AccurioPress C3080 C3080P C83hc C3070 C3070P C73hc Print C3070L E SM v3.00

SERVICE MANUAL
Date: 2019/01/07
Table of Contents
REGION SPECIFIC LEGAL CONFIRMATION FLOW .................................................................... -1
1. OUTLINE ................................................................................................................................................................... -1
1.1 Procedure for checking with customers whether Konica Minolta needs to take an action ....................................................... -1
Revision List .................................................................................................................................... -1

A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ............................................................................A-1
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE ..............................................................................................................................................A-2
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION ....................................................................... A-3
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual .................................................................................................................................A-3
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items .......................................................................................................A-3
3. SAFETY WARNINGS ...............................................................................................................................................A-4

3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA, INC. ....................................................................................A-4
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention..................................................................................................................................A-4
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION ...................................................................................................................................................A-5
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug.......................................................................................................................................A-5
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE .................................................................................................A-7
3.3.1 Power Supply .................................................................................................................................................................A-7
3.3.2 Installation Requirements .............................................................................................................................................A-11
3.3.3 After Service .................................................................................................................................................................A-13
3.4 FUSE .....................................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5 Used Batteries Precautions ...................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.1 ALL Areas.....................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.2 Germany.......................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.3 France ..........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.4 Denmark .......................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.5 Finland, Sweden...........................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.6 Norway .........................................................................................................................................................................A-20
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ...................................................................................................... A-21

4.1 Warning indications inside the machine ................................................................................................................................A-21
4.2 Warning indications on the boards ........................................................................................................................................A-49
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ............................................................................................ A-53
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS ..................................................................................................B-1

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL ....................................................................................................... B-1
2. PRODUCT NAME ....................................................................................................................................................B-2
3. TRADEMARK ...........................................................................................................................................................B-3
3.1 Trademarks of other companies ..............................................................................................................................................B-3
3.2 Own trademarks ......................................................................................................................................................................B-3
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS ..................................................................................................................... B-4

5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION ...................................................................................................................................... B-6
6. DISCLAIMER............................................................................................................................................................B-7
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................C-1

1. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L ...............................................C-1
1.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................ C-1
1.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................................................................ C-1
1.3 Paper ...................................................................................................................................................................................... C-2
1.3.1 Size and weight ..............................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.3.2 Type of paper .................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.4 Recommended paper ............................................................................................................................................................. C-3
1.4.1 Inch.................................................................................................................................................................................C-3
1.4.2 Metric ..............................................................................................................................................................................C-4
1.5 Materials ................................................................................................................................................................................. C-4
1.5.1 C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L ...........................................................................................C-4
1.6 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................................................... C-5
1.7 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................... C-5
1.8 Power cord.............................................................................................................................................................................. C-6
1.9 Operating environment ........................................................................................................................................................... C-7
i
2. HT-511......................................................................................................................................................................C-8
2.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................ C-8
2.2 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................... C-8
2.3 Operating environment ........................................................................................................................................................... C-8
3. DF-706......................................................................................................................................................................C-9
3.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................ C-9
3.2 Functions ................................................................................................................................................................................ C-9
3.3 Type of original ....................................................................................................................................................................... C-9
3.4 Particular original .................................................................................................................................................................... C-9
3.5 Prohibited original ................................................................................................................................................................... C-9
3.6 Mixed original feed chart....................................................................................................................................................... C-10
3.7 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................ C-10
3.8 Operating environment ......................................................................................................................................................... C-10
4. PF-602m (for WY3 or later) ....................................................................................................................................C-11

4.1 Type...................................................................................................................................................................................... C-11
4.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................. C-11
4.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................ C-11
4.4 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................................................... C-11
4.5 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................ C-11
5. HT-504....................................................................................................................................................................C-12
5.1 Type...................................................................................................................................................................................... C-12
5.2 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................ C-12
6. HT-505....................................................................................................................................................................C-13
6.1 Type...................................................................................................................................................................................... C-13
6.2 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................ C-13
7. PF-707m .................................................................................................................................................................C-14
7.1 Type...................................................................................................................................................................................... C-14
7.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................. C-14
7.2.1 Paper feed ....................................................................................................................................................................C-14
7.3 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................ C-14
7.4 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................ C-14
8. HT-506....................................................................................................................................................................C-15
8.1 Type...................................................................................................................................................................................... C-15
8.2 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................ C-15
9. FA-502 ....................................................................................................................................................................C-16
9.1 Type...................................................................................................................................................................................... C-16
9.2 Type of paper........................................................................................................................................................................ C-16
9.3 Machine data ........................................................................................................................................................................ C-16
10. LU-202m .............................................................................................................................................................. C-17

10.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-17
10.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-17
10.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-17
10.4 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................................................C-17
10.5 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-17
10.6 Operating environment ........................................................................................................................................................C-17
11. LU-202XL............................................................................................................................................................. C-18

11.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-18
11.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-18
11.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-18
11.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-18
12. LU-202XLm.......................................................................................................................................................... C-19

12.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-19
ii
13. HT-503/HT-515 .................................................................................................................................................... C-20
13.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-20
13.2 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-20
14. MK-746 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-21

14.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-21
14.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-21
14.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-21
14.4 Recommended paper ..........................................................................................................................................................C-21
14.5 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-21
15. MB-506 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-23

15.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-23
15.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-23
15.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-23
15.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-23
16. MB-508 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-24

16.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-24
16.2 Function...............................................................................................................................................................................C-24
16.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-24
16.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-24
17. MK-744C.............................................................................................................................................................. C-25

17.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-25
17.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-25
17.3 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-25
18. OT-510................................................................................................................................................................. C-26

18.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-26
18.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-26
18.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................C-26
18.2.2 Maximum tray capacity...............................................................................................................................................C-26
18.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-28
18.3.1 Paper Size ..................................................................................................................................................................C-28
18.3.2 Allowable amount of curling........................................................................................................................................C-28
18.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-28
19. OT-511................................................................................................................................................................. C-29

19.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-29
19.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-29
19.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-29
19.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-29
20. EF-103 (Specification: W*2 or later) .................................................................................................................... C-30

20.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-30
20.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-30
20.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-31
20.4 Recommended paper ..........................................................................................................................................................C-31
20.4.1 Inch.............................................................................................................................................................................C-31
20.4.2 Metric..........................................................................................................................................................................C-31
20.5 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-31
21. MK-740/MK-740m................................................................................................................................................ C-32

21.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-32
21.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-32
21.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-32
21.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-32
22. RU-518................................................................................................................................................................. C-33

22.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-33
22.2 Function...............................................................................................................................................................................C-33
22.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................C-33
iii
22.2.2 Capacity of the paper exit tray....................................................................................................................................C-33
22.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-33
22.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-34
23. HM-103 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-35

23.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-35
23.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-35
23.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-35
23.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-35
24. RU-702................................................................................................................................................................. C-36

24.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-36
24.2 Function...............................................................................................................................................................................C-36
24.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................C-36
24.2.2 Capacity of the purge tray ..........................................................................................................................................C-36
24.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-36
24.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-37
25. RU-510................................................................................................................................................................. C-38

25.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-38
25.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-38
25.3 Paper type ...........................................................................................................................................................................C-38
25.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-38
26. FS-531 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-39

26.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-39
26.2 Function...............................................................................................................................................................................C-39
26.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................C-39
26.2.2 Staple .........................................................................................................................................................................C-39
26.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-39
26.3.1 Staple mode ...............................................................................................................................................................C-39
26.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-40
27. FS-612 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-41

27.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-41
27.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-41
27.2.1 Function......................................................................................................................................................................C-41
27.2.2 Staple .........................................................................................................................................................................C-41
27.2.3 Folding........................................................................................................................................................................C-41
27.2.4 Maximum tray capacity*1 ...........................................................................................................................................C-41
27.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-42
27.3.1 Staple mode ...............................................................................................................................................................C-42
27.3.2 Saddle stitching mode ................................................................................................................................................C-42
27.3.3 Half-Fold mode ...........................................................................................................................................................C-42
27.3.4 Tri-folding mode..........................................................................................................................................................C-42
27.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-43
28. PK-512/513 .......................................................................................................................................................... C-44

28.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-44
28.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-44
28.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-44
28.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-44
29. PI-502 .................................................................................................................................................................. C-45

29.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-45
29.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-45
29.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-45
29.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-45
30. IQ-501 .................................................................................................................................................................. C-46

30.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-46
30.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-46
30.2.1 Function......................................................................................................................................................................C-46
iv
30.2.2 Paper feed mode ........................................................................................................................................................C-46
30.2.3 Scanner unit ...............................................................................................................................................................C-46
30.2.4 Colorimeter unit ..........................................................................................................................................................C-46
30.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-46
30.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-47
31. UK-301................................................................................................................................................................. C-48

31.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-48
31.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-48
31.2.1 Function......................................................................................................................................................................C-48
31.2.2 Basic specification ......................................................................................................................................................C-48
31.2.3 Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................................C-48
31.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-48
31.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-48
32. FS-532 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-49

32.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-49
32.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-49
32.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................C-49
32.2.2 Staple sheet................................................................................................................................................................C-49
32.2.3 Staple position ............................................................................................................................................................C-49
32.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-53
32.3.1 Sort/group mode(Main tray/Sub tray), offset Sort/offset group mode(Main tray)........................................................C-53
32.3.2 Staple mode ...............................................................................................................................................................C-54
32.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-54
33. SD-510................................................................................................................................................................. C-55

33.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-55
33.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-55
33.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................C-55
33.2.3 Performance ...............................................................................................................................................................C-55
33.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-56
33.3.2 Half-Fold mode ...........................................................................................................................................................C-57
33.3.3 Tri-folding mode..........................................................................................................................................................C-57
33.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-58
34. PK-522 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-59

34.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-59
34.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-59
34.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-59
34.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-59
35. MK-732 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-60

35.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-60
35.2 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-60
35.3 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-60
36. LS-506 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-61

36.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-61
36.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-61
36.2.1 Function......................................................................................................................................................................C-61
36.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-61
36.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-62
37. FD-503 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-63

37.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-63
37.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-63
37.2.1 Function......................................................................................................................................................................C-63
v
37.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-64
37.3.1 Punching function .......................................................................................................................................................C-64
37.3.2 Folding functions ........................................................................................................................................................C-64
37.3.3 PI functions.................................................................................................................................................................C-64
37.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-64
38. SD-506................................................................................................................................................................. C-65

38.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-65
38.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-65
38.2.1 Function......................................................................................................................................................................C-65
38.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-65
38.3.1 Straight/sub tray mode ...............................................................................................................................................C-65
38.3.3 Trimming mode...........................................................................................................................................................C-66
38.3.4 Multi-center folding mode ...........................................................................................................................................C-66
38.3.5 Overlap tri-folding mode .............................................................................................................................................C-67
38.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-67
39. SD-513................................................................................................................................................................. C-68

39.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-68
39.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-68
39.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................C-68
39.2.3 Performance ...............................................................................................................................................................C-69
39.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-70
39.3.1 Straight, sub tray mode ..............................................................................................................................................C-70
39.3.3 Trimming mode...........................................................................................................................................................C-73
39.3.4 Multi folding mode ......................................................................................................................................................C-73
39.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-74
40. CR-101................................................................................................................................................................. C-75

40.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-75
40.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-75
40.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................C-75
40.2.2 Applicable mode and number of creases ...................................................................................................................C-75
40.2.3 Performance ...............................................................................................................................................................C-76
40.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-77
40.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-77
41. TU-503 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-78

41.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-78
41.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-78
41.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................C-78
41.2.2 Applicable mode list....................................................................................................................................................C-78
41.2.3 Performance ...............................................................................................................................................................C-78
41.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-79
41.3.1 Slit mode.....................................................................................................................................................................C-79
41.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-79
42. FD-504 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-80

42.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-80
42.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-80
42.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................................................................................................C-80
42.2.2 Applicable mode list....................................................................................................................................................C-80
42.2.4 Performance ...............................................................................................................................................................C-80
42.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-80
42.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-81
43. PB-503 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-82

43.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-82
vi
43.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-82
43.2.1 Function......................................................................................................................................................................C-82
43.2.2 Binding sheets ............................................................................................................................................................C-82
43.2.4 Others.........................................................................................................................................................................C-82
43.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-82
43.3.1 Paper size...................................................................................................................................................................C-82
43.3.2 Paper weight...............................................................................................................................................................C-83
43.3.3 Applicable paper in each mode ..................................................................................................................................C-83
43.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-84
44. MK-737 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-85

44.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-85
44.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-85
44.3 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-85
44.5 Connector ............................................................................................................................................................................C-85
44.5.1 Connector housing .....................................................................................................................................................C-85
44.5.2 Connector pinning layout............................................................................................................................................C-85
45. IC-605 .................................................................................................................................................................. C-87

45.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-87
45.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-87
45.3 Paper ...................................................................................................................................................................................C-87
45.4 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-87
46. GP-501................................................................................................................................................................. C-88

46.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-88
46.2 Modes of Operation .............................................................................................................................................................C-88
46.3 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-88
46.4 Software ..............................................................................................................................................................................C-88
46.5 Electronic.............................................................................................................................................................................C-88
46.6 Inputs...................................................................................................................................................................................C-88
46.6.1 Media Input from Printer .............................................................................................................................................C-88
46.6.2 Power .........................................................................................................................................................................C-89
46.7 Outputs ................................................................................................................................................................................C-89
46.8 Performance ........................................................................................................................................................................C-89
46.8.1 Reliability ....................................................................................................................................................................C-89
46.9 Operation Environment, Storage, Transportation................................................................................................................C-89
46.10 Safety/Regulatory ..............................................................................................................................................................C-89
46.10.1 Safety Compliance ...................................................................................................................................................C-89
46.10.2 Electromagnetic Compliance....................................................................................................................................C-89
46.11 Appendix A ........................................................................................................................................................................C-90
46.12 Appendix B ........................................................................................................................................................................C-90
46.13 Appendix C ........................................................................................................................................................................C-91
46.14 Glossary of Terms .............................................................................................................................................................C-92
47. GP-502................................................................................................................................................................. C-93

47.1 Type.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-93
47.2 Functions .............................................................................................................................................................................C-93
47.2.1 Function......................................................................................................................................................................C-93
47.2.2 Binding sheets ............................................................................................................................................................C-93
47.2.3 Book stock quantity ....................................................................................................................................................C-93
47.2.4 Others.........................................................................................................................................................................C-93
47.3 Type of paper ......................................................................................................................................................................C-93
47.3.1 Paper size...................................................................................................................................................................C-93
47.3.2 Paper weight...............................................................................................................................................................C-93
47.3.3 Type of paper .............................................................................................................................................................C-94
47.3.4 Recommended paper .................................................................................................................................................C-94
47.4 Performance Specifications.................................................................................................................................................C-94
47.4.1 Input conditions ..........................................................................................................................................................C-94
47.4.2 Sticking specifications ................................................................................................................................................C-94
47.4.3 Book specifications.....................................................................................................................................................C-95
47.5 Materials ..............................................................................................................................................................................C-96
47.6 Machine data .......................................................................................................................................................................C-96
D OVERALL COMPOSITION ............................................................................................................D-1
vii
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................D-1
1.1 System configuration (C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P and C73hc)....................................................................... D-1
1.1.1 Option of paper feed.......................................................................................................................................................D-1
1.1.2 Option of the main body .................................................................................................................................................D-1
1.1.3 Option of paper exit ........................................................................................................................................................D-2
1.2 System configuration (C3070L) .............................................................................................................................................. D-3
1.2.1 Option of paper feed.......................................................................................................................................................D-3
1.2.2 Option of the main body .................................................................................................................................................D-4
1.2.3 Option of paper exit ........................................................................................................................................................D-4
1.3 Configuration for optional device (C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P and C73hc)..................................................... D-4
1.3.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option ...............................................................................D-4
1.3.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option .....................................................................................D-5
1.3.3 Combination of the main body and the image controller (IC) option ............................................................................D-15
1.3.4 Options that connect to the external AC power supply.................................................................................................D-15
1.4 Configuration for optional device (C3070L) .......................................................................................................................... D-16
1.4.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option .............................................................................D-16
1.4.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option ...................................................................................D-16
1.4.3 Combination of the main body and the image controller (IC) option ............................................................................D-16
1.4.4 Options that connect to the external AC power supply.................................................................................................D-16
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................................................D-17

3. PAPER PATH .........................................................................................................................................................D-18
3.1 Straight paper exit mode....................................................................................................................................................... D-18
3.2 Reversing exit mode ............................................................................................................................................................. D-19
3.3 Duplex mode......................................................................................................................................................................... D-20
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................................................D-21

5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS ..............................................................................................................................D-22
5.1 Image creation flow and functions ........................................................................................................................................ D-22
5.2 Charging process (Step 1).................................................................................................................................................... D-22
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2)........................................................................................................................................... D-23
5.4 Developing process (Step 3) ................................................................................................................................................ D-23
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4) ................................................................................................................................. D-23
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5) ............................................................................................................................................... D-24
5.7 Separation process (Step 6) ................................................................................................................................................. D-24
5.8 Drum cleaning (Sub step 1) .................................................................................................................................................. D-25
5.9 Exposure before the charge (Sub step 2)............................................................................................................................. D-25
5.10 Transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 3) .....................................................................................................................................D-25
5.11 2nd transfer roller/Lw cleaning (Sub step 4)........................................................................................................................D-26
5.12 Toner collection (Sub step 5)...............................................................................................................................................D-26
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL ..............................................................................................................................D-28

7. PROCESS SPEED .................................................................................................................................................D-30
7.1 AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L ........................................................... D-30
E SERVICE TOOL .............................................................................................................................E-1

1. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070............................................................................................................ E-1
1.1 Service material list..................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.1.1 Service material list ........................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.2 Jig list.......................................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.2.1 Jig list..............................................................................................................................................................................E-1
1.3 Tool list ....................................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.3.1 Tool list ...........................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4 Mail remote notification system ...............................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.2 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................................................E-3
1.4.3 Major functions ...............................................................................................................................................................E-4
1.4.4 Initial setting....................................................................................................................................................................E-4
1.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system ........................................................................................E-6
1.4.6 Mail sending ...................................................................................................................................................................E-6
1.5 Machine setting data Import/Export .........................................................................................................................................E-7
1.5.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................................E-7
1.5.2 Setting method ...............................................................................................................................................................E-7
1.6 Job history list ........................................................................................................................................................................E-10
1.6.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................E-10
1.6.2 Major functions .............................................................................................................................................................E-10
1.6.3 Setting method .............................................................................................................................................................E-10
viii
1.7 Counter list acquisition using USB memory...........................................................................................................................E-13
1.7.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................E-13
1.7.2 List that can be acquired ..............................................................................................................................................E-13
1.7.3 Acquisition method .......................................................................................................................................................E-14
1.8 Panel log................................................................................................................................................................................E-14
1.8.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................E-14
1.8.2 Log acquisition method.................................................................................................................................................E-14
1.9 ORU-M Counter Rewrite........................................................................................................................................................E-15
1.9.1 Load from external memory..........................................................................................................................................E-15
1.9.2 Store to external memory .............................................................................................................................................E-16
1.10 Management Tool................................................................................................................................................................E-17
1.10.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................E-17
1.10.2 Installation of Management Tool ................................................................................................................................ E-19
1.10.3 Starting up of Management Tool ................................................................................................................................ E-20
1.10.4 Technician mode ........................................................................................................................................................E-22
1.10.5 AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc and AccurioPrint C3070L replacement procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................E-31
1.10.6 Backup file ..................................................................................................................................................................E-35
1.10.7 Administrator mode .................................................................................................................................................... E-35
1.10.8 Various setting for the software .................................................................................................................................. E-38
1.10.9 Error message list.......................................................................................................................................................E-43
1.11 Machine state log store .......................................................................................................................................................E-44
1.11.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................E-44
1.11.2 Log acquisition............................................................................................................................................................E-44
1.12 Real-time Remote Panel .....................................................................................................................................................E-45
1.12.1 Setting Up Real-time Remote Panel........................................................................................................................... E-45
1.12.2 Installing Web plugin .................................................................................................................................................. E-45
1.12.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine...................................................................................................................... E-49
1.12.4 Setting Connection to VNC Viewer............................................................................................................................. E-50
1.12.5 Remote Panel Advanced Settings.............................................................................................................................. E-52
1.13 Service assistant tool...........................................................................................................................................................E-52
1.13.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................E-52
1.13.2 Major functions ...........................................................................................................................................................E-52
1.13.3 Operating instructions of the service assistant tool .................................................................................................... E-53
1.13.4 About the handling of tool........................................................................................................................................... E-69
1.14 Utility (IC card information setting tool)................................................................................................................................E-69
1.14.1 IC card information setting tool of the AU-201S card reader...................................................................................... E-69
1.15 CS Remote Analysis............................................................................................................................................................E-69
1.15.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................E-69
1.15.2 Function......................................................................................................................................................................E-71
1.15.3 Setup method .............................................................................................................................................................E-72
1.15.4 Login method..............................................................................................................................................................E-74
1.15.5 How to use..................................................................................................................................................................E-75
1.16 Paper profile ........................................................................................................................................................................E-76
1.16.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................E-76
1.16.2 Operation workflow.....................................................................................................................................................E-77
1.16.3 How to use..................................................................................................................................................................E-77
1.17 UK-301 Automatic Inspection test chart ..............................................................................................................................E-79
1.17.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................E-79
1.17.2 Principle......................................................................................................................................................................E-79
1.17.3 How to use..................................................................................................................................................................E-80
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................... F-1

1. MAINTENANCE ITEM .............................................................................................................................................. F-1
1.1 Maintenance item ....................................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.1.1 Procedure of the periodical maintenance ....................................................................................................................... F-1
1.1.2 Condition of the count..................................................................................................................................................... F-1
1.1.3 Life extension for the periodically replaced parts ........................................................................................................... F-1
1.2 AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc.......................................................................................................................................F-4
1.2.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................... F-4
1.2.2 Special parts counter...................................................................................................................................................... F-5
1.3 AccurioPress C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L..................................................................................................F-10
1.3.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................. F-10
1.3.2 Special parts counter.................................................................................................................................................... F-10
1.4 DF-706...................................................................................................................................................................................F-16
1.5 PF-602m ................................................................................................................................................................................F-16
ix
1.5.1 Total counter................................................................................................................................................................. F-16
1.6 PF-707m (1st tandem)...........................................................................................................................................................F-17
1.6.1 Periodical maintenance ................................................................................................................................................ F-17
1.7 PF-707m (2nd tandem)..........................................................................................................................................................F-18
1.8 PF-707m (3rd tandem) ..........................................................................................................................................................F-19
1.9 FA-502 (connected to the 1st tandem of PF-707m) ..............................................................................................................F-21
1.10 FA-502 (connected to the 2nd tandem of PF-707m) ........................................................................................................... F-21
1.10.1 Periodical maintenance .............................................................................................................................................. F-21
1.11 LU-202m.............................................................................................................................................................................. F-21
1.11.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-21
1.11.2 Special parts counter.................................................................................................................................................. F-21
1.12 LU-202XL ............................................................................................................................................................................ F-22
1.12.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-22
1.13 LU-202XLm ......................................................................................................................................................................... F-23
1.14 MB-506 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-23
1.15 MB-508 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-24
1.16 OT-510 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-25
1.16.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-25
1.17 EF-103................................................................................................................................................................................. F-26
1.18 OT-511 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-27
1.19 RU-510 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-27
1.20 RU-518 (1st device)............................................................................................................................................................. F-27
1.20.2 Spotted replacement .................................................................................................................................................. F-28
1.21 RU-518 (2nd device) ........................................................................................................................................................... F-28
1.22 HM-103................................................................................................................................................................................ F-29
1.23 FS-531................................................................................................................................................................................. F-30
1.23.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-30
1.24 FS-612................................................................................................................................................................................. F-30
1.24.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-30
1.25 PI-502 .................................................................................................................................................................................. F-31
1.25.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-31
1.26 IQ-501.................................................................................................................................................................................. F-32
1.26.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-32
1.27 FS-532................................................................................................................................................................................. F-32
1.27.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-32
1.28 SD-510 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-33
1.28.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-33
1.29 PK-522................................................................................................................................................................................. F-34
1.29.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-34
1.30 MK-732 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-34
1.30.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-34
1.31 LS-506 ................................................................................................................................................................................. F-34
1.31.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-34
1.32 FD-503................................................................................................................................................................................. F-35
1.32.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-35
x
1.33 SD-506 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-36
1.33.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-36
1.34 SD-513 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-38
1.35 CR-101 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-41
1.36 TU-503................................................................................................................................................................................. F-41
1.37 FD-504................................................................................................................................................................................. F-41
1.38 PB-503................................................................................................................................................................................. F-42
1.38.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-42
1.39 GP-501 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-44
1.39.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-44
1.40 GP-502 ................................................................................................................................................................................ F-46
1.40.1 Total counter............................................................................................................................................................... F-46
2. ORU-M PARTS ...................................................................................................................................................... F-48

2.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts ...............................................................................................................................................F-48
2.1.1 ORU-M corresponding parts......................................................................................................................................... F-48
2.2 ORU-M parts list ....................................................................................................................................................................F-48
2.2.1 ORU-M parts list ........................................................................................................................................................... F-48
2.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing ..........................................................................................................................................F-51
2.3.1 ORU-M target unit life setting ....................................................................................................................................... F-51
2.3.2 ORU-M warning icon display ........................................................................................................................................ F-51
2.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter...................................................................................................................................F-51
2.4.1 Counter display............................................................................................................................................................. F-51
2.4.2 Counter clear ................................................................................................................................................................ F-51
2.4.3 Replacement of envelope fusing unit in the ORU-M mode .......................................................................................... F-51
2.4.4 Replacing the transfer unit in the ORU-M mode........................................................................................................... F-51
3. LIFE VALUE ........................................................................................................................................................... F-53

3.1 Life value of materials/parts...................................................................................................................................................F-53
3.2 Life value determining condition ............................................................................................................................................F-55
4. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L ............................................. F-56

4.1 External section .....................................................................................................................................................................F-56
4.1.1 Replacement of the developing dust-proof filter/1, the developing dust-proof filter/2, the PH dust-proof filter and the
suction dust-proof filter ................................................................................................................................................. F-56
4.1.2 Replacement of the filter box........................................................................................................................................ F-57
4.1.3 Replacement of the electric component cooling filter ................................................................................................... F-57
4.2 Write section ..........................................................................................................................................................................F-58
4.2.1 Cleaning the dust proof glass ....................................................................................................................................... F-58
4.3 Photo conductor section ........................................................................................................................................................F-58
4.3.1 Pulling out the process unit .......................................................................................................................................... F-58
4.3.2 Cleaning around the process unit................................................................................................................................. F-59
4.3.3 Replacing the drum unit................................................................................................................................................ F-61
4.4 Charging section....................................................................................................................................................................F-62
4.4.1 Replace the charging corona........................................................................................................................................ F-62
4.4.2 Cleaning the charging corona....................................................................................................................................... F-63
4.5 Developing section ................................................................................................................................................................F-64
4.5.1 Developer charging procedures ................................................................................................................................... F-64
4.5.2 Replacing the Developing unit/Y, /M, /C, /K ................................................................................................................. F-65
4.6 Intermediate transfer section .................................................................................................................................................F-66
4.6.1 Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit .................................................................................................... F-66
4.6.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit ...................................................................................................................... F-68
4.6.3 Replacing the belt cleaning blade and the side seal .................................................................................................... F-71
4.6.4 Replacing the toner collection sheet............................................................................................................................. F-72
4.6.5 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw.................................................................................................................. F-72
4.6.6 Replacing the intermediate transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers and the cleaning sheet ...................................... F-73
4.6.7 Replacing the 1st transfer roller/Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller bearing/Y, /M, /C and /K............................... F-76
4.6.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller/Up............................................................................................................................. F-80
xi
4.6.9 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD2) ...................................................................................................... F-80
4.6.10 Removing and reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit ......................................................................................................... F-81
4.6.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller/Lw and the C-clip, and cleaning around the 2nd transfer unit ................................ F-82
4.6.12 Replacing the separate discharging unit .................................................................................................................... F-84
4.6.13 Replacing the 2nd transfer earth plate assy ............................................................................................................... F-84
4.7 Toner collection section .........................................................................................................................................................F-85
4.7.1 Replacing the waste toner box ..................................................................................................................................... F-85
4.8 Paper feed section.................................................................................................................................................................F-85
4.8.1 Replacement of the pick-up roller/1, pick-up roller/2, paper feed roller rubber/1 and paper feed roller rubber/2 ......... F-85
4.8.2 Replacement of the separation roller rubber/1 and separation roller rubber/2 ............................................................. F-86
4.8.3 Cleaning the slide sheet ............................................................................................................................................... F-87
4.8.4 Replacement of the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3) and pre-
registration clutch/2 (CL4) ............................................................................................................................................ F-87
4.9 Vertical conveyance section ..................................................................................................................................................F-90
4.9.1 Replacement of the intermediate conveyance clutch/1 (CL5) ...................................................................................... F-90
4.10 Registration section ............................................................................................................................................................. F-91
4.10.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet assy .......................................................................................................... F-91
4.10.2 Cleaning of the registration cleaning sheet assy ........................................................................................................ F-91
4.10.3 Replacing the registration roller and the registration roller bearing, cleaning the registration swing home sensar (PS20)
.................................................................................................................................................................................... F-92
4.10.4 Replacing the registration idler gear........................................................................................................................... F-96
4.11 Fusing section ..................................................................................................................................................................... F-97
4.11.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit.......................................................................................................................... F-97
4.11.2 Replacing the fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up and the fusing heater lamp 2 assy/Up ................................................. F-98
4.11.3 Replacing the fusing belt assy.................................................................................................................................. F-102
4.11.4 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3) .......................................................................................... F-103
4.11.5 Replacement of the fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat insulating sleeve/Lw2, fusing roller/Lw ...................... F-103
4.11.6 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4) .......................................................................................... F-108
4.11.7 Replacement of the fusing gear/2, the fusing gear/3................................................................................................ F-109
4.11.8 Replacement of the fusing separating claw assy ..................................................................................................... F-111
4.11.9 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Up.................................................................................................................. F-112
4.12 Duplex section ................................................................................................................................................................... F-113
4.12.1 Replacement of the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6), and the intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7).... F-113
4.13 Reverse and exit section ................................................................................................................................................... F-114
4.13.1 Replacing the reverse de-curler roller ...................................................................................................................... F-114
4.13.2 Replacing the paper exit drive gear/1, paper exit gear and paper exit decurler roller .............................................. F-116
4.14 Charge control section....................................................................................................................................................... F-118
4.14.1 Replacing the Charging Roller/Up ............................................................................................................................ F-118
4.14.2 Replacing the charging roller bearing/Fr and charging roller bearing/Rr.................................................................. F-120
4.14.3 Replacing the paper exit drive gear/2....................................................................................................................... F-120
5. DF-706.................................................................................................................................................................. F-122
5.1 Take-up section ...................................................................................................................................................................F-122
5.1.1 Cleaning of the pick-up roller/feed roller..................................................................................................................... F-122
5.1.2 Cleaning of the separation roller................................................................................................................................. F-122
5.1.3 Cleaning the torque limiter.......................................................................................................................................... F-122
5.1.4 Replacing the pick-up roller/feed roller ....................................................................................................................... F-123
5.1.5 Replacing the separation roller................................................................................................................................... F-124
5.1.6 Cleaning of the reflective sensor section.................................................................................................................... F-125
5.2 Transport section .................................................................................................................................................................F-125
5.2.1 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rolls ............................................................................................................................ F-125
5.2.2 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers......................................................................................................................... F-127
5.3 Scanning section .................................................................................................................................................................F-129
5.3.1 Cleaning of the front side scanning guide .................................................................................................................. F-129
6. PF-602m ............................................................................................................................................................... F-130

6.1 Precautions on maintenance ...............................................................................................................................................F-130
6.2 Tray section .........................................................................................................................................................................F-130
6.2.1 Precautions on maintenance of the tray section......................................................................................................... F-130
6.2.2 Replacing the Pick-up rubber/paper feed roller .......................................................................................................... F-130
6.2.4 Replacing the paper feed clutch (CL1/CL4) and the separation clutch (CL2/CL5)..................................................... F-134
6.3 Conveyance section ............................................................................................................................................................F-135
6.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9)................................................................. F-135
6.3.2 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12)....................... F-136
7. PF-707m ............................................................................................................................................................... F-138

7.2 Paper feed tray section........................................................................................................................................................F-138
7.2.1 Replacing the loop roller/Lw and the loop roller bearing/Lw....................................................................................... F-138
xii
7.3 Paper feed suction section ..................................................................................................................................................F-139
7.3.1 Replacing the suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), the suction belt clutch/2 (CL16), the suction belt clutch/3 (CL17).......... F-139
7.4 Vertical conveyance section ................................................................................................................................................F-139
7.4.1 Replacement of the exit clutch/1 (CL1), /2 (CL2), the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), /2 (CL4) ,the vertical
conveyance clutch/3 (CL5) and /4 (CL6). ................................................................................................................... F-139
7.5 Horizontal conveyance section ............................................................................................................................................F-140
7.5.1 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutches/1 (CL8), /2 (CL9)............................................................................... F-140
7.5.2 Replacing the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration roller bearing .............................................................. F-140
7.5.3 Replacing the horizontal conveyance rollers/1, /2, and the horizontal conveyance roller bearings/1, /2 ................... F-141
7.5.4 Replacing the loop roller/Up ....................................................................................................................................... F-143
7.5.5 Replacing the roller pressure release motor (M10) .................................................................................................... F-144
7.5.6 Cleaning the centering sensor (PS40)........................................................................................................................ F-145
8. FA-502 .................................................................................................................................................................. F-147

8.2 Tandem conveyance section ...............................................................................................................................................F-147
8.2.1 Replacing the tandem conveyance clutches /1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), and /5 (CL14) ................... F-147
9. LU-202m/LU-202XL/LU-202XLm ......................................................................................................................... F-148

9.2 Paper feed section...............................................................................................................................................................F-148
9.2.1 Cleaning the pre-registration roller ............................................................................................................................. F-148
9.2.2 Removing/installing paper feed roller assy................................................................................................................. F-148
9.2.3 Replacing the paper feed roller/pick-up roller............................................................................................................. F-148
9.2.5 Replacing paper feed clutch (CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102) ...................................................................... F-150
9.2.6 Replacing the pre-registration roller ........................................................................................................................... F-151
10. MB-506 ...............................................................................................................................................................F-153

10.1 Precautions on maintenance ............................................................................................................................................. F-153
10.2 Paper feed section............................................................................................................................................................. F-153
10.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/BP, the paper feed roller rubber/BP, and the paper feed clutch/BP (CL14) ................ F-153
10.2.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber/BP................................................................................................................ F-155
11. MB-508 ...............................................................................................................................................................F-156

11.2 Bypass paper feed section ................................................................................................................................................ F-156
11.2.1 Replacing the paper feed clutch/BP (CL3) and lift clutch/BP ................................................................................... F-156
11.2.2 Replacing the paper feed roller/BP, separation roller/BP, and pick-up roller/BP...................................................... F-156
11.2.3 Replacing the torque limiter/BP ................................................................................................................................ F-159
11.2.4 Replacing the up down motor/BP (M4)..................................................................................................................... F-160
11.3 Relay conveyance section................................................................................................................................................. F-161
11.3.1 Cleaning the bypass conveyance sensor/BP1 (PS1), /BP2 (PS2), and pre-registration sensor/BP (PS3) .............. F-161
11.3.2 Cleaning the horizontal conveyance guide plate, relay exit sensor/BP (PS4), relay conveyance sensor/BP1 (PS5),
and /BP2 (PS6)......................................................................................................................................................... F-161
11.3.3 Replacing the pre-registration clutch/BP (CL1) ........................................................................................................ F-162
11.3.4 Replacing the pre-registration roller/BP and pre-registration roller bushing/BP ....................................................... F-162
11.3.5 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch/BP (CL2) ........................................................................................ F-164
11.3.6 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller/BP, intermediate conveyance roller bushing/BP, and conveyance torque
limiter/BP .................................................................................................................................................................. F-165
11.3.7 Replacing the exit roller/BP and exit roller bearing/BP............................................................................................. F-167
11.3.8 Replacing the lift sheet/BP ....................................................................................................................................... F-169
12. OT-510................................................................................................................................................................F-172
12.1 Main tray section ............................................................................................................................................................... F-172
12.1.1 Cleaning and lubrication of the paper exit alignment plate shaft .............................................................................. F-172
13. OT-511................................................................................................................................................................F-173
13.1 Replacing the paper hold roller.......................................................................................................................................... F-173
13.1.1 Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................. F-173
13.2 Replacing the paper exit roller........................................................................................................................................... F-173
13.2.1 Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................. F-173
13.3 Replacing the paper exit driven roller/2 ............................................................................................................................. F-174
13.3.1 Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................. F-174
14. EF-103 ................................................................................................................................................................F-176

14.2 Fusing section ................................................................................................................................................................... F-176
15. RU-518/HM-103..................................................................................................................................................F-177
15.2 Output tray section ............................................................................................................................................................ F-177
xiii
15.2.1 Replacing the paper exit gate solenoid (SD3) .......................................................................................................... F-177
15.3 Output paper density detection section ............................................................................................................................. F-178
15.3.1 Replacing the color sensor shutter solenoid (SD1) .................................................................................................. F-178
15.3.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid (SD2)............................................................................................................... F-179
15.4 Water supply section ......................................................................................................................................................... F-181
15.4.1 Replacing the water feed control solenoid (SD4) ..................................................................................................... F-181
15.4.2 Replacing the pump motor (M401) ........................................................................................................................... F-186
15.4.3 Replacing the water feed filter .................................................................................................................................. F-187
15.4.4 Cleaning the water storage tank............................................................................................................................... F-188
15.5 Humidification section........................................................................................................................................................ F-189
15.5.1 Cleaning the supply roller and the water feed roller/Up............................................................................................ F-189
15.5.2 Cleaning the water feed roller/Lw and the humidification roller/Lw .......................................................................... F-190
15.5.3 Removing the humidification section assy/Up .......................................................................................................... F-190
15.5.4 Replacing the control roller/Up ................................................................................................................................. F-194
15.5.5 Replacing the humidification roller/Up and the humidification roller/Lw ................................................................... F-197
15.5.6 Replacing the water feed roller/Lw ........................................................................................................................... F-209
15.5.7 Replacing the control roller/Lw ................................................................................................................................. F-210
16. RU-510................................................................................................................................................................F-212
16.2 Conveyance section .......................................................................................................................................................... F-212
16.2.1 Replacing the paper re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the paper re-feed roller drive gear/2 ....................................... F-212
16.2.2 Replacing the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2) and the paper exit
conveyance belt........................................................................................................................................................ F-212
16.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley..................................................................................... F-213
16.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller/1, /2, paper exit roller, bearing /K and bearing assy .................................................. F-214
16.2.5 Replacing the merging section roller and bearing/K................................................................................................. F-215
16.2.6 Replacing the stacker entrance roller and bearing/K................................................................................................ F-216
16.2.7 Replacing the re-feed roller and bearing/K............................................................................................................... F-217
16.2.8 Replacing the driven roller........................................................................................................................................ F-218
16.2.9 Replacing the straight gate....................................................................................................................................... F-220
16.2.10 Replacing the stack switch motor (M6) .................................................................................................................. F-221
17. FS-531 ................................................................................................................................................................F-223

17.2.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) ................................................................................. F-223
17.3.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller).......................................................................................................... F-223
17.4 Stacker section .................................................................................................................................................................. F-224
17.4.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller) ...................................................................................................... F-224
17.4.2 Replacement of the cleaning plate Assy .................................................................................................................. F-225
17.5 Stapler section................................................................................................................................................................... F-225
17.5.1 Replacing the stapler unit ......................................................................................................................................... F-225
18. FS-612 ................................................................................................................................................................F-227

18.2.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) ................................................................................. F-227
18.3.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller).......................................................................................................... F-227
18.4.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller) ...................................................................................................... F-228
18.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover............................................................................................................. F-229
19. PI-502 .................................................................................................................................................................F-233

19.2 Paper feed section............................................................................................................................................................. F-233
19.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/Up and the paper feed roller/Up................................................................................... F-233
19.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller/Lw and the paper feed roller/Lw................................................................................... F-234
19.2.3 Replacing the separation roller/Up and the torque limiter/Up................................................................................... F-234
19.2.4 Replacing the separation roller/Lw and the torque limiter/Lw................................................................................... F-235
19.2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch/Up (CL201) and the paper feed clutch/Lw (CL202) .............................................. F-235
20. IQ-501 .................................................................................................................................................................F-237

20.2.1 Pulling out/reinstalling the conveyance mount ......................................................................................................... F-237
xiv
20.3 Scanner section/Scanner calibration section..................................................................................................................... F-238
20.3.1 Cleaning the scanner glass/1, /2 .............................................................................................................................. F-238
20.3.2 Cleaning the scanner B&W standard part/1, scanner white backing/1, scanner black backing/1-1, /1-2................. F-239
20.3.3 Cleaning the scanner B&W standard part/2, scanner white backing/2, scanner black backing/2-1, /2-2................. F-240
20.4 Colorimeter section/Colorimeter calibration section .......................................................................................................... F-241
20.4.1 Cleaning the colorimeter glass and the colorimetry trigger sensor (PS013) ............................................................ F-241
20.4.2 Cleaning the paper temperature sensor (TEMS4), colorimeter white backing, and colorimeter white calibration block
.................................................................................................................................................................................. F-242
21. FS-532 ................................................................................................................................................................F-244

21.2 Paper conveyance section ................................................................................................................................................ F-244
21.2.1 Lubrication of the FNS entrance roller conveyance switching cam, the FNS entrance roller conveyance switching gate/
Up ............................................................................................................................................................................. F-244
21.3.1 Replacing the paddle................................................................................................................................................ F-244
21.3.2 Lubrication of the stapler shaft and the rear stopper shaft ....................................................................................... F-245
21.5.1 Cleaning and lubrication of the paper exit alignment plate shaft .............................................................................. F-247
22. SD-510................................................................................................................................................................F-249
22.2 Alignment section .............................................................................................................................................................. F-249
22.2.1 Replacing the paddle/1, the paddle/2, and the paddle/3 .......................................................................................... F-249
22.3.2 Cleaning and lubrication of the staple guide/Up and the staple guide/Lw ................................................................ F-253
22.4 Half-fold/folding&staple/tri-folding section ......................................................................................................................... F-253
22.4.1 Cleaning the folding roller/1, the folding roller/2 ....................................................................................................... F-253
23. LS-506 ................................................................................................................................................................F-254

23.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1)....................................................................................................... F-254
23.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid/3 (SD8)............................................................................................................ F-254
23.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) .............................................................................................................. F-258
24. FD-503 ................................................................................................................................................................F-261

24.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids/1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)......................................................................................................... F-261
24.3 Punch section .................................................................................................................................................................... F-261
24.3.1 Replacing the punch unit .......................................................................................................................................... F-261
24.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board........................................................................................... F-262
24.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section .......................................................................................................................... F-262
24.4 Folding conveyance section .............................................................................................................................................. F-263
24.4.1 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) ............................................................................................................................ F-263
24.5.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11) ................................................................................................................. F-265
24.6 PI section........................................................................................................................................................................... F-265
24.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage)............................................................................................................. F-265
24.6.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage) ....................................................................................................... F-267
24.6.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage) ........................................................................................................ F-268
24.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)............................................................................................................. F-269
24.6.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage) ........................................................................................................ F-270
24.6.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage)......................................................................................................... F-270
25. SD-506 ...............................................................................................................................................................F-271

25.2 Right angle conveyance section........................................................................................................................................ F-271
25.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid/1 (SD5) .......................................................................................................... F-271
25.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)..................................................................................... F-272
25.3 Saddle stitching section..................................................................................................................................................... F-277
25.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy ....................................................................................................................................... F-277
25.3.2 Replacing the slope unit ........................................................................................................................................... F-280
xv
25.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit .......................................................................................................................... F-281
25.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit ........................................................................................................................... F-284
25.4 Bundle processing section................................................................................................................................................. F-284
25.4.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear .................................................................................................................... F-284
25.4.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit ..................................................................................................................... F-285
25.5 Trimmer section................................................................................................................................................................. F-290
25.5.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy ........................................................................................................... F-290
25.5.2 Replacing the trimmer board assy............................................................................................................................ F-290
25.5.3 Replacing the trimmer blade kit ................................................................................................................................ F-291
25.5.4 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32) ................................................................................................................ F-294
25.5.5 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31) ................................................................................................................ F-295
25.5.6 Replacing the trimming unit ...................................................................................................................................... F-299
25.5.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit .................................................................................................................................. F-301
26. SD-513................................................................................................................................................................F-303
26.2 Entrance conveyance section............................................................................................................................................ F-303
26.2.1 Replacing the reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102)............................................................................. F-303
26.2.2 Cleaning of the paper re-feed roller/Lt...................................................................................................................... F-303
26.2.3 Cleaning of the reverse exit roller/Rt ........................................................................................................................ F-303
26.3 Folding conveyance section .............................................................................................................................................. F-304
26.3.1 Replacing the 1st folding knife motor (M13) ............................................................................................................. F-304
26.3.2 Replacing the 2nd folding knife motor (M14)............................................................................................................ F-305
26.3.3 Cleaning of the 1st folding roller, 2nd folding roller .................................................................................................. F-307
26.3.4 Lubrication to the front stopper shaft ........................................................................................................................ F-308
26.4 Sub tray, tri-folding tray section ......................................................................................................................................... F-308
26.4.1 Cleaning the tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3 ...................................................................................................... F-308
26.5 Saddle stitching section..................................................................................................................................................... F-309
26.5.1 Replacing the staple unit .......................................................................................................................................... F-309
26.5.2 Replacing the clincher .............................................................................................................................................. F-309
26.5.3 Replacing the booklet holding motor (M17).............................................................................................................. F-309
26.5.4 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate/Rr .............................................................................................. F-309
26.5.5 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Fr...................................................................................... F-310
26.5.6 Replacing the conveyance guide assy/Up................................................................................................................ F-310
26.5.7 Replacing the alignment plate solenoid wiring ......................................................................................................... F-311
26.6 Booklet movement section ................................................................................................................................................ F-312
26.6.1 Lubrication to the booklet movement unit slide shaft................................................................................................ F-312
26.6.2 Lubrication to the booklet holding unit slide shaft..................................................................................................... F-313
26.6.3 Lubrication to the booklet set unit slide shaft............................................................................................................ F-313
26.7 Clamp section.................................................................................................................................................................... F-314
26.7.1 Replacing the fore edge stopper motor (M24).......................................................................................................... F-314
26.7.2 Replacing the fore edge finger motor (M52), the fore-edge finger gear, and the finger torque limiter ..................... F-314
26.7.3 Replacing the clamp motor (M23) ............................................................................................................................ F-316
26.7.4 Replacing the booklet holding wire/1, booklet holding wire/2 and booklet holding wire/3 ........................................ F-317
26.7.5 Replacing the clamp hanging wire............................................................................................................................ F-322
26.8 Trimmer section................................................................................................................................................................. F-327
26.8.1 Replacing the trimmer blade..................................................................................................................................... F-327
26.8.2 Replacing the trimmer board .................................................................................................................................... F-332
26.8.3 Replacing the trimming unit ...................................................................................................................................... F-341
26.8.4 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31) ................................................................................................................ F-346
26.8.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32) ................................................................................................................ F-347
26.8.6 Lubrication to the press drive screw, the gear.......................................................................................................... F-348
26.9 Booklet tray section ........................................................................................................................................................... F-349
26.9.1 Replacing the gripper motor (M26)........................................................................................................................... F-349
26.9.2 Lubrication to the gripper paper exit gear/Fr, the gripper paper exit gear/Rr ........................................................... F-350
26.9.3 Lubrication to the gripper lock plate.......................................................................................................................... F-350
26.9.4 Lubrication to the shutter slide shaft and the shutter slide plate............................................................................... F-351
27. CR-101................................................................................................................................................................F-352
27.2 Creaser section ................................................................................................................................................................. F-352
27.2.1 Cleaning the crease blade........................................................................................................................................ F-352
28. TU-503 ................................................................................................................................................................F-353

28.2.1 Cleaning the registration roller.................................................................................................................................. F-353
28.2.2 Replacing the registration roller................................................................................................................................ F-353
28.3 Slitter section ..................................................................................................................................................................... F-353
xvi
28.3.1 Lubrication to the slit cutter shaft.............................................................................................................................. F-353
28.3.2 Lubrication to the slit cutter drive gear...................................................................................................................... F-354
28.3.3 Replacing the slit cutter assy/Fr, /Rr......................................................................................................................... F-354
28.4 Rotary cutter section.......................................................................................................................................................... F-358
28.4.1 Replacing the rotary cutter assy ............................................................................................................................... F-358
28.4.2 Cleaning the slit scraps roller/Lt and slit scraps roller/Rt.......................................................................................... F-359
29. FD-504 ................................................................................................................................................................F-361

29.2 Clamp section.................................................................................................................................................................... F-361
29.2.1 Lubrication to FD clamp............................................................................................................................................ F-361
29.2.2 Replacing the FD clamp motor/Rr (M202)................................................................................................................ F-361
29.2.3 Replacing the FD clamp motor/Fr (M203) ................................................................................................................ F-362
29.3 Spine corner forming sction............................................................................................................................................... F-362
29.3.1 Replacing the FD roller motor (M201) ...................................................................................................................... F-362
29.3.2 Replacing the FD roller cleaning assy/Fr, /Rr........................................................................................................... F-363
30. PB-503 ................................................................................................................................................................F-364

30.1.1 Replacement of the entrance gate solenoid (SD1), the sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4) .................................... F-364
30.2 Sub compile (SC) section .................................................................................................................................................. F-367
30.2.1 Precautions on maintenance .................................................................................................................................... F-367
30.2.2 Replacing the switchback roller ................................................................................................................................ F-367
30.2.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutches/A and /B ......................................... F-368
30.2.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)..................................................................................................... F-371
30.2.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11) .......................................................................................................... F-371
30.2.6 Lubrication to the sub scan alignment plate shaft .................................................................................................... F-373
30.3 Clamp section.................................................................................................................................................................... F-373
30.3.1 Lubrication to the clamp pressing board shaft.......................................................................................................... F-373
30.4 Glue tank section............................................................................................................................................................... F-374
30.4.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing ................................................................................................... F-374
30.4.2 Lubrication to the glue apply roller drive gear........................................................................................................... F-375
30.4.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4).......................................................................................................... F-376
30.4.4 Replacing the glue tank assy.................................................................................................................................... F-377
30.5 Cover paper supply section ............................................................................................................................................... F-380
30.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy ........................................................... F-380
30.5.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller.............................................................................................. F-383
30.5.3 Replacing the separation roller................................................................................................................................. F-384
30.5.4 Replacing the cover paper pick-up clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72) ........................... F-385
30.6 Cover paper table section.................................................................................................................................................. F-386
30.6.1 Precautions on maintenance .................................................................................................................................... F-386
30.6.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy ...................................................................................................................... F-386
30.6.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate ............................................................... F-387
30.6.4 Lubrication to the cover paper alignment plate shaft................................................................................................ F-387
30.7 Book stock section............................................................................................................................................................. F-388
30.7.1 Lubrication to the guide shafts/Rt and /Lt ................................................................................................................. F-388
30.8 Framework section ............................................................................................................................................................ F-388
30.8.1 Replacing the exhaust filters/A and /B...................................................................................................................... F-388
31. GP-501................................................................................................................................................................F-390
31.1 Caution for maintenance procedure .................................................................................................................................. F-390
31.2 Die set service ................................................................................................................................................................... F-390
31.2.1 Die Set Service......................................................................................................................................................... F-390
31.2.2 Die Set Life Expectancy ........................................................................................................................................... F-390
31.2.3 Die Set Components ................................................................................................................................................ F-390
31.2.4 Checking and Replacing the Die Set........................................................................................................................ F-392
31.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts..................................................................... F-392
31.2.6 Hole Alignment inspection ........................................................................................................................................ F-393
31.3 Check, cleaning, and lubrication........................................................................................................................................ F-393
31.3.1 Check, cleaning, and lubrication............................................................................................................................... F-393
31.3.2 External Cleaning ..................................................................................................................................................... F-394
31.3.3 Internal Cleaning ...................................................................................................................................................... F-394
31.3.4 Operational Inspection.............................................................................................................................................. F-394
31.3.5 Internal Inspection .................................................................................................................................................... F-394
31.3.6 Cleaning the base..................................................................................................................................................... F-395
31.3.7 Cleaning the Die guide ............................................................................................................................................. F-395
31.3.8 Checking the Door Latch .......................................................................................................................................... F-395
31.3.9 Cleaning and Checking the aligner paper path and panels...................................................................................... F-395
31.3.10 Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller...................................................................................................... F-396
xvii
31.3.11 Cleaning the Aligner (Green) Drive Belt ................................................................................................................. F-397
31.3.12 Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge Solenoid ................................................................................................ F-397
31.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers ................................................................................................................ F-398
31.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers ....................................................................................................... F-400
31.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers............................................................................................................... F-401
31.3.16 Checking the Aligner Latch .................................................................................................................................... F-402
31.3.17 Cleaning the Optical Sensors ................................................................................................................................. F-403
31.3.18 Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Paper Path .................................................................................................... F-403
31.3.19 Cleaning and Checking the Punch Paper Path ...................................................................................................... F-404
31.3.20 Cleaning and Checking the Timing Belt ................................................................................................................. F-404
31.3.21 Bypass panel .......................................................................................................................................................... F-405
31.3.22 Bypass panel Removal........................................................................................................................................... F-405
31.3.23 Aligner panels......................................................................................................................................................... F-406
31.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal ........................................................................................................................................... F-406
31.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement............................................................................................................................ F-407
31.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement ............................................................................................................................. F-407
31.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller ....................................................................................................... F-412
31.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism .................................................................................................................. F-413
31.3.29 Back Gauge Removal ............................................................................................................................................ F-413
31.3.30 Solenoid Spring Replacement ................................................................................................................................ F-416
31.3.31 Back Gauge Paddle ............................................................................................................................................... F-416
31.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment ........................................................................................................................ F-416
31.3.33 Punch module ........................................................................................................................................................ F-417
31.3.34 Punch Module Removal ......................................................................................................................................... F-417
31.3.35 Lubricating to the Punch Drive Cams ..................................................................................................................... F-420
31.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement .................................................................................................................................... F-420
31.3.37 Punch Module Brake Replacement and Adjustment .............................................................................................. F-422
31.3.38 Punch Module Brake Replacement ........................................................................................................................ F-422
31.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment ........................................................................................................................... F-423
31.3.40 Punch Module Motor Replacement ........................................................................................................................ F-423
31.3.41 Punch Module Motor Drive Belt Replacement ....................................................................................................... F-424
31.3.42 Punch Module Drive Roller Replacement .............................................................................................................. F-424
31.3.43 Belt replacement .................................................................................................................................................... F-426
31.3.44 Tools....................................................................................................................................................................... F-426
32. GP-502................................................................................................................................................................F-427
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING ............................................................................................ G-1

1. ITEMS THAT YOU MUST NOT DISASSEMBLE .....................................................................................................G-1
1.1 List of Items that you must not disassemble........................................................................................................................... G-1
1.2 Items that you must not disassemble ..................................................................................................................................... G-1
1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw .............................................................................................................................................. G-1
1.2.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards................................................................................................................ G-1
1.2.3 CCD unit ........................................................................................................................................................................ G-1
1.2.4 Writing unit cover........................................................................................................................................................... G-2
1.2.5 Photo conductor section ................................................................................................................................................ G-2
1.2.6 Intermediate transfer section ......................................................................................................................................... G-3
1.2.7 Registration section ....................................................................................................................................................... G-3
1.2.8 Fusing section ............................................................................................................................................................... G-4
2. WARNING AND PRECAUTION ON DISASSEMBLING ..........................................................................................G-6

2.1 Precaution on removing the boards........................................................................................................................................ G-6
3. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L ...............................................G-7

3.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ........................................................................................................................... G-7
3.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ........................................................................................................................... G-8
3.2.1 Duct cover ..................................................................................................................................................................... G-8
3.2.2 Rear cover ..................................................................................................................................................................... G-8
3.2.3 Left cover....................................................................................................................................................................... G-8
3.2.4 Right cover/Up1, right cover/Up2, right cover/Up3, right cover/Up4, right cover/Lw1, right cover/Lw2......................... G-9
3.2.5 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr.......................... G-10
3.2.6 Main board unit............................................................................................................................................................ G-12
3.2.7 Overall control board (OACB)...................................................................................................................................... G-14
3.2.8 SSD (SSD) .................................................................................................................................................................. G-15
3.2.9 Original glass assy ...................................................................................................................................................... G-16
3.2.10 WT-511 (Option).........................................................................................................................................................G-16
3.2.11 CCD unit .....................................................................................................................................................................G-17
3.2.12 LED exposure unit ......................................................................................................................................................G-18
3.2.13 Scanner drive board (SCDB)......................................................................................................................................G-19
xviii
3.2.14 Scanner motor (M201)................................................................................................................................................G-19
3.2.15 IQ image processing board (IPB/I) (Option : IQ-501) .................................................................................................G-21
3.2.16 VIF board (VIFB) (Option: VI-513)..............................................................................................................................G-21
3.2.17 Writing unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-22
3.2.18 Process unit................................................................................................................................................................G-24
3.2.19 Image correction unit ..................................................................................................................................................G-25
3.2.20 Toner bottle motor, toner bottle clutch, remaining toner sensor, toner supply motor .................................................G-25
3.2.21 Duplex section ............................................................................................................................................................G-28
3.2.22 Paper feed tray ...........................................................................................................................................................G-30
3.2.23 Tray up down wire/1, tray up down wire/2 (Tray1) .....................................................................................................G-30
3.2.24 Tray up down wire/3, tray up down wire/4 (Tray2) .....................................................................................................G-32
3.2.25 Tray up down wire/5 (Tray2).......................................................................................................................................G-35
3.2.26 Fusing paper exit plate assy.......................................................................................................................................G-37
3.2.27 Temperature sensor/1 (TH1), temperature sensor/2 (TH2), thermostat/1 (TS1), thermostat/2 (TS2)........................G-37
3.2.28 Thermostat/3 (TS3) ....................................................................................................................................................G-40
3.2.29 Temperature sensor/5 (TH5) ......................................................................................................................................G-42
3.2.30 Fusing separation fan/1 (FM10), fusing separation fan/2 (FM11) and fusing separation fan/3 (FM12) .....................G-44
3.2.31 Replacement of the fusing ball bearings/Up, /Lw1, the heat insulating sleeves/Up, /Lw1, the belt regulating sleeve, the
fusing belt, the fusing rollers/1, /2, and the neutralizing ring ......................................................................................G-45
3.2.32 HDD1, HDD2, HDD3 ..................................................................................................................................................G-48
3.2.33 Hard disk/4 (HDD4) ....................................................................................................................................................G-50
3.2.34 Charge control framework unit ...................................................................................................................................G-50
3.2.35 Tucking fan/4 (FN35) and tucking fan/5 (FM36).........................................................................................................G-55
4. DF-706....................................................................................................................................................................G-58
4.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ......................................................................................................................... G-58
4.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ......................................................................................................................... G-58
4.2.1 Front cover .................................................................................................................................................................. G-58
4.2.2 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................... G-58
4.2.3 DF-706......................................................................................................................................................................... G-59
4.2.4 Front side glass cleaning roller unit ............................................................................................................................. G-62
4.2.5 Back side glass cleaning roller unit ............................................................................................................................. G-63
4.2.6 CIS module (CIS) ........................................................................................................................................................ G-64
4.2.7 DF control board (DFCB)............................................................................................................................................. G-66
4.2.8 Restriction plate positional volume (VR1).................................................................................................................... G-66
4.2.9 DF power supply board (DFPU) .................................................................................................................................. G-67
4.2.10 Sensor control board (SCB) .......................................................................................................................................G-69
4.2.11 Multi feed detection board/1 (transmitter) (MFDB/1) ..................................................................................................G-69
4.2.12 Multi feed detection board/2 (receiver) (MFDB/2) ......................................................................................................G-70
4.2.13 Paper feed motor (M1) ...............................................................................................................................................G-71
4.2.14 Registration motor (M2)..............................................................................................................................................G-72
4.2.15 Reading motor (M3)....................................................................................................................................................G-72
4.2.16 Exit motor (M4) ...........................................................................................................................................................G-73
4.2.17 Reading roller pressure release motor (M6)...............................................................................................................G-74
4.2.18 Back side cleaning motor (M7) ...................................................................................................................................G-74
4.2.19 Front side cleaning motor (M8)...................................................................................................................................G-75
4.2.20 Paper feed clutch (CL1)..............................................................................................................................................G-75
4.2.21 Cooling fan motor (FM)...............................................................................................................................................G-75
4.2.22 Replacing the separation roller torque limiter .............................................................................................................G-75
5. PF-602m .................................................................................................................................................................G-77
5.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling........................................................................................................... G-77
5.2.2 Right cover .................................................................................................................................................................. G-77
5.2.3 Rear cover/Lt2 ............................................................................................................................................................. G-78
5.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt........................................................................................................................................... G-78
5.2.5 Front door .................................................................................................................................................................... G-78
5.2.6 Tray ............................................................................................................................................................................. G-79
5.2.7 Lift wire ........................................................................................................................................................................ G-81
5.2.8 Paper lift motor/1 (M2) and /2 (M3) ............................................................................................................................. G-85
5.2.9 Vertical conveyance unit.............................................................................................................................................. G-86
5.2.10 Horizontal conveyance unit ........................................................................................................................................G-88
5.2.11 The multi feed detection board (MFDBR and MFDBS) ..............................................................................................G-89
6. PF-707m .................................................................................................................................................................G-92
6.1 Items you must not disassemble or reassemble................................................................................................................... G-92
6.1.1 Framework panel/1, framework panel/2 ...................................................................................................................... G-92
xix
6.3.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling........................................................................................................... G-92
6.3.2 Right cover .................................................................................................................................................................. G-93
6.3.3 Rear cover/Lt4 ............................................................................................................................................................. G-93
6.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2 and /Lt3 ............................................................................................................................................... G-93
6.3.5 Rear cover/Lt1 ............................................................................................................................................................. G-94
6.3.6 Rear cover/Rt .............................................................................................................................................................. G-94
6.3.7 Front door .................................................................................................................................................................... G-95
6.3.8 Tray front cover ........................................................................................................................................................... G-95
6.3.9 Tray ............................................................................................................................................................................. G-96
6.3.10 Lift wire .......................................................................................................................................................................G-98
6.3.11 Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12) ....G-99
6.3.12 Paper leading edge shutter solenoid /1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18).....................................................................G-101
6.3.13 Paper lift motor /1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9) ..................................................................................................................G-103
6.3.14 Paper feed suction unit.............................................................................................................................................G-106
6.3.15 Paper feed belt .........................................................................................................................................................G-107
6.3.16 Paper suction fan/1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), /6 (FM6) ..........................................................G-109
6.3.17 Paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)...................G-110
6.3.18 Shutter solenoid/Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3 (SD16)................................G-114
6.3.19 Paper feed check window.........................................................................................................................................G-116
6.3.20 Vertical conveyance unit...........................................................................................................................................G-116
6.3.21 Registration drive unit...............................................................................................................................................G-117
6.3.22 Horizontal conveyance unit ......................................................................................................................................G-118
6.3.23 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS) .........................................................................................................G-120
7. FA-502 ..................................................................................................................................................................G-122
7.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ....................................................................................................................... G-122
7.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ....................................................................................................................... G-122
7.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling......................................................................................................... G-122
7.2.2 FA-502....................................................................................................................................................................... G-122
8. LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm .......................................................................................................................G-124

8.2.2 Upper door................................................................................................................................................................. G-124
8.2.3 Upper door/Rt (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm) ................................................................................................................... G-124
8.2.4 Clutch cover............................................................................................................................................................... G-124
8.2.5 Paper feed cover ....................................................................................................................................................... G-125
8.2.6 Right cover (LU-202m) .............................................................................................................................................. G-125
8.2.7 Right cover (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)........................................................................................................................ G-125
8.2.8 Front cover (LU-202m) .............................................................................................................................................. G-126
8.2.9 Front cover (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)........................................................................................................................ G-126
8.2.10 Rear cover (LU-202m)..............................................................................................................................................G-127
8.2.11 Rear cover (LU-202XL) ............................................................................................................................................G-127
8.2.12 Rear cover (LU-202XLm) .........................................................................................................................................G-129
8.2.13 Replacing the lift wire (LU-202m) .............................................................................................................................G-129
8.2.14 Replacing the lift wires (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm).....................................................................................................G-136
8.2.15 Paper size VR (VR1) (LU-202m) ..............................................................................................................................G-143
8.2.16 Paper size VR (VR1) (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm) .......................................................................................................G-144
8.2.17 Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS), R (MFDBR) (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm) .....................................................G-145
9. MB-506 .................................................................................................................................................................G-149
9.2.2 Paper size VR/BP (VR3) ........................................................................................................................................... G-149
10. MB-508 .............................................................................................................................................................. G-151

10.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts ..................................................................................................................... G-151
10.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures ..................................................................................................................... G-151
10.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling........................................................................................................G-151
10.2.2 Right cover/Fr and Right cover/Rr ............................................................................................................................G-151
10.2.3 Right cover/Lw..........................................................................................................................................................G-151
10.2.4 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G-152
10.2.5 Bypass tray...............................................................................................................................................................G-152
10.2.6 Paper size VR/BP (VR3) ..........................................................................................................................................G-153
11. MK-744C............................................................................................................................................................ G-155

xx
11.2.2 Status indicator light .................................................................................................................................................G-155
12. OT-510............................................................................................................................................................... G-162

12.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled ........................................................................................................ G-162
12.1.1 Screws painted in red ...............................................................................................................................................G-162
12.3.2 Front door .................................................................................................................................................................G-162
12.3.3 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G-163
12.3.4 Upper cover /Rt1 ......................................................................................................................................................G-163
12.3.5 Upper cover /Rt2 ......................................................................................................................................................G-164
12.3.6 Upper cover /Fr1.......................................................................................................................................................G-164
12.3.7 Upper cover /Fr2.......................................................................................................................................................G-164
12.3.8 Upper cover /Rr ........................................................................................................................................................G-165
12.3.9 Upper cover /Md .......................................................................................................................................................G-165
12.3.10 Sub tray ..................................................................................................................................................................G-165
12.3.11 Main tray.................................................................................................................................................................G-166
12.3.12 Main tray up down motor (M11), main tray up-down drive assy.............................................................................G-166
12.3.13 Note for replacing the board ...................................................................................................................................G-169
13. OT-511............................................................................................................................................................... G-171

13.2.1 Paper exit unit...........................................................................................................................................................G-171
13.2.2 Left cover/Up, /Lw.....................................................................................................................................................G-172
13.2.3 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G-172
13.2.4 Conveyance door .....................................................................................................................................................G-173
14. EF-103 ............................................................................................................................................................... G-175

15. MK-740/MK-740m.............................................................................................................................................. G-176

15.2.1 Paper feed tray .........................................................................................................................................................G-176
15.2.2 Paper exit tray ..........................................................................................................................................................G-176
16. RU-518/HM-103................................................................................................................................................. G-177

16.1 Items that you must not disassemble or reassemble ....................................................................................................... G-177
16.1.1 Red-painted screws..................................................................................................................................................G-177
16.3.1 Upper cover/Rr .........................................................................................................................................................G-177
16.3.2 Paper exit cover/Lt....................................................................................................................................................G-177
16.3.3 Duct/Rt......................................................................................................................................................................G-178
16.3.4 Duct/Lt ......................................................................................................................................................................G-178
16.3.5 Rear cover/Up ..........................................................................................................................................................G-178
16.3.6 Rear cover/Md ..........................................................................................................................................................G-179
16.3.7 Water storage tank cover .........................................................................................................................................G-179
16.3.8 Color sensor unit ......................................................................................................................................................G-179
16.3.9 Water storage tank ...................................................................................................................................................G-181
16.3.10 Humidification unit ..................................................................................................................................................G-183
17. RU-702............................................................................................................................................................... G-189

17.3.1 Upper cover/Rr .........................................................................................................................................................G-189
17.3.2 Paper exit cover/Lt....................................................................................................................................................G-189
17.3.3 Duct/Rt......................................................................................................................................................................G-190
17.3.4 Duct/Lt ......................................................................................................................................................................G-190
17.3.5 Rear cover/Up ..........................................................................................................................................................G-190
17.3.6 Rear cover/Md ..........................................................................................................................................................G-191
17.3.7 Note for replacing the board .....................................................................................................................................G-191
18. RU-510............................................................................................................................................................... G-193
xxi
18.2.2 Front door .................................................................................................................................................................G-193
18.2.3 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G-193
18.2.4 Left cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-194
18.2.5 Upper cover ..............................................................................................................................................................G-194
18.2.6 Note for replacing the board .....................................................................................................................................G-195
19. FS-531 ............................................................................................................................................................... G-196

19.2.2 Upper cover/1 ...........................................................................................................................................................G-196
19.2.3 Upper cover/2 ...........................................................................................................................................................G-196
19.2.4 Front door .................................................................................................................................................................G-196
19.2.5 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G-197
19.2.6 Left cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-197
19.2.7 Main tray...................................................................................................................................................................G-197
19.2.8 Replacing the up down wire .....................................................................................................................................G-198
19.2.9 Stacker unit...............................................................................................................................................................G-201
19.2.10 Paper exit opening unit...........................................................................................................................................G-202
20. FS-612 ............................................................................................................................................................... G-205

20.1.1 Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper.........................................................................................G-205
20.3.2 Upper cover/1 ...........................................................................................................................................................G-205
20.3.3 Upper cover/2 ...........................................................................................................................................................G-206
20.3.4 Front door .................................................................................................................................................................G-206
20.3.5 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G-206
20.3.6 Left cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-207
20.3.7 Main tray...................................................................................................................................................................G-207
20.3.8 Replacing the up down wire .....................................................................................................................................G-208
20.3.9 Stacker unit cover.....................................................................................................................................................G-211
20.3.10 Stacker unit ............................................................................................................................................................G-211
20.3.11 Paper exit opening unit...........................................................................................................................................G-212
21. PK-512/513 ........................................................................................................................................................ G-214

21.1 Items that you must not disassemble and adjust.............................................................................................................. G-214
21.1.1 Punch unit.................................................................................................................................................................G-214
21.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list ................................................................................................................................... G-214
21.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure................................................................................................................................. G-214
21.3.2 Punch unit.................................................................................................................................................................G-214
22. IQ-501 ................................................................................................................................................................ G-217

22.3.2 Note for assembling and disassembling the IQ-501.................................................................................................G-217
22.3.3 Upper cover/Fr..........................................................................................................................................................G-217
22.3.4 Upper cover/Rr .........................................................................................................................................................G-218
22.3.5 Upper cover/Md ........................................................................................................................................................G-218
22.3.6 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G-219
22.3.7 Scanner unit/1 ..........................................................................................................................................................G-219
22.3.8 Scanner calibration unit/1 .........................................................................................................................................G-221
22.3.9 Scanner cleaning brush/1, Scanner B&W standard part/1, Scanner white backing/1, Scanner black backing/1-1, /1-2
..................................................................................................................................................................................G-224
22.3.10 Scanner unit/2 ........................................................................................................................................................G-227
22.3.11 Scanner calibration unit/2 .......................................................................................................................................G-229
22.3.12 Scanner cleaning brush/2, Scanner B&W standard part/2, Scanner white backing/2, Scanner black backing/2-1, /2-2
...............................................................................................................................................................................G-230
22.3.13 Colorimeter unit ......................................................................................................................................................G-232
xxii
22.3.14 Colorimeter calibration unit/1..................................................................................................................................G-233
22.3.15 Colorimeter white calibration block.........................................................................................................................G-234
23. UK-301............................................................................................................................................................... G-236

23.2.2 UK-301 .....................................................................................................................................................................G-236
23.2.3 Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................G-236
23.2.4 UK image processing board (IPB/U), UK relay board (UKRYB)...............................................................................G-237
23.2.5 SSD (SSD) ...............................................................................................................................................................G-238
23.2.6 UK control board (UKCB) .........................................................................................................................................G-238
23.2.7 HDD/1 (HDD/1), HDD/2 (HDD/2), HDD/3 (HDD/3), HDD/4 (HDD/4)........................................................................G-239
24. PI-502 ................................................................................................................................................................ G-242

24.2.2 Upper cover ..............................................................................................................................................................G-242
24.2.3 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G-242
24.2.4 Operation panel cover ..............................................................................................................................................G-242
24.2.5 PI unit .......................................................................................................................................................................G-243
25. FS-532 ............................................................................................................................................................... G-245

25.3.2 Front door .................................................................................................................................................................G-245
25.3.3 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G-246
25.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1 .......................................................................................................................................................G-246
25.3.5 Upper cover/Rt2 .......................................................................................................................................................G-247
25.3.6 Upper cover/Fr1........................................................................................................................................................G-247
25.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2........................................................................................................................................................G-247
25.3.8 Upper cover/Rr .........................................................................................................................................................G-248
25.3.9 Upper cover/Md ........................................................................................................................................................G-248
25.3.10 Front cover .............................................................................................................................................................G-249
25.3.11 Sub tray ..................................................................................................................................................................G-249
25.3.12 Stacker unit ............................................................................................................................................................G-249
25.3.13 Main tray.................................................................................................................................................................G-251
25.3.14 Main tray up down motor (M11), main tray up-down drive assy.............................................................................G-252
26. SD-510............................................................................................................................................................... G-256

26.3.2 Front cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-260
26.3.3 Stapler unit cover......................................................................................................................................................G-260
26.3.4 SD unit......................................................................................................................................................................G-261
26.3.5 Folding knife assy/1..................................................................................................................................................G-263
26.3.6 Folding knife assy/2..................................................................................................................................................G-266
27. PK-522 ............................................................................................................................................................... G-270

27.3.2 Punch unit.................................................................................................................................................................G-270
28. LS-506 ............................................................................................................................................................... G-272

28.2.2 Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................G-272
28.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire..................................................................................................................G-274
xxiii
29. FD-503 ............................................................................................................................................................... G-278
29.1.1 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section .....................................................................................G-278
29.3.2 Upper cover/Fr + PI cover/Fr ....................................................................................................................................G-278
29.3.3 Upper cover/Rr + PI cover/Rr ...................................................................................................................................G-279
29.3.4 Upper door................................................................................................................................................................G-279
29.3.5 Rear cover ................................................................................................................................................................G-280
29.3.6 Left cover/Fr .............................................................................................................................................................G-280
29.3.7 Left cover/Rr .............................................................................................................................................................G-280
29.3.8 Paper exit stopper cover...........................................................................................................................................G-280
29.3.9 Right cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-281
29.3.10 Left cover/Up ..........................................................................................................................................................G-281
29.3.11 Mount cover............................................................................................................................................................G-281
29.3.12 Front door ...............................................................................................................................................................G-282
29.3.13 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) ............................................................................................G-282
29.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) .............................................................................................G-283
29.3.15 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller ................................................................................................................................G-283
29.3.16 Folding conveyance section ...................................................................................................................................G-285
29.3.17 Main tray up/down wire ..........................................................................................................................................G-288
29.3.18 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2) ......................................................................................G-294
30. SD-506............................................................................................................................................................... G-297

30.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)......................................................G-297
30.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62)..........................................................................................................................G-297
30.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) .......................................................................................................................G-297
30.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)......................................................G-298
30.1.5 Trimmer press brake ................................................................................................................................................G-299
30.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt ...........................................................................................................G-299
30.3.2 Rear cover/Lt ............................................................................................................................................................G-300
30.3.3 Rear cover/Rt ...........................................................................................................................................................G-300
30.3.4 Left cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-300
30.3.5 Upper cover/Fr..........................................................................................................................................................G-301
30.3.6 Upper cover/Rr3 .......................................................................................................................................................G-301
30.3.7 Sub tray cover ..........................................................................................................................................................G-302
30.3.8 Front door/Lt .............................................................................................................................................................G-303
30.3.9 Front door/Rt ............................................................................................................................................................G-303
30.3.10 Folding unit .............................................................................................................................................................G-304
31. SD-513............................................................................................................................................................... G-308

31.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt .....................................................................................................................................................G-309
31.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3 ..................................................................................................................................................G-310
31.3.4 Front cover/1, /2, /3 ..................................................................................................................................................G-311
31.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3 .............................................................................................................G-312
31.3.6 Left cover/Rr .............................................................................................................................................................G-312
31.3.7 Upper cover/RrRt1, /RrRt2, /RrRt3, /RrRt4, /RrRt5, /RrRt6......................................................................................G-313
31.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3 ............................................................................................................................G-314
31.3.9 Upper cover/FrLt1, /FrLt2 .........................................................................................................................................G-315
31.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3, sub tray cover ..................................................................................................G-316
31.3.11 Opening and closing of the front console ...............................................................................................................G-318
31.3.12 Front console..........................................................................................................................................................G-320
31.3.13 Gripper paper exit unit ............................................................................................................................................G-322
31.3.14 Open and close of the booklet tray section door ....................................................................................................G-324
31.3.15 Moving up and down of the booklet holding ...........................................................................................................G-325
xxiv
32. CR-101............................................................................................................................................................... G-327
32.3.2 Creaser unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-327
33. TU-503 ............................................................................................................................................................... G-328

33.3.2 Slitter unit..................................................................................................................................................................G-328
34. FD-504 ............................................................................................................................................................... G-331

34.3.2 Spine corner forming unit .........................................................................................................................................G-331
34.3.3 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (1).....................................................................................................................G-332
34.3.4 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (2).....................................................................................................................G-334
35. PB-503 ............................................................................................................................................................... G-335

35.2.2 Front door .................................................................................................................................................................G-335
35.2.3 Front cover ...............................................................................................................................................................G-336
35.2.4 Booklet door .............................................................................................................................................................G-337
35.2.5 Rear cover/Rt ...........................................................................................................................................................G-338
35.2.6 Rear cover/Lt ............................................................................................................................................................G-339
35.2.7 Left cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-339
35.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr..............................................................................................................................G-340
35.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr .............................................................................................................................G-340
35.2.10 Pellet supply cover .................................................................................................................................................G-340
35.2.11 SC cover/Fr ............................................................................................................................................................G-341
35.2.12 SC cover/Up ...........................................................................................................................................................G-342
35.2.13 Upper cover/FrRt ....................................................................................................................................................G-342
35.2.14 Upper cover/FrLt ....................................................................................................................................................G-343
35.2.15 Upper cover/RrRt ...................................................................................................................................................G-343
35.2.16 Upper cover/RrLt ....................................................................................................................................................G-344
35.2.17 Upper cover/Md ......................................................................................................................................................G-344
35.2.18 Deodorant unit ........................................................................................................................................................G-344
35.2.19 Pellet supply unit ....................................................................................................................................................G-345
35.2.20 Glue tank unit .........................................................................................................................................................G-347
35.2.21 SC unit....................................................................................................................................................................G-348
35.2.22 Clamp unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-349
35.2.23 PB left unit ..............................................................................................................................................................G-351
35.2.24 Book lift wire ...........................................................................................................................................................G-354
35.2.25 Cart wire .................................................................................................................................................................G-357
35.2.26 Conveyance unit/Lw ...............................................................................................................................................G-358
35.2.27 Relay conveyance unit ...........................................................................................................................................G-359
35.2.28 Cover paper tray.....................................................................................................................................................G-360
35.2.29 Cover paper lift wire ...............................................................................................................................................G-361
35.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function ......................................................................................G-365
35.2.31 Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR) .....................................................................................G-366
36. GP-501............................................................................................................................................................... G-369

36.1 Centering punched holes.................................................................................................................................................. G-369
36.2 Door latch ......................................................................................................................................................................... G-370
36.2.1 Door latch check.......................................................................................................................................................G-370
36.2.2 Door Latch Adjustment .............................................................................................................................................G-370
36.2.3 Door Latch and Switch Replacement .......................................................................................................................G-371
36.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service .......................................................................................................................... G-372
36.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service ..................................................................................................................G-372
36.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer ....................................................................................................................G-372
xxv
36.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover ........................................................................................................................................G-372
36.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer................................................................................................................................... G-372
36.4.1 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................G-372
36.4.2 Tool Required ...........................................................................................................................................................G-372
36.4.3 To level the punch: ...................................................................................................................................................G-373
37. GP-502............................................................................................................................................................... G-374

38. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS............................................................................................................. G-375
38.1 Key counter (KCT)............................................................................................................................................................ G-375
38.1.1 Connector .................................................................................................................................................................G-375
38.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................G-375
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION ............................................................................................................H-1
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES............................................................................................................H-1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING ................................................................................................................ I-1

1. CHECKPOINTS......................................................................................................................................................... I-1
1.1 Checking before you start work ................................................................................................................................................ I-1
1.2 Checkpoints when you conduct the on-site service.................................................................................................................. I-1
2. UTILITY ..................................................................................................................................................................... I-2

2.1 Start and exit............................................................................................................................................................................. I-2
2.1.1 Start method .................................................................................................................................................................... I-2
2.1.2 Exit method...................................................................................................................................................................... I-2
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS ................................................................................................................................ I-3

3.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts ................................................................................................................. I-3
4. SERVICE MODE ....................................................................................................................................................... I-7

4.1 Service Mode List ..................................................................................................................................................................... I-7
4.1.1 Hierarchy ......................................................................................................................................................................... I-7
4.2 Start and exit........................................................................................................................................................................... I-12
4.2.1 Start method .................................................................................................................................................................. I-12
4.2.2 Exit method.................................................................................................................................................................... I-12
4.3 Machine Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................................... I-13
4.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ........................................................................................................... I-13
4.3.2 Centering Auto Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)..................................................................... I-14
4.3.3 Centering Sensor Gap Adj. (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)..................................................................... I-14
4.3.4 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment) ............................................................................. I-15
4.3.5 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)..................................................................................................................... I-16
4.3.6 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) .................................................................................................................... I-16
4.3.7 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)....................................................................................................... I-17
4.3.8 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment) .................................................................................................................. I-17
4.3.9 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment)...................................................................................................................... I-18
4.3.10 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ................................................................................................................... I-18
4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)........................................................ I-19
4.3.12 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ....................................................................................................... I-19
4.3.13 Color Regist. Gap Masurement (Printer Adjustment) .................................................................................................. I-21
4.3.14 Double Feed Detect Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ............................................................................................................ I-25
4.3.15 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ........................................................................................................... I-29
4.3.16 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) .............................................................................................................. I-30
4.3.17 Color Regist. Manual Adj. (Printer Adjustment)........................................................................................................... I-31
4.3.18 Speed Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) ...................................................................................................................... I-33
4.3.19 Registration Unit Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment) ........................................................................................................ I-34
4.3.20 Fusing Unit Skew Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)..................................................................................................... I-35
4.3.21 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment) ................................................................................................................. I-36
4.3.22 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)............................................................................................................ I-36
4.3.23 Centering Adjustment (Scan Adjustment) ................................................................................................................... I-37
4.3.24 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment) ..................................................................................................................... I-37
4.3.25 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment) ............................................................................................................ I-38
4.3.26 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)..................................................................................................................... I-38
4.3.27 Sensor Check (Scan Adjustment) ............................................................................................................................... I-39
4.3.28 CCD Check (Scan Adjustment) ................................................................................................................................... I-39
4.3.29 Line Mag. Setting (Scan Adjustment) .......................................................................................................................... I-40
4.3.30 Recall Standard Data (Scan Adjustment).................................................................................................................... I-40
4.3.31 IDC Sensor Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment)................................................................ I-41
4.3.32 Highlight Automatic Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment) ............................................................... I-43
4.3.33 Highlight Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment) .................................................................... I-46
xxvi
4.3.34 Half-Tone Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment)................................................................... I-47
4.3.35 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)............................................................................................................... I-47
4.3.36 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) .................................................................................................................. I-47
4.3.37 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)....................................................................... I-48
4.3.38 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) ....................................................................... I-48
4.3.39 Dot/Text Area Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level) ................................................................. I-49
4.3.40 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)......................................................................................................................... I-49
4.3.41 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) ............................................................................... I-50
4.3.42 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) ........................................................................ I-50
4.3.43 Background Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment) .............................................................................. I-50
4.3.44 Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC) (Quality Adjustment - Tone Adjustment) ..................................................................... I-51
4.3.45 Line Width Adj. (Quality Adjustment)........................................................................................................................... I-51
4.3.46 Package Color Auto Adj. (Quality Adjustment)............................................................................................................ I-52
4.3.47 Package Color Manual Adj. (Quality Adjustment) ....................................................................................................... I-54
4.3.48 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment)................................................................................................................. I-55
4.3.49 Prepare for auto selection (Quality Adjustment).......................................................................................................... I-56
4.3.50 Basic Setting (Quality Adjustment - Image Diagnosis) ................................................................................................ I-57
4.3.51 Simple Diagnosis (Quality Adjustment - Image Diagnosis) ......................................................................................... I-57
4.3.52 Detailed Diagnosis (Quality Adjustment - Image Diagnosis) ....................................................................................... I-58
4.3.53 Non-Image Area Erase Check..................................................................................................................................... I-59
4.3.54 Laser Pulse Adjustment............................................................................................................................................... I-59
4.3.55 Tray Size Adjustment (Tray Adjustment)..................................................................................................................... I-59
4.4 Process Adjustment................................................................................................................................................................ I-60
4.4.1 1st Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment) .................................................................................................... I-60
4.4.2 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment) ................................................................................................... I-60
4.4.3 Sep. Current Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment) ................................................................................................... I-60
4.4.4 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment) ................................................................................................ I-60
4.4.5 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adj.) .................................................................................................................. I-60
4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.) ................................................................................................. I-60
4.4.7 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.) ........................................................................................................ I-61
4.4.8 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)................................................................................................................ I-61
4.4.9 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.) ............................................................................................................. I-61
4.4.10 Max Dens. Initial Auto Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.) ..................................................................................................... I-97
4.4.11 All Dev. Unit Replace Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.) .................................................................................................... I-105
4.4.12 IDC Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm) ............................................................................................................ I-105
4.4.13 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)............................................................................................ I-105
4.4.14 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm) ........................................................................................... I-105
4.4.15 1st Trans. Resistance Meas. (Sensor Output Confirm)............................................................................................. I-106
4.4.16 2nd Trans. Resistance Meas. (Sensor Output Confirm)............................................................................................ I-106
4.4.17 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)......................................................................................... I-106
4.4.18 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)............................................................................................. I-107
4.4.19 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment) .................................................................................................. I-107
4.4.20 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment).................................................................................................. I-107
4.4.21 Fusing Temperature Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)........................................................................................ I-108
4.4.22 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)................................................................................................ I-108
4.4.23 Recall Standard Data ................................................................................................................................................ I-109
4.5 System setting ...................................................................................................................................................................... I-109
4.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures ........................................................................................................................... I-109
4.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list (1 to 50) .......................................................................................................................... I-110
4.5.3 Software DIPSW setting list (51 to 100) ...................................................................................................................... I-139
4.5.4 Software DIPSW setting list (101 to 150) .................................................................................................................... I-168
4.5.8 Service Center TEL/FAX ............................................................................................................................................. I-233
4.5.9 Serial Number Setting ................................................................................................................................................. I-233
4.5.10 Setup date/type of business setting........................................................................................................................... I-233
4.5.11 Toner band creation condition (productivity priority setting) ...................................................................................... I-234
4.5.12 Restrictions on banner print....................................................................................................................................... I-234
4.5.13 Setting of the toner amount and the replacement count of the toner bottle............................................................... I-234
4.5.14 Troubleshooting for image errors .............................................................................................................................. I-235
4.5.15 Remaining staple amount display setting .................................................................................................................. I-237
4.5.16 Postcard full bleed print setting ................................................................................................................................. I-240
4.5.17 Restrictions on use of parts for textured paper.......................................................................................................... I-240
4.5.18 Fusing Unit A and B Auto Recognition ...................................................................................................................... I-243
4.5.19 Release the capacity limit of FS-532 or OT-510 main tray and LS-506 stacker tray................................................. I-244
4.5.20 IQ-501 Paper size of Auto Image Adjustment ........................................................................................................... I-245
4.5.21 IQ-501 White overwriting area of the crop mark background of Auto Image Adjustment.......................................... I-246
xxvii
4.5.22 OpenAPI/IWS Function Correspondence Table........................................................................................................ I-246
4.6 Counter and data .................................................................................................................................................................. I-247
4.6.1 Maintenance Counter .................................................................................................................................................. I-247
4.6.2 Data collection procedures .......................................................................................................................................... I-248
4.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print) ......................................................................................................................... I-248
4.6.4 ADF Counter................................................................................................................................................................ I-249
4.6.5 Coverage Data History ................................................................................................................................................ I-250
4.6.6 Paper JAM History....................................................................................................................................................... I-252
4.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter Individual Sec. ............................................................................................................................... I-252
4.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode ....................................................................................................................................... I-261
4.6.9 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec....................................................................................................................... I-273
4.6.10 SC Data of Time Series............................................................................................................................................. I-292
4.6.11 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History).................................................................................................. I-292
4.6.12 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History).................................................................................................. I-292
4.6.13 Counter of each paper type ....................................................................................................................................... I-293
4.6.14 ORU-M Maintenance History..................................................................................................................................... I-295
4.6.15 Check, setting and reset procedure of the Special Parts Counter............................................................................. I-296
4.6.16 Data copying procedure of the Special Parts Counter (Intermediate transfer, intermediate transfer/C, intermediate
transfer/H).................................................................................................................................................................. I-296
4.6.17 Special Parts Counter................................................................................................................................................ I-298
4.6.18 Voluntary Part Counter (Parts Counter) .................................................................................................................... I-321
4.6.19 Total Counter History................................................................................................................................................. I-322
4.6.20 Life Counter ............................................................................................................................................................... I-322
4.7 State confirmation................................................................................................................................................................. I-322
4.7.1 I/O Check Mode........................................................................................................................................................... I-322
4.7.2 Input check procedures ............................................................................................................................................... I-323
4.7.3 Output check procedures ............................................................................................................................................ I-323
4.7.4 IO code (Main body, paper feed options) .................................................................................................................... I-323
4.7.5 IO code (RU-518, HM-103) ......................................................................................................................................... I-383
4.7.6 IO code (RU-702) ........................................................................................................................................................ I-388
4.7.7 IO code (IQ-501).......................................................................................................................................................... I-388
4.7.8 IO check mode list (OT-510) ....................................................................................................................................... I-390
4.7.9 IO check mode list (FS-532)........................................................................................................................................ I-392
4.7.10 IO check mode list (LS-506) ...................................................................................................................................... I-398
4.7.11 IO code (FD-503)....................................................................................................................................................... I-401
4.7.12 IO code (SD-506) ...................................................................................................................................................... I-404
4.7.13 IO code (SD-513) ...................................................................................................................................................... I-410
4.7.14 IO code (FS-531, FS-612) ......................................................................................................................................... I-417
4.7.15 IO code (RU-510) ...................................................................................................................................................... I-422
4.7.16 IO code (PB-503)....................................................................................................................................................... I-423
4.7.17 IO code (MK-737) ...................................................................................................................................................... I-429
4.7.18 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI) ............................................................................ I-430
4.7.19 Adjustment when you replace the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB)....................................................... I-431
4.7.20 IQ-501, FD-503, SD-506, SD-513, PB-503 adjustment data EEPROM storage ....................................................... I-433
4.7.21 Main body adjustment data NVRAM board storage .................................................................................................. I-433
4.7.22 Printer image processing board line memory check.................................................................................................. I-433
4.7.23 Hard disk check ......................................................................................................................................................... I-433
4.7.24 Hard disk replacing procedure................................................................................................................................... I-434
4.7.25 Replacing procedure of the write unit ........................................................................................................................ I-434
4.7.26 Procedure when IO35-21 or IO35-25 is used............................................................................................................ I-434
4.7.27 Procedure when IO99-70 is used (Board self-diagnosis function) ............................................................................ I-435
4.8 ADF adjustment .................................................................................................................................................................... I-436
4.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj.................................................................................................................................................. I-436
4.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position .............................................................................................................................................. I-437
4.8.3 ADF Orig Stop Pos. Auto............................................................................................................................................. I-438
4.8.4 ADF Registration Loop Adj. ......................................................................................................................................... I-438
4.8.5 Feed paper check........................................................................................................................................................ I-439
4.8.6 Sensor check............................................................................................................................................................... I-439
4.8.7 Read Position Adj. ....................................................................................................................................................... I-440
4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adj................................................................................................................................................ I-440
4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment.................................................................................................................................................... I-441
4.8.10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................... I-442
4.8.11 Scanning Light Adjustment........................................................................................................................................ I-442
4.8.12 Mixed Original Size Adj. ............................................................................................................................................ I-442
4.8.13 Line Detection(Front Side)......................................................................................................................................... I-442
4.8.14 Line Detection(Back Side) ......................................................................................................................................... I-443
4.8.15 ADF Scan Glass Auto Cleaning ................................................................................................................................ I-443
4.8.16 Home Read Position Adj(Back) ................................................................................................................................. I-443
xxviii
4.8.17 FD-Mag. Adjustment(Back) ....................................................................................................................................... I-444
4.8.18 FD-Mag. Auto Adj.(Back)........................................................................................................................................... I-444
4.8.19 Main Scan Dir. Zoom(Back) ...................................................................................................................................... I-445
4.8.20 Main Scan Dir. Zoom Auto(Back) .............................................................................................................................. I-445
4.8.21 Original Tray Pre-rise Set. ......................................................................................................................................... I-445
4.8.22 Multi-Feed Detection Adj. .......................................................................................................................................... I-446
4.8.23 Skew Measurement................................................................................................................................................... I-447
4.8.25 ADF Data Backup...................................................................................................................................................... I-448
4.9 Finisher adjustment .............................................................................................................................................................. I-449
4.9.1 OT-510 Exit guide unit paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment) ................................................... I-449
4.9.2 FS-532 Exit guide unit paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment).................................................... I-449
4.9.3 FS-532 Staple paper width adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment) ................................................................ I-450
4.9.4 FS-532 FD alignment plate adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment)................................................................ I-451
4.9.5 FS-532 Staple Position Adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment) ..................................................................... I-452
4.9.6 FS-532 Rewind paddle descent adjustment (staple finisher (main) adjustment) ........................................................ I-454
4.9.7 SD-510 Fold&staple paper width adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)......................................................... I-455
4.9.8 SD-510 Fold&staple pitch adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment).................................................................... I-455
4.9.9 SD-510 Fold&staple fold position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment) ........................................................ I-456
4.9.10 SD-510 Fold&staple staple position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment) .................................................. I-457
4.9.11 SD-510 Half-fold fold position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)............................................................ I-457
4.9.12 SD-510 Tri-fold position adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment)..................................................................... I-458
4.9.13 SD-510 Double fold plate adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment) .................................................................. I-459
4.9.14 SD-510 Half-fold strength adjustment (staple finisher (fold) adjustment) .................................................................. I-459
4.9.15 PK-522 Paper edge detect sensor adjustment (staple finisher (punch) adjustment) ................................................ I-460
4.9.16 PK-522 Registration adjustment (staple finisher (punch) adjustment) ...................................................................... I-460
4.9.17 PK-522 Horizontal position adjustment (paper feed direction) (staple finisher (punch) adjustment)......................... I-460
4.9.18 PK-522 Vertical position adjustment (crosswise direction) (staple finisher (punch) adjustment) .............................. I-461
4.9.19 PI-502 Tray size adjustment (staple finisher (PI) adjustment)................................................................................... I-462
4.9.20 PI-502 PI registration adjustment (staple finisher (PI) adjustment) ........................................................................... I-462
4.9.21 FD-503 Paper width adjustment (multi folder (punch) adjustment) ........................................................................... I-462
4.9.22 FD-503 Punch vertical position adjustment (multi folder (punch) adjustment) .......................................................... I-463
4.9.23 FD-503 Fold registration loop adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)................................................................. I-464
4.9.24 FD-503 Half fold position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)........................................................................ I-465
4.9.25 FD-503 Z-fold position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)............................................................................ I-465
4.9.26 FD-503 Tri-fold-in position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)...................................................................... I-466
4.9.27 FD-503 Tri-fold-out position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment) ................................................................... I-468
4.9.28 FD-503 Double parallel position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment)............................................................. I-469
4.9.29 FD-503 Gate position adjustment (multi folder (fold) adjustment) ............................................................................. I-470
4.9.30 LS-506 Paper width adjustment (stacker adjustment)............................................................................................... I-471
4.9.31 LS-506 Paper length adjustment (stacker adjustment) ............................................................................................. I-472
4.9.32 SD-506 Fold paper width adjustment (saddle stitcher adjustment) ........................................................................... I-472
4.9.33 SD-506 Half-fold position adjustment (saddle stitcher adjustment)........................................................................... I-473
4.9.34 SD-506 Staple paper width adjustment (saddle stitcher adjustment)........................................................................ I-474
4.9.35 SD-506 Staple center position adjustment (saddle stitcher adjustment) ................................................................... I-475
4.9.36 SD-506 Staple pitch adjustment (saddle stitcher adjustment)................................................................................... I-475
4.9.37 SD-506 Trimming adjustment (saddle stitcher adjustment)....................................................................................... I-476
4.9.38 SD-506 Tri-fold position adjustment (saddle stitcher adjustment) ............................................................................. I-477
4.9.39 SD-506 Trimmer receiver adjustment (saddle stitcher adjustment) .......................................................................... I-478
4.9.40 SD-513 Trans. Entrance Paper Width (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment) ........................................................................ I-478
4.9.41 SD-513 Fold Paper Width Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................................ I-480
4.9.42 SD-513 Fold Skew Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)................................................................................... I-481
4.9.43 SD-513 Half-Fold Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment) ....................................................................... I-482
4.9.44 SD-513 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment) ......................................................................... I-482
4.9.45 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - Half-Fold Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).............................. I-483
4.9.46 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - Tri-Fold Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment) ................................ I-484
4.9.47 CR-101 Crease Position Adjustment - PB Cover Crease Position (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment) ............................. I-486
4.9.48 SD-513 Staple Paper Width Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)..................................................................... I-486
4.9.49 SD-513 Staple Center Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).............................................................................. I-487
4.9.50 SD-513 Staple Pitch Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment) ................................................................................ I-489
4.9.51 SD-513 Saddle Position Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................................... I-491
4.9.52 SD-513 Staple Offset Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)............................................................................... I-492
4.9.53 SD-513 Staple Tip Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment) ................................................................................... I-492
4.9.54 FD-504 Spine Fold Line Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................................... I-493
4.9.55 FD-504 Flattening a Fold (Strength) (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment) ........................................................................... I-493
4.9.56 FD-504 Flattening a Fold (Frequency) (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................................ I-494
4.9.57 SD-513/FD-504 Parallel Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................... I-494
4.9.58 SD-513 Fore-edge Trimming Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment) ................................................................... I-495
xxix
4.9.59 TU-503 Registration Loop Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment)........................................................................ I-496
4.9.60 TU-503 2-Side Slitting Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment).............................................................................. I-497
4.9.61 SD-513 Trimmer Receiver Adjustment (Saddle Stitcher Adjustment) ....................................................................... I-498
4.9.62 PB-503 Sub compile CD width adjustment (perfect binder adjustment).................................................................... I-498
4.9.63 PB-503 Clamp CD width adjustment (perfect binder adjustment) ............................................................................. I-499
4.9.64 PB-503 Clamp FD position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment) ......................................................................... I-499
4.9.65 PB-503 Glue start position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment) .......................................................................... I-500
4.9.66 PB-503 Glue finish position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)......................................................................... I-501
4.9.67 PB-503 Cover lead edge adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)............................................................................. I-502
4.9.68 PB-503 Cover trimming adjustment (perfect binder adjustment)............................................................................... I-503
4.9.69 PB-503 Cover up down CD width adjustment (perfect binder adjustment) ............................................................... I-503
4.9.70 PB-503 Spine corner form position adjustment (perfect binder adjustment) ............................................................. I-504
4.9.71 PB-503 Temperature adjustment (perfect binder adjustment) .................................................................................. I-505
4.9.72 RU-510 Paper Width Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment).................................................................................. I-505
4.9.73 RU-510 Paper Length Adjustment (Relay Stacker Adjustment)................................................................................ I-506
4.9.74 FS-531/612 Confirm Paper Feed Position................................................................................................................. I-506
4.9.75 FS-612 Fold & Staple Stopper Adjustment................................................................................................................ I-509
4.9.76 FS-612 Half-Fold stopper adjustment........................................................................................................................ I-510
4.9.77 PK-512/513 Vertical Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment) ............................................................................................. I-510
4.9.78 PK-512/513 Horizontal Position Adj. (Punch Adjustment)......................................................................................... I-511
4.9.79 PK-512/513 Registration Adjustment (Punch Adjustment)........................................................................................ I-512
4.9.80 PK-512/513 Paper Edge Detect Sensor (Punch Adjustment) ................................................................................... I-512
4.9.81 FS-612 Tri-Fold Adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... I-512
4.9.82 FS-612 2 Position Staple Pitch.................................................................................................................................. I-513
4.9.83 PI-502 Post Inserter Tray Size .................................................................................................................................. I-514
4.9.84 FS-531/612 Output Quantity Limit ............................................................................................................................. I-514
4.9.85 MK-737 External FNS Customize Set. ...................................................................................................................... I-515
4.9.86 MK-737 Special Customize Setting ........................................................................................................................... I-516
4.9.87 IQ-501 Read Trans. Roller Speed Adj. (IQ Optimizer Adjustment) ........................................................................... I-517
4.9.88 IQ-501 Scanner Correction Pos. Adj. (IQ Optimizer Adjustment).............................................................................. I-517
4.9.89 IQ-501 Scanner Read Position Adj. (IQ Optimizer Adjustment) ................................................................................ I-518
4.9.90 IQ-501 Scanner LUT Interpolation (IQ Optimizer Adjustment) .................................................................................. I-519
4.9.91 IQ-501 Measured Trigger Sensitivity (IQ Optimizer Adjustment) .............................................................................. I-519
4.9.92 IQ-501 Measured Trigger Pos. Adj. (IQ Optimizer Adjustment) ................................................................................ I-519
4.9.93 IQ-501 Spot Detect. Base Adjustment (IQ Optimizer Adjustment) ............................................................................ I-520
4.10 Firmware Version ............................................................................................................................................................... I-522
4.10.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-522
4.10.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-522
4.11 CS Remote Care ................................................................................................................................................................ I-523
4.11.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................................... I-523
4.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using E-mail) ................................................................................ I-523
4.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using phone line modem)............................................................. I-525
4.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using WebDAV server) ................................................................ I-526
4.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system.............................................. I-528
4.11.6 Mail initial setting ....................................................................................................................................................... I-528
4.11.7 http communication setting........................................................................................................................................ I-529
4.11.8 Log forwarding function ............................................................................................................................................. I-529
4.11.9 Input procedure of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care ........................................................................................ I-529
4.11.10 List of software DIPSW for CS Remote Care ...........................................................................................................I-530
4.11.11 Setup confirmation ...................................................................................................................................................I-536
4.11.12 Maintenance call ......................................................................................................................................................I-536
4.11.13 Center call from administrator ..................................................................................................................................I-537
4.11.14 Confirm communication log ......................................................................................................................................I-537
4.11.15 Initialization of RAM for CS Remote Care ................................................................................................................I-537
4.11.16 CS Remote Care error code list ...............................................................................................................................I-537
4.11.17 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................................................I-539
4.12 List Output .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-539
4.12.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-539
4.12.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-539
4.13 Test Mode........................................................................................................................................................................... I-540
4.13.1 Running Test Mode ................................................................................................................................................... I-540
4.13.2 Test Pattern Output Mode ......................................................................................................................................... I-540
4.13.3 Test pattern number 11 Beam check ........................................................................................................................ I-541
4.13.4 Test pattern number 16 Linearity evaluation pattern ................................................................................................. I-541
4.13.5 Test pattern number 25 registration mark position check pattern ............................................................................. I-542
4.13.6 Test pattern number 33 Linearity evaluation pattern ................................................................................................. I-543
4.13.7 Test pattern number 40 Image skew check pattern (full-bleed print of test pattern number 16) ............................... I-544
xxx
4.13.8 Test pattern number 43 Output 12 test patterns at a time......................................................................................... I-544
4.13.9 Test pattern number 49 RU color sensor gamma correction (output paper density adjustment chart i1-iSis/i1-Pro) I-545
4.13.10 Test pattern number 51 Gradation evaluation pattern (main scan) ..........................................................................I-546
4.13.11 Test pattern number 52 Gradation evaluation pattern (sub scan) ............................................................................I-546
4.13.12 Test pattern number 53 Overall halftone ..................................................................................................................I-547
4.13.13 Test pattern number 54 Gradation evaluation pattern..............................................................................................I-547
4.13.14 Test pattern number 55 5% coverage ......................................................................................................................I-548
4.13.15 Test pattern number 58 Stripe check pattern ...........................................................................................................I-548
4.13.16 Test pattern number 62 Uneven density check pattern............................................................................................I-549
4.13.17 Test pattern number 69 Maximum density adjustment pattern ................................................................................I-550
4.13.18 Test pattern number 75 Density correction pattern i1-iSis XL (Type1/Type2) .........................................................I-551
4.13.19 Test pattern number 76 Density correction pattern i1-Pro (Type1/Type2) ...............................................................I-551
4.13.20 Test pattern number 77 Density correction pattern manual .....................................................................................I-552
4.13.21 Test pattern number 79 Density correction pattern (when the scanner is used) ......................................................I-553
4.13.22 Test pattern number 80 Print peculiarity evaluation pattern .....................................................................................I-553
4.13.23 Test pattern number 200 Chart file output................................................................................................................I-554
4.13.24 Print suspend mode .................................................................................................................................................I-554
4.14 Setting Data........................................................................................................................................................................ I-555
4.14.1 Load from External Memory ...................................................................................................................................... I-555
4.14.2 Store to External Memory.......................................................................................................................................... I-556
4.15 Log Store ............................................................................................................................................................................ I-557
4.15.1 Log Store Setting....................................................................................................................................................... I-557
4.15.2 Execute Log Storing .................................................................................................................................................. I-557
4.15.3 Log Store Setting (UK-301) ....................................................................................................................................... I-559
4.15.4 Execute Log Storing (UK-301)................................................................................................................................... I-559
4.15.5 Download of the log from Web Utilities...................................................................................................................... I-561
4.15.6 Download of the log from Web Utilities (UK-301) ...................................................................................................... I-561
4.15.7 Acquire the logs for the controller via WebDAV ........................................................................................................ I-561
4.16 ORU-M Setting ................................................................................................................................................................... I-562
4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life setting ............................................................................................................................................ I-562
4.16.2 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting .................................................................................................................................. I-563
4.16.3 ORU-M Password Setting ......................................................................................................................................... I-563
4.17 HDD Setting........................................................................................................................................................................ I-563
4.17.1 Format HDD All Data................................................................................................................................................. I-563
4.17.2 Format Controller HDD Data ..................................................................................................................................... I-565
4.17.3 Format Additional HDD Data ..................................................................................................................................... I-566
4.17.4 Format HDD All Data (UK-301) ................................................................................................................................. I-567
4.18 Auth. Device Setting ........................................................................................................................................................... I-567
4.18.1 Auth. Unit Selection ................................................................................................................................................... I-567
4.18.2 Loadable Driver Install............................................................................................................................................... I-568
4.19 Startup Setting.................................................................................................................................................................... I-568
4.19.1 Package Adjustment.................................................................................................................................................. I-568
4.19.2 Setup Setting 1 .......................................................................................................................................................... I-568
4.19.3 Setup Setting 2 .......................................................................................................................................................... I-569
4.19.4 Centering Auto Adjustment (Package Position Adjustment) ..................................................................................... I-569
4.19.5 Package Position Auto Adj. (Package Position Adjustment) ..................................................................................... I-569
4.19.6 Package Position Manual Adj. (Package Position Adjustment)................................................................................. I-570
4.20 Install User's Guide............................................................................................................................................................. I-571
4.20.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................................... I-571
4.20.2 Preparation ................................................................................................................................................................ I-571
4.20.3 Procedure for import.................................................................................................................................................. I-572
5. IC-605 SERVICE MODE ....................................................................................................................................... I-575

5.1 IC Service Mode List............................................................................................................................................................. I-575
5.2 Start and exit of IC service mode.......................................................................................................................................... I-575
5.2.1 Method to activate the IC service mode ...................................................................................................................... I-575
5.2.2 Method to exit the IC service mode ............................................................................................................................. I-575
5.3 System Setting (Toner Supply)............................................................................................................................................. I-576
5.3.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................................... I-576
5.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-576
5.4 CSV File Import/Export ......................................................................................................................................................... I-576
5.4.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................................... I-576
5.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-576
5.5 Font Backup.......................................................................................................................................................................... I-578
5.5.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................................... I-578
5.5.2 Preparation of backup/restore ..................................................................................................................................... I-578
5.5.3 Backup method............................................................................................................................................................ I-578
5.5.4 Method to restore ........................................................................................................................................................ I-579
xxxi
5.6 HP Tray Mapping.................................................................................................................................................................. I-580
5.6.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................................... I-580
5.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-580
5.7 Controller Capture Setting .................................................................................................................................................... I-582
5.7.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................................... I-582
5.7.2 Acquisition procedure .................................................................................................................................................. I-582
5.8 AccurioPro Cloud Eye Error History ..................................................................................................................................... I-583
5.8.1 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-583
6. CE/ADMINISTRATOR SECURITY SETTING ....................................................................................................... I-584

6.1 CE/Administrator Security Setting list ................................................................................................................................... I-584
6.2 Start/exit................................................................................................................................................................................ I-584
6.2.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-584
6.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-584
6.3 CE Authentication ................................................................................................................................................................. I-584
6.3.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-584
6.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-584
6.4 CE Auth. Password............................................................................................................................................................... I-584
6.4.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-584
6.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-584
6.5 Admin. Authentication........................................................................................................................................................... I-585
6.5.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-585
6.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-585
6.6 Administrator Password........................................................................................................................................................ I-585
6.6.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-585
6.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-585
7. FEE COLLECTION SETTING ............................................................................................................................... I-586

7.1 Fee Collection Setting List .................................................................................................................................................... I-586
7.2 Start/exit................................................................................................................................................................................ I-586
7.2.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-586
7.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-586
7.3 Total Counter Setting............................................................................................................................................................ I-586
7.3.1 Paper Size Threshold Setting...................................................................................................................................... I-586
7.3.2 Paper Size Counter ..................................................................................................................................................... I-586
7.3.3 Coefficient Setting ....................................................................................................................................................... I-587
7.4 General Setting..................................................................................................................................................................... I-587
7.4.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-587
7.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-587
7.5 Manage OpenAPI Auth......................................................................................................................................................... I-588
7.5.1 Restriction Code .......................................................................................................................................................... I-588
7.6 Billing Coefficient Setting ...................................................................................................................................................... I-588
7.6.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-588
7.6.2 Function....................................................................................................................................................................... I-588
7.6.3 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-588
8. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD ..................................................................................................................................... I-590

8.1 Expert Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................................ I-590
8.1.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................................... I-590
8.1.2 Preset .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-590
8.1.3 2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front), (Back) ..................................................................................................................... I-591
8.1.4 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge(Front), (Back) ...................................................................................................................... I-592
8.1.5 2nd Transfer-Rear Edge(Front), (Back)....................................................................................................................... I-592
8.1.6 Separation AC(Front), (Back) ...................................................................................................................................... I-593
8.1.7 Separation DC(Front), (Back) ...................................................................................................................................... I-594
8.1.8 Upper Fusing Roller Temperature ............................................................................................................................... I-594
8.1.9 Lead Edge Erase Quantity .......................................................................................................................................... I-594
8.1.10 Temp. Gap of Fus. Edge and Mid. ............................................................................................................................ I-595
8.1.11 Lower Fusing Roller Temperature ............................................................................................................................. I-595
8.1.12 Rear Edge Erase Quantity......................................................................................................................................... I-596
8.1.13 Back on Top Output Timing Adj................................................................................................................................. I-596
8.1.14 ADU Reverse Timing................................................................................................................................................. I-597
8.1.15 Fusing Speed(Front Side) ......................................................................................................................................... I-597
8.1.16 Fusing Speed(Back Side Offset) ............................................................................................................................... I-598
8.1.17 Registration Loop(Front), (Back) ............................................................................................................................... I-600
8.1.18 IQ Transport Roller Speed Adj. ................................................................................................................................. I-600
8.1.19 Registration Speed .................................................................................................................................................... I-600
8.1.20 Reverse De-Curler Speed ......................................................................................................................................... I-601
8.1.21 Reverse Speed(RevExit) ........................................................................................................................................... I-601
xxxii
8.1.22 Reverse Speed(ADU)................................................................................................................................................ I-601
8.1.23 Banner Reverse Speed1 ........................................................................................................................................... I-602
8.1.24 Output De-Curler Speed............................................................................................................................................ I-602
8.1.25 LCT BannerRegist. Speed......................................................................................................................................... I-602
8.1.26 Regist. Speed(Banner) .............................................................................................................................................. I-604
8.1.27 Banner Reverse Speed2 ........................................................................................................................................... I-604
8.1.28 Reverse Gate SW Timing.......................................................................................................................................... I-604
8.1.29 RU Speed Adjustment(Banner) ................................................................................................................................. I-605
8.1.30 Pre-regist. Loop Adj.(Front) ....................................................................................................................................... I-605
8.1.31 Pre-regist. Loop: 1st Connection ............................................................................................................................... I-606
8.1.32 Pre-regist. Loop: 2nd Connection.............................................................................................................................. I-606
8.1.33 Pre-regist. Loop: BypassConnection ......................................................................................................................... I-607
8.1.34 Pre-regist. Loop: Tray6 Connection........................................................................................................................... I-607
8.1.35 Up Fusing Initial Temp............................................................................................................................................... I-607
8.1.36 2nd Trans. Pressure .................................................................................................................................................. I-607
8.1.37 CPM Down ................................................................................................................................................................ I-608
8.1.38 Toner Amount Save................................................................................................................................................... I-608
8.1.39 Dens. Adj. Per Tray (YMC)........................................................................................................................................ I-608
8.1.40 Dens. Adj. Per Tray (K) ............................................................................................................................................. I-609
8.1.41 Mis-centering Detect JAM ......................................................................................................................................... I-609
8.1.42 Double Feed Detection.............................................................................................................................................. I-609
8.1.43 Int. Transfer Separation............................................................................................................................................. I-609
8.1.44 Thick BK mode .......................................................................................................................................................... I-609
8.1.45 Feed Correction Level ............................................................................................................................................... I-610
8.1.46 Output Curl Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................. I-610
8.1.47 Output Curl (Back on Top)......................................................................................................................................... I-611
8.1.48 Paper Feed Assist Set............................................................................................................................................... I-611
8.1.49 Centering Adj. (Front), (Back).................................................................................................................................... I-612
8.1.50 Oscillation Setting...................................................................................................................................................... I-613
8.1.51 Fusing Air Separation Air Level Setting..................................................................................................................... I-613
8.1.52 Change Fusing Pressure........................................................................................................................................... I-614
8.1.53 Hard Paper Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... I-614
8.1.54 PFU Suction Air Level Setting ................................................................................................................................... I-614
8.1.55 Output Paper Separation Setting............................................................................................................................... I-615
8.1.56 Output Cooling Air Level Adj. .................................................................................................................................... I-615
8.2 Image quality/improving paper feeding adjustment .............................................................................................................. I-616
8.2.1 Transfer jitter adjustment............................................................................................................................................. I-616
9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L

............................................................................................................................................................................... I-618
9.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt ................................................................................................................................... I-618
9.1.1 Purpose ....................................................................................................................................................................... I-618
9.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-618
9.2 Centering adjustment of the paper feed tray/1 and the paper feed tray/2 ............................................................................ I-618
9.2.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-618
9.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-618
9.3 Separation pressure adjustment of the paper feed tray/1 and the paper feed tray/2 ........................................................... I-619
9.3.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-619
9.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-619
9.4 Writing unit tilt adjustment..................................................................................................................................................... I-619
9.4.1 Whole adjustment flow of color gap............................................................................................................................. I-619
9.4.2 Function....................................................................................................................................................................... I-620
9.4.3 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-621
9.4.4 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-621
9.5 Separation discharging plate assy position adjustment........................................................................................................ I-622
9.5.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-622
9.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-623
9.6 Registration unit skew adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ I-624
9.6.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-624
9.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-624
9.7 Fusing unit skew adjustment ................................................................................................................................................ I-628
9.7.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-628
9.7.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-628
9.8 Fusing paper exit rollerr pressure adjustment ...................................................................................................................... I-632
9.8.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-632
9.8.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-632
9.9 Tilt adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................................... I-632
9.9.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................... I-632
xxxiii
9.9.2 Preparation .................................................................................................................................................................. I-633
9.9.3 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................... I-633
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-706 ...............................................................................................................I-636

10.1 Adjusting the height ............................................................................................................................................................ I-636
10.1.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................................................... I-636
10.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-636
10.2 Adjusting front side skew feed on dual scan document feeder .......................................................................................... I-636
10.2.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................................................... I-636
10.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-636
10.3 Adjusting back side skew feed on dual scan document feeder .......................................................................................... I-638
10.3.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................................................... I-638
10.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-638
10.4 Adjusting the pressure of the separation roller ................................................................................................................... I-639
10.4.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................................................... I-639
10.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-639
10.5 Adjusting multi-feed detection ............................................................................................................................................ I-640
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-602m ............................................................................................................I-642

11.1 Paper feed pick-up amount adjustment.............................................................................................................................. I-642
11.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-642
11.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-642
11.2 Pick-up roller height adjustment ......................................................................................................................................... I-643
11.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-643
11.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-643
11.3 Separation pressure adjustment......................................................................................................................................... I-645
11.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-645
11.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-645
11.4 Lift plate horizontal adjustment........................................................................................................................................... I-645
11.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-645
11.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-645
11.5 Horizontal adjustment......................................................................................................................................................... I-646
11.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-646
11.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-646
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PF-707m ............................................................................................................I-648

12.1 Paper feed pressure adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ I-648
12.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-648
12.1.2 Preparation ................................................................................................................................................................ I-648
12.1.3 Multi-feed adjustment (J-1610).................................................................................................................................. I-648
12.1.4 No feed adjustment (J-1601 to J-1603) ..................................................................................................................... I-648
12.1.5 Paper lead edge buckle adjustment .......................................................................................................................... I-648
12.1.6 Feed failed jam adjustment (J-1601, J-1602, J-1613) ............................................................................................... I-648
12.2 Centering adjustment (for each tray) .................................................................................................................................. I-648
12.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-648
12.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-649
12.3 Centering Adjustment (PF) ................................................................................................................................................. I-649
12.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-649
12.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-650
12.4 Height and tilt adjustment ................................................................................................................................................... I-650
12.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-650
12.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-650
12.5 Tilt adjustment .................................................................................................................................................................... I-654
12.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-654
12.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-655
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm .....................................................................I-656

13.1 Separation pressure adjustment......................................................................................................................................... I-656
13.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-656
13.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-656
13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal adjustment ................................................................................................................................. I-656
13.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-656
13.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-657
13.3 Paper centering adjustment................................................................................................................................................ I-657
13.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-657
13.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-658
13.4 Paper skew adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................... I-658
13.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-658
13.4.2 Preparation ................................................................................................................................................................ I-658
13.4.3 Adjustment procedure of all the paper skew regularly(For LU-202m) ....................................................................... I-659
xxxiv
13.4.4 Adjustment procedure for all paper in the LU skew regularly (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm) ........................................... I-659
13.4.5 Adjustment procedure of each paper skew irregularly (LU-202m) ............................................................................ I-660
13.4.6 Adjustment procedure of each paper skew irregularly (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)...................................................... I-660
13.5 (Maximum) Paper feed height adjustment.......................................................................................................................... I-660
13.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-660
13.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-661
13.6 Pick-up roller separation adjustment .................................................................................................................................. I-661
13.6.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-661
13.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-661
13.7 Weight adjustment.............................................................................................................................................................. I-662
13.7.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-662
13.7.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-662
13.8 Height adjustment of LU ..................................................................................................................................................... I-662
13.8.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-662
13.8.2 Preparation ................................................................................................................................................................ I-662
13.8.3 Procedure (LU-202m)................................................................................................................................................ I-663
13.8.4 Procedure (LU-202XL) .............................................................................................................................................. I-664
13.8.5 Procedure (LU-202XLm) ........................................................................................................................................... I-666
14. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MB-506...............................................................................................................I-670

14.1 Pick-up roller/BP load adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... I-670
14.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-670
14.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-670
14.2 Paper feed (Maximum) height adjustment (bypass)........................................................................................................... I-670
14.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-670
14.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-670
14.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment (bypass).......................................................................................................................... I-670
14.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-670
14.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-671
14.4 Separation roller/BP separation pressure adjustment ........................................................................................................ I-671
14.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-671
14.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-671
15. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MB-508...............................................................................................................I-672

15.1 Pick-up roller/BP load adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... I-672
15.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-672
15.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-672
15.2 Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment......................................................................................................................... I-672
15.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-672
15.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-672
15.3 Pick-up shift amount adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ I-672
15.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-672
15.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-673
15.4 Separation roller/BP separation pressure adjustment ........................................................................................................ I-673
15.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-673
15.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-673
15.5 Centering Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................................... I-673
15.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-673
15.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-673
15.6 Height adjustment............................................................................................................................................................... I-674
15.6.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-674
15.6.2 Preparation ................................................................................................................................................................ I-674
15.6.3 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-674
15.7 Tilt adjustment .................................................................................................................................................................... I-675
15.7.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-675
15.7.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-676
16. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MK-740/MK-740m ..............................................................................................I-677

16.1 Tray install position adjustment .......................................................................................................................................... I-677
16.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-677
16.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-677
17. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT EF-103 ...............................................................................................................I-678

17.1 Fusing unit skew adjustment .............................................................................................................................................. I-678
17.2 Fusing paper exit roller pressure adjustment ..................................................................................................................... I-678
18. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT OT-511 ...............................................................................................................I-679

18.1 Conveyance door position adjustment ............................................................................................................................... I-679
18.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-679
18.1.2 Adjustment procedure of the new type ...................................................................................................................... I-679
xxxv
19. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT OT-510 ...............................................................................................................I-681
19.1 Main tray horizontal adjustment.......................................................................................................................................... I-681
19.1.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................................................... I-681
19.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-681
20. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT RU-518...............................................................................................................I-682

20.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-682
20.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-682

21.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-684
21.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-684

22.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-686
22.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-686
23. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-531 ...............................................................................................................I-687

23.1 Adjustment the bypass gate ............................................................................................................................................... I-687
23.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-687
23.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-687
23.2 Adjusting the shift position.................................................................................................................................................. I-688
23.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-688
23.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-688
23.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid.......................................................................................................................... I-688
23.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-688
23.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-689
23.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm........................................................................................................ I-690
23.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-690
23.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-690
23.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate/Up................................................................................................. I-691
23.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-691
23.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-691
23.6 Staple position adjustment ................................................................................................................................................. I-692
23.6.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-692
23.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-692

24.1 Adjustment the bypass gate ............................................................................................................................................... I-694
24.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-694
24.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-694
24.2 Adjusting the shift position.................................................................................................................................................. I-695
24.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-695
24.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-695
24.3 Adjusting the paper exit opening solenoid.......................................................................................................................... I-695
24.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-695
24.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-696
24.4 Adjusting the mounting position of the paper exit arm........................................................................................................ I-697
24.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-697
24.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-697
24.5 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate/Up................................................................................................. I-698
24.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-698
24.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-698
24.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate/Lw................................................................................................. I-699
24.6.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-699
24.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-699
24.7.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-700
24.7.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-700
24.8 Staple position adjustment (Saddle stitching)..................................................................................................................... I-701
24.8.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-701
24.8.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-701
24.9 Staple up/down position adjustment................................................................................................................................... I-702
24.9.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-702
24.9.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-702
24.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ I-703
24.10.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-703
xxxvi
24.10.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-704
24.11 Folding pressure adjustment ............................................................................................................................................ I-704
24.11.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-704
24.11.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-705
24.12 Tri-folding position adjustment.......................................................................................................................................... I-705
24.12.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-705
24.12.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-705
25. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-512/513 ........................................................................................................I-706

25.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment ................................................................................................................................ I-706
25.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-706
25.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-706
26. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PI-502.................................................................................................................I-707

26.1 PI tilt adjustment (When PK is connected) ......................................................................................................................... I-707
26.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-707
26.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-707
26.2 PK punch position centering adjustment ............................................................................................................................ I-707
26.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-707
26.2.2 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray/Up .................................................................................................... I-707
26.2.3 Adjustment procedure for the cover sheet tray/Lw .................................................................................................... I-708
27. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT IQ-501 ................................................................................................................I-710

27.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-710
27.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-710

28.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-711
28.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-711
28.2 Main tray horizontal adjustment.......................................................................................................................................... I-712
28.2.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................................................... I-712
28.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-712
29. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-510 ...............................................................................................................I-714

29.1 Adjustment for Staple Clinch Failure .................................................................................................................................. I-714
29.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-714
29.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-714
29.2 1st folding skew adjustment ............................................................................................................................................... I-714
29.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-714
29.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-715
30. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PK-522 ...............................................................................................................I-716

30.1 Punch hole position skew adjustment ................................................................................................................................ I-716
30.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-716
30.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-716
30.2 Punch unit adjustment mounting position adjustment ........................................................................................................ I-716
30.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-716
30.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-716
31. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LS-506................................................................................................................I-718

31.1 Adjusting the paper press solenoid/1 (SD6) ....................................................................................................................... I-718
31.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-718
31.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-718
31.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-718
31.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-718
31.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-718
31.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-719
31.4 Adjusting the job partition solenoid (SD2) .......................................................................................................................... I-719
31.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-719
31.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-719
31.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-719
31.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-720
31.6 Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment ........................................................................................................................ I-720
31.6.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-720
31.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-720
31.7 Stacker tray height adjustment (LS-506) ............................................................................................................................ I-721
xxxvii
31.7.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................................................... I-721
31.7.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-722
31.8 Stacker tray levelness adjustment (LS-506)....................................................................................................................... I-722
31.8.1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................................................... I-722
31.8.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-723
32. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FD-503 ...............................................................................................................I-725

32.1 Roller solenoids/1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position adjustment ................................................................ I-725
32.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-725
32.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-725
32.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment ...................................................................................................... I-725
32.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-725
32.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-726
32.3 Punch centering adjustment ............................................................................................................................................... I-726
32.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-726
32.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-726
32.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-727
32.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-727
32.5 Paper feed control gear position adjustment (PI tray) ........................................................................................................ I-727
32.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-727
32.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-727
32.6 Paper feed pick-up volume adjustment (PI tray) ................................................................................................................ I-728
32.6.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-728
32.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-728

33.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-729
33.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-729
33.2 Folding skew adjustment .................................................................................................................................................... I-729
33.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-729
33.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-729
33.3 Second folding position stabilization adjustment ................................................................................................................ I-730
33.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-730
33.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-730
33.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-731
33.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-731
33.4.3 Adjustment Procedure/1 ............................................................................................................................................ I-731
33.4.4 Adjustment Procedure/2 ............................................................................................................................................ I-732
33.5 Stapler position adjustment ................................................................................................................................................ I-732
33.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-732
33.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-732
33.6 Tilt/gap adjustment of the clincher...................................................................................................................................... I-732
33.6.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-732
33.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-733
33.7 Trimming skew adjustment................................................................................................................................................. I-734
33.7.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-734
33.7.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-735
33.8 Trimming adjustment .......................................................................................................................................................... I-735
33.8.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-735
33.8.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-736

34.1 Front stopper position adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... I-737
34.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-737
34.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-737
34.2 1st folding skew adjustment ............................................................................................................................................... I-737
34.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-737
34.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-737
34.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-738
34.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-739
34.4 Front console open close caster height adjustment ........................................................................................................... I-741
34.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-741
34.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-741
34.5 Staple adjustment............................................................................................................................................................... I-741
34.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-741
xxxviii
34.5.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-741
34.6 Clincher position adjustment .............................................................................................................................................. I-751
34.6.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-751
34.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-752
34.7 Saddle stitching alignment plate/Md position adjustment................................................................................................... I-758
34.7.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-758
34.7.2 Prior check................................................................................................................................................................. I-758
34.7.3 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-761
34.8 Trimmer skew adjustment .................................................................................................................................................. I-763
34.8.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-763
34.8.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-763
35. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT CR-101...............................................................................................................I-766

35.1 Creaser unit skew adjustment ............................................................................................................................................ I-766
35.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-766
35.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-766
36. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT TU-503 ...............................................................................................................I-767

36.1 Slitter unit skew adjustment................................................................................................................................................ I-767
36.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-767
36.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-767
37. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PB-503 ...............................................................................................................I-768

37.1 Clamp sub scan direction alignment adjustment ................................................................................................................ I-768
37.1.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-768
37.1.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-768
37.2 Clamp main scan direction alignment adjustment .............................................................................................................. I-768
37.2.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-768
37.2.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-769
37.3 Pellet supply arm angle adjustment.................................................................................................................................... I-769
37.3.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-769
37.3.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-769
37.4 Glue apply roller gap adjustment........................................................................................................................................ I-770
37.4.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-770
37.4.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-771
37.5 Cover paper glue gap adjustment ...................................................................................................................................... I-771
37.5.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-771
37.5.2 Gap adjustment procedure in thin coat mode............................................................................................................ I-772
37.5.3 Gap adjustment procedure in thick coat mode .......................................................................................................... I-772
37.6 Glue tank movement rail tilt adjustment ............................................................................................................................. I-772
37.6.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-772
37.6.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-773
37.7 Cover paper folding plate nipping adjustment .................................................................................................................... I-773
37.7.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-773
37.7.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-774
37.8 Cover paper folding plate parallel adjustment .................................................................................................................... I-774
37.8.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-774
37.8.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-774
37.9 Cover paper table up down belt adjustment ....................................................................................................................... I-775
37.9.1 Usage ........................................................................................................................................................................ I-775
37.9.2 Check point................................................................................................................................................................ I-775
37.9.3 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. I-776
37.10 Cover paper alignment plate adjustment.......................................................................................................................... I-776
37.10.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-776
37.10.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-777
37.11 Cover paper cutting skew adjustment .............................................................................................................................. I-777
37.11.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-777
37.11.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-777
37.12 Cover paper table positioning........................................................................................................................................... I-778
37.12.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-778
37.12.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-778
37.13 Cover paper tray pick-up adjustment................................................................................................................................ I-779
37.13.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-779
37.13.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-779
37.14 Cover paper tray pick-up roller height adjustment............................................................................................................ I-780
37.14.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-780
37.14.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-781
37.15 Cover paper tray separation pressure adjustment ........................................................................................................... I-782
37.15.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-782
xxxix
37.15.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-783
37.16 Cover paper tray Centering Adjustment ........................................................................................................................... I-783
37.16.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-783
37.16.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-783
37.17 Cover paper tray lift plate horizontal adjustment .............................................................................................................. I-784
37.17.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-784
37.17.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-784
37.18 Height adjustment............................................................................................................................................................. I-786
37.18.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................................I-786
37.18.2 Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................I-787
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE ........................................................................................................ J-1

1. OUTLINE ...................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................... J-1
1.1.1 USB memory ISW .......................................................................................................................................................... J-1
1.1.2 Internet ISW.................................................................................................................................................................... J-1
1.2 Board to be rewritten and firmware.......................................................................................................................................... J-1
1.3 Firmware data flow .................................................................................................................................................................. J-1
1.4 Precautions on rewriting the firmware ..................................................................................................................................... J-2
1.4.1 ISW execution procedures ............................................................................................................................................. J-2
1.4.2 DIPSW on the board....................................................................................................................................................... J-2
1.4.3 Connect the short connector when the firmware is rewrote ........................................................................................... J-3
1.5 Error list ................................................................................................................................................................................... J-3
1.5.1 Main body error list ......................................................................................................................................................... J-3
1.5.2 Troubleshooting procedure for the main body error ....................................................................................................... J-3
1.5.3 Operation when firmware abnormality occurs ................................................................................................................ J-4
2. ISWTRNS_G .............................................................................................................................................................J-6
2.1 Specifications........................................................................................................................................................................... J-6
2.1.1 ISWTrns_G (PC software) .............................................................................................................................................. J-6
2.2 Installation of the ISWTrns_G.................................................................................................................................................. J-6
2.2.1 Procedure ....................................................................................................................................................................... J-6
2.3 Usage of the ISWTrns_G......................................................................................................................................................... J-7
2.3.1 Firmware checksum check ............................................................................................................................................. J-7
2.4 Error list ................................................................................................................................................................................... J-8
2.4.1 ISWTrns_G error list ....................................................................................................................................................... J-8
2.4.2 ISWTrns_G troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................................... J-8
3. USB MEMORY ISW ..................................................................................................................................................J-9

3.1 Usage of the USB memory ISW .............................................................................................................................................. J-9
3.1.1 Procedure ....................................................................................................................................................................... J-9
3.1.2 Checking the setting of the enhanced security mode................................................................................................... J-10
3.1.3 Procedure (ISW) ........................................................................................................................................................... J-10
3.1.4 Procedure (Package ISW)............................................................................................................................................ J-12
3.1.5 Main body error list ....................................................................................................................................................... J-13
3.2 ISW procedure for ADF and the scanner............................................................................................................................... J-13
3.2.1 Preparation ................................................................................................................................................................... J-13
3.2.2 Procedure for moving to the ISW rewriting screen ....................................................................................................... J-14
3.2.3 Procedure for rewriting the firmware ............................................................................................................................ J-15
3.3 ISW Procedure of GP-502 ..................................................................................................................................................... J-16
3.3.1 Preparation ................................................................................................................................................................... J-16
3.3.2 Procedure of rewriting M1 ............................................................................................................................................ J-17
4. INTERNET ISW .......................................................................................................................................................J-24

4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................................... J-24
4.2 Operating environment .......................................................................................................................................................... J-24
4.3 Usage precautions................................................................................................................................................................. J-24
4.3.1 Notice to administrator.................................................................................................................................................. J-24
4.3.2 Power cut during writing ............................................................................................................................................... J-24
4.4 Initial setting........................................................................................................................................................................... J-24
4.4.1 Setting from the operation panel .................................................................................................................................. J-24
4.4.2 Setting from the Web browser ...................................................................................................................................... J-24
4.5 Internet ISW using the Web Utilities ...................................................................................................................................... J-27
4.5.1 Procedure ..................................................................................................................................................................... J-27
4.6 Internet ISW using the operation panel ................................................................................................................................. J-28
4.6.1 Procedure ..................................................................................................................................................................... J-28
xl
4.7 Authentication of the proxy server in Internet ISW ................................................................................................................ J-31
4.7.1 Proxy server ................................................................................................................................................................. J-31
4.7.2 Authentication of the proxy server ................................................................................................................................ J-31
4.7.3 Authentication type of the proxy server and the command list ..................................................................................... J-31
4.7.4 Remark ......................................................................................................................................................................... J-32
K TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................................................K-1
1. JAM CODE LIST ......................................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1 Jam process ............................................................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1.2 Downstream paper exit function .....................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1.3 Pre-purge function ..........................................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1.4 Automatic purge function................................................................................................................................................K-2
1.2 Jam code list (1000 to 1700) ...................................................................................................................................................K-3
1.3 Jam code list (1701 to 2000) ...................................................................................................................................................K-8
1.4 Jam code list (2001 to 7000) .................................................................................................................................................K-12
1.5 Jam code list (7001 to 7300) .................................................................................................................................................K-16
1.6 Jam code list (7301 to 7500) .................................................................................................................................................K-21
1.7 Jam code list (7501 to 7600) .................................................................................................................................................K-25
1.8 Jam code list (7601 to 7800) .................................................................................................................................................K-29
1.9 Jam code list (7801 to 8000) .................................................................................................................................................K-33
1.10 Jam code list (8001 to 9999) ...............................................................................................................................................K-38
2. MALFUNCTION CODE ..........................................................................................................................................K-39

2.1 Trouble reset method.............................................................................................................................................................K-39
2.2 Function to detach defective sections....................................................................................................................................K-39
2.2.1 User operation ..............................................................................................................................................................K-39
2.2.2 DIPSW setting ..............................................................................................................................................................K-39
2.3 Usage of the tester in troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................K-39
2.3.1 Voltage measurement of the DC hot side.....................................................................................................................K-39
2.4 Solution 1 (C-0001_0300)......................................................................................................................................................K-39
2.4.1 C-0001..........................................................................................................................................................................K-39
2.4.2 C-0002..........................................................................................................................................................................K-40
2.4.3 C-0101..........................................................................................................................................................................K-40
2.4.4 C-0102..........................................................................................................................................................................K-40
2.4.5 C-0103..........................................................................................................................................................................K-41
2.4.6 C-0104..........................................................................................................................................................................K-41
2.4.7 C-0113..........................................................................................................................................................................K-42
2.4.8 C-0114..........................................................................................................................................................................K-42
2.4.9 C-0115..........................................................................................................................................................................K-43
2.4.10 C-0116........................................................................................................................................................................K-43
2.4.11 C-0117........................................................................................................................................................................K-43
2.4.12 C-0118........................................................................................................................................................................K-44
2.4.13 C-0119........................................................................................................................................................................K-44
2.4.14 C-0120........................................................................................................................................................................K-45
2.4.15 C-0121........................................................................................................................................................................K-45
2.4.16 C-0122........................................................................................................................................................................K-46
2.4.17 C-0123........................................................................................................................................................................K-46
2.4.18 C-0124........................................................................................................................................................................K-47
2.4.19 C-0125........................................................................................................................................................................K-47
2.4.20 C-0126........................................................................................................................................................................K-48
2.4.21 C-0127........................................................................................................................................................................K-48
2.4.22 C-0128........................................................................................................................................................................K-49
2.4.23 C-0129........................................................................................................................................................................K-49
2.4.24 C-0130........................................................................................................................................................................K-50
2.4.25 C-0136........................................................................................................................................................................K-50
2.4.26 C-0143........................................................................................................................................................................K-51
2.4.27 C-0154........................................................................................................................................................................K-51
2.4.28 C-0164........................................................................................................................................................................K-52
2.4.29 C-0165........................................................................................................................................................................K-52
2.4.30 C-0180........................................................................................................................................................................K-52
2.4.31 C-0181........................................................................................................................................................................K-53
2.4.32 C-0182........................................................................................................................................................................K-53
2.4.33 C-0183........................................................................................................................................................................K-54
2.4.34 C-0184........................................................................................................................................................................K-54
2.4.35 C-0201........................................................................................................................................................................K-55
2.4.36 C-0202........................................................................................................................................................................K-55
xli
2.4.37 C-0204........................................................................................................................................................................K-55
2.4.38 C-0205........................................................................................................................................................................K-56
2.4.39 C-0208........................................................................................................................................................................K-57
2.4.40 C-0209........................................................................................................................................................................K-57
2.4.41 C-0211........................................................................................................................................................................K-57
2.4.42 C-0212........................................................................................................................................................................K-58
2.4.43 C-0213........................................................................................................................................................................K-58
2.4.44 C-0215........................................................................................................................................................................K-59
2.4.45 C-0218........................................................................................................................................................................K-59
2.4.46 C-0221........................................................................................................................................................................K-60
2.4.47 C-0224........................................................................................................................................................................K-60
2.4.48 C-0227........................................................................................................................................................................K-61
2.4.49 C-0228........................................................................................................................................................................K-61
2.4.50 C-0229........................................................................................................................................................................K-62
2.4.51 C-0230........................................................................................................................................................................K-62
2.4.52 C-0231........................................................................................................................................................................K-63
2.4.53 C-0232........................................................................................................................................................................K-63
2.4.54 C-0233........................................................................................................................................................................K-64
2.4.55 C-0234........................................................................................................................................................................K-64
2.4.56 C-0235........................................................................................................................................................................K-64
2.4.57 C-0236........................................................................................................................................................................K-65
2.4.58 C-0237........................................................................................................................................................................K-65
2.5 Solution 2 (C-0301_0400)......................................................................................................................................................K-66
2.5.1 C-0301* ........................................................................................................................................................................K-66
2.5.2 C-0302* ........................................................................................................................................................................K-66
2.5.3 C-0303..........................................................................................................................................................................K-67
2.5.4 C-0304* ........................................................................................................................................................................K-67
2.5.5 C-0306..........................................................................................................................................................................K-67
2.5.6 C-0307..........................................................................................................................................................................K-68
2.5.7 C-0308..........................................................................................................................................................................K-68
2.5.8 C-0309..........................................................................................................................................................................K-68
2.5.9 C-0310..........................................................................................................................................................................K-69
2.5.10 C-0311........................................................................................................................................................................K-69
2.5.11 C-0312........................................................................................................................................................................K-69
2.5.12 C-0313........................................................................................................................................................................K-70
2.5.13 C-0314........................................................................................................................................................................K-70
2.5.14 C-0315........................................................................................................................................................................K-70
2.5.15 C-0316........................................................................................................................................................................K-70
2.5.16 C-0317........................................................................................................................................................................K-71
2.5.17 C-0318........................................................................................................................................................................K-71
2.5.18 C-0320 (LU-202m, LU-202XL) ................................................................................................................................... K-71
2.5.19 C-0320 (LU-202XLm) ................................................................................................................................................. K-72
2.5.20 C-0321 (LU-202m, LU-202XL) ................................................................................................................................... K-72
2.5.21 C-0321 (LU-202XLm) ................................................................................................................................................. K-73
2.5.22 C-0322........................................................................................................................................................................K-73
2.5.23 C-0323* ......................................................................................................................................................................K-73
2.5.24 C-0324* ......................................................................................................................................................................K-74
2.5.25 C-0325........................................................................................................................................................................K-74
2.5.26 C-0326........................................................................................................................................................................K-74
2.5.27 C-0327........................................................................................................................................................................K-75
2.5.28 C-0328........................................................................................................................................................................K-75
2.5.29 C-0329........................................................................................................................................................................K-75
2.5.30 C-0330........................................................................................................................................................................K-76
2.5.31 C-0331........................................................................................................................................................................K-76
2.5.32 C-0332........................................................................................................................................................................K-76
2.5.33 C-0333........................................................................................................................................................................K-76
2.5.34 C-0334........................................................................................................................................................................K-77
2.5.35 C-0335........................................................................................................................................................................K-77
2.5.36 C-0336........................................................................................................................................................................K-77
2.5.37 C-0337........................................................................................................................................................................K-78
2.5.38 C-0338........................................................................................................................................................................K-78
2.5.39 C-0339........................................................................................................................................................................K-78
2.5.40 C-0340........................................................................................................................................................................K-79
2.5.41 C-0341........................................................................................................................................................................K-79
2.5.42 C-0342........................................................................................................................................................................K-80
2.5.43 C-0343........................................................................................................................................................................K-80
2.5.44 C-0344........................................................................................................................................................................K-81
2.5.45 C-0345........................................................................................................................................................................K-81
xlii
2.5.46 C-0346........................................................................................................................................................................K-81
2.5.47 C-0347........................................................................................................................................................................K-82
2.5.48 C-0348........................................................................................................................................................................K-82
2.5.49 C-0349........................................................................................................................................................................K-83
2.5.50 C-0350........................................................................................................................................................................K-83
2.5.51 C-0351........................................................................................................................................................................K-84
2.5.52 C-0352........................................................................................................................................................................K-84
2.5.53 C-0353........................................................................................................................................................................K-85
2.5.54 C-0354........................................................................................................................................................................K-85
2.5.55 C-0355........................................................................................................................................................................K-86
2.5.56 C-0356........................................................................................................................................................................K-86
2.5.57 C-0357........................................................................................................................................................................K-86
2.5.58 C-0358........................................................................................................................................................................K-87
2.5.59 C-0359........................................................................................................................................................................K-87
2.5.60 C-0360........................................................................................................................................................................K-88
2.5.61 C-0361........................................................................................................................................................................K-88
2.5.62 C-0362........................................................................................................................................................................K-89
2.5.63 C-0363........................................................................................................................................................................K-89
2.5.64 C-0364........................................................................................................................................................................K-90
2.5.65 C-0365........................................................................................................................................................................K-90
2.5.66 C-0366........................................................................................................................................................................K-91
2.5.67 C-0367........................................................................................................................................................................K-91
2.5.68 C-0368........................................................................................................................................................................K-91
2.5.69 C-0369........................................................................................................................................................................K-92
2.5.70 C-0370........................................................................................................................................................................K-92
2.5.71 C-0371........................................................................................................................................................................K-93
2.5.72 C-0372........................................................................................................................................................................K-93
2.5.73 C-0373* ......................................................................................................................................................................K-94
2.5.74 C-0374* ......................................................................................................................................................................K-94
2.5.75 C-0375* ......................................................................................................................................................................K-94
2.5.76 C-0376* ......................................................................................................................................................................K-95
2.5.77 C-0377........................................................................................................................................................................K-95
2.5.78 C-0378........................................................................................................................................................................K-95
2.6 Solution 3 (C-0401_0500)......................................................................................................................................................K-96
2.6.1 C-0401..........................................................................................................................................................................K-96
2.6.2 C-0402..........................................................................................................................................................................K-96
2.6.3 C-0403..........................................................................................................................................................................K-97
2.6.4 C-0404..........................................................................................................................................................................K-97
2.6.5 C-0405..........................................................................................................................................................................K-97
2.6.6 C-0406..........................................................................................................................................................................K-98
2.6.7 C-0407..........................................................................................................................................................................K-98
2.6.8 C-0408..........................................................................................................................................................................K-99
2.6.9 C-0409..........................................................................................................................................................................K-99
2.6.10 C-0410........................................................................................................................................................................K-99
2.6.11 C-0411......................................................................................................................................................................K-100
2.6.12 C-0412......................................................................................................................................................................K-100
2.6.13 C-0413......................................................................................................................................................................K-101
2.6.14 C-0414......................................................................................................................................................................K-101
2.6.15 C-0415 (LU-202m, LU-202XL) ................................................................................................................................. K-102
2.6.16 C-0415 (LU-202XLm) ............................................................................................................................................... K-102
2.6.17 C-0416 (LU-202m, LU-202XL) ................................................................................................................................. K-103
2.6.18 C-0416 (LU-202XLm) ............................................................................................................................................... K-103
2.6.19 C-0417 (LU-202m, LU-202XL) ................................................................................................................................. K-104
2.6.20 C-0417 (LU-202XLm) ............................................................................................................................................... K-105
2.6.21 C-0418 (LU-202m, LU-202XL) ................................................................................................................................. K-105
2.6.22 C-0418 (LU-202XLm) ............................................................................................................................................... K-105
2.6.23 C-0419......................................................................................................................................................................K-106
2.6.24 C-0420......................................................................................................................................................................K-106
2.6.25 C-0421......................................................................................................................................................................K-107
2.6.26 C-0422......................................................................................................................................................................K-107
2.6.27 C-0423......................................................................................................................................................................K-107
2.6.28 C-0424......................................................................................................................................................................K-108
2.6.29 C-0425......................................................................................................................................................................K-108
2.6.30 C-0426......................................................................................................................................................................K-108
2.6.31 C-0427......................................................................................................................................................................K-108
2.6.32 C-0428......................................................................................................................................................................K-109
2.6.33 C-0429......................................................................................................................................................................K-109
2.6.34 C-0430......................................................................................................................................................................K-109
xliii
2.6.35 C-0431......................................................................................................................................................................K-110
2.6.36 C-0432......................................................................................................................................................................K-110
2.6.37 C-0433......................................................................................................................................................................K-110
2.6.38 C-0434......................................................................................................................................................................K-111
2.6.39 C-0435......................................................................................................................................................................K-111
2.6.40 C-0436......................................................................................................................................................................K-111
2.6.41 C-0437......................................................................................................................................................................K-111
2.6.42 C-0438......................................................................................................................................................................K-112
2.6.43 C-0439......................................................................................................................................................................K-112
2.6.44 C-0440......................................................................................................................................................................K-112
2.6.45 C-0441......................................................................................................................................................................K-113
2.6.46 C-0452......................................................................................................................................................................K-113
2.6.47 C-0453......................................................................................................................................................................K-113
2.7 Solution 4 (C-1001_1126)....................................................................................................................................................K-114
2.7.1 C-1005........................................................................................................................................................................K-114
2.7.2 C-1006........................................................................................................................................................................K-114
2.7.3 C-1007........................................................................................................................................................................K-114
2.7.4 C-1007........................................................................................................................................................................K-115
2.7.5 C-1009........................................................................................................................................................................K-115
2.7.6 C-1010........................................................................................................................................................................K-115
2.7.7 C-1011........................................................................................................................................................................K-116
2.7.8 C-1012........................................................................................................................................................................K-116
2.7.9 C-1014........................................................................................................................................................................K-116
2.7.10 C-1015......................................................................................................................................................................K-117
2.7.11 C-1016......................................................................................................................................................................K-117
2.7.12 C-1018......................................................................................................................................................................K-117
2.7.13 C-1019......................................................................................................................................................................K-117
2.7.14 C-1021......................................................................................................................................................................K-118
2.7.15 C-1022......................................................................................................................................................................K-118
2.7.16 C-1101 (FS-531/612)................................................................................................................................................ K-118
2.7.17 C-1102 (FS-531/612)................................................................................................................................................ K-119
2.7.18 C-1102 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-119
2.7.19 C-1102 (OT-510) ......................................................................................................................................................K-120
2.7.20 C-1103 (FS-531/612)................................................................................................................................................ K-120
2.7.21 C-1103 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-121
2.7.22 C-1104 (FS-531/612)................................................................................................................................................ K-121
2.7.23 C-1105 (FS-531/612)................................................................................................................................................ K-121
2.7.24 C-1105 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-122
2.7.25 C-1105 (OT-510) ......................................................................................................................................................K-122
2.7.26 C-1106 (FS-531/612)................................................................................................................................................ K-123
2.7.27 C-1106 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-123
2.7.28 C-1107 (FS-612).......................................................................................................................................................K-124
2.7.29 C-1108 (FS-612).......................................................................................................................................................K-124
2.7.30 C-1109 (FS-531/612)................................................................................................................................................ K-125
2.7.31 C-1109 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-125
2.7.32 C-1110 (FS-531/612)................................................................................................................................................ K-125
2.7.33 C-1111 (FS-612).......................................................................................................................................................K-126
2.7.34 C-1112 (FS-612).......................................................................................................................................................K-126
2.7.35 C-1113 (FS-612).......................................................................................................................................................K-126
2.7.36 C-1113 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-127
2.7.37 C-1114 (FS-612).......................................................................................................................................................K-127
2.7.38 C-1114 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.7.39 C-1115 (FS-612).......................................................................................................................................................K-128
2.7.40 C-1115......................................................................................................................................................................K-129
2.7.41 C-1116 (FS-612).......................................................................................................................................................K-129
2.7.42 C-1124......................................................................................................................................................................K-129
2.7.43 C-1125......................................................................................................................................................................K-130
2.7.44 C-1126......................................................................................................................................................................K-130
2.8 Solution 5 (C-1127_1230)....................................................................................................................................................K-131
2.8.1 C-1127 (PK-512/513) .................................................................................................................................................K-131
2.8.2 C-1127 (PK-522) ........................................................................................................................................................K-131
2.8.3 C-1132 (PK-512/513) .................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.8.4 C-1132 (PK-522) ........................................................................................................................................................K-132
2.8.5 C-1137 (FS-531/612)..................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.8.6 C-1137 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-133
2.8.7 C-1141 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-134
2.8.8 C-1144 (FS-532).........................................................................................................................................................K-134
2.8.9 C-1144 (OT-510) ........................................................................................................................................................K-134
xliv
2.8.10 C-1147 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.8.11 C-1147 (OT-510) ......................................................................................................................................................K-135
2.8.12 C-1153 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.8.13 C-1153 (OT-510) ......................................................................................................................................................K-136
2.8.14 C-1154 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-137
2.8.15 C-1154 (OT-510) ......................................................................................................................................................K-137
2.8.16 C-1155 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.8.17 C-1155 (OT-510) ......................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.8.18 C-1156 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-138
2.8.19 C-1157 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-139
2.8.20 C-1158 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-139
2.8.21 C-1159 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.8.22 C-1170 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-140
2.8.23 C-1170 (OT-510) ......................................................................................................................................................K-141
2.8.24 C-1171 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-141
2.8.25 C-1172 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.8.26 C-1173......................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.8.27 C-1174......................................................................................................................................................................K-142
2.8.28 C-1175......................................................................................................................................................................K-143
2.8.29 C-1176......................................................................................................................................................................K-143
2.8.30 C-1177......................................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.8.31 C-1179 (FS-532).......................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.8.32 C-1179 (OT-510) ......................................................................................................................................................K-144
2.8.33 C-1180......................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.8.34 C-1181......................................................................................................................................................................K-145
2.8.35 C-1201......................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.8.36 C-1202......................................................................................................................................................................K-146
2.8.37 C-1203......................................................................................................................................................................K-147
2.8.38 C-1204......................................................................................................................................................................K-147
2.8.39 C-1205......................................................................................................................................................................K-147
2.8.40 C-1206......................................................................................................................................................................K-148
2.8.41 C-1211......................................................................................................................................................................K-148
2.8.42 C-1212......................................................................................................................................................................K-149
2.8.43 C-1213......................................................................................................................................................................K-149
2.8.44 C-1214......................................................................................................................................................................K-150
2.8.45 C-1215......................................................................................................................................................................K-150
2.8.46 C-1216......................................................................................................................................................................K-151
2.8.47 C-1221......................................................................................................................................................................K-151
2.8.48 C-1222......................................................................................................................................................................K-151
2.8.49 C-1223......................................................................................................................................................................K-152
2.8.50 C-1224......................................................................................................................................................................K-152
2.8.51 C-1225......................................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.8.52 C-1226......................................................................................................................................................................K-153
2.8.53 C-1227......................................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.8.54 C-1228......................................................................................................................................................................K-154
2.8.55 C-1229......................................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.8.56 C-1230......................................................................................................................................................................K-155
2.9 Solution 6 (C-1231_1270)....................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.9.1 C-1231........................................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.9.2 C-1232........................................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.9.3 C-1233........................................................................................................................................................................K-156
2.9.4 C-1234........................................................................................................................................................................K-157
2.9.5 C-1235........................................................................................................................................................................K-157
2.9.6 C-1241........................................................................................................................................................................K-158
2.9.7 C-1242........................................................................................................................................................................K-158
2.9.8 C-1242........................................................................................................................................................................K-159
2.9.9 C-1243........................................................................................................................................................................K-159
2.9.10 C-1243......................................................................................................................................................................K-160
2.9.11 C-1244......................................................................................................................................................................K-160
2.9.12 C-1244......................................................................................................................................................................K-161
2.9.13 C-1245......................................................................................................................................................................K-161
2.9.14 C-1245......................................................................................................................................................................K-162
2.9.15 C-1246......................................................................................................................................................................K-162
2.9.16 C-1246......................................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.9.17 C-1247......................................................................................................................................................................K-163
2.9.18 C-1247......................................................................................................................................................................K-164
2.9.19 C-1248......................................................................................................................................................................K-164
2.9.20 C-1248......................................................................................................................................................................K-165
xlv
2.9.21 C-1249......................................................................................................................................................................K-165
2.9.22 C-1249......................................................................................................................................................................K-166
2.9.23 C-1250......................................................................................................................................................................K-167
2.9.24 C-1250......................................................................................................................................................................K-167
2.9.25 C-1251......................................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.9.26 C-1251......................................................................................................................................................................K-168
2.9.27 C-1252......................................................................................................................................................................K-169
2.9.28 C-1252......................................................................................................................................................................K-169
2.9.29 C-1253......................................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.9.30 C-1253......................................................................................................................................................................K-170
2.9.31 C-1254......................................................................................................................................................................K-171
2.9.32 C-1254......................................................................................................................................................................K-171
2.9.33 C-1255......................................................................................................................................................................K-172
2.9.34 C-1256......................................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.9.35 C-1256......................................................................................................................................................................K-173
2.9.36 C-1257......................................................................................................................................................................K-174
2.9.37 C-1258......................................................................................................................................................................K-174
2.9.38 C-1258......................................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.9.39 C-1259......................................................................................................................................................................K-175
2.9.40 C-1259......................................................................................................................................................................K-176
2.9.41 C-1260......................................................................................................................................................................K-176
2.9.42 C-1260......................................................................................................................................................................K-177
2.9.43 C-1261......................................................................................................................................................................K-177
2.9.44 C-1261......................................................................................................................................................................K-178
2.9.45 C-1262......................................................................................................................................................................K-178
2.9.46 C-1262......................................................................................................................................................................K-179
2.9.47 C-1263......................................................................................................................................................................K-179
2.9.48 C-1263......................................................................................................................................................................K-179
2.9.49 C-1264......................................................................................................................................................................K-180
2.9.50 C-1264......................................................................................................................................................................K-181
2.9.51 C-1265......................................................................................................................................................................K-181
2.9.52 C-1265......................................................................................................................................................................K-182
2.9.53 C-1266......................................................................................................................................................................K-182
2.9.54 C-1266......................................................................................................................................................................K-182
2.9.55 C-1267......................................................................................................................................................................K-183
2.9.56 C-1267......................................................................................................................................................................K-183
2.9.57 C-1268......................................................................................................................................................................K-184
2.9.58 C-1268......................................................................................................................................................................K-184
2.9.59 C-1269......................................................................................................................................................................K-185
2.9.60 C-1269......................................................................................................................................................................K-185
2.9.61 C-1270......................................................................................................................................................................K-186
2.9.62 C-1270......................................................................................................................................................................K-186
2.10 Solution 7 (C-1271_1400) .................................................................................................................................................K-187
2.10.1 C-1271......................................................................................................................................................................K-187
2.10.2 C-1271......................................................................................................................................................................K-187
2.10.3 C-1272......................................................................................................................................................................K-188
2.10.4 C-1272......................................................................................................................................................................K-188
2.10.5 C-1273......................................................................................................................................................................K-189
2.10.6 C-1273......................................................................................................................................................................K-189
2.10.7 C-1274......................................................................................................................................................................K-190
2.10.8 C-1275......................................................................................................................................................................K-190
2.10.9 C-1275......................................................................................................................................................................K-191
2.10.10 C-1276.................................................................................................................................................................... K-191
2.10.11 C-1277.................................................................................................................................................................... K-192
2.10.12 C-1278.................................................................................................................................................................... K-192
2.10.13 C-1279.................................................................................................................................................................... K-193
2.10.14 C-1280.................................................................................................................................................................... K-193
2.10.15 C-1281.................................................................................................................................................................... K-194
2.10.16 C-1282.................................................................................................................................................................... K-194
2.10.17 C-1302.................................................................................................................................................................... K-195
2.10.18 C-1303.................................................................................................................................................................... K-195
2.10.19 C-1304.................................................................................................................................................................... K-195
2.10.20 C-1305.................................................................................................................................................................... K-195
2.10.21 C-1307.................................................................................................................................................................... K-196
2.10.22 C-1308.................................................................................................................................................................... K-196
2.10.23 C-1309.................................................................................................................................................................... K-196
2.10.24 C-1310.................................................................................................................................................................... K-197
2.10.25 C-1311.................................................................................................................................................................... K-197
xlvi
2.10.26 C-1312.................................................................................................................................................................... K-197
2.10.27 C-1313.................................................................................................................................................................... K-198
2.10.28 C-1330.................................................................................................................................................................... K-198
2.10.29 C-1331.................................................................................................................................................................... K-199
2.10.30 C-1332.................................................................................................................................................................... K-199
2.10.31 C-1333.................................................................................................................................................................... K-200
2.10.32 C-1334.................................................................................................................................................................... K-200
2.10.33 C-1341.................................................................................................................................................................... K-200
2.10.34 C-1342.................................................................................................................................................................... K-201
2.11 Solution 8 (C-1401_1500) .................................................................................................................................................K-201
2.11.1 C-1402......................................................................................................................................................................K-201
2.11.2 C-1403......................................................................................................................................................................K-201
2.11.3 C-1404......................................................................................................................................................................K-202
2.11.4 C-1404......................................................................................................................................................................K-202
2.11.5 C-1406......................................................................................................................................................................K-202
2.11.6 C-1408......................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.11.7 C-1409......................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.11.8 C-1411......................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.11.9 C-1412......................................................................................................................................................................K-203
2.11.10 C-1413.................................................................................................................................................................... K-204
2.11.11 C-1431.................................................................................................................................................................... K-204
2.11.12 C-1432.................................................................................................................................................................... K-205
2.11.13 C-1433.................................................................................................................................................................... K-205
2.11.14 C-1433.................................................................................................................................................................... K-205
2.11.15 C-1435.................................................................................................................................................................... K-205
2.11.16 C-1436.................................................................................................................................................................... K-206
2.11.17 C-1437.................................................................................................................................................................... K-206
2.11.18 C-1439.................................................................................................................................................................... K-206
2.11.19 C-1442.................................................................................................................................................................... K-207
2.11.20 C-1443.................................................................................................................................................................... K-207
2.11.21 C-1444.................................................................................................................................................................... K-207
2.11.22 C-1451.................................................................................................................................................................... K-208
2.11.23 C-1452.................................................................................................................................................................... K-208
2.11.24 C-1454.................................................................................................................................................................... K-208
2.11.25 C-1456.................................................................................................................................................................... K-208
2.11.26 C-1457.................................................................................................................................................................... K-209
2.11.27 C-1458.................................................................................................................................................................... K-209
2.11.28 C-1480.................................................................................................................................................................... K-209
2.11.29 C-1499.................................................................................................................................................................... K-210
2.12 Solution 9 (C-1501_1539) .................................................................................................................................................K-210
2.12.1 C-1501......................................................................................................................................................................K-210
2.12.2 C-1502......................................................................................................................................................................K-210
2.12.3 C-1504......................................................................................................................................................................K-211
2.12.4 C-1505......................................................................................................................................................................K-211
2.12.5 C-1506......................................................................................................................................................................K-212
2.12.6 C-1507......................................................................................................................................................................K-212
2.12.7 C-1508......................................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.12.8 C-1509......................................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.12.9 C-1510......................................................................................................................................................................K-213
2.12.10 C-1511.................................................................................................................................................................... K-214
2.12.11 C-1512.................................................................................................................................................................... K-214
2.12.12 C-1513.................................................................................................................................................................... K-215
2.12.13 C-1514.................................................................................................................................................................... K-215
2.12.14 C-1515.................................................................................................................................................................... K-216
2.12.15 C-1516.................................................................................................................................................................... K-216
2.12.16 C-1517.................................................................................................................................................................... K-217
2.12.17 C-1518.................................................................................................................................................................... K-217
2.12.18 C-1519.................................................................................................................................................................... K-218
2.12.19 C-1520.................................................................................................................................................................... K-218
2.12.20 C-1521.................................................................................................................................................................... K-218
2.12.21 C-1522.................................................................................................................................................................... K-219
2.12.22 C-1523.................................................................................................................................................................... K-219
2.12.23 C-1524.................................................................................................................................................................... K-220
2.12.24 C-1525.................................................................................................................................................................... K-220
2.12.25 C-1526.................................................................................................................................................................... K-221
2.12.26 C-1527.................................................................................................................................................................... K-221
2.12.27 C-1528.................................................................................................................................................................... K-222
2.12.28 C-1530.................................................................................................................................................................... K-222
xlvii
2.12.29 C-1531.................................................................................................................................................................... K-223
2.12.30 C-1532.................................................................................................................................................................... K-223
2.12.31 C-1534.................................................................................................................................................................... K-224
2.12.32 C-1537.................................................................................................................................................................... K-224
2.12.33 C-1538.................................................................................................................................................................... K-224
2.13 Solution 10 (C-1540_1931) ...............................................................................................................................................K-225
2.13.1 C-1540......................................................................................................................................................................K-225
2.13.2 C-1541......................................................................................................................................................................K-226
2.13.3 C-1542......................................................................................................................................................................K-226
2.13.4 C-1543......................................................................................................................................................................K-227
2.13.5 C-1544......................................................................................................................................................................K-228
2.13.6 C-1545......................................................................................................................................................................K-228
2.13.7 C-1546......................................................................................................................................................................K-229
2.13.8 C-1547......................................................................................................................................................................K-230
2.13.9 C-1548......................................................................................................................................................................K-230
2.13.10 C-1549.................................................................................................................................................................... K-231
2.13.11 C-1550.................................................................................................................................................................... K-232
2.13.12 C-1551.................................................................................................................................................................... K-232
2.13.13 C-1552.................................................................................................................................................................... K-233
2.13.14 C-1553.................................................................................................................................................................... K-234
2.13.15 C-1554.................................................................................................................................................................... K-234
2.13.16 C-1555.................................................................................................................................................................... K-235
2.13.17 C-1556.................................................................................................................................................................... K-236
2.13.18 C-1557.................................................................................................................................................................... K-236
2.13.19 C-1558.................................................................................................................................................................... K-237
2.13.20 C-1559.................................................................................................................................................................... K-238
2.13.21 C-1560.................................................................................................................................................................... K-238
2.13.22 C-1561.................................................................................................................................................................... K-239
2.13.23 C-1562.................................................................................................................................................................... K-240
2.13.24 C-1565.................................................................................................................................................................... K-240
2.13.25 C-1566.................................................................................................................................................................... K-241
2.13.26 C-1567.................................................................................................................................................................... K-241
2.13.27 C-1620.................................................................................................................................................................... K-241
2.13.28 C-1621.................................................................................................................................................................... K-242
2.13.29 C-1622.................................................................................................................................................................... K-242
2.13.30 C-1623.................................................................................................................................................................... K-243
2.13.31 C-1625.................................................................................................................................................................... K-243
2.13.32 C-1626.................................................................................................................................................................... K-244
2.13.33 C-1627.................................................................................................................................................................... K-244
2.13.34 C-1628.................................................................................................................................................................... K-245
2.13.35 C-1629.................................................................................................................................................................... K-245
2.13.36 C-1630.................................................................................................................................................................... K-246
2.13.37 C-1632.................................................................................................................................................................... K-246
2.13.38 C-1633.................................................................................................................................................................... K-247
2.13.39 C-1701.................................................................................................................................................................... K-247
2.13.40 C-1702.................................................................................................................................................................... K-247
2.13.41 C-1703.................................................................................................................................................................... K-248
2.13.42 C-1704.................................................................................................................................................................... K-248
2.13.43 C-1705.................................................................................................................................................................... K-249
2.13.44 C-1706.................................................................................................................................................................... K-249
2.13.45 C-1707.................................................................................................................................................................... K-249
2.13.46 C-1708.................................................................................................................................................................... K-250
2.13.47 C-1709.................................................................................................................................................................... K-250
2.13.48 C-1710.................................................................................................................................................................... K-251
2.13.49 C-1711.................................................................................................................................................................... K-251
2.13.50 C-1713.................................................................................................................................................................... K-251
2.13.51 C-1714.................................................................................................................................................................... K-252
2.13.52 C-1715.................................................................................................................................................................... K-252
2.13.53 C-1716.................................................................................................................................................................... K-252
2.13.54 C-1717.................................................................................................................................................................... K-253
2.13.55 C-1718.................................................................................................................................................................... K-253
2.13.56 C-1719.................................................................................................................................................................... K-253
2.13.57 C-1720.................................................................................................................................................................... K-254
2.13.58 C-1721.................................................................................................................................................................... K-254
2.13.59 C-1722.................................................................................................................................................................... K-254
2.13.60 C-1723.................................................................................................................................................................... K-255
2.13.61 C-1724.................................................................................................................................................................... K-255
2.13.62 C-1725.................................................................................................................................................................... K-255
xlviii
2.13.63 C-1726.................................................................................................................................................................... K-256
2.13.64 C-1727.................................................................................................................................................................... K-256
2.13.65 C-1728.................................................................................................................................................................... K-256
2.13.66 C-1729.................................................................................................................................................................... K-257
2.13.67 C-1730.................................................................................................................................................................... K-257
2.13.68 C-1731.................................................................................................................................................................... K-257
2.13.69 C-1732.................................................................................................................................................................... K-258
2.13.70 C-1733.................................................................................................................................................................... K-258
2.13.71 C-1734.................................................................................................................................................................... K-258
2.13.72 C-1735.................................................................................................................................................................... K-259
2.13.73 C-1736.................................................................................................................................................................... K-259
2.13.74 C-1737.................................................................................................................................................................... K-260
2.13.75 C-1738.................................................................................................................................................................... K-260
2.13.76 C-1739.................................................................................................................................................................... K-260
2.13.77 C-1740.................................................................................................................................................................... K-261
2.13.78 C-1741.................................................................................................................................................................... K-261
2.13.79 C-1742.................................................................................................................................................................... K-262
2.13.80 C-1743.................................................................................................................................................................... K-262
2.13.81 C-1744.................................................................................................................................................................... K-263
2.13.82 C-1745.................................................................................................................................................................... K-263
2.13.83 C-1746.................................................................................................................................................................... K-263
2.13.84 C-1747.................................................................................................................................................................... K-264
2.13.85 C-1748.................................................................................................................................................................... K-264
2.13.86 C-1749.................................................................................................................................................................... K-265
2.13.87 C-1750.................................................................................................................................................................... K-265
2.13.88 C-1751.................................................................................................................................................................... K-265
2.13.89 C-1752.................................................................................................................................................................... K-266
2.13.90 C-1753.................................................................................................................................................................... K-266
2.13.91 C-1754.................................................................................................................................................................... K-266
2.13.92 C-1755.................................................................................................................................................................... K-267
2.13.93 C-1756.................................................................................................................................................................... K-267
2.13.94 C-1757.................................................................................................................................................................... K-267
2.13.95 C-1758.................................................................................................................................................................... K-268
2.13.96 C-1771.................................................................................................................................................................... K-268
2.13.97 C-1772.................................................................................................................................................................... K-269
2.13.98 C-1773.................................................................................................................................................................... K-269
2.13.99 C-1774.................................................................................................................................................................... K-269
2.13.100C-1775.................................................................................................................................................................... K-270
2.13.101C-1776.................................................................................................................................................................... K-270
2.13.102C-1779.................................................................................................................................................................... K-271
2.13.103C-1780.................................................................................................................................................................... K-271
2.13.104C-1781.................................................................................................................................................................... K-271
2.13.105C-1783.................................................................................................................................................................... K-272
2.13.106C-1784.................................................................................................................................................................... K-272
2.13.107C-1785.................................................................................................................................................................... K-272
2.13.108C-1786.................................................................................................................................................................... K-273
2.13.109C-1787.................................................................................................................................................................... K-273
2.13.110C-1791.................................................................................................................................................................... K-273
2.13.111C-1792.................................................................................................................................................................... K-274
2.13.112C-1793.................................................................................................................................................................... K-274
2.13.113C-1794.................................................................................................................................................................... K-274
2.13.114C-1795.................................................................................................................................................................... K-275
2.13.115C-1796.................................................................................................................................................................... K-275
2.13.116C-1797.................................................................................................................................................................... K-275
2.13.117C-1798.................................................................................................................................................................... K-276
2.13.118C-1799.................................................................................................................................................................... K-276
2.13.119C-1800.................................................................................................................................................................... K-276
2.13.120C-1801.................................................................................................................................................................... K-277
2.13.121C-1802.................................................................................................................................................................... K-277
2.13.122C-1803.................................................................................................................................................................... K-277
2.13.123C-1819.................................................................................................................................................................... K-278
2.13.124C-1820.................................................................................................................................................................... K-278
2.13.125C-1821.................................................................................................................................................................... K-278
2.13.126C-1825.................................................................................................................................................................... K-279
2.13.127C-1826.................................................................................................................................................................... K-279
2.13.128C-1827.................................................................................................................................................................... K-279
2.13.129C-1831.................................................................................................................................................................... K-280
2.13.130C-1832.................................................................................................................................................................... K-280
xlix
2.13.131C-1833.................................................................................................................................................................... K-281
2.13.132C-1834.................................................................................................................................................................... K-281
2.13.133C-1835.................................................................................................................................................................... K-281
2.13.134C-1836.................................................................................................................................................................... K-282
2.13.135C-1837.................................................................................................................................................................... K-282
2.13.136C-1838.................................................................................................................................................................... K-282
2.13.137C-1839.................................................................................................................................................................... K-283
2.13.138C-1901.................................................................................................................................................................... K-283
2.13.139C-1902.................................................................................................................................................................... K-284
2.13.140C-1903.................................................................................................................................................................... K-284
2.13.141C-1904.................................................................................................................................................................... K-284
2.13.142C-1906.................................................................................................................................................................... K-285
2.13.143C-1907.................................................................................................................................................................... K-285
2.13.144C-1908.................................................................................................................................................................... K-286
2.13.145C-1909.................................................................................................................................................................... K-286
2.13.146C-1910.................................................................................................................................................................... K-286
2.13.147C-1911.................................................................................................................................................................... K-287
2.13.148C-1912.................................................................................................................................................................... K-287
2.13.149C-1916.................................................................................................................................................................... K-288
2.13.150C-1930.................................................................................................................................................................... K-288
2.13.151C-1931.................................................................................................................................................................... K-288
2.14 Solution 11 (C-2001_2400) ...............................................................................................................................................K-289
2.14.1 C-2001......................................................................................................................................................................K-289
2.14.2 C-2004......................................................................................................................................................................K-289
2.14.3 C-2005......................................................................................................................................................................K-289
2.14.4 C-2201......................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.14.5 C-2202......................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.14.6 C-2203......................................................................................................................................................................K-290
2.14.7 C-2204......................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.14.8 C-2211......................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.14.9 C-2212......................................................................................................................................................................K-291
2.14.10 C-2213.................................................................................................................................................................... K-292
2.14.11 C-2214.................................................................................................................................................................... K-292
2.14.12 C-2220.................................................................................................................................................................... K-293
2.14.13 C-2221.................................................................................................................................................................... K-293
2.14.14 C-2222.................................................................................................................................................................... K-294
2.14.15 C-2223.................................................................................................................................................................... K-294
2.14.16 C-2224.................................................................................................................................................................... K-294
2.14.17 C-2225.................................................................................................................................................................... K-295
2.14.18 C-2251.................................................................................................................................................................... K-295
2.14.19 C-2252.................................................................................................................................................................... K-295
2.14.20 C-2253.................................................................................................................................................................... K-296
2.14.21 C-2254.................................................................................................................................................................... K-296
2.14.22 C-2302* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-296
2.14.23 C-2303* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-297
2.14.24 C-2304* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-297
2.14.25 C-2305* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-297
2.14.26 C-2306* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-298
2.14.27 C-2307* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-298
2.15 Solution 12 (C-2401_2500) ...............................................................................................................................................K-298
2.15.1 C-2401......................................................................................................................................................................K-298
2.15.2 C-2402......................................................................................................................................................................K-299
2.15.3 C-2403......................................................................................................................................................................K-299
2.15.4 C-2404......................................................................................................................................................................K-299
2.15.5 C-2431......................................................................................................................................................................K-300
2.15.6 C-2432......................................................................................................................................................................K-300
2.15.7 C-2433......................................................................................................................................................................K-300
2.15.8 C-2434......................................................................................................................................................................K-301
2.15.9 C-2441......................................................................................................................................................................K-301
2.15.10 C-2442.................................................................................................................................................................... K-302
2.15.11 C-2443.................................................................................................................................................................... K-302
2.15.12 C-2444.................................................................................................................................................................... K-302
2.15.13 C-2451.................................................................................................................................................................... K-303
2.15.14 C-2452.................................................................................................................................................................... K-303
2.15.15 C-2453.................................................................................................................................................................... K-304
2.15.16 C-2454.................................................................................................................................................................... K-304
2.15.17 C-2455.................................................................................................................................................................... K-304
2.15.18 C-2456.................................................................................................................................................................... K-305
l
2.15.19 C-2457.................................................................................................................................................................... K-305
2.15.20 C-2458.................................................................................................................................................................... K-306
2.15.21 C-2470.................................................................................................................................................................... K-306
2.15.22 C-2471.................................................................................................................................................................... K-306
2.16 Solution 13 (C-2701_2800) ...............................................................................................................................................K-307
2.16.1 C-2701......................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.16.2 C-2702......................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.16.3 C-2703......................................................................................................................................................................K-307
2.16.4 C-2704......................................................................................................................................................................K-308
2.16.5 C-2711......................................................................................................................................................................K-308
2.16.6 C-2712......................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.16.7 C-2713......................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.16.8 C-2714......................................................................................................................................................................K-309
2.16.9 C-2720......................................................................................................................................................................K-310
2.16.10 C-2721.................................................................................................................................................................... K-310
2.17 Solution 14 (C-2801_3000) ...............................................................................................................................................K-310
2.17.1 C-2801......................................................................................................................................................................K-310
2.17.2 C-2802......................................................................................................................................................................K-311
2.17.3 C-2803......................................................................................................................................................................K-311
2.17.4 C-2804......................................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.17.5 C-2811......................................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.17.6 C-2812......................................................................................................................................................................K-312
2.17.7 C-2813......................................................................................................................................................................K-313
2.17.8 C-2814......................................................................................................................................................................K-313
2.17.9 C-2821......................................................................................................................................................................K-314
2.17.10 C-2822.................................................................................................................................................................... K-314
2.17.11 C-2823.................................................................................................................................................................... K-315
2.17.12 C-2824.................................................................................................................................................................... K-315
2.17.13 C-2831.................................................................................................................................................................... K-315
2.17.14 C-2832.................................................................................................................................................................... K-316
2.17.15 C-2833.................................................................................................................................................................... K-316
2.17.16 C-2834.................................................................................................................................................................... K-317
2.17.17 C-2840.................................................................................................................................................................... K-318
2.17.18 C-2841.................................................................................................................................................................... K-318
2.18 Solution 15 (C-3001_3500) ...............................................................................................................................................K-318
2.18.1 C-3001......................................................................................................................................................................K-318
2.18.2 C-3101......................................................................................................................................................................K-319
2.18.3 C-3102......................................................................................................................................................................K-319
2.18.4 C-3103......................................................................................................................................................................K-319
2.18.5 C-3104......................................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.18.6 C-3105......................................................................................................................................................................K-320
2.18.7 C-3301* ....................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.18.8 C-3302* ....................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.18.9 C-3303......................................................................................................................................................................K-321
2.18.10 C-3304* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-322
2.18.11 C-3305* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-322
2.18.12 C-3307* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-322
2.18.13 C-3308* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-323
2.18.14 C-3401.................................................................................................................................................................... K-323
2.19 Solution 16 (C-3501_4000) ...............................................................................................................................................K-323
2.19.1 C-3501 * ...................................................................................................................................................................K-323
2.19.2 C-3502 * ...................................................................................................................................................................K-324
2.19.3 C-3503 * ...................................................................................................................................................................K-325
2.19.4 C-3504 * ...................................................................................................................................................................K-325
2.19.5 C-3505* ....................................................................................................................................................................K-326
2.19.6 C-3506* ....................................................................................................................................................................K-327
2.19.7 C-3508* ....................................................................................................................................................................K-327
2.19.8 C-3509* ....................................................................................................................................................................K-328
2.19.9 C-3510* ....................................................................................................................................................................K-329
2.19.10 C-3511* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-329
2.19.11 C-3512* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-330
2.19.12 C-3513* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-331
2.19.13 C-3515* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-331
2.19.14 C-3517* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-332
2.19.15 C-3518* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-333
2.19.16 C-3519* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-333
2.19.17 C-3801* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-334
2.19.18 C-3802* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-335
li
2.19.19 C-3803* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-335
2.19.20 C-3807* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-336
2.19.21 C-3901* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-337
2.19.22 C-3902* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-337
2.19.23 C-3903* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-338
2.19.24 C-3904* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-339
2.19.25 C-3905* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-339
2.19.26 C-3906* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-340
2.19.27 C-3907* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-341
2.19.28 C-3908* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-341
2.19.29 C-3909* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-342
2.19.30 C-3910* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-343
2.19.31 C-3911* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-343
2.19.32 C-3912* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-344
2.19.33 C-3913* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-345
2.19.34 C-3917* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-345
2.20 Solution 17 (C-4001_5000) ...............................................................................................................................................K-346
2.20.1 C-4101......................................................................................................................................................................K-346
2.20.2 C-4102......................................................................................................................................................................K-346
2.20.3 C-4103......................................................................................................................................................................K-346
2.20.4 C-4104......................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.20.5 C-4501......................................................................................................................................................................K-347
2.20.6 C-4502......................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.20.7 C-4503......................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.20.8 C-4504......................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.20.9 C-4505......................................................................................................................................................................K-348
2.20.10 C-4506.................................................................................................................................................................... K-349
2.20.11 C-4507.................................................................................................................................................................... K-350
2.20.12 C-4508.................................................................................................................................................................... K-350
2.20.13 C-4511.................................................................................................................................................................... K-350
2.20.14 C-4512.................................................................................................................................................................... K-351
2.20.15 C-4513.................................................................................................................................................................... K-351
2.20.16 C-4514.................................................................................................................................................................... K-352
2.20.17 C-4515.................................................................................................................................................................... K-352
2.20.18 C-4516.................................................................................................................................................................... K-352
2.20.19 C-4517.................................................................................................................................................................... K-353
2.20.20 C-4518.................................................................................................................................................................... K-353
2.20.21 C-4520.................................................................................................................................................................... K-353
2.20.22 C-4521.................................................................................................................................................................... K-354
2.20.23 C-4522.................................................................................................................................................................... K-354
2.20.24 C-4525.................................................................................................................................................................... K-355
2.20.25 C-4526.................................................................................................................................................................... K-355
2.20.26 C-4527.................................................................................................................................................................... K-355
2.20.27 C-4528.................................................................................................................................................................... K-356
2.20.28 C-4601.................................................................................................................................................................... K-356
2.20.29 C-4602.................................................................................................................................................................... K-356
2.20.30 C-4603.................................................................................................................................................................... K-357
2.20.31 C-4604.................................................................................................................................................................... K-357
2.20.32 C-4611.................................................................................................................................................................... K-358
2.20.33 C-4612.................................................................................................................................................................... K-358
2.20.34 C-4613.................................................................................................................................................................... K-359
2.20.35 C-4614.................................................................................................................................................................... K-359
2.20.36 C-4631.................................................................................................................................................................... K-359
2.20.37 C-4632.................................................................................................................................................................... K-360
2.20.38 C-4633.................................................................................................................................................................... K-360
2.20.39 C-4634.................................................................................................................................................................... K-361
2.20.40 C-4641.................................................................................................................................................................... K-361
2.20.41 C-4642.................................................................................................................................................................... K-361
2.20.42 C-4643.................................................................................................................................................................... K-362
2.20.43 C-4644.................................................................................................................................................................... K-362
2.20.44 C-4661.................................................................................................................................................................... K-363
2.20.45 C-4662.................................................................................................................................................................... K-363
2.20.46 C-4663.................................................................................................................................................................... K-364
2.20.47 C-4680.................................................................................................................................................................... K-364
2.20.48 C-4705.................................................................................................................................................................... K-364
2.20.49 C-4709.................................................................................................................................................................... K-365
2.20.50 C-4713.................................................................................................................................................................... K-365
2.20.51 C-4714.................................................................................................................................................................... K-365
lii
2.20.52 C-4715.................................................................................................................................................................... K-366
2.20.53 C-4716.................................................................................................................................................................... K-366
2.20.54 C-4717.................................................................................................................................................................... K-366
2.20.55 C-4718.................................................................................................................................................................... K-367
2.20.56 C-4719.................................................................................................................................................................... K-367
2.20.57 C-4720.................................................................................................................................................................... K-367
2.20.58 C-4721.................................................................................................................................................................... K-368
2.20.59 C-4722.................................................................................................................................................................... K-368
2.20.60 C-4723.................................................................................................................................................................... K-369
2.20.61 C-4724.................................................................................................................................................................... K-369
2.20.62 C-4725.................................................................................................................................................................... K-369
2.20.63 C-4726.................................................................................................................................................................... K-370
2.20.64 C-4728.................................................................................................................................................................... K-370
2.20.65 C-4729.................................................................................................................................................................... K-370
2.20.66 C-47A5 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-371
2.20.67 C-4840.................................................................................................................................................................... K-371
2.20.68 C-4850* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-372
2.20.69 C-4851.................................................................................................................................................................... K-372
2.21 Solution 18 (C-5001_6000) ...............................................................................................................................................K-372
2.21.1 C-5002 * ...................................................................................................................................................................K-372
2.21.2 C-5003......................................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.21.3 C-5006......................................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.21.4 C-5007......................................................................................................................................................................K-373
2.21.5 C-5008......................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.21.6 C-5010......................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.21.7 C-5014......................................................................................................................................................................K-374
2.21.8 C-5015......................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.21.9 C-5016......................................................................................................................................................................K-375
2.21.10 C-5017.................................................................................................................................................................... K-375
2.21.11 C-5025.................................................................................................................................................................... K-376
2.21.12 C-5100.................................................................................................................................................................... K-376
2.21.13 C-5101.................................................................................................................................................................... K-376
2.21.14 C-5102.................................................................................................................................................................... K-377
2.21.15 C-5103.................................................................................................................................................................... K-377
2.21.16 C-5110.................................................................................................................................................................... K-377
2.21.17 C-5111.................................................................................................................................................................... K-378
2.21.18 C-5121.................................................................................................................................................................... K-378
2.21.19 C-5137.................................................................................................................................................................... K-378
2.21.20 C-5138.................................................................................................................................................................... K-379
2.21.21 C-5301* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-379
2.21.22 C-5305* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-379
2.21.23 C-5307* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-380
2.21.24 C-5309* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-380
2.21.25 C-5310* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-380
2.21.26 C-5311* .................................................................................................................................................................. K-381
2.21.27 C-5401.................................................................................................................................................................... K-381
2.21.28 C-5403.................................................................................................................................................................... K-381
2.21.29 C-5404.................................................................................................................................................................... K-382
2.22 Solution 19 (C-6001_7000) ...............................................................................................................................................K-382
2.22.1 C-6102......................................................................................................................................................................K-382
2.22.2 C-6103......................................................................................................................................................................K-383
2.22.3 C-6104......................................................................................................................................................................K-383
2.22.4 C-6105......................................................................................................................................................................K-383
2.22.5 C-6114......................................................................................................................................................................K-384
2.22.6 C-6115......................................................................................................................................................................K-384
2.22.7 C-6121 (When the VI-509 is installed)...................................................................................................................... K-384
2.22.8 C-6121 (When the VI-513 is installed.)..................................................................................................................... K-385
2.22.9 C-6702......................................................................................................................................................................K-385
2.22.10 C-6703 (When the VI-509 is installed) ................................................................................................................... K-385
2.22.11 C-6703 (When the VI-513 is installed.) .................................................................................................................. K-386
2.22.16 C-6720.................................................................................................................................................................... K-388
2.22.17 C-6725.................................................................................................................................................................... K-388
2.22.18 C-6751.................................................................................................................................................................... K-389
2.22.19 C-6752.................................................................................................................................................................... K-389
liii
2.22.20 C-6753.................................................................................................................................................................... K-389
2.22.21 C-6754.................................................................................................................................................................... K-390
2.22.22 C-6755.................................................................................................................................................................... K-390
2.22.23 C-6756.................................................................................................................................................................... K-391
2.22.28 C-6783.................................................................................................................................................................... K-392
2.22.29 C-6801.................................................................................................................................................................... K-393
2.22.30 C-6802.................................................................................................................................................................... K-393
2.22.31 C-6A01 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-393
2.22.32 C-6A01 (When the UK-301 is installed.) ................................................................................................................ K-394
2.22.33 C-6A02 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-394
2.22.35 C-6A03 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-395
2.22.37 C-6A04 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-396
2.22.39 C-6A06 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-397
2.22.41 C-6A09 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-398
2.22.43 C-6A11 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-399
2.22.45 C-6A12 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-400
2.22.47 C-6A13 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-401
2.22.49 C-6A16 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-401
2.22.51 C-6A17 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-402
2.22.53 C-6A41 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-403
2.22.55 C-6A42 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-404
2.22.57 C-6A43 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-405
2.22.59 C-6A44 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-406
2.22.61 C-6A46 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-407
2.22.63 C-6A49 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-408
2.22.65 C-6A51 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-409
2.22.67 C-6A52 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-410
2.22.69 C-6A53 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-410
2.22.71 C-6A56 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-411
2.22.73 C-6A57 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-412
2.22.75 C-6A81 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-413
2.22.77 C-6A82 (When the UK-301 is not installed.) .......................................................................................................... K-414
2.22.79 C-6A83 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-415
2.22.80 C-6A84 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-415
2.22.81 C-6A85 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-416
2.22.82 C-6A86 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-416
2.22.83 C-6A87 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-417
2.22.84 C-6A89 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-417
2.22.85 C-6A90 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-417
2.22.86 C-6A91 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-418
2.22.87 C-6A92 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-418
liv
2.22.88 C-6A93 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-418
2.22.89 C-6A94 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-419
2.22.90 C-6A95 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-419
2.22.91 C-6A96 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-420
2.22.92 C-6A97 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-420
2.22.93 C-6A99 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-420
2.22.94 C-6B01 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-421
2.22.95 C-6B31 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-421
2.22.96 C-6B41 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-421
2.22.97 C-6B42 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-422
2.22.98 C-6B43 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-422
2.22.99 C-6BFF ................................................................................................................................................................... K-422
2.22.100C-6F01 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-423
2.23 Solution 20 (C-7001_9999) ...............................................................................................................................................K-423
2.23.1 C-7001......................................................................................................................................................................K-423
2.23.2 C-8001......................................................................................................................................................................K-423
2.23.3 C-8101......................................................................................................................................................................K-424
2.23.4 C-8103......................................................................................................................................................................K-424
2.23.5 C-8106......................................................................................................................................................................K-424
2.23.6 C-8107......................................................................................................................................................................K-425
2.23.7 C-8302......................................................................................................................................................................K-425
2.23.8 C-8401......................................................................................................................................................................K-425
2.23.9 C-8402......................................................................................................................................................................K-426
2.23.10 C-9401.................................................................................................................................................................... K-426
2.23.11 C-9402.................................................................................................................................................................... K-427
2.23.12 C-9403.................................................................................................................................................................... K-427
2.23.13 C-9404.................................................................................................................................................................... K-428
2.24 Solution 21 (C-A001_C200) ..............................................................................................................................................K-428
2.24.1 C-A001 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-428
2.24.2 C-A002 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-428
2.24.3 C-A003 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-429
2.24.4 C-A004 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-429
2.24.5 C-A005 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-429
2.24.6 C-A007 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-430
2.24.7 C-A008 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-430
2.24.8 C-A110 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-430
2.24.9 C-A180 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-430
2.24.10 C-A1C0................................................................................................................................................................... K-431
2.24.11 C-A1E1 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-431
2.24.12 C-A1E3 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-432
2.24.13 C-A1E4 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-432
2.24.14 C-A1E5 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-433
2.24.15 C-A1E6 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-433
2.24.16 C-A1E7 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-434
2.24.17 C-A1E8 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-434
2.24.18 C-A1F1 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-435
2.24.19 C-A1F5 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-435
2.24.20 C-A1F6 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-436
2.24.21 C-A1FE................................................................................................................................................................... K-436
2.24.22 C-A250 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-437
2.24.23 C-A251 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-437
2.24.24 C-A260 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-437
2.24.25 C-A261 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-437
2.24.26 C-A301 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-438
2.24.27 C-A302 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-438
2.24.28 C-A303 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-438
2.24.29 C-A304 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-438
2.24.30 C-A305 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-439
2.24.31 C-A306 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-439
2.24.32 C-A317 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-439
2.24.33 C-A401 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-440
2.24.34 C-A402 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-440
2.24.35 C-A403 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-440
2.24.36 C-A404 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-441
2.24.37 C-A406 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-441
2.24.38 C-A409 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-442
2.24.39 C-A412 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-442
2.24.40 C-A413 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-443
lv
2.24.41 C-A416 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-443
2.24.42 C-A441 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-443
2.24.43 C-A442 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-444
2.24.44 C-A443 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-444
2.24.45 C-A444 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-445
2.24.46 C-A446 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-445
2.24.47 C-A449 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-446
2.24.48 C-A452 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-446
2.24.49 C-A453 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-446
2.24.50 C-A456 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-447
2.24.51 C-A501 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-447
2.24.52 C-A502 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-448
2.24.53 C-A503 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-448
2.24.54 C-C101 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-448
2.24.55 C-C102 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-449
2.24.56 C-C104 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-449
2.24.57 C-C106 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-449
2.24.58 C-C109 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-449
2.24.59 C-C111 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-450
2.24.60 C-C112 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-450
2.24.61 C-C113 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-450
2.24.62 C-C114 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-451
2.24.63 C-C114 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-451
2.24.64 C-C116 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-451
2.24.65 C-C117 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-452
2.24.66 C-C118 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-452
2.24.67 C-C120 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-452
2.24.68 C-C121 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-453
2.24.69 C-C122 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-453
2.24.70 C-C123 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-453
2.24.71 C-C124 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-454
2.24.72 C-C126 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-454
2.24.73 C-C129 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-454
2.24.74 C-C130 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-455
2.24.75 C-C132 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-455
2.24.76 C-C133 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-455
2.24.77 C-C134 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-456
2.24.78 C-C136 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-456
2.24.79 C-C137 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-456
2.24.80 C-C138 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-456
2.24.81 C-C139 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-457
2.24.82 C-C140 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-457
2.24.83 C-C141 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-457
2.24.84 C-C142 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-457
2.24.85 C-C143 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-458
2.24.86 C-C149 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-458
2.24.87 C-C150 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-458
2.24.88 C-C151 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-459
2.24.89 C-C152 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-459
2.24.90 C-C156 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-459
2.24.91 C-C180 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-459
2.24.92 C-C181 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-461
2.25 Solution 22 (C-C201_E100) ..............................................................................................................................................K-461
2.25.1 C-D010 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-461
2.25.2 C-D060 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-462
2.25.3 C-D070 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-462
2.25.4 C-D080 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-463
2.25.5 C-D0C0.....................................................................................................................................................................K-463
2.25.6 C-D0D1.....................................................................................................................................................................K-463
2.25.7 C-D0E1.....................................................................................................................................................................K-464
2.25.8 C-D0E3.....................................................................................................................................................................K-465
2.25.9 C-D0E4.....................................................................................................................................................................K-465
2.25.10 C-D0E5................................................................................................................................................................... K-465
2.25.11 C-D0E8................................................................................................................................................................... K-466
2.25.12 C-D0EF .................................................................................................................................................................. K-466
2.25.13 C-D0F0 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-467
2.25.14 C-D0F1 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-467
2.25.15 C-D0F2 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-468
lvi
2.25.16 C-D0F5 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-468
2.25.17 C-D0F6 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-468
2.25.18 C-D0FD .................................................................................................................................................................. K-469
2.25.19 C-D0FE .................................................................................................................................................................. K-469
2.25.20 C-E001 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-469
2.25.21 C-E002 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-470
2.25.22 C-E003 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-470
2.25.23 C-E004 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-470
2.25.24 C-E005 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-471
2.25.25 C-E006 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-471
2.25.26 C-E007 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-472
2.25.27 C-E008 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-472
2.25.28 C-E009 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-472
2.25.29 C-E017 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-473
2.25.30 C-E018 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-473
2.25.31 C-E020 ................................................................................................................................................................... K-473
3. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE .................................................................. K-474

3.1 The power of main body does not become active ...............................................................................................................K-474
3.1.1 Activate the main power switch but the power LED of the operation panel does not light up in orange ....................K-474
3.1.2 Activate the main power switch and the sub power switch, but the touch panel does not display anything ..............K-474
3.1.3 Activate the sub power switch but the power LED does not switch from orange to blue ...........................................K-474
3.1.4 The operation panel stops on the "Please wait starting system" screen. ...................................................................K-475
3.2 The power is not supplied to DF ..........................................................................................................................................K-475
3.3 The power is not supplied to the paper feed option.............................................................................................................K-475
3.3.1 PF-602m.....................................................................................................................................................................K-475
3.3.2 PF-707m.....................................................................................................................................................................K-476
3.3.3 LU-202m.....................................................................................................................................................................K-476
3.3.4 LU-202XL ...................................................................................................................................................................K-476
3.3.5 LU-202XLm ................................................................................................................................................................K-477
3.4 The power is not supplied to the finishing option.................................................................................................................K-477
3.4.1 RU-518 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-477
3.4.2 RU-702 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-478
3.4.3 RU-510 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-478
3.4.4 IQ-501.........................................................................................................................................................................K-478
3.4.5 FS-531 /FS-612 ..........................................................................................................................................................K-479
3.4.6 FS-532........................................................................................................................................................................K-479
3.4.7 OT-510 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-479
3.4.8 LS-506 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-480
3.4.9 FD-503........................................................................................................................................................................K-480
3.4.10 SD-506 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-480
3.4.11 SD-513 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-481
3.4.12 PB-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-481
3.4.13 GP-501 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-482
4. IMAGE TROUBLE ................................................................................................................................................K-483

4.1 Outline of solution ................................................................................................................................................................K-483
4.1.1 Test pattern print ........................................................................................................................................................K-483
4.2 Solution................................................................................................................................................................................K-484
4.2.1 Image trouble sample illustrations ..............................................................................................................................K-484
4.2.2 White line 1, white band 1, color stripe 1, color band 1 ..............................................................................................K-485
4.2.3 White line 2, white band 2, color stripe 2, color band 2 ..............................................................................................K-487
4.2.4 Uneven density 1........................................................................................................................................................K-488
4.2.5 Uneven density 2........................................................................................................................................................K-491
4.2.6 Gradation error ...........................................................................................................................................................K-494
4.2.7 Inky backside..............................................................................................................................................................K-495
4.2.8 Color reproduction error .............................................................................................................................................K-495
4.2.9 Color registration error................................................................................................................................................K-496
4.2.10 Gray background ......................................................................................................................................................K-497
4.2.11 Low image density....................................................................................................................................................K-499
4.2.12 Color spots ...............................................................................................................................................................K-502
4.2.13 White spots, void areas ............................................................................................................................................ K-504
4.2.14 Blurry white spots, blurry color spots........................................................................................................................ K-507
4.2.15 Image erasure at leading edge, image erasure at trailing edge ............................................................................... K-508
4.2.16 Thick paper leading edge repelling, Thick paper trailing edge repelling................................................................... K-508
4.2.17 Blank print, black print .............................................................................................................................................. K-509
4.2.18 Ripple unevenness (solid images of R, B, G)........................................................................................................... K-510
4.2.19 Moire.........................................................................................................................................................................K-510
4.2.20 Uneven gloss, trails of rollers ................................................................................................................................... K-511
lvii
4.2.21 Image memory, size memory ................................................................................................................................... K-512
4.2.22 Darker at trailing edge, faint at leading edge............................................................................................................ K-513
4.2.23 Pitch unevenness .....................................................................................................................................................K-513
4.2.24 Periodical white dot, color dot................................................................................................................................... K-514
4.2.25 Poor fusing performance, offset ............................................................................................................................... K-515
4.2.26 Blurred image ...........................................................................................................................................................K-515
4.2.27 Brush effect, image bleeding .................................................................................................................................... K-517
4.2.28 Paper crease, bleeding............................................................................................................................................. K-517
4.2.29 Developing ghost......................................................................................................................................................K-519
4.2.30 Image skew ..............................................................................................................................................................K-520
4.2.31 Image distortion ........................................................................................................................................................K-520
4.2.32 ACS abnormality.......................................................................................................................................................K-520
4.2.33 Image abnormality ....................................................................................................................................................K-521
4.2.34 The density differs between the original and copy outputs....................................................................................... K-521
4.2.35 The color differs between the original and copy outputs. ......................................................................................... K-522
5. IC PROTECTOR ..................................................................................................................................................K-524
5.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................................................K-524
5.2 IC protector list.....................................................................................................................................................................K-524
5.2.1 AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P*2, C73hc*2 and AccurioPrint C3070L*1 ............................K-524
5.2.2 DF-706........................................................................................................................................................................K-527
5.2.3 PF-602m, HT-504, HT-505.........................................................................................................................................K-527
5.2.4 PF-707m.....................................................................................................................................................................K-528
5.2.5 LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm .............................................................................................................................K-530
5.2.6 RU-518 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-531
5.2.7 RU-702 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-533
5.2.8 FS-531........................................................................................................................................................................K-533
5.2.9 FS-612........................................................................................................................................................................K-534
5.2.10 PI-502 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-535
5.2.11 IQ-501.......................................................................................................................................................................K-535
5.2.12 UK-301 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-536
5.2.13 FS-532......................................................................................................................................................................K-536
5.2.14 SD-510 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-537
5.2.15 MB-508 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-537
5.2.16 OT-510 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-538
5.2.17 PK-522......................................................................................................................................................................K-538
5.2.18 LS-506 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-538
5.2.19 FD-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-539
5.2.20 SD-506 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-540
5.2.21 SD-513 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-541
5.2.22 TU-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-543
5.2.23 FD-504......................................................................................................................................................................K-543
5.2.24 PB-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-543
5.3 IC protector location.............................................................................................................................................................K-545
5.3.1 AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P*2, C73hc*2 and AccurioPrint C3070L*1 ............................K-545
5.3.2 DF-706........................................................................................................................................................................K-548
5.3.3 PF-602m, HT-504, HT-505.........................................................................................................................................K-549
5.3.4 PF-707m.....................................................................................................................................................................K-550
5.3.5 LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm .............................................................................................................................K-551
5.3.6 RU-518 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-552
5.3.7 RU-702 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-553
5.3.8 FS-531........................................................................................................................................................................K-553
5.3.9 FS-612........................................................................................................................................................................K-554
5.3.10 PI-502 .......................................................................................................................................................................K-555
5.3.11 IQ-501.......................................................................................................................................................................K-556
5.3.12 UK-301 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-557
5.3.13 FS-532......................................................................................................................................................................K-557
5.3.14 SD-510 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-558
5.3.15 MB-508 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-558
5.3.16 OT-510 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-558
5.3.17 PK-522......................................................................................................................................................................K-559
5.3.18 LS-506 ......................................................................................................................................................................K-559
5.3.19 SD-506 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-560
5.3.20 SD-513 .....................................................................................................................................................................K-561
5.3.21 TU-503......................................................................................................................................................................K-562
5.3.22 FD-504......................................................................................................................................................................K-562
6. TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-605) ........................................................................................................................... K-563

6.1 IC malfunction code list........................................................................................................................................................K-563
lviii
6.2 IC solution............................................................................................................................................................................K-563
6.2.1 00-001 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-563
6.2.2 00-002 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-563
6.2.3 01-001 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-564
6.2.4 01-002 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-564
6.2.5 02-001 ........................................................................................................................................................................K-564
7. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501).......................................................................................................................... K-565

7.1 TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501).........................................................................................................................................K-565
7.2 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................................................K-565
7.2.1 Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................................................................K-565
7.2.2 General.......................................................................................................................................................................K-565
7.2.3 Back Gauge................................................................................................................................................................K-566
7.2.4 Die Set........................................................................................................................................................................K-566
7.3 Initial Service Action ............................................................................................................................................................K-566
7.3.1 Initial Service Action ...................................................................................................................................................K-566
7.4 Mis-Feed Service Action......................................................................................................................................................K-567
7.4.1 Mis-Feed Service Action.............................................................................................................................................K-567
7.5 Final Service Action .............................................................................................................................................................K-569
7.5.1 Final Service Action....................................................................................................................................................K-569
8. OTHER ABNORMALITIES (ERROR CODES, TROUBLESHOOTINGS) ............................................................ K-570
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING.................................................................................. L-1

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING .................................................................................................................................... L-1
1.1 AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P*2, C73hc*2 and AccurioPrint C3070L*1 ......................................... L-1
1.1.1 Main body rear side 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... L-1
1.1.2 Main body rear side 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... L-3
1.1.3 Main body upper surface ................................................................................................................................................ L-4
1.1.4 Main body left side.......................................................................................................................................................... L-5
1.1.5 Main body front side1 ..................................................................................................................................................... L-5
1.1.6 Main body front side2 ..................................................................................................................................................... L-6
1.1.7 Write section ................................................................................................................................................................... L-7
1.1.8 Developing section ......................................................................................................................................................... L-7
1.1.9 Intermediate transfer section .......................................................................................................................................... L-8
1.1.10 Image correction unit section........................................................................................................................................ L-8
1.1.11 Paper feed tray ............................................................................................................................................................. L-9
1.1.12 Vertical conveyance section ....................................................................................................................................... L-10
1.1.13 Registration section .................................................................................................................................................... L-10
1.1.14 Duplex section 1 ......................................................................................................................................................... L-11
1.1.15 Duplex section 2 ......................................................................................................................................................... L-12
1.1.16 Duplex section 3 ......................................................................................................................................................... L-13
1.1.17 Fusing section ............................................................................................................................................................ L-14
1.1.18 Paper exit section ....................................................................................................................................................... L-15
1.1.19 Operation panel section.............................................................................................................................................. L-15
1.1.20 Charge control section................................................................................................................................................ L-16
1.2 DF-706................................................................................................................................................................................... L-16
1.3 PF-602m, HT-504, and HT-505 ............................................................................................................................................. L-18
1.3.1 Configuration front side ................................................................................................................................................ L-18
1.3.2 Configuration rear side ................................................................................................................................................. L-18
1.3.3 Vertical conveyance section ......................................................................................................................................... L-19
1.3.4 Horizontal conveyance section..................................................................................................................................... L-19
1.3.5 Tray section 1 ............................................................................................................................................................... L-20
1.3.6 Tray section2 ................................................................................................................................................................ L-20
1.4 PF-707m, HT-506 .................................................................................................................................................................. L-21
1.4.1 Front side...................................................................................................................................................................... L-21
1.4.2 Right side...................................................................................................................................................................... L-22
1.4.3 Rear side ...................................................................................................................................................................... L-22
1.4.4 Vertical conveyance section front side ......................................................................................................................... L-23
1.4.5 Vertical conveyance section rear side .......................................................................................................................... L-24
1.4.6 Horizontal conveyance section top side ....................................................................................................................... L-25
1.4.7 Horizontal conveyance section bottom side ................................................................................................................. L-25
1.4.8 Horizontal conveyance section rear side...................................................................................................................... L-26
1.4.9 Paper feed trays 1 to 3 section..................................................................................................................................... L-26
1.4.10 Paper feed suction section ......................................................................................................................................... L-27
1.4.11 HT-506........................................................................................................................................................................ L-27
1.5 FA-502 ................................................................................................................................................................................... L-28
1.5.1 Tandem conveyance section........................................................................................................................................ L-28
lix
1.5.2 Rear side of PF-707m .................................................................................................................................................. L-28
1.6 LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm, HT-503, and HT-515...................................................................................................... L-29
1.6.1 Paper feed/up/down section (LU-202m)....................................................................................................................... L-29
1.6.2 Paper feed/up/down section (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm) ................................................................................................ L-29
1.6.3 Inside the machine (LU-202m) ..................................................................................................................................... L-30
1.6.4 Inside the machine (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)............................................................................................................... L-31
1.6.5 HT-503.......................................................................................................................................................................... L-32
1.6.6 HT-515.......................................................................................................................................................................... L-32
1.7 MB-506 .................................................................................................................................................................................. L-33
1.8 MB-508 .................................................................................................................................................................................. L-34
1.8.1 Conveyance section ..................................................................................................................................................... L-34
1.8.2 Rear side ...................................................................................................................................................................... L-35
1.9 OT-510................................................................................................................................................................................... L-35
1.9.1 Rear side ...................................................................................................................................................................... L-35
1.9.2 Right side...................................................................................................................................................................... L-36
1.9.3 Left side 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................... L-37
1.9.4 Left side 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................... L-38
1.9.5 Upper surface ............................................................................................................................................................... L-39
1.10 OT-511 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-39
1.11 EF-103................................................................................................................................................................................. L-39
1.12 RU-518/HM-103 .................................................................................................................................................................. L-40
1.12.1 Right side 1................................................................................................................................................................. L-40
1.12.2 Right side 2................................................................................................................................................................. L-40
1.12.3 Left side ...................................................................................................................................................................... L-41
1.12.4 Rear side .................................................................................................................................................................... L-41
1.12.5 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-42
1.12.6 Output paper density detection section ...................................................................................................................... L-43
1.12.7 Humidification section 1 (HM-103) ............................................................................................................................. L-43
1.12.10 Humidification section 4 (HM-103) ............................................................................................................................L-45
1.13 RU-702 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-46
1.13.1 Right side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-46
1.13.2 Left side ...................................................................................................................................................................... L-47
1.13.3 Rear side .................................................................................................................................................................... L-47
1.13.4 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-48
1.14 RU-510 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-48
1.14.1 Right side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-48
1.14.2 Left-side view.............................................................................................................................................................. L-49
1.14.3 Rear side .................................................................................................................................................................... L-49
1.15 FS-531................................................................................................................................................................................. L-50
1.15.1 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-50
1.15.2 Rear side .................................................................................................................................................................... L-51
1.15.3 Stacker section rear side ............................................................................................................................................ L-51
1.15.4 Stapler section............................................................................................................................................................ L-52
1.16 FS-612................................................................................................................................................................................. L-52
1.16.1 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-52
1.16.2 Rear side .................................................................................................................................................................... L-53
1.16.3 Folding section ........................................................................................................................................................... L-53
1.16.4 Stapler section............................................................................................................................................................ L-54
1.17 PK-512/513.......................................................................................................................................................................... L-54
1.18 PI-502 .................................................................................................................................................................................. L-55
1.19 IQ-501.................................................................................................................................................................................. L-56
1.19.1 Rear side 1 ................................................................................................................................................................. L-56
1.19.2 Rear side 2 ................................................................................................................................................................. L-57
1.19.3 Conveyance section 1 ................................................................................................................................................ L-57
1.19.4 Conveyance section 2 ................................................................................................................................................ L-58
1.19.5 Scanner section.......................................................................................................................................................... L-59
1.19.6 Scanner calibration section ........................................................................................................................................ L-60
1.19.7 Colorimeter section..................................................................................................................................................... L-60
1.19.8 Colorimeter calibration section ................................................................................................................................... L-61
1.20 UK-301 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-61
1.20.1 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-61
1.20.2 Back of the cover........................................................................................................................................................ L-62
1.21 FS-532................................................................................................................................................................................. L-62
1.21.1 Rear side .................................................................................................................................................................... L-62
1.21.2 Right side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-63
1.21.3 Left side 1 ................................................................................................................................................................... L-64
lx
1.21.4 Left side 2 ................................................................................................................................................................... L-65
1.21.5 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-66
1.21.6 Upper surface ............................................................................................................................................................. L-67
1.21.7 Stacker 1 .................................................................................................................................................................... L-67
1.21.8 Stacker 2 .................................................................................................................................................................... L-68
1.21.9 Stacker 3 .................................................................................................................................................................... L-69
1.21.10 Stapler .......................................................................................................................................................................L-69
1.22 SD-510 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-70
1.22.1 Rear side .................................................................................................................................................................... L-70
1.22.2 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-70
1.22.3 Bottom 1 ..................................................................................................................................................................... L-71
1.22.4 Bottom 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................... L-72
1.22.5 Stapler ........................................................................................................................................................................ L-72
1.23 PK-522................................................................................................................................................................................. L-73
1.24 MK-732 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-73
1.25 LS-506 ................................................................................................................................................................................. L-74
1.25.1 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-74
1.25.2 Upper surface ............................................................................................................................................................. L-74
1.25.3 Rear side .................................................................................................................................................................... L-75
1.25.4 Shift unit...................................................................................................................................................................... L-75
1.26 FD-503................................................................................................................................................................................. L-76
1.26.1 Conveyance section front side/right side.................................................................................................................... L-76
1.26.2 Major boards in the power source section.................................................................................................................. L-76
1.26.3 Conveyance section rear side/left side....................................................................................................................... L-77
1.26.4 PI rear side ................................................................................................................................................................. L-77
1.26.5 PI upper surface ......................................................................................................................................................... L-78
1.26.6 PI lower tray................................................................................................................................................................ L-78
1.26.7 Punch section ............................................................................................................................................................. L-79
1.26.8 Folding unit front side/right side.................................................................................................................................. L-79
1.26.9 Folding unit rear side/left side..................................................................................................................................... L-80
1.27 SD-506 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-80
1.27.1 Horizontal conveyance section................................................................................................................................... L-80
1.27.2 Right angle conveyance section................................................................................................................................. L-81
1.27.4 Saddle stitching section.............................................................................................................................................. L-84
1.27.5 Bundle processing section.......................................................................................................................................... L-86
1.27.6 Trimmer section.......................................................................................................................................................... L-87
1.27.7 Left-side view.............................................................................................................................................................. L-88
1.27.8 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-88
1.27.9 Rear side .................................................................................................................................................................... L-89
1.28 SD-513 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-90
1.28.1 Rear console front side 1............................................................................................................................................ L-90
1.28.2 Rear console front side 2............................................................................................................................................ L-91
1.28.3 Rear console rear side ............................................................................................................................................... L-92
1.28.4 Front console.............................................................................................................................................................. L-93
1.28.5 Entrance conveyance section..................................................................................................................................... L-94
1.28.6 Folding conveyance section ....................................................................................................................................... L-95
1.28.7 Sub tray/tri-folding tray section 1 ................................................................................................................................ L-96
1.28.8 Sub tray/tri-folding tray section 2 ................................................................................................................................ L-97
1.28.9 Saddle stitching section.............................................................................................................................................. L-98
1.28.10 Booklet movement section ........................................................................................................................................L-99
1.28.11 Clamp section..........................................................................................................................................................L-100
1.28.12 Trimmer section.......................................................................................................................................................L-101
1.28.13 Booklet tray section .................................................................................................................................................L-102
1.29 CR-101 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-103
1.30 TU-503............................................................................................................................................................................... L-103
1.31 FD-504............................................................................................................................................................................... L-104
1.31.1 Clamp up down section ............................................................................................................................................ L-104
1.31.2 Spine corner forming section.................................................................................................................................... L-104
1.31.3 SD-513 left side ........................................................................................................................................................ L-105
1.32 PB-503............................................................................................................................................................................... L-105
1.32.1 SC section ................................................................................................................................................................ L-105
1.32.2 Clamp section........................................................................................................................................................... L-106
1.32.3 Pellet supply section................................................................................................................................................. L-107
1.32.4 Glue tank section...................................................................................................................................................... L-108
1.32.5 Cover paper supply section ...................................................................................................................................... L-109
1.32.6 Cover paper table section......................................................................................................................................... L-110
1.32.7 Book stock section.................................................................................................................................................... L-111
lxi
1.32.8 Conveyance section and framework section ............................................................................................................ L-112
1.32.9 Relay conveyance section........................................................................................................................................ L-114
1.33 MK-737 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-115
1.34 GP-501 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-115
1.34.1 Rear side 1/Right side 1 ........................................................................................................................................... L-115
1.34.2 Rear side 2/Left side................................................................................................................................................. L-116
1.34.3 Right side 2............................................................................................................................................................... L-116
1.34.4 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................. L-116
1.34.5 Bypass conveyance section ..................................................................................................................................... L-117
1.34.6 Punch conveyance section....................................................................................................................................... L-117
1.35 GP-502 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-118
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING IN BOARD .................................................................................................. L-119

2.1 AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc and AccurioPrint C3070L*1 ............................................ L-119
2.1.1 Overall control board .................................................................................................................................................. L-119
2.1.2 Printer control board ................................................................................................................................................... L-119
2.1.3 Printer image processing board.................................................................................................................................. L-120
2.1.4 Scanner image processing board............................................................................................................................... L-120
2.1.5 Scanner drive board ................................................................................................................................................... L-121
2.1.6 AC drive board/1 (ACDB/1) ........................................................................................................................................ L-121
2.1.7 Conveyance drive board............................................................................................................................................. L-121
2.1.8 DC power supply/1 ..................................................................................................................................................... L-122
2.1.9 DC power supply/2 ..................................................................................................................................................... L-122
2.1.10 High voltage unit/1.................................................................................................................................................... L-123
2.1.13 Operation board/1..................................................................................................................................................... L-124
2.1.14 Operation board/2..................................................................................................................................................... L-124
2.1.15 LCD board ................................................................................................................................................................ L-124
2.1.16 CCD board................................................................................................................................................................ L-125
2.1.17 Scanner inverter board ............................................................................................................................................. L-125
2.1.18 NVRAM board .......................................................................................................................................................... L-125
2.2 DF-706................................................................................................................................................................................. L-125
2.2.1 DF control board (DFCB)............................................................................................................................................ L-125
2.2.2 DF power supply board (DFPU) ................................................................................................................................. L-125
2.2.3 Sensor control board (SCB) ....................................................................................................................................... L-126
2.2.4 Multi feed detection board/1 (transmitter) (MFDB/1) .................................................................................................. L-126
2.2.5 Multi feed detection board/2 (receiver) (MFDB/2) ...................................................................................................... L-126
2.3 PF-602m/HT-504/505 .......................................................................................................................................................... L-126
2.3.1 PF drive board (PFDB) ............................................................................................................................................... L-126
2.3.2 AC drive board (ACDB) .............................................................................................................................................. L-127
2.4 PF-707m, HT-506 ................................................................................................................................................................ L-127
2.4.1 PFU drive board (PFUDB) .......................................................................................................................................... L-127
2.4.3 DC power supply /1, /2 (DCPS/1, /2).......................................................................................................................... L-128
2.4.4 Multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR) ...................................................................................................................... L-128
2.4.5 Multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS)....................................................................................................................... L-128
2.5 LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm, HT-503, and HT-515.................................................................................................... L-128
2.5.1 LU drive board (LUDB) (LU-202m) ............................................................................................................................. L-128
2.5.2 LU drive board (LUDB) (LU-202XL) ........................................................................................................................... L-129
2.5.3 LU drive board (LUDB) (LU-202XLm) ........................................................................................................................ L-129
2.6 MB-508 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-129
2.6.1 MB drive board (MBDB) ............................................................................................................................................. L-129
2.7 OT-510................................................................................................................................................................................. L-130
2.7.1 FNS control board ...................................................................................................................................................... L-130
2.8 RU-518/HM-103................................................................................................................................................................... L-130
2.8.1 RU control board (PCB1)............................................................................................................................................ L-130
2.8.2 AC drive board (PCB2)............................................................................................................................................... L-130
2.8.3 Color density detection board/Y, /M, /C, /K (CDDBY, CDDBM, CDDBC, CDDBK) .................................................... L-131
2.8.4 Color density control board (PCB3)............................................................................................................................ L-131
2.8.5 Jam indication board (PCB4)...................................................................................................................................... L-131
2.8.6 DC power supply/1 (DCPS1) ...................................................................................................................................... L-131
2.9 RU-702 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-133
2.9.1 RU control board (PCB1)............................................................................................................................................ L-133
lxii
2.9.2 AC drive board (PCB2)............................................................................................................................................... L-133
2.9.3 Jam indication board (PCB4)...................................................................................................................................... L-134
2.10 RU-510 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-136
2.10.1 RU control board (RUCB)......................................................................................................................................... L-136
2.10.2 Jam indication board (JAMIB) .................................................................................................................................. L-136
2.11 FS-531............................................................................................................................................................................... L-136
2.11.1 FNS control board (FNSCB)..................................................................................................................................... L-136
2.11.2 Relay board (RB)...................................................................................................................................................... L-137
2.12 FS-612............................................................................................................................................................................... L-137
2.12.1 FNS control board (FNSCB)..................................................................................................................................... L-137
2.12.2 Relay board (RB)...................................................................................................................................................... L-137
2.13 PK-512/513........................................................................................................................................................................ L-138
2.13.1 Punch drive board (PDB).......................................................................................................................................... L-138
2.13.2 Paper size sensor board........................................................................................................................................... L-138
2.14 PI-502 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-138
2.14.1 PI drive board (PIDB) ............................................................................................................................................... L-138
2.14.2 PI operation board (PIOB) ........................................................................................................................................ L-138
2.15 IQ-501................................................................................................................................................................................ L-139
2.15.1 IQ control board (PCB1) ........................................................................................................................................... L-139
2.15.2 IQ drive board (PCB2) .............................................................................................................................................. L-139
2.15.3 LED drive board/1 (PCB4), /2 (PCB5) ...................................................................................................................... L-139
2.15.4 IQ relay board (PCB6) .............................................................................................................................................. L-140
2.15.5 Jam indication board (PCB13).................................................................................................................................. L-140
2.16 UK-301 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-141
2.16.1 UK control board (UKCB) ......................................................................................................................................... L-141
2.16.2 UK image processing board (IPB/U) ........................................................................................................................ L-141
2.16.3 UK relay board (UKRYB).......................................................................................................................................... L-141
2.17 FS-532............................................................................................................................................................................... L-142
2.17.1 FNS control board .................................................................................................................................................... L-142
2.17.2 Jam indication board ................................................................................................................................................ L-142
2.18 SD-510 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-142
2.18.1 SD control board....................................................................................................................................................... L-142
2.19 PK-522............................................................................................................................................................................... L-143
2.19.2 Paper size sensor board........................................................................................................................................... L-143
2.20 LS-506 ............................................................................................................................................................................... L-143
2.20.1 LS control board (LSCB) .......................................................................................................................................... L-143
2.20.2 Relay board/1 (RLB/1).............................................................................................................................................. L-143
2.20.3 Relay board/2 (RLB/2).............................................................................................................................................. L-143
2.20.4 DC power supply (DCPS)......................................................................................................................................... L-144
2.20.5 Relay board (RLB).................................................................................................................................................... L-144
2.21 FD-503............................................................................................................................................................................... L-144
2.21.1 FD control board (FDCB).......................................................................................................................................... L-144
2.21.3 Folding drive board (FDB) ........................................................................................................................................ L-145
2.21.4 PI drive board (PIDB) ............................................................................................................................................... L-145
2.21.5 FD operation board (FDOB) ..................................................................................................................................... L-146
2.21.6 Jam indication board (JAMIB) .................................................................................................................................. L-146
2.21.7 DC power supply (DCPS)......................................................................................................................................... L-146
2.21.8 Multi feed detection board/1, /2 (MFDB1, 2)............................................................................................................. L-146
2.22 SD-506 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-147
2.22.1 SD control board (SDCB) ......................................................................................................................................... L-147
2.22.2 SD drive board (SDDB) ............................................................................................................................................ L-147
2.22.3 SD drive board/2 (SDDB/2) ...................................................................................................................................... L-147
2.22.4 DC power supply/1 (DCPS1).................................................................................................................................... L-148
2.22.7 Jam indication board/1 (JAMIB/1) ............................................................................................................................ L-148
2.22.8 Jam indication board/2 (JAMIB/2) ............................................................................................................................ L-149
2.23 SD-513 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-149
2.23.1 SD control board (PCB1).......................................................................................................................................... L-149
2.23.2 SD drive board (PCB2)............................................................................................................................................. L-150
2.23.3 Rear console jam indication board (PCB5) .............................................................................................................. L-150
2.23.4 Front console jam indication board (PCB6).............................................................................................................. L-151
lxiii
2.24 TU-503............................................................................................................................................................................... L-152
2.24.1 Slitter drive board (TUDB) ........................................................................................................................................ L-152
2.25 FD-504............................................................................................................................................................................... L-152
2.25.1 FD drive board (FDDB)............................................................................................................................................. L-152
2.26 PB-503............................................................................................................................................................................... L-152
2.26.1 PB control board (PBCB).......................................................................................................................................... L-152
2.26.2 AC drive board (ACDB) ............................................................................................................................................ L-153
2.26.3 PB drive board/1 (PBDB1)........................................................................................................................................ L-153
2.26.6 Jam indication board/1 (JAMB1) .............................................................................................................................. L-154
2.26.7 Jam indication board/2 (JAMB2) .............................................................................................................................. L-154
2.26.8 Manual operation board (OB1) ................................................................................................................................. L-154
2.26.9 Booklet stock operation board (OB2) ....................................................................................................................... L-154
2.26.10 DC power supply/1 (DCPU/1) .................................................................................................................................L-154
2.27 MK-737 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-156
2.27.1 MK relay board (MKRB) ........................................................................................................................................... L-156
2.28 GP-501 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-157
2.28.1 Punch Controller PCB .............................................................................................................................................. L-157
2.29 GP-502 .............................................................................................................................................................................. L-157
2.30 VI-511 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-158
2.30.1 IQ image processing board (IPB/I) ........................................................................................................................... L-158
2.31 VI-509 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-158
2.31.1 VIF board (VIFB) ...................................................................................................................................................... L-158
2.32 VI-513 ................................................................................................................................................................................ L-159
2.32.1 VIF board (VIFB) ...................................................................................................................................................... L-159
3. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING ........................................................................................................ L-160

3.1 SD-506................................................................................................................................................................................. L-160
3.1.1 Right side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-160
3.1.2 Left side ...................................................................................................................................................................... L-161
3.1.3 Rear side-1 ................................................................................................................................................................. L-162
3.1.4 Rear side-2 ................................................................................................................................................................. L-162
3.1.6 Saddle stitching section-1........................................................................................................................................... L-164
3.1.7 Saddle stitching section-2........................................................................................................................................... L-164
3.2 PB-503................................................................................................................................................................................. L-165
3.2.1 Rear side-1 ................................................................................................................................................................. L-165
3.2.2 Rear side 2 ................................................................................................................................................................. L-166
3.2.3 Rear side 3 ................................................................................................................................................................. L-167
3.2.4 Rear side 4 ................................................................................................................................................................. L-168
3.2.5 Rear side 5 ................................................................................................................................................................. L-169
3.2.6 Front side.................................................................................................................................................................... L-170
3.2.7 Sub compile (SC) section ........................................................................................................................................... L-170
3.2.8 Clamp section............................................................................................................................................................. L-171
3.2.9 Cover paper supply section ........................................................................................................................................ L-171
3.2.10 Cover paper table section......................................................................................................................................... L-172
3.2.11 Book stock section.................................................................................................................................................... L-172
3.2.12 Conveyance section ................................................................................................................................................. L-173
3.2.13 Pellet supply section................................................................................................................................................. L-173
3.2.14 Relay conveyance section........................................................................................................................................ L-173
M TIMING CHART............................................................................................................................. M-1

1. AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc and AccurioPrint C3070L ................................... M-1
1.1 Timing chart when the sub power switch becomes active (in the morning)............................................................................ M-1
1.2 Timing chart when the sub power switch becomes active (not in the morning) ..................................................................... M-1
1.3 Timing chart of the duplex mode ............................................................................................................................................ M-2
1.3.1 Operation condition ....................................................................................................................................................... M-2
1.3.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................... M-2
2. DF-706..................................................................................................................................................................... M-3
2.1 Timing chart of the duplex mode ............................................................................................................................................ M-3
lxiv
2.1.2 Timing chart diagram ..................................................................................................................................................... M-3
3. PF-602m .................................................................................................................................................................. M-4

3.1 Tray4, A4, 2 sheets of original ................................................................................................................................................ M-4
4. PF-707m .................................................................................................................................................................. M-5

4.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode........................................................................................................................................... M-5
4.1.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................... M-5
5. LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm .......................................................................................................................... M-6

5.1 A4, simplex, 2 sheets.............................................................................................................................................................. M-6
5.1.1 LU-202m, LU-202XL...................................................................................................................................................... M-6
5.1.2 LU-202XLm ................................................................................................................................................................... M-6
5.2 A3, simplex, 2 sheets.............................................................................................................................................................. M-7
6. MB-508 .................................................................................................................................................................... M-8

6.1 Timing chart of the simplex mode........................................................................................................................................... M-8
6.1.2 Time chart...................................................................................................................................................................... M-8
7. OT-510 .................................................................................................................................................................... M-9

7.1 Timing chart of the straight mode ........................................................................................................................................... M-9
7.1.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................... M-9
8. RU-518/HM-103 .................................................................................................................................................... M-10

8.1 Timing chart of the straight mode (Humidification is active) ................................................................................................. M-10
8.1.1 Operation condition ..................................................................................................................................................... M-10
8.1.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................. M-10
8.2 Timing chart of the reverse exit mode .................................................................................................................................. M-10
8.2.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................. M-10
8.3 Timing chart of the paper exit tray mode .............................................................................................................................. M-10
8.3.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................. M-11
8.4 Timing chart of the de-curler mode....................................................................................................................................... M-11
8.4.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................. M-11
9. RU-702 .................................................................................................................................................................. M-12

9.1 Timing chart of the straight mode (not accelerated) ............................................................................................................. M-12
9.1.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................. M-12
9.2 Timing chart of the straight mode (accelerated) ................................................................................................................... M-12
9.2.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................. M-12
9.3 Timing chart of the lower conveyance mode ........................................................................................................................ M-12
9.3.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................. M-12
9.4 Timing chart of the lower conveyance + purge tray mode.................................................................................................... M-12
9.4.2 Timing chart ................................................................................................................................................................. M-13
10. RU-510.................................................................................................................................................................M-14
10.1 Timing chart of the straight exit mode ................................................................................................................................ M-14
10.1.1 Operation condition ................................................................................................................................................... M-14
10.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-14
10.2 Timing chart of the single sheet reverse/exit mode ............................................................................................................ M-14
10.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-15
10.3 Timing chart of the double sheets reverse/exit conveyance mode..................................................................................... M-15
10.3.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-16
11. FS-531 .................................................................................................................................................................M-17

11.1 Timing chart of the sort mode............................................................................................................................................. M-17
11.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-17
11.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode ................................................................................................................................ M-17
lxv
11.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-18
12. FS-612 .................................................................................................................................................................M-19

12.1 Timing chart of the sort mode............................................................................................................................................. M-19
12.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-19
12.2 Timing chart of the flat-stapling mode ................................................................................................................................ M-19
12.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-20
12.3 Timing chart of the saddle stitching mode .......................................................................................................................... M-20
12.3.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-20
12.4 Timing chart of the tri-folding mode .................................................................................................................................... M-21
12.4.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-21
13. PK-512/513 ..........................................................................................................................................................M-22

13.1 Punch, 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 2 originals, 3 copies, Single side ................................................................................. M-22
14. PI-502 ..................................................................................................................................................................M-23

14.1 Timing chart of the PI automatic paper feed mode............................................................................................................. M-23
14.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-23
15. IQ-501 ..................................................................................................................................................................M-24

15.1 Timing chart of the non-reading mode................................................................................................................................ M-24
15.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-24
15.2 Timing chart of the scanner reading mode (duplex mode) ................................................................................................. M-24
15.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-24
15.3 Timing chart of the scanner+colorimeter reading mode ..................................................................................................... M-24
15.3.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-24
16. FS-532 .................................................................................................................................................................M-25

16.1 Timing chart of the straight mode ....................................................................................................................................... M-25
16.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-25
16.2 Timing chart of the staple mode ......................................................................................................................................... M-25
16.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-26
17. SD-510.................................................................................................................................................................M-27
17.1 Time chart of the saddle stitching mode............................................................................................................................. M-27
17.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-27
17.2 Timing chart of the folding mode ........................................................................................................................................ M-27
17.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-28
17.3 Timing chart of the tri-folding mode .................................................................................................................................... M-28
17.3.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-29
18. PK-522 .................................................................................................................................................................M-30

18.1 Timing chart of the punch mode ......................................................................................................................................... M-30
18.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-30
19. LS-506 .................................................................................................................................................................M-31

19.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-31
19.2 Timing chart of the shift mode ............................................................................................................................................ M-31
19.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-32
19.3 Timing chart of the sub tray mode ...................................................................................................................................... M-32
19.3.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-32
19.4 Timing chart of the coupling mode ..................................................................................................................................... M-33
19.4.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-33
lxvi
20. FD-503 .................................................................................................................................................................M-34
20.1 Timing chart of the letter fold-in mode ................................................................................................................................ M-34
20.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-34
20.2 Timing chart of the letter fold-out mode.............................................................................................................................. M-34
20.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-35
20.3 Timing chart of the double parallel mode ........................................................................................................................... M-35
20.3.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-36
20.4 Timing chart of the half-folding mode ................................................................................................................................. M-36
20.4.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-37
20.5 Timing chart of the gate fold mode ..................................................................................................................................... M-37
20.5.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-38
20.6 Timing chart of the Z-fold mode.......................................................................................................................................... M-38
20.6.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-39
20.7 Timing chart of the PI cover paper insertion mode............................................................................................................. M-39
20.7.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-40
20.8 Timing chart of the punch mode ......................................................................................................................................... M-40
20.8.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-41
21. SD-506.................................................................................................................................................................M-42
21.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-42
21.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-43
21.3 Timing chart of the overlap tri-folding mode ....................................................................................................................... M-43
21.3.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-44
21.4 Timing chart of the saddle stitching (trimmer) mode .......................................................................................................... M-45
21.4.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-46
22. SD-513.................................................................................................................................................................M-48
22.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-48
22.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-48
22.3 Timing chart of the overlap tri-folding mode ....................................................................................................................... M-48
22.3.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-49
22.4 Timing chart of the multi half-folding mode......................................................................................................................... M-49
22.4.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-49
22.5 Time chart of the saddle stitching mode............................................................................................................................. M-51
22.5.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-51
22.6 Time chart of the spine corner forming mode..................................................................................................................... M-53
22.6.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-54
22.7 Time chart of the crease and slit mode .............................................................................................................................. M-54
22.7.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-55
23. PB-503 .................................................................................................................................................................M-56

23.1 Timing chart of the sub tray paper exit mode ..................................................................................................................... M-56
23.1.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-56
23.2 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (PB cover paper supply).................................................................................... M-56
lxvii
23.2.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-57
23.3 Timing chart of the perfect binding mode (Main body cover paper supply)........................................................................ M-57
23.3.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-58
23.4 Timing chart of the relay conveyance mode....................................................................................................................... M-58
23.4.2 Timing chart............................................................................................................................................................... M-59
N WIRING DIAGRAM ........................................................................................................................N-1

1. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070............................................................................................................N-1
1.1 AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070 (1/4).................................................................................................................. N-1
1.2 AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L (2/4) ..................................................... N-2
2. DF-706......................................................................................................................................................................N-5
3. PF-602m (for WY3 or later) ......................................................................................................................................N-6
4. PF-707m ...................................................................................................................................................................N-7
4.1 PF-707m (1/2)......................................................................................................................................................................... N-7
4.2 PF-707m (2/2)......................................................................................................................................................................... N-8
5. LU-202m ...................................................................................................................................................................N-9
6. LU-202XL ...............................................................................................................................................................N-10
7. LU-202XLm ............................................................................................................................................................N-11
8. MB-508 ...................................................................................................................................................................N-12
9. OT-510 ...................................................................................................................................................................N-13
10. EF-103 ................................................................................................................................................................. N-14
11. RU-518/HM-103................................................................................................................................................... N-15
12. RU-702................................................................................................................................................................. N-16
13. RU-510................................................................................................................................................................. N-17
14. FS-531 ................................................................................................................................................................. N-18
15. FS-612 ................................................................................................................................................................. N-19
16. PK-512/513 .......................................................................................................................................................... N-20
17. PI-502 .................................................................................................................................................................. N-21
18. IQ-501 .................................................................................................................................................................. N-22
19. UK-301................................................................................................................................................................. N-23
20. FS-532 ................................................................................................................................................................. N-24
21. SD-510................................................................................................................................................................. N-25
22. PK-522 ................................................................................................................................................................. N-26
23. LS-506 ................................................................................................................................................................. N-27
24. FD-503 ................................................................................................................................................................. N-28
25. SD-506................................................................................................................................................................. N-29
26. SD-513................................................................................................................................................................. N-30
26.1 SD-513 (1/2) ........................................................................................................................................................................N-30
26.2 SD-513 (2/2) ........................................................................................................................................................................N-31
27. CR-101................................................................................................................................................................. N-32

28. TU-503 ................................................................................................................................................................. N-33
29. FD-504 ................................................................................................................................................................. N-34
30. PB-503 ................................................................................................................................................................. N-35
31. MK-737 ................................................................................................................................................................ N-36
31.1 MK-737 (1/2)........................................................................................................................................................................N-36
31.2 MK-737 (2/2)........................................................................................................................................................................N-37
31.3 MK-737 (Max MB-2000KM).................................................................................................................................................N-38
32. GP-501................................................................................................................................................................. N-39
lxviii
33. GP-502................................................................................................................................................................. N-40
O THEORY OF OPERATION C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070........................................................... O-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.1 Unit configuration.................................................................................................................................................................... O-1
1.2 Paper path .............................................................................................................................................................................. O-1
2. INTERFACE SECTION ............................................................................................................................................O-2

2.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................... O-2
2.1.1 Main body right side ...................................................................................................................................................... O-2
2.1.2 Main body left side......................................................................................................................................................... O-2
2.1.3 Main body upper side .................................................................................................................................................... O-3
3. SCANNER SECTION ...............................................................................................................................................O-4

3.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................... O-4
3.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................... O-4
3.3 Operation ................................................................................................................................................................................ O-5
3.3.1 LED exposure unit ......................................................................................................................................................... O-5
3.3.2 When the power turns ON ............................................................................................................................................. O-5
3.3.3 Control when the Start key is pressed........................................................................................................................... O-6
3.3.4 Original scanning area................................................................................................................................................... O-7
3.3.5 Original size detection control ....................................................................................................................................... O-7
3.3.6 Image processing .......................................................................................................................................................... O-9
4. WRITING SECTION ...............................................................................................................................................O-10

4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................ O-10
4.2 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................. O-11
4.2.1 Exposure path ............................................................................................................................................................. O-11
4.2.2 Writing control.............................................................................................................................................................. O-11
4.2.3 Writing area ................................................................................................................................................................. O-12
4.2.4 Color registration control ............................................................................................................................................. O-12
4.2.5 Front and back sides skew correction in the main scan direction ............................................................................... O-15
4.2.6 Back side magnification adjustment in sub scan direction .......................................................................................... O-15
4.2.7 Image stabilization control ........................................................................................................................................... O-15
5. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION .........................................................................................................................O-16

5.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................ O-16
5.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................... O-17
5.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................. O-17
5.3.1 Erase lamp (EL) control............................................................................................................................................... O-17
6. CHARGING SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................O-18

6.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................ O-18
6.2 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................. O-18
6.2.1 Charging control .......................................................................................................................................................... O-18
7. DEVELOPING SECTION .......................................................................................................................................O-19

7.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................ O-19
7.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................... O-19
7.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................. O-20
7.3.1 Developer conveyance ................................................................................................................................................ O-20
7.3.2 Developing bias ........................................................................................................................................................... O-20
7.3.3 Developing suction control .......................................................................................................................................... O-20
7.3.4 Developing cooling control .......................................................................................................................................... O-22
7.3.5 Auto refining developing system.................................................................................................................................. O-23
8. TONER SUPPLY SECTION ...................................................................................................................................O-25

8.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................ O-25
8.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................... O-26
8.2.1 Toner bottle drive......................................................................................................................................................... O-26
8.2.2 Toner supply drive ....................................................................................................................................................... O-26
8.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................. O-27
8.3.1 Toner conveyance device............................................................................................................................................ O-27
8.3.2 Toner supply control to the toner hopper..................................................................................................................... O-28
8.3.3 Toner supply control to the developing unit................................................................................................................. O-28
8.3.4 Remaining toner amount detection control.................................................................................................................. O-28
8.3.5 Stop control of printing without toner ........................................................................................................................... O-28
lxix
9. INTERMEDIATE TRANSFER SECTION ...............................................................................................................O-29
9.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................ O-29
9.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................................................................................... O-30
9.2.1 Transfer belt conveyance pressure drive .................................................................................................................... O-30
9.2.2 2nd transfer pressure release mechanism .................................................................................................................. O-31
9.3 Operation .............................................................................................................................................................................. O-31
9.3.1 Transfer belt conveyance, 1st transfer roller pressure and release mechanism ......................................................... O-31
9.3.2 1st transfer control....................................................................................................................................................... O-32
9.3.3 2nd transfer mechanism .............................................................................................................................................. O-32
9.3.4 2nd transfer control...................................................................................................................................................... O-33
9.3.5 Separation claw control ............................................................................................................................................... O-34
9.3.6 Image correction unit shutter mechanism.................................................................................................................... O-35
9.3.7 Blade setting mode control .......................................................................................................................................... O-36
9.3.8 Belt filming prevention control ..................................................................................................................................... O-36
10. TONER COLLECTION SECTION ....................................................................................................................... O-37

10.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................... O-37
10.2 Drive ................................................................................................................................................................................... O-38
10.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................ O-38
10.3.1 Toner collection control ..............................................................................................................................................O-38
10.3.2 Waste toner box detection control ..............................................................................................................................O-38
10.3.3 Waste toner box full detection control ........................................................................................................................O-39
11. PAPER FEED SECTION ..................................................................................................................................... O-40

11.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................... O-40
11.2 Drive ................................................................................................................................................................................... O-41
11.2.1 Paper feed drive .........................................................................................................................................................O-41
11.2.2 Tray up down drive .....................................................................................................................................................O-42
11.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................ O-42
11.3.1 Up down control..........................................................................................................................................................O-42
11.3.2 Paper size detection control .......................................................................................................................................O-43
11.3.3 Paper feed control ......................................................................................................................................................O-45
11.3.4 Remaining paper detection control.............................................................................................................................O-46
11.3.5 Dehumidification heater control (HT-511 option)........................................................................................................O-48
12. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION ................................................................................................................ O-49

12.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................... O-49
12.2 Drive ................................................................................................................................................................................... O-49
12.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................ O-49
12.3.1 Vertical conveyance control........................................................................................................................................O-49
13. REGISTRATION SECTION ................................................................................................................................. O-51

13.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................... O-51
13.2 Drive ................................................................................................................................................................................... O-52
13.2.1 Registration roller drive, registration roller swing drive...............................................................................................O-52
13.2.2 Registration roller pressure release drive...................................................................................................................O-52
13.2.3 Loop roller drive..........................................................................................................................................................O-53
13.2.4 Loop roller pressure release drive ..............................................................................................................................O-53
13.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................ O-53
13.3.1 Loop control................................................................................................................................................................O-53
13.3.2 Loop roller pressure release control ...........................................................................................................................O-54
13.3.3 Registration roller pressure release control................................................................................................................O-55
13.3.4 Centering adjustment control......................................................................................................................................O-55
13.3.5 Registration operation ................................................................................................................................................O-56
13.3.6 Paper leading edge timing adjustment control ...........................................................................................................O-57
13.3.7 Registration speed control..........................................................................................................................................O-58
14. FUSING SECTION .............................................................................................................................................. O-59

14.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................... O-59
14.2 Drive ................................................................................................................................................................................... O-60
14.2.1 Fusing roller drive .......................................................................................................................................................O-60
14.2.2 Fusing pressure release drive ....................................................................................................................................O-61
14.2.3 Fusing swing drive......................................................................................................................................................O-62
14.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................ O-62
14.3.1 Fusing roller drive control ...........................................................................................................................................O-62
14.3.2 Pressure release control.............................................................................................................................................O-63
14.3.3 Fusing temperature control.........................................................................................................................................O-64
14.3.4 Malfunction protection ................................................................................................................................................O-66
14.3.5 Fusing roller/Lw cooling control ..................................................................................................................................O-66
lxx
14.3.6 Fusing recovery control ..............................................................................................................................................O-66
14.3.7 Fusing air separation control ......................................................................................................................................O-67
14.3.8 Fusing swing control...................................................................................................................................................O-68
14.3.9 Fusing control .............................................................................................................................................................O-68
15. DUPLEX SECTION.............................................................................................................................................. O-70

15.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................... O-70
15.2 Drive ................................................................................................................................................................................... O-70
15.2.1 Intermediate conveyance, ADU conveyance drive.....................................................................................................O-70
15.2.2 ADU reverse roller drive .............................................................................................................................................O-71
15.2.3 Intermediate conveyance roller pressure and release drive.......................................................................................O-71
15.2.4 ADU roller pressure and release drive .......................................................................................................................O-72
15.2.5 Banner paper conveyance drive.................................................................................................................................O-72
15.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................ O-73
15.3.1 Intermediate conveyance roller pressure and release mechanism ............................................................................O-73
15.3.2 ADU roller pressure and release drive .......................................................................................................................O-73
15.3.3 Paper reverse control .................................................................................................................................................O-74
15.3.4 ADU conveyance control ............................................................................................................................................O-76
15.3.5 ADU conveyance control (banner paper 487.8 mm to 762 mm) ................................................................................O-77
16. REVERSE AND EXIT SECTION ......................................................................................................................... O-79

16.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................... O-79
16.2 Drive ................................................................................................................................................................................... O-80
16.2.1 Reverse and exit conveyance drive 1.........................................................................................................................O-80
16.2.2 Reverse and exit conveyance drive 2.........................................................................................................................O-81
16.2.3 Paper exit drive...........................................................................................................................................................O-81
16.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................ O-82
16.3.1 Conveyance control....................................................................................................................................................O-82
16.3.2 Reverse and exit timing control ..................................................................................................................................O-83
16.3.3 Paper exit de-curler roller pressure control ................................................................................................................O-84
16.3.4 Reverse de-curler roller pressure control ...................................................................................................................O-84
17. CHARGE CONTROL SECTION .......................................................................................................................... O-86

17.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................................................................................... O-86
17.2 Drive ................................................................................................................................................................................... O-86
17.3 Operation............................................................................................................................................................................ O-87
17.3.1 Conveyance control....................................................................................................................................................O-87
17.3.2 Charging control .........................................................................................................................................................O-87
17.3.3 Fan control..................................................................................................................................................................O-87
17.3.4 Open close detection control ......................................................................................................................................O-88
18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL ................................................................................................................... O-90

18.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................................ O-90
18.2 Long correction control ....................................................................................................................................................... O-90
18.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................O-90
18.2.2 Automatic long correction control ...............................................................................................................................O-90
18.2.3 Manual long correction control ...................................................................................................................................O-91
18.2.4 Operation flow of the long correction control ..............................................................................................................O-92
18.2.5 Long correction control and color density control (periodical adjustment) with RU-518.............................................O-93
18.3 Stabilization control between images ................................................................................................................................. O-94
18.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................O-94
18.3.2 Dot diameter correction between images ...................................................................................................................O-94
18.4 Middle correction control .................................................................................................................................................... O-95
18.4.1 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................O-95
18.4.2 Automatic middle correction control ...........................................................................................................................O-95
18.4.3 Middle correction for the measurement ......................................................................................................................O-95
18.4.4 Operation flow of the middle correction control ..........................................................................................................O-96
18.5 Other image stabilization controls ...................................................................................................................................... O-96
18.5.1 Color registration correction control............................................................................................................................O-96
19. IMAGE PROCESSING SECTION ....................................................................................................................... O-98

19.1 Image processing in the scanner section ........................................................................................................................... O-98
19.1.1 Image processing flow in the scanner section............................................................................................................O-98
19.1.2 CCD sensor, CIS ........................................................................................................................................................O-98
19.1.3 A/D conversion ...........................................................................................................................................................O-98
19.1.4 Shading correction, CIS correction.............................................................................................................................O-98
19.1.5 RGB gap correction ....................................................................................................................................................O-98
19.1.6 Chroma aberration correction.....................................................................................................................................O-98
19.1.7 Color space conversion ..............................................................................................................................................O-99
19.1.8 Magnification processing in the main scan direction ..................................................................................................O-99
lxxi
19.1.9 Color conversion, character edge regeneration, color balance adjustment ...............................................................O-99
19.1.10 Area discrimination ...................................................................................................................................................O-99
19.1.11 Image distinction ......................................................................................................................................................O-99
19.1.12 AE control .................................................................................................................................................................O-99
19.1.13 Reduction processing in the main and sub scan direction .......................................................................................O-99
19.2 Image processing in the write section ................................................................................................................................ O-99
19.2.1 Image processing flow in the write section .................................................................................................................O-99
19.2.2 DRAM (Local), DRAM (System), HDD .....................................................................................................................O-100
19.2.3 Color conversion, ACS process................................................................................................................................O-100
19.2.4 Image compressing (Scanner) .................................................................................................................................O-100
19.2.5 Image expansion (Scanner) .....................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.6 Magnification processing in the sub scan direction ..................................................................................................O-101
19.2.7 Cell average (Scanner).............................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.8 Image compressing (IC-605) ....................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.9 Image enlargement (IC-605, IC-313*1, IC-417*2, IC-314*3)....................................................................................O-101
19.2.10 Skeletonization/Outline letter emphasis .................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.11 Outline emphasis....................................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.12 Smoothing ..............................................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.13 Toner amount save ................................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.14 Color sensor correction ..........................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.15 IC-605 calibration correction (Standard) ................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.16 Density balance ......................................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.17 Gradation correction gamma ..................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.18 G7 calibration correction ........................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.19 Screen processing..................................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.20 2-dimensional position correction ...........................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.21 Delay control between drums .................................................................................................................................O-101
19.2.22 PWM gamma..........................................................................................................................................................O-102
19.2.23 PWM conversion ....................................................................................................................................................O-102
19.2.24 Writing unit/Y, writing unit/M, writing unit/C, writing unit/K .....................................................................................O-102
20. POWER SOURCE SECTION ............................................................................................................................ O-103

20.1 Operating parts with the connection of the power cord .................................................................................................... O-103
20.1.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................O-103
20.1.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-103
20.2 Operating parts when the main power switch (SW1) becomes active. ............................................................................ O-103
20.2.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................O-103
20.2.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-103
20.3 Operating parts when the sub power switch (SW2) becomes active. .............................................................................. O-104
20.3.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................O-104
20.3.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-104
20.4 Operating parts when the dehumidification heater switch (SW5) becomes active........................................................... O-105
20.4.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................................................O-105
20.4.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................O-105
21. FAN SECTION................................................................................................................................................... O-106

21.1 Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................... O-106
21.2 Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................... O-107
21.2.1 Image processing cooling fan (FM1) control ............................................................................................................O-107
21.2.2 Power supply cooling fan/1 (FM2) control ................................................................................................................O-107
21.2.3 Power supply cooling fans/2 (FM3), power supply cooling fans/3 (FM4), power supply cooling fans/4 (FM5) control
..................................................................................................................................................................................O-107
21.2.4 Drum motor cooling fan/1 (FM6), drum motor cooling fan/2 (FM7) control ..............................................................O-107
21.2.5 Fusing exhaust fan (FM8) control.............................................................................................................................O-107
21.2.6 Fusing belt exhaust fan (FM9) control ......................................................................................................................O-108
21.2.7 Fusing separation fan/1 (FM10), fusing separation fan/2 (FM11), fusing separation fan/3 (FM12) control..............O-108
21.2.8 Fusing intake fan (FM13) control..............................................................................................................................O-108
21.2.9 Exhaust fan/Rr (FM14) abnormality..........................................................................................................................O-108
21.2.10 Exhaust fan/Fr (FM15) control................................................................................................................................O-108
21.2.11 Transfer belt fan (FM17) control .............................................................................................................................O-109
21.2.12 PH cooling fan (FM18) control................................................................................................................................O-109
21.2.13 Tacking fan/1 (FM19), Tacking fan/2 (FM20), Tacking fan/3 (FM21) control .........................................................O-109
21.2.14 Tacking fan/4 (FM35), Tacking fan/5 (FM36) .........................................................................................................O-109
21.2.15 Cyclone exhaust fan (FM22) control ......................................................................................................................O-109
21.2.16 Paper exit cooling fan/1 (FM23), paper exit cooling fan/2 (FM25) control..............................................................O-110
21.2.17 ADU exhaust fan (FM24) control ............................................................................................................................O-110
21.2.18 Developing fan/1 (FM26), Developing fan/2 (FM27) and Developing fan/3 (FM28) control ...................................O-110
21.2.19 ADU cooling fan (FM29) control .............................................................................................................................O-110
21.2.20 ADU reverse motor fan (FM30) control ..................................................................................................................O-110
lxxii
21.2.21 Fusing roller cooling fans/1 (FM33) and Fusing roller cooling fans/2 (FM34) control ............................................O-111
22. COUNTER SECTION ........................................................................................................................................ O-112

22.1 Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................... O-112
22.2 Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................... O-112
23. ACS CONTROL ................................................................................................................................................. O-113

23.1 Switching from color mode to black and white mode ....................................................................................................... O-113
23.1.1 Outline ......................................................................................................................................................................O-113
23.1.2 Sequence of switching from color mode to black and white mode...........................................................................O-113
23.1.3 Sequence of switching from black and white mode to color mode...........................................................................O-113
23.1.4 Timing of switching from color mode to black and white mode ................................................................................O-113
23.2 Count at ACS.................................................................................................................................................................... O-113
23.2.1 Black and white mode (1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C released) ............................O-113
23.2.2 Color mode (1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C, 1st transfer roller/K pressed) .............O-113
24. IC-605/HDD/UPGRADE KIT (UK)...................................................................................................................... O-114

24.1 Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................... O-114
24.2 Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................... O-116
24.2.1 Components of IC-605A (Option for C3080, C3070, C3070L) .................................................................................O-116
24.2.2 Components of IC-605B (Option for C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, C73hc) ..................................................................O-117
24.2.3 HDD section components.........................................................................................................................................O-117
24.2.4 Components of UK-104 ............................................................................................................................................O-117
24.2.5 Components of UK-218 ............................................................................................................................................O-117
24.2.6 VI-509 .......................................................................................................................................................................O-117
24.2.7 VI-513 .......................................................................................................................................................................O-117
24.2.8 VI-511 .......................................................................................................................................................................O-117
25. AUTHENTICATION DEVICE ............................................................................................................................. O-118

25.1 Authentication unit (IC card type: AU-201S)..................................................................................................................... O-118
P THEORY OF OPERATION DF-706 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.1 Unit configuration.....................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. PAPER FEED SECTION .......................................................................................................................................... P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3.1 Original set/empty detection ...........................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3.2 Original size detection mechanism.................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.3 Up/down control for the document feed tray...................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.4 Original take-up control ..................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.5 Double feed detection control.........................................................................................................................................P-5
3. REGISTRATION SECTION...................................................................................................................................... P-7

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-7
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-7
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-7
3.3.1 Registration control.........................................................................................................................................................P-7
4. READ SECTION.......................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.3.1 Reading transport control ...............................................................................................................................................P-9
4.3.2 Reading roller pressure release control........................................................................................................................P-10
4.3.3 DF original glass contamination prevention control......................................................................................................P-10
4.3.4 CIS original reading control ..........................................................................................................................................P-11
4.3.5 CIS control when power is turned ON ..........................................................................................................................P-12
4.3.6 CIS control when the document is loaded ....................................................................................................................P-12
4.3.7 CIS control when the start key is pressed ....................................................................................................................P-12
4.3.8 CIS glass contamination prevention control .................................................................................................................P-13
4.3.9 Opening and closing guide set detection......................................................................................................................P-14
5. PAPER EXIT SECTION ......................................................................................................................................... P-15

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-15
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-15
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-15
5.3.1 Document exit mechanism ...........................................................................................................................................P-15
lxxiii
6. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................P-16
6.1 Open and close detection section..........................................................................................................................................P-16
6.1.1 DF angle open and close detection ..............................................................................................................................P-16
6.1.2 DF open and close detection........................................................................................................................................P-16
6.2 Fan control.............................................................................................................................................................................P-16
6.2.1 Function........................................................................................................................................................................P-16
6.2.2 Control condition...........................................................................................................................................................P-16
P THEORY OF OPERATION PF-602m/HT-504/505.........................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2. PAPER FEED SUCTION SECTION......................................................................................................................... P-3

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.2.1 Tray lift drive ...................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.2.2 Paper feed drive .............................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.2.3 Pick-up drive ...................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.1 Up down control..............................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.2 Size detection control .....................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.3 Pick-up mechanism ........................................................................................................................................................P-7
2.3.4 Separation mechanism...................................................................................................................................................P-7
2.3.5 Air assist mechanism......................................................................................................................................................P-8
2.3.6 Paper empty detection control........................................................................................................................................P-9
2.3.7 Remaining paper detection control.................................................................................................................................P-9
2.3.8 Tray lock control .............................................................................................................................................................P-9
3. CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................................................................................................................... P-11

3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-11
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3.1 Pre-registration control .................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3.2 Conveyance control......................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3.3 Multi feed detection control...........................................................................................................................................P-13
4. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................P-14
4.1 Dehumidification heater control .............................................................................................................................................P-14
4.2 Tray damper mechanism .......................................................................................................................................................P-14
4.3 Main body assist mechanism.................................................................................................................................................P-14
4.3.1 Filter replacement assy retaining mechanism ..............................................................................................................P-14
4.3.2 Filter replacement assy ventilation mechanism............................................................................................................P-14
5. HT-504/505 (OPTIONAL) ....................................................................................................................................... P-16

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-16
5.2 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-16
5.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control ....................................................................................................................................P-16
P THEORY OF OPERATION PF-707m/HT-506................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. PAPER FEED TRAY SECTION ............................................................................................................................... P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2.1 Tray lift drive ...................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2.2 Side guide shutter drive..................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2.3 Paper leading edge shutter drive....................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.1 Up down control..............................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.3 Air control .......................................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.4 Paper empty detection control......................................................................................................................................P-13
2.3.5 Remaining paper detection control...............................................................................................................................P-13
2.3.6 Tray lock control ...........................................................................................................................................................P-14
3. PAPER FEED SUCTION SECTION....................................................................................................................... P-15
lxxiv
3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-15
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-15
3.2.1 Paper feed drive ...........................................................................................................................................................P-15
3.2.2 Paper feed suction drive...............................................................................................................................................P-16
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-16
3.3.1 Suction control..............................................................................................................................................................P-16
3.3.2 Paper feed belt control .................................................................................................................................................P-16
4. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION ................................................................................................................... P-18

4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-18
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-18
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-19
4.3.1 Vertical conveyance control..........................................................................................................................................P-19
5. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION ............................................................................................................. P-20

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-20
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-20
5.2.1 Horizontal conveyance drive ........................................................................................................................................P-20
5.2.2 Horizontal conveyance roller pressure release drive....................................................................................................P-21
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-21
5.3.1 Pre-registration control .................................................................................................................................................P-21
5.3.2 Horizontal conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................P-21
5.3.3 Horizontal conveyance roller pressure release control.................................................................................................P-21
5.3.4 Multi-feed detection control ..........................................................................................................................................P-22
6. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................P-23
6.1 Internal heater control............................................................................................................................................................P-23
6.2 Main body assist mechanism.................................................................................................................................................P-23
6.2.1 Machine internal cooling mechanism ...........................................................................................................................P-23
7. HT-506 (Option)......................................................................................................................................................P-24
7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-24
7.2 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-24
P THEORY OF OPERATION FA-502................................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. TANDEM CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................................................................................................... P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.1 Tandem conveyance control ..........................................................................................................................................P-3
P THEORY OF OPERATION LU-202m/LU-202XL/LU-202XLm/HT-503/HT-515/MK-746................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.1.1 LU-202m.........................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.1.2 LU-202XL, LU-202XLm ..................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.1 LU-202m.........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.2 LU-202XL, LU-202XLm ..................................................................................................................................................P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.1.1 LU-202m.........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.1.2 LU-202XL, LU-202XLm ..................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.2.2 Pick-up drive ...................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.1 Paper feed control ..........................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.2 Paper empty detection control........................................................................................................................................P-8
2.3.5 Double feed detection control (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm) ..............................................................................................P-11
3. UP DOWN SECTION .............................................................................................................................................P-12
lxxv
3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.1.1 LU-202m.......................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.1.2 LU-202XLm ..................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-13
3.2.1 LU-202m.......................................................................................................................................................................P-13
3.2.2 LU-202XL, LU-202XLm ................................................................................................................................................P-14
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-14
3.3.1 Up down control (LU-202m) .........................................................................................................................................P-14
3.3.2 Up down control (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)...................................................................................................................P-15
4. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.1 Dehumidification heater control .............................................................................................................................................P-17
4.1.1 LU-202m.......................................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.1.2 LU-202XL, LU-202XLm ................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.2 Interlock switch control ..........................................................................................................................................................P-17
5. HT-503 (OPTIONAL) ..............................................................................................................................................P-18

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-18
5.1.1 LU-202m.......................................................................................................................................................................P-18
5.1.2 LU-202XL, LU-202XLm ................................................................................................................................................P-18
5.2 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-18
5.2.1 Dehumidifier fan heater control (LU-202m, LU-202XL) ................................................................................................P-18
5.2.2 Dehumidifier fan heater control (LU-202XLm)..............................................................................................................P-19
6. HT-515 (OPTIONAL) ..............................................................................................................................................P-21

6.1 Configuration (HT-515) ..........................................................................................................................................................P-21
6.2 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-21
7. MK-746 (OPTIONAL) .............................................................................................................................................P-23

7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-23
7.2 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................P-23
P THEORY OF OPERATION MB-506 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.2 Up down drive.................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.1 Up down control..............................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.2 Paper size detection control ...........................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.4 Paper empty control .......................................................................................................................................................P-4
P THEORY OF OPERATION MB-508 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. BYPASS PAPER FEED SECTION .......................................................................................................................... P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2.2 Up down drive.................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.1 Up down control..............................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.4 Paper empty control .......................................................................................................................................................P-5
3. RELAY CONVEYANCE SECTION........................................................................................................................... P-6

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-6
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
lxxvi
3.2.1 Bypass relay conveyance drive ......................................................................................................................................P-6
3.2.2 LU relay conveyance drive .............................................................................................................................................P-7
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-7
3.3.1 Bypass relay conveyance control ...................................................................................................................................P-7
3.3.2 LU relay conveyance control ..........................................................................................................................................P-8
3.3.3 Bypass conveyance door open-close detection control .................................................................................................P-8
3.3.4 Relay conveyance door open-close detection control ....................................................................................................P-9
4. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................P-10
4.1 Door open-close detection control .........................................................................................................................................P-10
4.1.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................P-10
4.1.2 Upper door open close detection mechanism ..............................................................................................................P-10
4.1.3 Front door open close detection mechanism................................................................................................................P-11
P THEORY OF OPERATION MK-744C ............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. STATUS INDICATOR LIGHT SECTION .................................................................................................................. P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.1 Lighting control ...............................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.2 Connection specification.................................................................................................................................................P-3
P THEORY OF OPERATION OT-510 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.1 Unit configration.......................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION .......................................................................................................................... P-3

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.1 Line speed switch control ...............................................................................................................................................P-4
3. MAIN TRAY SECTION .............................................................................................................................................P-5

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-5
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
3.2.1 Main tray up-down drive .................................................................................................................................................P-6
3.2.2 Paper exit roller/paper exit opening drive .......................................................................................................................P-6
3.2.3 Gripper/paper exit pressure drive ...................................................................................................................................P-7
3.2.4 Paper exit alignment plate drive .....................................................................................................................................P-8
3.2.5 Main tray shift drive ........................................................................................................................................................P-8
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-8
3.3.1 Paper exit opening control..............................................................................................................................................P-8
3.3.2 Gripper control................................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.3.3 Paper pressure control .................................................................................................................................................P-10
3.3.4 Main tray up/down control ............................................................................................................................................P-10
3.3.5 Paper exit alignment control .........................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3.6 Main tray shift control ...................................................................................................................................................P-12
P THEORY OF OPERATION OT-511 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ....................................................................................................................................... P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3.1 Conveyance control........................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3.2 Paper exit full detection control ......................................................................................................................................P-2
3. CONVEYANCE DOOR SECTION............................................................................................................................ P-3

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
3.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
3.2.1 Conveyance door open and close control ......................................................................................................................P-3
P THEORY OF OPERATION EF-103................................................................................................P-1
lxxvii
1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.1 Way to distinguish the fusing unit between C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L and EF-103 ............P-1
1.3 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2. FUSING SECTION ...................................................................................................................................................P-3

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.2.1 Fusing roller drive ...........................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.2.2 Fusing pressure release drive ........................................................................................................................................P-4
2.2.3 Fusing swing drive..........................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.1 Fusing roller drive control ...............................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.2 Pressure release control.................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.3 Fusing temperature control.............................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.4 Malfunction protection ....................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.5 Fusing roller/Lw cooling control ......................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.6 Fusing recovery control ..................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.7 Fusing air separation control ..........................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.8 Fusing swing control.......................................................................................................................................................P-7
3. PAPER FEED ASSIST SECTION ............................................................................................................................ P-8

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-8
3.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-8
P THEORY OF OPERATION RU-518/HM-103 .................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.1 Straight mode .................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.2 Reverse exit mode..........................................................................................................................................................P-3
1.2.3 Output tray mode............................................................................................................................................................P-3
1.2.4 De-curler mode ...............................................................................................................................................................P-4
1.2.5 De-curler + reverse exit mode ........................................................................................................................................P-5
1.2.6 De-curler + output tray mode..........................................................................................................................................P-5
2. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION ............................................................................................................... P-7

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-7
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-8
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-8
2.3.1 Horizontal conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................P-8
3. DE-CURLER SECTION..........................................................................................................................................P-10
3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-10
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-11
3.2.1 De-curler conveyance drive..........................................................................................................................................P-11
3.2.2 De-curler belt drive .......................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.2.3 De-curler pressure drive ...............................................................................................................................................P-13
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-14
3.3.1 De-curler conveyance control.......................................................................................................................................P-14
3.3.2 De-curler pressure control ............................................................................................................................................P-15
4. REVERSE EXIT SECTION .................................................................................................................................... P-17

4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.2.1 Reverse exit conveyance drive.....................................................................................................................................P-17
4.2.2 Reverse exit pressure release drive .............................................................................................................................P-18
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-18
4.3.1 Reverse exit conveyance control..................................................................................................................................P-18
4.3.2 Reverse exit pressure release control ..........................................................................................................................P-19
5. OUTPUT PAPER DENSITY DETECTION SECTION ............................................................................................ P-22

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-22
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-23
5.2.1 Color sensor shutter drive ............................................................................................................................................P-23
5.2.2 Paper pressure drive ....................................................................................................................................................P-23
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-23
5.3.1 Image density detection control....................................................................................................................................P-23
5.3.2 Color sensor shutter control .........................................................................................................................................P-24
lxxviii
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION ............................................................................................................................................P-27
6.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-27
6.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-27
6.2.1 Paper exit conveyance drive ........................................................................................................................................P-27
6.2.2 Paper exit gate drive.....................................................................................................................................................P-28
6.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-28
6.3.1 Paper exit conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................P-28
6.3.2 Paper exit gate control..................................................................................................................................................P-28
7. CONVEYANCE PATH SWITCHING SECTION ..................................................................................................... P-30

7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-30
7.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-30
7.2.1 De-curler entrance gate drive .......................................................................................................................................P-30
7.2.2 Conveyance path switching gate drive .........................................................................................................................P-31
7.2.3 Reverse exit gate drive.................................................................................................................................................P-32
7.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-32
7.3.1 De-curler entrance gate control ....................................................................................................................................P-32
7.3.2 Conveyance path switching gate control ......................................................................................................................P-33
7.3.3 Reverse exit gate control..............................................................................................................................................P-35
8. WATER SUPPLY SECTION (HM-103) .................................................................................................................. P-36

8.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-36
8.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-37
8.2.1 Water feed path ............................................................................................................................................................P-37
8.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-37
8.3.1 Water supply control.....................................................................................................................................................P-37
9. HUMIDIFICATION SECTION (HM-103) ................................................................................................................. P-43

9.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-43
9.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-44
9.2.1 Humidification section conveyance drive......................................................................................................................P-44
9.2.2 Humidification roller pressure drive ..............................................................................................................................P-45
9.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-46
9.3.1 Humidification section conveyance control...................................................................................................................P-46
9.3.2 Humidification roller pressure release control ..............................................................................................................P-47
10. OTHERS .............................................................................................................................................................. P-50

10.1 Fan control...........................................................................................................................................................................P-50
10.1.1 Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................................P-50
10.1.2 Outline ........................................................................................................................................................................P-51
P THEORY OF OPERATION RU-702 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.1 Straight mode .................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.2 Lower conveyance mode................................................................................................................................................P-3
1.2.3 Lower conveyance + purge tray mode ...........................................................................................................................P-3

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.1 Horizontal conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................P-6
3. LOWER CONVEYANCE SECTION ......................................................................................................................... P-8

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-8
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.3.1 Lower conveyance control..............................................................................................................................................P-9
4. PURGE TRAY SECTION ....................................................................................................................................... P-11

4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-11
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-11
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-12
4.3.1 Purge tray conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................P-12
5. CONVEYANCE PATH SWITCHING SECTION ..................................................................................................... P-13

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-13
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-13
5.2.1 Lower conveyance entrance gate drive........................................................................................................................P-13
lxxix
5.2.2 Conveyance path switching gate drive .........................................................................................................................P-14
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-14
5.3.1 Lower conveyance entrance gate control.....................................................................................................................P-14
5.3.2 Conveyance path switching gate control ......................................................................................................................P-15
6. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................P-17
6.1 Fan control.............................................................................................................................................................................P-17
6.1.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................................................P-17
6.1.2 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................P-17
P THEORY OF OPERATION MK-740/MK-740m ..............................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2.1 Paper path of Main Body + MB-506 + OT-511 + MK-740 ..............................................................................................P-1
1.2.2 Paper path of Main Body + LU-202XL + OT-511 + MK-740...........................................................................................P-2
1.2.3 Paper path of Main Body + MB-531 + FS-531/612 + MK-740........................................................................................P-2
1.2.4 Paper path of Main Body + MB-506 + LU-202XL or LU-202XLm + FS-532 or OT-510 + MK-740 or MK-740m............P-2
1.2.5 Paper path of Main Body + PF-707m + MB-508 + LU-202XLm + FS-532 or OT-510 + MK-740 or MK-740m ..............P-3
P THEORY OF OPERATION RU-510 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2.1 Straight conveyance .......................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2.2 Reverse/exit conveyance ...............................................................................................................................................P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2.1 Conveyance drive...........................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2.2 Straight gate drive ..........................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching control ................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.2 Paper feed mechanism...................................................................................................................................................P-5
3. STACKER SECTION................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.2.1 Assist guide drive ...........................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.2.2 CD alignment drive .......................................................................................................................................................P-10
3.2.3 FD alignment drive .......................................................................................................................................................P-10
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-10
3.3.1 Conveyance path switching control ..............................................................................................................................P-10
3.3.2 Horizontal alignment control .........................................................................................................................................P-11
3.3.3 Vertical alignment control .............................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3.4 Reverse/exit control......................................................................................................................................................P-13
3.3.5 Stack assist fan control.................................................................................................................................................P-16
P THEORY OF OPERATION FS-531................................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode.............................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.2 Sub tray mode ................................................................................................................................................................P-3
1.2.3 Staple mode ...................................................................................................................................................................P-3

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed)...................................................................................................P-6
2.3.2 FS conveyance control ...................................................................................................................................................P-7
2.3.3 Gate drive control ...........................................................................................................................................................P-7
2.3.4 Bypass gate control ........................................................................................................................................................P-8
2.3.5 Shift control.....................................................................................................................................................................P-9
lxxx
2.3.6 Paper exit roller control.................................................................................................................................................P-10
2.3.7 Paper exit opening solenoid control .............................................................................................................................P-10
2.3.8 Paper exit opening control............................................................................................................................................P-11
2.3.9 Sub tray paper exit control............................................................................................................................................P-11
3. MAIN TRAY SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................P-13

3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-13
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-13
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-14
3.3.1 Tray up down control ....................................................................................................................................................P-14
4. STACKER SECTION..............................................................................................................................................P-16
4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-16
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-16
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.3.1 Alignment control..........................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.3.2 Stopper control .............................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.3.3 Stacker entrance conveyance control ..........................................................................................................................P-17
4.3.4 Stacker paper exit control.............................................................................................................................................P-19
5. STAPLER SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................P-20

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-20
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-20
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-20
5.3.1 Stapler movement control.............................................................................................................................................P-20
5.3.2 Stapler control ..............................................................................................................................................................P-21

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.1 None sort/sort/group mode.............................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.2 Sub tray mode ................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.3 Staple mode ...................................................................................................................................................................P-3
1.2.4 Center folding/saddle stitching mode .............................................................................................................................P-3
1.2.5 Tri-folding mode..............................................................................................................................................................P-4

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.1 Punch registration control (Only when PK is installed)...................................................................................................P-6
2.3.2 FS conveyance control ...................................................................................................................................................P-7
2.3.3 Gate drive control ...........................................................................................................................................................P-7
2.3.4 Bypass gate control ........................................................................................................................................................P-8
2.3.5 Shift control.....................................................................................................................................................................P-9
2.3.6 Paper exit roller control.................................................................................................................................................P-10
2.3.7 Paper exit opening solenoid control .............................................................................................................................P-10
2.3.9 Sub tray paper exit control............................................................................................................................................P-12

3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-13
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-13
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-14
3.3.1 Tray up down control ....................................................................................................................................................P-14
4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-16
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.3.1 Alignment/Up control ....................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.3.2 Alignment/Lw control ....................................................................................................................................................P-18
4.3.3 Stopper control .............................................................................................................................................................P-18
4.3.4 Stacker entrance conveyance control ..........................................................................................................................P-20
4.3.5 Stacker paper exit control.............................................................................................................................................P-22

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-24
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-24
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-25
lxxxi
6. HALF-FOLDING/SADDLE-STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING SECTION ........................................................................ P-28

6.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-28
6.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-28
6.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-29
6.3.1 Folding knife control .....................................................................................................................................................P-29
6.3.2 Folding conveyance control..........................................................................................................................................P-29
6.3.3 Tri-folding gate control..................................................................................................................................................P-30
P THEORY OF OPERATION PK-512/513 ........................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. PUNCH SECTION ....................................................................................................................................................P-2

2.1 Composition.............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.1 Punch shift drive .............................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.2 Punch drive.....................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.1 Punch standby position movement control.....................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.2 Punch position correction control ...................................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.3 Punch control..................................................................................................................................................................P-6
3. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION ........................................................................................................................... P-9

3.1 Composition.............................................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.3.1 Punch scraps box control ...............................................................................................................................................P-9
P THEORY OF OPERATION PI-502 .................................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2.1 Automatic sheet feed (Online operation) ........................................................................................................................P-1
1.2.2 Manual sheet feed (Offline operation) ............................................................................................................................P-1

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.2 Tray lift drive ...................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.1 Tray lift mechanism ........................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.2 Pick-up mechanism ........................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.3 Separation mechanism...................................................................................................................................................P-4
P THEORY OF OPERATION IQ-501 ................................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2.2 Conveyance mount lever lock drive................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.2 Conveyance mount lever lock mechanism .....................................................................................................................P-5
2.3.3 Scanner calibration unit/1 evacuation mechanism .........................................................................................................P-7
3. SCANNER SECTION/SCANNER CALIBRATION SECTION .................................................................................. P-8

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-8
3.1.1 Scanner section..............................................................................................................................................................P-8
lxxxii
3.1.2 Scanner calibration section ............................................................................................................................................P-9
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-11
3.2.1 Scanner calibration section rotation drive.....................................................................................................................P-11
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3.1 Scanner reading control ...............................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3.2 Scanner calibration section rotation control..................................................................................................................P-13
3.3.3 Scanner cleaning mechanism ......................................................................................................................................P-15
3.3.4 Shading correction........................................................................................................................................................P-17
3.3.5 Scanner dust detection control .....................................................................................................................................P-18
4. COLORIMETER SECTION/COLORIMETER CALIBRATION SECTION ............................................................... P-20

4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-20
4.1.1 Colorimeter section.......................................................................................................................................................P-20
4.1.2 Colorimeter calibration section .....................................................................................................................................P-21
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-22
4.2.1 Colorimeter calibration section rotation drive ...............................................................................................................P-22
4.2.2 Colorimeter calibration section up down drive..............................................................................................................P-22
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-23
4.3.1 Colorimetry control .......................................................................................................................................................P-23
4.3.2 Colorimetry trigger control ............................................................................................................................................P-23
4.3.3 Thermochromism correction .........................................................................................................................................P-24
4.3.4 Colorimeter white calibration ........................................................................................................................................P-25
4.3.5 Colorimeter dust detection control................................................................................................................................P-26
4.3.6 Colorimeter calibration section position control ............................................................................................................P-26
5. FAN CONTROL ......................................................................................................................................................P-28

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-28
5.2 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-28
5.2.1 Machine internal cooling mechanism ...........................................................................................................................P-28
5.2.2 Scanner cooling mechanism ........................................................................................................................................P-29
5.2.3 Colorimeter cooling mechanism ...................................................................................................................................P-30
6. ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS ................................................................................................................................. P-32

6.1 Auto Image Adjustment .........................................................................................................................................................P-32
6.1.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................P-32
6.1.2 Position adjustment ......................................................................................................................................................P-32
6.1.3 Gradation adjustment ...................................................................................................................................................P-36
6.2 Periodical Both Sides Adj. .....................................................................................................................................................P-40
6.2.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................P-40
6.2.2 Basic operation.............................................................................................................................................................P-40
6.2.3 Deviation Check ...........................................................................................................................................................P-41
6.2.4 Relation with Auto Image Adjustment...........................................................................................................................P-41
6.3 Color Density Control (periodical adjustment) .......................................................................................................................P-41
6.3.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................P-41
6.3.3 Relation with Auto Image Adjustment...........................................................................................................................P-43
7. IMAGE DIAGNOSIS ...............................................................................................................................................P-44

7.1 Simple diagnosis....................................................................................................................................................................P-44
7.1.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................P-44
7.2 Detailed diagnosis .................................................................................................................................................................P-45
7.2.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................P-45
7.3 Automatic selection of the adjustment items of Package Color Auto Adj. .............................................................................P-48
7.3.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................P-48
7.4 Sending diagnosis result........................................................................................................................................................P-50
7.5 Remote diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................................................P-51
P THEORY OF OPERATION UK-301 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Control block diagram..............................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. INTERFACE SECTION ............................................................................................................................................P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
3. IMAGE ANALYSIS SECTION .................................................................................................................................. P-3

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
lxxxiii
3.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
4. POWER SOURCE SECTION................................................................................................................................... P-4

4.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-4
4.2 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
5. AUTOMATIC INSPECTION ..................................................................................................................................... P-5

5.1 Outline .....................................................................................................................................................................................P-5
5.2 Work flow .................................................................................................................................................................................P-5
5.3 How to perform inspection .......................................................................................................................................................P-6
5.3.1 Reference image ............................................................................................................................................................P-6
5.3.2 Image analysis................................................................................................................................................................P-7
5.3.3 Inspection area setting ...................................................................................................................................................P-9
5.4 Operation during inspection...................................................................................................................................................P-10
5.4.1 Output destination for abnormal images.......................................................................................................................P-10
5.4.2 Continuous output and stop..........................................................................................................................................P-11
5.4.3 Automatic reprint ..........................................................................................................................................................P-12
5.4.4 Partition paper ..............................................................................................................................................................P-13
5.4.5 Typical operation example with combination of each setting .......................................................................................P-14
5.5 Automatic inspection report ...................................................................................................................................................P-15
5.5.1 Outline ..........................................................................................................................................................................P-15
5.5.2 Types of reports............................................................................................................................................................P-15
5.5.3 Image included in the report .........................................................................................................................................P-16

1. UNIT CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................................................... P-1
2. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................................................................P-2
3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
3.2.1 FNS entrance roller drive/conveyance gate drive...........................................................................................................P-4
3.2.2 Bypass conveyance roller/stacker entrance roller drive .................................................................................................P-4
3.2.3 Sub tray conveyance roller/PK exit roller/stacker conveyance roller drive .....................................................................P-5
3.2.4 Sub tray exit roller/horizontal conveyance roller drive ....................................................................................................P-5
3.2.5 Bypass gate drive ...........................................................................................................................................................P-6
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
4. SUB TRAY SECTION...............................................................................................................................................P-9

4.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.3.1 Sub tray paper exit control..............................................................................................................................................P-9
4.3.2 Sub tray paper full detection control .............................................................................................................................P-10
5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-11
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-11
5.2.1 Stacker entrance roller pressure release drive.............................................................................................................P-11
5.2.2 Rewind paddle pressure release/rewind paddle drive..................................................................................................P-12
5.2.3 Stack assist plate drive.................................................................................................................................................P-13
5.2.4 Alignment plate/rear stopper drive/bundle exit claw drive ............................................................................................P-13
5.2.5 Paper pressure drive ....................................................................................................................................................P-14
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-14
5.3.1 Paper overlap control ...................................................................................................................................................P-14
5.3.2 Stacker entrance roller pressure release control..........................................................................................................P-16
5.3.3 Stack assist control.......................................................................................................................................................P-16
5.3.4 Paper stopper control ...................................................................................................................................................P-17
5.3.5 Rear stopper position control........................................................................................................................................P-18
5.3.7 Horizontal alignment control .........................................................................................................................................P-19
5.3.9 Small-size paper exit auxiliary control ..........................................................................................................................P-21

6.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-22
6.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-22
6.2.1 Stapler movement/rotation control................................................................................................................................P-22
lxxxiv
6.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-22
6.3.2 Staple control................................................................................................................................................................P-23

7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-25
7.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-26
7.2.1 Main tray up-down drive ...............................................................................................................................................P-26
7.2.2 Paper exit roller/paper exit opening drive .....................................................................................................................P-26
7.2.3 Gripper/paper exit pressure drive .................................................................................................................................P-27
7.2.4 Paper exit alignment plate drive ...................................................................................................................................P-28
7.2.5 Main tray shift drive ......................................................................................................................................................P-28
7.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-28
7.3.2 Gripper control..............................................................................................................................................................P-29
7.3.4 Main tray up/down control ............................................................................................................................................P-30
7.3.5 Paper exit alignment control .........................................................................................................................................P-32
7.3.6 Main tray shift control ...................................................................................................................................................P-32
P THEORY OF OPERATION SD-510 ...............................................................................................P-1

2. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.1 Half-folding/saddle stitching.....................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Tri-folding.................................................................................................................................................................................P-3

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-4
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
3.3.1 SD entrance conveyance ...............................................................................................................................................P-4
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION............................................................................................................................................P-5
4.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-5
4.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
4.2.1 Paddle/Md drive..............................................................................................................................................................P-6
4.2.2 Rear stopper/rear gripper drive ......................................................................................................................................P-6
4.2.3 Paddle/Lw drive ..............................................................................................................................................................P-7
4.2.4 Alignment Plate drive......................................................................................................................................................P-7
4.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-7
4.3.1 Paper stopper control mechanism..................................................................................................................................P-7
4.3.2 Rear stopper mechanism ...............................................................................................................................................P-8
4.3.3 Alignment mechanism ....................................................................................................................................................P-9

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-13
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-13
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-13
5.3.2 Staple control................................................................................................................................................................P-14
6. HALF-FOLD/FOLD&STAPLE/TRI-FOLDING SECTION ........................................................................................ P-16

6.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-16
6.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-17
6.2.1 Folding roller drive ........................................................................................................................................................P-17
6.2.2 1st Fold knife drive .......................................................................................................................................................P-17
6.2.3 2nd folding knife drive...................................................................................................................................................P-17
6.2.4 2nd Fold gate drive.......................................................................................................................................................P-17
6.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-18
6.3.1 1st folding knife control.................................................................................................................................................P-18
6.3.2 Half-folding/saddle stitching conveyance control..........................................................................................................P-18
6.3.3 2nd folding gate control ................................................................................................................................................P-19
6.3.4 2nd Folding knife control ..............................................................................................................................................P-20
6.3.5 Tri-folding conveyance control......................................................................................................................................P-20
7. PAPER EXIT SECTION ......................................................................................................................................... P-22

7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-22
7.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-22
7.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-22
lxxxv
7.3.1 Paper exit control..........................................................................................................................................................P-22
7.3.2 Output tray lift up control ..............................................................................................................................................P-22
P THEORY OF OPERATION PK-522 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. PUNCH SECTION ....................................................................................................................................................P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.1 Punch shift drive .............................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.2 Punch drive.....................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.1 Punch ready position movement control ........................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.2 Punch position correction control ...................................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.3 Punch control..................................................................................................................................................................P-4
3. PUNCH-HOLE SCRAPS BOX SECTION .............................................................................................................. P-12

3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3.1 Punch scraps dropping.................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3.2 Punch scraps box control .............................................................................................................................................P-12
P THEORY OF OPERATION MK-732 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
P THEORY OF OPERATION LS-506 ................................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION.................................................................................................................... P-3

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.1 Door open/close mechanism ..........................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.2 Jam release lever lock mechanism ................................................................................................................................P-3
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION................................................................................................................... P-4

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-4
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-4
3.3.1 Path switching ................................................................................................................................................................P-4
3.3.2 Conveyance line speed control ......................................................................................................................................P-6
3.3.3 Paper cooling mechanism ..............................................................................................................................................P-6

4.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-7
4.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-8
4.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive ............................................................................................................................................P-8
4.2.2 Stacker tray conveyance drive (M3 reverse) ..................................................................................................................P-8
4.2.3 Sub tray conveyance drive (M3 forward)........................................................................................................................P-9
4.2.4 Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive ...................................................................................................P-9
4.2.5 Stacker tray up down drive ...........................................................................................................................................P-10
4.2.6 Shift unit/alignment plate drive .....................................................................................................................................P-10
4.2.7 Rear stopper/job partition plate drive............................................................................................................................P-11
4.2.8 Front stopper/paper press arm drive ............................................................................................................................P-11
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-11
lxxxvi
4.3.1 Stacker tray conveyance ..............................................................................................................................................P-11
4.3.2 Coupling conveyance ...................................................................................................................................................P-16
4.3.3 Sub tray conveyance ....................................................................................................................................................P-16
P THEORY OF OPERATION FD-503 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.1 Straight mode .................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.2 Sub tray mode ................................................................................................................................................................P-3
1.2.3 Punch mode (L and S sizes) ..........................................................................................................................................P-4
1.2.4 Z-Fold mode ...................................................................................................................................................................P-5
1.2.5 Letter fold-out mode .......................................................................................................................................................P-6
1.2.6 Tri-Fold-in/double parallel mode.....................................................................................................................................P-7
1.2.7 Gate fold mode ...............................................................................................................................................................P-8
1.2.8 Half-fold mode ................................................................................................................................................................P-9
2. CONVEYANCE SECTION ..................................................................................................................................... P-10

2.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-10
2.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-11
2.2.1 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................P-11
2.2.2 Gate drive .....................................................................................................................................................................P-12
2.2.3 Alignment drive.............................................................................................................................................................P-12
2.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-13
2.3.1 Conveyance path switching..........................................................................................................................................P-13
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed control ....................................................................................................................................P-16
2.3.4 Gap recovery control ....................................................................................................................................................P-17
3. PUNCH SECTION ..................................................................................................................................................P-19

3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-19
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-19
3.2.1 Rear registration drive ..................................................................................................................................................P-19
3.2.2 Punch drive...................................................................................................................................................................P-20
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-20
3.3.1 Punch control................................................................................................................................................................P-20
3.3.2 Punch hole switching control ........................................................................................................................................P-20
3.3.3 Punch-hole scraps box control .....................................................................................................................................P-20
4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION .................................................................................................................... P-21

4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-21
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-21
4.2.1 Conveyance drive.........................................................................................................................................................P-21
4.2.2 Folding drive .................................................................................................................................................................P-22
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-22
4.3.1 Registration control.......................................................................................................................................................P-22
4.3.2 Conveyance path switching..........................................................................................................................................P-23
4.3.3 1st folding control .........................................................................................................................................................P-23
4.3.4 2nd folding control ........................................................................................................................................................P-24
4.3.5 3rd folding control .........................................................................................................................................................P-26

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-28
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-29
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-29
5.3.1 Main tray up down control ............................................................................................................................................P-29
6. SUB TRAY SECTION.............................................................................................................................................P-31

6.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-31
6.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-31
6.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-31
6.3.1 Sub tray full-status detection control ............................................................................................................................P-31
6.3.2 Line speed switching ....................................................................................................................................................P-32
7. PI SECTION ...........................................................................................................................................................P-33
7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-33
7.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-33
7.2.1 Tray lift drive .................................................................................................................................................................P-33
7.2.3 Pick-up drive .................................................................................................................................................................P-34
lxxxvii
7.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-34
7.3.1 Size detection control ...................................................................................................................................................P-34
7.3.2 Up down control............................................................................................................................................................P-35
7.3.3 Pick-up mechanism ......................................................................................................................................................P-36
7.3.4 Separation mechanism.................................................................................................................................................P-36
7.3.5 Multi feed detection control...........................................................................................................................................P-37
7.3.6 Paper empty detection control......................................................................................................................................P-37

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.1 Coupling exit/sub tray exit mode ....................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.2 Overlap tri-folding mode .................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.3 Center folding/saddle stitching mode .............................................................................................................................P-3

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.2.2 Horizontal conveyance drive ..........................................................................................................................................P-5
2.2.3 Gate drive/sub tray pressure release drive.....................................................................................................................P-6
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.2 Conveyance line speed switch control ...........................................................................................................................P-6
2.3.3 Sub tray paper exit control..............................................................................................................................................P-7
2.3.4 Sub tray paper full detection control ...............................................................................................................................P-7
3. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION .............................................................................................................. P-8

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-8
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-8
3.2.1 Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive ...............................................................................................................P-8
3.2.2 Overlap drive ..................................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.3.1 Paper overlap control .....................................................................................................................................................P-9
3.3.3 Right angle conveyance control ...................................................................................................................................P-12
4. FOLDING SECTION...............................................................................................................................................P-14
4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-14
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-14
4.2.1 Folding entrance drive ..................................................................................................................................................P-14
4.2.2 Folding conveyance drive.............................................................................................................................................P-15
4.2.3 Folding blade drive .......................................................................................................................................................P-15
4.2.4 Folding main scan alignment drive ...............................................................................................................................P-16
4.2.5 Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive....................................................................................................P-16
4.2.6 Guide shaft drive ..........................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-17
4.3.1 Folding entrance conveyance control...........................................................................................................................P-17
4.3.2 Folding main scan alignment control ............................................................................................................................P-18
4.3.3 Folding control ..............................................................................................................................................................P-19
4.3.4 Folding sub scan alignment control ..............................................................................................................................P-22
4.3.5 Guide shaft control .......................................................................................................................................................P-23
5. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION ............................................................................................................................ P-25

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-25
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-25
5.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive...................................................................................................................................P-25
5.2.2 Saddle stitching hold drive............................................................................................................................................P-26
5.2.3 Clincher up down drive .................................................................................................................................................P-26
5.2.4 Stapler/clincher movement drive ..................................................................................................................................P-27
5.2.5 Stapler/clincher drive ....................................................................................................................................................P-27
5.2.6 Bundle arm rotation drive .............................................................................................................................................P-28
5.2.7 Bundle arm movement drive.........................................................................................................................................P-28
5.2.8 Bundle arm assist drive ................................................................................................................................................P-29
5.2.9 Bundle clip drive ...........................................................................................................................................................P-29
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-29
5.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control................................................................................................................................P-29
5.3.2 Stapler/clincher movement control ...............................................................................................................................P-30
lxxxviii
5.3.3 Saddle stitching hold control.........................................................................................................................................P-31
5.3.4 Clincher up down control ..............................................................................................................................................P-33
5.3.6 Bundle arm control .......................................................................................................................................................P-35
5.3.7 Bundle arm assist control .............................................................................................................................................P-38
5.3.8 Bundle clip control ........................................................................................................................................................P-39
6. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION ....................................................................................................................... P-43

6.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-43
6.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-43
6.2.1 Bundle press stage lift drive .........................................................................................................................................P-43
6.2.2 Bundle press movement drive ......................................................................................................................................P-44
6.2.3 Bundle registration drive...............................................................................................................................................P-44
6.2.4 Bundle press drive........................................................................................................................................................P-45
6.2.5 Bundle exit drive ...........................................................................................................................................................P-45
6.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-46
6.3.1 Bundle press stage up down control ............................................................................................................................P-46
6.3.2 Bundle press movement control ...................................................................................................................................P-48
6.3.3 Bundle press control.....................................................................................................................................................P-50
6.3.4 Bundle registration control............................................................................................................................................P-51
6.3.5 Bundle exit control ........................................................................................................................................................P-52
7. TRIMMER SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................P-58

7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-58
7.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-58
7.2.1 Trimmer press drive......................................................................................................................................................P-58
7.2.2 Trimmer blade drive......................................................................................................................................................P-58
7.2.3 Trimmer board drive .....................................................................................................................................................P-60
7.2.4 Paddle drive..................................................................................................................................................................P-60
7.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-60
7.3.1 Trimmer press control...................................................................................................................................................P-60
7.3.2 Trimmer blade control...................................................................................................................................................P-62
7.3.3 Trimmer board control ..................................................................................................................................................P-64
7.3.4 Trimmer paddle control.................................................................................................................................................P-64

1.1 Entire system ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Rear console............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.3 Front console ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2. PAPER PATH ...........................................................................................................................................................P-3

2.1 Straight mode, sub tray mode..................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.2 Overlap tri-folding mode ..........................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3 Multi half-fold mode, fold & staple and trimming mode............................................................................................................P-4
2.3.1 Conveyance path of the rear console.............................................................................................................................P-4
2.3.2 Conveyance path from the rear console to the front console .........................................................................................P-4
2.3.3 Conveyance path of the front console ............................................................................................................................P-5
3. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION................................................................................................................... P-6

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-6
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-7
3.2.1 Entrance gate drive ........................................................................................................................................................P-7
3.2.2 Reverse/exit gate drive...................................................................................................................................................P-8
3.2.4 Reverse exit drive, reverse exit roller pressure release drive.........................................................................................P-9
3.2.5 Paper re-feed drive, paper re-feed roller pressure release drive..................................................................................P-10
3.2.6 CD alignment plate drive ..............................................................................................................................................P-11
3.2.7 Front stopper drive .......................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.3.2 Line speed switch control .............................................................................................................................................P-14
3.3.3 Overlap conveyance control .........................................................................................................................................P-15
3.3.4 Reverse exit roller pressure release control .................................................................................................................P-16
3.3.5 Stack assist control.......................................................................................................................................................P-17
3.3.7 Paper re-feed roller pressure release control ...............................................................................................................P-20
4. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION .................................................................................................................... P-23

4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-23
lxxxix
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-24
4.2.1 Horizontal conveyance drive/1 .....................................................................................................................................P-24
4.2.2 Sub tray gate drive .......................................................................................................................................................P-25
4.2.3 Horizontal conveyance drive/2 .....................................................................................................................................P-25
4.2.4 Horizontal conveyance pressure release drive/1..........................................................................................................P-26
4.2.5 Horizontal conveyance pressure release drive/2..........................................................................................................P-26
4.2.6 1st folding stopper drive ...............................................................................................................................................P-27
4.2.7 1st folding FD alignment drive ......................................................................................................................................P-27
4.2.8 Folding roller drive, tri-folding conveyance drive ..........................................................................................................P-28
4.2.9 1st folding knife drive....................................................................................................................................................P-28
4.2.10 2nd folding knife drive................................................................................................................................................. P-29
4.2.11 Folding roller guide drive ............................................................................................................................................ P-29
4.2.12 Half-folding conveyance drive .................................................................................................................................... P-30
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-30
4.3.2 Horizontal conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................P-31
4.3.3 Horizontal conveyance pressure release control..........................................................................................................P-32
4.3.5 1st Fold knife control ....................................................................................................................................................P-36
4.3.6 Folding control ..............................................................................................................................................................P-38
4.3.7 2nd Folding knife control ..............................................................................................................................................P-40
4.3.8 Half-folding conveyance control ...................................................................................................................................P-42
5. SUB TRAY, TRI-FOLDING TRAY SECTION ......................................................................................................... P-43

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-43
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-44
5.2.1 Sub tray, tri-folding tray paper exit drive.......................................................................................................................P-44
5.2.2 Tri-folding paper exit gate drive ....................................................................................................................................P-44
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-44
5.3.2 Sub tray, tri-folding tray paper exit control....................................................................................................................P-45
5.3.3 Sub tray paper, tri-folding tray paper full detection control ...........................................................................................P-46
6. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION ............................................................................................................................ P-48

6.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-48
6.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-49
6.2.1 Saddle stitching alignment drive/Rr ..............................................................................................................................P-49
6.2.2 Saddle stitching alignment drive/Md.............................................................................................................................P-49
6.2.3 Saddle stitching alignment plate release drive .............................................................................................................P-50
6.2.4 Saddle stitching alignment drive/Fr ..............................................................................................................................P-50
6.2.5 Booklet holding drive ....................................................................................................................................................P-51
6.2.6 Stapler head drive ........................................................................................................................................................P-52
6.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-52
6.3.1 Saddle stitching alignment control................................................................................................................................P-52
6.3.3 Booklet holding control .................................................................................................................................................P-56
7. BOOKLET MOVEMENT SECTION ........................................................................................................................ P-59

7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-59
7.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-60
7.2.1 Booklet holding unit drive .............................................................................................................................................P-60
7.2.2 Booklet holding drive ....................................................................................................................................................P-61
7.2.3 Booklet set drive ...........................................................................................................................................................P-61
7.2.4 Book movement drive...................................................................................................................................................P-62
7.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-63
7.3.1 Booklet holding control .................................................................................................................................................P-63
7.3.2 Booklet movement control ............................................................................................................................................P-63
8. CLAMP SECTION ..................................................................................................................................................P-65

8.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-65
8.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-66
8.2.1 Clamp up down drive....................................................................................................................................................P-66
8.2.2 Clamp/Lt drive ..............................................................................................................................................................P-67
8.2.3 Clamp/Rt drive ..............................................................................................................................................................P-67
8.2.4 Lifter plate drive ............................................................................................................................................................P-68
8.2.5 Lifter plate up down drive .............................................................................................................................................P-68
8.2.6 Fore edge stopper drive ...............................................................................................................................................P-69
8.2.7 Fore edge finger drive ..................................................................................................................................................P-70
8.2.8 Trimmer booklet holding drive ......................................................................................................................................P-71
xc
8.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-71
8.3.1 Clamp control ...............................................................................................................................................................P-71
8.3.2 Lifter control..................................................................................................................................................................P-75
8.3.3 Fore edge stopper control ............................................................................................................................................P-76
8.3.4 Trimmer booklet holding control ...................................................................................................................................P-78
8.3.5 Front console lock control.............................................................................................................................................P-79
9. TRIMMER SECTION ..............................................................................................................................................P-81

9.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-81
9.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-82
9.2.1 Trimmer press drive......................................................................................................................................................P-82
9.2.2 Trimmer brake drive .....................................................................................................................................................P-83
9.2.3 Trimmer blade drive......................................................................................................................................................P-84
9.2.4 Trimmer board drive .....................................................................................................................................................P-85
9.2.5 Trimmer paddle drive....................................................................................................................................................P-85
9.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-85
9.3.1 Trimmer press control...................................................................................................................................................P-85
9.3.2 Trimmer blade control...................................................................................................................................................P-88
9.3.3 Trimmer board control ..................................................................................................................................................P-89
9.3.4 Trimmer paddle control.................................................................................................................................................P-90
9.3.5 Trimmer shutter control ................................................................................................................................................P-91
9.3.6 Trimmer scraps box full detection control.....................................................................................................................P-92
10. BOOKLET TRAY SECTION ................................................................................................................................ P-94

10.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................P-94
10.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................P-95
10.2.1 Grip roller pressure drive ............................................................................................................................................ P-95
10.2.2 Grip roller rotation drive .............................................................................................................................................. P-96
10.2.3 Booklet tray paper exit drive ....................................................................................................................................... P-97
10.2.4 Paper exit belt drive.................................................................................................................................................... P-97
10.3 Operation.............................................................................................................................................................................P-98
10.3.1 Grip roller control ........................................................................................................................................................P-98
10.3.2 Booklet tray paper exit control .................................................................................................................................. P-100
10.3.3 Paper exit belt control............................................................................................................................................... P-101
10.3.4 Paper exit shutter control.......................................................................................................................................... P-102
10.3.5 Booklet tray paper full detection control ................................................................................................................... P-104
P THEORY OF OPERATION CR-101 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. CREASER SECTION ...............................................................................................................................................P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.1 Creaser drive ..................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3.1 Paper conveyance control ..............................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3.2 Paper alignment control..................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3.3 Creaser control ...............................................................................................................................................................P-3
P THEORY OF OPERATION TU-503 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.1 Conveyance gate drive...................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.1 Gate open close control..................................................................................................................................................P-3
3. SLITTER SECTION ..................................................................................................................................................P-6

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-6
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
3.2.1 Slitter position shift drive.................................................................................................................................................P-6
xci
3.2.2 Slit cutter drive................................................................................................................................................................P-7
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-7
3.3.1 Trimmer control ..............................................................................................................................................................P-7
4. ROTARY CUTTER SECTION .................................................................................................................................. P-9

4.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.2.1 Slit scraps trimmer drive .................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
4.3.1 Slit scraps trimmer control ..............................................................................................................................................P-9
4.3.2 Slitter shutter control.....................................................................................................................................................P-11
5. SLIT SCRAPS BOX SECTION............................................................................................................................... P-13

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-13
5.2 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-13
5.2.1 Slit scraps box set detection control .............................................................................................................................P-13
5.2.2 Slit scraps box full detection control .............................................................................................................................P-13
P THEORY OF OPERATION FD-504 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. CLAMP UP DOWN SECTION .................................................................................................................................. P-2

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2.1 FD clamp up and down drive..........................................................................................................................................P-2
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-3
2.3.1 FD clamp up and down control.......................................................................................................................................P-3
3. CLAMP SECTION ....................................................................................................................................................P-5

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-5
3.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-5
3.2.1 FD clamp drive ...............................................................................................................................................................P-5
3.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-5
3.3.1 FD clamp control ............................................................................................................................................................P-5
4. SPINE CORNER FORMING SECTION ................................................................................................................. P-11

4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-11
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-11
4.2.1 Spine corner forming drive ...........................................................................................................................................P-11
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-11
4.3.1 Spine corner forming control ........................................................................................................................................P-11
P THEORY OF OPERATION PB-503 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.1 Sub tray exit....................................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.2 Perfect binding mode......................................................................................................................................................P-2
1.2.3 Relay conveyance mode ................................................................................................................................................P-4

2.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-5
2.2 Drive ........................................................................................................................................................................................P-6
2.2.1 Entrance conveyance drive/Intermediate conveyance drive/Cover paper conveyance drive ........................................P-6
2.2.2 Entrance gate drive/Bypass gate drive/Sub tray gate drive/Sub tray exit and separation drive .....................................P-6
2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................................................................P-7
2.3.1 Gate control ....................................................................................................................................................................P-7
2.3.2 Entrance conveyance control .........................................................................................................................................P-8
2.3.3 Intermediate conveyance control....................................................................................................................................P-9
2.3.4 Cover paper conveyance control....................................................................................................................................P-9
2.3.5 Sub tray paper exit release control.................................................................................................................................P-9
2.3.6 Sub tray full-status detection control ..............................................................................................................................P-9
2.3.7 Cover paper multi feed detection control........................................................................................................................P-9
3. SUB COMPILE (SC) SECTION.............................................................................................................................. P-11

3.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-11
3.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-12
3.2.1 SC entrance conveyance drive/Switchback conveyance drive/Paper bundle conveyance drive .................................P-12
xcii
3.2.2 Switchback release drive..............................................................................................................................................P-12
3.2.3 SC roller release drive/Clamp entrance release drive ..................................................................................................P-13
3.2.4 Clamp entrance movement drive..................................................................................................................................P-13
3.2.5 SC main scan alignment drive......................................................................................................................................P-14
3.2.6 Sub scan alignment drive .............................................................................................................................................P-14
3.2.7 SC stopper drive/SC pressure arm drive/Straight gate drive........................................................................................P-14
3.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-15
3.3.1 SC section operation overview .....................................................................................................................................P-15
3.3.2 Gate control of the relay conveyance ...........................................................................................................................P-17
3.3.3 SC entrance conveyance control..................................................................................................................................P-17
3.3.4 SC switchback conveyance control ..............................................................................................................................P-17
3.3.5 SC main scan alignment control...................................................................................................................................P-20
3.3.6 Sub scan alignment control ..........................................................................................................................................P-21
3.3.7 SC paper bundle conveyance control...........................................................................................................................P-21
3.3.8 Clamp entrance movement control...............................................................................................................................P-23
3.3.9 SC stopper control........................................................................................................................................................P-23
3.3.10 SC pressure arm control............................................................................................................................................. P-23
4. CLAMP SECTION ..................................................................................................................................................P-25

4.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-25
4.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-25
4.2.1 Clamp drive ..................................................................................................................................................................P-25
4.2.2 Clamp rotation drive .....................................................................................................................................................P-26
4.2.3 Clamp alignment drive..................................................................................................................................................P-26
4.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-26
4.3.1 Clamp alignment control...............................................................................................................................................P-26
4.3.2 Clamp control ...............................................................................................................................................................P-27
4.3.3 Clamp rotation control ..................................................................................................................................................P-28
4.3.4 Book thickness detection control ..................................................................................................................................P-32
5. PELLET SUPPLY SECTION .................................................................................................................................. P-33

5.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-33
5.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-33
5.2.1 Pellet supply drive ........................................................................................................................................................P-33
5.2.2 Pellet supply arm drive .................................................................................................................................................P-34
5.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-34
5.3.1 Pellet supply operation overview ..................................................................................................................................P-34
5.3.2 Pellet supply arm control ..............................................................................................................................................P-35
5.3.3 Pellet supply amount control ........................................................................................................................................P-36
5.3.4 Pellet remaining amount detection control ...................................................................................................................P-38
5.3.5 Pellet supply door opening and closing detection control.............................................................................................P-38
6. GLUE TANK SECTION ..........................................................................................................................................P-39

6.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-39
6.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-39
6.2.1 Drive .............................................................................................................................................................................P-39
6.2.2 Glue apply roller drive...................................................................................................................................................P-40
6.2.3 Tank up drive................................................................................................................................................................P-40
6.2.4 Cover paper glue lifting drive........................................................................................................................................P-40
6.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-41
6.3.1 Glue tank unit movement control..................................................................................................................................P-41
6.3.2 Glue apply roller control................................................................................................................................................P-41
6.3.3 Glue tank lifting control .................................................................................................................................................P-42
6.3.4 Cover paper glue control ..............................................................................................................................................P-43
6.3.5 Glue temperature control..............................................................................................................................................P-44
7. COVER PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ..................................................................................................................... P-46

7.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-46
7.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-46
7.2.1 Cover paper tray lift drive .............................................................................................................................................P-46
7.2.3 Pick-up drive .................................................................................................................................................................P-47
7.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-48
7.3.1 Up down control............................................................................................................................................................P-48
7.3.2 Pick-up mechanism ......................................................................................................................................................P-49
7.3.3 Separation mechanism.................................................................................................................................................P-49
7.3.4 Paper feed mechanism.................................................................................................................................................P-50
7.3.5 Air assist mechanism....................................................................................................................................................P-50
7.3.6 Cover paper empty detection control............................................................................................................................P-50
7.3.7 Paper feed assist plate .................................................................................................................................................P-50
xciii
8. COVER PAPER TABLE SECTION ........................................................................................................................ P-52
8.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-52
8.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-53
8.2.1 Cover paper table up down/Fr and /Rr drive ................................................................................................................P-53
8.2.2 Cover paper alignment drive ........................................................................................................................................P-53
8.2.3 Cover paper conveyance drive.....................................................................................................................................P-54
8.2.4 Book exit drive ..............................................................................................................................................................P-54
8.2.5 Cover paper folding plate/Rt and /Lt drive ....................................................................................................................P-54
8.2.6 Cover paper conveyance arm/Rr and /Lt drive.............................................................................................................P-55
8.2.7 Cover paper lift drive ....................................................................................................................................................P-55
8.2.8 Cutter drive ...................................................................................................................................................................P-55
8.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-55
8.3.1 Cover paper table section operation overview .............................................................................................................P-55
8.3.2 Cover paper conveyance control..................................................................................................................................P-58
8.3.3 Cover paper trimming control .......................................................................................................................................P-60
8.3.4 Cover paper alignment drive ........................................................................................................................................P-60
8.3.5 Cover paper table up down control...............................................................................................................................P-61
8.3.6 Cover paper folding plate control..................................................................................................................................P-63
8.3.7 Cover paper conveyance arm control...........................................................................................................................P-65
8.3.8 Cover paper lifting (supporting) control ........................................................................................................................P-67
8.3.9 Book paper exit control.................................................................................................................................................P-67
8.3.10 Waste paper control ................................................................................................................................................... P-68
9. BOOK STOCK SECTION ....................................................................................................................................... P-69

9.1 Configuration .........................................................................................................................................................................P-69
9.2 Drive ......................................................................................................................................................................................P-69
9.2.1 Book conveyance drive ................................................................................................................................................P-69
9.2.2 Book conveyance belt drive..........................................................................................................................................P-70
9.2.3 Book conveyance up down drive..................................................................................................................................P-70
9.2.4 Book movement drive...................................................................................................................................................P-71
9.2.5 Book stopper drive........................................................................................................................................................P-71
9.3 Operation ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-71
9.3.1 Book stock section operation overview ........................................................................................................................P-71
9.3.2 Book conveyance and movement control.....................................................................................................................P-72
9.3.3 Book conveyance belt control.......................................................................................................................................P-74
9.3.4 Book conveyance up down control...............................................................................................................................P-74
9.3.5 Book movement control................................................................................................................................................P-75
9.3.6 Book stopper control.....................................................................................................................................................P-76
9.3.7 Book full status detection control..................................................................................................................................P-76
10. RELAY CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................................................... P-78

10.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................................................................................P-78
10.2 Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................P-78
10.2.1 Relay conveyance roller drive / Relay paper exit roller drive...................................................................................... P-78
10.3 Operation.............................................................................................................................................................................P-79
10.3.1 Relay conveyance control .......................................................................................................................................... P-79
11. OTHERS .............................................................................................................................................................. P-80

11.1 Fan control...........................................................................................................................................................................P-80
11.1.1 Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) .................................................................................................................................. P-80
11.1.2 Exhaust fan/1 (FM80), exhaust fan/2 (FM81)............................................................................................................. P-80
11.1.3 Deodorant fan/1 (FM97), deodorant fan/2 (FM98) ..................................................................................................... P-80
11.2 Door opening and closing control ........................................................................................................................................P-80
P THEORY OF OPERATION GP-501 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. PREFACE.................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.1.1 Setting the Right Expectations .......................................................................................................................................P-1
1.2 Product positioning ..................................................................................................................................................................P-1
1.3 Long edge feed (LEF) only ......................................................................................................................................................P-1
2. OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.1 Unit configuration diagram.......................................................................................................................................................P-2
2.2 Paper path ...............................................................................................................................................................................P-3

3.1 Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................................................P-4
4. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. P-5

4.1 Punch conveyance control.......................................................................................................................................................P-5
xciv
4.2 Punch operation.......................................................................................................................................................................P-6
4.3 Chip tray control.......................................................................................................................................................................P-7
4.4 Bypass conveyance control .....................................................................................................................................................P-7
5. PUNCH MODULE ....................................................................................................................................................P-9

5.1 Tools Required ........................................................................................................................................................................P-9
5.2 Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................................P-9
P THEORY OF OPERATION GP-502 ...............................................................................................P-1

1. THEORY OF OPERATION ...................................................................................................................................... P-1
Q IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT................................................................................................ Q-1

1. UNDERSTANDING THE CHARACTER OF THE PAPER .......................................................................................Q-1
1.1 The shrinkage of the paper..................................................................................................................................................... Q-1
1.2 The dimensional accuracy of the paper.................................................................................................................................. Q-1
1.3 Precautions on supplying papers............................................................................................................................................ Q-1
2. BASIC OPERATION.................................................................................................................................................Q-2
2.1 Both sides adjustment (Preparation) ...................................................................................................................................... Q-2
2.1.1 Preparation for papers................................................................................................................................................... Q-2
2.1.2 About the adjustment procedure ................................................................................................................................... Q-2
2.2 Both sides adjustment (Mechanical adjustment and Software adjustment) ........................................................................... Q-3
2.2.1 Skew mechanical adjustment (In the sub scan direction).............................................................................................. Q-3
2.2.2 Skew adjustment (In the main scan direction)............................................................................................................... Q-5
2.2.3 Skew mechanical adjustment (main scan) .................................................................................................................... Q-7
2.3 Both sides adjustment (Software adjustment) ........................................................................................................................ Q-9
2.3.1 Belt line speed adjustment ............................................................................................................................................ Q-9
2.3.2 Restart timing adjustment (Side2) rough adjustment .................................................................................................... Q-9
2.3.3 CD-Mag. adjustment (Side2) ....................................................................................................................................... Q-11
2.3.4 Centering auto adjustment .......................................................................................................................................... Q-12
2.3.5 Package Position Auto Adj. ......................................................................................................................................... Q-13
2.3.6 Package Position Manual Adj...................................................................................................................................... Q-13
2.3.7 Centering sensor gap adjustment................................................................................................................................ Q-14
2.3.8 Both sides adjustment ................................................................................................................................................. Q-14
2.4 About the Both Sides Adj...................................................................................................................................................... Q-16
2.4.1 About the adjustment procedure of the [12. Adjustment] - [Both Sides Adjust] in User's Guide" ................................ Q-16
2.4.2 About the adjustment procedure of the [12. Adjustment] - [Machine Adjustment] in "User's Guide"........................... Q-16
2.5 About the line speed adjustment .......................................................................................................................................... Q-16
3. ADVANCED OPERATION .....................................................................................................................................Q-17

3.1 When the mis-centering unexpectedly occurs ...................................................................................................................... Q-17
3.1.1 Checkpoint................................................................................................................................................................... Q-17
3.1.2 Centering ..................................................................................................................................................................... Q-17
3.1.3 Curve (Tilt) ................................................................................................................................................................... Q-18
3.1.4 The trouble with the paper conveyance timing ............................................................................................................ Q-18
3.2 When the particular paper is curved ..................................................................................................................................... Q-18
3.2.1 Paper types that are easily skewed............................................................................................................................. Q-18
3.2.2 Checkpoint and handling ............................................................................................................................................. Q-18
3.3 When the mis-centering is excessive ................................................................................................................................... Q-19
3.3.1 Checkpoint and handling ............................................................................................................................................. Q-19
R COLOR ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................................R-1
1. COMBINATION OF EXECUTION TIMING AND ITEMS ..........................................................................................R-1
1.1 When IQ-501 is connected, When IC-605 is connected......................................................................................................... R-1
1.2 When IQ-501 is connected, When IC-313/IC-417 is connected ............................................................................................. R-2
1.3 When IQ-501 is connected, When IC-314 is connected......................................................................................................... R-3
1.4 When IQ-501 is NOT connected, When IC-605 is connected ................................................................................................ R-3
1.5 When IQ-501 is NOT connected, When IC-313/IC-417 is connected .................................................................................... R-5
1.6 When IQ-501 is NOT connected, When IC-314 is connected ................................................................................................ R-6
2. QUALITY ADJUSTMENT .........................................................................................................................................R-9

2.1 Package adjustment ............................................................................................................................................................... R-9
2.1.1 Package Color Auto Adj. (Service mode) .......................................................................................................................R-9
2.1.2 Package Color Auto Adj. (User mode) .........................................................................................................................R-10
2.1.3 Package Color Manual Adj. (Service mode).................................................................................................................R-11
2.1.4 Package Color Manual Adj. (User mode) .....................................................................................................................R-12
2.1.5 Prepare for auto selection ............................................................................................................................................R-13
2.2 Individual adjustment/setting ................................................................................................................................................ R-14
xcv
2.2.1 Setting of maximum density management paper .........................................................................................................R-14
2.2.2 Select screen................................................................................................................................................................R-15
2.2.3 Gamma Automatic Adjustment.....................................................................................................................................R-16
2.2.4 Density Balance Adjustment.........................................................................................................................................R-16
2.2.5 Max Dens. Initial Auto Adj. ...........................................................................................................................................R-51
2.2.6 Max Density Initial Adj. .................................................................................................................................................R-58
2.2.7 Max. Density Auto Adj. (RU).........................................................................................................................................R-94
2.2.8 Maximum Density Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................R-95
2.2.9 Color Density Control Setting .......................................................................................................................................R-96
2.2.10 Color Density Control (Manual adjustment)................................................................................................................R-98
2.2.11 IC-605 calibration .......................................................................................................................................................R-99
2.2.12 Exact Color ...............................................................................................................................................................R-105
2.2.13 G7 Calibration...........................................................................................................................................................R-112
2.2.14 IC-313/IC-417 Calibration.........................................................................................................................................R-120
2.2.15 IC-314 Calibration.....................................................................................................................................................R-123
2.2.16 IDC Sensor Adjustment ............................................................................................................................................R-123
2.2.17 Highlight Automatic Adj. ...........................................................................................................................................R-124
S TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver2.0 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET) ...................................S-1

1. IMAGE QUALITY......................................................................................................................................................S-1
1.1 Spot .........................................................................................................................................................................................S-1
1.1.1 Cyclic white spot/black spot............................................................................................................................................S-1
1.1.2 Color Spots due to soilage inside machine ....................................................................................................................S-1
1.1.3 Color spots (black spots) ................................................................................................................................................S-4
1.1.4 White Spot due to the developing leakage (foreign material).........................................................................................S-5
1.1.5 White dots from 2nd transfer unit ...................................................................................................................................S-5
1.1.6 Void on solid color and attachment of powder................................................................................................................S-6
1.2 Line/Band.................................................................................................................................................................................S-7
1.2.1 Line and uneven density countermeasure flow ..............................................................................................................S-7
1.2.2 White lines (to sub-scan direction) .................................................................................................................................S-9
1.2.3 Gloss line caused by fusing paper exit roller ................................................................................................................S-11
1.2.4 Banding in the main scan direction on halftone image printed on thick paper(Jitter problem) .....................................S-11
1.2.5 Line like ripple on image...............................................................................................................................................S-13
1.2.6 Waste toner packing.....................................................................................................................................................S-14
1.2.7 Darker image up to 44mm from leading edge or after 44mm from white area (Developing memory)..........................S-14
1.2.8 Lines or banding to the main scan direction (CD) due to speed difference between 2nd transfer and fusing .............S-15
1.2.9 Image got blurred affected by ozone (cyclic white band) .............................................................................................S-16
1.2.10 Photoconductor (Drum) memory ................................................................................................................................ S-17
1.2.11 Developing screw mark (at low speed)....................................................................................................................... S-19
1.2.12 Lines or banding on image due to speed change (shock noise) ................................................................................ S-21
1.2.13 Developing roller (44mm) cycle banding (different density) ....................................................................................... S-26
1.2.14 Irregular darker or lighter density band appears after leaving machine under high humidity environment (Green)... S-27
1.2.15 Jittering lines at trailing edge ...................................................................................................................................... S-27
1.2.16 8mm interval FD lines................................................................................................................................................. S-28
1.2.17 Density change by static electricity............................................................................................................................. S-29
1.2.18 FD Lines and Banding ................................................................................................................................................ S-30
1.2.19 5mm cycle density difference caused by the fusing unit ............................................................................................ S-31
1.2.20 Color lines in CD at 13mm from the leading edge...................................................................................................... S-32
1.2.21 White line due to separation claw mark...................................................................................................................... S-33
1.2.22 Gloss band in CD with margin width........................................................................................................................... S-33
1.2.23 Image lacks at the corner of the trailing edge (Soilage in main scan direction (CD))................................................. S-34
1.2.24 CD line on the lead edge ............................................................................................................................................ S-35
1.2.25 Main scan direction Line (result from Fusing belt line, Crack) ................................................................................... S-36
1.3 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................................S-36
1.3.1 Image after white part becomes darker (Developing ghost).........................................................................................S-36
1.3.2 Darker at the trailing edge of image .............................................................................................................................S-37
1.3.3 Background or toner scattering after continuous low coverage....................................................................................S-38
1.3.4 How to maintain consistent color during continuous printing........................................................................................S-38
1.3.5 Unexpected density drop if "Dens. Adj. Per Paper" set positive (+) value....................................................................S-39
1.3.6 Small blank area or color registration error ..................................................................................................................S-41
1.3.7 Too high gloss ..............................................................................................................................................................S-41
1.3.8 Rough image on the 1st side of duplex ........................................................................................................................S-42
1.3.9 White or color banding at thick paper leading and trailing edges .................................................................................S-43
1.3.10 C-2451, C-2452, C-2453 or C-2454, Low toner density ............................................................................................. S-44
1.3.11 Poor transfer at image front........................................................................................................................................ S-44
1.3.12 Prevention of the backside soilage............................................................................................................................. S-45
1.3.13 Fainted outline, darker at edge................................................................................................................................... S-45
xcvi
1.3.14 Image bacground under high temperature ................................................................................................................. S-46
1.3.15 Backside image soilage.............................................................................................................................................. S-47
1.3.16 Toner is not cleaned at the edge of the transfer belt .................................................................................................. S-47
1.3.17 Transferability on embossed paper ............................................................................................................................ S-49
1.3.18 Image density is lighter on uncoated paper (unsmooth paper) .................................................................................. S-55
1.3.19 Gloss memory ............................................................................................................................................................S-56
1.3.20 Center of line gets broken .......................................................................................................................................... S-57
1.3.21 Secondary color text scatters ..................................................................................................................................... S-57
1.3.22 Image offset caused by fusing unit ............................................................................................................................. S-59
1.3.23 Tonerband control setting........................................................................................................................................... S-61
1.3.24 On the 2nd side of the small size thick paper (ex. Postcard), Uneven color occurs................................................... S-64
1.3.25 Lighter density part at trailing edges of wide paper .................................................................................................... S-65
1.3.26 Thin paper trailing edge dent mark (1st side), poor transfer (2nd side)...................................................................... S-66
1.4 Troubleshooting by using CSRA............................................................................................................................................S-66
1.4.1 Darker/Lighter image density and background (CSRA approach) ...............................................................................S-66
2. PAPER ...................................................................................................................................................................S-70
2.1 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................................S-70
2.1.1 Paper waving................................................................................................................................................................S-70
2.1.2 Setting for OHP sheet printing......................................................................................................................................S-70
2.1.3 Trailing edge skews......................................................................................................................................................S-71
2.1.4 Printed paper curls (without RU connection) ................................................................................................................S-71
2.1.5 Fusing wrapping jam ....................................................................................................................................................S-72
2.1.6 No feed jam (J-1101/J-1201)........................................................................................................................................S-74
2.1.7 Dents on paper at 48mm cycle in FD ...........................................................................................................................S-76
2.1.8 Centering error (±5 mm or more)..................................................................................................................................S-78
2.1.9 Paper stick with each other due to static electricity ......................................................................................................S-80
2.1.10 Static Sticking in Options............................................................................................................................................ S-83
2.1.11 Paper removing procedure on fusing wrap up JAM ................................................................................................... S-85
2.1.12 J-3102, Thin paper feed failure at the 2nd transfer unit.............................................................................................. S-88
2.1.13 Paper wrinkle at duplex printing ................................................................................................................................. S-91
2.1.14 J-3201 paper is caught by the fusing separation claw................................................................................................ S-92
2.1.15 Corner folding at the paper leading edge, machine front side.................................................................................... S-92
2.1.16 Leading edge does not looks nice (hitting mark like peeling) ..................................................................................... S-94
2.1.17 SRA4S Corner folding at the paper trailing edge, machine rear side......................................................................... S-94
2.1.18 Pickup jam clearance workflow .................................................................................................................................. S-95
2.1.19 Jam, Paper damage, Image failure due to conveyance speed difference................................................................ S-111
2.1.20 J-17xx/3101/3102/3120 caused by paper dust or some foreign materials attached to the feed roller ..................... S-116
2.1.21 Corner folding at the paper leading edge on wide paper.......................................................................................... S-116
2.1.22 Wrinkle on thin paper at trailing edge to feed direction (on 180 to 230mm width paper) ......................................... S-117
2.2 Troubleshooting by using CSRA..........................................................................................................................................S-118
2.2.1 J-16xx (CSRA approach)............................................................................................................................................S-118
3. MACHINE TROUBLES.........................................................................................................................................S-122
3.1 Control .................................................................................................................................................................................S-122
3.1.1 Highlight automatic adjustment does not complete normally after trying several times. ............................................S-122
3.1.2 Print job is not accepted while machine indicates dehumidifying ...............................................................................S-122
3.2 Error code ............................................................................................................................................................................S-122
3.2.1 C-2451, C-2452, C-2453 and C-2454 occur...............................................................................................................S-122
3.2.2 C-3102 ADU wiring connector is disconnected ..........................................................................................................S-122
3.2.3 C2455/C2456/C2457/C2458 Toner density abnormality(High density) occur............................................................S-124
3.3 Others ..................................................................................................................................................................................S-125
3.3.1 Options cannot be recognized. System configuration display without options ...........................................................S-125
3.3.2 How to eject developer ...............................................................................................................................................S-125
3.3.3 Image shift ..................................................................................................................................................................S-127
3.3.4 Note for the developing shutter installation work........................................................................................................S-128
3.3.5 Productivity decrease at first in the morning under low temperature, low humidity....................................................S-130
3.3.6 Release of productivity down mode for small size print under high temperature (Adjustment of toner band creation cycle
for cleaning blade) ......................................................................................................................................................S-130
3.3.7 ADU MT lever is very hard to release.........................................................................................................................S-131
3.3.8 Working noise of the tacking fan in the charge control unit ........................................................................................S-133
3.3.9 The machine log does not capture the symptom .......................................................................................................S-134
3.3.10 Charging corona soilage control measure (It is replaced with a high frequency of Charging corona soilage.) ....... S-135
4. OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................................................S-137
4.1 PF-707m ..............................................................................................................................................................................S-137
4.1.1 Multi-feed of Plain Fine paper under high temperature and high humidity .................................................................S-137
4.1.2 PF-707m Wrinkle on paper.........................................................................................................................................S-137
4.1.3 PF-707m Paper skew of small size ............................................................................................................................S-138
xcvii
4.1.4 PF-707m Corner fold (dog ear) and conveyance JAM of small size ..........................................................................S-141
4.1.5 Thick paper jam due to multi-feed ..............................................................................................................................S-142
4.1.6 Wrinkle on thin paper at trailing edge to feed direction ..............................................................................................S-142
4.1.7 Light hitting mark at paper edge at PFU Registration PS phase ................................................................................S-144
4.1.8 Horizontal conveyance jam at feeding thick paper (J-1624/1814/2014).....................................................................S-146
4.2 LU-202m/LU-202XL/LU-202XLm.........................................................................................................................................S-146
4.2.1 No feed JAM/ Paper skew when feeding a western style envelop (when use MK-746).............................................S-146
4.2.2 LU-202m/LU-202XL/LU-202XLm J-1501(No feed Jam) occurs when the thick paper and the coated paper is fed. .S-148
4.2.3 LU-202m/LU-202XL/LU-202XLm J-1502(No feed JAM) occur when feeding coated paper ......................................S-148
4.2.4 LU-202XL/LU-202XLm Black Line at 104mm, 208mm from leading edge 614mm from trailing edge or narrow trailing
space (magnification defect).......................................................................................................................................S-149
4.2.5 Multi-feed jam of coated paper (J-1510).....................................................................................................................S-149
4.3 OT-510.................................................................................................................................................................................S-150
4.3.1 J-7229 The paper trailing edge does not go out the paper exit section (Connecting OT-510)...................................S-150
4.4 FS-532 .................................................................................................................................................................................S-151
4.4.1 Irregular correspondence of the main tray exit ...........................................................................................................S-151
4.4.2 FS-532/OT-510/FS-612/FS-531 Solution of Condensation under direct connection .................................................S-158
4.5 IQ-501..................................................................................................................................................................................S-158
4.5.1 IQ-501, C-6A01 ..........................................................................................................................................................S-158
4.5.2 IQ-501 and MK-744C(Patlite), C-E002/E013 .............................................................................................................S-159
4.5.3 C-6B01 (IQ-501: Image abnormality) .........................................................................................................................S-160
4.5.4 IQ-501 Spot was detected.. message remains...........................................................................................................S-160
4.6 DF-706.................................................................................................................................................................................S-168
4.6.1 DF-706, [ADF Clean] icon appears ............................................................................................................................S-168
4.7 MB-508 ................................................................................................................................................................................S-168
4.7.1 Abnormal noise while coated paper feeding...............................................................................................................S-168
SA SD-513 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver1.0 (REPORTS FROM THE MARKET)..................SA-1

1. SD-513 ...................................................................................................................................................................SA-1
1.1 Adjustment value is not reflected.......................................................................................................................................... SA-1
1.1.1 Symptom ..................................................................................................................................................................... SA-1
1.1.2 Cause .......................................................................................................................................................................... SA-1
1.1.3 Solution........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-1
1.2 Clamp door open/close issue ............................................................................................................................................... SA-1
1.2.1 Symptom ..................................................................................................................................................................... SA-1
1.2.2 Cause .......................................................................................................................................................................... SA-1
1.2.3 Solution........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-1
1.2.4 Procedures .................................................................................................................................................................. SA-2
1.3 Entrance conveyance section JAM (wavy curl paper) .......................................................................................................... SA-2
1.3.1 Symptom ..................................................................................................................................................................... SA-2
1.3.2 Cause .......................................................................................................................................................................... SA-2
1.3.3 Solution........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-3
1.4 Breakage of the meal guide of the Hold Assy/C-1266.......................................................................................................... SA-3
1.4.1 Symptom ..................................................................................................................................................................... SA-3
1.4.2 Cause .......................................................................................................................................................................... SA-3
1.4.3 Solution........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-3
1.5 Problem of folding section .................................................................................................................................................. SA-11
1.5.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-11
1.5.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-11
1.5.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-11
1.6 4-stitch booklet fold line break at trail edge ........................................................................................................................ SA-28
1.6.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-28
1.6.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-28
1.6.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-29
1.7 How to calculate Fore-edge trimming adjustment value..................................................................................................... SA-29
1.7.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-29
1.7.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-29
1.7.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-29
1.8 Fore-edge trimming section (corner) paper torn-up / cutting shortage ............................................................................... SA-30
1.8.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-30
1.8.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-30
1.8.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-30
1.9 Booklet edge soilage (machine front side).......................................................................................................................... SA-30
1.9.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-30
1.9.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-31
1.9.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-31
1.10 Clamp ASSY Problem ...................................................................................................................................................... SA-31
xcviii
1.10.1 Symptom ..................................................................................................................................................................SA-31
1.10.2 Cause .......................................................................................................................................................................SA-31
1.10.3 Solution.....................................................................................................................................................................SA-31
1.11 Up-down error due to the up-down drive assy parts problem........................................................................................... SA-37
1.11.1 Symptom ..................................................................................................................................................................SA-37
1.11.2 Cause .......................................................................................................................................................................SA-37
1.11.3 Solution.....................................................................................................................................................................SA-37
1.12 Breakage of the meal guide of the Hold Assy/C-1266...................................................................................................... SA-39
1.12.1 Symptom ..................................................................................................................................................................SA-39
1.12.2 Cause .......................................................................................................................................................................SA-40
1.12.3 Solution.....................................................................................................................................................................SA-40
2. TU-503..................................................................................................................................................................SA-45
2.1 Slitter JAM/SC caused by inputting wrong Custom size..................................................................................................... SA-45
2.1.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-45
2.1.2 Problem cases........................................................................................................................................................... SA-45
2.1.3 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-45
2.1.4 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-46
2.2 How to clear slitter scrap JAM ............................................................................................................................................ SA-46
2.2.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-46
2.2.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-46
2.2.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-46
3. FD-504..................................................................................................................................................................SA-48
3.1 Abnormal movement in the front console, when FD-504 is installed.................................................................................. SA-48
3.1.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-48
3.1.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-48
3.1.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-48
3.2 Booklet side soilage at clamping ........................................................................................................................................ SA-48
3.2.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-48
3.2.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-48
3.2.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-49
3.3 FD-504 clamp motor engaging gear scraped/C-1280 ........................................................................................................ SA-49
3.3.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-49
3.3.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-49
3.3.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-49
3.4 Flat back forming failure (Clamp Assy-caused / M39 motor).............................................................................................. SA-51
3.4.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-51
3.4.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-51
3.4.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-51
3.5 Booklet side soilage at clamping ........................................................................................................................................ SA-54
3.5.1 Symptom ................................................................................................................................................................... SA-54
3.5.2 Cause ........................................................................................................................................................................ SA-54
3.5.3 Solution...................................................................................................................................................................... SA-54
SB RU-518 HM-103 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Ver1.0 ............................................................SB-1

1. CAUTIONS AT INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................................SB-1
1.1 Cautions at installation RU-518 ............................................................................................................................................ SB-1
1.1.1 Scratch by entrance guide plate .................................................................................................................................. SB-1
1.1.2 MK-740 Banner tray attachement................................................................................................................................ SB-2
1.1.3 Connection of “RU-518” + “FNS with PI part” .............................................................................................................. SB-4
1.2 Cautions at installation HM-103............................................................................................................................................ SB-5
1.2.1 Cautions at installation the humidification unit............................................................................................................. SB-5
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ...........................................................................................................................................SB-7
2.1 RU-518 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................................... SB-7
2.1.1 Adjustment of entrance guide...................................................................................................................................... SB-7
2.1.2 JAM in the horizontal conveyance section .................................................................................................................. SB-8
2.1.3 The light hitting mark at trailing edge of the paper ...................................................................................................... SB-9
2.2 HM-103 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................................... SB-11
2.2.1 About the warm-up operation of HM.......................................................................................................................... SB-11
2.2.2 Caution in drainage work........................................................................................................................................... SB-11
2.3 HM-103 Troubleshooting (when using the aqua conditioner) ............................................................................................. SB-15
2.3.1 C-1754/C-1743 .......................................................................................................................................................... SB-15
2.3.2 C-1743 / the empty display is not canceled............................................................................................................... SB-16
xcix
AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/
C73hc/Print C3070L REGION SPECIFIC LEGAL CONFIRMATION FLOW > 1. OUTLINE
REGION SPECIFIC LEGAL CONFIRMATION FLOW

1. OUTLINE
1.1 Procedure for checking with customers whether Konica Minolta needs to take an action
Please follow the procedure below if you say for certain when KM printer will be installed in our customer.
1. First, please ask a customer if there are any actions to be taken by Konica Minolta for chemical management or EHS regulations which a
customer must comply with, when a customer will install production printer or label printer.
If “yes”, please ask a customer to provide the following information.
• The name of regulation or ordinance
• Action: [What KM should do] [after/before import]
• Deadline of action
If “no”, please inquire of local government according to the next step No.2, because some customers may not recognize such
regulations.
2. Contact method with local government where KM printer will be installed.

• [Recommended] By local language; Telephone
• By language other than local language; E-mail
3. To search a contact information of local government

• You can ask your customer.
• Please confirm the telephone number or e-mail address of local government.
• If you search on web search engine, “state or province’s name [space] gov”, you can see the homepage of local government. And
please find the department which manage chemical management or EHS regulation. “Contact us” is usually shown.
• Small administrative divisions might not have applicable departments. So it is better to contact a local government that have bigger
administration such as state or province.
4. To inquire
Please ask a local government same contents as the procedure No. 1
Are there any actions to be taken by Konica Minolta for chemical management or EHS regulations which a customer must comply with,
when a customer will install production printer or label printer?
If “yes”, please provide us the following information.
• The name of regulation or ordinance
• Action: [What KM should do] [after/before import]
• Deadline of action
5. The sample of questionnaire is prepared in English ver. and Chinese ver. If you need it, please contact us at:
ehs-reg_local.confirm@gcp.konicaminolta.com
-1
C73hc/Print C3070L Revision List
Revision List
Version Description Date
1.00 Issue of first edition 2017/11/24
1.01 Video added (HTML) 2018/01/19
Correction of error in writing
2.10 Corresponds FW ver.21 (FW ver.20 is not issued.) 2018/05/21
3.00 Corresponds FW ver.30 2019/01/08
-1
C73hc/Print C3070L A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
A-1
C73hc/Print C3070L A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE
▪ Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA, INC. (hereafter called KM) strongly
recommends that all servicing be performed only by KM-trained service technicians.
▪ Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KM does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the
information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
▪ The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended. Therefore,
this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of
technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product
properly. Keep this service manual also for future service.
▪ Distributors or KM issue password for customer engineers (CE) as necessary. The password
is required for operations or machine settings that are based on this service manual. These
customer engineers (CE) must manage the password carefully. Never leak the password to
a third party.
A-2
AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/ A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR
C73hc/Print C3070L DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

AND CAUTION
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “
CAUTION” are defined as follows.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER : Action having a high possibility of suffering

death or serious injury
WARNING : Action having a possibility of suffering death

or serious injury
CAUTION : Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

wound and property damage
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
: Precaution when
servicing the product.
General
Electric hazard High temperature
precaution
: Prohibition when
servicing the product.
General Do not touch with Do not
prohibition wet hand disassemble
: Direction when servicing

the product.
General
Unplug Ground/Earth
instruction
Illustrations representing the power plug and wall outlet used in the following descriptions are
only typical. Their shapes differ depending on the country or region.
A-3
C73hc/Print C3070L A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY WARNINGS
3. SAFETY WARNINGS
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at
proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high
risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly
prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind
this policy.
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention
WARNING
▪ Do not make any modifications to the product
unless otherwise instructed by KM.
▪ Do not use any part not specified by KM.
▪ Do not use any power cord or power plug not

specified by KM.
▪ Use only the protective fuses specified by KM.

Use of any type of fuse or related part not
specified by KM makes safety devices
inoperative which may result in a fire from
high heat.
▪ Do not disable fuse functions or use a wire,
metal clip, solder, or other conductor in place
of the fuse.
Fire may result from high heat.
▪ Do not disable relay functions (for example,
inserting a piece of paper between relay
contacts to hamper circuit action.)
Fire may result from high heat.
A-4
WARNING
▪ Do not disable safety functions (for example,
interlocks and safety circuits).
Safety devices become inoperative, resulting
in fire from high heat, electric shock, or
injury.
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit the wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is the obligation of the customer engineer (hereafter called the
CE) to attach the appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to
the supply.
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
▪ Use a power supply cord set which meets the
following criteria:
• provided with a plug having configuration
intended for the connection to wall outlet
appropriate for the product's rated voltage
and current, and
kw
• the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding,
and
• provided with three-conductor cable
having enough current capacity, and
• the cord set meets regulatory
requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or
electric shock.
A-5
WARNING
▪ Attach power plug which meets the following
criteria:
• having configuration intended for the
connection to wall outlet appropriate for
the product’s rated voltage and current,
and
• the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding,
and
• meets regulatory requirements for the
area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the
product connecting to inadequate power
supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric
shock.
▪ The wires in the power supply cord shall be
connected to the terminals of the plug in
accordance with the following:
Color of the wire Terminal of the plug
Brown Black Marked with "L", "A" or "W"
or colored RED
Marked with "N"
Light Blue White or colored BLACK
Marked with "E", "PE" or " "
Green-and-Yellow or colored GREEN
or GREEN-AND-YELLOW
▪ Wrong connection may cancel safeguards

within the product, and results in fire or electric
shock.
A-6
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer
(hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment
may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the
CE must perform regular safety checks.
3.3.1 Power Supply
(1) Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
▪ The power outlet should have a capacity of at
least the maximum power consumption and
be dedicated only to the product.
The current that can be passed through the
outlet is limited and any current exceeding
the limit could result in fire.
kw
▪ If the wall outlet has two or more receptacles
and the product and another electrical
appliance are plugged into this wall outlet,
make sure that the total load does not exceed
the rating of the wall outlet. The current that
can be passed through the outlet is limited
and any current exceeding the limit could
result in a fire.
A-7
WARNING
▪ Do not use any conversion plug adapter even
if the power plug shape does not match your
wall outlet.
The shapes of the power plug and the wall
outlet are set according to the voltage and
allowable current. Use of a conversion plug
adapter could result in an abnormal voltage
or insufficient current capacity, leading to a
fire. It may also result in an electric shock
due to a grounding failure.
If the plug shape does not match the wall
outlet, request the user to perform power
source installation work.
▪ Make sure the power cord is plugged into the
wall outlet securely.
If the power plug is left loose in the wall
outlet, contact failure may occur, leading to
abnormal heating of the power plug and a
risk of fire.
(2) Ground Connection
WARNING
▪ Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded
product, you may suffer electric shock while
operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall
outlet.
A-8
WARNING
▪ Make sure of correct ground connection.
If the grounding wire is connected to an
inappropriate part, there is a risk of
explosion or electric shock. Do not connect
the grounding wire to any of the following
parts:
a. Gas pipe: Gas explosion or fire may
result.
b. Lightning rod: Risk of electric shock or
fire during lightning.
c. Grounding wire for telephone line: Risk
of electric shock or fire during lightning.
d. Water pipe and faucet: These parts do
not serve as a ground connection because
of a plastic part that is very often installed
midway within the water pipe.
(3) Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
▪ When using the power cord set (inlet type)
that came with this product, make sure the
connector is securely inserted in the inlet of
the product.
When a securing measure is provided,
secure the cord with the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not
connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
A-9
WARNING
▪ Do not allow the power cord to be stepped on
or pinched.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
▪ Check whether the power cord is damaged.
Check whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is
damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plug and connector on each end)
specified by KM. Using the damaged power
cord may result in fire or electric shock.
▪ Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
▪ Check whether dust is collected around the
power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet
without removing dust may result in fire.
▪ Do not insert the power plug into the wall
outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
▪ When unplugging the power cord, grasp the
plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk
of fire and electric shock.
(4) Wiring
WARNING
▪ Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple
power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
A-10
WARNING
▪ When an extension cord is required, use one
that meets the rated current, rated voltage,
and the relevant safety standards of the
country.
Current that can be passed through the
extension cable is limited and fire may
result from the use of an inappropriate type
of an extension cable.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the
cable taken up. Fire may result.
3.3.2 Installation Requirements
(1) Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
▪ Do not place the product near flammable
materials or volatile materials that may catch
fire.
A risk of fire exists.
▪ Do not place the product in a place exposed
to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
A-11
(2) When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
▪ When the product is not to be used for an
extended period of time (for holidays, for
example), instruct the user to turn OFF the
power switch and unplug the power cord from
the power outlet.
Dust collected around the power plug and
outlet may cause fire.
(3) Ventilation
CAUTION
▪ The product generates ozone gas during
operation.
If the smell of ozone is present in the
following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly
ventilated room
b. When making a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the
same time
(4) Stability
CAUTION
▪ Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake, the product
may slide, leading to an injury.
A-12
3.3.3 After Service
(1) Inspection before Servicing
WARNING
▪ Before conducting an inspection, read all
relevant documentation (service manual,
technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the
inspection following the prescribed procedure
using the recommended personal safety
equipment and using only the prescribed
tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described
in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not
used, the product may break and a risk of
injury or fire exists.
▪ Before conducting an inspection, be sure to
disconnect the power plugs from the Main
Body and Accessories (Options).
When the power plug is inserted into the
wall outlet, some units are still powered
even if the POWER switch is turned OFF.
A risk of electric shock exists.
CAUTION
▪ The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burned.
A-13
CAUTION
▪ Do not leave the machine unattended during
transportation, installation, and/or inspection.
If the machine is left unattended, face
protrusions toward the wall or take other
necessary precautions to prevent a user or
other person in the area from stumbling
over a protrusion of the machine or being
caught by a cable, possibly causing a fall to
the floor or other personal injury.
(2) Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
▪ Take every care when making adjustments or
performing an operation check with the
product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an
operation check with the external cover
detached, you may touch live or high-
voltage parts or you may be caught in
moving gears or the timing belt, leading to
a risk of injury.
▪ Take every care when servicing with the
external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A
risk of electric shock exists.
▪ If it is absolutely necessary to service the
machine with the door open or external
covers removed, always be attentive to the
motion of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause
unexpected hazards.
A-14
CAUTION
▪ Do not keep gazing at a lamp light during the
service procedure with the product powered
ON.
Eyestrain may result.
(3) Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
▪ When a product fault is reported from a user,
check parts and repair the fault appropriately
with safety in mind.
A damaged product, personal injury, or fire
may result.
▪ Whenever mounting an option on the
machine, be attentive to the motion of the
other workers performing the task.
Another worker may be injured by a pinch
point between the machine and the option.
▪ When mounting an option on the machine, be
careful about the clearance between the
machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand
pinched between the machine and the
option.
▪ When removing a part that secures a motor,
gear, or other moving part, disassembling a
unit, or reinstalling any of such parts and
units, be careful about moving parts and use
care not to drop any part or unit. During the
service procedure, give sufficient support for
any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.
A-15
WARNING
▪ Check the external covers and frame for
possible sharp edges, burrs, and damage.
They can be a cause of injury during use or
servicing.
▪ When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow
spot, be careful about sharp edges and burrs
on the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
▪ Do not allow any metal parts such as clips,
staples, and screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause
electric shock or spark bursting into flame.
▪ Check wiring for pinched and any other
damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of
electric shock or fire.
▪ Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for
any damage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
▪ Do not disassemble or adjust the write unit
(PH unit) incorporating a laser.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
▪ Do not supply power with the write unit (PH
unit) shifted from the specified mounting
position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
▪ After replacing a part to which AC voltage is
applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp),
be sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
A-16
WARNING
▪ Check the interlock switch and actuator for
loosening and check whether the interlock
functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may
receive an electric shock or be injured
when you insert your hand in the product
(e.g., for clearing paper jam).
▪ Make sure the wiring cannot come into
contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other
pointed parts.
Damage may lead to the risk of electric
shock or fire.
▪ Make sure that all screws, components,
wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for
safety check and maintenance have been
reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors,
pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, personal injury,
electric shock, and fire exists.
▪ Never use any flammable or combustible
spray, fluid, gas, or similar substance in and
around the product.
Do not use any flammable or combustible
dust spray, in particular, to clean the
interior of the product.
Fire or explosion may result.
A-17
CAUTION
▪ Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust
from electrical parts and electrode units such
as a charging corona unit.
Toner remnants and dust may lead to
product failure and/or the risk of fire.
▪ Check electrode units such as a charging
corona unit for deterioration and signs of
leakage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
▪ When replacing a battery, replace it with a
new one as specified.
Dispose of the used battery as instructed
on its packaging or by local ordinance.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with an incorrect type.
(4) Handling of Consumables
WARNING
▪ For handling of consumables (toner,
developer, photoconductor, etc.) and their
storage precautions, see MSDS.
(5) Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
▪ Handle with care according to MSDS.
Use of solvent may involve explosion, fire,
or personal injury.
A-18
3.4 FUSE
CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
ATTENTION
Double pôle / fusible sur le neutre.
3.5 Used Batteries Precautions

3.5.1 ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3.5.2 Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
3.5.3 France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé
par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
3.5.4 Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
3.5.5 Finland, Sweden
VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
A-19
3.5.6 Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
A-20
AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/ A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON
C73hc/Print C3070L THE MACHINE
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be
taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine

(Fusing unit)
The fusing unit is DO NOT put your hand

very hot. between the main body
To avoid getting and fusing unit;
burned DO NOT otherwise you may
TOUCH. be injured.
A-21
(Weste toner box)

WARNING: Explosion
The toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
NEVER throw the waste toner box into a fire.
A-22
(Rear side)
WARNING: Electrical Shock
There is a risk of electrical shock.
Since a large amount of current leaks, make sure to connect the power plug into a power
outlet that is grounded.
Before unplugging the main body, unplug all power plugs of optional devices.

Leakage could result in a fire or electrical shock.
Be sure to connect this product to an earthed socket outlet only.
(Process unit)
A-23
(Writing unit)
CAUTION
Do not open the cover
during energization
since the light source of
laser is inside.
(PF-707m)

A-24
(PF-707m)
(LU-202m)
CAUTION
To avoid any unexpected
injury, DO NOT put your
hand into the holes
(3 places) on the bottom
plate of the LU.
CAUTION
DO NOT put your hand into the sheet metal area.
Otherwise, you may get burned. Please be
especially careful in loading or removing paper.
A-25
(LU-202XL/LU-202XLm)
CAUTION: Injury
An unexpected injury may occur, such as getting your hand caught.
DO NOT put your hand into the five holes on the tray bottom plate.
Be especially careful when loading paper.
CAUTION: High temperature! Burn

You may get burned.
DO NOT put your hand into the sheet metal area.
Be especially careful when loading or removing paper.
A-26
(HT-515)
(MB-508)
CAUTION: Injury
An unexpected injury may occur, such as getting your fingers caught when opening the
manual tray.
DO NOT put your fingers between the manual tray and the main body.
A-27
(IQ-501)

(IQ-501)
A-28
(UK-301)

(UK-301)
A-29
(UK-301)
CAUTION: Electrical Shock
There is a risk of electrical shock because hazardous voltage
exists inside.
DO NOT open the cover.
CAUTION
If the inside temperature rises, it may damage the machine.
DO NOT cover the air opening.
A-30
Paste when OT-510/FS-531/FS-532/FS-612 is

directly connected to main body
The charging roller

assy is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
(OT-510)
CAUTION
NEVER put your hand on the top of printed sheets when
removing them from the primary (main) tray.
Failure to do so may cause unexpected injury, such as
getting your fingers squeezed between the main body and
the primary (main) tray going upward. Be sure to hold both
front and rear sides of the stack to remove it from the tray.
CAUTION
NEVER insert your fingers
into the space between the
main body and the primary
(main) tray.
Failure to do so may cause
unexpected injury, such as
getting your fingers
squeezed by the primary
(main) tray sliding
sideways. Please be careful
when removing paper from
the tray.
A-31
(OT-511)
The charging roller assy

and surrounding metal
plate are very hot.
To avoid getting burned
DO NOT TOUCH.
(FS-531/612)
CAUTION
To avoid injury, DO NOT
put your hand on top of
the printed sheets.
Be sure to hold both
sides of the printed
sheets when removing
them, and DO NOT leave
your hand on the printed
sheets while the primary
(main) tray goes up.
A-32
)6
CAUTION
NEVER put your hand on the top of printed sheets when
removing them from the primary (main) tray.
Failure to do so may cause unexpected injury, such as
getting your fingers squeezed between the main body and
the primary (main) tray going upward. Be sure to hold both
front and rear sides of the stack to remove it from the tray.
CAUTION
NEVER insert your fingers
into the space between the
main body and the primary
(main) tray.
Failure to do so may cause
unexpected injury, such as
getting your fingers
squeezed by the primary
(main) tray sliding
sideways. Please be careful
when removing paper from
the tray.
A-33

(5 CAUTION
NEVER put your hand into the hollow
portion inside the finisher.
The finisher mounted with Punch Kit
PK-522 has a hollow portion, in the
back of which is located a motor.
Touching the motor, you may get
burned. Please do not put your hand
deep into the hollow portion when
removing mishandled paper.
(PB-503)
CAUTION
The paste tank
unit is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
A-34
(PB-503)

(SD-506)
Do not touch the edge of the

trimmer blade.
You get injured.
A-35

5&
CAUTION : This unit has more than

one power-supply cord. To reduce the risk
of electric shock disconnect all power
suplly cords before servicing.
VORSICHT : Dieses Gerät verfügt über
mehrere Netzkabel. Um daher der
Stromschlaggefahr vorzubeugen, sind vor
Servicearbeiten alle Netzkabel abzutrennen.
ᴾ දॖᴾᾉᴾ䈖䈱䊡䊆䉾䊃䈲㪉ᧄએ਄䈱㔚Ḯ䉮䊷䊄䉕
૶↪䈚䈩䈇䉁䈜䇯ᗵ㔚䈱ෂ㒾䉕㒐ᱛ䈜䉎䈢䉄䈮䇮
䉰䊷䊎䉴೨䈮䈜䈼䈩䈱㔚Ḯ䉮䊷䊄䉕ಾ䉍㔌䈚䈩
䈒䈣䈘䈇䇯
>PET<
(GP-501) WARNING
This safety message you could
get an electrical shock because
disconnecting power from this
section does not cut off power
from adjacent sections of the
machine.
WARNING
This safety message means
that you might get seriously
hurt or killed if you open the
product and expose yourself to
hazardous voltage. NEVER
remove the screwed on covers.
ALWAYS refer service
requirements to qualified
service personnel.
A-36

)2
CAUTION
NEVER put your hand on
the display panel when
closing the upper part of
the auto ring binder.
Otherwise, you may be
injured. Please be
careful when closing the
upper part of the auto
ring binder.
CAUTION
When the top cover or bypass deck of
the ring binder is opened, be careful
of your head.
Otherwise, you may be injured getting
bumped on your head. Please be
especially careful when removing
mishandled paper.
A-37
(GP-502)
WARNING
This safety message means you could get an
electrical shock because disconnecting power
from this section does not cut off power from
adjacent sections of the machine.
WARNING
This safety message means that you might get
seriously hurt or killed if you open the product
and expose yourself to hazardous voltage.
NEVER remove the screws on covers. ALWAYS
refer service requirements
to qualified service personnel.
A-38
(SD-513)
When taking out output sheets from

the bundle exit tray, do not put your
hand into the shutter of the outlet.
If you put your hand into the
shutter while sheets are being
delivered onto the bundle exit tray,
it may cause an unexpected
accident.
Before removing out output sheets,
make sure that they have all been
delivered onto the bundle exit
tray.
A-39
(SD-513)
When closing the clamp

section, do not put your hand
between the clamp section
and the main body.
Your hand is caught between
them, it may cause an
unexpected accident.
Be careful to close the clamp
section.
(SD-513)
When the clamp section is opened, the
internal unit inside the saddle stitcher
may be located forward. Do not touch the
motor section of the internal unit with
your hand.
The motor section of the internal unit
may be hot. If you touch it with your
hand, you may burn your hand.
Pay special attention to clear jammed
paper inside the main body of the saddle
stitcher.
A-40
(SD-513)

(SD-513)
Before starting the service,
disconnect the power cord.
Otherwise, it may cause an
electric shock.
A-41
(SD-513)
WARNING
To avoid electric shock, after turning OFF the power switch,
do not touch the DC power supply unit for a specified time.
If the DC power supply unit is faulty, it may take time
before its voltage drops sufficiently.
CAUTION
For continued protection against risk of fire,
replace only with same type and rating of fuse.
A-42
(TU-503)
Be sure to hold the specified

position;
If you hold other position, it
may cause an unexpected
accident.
Do not put your hand into the

rotary cutter section;
otherwise you may be injured.
A-43
(RU-518/HM-103)
CAUTION: Electrical Shock, Fire
There is a risk of electrical shock or fire. DO NOT put anything other than the specified liquid
into the unit. Also, do not carry out replenishment work on the unit.
If any liquid drips on any electrical components in the unit, it may damage the machine or
cause unexpected trouble.
CAUTION: Injury
You may get injured. DO NOT drop the container containing liquid.
If liquid is scattered on the floor, the floor will become slippery, which may cause unexpect-
ed trouble.
A-44
(RU-518)
A-45
(RU-702)

(RU-702)
A-46
(FD-503)

A-47
(LS-506)
CAUTION
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area
that you are advised not to touch by any caution label.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has
come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be
read, contact our service office.
A-48
4.2 Warning indications on the boards
WARNING
• To avoid electric shock, after turning OFF the power
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/1 unit for 30
minutes.
WARNING
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/2 unit for 10
minutes.
A-49
WARNING
do not touch the DC power supply unit for 10 minutes.
WARNING Do not touch power supply unit for 10 min.

after shutting off the machine.
Electric Shock from Stored Charge on Capacitors!
WARNING
WARNING Do not touch power supply unit for 30 min.

Electric Shock from Stored Charge on Capacitors!
A-50
CAUTION
switch, do not touch the DC power supply/1 and DC power
supply/2 for 6 minutes.
(PF-707m)
CAUTION
CAUTION Electric Shock from Stored Charge on Capacitors!

Do not touch power supply unit for 6 min.
WARNING
• Do not open the cover for 50 minutes after turning OFF the
power switch.
There is a possibility of electrical shock caused by
charging voltage.
A-51
(SD-513)
CAUTION
CAUTION Electric Shock from Stored Charge on Capacitors!

Do not touch power supply unit for 6 min.
CAUTION
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area
that you are advised not to touch by any caution label.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has
come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be
read, contact our service office.
A-52
AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/ A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE
C73hc/Print C3070L OF AN ACCIDENT
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take
emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KM must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through
direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KM.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by
every distributor.
A-53
AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/ B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS
C73hc/Print C3070L MANUAL
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL
Be sure to maintain the confidentiality of this manual.
Mishandling of this manual may make you face punishment according to the laws.
B-1
C73hc/Print C3070L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 2. PRODUCT NAME
2. PRODUCT NAME
In this manual, each product is indicated as following names.
(1) AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc: Copier or Main body
AccurioPrint C3070L: Copier or Main body
Microsoft Windows 7: Windows 7
Microsoft Windows 8.1: Windows 8.1
Microsoft Windows 10: Windows 10
The combination of these OSs: Windows 7, 8.1, 10
B-2
C73hc/Print C3070L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 3. TRADEMARK
3. TRADEMARK
3.1 Trademarks of other companies
The indicated company and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of each company.
3.2 Own trademarks
KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA logo, Accurio, and AccurioPress are the registered trademarks of Konica Minolta, Inc.
© 2017 KONICA MINOLTA, INC.
B-3
C73hc/Print C3070L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS

Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
Sensor PS IN Sensor detection signal
PS
Door PS1
SIG
102 PS
Solenoid SD 24V Power to drive the solenoid
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Clutch CL 24V Power to drive the clutch
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Motor M 24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1 Drive signals of two kinds
DRV2
D1
D2
_U Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
_V
_W
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1 Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
D2 Motor, phases A and B control signals
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV
DRV B
DRV
A
/A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
Fan FM 24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
Ground SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
B-4
C73hc/Print C3070L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS
PG, P.GND Power ground

Serial DCD Data carrier detection
communication SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
DSR, DSET Data set ready
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
B-5
C73hc/Print C3070L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION

When the direction in which paper is fed is in parallel with the longer side of paper, the paper feed direction like this is referred to as the
longitudinal feed.
And the paper feed direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal feed is referred to as the transverse feed.
When specifying the longitudinal feed, "S (abbreviation for Short Edge Feeding)" is added to the paper size. For the transverse feed, no specific
notation is employed.
However, when only the longitudinal feed is specified for one and the same paper size with no specification made for the transverse feed, "S" is
not added even when being fed longitudinally.
<Example>
Paper size Feed direction Notation
A4 Transverse feed A4
Longitudinal feed A4S
A3 Longitudinal feed A3
B-6
C73hc/Print C3070L B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 6. DISCLAIMER
6. DISCLAIMER
The information herein is possibly changed for an improvement without any notice.
B-7
AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/ C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/
C73hc/Print C3070L C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L
1.1 Type
Type Console type
Copying method 4-coupled drum tandem laser electrostatic method
Original stand Fixed
Original alignment Left rear standard
Photo conductor type OPC
Writing type 4-beam laser exposure method
Tray capacity Tray 1 (500 sheets, 80 g/m2)
Tray 2 (1000 sheets, 80 g/m2)
MB-506, MB-508 (Multi manual feed, 250 sheets, 80 g/m2)*1 *2
PF-602m (3000 sheets x 2, 80g/m2) *1
PF-707m (1390 sheets x 2, 1850 sheets x 1, 80 g/m2)*1
LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm (2500 sheets, 80 g/m2)*1
LU-202XL, LU-202XLm (Banner paper (487.8 mm or more in the FD direction), 1000 sheets, 128 gsm)*1
*1 MB-506, MB-508, PF-602m, PF-707m, LU-202m, LU-202XL and LU-202XLm are the options.
*2 The PF-602m and PF-707m are not available when the MB-506 is installed.
1.2 Functions
Original*1 Sheet, book, solid object
*1
Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17 (Custom: Maximum 297 x 431.8mm)
Copy magnification*1 Fixed magnification Inch : x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.545, x 1.294, x 1.214, x 0.785, x
0.772, x 0.647, x 0.500
Metric : x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.189, x 0.840, x 0.707, x
0.500
Zoom magnification x 0.250 to x 4.000 (each 0.001 step)
Warm-up time 390 seconds or less
First copy out time (C3080) Color 6.1 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Black and white 4.0 seconds or less (A4, 81/2 x 11)
First copy out time (C3070, Color 6.5 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
C3070L) Black and white 4.0 seconds or less (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Continuous copy/printing speed Color 80 sheets/min. (8 1/2 x 11), 81 sheets/min. (A4)
(C3080, C3080P, C83hc) 39 sheets/min. (SRA3), 45 sheets/min. (A3)
Black and white 80 sheets/min. (8 1/2 x 11), 81 sheets/min. (A4)
39 sheets/min. (SRA3), 45 sheets/min. (A3)
Continuous copy/printing speed Color 70 sheets /min. (8 1/2 x 11), 71 sheets /min. (A4)
(C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L) 36 sheets/min. (SRA3), 37 sheets/min. (A3)
Black and white 80 sheets /min. (8 1/2 x 11), 81 sheets /min. (A4)
39 sheets/min. (SRA3), 45 sheets/min. (A3)
Continuous copy/printing count Up to 9,999 sheets
Resolution Scan*1 Main scan: 600dpi
Sub scan: 600dpi
Writing Main Scan: Equivalent to 3600 dpi (Image data resolution is
1200 dpi)
Sub scan: 1200 dpi
Standard memory Image memory capacity: 5GB
System memory capacity C3080, C3070, C3070L: 10GB
C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, C73hc: 4GB
System memory C3080, Standard of the main body 10GB (8GB + 2GB)
C3070 Main body + IC-605A 14GB
(10GB (Standard of the main body) + 4GB (IC-605A))
Main body + VI-511 14GB
(10GB (Standard of the main body) + 4GB (VI-511)
Main body + IC-605A + 18GB
VI-511 (10GB (Standard of the main body) + 4GB (IC-605A) + 4GB
(VI-511)
Main body IC-605A + 20GB
UK-104 + VI-511 (8GB (Main body) + 4GB (IC-605A) + 4GB (UK-104) + 4GB
(VI-511)
C-1
C3080P, Standard of the main body 4GB

C83hc, Main body + IC-605B 12GB
C3070P, (4GB (Standard of the main body) + 8GB (IC-605B))
C73hc
Main body + VI-511 8GB
(4GB (Standard of the main body) + 4GB (VI-511)
Main body + IC-605B + 16GB
VI-511 (4GB (Standard of the main body) + 8GB (IC-605B) + 4GB
(VI-511)
Main body IC-605B + 20GB
UK-104 + VI-511 (4GB (Standard of the main body) + 8GB (IC-605B) + 4GB
(UK-104) + 4GB (VI-511)
C3070L Standard of the main body 10GB
Main body + IC-605A 14GB:
10GB (Standard of the main body) + 4GB (IC-605A)
HDD C3080/C3070 Maximum 3.5TB:
1TB x 3 (Standard of the main body) +500GB (UK-104)
C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, C73hc Maximum 3.5TB:
1TB x 3 (IC-605B) +500GB (UK-104)
C3070L Maximum 3TB:
1TB x 3 (Standard of the main body)
Number of originals to be stored More than 10,000 sheets (A4)
Interface section RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C), Service port (USB-Type A x 4, USB-Type B x 1)
*1 C3080, C3070 and C3070L only.
1.3 Paper
1.3.1 Size and weight
Paper size Tray 1 A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5S
11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 S
8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 x 431.8mm, Minimum 139.7 x 182mm)
Tray2 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, ISOB5S,
A5S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 S
8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 139.7 mm x
182 mm)
Reverse and exit SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, ISOB5S,
A5S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 S
8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 330.2 x 487.7 mm, Min. 139.7 x 182 mm)
Duplex SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S,
ISOB5S, A5*3, A5S,
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 S
8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 762 mm, Minimum 100 mm x
148 mm*2)
When MB-506 or MB-508 + Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 1300mm, Minimum 100 mm x
MK-740 or MK-740m are used 148 mm)
When the LU-202XL or Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 762 mm, Minimum 210 mm x
LU-202XLm is used 182 mm)
Paper weight that can be fed Tray 1, Tray 2 62 g/m2 to 256 g/m2*1 (plain, fine, color specific)
80 g/m2 to 256 g/m2*1 (coated)
Paper weight that can be passed Simplex straight paper exit*5 62 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*4 (plain, fine, color specific)
through Simplex back on top output 80 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*4 (coated)
ADU
*1 For paper size A4 or smaller than 81/2 x 11, it is up to 216g/m2
C-2
*2 Only the paper from 64 gsm to 135 gsm can be passed through when the length in the sub scan direction is less than 182.0 mm and the
length in the main scan direction is 105.1 mm or more.
*3 Only the paper from 64 gsm to 135 gsm can be passed through.
*4 The paper from 301 gsm to 350 gsm can be passed through only when the paper size is from A3 to SRA3.
*5 The paper weight of banner paper (length in the FD direction: 762.1 mm or more) is from 128 g/m2 to 256 g/m2.
1.3.2 Type of paper
Type of paper Tray 1, Tray 2 MB-506, MB-508 LU-202m, LU-202XL, PF-602m*15 *16 PF-707m*15
LU202XLm*15
Plain ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Fine ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Color ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Coated GL, ML, GO, ○ *3
○ *3
○ ○ ○
MO*1 *2
Color ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Postcard *18 - ○ ○*4 *13 ○*8 ○*13
Envelope*11 - ○*3 *17 ○*10 *13 - ○*13 *14
*5
Label - ○ - - -
*6
OHP sheet ○ ○ - - -
Tab paper *7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○*9
Textured ○ *3
○ *3 *17
○ *13 *14
○ *14
○*13 *14
○: Can be fed, -: Cannot be fed
(Coated type) G: Gloss, M: Matte, L: Laser, O: Offset
*1 Paper less than 80g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 HT-503, HT-504, HT-505, HT-506, or HT-515 (option) is required for humidity 50% or more.
*3 The paper can be fed only per 1 sheet.
*4 The LU-202m, LU-202XL, and LU-202XLm can be fed only when the postcard kit or the MK-746 is installed.
*5 The feed is available but not guaranteed.
*6 The image quality is not assured.
*7 Placement direction is specified. Only for simplex.
*8 Postcard can be fed only lower path.
*9 Can be fed only when the side auxiliary guide is installed.
*10 Can be fed only when the MK-746 installed.
*11 Can be fed only when the EF-103 installed.
*12 Tray 3 is only assured. Tray 1 and tray 2 are available, but not assured.
*13 Paper feed is guaranteed only when the option is directly connected to the main body.
*14 The specifications for restrictions on the size and paper feed tray depend on the product specifications of each paper feed option.
*15 The environmental assurance depends on the product specifications of the temperature and humidity conditions and the reliability usage
conditions for each paper feed option,.
*16 For WY3 or later
*17 Only for the MB-506
*18 Only for Japan.
1.4 Recommended paper
• The recommended paper is the paper type which can be fed in Q zone and has no extreme image deterioration.
1.4.1 Inch
Paper type Product name
Plain, Fine Domtor First Choice (90g/m2)
Recycled paper MOHOAWK Color Copy Recycle 54302 (105g/m2)
STAPLES multipurpose paper 50% recycled (105g/m2)
BOISE Aspen Laser (90g/m2)
BOISE Aspen Color Copy ACC-2811 (105g/m2)
Color Hammermill Color Copy Photo White 28lb (105g/m2)
Hammermill Color Copy Cover 60lb (163g/m2)
Hammermill Color Copy Cover 80lb (216g/m2)
Domtar Cougar Digital Color Copy (351g/m2)*1
Coated-GL, Coated-GO NewPage Sterling Premium Digital Gloss Text 100lb (148g/m2)
Sappi OPUS GLOSS DIGITAL TEXT (216g/m2)
WAUSAU PAPER Gloss coated (216g/m2)
MOHOAWK color copy ultra gloss White/Blanc 12pt (255g/m2)
Coated-ML , Coated-MO New Page FUTURA LASER DULL COVER 80# (216g/m2)
MOHOAWK EVERYDAY DIGITAL COATED SILK WHITE (118g/m2)
Textured Mohawk superfine White i-TONE Eggshell (118g/m2)
C-3
Mohawk via Linen Bright White i-TONE (298g/m2)

*1 Paper's grainy direction is the perpendicular to the feed direction.
1.4.2 Metric
Paper type Product name
Plain, Fine Profi (80g/m2)
Original (80g/m2)
Color Color Copy (Mondi) (90g/m2, 100g/m2, 120g/m2, 160g/m2, 200g/m2, 220g/m2, 250g/m2, 280g/m2, 300g/
m2 ,350g/m2 *1)
SUPERIOR OFFICE COLOR (160g/m2)
KMColor+ (90g/m2)
DCP Blanc White (280g/m2)
Coated-GL, Coated-GO Color Copy Coated Glossy (Mondi) (135g/m2, 170g/m2, 200g/m2, 250g/m2)
Sappi Magnostar (200g/m2)
Coated-ML, Coated-MO Color Copy Coated Silk (Mondi) (135g/m2, 170g/m2, 200g/m2, 250g/m2)
Konicaminolta Semi Gloss Refrence (130g/m2)
Textured Invercote G Linen (240g/m2)
Elfenbein Linen (246g/m2)
Gmund Ever aomori (300g/m2)
*1 Paper's grainy direction is the perpendicular to the feed direction.
1.5 Materials
1.5.1 C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L
Parts name Useful life Name
*1*6 *6
Toner bottle/Y 71,000 counts TN619Y
64,000 counts *1*7 TN620Y *7
66,000 count *1*5*8 TN621Y *8
Toner bottle/M 54,500 counts *1*6 TN619M *6
49,000 counts *1*7 TN620M *7
51,500 count *1*5*8 TN621M *8
Toner bottle/C 78,000 counts *1*6 TN619C *6
70,000 counts *1*7 TN620C *7
63,000 count *1*5*8 TN621C *8
Toner bottle/K 66,500 counts *1*6 TN619K *6*8
60,000 counts *1*7 TN620K *7
67,000 count *1*5*8 TN621K *8
Drum unit/Y 460,000 counts, drive distance of the drum DU-105 *6*8
223 km, or lubricant applying roller drive DU-106 *7
distance 71.4 km, whichever is earlier.
Drum unit/M 460,000 counts, drive distance of the drum DU-105 *6*8
Drum unit/C 460,000 counts, drive distance of the drum DU-105 *6*8
Drum unit/K 460,000 counts *2, 420,000 counts *3 , drive DU-105 *6*8
distance of the drum 223 km, or lubricant DU-106 *7
applying roller drive distance 71.4 km,
whichever is earlier.
Developer/Y 1,350,000 counts *2 A3VX700
1,200,000 counts *3
(The drive distance of the developing roller/Y
694.2 km) *4
Developer/M 1,350,000 counts *2 A3VX800 *6*7
1,200,000 counts *3 A3VX801 *8
(The drive distance of the developing roller/M
694.2 km) *4
Developer/C 1,350,000 counts *2 A3VX900 *6*7
1,200,000 counts *3 A3VX901 *8
(The drive distance of the developing roller/C
694.2 km) *4
Developer/K 1,350,000 counts *2 A3VX600
1,200,000 counts *3
(The drive distance of the developing roller/K
694.2 km) *4
C-4
Waste toner box 130,000 counts *1*5 A50UR701##

*1 A4 original at each color 5% coverage is the condition to operate.
*2 C3080, C3080P, C83hc
*3 C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L
*4 The drive distance of the developing roller decides the actual life.
*5 The sensor detects the actual life automatically.
*6 C3080, C3080P, C3070, C3070P
*7 C3070L
*8 C83hc, C73hc
1.6 Maintenance
Maintenance cycle Every 222,000 prints*1
Every 220,000 counts*2*3
Average number of prints*4 Inch: 59,000 per month*1
Inch: 34,000 per month*2
Metric: 54,000 per month*1
Metric: 26,983 per month (only for Europe)*6
Metric: 21,459 per month (only for India)*6
Metric: 17,400 per month (Except for Europe and India)*6
Maximum number of prints*4 Q zone*5 864,000 per month*1*6 28,800 per day*1*6
758,000 per month*2*3*7 25,200 per day*2*3*7
B, C zone*5 150,000 per month 8,500 per day
A zone*5 100,000 per month 5,000 per day
*1 C3080 and C3080P
*2 C3070
*3 C3070L
*4 The print number is a total of black and white, single color, and full colors.
*5 The zones mean the temp&humidity range that is indicated in the following graph.
*6 C83hc
*7 C3070P, C73hc
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
1.7 Machine data
Power source C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc
Inch: AC208 to 240V 24A 60Hz
Metric: AC220 to 240V 25A, 50Hz
Australia: AC220 to 240V 20A, 50Hz
C3070L
Inch: AC208 to 240V 16A 60Hz
Metric: AC220 to 240V 16A, 50Hz
Australia: AC220 to 240V 20A, 50Hz
Power consumption C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc
Inch: 5,760W or less (For the whole system excluding the options with a dedicated power code)
Metric: 6,000W or less (For the whole system excluding the options with a dedicated power code)
Australia: 4,800W or less (For the whole system excluding the options with a dedicated power code)
C3070L
Inch: 3,840W or less (For the whole system excluding the options with a dedicated power code)
Metric: 3,840W or less (For the whole system excluding the options with a dedicated power code)
Australia: 4,800W or less (For the whole system excluding the options with a dedicated power code)
Dimensions C3080, C3070 or C3070L + 800 (W) x 903 (D) x 1,076 (H*1) mm
OC-511
C3080, C3070 or C3070L + 2,193 (W) x 903 (D) x 1,478 (H*2) mm
DF-706 + LU-202m + FS-612
C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, C73hc 800 (W) x 903 (D) x 1,041 (H*1) mm
Weight Approximately 319kg (C3080, C3070, C3070L)
C-5
Approximately 312kg (C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, C73hc)

*1 The operation panel section is not included.
*2 The operation panel section is included.
1.8 Power cord
<C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070>
Destination Specifications Power code, power plug
Japan 200 V, 25 A
North America 208 V to 240 V, 24 A
Europe, Asia Pacific, China*1, India*1, Color 220 V to 240 V, 25 A

Press*1
*1 Except for the C3080P.
Australia*1 220 V to 240 V, 20 A

*1 Except for the C3080P.
<C3070P, C73hc>
India 220 V to 240 V, 25 A
<C3070L>
North America 208 V to 240 V, 16 A
Europe 220 V to 240 V, 16 A
C-6
Asia Pacific, Color Pro 220 V to 240 V, 25 A
China 220 V, 16 A
Australia 220 V to 240 V, 20 A
1.9 Operating environment
Temperature 10°C to 30°C
Humidity 10% to 80%RH (with no condensation)
C-7
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. HT-511
2. HT-511
2.1 Type
Type Heater type dehumidifier
2.2 Machine data
Power source 220 VAC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 40 W
Dimensions 240.6 (W) x 124.1 (D) x 7.8 (H) mm
Weight 232.4 g
C-8
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. DF-706
3. DF-706
3.1 Type
Name Dual scan document feeder
Type Paper feed section Paper feed from top of stack
Image reading section • Sheet-through system
• Back side: Reading by CIS
Exit section Straight exit system
Installation Screw clamp to the main body
Document alignment Center
Document loading Face up
3.2 Functions
Mode Standard mode, Thin paper mode, Mixed original (same width/different width) detection mode, Scan mode, Index paper
mode
3.3 Type of original
Type Standard mode, Scan 1-sided mode: 35 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (9 5/16 to 55 7/8 lb) *1
mode 2-sided mode: 50 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (13 5/16 to 55 7/8 lb)
Mixed original detection 1-sided / 2-sided mode: 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (13 5/16 to 34 1/16 lb)
mode*2
Original size Maximum 297 mm x 431.8 mm
Minimum 100 mm x 139.7 mm
Detectable document size Standard mode, Scan Inch
mode A3, A4S, A4, B4, B5S, B5
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 51/2S, 81/2 x 51/2
Metric
A3, A4S, A4, A5S, A5, A6S, B4, B5S, B5, B6S
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 11, 8x13, 8K, 16k, 16KS
Index paper mode Metric
B5, A4, A4S, B4, A3
Inch
8.5x14,8.5x11S,8.5x11
Capacity 300 sheets (64 g/m2 (17 lb)) or stack of 19 mm (3/4 inches) and below (including paper curl)
• *1: Original which is lighter than 50 g/m2 is guaranteed only when thin paper mode is used.
*2: For the combined original detection mode, refer to the mixed original feed chart.
3.4 Particular original
• If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of original Possible trouble
Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 to 15 mm (3/8 Dog-eared, exit failure, transport failure
to 9/16 inches)) *4
Thermal paper (Heat sensitive paper) Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure
Paper immediately after paper exit from the main body Paper feed failure, transport failure
Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose leaf *1, CF Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes
paper *2)
Folded original (including half-folded and Z-folded Paper feed failure, transport failure, image distortion
originals) *3
Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Transport failure
Coated paper (including inkjet paper) Paper feed failure, transport failure
• *1: Limited to vertical feeding
*2: No crease on perforation
*3: Creases must be smoothed out. (amount of float: 15 mm (9/16 inches) or less)
*4: Amount of curl: less than 10 mm (3/8 inches) in vertical and 20 mm (13/16 inches) in horizontal direction
10mm
20mm
3.5 Prohibited original
• Prohibited originals that cause trouble
C-9
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. DF-706
Type of original
Sheets stapled or clipped together
Book original
Sheets with paper attached
Sheets clipped or notched
Torn paper
Original weighing less than 35 g/m2 (9 5/16 lb) or 210 g/m2 (55 7/8 lb) or more
Significantly curled original (amount of curl exceeding 15 mm (9/16 inches))
OHP film
Label sheet
Offset master paper
Glossy photographic paper or glossy enamel paper
3.6 Mixed original feed chart

• For metric
Maximum 297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm
original width
Mixed original size A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 B5S A5S
297 mm A3 ◎ ◎ - - - - - -
A4 ◎ ◎ - - - - - -
257 mm B4 ○ ○ ◎ ◎ - - - -
B5 ○ ○ ◎ ◎ - - - -
210 mm A4S ○ ○ ○ ○ ◎ ◎ - -
A5 × × ○ ○ ◎ ◎ - -
182 mm B5S × × ○ ○ ○ ○ ◎ -
148 mm A5S × × × × × × ○ ◎
• For inch
Maximum original 11 8 1/2 5 1/2
width
Mixed original size 11×17 8 1/2 x 11 8 1/2 x 14 8 1/2 x 11S 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S
11 11 x 17 Same width Same width - - - -
8 1/2 x 11 Same width Same width - - - -
1 1
8 /2 8 /2 x 14 ○ ○ Same width Same width Same width -
8 1/2 x 11S ○ ○ Same width Same width Same width -
1 1
5 /2 x 8 /2 × × Same width Same width Same width -
5 1/2 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S × × × × × Same width
◎ Same width Tilted with in 1.5 % or less

○ Mixed original feed available No regulation of tilted degree
× No. mixed original feed
- Can not set original
3.7 Machine data
Power requirement Power supply DC 24 V, DC 12 V (for CIS), DC 5 V
Supplying method Supplied from the main body
Max. power consumption 104.5 W or less
Dimension Width 618 mm (24 5/16 inches)
Depth 575 mm (22 5/8 inches)
Height 166 mm (6 9/16 inches) (180 mm (7 1/16 inches): max. including projection)
Weight Approx. 15.1 kg (33 5/16 lb)
Temperature change rate: 10 degrees/h or less
Temperature change rate: 10% (relative temperature)/h or less
C-10
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 4. PF-602m (for WY3 or later)
4. PF-602m (for WY3 or later)

4.1 Type
Type Front loading type two-tray paper feeder
4.2 Functions
Number of trays Two trays (All trays universal)
Maximum tray capacity 6,000 sheets (80 g/m2 standard paper) = 3,000 sheets x 2 trays
4.3 Type of paper
Paper size*3 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5*1, B5S, ISOB5S, A5*1,A5S, B6S, ISOB6S*1,
A6S*1
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tray 1: Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7mm, Minimum 100 mm x 182 mm)
Tray 2: Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 148 mm)
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Coated*2, Color, Tab Paper, Textured*1 *4 *5
Paper weight Tray 1 64 to 256g/m2
Tray 2 64 to 300g/m2
*1 Paper feed available only from tray 2
*2 Paper less than 80g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*3 The specification of the PF-602m itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*4 The paper whose width is less than 182 mm is not guaranteed.
*5 Only C3080 series.
4.4 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE Same as the main body.
4.5 Machine data
Power source 200 VAC to 240 VAC, 24 VDC, 12 VDC, 5 VDC (supplied both from the main body)
Maximum power consumption DC: 90W or less, AC: 100W or less
Dimensions 947 (W) x 750 (D) x 1045 (H) mm
Weight Approximately 170kg
C-11
5. HT-504
5.1 Type
Type Fan heater type dehumidifier
5.2 Machine data
Power source 24 VDC, 5 VDC, 200 VAC to 240 VAC (supplied from the connected device)
Dimensions Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 197 (W) x 82 (D) x 293 (H) mm
Power source unit: 121 (W) x 80 (D) x 160 (H) mm
Weight Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 1.5kg (per unit)
Power supply unit: 0.9 kg
C-12
6. HT-505
6.1 Type
6.2 Machine data
Power source 24 VDC, 5 VDC, 200 VAC to 240 VAC (supplied from the main body)
Weight Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 1.5kg (per unit)
C-13
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 7. PF-707m
7. PF-707m
7.1 Type
Type Front loading type suction method 3-tray paper feeder
7.2 Functions
7.2.1 Paper feed
Number of trays 3 trays (All trays universal)
Maximum tray capacity 4,630 sheets (80 g/m2)
Tray 1, 2: 1,390 sheets
Tray 3: 1,850 sheets
7.3 Type of paper
Paper size*5 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S*1, ISOB6S*1,
A6S*1
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2 S, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 139.7 mm) *2
Tab paper (A4, 81/2 x 11)*4
Postcard (only for Japan)*1
Applicable paper *5 Plain, Fine, Color, Coated*5, Envelope*3, Textured*6
*5
Paper weight 62 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
*1 Use the small size guide. Only the 1st tandem is available.
*2 Use the small guide when the width is shorter than 139.7 mm. Only the 1st tandem is available. The minimum sizes of the 2nd tandem and
3rd tandem are 139.7 mm x 139.7 mm.
*3 Only tray 3 supports envelopes.
*4 Can be fed only when the side auxiliary guide is installed. Only for a simplex.
*5 Paper less than 81 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*6 Only the paper feed from the tray 3 is guaranteed. Paper feed for the paper that is 250 mm or less in the CD direction, or 180 mm or less in
the FD direction (standard sizes: A6S, B6S, A5S, A5, B5S, A4S) is not guaranteed.
7.4 Machine data
Power source 12/5/-12VDC, 180 VAC to 264VAC, 50Hz/60Hz common (supplied from the main body)
100 V AC (Supplied from the dedicated power code)
Japan: 100 V AC (Supplied from the dedicated power plug)
Inch: 120 V AC (Supplied from the dedicated power plug)
Metric (Other than Japan): 230 V AC (Supplied from the dedicated power plug)
Maximum power consumption*1 DC: 70W or less
AC: 580W or less
Weight 203kg
*1 Excluding the power consumption of HT-506.
C-14
8. HT-506
8.1 Type
8.2 Machine data
Power source 24/5 V DC
Inch (100 V specification): 90 V AC to 132 V AC
Metric (200 V specification): 180 V AC to 264 V AC
Maximum power consumption DC: 6W or less
AC: Inch (100 V line), Metric (200 V line) 384 W or less (per unit)
Dimension Dehumidifier fan unit + air supply and exhaust duct: 293 (W) x 336 (D) x 176 (H) mm
Weight 6kg
(Dehumidifier fan unit x 3, air supply and exhaust duct x 3, power source unit x 1)
C-15
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 9. FA-502
9. FA-502
9.1 Type
Type PF tandem paper conveyance device
9.2 Type of paper
Paper size Maximum 330.2 mm x 1300 mm, minimum 139.7 mm x 139.7 mm*1*2
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated
Weight 52 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*1
*1: The specification of the FA-502 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*2: Minimum length in the main scan direction of banner paper (length in sub scan direction: 487.8 mm or more) is 250 mm.
9.3 Machine data
Power source 24VDC (supplied from PF)
Maximum power consumption 96W or less
Weight Tandem unit: 8 kg
Drive: 1 kg
C-16
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 10. LU-202m
10. LU-202m
10.1 Type
Type Side mount type large volume paper feed unit
10.2 Functions
Maximum tray capacity 2500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
*1 Stacked height 275 mm
10.3 Type of paper
Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
8K, 16, ISOB4
Tab paper (A4*3, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 210 mm x 182 mm)
Postcard*1 (100 mm x 148 mm)
Envelope*1 *5 (Maximum 292 mm x 429 mm, Minimum 90 mm x 148 mm)
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Coated*2, Colored, Color, Tab Paper*4, Textured, Envelope*5
Envelope*1 *5: 70 g/m2 to 100 g/m2
*1 Only when installed the MK-746.
*2 When you feed the coated paper, you need HT-503.
*3 The tab length of the A4T can be switched between 12.5 mm and 15.0 mm.
*4 The set direction of index paper is specified. (The tab side is the trailing edge.) Only for a simplex
*5 When EF-103 is installed.
10.4 Maintenance
MAINTENANCE Same as the main body.
10.5 Machine data
Power source 24 VDC, 12 VDC, 5 VDC, 200 VAC to 240 VAC (50 Hz, 60 Hz) (supplied both from the main body)
Maximum power consumption DC: 40W or les, AC: 40W or less (When you use a night heater.)
DC: 40W or les, AC: 290W or less (When you use HT-503.)
C-17
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. LU-202XL
11. LU-202XL
11.1 Type
Type Side mount type large volume paper feed unit(Correspond to banner paper)
11.2 Functions
Maximum tray capacity Sub scan length: 182 mm to 2,500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
487.7 mm 182 mm to 487.7 mm
Sub scan length: 487.7 mm to Plain 1,000 sheets, coated paper 500 sheets (128 g/m2)
750 mm 487.8 mm to 762 mm
(banner paper)*2
*1 Stacked height 275 mm
*2 The specification of the LU-202XL itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
11.3 Type of paper
Paper size SRA3, SRA4, A3, A4, B4, B5, SRA4S, A4S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
8K, 16, ISOB4
Tab paper (A4T*2, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330 mm x 762 mm, Minimum 210 mm x 182 mm)*3 *7
Postcard*1 (100 mm x 148 mm) (only for Japan)
Envelope*1*6 (Maximum 292 x 429mm, Minimum 90 x 148mm)
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Coated*4, Colored, Color, Tab Paper*5, Postcard (only for Japan)*1, Envelope*1 *6, Textured*8
Paper weight *7 Sub scan length: 182 mm to 487.7 mm 52 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*2 *7
Sub scan length: 487.8 mm to 762 mm (banner 128 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*7
paper)*7
Envelope*1*6 70 g/m2 to 100 g/m2
*1 When MK-746 is mounted.
*2 For the width of A4T, switch 12.5 mm and 15.0 mm.
*3 When the length is more than 487.8 mm (banner paper), the minimum width size is 250 mm.
*4 When you feed the coated paper, you need the HT-503.
*5 For the tab paper, the placement direction is specified (the tab is on the paper trailing edge), only one side.
*6 When EF-103 is installed.
*7 The specification of the LU-202XL itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*8 Performance is not guaranteed for the banner paper whose length in the sub scan direction is 487.8 mm or more.
11.4 Machine data
Power source 24/12/5/-12VDC, 200VAC to 240VAC (50/60Hz) (Supplied from the main body.)
Maximum power consumption DC: 40W or les, AC: 40W or less (When you use a night heater.)
DC: 40W or les, AC: 290W or less (When you use HT-503.)
Dimensions 1012 (W)mm x 639 (D)mm x 477 (H) mm
Weight 60 kg
Sub scan: Paper less than Temperature 10°C to 30°C
487.8 mm Humidity 10% to 80%RH (with no condensation)
Sub scan: Paper 487.8 mm Temperature 18°C to 23°C
or more, Envelope, Humidity 40% to 60%RH (with no condensation)
Textured
C-18
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 12. LU-202XLm
12. LU-202XLm
12.1 Type
Type Large capacity paper feed unit (supporting banner paper)
12.2 Functions
Maximum tray capacity Paper size in the sub scan 2500 sheets (80 g/m2, Stacking height: 275 mm)
direction: 487.7 mm or less
Paper size in the sub scan Plain: 1,000 sheets, Coated: 500 sheets (128 g/m2)
direction: 487.8 mm or more
12.3 Type of paper
Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11S
8K, 16K
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 762 mm, Minimum 210 mm x 182 mm) *1
Tab paper (A4, 8.5 x 11) *2
Postcard (100 mm x 148 mm) (only for Japan) *3 *4 *5
Envelope (maximum 292 mm x 429 mm, minimum 90 mm x 148 mm) *3 *4 *5
Applicable paper type Plain, Fine, Coated*6, Colored, Color, Tab Paper*2, Textured*4 *7, Postcard (only for Japan)*3 *4, Envelope*3 *4
*8
Paper weight Paper size in the sub scan direction: 487.7 mm or 52 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
less
Paper size in the sub scan direction: 487.8 mm or 128 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
more
Envelope *3 *4 70 g/m2 to 100 g/m2
*1: Minimum length in the main scan direction of banner paper (length in sub scan direction: 487.8 mm or more) is 250 mm.
*2: The set direction is specified. (The tab side is the trailing edge.) Only for a simplex.
*3: Only when MK-746 is installed.
*4: Only when the LU is directly connected to the main body. (Whether the LU can be directly connected to the main body or not depends on the
type of main body.)
*5: The minimum length in the sub scan direction is 178 mm when the LU is connected to the PFU or the MB.
*6: Only when HT options are installed.
*7: Banner paper (length in the sub scan direction: 487.8 mm or more) is not guaranteed.
*8: The specification of the LU-202XLm itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
12.4 Machine data
Power source 24 VDC, 12 VDC, 5 VDC, -12 VDC: Supplied from the main body
200 VAC to 240 VAC: Supplied from the main body
Maximum power consumption DC: 40 W or less
AC: 40 W or less (when the dehumidifier heater inside the LU is used.)
Dimension 1012 (W) mm x 639 (D) mm x 477 (H) mm
Weight 60 kg
Paper size in the sub scan Temperature 10°C to 30°C
direction: 487.7 mm or less Humidity 10% to 80%RH (with no condensation)
Paper size in the sub scan Temperature 18°C to 23°C
direction: 487.8 mm or more Humidity 40% to 60% RH (with no condensation)
Envelope
Textured
C-19
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 13. HT-503/HT-515
13. HT-503/HT-515
13.1 Type
13.2 Machine data
Power source 5 V DC: Supplied from the main body
24 V DC: Supplied from the machine to which the LU is connected
HT-503: 200 V AC to 240 V AC (supplied from the machine to which the LU is connected)
HT-515: 100 V AC to 120 V AC (Supplied from the power plug)
Weight Dehumidifier fan heater unit: 1.5 kg
C-20
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 14. MK-746
14. MK-746
14.1 Type
Type Envelope guide
Configuration Side assist guide (attached to the side guide of the LU: Use as a pair of guides.)
Lead assist guide (attached to the side guide of the LU: Use as a pair of guides.)
Bottom assist plate (attached to the bottom side guide.)
Bottom assist guide (attached to the up down plate of the LU.)
Lead lift part (When the thin paper no feed JAM occurs, attach to the bottom assist guide.)
14.2 Functions
Function Envelopes can be fed with installing the paper feed assist parts.
Feed available width (main scan 90 mm to 292 mm
direction)
Feed available length (sub scan 148 mm to 429 mm
direction)
Loading capacity *1 100 sheets *2
*1 The number of loading sheets is for when you use the evaluation standard paper that is written in the EF or recommended paper.
Load capacity for envelopes of 270 mm x 382 mm and 287 mm x 382 mm is 50 sheets.
14.3 Type of paper
Weight of envelope 70 g/m2 to 100 g/m2
Recommended envelope *1 Metric 229 mm x 162 mm *2
229 mm x 114 mm *2
Inch 241 mm x 152 mm *2
[1] [2] [3]
[1] Single side seam

[2] Center seam
[3] Double side seam
Metric, Inch : Double side seam is recommended.
Envelope not allowed to use Envelopes with double-stick tape or release coated paper on the flap.
The envelope with the film window. *1
Envelope not guaranteed Envelope with the triangle flap
The following envelopes that deform too much are not guaranteed because they possibly cause a paper
jam or a paper skew.
· The bottom side of an envelope is folded.
· Sides of an envelope are folded.
· Corners of an envelope are folded.
*1 The seal area is not assured when the back is printed.
*2 Not including flap.
Paper size Manufacturer Product name Seam Recommendation
Inch Western States 7059 white (93 g/m2) Double side seam Evaluation standard
Sulfite paper
Metric ELCO 32486 (100 g/m2) Double side seam Evaluation standard
paper
14.5 Machine data
Dimensions Side assist guide (size per one): 243 mm (W) x 99 mm (D) x 222 mm (H)
Lead assist guide (size per one): 87 mm (W) x 37 mm (D) x 72 mm (H)
Bottom assist plate: 72 mm (W) x 190 mm (D) x 4 mm (H)
Bottom assist guide: 417 mm (W) x 124 mm (D) x 149 mm (H) (Except trail edge guide shaft)
C-21
Leading edge lift part: 45 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 12 mm (H)

Weight Side assist guide (weight per one): 1 kg
Leading edge assist guide (weight per one): 0.06 kg
Bottom assist plate: 0.1 kg
Bottom assist guide: 1.6 kg
Leading edge lift part: 0.01 kg
Humidity 40% to 60% RH (with no condensation)
C-22
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 15. MB-506
15. MB-506
15.1 Type
Type Multi bypass paper feed unit
15.2 Functions
Tray capacity 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
15.3 Type of paper
Paper size*7 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S,
Postcard (only for Japan),
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100 x 148 mm)
Applicable paper Plain, Colored, Fine, Color, Coated*1, Postcard (only for Japan), Label*2, Tab Paper*3, OHP sheet*4,
Envelope*5, Banner paper*6, Textured*9
Paper weight 62 g/m2 to 350 g/m2*8
*1 The paper can be fed only per 1 sheet. Paper less than 81 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 Paper feed is possible, but it is not guaranteed.
*3 Place direction is specified. Only for simplex.
*4 The image quality is not guaranteed.
*5 When installing the EF-103. The paper can be fed only per 1 sheet.
*6 Performance is guaranteed only when MK-740 or MK-740m is installed.
*7 The specification of the MB-506 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*8 Performance is only guaranteed for 350 gsm when the C3080 series + MB-506 (WY2 specification) combination is used.
*9 The paper can be fed only per 1 sheet.
15.4 Machine data
Power source 24 VDC, 5 VDC (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption Maximum 28 W or less
Weight Approximately 4.2 kg
C-23
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 16. MB-508
16. MB-508
16.1 Type
Type Multi bypass paper feed unit
16.2 Function
LU relay conveyance mode The paper that is fed from the LU is conveyed.
Bypass paper feed mode Paper is conveyed from the bypass tray.
Tray capacity (Bypass tray) 250 sheets (80 g/m2, stacking height: 27.5 mm)*1
Paper feed, conveyance speed*2 LU relay conveyance mode 100 sheets per minute (A4, 8.5 x 11)
Bypass paper feed mode 85 sheets per minute (A4, 8.5 x 11)
*1: The capacity for coated paper, envelopes, and Textured paper is 1 sheet.
*2: The specification of the MB-508 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
16.3 Type of paper
Paper size SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11S, 5.5 x 8.5S, 8 x 13,
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 148 mm)*1*2*3
Tab paper (A4, 8.5 x 11) *4
Postcard (only for Japan)
Applicable paper type Plain, Fine, Coated, Colored, Color, Tab Paper*4, Textured*5, Postcard (only for Japan), Envelope*5
Paper weight 52 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 *6
*1: Paper whose paper size ratio (main scan direction : sub scan direction) is “1:2” or more is not recommended.
*2: Banner paper (length in the sub scan direction is 487.8 mm or more) can be fed when the MK-740 or the MK-740m is connected. The
minimum length in the main scan direction of the banner paper is 250 mm.
*3: Paper whose length in the main scan direction is 100 mm to 137.8 mm can be fed, but it is not guaranteed.
*4: The set direction is specified. (The tab side is the trailing edge.) Only for a simplex.
*5: Creases in the folding part and scratches on the leading edge are not guaranteed. Not supported in the initial state.
*6: Recommended setting of the grain direction of the paper (217 g/m2 or more): Perpendicular to the paper conveyance direction
16.4 Machine data
Power source 5 VDC, 12 VDC: Supplied from the main body
24 VDC: Supplied from PFU
Maximum power consumption DC: 200 W or less
Weight 31.5 kg
Dimensions When the bypass tray is stored in: 296 (W) x 636 (D) x 788 (H) mm
When the bypass tray is in use: 600 (W) x 636 (D) x 673 (H) mm
C-24
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 17. MK-744C
17. MK-744C
17.1 Type
Type Status indicator light kit
17.2 Functions
Function The main body status is displayed with the 4-level lights (LEDs).
17.3 Machine data
Power source 24 VDC (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption 0.6 W per LED (4 levels)
Weight Approximately 0.65 kg (Main body)
Dimensions 50 mm (W) x 50 mm (D) x 544 mm (H) (Main body)
C-25
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 18. OT-510
18. OT-510
18.1 Type
Type Floor type large capacity open output tray
18.2 Functions
18.2.1 Functions
Sort, group mode
Offset Sort, offset group mode
18.2.2 Maximum tray capacity

When the paper length in the FD direction is 487.7 mm or less:
The main tray quarter position sensor (PS17) [1], the lower limit sensor/1 (PS4)*1 [2], the main tray middle position sensor (PS18) [3], the 3000
sheets sensor (PS16) [4], and the 4000 sheets sensor (PS19) [5] detect the stacking height.
*1 For WY2 or later
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
When the paper length in the FD direction is 487.8 mm or more (only when the exit tray of MK-740 or MK-740m is installed):
Counts the number of output paper after the paper removal sensor (PS15) [1] detects the loaded paper. The paper full detection is conducted
when it reaches the specified amount.
[1]
C-26
(1) Sort, group mode

(a) Maximum stacking height (determined with the sensor detection)
• Length in the FD direction: 487.7 mm or less

Paper type Paper weight More than A4 More than A5, A4 or less A5 or less
A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
Paper area 0.06238 m2 or more 0.03109 m2 to 0.06237 m2 0.03108 m2 or less
Not coated 40 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 *1 PS17 PS17 PS17
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 PS18 PS19 PS17
248 mm 497 mm 100 mm
Coated 40 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 *1 PS17 PS17 PS17
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 PS17 PS18 PS17
100 mm 248 mm 100 mm
*1 Loading paper of 40 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
(b) Approximate maximum number of stacked paper

Paper type State of MK-740 More than A4 More than A5, A4 or less A5 or less
installation A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
Uncoated (80 g/m2) When MK-740m is not 2000 sheets 4200 sheets 750 sheets
installed
When MK-740m is installed 2000 sheets 3000 sheets 750 sheets
*1
Coated (80 g/m2) When MK-740m is not 750 sheets 2000 sheets 750 sheets
installed
*1
*1 The banner paper exit tray of MK-740m is not installed.
• Length in the FD direction: 487.8 mm or more (Only when the exit tray of the MK-740 or MK-740m is installed)
Weight MK-740 MK-740m MK-740, MK-740m
Length in the FD direction: 487.8 mm to 762 mm Length in the FD direction: 762.1
mm or more
40 g/m2 to 127 g/m2 Not guaranteed
128 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 300 sheets 1000 sheets 100 sheets
• Envelope
100 sheets or more (not guaranteed)
(2) Offset Sort, offset group mode

Paper and envelopes whose lengths in the FD direction are 487.8 mm or more cannot be offset.

A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 PS18 PS16 PS17
248 mm 379 mm 100 mm
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 PS17 PS18 PS17
100 mm 248 mm 100 mm

C-27
A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
Uncoated 80 g/m2 1500 sheets 1500 sheets 750 sheets
18.3 Type of paper
18.3.1 Paper Size
Paper size *3 SRA3, SRA4, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5, ISOB5S, A5S, ISOB6S*1, B6S*1, A6S
*1
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13,
5 1/2 x 8 1/2S*1
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper*2 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Postcard (Only for Japan) (100 mm x 148 mm) *1
Custom size Minimum 95 (90) *7 mm x 133 mm, Maximum 331 mm x 487.7 mm
Banner Minimum 100 mm x 487.8 mm, Maximum 330.2 mm x 1300 mm
paper *4
Applicable paper *3 Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, Banner*1 *4, Label Paper*1, Letterhead*1, Envelope*1, Postcard (only for Japan)*1 *5
*3
Paper weight 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 *6
*1 Not available in the offset sort and offset group mode.
*2 Operation of the paper exit with the tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
*3 The specification of OT-510 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*4 Only when MK-740/MK-740m is installed.
*5 190 g/m2
*6 351 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 has limited paper types.
*7 Minimum length 90 mm in the main scan direction only applies to an envelope of 90 mm x 205 mm that is placed in the main tray.
18.3.2 Allowable amount of curling

Paper curl amount
C
The amount is measured with 5 printed sheets that are overlapped.

a Excluding the OHP paper: Amount of curl: 15 mm or less
OHP paper: Amount of curl: 3 mm or less
18.4 Machine data
Power source 24 VDC±10% (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions 544 mm (width)*1 x 723 mm (depth) x 1020 mm (height)
Weight Approximately 55 kg
*1 Main tray leading edge: A4 = 876 mm, A3 = 1003 mm
C-28
19. OT-511
19.1 Type
Type Output tray unit with the door for charge control
19.2 Functions
Tray capacity 150 sheets (80 g/m2) *1
*1 The alignment is not guaranteed.
19.3 Type of paper
Paper size Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, minimum 100 mm x 148 mm
Banner: Available when MK-740 or MK-740m is used (same as the main body)
19.4 Machine data
Dimensions When the output tray is stored in: 398 (W) x 645 (D) x 828 (H) mm
When the output tray is pulled out: 518 (W) x 645 (D) x 828 (H) mm
C-29
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 20. EF-103 (Specification: W*2 or later)
20. EF-103 (Specification: W*2 or later)

20.1 Type
Type Envelope fusing unit
20.2 Functions
Paper feed method When you use the fusing unit only for envelopes and the paper feed assist parts, the envelope feed is
available.
Document alignment Center
Paper feed mode Only face up exit in the simplex mode.
Paper feed direction Open the flap and feed paper from the opposite side of the flap.
Paper feed specification Paper feed tray PF-707m Only lower tray of the 1st tandem
LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm*2
MB-506
Paper feed tray load PF-707m Metric 229 mm x 162 mm, 229 mm x 114
capacity mm: 100 sheets (The height difference on
the top surface of the envelope: 10 mm or
less)
Inch 241 mm x 152 mm: 100 sheets (The
height difference on the top surface of the
envelope: 10 mm or less)
LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm*2 Metric 229 mm x 162 mm, 229 mm x 114
mm: 100 sheets (The height difference on
the top surface of the envelope: 10 mm or
less)
Inch 241 mm x 152 mm: 100 sheets (The
height difference on the top surface of the
envelope: 10 mm or less)
MB-506 1 sheet
Finishing specification*6 Paper exit tray OT-511
FS-612 Sub tray*1
FS-531 Sub tray*1
*4
FS-532 Main tray (straight output)*1
Sub tray*1
OT-510 Main tray*1
LS-506 Sub tray*1
SD-506 Sub tray*1
PB-503 Sub tray*1
SD-513 Sub tray*1
RU-518 Output tray*1
Output tray load capacity*3 OT-511: 50 sheets (evaluation standard paper)
Main tray of OT-510 or FS-532: 100 sheets (evaluation standard paper)
Finishing options which RU-518 Straight conveyance mode*1 *7
can feed the envelop FD-503 Straight mode*1
LS-506 Coupling mode*1
SD-506 Coupling exit mode*1
PB-503 Relay conveyance mode*1
SD-513 Throughpass mode*1
IQ-501 Straight mode*1
RU-510 Straight mode*1
GP-501 Straight conveyance*1 *5
GP-502 Straight conveyance*1 *5
*1 A crease at the folding position are not guaranteed.
*2 The paper feed is guaranteed only when the MK-746 is installed, and during a direct connection to the main body. A crease at the folding
position is guaranteed only when the PF (lower tray) + main body + OT-511 are connected.
*3 The alignment is not guaranteed.
*4 SD-510, PK-522 or PI-502 + MK-732 can be connected arbitrarily.
*5 Not supported in Japan. It is guaranteed only when RU-510 + FS-532 or FD-503 are installed as a finisher.
*6 When you connect three or more options, up to the second tandem is guaranteed. From the 3rd tandem, paper can be fed, but it is not
guaranteed. (Example: When the RU-518, the SD-506, and the OT-510 are connected, the SD-506 is guaranteed, but the OT-510 is not.)
*7 RU curl adjustment cannot be changed.
C-30
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 20. EF-103 (Specification: W*2 or later)
20.3 Type of paper
Weight of envelope 70 g/m2 to 100 g/m2
Envelope size PF-707m Tray 3 Main scan direction 100 mm*1 to 287 mm
Sub scan direction 148 mm to 382 mm
LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm Main scan direction 90.0 mm*2 to 287.0 mm
(only when the MK-746 is installed) Sub scan direction 148.0 mm to 382.0 mm
MB-506 Main scan direction 100.0 mm to 287.0 mm
Sub scan direction 148.0 mm to 382.0 mm
*3
Recommended envelope Inch 240 mm x 332 mm
Metric 120 mm x 235 mm
Metric*4 90 mm x 205 mm
Single side seam and double side seam are recommended.
[1] [2]
[1] Single side seam

[2] Double side seam
Envelope not allowed to use Envelopes with double-stick tape or release coated paper on the flap.
The envelope with the film window.
*1 When you feed the paper that is 140 mm or less, use the paper assist part.
*2 When you feed the paper that is 100 mm or less, the mis-centering correction control is not performed.
*3 The seal area is not assured.
*4 Only when the MK-746 is installed to the LU-202m, LU-202XL, or LU-202XLm.
20.4.1 Inch
Size Maker Product name Seam method Recommendation
6 x 9 1/2 Western States 7059 white (93 g/m2) Double side seam Evaluation standard
Sulfite paper
20.4.2 Metric
Size Maker Product name Seam method Recommendation
C5 162mm x ELCO 32486 (100 g/m2) Double side seam Evaluation standard
229mm paper
20.5 Machine data
Power source Inch: 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 208 VAC to 240 VAC (supplied from the main body)
Metric: 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 220 VAC to 240 VAC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 2430 W or less
Dimensions 200 (W) × 690 (D) × 235 (H) mm
Weight 18.8 kg (Fusing unit: 18.5 kg, Paper feed assist parts: 0.3 kg)
C-31
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 21. MK-740/MK-740m
21. MK-740/MK-740m
21.1 Type
Type Banner tray unit
21.2 Functions
Functions To feed banner paper, extend the paper feed tray and the output tray.
21.3 Type of paper
Paper size Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 1300 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 148 mm)
Paper weights 128 g/m2 to 300 g/m2*5
Maximum tray capacity Paper feed side MB-506, MB-508 Coated 1 sheet
Not coated 10 sheets (Length in the
sub scan direction: 1200
mm or less)
1 sheet (Length in the
sub scan direction:
1200.1 mm to 1300 mm)
Paper exit side*1 OT-511*4, FS-531 (sub Coated 10 sheet*2
tray only)*4, FS-612 (sub Not coated 10 sheets (Length in the
tray only), RU-518 (output sub scan direction: 1200
tray)*4 mm or less)
1 sheet (Length in the
sub scan direction:
1200.1 mm to 1300 mm)*3
FS-532, OT-510 Described in each specification
*1 Lay a sheet of the same coated paper as the one you fed on the paper exit tray.
*2 Only 1 sheet if a sheet of the same coated paper is not laid on the paper exit tray.
*3 Lay a sheet of the same paper as the one you fed on the paper exit tray.
*4 Only installed to the MK-740.
*5 The specification of the MK-740 or MK-740m itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to
connect.
21.4 Machine data
Dimen Paper feed tray side MK-740 When the tray is stored in: 432 (W) x 368 (D) x 200 (H) mm
sions When the tray is extended: 583 (W) x 368 (D) x 309 (H) mm
Output tray side When the tray is stored in: 528 (W) x 346 (D) x 28.5 (H) mm
When the tray is extended: 1054 (W) x 346 (D) x 28.5 (H) mm
MK-740m When the tray is stored in: 527 (W) x 467 (D) x 440 (H) mm
When the tray is extended: 1022 (W) x 467 (D) x 642 (H) mm
Weight Paper feed tray side MK-740 Approximately 0.9 kg
Output tray side Approximately 2.0 kg
MK-740m Approximately 8.0 kg
C-32
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 22. RU-518
22. RU-518
22.1 Type
Type Relay conveyance device with the paper cooling and the de-curler function
22.2 Function
22.2.1 Functions
Straight mode Paper is passed without the de-curl process and conveyed at an accelerating rate with the post treatment
linear velocity.
Reversing exit mode Paper is passed without the de-curl process, reversed, and conveyed at an accelerating rate with the post
treatment linear velocity.
Output tray mode Paper is passed without the de-curl process and output to the paper exit tray.
De-curler mode Paper curl is reduced and the paper is conveyed at an accelerating rate with the post treatment linear
velocity.
Humidification conveyance Paper is humidified with HM-103 (option) and conveyed at an accelerating rate with the post treatment
linear velocity.
Image Density Control The image density is measured from the density patch that is printed on the paper and the result is fed
back to the image stabilization control of the main body.
22.2.2 Capacity of the paper exit tray

Length in the sub scan direction: The paper exit tray paper full sensor (PS105) detects the full condition.
762 mm or less*1 The approximate capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
of single sheet
Length in the sub scan direction: 1 sheet
762.1mm or more*1*2
*1 When you install the FD-503 or PI-502 in the immediate downstream of the RU-518, the RU-518 exit tray can not be installed. At this time,
the exit tray section can exit the only 1 paper. (Paper exit is possible, but it is not guaranteed.)
*2 Loading paper is not guaranteed.
22.3 Type of paper
Paper size *1 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11S, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5 S,
8.5 x 13, 8.25 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8 x 13
7.25 x 10.5, 7.25 x 10.5S
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 1300 mm, Minimum 95 mm x 133 mm) (straight mode, output
tray mode)
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 95 mm x 133 mm) (reverse exit mode)
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 487.7 mm, Minimum 95 mm x 139 mm) (de-curler mode)
Tab paper*2 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Postcard *3
Applicable paper Same as the main body
Paper weight *1 Straight mode 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2
Output tray mode
Reversing exit mode 40 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
De-curler mode 50 g/m2 to 350 g/m2
Allowable amount of curling
a : The amount of curling
The amount is measured with 5 papers that are overlapped after printed
The curing amount of other than the OHP sheet
Sub scan direction: Shown in the following figure
Main scan direction: 15 mm or less
C-33
The amount of curling in the sub scan direction

40
20
a (mm)
Allowable range
0
-20
-40
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
b (mm)
The curing amount of the OHP sheet

Sub scan direction/Main scan direction: 3 mm or less
*1 The specification of RU-518 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*3 Only for Japan
22.4 Machine data
Power source 100 V AC to 127 V AC, 220 V AC to 240 V AC: Supplied from the dedicated power plug
Supplied from the main body: 5 V DC, 24 V DC
Supplying to the machine connected downstream: 5 V DC, 24 V DC
Dimension 410 (W) mm x 787.2 (D) mm x 1,135 (H) mm (not including the paper exit tray, the external tank, the
projection, but including the duct)
C-34
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 23. HM-103
23. HM-103
23.1 Type
Type Paper humidifier kit
23.2 Functions
Function Humidifies both sides of the paper uniformly and removes static electricity on the paper to stabilize the
paper quality.
Water supply tank capacity 2.9 L (approximately equivalent to 15,000 prints)
Water storage tank capacity 5.2 L (approximately equivalent to 30,000 prints)
23.3 Type of paper
Paper size*1 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S,
postcard*2
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11S, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5S
8.5 x 13, 8.25 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8 x 13
7.25 x 10.5, 7.25 x 10.5S
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A4, 8.5 x 11)
Custom paper Maximum 330.2 mm x 1300 mm, Minimum 95 mm x 133 mm
Applicable paper Same as the main body
Paper weight *1 Dehumidification [High]*3 136 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 (only for coated paper)
Dehumidification 50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 (except for coated paper)
[Standard] 80 g/m2 to 400 g/m (for coated paper)*4
Deactivating 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2
dehumidification
*1 The specification of HM-103 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*2 Only for Japan
*3 Only for color machines. Furthermore, only for paper with Rigidity 32 or more.
*4 For thin coated paper (80 g/m2 to 135 g/m2), perform paper feeding with lower productivity.
23.4 Machine data
Power source 24 V DC (supplied from RU-518)
5 V DC (supplied from RU-518)
Dimension Not determined (built in RU-518)
C-35
24. RU-702
24.1 Type
Type Relay conveyance device with the purge tray
24.2 Function
24.2.1 Functions
Straight mode Conveys paper to the downstream option.
Lower conveyance mode To ensure the analysis time for the Automatic Inspection and the Auto Image Adjustment, extends the
paper path (paper passing time). (Depending on the result of the Automatic Inspection and the Auto Image
Adjustment, the paper is conveyed to the downstream option or the purge tray.)
Purge tray mode Outputs the following paper to the purge tray.
• Paper that is detected as an out-of-range image (image trouble) by the Automatic Inspection
• Paper that is detected as a misaligned image by the Auto Image Adjustment
24.2.2 Capacity of the purge tray

Length in the sub scan direction: The purge tray paper full sensor (PS105) detects the full condition.
762 mm or less*1 The approximate capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
of single sheet
Length in the sub scan direction: 1 sheet
762.1 mm or more*1*2
*1 The specification of the RU-702 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*2 Loading paper is not guaranteed.
24.3 Type of paper
Paper size*1 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11S, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5 S,
8.5 x 13, 8.25 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8 x 13
7.25 x 10.5, 7.25 x 10.5S
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 1300 mm, Minimum 95 mm x 139 mm) (straight mode, lower
conveyance mode, purge tray mode)
Tab paper*2 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Postcard *3
Type of paper Same as the main body
Paper weight *1 Straight mode 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2
Lower conveyance mode
Purge tray mode

40
20
a (mm)
Allowable range
0
-20
-40
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
b (mm)

*3 Only for Japan
C-36
24.4 Machine data
Power source 100 V AC to 240 V AC: Supplied from the dedicated power plug
Supplied from the machine connected upstream: 5 V DC, 24 V DC
Supplying to the machine connected downstream: 5 V DC, 24 V DC
Maximum power consumption 600 W or less (includes the supply to the downstream option)
Dimension 410 (W) mm x 787.2 (D) mm x 1,135 (H) mm (Not including the purge tray and the projection. Including the
duct.)
C-37
25. RU-510
25.1 Type
Type Paper conveyance unit with paper overlap and reverse functions
25.2 Functions
Double sheets reverse exit Reverses 2 thicknesses of the paper that is output from the main body or the PI-PFU, and conveys the
conveyance mode paper to the finishing device.
Single sheet reverse exit Reverse 1 sheet of the paper that is output from the main body or the PI-PFU, and conveys the paper to
conveyance mode the finishing device.
Straight conveyance mode Conveys the paper that is output from the main body or the PI-PFU to the finishing device without any
process.
25.3 Paper type
Paper size *1 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4*1, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S*1, A6S,
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
Postcard, 8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper (Maximum 331 mm x 488 mm, Minimum 95mm x 133 mm) (Double sheets reverse exit
conveyance mode, single sheet reverse exit conveyance mode)
Custom size paper (Maximum 331 mm x 1300 mm, Minimum 95 mm x 133 mm) (Straight conveyance
mode)
Tab paper (A4, A4S, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S)
Type of paper Plain, Fine, Coated, Tab Paper, OHP Film, Label Paper, PrePrinted, Blank Insert, Textured, Book/News,
Plain-rough, Envelope (same as the main body)
Paper weight 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 *1*2
25.4 Machine data
Power source 24/5V DC (supplied from the previous device)
Maximum power consumption 79VA or less
Weight Approx. 35 kg
C-38
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 26. FS-531
26. FS-531
26.1 Type
Type Staple device
26.2 Function
26.2.1 Functions
Sort, group mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Offset sort, offset group mode Executes shifting operation for each copy and exits to the main tray
Sub tray mode Exits paper to the sub tray without any process.
Staple mode Exits to the main tray after being flat-stapled
26.2.2 Staple
Maximum flat stapling sheets 64g/m2 to 80g/m2: 50 sheets (Plain, Fine, Color), 40 sheets (Coated)
81g/m2 to 105g/m2: 40 sheets (Plain), 30 sheets (Fine, Color), 25 sheets (Coated)
106g/m2 to 135g/m2: 30 sheets (Plain, Fine), 25 sheets (Color), 20 sheets (Coated)
136g/m2 to 209g/m2: 20 sheets (Plain, Fine), 15 sheets (Color)
Within the range of the number, up to 200g/m2: 2 sheets can be inserted.
Staple position Corner stapling It is parallel or diagonal depending
on paper size
2 staplings Center spreading 162 mm pitch

Main tray Sort, group mode, offset 3000 sheets (A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S*1, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 16K,
(Paper weight 80g/m2) sort, offset group mode 16KS)
1500 sheets (SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x14, 8 1/2 x
13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13, 8K)
500 sheets (A5, A5S *1 B6S *1, ISOB6S *1, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 S *1)
Tab paper *2 (A4, 8 1/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 320 x 458 mm, Minimum *3 182 x 148 mm)
Staple mode 1000 sheets
Staple sheet Length in the sub scan Other than left
direction: 150 mm to 417 mm
2 to 9 100 sets 50 sets
Sub tray 100 sheets (SRA3, A3, B4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S,
(Paper weight 80g/m2) Postcard (only for Japan), 13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 8 1/2S, 81/2 x 13,
81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K, 16K, 16KS)
Tab paper *2 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330.2 mm x 1300*4 mm, Minimum 100 mm x 148 mm)
*1 Sort, group mode only
*3 128 mm x 148 mm for sort, group mode
*4 Paper of 487.8 mm or more is guaranteed only when the MK-740 is installed.
26.3 Type of paper
26.3.1 Staple mode
Paper size*2 A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
12x18, 11x17, 9x11, 81/2x14, 81/2 x11, 81/2 x11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 mm x 458 mm, Minimum 182 mm x 139 mm)
Paper curl amount
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less (However, the paper reverse placement and the curl adjustment is possibly
applied for the paper with 5mm or more curl.)
C-39
[1] 5 sheets
*2 The specification of the FS-531 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
26.4 Machine data
Dimensions When the main tray is pulled out:
790.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
When the main tray is stored in:
674.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
C-40
27. FS-612
27.1 Type
Type Multi folding and multi stapling device
27.2 Functions
27.2.1 Function
Non-sort mode Exited into the main tray with no processing made.
Sort/group mode Executes shifting operation for each copy and exits to the main tray
Staple mode Exits to the main tray after being flat-stapled
Saddle stitching mode After the stapling on the center of the paper finishes, folds the paper in the middle and exits to the booklet
tray
Half-Fold mode Folds the paper in the middle and exits to the booklet tray
Tri-folding mode Folds the paper twice and exits to the booklet tray
Punch mode *1 Executes punching operation and exits paper to the main tray or the sub tray
PI mode *2 Feeds the sheet
*1 When PK (option) is mounted. The combination with the non-sort mode, sort/group mode, and staple mode is available.
*2 When PI (option) is mounted. Manual stapling and manual punching are available.
27.2.2 Staple
Maximum flat stapling sheets Plain Fine Color Coat
60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 50 sheets 50 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheet
81g/m2 to 105g/m2 30 sheets 30 sheet 16 sheet 16 sheet
Within the range of the number on this chart, up to 200g/m2: 2 sheets can be inserted.
Staple position Parallel in front/45 degrees in back Slant:1 point Center:2 points
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain Fine Color Coat
60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 20 sheets 20 sheet 20 sheet 20 sheet
81g/m2 to 105g/m2 20 sheets 20 sheet 16 sheet 16 sheet
Within the range of the number on this chart, up to 200g/m2: 1 sheet can be inserted.
Staple position Changeable (128mm to 160mm)
27.2.3 Folding
Maximum center fold 60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2: 3 sheets
Maximum tri-folding 60 g/m2 to 105 g/m2: 1 sheet
27.2.4 Maximum tray capacity*1

Main tray Sort, group mode, offset sort, • 2,500 sheets
(Paper weight 60g/m2 to 350g/m2) offset group mode A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S*2, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 16K,
*4
16KS
• 1500 sheets
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x
13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K
• 500 sheets
A5, A5S *2, B6S *2, ISOB6S *2, 51/2 x 81/2 *2, 51/2 x 81/2 S *2
• Tab paper *3 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
• Custom paper • Sort, group mode
Minimum 128 mm x 139 mm, Maximum
320 mm x 458 mm
• Offset sort, offset group mode
Minimum 182 mm x 148 mm, Maximum
320mm x 458 mm
Staple mode Staple sheet Length in the sub scan Length in the sub
direction: 418mm or scan direction:
more 417mm or less
Booklet tray Saddle stitching mode Length in the sub scan direction: 299 mm or less: 15 sets with 5 sheets
(Paper weight 60g/m2 to 105g/m2) Other than this condition: 20 sets with 5 sheets
C-41
Folding mode Length in the sub scan direction: 299 mm or less: 25 sets with 3 sheets
fold
Other than this condition: 33 sets with 3 sheets fold
Tri-folding mode 50 sets with 1 sheet fold
Sub tray • 100 sheets
(Paper weight 50g/m2 to 350g/m2) SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S
*4
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 8 1/2,
51/2 x 8 1/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *3 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 330 mm x 1300 mm*5, Minimum 100 mm x 140 mm)
*1 The capacity is counted with 80g/m2 paper.
*2 Sort, group mode only
*3 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not warranty.
*5 A paper length of 488 mm or more is guaranteed only when the MK-740 is installed.
27.3 Type of paper
27.3.1 Staple mode
Paper size*2 A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper *1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom paper (Maximum 314 x 458 mm, Minimum 182 x 139 mm)
Paper curl amount
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curing: 10 mm or less
[1] 5 sheets
27.3.2 Saddle stitching mode

Paper size A3, SRA3*1, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
Custom paper (Maximum 320 mm*1 x 458 mm, Minimum 210 mm x 279 mm)
*1 You must change the setting of the DIPSW27-0 when you print on the SRA3 or extend the maximum length of the custom paper in the main
scan direction from 314 mm to 320 mm in print jobs from the controller.
27.3.3 Half-Fold mode
Paper size A3, SRA3*1, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
Custom paper (Maximum 320 mm*1 x 458 mm, Minimum 210 mm x 279 mm)
*1 You must change the setting of the DIPSW27-0 when you print on the SRA3 or extend the maximum length of the custom paper in the main
scan direction from 314 mm to 320 mm in print jobs from the controller.
27.3.4 Tri-folding mode
Paper size A4S
81/2 x 11S
16KS
C-42
27.4 Machine data
Dimensions When the main tray is pulled out:
790.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
When the main tray is stored in:
674.5 (W) x 656 (D) x 990 (H) mm
Weight 65kg
C-43
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 28. PK-512/513
28. PK-512/513
28.1 Type
Type FS built-in type punching operation device
28.2 Functions
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
Number of holes PK-512: 2 holes/3 holes (inch) or 2 holes/4 holes (metric)
PK-513: 4 holes
Hole diameter 6.5 mm (2 holes/4 holes), 8.0 mm (3 holes)
Hole pitch PK-512: 80 mm (2 holes/4 holes), 108 mm (3 holes)
PK-513: 21, 70, 21 mm
Supported mode Punch mode, straight mode
Applicable post processing mode Sort, group, staple
28.3 Type of paper
Type of paper PK-512 (2 holes) (A3, B4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2
x 81/2S, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K, 16K, 16KS)
PK-512 (3 holes/4 holes) (A3, B4, A4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 8K, 16K)
PK-513 (A3, B4, A4, B5)
Applicable paper Plain paper, high quality paper, color paper, coated paper (same as the main body)
Paper weight 60g/m2 to 128g/m2
Punch prohibited paper Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper, and the other paper that may
interfere with the operation of the punch unit or the punch blade.
Paper curling
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
a Curling (10 mm or less)

[1] 5 sheets
The specification of the PK-512/513 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
28.4 Machine data
C-44
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 29. PI-502
29. PI-502
29.1 Type
Type Torque limiter separation type sheet feeding device
29.2 Functions
Automatic sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS automatically under the instruction from the main body.
(Online operation)
Manual sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS under the instruction from the PI operation panel.
(Offline operation) The following 5 types can be selected for the post processing mode.
1 staple/back mode
2 staples (flat-stapling) mode
Punch Mode (when PK is installed on FS)
Saddle stitching mode
Tri-Fold mode
Note
The tray/Lw only supports the manual sheet feeding.
29.3 Type of paper
Paper size*1 Tray /Up A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
16K, 16KS
Custom size paper
Maximum 330 mm x 297 mm, minimum 182 mm x 139 mm
Tray /Lw SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper*2
Maximum 330 mm x 482mm, minimum 182 mm x 139 mm
Paper type Plain, Recycle, Color, Special, Coated, Fine
Capacity Tray /Up, /Lw 200 sheets (80 g/m2) or 30 mm or less in height
Paper curl amount
[1]
a
15jft1c001na
[1] 5 sheets
*1 The specification of PI-502 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*2 The custom size is not available for the manual sheet paper feed.
29.4 Machine data
Weight Approximately 10.5kg
C-45
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 30. IQ-501
30. IQ-501
30.1 Type
Type Auto image reading correction unit
30.2 Functions
30.2.1 Function
Functions Image scan with the scanner unit and the colorimeter unit
30.2.2 Paper feed mode

Non-reading mode Conveys paper. Not reads images.
Scanner reading mode Reads the image of the underside with the scanner unit/1 while the machine conveys paper.
Reads the image of the upper side with the scanner unit/2 while the machine conveys paper.
Reads the images of the underside and the upper side with the scanner unit/1 and the scanner unit/2 while
the machine conveys paper.
Scanner + colorimeter reading Reads the image of the upper side with the scanner unit/2 and the colorimeter unit while the machine
mode conveys paper.
(Performs the color calibration of the scanner unit/2 by reading the same image with the scanner unit/2 and
the colorimeter unit.)
Colorimeter reading mode Measures the color of the image of the upper side with the colorimeter unit while the machine conveys
paper.
30.2.3 Scanner unit
Read method Reading of the two-dimensional image with the CCD line sensor
Read width Main scan direction: 350 mm
30.2.4 Colorimeter unit
Colorimetry method Measures the absolute value of the colors with the spectrophotometer.
Colorimetry position Fixed at the center of the paper feeding
30.3 Type of paper
Paper size Maximum 331 mm x 1300 mm, minimum 95 mm x 139 mm*1 *2
Paper weight 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2*1
Paper type Same as the main body.
However, the following sheets cannot be read.
Textured, Tab paper, OHP sheet, Envelope, Blank insert sheet, Paper that is configured to [Pre-punched]

40
20
a (mm)
Allowable range
0
-20
-40
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
b (mm)

*1: The specification of the IQ-501 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*2: For paper whose length in the sub scan direction is 762.1 mm or longer, paper conveyance is available but reading is not conducted.
C-46
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 30. IQ-501
30.4 Machine data
Power source 100 to 240 VAC: Supplied from the dedicated power plug
24 VDC, 5 VDC: Supplied from the upstream option
24 VDC, 5 VDC: Supply to the downstream option
Maximum power consumption 700 W or less (includes the supply to the downstream option)
Dimension 663 (W) x 696 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm *1
*1 Without the projection
Temperature 10°C to 30°C *1
Humidity 10% to 80%RH (with no condensation) *1
*1: The guaranteed environment of the adjustment mode which uses the colorimeter unit is the Q zone.
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
C-47
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 31. UK-301
31. UK-301
31.1 Type
Type Auto inspection unit
31.2 Functions
31.2.1 Function
Image analysis Analyzes the image that the IQ-501 reads to detect whether there is an out-of-range image (image trouble).
Report output Outputs the report of the image analysis.
31.2.2 Basic specification
Productivity Same as the IQ-501. (150 sheets/minute (A4, 8.5 x 11))
Width of image analysis Maximum 350 mm
Process resolution Main scan, sub scan: 200 dpi
Detectable image troubles Image lacking, poor transfer, white speckles, black speckles, ink stain
Detectable area Not including the following areas.
1 mm or less from the edges of the image
1 mm from the edges of the paper
Detection level, range A user can adjust the detection level and range.
Printing condition of the inspection Not including the following printing condition.
target PrePrinted, full bleed print
The number of stored pages: 90,000 pages or more (A4 image at 30% compression rate)
Automatic inspection report
The number of stored pages: 28,000 pages or more (A4 image)
Reference image
31.2.3 Configuration
System memory 16 GB
Local memory 2 GB
HDD 4 TB (1 TB x 4)
Interface RJ45 Ethernet connector x 2
USB port (USB 3.0 Type A x 2)
31.3 Type of paper
Paper size Same as IQ-501.
However, the following paper cannot be inspected.
Banner paper (487.8 mm or more)
Paper weight Same as RU-702.
Type of paper Same as the main body.
However, the following paper cannot be inspected.
PrePrinted, Label Paper, Textured, OHP Sheet, Tab Paper, Envelope, NCR Paper
31.4 Machine data
Power source 100 to 240 VAC: Supplied from the dedicated power plug
Dimensions 370 (W) x 559 (D) x 153 (H) mm*1
Weight 11.2 kg
*1: Except for the mounting plate and the projection.
C-48
32. FS-532
32.1 Type
Type Staple-cut type multi staple device
32.2 Functions
32.2.1 Functions
Sort, group mode
Offset Sort, offset group mode
OffsetStapleMode
Staple mode
32.2.2 Staple sheet
• Combination condition of the paper type, the paper width (in the sub scan direction), the number of sheets for every range of paper weight
Paper weight (g/m2) Number of staple sheets
Plain Fine Plain paper and the paper that
is not Fine
Less than 400 400 mm or 320 mm or less 321 mm to 399 400 mm or Less than 400 400 mm or
mm more mm more mm more
40 to 49 - - - - - - -
50 to 61 100 50 50 20 - 35 35
62 to 74 100 50 50 20 - 35 35
75 to 80 100 50 30 30 30 35 35
81 to 91 60 50 30 30 30 35 35
92 to 135 50 50 30 30 30 30 30
136 to 162 40 40 30 30 30 25 25
163 to 216 25 25 25 25 25 20 20
217 to 256 25 25 25 25 25 15 15
257 to 300 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
301 to 400 - - - - - - -
32.2.3 Staple position
Staple position 1 in the back (parallel/45 degrees), 1 in the front (parallel), 2 in the center (pitch: 120 mm, 140
mm and 165 mm)

When the paper length in the FD direction is 487.7 mm or less:
The main tray quarter position sensor (PS17) [1], the lower limit sensor/1 (PS4)*1 [2], the main tray middle position sensor (PS18) [3], the 3000
sheets sensor (PS16) [4], and the 4000 sheets sensor (PS19) [5] detect the stacking height.
*1 W*5 or later
C-49
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
When the paper length in the FD direction is 487.8 mm or more (only when the exit tray of MK-740 or MK-740m is installed):
Counts the number of output paper after the paper removal sensor (PS15) [1] detects the loaded paper. The paper full detection is conducted
when it reaches the specified amount.
[1]
When the sub tray is used:

The sub tray paper full sensor (PS9) [1] detects the stacking height.
C-50
[1]
(1) Sort, group mode (Main tray)


When SD-510 is not connected
A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 PS18 PS19 PS17
248 mm 497 mm 100 mm
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 PS17 PS18 PS17
100 mm 248 mm 100 mm
When SD-510 is connected

A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 PS18 PS16 PS17
248 mm 379 mm 100 mm
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 PS17 PS18 PS17
100 mm 248 mm 100 mm

When SD-510 is not connected (not including Z-fold and half-fold)
installation A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
installed
*1
C-51
installed
When MK-740m is installed 1800 sheet 3000 sheets 750 sheets
*1
*1 The banner paper exit tray of the MK-740m is not installed.
When SD-510 is connected (not including Z-fold and half-fold)

installation A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
installed
*1
installed
*1
*1 The banner paper exit tray of the MK-740m is not installed.
Z-folding paper, half-folding paper

Paper type Paper weight Sheet
Z-fold 130 g/m2 or less 20 sheets
Half-fold 130 g/m2 or less 50 sheets
• Length in the FD direction: 487.8 mm or more (Only when the exit tray of the MK-740 or MK-740m is installed)
Weight MK-740 MK-740m MK-740, MK-740m
Length in the FD direction: 487.8 mm to 762 mm Length in the FD direction: 762.1
mm or more
40 g/m2 to 127 g/m2 Not guaranteed
• Envelope
100 sheets or more (not guaranteed)
(2) Sort, group mode (Sub tray)
• 43 mm (until the sensor detects the tray is full)

• Loading paper of 40 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 is not guaranteed.

Plain (not including Z-fold 80 g/m2 300 sheets
and half-fold)
(3) Offset sort, offset group mode (Main tray)

A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
*1
Not coated 40 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 PS17 PS17 PS17
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 PS18 PS16 PS17
248 mm 379 mm 100 mm
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 PS17 PS18 PS17
C-52
100 mm 248 mm 100 mm


Except for Z-fold and half-fold
A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
Uncoated 80 g/m2 1500 sheets 1500 sheets 750 sheets
For Z-fold and half-fold

• Paper and envelopes whose lengths in the FD direction are 487.8 mm or more cannot be offset.
(4) Staple mode (Main tray)

Paper type Sheets per bundle More than A4 More than A5, A4 or less A5 or less
A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x14 A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 A5, 5.5 x 8.5
Not coated 2 to 5 sheets PS17 PS17 PS17
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
6 to 9 sheets PS17 PS18 PS17
100 mm 248 mm 100 mm
100 mm 248 mm 248 mm
21 sheets or more PS18 PS16 PS18
248 mm 379 mm 248 mm
Coated 2 to 5 sheets PS17 PS17 PS17
100 mm 100 mm 100 mm
100 mm 248 mm 100 mm
100 mm 248 mm 100 mm
21 sheets or more PS17 PS18 PS17
100 mm 248 mm 100 mm

Paper type/Paper size Number of bound sheets Set
Uncoated 80 g/m2 2-sheet binding 180 sets

A4, B5, 8.5 x 11 5-sheet binding 150 sets
2 position staple (Simplex
print) 10-sheet binding 130 sets
25-sheet binding 120 sets
32.3 Type of paper
32.3.1 Sort/group mode(Main tray/Sub tray), offset Sort/offset group mode(Main tray)
Paper size*2 SRA3, SRA4, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, A5, ISOB5S, A5S, ISOB6S*1, B6S*1,
A6S*1, 13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S, 8 1/2 x 13,
8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2S*1
8K, 16K, 16KS
Wide paper (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 8 1/2 x 11W, 8 1/2 x 11SW,
5 1/2 x 8 1/2W)
Tab paper*3 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2)
Postcard (only for Japan) (100 mm x 148 mm) *1
Custom size Minimum 95 (90)*6 mm x 133 mm, Maximum 331 mm x 487.7mm
paper
Banner paper*4 Minimum 100 mm x 487.8 mm, Maximum 330 mm x 1300 mm
C-53
Type of paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, PrePrinted, Book/News, Plain-rough, Envelope*1 *6, Textured, Tab Paper,
Postcard (only for Japan)*1
Paper weight *2 50 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 *5
*1 Offset Sort/Offset group mode cannot be used.
*4 Only for the MK-740 and the MK-740m.
*6 Minimum length 90 mm in the main scan direction only applies to an envelope of 90 mm x 205 mm that is placed in the main tray.
32.3.2 Staple mode
Paper size *1 *2 SRA3, SRA4, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, A5, 13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 8 1/2 x
14, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K
Wide paper (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 8 1/2 x 11W, 8 1/2 x 11SW, 5 1/2 x 8
1
/2W)
Tab paper*4 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 11, 8 1/2 x 11S, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2)
Custom size Minimum 203 mm x 139 mm, Maximum 331 mm x 487.7 mm *3
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, PrePrinted, Book/News, Plain-rough, Textured, Tab Paper (same as the main
body)
Paper weight *2 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
*1 Z-folding staple: Maximum 305 mm x 229 mm, Minimum 210 mm x 210 mm (Folded paper size)
*2 The specification of FS-532 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*3 Rear corner parallel staple: Maximum 320 mm in the CD direction

Paper curl amount
C
The amount is measured with 5 papers overlapped after printed

32.4 Machine data
Power source 24VDC±10% (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions With the main tray: 798 (W) x 723 (D) x 1070 (H) mm
Without the main tray: 544 (W) x 723 (D) x 1070 (H) mm
C-54
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 33. SD-510
33. SD-510
33.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with the center folding and tri-folding
33.2 Functions
33.2.1 Functions
Saddle stitching mode Exits paper to the output tray after being saddle stitched.
Half-Fold mode Exits paper to the output tray after being center folded on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Tri-folding mode Exits paper to the output tray after being tri-folded on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Paper exit Paper conveyance by the belt conveyor

Folding exit tray Large-size paper (sub- Half-fold 1 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
scanning direction length: Folding & Stapling 2 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
330 mm or longer)
6 to 10 sheets 23 sheets*2
11 to 20 sheets 15 copies *3
Small-size paper: (sub- Half-fold 1 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
scanning direction length: Folding & Stapling 2 to 5 sheets 35 copies *1
shorter than 330 mm)
Tri-Fold 1 sheet 50 copies
2 sheets 40 copies
3 sheets 30 copies
*1 20 sheets when 92 g/m2 or heavier paper is used for inside paper or cover, or the paper is fed from PI-502
*2 15 sheets when 92 g/m2 or heavier paper is used for cover, or the paper is fed from PI-502
*3 10 sheets when 92 g/m2 or heavier paper is used for cover, or the paper is fed from PI-502
33.2.3 Performance
Staple position
A
B
W
Staple position A: (W/2 - 14.5 mm)/2 ±3.0 mm

B: W/2 ± 3.0 mm
Parallelism Difference between the left staple and the right staple: 2.0 mm or less
Adjustment range A ≧ 23.0 mm and B: 60.0 mm to 148.5 mm
Folding and stitching position
C
[1] [2]
A
[3] [1]
C1
[2]
B
[3]
C’ [1]
C2
[1]: Fold position
C-55
[2]: Center of paper

[3]: Stapling position
Misalignment inside booklet*1 FD direction: 1.0 mm or less
CD direction: 1.0 mm or less
Misalignment between stapling A: 1.0 mm or less
position and folding
Misalignment between stapling B: 1.0 mm or less
position and the center of paper
Misalignment between the center C: 1.0 mm or less
of paper and folding*2
Parallelism of folding*2 C' (C1 - C2): 1.0 mm or less
(Length in the FD direction: 279.4 mm or more)
C' (C1 - C2): 2.0mm or less
(Length in the FD direction: Less than 279.4 mm)
Folding height
(Saddle stitching and half folding)
[1]: Not defined*3

Tri-Fold
d
h
a c d
b
Classification Item A4S 8.5 x 11S 16KS Folding position
standard
Folding position a 95.0 mm 89.4 mm 88.0 mm ± 2.0 mm
b 101.0 mm 95.0 mm 91.0 mm ± 2.0 mm
c 101.0 mm 95.0 mm 91.0 mm ± 2.0 mm
Folding height h Not defined*3
standard
Folding d ± 2.0 mm or less -
misalignment
standard
*1 Not defined for half folding
*2 Defined in the same paper
*3 Output paper is allowed to become open. However, the paper must have folding creases that enable you to fold it easily by hand.
33.3 Type of paper
Paper size*1 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S, B5S, ISOB5S
13 x 19*4, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K , 16KS
Wide paper (A3W, A4SW, B4W, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW)
Custom size Minimum 120mm x 240mm, Maximum 331 mm x 488mm
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, PrePrinted, Book/News, Plain-rough, Textured (same as the main body)
Paper weight *1 Inside paper: 50g/m2 to 216g/m2
Cover: 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Paper weight Sheet
The paper width is 279.4 mm or The paper width is shorter than
longer in the sub scan direction. 279.4 mm in the sub scan
direction.
40 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 - -
50 g/m to 261 g/m2 25 sheets -
62g/m2 to 74g/m2 20 sheets -
75g/m2 to 80g/m2 20 sheets 10 sheets
C-56

217g/m2 to 244g/m2 Cover only -
245g/m2 to 300g/m2 Cover only -
301g/m2 to 350g/m2 - -
For the paper that is more than 217 g/m2, only the cover is adjustable and 1 sheets is counted as a set of 5
sheets.
Staple position Automatically adjusted according to the paper size (60 mm to 148.5 mm)
*1 The specification of SD-510 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
33.3.2 Half-Fold mode
Paper size*1 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S, B5S, ISOB5S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K , 16KS
Wide paper (A3W, A4SW, B4W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW)
Custom size Minimum 120mm x 240mm, Maximum 331 mm x 488mm
Maximum center folding sheets Paper weight Sheet
The paper width is 279.4 mm or The paper width is shorter than
longer in the sub scan direction. 279.4 mm in the sub scan
direction.
40 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 - -
217g/m2 to 244g/m2 1 sheet 1 sheet
245g/m2 to 300g/m2 1 sheet 1 sheet
301g/m2 to 350g/m2 - -
33.3.3 Tri-folding mode
Paper size A4S
81/2 x 11S
16KS
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated*1, PrePrinted, Book/News, Plain-rough, Textured (same as the main body)
Maximum tri-folding sheets Paper weight Sheet
40 g/m2 to 49 g/m2 -
50g/m2 to 61g/m2 3 sheets
92g/m2 to 105g/m2 1 sheet
106g/m2 to 135g/m2 -
136g/m2 to 162g/m2 -
163g/m2 to 216g/m2 -
217g/m2 to 244g/m2 -
245g/m2 to 300g/m2 -
301g/m2 to 350g/m2 -
*1 Maximum tri-folding sheets: 1 sheet
C-57

Paper curl amount
C
The amount is measured with 5 sheets are overlapped after printed

33.4 Machine data
Dimensions 281.3 mm (W) x 596.4 mm (D) x 529.8 mm (H)
Weight SD-510 itself: Approximately 22.6kg
Output tray: Approximately 3.8kg
C-58
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 34. PK-522
34. PK-522
34.1 Type
Type FS built-in type punching operation device
34.2 Functions
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
Number of holes Inch area: 2-Holes/3-Holes
Metric area: 2-Holes/4-Holes
Sweden: 4-Holes
Hole diameter Inch area: φ8.0mm
Metric area: φ6.5mm
Sweden: φ6.5mm
Punch hole accuracy The accuracy is measured with 10 punched papers being overlapped.
a
Inch area: a (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 5.5mm or more
Metric area: a (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 4.0mm or more
Sweden: a (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 4.0mm or more
Hole pitch Inch area: 70 mm (2 holes), 108 mm (3 holes)
Metric area: 80 mm (2 holes/4 holes)
Sweden: 21, 70, 21mm (4 holes)
Supported mode Punch mode, straight mode
Applicable post processing mode Sort, group, staple
34.3 Type of paper
Paper size*1 A3, B4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S, ISOB4, ISOB5, ISOB5S
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2S, 51/2 x 81/2, 9 x 11,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13,
8K, 16K, 16KS
Punching prohibited paper Label, tab, OHP, second original, punched paper, envelope, and others which cause troubles on the
operation of the punch unit and the punch blade
Paper curl amount
a [1]
15kjt1c001na
[1] 5 sheets
*1 The specification of PK-522 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
34.4 Machine data
Dimensions 156 mm (W) x 592 mm (D) x 180 mm (H)
Weight Approximately 4.5kg
C-59
35. MK-732
35.1 Type
Type PI paper conveyance unit
35.2 Type of paper
Paper size Maximum 331 mm×488 mm, minimum 182 mm × 139mm
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Coated, Recycled paper
35.3 Machine data
Weight 3 kg
C-60
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 36. LS-506
36. LS-506
36.1 Type
Type Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker
Conveyance method Entrance conveyance Roller conveyance method
Stacker tray conveyance Grip conveyance method
Sub tray conveyance Roller conveyance method
Coupling conveyance Roller conveyance
Alignment method Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only)
Method of stacking Horizontal stacking Mixed stacking is unavailable (stacker tray only)
Shifting method Conveyance direction shift Shift amount: 20 mm (stacker tray only) *1
*
1 The use of the shift is unavailable with the tab paper.
36.2 Functions
36.2.1 Function
Stacker tray non-sort mode Exits paper to the stacker tray without any process.
Stacker tray sort mode Executes shifting operation (20 mm) and exits to the stacker tray*1
Coupling mode Conveys to the finishing option without any process
*
1 The use of the shift is unavailable with the tab paper.

Maximum tray capacity Stacker tray • The activation of 5,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS14) or 5,000
(Paper weight 80 g/m2)*1 sheets Paper which the length in the sub scan direction is 195 mm
to 488 mm
SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/4 x 13, 8 1/8 x 13 1/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K
2,000 sheets Paper which the length in the sub scan direction is 148
mm to 194 mm
B5, ISOB5, A5
Sub tray Straight paper exit: 200 sheets
Z-Fold paper: 20 sheets
Half-fold paper: 40 sheets
*1 The specification of LS-506 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
36.3 Type of paper
Paper size *3 Stacker tray SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, A5
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x
13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K
Tab paper*1 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom size paper
Maximum 331 mm x 488 mm, Minimum 210 mm x 148 mm
Sub tray SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, ISOB5,
ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, A6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x
81/2, 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13, 8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper*2 (A4, 81/2 x 11)
Custom size paper
Maximum 331 mm x 488 mm, Minimum 95 mm x 139 mm
Paper weight *3 Stacker tray 50g/m2 to 400g/m2 *4
Sub tray 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 *4
Paper curl amount
C
a Other than the OHP paper, the amount of curl is 15 mm or less.
*1 1 to 15 tab (4 tab and 10 tab are unavailable.) The use of the shift is unavailable with tab paper.
C-61
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 36. LS-506
*3 The specification of LS-506 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*4 "351 g/m2 to 400 g/m2" has limited paper types.
36.4 Machine data
Power source 100VAC to 240VAC, 5VDC (Only 5VDC is supplied from the main body)
Dimension 785 (W) x 723 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
C-62
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 37. FD-503
37. FD-503
37.1 Type
Type Multi folding device with punch and PI functions
37.2 Functions
37.2.1 Function
Normal paper exit function Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray or the sub tray.
Punching function Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for each sheet of paper and
exited into the main tray.
Punch hole accuracy The accuracy is measured with 10 punched papers being overlapped.
a
“a” (a diameter of an inscribed circle of a punched hole): 5.0mm or more (2 punched holes), 6.5mm or
more (3 punched holes)
Folding functions Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for folding (either one of the
following: Z-Fold, Letter fold-out, Letter fold-in, Double parallel fold, Gate fold, and folding) for each sheet of
paper, and exited into the sub tray/main tray (The Z-Fold exit to the main tray while in the FS connection is
limited only to B4, A3, 8 1/2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 and 8K.)
PI insertion function The PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body.
Manual mode The PI tray paper is punched, folded and stapled, and then exited into the sub tray or the main tray. (The
stapling function is available only when the staple unit is connected to the downstream of the FD.)

Main tray 2500 sheets: A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S
(Paper weight 40 g/m2 to 400 g/ 9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
m2)*1 16K, 16KS
1500 sheets: SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K
500 sheets: A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S
Others: Tab paper*2 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2)
Wide paper (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x
17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x 81/2W)
Custom size paper Minimum 95 mm x 139 mm, Maximum 331 mm x 483 mm
Sub tray Folding type: Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, Double parallel, Gate
(with the folder tray) *1 Paper size: A3, B4, ISOB4, A4S, SRA4S,
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 8K
Custom size paper (Maximum 305 mm x 458 mm, Minimum 210 mm x
279 mm)
Paper weight: Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out
50g/m2 to 130g/m2
Double parallel, Gate
50g/m2 to 91g/m2
Tray capacity of folding paper: 30 sets or more
(for all types of folding with 80g/m2 paper)*3
Sub tray Tray capacity: 200 sheets
(without folder tray) SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S
(Paper weight 40 g/m2 to 350 g/ 13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S
m2) *1 *4 81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Tab paper*4 (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2)
Wide paper (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW, 51/2 x
81/2W)
Custom size paper Minimum 95 mm x 139 mm, Maximum 331 mm x 488mm
*1 The specification of FD-503 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*2 Operation of the paper exit with the tab area at the trail edge side is not guaranteed.
*3 Paper is stacked in the exiting sequence.
*4 Loading paper weight 49g/m2 or less is not warranty
C-63
37.3 Type of paper
37.3.1 Punching function
Paper size*1 2-hole: SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S,
A5, A5S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Tab paper (A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2)
3-hole: SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, A4, B5, ISOB5
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11*1 *2 *6*7, 81/2 x 11,
8K, 16K
Tab paper (A3, A4, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S)
Applicable paper Plain paper, tab paper
*1
Paper weight 50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 (2 sheets overlap mode: 50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2)
37.3.2 Folding functions
Paper size*1 A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
8K
Custom size paper (Maximum 305 mm x 458 mm, Minimum 210 mm x 279 mm)
Applicable paper Plain paper
*1
Paper weight Half-Fold, Tri-Fold-in, Tri-Fold-out, 50g/m2 to 130g/m2
Z-Fold
Double parallel, Gate 50g/m2 to 91g/m2
37.3.3 PI functions
Paper size*1 SRA3, A3, B4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x
81/2,
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Custom size paper *2*3
Minimum 182mm x 139 mm, Maximum 331 mm x 483mm
Applicable paper Plain, Recycle, Fine, Special
Maximum tray capacity 500 sheets (80g/m2) x 2 trays
*2 When it is used as the cover in perfect binding mode (Minimum 182 mm x 279 mm, Maximum 307 mm x 483 mm)
*3 The custom size is not available for the manual sheet paper feed.
37.4 Machine data
Power source 100 V AC to 240 V AC (supplied from the dedicated power plug), 5 V DC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 180VA or less
Dimensions 400 (W) x 723 (D) x 1231 (H) mm (The main tray is not included in the width)
C-64
38. SD-506
38.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with the fore-edge trimming and the multi-folding function
38.2 Functions
38.2.1 Function
Sub tray paper exit mode Exit paper to the sub tray without any process.
Coupling paper exit mode Convey paper to the succeeding device without any process.
Saddle stitching mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding, saddle stitching operation.
Saddle stitching trimming mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding, saddle stitching, trimming operation.
Multi-center folding mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding on 1 or more sheets of paper.
Multi-center folding trimming mode Exit paper to the bundle exit tray after the center folding and the trimming operation on 1 or more sheets of
paper.
Overlap tri-folding mode Exit paper to the tri-folding tray after the letter folding operation on 1 or more sheets of paper.

Sub tray 200 sheets
(Paper weight 80g/m2) Z-Folding 20 sheets
Center folding 40 sheets
Bundle exit tray Folding & Stapling/trimming Stitching sheets Set
Mode 2 to 10 50 or more
11 to 20 30 or more
21 to 40 20 or more
41 to 50 15 or more
Multi-center folding mode 30 sets
Tri-folding paper exit tray Overlap tri-folding mode 20 sets
38.3 Type of paper
38.3.1 Straight/sub tray mode
Paper size*1 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB5S, A6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
Wide paper (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, A5W, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11W, 81/2 x 11SW,
51/2 x 81/2W)
Custom size paper Minimum 95mm x 139 mm, Maximum 331 mm x 488mm
Paper weight *1 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2*3*4
*3 Loading paper weight 49 g/m2 or less is not guaranteed.

Paper size*1 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K , 16KS
51/2 x 81/2W)
Paper weight *1 50g/m2 to 244g/m2
Maximum saddle stitching sheets Plain, coated, color specific Paper weight Sheet
Plain paper Coated
Color
50g/m2 to 81g/ 50 *2 30 *2
m2
82g/m2 to 91g/ 30 *2 15 *2
m2
92g/m2 to 20 *2 10 *2
130g/m2
C-65
131g/m2 to 15 *2 5 *2
161g/m2
162g/m2 to 10 -
209g/m2
210g/m2 to 5 -
244g/m2
Fine Paper brand 55kg (64g/m2) 70kg (81.4g/m2)
KIMMARI V 50 sheets 50 sheets
RAICHO FINE
KANABISHI
OK PRINCE -
NEW NPi 50 sheets 30 sheets
POD PRINCE
FINE
SHIRAOI
Staple position Automatically adjusted according to the paper size (90mm to 165mm)
[1]
[2]
15ant1c006na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 ± 2 mm

[2] = [Paper Size] /4 ± 2 mm
Folding height
[1]
15ant1c011na
Stitching sheets [1] Folding height

A3 B4 A4S B5S
12 x 18 81/2 x 14 81/2 x 11S (260mm or less)
11 x 17 (301mm to (261mm to
(401mm or 400mm) 300mm)
more)
2 to 5 35mm or less 40mm or less 45mm or less Not defined
6 to 15 45mm or less 50mm or less Not defined
16 to 30 50mm or less 55mm or less
31 to 50 60mm or less 65mm or less
(The above information is applied when paper weight is 64g/m2 and no thick cover is not used.)
*2 1 sheet can be switched to thick paper (200 g/m2)
38.3.3 Trimming mode
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K , 16KS
Wide paper (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW)
Maximum trimming sheets 50 sheets (80g/m2) or 49 sheets (80g/m2) + 1 sheet (200g/m2)
(This is the number of the printed paper before the folding. The number of fore-edge (after folding) is
double.)
38.3.4 Multi-center folding mode

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16KS
Wide paper (A3W, B4W, A4SW, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 81/2 x 11SW)
C-66

Maximum overlap folding sheets Paper weight Sheet
Folding precision (for 1 sheet)
[1]
15ant1c009na
[1] = [Paper Size] /2 ± 1.5mm
[1] 15ant1c008na
[1] = 1.5mm or less

38.3.5 Overlap tri-folding mode

Paper size A4S, 81/2 x 11S
*1
Maximum overlap folding sheets Paper weight Sheet
82 g/m2 to 91g/m2 3 sheets
Folding precision (for 1 sheet) Paper size [1] [2] [3]
A4S 97.5 ± 4 mm 102.0 ± 4 mm 1.5mm or less
81/2 x 11S 91.6 ± 4 mm 96.1 ± 4 mm
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant1c010na
38.4 Machine data
Power source 100 V AC to 240 V AC (supplied from the dedicated power plug), 5 V DC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power consumption 270 W
Weight 280 kg
Dimensions When the bundle output tray is stored:
1,170 (W) x 775 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
When the bundle output tray is pulled out
1,170 (W) x 1,441 (D) x 1,020 (H) mm
C-67
39. SD-513
39.1 Type
Type Saddle stitching unit with the fore-edge trimming and the multi-folding operation device
39.2 Functions
39.2.1 Functions
Saddle stitching mode Exit several sheets to the booklet tray after the half-folding and saddle stitching operation.
Saddle stitching trimming mode Exit several sheets to the booklet tray after the half-folding, saddle stitching and trimming operation.
Multi half-fold mode Exit one sheet or several sheets to the booklet tray after the process of the half-folding.
Multi half-fold trimming mode Exit one sheet or several sheets to the booklet tray after the process of the half-folding and trimming.
Multi tri-folding mode Exit one sheet or several sheets to the tri-folding tray after the process of the tri-folding.
Straight mode Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process.

Sub tray The sub tray paper full sensor (PS11) detects the full condition.
The approximate capacity of single 200 sheets (80 g/m2)
sheet
The approximate capacity of Z- 20 sheets (80 g/m2)
folding
The approximate capacity of half- 20 sheets (80 g/m2)
fold
Single sheet with crease 100 sheets (The paper feed stops when 100 sheets are fed in
succession.)
Booklet tray The booklet tray paper full sensor (PS44) detects the full condition.
The approximate capacity of Stitching sheets Set
saddle stitching mode (Grain short 2 to10 sheets 30 sets
paper, 91 g/m2)
11 to 25 sheets 18 sets
26 to 50 sheets 10 sets
The approximate capacity of multi 30 sets
half-fold mode (5 sheets overlap)
Tri-folding tray The tri-folding tray paper full sensor (PS81) detects the full condition.
The approximate capacity of Multi Folding sheets Set
tri-folding mode (80 g/m2) 1 sheet 40 sets
2 sheets 20 sets
3 sheets 13 sets
4 sheets 10 sets
5 sheets 8 sets
C-68
39.2.3 Performance
Paper alignment performance
a b c
>@
d1
d e1 d2
w e w
e2
>@
f g
>@
[1]: Fold position

[2]: Center of paper
Misalignment inside booklet (No a: 1.0 mm or less
trim on both sides) b: 1.0 mm or less
Misalignment between stapling c: 1.0 mm or less (150 mm or more in the main scan direction of the
position and folding booklet)
c: 1.5 mm or less (less than 150 mm in the main scan direction of the
booklet)
Misalignment of stapling position d: (W/4 - 8 mm ±3.0 mm or less)
from the edge (2-point staple)
Staple pitch (2-point staple) e: (W/2 ±3.0 mm or less)
Misalignment of stapling position d1: (W/8 - 8) mm ±3.0 mm or less)
from the edge (4-point staple) d2: (W/8 x 5 - 8) mm ±3.0 mm or less)
Staple pitch (4-point staple) e1: W/4 mm ±3.0 mm or less
e2: W/4 mm ±3.0 mm or less
Misalignment between center of f: 1.0mm or less
paper and folding
Folding skew (2 to 15 sheets) g: 1.5 mm or less
Folding skew (16 to 50 sheets) g: 2.0 mm or less
Multi half-fold performance
[1]
15ant1c009na
[1] = [sub-scanning direction length] / 2 ± 1.5 mm
C-69
[1] 15ant1c008na
[1] = 1.5 mm or less

Multi tri-folding performance
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
15ant1c010na
Paper size (paper weight) [1] [2] [3]

2
A4S (80g/m ) 97.5 mm ± 1.5 mm 102.0 ± 3 mm 1.5 mm or less
81/2 x 11S (20lb) 91.6 mm ± 1.5 mm 96.1 ± 3 mm
Trimmer performance
[1]
Paper size (paper type) Stitching sheets [1]

A4 (J paper, KM Profi) 2 to 15 sheets 1.0 mm or less
81/2 x 11 (Hammermill Tidal MP) 16 to 30 sheets 1.5 mm or less
31 to 51 sheets 1.5 mm or less
Other than the above 2 to 15 sheets 2.0 mm or less
39.3 Type of paper
39.3.1 Straight, sub tray mode
Paper size *2 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, SRA4, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, ISOB5S, B5S, A5, A5S, B6S, A6S
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16K, 16KS
51/2 x 81/2W)
Applicable paper Plain, Fine, Color, Coated, Preprinted, Book/News, Plain-rough, Envelope, Textured, Tab Paper, Postcard
(only for Japan) (same as the main body)
Paper weight *2 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 3*4
*1 Operation of paper exit with tab area at the trail edge side is not guaranteed.
*3 Paper weight of the sub tray load that is 49 g/m2 or less is not guaranteed.

Paper size *2 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4S, B5S
C-70
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 11S

81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
8K, 16KS
Wide paper (A3W, B4W, A4W, A4SW, B5W, B5SW, 12 x 18W, 11 x 17W, 8 1/2 x 11SW)
Custom size*1 (Maximum 331 mm x 488 mm, Minimum*3 120 mm x 257 mm)
Paper weight *2 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
Maximum saddle stitching (2-point Plain Body weight Sheet
staple) sheets*4 50 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 50 sheets
45 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
65 g/m2 to 81 g/m2 35 sheets
92 g/m2 to 130 g/ 20 sheets
m2 19 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 256g/m2)
131 g/m2 to 161 g/ 15 sheets
162 g/m2 to 209 g/ 10 sheets
Fine (81.4 g/m2) Paper brand Sheet
KIMMARI V 30 sheets
RAICHO 29 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
NEW Npi
OK PRINCE 24 sheets + cover (217 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
SHIRAOI
KANABISHI 35 sheets
POD PRINCE 30 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
Coated, color paper Body weight Sheet
14 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 256g/m2)
Long grain paper Body weight Sheet
29 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)*5
m2 9 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)*5
m2 4 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)*5
C-71
162 g/m2 to 300 g/ Not guaranteed

m2
Papers that are less than 182 Body weight Sheet
mm in the main scan direction 50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2 16 sheets
15 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 300g/m2)
m2 7 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
Paper size (4-position staple)*2 A3, 11 x 17
Custom size*6
Maximum 297 mm x 488 mm, Minimum 279 mm x 257 mm (with fore-edge trimming)
Maximum 297 mm x 488 mm, Minimum 279 mm x 240 mm (without fore-edge trimming)
Saddle stitching (4-point staple) Plain Body weight Sheet
sheets*4 50 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 15 to 50 sheets
15 sheets to 45 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/
m2)
m2)
65 g/m2 to 81 g/m2 12 to 35 sheets
m2)
m2)
m2)
m2)
92 g/m2 to 130 g/ 9 to 20 sheets
m2 9 sheets to 19 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/
m2)
8 sheets to 19 sheets + cover (217 g/m2 to 256g/
m2)
8 to 14 sheets + cover (257 to 300 g/m2)
131 g/m2 to 161 g/ 7 to 15 sheets
m2 7 sheets to 14 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/
m2)
m2)
162 g/m2 to 209 g/ 6 to 10 sheets
m2 6 sheets to 9 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/m2)
5 sheets to 9 sheets + cover (217 g/m2 to 256g/m2)
m2 4 sheets + cover (50 to 216g/m2)
Fine (81.4 g/m2) Paper brand Sheet
KIMMARI V 12 to 30 sheets
RAICHO 12 sheets to 29 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/
NEW Npi m2)
OK PRINCE
SHIRAOI 11 sheets to 24 sheets + cover (217 g/m2 to 300 g/
m2)
KANABISHI 12 to 35 sheets
POD PRINCE 11 sheets to 30 sheets + cover (50 g/m2 to 216 g/
m2)
C-72

m2)
Coated, color paper Body weight Sheet
m2)
m2)
m2)
m2)
m2 9 sheets + cover (50 to 216g/m2)
*1 When a ratio of the main scan direction to the sub scan direction regarding the custom size paper is less than 0.6 (also 0.78 or more), it is not
guaranteed.
*3 The dimension after the trimming accommodates to the compact disc sleeve size (120 mm × 120 mm).
*4 When the weight differs between each inside paper, define with the heaviest weight.
*5 The cover of long grain paper is not guaranteed.
*6 Paper feed is possible, but not guaranteed. (297 mm x 420 mm and 279 mm x 431.8 mm are guaranteed.)
39.3.3 Trimming mode
Paper size Conforms to the saddle stitching mode specification.
Weight Conforms to the saddle stitching mode specification.
Maximum trimming sheets Twice the number of saddle stitching paper
Trimming distance 5mm to 40mm
However, when the booklet length after the trimming becomes shorter than 120 mm, trimming is not
available.
Trimming position Fore edge
Trimmer scraps box capacity Trimmer scraps box full sensor (PS96) detects the full condition.
The scraps box can be pulled out during machine operation.
The approximate capacity of the scraps box is 1,700 sheets.*1
*1 Condition: PROFI (80 g/m2), A3, 10 sheets saddle stitching booklet, trimming amount 5 mm
39.3.4 Multi folding mode

Paper size Half-fold Same specification as saddle stitching mode
Tri-folding A4S, 81/2 x 11S
*3
Paper weight Half-fold 50g/m2 to 300g/m2
Tri-folding 50g/m2 to 91g/m2
*1
Crease + tri-folding 80g/m2 to 216g/m2
Number of overlapped sheets Half-fold*2 Weight Sheet
Tri-folding 50g/m2 to 81g/m2 5 sheets
Crease + tri-folding 80g/m2 to 216g/m2 1 sheet
*1 The position misalignment of the crease line and the fold of paper whose weight is less than 105 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 When the paper weight differs between each multi half fold, define with the heaviest weight.

Paper curl amount
C
C-73
Curling amount "a" 10 mm or less (49 g/m2 or less)

15 mm or less (50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2)
10 mm or less (92 g/m2 or more)
When the booklet is output, the outward curl is not guaranteed.
39.4 Machine data
Power source Inch: 120VAC, 24/5VDC (some are supplied from the main body)
Metric: 230VAC, 24/5VDC (some are supplied from the main body)
Dimensions 1,241 mm (W) × 1,431 mm (D) × 1,020 mm (H) (The width does not include the booklet tray (236 mm).)
Rear console 1,241 mm (W) × 723 mm (D) × 1,020 mm (H)
Front console 800 mm (W) × 830 mm (D) × 1,020 mm (H)
Rear console 181 kg
Front console 156 kg
C-74
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 40. CR-101
40. CR-101
40.1 Type
Type SD built-in type crease operation device
40.2 Functions
40.2.1 Functions
No-crease mode
Crease mode
Number of creases 1 to 4
Setting unit 0.1 mm
Minimum distance 1.0 mm
between the crease
lines
Prohibited range H1, H2: Crease is unavailable
a: Crease is available
The crease is performed in the order of A, B, C, D.
[1]: Output direction after the paper reverse
[2] Front stopper
[1]
H2
A
B
L a
C
H1
[2]
H1, H2 depends on the paper length in the sub scan direction (L).
Paper length in the sub scan direction (L)
240 mm or longer, less than 336 mm 336 mm or longer, less than 337 337 mm or longer, 488 mm or
mm shorter
H1 7 mm 7 mm (L-330) mm
H2 46 mm (L-290) mm (L-290) mm
40.2.2 Applicable mode and number of creases

Mode Number of creases
Cover Only All pages
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Saddle stitching (SD-513) ●*1 × × × × × × ×
Multi half-fold (SD-513) ● × × × × × × ×
Tri-folding (SD-513) *2 × × × × × ● × ×
Perfect binding (PB-503) × ● × ● × × × ×
Free crease + sub tray (SD-513, PB-503, FS-532)*3 × × × × ● ● ○ ○
Free crease + straight, shift (main tray of FS-532)*3 × × × × ● ● ● ○
Punch, Staple (FS-532) × × × × × × × ×
●: Recommended (The accuracy is guaranteed)
○: The selection is possible but not guaranteed.
×: Unable
*1 Unable to combine with FD-504 spine corner forming mode.
*2 Crease + multi tri-folding exits one sheet each (overlap is released).
*3 When you crease paper which is heavier than 301 g/m2, limit the conditions to the following.
C-75
- Crease to the image side

- Paper exit with the face down to the sub tray or the FS-532 main tray
40.2.3 Performance
Crease performance
Skew j-k: ± 0.7 mm or less

Misalignment j or k: ± 0.7 mm or less corresponding to the setting data
j1 j2 j3
k1 k2 k3
Pitch (maximum 4 j1, j2, j3, k1, k2, k3: ± 0.7 mm or less corresponding to the setting data
lines)
a
[2]
[1]
[1]: Fold line
[2]: Crease groove edge
Position a: 1.0 mm or less
misalignment of the (Paper weight: 105g/m2 to 216g/m2)
fold and the crease
line
Folding position a: ± 3.0 mm or less

misalignment on the
crease operation
C-76
Folding skew on the a: ± 2.0 mm or less

crease operation
40.3 Type of paper
Paper size Crease + saddle stitching, multi half-fold, sub tray, Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching, multi half
straight, shift mode mode specification.
Crease + tri-folding mode Conforms to the SD-513 multi tri-folding mode
specification.
Crease + perfect binding mode Conforms to the PB-503 specification.
*2
However, the maximum paper weight is based on the function that is combined with the crease mode.
Crease + tri-folding mode*1: 80 g/m2 to 216 g/m2
C
Curling amount "a" 15 mm or less (50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2)
*1 The position misalignment of the crease line and the fold of paper whose weight is less than 105 g/m2 is not guaranteed.
*2 The specification of CR-101 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
40.4 Machine data
Power source 24/5VDC (supplied from SD-513)
Weight 6.8 kg or less
Dimensions 211 mm (W) x 460 mm (D) x 137 mm (H) (The depth is to the edge of the creaser drive shaft)
C-77
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 41. TU-503
41. TU-503
41.1 Type
Type SD built-in type top and bottom trimming operation device
41.2 Functions
41.2.1 Functions
No-slit mode
Slit mode
Cut position The top edge and the bottom edge of booklet
Trimming amount 14 mm to 26 mm (50 g/m2 to 61 g/m2)
10 mm to 26 mm (62 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
The top and the bottom edge individual setting
However, the difference of cutting amount between the top and the bottom edge is within 10 mm and the length in the
main scan direction after the cutting is 120 mm or longer.
Capacity of the slit The slit scraps box full sensor/1 (PS107) and the slit scraps box full sensor/2 (PS115) detect the full condition.
scraps box The scraps box can be pulled out during machine operation.
The approximate capacity of capacity: 4,000 scraps of 13 mm (W) x 420 mm (L) , PROFI (80 g/m2)
41.2.2 Applicable mode list

Mode Slit
*1
Cover only All pages
Saddle stitching (SD-513) ○ ◎
Multi half-fold (SD-513) ○ ◎
Tri-folding (SD-513) × ○*2
Perfect binding (PB-503) ○*3 ×
Sub tray (sub tray of SD-513, PB-503, FS-532) ○ ◎
Straight, Shift (main tray of FS-532) ○ ○
Punch, Staple (FS-532) × ×
◎: Recommended (The accuracy is guaranteed)
○: The selection is possible but not guaranteed.
×: Unable to select
*1 When the slit is executed only to the cover, refer to the following prohibition conditions.
· Cover length in the main scan direction after slitting is within ± 1.0 mm in contrast with the inside paper length in the main scan direction
· The length of the cover in the sub scan direction is within ± 80.0 mm compared with the length of the inside papers in the sub scan direction.
(With Fore-edge trimming)
· The length of the cover in the sub scan direction is same as the length of the inside papers in the sub scan direction. (Without fore-edge
trimming)
*2 Slit + tri-folding exits one sheet each (overlap is released).
*3 The top and the bottom edge individual setting is not available for the cutting amount.
41.2.3 Performance
Slit performance
m q
m q
Slit straightness m: 0.5 mm or less (single sheets of 65 g/m2 or more)

m: 1.0 mm or less (single sheets of 64 g/m2 or less)
Width accuracy n: ± 0.5 mm or less corresponding to the setting data (65 g/m2 or more)
n: ± 1.0 mm or less corresponding to the setting data (64 g/m2 or less)
C-78
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 41. TU-503
41.3 Type of paper
41.3.1 Slit mode
Paper size Slit + saddle stitching (2 positions), multi half-fold, sub Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching (2
tray, straight, shift mode positions) mode specification.
However, the length in the main scan direction after
the slit is 120 mm or longer.
Slit + Saddle stitching (4 positions) mode Length in the main scan direction: Conforms to the
SD-513 saddle stitching (2 positions) mode.
Length in the sub scan direction:Conforms to the
the slit is within the SD-513 saddle stitching (4
positions) mode.
Slit+ tri-folding mode A4S, 81/2 x 11S
(The paper size before slit is A4S, 8 1/2 x 11S.)
Slit + perfect binding mode Length in the main scan direction: Conforms to the
Length in the sub scan direction: Conforms to the
PB-503 perfect binding mode specification.
the slit is within the PB-503 perfect binding mode.
However, the maximum paper weight is based on the specification of the function that is combined with the
slit mode.
C
*1 The specification of TU-503 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
41.4 Machine data
Weight Slitter unit (including the rotary cutter and the scraps shutter): 18.7 kg
Scraps box (2 boxes): 1.0 kg x 2
Dimensions 304 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x 381 mm (H) (The depth is from the edge of the shutter lever shaft to the rear
of the bottom.)
C-79
42. FD-504
42.1 Type
Type SD built-in type flattening a fold operation device
42.2 Functions
42.2.1 Functions
Spine corner forming Spine corner forming + Saddle stitching (SD-513)
mode
42.2.2 Applicable mode list

Mode Spine corner forming
Saddle stitching (SD-513) ◎*1
Multi half-fold (SD-513) ×
Multi tri-folding (SD-513) ×
Perfect binding (PB-503) ×
Sub tray (sub tray of SD-513, PB-503, FS-532) ×
Straight, Shift (main tray of FS-532) ×
Punch, Staple (FS-532) ×
◎: Recommended (The accuracy is guaranteed)
×: Unable
*1 Unable to combine with CR-101 crease mode.

Booklet tray The booklet tray paper full sensor (PS44) detects the full condition.
(Grain short paper, paper weight Stitching sheets The approximate capacity (sets)
91 g/m2 or less)
5 to 10 30 sets
11 to 25 20 sets
26 to 50 10 sets
42.2.4 Performance
Booklet height performance
Stitching sheets (PROFI, no cover) Paper Size

A3 B4 A4S B5S
12 × 18 81/2 × 14 81/2 x 11S (260 mm or less)
11 × 17 (301 mm to 400 (261 mm to 300
(401 mm or mm) mm)
more)
5 h: 15 mm or h: 20 mm or less h: 25 mm or h: 30 mm or less
less less
6 to 15 h: 20 mm or h: 25 mm or less h: 30 mm or h: 35 mm or less
less less
less less
less less
42.3 Type of paper
Paper size Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching mode specification.
Minimum processing sheets 5 sheets
Maximum processing sheets Conforms to the SD-513 saddle stitching mode specification.
C
C-80
42.4 Machine data
Weight Spine corner forming unit: 11 kg
Clamp up down drive unit: 2 kg
Dimensions 643 mm (W) × 258 mm (D) × 157 mm (H)
C-81
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 43. PB-503
43. PB-503
43.1 Type
Type Simplified perfect binding machine (Consoled hot-melt type)
43.2 Functions
43.2.1 Function
Perfect binding mode Automatically binds and stocks in a book stock section.
Relay conveyance mode Exits paper to the downstream option (FS) without any process.
43.2.2 Binding sheets
Binding sheets Minimum thickness 10 sheets
Maximum thickness Plain: 300 sheets or 30 mm
Color and Coated:150 sheets or 15 mm
Binding sheets with Z-Fold Simplex printing Number of Z-Fold Maximum number of Total
sheets*1 sheets unfold sheets
Binding sheets*1 Number of Inserted Maximum number of
sheets sheets
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
2 sheets 150 sheets 152 sheets
Duplex printing Number of Z-Fold Maximum number of Total
sheets unfold sheets
Number of Inserted Maximum number of
sheets sheets
1 sheet 200 sheets 201 sheets
Simplex and duplex mixed printing When 1 or more unfold sheets is single-sided, the specification is the
(printer function) same as the simplex print.
When the z-folded sheet is single-sided, the specification is the same
as the duplex print.
*
1 The limit of the total number of sheets can be released when you switch the DIPSW. The target DIPSW depends on the main body to be
connected.

Book stock section Maximum 11 books *1 x 2 rows *2 (book thickness: 30 mm)
10 sheets to 30 sheets book 50 sets
31 sheets to 150 sheets book 35 books or until the upper limit is detected.
151 sheets to 300 sheets book Until the upper limit is detected
PB cover paper tray*3 1000 sheets (82g/m2)
500 sheets (216g/m2)
Sub tray 200 sheets (80 g/m2)
*
1 The available number of books possibly decreases due to curls of papers.
*
2 When books have been stacked up to the limit at the first row, the first stack is automatically moved to the second row on the cart. The pile of
books at the first row continues.
*
3 The cover paper supply is selectable from the PB cover paper tray, main body tray, PI or PI-PFU.
43.2.4 Others
Warm-up time Approximately 20 minutes
Cover trimming Selectable from Trim or Not trim.
43.3 Type of paper
43.3.1 Paper size
Perfect binding mode*1 Inside paper: A4, B5, ISOB5, A5, A5S, 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S, 16K
Custom size paper (Maximum 307 (W) x 221 (L) mm,
Minimum 139 (W) x 210 (L) mm)
Z-fold size (A3, B4, ISOB4, A4S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, 8K)
Cover: Maximum 307mm x 472mm, Minimum 139mm x 279mm
Vertical (main scan direction) Same size as the inside paper.
Horizontal (sub scan direction) Wide size L mm
L= book size in the sub scan direction x 2 + book thickness (book
spine) + 5mm (for trimming)
C-82
Sub tray mode*1 SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, A6S,
8K, 16K, 16KS
13 x 19, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
51/2 x 81/2W)
Custom size paper: Maximum 331 mm x 488 mm
Minimum 95 mm x 139 mm
Finite tab paper*2: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Relay conveyance mode *1*3 Paper which can be used by the subsequent option (FS-521/FS-532)
• Large size: SRA3, A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4, SRA4S
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 13 x 19, 8K
81/2 x 13, 81/4 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 8 x 13
Wide paper (Maximum 324 mm x 460 mm)
• Small size: A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, 16K, 16KS
9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
• Minimum size: A5, A5S, B6S, ISOB6S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S
• Others: Finite tab paper *2: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x
11S, 51/2 x 81/2
Custom size paper:
Maximum 331 mm x 488 mm
Minimum 95 mm x 139 mm
43.3.2 Paper weight
Perfect binding mode*1 Inside paper: 64g/m2 to 105g/m2
Sub tray mode*1 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2*4
Relay conveyance mode *1 40 g/m2 to 400 g/m2*4
*1 The specification of PB-503 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*3 Paper can be fed only when the FS-521, FS-532 is connected as the subsequent stage of the PB-503.
43.3.3 Applicable paper in each mode

Body Cover -
Binding Binding PB tray Main tray Sub tray
mode (6136, mode (
6136P, C2070
6120) , C2070P,
C2060,
C2060L,
C6100,
C6085,
C3080,
C3080P,
C83hc,
C3070,
C3070P,
C73hc,
C3070L)
Plain Japan J paper 64 g/m2 ○ ○ - - ○
North Tidal MP 20 lb (75 g/m2) ○ ○ - - ○
Ameri
ca
Europ Konica Minolta 80 g/m2 ○ - - - ○
e Original
Konica Minolta Profi 80 g/m2 - - - - ○
Recycled Japan NR-A80 64 g/m2 - ○ - - ○
paper
NR-A100 64 g/m2 ○ ○ ○
North Hammermill Great 20 lb (75 g/m2) ○ - - - ○
Ameri White
ca Recycle Eclips 20 lb (75 g/m2) - - - - ○
Europ Nautilus 80 g/m2 ○ - - - ○
e
Classic White 80 g/m2 ○ - - - ○
C-83
Color Japan Konicaminolta CF 80 g/m2 - ○ - - ○

paper
North Hammermill Color 28 lb (105 g/m2) - ○ - - ○
Ameri Copy Photo White
ca Domtor Microprint 28 lb (105 g/m2) - - -
○ ○
Color Copy
Gilbert Neutech 28 lb (105 g/m2) - ○ - - ○
Color Copy
Europ Color copy (mondi) 90 g/m2 - ○ - - ○
e
100 g/m2 - ○ - - ○
Fine - - Body Cover - - - - -
Japan Kinmari V 64 g/m2 to 82 g/m2 to - - ○ △ ○
91 g/m2 216 g/m2
NEW NPi FINE 64 g/m2 to - - ○ △ ○
91 g/m2
105 g/m2 - ○ - - ○
POD prince high 64 g/m2 to ○ - ○ ○ ○
quality 91 g/m2
OK PRINCE FINE 81.4 g/m2 - - ○ △ ○
105 g/m2 - ○ - - ○
shiraoi 64 g/m2 to - - ○ △ ○
91 g/m2
High quality 64 g/m2 to - - ○ △ ○
91 g/m2
KANABISHI 64 g/m2 to - - ○ △ ○
91 g/m2
Coated *1 Japan JD 98 g/m2 - ○ - - ○
NEW AGE 81.4 g/m2 - ○ - - ○
NEW AGE BLANC 81.4 g/m2 - ○ - - ○
POD GLOSS COAT 64 g/m2 to 81 g/m2 - - - - ○
North Kromekote Laser 82 g/m2 to 130 g/m2 - - ○ △ ○
Ameri
HIGH GLOSS 131 g/m2 to 161 g/m2 - - ○ △ ○
ca
Futura Laser 162 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 - - ○ △ ○
△: Available for a paper curled less than 10mm
*1 Regarding Coated, the matt coated paper is only available for the body.
43.4 Machine data
Power source 120VAC (North America), 230VAC (Europe)
5VDC (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption 1000W or less
Dimensions 1,360 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 755 (D) mm
Binding section 740 (W) x 1,223 (H) x 755 (D) mm
Book stock section 620 (W) x 1,020 (H) x 753 (D) mm
Relay conveyance section
C-84
44. MK-737
44.1 Type
Type Mount kit for 3rd Party Option
44.2 Functions
Configuration Case, board, wiring harness, wiring cover
Product that supports MK-737 LS-506: 3rd Party Option (finisher)
3rd Party option in between KM options *1
Communication method Between the main body and MK-737: Serial communication or parallel communication
Between MK-737 and the 3rd Party Option: Parallel communication
Overall control 16 bit microcomputer control
*1: 2 units of MK737 will be required for this condition. (WY2 or later)
44.3 Machine data
Power source 5.1VDC +/- 5% (supplied from the supported product)
Maximum power consumption 10W
Weight 2.5kg
44.5 Connector
44.5.1 Connector housing
HRS No. (Supplier) No. of Pin Part No. (Supplier) A B C D E

CL221-0281-1-05 37 CDC-37P-(05) 69.32 63.5 55.47 5.87 1.4
44.5.2 Connector pinning layout
1 19
20 37
Pin signal name Pin signal name

1 must be connected GND 20 NonConecting
2 NonConecting 21 NonConecting
3 must be connected GND 22 S0_Cathode
4 S0_Anode 23 S1_Cathode
C-85
11 S7_Anode 30 C0_Emitter
12 C0_Collector 31 C1_Emitter
19 C7_Collector
C-86
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 45. IC-605
45. IC-605
45.1 Type
Type AIO to the engine (option)
45.2 Functions
Resolution: Print: 1200 x 1200dpi, 600 x 600dpi
Scan (C3080, C3070, C3070L): 200 x 200dpi, 300 x 300dpi, 400 x 400dpi, 600 x 600dpi
Gradation: RIP: 8bit/256 Gradation, 1bit/2 Gradation (Writing section of the main body: Equivalent to 256bit Gradation)
Max. Printable Area: 323mm x 480mm (non-banner paper)
323mm x 1295mm (banner paper)
Number of Print: 1 to 9999
Continuous Print Speed: A4: 81 ppm (C3080, C3080P, C83hc), 71 ppm (C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L)
81/2 x 11: 80 ppm (C3080, C3080P, C83hc), 70 ppm (C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L)
Page-description language: Adobe PostScript3 (PS3020), PDF direct print (PDF version 1.7), APPE (version 4.6) (UK-104 and UK-218
is required), PDF and VT-2 (UK-104 and UK-218 is required), TIFF direct print (TIFF version 6 compliance),
PPML (version 2.2), PCL-5c compatible, PCL XL (PCL6 version 3) compatible
Printer Driver: PPD
• Windows 7/8.1/10/Server 2008/Sever 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server 2012 R2/Server 2016/Server 2019
*1
• Linux CUPS (Only English)

PS Plug-In
• Windows 7/8.1/10/Server 2008/Sever 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server 2012 R2/Server 2016/Server 2019
*1
• MacOSX 10.9/10.10/10.11/10.12/10.13/10.14
Printing Method: Pserver (IPX, SPX), LPD and LPR (TCP/IP), IPP (TCP/IP), AppleTalk (EtherTalk), Bonjour (TCP/IP), Web
service printing (TCP/IP), NPrinter and RPrinter (IPX, SPX), Raw Port (TCP/IP), SMB
*1 Includes 64bit.
45.3 Paper
Paper size Same as the main body.
Type of paper Same as the main body.
Paper weight Same as the main body.
45.4 Machine data
C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc C3070L
CPU Intel Core i5 4570 2.9GHz Intel Pentium G3420
3.2GHz
System Memory Same as the main body
SSD 4GB
HDD Same as the main body
Interface section Same as the main body
Temperature Same as the main body
Humidity Same as the main body
C-87
C73hc/Print C3070L C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 46. GP-501
46. GP-501
46.1 Type
Type Multi-hole punch unit for ring binding
46.2 Modes of Operation
Bypass mode The paper moves straight from the printer to the finisher without passing through the punch module. In this
mode the paper in not punched.
Punch mode with Punch The paper moves from the printer to the punch module where it gets punched and then is routed to the
finisher.
46.3 Machine data
Punch unit size 12” (305mm) W x 40” (1016mm) H x 30.5” (775mm) D
Weight 170 lbs (80kg) when it is not packaged,
270 lbs (123kg) packaged (Pallet, Carton, PKG Inserts)
Color Top Cover. Orca Black, Lower covers. Cuttle Gray
AC Power Supply to GP-501 External power cord according to market destination.
DC 5V Supply to GP-501 Supplied by system to PCB contained within GP-501
System Power Supply Lines GP-501 Internal Lead-Through
• On upstream side: Wiring with connectors through cover-recess.
• On downstream side: Lock-style connector panel on the left side cover.
46.4 Software
Communication method i) Start-stop synchronization style, full duplex.
ii) 1 Start Bit, 8bit Data length, 1 Parity Bit, 1 Stop bit. Maximum Frame Length: 128 byte
iii) Hard flow control (CTS/RTS).
iv) Baud rate:
[Standard] 19200 bps
[ISW=Log file Transmissions] 78000 bps
Communication Content According Interface Specification (Also refer to Appendix B)
46.5 Electronic
Required signals to UP & RXD, RTS, CTS, TXD
Downstream connected units
46.6 Inputs
46.6.1 Media Input from Printer
Alignment/ skew variance at pick Center justified ± 4mm
up
Line speed 290 to 1250 mm/s (Fixed speeds within this range)
Speed variance at pick up ± 2%
Sheet frequency 120 ppm maximum
(1) For Punching
Paper weight 20lb bond - 80lb cover
Plain Paper: 75gsm - 216gsm
Other Paper: 120gsm - 216gsm
Exception ProClick: LTR & A4 Limited to 200gsm
Paper type See appendix C
Maximum Sheet size Letter configuration 279 x 216mm
A4 configuration 297 x 210mm
(2) For Bypass
Paper weight 16lb bond - 106 lb Bond
64gsm - 400gsm*1*2
Paper type Coated, Pre-printed, High Quality, Plain, Book, Color, Rough, Label, OHP, Index
Transparency weight 5 -10 mil (0.127mm to 0.254mm)
Maximum bypass sheet size 13” x 24.8” (330 x 630mm)
Minimum bypass sheet size 3.74” x 5.47” (95 x 139mm)
*1 The specification of the GP-501 itself. The specification as a system is different depending on the main body and the options to connect.
*2 351 g/m2 to 400 g/m2 / 93 lb Bond to 106 lb Bond has limited paper types.
C-88
46.6.2 Power
Supply GP-501 individual power supply and power cord required.
Configurations by market Refer to the following table.
Machine Market Voltage (V) Current (A) Frequency (Hz) Paper size
1 US, Canada 115 +10/-15 % 3 60 81/2 x 11
2 Europe, Australia 220-240 +10/-15 % 1.8 50 A4
46.7 Outputs
Alignment/ skew at delivery ± 2mm or less for the pick up position
Speed variance at delivery ± 1% compared to speed variance at pick up
Chip tray capacity 2500 cycles (based on punched sheet count)
46.8 Performance
Punch accuracy Hole size ± 2%
Alignment ±0.5mm
Back gauge depth ±0.3mm
46.8.1 Reliability
MCBJ: Punch 1 in 15,000 (20lb bond)
MCBJ: Bypass 1 in 65,000 (20lb bond)
46.9 Operation Environment, Storage, Transportation

Normal Operation Temperature 10 °C – 30 °C
Normal Operation Humidity 10% - 80%
Storage Temperature -10 °C – 40 °C
Storage Humidity 10% - 80%
46.10 Safety/Regulatory
Noise emissions (measured to Punch Maximum of 78dBA (punching 216gsm cover)
ISO7779) Bypass Maximum of 70dBA
46.10.1 Safety Compliance
UL & CSA standards CAN/USA-C22.2 No. 60950-01
UL60950-1 First Edition
TUV standards IEC 60950-1:2001
EN60950-1:2001
46.10.2 Electromagnetic Compliance
EMC standards EN55024:1998 Amendments A1:2001 & A2:2003
EN61000-3-2:2000
EN61000-3-3:1995 Amendment A1:2001
EN55022:1998 Amendments A1:2000 & A2:2003
EN61000-4-2, EN61000-4-4, EN61000-4-5, EN61000-4-6, EN61000-4-11
FCC standards Class B
Part 15, Subpart B, Section A 15.107A &15.109a
C-89
46.11 Appendix A
Figure 1.1 Front
Figure 1.2 Entrance
46.12 Appendix B
Number Model Die set type Pins Pinshape Hole size Paper size Label artwork
(WxH or D)
1 DS-501 Ring Binder 3 Round 8mm 81/2 x 11
3Hole (0.316")
2 DS-502 Plastic Bind 19 Rectangle 8mm x 2.9mm 81/2 x 11

Cerlox (0.313" x 0.116")
3 DS-503 WireBind –3:1 32 Square 4mm x 4mm 81/2 x 11

Square (0.156" x 0.156")
4 DS-504 WireBind –2:1 21 Rectangle 6.4mm x 5.4mm 81/2 x 11

Rectangular (0.250" x 0.214")
5 DS-505 Color Coil 44 Round 4.4mm 81/2 x 11

(0.174")
C-90
6 DS-506 VeloBind 11 Round 3.2mm 81/2 x 11

(0.125")
7 DS-507 ProClick 32 Rectangle 5mm x 5.5mm 81/2 x 11

(0.197" x 0.217")
8 DS-508 Ring Binder 4 4 Round 8mm A4
Hole (0.316")
9 DS-509 Plastic Bind 21 Rectangle 8mm x 2.9mm A4

Cerlox (0.313" x 0.116")
10 DS-510 WireBind –3:1 34 Round 4.4mm A4

Round (0.174")
11 DS-511 WireBind –2:1 23 Round 6.38mm A4

Round (0.251")
12 DS-512 Color Coil 47 Round 4.4mm A4

(0.174")
13 DS-513 VeloBind 12 Round 3.2mm A4

(0.125")
14 DS-514 ProClick 34 Rectangle 5mm x 5.5mm A4

(0.197" x 0.217")
15 DS-515 Ring Binder 2 2 Round 8mm A4
Hole (0.316")
16 DS-516 Plastic Bind 20 Rectangle 8mm x 2.9mm A4

Cerlox (0.313" x 0.116")
17 DS-517 WireBind –2:1 23 Rectangle 6.4mm x 5.4mm A4

Rectangular (0.250" x 0.214")
(Australia)
18 DS-518 WireBind –3:1 34 Square 4mm x 4mm A4
Square (0.156" x 0.156")
(Australia)
46.13 Appendix C
Paper Type for Punching *1
Destination Paper Name Weight (g/m2) Punch *2
(1) US Hammermill Color Copy Paper - 120 Q-Zone
Photo White
Hammermill Tidal MP 75 All
Hammermill Fore MP 75 All
Color Copy (Mondi) 120 Q-Zone
Wausau Exact Gloss Coated 215 Q-Zone
(C1S)
Hammermill Color Copy Cover 163 Q-Zone
216 Q-Zone
Color Copy (Mondi) 160 Q-Zone
(2) EU Konica Minolta Original 80 All
Konica Minolta Profi 80 All
Mondi BIO TOP 3 extra 80 All
Mondi Color Copy 200 Q-Zone
*1 The specification is different depending on the main body.
*2 Q-Zone: Guaranteed only in Q-zone
All: Guaranteed in all environments
*Refer to the following graph
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
C-91
46.14 Glossary of Terms
These terms are common to the punch and the bindery industry.
Cerlox The trade name GBC uses for its Plastic Binding
Color coil A plastic coil that looks like a spring which is threaded through round holes that are punched in the
document then the ends are cut off and crimped. The holes are either 4:1 or 5:1 (4 holes per inch or 5
holes per inch). This type of bind is horizontally flat and even folds around for easy handling of the
document.
Flush-cut covers Covers stock that is the same size as the paper contents and has round corners.
Plastic binding The name that is used to describe most common binding method of GBC.
The 19 and 21 rectangular hole, Plastic Comb type.
ProClick A plastic element that snaps together. This style requires holes that appear to be the same as Twin Loop
but are slightly larger.
The larger holes enable correct operation of the ProClick Pronto finishing devise.
Tabbing (hanging chad) “Tabbing” or “hanging chad” is when a hole is not punched cleanly through the material and a piece of
paper hangs from the edge.
This condition occurs when a die set is worn and usually result in miss-feeds.
Twin loop Looped wire element that is fed into square or round holes in the document in a similar fashion to Plastic
Binding. The holes are either 2:1 or 3:1 (2 holes per inch or 3 holes per inch). It is then squeezed together
or crimped to create an attractive bind that is holizontally flat.
Velobind A heat seal plastic bind that is best known for its security and attractive look. The one draw-back for
VeloBind is that it is not a layflat bind style. It is most often used in the Legal market for its security feature.
C-92
47. GP-502
47.1 Type
Type Automatic Ring Binding Device (Ring Binder)
47.2 Functions
47.2.1 Function
Bind mode Automatically punches and binds papers exited from the previous device and stocks in a book stock
section.
Through conveyance mode Conveys papers exited from the previous device to the succeeding device without any process.
47.2.2 Binding sheets
Front cover (g/m2) Back cover (g/m2) Body weight (g/m2) Minimum (sheets) Maximum (sheets)
Sheet 163 to 216 or OHP 163 to 216 1 sheet 75 7 102
paper: 1 sheet 80 96
90 85
100 76
110 70
120 64
47.2.3 Book stock quantity

The full detection sensor detects the limits of the stock quantity. For the 75g/m2 body and the 216g/m2 front cover, refer to the followings.
7 sheets book Equivalent to the 30 sheets book or until the upper limit is detected
47.2.4 Others
Punch waste capacity Approximately 2,000 punches
*Detected by the full detection sensor and the punch conter
Element stacker Minimum 16 sheets
*Detected by the full detection sensor
Maximum Approximately 100 sheets
*Defined by the position of the label
47.3 Type of paper
47.3.1 Paper size
Bind mode A4, 81/2 x 11
Requirements for the tab paper
a: Minimum: 5mm
b: Maximum: 13.5mm
b: R Minimum: 4.8mm
[1] [2]
[1] Tab paper with a shoulder: available

[2] Tab paper with no shoulder: unavailable
Through conveyance mode Same as the main body.
47.3.2 Paper weight
Bind mode Body 75g/m2 to 120g/m2
Cover 163g/m2 to 216g/m2
OHP paper (front cover only)
Insert sheet 75g/m2 to 120g/m2
C-93
47.3.3 Type of paper
Bind mode Body Plain, Fine, Coated (same as the main body)
Cover Plain, Fine, Coated, OHP papers*1 (same as the main body)
Insert sheet Plain, Fine, Coated (same as the main body)
*
1 Front cover only. The paper feeding reliability, image, and damage are not assured. Q zone only.
47.3.4 Recommended paper
Paper type Product name Weight Bind mode
Mono Color
Book Cover Book Cover
Inch Bond Hammermill Color 120g/m2 - - A -
Copy Paper - Photo
White
Hammermill Tidal MP 75g/m2 A - A -
2
Hammermill Fore MP 75g/m A - - -
Gloss Wausau Exact Gloss 215g/m2 - A - -
Coated (CIS)
Hammermill Color 120g/m2 - - A -
Copy Glossy
Color paper Hammermill Color 163g/m2 - - - A
Copy Cover 216g/m2 - - - A
Transparency 3M CG3700 - B - B
Metric Business Konicaminolta Original 80g/m2 A - A -
Konicaminolta Profi 80g/m2 A - A -
Mondi BIO TOP 3 extra 80g/m2 A - - -
2
Color paper Mondi Color Copy 100g/m - - A -
120g/m2 - - A -
200g/m2 - A - A
Coated Mondi Color Copy 170g/m2 - - - A
Coated Glossy
Transparency 3M CG3700 - B - B
* Recommended paper A: Evaluation standard paper for Japan, North America and Europe
Recommended paper B: Paper for original through check. Q zone is recommended
47.4 Performance Specifications
47.4.1 Input conditions
Paper grain No limitation
Centering ±8mm around the center
Paper curl amount
C
a In the bind mode, 10mm or less

In the through conveyance mode, 15mm or less
47.4.2 Sticking specifications
Sticking specifications Peeling strength of the bind element: 8.9N or more
C-94
Sticking accuracy
a Finger skew: ±1.6mm

Sticking length Length: 10 steps in accordance with the book thickness
Step Sticking length x Step Sticking
(mm) length x
(mm)
1 38.6 6 25.4
2 36.8 7 22.6
3 34.0 8 19.9
4 30.9 9 16.7
5 28.5 10 15.8
X±1.8 mm X±1.8 mm
The variability among the sticking lengths in each step: x ±1.8mm
a The variability among the sticking lengths in a single book (The variability
between 9 elements): 5mm or less
47.4.3 Book specifications
Hole position Position
C-95
3.6mm
Paper center
2.3mm
15.7mm 15.5mm
Hole position misalignment
D D
C
C
Paper center
Sub scan direction a: ±0.5 mm or less

Main scan direction b: ±1.5mm or less
Hole quality
Unacceptable-Protuberance too wide
Acceptable-Protuberance
Acceptable-Paper Fiber 1.5mm

3mm
1.0mm
0.38mm
C Zone B Zone A Zone
Unacceptable-Protuberance too long
Acceptable-Fuzziness
A Zone: Unacceptable. But paper fiber is acceptable.

B Zone: Regardless of 1.5mm or less in width.
C Zone: Regardless.
Element damage Grain damage Regardless of the grain damage such as the scratches by the nail.
Edge damage Regardless of 1.0mm x 1.0mm or less in size, and 1.0mm or less in height.
Hole damage (Back Dent of 0.6mm to 0.9mm in diameter Regardless of 100 dents or less for 1 Box
side only) Dent of 1.0mm or more in diameter Regardless of 1 dent or less for 1 Box
47.5 Materials
Name RB-101 (Ring binder element for GP-502)
Type GBC ellips
Color 4 Colors
Black: WY1, Clear: WY2, White: WY3, Navy Blue: WY4
Thickness 0.36 to 0.43 mm (Base material only)
Service life 1 year after manufacture. Only for the ones that are saved under the following conditions.
Storage ambient condition: Temperature: 12°C to 32°C, Humidity: 25% to 80%
Transportation ambient condition: Temperature: 0°C to 70°C, Humidity: 0% to 90%
Percent defective 2/1000 sheets
* The incidence ratio about
double-stick tape trouble
47.6 Machine data
Power source Inch: AC 115V, 60Hz
Metric: AC 230V, 50Hz
Maximum power consumption Inch: 200W or less (2.2A or less)
Metric: 190W or less (0.98A or less)
Weight 183kg
C-96
Dimensions 655 (W) x 944 (D*1) x 1,020 (H) mm

*1 Including the power box.
C-97
C73hc/Print C3070L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
D OVERALL COMPOSITION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 System configuration (C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P and C73hc)
Note
For details of the configuration for optional device, refer to D.1.3 Configuration for optional device (C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070,
C3070P and C73hc).
1.1.1 Option of paper feed
[2] [3] [4] [3] [4]

[1]
[5] [6]
[7] [10] [2]

[12]
[8] [9] [11]
[1] Multi bypass paper feed unit (MB-506) [2] Banner tray unit (MK-740, MK-740m*3) (Paper feed side)
[3] Envelope guide (MK-746) [4] Dehumidification heater (HT-503*8, HT-515*5)
[5] Large capacity paper feed unit (LU-202m) [6] Large capacity paper feed unit (Correspond to banner
paper) (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)*1
[7] Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-602m)*2 *4 [8] Dehumidification heater (HT-504*6, HT-505*7)
[9] Intermediate conveyance unit (FA-502) [10] Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-707m)*2
[11] Dehumidifier heater (HT-506) [12] Bypass paper feed unit (MB-508)
*1 When you install the LU-202XL or LU-202XLm without connecting the MK-740 or MK-740m, and feed the paper that is 487.8 mm or more,
the performance is not guaranteed.
*2 The WT-511 and MB-506 cannot be installed when you connect the PF-602m and the PF-707m.
*3 The MK-740m supports the FS-532 (W*5 or later) and the OT-510 (WY2 or later).
*4 For WY3 or later.
*5 Used only when the LU-202XLm is connected to the upstream of the PFU. (Only for Japan and North America)
*6 Applied to other than North America.
*7 Only for North America and Japan.
*8 When this option is connected to the LU-202XLm, it is used only when the LU-202XLm is connected directly to the main body. (Only for
Japan and North America)
1.1.2 Option of the main body
[2] [3] [4]
[5] [9] [18]

[17] [10]
[16] [11]
[6]
[1] [12]
[15]
[1] [13]
[7]
[8] [14]
[1] Main body [2] Original cover (OC-511)*2

*2
[3] Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-706) [4] Status indicator light (MK-744C) (Long type or short type)
[5] Authentication unit (AU-201S), key counter [6] Working table (WT-511)*1
[7] Dehumidifier heater (HT-511) [8] Envelope fusing unit (EF-103)*5
D-1
[9] Image controller (IC-417)*7 [10] Video interface kit (VI-509)

[11] Upgrade kit (UK-104) [12] Upgrade kit (UK-218)
*6
[13] Upgrade kit (UK-111) [14] Image controller (IC-314)*8
*9
[15] Image controller (IC-313) [16] Image controller (IC-605A*3, IC-605B*4)
[17] Video interface kit (VI-511)*10 [18] Video interface kit (VI-513)*11
*1 The WT-511 cannot be installed when you connect the PF-602m and the PF-707m.
*2 Select one of OC-511 or DF-706. However, it is not for the C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, and C73hc since they do not have a scanner and the
DF function.
*3 The IC-605A can be installed to the C3080/C3070.
*4 The IC-605B can be installed to the C3080P/C83hc/C3070P/C73hc.
*5 Only for W*2 specification
*6 Only in the following conditions: When the outsourced controller is connected to the C3080P or C83hc, two PF-707ms or more are connected
in tandem.
*7 Not supported in Japan. Not installed in the C3070P, and C73hc.
*8 Not supported in Japan. Not installed in the C83hc, C3070P, and C73hc.
*9 The C83hc (only for Japan), C3070P, and C73hc are not supported.
*10 This device is necessary when the IQ-501 is connected.
*11 This device is necessary when the UK-301 is connected.
1.1.3 Option of paper exit

[9]
[4] [2] [1]
[10] [8] [7] [6] [5]
[3]
[11]
[12]
[32] [16]
[22] [15]
[21] [20] [19] [17] [13]
[18] [14]
[9] [9]
[33] [31] [30] [19] [28] [26]
[24] [24]
[29] [27] [25] [23]
[34] [19]
[1] Output tray unit (OT-511) [2] Banner tray unit (MK-740, MK-740m*2) (Paper exit side)
[3] Humidification unit (HM-103) [4] Relay conveyance unit (RU-518)*5
[5] Intelligent quality optimizer (IQ-501) [6] Relay conveyance unit (RU-510)
[7] Floor type large capacity open output tray (OT-510)*1 [8] Finisher (Flat stitch type) (FS-532)*6
[9] Post inserter (PI-502) [10] PI-502 coupling conveyance kit (MK-732)
[11] Punch kit (PK-522) [12] Saddle stitch unit (SD-510)
[13] Saddle stitch unit (SD-513) [14] Creaser unit (CR-101)
[15] Trimmer unit (TU-503) [16] Folding unit (FD-504)
[17] Large capacity stacker (LS-506) [18] Large capacity stacker handcart (LC-501)
*4
[19] Mount kit for the 3rd Party Option (MK-737) [20] Perfect binder (PB-503)
D-2
[21] Saddle stitch unit (SD-506) [22] Folding unit (FD-503)

[23] Finisher (Flat stitch type) (FS-531) [24] Punch kit (PK-512, PK-513)
[25] Finisher (Saddle stitch type) (FS-612) [26] Smart punch unit (GP-502)*4
*4
[27] Ring binder material (RB-101) [28] Multi hole punch unit (GP-501)*4
[29] Die Set (DS-***)*4 [30] GBC punch G2*3*4
*4
[31] GBC wire binder G1 [32] Auto inspection unit (UK-301)
[33] Relay conveyance unit (RU-702) [34] Max MB-2000KM*3 *4
• Die set (DS-***) is selectable arbitrarily in accordance with the number and shape of pins.
Model Paper size The number of pins Shape of pin
DS-501 81/2 x 11 3 Round
1
DS-502 8 /2 x 11 19 Rectangle
DS-503 81/2 x 11 32 Square
DS-504 81/2 x 11 21 Rectangle
DS-505 81/2 x 11 44 Round
DS-506 81/2 x 11 11 Round
1
DS-507 8 /2 x 11 32 Rectangle
DS-508 A4 4 Round
DS-509 A4 21 Rectangle
DS-510 A4 34 Round
DS-511 A4 23 Round
DS-512 A4 47 Round
DS-513 A4 12 Round
DS-515 A4 2 Round
DS-517 A4 23 Square
DS-518 A4 34 Square
*1 The IQ-501 can not be installed when you connect the OT-510 to the SD-506 or the SD-513.
*2 The MK-740m can only be installed to the FS-532 (W*5 or later) and the OT-510 (WY2 or later).
*3 Two connections of the MK-737s are necessary (for WY2 or later).
*4: Not supported in Japan.
*5 The MK-740 can be optionally connected to the paper exit tray of the RU-518.
*6 Only for W*5 and later
1.2 System configuration (C3070L)

1.2.1 Option of paper feed
[2] [3] [4] [3] [4]

[1]
[5] [6]
[1] Multi bypass paper feed unit (MB-506) [2] Banner tray unit (MK-740, MK-740m) (Paper feed side)
[3] Envelope guide (MK-746) [4] Dehumidifier heater(HT-503)
[5] Large capacity paper feed unit (LU-202m) [6] Large capacity paper feed unit (supporting banner paper)
(LU-202XL/XLm)*1
*1 When you install the LU-202XL or LU-202XLm without connecting the MK-740 or MK-740m, and feed the paper that is 487.8 mm or more,
the performance is not guaranteed.
D-3
1.2.2 Option of the main body
[2] [3] [4]
[5] [9]
[10]
[6] [11]
[1]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[1] Main body [2] Original cover (OC-511)*1

*1
[3] Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-706) [4] Status indicator light kit (MK-744C)
[5] Authentication unit (AU-201S), key counter [6] Working table (WT-511)
[7] Dehumidifier heater (HT-511) [8] Envelope fusing unit (EF-103)*2
[9] Image controller (IC-417) [10] Video interface kit (VI-509)
[11] Image controller (IC-605A) -
*1 Select one of OC-511 or DF-706.
*2 Only for W*2 specification.
1.2.3 Option of paper exit
[4] [4]
[3] [2] [1]
[6] [6]
[7] [5]
[1] Output tray unit (OT-511) [2] Banner tray unit (MK-740, MK-740m*1) (Paper exit side)
[3] Floor type large capacity open output tray (OT-510) [4] Post inserter (PI-502)
[5] Finisher (Flat stitch type) (FS-531) [6] Punch kit (PK-512, PK-513)
[7] Finisher (Saddle stitch type) (FS-612) -
*1 MK-740m is only for the option OT-510 (WY2 or later).
1.3 Configuration for optional device (C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P and C73hc)
Note
▪ The combination except as mentioned in the following is prohibited.
▪ IC-605 is available with all combinations.
▪ IC-417 is available with all combinations except for C73hc.
▪ IC-313 is not available for C73hc and C3070L.
▪ IC-314 is not available for C83hc,C73hc and C3070L.
▪ The options can be connected each other. However, be sure to be careful of the AC connection mode.
▪ RU-510 has to be connected for connecting GP-501.
▪ When you use the EF-103, refer to the “ Functions ” for the available options.
1.3.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
1 Main body MB-506*4
2 Main body LU-202m*1/LU-202XL*1/
LU-202XLm*1
3 Main body PF-602m*2
4 Main body PF-707m*3
5 Main body PF-707m*3 *5 PF-707m*3
6 Main body PF-707m*3 *5 PF-707m*3 *5 PF-707m*3
D-4
7 Main body MB-506*4 LU-202m*1/LU-202XL*1/
LU-202XLm*1
8 Main body PF-707m*3 *5 MB-508*4
*3 *5
9 Main body PF-707m LU-202XLm*1 *6
10 Main body PF-707m*3 *5 MB-508*4 LU-202XLm*1 *6
*1 The HT-503 and MK-746 can be connected arbitrarily to the LU-202m, LU-202XL, and LU-202XLm. However, the HT-503 can be connected
to the LU-202XLm only when the LU-202XLm is directly connected to the main body.
*2 The HT-504 (for the regions except Japan and North America) and HT-505 (for Japan and North America) can be connected arbitrarily to the
PF-602m. For WY3 or later.
*3 The HT-506 can be connected arbitrarily to the PF-707m.
*4 The MK-740 and MK-740m (paper feed side) can be connected arbitrarily to the MB-506 and MB-508.
*5 Installation of the FA-502 is required.
*6 The HT-515 (only for Japan and North America) can be connected arbitrarily when the LU-202XLm is connected upstream of the PFU.
1.3.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option

Op.10 Op.9 Op.8 Op.7 Op.6 Op.5 Op.4 Op.3 Op.2 Op.1 Main body
- - - - - FS-532*2/ - - - - Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - MK-740/ FS-532*2/ - - - - Main body*4
MK-740m*9 OT-510
- - - - - FS-532*2/ RU-510*15 - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - - FS-532*2/ - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - - FS-532*2/ RU-510*14 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - MK-740/ FS-532*2/ RU-510*15 - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
MK-740m*9 OT-510
- - - - MK-740/ FS-532*2/ - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
MK-740m*9 OT-510
- - - - MK-740/ FS-532*2/ RU-510*14 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
MK-740m*9 OT-510
- - - - - FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*3
- - - - - FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*8 *1
- - - - - FD-503 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*16 *8 *1
- - - - - FD-503 RU-510 RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*2 *1*6
- - - - FS-532 / FD-503 - - - RU-518 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - FS-532*2/ FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - FS-532*2/ FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - FS-532*2/ FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - LS-506 FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*3
- - - - LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*8 *1
- - - - LS-506 FD-503 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*16 *8 *1
- - - - LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
- - - FS-532*2/ LS-506 FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - FS-532*2/ LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - FS-532*2/ LS-506 FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - FS-532*2/ LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - LS-506 LS-506 FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*3
- - - LS-506 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
- - - LS-506 LS-506 FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
*16 *8 *1
- - - LS-506 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*1*6
- - 3rd party LS-506 LS-506 FD-503 - - - RU-518 Main body*3
option *10*12
D-5
- - 3rd party LS-506 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - 3rd party LS-506 LS-506 FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - 3rd party LS-506 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - - SD-506/ LS-506 FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - SD-506/ LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - SD-506/ LS-506 FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - SD-506/ LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 LS-506 FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*3
- - - PB-503 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
- - - PB-503 LS-506 FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
*16 *8 *1
- - - PB-503 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*1*6
- - - 3rd party LS-506 FD-503 - - - RU-518 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - - 3rd party LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - - 3rd party LS-506 FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - - 3rd party LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - - - SD-506/ FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - SD-506/ FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 SD-506/ FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 SD-506/ FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - FS-532*2 PB-503 SD-506/ FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*4
SD-513*7
- - FS-532*2 PB-503 SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
SD-513*7
- - FS-532*2 PB-503 SD-506/ FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
SD-513*7
- - FS-532*2 PB-503 SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
SD-513*7
- - - - PB-503 FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*3
- - - - PB-503 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*8 *1
- - - - PB-503 FD-503 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*16 *8 *1
- - - - PB-503 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
- - - FS-532*2 PB-503 FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*4
*2
- - - FS-532 PB-503 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
D-6
- - - FS-532*2 PB-503 FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
- - - FS-532*2 PB-503 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
*1
- - - - - LS-506 - - - RU-518 Main body*3
*8 *1
- - - - - LS-506 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
- - - - - LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
*2 *1
- - - - FS-532 / LS-506 - - - RU-518 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - FS-532*2/ LS-506 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - FS-532*2/ LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - - LS-506 LS-506 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*8 *1
- - - - LS-506 LS-506 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*16 *8 *1
- - - - LS-506 LS-506 - RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*2 *1
- - - FS-532 / LS-506 LS-506 - - - RU-518 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - FS-532*2/ LS-506 LS-506 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - FS-532*2/ LS-506 LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - SD-506/ LS-506 LS-506 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - SD-506/ LS-506 LS-506 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - SD-506/ LS-506 LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 LS-506 LS-506 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*8 *1
- - - PB-503 LS-506 LS-506 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
- - - PB-503 LS-506 LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
*1
- - - 3rd party LS-506 LS-506 - - - RU-518 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - - 3rd party LS-506 LS-506 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - - 3rd party LS-506 LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - - - SD-506/ LS-506 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - SD-506/ LS-506 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - SD-506/ LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ LS-506 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ LS-506 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 SD-506/ LS-506 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 SD-506/ LS-506 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 SD-506/ LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - PB-503 LS-506 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
- - - - PB-503 LS-506 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
*16 *8 *1
- - - - PB-503 LS-506 - RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*2 *1
- - - FS-532 PB-503 LS-506 - - - RU-518 Main body*4
*2 *8 *1
- - - FS-532 PB-503 LS-506 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*4
- - - FS-532*2 PB-503 LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
*1
- - - - 3rd party LS-506 - - - RU-518 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - - - 3rd party LS-506 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
option *10*12
D-7
- - - - 3rd party LS-506 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
option *10*12
- - - - - SD-506/ - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - - SD-506/ - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - - SD-506/ - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - - PB-503 SD-506/ - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - PB-503 SD-506/ - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - - PB-503 SD-506/ - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2 PB-503 SD-506/ - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2 PB-503 SD-506/ - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2 PB-503 SD-506/ - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
SD-513*7
- - - - - PB-503 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*8 *1
- - - - - PB-503 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*16 *8 *1
- - - - - PB-503 - RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
- - - - FS-532*2 PB-503 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
*2 *8 *1
- - - - FS-532 PB-503 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*4
*2 *16 *8 *1
- - - - FS-532 PB-503 - RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*4
*2 *10 *1
- - - FS-532 / RU-510 GP-501 - - - RU-518 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - FS-532*2/ RU-510 GP-501*10 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - FS-532*2/ RU-510 GP-501*10 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - FS-532*2/ FD-503 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - FS-532*2/ FD-503 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - FS-532*2/ FD-503 RU-510 GP-501*10 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 GP-501*10 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - FS-532*2/ LS-506 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - FS-532*2/ LS-506 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - FS-532*2/ LS-506 RU-510 GP-501*10 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - SD-506/ LS-506 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - SD-506/ LS-506 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - SD-506/ LS-506 RU-510 GP-501*10 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - PB-503 LS-506 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*10 *8 *1
- - PB-503 LS-506 RU-510 GP-501 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
D-8
- - PB-503 LS-506 RU-510 GP-501*10 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
- - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ RU-510 GP-501*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ RU-510 GP-501*10 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ RU-510 GP-501*10 - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*10 *8 *1
- - - PB-503 RU-510 GP-501 - - IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*10 *16 *8 *1
- - - PB-503 RU-510 GP-501 - RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*3
*2 *10 *1
- - FS-532 PB-503 RU-510 GP-501 - - - RU-518 Main body*4
- - FS-532*2 PB-503 RU-510 GP-501*10 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
*2 *10 *16 *8 *1
- - FS-532 PB-503 RU-510 GP-501 - RU-702 IQ-501 RU-518 Main body*4
*2 *10 *1
- - - - FS-532 / GP-502 - - - RU-518 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - FS-532*2/ FD-503 GP-502*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 GP-502*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2/ LS-506 GP-502*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - - SD-506/ LS-506 GP-502*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
SD-513*7
- - - PB-503 LS-506 GP-502*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
- - - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ GP-502*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - - PB-503 GP-502*10 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*2 *10 *1
- - - FS-532 PB-503 GP-502 - - - RU-518 Main body*4
- - FS-532*2/ GP-502*10 LS-506 FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*4
OT-510
- - FS-532*2/ GP-502*10 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - FS-532*2/ GP-502*10 LS-506 FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - FS-532*2/ GP-502*10 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510
- - FS-532*2/ GP-502*10 SD-506/ FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - FS-532*2/ GP-502*10 SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - FS-532*2/ GP-502*10 SD-506/ FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - FS-532*2/ GP-502*10 SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
OT-510 SD-513*7
- - - FS-532*2/ - GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
OT-510 PUNCH G2
*10*11
*2
- - - FS-532 / - GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
OT-510 PUNCH G2
*10*11
*2
- - - FS-532 / - GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
OT-510 PUNCH G2
*10*11
*2
- - FS-532 / FD-503 - GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
OT-510 PUNCH G2
*10*11
*2
- - FS-532 / FD-503 - GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
OT-510 PUNCH G2
*10*11
*2
- - FS-532 / FD-503 - GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
OT-510 PUNCH G2
*10*11
*2
- FS-532 / SD-506/ FD-503 - GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
OT-510 SD-513*7 PUNCH G2
*10*11
D-9
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-518 GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
*10*11
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-518 GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
*10*11
- - FS-532*2/ LS-506 - GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

OT-510 PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - FS-532*2/ LS-506 - GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

OT-510 PUNCH G2
*10*11
*2
- - FS-532 / LS-506 - GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
OT-510 PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - SD-506/ LS-506 - GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

SD-513*7 PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - SD-506/ LS-506 - GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

SD-513*7 PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - SD-506/ LS-506 - GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

SD-513*7 PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - SD-506/ LS-506 RU-518 GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

SD-513*7 PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - SD-506/ LS-506 RU-518 GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

SD-513*7 PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - PB-503 LS-506 - GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - PB-503 LS-506 - GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - PB-503 LS-506 - GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - PB-503 LS-506 RU-518 GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - PB-503 LS-506 RU-518 GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

PUNCH G2
*10*11
*2
- - FS-532 / SD-506/ - GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*10*11
*2
- - FS-532 / SD-506/ - GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
*10*11
*2
- - FS-532 / SD-506/ - GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
*10*11
- - - PB-503 - GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - - PB-503 - GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - - PB-503 - GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

PUNCH G2
*10*11
*2
- - FS-532 PB-503 - GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
PUNCH G2
*10*11
D-10
- - FS-532*2 PB-503 - GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - FS-532*2 PB-503 - GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

PUNCH G2
*10*11
- - FS-532*2/ - GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

OT-510 BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- - FS-532*2/ - GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

G1 *10 *10*11
- - FS-532*2/ - GBC WIRE GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2/ FD-503 - GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2/ FD-503 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2/ FD-503 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
OT-510 SD-513*7 BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2/ LS-506 - GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2/ LS-506 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2/ LS-506 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
- SD-506/ LS-506 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

SD-513*7 BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- SD-506/ LS-506 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
- SD-506/ LS-506 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
- PB-503 LS-506 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- PB-503 LS-506 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- PB-503 LS-506 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ - GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
D-11
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
- - PB-503 - GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- - PB-503 - GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- - PB-503 - GBC WIRE GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3

BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- - PB-503 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- - PB-503 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2 PB-503 - GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2 PB-503 - GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2 PB-503 - GBC WIRE GBC - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2 PB-503 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3

BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
- FS-532*2 PB-503 RU-518 GBC WIRE GBC RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
BINDER PUNCH G2
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ GBC WIRE GBC RU-518 LS-506 FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ GBC WIRE GBC RU-518 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ GBC WIRE GBC RU-518 LS-506 FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ GBC WIRE GBC RU-518 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ GBC WIRE GBC RU-518 SD-506/ FD-503 - - - RU-518*1*6 Main body*3
OT-510 BINDER PUNCH G2 SD-513*7
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ GBC WIRE GBC RU-518 SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ GBC WIRE GBC RU-518 SD-506/ FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
FS-532*2/ GBC WIRE GBC RU-518 SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*3
G1 *10 *10*11
- - - FS-532*2/ - Max - - - RU-518*1 Main body

OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - - FS-532*2/ - Max RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - - FS-532*2/ - Max - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
D-12
- - FS-532*2/ FD-503 - Max - - - RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - FS-532*2/ FD-503 - Max RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - FS-532*2/ FD-503 - Max - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-518 Max - - - RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 SD-513*7 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-518 Max RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 SD-513*7 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- FS-532*2/ SD-506/ FD-503 RU-518 Max - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 SD-513*7 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - FS-532*2/ LS-506 - Max - - - RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - FS-532*2/ LS-506 - Max RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - FS-532*2/ LS-506 - Max - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - PB-503 LS-506 - Max - - - RU-518*1 Main body
MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - PB-503 LS-506 - Max RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - PB-503 LS-506 - Max - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - SD-506/ LS-506 - Max - - - RU-518*1 Main body
SD-513*7 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - SD-506/ LS-506 - Max RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
SD-513*7 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - SD-506/ LS-506 - Max - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
SD-513*7 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ - Max - - - RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 SD-513*7 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ - Max RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 SD-513*7 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - FS-532*2/ SD-506/ - Max - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 SD-513*7 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - - PB-503 - Max - - - RU-518*1 Main body
MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - - PB-503 - Max RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - - PB-503 - Max - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - FS-532*2 PB-503 - Max - - - RU-518*1 Main body
MB-2000K
M *10 *11
D-13
- - FS-532*2 PB-503 - Max RU-510 - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- - FS-532*2 PB-503 - Max - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- FS-532*2/ Max RU-518 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- FS-532*2/ Max RU-518 LS-506 FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- FS-532*2/ Max RU-518 LS-506 FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K
M *10 *11
- FS-532*2/ Max RU-518 SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 - - RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K SD-513*7
M *10 *11
- FS-532*2/ Max RU-518 SD-506/ FD-503 - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K SD-513*7
M *10 *11
- FS-532*2/ Max RU-518 SD-506/ FD-503 RU-510 RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body
OT-510 MB-2000K SD-513*7
M *10 *11
- - - - - FS-612*13 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
*13 *1
- - - - MK-740 FS-612 - - - RU-518 Main body*3
*13 *1
- - - - - FS-531 - - - RU-518 Main body*3
- - - - MK-740 FS-531*13 - - - RU-518*1 Main body*3
- - - - - OT-510 - - - - Main body*4
- - - - MK-740/ OT-510 - - - - Main body*4
MK-740m*9
- - - - - FS-612 - - - - Main body*5
- - - - MK-740 FS-612 - - - - Main body*5
- - - - - FS-531 - - - - Main body*5
- - - - MK-740 FS-531 - - - - Main body*5
- - - - - OT-511 - - - - Main body*4
- - - - MK-740 OT-511 - - - - Main body*4
*1
- - - - OT-510 SD-506/ - - - RU-518 Main body*4
SD-513*7
- - - - OT-510 SD-506/ - - IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
SD-513*7
- - - - OT-510 SD-506/ - RU-702*16 IQ-501*8 RU-518*1 Main body*4
SD-513*7
*1 The HM-103 and MK-740 can be connected arbitrarily. (When the FD-503 or PI-502 is connected immediately after the RU-518, the MK-740
cannot be connected.)
*2 The SD-510, PK-522, or PI-502 + MK732 can be connected arbitrarily to the FS-532 in the following conditions.
• The SD-510 cannot be connected when the SD-506 or SD-513 is connected.
• The PK-522 and PI-502 + MK-732 cannot be connected when the FD-503 is connected.
• The SD-510, PK-522 and PI-502 + MK732 cannot be connected when the duplicate function of the SD, PI, or PK is available.
*3 The output destination for envelopes is only the purge tray of the RU-518 when the EF-103 is installed.
*4 You can select the output destination for envelopes from the FS-532, OT-510, or OT-511 when the EF-103 is installed.
*5 No settings for the EF-103.
*6 The paper exit tray of the RU-518 cannot be connected.
*7 FD-504, TU-503, or CR-101 can be connected arbitrarily to SD-513.
*8 Installation of the VI-511 is required when you connect the IQ-501.
*9 The MK-740m can be connected arbitrarily to the FS-532 (W*5 or later) and OT-510 (WY2 or later).
*10 Not supported in Japan.
*11 When the GBC PUNCH G2 or the Max MB-2000KM is connected, two MK-737 devices (area code: WY2 or later) must be installed.
*12 Installation of the MK-737 is required when the 3rd party option is connected.
*13 The PI-502 cannot be installed.
*14 Connection of the RU-510 is required, only when the PI-502 is connected to the FS-532. Otherwise, connection of the RU-510 is not
required.
*15 Connection of the RU-510 is required only when you want to install the paper exit tray of the RU-518 while the PI-502 is connected to the
FS-532. Otherwise, connection of the RU-510 is not required.
*16 Installation of the UK-301 and VI-513 are required.
D-14
1.3.3 Combination of the main body and the image controller (IC) option
Combination of the main body and the IC option Option connection
IQ-501 UK-301 + Two or more
RU-702 PF-707m
connected in
tandem
Main body IC-605*1 - - - - Not connected Not connected Not connected
Main body IC-605*1 VI-511*7 - - - Connected Not connected Not connected
*1
Main body IC-605 UK-104 - - - Not connected Not connected Not connected
Main body IC-605*1 UK-104 UK-218 - - Not connected Not connected Not connected
Main body IC-605*1 UK-104 VI-511*7 - - Connected Not connected Not connected
Main body IC-605*1 UK-104 UK-218 VI-511*7 - Connected Not connected Not connected
*1 *7 *8
Main body IC-605 UK-104 VI-511 VI-513 - Connected Connected Not connected
Main body IC-605*1 UK-104 UK-218 VI-511*7 VI-513*8 Connected Connected Not connected
Main body IC-313*3 VI-509 - - - Not connected Not connected Not connected
Main body IC-313*3 VI-509 VI-511*7 - - Connected Not connected Not connected
Main body IC-313*3 VI-509 UK-111*2 - - Not connected Not connected Connected
*3 *7 *2
Main body IC-313 VI-509 VI-511 UK-111 - Connected Not connected Connected
Main body IC-313*3 - VI-511*7 VI-513*8 - Connected Connected Not connected
Main body IC-313*3 - VI-511*7 VI-513*8 UK-111*2 Connected Connected Connected
Main body IC-417*4*6 VI-509 - - - Not connected Not connected Not connected
Main body IC-417*4*6 VI-509 VI-511*7 - - Connected Not connected Not connected
*4*6
Main body IC-417 VI-509 UK-111*2 - - Not connected Not connected Connected
Main body IC-417*4*6 VI-509 VI-511*7 UK-111*2 - Connected Not connected Connected
Main body IC-417*4*6 - VI-511*7 VI-513*8 - Connected Connected Not connected
Main body IC-417*4*6 - VI-511*7 VI-513*8 UK-111*2 Connected Connected Connected
*5*6
Main body IC-314 VI-509 - - - Not connected Not connected Not connected
Main body IC-314*5*6 VI-509 VI-511*7 - - Connected Not connected Not connected
*5*6
Main body IC-314 VI-509 UK-111*2 - - Not connected Not connected Connected
Main body IC-314*5*6 VI-509 VI-511*7 UK-111*2 - Connected Not connected Connected
*5*6 *7 *8
Main body IC-314 - VI-511 VI-513 - Connected Connected Not connected
Main body IC-314*5*6 - VI-511*7 VI-513*8 UK-111*2 Connected Connected Connected
*1 If the IC option is connected to the C3080 or C3070, install the IC-605A. *1 If the IC option is connected to the C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, or
C73hc, install the IC-605B.
*2 For the C3080P and C83hc only, and when two or more PF-707m devices are connected in tandem.
*3 Except for the C83hc (only for Japan), C3070P, and C73hc.
*4 Except for the C3070P or C73hc.
*5 Except for the C83hc, C3070P, or C73hc.
*6 Not supported for Japan.
*7 Installation of the VI-511 is required when you connect the IQ-501.
*8 Installation of the VI-513 is required when you connect the UK-301.
1.3.4 Options that connect to the external AC power supply

Type Target options
Paper feed option HT-515*1
HT-504*2
PF-707m
Main body Main body
Finisher option RU-518
IQ-501
RU-702
UK-301
GP-501*3
GP-502*3
GBC PUNCH G2*3
GBC WIRE BINDER G1*3
FD-503
LS-506
SD-506
SD-513
D-15
Type Target options

PB-503
3rd Party Option*3
Electronic option IC-313*4
IC-417*5
IC-314*6
*1: Only for Japan and North America

*2: Except for Japan and North America
*3: Except for Japan
*4: C3080, C3070, C3080P, and C83hc. C83hc is not supported in japan.
*5: C3080, C3070, C3080P, and C83hc. Not supported in Japan.
*6: C3080, C3070, and C3080P. Not supported in Japan.
1.4 Configuration for optional device (C3070L)

Note
▪ The combination except as mentioned in the following is prohibited.
▪ IC-605 and IC-417 are available with all combinations.
1.4.1 Coupling combination of the main body and the paper feed option
Main body MB-506*2
Main body LU-202m /LU-202XL*1/LU-202XLm*1
*1
Main body LU-202m*1/LU-202XL*1/LU-202XLm *1 MB-506*2

*1 HT-503 can be connected arbitrarily to LU-202m, LU-202XL and LU-202XLm.
*2 MK-740/740m (paper feed side) can be connected arbitrarily to MB-506.
1.4.2 Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option

Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option
OT-510*2*3 Main body
OT-511*2 Main body
FS-531*1*2 Main body
*1*2
FS-612 Main body
*1 PK-512, 513 and PI-502 can be connected arbitrarily to FS-531 and FS-612.
*2 MK-740 (paper exit side) can be connected arbitrarily to FS-531, FS-612, OT-510, and OT-511.
*3 MK-740m is only for the option OT-510 (WY2 or later).
1.4.3 Combination of the main body and the image controller (IC) option
Combination of the main body and the IC option
Main body IC-605A -
Main body IC-417 VI-509
1.4.4 Options that connect to the external AC power supply

Type Target options
Electronic option IC-417
D-16
C73hc/Print C3070L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION
[20]
[18] [19]
[17]
[16]
[1]
[2]
[15]
[3]
[4]
[14] [5]
[6]
[13] [7]
[12] [11] [10] [9] [8]

[1] Scanner section [2] Toner supply section
[3] Write section [4] Developing section
[5] MB-506 (Optional) [6] Duplex section
[7] Vertical conveyance section [8] Charging section
[9] Paper feed section [10] Registration section
[11] 2nd transfer section [12] Toner collection section
[13] Charge control section [14] Reverse and exit section
[15] OT-511 (Optional) [16] Fusing section
[17] Intermediate transfer section [18] DF-706 (Optional)
[19] Photo conductor section [20] Operation panel section
D-17
C73hc/Print C3070L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 3. PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
3.1 Straight paper exit mode
[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6] [4]
[5]
[1] Paper feed (common) [2] Bypass tray paper feed

[3] PF paper feed, LU paper feed [4] Vertical conveyance
[5] Tray 2 paper feed [6] Tray 1 paper feed
[7] Paper exit [8] Transfer and fusing conveyance
D-18
3.2 Reversing exit mode
[10]
[1]
[2]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[6] [4]
[5]

[3] PF paper feed, LU paper feed [4] Vertical conveyance
[5] Tray 2 paper feed [6] Tray 1 paper feed
[7] Reversing conveyance [8] Reversal Output
[9] Paper exit [10] Transfer and fusing conveyance
D-19
3.3 Duplex mode
[11] [12]
[13]
[1]
[10] [2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[4]
[7] [5]
[6]

[3] Reversing conveyance (for banner paper) [4] PF paper feed, LU paper feed
[5] Vertical conveyance [6] Tray 2 paper feed
[7] Tray 1 paper feed [8] Reversing conveyance/1
[9] Reversing conveyance/2 [10] Paper exit
[11] Straight paper exit [12] Transfer and fusing conveyance
[13] ADU conveyance -
D-20
C73hc/Print C3070L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

CCDB DF Serial USB LAN
I/F I/F I/F
SCIPB NRB
M PS HDD OB RBU HDD
SCDB PRIPB OACB
RU
IC FM
VIFB IPB/I
FS FD LS SD PB GP GP
IC UK
IQ RU
DCPS USB LAN
I/F I/F
Write FS
RU
Section PF/LU/MB
M FM CL SD PS
PRCB
Fusing Unit CDB DDB HV
M FM CL SD PS MB M
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[1] SATA [2] Individual signal line

[3] Other bus [4] UART bus
[5] Clock-synchronized serial bus [6] Image bus
Board name Purpose of board

Overall control board (OACB) Overall condition control
Scanner image processing board (SCIPB) Image processing control for the scanner
Printer image processing board (PRIPB) Image processing control for writing
Printer control board (PRCB) Load control of such as motor, fan, clutch, solenoid and sensor
IQ image processing board (IPB/I) Image processing control for IQ (option: VI-511)
VIF board (VIFB) Interface of outsourced controller (option: VI-509)
Interface of UK-301 and outsourced controller (option: VI-513)
D-21
C73hc/Print C3070L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS
5. IMAGE CREATION PROCESS

5.1 Image creation flow and functions
Step Process Function
Step 1 Charging process Forms a charge layer on the photo conductor drum.
Step 2 Laser exposure process Forms an electrostatic latent image on the photo conductor drum.
Step 3 Developing process Makes the electrostatic latent image to the visible image.
Step 4 Intermediate transfer process Combine the monochromatic (YMCK) visible image on each photo
conductor drum on the transfer belt to form an image.
Step 5 2nd transfer process Transfers the image on the transfer belt to paper.
Step 6 Separation process Separates paper after the toner transfer from the transfer belt.
Sub step 1 Drum cleaning Removes the toner on the photo conductor drum after the intermediate
transfer.
Sub step 2 Exposure before charge Removes the potential remains on the photo conductor drum after the
drum cleaning.
Sub step 3 Transfer belt cleaning Removes the toner on the intermediate transfer belt after the 2nd
transfer.
Sub step 4 2nd transfer roller/Lw cleaning Removes the toner on the 2nd transfer roller/Lw after the 2nd transfer.
Sub step 5 Toner collection Collect the toner that is removed by the drum cleaning and transfer belt
cleaning. (Not displayed in the following picture.) )
[11] [1]
Step 3
Sub step 3 [2]
[12] [4][3] Step 2
Step 4
Step 1
Sub step 1
[10]
Sub step 2
[9]
[8]
Step 6 [5]
[6]
[7] Step 5 / Sub step 4
[1] Developing unit [2] Writing unit

[3] Charging corona [4] Erase lamp (EL)
[5] Paper [6] 2nd transfer roller/Lw
[7] Discharge section [8] 2nd transfer roller/Up
[9] Transfer belt [10] Blade (drum cleaning)
[11] Blade (Transfer belt cleaning) [12] Drum
5.2 Charging process (Step 1)

Applies the high DC voltage (negative) to the charging corona with the gold coated tungsten wire. Then, discharges the wire to charge the
negative charge to the drum. The charging corona has the charger plate, and it makes the charge on the surface of the drum even. The
photoconductor is prepared for 4 colors (YMCK).
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Drum [2] Charge (negative)
[3] Charging corona [4] Charging plate
D-22
5.3 Laser exposure process (Step2)

The charge on the photo conductor drum has a characteristic that it is neutralized and disappears when the light is exposed. With this
characteristic, exposes the laser beam to the image area to create an image on the photo conductor drum. This image is called an electrostatic
latent image. The laser beam which is exposed to each of the YMCK drum corresponds to the color data disassembled into 4 at the image
processing section.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1] Writing unit [2] Laser beam
[3] Neutralized section [4] Charge (negative)
5.4 Developing process (Step 3)

The non-image points of the electrostatic latent image on the drum is charged negatively while the image points are neutralized. As the toner is
negatively charged, it is attracted to the image points on the drum. As a result, a visible toner image is created on the drum. This operation is
referred to as "development."
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1] Developing roller [2] Drum

[3] Charge (negative) [4] Toner (negative)
5.5 Intermediate transfer process (Step 4)

The toner on each of the Y, M, C and K photoconductor drums are transferred to the intermediate transfer belt and composed on it. This toner
transfer from the drums to the intermediate belt is referred to as "intermediate transfer" (1st transfer) and it is performed in order of Y, M, C, K.
At the intermediate transfer, a positive high DC voltage bias is applied to the 1st transfer roller that is provided on the back surface of the
intermediate transfer belt. This process makes the intermediate transfer belt surface have a positive potential higher than the potential of the
each drum surface so that the toner on the drums are attracted to the transfer belt.
D-23
[3] [4] [5]
[2]
[1]
[8] [5]
[7]
[6]
[1] Drum/Y [2] 1st transfer roller/Y

[3] Transfer belt [4] Toner/Y
[5] Charge (negative) [6] Drum/M
[7] 1st transfer roller/M [8] Toner/M
5.6 2nd transfer process (Step 5)

The operation to transfer the image that is composed of four colors on the transfer belt to the paper is referred to as 2nd transfer. At the 2nd
transfer, the 2nd transfer roller/Lw which is mounted on the bottom side of the transfer belt conveys the paper while it is pressed against the
transfer belt. At this time, the 2nd transfer roller/Up on the back side of the transfer belt is applied a DC bias (negative) at high voltage, and the
electric field is produced between the 2nd transfer roller/Up and the 2nd transfer roller/Lw mounted inside the 2nd transfer belt. It moves the
toner on the transfer belt onto the paper.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1] Transfer belt [2] Paper
[3] 2nd transfer roller/Lw [4] 2nd transfer roller/Up
5.7 Separation process (Step 6)

At the 2nd transfer, the 2nd transfer roller/Up negatively charges the paper on which is being transferred. It causes the paper and the
intermediate transfer belt to attract each other and the paper sticks to the intermediate transfer belt. The operation to separate that absorbed
paper is referred to as "separation."
Apply the AC and DC biases at high voltage to the discharge section to perform the separation. This operation neutralizes the charges of the
paper and the intermediate transfer belt.
D-24
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[1] Transfer belt [2] Paper

[3] 2nd transfer roller/Lw [4] Discharge section
5.8 Drum cleaning (Sub step 1)

After the intermediate transfer, a small amount of the toner remains on the drum. The process to remove that toner is referred to as "drum
cleaning."
To conduct the drum cleaning, scrap the toner adhering to the drum with the edge of the urethane rubber plate which is called blade.
[3] [1]
[2]
[1] Drum [2] Cleaning blade
[3] Remaining toner -
5.9 Exposure before the charge (Sub step 2)

After completion of drum cleaning, no toner remains but a subtle potential remains on the drum surface. With this condition, the charging for the
next print is not performed normally. Therefore, the exposure which is different from the laser exposure is performed to neutralize the potential
on the drum surface completely. This process is referred to as "exposure before charging."
This machine uses the erase lamp (EL) for this process.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] Drum [2] Erase lamp (EL)
[3] Remaining electric charge -
5.10 Transfer belt cleaning (Sub step 3)

After the 2nd transfer, a small amount of the toner remains on the transfer belt. The process to remove that the toner is the transfer belt
cleaning.
The transfer belt cleaning is conducted in the following way: The edge of the urethane rubber plate, which is called blade, scrapes the toner that
is attached on the transfer belt surface.
D-25
[3] [1]
[2]
[1] Transfer belt [2] Remaining toner

[3] Cleaning blade -
5.11 2nd transfer roller/Lw cleaning (Sub step 4)

The 2nd transfer roller/Lw get dirty because the toner on the transfer belt contacts it directly.
For this reason, high voltage positive and negative DC biases are applied to the 2nd transfer roller/Up one after the other to move the toner on
the 2nd transfer roller/Lw to the transfer belt side. The transfer belt cleaning that is described on the preceding paragraph cleans the toner which
is moved to the transfer belt.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5] [4]
[1] Transfer belt [2] 2nd transfer roller/Lw

[3] 2nd transfer roller/Up [4] When the DC bias (positive) is applied
[5] When the DC bias (negative) is applied -
5.12 Toner collection (Sub step 5)

The toner that is cleaned at the drum cleaning section and the transfer belt cleaning and the toner that is exited from the developing unit are
collected in the waste toner box via the belt collection pipe, the vertical pipe/1, the vertical pipe/2, the vertical pipe/3 and the horizontal
conveyance pipe.
D-26
[15]
[1]
[2]
[14] [3]
[13] [4]
[12]
[11] [5]
[6]
[10] [8] [7]
[9]
[1] Developing unit/Y waste toner entrance [2] Belt collection pipe
[3] Developing unit/M waste toner entrance [4] Developing unit/C waste toner entrance
[5] Developing unit/K waste toner entrance [6] Horizontal conveyance pipe
[7] Vertical conveyance pipe/1 [8] Vertical conveyance pipe/2
[9] Waste toner box [10] Vertical conveyance pipe/3
[11] Drum/K waste toner inlet [12] Drum/C waste toner inlet
[13] Drum/M waste toner inlet [14] Drum/Y waste toner inlet
[15] Belt waste toner inlet -
D-27
C73hc/Print C3070L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL

• The image creation is conducted in the order of yellow, magenta, cyan, and black, but the start of the image creation control is when the
drum motor/K (M4) becomes active [1].
• After M4 becomes active, the drum motor/Y (M1) [2], the drum motor/M (M2) [3], the drum motor/C (M3) [4] become active in this order.
• The timing when the developing motor, the erase lamp, the charging corona, the development bias (DC), and the 1st transfer of each color
become active is when each drum motor becomes active.
• The timing when the writing operation becomes active [9] is based on the timing when the charging corona becomes active [5]. The writing
operation becomes active after the drum is rotated for more than one circle for charging.
• The timing when the writing operation becomes active [9] or inactive [10] is based on the ON or OFF timing of the developing bias (AC).
• The timing when the last writing operation becomes inactive [11] is based on the timing when the drum motor and the developing motor and
the erase lamp become inactive.
• These operations are performed in the order of yellow, magenta, cyan, black, and an image is created on each drum.
• While the image is created to each drum, the 1st transfer pressure release motor (M10) and the 2nd transfer pressure release motor (M38)
becomes active after M4 becomes active.
• When M10 presses the transfer belt to the full color position, the base signal for the 2nd transfer V_TOP is output [6].
• The pressure of the transfer belt performs the intermediate transfer (1st transfer) from each drum to the transfer belt in the order.
• The separation (HV2) becomes active [7] after a specified time since the base signal V_TOP becomes active.
• After another specified time, the 2nd transfer (HV2) becomes active [8] and the 2nd transfer from the transfer belt to the paper is
performed.
• When a specified period of time elapses after the last sheet passes through the 2nd transfer roller/Lw, 2nd transfer (HV2) and the
separation (HV2) becomes inactive [12] to complete the 2nd transfer operation.
• The timing when the separation (HV2) becomes inactive is based on the timing when the charging corona of each color, developing bias
(DC), and 1st transfer become inactive. The timing when the separation (HV2) becomes inactive is also based on the timing when the
pressure of M10 and M38 released.
• When the charging corona or 1st transfer or the developing bias (DC) becomes inactive, each of them becomes inactive regardless of their
color.
D-28
C73hc/Print C3070L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [9] [10] [11]
Drum motor/Y (M1)
Developing motor/Y (M5)
Erase lamp/Y (EL1)
Charging corona/Y (HV1)
Writing/Y (LDB1)
Developing bias/Y (DC)(HV1)
Developing bias/Y (AC)(HV1)
1st transfer/Y (HV2)
Drum motor/M (M2)
Developing motor/M (M6)
Erase lamp/M (EL2)
Charging corona/M (HV1)
Writing/M (LDB2)
Developing bias/M (DC)(HV1)
Developing bias/M (AC)(HV1)
1st transfer/M (HV2)
Drum motor/C (M3)
Developing motor/C (M7)
Erase lamp/C (EL3)
Charging corona/C (HV1)
Writing/C (LDB3)
Developing bias/C (DC)(HV1)
Developing bias/C (AC)(HV1)
1st transfer/C (HV2)
Drum motor/K (M4)
Developing motor/K (M8)
Erase lamp/K (EL4)
Charging corona/K (HV1)
Writing/K (LDB4)
Developing bias/K (DC)(HV1)
Developing bias/K (AC)(HV1)
1st transfer/K (HV2)
Intermediate transfer motor (M9)
1st transfer pressure

release motor (M10)
2nd transfer pressure
release motor (M38)
2nd transfer (HV2)
Separation (HV2)
[6] [7][8] [12]
[1] The drum motor/K (M4) becomes active [2] The drum motor/Y (M1) becomes active
[3] The drum motor/M (M2) becomes active [4] The drum motor/C (M3) becomes active
[5] The charging corona/Y becomes active [6] The V_TOP signal is created
[7] The separation becomes active [8] 2nd transfer started
[9] Writing started (1st sheet) [10] Writing ended (1st sheet)
[11] Writing ended (last) [12] 2nd transfer completed
D-29
C73hc/Print C3070L D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 7. PROCESS SPEED
7. PROCESS SPEED
7.1 AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L
Depending on the combination of the paper weight and the coating of the output image, the machine has 4 types of the process speed.
The process speed has 4 types: 340 mm/s (High 1), 315 mm/s (High 2), 225 mm/s (Middle), and 157.5 mm/s (Low).
Paper weight Paper type
Plain, Fine, Color*5 *6 *8 Coated-GL, Coated-GO, Coated-ML, Textured Textured (deep Special
Coated-MO*5 *6 *8 (shallow groove) (envelope)*5 *6
*7
Normal Glossy Normal Glossy groove)
62 g/m2 to 74 g/ High 1*9 *10, High Middle - - High1 Middle High 2*1 *12
m2 2*11
75 g/m2 to 80 g/ High 1*9 *10, High Middle - - High1 Middle High 2*1 *12
m2 2*11
81 g/m2 to 91 g/ High 1*3 *9 *10, High Middle*4 High 1*9 *10, High Middle High 1*3 Middle*4 High 2*1 *12
m2 2*3 *11 2*11
92 g/m2 to 105 g/ High 1*3 *9 *10, High Middle*4 High 1*3 *9 *10, High Middle*4 Middle*4 Middle*4 High 2*1 *12
m2 2*3 *11 2*3 *11
106 g/m2 to 135 High 1*1 *9 *10, High Middle*2 High 1*1 *9 *10, High Middle*2 Middle*2 Middle*2 -
g/m2 2*1 *11 2*1 *11
g/m2 2*1 *11 2*1 *11
g/m2 2*1 *11 2*1 *11
217 g/m2 to 256 Middle*2 Low Middle*2 Low Middle*2 Low -
g/m2
257 g/m2 to 300 Middle*2 Low Middle*2 Low Middle*2 Low -
g/m2
301 g/m2to 350 Middle*2 Low Middle*2 Low Middle*2 Low -
g/m2
*1 When the temperature that has been detected for the last 4 hours is estimated less than 7°C (or 17°C for special paper: Envelope), the
process speed slows down to 225 mm/s (Middle).
*2 When the temperature that has been detected for the last 4 hours is estimated less than 7°C, the process speed slows down to 157.5 mm/s
(Low).
*3 The temperature that has been detected for the last 4 hours is estimated less than 7℃ and a specified period of time has not elapsed since
the first warm up of the day. In this case, the process speed slows down to 225 mm/s (Middle).
*4 The temperature that has been detected for the last 4 hours is estimated less than 7℃ and a specified period of time has not elapsed since
the first warm up of the day. In this case, the process speed slows down to 157.5 mm/s (Low).
*5 When the resistance value of the 2nd transfer is the specified value or more, the process speeds "High 1" and "High 2" are changed to
"Middle".
*6 In the normal mode, the arbitrary speed is selectable from the followings: The automatic switchover, the initial speed, the 1 step slow speed.
*7 When EF-103 is used.
*8 In the normal mode, the arbitrary speed is selectable from the followings: The automatic switchover, the high speed, the middle speed, the
low speed.
*9 The process speed "High 1" is changed to "High 2" when the banner paper whose weight is 176 g/m2 or less is passed. Also, the process
speed "High 1" is changed to "Middle" when the banner paper whose weight is from 177 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 is passed.
*10 C3080, C3080P, C83hc
*11 C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L
*12 The process speeds of the C83hc and C73hc are reduced to 225 mm/s (Middle) regardless of the temperature condition. (Except for Japan)
D-30
C73hc/Print C3070L E SERVICE TOOL > 1. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070
E SERVICE TOOL
1. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070
1.1 Service material list
1.1.1 Service material list
Parts Number Name Shape Remark
- Isopropyl alcohol
50gaf2c142na
- Aceton
50gaf2c142na
A50UPP0100 Setting toner number 2 30g
A5AWP001## Cleaning pad 30pcs/1 pack
65AA-992## Hydro-wipe 10pcs/1 pack
8050fs3005
00GR0026## Multemp FF-RM (Fluotribo MH) 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR0002## Plas guard No.1 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR0022## Molykote EM-30L 25g
50gaf2c145na
A0N9PP67## Magnalube-G Teflon Grease 0.75 oz
- WD-40 Company 3-IN-ONE
A4EUPP0000# MH Surf FT-240 30 g
A1TUP50400# Aqua Conditioner 357g

When you use an aqua
conditioner, the starter kit
(A9CFR901##) is necessary.
For details, read the procedure
manual that is included with the
starter kit.
1.2 Jig list
1.2.1 Jig list
A50UPJG3## Temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw (for Quantity: 1
the fusing roller/Lw) The character "C1070-TH-L" is
engraved.
E-1

A50UPJG1## Thermostat positioning jig/Up (for the Quantity: 1
thermostat/1 and the thermostat/2) The character "C1070-TS-U" is
engraved.
A50UPJG2## Thermostat positioning jig/Lw (for the Quantity: 1

thermostat/3) The character "C1070-TS-L" is
engraved.
9J06PJP1## Color chart (A3) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
9J06PJP2## Color chart (11 x 17) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
4040PJP1## Test chart (A3) Quantity: 1

Black and white
8050fs3005
4040PJP2## Test chart (11 x 17) Quantity: 1

Black and white
8050fs3005
120A9711## Adjustment chart Quantity: 1

For DF
8050fs3005
65AA995## Fusing adjustment paper (16 sheets, A3) Quantity: 1

For multi feed detection
8050fs3005
00VC-2-0## Drum cover Quantity: 4
8050fs3017
00VD-100## Blower brush Quantity: 1
8050fs3018
13QEJG01## Stapler positioning jig Quantity: 1

For FS-612
8050fs3022
- Management Tool Quantity: 1

Application for ORU-M Use for
managing the counter information
of the unit.
9J06PJG1 ## DF reading chart Quantity: 1
E-2

A7829450## DF reading chart (for Duplex) Quantity: 1
A8WC7071## DF double feed detect adjustment sheet Quantity: 1
A0H2RX00## Trimmer unit support board Quantity: 1

For SD-506
A4F4PJG1## Staple adjustment jig Quantity: 1

For SD-510
A729PJG0## Staple adjustment jig kit Quantity: 1

For SD-513
A1DUPJG1## Cleaning jig Quantity: 1

For cleaning the inside of the
machine
A4F6PPH2## Generator, Motor Crank-wires Quantity: 1

For GP-502
1.3 Tool list
1.3.1 Tool list
- Wrench (17 mm) Quantity: 1
Thickness: 7.5 mm or less
- Wrench (13 mm) Quantity: 1

Thickness: 4.4 mm or less
1.4 Mail remote notification system

1.4.1 Outline
"Mail remote notification system" is a system that allows you to obtain a list print which can be output by the main body with using the Internet
mail (E-mail).
Use of this system dispenses not only with printing the list on the paper but also visiting the users. Send an E-mail with a simple keyword to the
main body, and receive the list prints from the main body by E-mail.
1.4.2 Operating environment
In order to use the functions of "Mail remote notification system", the following conditions must be met. The operation of the functions is
available even while in jams, SC, and a low power mode. Under the condition that the main body is not operating, an E-mail sent to the main
body does not get lost but is handled when the main body is activated again.
1. The main body has a server that can receive an E-mail using POP3 or the IMAP protocol.
2. The main body has a mail server that can send an E-mail using SMTP protocol.
3. In the following 4 cases, "Mail remote notification system" does not operate in the main body.
• When the main power switch (SW1) is OFF
• When the sub power switch (SW2) is OFF
• The machine is in the auto shut-off mode.
• When the "Enhance Security Mode" is active (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
E-3
1.4.3 Major functions
To Send a mail with a simple keyword, allows you to use the following functions.
1. You can receive the list print information of the main body that you want to obtain by E-mail.
List prints that can be obtained are the following 11 lists.
• User setting list
• Font Pattern List
• Machine Management List
• Adjustment Data List
• Use Management List
• Counter list
• Coverage Data List
• Communication Log List
• ORU-M Maintenance History
• Maintenance History
• Parameter List
2. A password that was used for the certification of the mail can be changed.
3. You can receive directions for use of "Mail remote notification system" using E-mail.
To use the preceding functions, send a mail with a simple keyword (command).
For details of the command, refer to E.1.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system.
1.4.4 Initial setting
To use "Mail remote notification system", register the network parameter on the main body and the account on the mail server.
(1) Setting from the operation panel

Place the IP address of the copier from the operation panel to connect the copier to the network. When this setting has been already made,
proceed to " E.1.4.4 (2) Setting from the Web browser".
(a) Procedure
1.Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2.Press [03 Administrator Setting].
3.Press [05 Network Setting].
4.Press [01 NIC Setting].
When IC-605 is installed, press [01 TCP/IP Setting].
5. Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
6. Restart the main body.
Note
▪ The system administrator normally assigns the IP address of the copier. For details, contact the system administrator.
(2) Setting from the Web browser

Enter the setting of the mail server from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, make preparations of a PC that can be connected to the
network.
Note
▪ To place the space in all items is not available. The following characters cannot be used for setting an E-mail address.
( ) < > ; : “ [ ]/
When an improper entry or setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to make corrections following the error message.
When not to correct the error, a program download error occurs.
(a) Procedure
1. Start up the Web browser.
When the proxy is placed on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2. Specify the IP address of the main body that is entered thorough "(1) Setting from the operation panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the main body, "Main page" is displayed.
Note
▪ When IC-605 is connected, the screen "PageScope Web Connection" appears. To display "Main page" of the Web
Utilities, click the icon "Web Utilities" after you logout.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3. "Main page screen"

Click [Extension for maintenance].
4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
E-4
User name: ce (small letter, cannot be changed)

Password: CE Enter the password. (Default:"92729272")
5. "Extension for maintenance screen"

Click [E-mail Initial Setting].
6. "E-mail Initial Setting screen"

For details of setting items, refer to "Table 1: E-mail Initial Setting".
7. After completion of entry, click [Apply].

8. Conduct the mail sending, receiving test.
• Click "Test" and a sending test and a receiving test are conducted collectively to check to see if a test mail sent is correctly
received.
When a test failed, recheck the setting items following the error message.
For details of the sending test and receiving test, refer to "Table 2: Sending test and receiving test".
Table 1: E-mail Initial Setting
Setting item Details
Enable E-mail notification When you use the mail remote notification system, select "ON." The default is "OFF."
Time difference The time at which a mail was sent out is calculated based on this value. For the time difference setting,
enter the difference from the standard time UTC in the range from -1200 (- 12 hour 00 minute) to +1200
(-12 hour 00 minute). When no value is entered, +0000 (UTC) is placed. (Example: For Japan, enter +
900.)
Sending mail Place the Host Name or IP address of the SMTP server.
(SMTP) server When you use SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
SMTP port number Place the port number of the SMTP server. For the default, 25 is placed.
Sending mail (SMTP) server time Place the time-out of the SMTP connection. The default is for 5 minutes.
out
Interval between fetching mails The interval of the main body checking the receiving mail server to see if a mail is newly received.
(An interval can be specified in the range from 1 minute to 60 minutes.) To take the consideration of the
load on the network, this range is placed at the interval of 10 minutes.
Receiving mail server Place the Host Name or IP address of the receiving mail server.
When you use SSL, check in the "Enable SSL."
E-5
Kind of mail spool Select either of POP3 and IMAP. For the default, [POP3] is selected.
POP3 (IMAP) Select "Enable default" when you use 110 for POP3, and 143 for IMAP. When you use other than the
port number default, select "Custom" and enter a port number to use.
User name on the server Enter an account name that was assigned to the main body using the receiving mail server.
Password Enter a password to this account name.
E-mail address of this copy Enter the mail address of the main body its own. The address is normally "mail account
machine name@incoming mail server name."
Address
Nickname Enter a nickname that is added to the title (subject) of a mail who was sent from the main body. No
entry causes no problem.
CE password Enter a password that is added to the title (subject) of a mail sent to the main body. The main body
uses this password for the security check.
Also Notice to the administrator • Not transfer: Default
• Only illegal mail: When a mail received by the main body does not match with this password, or
when the mail size is in excess of a fixed size (10k bytes), transfer the mail.
• all mails: Transfer all mails that use "Mail remote notification system."
Administrator E-mail address When "only illegal mail" or "all mails" is selected, enter an E-mail address for transfer.
Announce delay time in replay Choose whether to indicate in the mail the interval (the amount of time required) from the time when a
mail mail is sent to the main body to the time when the main body receives it. The default is "No."
Enable POP (IMAP) After the mail receiving server makes the authentication, a selection is made to decide whether to send
before SMTP out the mail or not. For the default, "Send" is selected.
Retry polling when the machine is POP polling option in machine busy state. For the default, "Send" is selected.
busy
Enable SMTP Authentication Input the user name and the password when you use it. The default is "No".
Table 2: Sending test and receiving test
Sending test A mail sending test is made on the SMTP server. A test mail is sent to "E-mail Address for Machine"
that was placed in Step6.
Receiving test A receiving test is made on the incoming mail server. A test mail is received from "E-mail Address for
Machine" that was placed in Step6.
1.4.5 Operating instructions of the mail remote notification system

For commands for communications with the main body and the details of options, refer to the following table.
Command Option Description
Minimum Minimum
input input
GETLOG G UserSetting U Send back [User Management List] by mail.
FontPattern F Send back [Font Pattern List] by mail.
Management M Send back [Machine Management List] by mail.
Adjustment A Sent back [Adjustment Data List] by mail.
Parameter P Send back [Parameter List] by mail.
UseManagement UseM Send back [Use Management List] by mail.
Counter C Send back [Counter List] by mail.
CoverageData Cov Send back [Coverage Data List] by mail.
CommunicationLog Com Send back [Communication Log List] by mail.
ORUMaintenance O Send back [ORU-M Maintenance History] by mail.
Maintenance Ma Send back [Maintenance History] by mail.
ALL AL Send back all preceding items by mail.
Not specified Send back [Counter List] by mail.
CHPASS C [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] Change a password that is used for the certification of a
mail.
[OldPasswd] Specify a password that is currently used.
[NewPasswd] Specify a new password.
HELP H Not specified Send a help mail that describes the operating
instructions of the preceding commands.
1.4.6 Mail sending
• A command (option) printed on the mail is not case sensitive and can be identified from the minimum input that is listed on the preceding
table.
• The following information are required on the mail.
• To: E-mail address of this copy machine
• Subject: CE password
• Body: Command and option
Note
▪ The mail software can be used without any discrimination by OS and a hand-held device or a free mail using browser.
E-6
▪ Use the mail software in the text mode. The HTML mail is not available.
▪ For the mail software, as a condition for the reception, 128 characters or more are recommended as the maximum number of
characters that are displayed in a line.
▪ One or more spaces or tab are required between a command and an option that are written in the mail. The line break is not
available.
▪ Enter all the commands that are written in the mail in one-byte alphanumeric characters (ASCII characters). When there is any
other characters are used, an error message "No command found" is sent back.
▪ Start a command that was written in the mail from the line head without space. When there is a space or tab found at the line
head, the line is ignored.
▪ The maximum number of commands available in a mail is 10. Commands exceeding 10 are ignored.
▪ Avoid attaching a file to a mail who is sent to the main body. When the attached file size is large, the main body handles that mail
as a nuisance mail.
▪ Avoid adding a signature to a mail who is sent to the main body. The copier handles a signature on a mail as a command and
send back an error mail.
▪ In the case the power is shut off while the main body is sending a mail or the main body is printing the list print, the same mail
can be sent back twice.
▪ The main body can receive up to 5 mails from the mail server at the same time. The main body can receive up to mails from the
mail server at the same time.
1.5 Machine setting data Import/Export

1.5.1 Outline
"Machine setting data Import/Export" is the function to import or export the following files with the Web browser.
• Import the colorimetry chart file of "Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment)" to the main body.
• Import the Web setting file of "Job History List" to the main body.
• Import each setting information that is stored in the NVRAM board (NVRAM) and the SSD (SSD). Also, export them.
Note
▪ For the information about getting each setting file and the editor commands, contact the service manager of Konica Minolta
Japan.
1.5.2 Setting method
(1) Setting from the touch panel
To connect the main body to the network, configure the IP address of the main body from the operation panel.
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "(2) Setting from the Web browser."
(a) Procedure
1. Select [Utility/Counter] button on the touch panel.
2. Press [03 Administrator Setting].
3. Press [05 Network Setting].
4. Press [01 NIC Setting].
When the IC-605 is installed, press [01 TCP/IP Setting].
5. Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
Note
▪ The system administrator normally assigns the IP address of the copier. For details, contact the system administrator.
(2) Setting from the Web browser

To use the Web browser, make preparations of a PC that can be connected to the network.
(a) Procedure for import

• When the proxy is placed on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body Web. For particulars, contact the
network administrator. Be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
• Recommended Web browser: Internet Explorer 8.0 or later
2. Specify the IP address of the main body that is entered thorough "(1) Setting from the touch panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the main body, "Main page" is displayed.
Note
▪ When the IC-605 is connected, the screen "PageScope Web Connection" appears. To display "Main page" of the Web
Utilities, click the icon "Web Utilities" after you logout.
Copyright © 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
E-7
Click [Extension for maintenance].

4. Enter the user name or the CE password in "Extension for maintenance" and press "OK."
User name: ce (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: CE Enter the password. (Default:"92729272")
5. Enter the service mode.

Note
▪ When the main body is not in the service mode, the setting of [Machine setting data Import/Export] is unavailable.
6. "Extension for maintenance screen"
Click [Machine setting data Import/Export].
7. "Machine setting data Import/Export" screen

According to the setting file to import, click the button.
• "Gray Chart": Colorimetry chart file of "Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment)"
• "A" to "J": Web setting file of "Job History List" (For the details of the procedure, refer to Setting method.)
• “Paper Setting" to "ALL": Each setting information that is stored in the NVRAM board (NVRAM) and the SSD (SSD) (Refer to 4.15
Setting data)

Click [Browse] and select the setting file.
E-8
Note
▪ No error check is proceeded for the Web setting file. Be careful when the import is proceeded.
Click [Submit] of the Import side.

When the import is completed correctly, the following message is displayed. Deactivate and activate the power switch (SW2) of the
main body.
Note
▪ To enable the setting data, switch off and on the SW2 and initialize the HDD.
▪ Access the Web Utility after the initialization of main body and options is completed. The imported setting files are
possibly not take effect when you access the Web Utility soon after the OFF or ON of SW2.
(b) Procedure for export

1. Display "Machine setting data Import/Export screen". (Refer to the same procedure as step1 to step6 of " (a) Procedure for import ")
2. "Machine setting data Import/Export screen"
Click [Submit] of the Export side.
E-9
3. A save file dialog of Web browser is open. Click save button and save files.
Note
▪ Be sure not to click the cancel button at the save file dialog. Otherwise, the communication between and PC could not be
available. When the page is not displayed even if you click the reload button, deactivate and activate the SW2.
▪ During the export, be sure not to touch the touch panel.
1.6 Job history list

1.6.1 Outline
"Job History List" is the function to refer to the output history of the copier by using Web browser. The job history that is displayed on the
operation panel is stored in the memory and deleted when the SW2 is deactivated. However, with this function, the job history is stored in the
built-in HDD so that the users can refer it even after the SW2 becomes inactive.
The job history list allows you to use the following functions.
• Displaying and downloading of job history by 100 data.
• Store of the job history up to 300,000 (The number of histories to save is selectable from 100,000 or 300,000. Select 0 to deactivate the job
history utility.)
• Up to 10 types (A to J) of setting files can be imported from the CE page.
• The contents that was displayed can be changed for each of the 10 setting files (A to J)
Note
▪ The history data that is displayed on the output history list of the main body when the job is completed is stored in the built-in
HDD. Therefore the data is not stored in case the proof is output or a jam is caused.
▪ Send History of the scanned information (Scan to E-mail, Scan to SMB, for example) is not saved.
▪ If the built-in HDD is damaged, the data cannot be recovered.
▪ When DIPSW2-0 is "0", "Job History List" is not available.
1.6.3 Setting method
When you use the Job history list in the initialization, the 4 items of the job history are displayed. However, import of the customized setting file
can display other items. For the information about getting this setting file and the editor commands, contact the support section of KM.
The following are the display items of the job history in the initialization
• Mode
• Job-completion date
• Print-start time
• Job-reception time
• User name
• File Name
• Output result
• Output tray
• Number of pages or copy
• Number of sheets or copy
• Number of configured copies
• Number of output copies
• Color counter (full color, monochrome, mono color)
• Number of fed sheets
• Number of output sheets
• Number of wasted sheets
E-10
(1) Setting procedure
1. Display "Machine setting data Import/Export screen". (Refer to E.1.5.2 Setting method)

Click each symbol (A to J) that is displayed on [Import datatype change] -[Web setting].
Note
▪ The setting file that was imported to A is appeared on "Administrator Setting screen" in initial setting, therefore selecting A
is recommended.
When the preparation of the setting file is completed, the following message is displayed. Click [Browse] key, and specify the setting file.
E-11
Note
▪ The setting file name does not need to be [joblogA.html]. The settings are saved in the main body with names of
joblogA.html to joblogJ.html.
Click [Submit] of the Import side.

When the import is completed correctly, the following message is displayed. Deactivate and activate the power switch (SW2) of the main
body.
Note
▪ To enable the setting data, switch off and on the SW2 and initialize the HDD.
▪ Access the Web Utility after the initialization of main body and options is completed. The imported setting files are
possibly not take effect when you access the Web Utility soon after the OFF or ON of SW2.
Click [Machine Manager Setting].
7. Enter the user name and the administrator password on "Administrator Setting Log in" the page, and click "OK".
User name: admin (small letter, cannot be changed)
Password: Enter the password of the administrator of the copier (default is "00000000".)
E-12
Note
▪ They differ from the login user name and the password for the Extension for maintenance.
8. "Machine Manager Setting screen"
Click [Job History List].
9. "Job History List screen"
To update the page, you can change the URL in the address bar to the letter from A to J that has imported the customized file.
Example
Before: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=A
After: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=B
Note
▪ In case the customized file is imported to "B".
▪ When the IC-605 is connected, the following is shown.
Example
Before: http://X.X.X.X:30091/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=A
After: http://X.X.X.X:30091/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=B
10. "Job History List screen"
Click [JobHistory list].
Note
▪ This operation places the customized item number in the order.
▪ The address bar displays "http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi" after the click. However, when the IC-605 is connected, "http://
X.X.X.X:30091/goform/joblog.cgi" is displayed.
(2) In case the writing of the setting file fails

When the writing of the setting file fails, the following message is displayed. In this case, conduct the following procedure to see if the built-in
HDD has malfunction and requires the replacement of the HDD or not.
1. Conduct the step 1 to step10 of the procedure (a) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. When the import of the
setting file fails after you conduct these processes, conduct the step2 and the following steps.
"Service Mode menu screen"
Press [05 State Confirmation].
Press [01 I/O Check Mode].
3. [I/O Check Mode screen]
Enter "99" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-00" is displayed on the message display area.
4. Press the Access button.
5. Enter "03" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-03" is displayed on the message display area.
6. Press the start button.
When "NG" is displayed, press the Start button and perform the HDD bad sectors check and the recovery again.
When “OK” appears, conduct the step1 to step10 of the procedure (1) to see if the import of the setting file is normally completed. If the
writing of the setting file fails after you conduct these processes, the trouble of the HDD is considerable. Replace it with new one.
Note
▪ When the HDD is replaced, execute "Utility" - "Administrator Setting" - "Security Setting" - "HDD Management Setting" -
"HDD Restore/Backup". (Only when the customer has the backed up data)
▪ The job history data is not restored after the execution of "HDD Restore/Backup".
1.7 Counter list acquisition using USB memory

1.7.1 Outline
Connection of the USB memory to the service port saves the counter list information in the USB memory in the text file format.
1.7.2 List that can be acquired

1. Counter list
2. User setting list
3. Use Management List
4. Machine Management List
E-13
5. Adjustment Data List

6. Coverage Data List
7. Maintenance History
Note
▪ When you place DIPSW30-1 to 1, the Parameter List and the Communication Log List are also stored.
▪ When you select "1" on DIPSW15-0, the ORU-M Maintenance History is also stored.
▪ When the security enhance mode is enabled, no file is output when you press [HELP] - [Utility] - [Check Job Setting].
1.7.3 Acquisition method
(1) Preparation
1. Select the service port device setting to [ON].
2. Connect the USB memory to the service port.
(2) Procedure
1. Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2. Press [Details Counter].
3. "Details Counter List screen"
Press [HELP] - [Utility/Counter] -[Check Job Setting] on the operation panel.
4. After the following message appears, remove the USB memory.
Note
▪ Do not remove the USB memory before the message disappears. The data is being output to the file while the message is
displayed. If you remove the USB memory while the message is displayed, you cannot save the file properly.
▪ ORU-M Maintenance History is output to the file only when DIPSW15-0 is ON.
(3) File storage location

The list print data file is saved to the root directory in the USB memory.
(4) File name
The file name is defined as follows. When the same file name exists, it is overwritten with the new data.
listprint + Machine type + destination code + Serial No._Year_Date_Time.txt
Ex: listprintA85C021901003_2016_1114_2033.txt
1.8 Panel log
1.8.1 Outline
The "Panel log" is a function to display the operation history of the main body operation panel and the hard key using Web browser. Because
the panel log is stored in the memory of the main body, it is deleted when the sub power switch (SW2) becomes inactive. However, when Log
Store in " I.4.15.1 Log Store Setting" in the service mode is changed to "ON", the log is stored in the built-in HDD or the USB memory at the time
SC occurs. At this time the panel log is also stored, which helps troubleshooting.
• Items recorded: Touch panel operation, hard key operation
• Items not recorded: Mouse operation, external key board operation
• Maximum storable number: 1024 (deleted by power OFF)
• In security mode: The panel log reference is unavailable as the main body NIC network cannot be connected.
Note
▪ If the built-in HDD is damaged, the data cannot be recovered.
1.8.2 Log acquisition method

There are 2 methods for storing and using the panel log data.
• Download from Web Utilities to a computer (manual store)
• HDD automatic log store function (auto store)
(1) Download from Web Utilities

1. Display the panel log from the Web Utilities.
2. "Panel log screen"
The following 6 panel log items are displayed.
E-14
• No.: Recorded number (up to 1024)

• scrcode: Screen code at the time it is operated
• kind: Operation kind (hard key or panel pressed)
• detail: Detailed information when it is pressed
• mean: Key type that is pressed
• time: Time that it pressed
3. Click "download" to download it to the computer.
• File type: Tab-delimited text file
(2) HDD automatic log store function

For details on the HDD automatic log store function, refer to I.4.15.1 Log Store Setting.
Note
▪ The panel log which can be acquired with the HDD automatic log store function is in the JSON format (JavaScript). For details
on the analysis method of this panel log, contact the Support section of the authorized distributor.
1.9 ORU-M Counter Rewrite

1.9.1 Load from external memory
(1) Outline
Read the counter data that is written using Management Tool from the USB memory and write it to the main body. To reduce the down-time, it
can be executed even during printing.
The counter data for the spare unit (not in use) is written in the main body. The target unit is the fusing unit, the intermediate transfer unit, and
the 2nd transfer.
Note
▪ This function is available only when DIPSW 15-0 is placed to ON.
(2) Preparation
Connect the USB memory to the service port.
Note
▪ When the counter data file is created in the folder combination mode of Management Tool, save the counter data file in the
following folder configuration of the USB memory.
C3080
ORU_DATA
▪ This is the counter data file name.

[Main Body Serial Number]_ORU_DATA.bin
(3) Procedure
1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 is displayed.
Press [Utility/Counter] button.
2. "Utility screen"
On the Operation panel, press the following buttons.
1→0→C→6→9
3. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite menu screen"
Press [01 Load from external memory].
Note
▪ If the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, the error message appears not to go on to the file selection
screen.
4. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite [From External] screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the file to be read and press [OK].
Note
▪ If you press [Limit], only the file corresponded to the serial number of the machine is displayed.
E-15
5. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite [From External] (item selection) screen"

After you select [Intermediate Trans.], [Fusing], and [2nd Transfer] in "Load Item", check the counter value with [▲] and [▼] and press
[Store Selected Items].
Press [Store All Items] to read the counter data of all of the intermediate transfer unit, the fusing unit, and all of the 2nd transfer.
6. "Pop-up screen"
Press [Yes] to start reading the counter data.
Note
▪ Be sure not to deactivate the main power switch (SW1) until the reading file completes.
7. "Pop-up screen"
Confirm the message "Completed data loading from external memory" and press [OK].
*1 Default is the [MACHINE] screen.
1.9.2 Store to external memory

(1) Function
Transfers the counter data of the fusing unit, the intermediate transfer unit, and the 2nd transfer unit from the main body to the USB memory.
The saved data can be used in Management Tool.
Note
▪ This function is available only when DIPSW 15-0 is placed to ON.
(2) Preparation
Note
▪ Be sure to create a folder as shown below beforehand.
E-16
C3080
ORU_DATA
(3) Procedure
1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 is displayed.
2. "Utility screen"
1→0→C→6→9
3. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite menu screen"
Press [02 Store to External Memory].
4. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite [To External] screen"
Press [Start Storing].
Note
▪ When the USB memory is not connected to the connection port, an error message appears.
▪ Be sure not to deactivate the main power switch (SW1) until the storing file completes.
5. "Pop-up screen"
A pop-up screen is displayed after the saving completes. Check the file name and press [OK].
6. "ORU-M Counter Rewrite [To External] screen"

Confirm that the screen returns to "ORU-M Counter Rewrite [To External] screen", disconnect the USB memory from the service port.
1.10 Management Tool
1.10.1 Outline
"Management Tool" is a software to read and reset the parts counter information of the unit.
(1) Operating environment
The following shows the hardware requirements of the Management Tool.
Applicable OS Windows 7 (32 bit, 64 bit) Home Premium, Professional, Enterprise, Ultimate (Service
Pack 1 or later versions)
Windows 8.1 (64bit) Pro/Enterprise
Windows 10 (64bit) Pro/Enterprise
CPU Conform to OS recommended environment
Hard disk capacity 100 MB or more
Memory capacity Conform to OS recommended environment
Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 11
Library Windows 7/8.1/10 & .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1)*1
Display At resolution of 800 x 600 (SVGA) or more
16 bit color or more
Applicable machine bizhub PRESS C8000
bizhub PRESS C7000
bizhub PRESS C6000
bizhub PRESS 1250
bizhub PRESS 1250P
bizhub PRESS 1052
bizhub PRESS C1070
bizhub PRESS C1070P
bizhub PRESS C71hc
bizhub PRESS C1060
bizhub PRO C1060L
bizhub PRESS C1100
bizhub PRESS C1085
AccurioPress C2070
AccurioPress C2070P
AccurioPress C2060
AccurioPrint C2060L
AccurioPress C6100
AccurioPress C6085
AccurioPress 6136
AccurioPress 6136P
AccurioPress 6120
E-17
AccurioPress C3080
AccurioPress C3080P
AccurioPress C83hc
AccurioPress C3070
AccurioPress C3070P
AccurioPress C73hc
AccurioPrint C3070L
*1: .NET Framework 3.5 is disabled at the default setting of Windows 8.1/10.
Enable it in the following procedure.
1. Open "Control Panel", click "Programs", and click "Turn Windows features on or off" under "Programs and Features".
2. Check the ".NET Framework 3.5 (includes .NET 2.0 and 3.0)" check box and click "OK", then reboot the computer if the message
appears.
Note
▪ It is possible that compliant OS is limited depending on the RFID tag reader or writer.
It is possible that compliant OS is changed for the future model development.
(2) RFID tag reader and writer

Management Tool uses the RFID tag reader and writer for reading and writing the RFID tag. The following shows the corresponding RFID tag
reader and writer.
• "TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
• "TWN3" (Elatec Vertriebs GmbH)
Applicable mode USB
: Transparent Virtual COM Port
V24: Transparent Operation
Note
The driver for the RFID tag reader and writer must be installed to the computer beforehand.
• "TMRF-1-U001" (Tamura Corporation)
Obtain the dedicated driver (Windows 7/8.1/10) from CSES.
• "TWN3" (Elatec Vertriebs GmbH)
TWN Serial Port driver (same operating environment as TWN3)
• The following shows the port setting of the TWN Serial Port driver.
Item Value
bit/sec 9600
Data bit 8
Parity None
Stop bit 1
Flow control None
(3) Main functions
The following shows the main functions of the Management Tool.
• Reading and writing the RFID tag of the unit (bizhub PRESS C8000, bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085, AccurioPress C6100/C6085)
The part information is read from the RFID tag of the unit and displayed on the screen. Select the part whose counter information is reset
and write the reset information on the IC tag.
• Reading and writing the data file of the unit (bizhub PRESS C7000/6000, bizhub PRESS 1250/1250P/1052, bizhub PRESS C1070/
C1070P/C71hc/C1060, PRO C1060L, bizhub PRESS C71cf, AccurioPress C2070/C2070P/C2060, AccurioPrint C2060L, AccurioPress
C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L)
Reads the part information from the data file of the unit output from the device and displays it on the screen. Select a part for counter
information reset on the screen, and write the reset information to the data file. (Support to read and write automatically from the USB
memory.)
• Work log management
The counter information and the counter reset information that are caught from the replacement work are saved automatically as a log.
On the work log display, the information can be sorted by the read or reset date and searched by the term such as the customer or the
technician who executed the replacement. Therefore, the previous works can be checked.
• Output of work information with CSV file
Outputs the work information and work log of the replacement work in the CSV format file.
• Printing work information
Prints out the work information and work log of the replacement work.
• Association of the user information and the device
The user information can be associated with the device.
• Export and Import
E-18
The work log, user information, and technician information can be exported to the file. Also, the exported file can be imported.
• Serial number setting (bizhub PRESS C8000, and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085, AccurioPress C6100/C6085)
When the tag is replaced due to the breakage, the new RFID tag can be recognized to the machine.
• Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS C8000, and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085, AccurioPress C6100/
C6085)
The initial value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor can be registered.
• Option
Configure each setting of Management Tool.
• Login Mode
To use the Management Tool, login is required.
2 modes are provided for the login; "Administrator mode" and "Technician mode".
[Administrator mode]
Mode for the login as an administrator
[Technician mode]
Mode for the login as an technician. The administrator registers the technician.
The operable function differs depending on the log in mode.

Number Function name Administrator mode Technician mode
1 Replacement work × ○
2 Work log ○ ○
3 Register user ○ ○
4 Register technician ○ ×
5 SetPersonal × ○
6 Administrator Setting ○ ×
7 Unit Serial Number Setting × ○
8 Intermediate transfer steering sensor information × ○
setting
9 Option × ○
10 Version ○ ○
○ operable, ×: inoperable
1.10.2 Installation of Management Tool

(1) Installation method
Install Management Tool in the following steps.
Note
▪ Log on with the user name which has the Administrator authority to install.
▪ If any application is running on the computer (including anti-virus program), close it.
▪ Check that "Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1)" has been installed on the computer before the installation.
Installation steps
1. Double click the installation program "Setup.exe."
2. Select the language and click [OK].
3. Continue the installation following the instructions on screen.

Note
▪ Product key input
The Management Tool installer displays the screen to input the product key during installation.
The installation continues when the input product key is proper.
(2) Items to be installed
Once the Management Tool is installed, the following items are registered on the Start menu and the desk top.
Items to be registered for start menu
• Program
E-19
• Readme
• Manual
Items to be registered on desktop
• Shortcut of program
Note
▪ The "Readme" of the Start menu can be configured not to be installed.
▪ Select "Custom" on the set up type and check the items to be installed.
▪ Whether to create the shortcut of the program registered on the desktop can be selected when installing.
(3) Uninstallation
There are following 2 ways to uninstall the Management Tool.
• Use "Programs and Features".
• Execute "Setup.exe" again.
Note
▪ The user information and the data information (Work log, User information, and Technician information) are saved in the
following folder separately from Management Tool.
▪ C:\Users\Public\Documents\KONICA MINOLTA\Management Tool\
Since those information cannot be deleted by uninstalling, delete them manually.
When reinstalling it without deleting those information, the Management Tool can be started with the information before
uninstallation.
▪ When uninstalling the Management Tool, all Management Tool programs need to be closed.
1.10.3 Starting up of Management Tool

(1) Start
There are following 2 ways to start the Management Tool.
• Start from the Start menu of Windows
Click Windows "Start" button - "All Programs" - "KONICAMINOLTA" - "Management Tool" - "Management Tool."
• Start from the shortcut icon on the desktop
Double click "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon that is created on the desktop.
The login screen appears when it starts.
Note
▪ Whether to create the "KONICA MINOLTA Management Tool" icon or not can be selected when you install.
(2) The login screen

The login screen appears when the Management Tool starts. Select the login mode, enter the required information and log in.
(a) At 1st time of startup
The administrator password has not been registered soon after the installation. Register the administrator password when the password
setting screen appears after you click the [OK] button.
E-20
(b) At normal startup
For the replacement work, log in the technician mode. Select [Registered technician name], enter the required information and log in.
Note
▪ The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.10.8 (4) Image setting)
▪ When no technician has been registered, the registered technician name cannot be selected.
For details of registering the technician, refer to E.1.10.7 (2) Register technician.
(3) Operation screen
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[1] Menu bar [2] Navigation

[3] Operation area [4] Login user
1. Menu bar
Specify each function of the Management Tool. (Refer to E.1.10.8 Various setting for the software)
2. Navigation
E-21
[1] [2]
• [1] Path
The transition of screens from the top screen appears as the path.
• [2] Image
The image can be customized. (Refer to E.1.10.8 (4) Image setting)
3. Login user
The current login user appears.
4. Operation area
The operation panel that is based on the purpose appears.
(4) End
There are following 2 ways to exit the Management Tool.
• Click [Exit] button on the login screen or the top screen
• Select [Exit] from [File] menu
• Click [x] (close) button on the upper right corner of the screen
• Shut down or log off the computer
1.10.4 Technician mode
The operation procedures for the user who logs in as an registered technician is described as follows.
To execute this mode, register the technician information in the administrator mode. (Refer to E.1.10.7 (2) Register technician)
(1) Top screen
When the login is proceeded successfully, the top screen is displayed.

• To perform unit parts replacement, click the "Replacement work" button. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (2) Replacement work)
• To check the work log, click the "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (3) Work log)
• To register the customer information, click the "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (4) Register user)
• To change the password or edit the memo, click the "Set personal info" button. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (5) SetPersonal)
Note
▪ The image at the left of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.10.8 (4) Image setting)
(2) Replacement work
Perform unit parts replacement.
(a) Type of replacement
Depending on the machine type, the form and media of data differ.
Check the replacement procedure of the corresponding machine.
• AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc, and AccurioPrint C3070L (Refer to E.1.10.5 AccurioPress C3080,
C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc and AccurioPrint C3070L replacement procedure)
(b) Associating customers
When the device serial number and the user information are properly associated, the user information is displayed on the operation
information automatically.
When it is not configured, " (No User Setting)" is displayed.
To modify the association between the unit that is read and the user, conduct the following procedures.
• Click "Change" to display the user setting screen.
• Select the desired user setting and click [OK].
E-22
The user setting of the work information is changed.

Note
▪ For details on user registration, refer to E.1.10.4 (4) Register user.
(c) Export the csv format file

The detailed information of the unit that is currently displayed is exported in CSV format.
1. Specify the location where the file is stored.
2. Click [Save].
The CSV file is exported to the specified location.
For details on CSV format, refer to E.1.10.8 (6) Export CSV.
(d) Printing the report

The detailed information of the unit that is currently displayed can be printed as report.
1. The print dialog is displayed.
2. Click [OK].
The report is printed.
For details on print layout, refer to E.1.10.8 (7) Print Report.
(3) Work log
The work conditions of previous replacement work can be checked.
E-23
(a) Procedures to display the work log list

1. Click "Work log" on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "Work log" in "Tool" menu.
2. The work log referring method selection screen appears.
• To select the user and display the work log, click "Select user".
Proceed to step 3.
• To select the technician and display the work log, click "Select technician".
Proceed to step 4.
• To display all the work log, click "All".
Proceed to step 5.
3. The "Select user" screen appears.
Select the user, check the work log, and click "OK".
Proceed to step 5.
4. The "Select technician" screen appears.
Select the technician, check the work log, and click "OK".
Proceed to step 5.
5. The work log list is displayed.
On the work log list, filtering by conditions or sorting displayed items is available.
You can check the detail of the work log information that is selected, export as CSV, and print the report.
E-24
For the display filter, the displayed contents differ depending on the method that is selected on the work log reference method in the
step 2.
When "Select user" is selected:
When "Select technician" is selected:
Note
▪ Click the item name of the work log list so that items can be sorted in descending or ascending order. The mark ▲
indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
• On the work log list screen, the items that are displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view". (Refer
to E.1.10.8 (5) Set list view)
• Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information that is currently selected in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.10.8 (6)
Export CSV)
• Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information currently selected. (Refer to E.1.10.8 (7) Print Report)
(b) Detailed information
The detailed information of the replacement work log selected on the work log list is displayed.
Change the user that is associated or edit the work information memo.
Note
▪ Click [Back] or [Next] to switch the work log displayed.
▪ Click [Export CSV] to export the work log information that is currently displayed in CSV format. (Refer to E.1.10.8 (6) Export
CSV)
▪ Click [Print] to print the report of the work log information that is currently displayed. (Refer to E.1.10.8 (7) Print Report)
▪ For details on user association, refer to Associating customers.
(c) Import
Import the work log which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the work log file that is imported.
E-25
2. Click [Open].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
Enter the password that you configured on the work log file when it was exported.
4. Click [OK].
The work log file is imported.
Note
▪ Use one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols for password.
▪ The work log information that exists is not imported.
▪ The invalid work log information is skipped and the import process continues.
▪ The work log exported by other computer also can be imported. However, the work log information is possibly overlapped.
(d) Export
Export the work log collectively.
2. Click [Save].
3. The password input screen is displayed.
Configure the password on the export file.
4. Click [OK].
The export of the work log starts.
Note
▪ The password that is configured on the export file is required for the import.
▪ The file format "Work log file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in other
format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(4) Register user
Register, edit or delete the user information.
(a) User list
Click [RegisterUser] on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "RegisterUser" in "Tool" menu.
E-26
Note
▪ Click the item name of the user information list so that the items can be sorted in descending or ascending order. The mark
▲ indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
▪ On the user information list screen, the items that are displayed and their display width can be changed via "Set list view".
(Refer to E.1.10.8 (5) Set list view)
(b) Initial registration
Register the user information.
1. Click [New] on the user list screen.

2. The registration screen is displayed.
3. Enter "User name."
Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two bytes.
4. Select "Type of business".
5. Enter the following items as necessary.
• Enter "User code". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "User ID". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "User office location name". Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two bytes.
• Enter "User office location code". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Contact person name". Use 0 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two bytes.
• Enter "Contact person ID no". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Contact telephone". Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Register "Machine list".
Enter "Machine serial number to add". Use 1 to 13 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols. Click "Add" to add it to
"Machine list".
Select and click the serial number so that the number is deleted from "Machine list".
• Enter "Remark".
6. Click [Register].
The entered user information is registered and the next user information can be registered.
Note
▪ Register the serial number of the machine of the user to "Machine list" so that the user information is automatically
associated when the unit information is read during the replacement work.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered user information.
1. Edit the items to be changed.
For the procedure to enter each item, refer to E.1.10.4 (4) (b) Initial registration.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the user information.
E-27
(d) Import
Import the user information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the user information file that is imported.
2. Click [Open].
The user information file is imported.
Note
▪ The user information that exists is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the user information collectively.
2. Click [Save].
The export of the user information starts.
Note
▪ The file format "User Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is stored in
other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
(5) SetPersonal
Change the password of login technician or edit the comment.
(a) Password Change
1. Click "Password change".
The password change screen is displayed. The password can be changed at this time.
E-28
2. Click [OK].
The new Password is configured.
Note
(6) Unit serial number setting (bizhub PRESS C8000 and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085, AccurioPress C6100/C6085)
The unit serial number is written in the RFID tag.
Note
▪ When the RFID tag is replaced because of such as physical damage, the new RFID tag can be recognized to the unit.
(a) Procedures of the unit serial number setting

1. Select "Unit Serial Number" from "Tool" menu.
When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is correctly
connected.
2. The wizard starts up and the unit serial number input screen is displayed.
Enter the unit serial number and click "Write".
Note
▪ Serial number setting initializes the RFID tag data.
The initialized data cannot be restored.
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
4. When the writing process is completed, the result screen is displayed.
E-29
(7) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub PRESS C8000)

The initial value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor is written to the RFID tag.
(a) Procedures of the intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting

1. Select "Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting" from "Tool" menu.
Note
▪ When the RFID tag reader is not recognized, the process does not proceed to step 2. Check that the RFID tag reader is
correctly connected.
2. The wizard is activated and the intermediate transfer steering sensor information input screen appears.
Input the intermediate transfer steering sensor information and click "Write".
3. When the RFID tag write in screen is displayed, touch the RFID tag with the RFID tag reader.
Note
▪ Touch the RFID tag in which the data of the intermediate transfer unit is saved.
4. When the writing process is completed, the result screen is displayed.
E-30
(8) Option
Configure each setting of Management Tool.
(a) Display a confirmation message when a part of the following copiers that requires the replacement is selected: bizhub PRESS
C7000/6000, 1250/1250P/1052, C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, C71cf, bizhub PRO C1060L, AccurioPress C2070/C2070P/C2060,
6136/6136P/6120, C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C2060L, and C3070L.
Select whether to display the confirmation message of the target unit after the selection of the part for replacement during the replacement of
the following copiers: bizhub PRESS C7000/6000, 1250/1250P/1052, C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, C71cf, bizhub PRO C1060L,
AccurioPress C2070/C2070P/C2060, 6136/6136P/6120, C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C2060L, and C3070L.
(b) Locate automatically the data file of the following copiers in the USB memory: bizhub PRESS C7000/6000, 1250/1250P/1052,
C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, C71cf, bizhub PRO C1060L, AccurioPress C2070/C2070P/C2060, 6136/6136P/6120, C3080/C3080P/
C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C2060L, and C3070L.
Configure the activation mode of the replacement of bizhub PRESS C7000/6000, 1250/1250P/1052, C1070/C1070P/C71hc/C1060, C71cf,
bizhub PRO C1060L, AccurioPress C2070/C2070P/C2060, 6136/6136P/6120, C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint
C2060L, and C3070L.
• When the box is checked, the replacement is activated in USB memory cooperation mode.
• When the box is not checked, the replacement is activated in folder cooperation mode.
1.10.5 AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc and AccurioPrint C3070L replacement procedure
Note:
▪ There are following 2 modes according to the destination to save the cooperated counter data for the replacement on
AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc and AccurioPrint C3070L.
▪ USB cooperation mode:
Execute the counter reset directly to the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory with the "Save to
External Memory" of ORU-M.
▪ Folder cooperation mode:
Move the counter data that is read from the main body to the USB memory to the folder of the client PC once and execute the
counter reset to the counter data in the folder with the "Save to External Memory" of ORU-M.
▪ It is activated in the mode of the previous replacement, but the mode can be selected with "Option" (Refer to E.1.10.4 (8) Option).
(Default is the USB cooperation mode.)
1. Click "Replacement work" on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "Replacement work" in the "Tool" menu.
2. A screen to select the machine type appears.
E-31
Select "AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L" and click the [OK] button.
Proceed to step 3.
Note
▪ When it is activated in the USB cooperation mode and the USB memory in which the data file is saved cannot be recognized,
the following warning appears. Select [Yes (Y)] to activate in the folder cooperation mode.
3. Once the reading the data file of the USB memory or the folder completes, the writing screen appears. The read files are shown in a list on
the upper side in the center of the screen. Also, the unit information of the data files that is selected in the data file list is shown in a list on
the lower side in the center of the screen.
Note
▪ When it is activated in the folder cooperation mode, it cooperates with the folder of the previous replacement.
4. Select the data file which includes the replacement unit from the read data files and click the "Select parts".
E-32
Note
▪ The data file that is regarded as a "Replacement object" in the Unit column of the data file list, includes the units that need
the replacement. (equipped with the parts that are the counter reset object.)
▪ The display of the unit column shows the condition of the all units which are stored in the data file.
· Blank:
Data file with the unit whose part information has been exported from the device, or the unit which has been written. Even if
there is no target unit of the replacement, you can select the part which requires the count reset and you can also configure
the unit serial number.
▪ Replacement object:
Among the unit whose part information has been exported from the device and the unit which has been written, the data file
with the target unit of the replacement. The unit whose count to be reset can be selected, and the unit serial number can be
configured.
· The edited parts are included:
Data file which includes the unit that already selected the part for the counter reset and the unit that registered the unit serial
number.
▪ Already imported the device.:
Data File which has the all units whose part information are imported to the device.
▪ The unit with "blank" on the status column of the unit information list is the target unit of the replacement.
▪ The status column shows the condition of the unit.
▪ Blank:
Unit whose part information is exported from the device (target to replace)
▪ Completed editing:
Unit of which you have selected the part for the counter reset, or the unit of which you configure the unit serial number
▪ Already written.:
Unit whose part to be reset the count has been written in the data file
▪ Already imported the device.:
Unit whose part information has been imported to the device
▪ For the unit with "Already imported the device." on the status column in the unit information list, the part cannot be selected
for the counter reset.
5. Once the reading of the unit completes, the part selection screen appears.
The units read are listed on the left of the screen as buttons.
6. Select the unit that you replace, select the part you reset the count, and then click "Back to writing screen".
On the parts selecting screen, the unit serial number (alphanumeric characters in 16-digit) can be input.
Blank is also available when the serial number is not needed.
E-33
Conduct the same operation to all units you replace.

Note
▪ Even if you click the "Back to writing screen" on the parts selecting screen, data file writing is not executed. Data file writing
is executed on the writing screen. For details, refer to the steps 7 and more.
▪ The unit serial number that is been output is reflected when the screen is returned to the writing screen and the writing to the
data file is executed. The display is not updated during the number input or edit. So, the old information before the number
input is appeared on the following serial numbers: the serial number that is appeared on the button on the left side of the
screen; the serial number that is appeared on the unit information or the machine information.
7. Writing screen appears.
Confirm that the unit with part selected is "Completed editing".
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 to all data files which include the unit you replace.
9. Click "Write" button.
Note
▪ To switch to the folder cooperate mode, click the "Reference" button of the writing screen and select the folder.
▪ In the next replacement, it is activated in the mode of the previous replacement.
The activation mode can be switched with "Option" (Refer to E.1.10.4 (8) Option).
10. A writing confirmation message appears and the unit in the "Completed editing" status is written in the data file of the USB memory or the
PC folder. Then, the replacement completes.
In the USB cooperate mode, the USB memory can be removed safely once the replacement completes.
* Pop-up screen in the USB cooperation mode
* Pop-up screen in the folder cooperation mode
Note
▪ Be sure not to disconnect the USB memory until the writing completes since it takes time to complete writing to the USB
memory in the USB cooperation mode.
E-34
▪ When the USB memory failed to be removed safely, writing to the data file possibly not complete properly. Confirm that no
other program uses the USB memory and write to the data file again.
▪ In the folder cooperate mode, be careful not to mistake the import data when main body is cooperated.
▪ While in the replacement work, the Management Tool cannot be exited.
To exit the Management Tool, exit the replacement work.
1.10.6 Backup file
For the replacement operation of AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc, and AccurioPrint C3070L: Back up the data
file when you write in the data file.
Management Tool Management Tool

Machine Machine
Import
Read Read
Output Write Output Write
Writing
folder Backup Backup
Backup
folder
The backup file is created during writing

and saved until next writing.
Note
▪ If the wrong information is written with Management Tool, take back the backup file to the writing folder to recover the
information.
▪ When several writings are executed to 1 data file, the data you can recover is the data file which written before the last writing.
▪ For the backup file in the USB cooperation mode, a backup folder is created automatically and saved in the ORU-DATA folder.
▪ For the backup file in the folder cooperation mode, a backup folder is created automatically and saved in the folder that is the
same as the data file.
1.10.7 Administrator mode
Register the required information of the Management Tool.
(1) Top screen
When you log in successfully, the top screen appears.

• To check the work log, click the "WorkLog" button. (Refer to E.1.10.7 (3) Administrator Setting)
• To register the customer information, click the "RegisterUser" button. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (4) Register user)
• To register a technician, click the "RegisterTech" button. (Refer to E.1.10.7 (2) Register technician)
• To change the administrator password, click "Admin.setting" button. (Refer to E.1.10.7 (3) Administrator Setting)
E-35
(2) Register technician
Register, edit or delete the technician information.
(a) Technician list
Click [RegisterTech] on the top screen.
Alternatively, select "RegisterTech" in the "Tool" menu.
Note
▪ The items can be sorted in the descending or ascending order when you click the item name of the technician information
list. The mark ▲ indicates that the current display is in ascending order. Click it to change in descending order.
▪ The items which appears on the technician information list screen and their display width can be changed via "Set View".
(Refer to E.1.10.8 (5) Set list view)
(b) New resister
Register a new technician information.
The items with "*" must be filled.
1. Enter "Technician name."

Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
2. Enter "Password" and "Password (confirmation)."
Use one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols for password.
3. Enter "Country."
4. Enter "Company name."
5. Enter the following items if you need.
• Enter "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Enter "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Enter "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• "Generate a password"
When you click "Generate a password", a password is generated automatically.
Click "Set password" to register the password which is automatically generated, to the "Password" and "Password (confirmation)."
Click "Copy" to copy the password which is automatically generated, to the clipboard.
6. Click [Register].
The entered technician information is registered and the next technician information can be registered.
E-36
Note
▪ Registration Number is determined automatically.
(c) Edit
Edit a registered technician information.
1. Edit the items to be changed.

• Edit "Technician name." Use 1 to 64 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Technician code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Edit "Country." Use 1 to 128 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Company." Use 1 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Company code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
• Edit "Service office name." Use 0 to 256 characters regardless of whether one-byte or two byte.
• Edit "Service office code." Use 0 to 32 one-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols.
2. Click [OK].
The edited result is reflected to the technician information.
(d) Import
Import the technician information which is exported from Management Tool.
1. Specify the storage location of the technician information file you import.
2. Click [Open].
The technician information file is imported.
Note
▪ The existing technician information is not imported.
(e) Export
Export the technician information collectively.
1. Specify the location where you want to store the file.
2. Click [Save].
The export of the technician information starts.
Note
▪ The file format "Technician Information file" is a format to display the contents on the Management Tool. When the file is
stored in the other format, the file is unable to open on the Management Tool.
E-37
(3) Administrator Setting
Change the administrator password.
1. Enter the current password and the new password.

2. Click [OK].
The new Password is registered.
Note
1.10.8 Various setting for the software

(1) File menu
(a) Import
• Work log
To load the work log which has been exported with the Management Tool, select "Work log" from "Import" in the "File" menu. (Refer to
E.1.10.4 (3) (c) Import)
Note
▪ It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
• User information
To load the user information which has been exported with the Management Tool, select "User information" from "Import" in the "File"
menu (Refer to E.1.10.4 (4) (d) Import)
Note
▪ It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
• Technician information
To load the technician information which has been exported with the Management Tool, select "Technician information" from "Import"
in the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.7 (2) (d) Import)
Note
▪ This menu appears when you log in as an administrator.
▪ It is available only from the top screen or the Technician information screen.
(b) Export
• Work log
To store the collective work log as a file, select "Work log" from "Export" in the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (3) (d) Export)
Note
▪ It is available only from the top screen or the Work log screen.
• User information
To store the collective user information as a file, select "User information" from "Export" in the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (4) (e)
Export)
Note
▪ It is available only from the top screen or the Register user screen.
• Technician information
To store the collective user information as a file, select "Technician information" from "Export" in the "File" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.7 (2)
(e) Export)
Note
▪ It is available only from the top screen or the Register technician screen.
(2) Tool menu
The functions in "Tool" are available only from the top screen.
(a) Replacement work
To perform the unit parts replacement, select "Replacement work" in the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (2) Replacement work)
Note
▪ This menu appears when you log in to the technician mode.
(b) Work log
Select "Work log" from "Tool" to check the work log. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (3) Work log)
E-38
(c) Register user
Select "Register user" in the "Tool" menu to check, to register, to edit, or to delete the user information. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (4) Register
user)
(d) SetPersonal
To change the password of the login technician or to edit comments, select "Set personal info" in the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (5)
SetPersonal)
Note
(e) Unit Serial Number Setting

To write the unit serial number in the RFID tag, select "Unit Serial Number" from the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (6) Unit serial number
setting (bizhub PRESS C8000 and bizhub PRESS C1100, 1085, AccurioPress C6100/C6085))
Note
(f) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting

The default value of the intermediate transfer steering sensor can be written in the RFID tag when you select "Intermediate transfer steering
sensor information setting" from the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (7) Intermediate transfer steering sensor information setting (bizhub
PRESS C8000))
Note
(g) Option
Each item of Management Tool can be configured when you select "Option" from the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.4 (8) Option)
Note
(h) Register technician
Select "Register technician" in the "Tool" menu to check, to register, to edit, or to delete the technician information. (Refer to E.1.10.7 (2)
Register technician)
Note
(i) Administrator Setting
To change the password of the administrator, select "Administrator Setting" in the "Tool" menu. (Refer to E.1.10.7 (3) Administrator
Setting)
Note
(3) Help menu
(a) Version
To display the version information of the Management Tool, select "Version" in the "Help" menu.
Note
▪ The image at the top of the screen can be customized. (Refer to E.1.10.8 (4) Image setting)
(4) Image setting
(a) Navigation
"70 x 40 (pixels)" image display area of is provided in the navigation view area. The users can customize the displayed image.
Item Description
Supported file type GIF, JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG
Image size Image size is arbitrary. *1
Display method Enlarge or reduce the displayed custom image to the area size (70 x 40).
File Name Navigation. (extension*2)
Stored location (Install directory)\Images
Remark When a file exists, a custom image appears. *3
*1 70 x 40 (pixels) size is recommended.
*2 For extension, refer to "Supported file type."
When a file does not exist, a default image that is shown above the chart appears.
(b) The login screen

"480 x 90 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the login screen.
Users can customize the displayed image here.
E-39
Item Description
File Name Login.(extension*2)
(c) Top screen
"350 x 365 (pixels)*1" image display area of is provided on the login screen (when the main window size is 800 x 600*2). Users can
customize the displayed image here.
Item Description
File Name TopMenu.(extension*3)
*2 Image size (350 x 365) is default value. Enlarge or reduce the displayed image in accordance with the window size.
(d) Version information screen

"460 x 150 (pixels)" image display area of is provided on the version information screen.
Users can customize the displayed image here.
Item Description
E-40
File Name Version.(extension*2)
(5) Set list view

The display items and the display width can be changed.
1. Click [Set list view].
2. The set list view screen appears.
The displayed items differs among screens.
The following figure is the work log set list view screen.
3. Check in the list and configure show or hide of items.

• Items with the check appears.
• The setting can be changed when you click [Show]/[Hide] on the right side of the screen.
4. Configure other conditions if you need.
• Selected column width: Enter the arbitrary value and specify the display width. You can specify it by 0 to 999.
• [Top]: Item display order is moved to top.
• [Bottom]: Item display order is moved to bottom.
5. Click [OK].
The set list view is updated.
(6) Export CSV
The format of the CSV file that Management Tool export is as follows.
(a) Output items
Common information (Replacement work information)
No Item Description
1 User name The user name that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
2 Type of business (user) The type of business that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
3 User code The user code that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
4 User ID The user ID that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
5 User office location name (user) The user office location name that is associated to the replacement work is
exported.
6 User office location code (user) The user office location code that is associated to the replacement work is
exported.
7 Contact person name (user) The contact person name that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
8 Contact person ID no. (user) The contact person ID number that is associated to the replacement work is
exported.
9 Contact telephone (user) The contact telephone that is associated to the replacement work is exported.
10 Technician name The name of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
11 Technician code The code of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
12 Country (technician) The country of the technician who performed replacement work is exported.
13 Company name (technician) The company name of the technician who performed replacement work is
exported.
14 Company code (technician) The company code of the technician who performed replacement work is
exported.
15 Service office name (technician) The service office name of the technician who performed replacement work is
exported.
E-41
16 Service office code (technician) The service office code of the technician who performed replacement work is
exported.
17 Machine name Export the device name.
18 Main Body Serial Number The serial number of the main body is exported.
19 Unit type The unit type is exported.
20 Unit Serial Number The serial number of the unit is exported.
21 Replacement Count The number of times of the unit replacement is exported.
22 Unit removal date The date of the unit removal is exported.
23 Count read date The date when the unit RFID tag is read is exported.
24 Count reset date The date when the count is reset is exported.
25 The last undo reset date The last date when the cancellation of the reset is exported.
26 Number of parts The number of parts in the unit is exported.
Part Information (for each part)
27 Number Assigned from 1 automatically.
28 Replace The replaced parts are outputted as "Changed."
29 Parts name The parts name is exported.
30 Parts Number The parts number is exported.
31 Quantity The quantity of parts is exported.
32 Count The count value of parts is exported.
33 Life cycle The life cycle value of parts is exported.
34 Supplement 1 When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
transfer belt" with the count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(front)" is exported.
35 Supplement 2 When the unit type is "intermediate transfer unit" and the parts is "intermediate
transfer belt" with the count reset, "intermediate transfer belt characteristic value
(rear)" is exported.
Note
▪ Break character is "," (comma).
▪ Each item is enclosed in " " (double quotation marks).
▪ When no data exist, only " " (double quotation marks) is outputted.
(b) File format
The header (item name) is created on the first row of the file.
For the subsequent rows, each parts information is outputted per one line.
For example, when the unit has 15 parts in it, 15 rows are outputted per replacement work.
1st row Header row (exports the item name)
2nd row Replacement work 1 - part (1)
3rd row Replacement work 2 - part (2)

4th row Replacement work 3 - part (3) N of replaced parts
per replacement work
5th row Replacement work 4 - part (4)
(7) Print Report
Details on the replacement work can be printed as a replacement report.
E-42
(a) Print layout
1.10.9 Error message list

An error message may appear while Management Tool is operating.
The description of error and its error code are displayed.
The error codes and countermeasures are shown below. Follow the countermeasures shown below.
Error code Countermeasures
400-402, 500, 501, 600, 700, 2005-2008, Retry.
2030-2044, 2100-2109, 2130-2140, 2151-2160,
2170-2187, 2194-2196, 2200-2209, 2230-2240,
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2290-2297, 2303-2329,
2331-2343, 2346-2358, 2362, 2363, 2367, 2405,
2409, 2411, 2500-2509, 2516, 2517, 2520-2523,
2762-2766, 2781-2843, 3000-3006, 3008-3014,
3100, 3101
2402, 2403, 2410, 2411, 5001-5011, 5200-5208 Check the RFID tag and retry.
Note
• When the same error occurs even after retrying, remove the RFID tag reader/
writer from a computer once and insert it again, then reboot the Management
Tool.
• When the same error still occurs, contact an administrator.
E-43
2400, 2406-2408, 5100-5106 Check whether the RFID tag reader/writer is connected to a computer correctly.
102, 111-113, 800-802, 854, 855, 860-868, Reinstall the Management Tool.
880-884, 2090-2096, 2600-2611, 2622-2633,
2636-2644, 2710-2720, 3000-3006
2100-2121, 2151-2160, 2170-2180, 2200-2221, The file is not supported.
2251-2260, 2270-2280, 2303-2319, 2322-2329,
2331-2345, 2359 , 2731, 2760, 2761
100 Non-compliant OS is used.
803-808, 914, 915, 950, 951, 2401, 2404, Reboot the Management Tool.
2721-2723, 2730, 2732-2759, 2767-2775, 5102,
5201
2510-2515 Check the printing environment.
1.11 Machine state log store

1.11.1 Outline
This function stores the operation condition of the machine to HDD. When an error occurs, you can aquire the data to a USB memory.
NOTE
▪ When DIPSW2-0 is "0" or when DIPSW18-7 is "1", this function is not available.
(1) Function
This function limits the items that are saved by "14 Log Store" on the service mode. Therefore, you can aquire the long term log.
• Correction timing (gamma, patch, registration)
• Paper feed request
• Drawing completion
• Paper exit completion (single paper exit)
• Paper exit completion (bundle paper exit): Status report of the post processing machine
• No paper report: No paper report of the selected tray
• Printer operation status
• DF JAM status change
• DF SC status change
• Machine status report
• Tray condition report
• Start, completion, stop of the job
• Finisher status report
• DF condition report
• Temperature and humidity
(2) Usage
Send this log data to KM when an error occurs.
(3) Specifications
Log storage size Up to 10GB (1 file is approximately 10MB.)
Number of saved files Up to 100 files
Log storage area HDD RAW area
Log storage file type dat type
Required USB memory space Approximately 1.5GB
When the free space is less than 1.5GB, all the log files cannot be saved.
Saved data Private information such as the destination addresses are not saved.
1.11.2 Log acquisition
(1) Preparation
(2) Procedure
1. "Service Mode Menu screen"
Stop→0→8→5→9→8→7→Clear
Note
▪ Do not move the screen from the service mode to other screens during the log acquisition.
▪ During the log acquisition, connect only 1 USB memory to the service port.
▪ If SC or a jam has occurred, acquire its log before you deactivate and activate the main power and release the jam. You
cannot analyze the error if the log disappears because you deactivate and activate the main power.
▪ If any errors such as image abnormality have occurred during printing operation, stop the operation by pressing the STOP
button and acquire the error log. If you keep printing after an error occurs, it is difficult to analyze the error log because it
gets buried under the later logs.
▪ Do not touch the machine and its panel while the log is being saved.
2. Disconnect the USB memory from the service port.
3. Check the log on the USB memory.
The following folder is created at the root directly of the USB memory.
EtrnlLog_(main body serial number)_YYYY (Year)_MM (Month)_DD (Date)_hh (Hour)_mm (Minute)
E-44
• EtrnlLog_XXXXXXXXXXXXX_YYYYMMDDhhmm
1.12 Real-time Remote Panel

1.12.1 Setting Up Real-time Remote Panel
To use Real-time Remote Panel, you need a Windows computer installed with a browser recommended as follows, or a computer or mobile
device (such as the iPad) installed with VNC Viewer (VNC client application) that supports RFB protocol version 3.8 or later.
Note
▪ Real-time Remote Panel can be used only with the following machines.
Applicable machine:
AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc
AccurioPress 6136, 6136P, 6120
AccurioPress C6100, C6085
AccurioPress C2070, C2070P
bizhub PRESS C1100, C1085
bizhub PRESS C1070, C1070P, C71hc
bizhub PRESS C71cf, AccurioLabel 190
(1) Operating environment
Browser use environment
Applicable OS Windows 7
Windows 8.1
Web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 11
Note
▪ In your browser, JavaScript must be enabled.
VNC Viewer use environment
Applicable OS Windows 7
Windows 8.1
Mac OS X 10.7 or later
iOS 5 or later
Android ver. 4.0.3 or later
Application VNC Viewer supporting 16bit color display and RFB protocol version 3.8 or later
The following applications are available:
· Real VNC Viewer (for Windows, MacOS, iOS, Android)
· Remoter VNC - Remote Desktop (for iOS)
· PocketCloud Remote Desktop RDP/VNC (for iOS, Android)
(2) Setup Procedure
To use Real-time Remote Panel in a browser, configure the regular remote panel first before installing the exclusive plugin.
• For details about how to install the regular remote panel, refer to E.1.12.2 Installing Web plugin.
To use Real-time Remote Panel with a VNC Viewer, enable the VNC function of the machine. The connection setting of the VNC Viewer is
also required. For details, refer to each of the following pages.
• E.1.12.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine
• E.1.12.4 Setting Connection to VNC Viewer
Real-time Remote Panel is initially activated and the session timeout time is set to 0 minutes (no timeout). To change these settings, refer to
the following page.
• E.1.12.5 Remote Panel Advanced Settings
1.12.2 Installing Web plugin

Files necessary to install the plugin can be downloaded by accessing the download page from Remote Panel of Web Utilities. As downloaded
installation files are compressed, be sure to extract them before installation.
Recommended hardware requirements:
A computer equipped with 32 bit or 64 bit, 1.5 GHz or greater processor and 512 MB or more of RAM
NOTE
▪ The plugin of Real-time Remote Panel checks the version requested from the machine when Remote Panel is loaded. If the
requested version is newer, a message is displayed to prompt you to install the latest plugin. Keep the latest version installed so
that the plugin functions properly in Remote Panel.
(1) Downloading software
1. Display the [Main page] screen of Web Utilities.
2. Click on [Remote Panel].
E-45
Remote Panel is displayed in the browser.

3. Click [Download Page] in the upper right of the screen.
The [Download Real-time Remote Panel plugin] page is displayed.

4. Click [Download] to save the files in a desired directory.
NOTE
▪ Two file types are provided on the download page. Click each button to save them in a desired directory of the computer.
Item File Name Type Description
Real-time Remote Panel Plugin Setup.exe Installer A file to execute the installation
Installer for Windows
Real-time Remote Panel Plugin RealTime_Remote_Panel_InstallFile.zi Installation file A compressed file including the
InstallFile p plugin to be actually installed
(2) Extracting installation file

1. Right-click the installation file, and select [Extract All...] from the pull-down menu.
The [Select a Destination and Extract Files] screen is displayed.

2. As the destination of extraction, specify the folder in which the installer (Setup.exe) is saved, and then click [Extract].
E-46
NOTE
▪ If the location you saved the installation file is not the same as that of the installer, click [Browse...] to specify the folder in
which the installer is saved.
3. Check the extracted installation file.
Check that the following two folders are saved in the folder specified as the destination of extraction.
[libraries]
[plugins]
NOTE
▪ Be sure to store the two folders extracted from RealTime_Remote_Panel_InstallFile.zip ([libraries] and [plugins]) and the
installer (Setup.exe) in the same folder. Otherwise, an error message is displayed when the installer is launched.
(3) Installing the plugin

NOTE
▪ Installing the plugin requires the administrator privilege.
1. Double-click Setup.exe.
The installer starts.
2. Click [Next].
A screen is displayed to prompt you to install Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package.
NOTE
▪ For the operation of the plugin, Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package is required to be installed on the
computer. If this package has already been installed, proceed to step 5.
3. Install Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package on the computer, and then click [Next].
NOTE
▪ Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Redistributable Package can be downloaded from Official Microsoft Download Center.
E-47
The [License Agreement] screen is displayed.

4. Select [I accept the agreement] after checking the content, and then click [Next].
NOTE
▪ If you disagree, you will not be able to install Job Centro.
▪ By selecting from the drop-down list, you can change the language of the license agreement.
5. Check the copyright information on the [Information] screen, and then click [Next].
6. Click [Install].
E-48
The installation is started.

7. Click [Finish].
The installation is complete.

NOTE
▪ When uninstalling the plugin, follow the instructions provided for each OS.
1.12.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine

Set up the VNC Function of the machine in the Machine Manager Setting of Web Utilities.
1. Display the [Main page] screen of Web Utilities.
2. Click [Machine Manager Setting].
The password entry dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter "admin" in the User Name text box, and the administrator password in the password text box, then click [OK].
The [Machine Manager Setting ] screen is displayed.
4. Click [Remote Panel Setting/Job History Setting].
E-49
The [Remote panel setting/Job history setting] screen is displayed.

5. Click [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] in the upper left of the screen.
The [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen is displayed.

6. Set the VNC password composed of 8 characters, and then click [OK].
The VNC password should be composed of 8 characters using upper cases, lower cases, numbers, and symbols (excluding colons (:),
double quotation marks ("), and commas (,)). Setting a password of the content other than specified is rejected with an error message
displayed in the screen. When the VNC function is enabled, the display of the button changes to [Disable].
Note
▪ Once the VNC function is enabled or disabled, the setting change cannot be accepted for 10 minutes. To reset the setting,
hold steady for 10 minutes or open the [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen again after 10 minutes.
1.12.4 Setting Connection to VNC Viewer

To use the Real-time Remote Panel in the VNC Viewer, enter the IP address of the connection destination (machine) and the VNC password on
the connection setting screen of the application.
The VNC password is required to be set in advance. For details, refer to E.1.12.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine.
The following procedure is an example showing how to set up the VNC Viewer for iPad "Remoter VNC."
1. Start Remoter VNC.
2. Tap [Discovery List].
E-50
3. Tap [Add Session Manually].
4. Tap [Select] of "Server Type," and then select [VNC/ScreenSharing].
5. Enter the IP address of the machine for "VNC Hostname," and the VNC password for "VNC Password."
E-51
6. Tap [Save] in the upper right of the window.

The connection to the machine is completed. The profile selection screen is displayed.
7. Select the profile of the touch panel of the machine, and then enter your password in the login screen.
8. Tap [Unlock].
Remote Panel is displayed.
1.12.5 Remote Panel Advanced Settings

The [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen is provided to disable Real-time Remote Panel or to set the time for the session timeout.
1. Follow the procedure in E.1.12.3 Enabling VNC Function of the Machine to display the [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen.
2. Make desired settings.
To disable Real-time Remote Panel, click [Disable] in the right side area of [Enable or disable Real-time Remote Panel]. The function is
disabled, and the display of the button changes to [Enable].
To set the session timeout time, enter a desired time on the right side of [Session Timeout], and then click [Setting].
NOTE
▪ Once Real-time Remote Panel or VNC function is enabled or disabled, the setting change cannot be accepted for 10 minutes.
To reset the setting, hold steady for 10 minutes or open the [Remote Panel Advanced Settings] screen again after 10
minutes.
1.13 Service assistant tool

1.13.1 Outline
With "Service Assistant Tool" (SA tool), you can check the information which is necessary for the service on the main body operation panel,
such as the service manual. In addition, you can access directly to the screen on the main body function that is related with the screen that you
read.
By connecting the USB memory that stores the SA tool to the service port, you can use the SA tool on the main body operation panel. In the
other case, you can use this tool after you store the SA tool in the HDD via the USB memory.
The main function of the service assistant tool is as follows.
Function name Outline
Parts replacement You can conduct the operation flow easily when you replace the periodically replaced parts.
TROUBLESHOOTING You can confirm the solutions for the image trouble and malfunction code, and make the adjustment of the main
body easily.
Check machine information The machine information of the main body can be checked on the operation panel.
Machine information You can move to the log saving screen of the main body and use the log saving function on the tool.
acquisition
Show manual You can check the service manual or the parts guide manual on the operation panel.
I/O Check Mode You can confirm the I/O Check Mode list and use the I/O Check Mode.
E-52
Check controller information You can check the controller information and acquire the log. * Some of the functions are available only when the
KM controller is used.
1.13.3 Operating instructions of the service assistant tool

Use the service assistant tool in the following procedure.
(1) Preparation
(a) Prepare the USB memory
1. Create a folder that has the following structure in the USB memory.
Removable disk -> [C3080] folder -> [SATOOL] folder
2. Save the img file of the assistant tool main body and the 3 files (decryptTool, mountTool, and userSetting) for starting the tool in the
[SATOOL] folder. Save these 4 files in the [SATOOL] folder so that you can use the SA tool.
Note
▪ This tool operates properly only with the assigned folder structure. Therefore, be sure to create the folder as it is shown
before and store the SA tool in the USB memory.
▪ The file size of the SA tool is about 1 GB. Consider the size of this tool and be sure to use the USB memory that has
enough capacity.
▪ You cannot use the SA tool with the USB that has a security function.
▪ Because the SA tool is encrypted, you cannot check the contents of the tool even you use a computer. Only when you
connect the SA tool to the main body, you can activate the SA tool.
▪ You can store other data in the USB memory in which you store this tool.
3. You can store the SA tool in the main body HDD via the USB memory. When you store the SA tool in the HDD, you can activate the
SA tool from the HDD without the USB memory.
When you store the SA tool in the HDD, store the SA tool that you store under the [SATOOL] folder.
Removable disk -> [C3080] folder -> [SATOOL] folder
E-53
4. Create the [setting] folder under the [SATOOL] folder and save the userSetting file under the [setting] folder.
Removable disk -> [C3080] folder -> [SATOOL] folder -> [setting] folder
5. You can store not only the SA tool itself but also the setting file that you use in the SA tool to the HDD and use it. When you save other
text files for changing the setting in the HDD, save the files which you save in the HDD in the [setting] folder.
Note
▪ During the installation of the HDD, the specified SA tool file itself (img file), decryptTool, mountTool, userSetting, and the
files in the [setting] folder are saved in the HDD.
▪ Do not create a sub folder under the [setting] folder. If there is a sub folder, the installation to the HDD can be failed.
▪ If the total size of all files that you install to the HDD exceeds the limit (5GB), you cannot install the files.
(b) Operation of the main body

1. Connect the USB memory on which you store the SA tool with the service port of the main body. (This procedure is unnecessary when
you use the SA tool that is stored in the HDD.)
3. Press the [Service Assistant Tool] button that is displayed at the lower left and activate the service assistant tool.
Note
▪ The [Service Assistant Tool] button on the Service Mode screen is displayed at all times. When the USB memory on
which you install the SA tool is unconnected or the SA tool is not stored in the HDD, the SA tool does not become active
even when you press the [Service Assistant Tool] button.
▪ When the browser of the main body is not started, or when it is in use (eCopy is running), the starting button is in shade.
E-54
Note
▪ With using the magic sequence, you can also activate the SA tool.
1. Press the [Utility/Counter] button on the touch panel.
2. Press [92729272] with the hard key on the Utility Menu screen.
3. The starting button of [Service Assistant Tool] appears at the lower right. Press this button to activate the SA tool.
▪ When you activate the SA tool with the magic sequence, this tool is available even while the main body is during
printing. However, the use of some functions, such as the setting change, is limited.
▪ When you start the SA tool which you saved in the HDD from the utility screen, this operation possibly influences the
printing operation of the main body. Therefore, the use of the SA tool which is saved in the USB memory is
recommended when you start it from the utility screen.
(2) Operation screen
(a) Activation of the tool
1. When you activate the SA tool, the following operation screen appears. [HDD] on this screen displays the SA tool that is stored in the
HDD. [USB memory] displays a list of the SA tool that is stored in the USB memory.
Note
▪ When the USB memory is not connected to the main body, [USB memory] and [Installation from USB memory to HDD]
do not appear.
▪ When you start the SA tool from the utility screen, you cannot save it in the HDD. Therefore, [Installation from USB
memory to HDD] does not appear.
2. When you activate the SA tool, select the SA tool that you want to activate from the tools that are stored in [HDD] or [USB memory] on
this screen. Select the [Select] button next to the file name and activate the SA tool.
3. When you activate the SA tool, the following top screen appears.
E-55
[1] [2] [3] [4]
4. 4 buttons are displayed at the upper side at all times. You can use these buttons at all times with the exclusion of certain case.
"Return" button [1]: Displays the previous screen (when there is a previous screen).
"Next" button [2]: Displays the next screen (when there is a next screen).
"Top" button [3]: Displays the top screen of the tool.
"Close" button [4]: Closes the tool.
5. Press the function button in the middle and use each function.
(For the details of each function, refer to "Service Assistant Tool Operation Manual".)
6. The version of the SA tool appears at the lower part of the top screen.
Note
▪ When you activate the tool from the USB memory, do not pull out the USB memory from the main body before the tool is
not completed. The following caution screen appears when you pull out the USB memory before you complete the tool. If
this message appears, press [x] (close) and complete the tool. When you continue to use the tool, connect the USB
memory to the main body again.
(b) Storing the tool in the HDD

1. Connect the USB memory in which you save the SA tool to the main body. When you activate the SA tool from the service mode,
[Installation from USB memory to HDD] appears under the SA tool operation screen as the following shows.
2. This item displays a list of the SA tools that are stored in the USB memory.
E-56
3. When you store the SA tool that is stored in the USB memory in the HDD, select the tool that you want to install to the HDD from the
list. Select the tool so that you can select the [Install] button at the lower part.
4. Select the [Install] button after you select the tool and the installation to the HDD starts. During installing, the following appears.
5. After this installation, you can use the SA tool that is stored to the HDD. (Reboot of the SA tool is unnecessary.)
Note
▪ If the USB memory is not connected with the main body, [Installation from USB memory to HDD] does not appear.
▪ You can store only one file of the SA tool in the HDD. If you store the SA tool in the HDD while you have already stored
the SA tool, the new tool is overwritten.
▪ Be careful that the SA tool installation to the HDD takes 1 to 3 minutes (a standard time).
▪ When you conduct the Format HDD All Data, install the SA tool again.
▪ If you activate the SA tool from the magic sequence, you cannot store the tool to the HDD.
E-57
▪ If you activate the SA tool from the magic sequence, using the tool that is stored in the HDD is not recommended.
Principally, use the SA tool of the USB memory.
(3) Explanation of each function

(a) Parts replacement
With [Parts replacement], you can conduct the replacement of the periodical replacement parts easily by following the procedure.
1. Select the parts that you want to replace from the periodical replacement parts on the screen, and press [Check the selected parts] at
the upper part.
2. The confirmation screen of the parts that you selected appears. Confirm the displayed parts, and then press [Start replacement work]
at the upper part.
3. Then, the screen moves to the implementation screen of the parts replacement. When you start the replacement of the parts, select
[Start replacement work] at the upper part.
E-58
4. When you select [Start replacement work], the power supply of any section except the operation section is deactivated. At this time,
the screen changes to the following condition.
Note
▪ Be sure to replace the parts with this screen (yellow background) in which the power supply of any section except the
operation section is deactivated. Never conduct the parts replacement with the normal white background because the
main body power supply is active.
5. Select the [Replacement procedure] button that is displayed on the right side of the parts list on the screen and the replacement
procedure on the service manual appears. Conduct the replacement while you confirm this procedure.
6. After the replacement is done, back to the page and select the [End replacement work] button. The operation section turns to the
following display. Then select the [Clear counter] button at the lower part.
E-59
7. Check the parts that you replaced on the next screen, and then select the [Clear counter] button at the left upper if you conduct the
counter clear. Then the pop-up for confirmation appears. If you select [OK], the counter is cleared.
8. Select [Adjustment procedure] at the right upper on the screen 7 and the items that need the adjustment after the replacement
appears. Adjust the displayed items from top to bottom. If you select the adjustment button, the screen moves to the adjustment screen
of the main body.
9. Conduct the adjustment on the displayed adjustment screen. Select [Return] to return to the previous screen.
E-60
10. Conduct the displayed adjustment in order. After the adjustment is completed, select [Finished required adjustment] at the lower part to
complete the work.
(b) Troubleshooting
With [Troubleshooting], you can confirm the solutions for the image trouble and malfunction code, and make the adjustment of the main
body easily.
When the IQ-501 is connected, you can see the result of basic image diagnosis for the Package Color Auto Adj. (Auto Selection: ON). You
can see the solutions for the items of out-of-standard image quality.
1. If you select [Image trouble], the list of the image troubles appears. Select the corresponded trouble from the displayed list.
E-61
2. The solution of the image trouble appears. The solution of each trouble can be confirmed on this screen. In addition, the adjustment
items on the solution are the buttons. If you select the adjustment button, the screen moves to the adjustment operation screen of the
main body.
3. Conduct the adjustment on the adjustment screen that you moved to. Select [Return] and return to the solution screen. Follow the
solution and conduct the action in order.
4. If you select [Malfunction Code], the list of the image troubles appears. Select the corresponding malfunction code from the displayed
list.
5. The solution of the malfunction code appears. The solutions of each malfunction code can be confirmed on this screen. In addition, the
IO checks on the solution are the buttons. If you select the IO check, the screen moves to the screen to execute the IO check of the
main body with keeping the IO check code.
E-62
6. Execute the IO check on the IO check screen after the preceding task. Select [Return] and return to the solution screen. Follow the
solution and conduct the action in order.
(c) Check machine information

With [Check machine information], you can confirm the machine information of the main body on the operation panel.
1. Select the function that you want to confirm from the displayed buttons.
E-63
2. If you select [DIPSW list], the following display appears. On this screen, you can confirm and change the setting of the DIPSW. (The
green button shows the value that is configured currently. )
3. If you select [List Output], the following screen appears. On this screen, you can confirm the list print without printing.
(d) Machine information acquisition

With [Get machine information], you can move to the log saving screen of the main body and use the function on the tool.
1. Select the function that you want to use from the buttons on the center of the screen.
E-64
2. Move to the log saving function screen of the main body, and conduct a work, such as log saving, on the displayed screen.
(e) Show manual
With [Show manual], you can check the service manual or parts guide manual on the operation panel.
1. The following screen appears when you select [Service manual].If you select the item from the index on the left of the screen, the
information of the service manual appears on the right of the screen.
2. The following screen appears when you select [Parts guide manual].Select the displayed parts so that you can check the parts number
or name of the selected parts.
E-65
3. If you select [PDF], the following display appears.

When you store the PDF file in a specific folder in the USB memory that you store service assistant tool, you can check the PDF file on
the operation panel.
4. Select [Select] from the PDF file list, then the PDF file is displayed on the panel as the following.
(For the details of each function, refer to "Service Assistant Tool Operation Manual".)
(f) Check mode
With [Check mode], you can execute the I/O check mode or test pattern output.
1. If you select [I/O check mode], the following display appears.
Confirm the contents of the I/O check that you conduct with the I/O check mode list appears on the screen.
E-66
2. Select [Start I/O check mode] at the upper part of the screen and input the number on the next screen. Then, conduct the I/O check.
3. If you select [Test Pattern Output Mode], the following display appears.
4. Select [Start Test Pattern Output] at the upper part of the screen. Then conduct the test pattern output on the next screen.
The test pattern number and gradation are entered automatically on the screen.
E-67
(g) Check controller information

With [Check controller information], you can check the controller setting or acquire the information.
* Some of the functions are available only when the KM controller is used.
1. If you select [Software memory SW list], the following screen appears. You can check and change the setting of the controller memory
switch on this screen.
2. When you select [Controller Service Tool], the PDF file of the controller service tool can be checked on the operation panel.
E-68
1.13.4 About the handling of tool

• This tool is encrypted. However, be careful not to lose this tool if you store the tool in the USB memory because it contains such as the
product information. When you use the tool with the USB memory, be sure to collect the USB memory from the main body. Do not store the
USB memory at the customers.
• This tool is for service, so do not allow a customer to use even when you store the SA tool in the HDD.
• During the operation of this tool, [Auto Reset Setting] is configured to OFF. Be careful to handle the tool because the screen of the tool
remains displayed even after a specified period of time has passed. If you leave the machine for a long time, close the tool and remove the
USB memory when you activate the SA tool from the USB memory.
• When the SA tool is during operation, the administrator login to PageScope Web Connection is not available and the auto shut OFF is
disabled.
1.14 Utility (IC card information setting tool)

1.14.1 IC card information setting tool of the AU-201S card reader
(1) Outline
• Use Auth Device Tool Advanced and create an IC card information setting file.
Note
▪ The loadable driver of AU-201S card reader is incorporated in the main body.Therefore, the loadable driver is unnecessary
when there is no change in the setting by Auth Device Tool Advanced.
(2) IC card information setting file creation tool

(a) Tool name
Tool for CE
• Auth Device Tool Advanced for AU-201S 2.2.00000
(b) Operation specifications of the tool for CE

OS • Windows 7 Enterprise, Professional, Ultimate (SP1 or later)
• Windows 8.1 Pro, Enterprise
• Windows 10 Pro, Enterprise
All the OS support 32-bit (x 86) and 64-bit (x 64) versions.
Library • Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 (SP1 or later)*1
Hard disk 10MB of free disk space or more
Display 800 x 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more
*1: .NET Framework 3.5 is disabled at the default setting of Windows 8.1/10. Enable it in the following procedure.
1. Open "Control Panel", click "Programs", and click "Turn Windows features on or off" under "Programs and Features".
2. Check the ".NET Framework 3.5 (includes .NET 2.0 and 3.0)" check box and click "OK", then reboot the computer if the message
appears.
(3) Procedure of the setting for the IC card information

(a) Auth Device Tool Advanced for AU-201S
1. Use the loadable driver for AU-201S which is suitable for the kind of the card which you use.
2. Activate Auth Device Tool Advanced for AU-201S.
3. Select "Import Loadable Driver" from [File], and select the loadable driver.
4. Select the card type.
5. For the card of which you can configure the detail setting, click [Detail Setting/Extra Data Setting].
6. Input the necessary extended data. (For the details, be sure to contact the IC card administrator.)
7. For the output format, select the loadable driver, and click [Export].
8. Select the loadable driver which you update and its output destination, and click [OK].
9. Copy the loadable driver (ICC_LDR.tar) which is output to the root directory of the USB memory.
Note
▪ Be sure not to save the data other than the loadable driver file in the USB memory.
10. Enter the service mode by MFP.
11. Select [Auth. Device Setting].
12. Connect the USB memory in which you save the loadable driver to the USB port.
13. To install the loadable driver, select [Loadable Driver Install], and press [Start].
14. Remove the USB memory and select [Auth.Device Setting] - [Authentication Device] - [Card 1].
15. Deactivate the main power switch. Then after 10 seconds or more, activate it.
16. Configure the setting of the authentication user.
1.15 CS Remote Analysis

1.15.1 Outline
(1) Outline
• The CS Remote Analysis is the system that corrects and analyzes the data inside the machine.
• The collection and analysis of the data enable the remote analysis of the troubles in the field, the trouble prediction*1, and the prediction
of the parts life*1.
*1: The trial of the trouble prediction is being conducted in some areas. The parts life prediction will be available in the future.
(2) Outline of the collecting data

The CS Remote Analysis collects the following data.
E-69
Numb Description of the collecting data CS Remote Analysis (Reference) CS Remote

er Care
1 Counter (Total counter, Counter of each mode) ○
(For fee collection)
2 Toner Alarm, Emergency notification (C code, J code) ○
(For the automatic delivery
of the toner)
3 Paper feed condition (Example: Paper type, paper weight, tray, air-blow ○
setting, and heater setting) (For the trouble prediction)
4 Information of the process system (Example: LD power, toner density) ○
(For the trouble prediction)
5 Function counter of the process system parts (Example: Such as drive ○
distance of the developer or the drum) (For the prediction of the
parts life)
6 SC information history, DIPSW setting, special parts counter, ROM version, ○ ○
and option configuration
7 Failure diagnosis (Examples: Misalignment of the images or toner ○
contamination in the development system that the IQ-501 collected)
(3) Major specifications
The major specifications of the CS Remote Analysis is as follows.
Numb Item CS Remote Analysis (Reference) CS Remote Care
er
1 Frequency of the · Automatic transfer (Regular call) Once a day to once a week (depends on the sales
data collection The data is transferred automatically at the configured companies)
time once a day.
· Manual transfer (Administrator call)
The data is transferred when the user conducts
[Administrator Call]. (The user conducts the manual
transfer when an abnormality occurs on the main body.)
2 Data management The data is managed collectively with the server that is The data is managed with the server that is installed in
installed in the KMI. each sales company.
(You can access to the server by the Web browser) (The data is transferred to the KMI once a month)
3 Available sales Sales companies, distributors Sales companies, distributors
company
4 Applicable machine · 6136 series All machines
· C3080 series
· C6100 series
· C2070 series
· C1100 series
· C1070 series
· C71cf, 190
· 1100
5 Communication · Modem (not available in Japan)*1 · Modem
protocol · http simplex · E-mail simplex and duplex
· http simplex and duplex
6 Operation condition · The CS Remote Analysis can be connected only with None The CS Remote Care operates regardless of the
the machine which is connected to the CS Remote CS Remote Analysis.
Care.
· The CS Remote Analysis can be operated only with
the machine which is equipped with the HDD on
C1070P and C1100/C1085.
*1 For how to connect the modem, refer to the CS Remote Analysis administrator guide.
Note
▪ If the data communication is failed, the retry is not operated. The system sends the data in the next data communications.
▪ Once the delivery call is finished, the stored data is cleared. However, if the data communication is failed, the data is not
cleared until the next data communications.
If the data is sent manually with [Administrator Call], the data is not cleared.
▪ When the sub power switch (SW2) or the main power switch (SW1) is inactive during regular call, the data is sent during idling
after the power is activated.
▪ The communication volume per communication is 20 Kbyte. The communication time per communication is a second or less.
(Only for a version of HTTP)
▪ The CS Remote Analysis is the system that is independent of the CS Remote Care. This system is for the stabilized operation
of each system.
(4) System configuration
The data of the main body is sent to the WebDAV server of the CS Remote Analysis with the following system configuration.
E-70
(a) When the main body is connected to the WebDAV server of the KMI
User environment KMI

environment
Proxy WebDAV server

Main body
server of the KMI
(b) When the main body is connected to the WebDAV server of the sales companies
User environment Sales company KMI

environment environment
WebDAV server
Proxy of the WebDAV server
Main body
server sales company of the KMI
1.15.2 Function
CS Remote Analysis has the following functions.
Note
▪ For details of each function, refer to the operation manual of CS Remote Analysis. (Refer to E.1.15.5 How to use)
(1) Operation Status
• This function displays the collected data.
• Use this function to check detail information of the main body.
(2) Troubleshooting Guide
• When some troubles occur, the information to troubleshoot and the related operating status of the machine are displayed.
(3) Remote Trouble Shooting

• The probable cause and the countermeasure are displayed against a specified trouble of the main body.
• When a specified trouble occurs in the main body, use this function. This function enables the CE to check the cause and
countermeasure before CE visits the user.
E-71
(4) Dashboard
• This screen is for checking with a mobile terminal and displays the operational status with graphs.
• The CE can check the operational status process of the machine with graphs by a mobile terminal and others before they visit the user.
(5) Report
• This function outputs the report of the collected data.
1.15.3 Setup method
To use the CS Remote Analysis, connect the main body to the WebDAV server of the CS Remote Analysis.
(1) Prerequisite
• Before you install the CS Remote Analysis, install the CS Remote Care. (Refer to: I.4.15 CS Remote Care)
If the CS Remote Care is not installed, the CS Remote Analysis does not operate.
(2) Setup procedure
1. Enter the service mode of the main body.
2. "Service Mode screen"
Select [02 Log FW Address Setting].
[Service Mode] - [09 CS Remote Care] - [02 Log FW Address Setting]
3. "Log FW Address Setting screen"
Enter the following setting value to each item.
For details of the setting value, refer to E Table 1:Log FW Address Setting.
Note
▪ There are 2 ways to connect the main body to the WebDAV server of the CS Remote Analysis. The required setting value
differs depending on the ways.
· When the main body is connected to the WebDAV server of the KMI
▪ When the main body is connected to the WebDAV server of the sales companies
▪ When you connect the main body to the WebDAV server of the sales companies, the file transfer application (File Detection
Service) must be installed to the WebDAV server of the sales companies.
For more details, contact the service section of KMI.
▪ [02 Log FW Address Setting] is unnecessary in the modem version.
4. "Log FW Address Setting screen"

Press [OK].
5. "CS Remote Care screen"
Select [03 Log Forwarding Time Setting].
[Service Mode] - [09 CS Remote Care] - [03 Log Forwarding Time Setting]
6. "Log Forwarding Time Setting screen"
Enter the following setting value to each item.
For details of the setting values, refer to E Table 2: Log Forwarding Time Setting.
E-72
7. "Log Forwarding Time Setting screen"

Press [OK].
8. Deactivate and activate the sub power switch (SW2).
Note
▪ If you do not deactivate and activate the sub power switch (SW2), the regular call of the data does not become available.
9. Select [Administrator Call].
[Utility Menu] - [Administrator Setting] - [System Connection] - [Administrator Call]
10. "Administrator Call screen"
Press [Start], and send the data of the main body to the WebDAV server of the CS Remote Analysis.
Confirm that the communication is normally completed.
11. Log in to CS Remote Analysis. (Refer to E.1.15.4 Login method)

12. "Top screen"
Select [Operation Status].
13. "Operation Status screen"

Select [Sales Company], [Model] and [S/No]. Confirm that the added main body is registered.
Note
▪ Confirm that [My Profile Setting] is OFF. If [My Profile Setting] is ON, the newly registered main body is not displayed.
▪ It takes time as following to resister the data that is sent in the step 10.
· When the main body is connected to the WebDAV server of the KMI: 5 minutes
E-73
· When the main body is connected to the WebDAV server of the sales companies: 5 minutes + 5 minutes (Execution
interval of the file transfer application. Configured by the sales companies).
Table 1:Log FW Address Setting

Numb Item Setting value
er When the main body is connected to the When the main body is connected to the
WebDAV server of the KMI WebDAV server of the sales companies
1 WebDAV server csrawebdav1.konicaminolta.jp IP address or host name of the WebDAV server
or of the sales companies
210.133.205.45
2 Store directory /(sales company)/(model)/
· (sales company): Abbreviation of the sales company*1 (such as BAU, BCN, BEU, BHK, BIN1, BJ,
BNZ, BSA, BUS, and BBR)
· (Model): Name of the main body (such as C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc,
C3070L, 6136, 6136P, 6120, C6100, C6085, C2070, C2070P, C2060, C2060L, C1100, C1085,
C1070, C1060, C1060L, C71hc, C71cf/190, and 1100)
· Example: When the sales company is BUS and main body is C2070
/BUS/C2070/
*1: The BIN folder must not be used in the Web server of the CS Remote Analysis. Therefore, the
BIN must use the BIN1 folder.
3 Enable Proxy Server Enter the proxy setting of the installation environment of the main body.
4 Proxy Server Enter the proxy setting of the installation environment of the main body.
5 Proxy Server Port Number Enter the proxy setting of the installation environment of the main body.
6 Enable SSL Voluntary Voluntary
· [ON] is recommended. · Follow the policy of the sales companies.
7 Authentication [ON]
8 User name webdav_user1 Voluntary
9 Password Gsx-7500 Voluntary
Note
▪ For the specifications of Japan and North America, No.1, 2, 7, 8, and 9 in Log FW Address Setting are configured in advance.
▪ For the specifications of Europe, No.7, 8, and 9 in Log FW Address Setting are configured in advance.
Table 2: Log Forwarding Time Setting
Numb Item Configuration value
er
1 Log Forwarding [ON]
2 Log Forwarding Time Voluntary
· Configure the execution time of the regular call. (Configure when to forward the log once a day.)
· 30 minutes before the user starts to work (when the user activates the main body) is recommended. (If
the starting time is at "8:30", configure at "8:00".)
· If you configure Log Forwarding Time at 30 minutes before you activate the main body, the data transfer
is completed during idling (before the main body starts printing). This action enables a stable
communication.
1.15.4 Login method
Note
▪ Recommended web browser: Google Chrome
▪ When you use the Internet Explorer, it takes time until the screen is displayed.
2. Enter the following URL in the address bar and press the Enter key.
http://csra.konicaminolta.jp
3. "Login screen"
Input the following items, and then log in to the CS Remote Analysis.
• Language
• Time zone
• User ID
• Password
E-74
Note
▪ For creation of a user ID or a password, be sure to contact the person responsible for the CSRA in each distributor.
▪ To access the server including the CSRA data, be sure to contact the person responsible for the CSRA in each distributor.
4. The "Top screen" of CS Remote Analysis is displayed.
1.15.5 How to use
(1) How to use
• CS Remote Analysis has the following functions. (Refer to E.1.15.2 Function)
• Operation Status
• Troubleshooting Guide
• Remote Trouble Shooting
• Dashboard
• Report
• JAM Prediction Report
• For how to use each function, refer to the operation manual of CS Remote Analysis.
• Download the operation manual from the top screen of the CS Remote Analysis.
(2) How to download the operation manual

1. Log in to CS Remote Analysis. (Refer to E.1.15.4 Login method)
2. "Top screen"
Click [Manual].
E-75
3. The operation manual is downloaded to your PC.
1.16 Paper profile
1.16.1 Outline
(1) Outline
The paper profile is the setting information that puts the paper condition (type, weight and others) together.
The profile of the recommended paper is registered on the main body as preset before the shipment. Users copy the paper profile to use from
the preset profile list to the paper profile list, and take it as the paper setting for each tray. Thus, the wrong setting of the paper reduces and
the operability increases.
Also, CE must download the preset profile from CSES and import it to the main body via the USB memory to add the preset profile.
CSES
Download
USB memory
Import (All/Individual)
Paper Setting Paper Profile Preset Profile
Tray 1 Profile 1 Copy Profile 1

Recall
Tray 2 Profile 2 (All/Individual) Profile 2
Tray 3 Profile 3 Profile 3
· Register · ·
· · ·
· · ·
Main Body
(2) Type of paper profile

There are following types of paper profile.
The type can be recognized with the icon on the right of the paper profile name.
• : Recommended paper
• : Confirmed paper (evaluated by KMI/distributor)
• (No icon): General paper (paper type x weight), or user-created paper profile
E-76
1.16.2 Operation workflow
The operation workflow for when you add the paper profile is as follows.
For the details, refer to " E.1.16.3 How to use".
Number Implement procedure Conduct person
1 Download the corresponding paper profile data (.txt) from CSES. CE
2 Import the downloaded paper profile to the main body as a preset profile (via USB memory). CE
3 Copy the paper profile to use from the preset profile list to the paper profile list. User
4 Take the paper profile from the paper setting screen, and apply it to each tray. User
1.16.3 How to use
(1) Procedure (CE)
1. Download the corresponding paper profile data (.txt) from CSES.
2. Create the "/export/profile" folder on the root of the USB memory, and save the downloaded paper profile.
3. Connect the USB memory to the main body connection port.
4. Press Utility/Counter on the operation panel of the main body.
5. Press [User Setting] - [System Setting] - [Paper Tray Setting] - [Paper Setting] - [Paper Profile Management] in this order.
6. Press [USB Import].
7. Select the file to import, and press [All] or [Individual].

• When you press [Indivisual], select the paper profile to import (multiple choice allowed).
E-77
8. Press [Import].
9. When the confirmation screen appears, press [OK].
Note
▪ Preset profile cannot be edited. After the copying from the preset profile list to the paper profile list, you can edit it.
▪ When the profile name and the registered preset profile are the same, it is overwritten.
▪ 500 preset profiles can be registered at maximum.
(2) Procedure (user)
1. Press Utility/Counter on the operation panel of the main body.
2. Press [User Setting] - [System Setting] - [Paper Tray Setting] - [Paper Setting] - [Paper Profile Management] in this order.
3. Select the paper profile to use (multiple choice allowed), and press [Add Profile].
• Press [SearchCondition] so that you can search by the paper profile name (partial match), paper type, weight, and paper size.
4. When the confirmation screen appears, press [OK].

5. Press the [Paper Profile] tab, and check that the selected paper profile is copied.
• 500 paper profiles can be registered at maximum.
6. Press [Paper Setting] on the [MACHINE] screen.

7. Select the tray that you configure, and press [Recall].
E-78
8. Select the paper profile, and press [OK].
1.17 UK-301 Automatic Inspection test chart

1.17.1 Outline
• With the Automatic Inspection test chart, you can check the inspection level using the actual printed paper. (Example: The size of spot
which is detected as an image trouble.)
• When you install the UK-301 or a user inquires about the inspection level, provide this test chart for a user and explain its usage. With this
test chart, check the inspection level together with a user.
• Test chart
• Reference chart (PDF)
• Inspection chart (PDF)
1.17.2 Principle
• There are two types of test charts.
• Reference chart: There are no dots in the table.
• Inspection chart: There are dots in the table.
• The way to select a reference image is different from the normal way.
• For a normal Automatic Inspection job: The image of the job is used as a reference image.
• For the Automatic Inspection job that uses this test chart: A different image from the job is used as a reference image.
• By comparing the reference chart with the inspection chart, the dots in the inspection chart are forcibly detected as a difference.
• Among the dots of the difference, out-of-range dots are detected as an image problem.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] Reference chart [2] Inspection chart
E-79
[3] Difference -
1.17.3 How to use
(1) Preparation
1. Press [Common Setting].
[Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [Common Setting]
2. Configure each item as follows:
• [Automatic Reprint when Deviation/Out of Range was Detected]: [OFF]
• [Output Tray for Out of Range]: [Same as the Job]
• [Create Auto Inspection Report]: [ON]
(2) Inspection level setting

1. Press [Detail Setting] in [Automatic Inspection Level Setting].
[Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [Common Setting] → [Automatic Inspection Level Setting]
2. Change each setting in the [Standard] to the value that you want to check the inspection level.
(3) Creating the reference image

1. Open the reference chart (PDF file).
2. Store the reference chart in the main body as a hold job.

3. In the Job Ticket of the hold job in step 2, configure each item as follows.
• [Inspection Setting]: [ON]
• [Reference Image Setting]: [Create New]
• [Inspection Level Setting]: [Standard]
E-80
4. Perform proof printing.
5. Check the print output and confirm that there are no image troubles.
6. Press the start button and print the job.
Note
▪ When you stop the job, the reference image is not stored.
(4) Performing the inspection

1. Open the inspection chart (PDF).
Note
▪ This chart is different from the chart that was used in "(3) Creating the reference image".
▪ This chart has dots in the table.
2. Store the inspection chart in the main body as a hold job.

3. In the Job Ticket of the hold job in step 2, configure each item as follows.
• [Inspection Setting]: [ON]
• [Reference Image Setting]: [Use Registered Image], [PDF file name of the reference chart]
• [Inspection Level Setting]: [Standard]
Note
▪ Do not select the hold job that was created in "(3) Creating the reference image", but select the hold job that was created in
step 2.
▪ In [Reference Image Setting], select the reference image that was created in "(3) Creating the reference image".
E-81
4. Output the job.

Note
▪ The inspection result possibly changes according to small density fluctuations of every prints. Output 3 to 5 sheets.
(5) Checking the Automatic Inspection report

1. Access the Web Utilities of the UK-301. (http://xx.xx.xx.xx)("xx.xx.xx.xx" is the IP address of the UK-301.)
2. Press [List of Auto Image Inspection Report].
• User name: webuser
• Password: Web access password for the UK-301 (configured by a user)
3. Press [Report] of the inspection chart.
4. Select the out-of-range image report.

Note
▪ The out-of-range image report is not created when there is no image trouble.
5. In the PDF file, red circles are added to the dots that have been detected as an image trouble.
E-82
Note
▪ Whether the red circles are added or not added depends on the setting level that you configured in"(2) Inspection level
setting".
▪ The inspection result possibly changes according to small density fluctuations of every prints. Check the result by taking
the average of 3 to 5 sheets.
(6) Changing the inspection level and performing the inspection again

1. Change the inspection level in the same procedure as "(2) Inspection level setting".
Example: [Spot Detection Level]: 4 to 6
2. Output the hold job (inspection chart) that was used in "(4) Performing the inspection".
3. Check the inspection result in the same procedure as "(5) Checking the Automatic Inspection report".
E-83
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
1.1 Maintenance item
1.1.1 Procedure of the periodical maintenance
Note
▪ For the procedure of the periodic maintenance, refer to F.4 AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc,
AccurioPrint C3070L.
1.1.2 Condition of the count

Note
▪ For the condition of the count, refer to I.4.6.17 Special Parts Counter.
1.1.3 Life extension for the periodically replaced parts

(1) Purpose
Depress the early replacement of the parts whose quality and the state is good.
Extending parts life can reduce the cost of replacement parts and the number of visits to customers.
(2) Function
When you change the setting of DIPSW99-6 or DIPSW99-7, the life of the particular periodically replaced parts is extended. (The limit value of
the special parts counter is extended.)
• No life extension (DIPSW99-6=0, DIPSW99-7=0 (default) or DIPSW99-6=1, DIPSW99-7=1)
• Life extension 1: (DIPSW99-6=1, DIPSW99-7=0)
• Life extension 2: (DIPSW99-6=0, DIPSW99-7=1)
(3) Usage
Change the setting depending on the image quality that a user requires.
• Recommended user example
• Life extension 1: Commercial printing
• Life extension 2: In-house printing
Note
▪ "No life extension" is recommended for users who are concerned about image quality, regardless of the industry where they
work.
▪ When a part life is extended, its performance is not guaranteed.
(4) Special parts counter (AccurioPress C3080, C3080P, C83hc)

Unit Parts name Parts number Quantity Special parts Life (count)
counter number No life extension Life extension 1 Life extension 2
(DIPSW99-6=0, (DIPSW99-6=1, (DIPSW99-6=0,
DIPSW99-7=0 DIPSW99-7=0) DIPSW99-7=1)
(default) or
DIPSW99-6=1,
DIPSW99-7=1)
Intermediate Toner collection A1DUR71C## 1 52 222,000 480,000 480,000
transfer section sheet
Transfer belt A50UR70K## 1 53 222,000 480,000 480,000
cleaning blade
Side seal A50U5316## 2 60 222,000 480,000 480,000
Intermediate A1DU5042## 1 50 444,000 750,000 750,000
transfer belt
Intermediate A9VE5001## 1 557 444,000 750,000 750,000
transfer belt/H
transfer belt/C
1st transfer A50U5012## 1 55 444,000 792,000 1,000,000
roller/Y
1st transfer A50U5012## 1 56 444,000 792,000 1,000,000
roller/M
1st transfer A50U5012## 1 57 444,000 792,000 1,000,000
roller/C
1st transfer A50U5012## 1 58 444,000 792,000 1,000,000
roller/K
2nd transfer A50U5200## 1 75 468,000 800,000 1,000,000
roller/Lw
Separation A50UR70B## 1 76 468,000 800,000 2,000,000
discharging
plate unit
F-1
(default) or
DIPSW99-6=1,
DIPSW99-7=1)
2nd transfer A50U5004## 1 59 444,000 950,000 1,150,000
roller/Up
Transfer belt A50UR706## 1 51 888,000 1,450,000 1,760,000
cleaning unit
Developing Developing unit/ A50UR702## 1 37 1,350,000 1,440,000 2,100,000
section Y
Developing unit/ A50UR702## 1 39 1,350,000 1,440,000 2,100,000
M
C
K
Developer/Y A3VX700 1 29 1,350,000 1,350,000 1,500,000
A3VX760
(ColorPress83,
83hc)
Developer/M A3VX800 1 31 1,350,000 1,350,000 1,500,000
(C3080,
C3080P)
A3VX801
(C83hc: For the
regions except
Europe)
A3VX851
(C83hc: Only for
Europe)
A3VX860
(ColorPress83)
A3VX861
(ColorPress83h
c)
Developer/C A3VX900 1 33 1,350,000 1,350,000 1,500,000
(C3080,
C3080P)
A3VX901
(C83hc)
A3VX960
(ColorPress83)
A3VX961
(ColorPress83h
c)
Developer/K A3VX600 1 35 1,350,000 1,350,000 1,500,000
A3VX660
(ColorPress83,
83hc)
Fusing section Fusing paper A1DU7225## 2 87 1,200,000 1,320,000 2,400,000
exit roller/Up
Fusing roller/Lw A50U7655## 1 84 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
Fusing bearing/ 26NA5371## 2 89 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
Lw
Fusing gear/2 A03U8095## 1 94 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
Fusing A50UR72U## 1 97 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
separating claw
assy
Fusing heater A9VEM31A## 1 98 3,000,000 Not required Not required
lamp 1 assy/Up (Japan) maintenance maintenance
A9VEM31E##
(North America)
A9VEM31F##
(Europe)
F-2
(5) Special parts counter (AccurioPress C3070, C3070P, C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L)

(default) or
DIPSW99-6=1,
DIPSW99-7=1)
Photo conductor Drum unit/K A5WH0Y0## 1 27 420,000 460,000 460,000
section (C3070,
C3070P, C73hc)
A5WJ0Y0##
(C3070L)
Intermediate Toner collection A1DUR71C## 1 52 220,000 480,000 480,000
transfer section sheet
Transfer belt A50UR70K## 1 53 220,000 480,000 480,000
cleaning blade
Side seal A50U5316## 2 60 220,000 480,000 480,000
Intermediate A1DU5042## 1 50 440,000 750,000 750,000
transfer belt
transfer belt/H
transfer belt/C
1st transfer A50U5012## 1 55 440,000 792,000 1,000,000
roller/Y
1st transfer A50U5012## 1 56 440,000 792,000 1,000,000
roller/M
1st transfer A50U5012## 1 57 440,000 792,000 1,000,000
roller/C
1st transfer A50U5012## 1 58 440,000 792,000 1,000,000
roller/K
2nd transfer A50U5200## 1 75 440,000 800,000 1,000,000
roller/Lw
Separation A50UR70B## 1 76 440,000 800,000 2,000,000
discharging
plate unit
2nd transfer A50U5004## 1 59 444,000 950,000 1,150,000
roller/Up
Transfer belt A50UR706## 1 51 880,000 1,450,000 1,760,000
cleaning unit
Developing Developing unit/ A50UR702## 1 37 1,200,000 1,440,000 2,100,000
section Y
M
C
K
Developer/Y A3VX700 1 29 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
A3VX760
(ColorPress83,
83hc)
Developer/M A3VX800 1 31 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
(C3080,
C3080P)
A3VX801
(C83hc: For the
regions except
Europe)
A3VX851
(C83hc: Only for
Europe)
A3VX860
(ColorPress83)
A3VX861
(ColorPress83h
c)
F-3
(default) or
DIPSW99-6=1,
DIPSW99-7=1)
Developer/C A3VX900 1 33 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
(C3080,
C3080P)
A3VX901
(C83hc)
A3VX960
(ColorPress83)
A3VX961
(ColorPress83h
c)
Developer/K A3VX600 1 35 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
A3VX660
(ColorPress83,
83hc)
Fusing section Fusing paper A1DU7225## 2 87 1,200,000 1,320,000 2,400,000
exit roller/Up
Fusing roller/Lw A50U7655## 1 84 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
Fusing bearing/ 26NA5371## 2 89 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
Lw
Fusing gear/2 A03U8095## 1 94 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
Fusing A50UR72U## 1 97 1,200,000 1,200,000 1,500,000
separating claw
assy
Fusing heater A9VEM31A## 1 98 3,000,000 Not required Not required
lamp 1 assy/Up (Japan) maintenance maintenance
A9VEM31E##
(North America)
A9VEM31F##
(Europe)
1.2 AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc
Note
▪ The following table shows the maintenance cycle for DIPSW99-6/7=0/0 (default).
▪ For the differences of the DIPSW replacement cycle, refer to F.1.1.3 Life extension for the periodically replaced parts.
1.2.1 Total counter
(1) Every 400,000 counts
No. Unit classification Description Quant Implementation classification Remark
ity Cleani Check Lubrica Replac
ng tion e
1 External section Filter box 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A50UR70A## (special parts counter)
F.3 LIFE VALUE

ng tion e
1 External section Developing dust-proof filter/1 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A50U1689## (special parts counter)
Developing dust-proof filter/2 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
A50U1695##
PH dust-proof filter 1 ●
A50U1688##
Electric component cooling filter 1 ●
A50U1099##
suction dust-proof filter 1 ●
A50U1649##
F-4
1.2.2 Special parts counter

ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber ● Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Separation roller rubber ●
Pick-up roller ●

ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Slide sheet ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
· Be sure to clean them at the
same time with the replacement
of the paper feed roller rubber
and the separation roller rubber.
Paper feed roller rubber 2 ●
25SA4096##
Separation roller rubber 2 ●
25SA4096##

ng tion e
1 Toner collection Waste toner box 1 ● The sensor detects its full
section A50UR701## automatically.

ng tion e
1 Write section Dust proof glass/Y, dust proof glass/ ● · Service tool: Hydro-wipe
M, dust proof glass/C, dust proof · Be sure to clean them at the
glass/K same time with the replacement
of the charging corona.
2 Charging section Charging corona/Y 1 ● ● · Actual replacement: 100%
A50UR703## (special parts counter)
Charging corona/M 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
● ●
A50UR703## ·Execute the cleaning when it is
dirty.
Charging corona/C 1 ● ●
A50UR703##
Charging corona/K 1 ● ●
A50UR703##
3 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy ● Service tool: Blower brush,
cleaning pad, isopropyl alcohol
Loop roller ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Loop driven roller ● · Be sure to clean them at the
4 Fusing section Fusing separating claw assy ● same time with the cleaning of
the registration cleaning sheet
assy.

ng tion e
1 Photo conductor Around the process unit ● Be sure to clean the process unit
section when you pull it out.
2 Intermediate transfer Toner collection sheet 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A1DUR71C## (special parts counter)
Transfer belt cleaning blade 1 F.4 LIFE VALUE
●
F-5

ng tion e
A50UR70K##
Side seal 2 ●
A50U5316##

ng tion e
1 Reverse and exit Reverse de-curler roller 1 ●
section A50U8605##

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer Cleaning sheet ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
section isopropyl alcohol
Tension roller ● · Be sure to clean them at the
Belt driven roller ● same time with the replacement
of the intermediate transfer belt.
Assist roller ●
2nd transfer unit ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
1st transfer roller/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
1st transfer roller/M 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
A50U5012##
1st transfer roller/C 1 ●
A50U5012##
1st transfer roller/K 1 ●
A50U5012##
2nd transfer roller/Up 1 ●
A50U5004##
Intermediate transfer belt 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A1DU5042## (Normal) (special parts counter)
A9VE5001## (H) F.3 LIFE VALUE
A9VE5002##(C)*1 You can distinguish by the color
of the connectors.
*1 For the service part.

ng tion e
1 Photo conductor Drum unit/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 460,000
section counts (quantity) or 100%
Drum unit/M 1 ● (distance), whichever is earlier
Drum unit/C 1 ● F.3 LIFE VALUE
A5WH0Y0## (C3080, C3080P,
Drum unit/K 1 ● C83hc)

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer 2nd transfer roller/Lw 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A50U5200## (special parts counter)
Separate Discharging Unit 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
A50UR70B##
F-6

ng tion e
1 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy 1 ●
A50UR70D##
2 Fusing section Fusing paper exit roller/Lw ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Fusing paper exit roller/Up ● · Be sure to clean them at the
of the fusing belt assy.
Heat insulating sleeve/Lw 2 ● ● Service tool: Fluotribo MH
A50U7563##
Fusing gear/1 1 ● ●
A50U7527##
Fusing gear/2 ●
A50U7522##
Fusing belt assy 1 ●
A9VER704##

Nu Unit classification Description Quant Implementation classification Remark
mbe ity Cleani Check Lubrica Replac
r ng tion ement
1 Charge control Charging roller/Up 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A85C8990## (special parts counter)
F.3 LIFE VALUE
Charging roller/Lw ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
· Clean them at the same time
with the replacement of the
charging roller/Up.

ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 2 ●
A1DUR71J##

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A50UR706## (special parts counter)
F.3 LIFE VALUE
Transfer belt separation claw 3 ●
A1DUR719##
(14) Every 1,000,000 counts

ng tion e
1 Reverse and exit Paper Exit Decurler Roller 1 ●
section A50U8908##
Paper exit drive gear /1 1 ●
A03U9095##
Paper exit gear 1 ●
A50U8997##
2 Charge control Paper exit drive gear/2 1 ●
section A0439099##
F-7

ng tion e
1 Fusing section Fusing paper exit roller/Up 2 ●
A1DU7225##
Fusing Bearing/Lw 2 ● ● Service tool: Fluotribo MH
26NA5371##
A03U8095##
Fusing Roller/Lw 1 ●
A50U7655##
Fusing separating claw assy 5 ●
A50UR72U##

ng tion e
1 Developing section Developer/Y 1 ● Be sure to replace it together
A3VX700 with the developing unit at the
A3VX760 (ColorPress83, 83hc) same time.
Developer/M 1 ●
A3VX800 (C3080, C3080P)
A3VX801 (C83hc: Other than
Europe)
A3VX851 (C83hc: Europe only)
A3VX860 (ColorPress83)
A3VX861 (ColorPress83hc)
Developer/C 1 ●
A3VX900 (C3080, C3080P)
A3VX901 (C83hc)
A3VX960 (ColorPress83)
A3VX961 (ColorPress83hc)
Developer/K 1 ●
A3VX600
A3VX660 (ColorPress83, 83hc)
Developing unit/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
Developing unit/M 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
A50UR702##
Developing unit/C 1 ●
A50UR702##
Developing unit/K 1 ●
A50UR702##

ng tion e
1 Registration section Registration roller 1 ●
A50U7101##
Registration Roller Bearing 2 ●
A03U8128##
Registration swing home sensor 1 ● · Service tool: blower brush
(PS20) · Be sure to clean it at the same
time with the replacement of the
registration roller and the
registration roller bearing.
Centering sensor (PS1) 1 ● · Service tool: Hydro-wipe
· Be sure to clean it at the same
F-8

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer Belt separation claw solenoid (SD2) 1 ●
section 26NA8251##

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer 2nd transfer earth plate assy 2 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A50UR70G## (special parts counter)
C-clip 2 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
V218060086

ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch 2 ●
56AA8201##
Pre-registration clutch 2 ●
56AA8201##
2 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch/1 1 ●
section (CL5)
56AA8201##
3 Duplex section Intermediate conveyance clutch/2 1 ●
(CL6)
56AA8201##
Intermediate conveyance clutch/3 1 ●
(CL7)
56AA8201##

ng tion e
1 Registration section Registration idler gear 1 ●
A50U7137##

ng tion e
1 Fusing section Fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up 1 ●
A9VEM31A## (Japan)
A9VEM31E## (North America)
A9VEM31F## (Europe)
Fusing heater lamp 2 assy/Up 1 ●
A9VEM33A## (Japan)
A9VEM33F## (Europe)
Fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3) 1 ●
A50UR70F##
A50UR70E##

ng tion e
1 Charge control Charging roller bearing/Fr 1 ●
section A1RF5089##
Charging roller bearing/Rr 1 ●
F-9

ng tion e
A85C8972##

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer roller bearing/Y, transfer 6 ●
section roller bearing/M and transfer roller
bearing/C
65AA2638##
Transfer Roller Bearing/K 2 ●
A50U5057##
1.3 AccurioPress C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L

Note
▪ The following table shows the maintenance cycle for DIPSW99-6/7=0/0 (default).
▪ For the differences of the DIPSW replacement cycle, refer to F.1.1.3 Life extension for the periodically replaced parts.
1.3.1 Total counter
ng tion e
1 External section Filter box 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A50UR70A## (special parts counter)
F.3 LIFE VALUE

ng tion e
1 External section Developing dust-proof filter/1 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
Developing dust-proof filter/2 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
A50U1695##
PH dust-proof filter 1 ●
A50U1688##
Electric component cooling filter 1 ●
A50U1099##
suction dust-proof filter 1 ●
A50U1649##

ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber ● Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Separation roller rubber ●
Pick-up roller ●

ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Slide sheet ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
of the paper feed roller rubber
and the separation roller rubber.
F-10

ng tion e
Paper feed roller rubber 2 ●
25SA4096##
Separation roller rubber 2 ●
25SA4096##

ng tion e
1 Toner collection Waste toner box 1 ● The sensor detects its full
section A50UR701## automatically.

ng tion e
1 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy ● Service tool: Blower brush,
cleaning pad, isopropyl alcohol
Loop roller ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Loop driven roller ● · Be sure to clean them at the
2 Fusing section Fusing separating claw assy ● same time with the cleaning of
assy.

ng tion e
1 Charging section Charging corona/Y 1 ● ● Actual replacement: 100%
Charging corona/M 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
● ●
A50UR703##
Charging corona/C 1 ● ●
A50UR703##
Charging corona/K 1 ● ●
A50UR703##
2 Write section Dust proof glass/Y, dust proof glass/ ● · Service tool: Hydro-wipe
M, dust proof glass/C, dust proof · Be sure to clean them at the
glass/K same time with the replacement
of the charging corona.

ng tion e
1 Photo conductor Around the process unit ● Be sure to clean the process unit
section when you pull it out.
2 Intermediate transfer Toner collection sheet 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A1DUR71C## (special parts counter)
Transfer belt cleaning blade 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
A50UR70K##
Side seal 2 ●
A50U5316##

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer 2nd transfer unit ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
F-11

ng tion e
2 Reverse and exit Reverse de-curler roller 1 ●
section A50U8605##

ng tion e
1 Photo conductor Drum unit/K 1 ● Actual replacement: 420,000
(distance), whichever is earlier
F.3 LIFE VALUE
A5WH0Y0## (C3070, C3070P,
C73hc)
A5WJ0Y0## (C3070L)

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer Cleaning sheet ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
Tension roller ● · Be sure to clean them at the
Belt driven roller ● same time with the replacement
of the intermediate transfer belt.
Assist roller ●
1st transfer roller/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
1st transfer roller/M 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
A50U5012##
1st transfer roller/C 1 ●
A50U5012##
1st transfer roller/K 1 ●
A50U5012##
2nd transfer roller/Up 1 ●
A50U5004##
Intermediate transfer belt 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
A1DU5042## (special parts counter)
A9VE5001## (/H) F.3 LIFE VALUE
A9VE5002##(/C)*1 You can distinguish by the color
of the connectors.
*1 For the service part.
2nd transfer roller/Lw 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
Separate Discharging Unit 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
A50UR70B##

ng tion e
1 Photo conductor Drum unit/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 460,000
Drum unit/M 1 ● (distance), whichever is earlier
Drum unit/C 1 ● F.3 LIFE VALUE
A5WH0Y0## (C3070, C3070P,
C73hc)
A5WJ0Y0## (C3070L)

ng tion e
1 Registration section Registration cleaning sheet assy 1 ●
A50UR70D##
F-12

ng tion e
isopropyl alcohol
of the fusing belt assy.
Heat insulating sleeve/Lw 2 ● ● Service tool: Fluotribo MH
A50U7563##
A50U7527##
Fusing gear/2 ●
A50U7522##
Fusing belt assy 1 ●
A9VER704##

ng tion e
1 Charge control Charging roller/Up 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A85C8990## (special parts counter)
F.3 LIFE VALUE
Charging roller/Lw ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
charging roller/Up.

ng tion e
A1DUR71J##

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A50UR706## (special parts counter)
F.3 LIFE VALUE

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer belt separation claw 3 ●
section A1DUR719##

ng tion e
1 Reverse and exit Paper Exit Decurler Roller 1 ●
section A50U8908##
Paper exit drive gear /1 1 ●
A03U9095##
Paper exit gear 1 ●
A50U8997##
2 Charge control Paper exit drive gear/2 1 ●
section A0439099##
F-13

ng tion e
1 Developing section Developer/Y 1 ● Be sure to replace it together
A3VX700 with the developing unit at the
A3VX760 (ColorPress73, 73L) same time.
Developer/M 1 ●
A3VX800 (C3070, C3070P, C3070L)
A3VX801 (C73hc)
A3VX860 (ColorPress73, 73L)
Developer/C 1 ●
A3VX900 (C3070, C3070P, C3070L)
A3VX901 (C73hc)
Developer/K 1 ●
A3VX600
Developing unit/Y 1 ● Actual replacement: 100%
Developing unit/M 1 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
A50UR702##
Developing unit/C 1 ●
A50UR702##
Developing unit/K 1 ●
A50UR702##
2 Fusing section Fusing paper exit roller/Up 2 ●
A1DU7225##
Fusing Bearing/Lw 2 ● ● Service tool: Fluotribo MH
26NA5371##
A03U8095##
A50U7655##
A50UR72U##

ng tion e
1 Registration section Registration roller 1 ●
A50U7101##
Registration Roller Bearing 2 ●
A03U8128##
Registration swing home sensor 1 ● · Service tool: blower brush
(PS20) · Be sure to clean it at the same

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer 2nd transfer earth plate assy 2 ● Actual replacement: 100%
section A50UR70G## (special parts counter)
C-clip 2 F.3 LIFE VALUE
●
V218060086

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer Belt separation claw solenoid (SD2) 1 ●
section 26NA8251##
F-14

ng tion e
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
2 Vertical conveyance Intermediate conveyance clutch/1 1 ●
section (CL5)
56AA8201##
3 Duplex section Intermediate conveyance clutch/2 1 ●
(CL6)
56AA8201##
Intermediate conveyance clutch/3 1 ●
(CL7)
56AA8201##

ng tion e
1 Registration section Registration idler gear 1 ●
A50U7137##

ng tion e
1 Fusing section Fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up 1 ●
A9VEM31A## (Japan)
A9VEM31F## (Europe)
Fusing heater lamp 2 assy/Up 1 ●
A9VEM33A## (Japan)
A9VEM33F## (Europe)
A50UR70F##
A50UR70E##

ng tion e
1 Charge control Charging roller bearing/Fr 1 ●
section A1RF5089##
Charging roller bearing/Rr 1 ●
A85C8972##

ng tion e
1 Intermediate transfer Transfer roller bearing/Y, transfer 6 ●
section roller bearing/M and transfer roller
bearing/C
65AA2638##
Transfer Roller Bearing/K 2 ●
A50U5057##
F-15
1.4 DF-706
r ng tion e
1 Preparation Paper feed and image conditions ● Be sure to check the conditions
at the same time with the
cleaning of the pick-up roller.
Appearance ● ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
· Be sure to clean and check
them at the same time with the
cleaning of the pick-up roller.
2 Paper feed section Pick-up roller ● Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Reflective sensor section ● · Service tool: blower brush
same time with the cleaning of
the pick-up roller.
Paper feed roller ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Separation roller ● · Be sure to clean them at the
3 Conveyance section Miscellaneous rollers and rolls ● same time with the cleaning of
the pick-up roller.
4 Scanning section Face reading guide ●

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Torque limiter ● Be sure to clean them at the
the pick-up roller.
Pick-up roller 2 ● Replace those three parts at the
9J073301## same time.
Paper feed roller 1 ●
A00J5636##
Separation roller 1 ●
9J073409##
1.5 PF-602m
1.5.1 Total counter
r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pick-up rubber ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Paper feed roller ●
Separation roller ●
PF separation gear section ● (●) Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad, Multemp FF-RM
2 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance roller/1 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Horizontal conveyance roller/1 ●

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pick-up rubber 2 ●
A03X5652##
A03X5653##
F-16
A03X5654##

r ng tion e
56AA8201##
Separation clutch 2 ●
56AA8201##
2 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance clutch/1 1 ●
56AA8201##
Vertical conveyance clutch/2 1 ●
56AA8201##
Vertical conveyance clutch/3 1 ●
56AA8201##
Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 1 ●
56AA8201##
Horizontal conveyance clutch/2 1 ●
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
1.6 PF-707m (1st tandem)

1.6.1 Periodical maintenance
(1) Every 210,000 counts*1 or 200,000 counts*2
ng tion e
1 Horizontal Horizontal conveyance guide plate ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad
conveyance section · Be sure to clean it at the same
2 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance guide plate time with the replacement of the
●
section transfer belt cleaning blade of
the main body.
*1 C3080, C3080P, C83hc
*2 C3070, C3070P, C73hc and C3070L

ng tion e
1 Horizontal Horizontal conveyance clutch/1 2 ● Actual replacement: 3,000,000
conveyance section (CL8), /2 (CL9) counts (special parts counter)
A03UM201##
Each roller ●
2 Vertical conveyance Each roller ●
section

ng tion e
1 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch/3 2 ● Actual replacement: 2,000,000
section (CL5), /4 (CL6) counts (special parts counter)
56AA8201##

ng tion e
1 Horizontal Roller pressure release motor (M10) 1 ● Actual replacement: 5,000,000
conveyance section A55CR702## counts (special parts counter)
F-17

ng tion e
1 Horizontal Pre-registration roller bearing 2 ● Actual replacement: 6,000,000
conveyance section A00V2406## counts (special parts counter)
Pre-registration roller 1 ●
A55C7101##
Horizontal conveyance roller 2 ●
bearing/1
A03U8128##
Horizontal conveyance roller/1 1 ●
A55C7135##
bearing/2
A03U8128##
A55C7135##
2 Paper feed suction Suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), /2 3 ● Actual replacement: 2,000,000
56AA8201##
3 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance clutch/1 3 ●
section (CL3), /2 (CL4), exit clutch/1 (CL1)
56AA8201##
Exit clutch/2 (CL2) 1 ●
56AA8201##

ng tion e
1 Horizontal Loop roller/Up 1 ● Actual replacement: 6,000,000
conveyance section A1RG7161## counts (special parts counter)

ng tion e
1 Paper feed tray Loop roller/Lw 1 ● Actual replacement: 6,000,000
section A1RG6075## counts (special parts counter)
2 Loop roller bearing/Lw 2 ●
A03U8128##
1.7 PF-707m (2nd tandem)

ng tion e
conveyance section · Be sure to clean it at the same
2 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance guide plate time with the replacement of the
●
section transfer belt cleaning blade of
the main body.
*1 C3080, C3080P, C83hc
*2 C3070, C3070P, C73hc and C3070L

ng tion e
A03UM201##
Each roller ●
F-18

ng tion e
section

ng tion e
56AA8201##

ng tion e
A55C7101##
bearing/1
A03U8128##
A55C7135##
bearing/2
A03U8128##
A55C7135##
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
56AA8201##

ng tion e

ng tion e
A03U8128##
1.8 PF-707m (3rd tandem)

ng tion e
conveyance section
F-19

ng tion e
2 Vertical conveyance Vertical conveyance guide plate ● · Be sure to clean it at the same
section time with the replacement of the
transfer belt cleaning blade of
the main body.
*1 C3080, C3080P, C83hc
*2 C3070, C3070P, C73hc and C3070L

ng tion e
A03UM201##
Each roller ●
section

ng tion e
56AA8201##

ng tion e
A55C7101##
bearing/1
A03U8128##
A55C7135##
bearing/2
A03U8128##
A55C7135##
56AA8201##
56AA8201##
56AA8201##

ng tion e
F-20

ng tion e
A03U8128##
1.9 FA-502 (connected to the 1st tandem of PF-707m)

ng tion e
1 Tandem conveyance Tandem conveyance clutch/1 5 ● Actual replacement: 3,000,000
section (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 counts (special parts counter)
(CL13), /5 (CL14)
A03UM201##
Each roller ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad
tandem conveyance clutch.
1.10 FA-502 (connected to the 2nd tandem of PF-707m)

ng tion e
1 Tandem conveyance Tandem conveyance clutch/1 5 ● Actual replacement: 3,000,000
section (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 counts (special parts counter)
(CL13), /5 (CL14)
A03UM201##
Each roller ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad
tandem conveyance clutch.
1.11 LU-202m
1.11.1 Total counter
r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller ● Service tool: Isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Pre-registration roller ●
Paper dust removing brush ●
LU separation gear ● (●) Service tool: Isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad, multemp FF-RM

r ng tion e
A03X5652##
A03X5653##
F-21
A03X5654##

r ng tion e
56AA8201##
56AA8201##

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pre-registration roller 1 ●
A03W6206##
1.12 LU-202XL
r ng tion e
cleaning pad
cleaning pad, MH surf

r ng tion e
A03X5652##
A03X5653##
A03X5654##

r ng tion e
57GA8201##
57GA8201##

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pre-registration roller 1 ●
A03W6206##
F-22
1.13 LU-202XLm
ng tion e
cleaning pad
cleaning pad, multemp FF-RM

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 1 ● Actual replacement: 300,000
A03X5652## counts (special parts counter)
A03X5653##
A03X5654##

ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch (CL101) 1 ● Actual replacement: 2,000,000
57GA8201## counts (special parts counter)
Pre-registration clutch (CL102) 1 ●
57GA8201##

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pre-registration roller 1 ● Actual replacement: 3,000,000
A03W6206## counts (special parts counter)
1.14 MB-506
r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber/BP ● Service tool: cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Pick-up roller/BP ●
Separation roller rubber/BP ●

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller rubber/BP 1 ●
25SA4096##
Separation roller rubber/BP 1 ●
25SA4096##
F-23

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller/BP 1 ●
A21ER703##

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch/BP (CL14) 1 ●
56AA8201##
1.15 MB-508
Num Unit classification Description Quant Implementation classification Remark
ber ity Cleani Check Lubric Replac
ng ation e
1 Bypass paper feed Paper feed roller/BP 1 ● Actual replacement: 150,000
section 55VAR745## counts (special parts counter)
Separation roller/BP 1 ●
55VAR745##

ng ation e
1 Bypass paper feed Pick-up roller/BP 1 ● Actual replacement: 450,000
section 55VAR746## counts (special parts counter)

ng ation e
1 Preparation Paper conveyance check ●
2 Relay conveyance Pre-registration roller/BP ● Service tool: Isopropyl alcohol,
section cleaning pad
Exit roller/BP ●
Intermediate conveyance roller/BP ●
Bypass conveyance sensor/BP1 ● Service tool: Blower brush
(PS1), /BP2 (PS2)
Pre-registration sensor/BP (PS3) ●
Relay exit sensor/BP (PS4) ●
Relay conveyance sensor/BP1 ●
(PS5), /BP2 (PS6)
Horizontal conveyance guide plate ● Service tool: Cleaning pad
3 Final check Paper conveyance check ●
Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: Isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad

ity Cleani Check Lubric Replac
ng ation e
1 Bypass paper feed Paper feed clutch/BP (CL3) 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,500,000
section 57GA8201## counts (special parts counter)
2 Relay conveyance Pre-registration clutch/BP (CL1) 1 ●
section 57GA8201##
Intermediate conveyance clutch/BP 1 ●
(CL2)
57GA8201##
F-24

ng ation e
1 Bypass paper feed Up down motor/BP (M4) 1 ● Actual replacement: 2,000,000
section A2X0M121## counts (special parts counter)

ng ation e
1 Bypass paper feed Torque limiter/BP 1 ● Actual replacement: 6,000,000
section A03X5656## counts (special parts counter)
2 Relay conveyance Pre-registration roller/BP 1 ●
section A79A7031##
Exit roller/BP 1 ●
AA017032##
Intermediate conveyance roller/BP 1 ●
A79A7033##
Conveyance torque limiter/BP 1 ●
57GA4430##

ng ation e
1 Bypass paper feed Lift clutch/BP 1 ● Actual replacement: 12,000,000
section A79A6034## counts (special parts counter)

ng ation e
1 Relay conveyance Pre-registration roller bushing/BP 2 ● Actual replacement: 18,000,000
section 55VA7554## counts (special parts counter)
Intermediate conveyance roller 2 ●
bushing/BP
55VA7554##
Exit roller bearing/BP 2 ●
A00J6179##
Lift sheet/BP 1 ●
A79A7062##
1.16 OT-510
r ng tion e
1 Preparation Original through check ●
2 Paper conveyance FNS entrance roller ● Service tool: Isopropyl alcohol,
FNS entrance sensor ● Service tool: Blower brush
4 Main tray section Main tray upper limit sensor (PS14) ● Service tool: Blower brush
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) ●
Rubber surface at the lower side of ● Service tool: Isopropyl alcohol,
the gripper, Winding rubber at the cleaning pad
lower side of the gripper
Up down tray drive section ● Service tool: Molykote EM-30L
Paper exit alignment plate shaft ● ● Service tool: Isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad, MH surf, or
Molykote EM-30L
5 Final check Original through check ●
F-25
Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: Isopropyl alcohol,

cleaning pad
1.17 EF-103
(1) Every 210,000 counts (C3080, C3080P), every 200,000 counts (C3070, C3070L)
r ng tion e
1 Fusing section Fusing separating claw assy ● · Service tool: cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
assy of the main body.

ng tion e
isopropyl alcohol
of the fusing belt.
Fusing Belt 1 ●
A57V7202##
Fusing gear/1 ● Service tool: Fluotribo MH
Fusing gear/2 ●

ng tion e
1 Fusing section Heat insulating sleeve/Lw1, heat 4 ● ● Service tool: Fluotribo MH
insulating sleeve/Lw2
A50U7563##
Belt regulating sleeve 2 ●
A50U7241##
Fusing paper exit roller/Up 2 ●
A50U7609##
Heat insulating sleeve/Up 2 ● ● Service tool: Fluotribo MH
A03U7295##
Fusing bearing/Lw1, fusing bearing/ 4 ● ●
Lw2
26NA5371##
A50U7527##
Fusing Bearing/Up 2 ● ●
A1UD7235##
A03U8095##
A50U7522##
Fusing Roller/1 1 ●
A57V7201##
A57V7401##
Fusing Roller/2 1 ●
A50U7205##
A50UR72U##
Neutralizing ring 1 ●
A50U7337##
Neutralizing flat spring assy 1 ●
F-26
A50UR733##

r ng tion e
1 Fusing section Fusing heater lamp assy/Up 1 ●
A50UM31A## (Japan)
A50UM31E## (North America)
A50UM31F## (Europe)
A50UR70F##
A50UR70E##
1.18 OT-511
r ng tion e
1 Output tray section Paper exit roller 1 ●
A0438907##
Paper exit driven roller/2 4 ●
65AA4818##
Paper holding roller 2 ●
65AA4849##
1.19 RU-510
ng tion e
2 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ● Blower brush
Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/ cleaning pad
1.20 RU-518 (1st device)

(1) Every 220,000 counts (C3080, C3080P, C83hc), every 200,000 counts (C3070, C3070P, C73hc)
ng tion e
1 Horizontal Entrance sensor (PS1) ● Service tool: Blower brush
conveyance section
Horizontal conveyance sensor (PS2) ●
Entrance conveyance pipe ● Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Entrance conveyance roller ●
Intermediate conveyance roller ●
Horizontal conveyance pipe/1 ●
2 De-curler section De-curler section conveyance ● Service tool: Blower brush
sensor/1 (PS4)
De-curler section conveyance ●
sensor/2 (PS5)
F-27

sensor/3 (PS6)
sensor/4 (PS12)
De-curler belt/1 ● Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
De-curler belt/2 ●
De-curler roller/1 ●
3 Reverse and exit Reverse exit sensor (PS7) ● Service tool: Blower brush
section
Reverse empty sensor (PS9) ●
4 Output tray section Exit sensor (PS8) ●
Paper exit roller ● Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Paper exit roller ●
1.20.2 Spotted replacement
ng tion e
1 Output paper density Color sensor shutter solenoid (SD1) 1 ● Actual replacement: 5,000,000
detection section A1TTR704## counts (special parts counter)
Paper press solenoid (SD2) 1 ●
A1TTR704##
2 Output tray section Paper exit gate solenoid (SD3) 1 ●
A9CER703##
1.21 RU-518 (2nd device)

(1) Every 220,000 counts (C3080, C3080P, C83hc), every 200,000 counts (C3070, C3070P, C73hc)
ng tion e
1 Horizontal Entrance sensor (PS1) ● Service tool: Blower brush
conveyance section
Horizontal conveyance sensor (PS2) ●
Entrance conveyance pipe ● Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
2 De-curler section De-curler section conveyance ● Service tool: Blower brush
sensor/1 (PS4)
sensor/2 (PS5)
sensor/3 (PS6)
sensor/4 (PS12)
De-curler belt/1 ● Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
De-curler belt/2 ●
3 Reverse and exit Reverse exit sensor (PS7) ● Service tool: Blower brush
section
Reverse empty sensor (PS9) ●
4 Output tray section Exit sensor (PS8) ●
F-28
Paper exit roller ● Service tool: Cleaning pad,

isopropyl alcohol
Paper exit roller ●
r ng tion e
1 Output tray section Paper exit gate solenoid (SD3) 1 ● Actual replacement: 5,000,000
A9CER703## counts (special parts counter)
1.22 HM-103
(1) Every 220,000 counts (C3080, C3080P, C83hc), every 200,000 counts (C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L)
ng tion e
1 Humidification Humidification entrance sensor ● Service tool: Blower brush
section (PS10)
Humidification exit sensor (PS11) ●
Humidification roller/Up ● Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
Humidification roller/Lw ●
Supply roller ●
Water feed roller/Up ●
Water feed roller/Lw ●
ng tion e
1 Water supply section Water feed filter 1 ● Actual replacement: 400,000
A9CF5421## counts (special parts counter)
2 Humidification Humidification roller/Up 1 ●
section A9CF5001##
Humidification roller/Lw 1 ●
A9CF5000##
Control roller/Up 1 ●
A9CF5014##
Control roller/Lw 1 ●
A9CF5004##

r ng tion e
1 Water supply section Water storage tank ● · Service tool: Cleaning pad,
isopropyl alcohol
with the replacement of the water
feed roller/Lw.
2 Humidification Water feed roller/Lw 1 ● Actual replacement: 1,500,000
section A9CF5003## counts (special parts counter)

r ng tion e
1 Water supply section Water feed control solenoid (SD4) 1 ● Actual replacement: 5,000,000
A9CFR709## counts (special parts counter)
F-29

ng tion e
1 Water supply section Pump motor (M401) 1 ● Actual replacement: 10,000,000
A1TUR704## counts (special parts counter)
1.23 FS-531
r ng tion e
1 Conveyance section Shift roller motor ●
Paper exit opening motor ●
Bypass gate solenoid ●
2 Stacker section Paper assist roller ●
(sponge roller)

r ng tion e
1 Conveyance section Intermediate conveyance roller 6 ●
(sponge roller)
13QE4531##
2 Main tray section Paper exit roller/A 4 ●
(sponge roller)
122H4825##
Paper exit roller/B 4 ●
(sponge roller)
A04D8904##

r ng tion e
1 Stacker section Paper assist roller 1 ●
(sponge roller)
20AK4210##
Cleaning plate assy 1 ●
A07RA741##

r ng tion e
1 Stapler section Stapler unit/Fr 1 ●
A07RA735##
Stapler unit/Rr 1 ●
A07RA736##
1.24 FS-612
r ng tion e
1 Conveyance section Shift roller motor ●
Paper exit opening motor ●
Bypass gate solenoid ●
F-30
2 Stacker section Paper assist roller ●

(sponge roller)
3 Half-Fold/ Folding knife motor ●
Fold&Staple/tri-
Tri-folding gate solenoid ●
folding section

r ng tion e
1 Conveyance section Intermediate conveyance roller 6 ●
(sponge roller)
13QE4531##
2 Main tray section Paper exit roller/A 4 ●
(sponge roller)
122H4825##
Paper exit roller/B 4 ●
(sponge roller)
A04D8904##
3 Stapler section Stapler unit/Fr 1 ●
15JM-501##
Stapler unit/Rr 1 ●
15JM-501##

r ng tion e
1 Stacker section Paper assist roller 1 ●
(sponge roller)
20AK4210##
1.25 PI-502
r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller/Up, pick-up roller/Lw ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Paper feed roller/Up, paper feed ●
roller/Lw
Separation roller/Up, separation ●
roller/Lw

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Paper feed roller/Up, paper feed 2 ●
roller/Lw
13QNR705##
Separation roller/Up, separation 2 ●
roller/Lw
13QNR704##

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Pick-up roller/Up, pick-up roller/Lw 2 ●
50BAR701##
F-31

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Torque limiter/Up, torque limiter/Lw 2 ●
13QN4073##

r ng tion e
1 Paper feed section Paper feed clutch/Up, paper feed 2 ●
clutch/Lw
13QN8201##
1.26 IQ-501
ng tion e
1 Scanner section/ Scanner glass/1 ● · Service tool: Equipped cleaning
Scanner calibration tool
Scanner glass/2 ●
section · Cleaned by an user when the
cleaning message is displayed
on the operation panel.
Scanner B&W standard part/1 ● Service tool: Hydro-wipe
Scanner white backing/1 ●
Scanner black backing/1-1 ●
Scanner B&W standard part/2 ●
Scanner white backing/2 ●
2 Colorimeter section/ Colorimeter glass ● Service tool: Blower brush
Colorimeter
Colorimetry trigger sensor (PS013) ● Service tool: Hydro-wipe
calibration section
Colorimeter white backing ●
Colorimeter white calibration block ●
Paper temperature sensor (TEMS4) ● Service tool: Blower brush
*1 C3080, C3080P, C83hc
*2 C3070, C3070P, C73hc and C3070L
1.27 FS-532
r ng tion e
2 Paper conveyance FNS entrance roller ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
FNS pass sensor (PS1) ● Service tool: blower brush
Paper overlap sensor/1 (PS32) ●
Paper overlap sensor/2 (PS33) ●
Roller pressure motor home sensor ●
(PS34)
FNS entrance roller conveyance ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
switching cam
FNS entrance roller conveyance ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
switching gate/Up
F-32
3 Stacker section Cleaning rollers ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,

cleaning pad
Stacker empty sensor (PS28) ● Service tool: blower brush
Stacker upper sensor (PS43) ●
Staple scraps box cleaning ●
Stacker entrance roller pressure ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
entrance cam
Stack assist plate drive cam ●
Stapler shaft ●
Rear stopper shaft, metal frame ●
sliding position
4 Main tray section Main tray upper limit sensor (PS14) ● Service tool: blower brush
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) ●
The rubber surface at the lower side ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
of the gripper, the winding rubber at cleaning pad
the lower side of the gripper
Up down tray drive section ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
Paper exit alignment plate shaft ● ● Service tool: Isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad, MH surf or
Molykote EM-30L
Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad

r ng tion e
1 Stacker section Paddle 6 ●
A4F37500##

r ng tion e
1 Stapler section Staple unit 1 ●
A4F3R714##
1.28 SD-510
r ng tion e
1 Paper conveyance Rollers ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
2 Stapler section Staple guide ● ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad, MH surf
3 Half-Fold/ Knives ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
Fold&Staple/tri- cleaning pad
Folding roller ●
folding section
4 Paper exit section Paper exit belt ●

r ng tion e
1 Stapler section Staple unit 1 ●
A4F47300##
F-33

r ng tion e
1 Alignment section Paddle/1 2 ●
A4F4R70D##
Paddle/2 2 ●
A4F4R70E##
Paddle/3 2 ●
A4F4R70F##
1.29 PK-522
r ng tion e
1 Punch section Cleaning the punch edge ● Service tool: blower brush
Clean the sensor ●
1.30 MK-732
r ng tion e
1 Conveyance section Conveyance roller cleaning ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
1.31 LS-506
r ng tion e
2 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
cleaning pad

r ng tion e
1 Conveyance section Paper press solenoid/3 (SD8) 1 ●
15AV8255##
Paper press solenoid/1 (SD6) 1 ●
15AV8252##
Paper press solenoid/2 (SD7) 1 ●
15AV8251##
Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) 1 ●
15AV8253##
Stacker tray up down motor (M1) 1 ●
15AV8003##
F-34
1.32 FD-503
r ng tion e
Removing the punch unit
Removing from RU
2 Punch section Punch shaft and the punch support ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
board cleaning pad
Punch drive section ● Service tool; Molykote EM-30L
3 Post-process Installing the punch unit
Installing to RU

r. ng tion e
1 Punch section Cleaning of each sensor ●
2 PI section Cleaning of each sensor ●
3 Main tray section Cleaning of each sensor ●
4 Conveyance section Cleaning of each sensor ●
5 Final check Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad

r ng tion e
1 Final check Cleaning of the cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad

r ng tion e
1 PI section Paper feed rubber 2 ●
50BAR702##
Separation rubber 2 ●
13QNR704##

r ng tion e
1 PI section Pick-up rubber 6 ●
50BAR701##

r ng tion e
1 Conveyance section Roller solenoid/1 (SD5) 1 ●
15AGR723##
Roller solenoid/2 (SD6) 1 ●
15AGR723##
15AGR723##
F-35

15AGR723##
2 Punch section Punch unit 1 ●
A0H0R700## (Japan)
A0H0R701## (US)
A0H0R702## (Europe)
3 Folding conveyance 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) 1 ●
section 15AGR761##
4 Main tray section Tray up down motor (M11) 1 ●
129U-108##
1.33 SD-506
r ng tion e
Removing the rear cover
Removing the unit
2 Right angle Right angle conveyance sensor/1 ● Service tool: blower brush
conveyance section
Right angle conveyance sensor/2 ●
Right angle conveyance roller/1 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Right angle conveyance roller/2 ●
3 Folding section Folding main scan alignment home ● Service tool: blower brush
sensor/Fr1
Folding main scan alignment home ●
sensor/Fr2
Folding entrance roller/1 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Folding entrance roller/2 ●
Folding entrance roller/3 ●
4 Saddle stitching Saddle stitching paper sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
section
Bundle sensor/1 ●
5 Bundle processing Bundle sensor/2 ●
section
6 Trimmer section Trimmer scraps full sensor ●
Actuator ●
7 Post-process Installing the unit ●
Installing the rear cover ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
cleaning pad

r ng tion e
1 Trimmer section Paper holding screw 2 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote EM-30L
A0H26621## · Actual lubrication cycle: 37,500
cuts

r ng tion e
1 Trimmer section Trimmer board assy 1 ●
F-36
A0H2B622##

r ng tion e
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade kit 1 ● ●
A0H2R901##

r ng tion e
1 Bundle processing Bundle press stage gear 1 ●
section 15AN7719##
2 Trimmer section Trimmer press motor (M32) 1 ●
A0H2M101##

r ng tion e
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade motor (M31) 1 ●
A0H2M102##

r ng tion e
1 Saddle stitching Stapler assy 2 ●
section 15AN-550##

r ng tion e
1 Saddle stitching Slope unit 1 ●
section 15AN-500##
Saddle stitch unit 1 ●
A0H2A720##
2 Bundle processing Bundle press stage unit 1 ●
section A0H2A530##
3 Trimmer section Trimmer unit 1 ●
A0H2A620##

r ng tion e
1 Right angle Roller release solenoid/1 (SD5) 1 ●
conveyance section 15AN8251##
Roller release solenoid/2 (SD6) 1 ●
15ANR710##
Roller release solenoid/3 (SD7) 1 ●
15AN8251##
Right angle conveyance gate 1 ●
solenoid (SD2)
15ANR711##
F-37
1.34 SD-513
ng tion e
2 Entrance conveyance Entrance sensor/1 (PS59) ● Blower brush
section
Reverse stacker entrance sensor ●
(PS211)
Entrance sensor/2 (PS60) ●
Horizontal conveyance sensor/1 ●
(PS72)
Reverse stacker empty sensor ●
(PS101)
Slit scraps box set sensor (PS106) ●
Entrance conveyance roller/1 ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Entrance conveyance roller/2 ●
Reverse exit roller/Rt ●
Paper re-feed roller/Lt ●
3 Folding conveyance Horizontal conveyance sensor/2 ● Blower brush
section (PS1)
Horizontal conveyance sensor/4 ●
(PS5)
Tri-folding conveyance sensor ●
(PS12)
2nd folding sensor (PS20) ●
Horizontal conveyance roller/1 ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Sub tray conveyance roller/1 ●
Sub tray conveyance roller/2 ●
Sub tray exit roller ●
Horizontal conveyance belt ●
Tri-folding conveyance belt ●
1st Folding Roller ●
2st Folding Roller ●
1st folding stopper slide shaft ● MH Surf
4 Sub tray, tri-folding Tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3 ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
tray section
Tri-folding tray conveyance roller/4 ●
Tri-folding tray exit roller ●
5 Saddle stitching Saddle stitching stacker empty ● Blower brush
section sensor (PS23)
Booklet set unit empty sensor (PS94) ●
Saddle stitching alignment/Rr guide ● MH Surf
Saddle stitching alignment/Fr guide ●
6 Booklet movement Booklet set unit slide guide shaft ●
section
Booklet hold unit offset guide shaft ●
Booklet hold unit slide guide shaft ●
7 Clamp section Clamp empty sensor (PS37) ● Blower brush
Clamp ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
F-38
8 Trimmer section Trimmer scraps box full sensor ● Blower brush

(PS96)
9 Booklet tray section Gripper paper sensor (PS38) ●
Booklet tray paper exit sensor (PS43) ●
Booklet tray exit roller, grip roller ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Paper exit belt ●
Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
ng tion e
1 Trimmer section Trimmer board 1 ●
A729F624##

ng tion e
1 Trimmer section Press drive screw ● · Service tool: Molykote
· Lubricate at the same time
when you replace the trimmer
blade.
Trimmer blade 1 ●
A729R901##

ng tion e
1 Clamp section Clamp motor (M23) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A729R70G##

ng tion e
1 Trimmer section Gear ● · Service tool: Molykote
when you replace the trimmer
press motor (M32).
Trimmer press motor (M32) 1 ●
A0H2M101##

ng tion e
1 Clamp section Fore edge finger motor (M52) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A729R706##
Finger torque limiter 1 ●
A03X5656##
Fore edge finger gear 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
55VA7903##
Clamp hanging wire 2 ● Only when FD-504 is installed
A65U6908##
2 Booklet tray section Gripper paper exit gear/Fr, /Rr ● · Service tool: Molykote
Gripper lock plate ● when you replace the fore edge
finger motor (M52).
Shutter slide shaft ● · Service tool: MH Surf
F-39
Shutter slide plate ● · Lubricate at the same time

when you replace the fore edge
finger motor (M52).

ng tion e
1 Trimmer section Trimmer blade motor (M31) 1 ●
A0H2M102##

ng tion e
1 Entrance conveyance Reverse exit roller pressure release 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
section motor (M102)
A65UR70M##
2 Saddle stitching Staple unit 1 ●
section A65U7779##
Clincher 1 ●
A65U7781##
Conveyance guide assy/Up 1 ●
A729R70S##

ng tion e
1 Saddle stitching Booklet holding motor (M17) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
section A729R704##
Alignment plate solenoid wiring 1 ●
A65UN165##
2 Clamp section Booklet holding wire/1 2 ●
A65U6290##
Booklet holding wire/2 2 ●
A65U6300##
Booklet holding wire/3 2 ●
A65U6302##

ng tion e
1 Folding conveyance 2nd folding knife motor (M14) 1 ●
section A65UR70P##

ng tion e
1 Folding conveyance 1st folding knife motor (M13) 1 ●
section A65UR70N##

ng tion e
1 Clamp section Fore edge stopper motor (M24) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A729R706##
2 Booklet tray section Gripper motor (M26) 1 ●
A4JUM101##
F-40

ng tion e
1 Trimmer section Trimmer unit 1 ●
A729F621##
1.35 CR-101
ng tion e
2 Creaser section Reverse stacker empty sensor ● Blower brush
(PS101)
Crease blade ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
1.36 TU-503
ng tion e
2 Conveyance section Registration roller ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Registration driven roller ●
Registration sensor (PS98) ● Blower brush
3 Slitter section Slit cutter drive gear ● Molykote
Horizontal conveyance sensor/1 ● Blower brush
(PS72)
Slit cutter shaft ● ● Cleaning pad/ Molykote
4 Rotary cutter section Slit scraps roller/Lt, slit scraps roller/ ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
Rt
5 Final check Around slit scraps box section ● Perform the maintenance when
the slit scraps are inside the
main body.
Original through check ●
ng tion e
1 Slitter section Slit cutter assy/Fr 1 ●
A65WF701##
Slit cutter assy/Rr 1 ●
A65WF702##
2 Rotary cutter section Rotary cutter assy 2 ●
A65WF700##
1.37 FD-504
ng tion e
F-41

2 Clamp section FD clamp plate ● ● Isopropyl alcohol, cleaning pad
MH Surf
ng tion e
1 Clamp section FD clamp motor/Fr (M203) 1 ● ● · Service tool: Molykote
A65VR705##
FD clamp motor/Rr (M202) 1 ● ●
A65VR705##
2 Spine corner forming FD roller cleaning assy/Fr 1 ●
section A65VR70A##
FD roller cleaning assy/Rr 1 ●
A65VR70B##

ng tion e
1 Spine corner forming FD roller motor (M201) 1 ●
section A65VR706##
1.38 PB-503
r ng tion e
2 Conveyance section Entrance sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
SC entrance sensor ●
Sub tray conveyance roller ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Cover paper conveyance roller ●
3 SC section Switchback assist roller/Rr ●
Switchback assist roller/Fr ●
Sub scan alignment plate shaft ●
4 Clamp section Paper reference plate ●
Clamp pressure plate shaft 1 ●*5 Service tool: plas guard No. 1
5 Pellet supply section Pellet hopper ● Service tool: blower brush
6 Glue tank section Glue tank ● ●*1 Service tool: tweezers, cleaning
pad, Multemp FF-RM
7 Cover paper supply Paper dust removing brush ● Service tool: blower brush
section
Paper dust removing roller ●
Conveyance roller ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
8 Cover paper table Cover paper folding plate ●*2 Service tool: tweezers, cleaning
section pad
Book spine backing plate ●*2
Book exit belt/Rr ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Book exit belt/Fr ●
Cover paper conveyance roller/Rt ●
Cover paper conveyance roller/Ft ●
F-42
Cover paper table entrance roller ●

Paper dust removing brush ● Service tool: blower brush
Cover paper alignment plate shaft ● *3 Service tool: plas guard No. 1
9 Book stock section Book load limit sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
Book upper limit LED ●
Booklet sensor/1, booklet sensor/2 ●
Guide shaft/Rt, guide shaft/Lt ●*4 Service tool: plas guard No. 1
Book conveyance belt/Rr ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
Book conveyance belt/Fr ●
Book movement belt ●
Book movement belt/2 ● Service tool: isopropyl alcohol,
cleaning pad
10 Relay conveyance Relay conveyance roller/1, relay ●
section conveyance roller/2, relay
conveyance roller/3, relay
conveyance roller/4, relay
conveyance roller/5
Relay paper exit roller/1, relay paper ●
exit roller/2
Relay conveyance entrance sensor ● Service tool: blower brush
Relay conveyance intermediate ●
sensor
Relay conveyance exit sensor ●
cleaning pad
*
1 Lubricate to the glue apply roller motor drive connecting gear.
*
2 Cleaning of the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate is an abbreviated cleaning. Remove adhered glue as necessary.
*
3 Lubricate to the cover paper alignment plate shaft.
*
4 Lubricate to the guide shaft/Rt and guide shaft/Lt.
*
5 Lubricate to the clamp pressing board shaft.

(1) Every 750 counts
r ng tion e
1 Glue tank section Cover paper glue roller drive gear 4 ●
bearing of glue tank section
A0753799##

r ng tion e
1 Glue tank section Glue tank assy 1 ●
A15XA36A## (100V)
A15XA36E## (120V)
A15XA36F## (240V)

r ng tion e
1 Cover paper table Roller cutter blade assy 1 ●
section A0756230##

r ng tion e
1 Cover paper supply Pick-up roller 1 ●
section 55VAR750##
F-43

55VAR749##
55VAR749##

r ng tion e
1 SC section Switchback roller 1 ●
13GQ4519##

r ng tion e
1 Pellet supply section Pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) 1 ●
27LA8051##
2 Deodorant unit Exhaust filter/A 2 ●
A15X3017##
Exhaust filter/B 1 ●
A15X3018##

r ng tion e
1 Conveyance section Entrance gate solenoid (SD1) 1 ●
15ANR714##
2 SC section SC switchback release motor (M13) 1 ●
A0V9M101##
3 Cover paper supply Cover paper feed clutch (CL71) 1 ●
section 56AA8201##
4 Cover paper separation clutch 1 ●
(CL72)
56AA8201##
5 Relay conveyance Sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4) 1 ●
section 15ANR714##

r ng tion e
1 SC section FD alignment solenoid (SD11) 1 ●
15AA8251##
SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) 1 ●
A075B746##

r ng tion e
1 SC section One-way clutch/A 1 ●
13GQ7709##
One-way clutch/B 1 ●
13GQ7709##
1.39 GP-501
Nu Unit classification Description Quant Implementation classification Materials
mbe ity Cleani Check Lubrica Replac Tools used
r ng tion e
1 Punch section Die Set Pins ● ● 3-IN-ONE (WD-40Company)
F-44
Actual lubrication count: 50,000

punches
The use must perform this
maintenance.

r ng tion e
1 Punch section Die Set Shoulder Bolts ● ● Magnalube-G
TeflonGreaseActual lubrication
count:
200,000 punches
The use must perform this
maintenance.

r ng tion e
GP removement, Front door open
2 Bypass conveyance Paper Path, Bypass ● ● Alcohol
section
3 Punch conveyance Latching Mechanisms aligner ●
section
4 Paper Path, Aligner panels ● ● Alcohol
5 Aligner Idler Rollers ● ●
6 Roller energy drive ● ●
7 Bypass, Punch Optical Sensors ● Blower brush
conveyance section
8 Timing Belts ● ● Alcohol
9 Idler Rollers ● ●
10 Drive Rollers ● ●
11 Punch section Back Gauge mechanism ● ● Blower brush/
vacuum cleaner
12 Die Guide ● Vacuum cleaner
13 Paper Path, Punch ● ● Alcohol
14 External section Base ● Vacuum cleaner
15 Door Closing Latch ●
16 Post-process Front door close, GP connected
18 Cleaning of the cover ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning
pad

r ng tion e
1 Punch conveyance Aligner Idler Roller Assembly ● Alcohol
section
2 Belt Aligner (Green) 1 ●
3 Punch section Punch drive cams 1 ● Magnalube-G Teflon Grease
Actual lubrication count:
3,000,000 punches

r ng tion e
1 Punch section Die Set 1 ● ● The replacement is
recommended when the hanging
chips are generated.
F-45

r ng tion e
1 Punch section Die Set 1 ● ● The replacement is
recommended if hanging chips
are generated.

r ng tion e
1 Punch section Back Gauge mechanism 1 ●
A0N9PP59##
1.40 GP-502
r ng tion e
1 Bypass section Bypass Rollers ● ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
Entrance sensor ● ● Blower brush
Exit sensor ● ●
2 Vertical conveyance Belts ● ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
section
Entrance driven roller ● ●
Entrance sensor ● ● Blower brush
Intermediate sensor ● ●
3 Die-set Entrance sensor ● ●
Pinch drive section (bearings) ● ● Magnalube-G TeflonGrease/
Nippeco MP No.1
Oiled Felt ● ● WD-40 Company 3-IN-ONE
4 Skew conveyance Belts ● ● Isopropyl alcohol/cleaning pad
section
Entrance drive roller, driven roller ● ●
Exit drive roller, driven roller ● ●
5 Stacker section Paper detection sensor ● ● Blower brush
6 Punch section Punch scraps box ● ● Vacuum cleaner
Around the punch scraps box ● ●
Punch scraps box full sensor ● ● Blower brush
Punch scraps box set sensor ● ●

r ng tion e
1 Pullback Pad A4F6PP00## 2 ●
Book Chute Myler A4F6PPH1## 4 ●
Die Set Felt A4F6PP01## 1 ● ●

r ng tion e
1 Punch section Suction Cup: Element Feeder 1 ●
A4F6PP03##
2 Punch Unit Punch Pin/Plate Assy, Die-set 1 ●
A4F6PP02##
F-46

r ng tion e
1 Punch Unit Punch Pin/Plate Assy, Die-set 1 ●
A4F6PP02##
F-47
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. ORU-M PARTS
2. ORU-M PARTS
2.1 Life value of the ORU-M parts
2.1.1 ORU-M corresponding parts
ORU-M stands for "Operator Replaceable Unit Management." This function displays the steps, adjustment setting methods and manages the
data when the educated user replaces the parts.
Install the prescribed option and change DIPSW15-0 to 1to enable this function. For ORU-M corresponding parts, some parts that are provided
as an assy of parts larger than those parts replaced normally by the CE so that the user can easily conduct the part replacement operation.
2.2 ORU-M parts list

2.2.1 ORU-M parts list
The Allow and restrict of the ORU-M parts can be set on I.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life setting in Service Mode individually.
Parts Target of ORU-M Detection of Detection of Required adjustment Life Life Life
number connector RFID (Standard) (Lower limit) (Upper limit)*1
disconnection connection
49 Intermediate transfer Provided None Blade Setting Mode (for 222,000 - -
unit intermediate transfer) prints*2 (Unchangea (Unchangeabl
Intermediate transfer Belt Line Speed Adj. 220,000 ble) e)
unit/H Gamma Automatic prints*3
(North America and Adjustment
Europe(Default)) Color Registration
Intermediate transfer Auto.Adj.
unit/C Density balance adjustment
(Service part)
37: Quantity Developing unit/Y Provided None TonerDensitySensorInit.Aut 1,350,000 50% 120%
38: Distance o (Y) prints*2 (Standard x (Standard x
Gamma Automatic 1,200,000 0.5) 1.2)
Adjustment prints*3
Color Registration 694.2km
Auto.Adj.
Density balance adjustment
39: Quantity Developing unit/M Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,350,000 50% 120%
40: Distance (M) prints*2 (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment prints*3
Auto.Adj.
41: Quantity Developing unit/C Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,350,000 50% 120%
42: Distance (C) prints*2 (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment prints*3
Auto.Adj.
43: Quantity Developing unit/K Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,350,000 50% 120%
44: Distance (K) prints*2 (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment prints*3
Auto.Adj.
29: Quantity Developer/Y Provided None TonerDensitySensorInit.Aut 1,350,000 50% 120%
30: Distance o (Y) prints*2 (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment prints*3
Auto.Adj.
31: Quantity Developer/M Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,350,000 50% 120%
32: Distance (M) prints*2 (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment prints*3
Auto.Adj.
33: Quantity Developer/C Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,350,000 50% 120%
34: Distance (C) prints*2 (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment prints*3
Auto.Adj.
F-48
35: Quantity Developer/K Provided None Toner Density Sensor Init. 1,350,000 50% 120%
36: Distance (K) prints*2 (Standard x (Standard x
Adjustment prints*3
Auto.Adj.
74: Quantity 2nd transfer unit None None Gamma Automatic 468,000 50% 120%
Adjustment prints*2 (Standard x (Standard x
Density balance adjustment 440,000 0.5) 1.2)
prints*3
82 Fusing unit Provided None None 600,000 - -
prints (Unchangea (Unchangeabl
ble) e)
21: Quantity Drum unit/Y None None Gamma Automatic 460,000 80% 113%
22: Distance Adjustment prints (178.4km) (252km)
and Quantity Color Registration 223 km of
Auto.Adj. the drum
Density balance adjustment drive
distance,
71.4 km of
the lubricant
applying unit
drive
distance, or
the quantity
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
23: Quantity Drum unit/M None None Gamma Automatic 460,000 80% 113%
Auto.Adj. the drum
distance,
71.4 km of
the lubricant
applying unit
drive
distance, or
the quantity
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
25: Quantity Drum unit/C None None Gamma Automatic 460,000 80% 113%
Auto.Adj. the drum
distance,
71.4 km of
the lubricant
applying unit
drive
distance, or
the quantity
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
27: Quantity Drum unit/K None None Gamma Automatic 460,000 80% 113%
28: Distance Adjustment prints*2 (178.4km) (252km)
and Quantity Color Registration 420,000
Auto.Adj. prints*3
Density balance adjustment 223 km of
the drum
drive
distance,
71.4 km of
F-49
the lubricant
applying unit
drive
distance, or
the quantity
reaches,
whichever
comes
earlier.
13: Quantity Charging corona/Y None None Gamma Automatic 210,000 57% 143%
14: Time Adjustment prints (40h) (100h)
Density balance adjustment 64h*2
70h*3
15: Quantity Charging corona/M None None Gamma Automatic 210,000 57% 143%
70h*3
17: Quantity Charging corona/C None None Gamma Automatic 210,000 57% 143%
70h*3
19: Quantity Charging corona/K None None Gamma Automatic 210,000 57% 143%
70h*3
3 Filter box None None None When 50% 120%
DIPSW5-6 is
0:
24,000,000
prints
When
DIPSW5-6 is
1:
24,800,000
prints
4 to 8 Dust-proof filter set None None None 600,000 50% 120%
prints
4 Developing dust-proof None None None 600,000 50% 120%
filter/1 prints
5 Developing dust-proof None None None 600,000 50% 120%
filter/2 prints
6 PH dust-proof filter None None None 600,000 50% 120%
prints
7 Electric component None None None 600,000 50% 120%
cooling filter prints
8 Suction dust-proof filter None None None 600,000 50% 120%
prints
117 Pick-up roller/1 None None None 800,000 50% 120%
prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
118 Pick-up roller/2 None None None 800,000 50% 120%
prints (Standard x (Standard x
0.5) 1.2)
113 Paper Feed, None None None 125,000 50% 120%
Separation Roller prints (Standard x (Standard x
Rubber/1 0.5) 1.2)
114 Paper Feed, None None None 125,000 50% 120%
Separation Roller prints (Standard x (Standard x
Rubber/2 0.5) 1.2)
- Duct cover Provided None None If the duct cover is not mounted, the same
error as the connector disconnection is
detected and notified to the user.
*1 The performance of the life upper limit is not guaranteed. It is within the range that CE can configure according to the demand of customers.
*2 C3080, C3080P, C83hc
*3 C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L
F-50
2.3 ORU-M parts replacement timing

2.3.1 ORU-M target unit life setting
The life of the ORU-M target unit can be selected individually on I.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life setting of Service Mode. Configure the life with
percent.
2.3.2 ORU-M warning icon display

When the life of the ORU-M target unit strays and the following conditions are met, the ORU-M warning icon appears on the Machine Screen.
• ORU-M function is enabled
• Allowed by I.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life setting
2.4 Management of ORU-M parts counter

2.4.1 Counter display
By pressing [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] on the Utility screen, the ORU-M target part counter appears.
Note
▪ By setting DIPSW15-0 to 1, [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] appears on the Utility screen.
▪ The contents that appear on [ORU-M (Unit Replace)] depend on the setting of I.4.16.1 ORU-M Item/Life setting.
▪ The ORU-M password can be changed with using "ORU-M Password Setting".
▪ When the fusing unit auto recognition (DipSW5-3) is "1" (to recognize automatically), do not replace the fusing unit of ORU-M
(because it cannot be reset as a replaced part at the replacement operation) (Refer to: I.4.5.18 Fusing Unit A and B Auto
Recognition)
2.4.2 Counter clear
When the user replaces the ORU-M target parts in the ORU-M replacement work mode.
2.4.3 Replacement of envelope fusing unit in the ORU-M mode

You can replace the fusing unit to the envelope fusing unit in the ORU-M mode.
For the special parts of the fusing unit, the NVRAM board (NRB) is equipped with 3 (fusing unit A, fusing unit B, envelope fusing unit) storage
area. The area can be switched according to the unit to install.
NRB
Special Parts Counter
<Fusing unit> Fusing unit A
Fusing unit B
Special Parts Counter Envelope fusing unit
<EF ( Envelope fusing unit )>
The replacement procedure of the fusing unit in the ORU-M mode is as follows.
Replacement object Procedure
Fusing unit A ↔ Fusing unit B Displays the [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] screen, and replace the unit. Put
a check on [Fusing Unit] on the [ORU-M Replacement Unit] screen to
switch the counter between A and B.
Fusing unit (A/B) → Envelope fusing unit Deactivate the main power supply of the main body, and replace the
fusing unit with the envelope fusing unit.
Note
Do not replace the fusing unit with the envelope fusing unit while
the [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] screen is displayed. When you return
the fusing unit (A/B) from the envelope fusing unit, the counter
management becomes possibly incorrect because the counter
does not count normally.
Envelope fusing unit → Fusing unit Deactivate the power supply of the main body, and replace the
* When the same fusing unit as the one before connecting the envelope fusing unit with the regular fusing unit.
envelope fusing unit is returned (Example: Fusing A → Envelope
fusing → Fusing A)
Envelope fusing unit → Fusing unit Displays the [ORU-M(Unit Replace)] screen, and replace the unit. Put
* When a different fusing unit from the one before connecting the a check on [Fusing Unit] on the [ORU-M Replacement Unit] screen to
envelope fusing unit is returned (Example: Fusing A → Envelope switch the counter between A and B.
fusing → Fusing B)
2.4.4 Replacing the transfer unit in the ORU-M mode

The normal intermediate transfer unit and the intermediate transfer unit in which the intermediate transfer belt/H*1 (supporting textured paper)
and the intermediate transfer belt/C*2 (supporting textured paper) are installed are the targets of ORU-M replacement.
• The NVRAM board (NRB) has two storage areas for the special parts counter of the intermediate transfer unit. You can change the storage
area to A or B when you replace the transfer unit in the ORU-M mode.
Note
*1: North America and Europe (Default)
*2: For the service part.
F-51
Special Parts Counter NRB

Intermediate transfer belt Intermediate transfer unit A
Intermediate transfer belt/H Intermediate transfer unit B
Intermediate transfer belt/C
ORU-M parts replacement
Special Parts Counter NRB
Intermediate transfer belt Intermediate transfer unit A

Intermediate transfer belt/H Intermediate transfer unit B
• The special parts counter counts the number of special parts that are connected to the unit. The counter can be displayed or reset.
• For the ORU-M replacement, you cannot replace the intermediate transfer unit with that of another model. When a unit of another model is
detected after replacement is completed, an error occurs.
Intermediate transfer unit A Intermediate transfer unit B

Intermediate transfer belt Intermediate transfer belt
Intermediate transfer unit B

Intermediate transfer belt/H
• When you replace with an intermediate transfer unit of another type, refer to “ I.4.5.17 (3) Replacement procedure for the intermediate
transfer unit”.
F-52
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. LIFE VALUE
3. LIFE VALUE
3.1 Life value of materials/parts
• For the special parts counter, the actual replacement cycles of the following parts are shown in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
Parts name Replacement cycle (reference) Actual replacement cycle
Developing dust-proof filter/1 600,000 counts (total counter) 600,000 counts *1
Developing dust-proof filter/2 600,000 counts (total counter) 600,000 counts *1
PH dust-proof filter 600,000 counts (total counter) 600,000 counts *1
Electric component cooling filter 600,000 counts (total counter) 600,000 counts *1
Suction dust-proof filter 600,000 counts (total counter) 600,000 counts *1
Filter box 400,000 counts (total counter) · 24,000,000 counts (DIPSW5-6 = 0, default)
· 24,800,000 counts (DIPSW5-6 = 1)
· Counts for 7 to 460 for each print page depending on the humidity,
the average coverage, or the paper size.
Drum unit/Y · 460,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) · The drive distance of the drum/Y: 223 km
· The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/Y: 71.4 km
The actual replacement cycle is the earliest timing among the
following.
· 460,000 counts*2
· The drive distance of the drum/Y: 223 km
· The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/Y: 71.4 km
Drum unit/M · 460,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) · The drive distance of the drum/M: 223 km
· The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/M: 71.4 km
following.
· 460,000 counts*2
· The drive distance of the drum/M: 223 km
· The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/M: 71.4 km
Drum unit/C · 460,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) · The drive distance of the drum/C: 223 km
· The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/C: 71.4 km
following.
· 460,000 counts*2
· The drive distance of the drum/C: 223 km
· The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/C: 71.4 km
Drum unit/K · 460,000 counts (special parts Shows one of the following values that is nearer its end of the life.
counter) (C3080, C3080P, C83hc) · The drive distance of the drum/K: 223 km
· 420,000 counts*3 (special parts · The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/K: 71.4 km
counter) (C3070, C3070P, C73hc, The actual replacement cycle is the earliest timing among the
C3070L) following.
· 460,000 counts (C3080, C3080P, C83hc), 420,000 counts*3 (C3070,
C3070P, C73hc, C3070L)*1
· The drive distance of the drum/K: 223 km
· The drive distance of the lubricant applying roller/K: 71.4 km
Charging corona/Y · 210,000 counts (special parts · Charging time of the charging corona/Y: 64 hours (C3080, C3080P,
counter) C83hc), 70 hours (C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L)
Charging corona/M · 210,000 counts (special parts · Charging time of the charging corona/M: 64 hours (C3080, C3080P,
Charging corona/C · 210,000 counts (special parts · Charging time of the charging corona/C: 64 hours (C3080, C3080P,
Charging corona/K · 210,000 counts (special parts · Charging time of the charging corona/K: 64 hours (C3080, C3080P,
Developer/Y · 1,350,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/Y: 694.2 km
counter) (C3080, C3080P, C83hc) For life extension 2: 811.5 km
· 1,200,000 counts*3 (special parts
counter) (C3070, C3070P, C73hc,
C3070L)
Developer/M · 1,350,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/M: 694.2 km
C3070L)
Developer/C · 1,350,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/C: 694.2 km
C3070L)
F-53

Developer/K · 1,350,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/K: 694.2 km
C3070L)
Developing unit/Y · 1,350,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/Y: 694.2 km
· 1,200,000 counts*3 (special parts For life extension 2: 1136.1 km
C3070L)
Developing unit/M · 1,350,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/M: 694.2 km
C3070L)
Developing unit/C · 1,350,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/C: 694.2 km
C3070L)
Developing unit/K · 1,350,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the developing roller/K: 694.2 km
C3070L)
Transfer belt cleaning unit · 888,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 576 km
counter) (C3080, C3080P, C83hc) For life extension 2: 960 km
· 880,000 counts*3 (special parts
C3070L)
Toner collection sheet · 222,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 144 km
· 220,000 counts*3 (special parts For life extension 2: 240 km
C3070L)
Transfer belt cleaning blade · 222,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 144 km
C3070L)
Side seal · 222,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 144 km
C3070L)
2nd transfer roller/Up · 444,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 288 km
C3070L)
Intermediate transfer belt · 444,000 counts*3 (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 288 km
Intermediate transfer belt/H counter) (C3080, C3080P, C83hc) For life extension 1: 312 km
Intermediate transfer belt/C*1 · 440,000 counts*3 (special parts For life extension 2: 480 km
(Service part) counter) (C3070, C3070P, C73hc,
C3070L)
Transfer roller bearing/Y, transfer · 3,552,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 2304 km
roller bearing/M and transfer roller counter) (C3080, C3080P, C83hc)
bearing/C · 3,520,000 counts (special parts
C3070L)
Transfer Roller Bearing/K · 3,552,000 counts (special parts The drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt: 2304 km
counter) (C3080, C3080P, C83hc)
· 3,520,000 counts (special parts
C3070L)
1st transfer roller/Y · 444,000 counts*3 (special parts The charging time of the 1st transfer roller/Y: 115 hours
counter) (C3080, C3080P, C83hc) For life extension 1: 285 hours
· 440,000 counts*3 (special parts For life extension 2: 575 hours
C3070L)
F-54

1st transfer roller/M · 444,000 counts*3 (special parts The charging time of the 1st transfer roller/M: 115 hours
C3070L)
1st transfer roller/C · 444,000 counts*3 (special parts The charging time of the 1st transfer roller/C: 115 hours
C3070L)
1st transfer roller/K · 444,000 counts*3 (special parts The charging time of the 1st transfer roller/K: 115 hours
C3070L)
2nd transfer roller/Lw · 486,000 counts*3 (special parts The charging time of the 2nd transfer roller/Lw: 181 hours
C3070L)
Separation discharging plate unit · 486,000 counts*3 (special parts The charging time of the separation discharging plate unit: 110 hours
C3070L)
2nd transfer earth plate assy · 1,872,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the 2nd transfer roller/Lw: 724 hours
C3070L)
C-clip · 1,872,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the 2nd transfer roller/Lw: 724 hours
C3070L)
Charging roller/Up · 750,000 counts (special parts The charging time of the Charging roller/Up: 70 hours
· 700,000 counts (special parts
C3070L)
*1 Count in all color modes
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode.
Banner: 1 count to 5 counts for each paper exit
• Up to 338 mm: 1 count
• 338.1 mm to 488 mm: 2 counts
• 915.1 mm to 1300 mm: 5 counts
*2 Count only in the full color mode.
Small size: 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode.
Large size: 2 counts for each paper exit in the simplex mode, 4 counts in the duplex mode.
Banner: 1 count to 5 counts for each paper exit
• Up to 338 mm: 1 count
• 915.1 mm to 1300 mm: 5 counts
*3 When you use life extension 1 or life extension 2, refer to F.1.1.3 Life extension for the periodically replaced parts.
3.2 Life value determining condition

The replacement cycles (number of prints) are values calculated based on the actual life of parts when the print is executed under the following
conditions. Since the idle running time (when an image is not created) of each part can vary widely depending on the print mode, the actual life
cycle possibly become different between the parts whose replacement cycle (number of sheets) are the same.
Item Description
Printing method Full color 8 copies intermittently (C3080, C3080P, C83h)
Full color 7 copies intermittently (C3070, C3070P, C73h, C3070L)
Paper size A4
Coverage 5% coverage for each color
Environmental temp, humidity Q zone
F-55
AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/ F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 4. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/

4.1 External section
4.1.1 Replacement of the developing dust-proof filter/1, the developing dust-proof filter/2, the PH dust-proof filter and
the suction dust-proof filter
(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply door [2].
2. Remove the suction dust-proof filter [3] from the toner supply door.
[2] [1] 3. Note

▪ When you reinstall the suction dust-proof filter [1], make sure that
the handle [2] faces upward.
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the filter cover [2].
5. Remove the developing dust-proof filter/1 [2], the developing dust-proof

filter/2 [3], and the PH dust-proof filter [4] from the filter cover [1].
F-56
[6] [5] [1] [3] [2] 6. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
• When you reinstall the developing dust-proof filter/1 [1] and developing
dust-proof filter/2 [2], align the notches [3] and projections [4].
• When you reinstall the PH dust-proof filter [5], insert the holes of the PH
dust-proof filter [6] into the projections which are in the filter cover [7].
[7] [4]
7. After the developing dust-proof filter/1, the developing dust-proof filter/2, the PH dust-proof filter and the suction dust-proof filter are
replaced, conduct the following items.
• For the developing dust-proof filter/1: The counter reset of the special parts counter number 4
• For the developing dust-proof filter/2: The counter reset of the special parts counter number 5
• For the PH dust-proof filter: The counter reset of the special parts counter number 6
• For the suction dust-proof filter: The counter reset of the special parts counter number 8
4.1.2 Replacement of the filter box

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1], and loosen 2 screws [2] to remove the filter box cover
[3].
2. Remove the filter box [1].
3. Remove the label [1] of the filter box and then cover the toner suction inlet [2]
with it.
Note
▪ Make sure to close the toner suction inlet with the label so that the
toner in the filter box does not scatter.
4. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.

5. After the replacement of the filter box, conduct the following step.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 3
4.1.3 Replacement of the electric component cooling filter

(1) Procedure
F-57
1. Remove the screw cap [1] and the screw [2], and then remove the filter cover
[3].
[3] [1][2]
2. Remove the electric component cooling filter [1].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the electric component cooling filter [1], align
the hole [2] of the electric component cooling filter and the hole [3]
of the screw.
[2] [3] [1]

4. After the replacement of the electric component cooling filter, conduct the following step.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number7
4.2 Write section
4.2.1 Cleaning the dust proof glass
(1) Procedure
[4] [3] [1] [2] 1. Remove the duct cover. (Refer to F.4.3.1 Pulling out the process unit)
2. Pull out and remove the dust proof glass/Y [1], the dust proof glass/M [2], the
dust proof glass/C [3], and the dust proof glass/K [4].
[2] [1] 3. Clean the glass [2] of each dust proof glass [1] with hydro-wipe.

5. After you clean the dust-proof glass, conduct the following items in the order.
• Gamma automatic adjustment (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
• Density Balance Adjustment
4.3 Photo conductor section

4.3.1 Pulling out the process unit
Note
▪ Be sure to remove the charging corona before you pull out the process unit.
▪ Be sure to reinstall the process unit before you install the charging corona.
▪ Do not pull out the process unit and the duplex section at the same time.
F-58
1. Open the front door/Lt [1] and then loosen 3 screws [2] to remove the duct
cover [3].
Note
▪ Be sure to loose 3 screws in order of top, lower right and lower left.
When you reinstall the duct cover, tighten the screws in the same
order.
2. Loosen the screw [1], and then open the fan cover [2].
[2] [1] 3. Remove 4 charging coronas. (Refer to F.4.4.1 Replace the charging corona)
4. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the 3 positioning parts [2].
5. Hold the handle [3], and pull out the process unit [4].
6. When you reinstall the process unit, be sure to clean around the process unit
and follow the removal steps in reverse. (Refer to F.4.3.2 Cleaning around the
process unit)
Note
▪ For the 3 positioning parts [2], reinstall the lower right positioning
parts first of all.At that time, tighten the screw slightly. Reinstall the
positioning parts in order of upper right, upper left. Tighten the
screws slightly and equally.
[4] [3]
4.3.2 Cleaning around the process unit

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ Be sure to pull out the process unit after you remove all charging coronas. Otherwise, charging coronas possibly become dirt
when you pull out or insert the process unit.
▪ Be careful not to exposure the drum unit to the light.
▪ Do not let the process unit and the duplex section be pulled out at the same time.
F-59
[1] 1. Remove the filter box cover on the back side of the main body, and check
around the filter box.
When a lot of toner scatters, change the filter box and clean the following
toner dirt. (Refer to F.4.1.2 Replacement of the filter box, F.4.3.3 Replacing
the drum unit)
• Clean the process unit stay [1] and the toner pan [2] with a vacuum
cleaner or a hydro-wipe.
• Clean the developing unit exhaust inlet [3] and the ozone inlet [4] with a
vacuum cleaner or a hydro-wipe.
• Clean the stay of drum units of each color [5] with a hydro-wipe.
Note
▪ Be sure not to fold the sheet when you clean [1].
▪ Clean [1] to [4] with a vacuum cleaner and when they are still not
cleaned, use a hydro-wipe.
[2] ▪ Be sure not to clean [5] with a vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, the
drum possibly gets damaged.
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1] [2] 2. Clean the toner dirt of the transfer belt cleaning unit [1] and the separation
claw unit [2] with a hydro-wipe. (Refer to F.4.6.1 Removing/reinstalling the
intermediate transfer unit)
[2] [1] 3. Clean the dirt of the toners of the upper side of the intermediate transfer unit
(ceiling inside the main body) [1] and the upper and lateral side of the color
registration assy [2] with a vacuum cleaner or a hydro-wipe.
Note
▪ Clean with a vacuum cleaner and when they are still not cleaned,
use a hydro-wipe.
F-60
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 4. Clean the following dirt of the toners with a hydro-wipe.
• Transfer guide plate/Lw [2]
• Transfer guide plate/Up [3]
• Registration sensor cover [4]
• Registration cleaning sheet assy [5]
Note
▪ Be sure not to clean [2] and [3] with a vacuum cleaner or alcohol.
Otherwise, the roller possibly gets damaged or the sheet possibly
gets folded or torn.
▪ You can clean [4] and [5] with a vacuum cleaner only when they
are too dirty.
▪ Be sure to clean them to the direction of the shaft. When you clean
them to the paper feed direction, the toner falls to the paper feed
path.
▪ Be careful not to deform the discharging pin and the sheets.
5. Clean the separation discharging plate unit [1] with a blower brush.
Note
▪ Be sure not to use a vacuum cleaner or alcohol to clean.
Otherwise, the roller possibly gets damaged or the sheet possibly
gets folded or torn.
▪ Be sure not to touch the discharging pin and the sheets because
they are easily deformed. Clean with a blower brush without
touching them.
6. After the cleaning completes, feed 10 sheets of A3 paper to check that there
is no problem.
[1] 7. When there is still dirt, remove the 2nd transfer unit to clean the following dirt
of the toner. (Refer to F.4.6.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller/Lw and the
C-clip, and cleaning around the 2nd transfer unit)
• Separation discharging unit [1]
• Transfer guide plate/Lw [2]
• Transfer guide plate/Up [3]
• Entrance sheet [4]
Note
▪ Remove 2 screws and remove [3], then clean [2] and [3].
▪ Be sure to use a hydro-wipe when you clean [4].
▪ Be sure not to fold the sheet when you clean [4].
[2] [3] [4]

8. After you clean around the process unit, conduct the following items.
• Cleaning the dust-proof glass (Refer to F.4.2.1 Cleaning the dust proof glass)
4.3.3 Replacing the drum unit

Note
▪ Be careful not to exposure the drum unit to the light.
▪ When you remove the drum unit, be sure to cover it with the drum cover [1].
▪ Even when other units are replaced, return the process unit to its original position and close the front door/Lt to avoid the drum
from being exposed.
[1]
(1) Procedure
Note
▪ The product installs 4 drum units one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts. Do not use a once-
used drum cartridge for another cartridge, though they are common parts. Otherwise the old remaining toner and the new toner
mix up and the print quality degrade.
F-61
1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.4.3.1 Pulling out the process unit)
2. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.4.6.1 Removing/
reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit)
3. Hold the drum unit at its ends [1], and remove the drum unit [2].
4. Note
▪ When you install the drum unit, push the drum unit to the machine
until the positions of △[1] matches.
▪ Be careful not to touch or damage the drum photo conductor
section with bare hands.
▪ When you leave the drum unit, be sure to spread a sheet over the
unit to protect from light, and put them in a dark place.
5. Remove 2 screws [1] of a new drum unit, and press the blade.
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.

7. After you replace the drum unit, conduct the following items.
• Cleaning the dust proof glass (Refer to F.4.2.1 Cleaning the dust proof glass)
• The counter reset of the special parts counter
• Color registration automatic adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.12 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• Manual adjustment of color registration (Refer to I.4.3.13 Color Regist. Gap Masurement (Printer Adjustment))
• Density balance adjustment
• Maximum density initial adjustment (Recommended to be conducted) (Refer to I.4.4.9 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Peculiarity
Adj.))
4.4 Charging section
4.4.1 Replace the charging corona
(1) Procedure
Note
▪ The product installs 4 charging coronas one each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black. They are common parts. Do not use a
once-used charging corona for another color, though they are common parts. Otherwise the old remaining toner and the new
toner mix up and the print quality degrade.
1. Remove the duct cover. (Refer to F.4.3.1 Pulling out the process unit)
2. Push down the charging corona lever to the lower right, and then pull it out
and remove the charging corona [1].
[1]
F-62

Note
▪ When you reinstall the charging corona, push it until the position
of the triangle mark [1] is aligned.
4. After you replace the charging corona, conduct the following items.
Adj.))
4.4.2 Cleaning the charging corona

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the charging corona. (Refer to F.4.4.1 Replace the charging
corona)
2. Turn the charging corona cleaning jig [1] counterclockwise to remove it.
[1]
3. When you clean the charging wire, insert the charging corona cleaning jig [3]
from the insertion opening [2] of the charging corona [1] of each color. Then
[5] move it back and forth [5] along the guide [4].
Note
▪ The charging wire [6] is cleaned by being scrubbed with the velvet
[2] section [7] of the charging corona cleaning jig [3].
[4]
[1] [7]
[6] [3]
F-63
4.5 Developing section
4.5.1 Developer charging procedures
1. Peal off the tape [1] on the prepared developing unit.
2. Move the connector [2] of the developing unit to the position in the picture.
3. Remove 2 screws [3].
4. Release 4 hooks [4] and remove the developing unit cover [5].
[3] [1]
[2] [4] [5]
5. Supply the developer [1] from above the agitator screw evenly.
6. Use the rotation jig [2] in the tool box to rotate the developing gear in the arrow
marked direction, and supply the developer.
Note
▪ When all developer cannot be supplied at once, supply it in a few
times.
▪ Be sure not to rotate the developing gear in the opposite of the arrow
marked direction.
▪ Conduct the operation for each color (YMCK).
[2] [1]
F-64
7. Install the developing unit cover [1] and turn the connector [2] back to the initial
[3] position.
Note
▪ Confirm that the projections [3] at the both sides are put in the
groove of the developing unit cover.
[2]
[1]
[3]
8. Install each developing unit to the main body.

Note
▪ Install them in order (YMCK in order from the top).
9. After you supply the developer, conduct the following items.
• Developer unit replacement adjustment (recommended to perform)
• Toner density sensor initial auto adjustment (Refer to I.4.4.7 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
• Gamma auto adjustment (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
• Color registration auto adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.12 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• Maximum density initial adjustment (execution is recommended) (Refer to I.4.4.9 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.) )
Note
▪ Reset of the parts counter, toner density sensor initial adjustment, gamma automatic adjustment, color registration
automatic adjustment, density balance adjustment are not needed when the developer unit replace adjustment is performed.
4.5.2 Replacing the Developing unit/Y, /M, /C, /K

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ When you clean the developing unit, be sure to use a hydro wipe that is regarded as a CE tool. When you use the paper or the
cloth other than hydro wipe, a white line possibly causes on the image because of the dust and lint that is stuck in the
developing regulation plate of the developing unit.
▪ 4 developing units each for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black are equipped. They are common parts. Do not use the used
developing unit as an alternative of another colored developing unit. Otherwise the old remaining toner and the new toner are
mixed up and the print quality degrades.
[1] 1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to F.4.3.1 Pulling out the process unit)
2. Disconnect the 4 connectors [1].
F-65
[3] [2] [1] 3. Note

▪ After the connector of the developing unit/Y is disconnected, insert
the connector [1] into the connector holder [2] and fix it with the
clamp [3].
4. Note
▪ After the connectors of the developing unit/M, the developing unit/
C, the developing unit/K are disconnected, be sure to insert the
connector [1] into the connector holder [2].
[1] [2]
[1] 5. Remove the developing unit/Y, the developing unit/M, the developing unit/C,
the developing unit/K [1].
6. Charge the developer to a new developing unit. (Refer to F.4.5.1 Developer charging procedures)
Note
▪ Attach the individual label which is bundled in the unit to the developing unit.
8. After the replacement of the developing unit/Y, the developing unit/M, the developing unit/C and the developing unit/K, conduct the
following steps.
• For the developing unit/Y: Counter reset of the parts counter number 37 and number 38
• For the developing unit/M: Counter reset of the parts counter number 39 and number 40
• For the developing unit/C: Counter reset of the parts counter number 41 and number 42
• For the developing unit/K: Counter reset of the parts counter number 43 and number 44
• Developer unit replacement adjustment (recommended to perform)
• Toner density sensor initial auto adjustment (Refer to " I.4.4.7 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)")
• Gamma auto adjustment (Refer to " I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)")
• Density Balance Adjustment
• Maximum density initial adjustment (execution is recommended) (Refer to I.4.4.9 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
Note
▪ Reset of the parts counter, toner density sensor initial adjustment, gamma automatic adjustment, color registration
automatic adjustment, density balance adjustment are not needed when the developer unit replace adjustment is
performed.
4.6 Intermediate transfer section

4.6.1 Removing/reinstalling the intermediate transfer unit
(1) Procedure for removal
F-66
2. Remove the 2 support sticks [1].
Note
▪ The support sticks are the assist sticks which stand the removed
intermediate transfer unit independently. Be sure to prepare them
beforehand when you remove the intermediate transfer unit.
3. Loosen the 2 screws [1] and then remove the 2 positioning parts [2].
Note
▪ Reinstall the positioning parts [2] with the process unit pulled out.
Also, reinstall the lower positioning part first of all.
[2] [1]
4. Lift up the handle [1], and remove the intermediate transfer unit [2] with
opening it in the arrow-marked direction [3].
Note
▪ Be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt [4] with bare
hands.
▪ Be sure to hold the ends of the handle of the intermediate transfer
unit [1] using both hands.
▪ To avoid the drum from being exposed, return the process unit to
its original position and close the front door/Lt after the
intermediate transfer unit is removed. If the drum is exposed, the
maximum density adjustment trouble or the image memory may
occur.
5. Place the 2 support sticks [2] on the intermediate transfer unit [1] and let the
unit stand independently.
(2) Procedure for reinstallation

1. Hold the handle [1] one-handed and remove the 2 support sticks [3] from the
intermediate transfer unit [2].
F-67
2. Lift up the intermediate transfer unit [1] with both hands, and insert the 2
shafts in the rear of the intermediate transfer unit [2] into the 2 holes of the
process unit [3].
3. Turn the intermediate transfer unit [1] in the arrow-marked direction. Then
put the 2 shafts at the front [2] on the 2 projections of the process unit [3].
Note
▪ Be careful not to contact the intermediate transfer unit with the
drum.
4. Be sure that the following reinstallation of the parts follows the removal steps in reverse.
(3) Installing of a new intermediate transfer unit

1. Remove the 8 screws [1] and then remove the 8 locking materials [2].
Note
▪ Installing and operating the intermediate transfer unit with the
locking materials [2] installed damage the main body drive section.
[1][2]
2. Remove 2 lock screws [1] and stretch the transfer belt pressure.
Note
▪ Remove the lock screw with the tension plate/Fr and the tension
plate/Rr are pushed.
▪ Make sure that the rib in the transfer belt is not on the roller.
3. Apply the setting toner to the transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to F.4.6.2
[1] Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit)
4. Be sure that the following reinstallation of the parts follows the normal installation steps.
4.6.2 Replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit

F-68

2. Hold the transfer belt cleaning unit [1], remove the 2 screws [2], and remove
the transfer belt cleaning unit.
Note
▪ Handle the unit gently when you remove it. The toner that is
accumulated in between the toner guide roller of the unit and the
intermediate transfer belt cleaning blade sometimes spills. It is
normal when the toner is accumulated because the toner grinds
the belt surface. If the toner is spilled over the separation claw
unit, remove and clean the unit.
[2] [1]
[2] [3]
(2) Installation procedure of the new transfer belt cleaning unit

1. Remove 2 lock screws [1] of the transfer belt cleaning unit.
Note
▪ Release the pressure of the blade [2] in the arrow-marked direction
to remove the lock screws.
[2] [1]
F-69
2. Use a spoon and calmly put the setting toner on the toner storage [1] of the
[3] [4] new transfer belt cleaning unit.
3. Turn the gear [2] in the arrowed direction, and apply the setting toner on the
cleaning roller [3].
Note
▪ Be sure to use the setting toner in the main body package. Never
use the toner in the toner bottle since it includes the carrier.
▪ Be sure to apply the setting toner until the groove [4] of the toner
adjustment sheet is half covered with the setting toner.
▪ If the setting toner fails to be applied evenly on the cleaning roller
[4], calmly put the setting toner again on the part that needs the
more setting toner. Then, turn the gear [3] until the toner is applied
evenly around the roller.
[2] [1]
4. Reinstall the transfer belt cleaning unit to the intermediate transfer unit. (2
screws)
Note
▪ During the installation of the transfer belt cleaning unit, be sure to
insert the guide part [1] of the transfer belt cleaning unit into the
shaft of the intermediate transfer unit [2] before the screw is
tightened.
[1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-70
5. Rotate the transfer belt with the pressure of the belt cleaning blade is
released [1]. When the side which the setting toner is applied appears, press
the blade. Rotate the transfer belt once with the blade is pressed.
Note
▪ Never rotate it in reverse.
[1]
[2]
[3]
6. Reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
7. After the transfer belt cleaning unit is replaced, conduct the following step.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 48 and number 51
• Blade setting mode (Refer to I.4.4.5 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
4.6.3 Replacing the belt cleaning blade and the side seal

(1) Procedure
[2] [2] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.4.6.1 Removing/
2. Remove the transfer belt cleaning unit. (Refer to F.4.6.2 Replacing the
transfer belt cleaning unit)
3. Remove 2 springs [1], and release the pressure of the belt cleaning blade.
4. Remove C-clip [2] 1 each.
[1]
5. Draw the blade support shaft [1] in the arrowed direction, and remove the
belt cleaning blade [2].
Note
▪ When you install the transfer belt cleaning unit, apply the setting
toner No.2 to entire surface of the intermediate transfer belt to
which the transfer belt cleaning unit is attached. After setting
powder is applied, rotate the transfer belt to brush off all setting
powder.
▪ Take an extra care not to touch or damage the blade of the belt
cleaning blade [2].
[2] [1]
F-71
[1] [2] 6. Reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
7. After the belt cleaning blade is installed, replace 2 side seals [1].
Note
▪ Be sure not to push a new side seal hard on the transfer cleaning
blade [2] and the section [3], but hit it to them.
When the belt cleaning blade is replaced, be sure to replace the
side seal.
Otherwise, a gap is created between the belt cleaning blade and
the side seal and the toner could spill out.
[3]
[2] [1]
[3]
8. After the transfer belt cleaning blade is replaced, conduct the following items in order.
• For the transfer belt cleaning blade: Counter reset of the special parts counter number 53, 54
After the side seals are replaced, conduct the following step.
• For the side plate: Counter reset of the special parts counter number 60, 72
4.6.4 Replacing the toner collection sheet

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.4.6.1 Removing/
3. Remove 3 screws [1], the toner collection board [2], and the toner collection
sheet [3]
Note
▪ Do not bend or damage the PET sheet of the toner collection sheet.
[3] [2]

5. After you replace the toner collection sheet, conduct the following items.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 52 and number 71
4.6.5 Replacing the transfer belt separation claw

(1) Procedure
F-72

2. Remove the screw [1] and remove the transfer belt separation claw unit [2].
Note
▪ Be careful not to touch or damage the intermediate transfer belt [3]
with bare hands.
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

3. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the 3 transfer belt separation
claws [2].
[1] [2]

5. After the transfer belt separation claw is replaced, conduct the following items.
• Counter reset of the parts counter number 70
4.6.6 Replacing the intermediate transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers and the cleaning sheet
(1) Procedure
3. Remove the transfer belt separation claw unit. (Refer to F.4.6.5 Replacing
the transfer belt separation claw)
4. Remove the unit stand [1] and the tension release screw [2].
[1] [2]
5. Attach the unit stand [2] on the positioning shaft/Up [1]
[1] [2]
F-73
[1] [3] [2] 6. Hold the 2 handles [1] and tilt the intermediate transfer unit [2] as illustrated.
Note
▪ Be sure not to hold nothing but the handles.
7. Remove the 2 support sticks [3].
[2] [1] 8. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the intermediate transfer handle assy [2]
in the arrowed direction.
9. Insert the tension release screw [2] to the hole [3] and the hole of the tension
roller [4] while you push the tension plate/Fr [1] to the direction of the arrow.
Then, release the tension.
[1] [4] [3] [2]

10. Push the tension plate/Rr [1] inside in the arrowed direction [2] and rotate the
handle support plate [3] in the arrowed direction [4] at a time.
11. Hook the projection of the handle support plate [5] on the projection of the
tension plate/Rr [6] and fix the tension plate/Rr [1], and release the tension.
Note
▪ Push the tension plate/Rr hard and hook it to the projection surely.
When the push amount is insufficient, it becomes difficult to
remove the intermediate transfer belt.
[1] [2] [4] [6] [3] [5]

12. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the encoder [2].
13. Remove 3 screws [3], and remove the insulation holder/Fr [4].
[4] [3] [2] [1]
F-74
14. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the bearing [2].
[2] [1]
15. Remove the intermediate transfer belt [1] while you pull it straight up.
Note
▪ Be sure to reinstall the intermediate transfer belt so that the side,
where the character "UPSIDE" [2] is engraved inside, comes on the
downside.
[1] [2]
16. Note
▪ Be sure to reinstall the intermediate transfer belt so that the inside
rib does not run on the rollers.
F-75
17. Check the color of the lot number that is printed on the back side of the
intermediate transfer belt, and then conduct the following items.
• Do not connect the connector [1], when the mark is red, which shows
that the intermediate transfer belt is normal one.
• Connect the dedicated connector [1] (see Note) when the mark is blue,
[1]/[2] which shows that it is the intermediate transfer belt/H.
• Connect the dedicated connector [2] (see Note) when the mark is black,
which shows that it is the intermediate transfer belt/C.
Note
▪ Separately purchase the connector [1] for the intermediate transfer
belt/H (transfer detection harness/1 (A9VEN133)).
▪ Separately purchase the connector [2] for the intermediate transfer
belt/C (transfer detection harness/2 (A9VEN134)).
18. Use the isopropyl alcohol and clean 3 auxiliary rollers [1], the driven roller [2],
[1] and the tension roller [3].
[4] 19. Use the blower brush and clean the cleaning sheet [4].
[3]
[2]
21. After you replace the drum unit, conduct the following items.
• Belt line speed adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.10 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
4.6.7 Replacing the 1st transfer roller/Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller bearing/Y, /M, /C and /K
(1) Procedure
[4] [3] [2] [1] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.4.6.1 Removing/
2. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.4.6.6 Replacing the
intermediate transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers and the cleaning sheet)
3. Remove the 1st transfer roller/Y [1], the 1st transfer roller/M [2], the 1st
transfer roller/C [3] and the 1st transfer roller/K [4].
Note
▪ Never touch the roller of the new 1st transfer roller.
Be sure to hold the metal shaft of the roller and reinstall the new
1st transfer roller.
F-76
[1] [2] 4. Remove the claws [1], 2 each, and remove the transfer roller bearing/Y, the
transfer roller bearing/M and the transfer roller bearing/C [2]
Note
▪ During the detachment of the transfer roller bearing/Y, the transfer
roller bearing/M and the transfer roller bearing/C [2], be careful not
to lose the springs [3]
▪ Be careful not to break the claw [1].
[3] ▪ When the transfer roller bearing/Y, the transfer roller bearing/M
and the transfer roller bearing/C [2] are removed, check that the
springs [3] are attached straight.
When the springs [3] are curved or attached obliquely, adjust the
position of the springs [3].
[1] [3] [2]
5. Attach 2 support sticks [1] and place the intermediate transfer unit [2].
Note
▪ Be sure not to hold the intermediate transfer motor (M9) [3] by the
hand when you place the intermediate transfer unit [2].
[3] [2] [1]

[1] [3] [2] 6. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 3 screws [2], and remove the 1st
transfer pressure release motor assy [3].
7. Remove the pressure release gear/3 [1], remove the E-ring [2], and remove
the pressure release gear [3] and the pin [4].
Note
▪ Be careful not to lose the pin [4].
[1] [3] [2] [4]
F-77
8. Remove the E-ring [2], 1 each, and remove the spacer [2], 1 each, and
remove the bearing [3], 1 each.
[3]
[2] [1]
[2] [3] [1]
9. Hold the tension plate/Fr [1] and remove the tension release screw [2], and
release the fixed tension roller [3].
10. Hold the tension plate/Rr [4] and rotate the support plate [5] in the arrow-
marked direction, and release the fixed tension plate/Rr [4].
[3] [5] [2] [1] [4]
11. Disconnect the connector [1] (white) and the connector [2] (blue) and remove
2 screws [2].
[3] [2] [1]
F-78
12. Lift up the 1st transfer pressure unit [1] and the 1st transfer pressure shaft [2]
[1] [2] in the arrowed direction [3].
13. Rotate the pressure arms [4] 1 each in the arrowed direction [5], and release
[3] the arm from each pressure cam [6].
[6]
[4] [5]
14. Remove the claws [1], 2 each, and remove each transfer roller bearing/K [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
F-79
Note
[3] ▪ When the transfer roller bearing/K [1] is installed, check that the
spring [2] is attached on the projection [3] straight.
When the springs [2] are curved or attached obliquely, adjust the
position of the springs [2].
[1] [2]
[3] [2] [1]
16. After the replacement of the 1st transfer roller/Y, the 1st transfer roller/M, the 1st transfer roller/C and the 1st transfer roller/K, conduct
the following items.
• For the 1st transfer roller/Y: The counter reset of the special parts counter number 55, number 65
• For the 1st transfer roller/M: The counter reset of the special parts counter number 56, number 66
• For the 1st transfer roller/C: The counter reset of the special parts counter number 57, number 67
• For the 1st transfer roller/K: The counter reset of the special parts counter number 58, number 68
After the transfer roller bearing/Y, the transfer roller bearing/M, the transfer roller bearing/C and the transfer roller bearing/K are replaced,
conduct the following items.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 47 and number 61 of the transfer roller bearing/Y and the transfer roller
bearing/M and the transfer roller bearing/C.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 46 and number 63 or the transfer roller bearing/K
4.6.8 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller/Up

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to F.4.6.1 Removing/
2. Remove the intermediate transfer belt. (Refer to F.4.6.6 Replacing the
intermediate transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers and the cleaning sheet)
3. Remove the bearing [1], and remove the 2nd transfer roller/Up [2].
Note
▪ Never touch the roller of the 2nd transfer roller/Up. When the 2nd
transfer roller/Up is held by hand, hold the metal shaft. If the roller
is touched by hand, it affects the image quality.When you touch
the roller, wipe the part with a dry cloth. Never wipe it with the
alcohol.
▪ When you install a new 2nd transfer roller/Up, wipe it with hydro-
wipe.Do not use an alcohol or a wet cloth.
5. After the 2nd transfer roller/Up is replaced, conduct the following item.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 59, 69
4.6.9 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid (SD2)

(1) Procedure
F-80
[4] [3] [2] [1] [5] 1. Remove the process unit. (Refer to G.3.2.18 Process unit)
2. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.4.11.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing
unit)
3. Remove the 2nd transfer unit. (Refer to F.4.6.10 Removing and reinstalling
the 2nd transfer unit)
4. Put the duplex section inside the main body.
5. Disconnect the connector [1].
6. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the cover [3].
7. Remove the screw [4], and remove the belt separation claw solenoid assy
[5].
8. Note
▪ When you reinstall the parts, hook the projection [1] of the
mounting plate [2] on the hole of the main body side.
[1] [2]
[2] [1] 9. Remove the clamp and release the wiring harness, and remove 2 screws [1]
and remove the belt separation claw solenoid (SD2) [2].
11. After you replace the part, be sure to reset the parts counter.
4.6.10 Removing and reinstalling the 2nd transfer unit

(1) Procedure
F-81
1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.4.12.1 Replacement of the

intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6), and the intermediate conveyance
clutch/3 (CL7))
2. Raise up the 2nd transfer unit [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
[2] 3. Remove 2 fastons [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the 2nd transfer unit, confirm that the 2nd
transfer earth plate assy [4] nips the shaft [3] of the 2nd transfer
roller/Lw. Also, be careful about the directions of the 2 fastons [2].
[1]
[4] [3]
4. Remove the C-clip [1] and then remove the 2nd transfer unit [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
Note
▪ When you hold the 2nd transfer unit, be sure not to bend the
discharging pin or the PET part.
[1] [2]
4.6.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller/Lw and the C-clip, and cleaning around the 2nd transfer unit
(1) Procedure
F-82
1. Remove the 2nd transfer unit. (Refer to F.4.6.10 Removing and reinstalling
[2] [1] [3] the 2nd transfer unit)
2. Clean the 2nd transfer earth plate [1], the pressure material [2], and the shaft
[3] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad.
[1] [2]
[3]
[3] 3. Remove the separation discharging unit. (Refer to F.4.6.12 Replacing the
separate discharging unit)
4. Remove the C-clips [1] 1 each, remove the shafts [2] 1 each, and remove the
2nd transfer roller/Lw [3] in the arrowed direction.
[2]
[1]
F-83
5. Clean [1] and [2] by using the isopropyl alcohol and the cleaning pad.
[2]
[1]

7. After you replace the 2nd transfer roller/Lw and the C-clip, conduct the following items.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 75 and number 78 of the 2nd transfer roller/Lw
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 73 of the C-clip.
4.6.12 Replacing the separate discharging unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the 2nd transfer unit. (Refer to F.4.6.10 Removing and reinstalling
2. Remove the separation discharging unit [1] in the arrowed direction.
Note
▪ Be careful not to deform the PET parts.
▪ Be sure not to lose each positioning pin [2] or miss the installation
position, and remove the separation discharging unit [1]
▪ When you hold the separate discharging plate unit, be sure not to
bend the discharging pin.
[2]

4. After the separation discharging unit is replaced, conduct the following item.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 76, 79
4.6.13 Replacing the 2nd transfer earth plate assy

(1) Procedure
F-84

clutch/3 (CL7))
2. Remove the screw [1] 1 each, and remove the 2nd transfer earth plate assy
[2] 1 each.
[2]
[1]

4.7 Toner collection section

4.7.1 Replacing the waste toner box
(1) Procedure
1. Open the waste toner box door [1] and pull the waste toner box [2].
[1] [2]
[1] [2] 2. Remove the label [1] from the waste toner box and then cover the entrance
of the waste toner box [2].

4. After you replace the waste toner box, conduct the following steps.
• For the waste toner box: The counter reset of the special parts counter number 1
4.8 Paper feed section

4.8.1 Replacement of the pick-up roller/1, pick-up roller/2, paper feed roller rubber/1 and paper feed roller rubber/2
(1) Procedure
F-85
1. Pull out the paper feed tray.

2. Remove 2 C-clips [1], and then slide outward 2 bearings [2] to remove the
paper feed roller assy [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper feed roller assy, check that there is
no foreign objects such as grease on each roller.
[3] [2] [6] [5] [1] 3. Remove the bearing [1].

4. Remove the C-clip [2], and remove the pick-up roller [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the pick-up roller, be sure to check that the
arrow-marked side [4] comes to the C-clip side [2].
5. Remove the C-clip [5], and remove the paper feed roller [6].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper feed roller, be sure to check that the
arrow-marked side [7] comes to the C-clip side [5].
6. Remove the paper feed roller rubber [8] from the paper feed roller.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper feed rubber, be sure to check that the
paint-marked side [9] comes to the arrow-marked side [7].
[4] [7]
[9] [8] a03uf2c055ca

8. After you replace the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller rubber, conduct the following steps.
• For the pick-up roller/1: The counter reset of the parts counter number 117
• For the pick-up roller/2: The counter reset of the parts counter number 118
• For the paper feed roller rubber/1: The counter reset of the parts counter number 113
• For the paper feed roller rubber/2: The counter reset of the parts counter number 114
4.8.2 Replacement of the separation roller rubber/1 and separation roller rubber/2

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the paper feed roller assy. (Refer to F.4.8.1 Replacement of the
pick-up roller/1, pick-up roller/2, paper feed roller rubber/1 and paper feed
roller rubber/2)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] (at the front side and rear side), and then remove the
middle hook. (Tray 1)
3. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the paper stopper plate [2]. (Tray 2)
Note
▪ When you remove the paper stopper plate of tray2, remove it while
pushing down the paper lift plate [3].
[5] 4. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the separation roller [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper feed roller, check that there is no
[3] foreign objects such as grease on each roller.
[4] 5. Remove the separation roller rubber [4] from the separation roller [3].
Note
[2] [1] ▪ When you reinstall the separation roller rubber, be sure to check
that the paint-marked side [5] comes to the C-clip side [1].

F-86
4.8.3 Cleaning the slide sheet

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Clean the 2 slide sheets [1] with alcohol.
4.8.4 Replacement of the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3) and pre-
registration clutch/2 (CL4)
(1) Procedure for pulling out the tray1 at the maximum
1. Pull out the paper feed tray1 [1].
2. Remove 2 stepped screws [2], and then remove the stopper/Rt [3].
3. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the stopper/Lt [5].
4. Pull out the paper feed tray1 [1] at the maximum.
[4] [1] [5]
[2] [3]
(2) Procedure for pulling out the tray2 at the maximum
F-87
1. Pull out the paper feed tray2 [1].

2. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the stopper/Rt [3].
3. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the stopper/Lt [5].
4. Pull out the paper feed tray2 [1] at the maximum.
[4] [1] [5]
[2] [3]
(3) Procedure for removing the tray1

1. Loosen the screw [1], and then remove the connector cover [2].
[1] [2]
F-88
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the sheet metal [2].
[1] 3. Note
▪ When you reinstall the sheet metal, fasten the hook [3] on the back
side of the sheet metal to the U-figured metal plate [4]. Then align
the 2 positioning pins [5].
[5] [2] [5]
[4] [3]
5. Remove the screw [2]. Loosen the fixing shaft screw [3], and then remove
the paper feed unit [4].
[1] [3] [4] [2]

[9] [10] [4] [3] [1] 6. Disconnect the connector [1].
7. Remove the C-clip [2], and then remove the paper feed clutch [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper feed clutch, be sure to match each
stopper [4] and each guide [5].
9. Remove the C-clip [7], and remove the pre-registration clutch [8].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the pre-registration clutch, be sure to match
each stopper [9] and each guide [10].
[8] [7] [6] [5] [2] a03uf2c057ca

1. Loosen the screw [1], and then remove the connector cover [2].
[1] [2]
F-89
[1] 2. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the sheet metal [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the pre-separation plate, be sure to align it with
the positioning pin [3].
[3] [2] [3]

4. Remove the screw [2]. Loosen the fixing shaft screw [3], and then remove
the paper feed unit [4].
[1] [3] [4] [2]

6. Remove the C-clip [2], and then remove the paper feed clutch [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper feed clutch, be sure to match each
stopper [4] and each guide [5].
8. Remove the C-clip [7], and remove the pre-registration clutch [8].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the pre-registration clutch, be sure to match
each stopper [9] and each guide [10].
[8] [7] [6] [5] [2] a03uf2c057ca

4.9 Vertical conveyance section

4.9.1 Replacement of the intermediate conveyance clutch/1 (CL5)
(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the right cover/Lw1 and the right cover/Lw2. (Refer to G.3.2.4 Right
cover/Up1, right cover/Up2, right cover/Up3, right cover/Up4, right cover/
Lw1, right cover/Lw2)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness from the
clamps.
3. Remove 4 screws [2], and remove the vertical conveyance unit [3] in the
arrowed direction.
[1] [3]
F-90
[1] [2] [3] [4][5] 4. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness from the
clamps.
5. Remove the C-clip [2], and remove the intermediate conveyance clutch/1
(CL5) [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the intermediate conveyance clutch/1 (CL5) [3],
be sure to match the stopper [4] and the guide [5].

7. After the intermediate conveyance clutch/1 (CL5) is replaced, conduct the following item.
• The counter reset of the special parts counter number 128
4.10 Registration section
4.10.1 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet assy
(1) Procedure
clutch/3 (CL7))
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the registration cleaning sheet assy
[2].
[2] [1]

4.10.2 Cleaning of the registration cleaning sheet assy

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the registration cleaning sheet assy. (Refer to F.4.10.1 Replacing
the registration cleaning sheet assy)
2. Clean the PET part [1] by using the blower brush.
3. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the PET part [1].
[2]
4. Clean the PET part [1] and the registration cleaning stay [2] by using the
[1] isopropyl alcohol.
[2]
F-91
4.10.3 Replacing the registration roller and the registration roller bearing, cleaning the registration swing home sensar
(PS20)
(1) Procedure
[4] [3] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.4.12.1 Replacement of the
clutch/3 (CL7))
2. Remove the duplex section cover/Lt and the duplex section cover/Up. (Refer
to F.4.12.1 Replacement of the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6),
and the intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7))
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the wiring mounting cover/1 [2].
4. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the wiring mounting cover/2 [4].
[1] [2]
5. Pull out the knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction.

[1] [2] 6. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the knob [1].
7. Remove the 3 screws [3], and remove the bearing assy [4].
Note
▪ The short screws are used for the screws [3]. Be careful not to use
the long screws, because the long screws can touch and damage
the motor system.
[3] [4]
8. Note
[1] [2] ▪ When you install the bearing assy [1], be sure to follow the
following steps. Otherwise, the gear is possibly damaged.
1 Loosen 2 screws [2].
2 Install the bearing assy [1].
3. Tighten 3 screws [2].
5 Tighten 1 screw [4].
[4] [3]
F-92
[1] 9. Disconnect the 4 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness.
10. Remove the 4 screws [2], and remove the swing drive cover [3].
Note
the registration swing motor (M39).
▪ When you remove and reinstall the swing drive cover, be sure to
pull the registration roller [4] to the front.
[3] [2] [4]
11. Note
▪ When you reinstall the swing drive cover, be sure to match the
shaft [1] of the registration swing motor (M39) and the hole [2].
[1][2]
12. Clean the registration swing home sensor (PS20) [1] by using the blower
brush.
[1]
[1]
14. Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the registration roller swing motor
assy [2].
[1] [2] [1]
F-93
15. Note
▪ When you reinstall the registration swing motor assy, be sure to
match the shaft [1] and the hole [2] of the swing rack.
[2] [1]
[4][5] [1] 16. Remove the 4 screws [1].
17. Remove the registration unit [2] while you rotate it in the arrow-marked
direction.
Note
▪ When you remove and reinstall the registration unit [2], be sure to
pull the registration roller [3] to the front.
▪ When you reinstall the registration unit [2], be sure to match each
hole [4] of the registration unit and each projection [5] of the
duplex section.
[3] [1] [2]
[4][5]
F-94
18. Note
▪ When you reinstall the registration unit, be sure to place each
pressure lever [1] on each metal cam [2].
▪ When you reinstall the registration unit, be careful not to touch the
pressure levers [1] with the cam [3].
If the pressure levers [1] touch the cams [3], the cams [3] can be
[1] [2] damaged.
[3]
[2]
19. Remove the screw [1], and then remove each bearing fixing plate [2].
20. Remove the registration roller bearing [3].
[4] 21. Slide the registration roller bearing [4], and remove the registration roller
assy [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
[2]
[1]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[3]
F-95
[2] [1] 22. Slide the gear [1] in the arrow-marked direction, and remove the pin [2].
[2] [4] [6] [7] [1] 23. Remove the gear [2], 2 spacers [3], the oscillation rack [4], 2 spring receivers
[5], the spring [6], the roll [7], the E-ring [8], and the registration roller bearing
[9] from the registration roller [1].
[3] [5] [8] [9]

4.10.4 Replacing the registration idler gear.

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6), and the intermediate conveyance
clutch/3 (CL7))
2. Remove the duplex section cover/Lt. (Refer to F.4.12.1 Replacement of the
clutch/3 (CL7))
3. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the knob [2].
4. Remove 3 screws [3], and then remove the bearing assy [4].
Note
the motor system.
[3] [4]
5. Note
[1] [2] ▪ When you install the bearing assy [1], be sure to follow the
following steps. Otherwise, the gear is possibly damaged.
1 Loosen 2 screws [2].
2 Install the bearing assy [1].
5 Tighten 1 screw [4].
[4] [3]
F-96
6. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the registration ring [2].
[2] [1] Note
▪ When you install the registration ring [2], install it so that the flat
side [3] comes outside.
[3]
7. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the spacer [2].
[4] 8. Remove the registration idler gear [4].
[3] Note
▪ Be careful not to lose the spacer [2] and the spacer [3].
[2]
[1]
4.11 Fusing section
4.11.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit
CAUTION
▪ The fusing section is hot immediately after the main power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) become inactive. To
prevent burn injuries, be sure to start operations when the temperature cools down sufficiently.
(1) Procedure
clutch/3 (CL7))
2. Release the JAM processing lever [1], and open the reverse exit section [2].
3. Loosen the screw [3].
4. Pull out the fusing fixing plate [1].
F-97
5. Hold 2 handles [1], and pull out the fusing unit [3] to the mark [2].
6. Lift up the fusing unit [3], and remove it.
Note
▪ When you install the fusing unit, confirm that the mark [2] of the
fusing unit comes to the mark [2] of the duplex section.
[1] [2] 7. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When the fusing duct [1] or the fusing unit cover/Up2 [2] is
removed when the fusing unit is removed, be sure to install it at
such as on the table where the surface is not rough.
If the surface is rough, the framework of the fusing unit gets
distorted, and misalignment or rupture of the belt possibly occurs.
▪ When you install the fusing duct [1] or the fusing unit cover/Up2 [2]
to the fusing unit, be sure not to work on the duplex section.
If you install on the duplex section, the framework of the fusing
unit gets distorted, and misalignment or rupture of the belt
possibly occurs.
4.11.2 Replacing the fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up and the fusing heater lamp 2 assy/Up
(1) Procedure
unit)
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the fusing knob [2].
3. Open the fusing paper exit plate assy [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4], and remove the fusing cover/Fr [5].
[1] [2]
[3] [4] [4] [5]
F-98
5. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the fusing cover/Rr [2].
[1]
[1] [2] [1]
[1] [2] 6. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the fusing cover/Up1 [2].
[1] [2] 7. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the fusing duct [2].
F-99
[1] 8. Remove the screws [1] 1 each, and then remove the fixing plates [2] 1 each.
9. Remove the connector [3], and then open the fusing unit/Up [4] in the
direction of the arrow.
Note
▪ Be careful not to lose the fixing plate [2].
▪ Be sure to install the fixing plate [2] securely so that there is no
gap between the screw [1], the fusing unit [5], and the fixing unit
[2].
[4] [5] [2] [5]
[3]
[3] [2] 10. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

11. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the heater cover/Fr [3].
[1]
12. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the heater support plate/UpFr [2].
[2] [1]
F-100
[2] [4] 13. Remove the clamp [1], and then release the wiring harness.
15. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the gear cover [4].
[1] [3]
[1] 16. Remove the screw [1], and remove the heater cover/Rr [2].
[2]
17. Remove the screw [1], and remove the heater support plate/UpRr [2].
[2] [1] [6] 18. Note
▪ When you reinstall the heater support plate/UpRr [2], be sure to
match the 2 notches [3] of the heater support plate/UpRr and the 2
projections [4] of the fusing heater lamp assy.
▪ When you reinstall the heater support plate/UpRr [2], be sure to
install the fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up [5] and the fusing heater
lamp 2 assy/Up [6] securely so that it is in contact with the main
body.
[3] [4] [5]

[2] [1] 19. Remove the fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up [1] and the fusing heater lamp 2
assy/Up [2] in the direction of the arrow.
Note
▪ Never touch the lamp section of the fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up
[1] or the fusing heater lamp 2 assy/Up [2] with bare hands.
20. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the removal
steps in reverse.
F-101
[1] 21. Note

▪ Be sure to insert the connector [1] that was removed to open the
fusing unit/Up.
4.11.3 Replacing the fusing belt assy

(1) Procedure
unit)
2. Remove the fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up and the fusing heater lamp 2
assy/Up. (Refer to F.4.11.2 Replacing the fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up and
the fusing heater lamp 2 assy/Up)
3. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the fusing entrance guide/Up [2].
Note
▪ When you remove the fusing entrance guide/Up [2], be careful not
to drop the fusing entrance guide/Up.
If the fusing entrance guide falls, it could damage the fusing roller/
Lw [3].
[3] [1] [2]

[3] [6] [4] 4. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the stopper arm/Fr [2].
5. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the stopper arm/Rr [4].
Note
▪ The engraved mark "F" [5] is on the stopper arm/Fr [2]. The
engraved mark "R" [6] is on the stopper arm/Rr [4].
When you reinstall the stopper arm, be sure to check the engraved
mark "F" and the engraved mark "R".
[2] [5] [1]
F-102
[1] [2] [3] 6. Be careful to insert a paper [1] to prevent the damage with the fusing belt
unit.
7. Hold the belt unit fix shaft [2], and remove the fusing belt unit [3] in the
arrowed direction.
Note
▪ Never touch the fusing belt with bare hands.
8. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the removal steps in reverse.
4.11.4 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3)

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.4.11.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing
unit)
2. Remove the fusing belt unit. (Refer to F.4.11.3 Replacing the fusing belt
assy)
3. Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the fusing cover/Up2 [2].
4. Remove the fusing cover/Up3 [1].

5. Disconnect the connector [2], and release the wiring harness from the clamp.
6. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the fusing temperature sensor/3
(TH3) [4].
[3] [4] [1]
[2]

4.11.5 Replacement of the fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat insulating sleeve/Lw2, fusing roller/Lw
(1) Procedure
F-103

unit)
2. Open the fusing unit/Up. (Refer to F.4.11.2 Replacing the fusing heater lamp
1 assy/Up and the fusing heater lamp 2 assy/Up)
3. Remove the faston [1].
[1]
[2] 4. Note
▪ When you remove the faston, be sure to remove it in parallel to the
terminal while you push the projection [1] and hold the plug part of
the faston [2]. Be sure not to take the wiring harness [3] by hand
and pull it out.
▪ After you installed the faston, gently pull its plug part [2] in parallel
to the terminal to check that it does not come off.
[1] [3]
[5] 5. Remove the clamp, and release the wiring harness.
6. Remove the screw [1] and the wiring harness guide [2].
7. Remove the screw [3], and remove the heater support plate/LwFr [4].
8. Remove the screw [5], and remove the fusing roller mounting plate [6].
[6]
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
F-104
[1] 9. Remove the faston [1].
[2] [1] 10. Note

and pull it out.
[3]
[2] [3] 11. Remove the screw [1] and the wiring harness guide [2].
12. Remove the screw [3], and remove the heater support plate/LwRr [4].
[4]
[1]
F-105
13. Note
▪ When you reinstall the heater support plate/LwFr [1] and the heater
support plate/LwRr [2], be sure to check that the shaft of the fusing
heater lamp/4 [3] comes into the hole [4] of the mounting plate.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
14. Note
▪ When you reinstall the fusing roller mounting plate [1] and the
heater support plate/LwRr [2], be sure to check that the metal plate
[3] comes inside the flange of the fusing bearing/Lw2 [4].
[4] [2] [3] [1]
F-106
[2] 15. Insert the paper [1] to prevent the damage of the fusing roller/Lw.
16. Remove the fusing roller/Lw assy [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
▪ Do not touch the surface of the fusing roller/Lw with bare hands.
▪ Be sure that the fusing roller/Lw does not touch the other parts. If
the fusing roller/Lw touches the other parts, the fusing roller/Lw
can be damaged.
▪ The fusing heater lamp/4 is inside the fusing roller/Lw assy [2]. Do
not drop the fusing heater lamp/4.
[1]
17. Note
▪ When you reinstall the fusing roller/Lw assy [1], be sure to check
that the flange [2] of the fusing bearing/Lw2 comes outside the
metal plate [3].
[2] [3] [2] [1]
[3] [4] [1] [2] 18. Remove the fusing heater lamp/4 [2] from the fusing roller/Lw assy [1]
Note
▪ Do not touch around the lamp of the fusing heater lamp/4 [2] with
bare hands.
▪ When you reinstall the fusing heater lamp/4 [2], be sure to check
that the white wiring harness [3] comes to the gear side [4].
F-107
19. Remove the C-ring [1], and then remove the fusing gear/1 [2].
Note
[3] ▪ When you reinstall the fusing gear/1 [2], be sure to check that the
projection [3] of the fusing gear/1 comes inside.
▪ When you reinstall the fusing gear/1 [2], be sure to apply the
multemp FF-RM on the gear.
[1] [2]
20. Remove the C-rings [1], 1 each.
21. Remove the heat insulating sleeve/Lw [3] 1 each and the fusing bearing/Lw
[4] 1 each from the fusing roller/Lw [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the heat insulating sleeve/Lw [3] and the fusing
bearing/Lw [4], be sure to check that the flange comes outside.
▪ When you reinstall the heat insulating sleeve/Lw [3], be sure to
apply the multemp FF-RM to the inside and the outside.
▪ When you reinstall the fusing bearing/Lw [4], be sure to apply the
multemp FF-RM on the outside the gear.
[2] [4] [3] [1]
[1] [3] [4]
4.11.6 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4)

(1) Procedure
unit)
2. Remove the fusing roller/Lw assy. (Refer to F.4.11.5 Replacement of the
fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat insulating sleeve/Lw2, fusing roller/
Lw)
3. Remove 2 clamps [1], and release the wiring harness.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the temperature sensor/4 (TH4), be sure to put
the harness and the connector inside the fusing unit. Then fix them
with the clamps.
If the harness and the connector are not fixed, they could be drawn
[2] [1] into the cover or the drive and cut off.
F-108

6. Remove 3 clamps [2], and release the wiring harness [3].
Note
▪ The working efficiency improves when the fusing paper exit plate
assy is removed before the wiring harness [3] is installed. (Refer
to G.3.2.26 Fusing paper exit plate assy)
[2] [3] [1]

[2] [1] 7. Note
▪ The wiring harness guide [1] is installed in the fusing unit. Be sure
that the wiring harness [2] of the fusing temperature sensor/4
(TH4) is not placed inside the wiring harness guide [1].
If the wiring harness [2] is placed inside the wiring harness guide
[1], the wiring harness is tensioned when the fusing roller is
pressed.
[2] [1] [3] 8. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the thermal insulating plate/Fr [2] and the
thermal insulating/Rr [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
9. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the fusing entrance guide/Lw [2] in the
arrow-marked direction.
[1] [2]
10. Remove the clamp, and release the wiring harness [1].
11. Remove the screw [2], and remove the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4)
[3].
Note
▪ When the fusing roller/Lw is in the pressing state, the screw [2]
cannot be removed.
Rotate the gear [4] in the arrowed direction, and release the
pressure.
[4] [3] [1] [2]

4.11.7 Replacement of the fusing gear/2, the fusing gear/3

(1) Procedure
F-109
[2] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.4.11.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing
unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the stopper arm/Rr [2].
[1]
[2] [3] [4] 4. Remove the clamp [1], and release the wiring harness.
6. Remove the 4 screws [3], and remove the fusing gear assy [4].
[1]
7. Remove the bearing [1] and 2 E-rings [2]. Then remove the fusing gear/2 [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the fusing gear/2 [3], be sure to apply the
multemp FF-RM on the gear.
[3] [2] [1]

8. Note
[1] [2] ▪ When you reinstall the fusing gear/2 [1], be sure to check that the
metal bearing [2] comes inside the fusing unit.

10. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the magnet assy [3].
[1] [3] [2]
F-110
[1] [5] [3] 11. Remove the 3 clamps [1], and release the wiring harness.
12. Remove the E-ring [2].
13. Remove the actuator [3] while you rotate it in the arrowed direction. Be
careful not to hit the sensors [4].
14. Remove the 2 screws [5], and release the mount of the fusing pressure
position sensor assy [6].
[4] [5] [2] [6] [4]
[2] [3] [1] 15. Note

▪ When you reinstall the actuator [1], be sure to check that the pin
[2] of the fusing pressure shaft matches the groove [3] of the
actuator.
16. Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the fusing drive assy [2].
[1] [2] [1]

17. Remove the fusing gear/3 [1].
[1]
[1] 18. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the fusing gear/3, be sure to apply the multemp
FF-RM on the gear.
▪ When you reinstall the fusing gear/3, be sure to check that the dent
side [1] comes inside.
4.11.8 Replacement of the fusing separating claw assy

(1) Procedure
F-111
[3] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to F.4.11.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing
unit)
3. Remove 5 screws [2], and remove 5 fusing separating claw assy [3].
[2] [1]

4.11.9 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Up

(1) Procedure
unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the paper exit guide assy [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper exit guide assy [3], be sure to check
that the left side is stuck to the arrow-marked direction.
[3] [2] [1]

[3] 4. Remove 2 E-ring [1].
5. Remove the shaft [2] in the arrow-marked direction, and remove the 2 fusing
paper exit rollers/Up [3].
[2] [1]
[1] 6. Remove the bearings [2] 2 each, from the each fusing paper exit roller/Up
[1].

F-112
4.12 Duplex section
4.12.1 Replacement of the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6), and the intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7)
(1) Procedure
Note
▪ Do not let the process unit and the duplex section be pulled out at the same time.
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Release the lock release lever [2] in the arrowed direction.
3. Tilt the duplex pull out lever [3] in the arrowed direction, and pull out the
duplex section [4].
Note
▪ During the installation of the duplex section, be sure to put the
duplex section pull out lever back.
[1] [2] [3] [4]

4. Remove the screw [1], and pull out the duplex section pull out lever [2].
5. Open the jam release lever [3], remove 5 screws [4], and remove the duplex
section cover/Lt [5].
[2] [1]
[4] [3] [4] [5]
6. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the duplex section cover/Rt [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
F-113
7. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the duplex section cover/Up [2].
[2] [1]
[1] 8. Remove 5 screws [2], and open the conveyance drive board assy [3] in the
arrowed direction.
[2] [1]
[1]
[8] [6] [9][10] [2] [3] 9. Remove the C-clip [1].
10. Remove the connector [2] and release the wiring harness, and remove the
intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6) [3].
Note
▪ Be sure to reinstall the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6) [3]
so that the stopper [4] matches the guide [5].
11. Remove the C-clip [6].
12. Remove the connector [7] and release the wiring harness, and remove the
intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7) [8].
Note
▪ Be sure to reinstall the intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7) [8]
so that the stopper [9] matches the guide [10].
[7] [4][5] [1]
14. After you replace the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6) and intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7), conduct the following items.
• For the intermediate conveyance clutch/2 (CL6): The counter reset of the special parts counter number 129
• For the intermediate conveyance clutch/3 (CL7): The counter reset of the special parts counter number 130
4.13 Reverse and exit section

4.13.1 Replacing the reverse de-curler roller
(1) Procedure
F-114

clutch/3 (CL7))
2. Open the paper reverse exit section [1].
3. Use the driver or other tools, and release the claw [3] inside the hole [2] in
the arrowed direction and remove the gear cover [4] at a time.
[1] [2] [3] [4]

4. Rotate the gear [1] in the arrowed direction and move the cam [2], and
remove 2 screws [3] and remove the reverse decurler roller assy [4] in the
arrowed direction.
[3] [2] [4] [1]

[1] [2] 5. Note
▪ Be sure to reinstall the reverse decurler roller assy so that the
shaft [1] of the reverse decurler roller is inserted into the bearing
[2].
[4] [2] 6. Remove 2 E-rings [2], 2 spacers [3], the bearing [4] from the reverse decurler
roller [1].
7. Remove 2 E-rings [5], 2 spacers [6], the bearing [7], the collar [8], the
mounting plate [9], and the bearing [10] from the reverse decurler roller [1].
[3]
[7] [8] [5]

[1]
[9]
[10] [6]
F-115
4.13.2 Replacing the paper exit drive gear/1, paper exit gear and paper exit decurler roller
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the charging control framework unit. ( G.3.2.34 Charge control
framework unit)
clutch/3 (CL7))
3. Remove the left cover. (Refer to G.3.2.3 Left cover)
5. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the paper exit unit [3] in the arrowed
direction.
[2] [1] [2] [3]

6. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the reinforcing plate [2].
[1] [2]
7. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the reinforcing plate/Lt [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
8. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the idler gear/1 [2].
9. Remove the E-ring [3], and remove the paper exit drive gear/1 [4].
[1] [2] [4] [3]
F-116
10. Note
▪ Be sure to reinstall the paper exit drive gear/1 [1] so that the arrow-
marked side [2] comes to the front.
[1] [2]
[2] [1] [3] [4] 11. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the paper exit gear [2].
12. Remove the E-ring [3] 1 each and remove the bearing [4] 1 each.
13. Remove the paper exit decurler roller [5] in the arrowed direction.
[4] [5] [3]
14. Note
▪ Be sure to reinstall the paper exit gear [1] so that the arrowed side
[2] comes to the front.
[1] [2]
F-117
15. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and remove 2 bearings [2].
[1] [2] [2] [1]
a03uf2c075ca
4.14 Charge control section

4.14.1 Replacing the Charging Roller/Up
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the screw cover [1].
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the cover [3].
[3] [1][2]
3. Loosen the screw [1], and remove the charging roller assy [2] to the direction
of the arrow.
[2] [1]
F-118
[2] [3] 4. Note

▪ When you reinstall the charging roller assy [1], be careful that the 2
guide shafts [2] of the charging roller assy align with the guide rail
[3].
▪ When you install the charging roller assy [1], be sure not to push
in too strong.
[1] [2] [3]
[1] [2] [3] 5. Slide the release lever [1] to the direction of arrow [2], and open the charging
roller assy [3].
[3] [2] [1] 6. Note

▪ Be careful not to open the charging roller assy [1] too much. When
you open the charging roller assy [1] too much, the gear [2]
contacts with the charging roller/Up [3] and possibly gets
damaged.
[3] [2] [1] 7. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the shaft [2] in the direction of the
arrow.
8. Remove the roller assy [3].
F-119
[1] 9. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the upper guide [2].
10. Remove the charging roller/Up [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
▪ When the charging roller/Up [3] is hard to remove, use a
screwdriver [4] to remove.
▪ When you use a screwdriver to remove the charging roller/Up [3],
be careful not to damage the shaft of the roller with the
screwdriver.
▪ Be careful not to touch the roller surface.
[4] [3] [2]
12. After you replace the charging roller/Up, conduct the following item.
• For the charging roller/Up: Counter reset of the parts counter number 139
4.14.2 Replacing the charging roller bearing/Fr and charging roller bearing/Rr

(1) Procedure
[1] [3] [1] 1. Remove the Charging Roller/Up. (Refer to F.4.14.1 Replacing the Charging
Roller/Up)
2. Remove the claws [1], 2 each, and remove the charging roller bearing/Fr [2]
and the charging roller bearing/Rr [3], 1 each.
Note
▪ During the detachment of the charging roller bearing/Fr [2] and the
[4] charging roller bearing/Rr [3], be careful not to lose the springs [4].
▪ Be careful not to break the claw [1].
[5] ▪ When the charging roller bearing/Fr [2] and the charging roller
bearing/Rr [3] are installed, check that the spring [4] is attached on
the projection [5] straight. When the springs [4] are curved or
attached obliquely, adjust the position of the springs [4].
[1] [2] [1]
[4]
[5]
4. After you replace the charging roller bearing/Fr and the charging roller bearing/Rr, conduct the following item.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 149 and 150
4.14.3 Replacing the paper exit drive gear/2

(1) Procedure
F-120
1. Remove the charging roller assy. ( F.4.14.1 Replacing the Charging Roller/
Up)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], remove 4 screws [2], and then remove the
stay/middle material [3].
[1] [2] [3] [2]

3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the drive unit [2].
[1] [2]
4. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the paper exit drive gear/2 [2].
[1] [2]
5. Note
▪ Be sure to reinstall the paper exit drive gear/2 [1] so that the arrow-
marked side [2] comes to the front.
[1] [2]
7. After you replace the paper exit drive gear/2, conduct the following items.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter number 142 of the paper exit drive gear/2
F-121
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 5. DF-706
5. DF-706
5.1 Take-up section
5.1.1 Cleaning of the pick-up roller/feed roller
(1) Procedure
1. Open the left cover [1].
[1]
2. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the pick-up roller [1]/feed roller [2]
[2] clean of dirt.
[1]
5.1.2 Cleaning of the separation roller

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the separation roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
5.1.3 Cleaning the torque limiter

(1) Procedure
F-122
[1]
2. Using a cleaning pad with alcohol, wipe the torque limiter [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
5.1.4 Replacing the pick-up roller/feed roller

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Release two locks [1], and remove the pick-up/feed roller assy [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Remove two C-clips [1], and remove the arm [2].
[2]
[1]
F-123
4. Remove the C-clip [1] and the belt [2], and remove the pick-up roller assy [3].
[3] [2]
[1]
5. Remove two C-clips [1] and two pins [2], and remove two pick-up rollers [3].
[3] [2] [3]
[1]
6. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the arm [2].
[2] [4] 7. Remove the C-clip [3], and remove the feed roller [4].
[1] [3]
8. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.
5.1.5 Replacing the separation roller

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Grip both sides [1] of the holder and remove the separation roller assy [2].
[1]
[2]
F-124
3. While opening up the holder [1], remove the shaft.

NOTE
▪ Opening the holder too much can break the holder.
[1]
4. Remove the separation roller [1] from the shaft.
NOTE
▪ Be careful not to lose the pin.
[1]
5. Before attaching a new separation roller, wipe off the grease adhered to the
torque limiter [1] and the shaft [2] using a dry cloth.
NOTE
▪ Make sure not to use alcohol. Wipe with a dry cloth.
[1] [2]
5.1.6 Cleaning of the reflective sensor section

(1) Procedure
1. Clean the sensor [1] using a brush or other similar tools.
[1]
2. Open the DF-706

[2] [3] 3. Clean the reflective section [2] and sensor section [3] while opening the pre-
read sheet assy [1].
[1]
5.2 Transport section
5.2.1 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rolls
(1) Procedure
1. Lift up the document feed tray.
F-125
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roll [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
5. Open the DF-706.
[1] 6. Wipe the roll [2] with a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol while opening
the pre-read sheet assy [1].
[2]
7. Open the opening and closing guide [1].
[1]
F-126
[1] [1]
5.2.2 Cleaning of the miscellaneous rollers

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1].
[1]
3. Lift up the document feed tray.

[1] 4. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [1].
5. Remove the front cover.

[2] [1] (Refer to G.4.2.1 Front cover)
6. Remove the rear cover.
(Refer to G.4.2.2 Rear cover)
7. Remove three screws [1] and remove three pins [2].
[1] [2]
F-127
8. Remove five screws [1].

[1]
[1]
9. Open the document feed tray, and remove three screws [1].
[1]
10. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the screw [2], and disconnect the
[3] ground wire [3].
[1] [2]
11. Remove the lower guide assy [1].
[1]
[1]
F-128
13. Open the opening and closing guide [1].

[1]
[1] [1]
5.3 Scanning section
5.3.1 Cleaning of the front side scanning guide
(1) Periodically cleaning parts/cycle
• Front side scanning guide: Every 50,000 counts
(2) Procedure
1. Open the DF-706.
[1] 2. Using a cleaning pad dampened with alcohol, wipe the front side scanning
guide [1] clean of dirt.
NOTE
▪ Be careful not to damage the sheet.
F-129
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 6. PF-602m
6. PF-602m
6.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
▪ Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
6.2 Tray section
6.2.1 Precautions on maintenance of the tray section
Note
▪ The replacement procedures for the pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and the separation roller in tray 1 are the same for the
procedures in tray 2.
The explanation here takes tray 1 as an example.
▪ After the installation is completed, rotate the pick-up roller in the paper feed direction (clockwise as seen from the front side) to
see if the paper feed roller rotates smoothly.
The rotation is restricted only in the paper feed direction (clockwise as seen from the front side) and be careful not to rotate the
roller counterclockwise.
▪ The orientation of the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy in the main unit differs from the orientation of the rollers
in the PF.
6.2.2 Replacing the Pick-up rubber/paper feed roller

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the paper
feed roller has a one-way mechanism inside. Be sure not to mix up these two rollers.
[3] [4] 2. Open the vertical conveyance unit guide plate [2] (Tray 1 only).
3. Insert a driver into the hole [3] and pull out the tray [5] while lifting up a little
the tray lock lever [4].
[2] [1] [5]
F-130
4. Points to check when you pull out the tray

Note
▪ Do not pull out the tray [1] all the way. Hold the tray [1] so that the
stopper [3] on the left side of the tray is pushed in, and make the
[3] pick-up holder assy [2] place horizontally (paper feed position).
[2] [1]
[8] [7] [5] [6] 5. Rotate the pick-up roller [1] in the direction of the arrow (clockwise as seen
from the front side) and bring the coupling [2] to the lengthwise direction.
Note
▪ Be sure not to rotate the pick-up roller against the direction of the
arrow forcibly, as the roller is designed not to rotate in that
direction.
6. Remove 2 C-clips [3].
7. Remove the bearing/Fr [4].
8. Move the bearing/Rr [5] to the rear side.
Note
▪ When you reinstall them, slightly press down the metal frame [6] of
the pick-up roller assy. Then keep the flat face [7] of the bearing/Rr
[5] horizontally and insert the bearing into the notch [8] on the
metal frame. Then insert the bearing/Fr [4] in the same manner.
[3] [2] [1]
[4] [5]
a03xt3c001ca
F-131
9. Hold the pick-up roller assy [1] by hand and lift and tilt the paper feed roller
[3] so that it rotates on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller. Then remove it from
the notch of the bearing [4] and the coupling [5].
Note
▪ When you remove the pick-up roller assy [1], be careful not to
damage the sensor [6] with the metal plate.
[6]
[4] [5] [1]
[3] [2] a03xt3c002ca
[3] 10. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm [1] of the paper feed guide
plate and then remove the pick-up roller assembly [3].
[2] [1]
a03xt3c003ca
[1] [3] [2] 11. Remove the C-clip [1], pull out the shaft [2], and remove the pick-up roller [3].
12. Remove the pick-up rubber from the pick-up roller.
13. Replace the pick-up rubber.
a03xt3c004ca
F-132
[1] [2] [4] [3] [5]
15. Slide the bearing [3] and remove the paper feed roller [4] together with the
shaft [5].
a03xf2c007cb
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 16. Remove the actuator [2] from the shaft [1].
17. Remove the C-clip [3] and pull out the paper feed roller [4] from the collar [5].
a03xf2c008cb
[2] [1] 18. Replace the paper feed roller.

Note
▪ The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller
and the separation roller. However, the collar [1] of the paper feed
roller has a one-way mechanism inside while the collar [2] of the
separation roller has no one-way mechanism. Be sure not to mix
up these two rollers.
a03xf2c009ca

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the paper
feed roller has a one-way mechanism inside. Be sure not to mix up these two rollers.
[2] [1] [5]
F-133

[3] 5. Disengage the coupling pin [4] from the joint [5] while you press down the
metal plate [3] of the separation roller assy [2], and remove the separation
roller assy [2].
Note
▪ When you install the separation roller assy, press down the metal
plate [3] of the separation roller assy [2] and engage the coupling
pin [4] to the joint [5].
[5] [4] [2]
[1]
a03xf2c011ca
[2] [3] [1]

6. Remove the C-clip [1] of the separation roller assy and remove the
separation roller [3] together with the shaft [2].
a03xf2c012cb
[1] [4] [3] [2] 7. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separation roller [4] from the shaft
[1] to the arrow-marked direction, and remove them.
8. Replace the separation roller [4].
steps in reverse.
Note
▪ The appearance of the collars is the same for the paper feed roller
and the separation roller. However, the collar [5] of the paper feed
roller has a one-way mechanism inside while the collar [6] of the
separation roller has no one-way mechanism, be sure not to mix
up these two rollers.
[6] [5]
a03xf2c013cb
6.2.4 Replacing the paper feed clutch (CL1/CL4) and the separation clutch (CL2/CL5)
Note
▪ The replacement procedures for the paper feed clutch and the separation clutch in tray 1 are the same as the tray 2. The tray 2 is
the example here.
(1) Procedure
F-134
[1] [3] 1. Remove the stopper and pull out the tray. (Refer to G.5.2.6 Tray)
2. Remove the 2 screws [1], bend the stopper [2] in the direction of the arrow,
and remove the paper feed cover [3].
Note
▪ For easier operation, lift up the under part [4] of the cover when
you install the paper feed cover [3].
▪ When you install the paper feed cover [3], be sure to insert the tab
[6] into the hole [5] of the metal plate.
[2] [3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
a03xf2c014ca
[3] [4]
3. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
4. Remove the two C-clips [2], and remove the paper feed clutch (CL1, CL4) [3]
and the separation clutch (CL2, CL5) [4].
Note
▪ When you install the clutch, be sure to engage the stopper [5] of
the clutch with the projection [6] of the metal plate.
[2] [5] [6] [1]
[5] [6] [2] [1]
a03xf2c015ca

6.3 Conveyance section
6.3.1 Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9)
(1) Procedure
F-135
1. Remove the following parts.

[2] [1] • Rear cover/Rt (Refer to G.5.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
• Rear cover/Lt1 (Refer to G.5.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
• Rear cover/Lt2 (Refer to G.5.2.3 Rear cover/Lt2)
2. Remove the four screws [1] and remove the gear mounting plate [2].
[6] [7] [8] 3. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].

4. Remove the three screws [2] and the three wire binding covers [3].
Note
▪ When you install the wire binding [4], pass the binding through the
hole in the wire binding cover [3].
5. Remove the three C-clips [5] and remove the vertical conveyance clutch/1
(MC7) [6], vertical conveyance clutch/2 (MC8) [7], and vertical conveyance
clutch/3 (MC9) [8].
[5] [2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
Note
[2]
a03xf2c018ca
6.3.2 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), and pre-registration clutch (CL12)
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the following parts.
• Rear cover/Rt (Refer to G.5.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
a03xf2c019ca
F-136
[1]
[4] 4. Remove the three screws [2] and the three wire binding covers [3].
[10]
[3] Note
[9]
▪ When you install the wire binding [4], pass the binding through the
hole in the wire binding cover [3].
[2] 5. Remove the three C-clips [5] and remove the horizontal conveyance clutch/1
(CL10) [6], horizontal conveyance clutch/2 (CL11) [7], and the pre-
registration clutch (CL12) [8].
[5] Note
▪ When you install the clutches, be sure to match the stoppers [9]
with the cutout of the rear panel [10].
[6] [8] [7] ▪ When you install the clutch, be sure to engage the stopper [9] of
the clutch with the pin [11].
[1]
[4] [11]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[5]
a03xf2c020ca

F-137
7. PF-707m
CAUTION
▪ Be sure to remove each connection cable [1] before the operation to avoid the damage when you install or remove the PF-707m.
[1] [1]
7.2 Paper feed tray section

7.2.1 Replacing the loop roller/Lw and the loop roller bearing/Lw
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the tray 3 at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 Procedure for pulling
out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the fan cover [2].
[2]
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the positioning stay [2].
[3] [5] [4] 4. Remove the E-ring [3].
5. Remove the E-rings [4] one each and slide the loop roller bearing/Lw [5] into
the inside.
[2]
[1]
F-138
[2] 6. Slide the pulley [1] to the front and remove the pin [2].
7. Remove the pulley [1] and the belt [3].
8. Slide the loop roller bearing/Lw [4] and the loop roller/Lw [5] to the direction
[1] of the arrow and remove them.
[3]
[5] [4]

10. After you replace the parts, reset the special parts counter.
7.3 Paper feed suction section

7.3.1 Replacing the suction belt clutch/1 (CL15), the suction belt clutch/2 (CL16), the suction belt clutch/3 (CL17)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.6.3.6 Rear cover/Rt)
[4]
3. Remove the wiring harness from the clamps [2], 2 each.
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the suction belt clutch/1
(CL15) [4], suction belt clutch/2 (CL16) [5] and suction belt clutch/3 (CL17)
[6].
[5] Note
▪ When you reinstall the suction belt clutch, be sure to insert the
stopper [7] of the clutch over the projection [8] of the metal frame.
[6]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[8]
[3]

7.4 Vertical conveyance section

7.4.1 Replacement of the exit clutch/1 (CL1), /2 (CL2), the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3), /2 (CL4) ,the vertical
conveyance clutch/3 (CL5) and /4 (CL6).
(1) Procedure
F-139
[4] 1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.6.3.6 Rear cover/Rt)

[6]
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the exit clutch/1 (CL1) [4],
exit clutch/2 (CL2) [5], the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL3) [6], vertical
conveyance clutch/2 (CL4) [7], vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL5) [8], and
[7] vertical conveyance clutch/4 (CL6) [9].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the vertical conveyance clutch, be sure to
insert the stopper [10] of the clutch over the projection [11] of the
[5] metal frame.
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2]
[10]
[11]
[3]

7.5 Horizontal conveyance section

7.5.1 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutches/1 (CL8), /2 (CL9)
(1) Procedure
[4] [5] 2. Remove 1 each of the connectors [1].
4. Remove the C-clips [3], 1 each, and then remove the horizontal conveyance
clutch/1 (CL8) [4] and horizontal conveyance clutch/2 (CL9) [5].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the suction belt clutch, be sure to insert the
stopper [6] of the clutch over the projection [7] of the metal frame.
[7] [6]
[1]
[2]
[3]

7.5.2 Replacing the pre-registration roller and the pre-registration roller bearing

(1) Procedure
F-140
1. Remove the horizontal conveyance unit. (Refer to G.6.3.22 Horizontal

[1] conveyance unit)
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pre-registration bearing [2].
3. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the gear [4].
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pre-registration roller bearing [2].
5. Slide and remove the pre-registration roller [3].
[3]

7.5.3 Replacing the horizontal conveyance rollers/1, /2, and the horizontal conveyance roller bearings/1, /2
(1) Procedure
conveyance unit)
[2] 2. Remove the screw [1], and then release the claw [2] and remove the
pressure release unit cover [3].
[3]
[1]
F-141

Note
[2] ▪ When you install the gear [2], be careful not to damage it by the
driver.
[1]
[2] [1] 4. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and remove 2 horizontal conveyance roller bearings/1
[2].
5. Slide the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [3] in the arrow direction and remove
it.
[3]
[2] [1]
[3] [2] [1] 6. Note
▪ For installing the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [1], push it in the
arrow direction [2], and insert it in the arrow direction [3].
Without pushing the horizontal conveyance roller/1 [1] in the arrow
direction [2], you cannot install it because the shaft of the roller
hits the plate.
F-142

Note
[2] ▪ When you install the gear [2], be careful not to damage it by the
driver.
[1]
[2] [1] 8. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and remove 2 horizontal conveyance roller bearings/2
[2].
9. Slide the horizontal conveyance roller/2 [3] in the arrow direction and remove
it.
[3]
[2] [1]
7.5.4 Replacing the loop roller/Up

(1) Procedure
F-143

conveyance unit)
[7] 2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the pulley cover [2], the belt [3], the
pulley [4] and the pin [5].
Note
[8] ▪ When you reinstall the pulley cover [2], install it so that the
stepped side [6] comes to the E-ring side [1].
3. Remove 2 E-rings [7] and then remove 2 bearings [8].
4. Slide and remove the loop roller/Up [9].
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [9] [2] [6]
[8]
[7]

7.5.5 Replacing the roller pressure release motor (M10)

(1) Procedure
1. Open the open close cover/1 [1], remove 2 screws [2], and remove the
protective cover/Up [3].
[2] [3] [1] [2]

2. Remove the screw [1], and release the claw [2] and remove the pressure
release unit cover [3].
[2] [3] [1]
F-144
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove 2 screws [2].

[5][6] [4] 4. Hold the roller pressure release unit [3] and remove 3 screws [4] at a time,
and remove the roller pressure release unit [3].
Note
▪ Be sure to install the roller pressure release unit [3] so that the
projection [5] matches the hole [6] of PF-707m.
▪ During the installation of the roller pressure release unit [3], be
sure to conduct the following steps: Half tighten 3 screws [4], stick
the roller pressure release unit [3] in the arrowed direction, attach
2 screws [2], and tighten 3 screws [4].
If the screws [4] are fixed first or the screws [2] are attached
without the screws [5] being half tightened, the roller pressure
release unit [3] could deform.
[2] [3] [1]
[2] [1] [3] [2] 5. Remove the connector [1] and release the wiring harness, and remove 4
screws [2] and remove the roller pressure release motor assy [3].
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the roller pressure release motor assy [2].
[2] [1]
7.5.6 Cleaning the centering sensor (PS40)

(1) Procedure
F-145

2. Open the open close cover [2].
[3] 3. Clean the centering sensor (PS40) [3] with a cleaning pad.
Note
▪ The grease is applied on the positioning shaft [4]. Be careful not to
touch with the cleaning pad.
▪ When you use alcohol for cleaning, the surface of the sensor
becomes fuzzy. Be sure to clean the sensor only with a dry cloth.
[4]
[2] [1]
F-146
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 8. FA-502
8. FA-502
CAUTION
Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
8.2 Tandem conveyance section

8.2.1 Replacing the tandem conveyance clutches /1 (CL10), /2 (CL11), /3 (CL12), /4 (CL13), and /5 (CL14)
(1) Procedure
3. Remove the C-clip [2] 1 each, and then remove the tandem conveyance
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] clutch/1 (CL10) [3], the tandem conveyance clutch/2 (CL11) [4], the tandem
conveyance clutch/3 (CL12) [5] , the tandem conveyance clutch/4 (CL13)
[6] , the tandem conveyance clutch/5 (CL14) [7].
Note
[2]
[8]
[9]
[1]
F-147
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 9. LU-202m/LU-202XL/LU-202XLm
9. LU-202m/LU-202XL/LU-202XLm
CAUTION

9.2.1 Cleaning the pre-registration roller
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper door)
2. Remove the paper feed cover. (Refer to G.8.2.5 Paper feed cover)
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the paper dust cleaner brush [2].
4. Clean the paper dust removing brush [2] and the pre-registration roller [3].
a03wf2c001ca
9.2.2 Removing/installing paper feed roller assy

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] [5] [10] [9][4][2][1] [6] [8] 1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper door)
3. Remove the 2 C-clips [1], and slide the 2 bearings [2] outward.
4. Rotate the paper feed roller assy [5] to the position free from upper limit
sensor (PS109) [3] and the paper empty sensor (PS108) [4]. Then remove
the coupling [8] while avoiding the notch [6] and the arm [7] of the paper feed
guide plate, and remove the paper feed roller assy [5].
Note
▪ When you remove and install the paper feed roller assy, be careful
not to damage the upper limit sensor (PS109) [3] and the paper
empty sensor (PS108) [4].
▪ When you install the paper feed roller assy, make sure that the arm
[9] is underneath the lever [10].
[6] [7] a03wf2c002ca
9.2.3 Replacing the paper feed roller/pick-up roller

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Remove the paper feed roller assy. (Refer to F.9.2.2 Removing/installing
paper feed roller assy)
2. Turn over the paper feed roller assy.
3. Remove the bearing [1].
4. Remove 2 C-clips [2], and remove the coupling bearing [3].
[1] [2] a03wf2c003cb
F-148
5. Slide the coupling bearing [1] and remove the mounting bracket [2].
[6] [2] [1] 6. Remove the C-clip [3] and remove the paper feed roller [4].
Note
▪ Be sure to reinstall in the same direction with the removing
direction.
7. Remove the C-clip [5], and remove the pick-up roller [6].
[5] [3] [4]
[2] [1] 8. Remove the collar [2] from the pick-up roller [1].
Note
▪ Be sure to install the pick-up roller in the same direction as it was
installed.
a03wf2c005cb


(1) Procedure
1. Open the upper door.
[2] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
Note
▪ When you install the cover [2], be sure the marking-off [3] is facing
upwards.
▪ Install the cover [2] up-side down only when a no-feed jam occurs.
[3] [1]
F-149
3. Remove the 2 screws [1] and pull out the front side while you press down the
separation roller [2]. Then remove the coupling [3], and also the separation
roller assy [4].
[3]
[2]
[4] [1] a03wf2c007ca

5. Match the D-shaped end of the shaft with the D-cut [2] of the metal plate,
and remove the separation roller [3].
Note
[1] [3] [4] ▪ When you remove and install, be careful not to damage the
protection sheet [4].
[2]
[1]
a03wf2c008cb
[1] [2] 6. Remove the separation roller [1] from the collar [2].
Note
▪ Be sure to insert the claw [4] of the gear [3] to the hole [5] of the
separation roller [1] in securely.
▪ Be careful not to let any grease spill or drip on the separation
roller.
[3]
[1]
[5]
[4]
a03wf2c009cb

9.2.5 Replacing paper feed clutch (CL101) /pre-registration clutch (CL102)

(1) Procedure
F-150
[2] [3] [5] [6] [7] [5] [4] [2] 1. Remove the clutch cover. (Refer to G.8.2.4 Clutch cover)
2. Remove 2 connectors [1].
3. Remove the 2 C-clips [2] and remove the paper feed clutch (CL101) [3], and
remove the pre-registration clutch (CL102) [4].
Note
▪ When you install the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration
clutch, be sure to insert the stoppers [5] of the clutches over the
screw [6] and the sheet metal [7].
[1] a03wf2c010ca

9.2.6 Replacing the pre-registration roller

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper door)
3. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.8.2.6 Right cover (LU-202m), G.8.2.7
Right cover (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm))
4. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.8.2.8 Front cover (LU-202m), G.8.2.9
Front cover (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm))
5. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.8.2.10 Rear cover (LU-202m), G.8.2.11
Rear cover (LU-202XL))
6. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the paper dust cleaner brush [2].
7. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the rear earth plate [2].
[4] [5] [3] 9. Remove the C-clip [4], and remove the pre-registration clutch (CL102) [5].
(Refer to F.9.2.5 Replacing paper feed clutch (CL101) /pre-registration
clutch (CL102))
[2] [1]
[2] [1] 10. Remove the screw [1], and remove the pre-registration roller rotation knob
[2].
F-151
[1] [2] [1] 11. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the wiring mounting cover [2].
12. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the interlock assy [2].
Note
▪ Be sure to press down the switch [3] when you remove the
interlock assy.
[3] [1] [2]
13. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and 2 bearings [2], and move the pre-registration roller
[3] to remove.
[2] Note
▪ Be sure to install the pre-registration roller so that its screw hole
comes to the front.
[1] [3]
[1] [2]
F-152
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 10. MB-506
10. MB-506
CAUTION

10.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/BP, the paper feed roller rubber/BP, and the paper feed clutch/BP (CL14)
(1) Procedure
[4] [5] [4] [3] 1. Remove the right cover/Up1, the right cover/Up2, the right cover/Lw1, and
the right cover/Lw2. (Refer to G.3.2.4 Right cover/Up1, right cover/Up2, right
cover/Up3, right cover/Up4, right cover/Lw1, right cover/Lw2)
clutch/3 (CL7))
3. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the guide plate [2].
4. Disconnect the connector [3], remove 4 screws [4], and then remove MB-506
[5].
[1] [2] [1]
5. Remove the 2 springs [1], and then release the pressure of the separation
roller/BP [2].
[1] [2] [1]

6. Loosen the screw [1], and slide the plate [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
▪ When the screw [1] is tightened firmly, use a radio pliers or others.
[2] [1]
7. Note
▪ When you install the metal plate [1], be sure to tighten the screw
[4]. At the time, press the edge [2] of the metal plate [1] to the edge
[3] of the MB-506 metal plate and push it in the arrow-marked
direction.
▪ If the screw [4] is not tightened firmly enough, the metal plate [1]
flows resulting in the conveyance error when a specific envelop
passes.
[1] [2][3] [4]
F-153
[1] [2] [5] [6] 8. Remove the C-clip [1], and slide the bearing [2] in the arrow-marked
direction.
10. Remove the pick-up roller/assy [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
▪ Be sure to install the pick-up roller/assy [5] so that the arm [6] is
on the shaft [7].
[7] [4] [3]
11. Remove the C-clip [1], and pull out the shaft [2] in the arrow-marked
direction. Then, remove the pick-up roller/BP [3].
[1] [3] [2]

12. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the bearing [2] and the drive gear [3].
13. Remove the connector [4], and remove the E-ring [5]. Then, remove the
paper feed clutch/BP [6].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper feed clutch/BP [5], be sure to align
each stopper [7] to each guide [8].
[7][8] [6] [4] [5] [3] [2] [1]

14. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the arm [2] and the cap [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the cap [3], be sure to check that the dent on
the cap matches with the pin [4] and the projection [5] of the paper
feed roller/BP.
[3] [5] [4] [1] [5] [2]

15. Remove the pin [1], and pull out the shaft [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
Then remove the paper feed roller/BP [3].
[3] [1] [2]
F-154
16. Remove the paper feed roller rubber/BP [2] from the paper feed roller/BP [1].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper feed roller rubber/BP, be sure to turn
the paint-marked side [3] to the gear side [4].
[3] [1] [2] [4]

10.2.2 Replacing the separation roller rubber/BP

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the MB-506. (Refer to F.10.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/BP, the
paper feed roller rubber/BP, and the paper feed clutch/BP (CL14))
2. Remove the 2 springs [1], and release the pressure of the separation roller/
BP [2].
[1] [2] [1]

3. Remove the C-clip [1], and pull out the shaft [2] in the arrow-marked
direction. Then remove the cap [3] and the separation roller/BP [4].
[2] [1] [3] [4]

4. Remove the separation roller rubber/BP [2] from the separation roller/BP [1].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the separation roller rubber/BP, be sure to turn
the paint-marked side [3] to the gear side [4].
[3] [2] [1] [4]

F-155
11. MB-508
CAUTION
11.2 Bypass paper feed section

11.2.1 Replacing the paper feed clutch/BP (CL3) and lift clutch/BP
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the bypass tray. (Refer to G.10.2.5 Bypass tray)
[1] 2. Release the wiring harness, and then remove the connector [1].
3. Remove the C-clip [2], and then remove the paper feed clutch/BP (CL3) [3].
Note
▪ When you install the paper feed clutch/BP (CL3) [3], be sure to
engage the stopper [4] of the clutch with the projection [5] of the
metal plate.
[4] [5] [2]
[3]
4. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the lift-up clutch/BP [2].
[2] [1]

11.2.2 Replacing the paper feed roller/BP, separation roller/BP, and pick-up roller/BP
(1) Procedure
F-156

[1] 2. Remove the 2 springs [1], and then release the pressure of the separation
roller/BP [2].
[2]
[3] [1] [2] 3. Remove the C-clip [1], pull out the shaft [2] in the arrow-marked direction,
and remove the separation roller [3].
[1] [2] 4. Remove the separation roller/BP [2] from the collar [1].
F-157
5. Remove the C-clip [1], and slide the bearing [2] in the arrow-marked
direction.
7. Remove the paper feed plate assy [5].
[3][4] [5] [2][1]
[1] 8. Remove 2 C-clips [1]. Remove 1 bearing [2], and slide the other one in the
9. Remove the paper feed roller assy [3].
[2] [3]
[3] [4] 10. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the arm [2], the spacer [3], and the paper
feed roller [4].
[1] [2]
[2] [1] 11. Remove the paper feed roller/BP [2] from the collar [1].
F-158
12. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove 2 bearings [2].

13. Remove the pick-up roller assy [3].
[1]
[3] [2]
[1] [2] 14. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the pick-up roller [2].
[1] [2] 15. Remove the pick-up roller/BP [2] from the collar [1].
11.2.3 Replacing the torque limiter/BP

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove the 2 springs [1], and then release the pressure of the separation
roller/BP [2].
[2]
F-159
3. Remove the E-ring [1], and then displace the bearing [2] in the arrow-marked
[1] [2] direction.
4. Remove the E-ring [3], and displace the bearing [4], and then displace the
separation roller assy/BP [5].
[4] [3]
[5]
[4] [1] [3] 5. Displace the torque limiter/BP [1] in the arrow-marked direction [2], and then
displace the pin [3].
Note
6. Pull out the shaft [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5], and then remove the
torque limiter/BP [1].
[5] [2]

11.2.4 Replacing the up down motor/BP (M4)

(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.10.2.4 Rear cover)
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the up down motor/BP (M4) [3].
[2] [1]
F-160

11.3 Relay conveyance section

11.3.1 Cleaning the bypass conveyance sensor/BP1 (PS1), /BP2 (PS2), and pre-registration sensor/BP (PS3)
(1) Procedure
1. Open the upper door [1].
[1] [2] 2. Open the bypass conveyance door [2].
[3] 3. Clean the bypass conveyance sensor/BP1 (PS1) [1], the bypass conveyance
sensor/BP2 (PS2) [2], and the pre-registration sensor/BP (PS3) [3] with the
blower brush.
[1] [2]
11.3.2 Cleaning the horizontal conveyance guide plate, relay exit sensor/BP (PS4), relay conveyance sensor/BP1 (PS5),
and /BP2 (PS6)
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 2. Press the conveyance guide lever [2] and open the conveyance guide plate.
F-161
3. Clean all the sides of the horizontal conveyance guide plate [1] with the
[1] cleaning pad.
4. Clean the relay exit sensor/BP (PS4) [1], the relay conveyance sensor/BP1
(PS5) [2], and the relay conveyance sensor/BP2 (PS6) [3] with the blower
brush.
[1] [3] [2]

11.3.3 Replacing the pre-registration clutch/BP (CL1)

(1) Procedure
[4] [5] [1] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.10.2.4 Rear cover)
2. Release the wiring harness, and remove the connector [1].
3. Remove the C-clip [2], and remove the pre-registration clutch/BP (CL1) [3].
Note
▪ When you install the pre-registration clutch/BP (CL1) [3], be sure to
engage the stopper [4] of the clutch with the projection [5] of the
metal frame.
[3] [2]

11.3.4 Replacing the pre-registration roller/BP and pre-registration roller bushing/BP

(1) Procedure
F-162

[1] [2] [1] 2. Remove the right cover/Lw. (Refer to G.10.2.3 Right cover/Lw)
4. Remove the pre-registration clutch/BP (CL1). (Refer to F.11.3.3 Replacing

the pre-registration clutch/BP (CL1))
5. Release the wiring harness, remove the screw [1], and remove the metal
plate [2].
[1] [2]
[2] [1] 6. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and remove the pre-registration roller bushing/BP
[2].
F-163
7. Open the front door.

[1] [2] 8. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the pre-registration roller bushing/BP [2].
9. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the metal plate [4].
[3] [4]
[1] 10. Slide the pre-registration roller/BP [1] in the arrow direction and remove it.
11.3.5 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch/BP (CL2)

(1) Procedure
2. Release the wiring harness, and remove the connector [1].
3. Remove the C-clip [2], and remove the intermediate conveyance clutch/BP
(CL2) [3].
Note
▪ When you install the intermediate conveyance clutch/BP (CL2) [3],
be sure to engage the stopper [4] of the clutch with the projection
[5] of the metal plate.
[4] [5]

F-164
11.3.6 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller/BP, intermediate conveyance roller bushing/BP, and conveyance
torque limiter/BP
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [1] 2. Remove the right cover/Lw. (Refer to G.10.2.3 Right cover/Lw)
4. Remove the intermediate conveyance clutch/BP (CL2). (Refer to F.11.3.5

Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch/BP (CL2))
5. Release the wiring harness, remove the screw [1], and remove the metal
plate [2].
[2] [1]
[2] [1] 6. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and remove the intermediate conveyance roller
bushing/BP [2].
F-165
7. Open the front door. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the intermediate
[1] [2] conveyance roller bushing/BP [2].
8. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the metal plate [4].
[3] [4]
9. Slide the intermediate conveyance roller assy/BP [1] in the arrow direction
[1] and remove it.
10. Remove the E-ring [1], the gear [2] and the pin [3], and then replace the
[2] intermediate conveyance roller/BP [4].
[4] [1] [3]
F-166
11. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the brake plate assy [2].
[1] [2]
[2] [1] 12. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the conveyance torque limiter assy/BP [2] in
the arrow direction and remove it.
13. Remove the E-ring [1], remove the gear [2] and the collar [3], and then
remove the conveyance torque limiter/BP [4].
Note
▪ To install them, engage the groove [5] of the conveyance torque
limiter/BP and the pin [6].
[5] [6]
[4] [2] [3] [1]

11.3.7 Replacing the exit roller/BP and exit roller bearing/BP

(1) Procedure
F-167
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.10.2.4 Rear cover)

[3] 2. Disconnect the connector [1], and then release the wiring harness.
3. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the motor mounting plate assy [3].
[2] [1]
4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
[2] [1]
[1] 5. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and the spacer [2], and remove the exit roller bearing/
BP [3].
[3] [2]
F-168

[1] 7. Remove the E-rings [1] and the spacer [2], and remove the exit roller
bearing/BP [3].
[3] [2]
8. Slide the exit roller/BP [1] in the arrow direction and remove it.
[1]
11.3.8 Replacing the lift sheet/BP

(1) Procedure
F-169

[1] 2. Remove the right cover/Lw. (Refer to G.10.2.3 Right cover/Lw)
[1]
[2] [1] 4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the wire [2].
Note
▪ When you remove the wire [2], be careful not to lose the screw [1].

6. Remove the horizontal conveyance guide [2].
[2] [1]
F-170
7. Remove the lift sheet/BP [2] from the horizontal conveyance guide plate [1].
[1] [2] NOTE
▪ When you reinstall the lift sheet/BP, be sure to paste the sheet that
is based on [3] and [4] of the pasting section.
[3]
[4]

F-171
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 12. OT-510
12. OT-510
12.1 Main tray section
12.1.1 Cleaning and lubrication of the paper exit alignment plate shaft
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.12.3.7 Upper cover /Fr2)
2. Remove the upper cover/Rr. (Refer to G.12.3.8 Upper cover /Rr)
3. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the paper exit cover/Up [2].
[2] [1]
4. Clean the paper exit alignment plate shaft [1] with the isopropyl alcohol and
apply the MH surf or Molykote EM-30L.
[1]
F-172
13. OT-511
13.1 Replacing the paper hold roller
13.1.1 Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to G.13.2.1 Paper exit unit)
2. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove the 2 paper hold roller assy
[2].
[2]
3. After you remove the E-ring [1], pull out the shaft [2], and then remove the
paper hold roller [3].
4. Remove the paper hold roller from the other paper hold roller assy following
Step 3.
[2] [3] [1]

a03uf2c077ca

13.2 Replacing the paper exit roller

13.2.1 Procedure
1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to G.13.2.1 Paper exit unit)
Note
▪ When you reinstall the gear, be sure to place it with its arrow-marked
side [3] on the E-ring side [1].
[3] [1] [2]
F-173
3. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove the bearing [2].

4. Remove the E-ring [3] and the bearing [4].
5. Remove 3 screws [5], and then remove the paper exit roller mounting plate/Rr
[6] and the paper exit roller [7].
[2] [1] [6] [5]
[7] [6]
[3] [4]

13.3 Replacing the paper exit driven roller/2

13.3.1 Procedure
1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to G.13.2.1 Paper exit unit)
2. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove the 4 roller holders [2].
3. Remove 2 paper exit driven roller assy [4] from the springs [3], 2 each.
[4] [2] [3]
[3] [1]
4. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bearing [2] and the paper exit
driven roller/1 [3].
[1] [2] [3]

a03uf2c079ca
F-174

6. Remove 2 E-rings [2], and then remove the first paper exit driven roller/2 [3].
[1] [2] [3]

a03uf2c080ca
7. Remove 2 E-rings [1], and then remove the second paper exit driven roller/2
[2].
8. Remove 2 paper exit driven roller/2 from the other paper exit driven roller assy
following Steps 4 to 7.
[1] [2] a03uf2c081ca

F-175
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 14. EF-103
14. EF-103
CAUTION
14.2 Fusing section
Some parts have a different maintenance cycle.
Periodical maintenance procedure Remark
F.4.11.2 Replacing the fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up and the fusing The maintenance cycle of the neutralizing flat spring assy differs.
heater lamp 2 assy/Up
G.3.2.31 Replacement of the fusing ball bearings/Up, /Lw1, the heat The following parts have a different maintenance cycle: The fusing ball
insulating sleeves/Up, /Lw1, the belt regulating sleeve, the fusing belt, bearing/Up, the fusing ball bearing/Lw1, the heat insulating sleeve/Up,
the fusing rollers/1, /2, and the neutralizing ring the heat insulating sleeve/Lw1, the belt regulating sleeve, the fusing
belt, the fusing roller/1, and the fusing roller/2.
F.4.11.4 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3)
F.4.11.5 Replacement of the fusing gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat The following parts have a different maintenance cycle: The fusing
insulating sleeve/Lw2, fusing roller/Lw bearing/Lw2, the fusing roller/Lw.
F.4.11.6 Replacement of the fusing temperature sensor/4 (TH4)
F.4.11.7 Replacement of the fusing gear/2, the fusing gear/3 The periodic maintenance cycle of the fusing gear/2 is different.
F.4.11.8 Replacement of the fusing separating claw assy The maintenance cycles differs.
F.4.11.9 Replacing the fusing paper exit roller/Up The maintenance cycles differs.
F-176
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 15. RU-518/HM-103
15. RU-518/HM-103
CAUTION
15.2 Output tray section

15.2.1 Replacing the paper exit gate solenoid (SD3)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Rr. (Refer to G.16.3.1 Upper cover/Rr)
2. Open the 5 wire saddles, and disconnect the connector [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the paper exit gate solenoid assy [3].
[2] Note
▪ Before you remove the screws [2], check the fixed position scale
of the paper exit gate solenoid assy [3].
▪ When you install the paper exit gate solenoid assy [3], the end of
the paper exit gate [4] must be into the hole of the actuator [5]. Fix
[1] it with the screws so that the fixed position scale is at the same
position as before it is removed.
[3]
[4]
[5]
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the solenoid mounting plate [2].
[1] [2]
F-177
5. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the solenoid cover [2]. Then remove the
paper exit gate solenoid (SD3) [3].
[3] Note
▪ Install the solenoid cover [2] with attention to the orientation not to
get the cable of the solenoid caught.
[1] [2]

Note
▪ After the installation, confirm that the position of the paper exit gate is switched with pushing the plunger of the paper exit
gate solenoid assy.
7. After the replacement, conduct the following steps.
• Counter reset of the special parts counter
15.3 Output paper density detection section

15.3.1 Replacing the color sensor shutter solenoid (SD1)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the color sensor unit. (Refer to G.16.3.8 Color sensor unit)
2. Release the 2 clamps, and disconnect the connector [1].
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the color sensor shutter solenoid
assy [2].
Note
▪ Before you remove the screws [1], check the fixed position scale
of the solenoid.
▪ Fix the solenoid with screws so that the fixed position scale is at
the same position as before it was.
[1]
[2]
F-178
4. Release the 2 clamps, and remove 2 screws [1]. Then remove the color
sensor shutter solenoid (SD1) [2].
[1] [2]

15.3.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid (SD2)

1. Remove the paper exit cover/Lt. ( G.16.3.2 Paper exit cover/Lt)
2. Release the 5 clamps. Then, disconnect the connector [1] and remove the
spring [2].
[2]
[1]
[6] [3] [4] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 1 screw [2].

4. Turn the spring pin of the plunger [4] that is hooked on the paper press arm
[3] 90 degrees. Then, remove the paper press solenoid assy [5] and the
sheet metal [6] from the paper press arm [3].
Note
▪ Before you remove the screws [1] and the screw [2], check the
fixed position scale of the solenoid [7] at 2 palaces.
▪ Fix the solenoid with screws so that the fixed position scale is at
the same position as before it was.
[1] [7] [2] [5]
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the paper press solenoid (SD2) [2].
[2]
[1]
F-179

1. Temporarily fasten the sheet metal [2] to the paper pressing solenoid assy
[1] with the screw [3].
[1]
2. Rotate the spring pin [1] upward.
[1]
3. Assemble the paper press solenoid assy [1] to the installation position with
inserting the upper ends of the sheet metal and plunger into the paper press
arm.
[1]
4. Turn the spring pin [1] to hook on the notch of the paper press arm [2].
[2]
[1]
5. Fully tighten the screw [1] that is fastened temporarily so that the fixed
position scale of the solenoid is at the same position as before it is removed.
6. Fix the solenoid with 2 screws [2] so that the fixed position scale is at the
same position as before it is removed.
[2] [1]
F-180
7. After that, install the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
▪ After the installation, confirm that the pressure roller is crimped when you push the plunger of the solenoid.
15.4 Water supply section

15.4.1 Replacing the water feed control solenoid (SD4)
(1) Procedure
2. Remove the water storage tank cover. (Refer to G.16.3.7 Water storage
tank cover)
[1]
3. Release 2 clamps [1] that are holding the wiring harness, and disconnect the
[4] [1] [2] connector [2].
4. Remove 2 screws [3], and remove the water leak detection tray/2 [4].
[3]
[3]
5. Remove the water shut-off jig [1].
[1]
F-181
6. Open the jam processing guide (RU8) [1].

[3] 7. Disconnect 2 connectors [2].
8. Cut off 3 connections of each pipe [3].
[1] [2]
9. Connect the water shut-off jig [2] to the pipe [1].

[1]
[2]
10. Pull out the water storage tank [1] to the position where you can disconnect
the connection of the pipe [2].
[2] 11. Disconnect the connection of the pipe [2].
Note
▪ If water drips due to disconnection of the pipe [2], absorb it with a
waste to prevent water from splashing to electronic parts.
[1]
F-182
12. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the hose relay unit cover [2].
[2]
[1]
13. Disconnect the connection of the pipe [1].

15. Pull out the hose relay unit [3] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-183
16. Note
▪ Install the hose relay unit [1] so that 2 claws [3] of it are inserted
[3] [2] into 2 holes [2].
[1]
17. Release 2 clamps [1], and disconnect the connector [2].

[4] [5] [3] 18. Release 2 clamps [3].
19. Remove 6 screws [4] and then remove the water feed control solenoid assy
[5].
Note
▪ Remove the water feed control solenoid assy [5], and then drain
the water in the pipe of the water feed control solenoid assy [5] to
a container.
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
F-184
[3] 20. Release the clamp [1].

22. Remove the water feed control solenoid [4] in the direction of the arrow with
disconnecting the connection with two pipes [3].
[2]
[1]
[4]
23. Note
▪ When you replace the water feed control solenoid, make sure that
2 rubber members [2] are attached to the new water feed control
solenoid [1].
[2] [1]
24. Note
▪ When you install the pipe [1], install it so that its end faces to the
[1] direction of the arrow.
F-185
25. Note
▪ When you install 2 pipes [1], 2 flanges [2] of the pipes must be
[3] [2] inside each cover [3] of the paper feed control solenoid.
[1]
26. Note
▪ When you install the paper feed control solenoid [1], press the
[3] [1] flange of the coupling member [2] so that it hits the solenoid cover
[3]. Make sure that there is no gap between the coupling member
[2] and the paper feeding control solenoid [1].
[2]
15.4.2 Replacing the pump motor (M401)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the water storage tank cover. (Refer to G.16.3.7 Water storage tank
[4] [1] [2] cover)
[3]
[3]
F-186

[3] [7] [2] [1] 5. Release 2 couplings of the pipes [3].
7. Open 2 clamps [6], and remove the pump assy.
8. Cut off the cable tie [7].
9. Remove the pipe [8] and the pipe [9], and remove the pump motor (M401)
[5].
Note
▪ Water leaks when you cut off the connection of the pipe [8] and
pipe [9]. Thus, drain water in the pipe to a container after you
disconnected it.
▪ When you remove the pipe [8] and the pipe [9], be careful not to
come off the connecting part [10] from the pump motor (M401) [5].
▪ When you install the pipe [8] and the pipe [9], be careful not to
mistake the installation position of each pipe.
[6] [8] [3] [9] [10] [4] [5] ▪ After you installed the pipe [8], secure it with a new cable tie.
15.4.3 Replacing the water feed filter

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the water storage tank. (Refer to G.16.3.9 Water storage tank)
2. Remove the connector [1], and remove the water leak detection tray/1 [2].
[1]
3. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the water feed motor assy [2].
[1] [2] 4. Note
▪ When you remove the water feed filter assy in the state that water
remains in the water storage tank, water that is contained in the
filter drips. Absorb the water with a waste to prevent water from
splashing to electronic parts.
F-187
[4] 5. Remove 2 claws [2] of the water feed filter holding member [1] with pushing
them in.
6. Remove the water feed filter [3] from the water filter assy.
Note
▪ When you install the water feed filter [3], insert it to the position
where it hits the projection [4] of the holding member so that the
water feed filter [3] does not come off.
[3]
[2]
[3] [1]

15.4.4 Cleaning the water storage tank

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the water storage tank. (Refer to G.16.3.9 Water storage tank)
[2] 2. Remove the connector [1], and remove the water leak detection tray/1 [2].
[1]
F-188
3. Remove 6 screws [1], and remove the wiring harness from the wiring
[2] harness clamp.
[1] [1] [2] [1]
[1] [2] 5. Remove 6 screws [1], and remove the water storage tank cover/Up [2].
[1] 6. Drain the water out of the water tank [1], and clean the inside of the water
tank [1] with the cleaning pad and isopropyl alcohol.
7. After you finish cleaning, fill the half of the water storage tank [1] with water
(3 L).
15.5 Humidification section
15.5.1 Cleaning the supply roller and the water feed roller/Up
(1) Procedure
1. Open the door [1], and pull out the humidification unit [2].
[1] [2]
F-189
2. Remove 6 screws [1], and remove the cover [2].
[2] [1]
3. Clean the supply roller [1] and the water feed roller/Up [2] with the cleaning
[2] [1] pad and isopropyl alcohol.
Note
▪ The control roller/Up does not require cleaning.
15.5.2 Cleaning the water feed roller/Lw and the humidification roller/Lw

(1) Procedure
1. Open the door [1], and pull out the humidification unit [2].
[1] [2]
2. Hold the jam release lever [1], and open the paper path assy [2] in the
[2] [1]
3. Clean the humidification roller/Lw [1] and the water feed roller/Lw [2] with the
cleaning pad and isopropyl alcohol.
[1] [2]
15.5.3 Removing the humidification section assy/Up

(1) Procedure
F-190

[2] 2. Remove the screw [2], and open the front door [1] to the maximum.
[1]
3. Take the pin [1] out of the bag.
4. Remove the humidification unit. (Refer to G.16.3.10 Humidification unit)
[1]
5. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the HM support stay assy/1 [2].
[2]
[1]
F-191
6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the adjustment plate/1 [2].
7. Remove the screw [3], and disassemble the HM support stay/1 [4] into two.
[4] [1] [2] [3]

[1] [2]
9. Remove the screw [1], and remove the sheet metal [2].
[1] [2]
10. Release 2 clamps [1].
[4] 11. Disconnect the connector [2].
12. Remove the screw [3].
14. Remove the belt [5], and then remove the stepping motor/assy [6].
[4] [6]
[2] [1] [3] [4] [5]
F-192
15. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal plate [2].
[1] [2]
16. Remove 2 pipes [1].
[3]
[1] [2]
F-193
19. Remove the humidification section assy/Up [1] from the humidification unit,
and install the HM support stay/1 [2] to the humidification section assy/Up
[1].
Note
▪ When you remove the humidification section assy/Up [1], keep it
as horizontal as you can not to spill the water in the unit.
▪ If you tilt the humidification unit [3] a lot or tip it over, water spills
from the unit. Be careful to handle.
▪ When you install the HM support stay/1 [2] to the humidification
section assy/Up [1], install it so that the stamp [3] and the stamp
[4] have the same character.
[5] [4] ▪ Be careful that the sensor [5] does not hit the HM support stay/1
when you load the humidification section assy/Up [1] on the HM
support stay/1.
[1]
[2]
[3]
15.5.4 Replacing the control roller/Up

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the humidification section assy/Up. (Refer to F.15.5.3 Removing
[1] the humidification section assy/Up)
[2]
[1]
F-194
3. Remove 2 springs [1].

[1] [2] [3] 4. Remove 2 C-clips [2], and remove 2 bearings [3].
[3] [2] [1]
F-195
5. Remove 2 bearings [1], and remove the regulation shaft [2].

[1]
[2]
[1]
F-196

[2] [1] 7. Remove 2 bearings [2], and remove the control roller/Up [3].
Note
▪ When you install the control roller/Up [3], install it so that the the
longer side of the roller shaft [4] comes to the rear side.
[3] [4]
[1] [2]
15.5.5 Replacing the humidification roller/Up and the humidification roller/Lw

1. Remove the humidification section assy/Up. (Refer to F.15.5.3 Removing
the humidification section assy/Up)
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove 2 HM support stays/2 [2].
[2] [1]
3. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the cover [2].
[2] [1]
F-197
4. Remove the screw [1], and remove the cover [2].
[1] [2]
[4]
[2]
[1]
9. Remove the screw [1], and remove the sheet metal [2].
[1] [2]

[1]
F-198
11. Disconnect 2 connectors [1].

[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-199
[1] 14. Remove 7 screws [1].
[1]
15. Note
▪ Be careful about 4 pieces of red painted screws [1] near the other
screws because disassembling them is prohibited.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
F-200
16. Install 2 HM support stays/2 [1] with 2 screws [2].

17. Remove the humidification section assy/Lw [3], and put it on a workbench.
Note
▪ When you remove the humidification section assy/Lw [3], be sure
not to damage the wiring harness [4] of the humidification unit [3].
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
18. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the HM support stay/2 [2].
[2] [1]
F-201
19. Install the HM support stay/2 [1] with the screw [2].
[1] [2]
20. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the HM support stay/2 [2].
[2] [1]
21. Install the HM support stay/2 [1] with the screw [2].
[2] [1]
22. Remove the screw [1], and remove the knob [2].
24. Remove the bearings [4].
[4]
[3] [2] [1]
F-202
25. Loosen the screw [1] with the hexagonal wrench # 1.5 and remove the
actuator/2 [2].
27. Remove the bearings [4].
[4]
[3] [2] [1]
28. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the mounting plate assy [2].
[2]
[1]
29. Remove the actuator/1 [1].
30. Remove the belt [2] and the belt [3].
[2] [1] [3]

31. Remove the humidification control cam/UpFr [1].
[1]
F-203

33. Remove the spacer [2].
34. Remove the humidification control cam/LwFr [3].
[3] [2] [1]

36. Remove 2 release rollers/1 [2].
[2] [1]
37. Note
▪ Reinstall the release roller [1] so that its bearing [2] comes to the
[1] [2] humidification roller/Lw side.
38. Remove the spring [1].

40. Remove 2 bearings [3].
[1] [2] [3]

[1]
F-204
42. Remove the screw [1], and remove the humidification roller/Up [2] in the
[2] [1]
43. Note
▪ Reinstall the humidification roller/Up [1] aligning its groove [2] with
[2] [3] the groove to secure a screw [3].
[1]

[2] [1] 45. Open the jam processing guide [2].
[1] 46. Remove the humidification roller/Lw [1].

F-205

1. Assemble the parts following the removal steps in reverse until you install the
[5] [8] [6] [3] release roller/1.
Note
▪ Bearings and springs are similar in size and shape. Be sure to
assemble the parts to the correct positions with the parts that were
used before disassembly. Be careful not to mistake parts.
2. Install the humidification control cam/UpFr [1].
3. Rotate the humidification roller/Up [2] with adjusting 2 holes [3] of the
humidification roller/Up [2] with the hole [4] of the humidification control cam/
UpFr [1] and the hole [6] of the humidification control cam/UpRr [5].
4. Insert the pin [7] that is pulled out in "removal step 3 of humidification section
assy/Up" into the hole [4] of the humidification control cam/UpFr [1].
Note
[2] ▪ When you insert the pin [7], make sure that the pin [7] is into the
hole [3] of the humidifying roller/Up [2].
5. Insert the pin [8] that is removed in the removal step 1 into the hole [6] of the
humidification control cam/UpRr [5].
Note
▪ When you insert the pin [8], make sure that the pin [8] is into the
hole [3] of the humidifying roller/Up [2].
[7] [4] [3] [1]
6. Install the belt [1].

[2] 7. Remove 2 pins [2].
[2] [1]
F-206
8. Install the humidification control cam/LwFr [1] in the removal steps in

[5] [8] reverse.
9. Rotate the water feed roller/Lw [2] with adjusting 2 holes [3] of the water feed
roller/Lw [2] with the hole [4] of the humidification control cam/LwFr [1] and
the hole [6] of the humidification control cam/LwRr [5].
10. Insert the pin [7] into the hole [4] of the humidification control cam/LwFr [1].
Note
hole [3] of the water feed roller/Lw.
11. Insert the pin [8] into the hole [6] of the humidification control cam/LwRr [5].
Note
[6] [3] hole [3] of the water feed roller/Lw.
[2]
[7] [4] [3] [1]

12. Install the belt [1].
[2] 13. Remove 2 pins [2].
[2] [1]
F-207
14. Install the actuator/1 [1] in the removal steps in reverse.

[3] Note
▪ Rotate to install the actuator/1 [1] so that the projection [2] of the
actuator/1 [1] is aligned with the notch [3] of the humidification
control cam/UpFr.
▪ Do not rotate the humidification roller/Up [4].
[2] [4]
[1]
15. Install the mounting plate assy [1] with 4 screws [2] in the removal steps in
[5] [6] reverse.
Note
▪ Install the mounting plate assy [1] so that its tension pulley [3] is
on the belt [4].
▪ When you install the mounting plate assy, be careful not to
damage the photo sensor [6] of the mounting plate assy [1] with
the actuator/1 [5].
▪ Install the actuator/1 [5] so that it is between the elements of the
photo sensor [6].
[1]
[2] [4] [3]
F-208
[6] 16. Install the actuator/2 [1] to the shaft [2] in the removal steps in reverse.
17. Insert the positioning pin [4] of the adjustment plate/1 [3] that is removed in
"removal step 6 of the humidification section assy/Up" into the positioning
hole [6] of the humidification control cam/LwFr [5].
18. Rotate the actuator/2 [1] to the position where its projection [7] is fitted into
the notch [8] of the adjustment plate/1 [3].
19. Fix the adjustment plate/1 [3] with the screw [9].
20. Tighten the screw [10] to fix the actuator/2 [1] to the shaft [2].
21. Remove the screw [9], and remove the adjustment plate/1 [3].
Note
▪ Install the actuator/2 [1] so that it is between the elements of the
photo sensor [11].
[2] [5] 22. Reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[10] [4]
[1]
[11] [7] [8] [3] [9]
15.5.6 Replacing the water feed roller/Lw

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the humidification roller/Lw. (Refer to F.15.5.5 Replacing the
humidification roller/Up and the humidification roller/Lw)
[2] [1]
F-209

[1] 5. Open the jam processing guide [2].
[2]
[1] 6. Remove the water feed roller [1].
7. Note
[3] [2] ▪ Reinstall the water feed roller/Lw [1] aligning its groove [2] with the
groove to secure a screw [3].
[1]

15.5.7 Replacing the control roller/Lw

(1) Procedure
F-210
1. Remove the humidification roller/Lw. (Refer to F.15.5.5 Replacing the

[6] [7] humidification roller/Up and the humidification roller/Lw)
3. Remove the roller [2].
7. Remove the roller [6].
10. Open the jam processing guide [9].
[5] [8]
[9]
[3]
[2] [1] [4]

[1] 11. Remove control roller/Lw [1].
F-211
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 16. RU-510
16. RU-510
CAUTION
16.2.1 Replacing the paper re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the paper re-feed roller drive gear/2
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the re-feed roller drive gear/1 [2] and
the re-feed roller drive gear/2 [3].
16.2.2 Replacing the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2) and the paper exit
conveyance belt
(1) Removing the entrance motor assy, Replacement procedure of the entrance conveyance belt
3. Remove the 5 saddles [2] of the entrance motor mounting plate, and release
[3] [4] [5] the wiring harness.
4. Remove 4 screws [3], the entrance motor assy [4] and the entrance
conveyance belt [5].
Note
When it is reinstalled, temporary tighten the 4 screws [3] and apply the
tension to the entrance conveyance belt [5] by own weight of the
entrance motor assy [4]. Then tighten 4 screws [3].
[2] [3] [1]
(2) Removing the paper exit motor assy, Replacement procedure of the paper exit conveyance belt
F-212
1. Remove the re-feed roller drive gear/2. (Refer to F.16.2.1 Replacing the
[5] [2] [4] [1] paper re-feed roller drive gear/1 and the paper re-feed roller drive gear/2)
3. Remove the 3 saddles [2] of the paper exit motor mounting plate, and
release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the 4 screws [3], the paper exit motor assy [4] and the paper exit
conveyance belt [5].
Note
When you reinstall the paper exit motor assy, temporary tighten the 4
screws [3] and apply the tension to the paper exit conveyance belt [5]
by own weight of the paper exit motor assy [4]. Then tighten 4 screws
[3].
[3]
Replacement procedure of the entrance motor (M1) and the paper exit motor (M2)
[2] [1] [3] 1. Remove the entrance motor assy and the paper exit motor assy. (Refer to
F.16.2.2 (1) Removing the entrance motor assy, Replacement procedure of
the entrance conveyance belt, F.16.2.2 (2) Removing the paper exit motor
assy, Replacement procedure of the paper exit conveyance belt)
3. Loosen the 2 screws [2] and remove the pulley gear [3].
4. Remove the 4 screws [4]. Then remove the entrance motor (M1) and the
paper exit motor (M2) [6] from the mounting plate [5].
[5] [4] [6]
16.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley

(1) Procedure
F-213
1. Remove the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper
exit motor (M2), and the paper exit conveyance belt
[3] [4] (Refer to F.16.2.2 Replacing the entrance motor (M1), the entrance
conveyance belt, the paper exit motor (M2) and the paper exit conveyance
belt)
2. Remove the E-ring [1] and then 1 paper exit pulley [2].
3. Remove each 1 of the screws [3] at 5 places, and then remove the 5 paper
exit pulleys [4].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper exit pulley [4] be sure that the gear
comes inside.
[2] [1]
16.2.4 Replacing the entrance roller/1, /2, paper exit roller, bearing /K and bearing assy
(1) Procedure
F-214
1. Replacing the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper
exit motor (M2), the paper exit conveyance belt
[2] (Refer to " F.16.2.2 Replacing the entrance motor (M1), the entrance
belt")
Remove the paper exit pulley, the conveyance pulley.
(Refer to " F.16.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the conveyance
pulley")
2. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each.
3. Remove the screw [2], 2 each, and then remove the bearing/K and the
bearing assy [3], 1 each. *Only the bearing of the paper exit roller [8] is the
bearing assy.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the bearing/K and the bearing assy [3], be sure
that the notch of the bearing/K and the bearing assy comes in the
position [4] as it is shown in the picture.
[3] [1] [6] ▪ To prevent the notch from opening, when tighten the screws [2], 1
for each, in counterclockwise order.
▪ When you reinstall the bearing/K [3] of the entrance roller/1 [6],
entrance roller/2 [7], be sure to apply the Molykote EM-30L inside
the bearing/K [3].
▪ When you reinstall the bearing/K [3] of the paper exit roller [8], be
sure to apply the Molykote EM-30L on all around of the spring pins
[5] on the front and rear of the shaft.
4. Remove the entrance roller/1 [6], entrance roller/2 [7] and the paper exit
roller [8].
[8] [7] [4] [2]
[2] [1] [3]
[5]
16.2.5 Replacing the merging section roller and bearing/K

(1) Procedure
F-215
[2] [1] [3] 1. Remove the paper exit motor (M2) and the paper exit conveyance belt.
(Refer to F.16.2.2 Replacing the entrance motor (M1), the entrance
belt)
2. Remove the conveyance pulley. (Refer to F.16.2.3 Replacing the paper exit
pulley and the conveyance pulley)
4. Remove the screws [3], 2 each, and E-rings [4], 1 each, and then remove the
bearing/K [5], 1 each.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the bearing/K [7], be sure to that the notch of
the bearing/K comes in the position [6] as it is shown in the
[7] [4] [5] picture.
▪ When you reinstall the bearing/K [7], be sure to apply the Molykote
EM-30L inside of the bearing/K [7].
5. Remove the merging section roller [7].
[6]
[3]
[5] [4]
16.2.6 Replacing the stacker entrance roller and bearing/K

(1) Procedure
F-216
[2] [1] [3] [4] 1. Remove the paper exit motor (M1) and the entrance conveyance belt. (Refer
to F.16.2.2 Replacing the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance
belt, the paper exit motor (M2) and the paper exit conveyance belt)
2. Remove the conveyance pulley. (Refer to F.16.2.3 Replacing the paper exit
pulley and the conveyance pulley)
4. Remove each 1 spring [3].
5. Remove the screw [4], 1 each, and the mounting metal fitting [5], 1 each.
6. Remove the E-ring [6], 1 each, and then remove bearing/K [7], 1 each.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the bearing/K [7], be sure that the notch of the
bearing/K comes in the position [8] as it is shown in the picture.
[9] [7] [6] [5] ▪ When you reinstall the bearing/K [7], be sure to apply the Molykote
EM-30L inside of the bearing/K [7].
7. Remove the stacker entrance roller [9].
[3] [8] [7]

[5]
[4]
[6]
16.2.7 Replacing the re-feed roller and bearing/K

(1) Procedure
F-217
1. Remove the entrance motor (M1), the entrance conveyance belt, the paper
[3] [6] [1] exit motor (M2) and the paper exit conveyance belt.
(Refer to " F.16.2.2 Replacing the entrance motor (M1), the entrance
belt")
Remove the paper exit pulley and the conveyance pulley.
(Refer to " F.16.2.3 Replacing the paper exit pulley and the conveyance
[2] pulley")
2. Remove each of the spring [1], 1 each.
3. Remove each of the screws [2], 1 each, and the mounting metal fitting [3], 1
each.
4. Remove the E-rings [4], 1 each, and then remove 5 bearing/K [5].
[4] [5] [8] Note
▪ When the bearing/K [5] is reinstalled, be sure that the notch of the
bearing/K [5] comes in the position [6].
▪ When you reinstall the bearing/K [5], be sure to apply the Molykote
EM-30L inside the bearing/K [5].
5. Remove the paper re-feed roller [8].
[5] [1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
16.2.8 Replacing the driven roller

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover.
[6] [5] [8] [3] (Refer to G.18.2.4 Left cover)
Remove the rear cover.
(Refer to Rear cover)
2. Remove the 2 open close springs [1].
3. Release the release spring/Rt [2] and remove the screw [3]. Then remove
the locking claw [4] and the release spring/Rt [2].
4. Release the release spring/Lt [5] and remove the screw [6]. Then remove the
locking claw [7] and the release spring/Lt [5].
5. Remove the 3 E-rings [8] and remove the pin [9]. Then pull out the open
close lever assy [10] in the direction of the arrow.
[7] [9] [10] [2] [4]
[1]
F-218
6. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], remove the saddle and release the wiring
[1] harness.
7. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the open close shaft assy/Rt [3].
8. Pull out the straight conveyance guide plate/Up [4] in the direction of the
arrow.
[2] [1]
[4] [3]
[3] 9. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the open close lever lock part [2].
10. Remove 10 screws [3] and 3 screws [4].
11. Remove the 3 saddles [5], and release the wiring harness, and remove the
conveyance cover/Up [6].
[2] [1]
[4] [3]
[5] [6]
F-219
12. Remove the holding spring [1], 1 each, and remove the 4 driven rollers [2].
[2] [1]
Note
▪ When you reinstall the driven roller, be sure that the groove of the
driven roller [1] faces down.
[1]
16.2.9 Replacing the straight gate

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] [2] 2. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
3. Remove the saddle [2] of the gate motor mounting plate at 6 places and
release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the 3 screws [3] and then remove the fan motor mounting plate [4].
[3] [4] [1] [2] [3]
F-220
5. Remove the straight gate spring [1].

6. Remove the screw [2] and remove the straight gate solenoid arm [3].
[3] [5] [4] 7. Remove the E-ring [4] and remove the bearing [5].
[1] [2]
8. Remove the straight conveyance guide plate [1].

[1] [4] 9. Remove the E-ring [2] and bearing [3], and pull out the straight gate [4] in the
[3]
[2]
16.2.10 Replacing the stack switch motor (M6)

(1) Procedure
[1] [4] (Refer to G.18.2.3 Rear cover)
2. Remove the saddle [1], and release the wiring harness.
4. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the stack switch motor (M6) [4].
[2] [3]
F-221

Note
▪ When you install the stack switch motor (M6), be sure to fit the
gear of the stack switch motor (M6) to the belt [1].
[1]
F-222
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 17. FS-531
17. FS-531
CAUTION
17.2.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the bearing [2] and then remove the shaft [3] of the
intermediate roller.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c004na
[1] 3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller, prize open and remove
the sponge roller.
15jkf2c005na
4. With each of the depressions [1] of a new sponge roller and the shaft that is
brought together, press the sponge roller until it clicks to fit it in securely.
[1]
[1]
15jkf2c006na

Note
▪ When reinstalling, check that the pin on the rear side of the intermediate conveyance roller shaft is inserted into the
groove on the receiver side securely.

17.3.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)
(1) Procedure
F-223
1. Activate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of
the main body.
2. Push up the actuator [1] of the main tray upper limit sensor (PS2) with
fingers and down the main tray [2].
3. Deactivate SW1 and SW2 of the main body, and unplug the power plug.
[1] [2]
15vlf2c001na
4. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller, prize open and remove
[1] the sponge roller.
15jkf2c002na
[1]
[1]
15jkf2c003na

17.4 Stacker section
17.4.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller)
(1) Procedure
F-224
[2] [1] 1. Open the front door.

2. Pull out the stacker unit.
3. Remove the C-clip [2] and then remove the paper assist roller [1].
15jkf2c007na

17.4.2 Replacement of the cleaning plate Assy

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the front door.
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cleaning plate Assy [2].
[2]
a0drf2c001ca

17.5 Stapler section
17.5.1 Replacing the stapler unit
(1) Procedure
[3] [4] [1] 1. Open the front door.
3. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.
4. Remove 2 screws [2] from the stapler stand/Fr [1], and then remove the
stapler stand/Fr [1].
Note
▪ When the screw hole for the screw [2] is too loose, the screw hole
[3] can be used.
▪ When you reinstall it, be careful not to damage the pet [4].
[2] 15jkf2c008na
5. Remove the connector cover [1], and then disconnect 2 connectors [2].
6. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the ground cable [4].
[4] [3] [2] [1] 15jkf2c009nb
F-225
[2] [1] 7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the stapler stand/Fr [2] from the
stapler/Fr [3].
[3] 15jkf2c010na
[1] 8. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 to remove the stapler/Rr [1].
15jkf2c011na

F-226
18. FS-612
CAUTION
18.2.1 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the bearing [2] and then remove the shaft [3] of the
intermediate roller.
[2]
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c004na
[1] 3. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller, prize open and remove
the sponge roller.
15jkf2c005na
[1]
[1]
15jkf2c006na

Note
▪ When reinstalling, check that the pin on the rear side of the intermediate conveyance roller shaft is inserted into the
groove on the receiver side securely.

18.3.1 Replacing the paper exit roller (sponge roller)
(1) Procedure
F-227
1. Activate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of
the main body.
fingers and down the main tray [2].
3. Deactivate SW1 and SW2 of the main body, and unplug the power plug.
[1] [2]
15vlf2c001na
4. Insert a driver into the groove of the sponge roller, prize open and remove
[1] the sponge roller.
15jkf2c002na
[1]
[1]
15jkf2c003na

18.4.1 Replacing the paper assist roller (sponge roller)
(1) Procedure
F-228

3. Open the paper assist section [1] and then lift the paper assist roller [2].
4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the paper assist roller [2].
[1]
[3] [2] 15jmf2c001na

18.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover
CAUTION
▪ When you remove the FS from the main body and pull out the stacker unit, FS possibly falls and causes an injury to you.
(1) Procedure
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
[1] 15jmf2c002na
3. Remove 2 screws [1] that are provided on the rail stopper, and then pull out
[1]
the stacker unit [2] further.
Note
▪ To prevent the falling of the FS, put something [3] under the pulled
out stacker unit for balancing.
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jmf2c003na
4. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the stapler unit cover [2].
[1]
[2]
15jmf2c004na

Note
▪ The stapler unit consists of the clincher section and the stapler section.
▪ Be sure not to move the clincher section and the stapler section in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it causes the
timing belt tooth skipping.
F-229
▪ After you install the stapler unit, be sure to perform the staple up down position adjustment. (Refer to I.24.9 Staple up/down
position adjustment)
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [3] 1. Enter the service mode and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode].
Perform the output code 72-32: Stapler movement motor (M11) (A4, 1-
stapling position). Then deactivate the main body.
3. Pull out the stacker unit and remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to
F.18.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the stapler unit cover)
4. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the screw [2] and then remove the flat
stitching stopper release unit/Fr [3].
5. Enter the service mode and select [State Confirmation]- [I/O Check Mode].
Perform the output code 72-31, and then deactivate the main body.
15jmf2c005na
[5] 6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the ground [2] and the clamp [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] to remove the clincher/Fr [5], and then remove the
connector [6].
[6] [4]
[1]
[3] [2]
15jmf2c006na
[2] [1] 8. Remove the screw [1] and remove the flat stitching stopper release unit/Rr
[2].
9. Disconnect the connector [3] at the rear side of the flat stitching stopper
release unit/Rr [2] and remove the wiring harness from the clamp [4].
[3] [4]
15jmf2c007na
[2] 10. Remove 4 screws [4] of the clincher/Rr [1] and then remove the ground [3].
[1] [3] 15jmf2c008na
F-230
[3] 11. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the ball bearing bracket [2]. Then rotate
the clincher/Rr so that it comes to the position easily removed and
disconnect the connector [4].
Note
▪ Be careful not to lose the ball bearing retaining spring [5] and the
ball.
[4]
[5] [1]
[2] 15jmf2c009na
[2] 12. Remove the cartridge from the stapler.

13. Remove 4 screws [2] of the stapler/Fr [1], and remove the screw [3] of the
[1] ground cable. Then put out the stapler/Fr [1] and disconnect the connector
[4].
[2]
[3] [4] 15jmf2c010na
14. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the mounting plate [3] from the stapler/Fr
[2].
[1] [3] [2] 15jmf2c011na
[1] 15. Remove 2 screws [3] of the sensor cover [2] of the stapler/Rr [1]. After you
remove the screws, remove the screw [4] of the ground cable and then
disconnect the connector [5].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the sensor cover [2], be sure that the wiring
[2] harness does not interfere the stapler rotation home sensor (PS13)
[7]. Also be sure that the gear does not nip it.
[5]
[3] [4] [6]

15jmf2c012na
[1] 16. Remove 4 screws [1] to remove the stapler/Rr [2], and then disconnect the
connector [3].
[2] Note
▪ When you remove the stapler/Rr [2], be careful not to damage PS13
[4].
[1]
[4] [3]
15jmf2c013na
F-231
17. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the mounting plate [3] from the stapler/Rr
[2].
[3] [1] [2] 15jmf2c014na
F-232
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 19. PI-502
19. PI-502
CAUTION

19.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/Up and the paper feed roller/Up
(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.24.2.2 Upper cover)
[1] [2] 2. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left and right
to remove the paper feed roller Assy/Up [3].
[2]
[3]
15jff2c001na
3. Remove the bearing [1] and remove the actuator [2].
[1]
[2]
a04hf2c001ca
4. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove 2 bearings [2].
[2]
[1]
a04hf2c002ca
[2] [3] 5. Remove the C-clip [1].

6. Slide 2 roller shafts [2] in the arrow-marked direction and remove the pick-up
roller/Up [3] and the paper feed roller/Up [4].
Note
▪ When you reinstall, be sure to assemble them so that the blue
surfaces of the one-way clutches of the pick-up roller and the
paper feed roller come to the front side.
[4] [1] a04hf2c003ca
F-233
[2] [5] [1] 7. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and the paper feed roller [2] from the one-way
clutches [3] and [4].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the pick-up roller [1], insert the one-way clutch
[3] from the notch [5] side so that the notch [5] of the pick-up roller
matches with the projection [6] of the one-way clutch.
▪ When you reinstall the paper feed roller [2], insert the one-way
[7] clutch [4] so that its projection [8] fits to the notch [7] of the paper
feed roller.
[4] [3]
[8] [6] a04hf2c004ca
19.2.2 Replacing the pick-up roller/Lw and the paper feed roller/Lw

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].
2. Perform steps 2 to 7 of " F.19.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/Up and the
paper feed roller/Up."
15jff2c004na
19.2.3 Replacing the separation roller/Up and the torque limiter/Up

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.24.2.2 Upper cover)
[1] [2] 2. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and slide outward the bearings [2] at the left and right
to remove the paper feed roller assy/Up [3].
[2]
[3]
15jff2c005na
[2] 3. Release the hooks on the right and left, and then lift the separation roller
assy/Up [2] to remove it.
[1] 15jff2c006na
[1] [2] 4. Remove the C-clip [1] from the separation roller assy/Up and then remove
the separation roller/Up [2] and the torque limiter/Up [3].
Note
▪ Be sure to install the separation roller/Up with its 2 notches [4] on
[3]
the front and fitted to the projections [5].
[4]
[5] 15jff2c007na
F-234
19.2.4 Replacing the separation roller/Lw and the torque limiter/Lw

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].
2. Perform steps 2, 3 and 4 of " F.19.2.3 Replacing the separation roller/Up and
the torque limiter/Up."
15jff2c008na
19.2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch/Up (CL201) and the paper feed clutch/Lw (CL202)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the PI Unit. (Refer to G.24.2.5 PI unit)
[2] [1] [3] [5] 2. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.24.2.2 Upper cover)
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the clutch fixing cover [2].
Note
▪ When you install the clutch fixing plate, be sure to install it so that
the spring [3] comes under the fixing plate.
▪ When you install the clutch fixing plate, be sure to engage the
stopper [4] of the clutch with the fixing plate and install it.
5. Remove the connector [5], remove the E-ring [6] and remove the paper feed
clutch/Up [7].
Note
▪ When you install the paper feed clutch/Up [7], be sure to engage
the D-cut [8] of the shaft with the paper feed clutch/Up and install
[4] [7] it.
[6] [8]
F-235
6. Pull the release lever [1] and open the upper door [2].
[4] 7. Remove 5 screws [3] and disconnect 2 connectors [4].
8. Release the wiring from the saddle and pull out the PIDB mounting plate [5]
toward you.
[3]
[1] [2] [5]
[3]
9. Note
▪ When you install the PIDB mounting plate, be sure to engage the
notch [1] of the mounting plate with the projection [2] of the paper
feed clutch/Lw.
[2] [1]
10. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the conveyance clutch/Lw [2].
Note
▪ When you install the paper feed clutch/Up [2], be sure to engage
the D-cut [3] of the shaft with the paper feed clutch/Up and install
it.
[1] [3] [2]

F-236
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 20. IQ-501
20. IQ-501
CAUTION
20.2.1 Pulling out/reinstalling the conveyance mount
(1) Normal pulling out procedure
[1] 1. Open the front door/Up [1].
2. While you release the lock [1], turn the conveyance mount lever [2]
counterclockwise.
3. Pull out the conveyance mount [3].
[2] [1] [3]

4. When you install the conveyance mount, raise its lever after you push it back.
(2) Maximum pulling out procedure

1. Pull out the conveyance mount. (Refer to F.20.2.1 (1) Normal pulling out
procedure)
2. Insert the driver [1] into release hole [2] and rotate it to release the lock/Rt.
[2]
[1]
F-237
3. Rotate the release shaft [1] to release the lock/Lt.

4. While you release the lock/Rt in the step 2 and the lock/Lt in the step 3, pull
out the conveyance mount [2] fully.
[1] [2]
5. When you install the conveyance mount, raise its lever after you push it back.
20.3 Scanner section/Scanner calibration section

20.3.1 Cleaning the scanner glass/1, /2
(1) Procedure
2. Remove the cleaning tool [2].
Note
[2] ▪ When you install the cleaning tool [2], install it so that the cleaning
surface [3] comes inside.
[1]
[3]
F-238
3. Face down the cleaning surface [2] of the cleaning tool [1], and then insert
[3] the tool into the scanner cleaning hole/1.
4. Move the cleaning tool [1] back and forth once to clean the scanner glass/1.
Note
▪ When the cleaning message does not disappear even if you move
the cleaning tool back and forth once, move the tool back and forth
for several times. (Reference: About five round trips)
[1]
[2]
5. Face up the cleaning surface [2] of the cleaning tool [1], and then insert the
[3] tool into the scanner cleaning hole/2.
6. Move the cleaning tool [1] back and forth once to clean the scanner glass/2.
Note
▪ When the cleaning message does not disappear even if you move
the cleaning tool back and forth once, move the tool back and forth
for several times. (Reference: About five round trips)
[1] [2]
20.3.2 Cleaning the scanner B&W standard part/1, scanner white backing/1, scanner black backing/1-1, /1-2
(1) Procedure
F-239
1. Pull out the conveyance mount. (Refer to F.20.2.1 Pulling out/reinstalling the
conveyance mount)
2. Insert the driver [2] into the tool insert holes [1], and rotate the calibration
stick/1 [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
3. Keep rotating the calibration stick/1 until you can see the scanner B&W
standard part/1 [1].
4. Clean the scanner B&W standard part/1 [1] with using the hydro wipe.
Note
▪ Do not use alcohol. When you use it, unevenness occurs on the
surface.
5. With the same procedure as the step 3 and the step 4, clean the scanner
white backing/1 [2], the scanner black backing/1-1 [3], and the scanner black
backing/1-2 [4] with using the hydro wipe.
Note
surface.
▪ Be sure not to damage the surface of the scanner white backing/1
or make it dirty.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
20.3.3 Cleaning the scanner B&W standard part/2, scanner white backing/2, scanner black backing/2-1, /2-2
(1) Procedure
F-240
1. Pull out the conveyance mount. (Refer to F.20.2.1 Pulling out/reinstalling the
conveyance mount)
stick/2 [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
4. Clean the scanner B&W standard part/2 [1] with using the hydro wipe.
Note
surface.
5. With the same procedure as the step 3 and the step 4, clean the scanner
white backing/2 [2], the scanner black backing/2-1 [3], and the scanner black
backing/2-2 [4] with using the hydro wipe.
Note
surface.
or make it dirty.
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
20.4 Colorimeter section/Colorimeter calibration section

20.4.1 Cleaning the colorimeter glass and the colorimetry trigger sensor (PS013)
(1) Procedure
F-241
1. Pull out the conveyance mount fully. (Refer to F.20.2.1 (2) Maximum pulling
[1]
out procedure)
2. Lift the colorimeter section [1].
3. Clean the colorimeter glass [2] with using the blower brush.
4. Clean the colorimetry trigger sensor [3] with using the hydro wipe.
Note
▪ Do not use alcohol.
[3]
[2]
6. After cleaning the colorimeter glass, perform the following adjustment.
• Spot Detect. Base Adjustment (Refer to I.4.9.93 IQ-501 Spot Detect. Base Adjustment (IQ Optimizer Adjustment))
20.4.2 Cleaning the paper temperature sensor (TEMS4), colorimeter white backing, and colorimeter white calibration
block
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Pull out the conveyance mount fully. (Refer to F.20.2.1 (2) Maximum pulling
out procedure)
3. Clean the paper temperature sensor (TEMS4) [2] with using the blower
brush.
[2]
[2] [1] 4. Keep rotating the colorimeter calibration section [2] with your hand until you
can see the colorimeter white backing [1].
5. Clean the colorimeter white backing [1] with using the hydro wipe.
Note
F-242
[2] [1] 6. Keep rotating the colorimeter calibration section [2] with your hand until you
can see the colorimeter white calibration block [1].
7. Clean the colorimeter white calibration block [1] with using the hydro wipe.
Note
F-243
21. FS-532
CAUTION
21.2 Paper conveyance section

21.2.1 Lubrication of the FNS entrance roller conveyance switching cam, the FNS entrance roller conveyance
switching gate/Up
(1) Procedure
2. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on the FNS entrance roller conveyance
switching cam [1] and the arm section [2] of the FNS entrance roller
conveyance switching gate/Up.
[1]
[2]
21.3.1 Replacing the paddle
(1) Procedure
2. Remove each E-ring [1] and then remove the paddle [2], 3 each, in the
Note
▪ When you remove the paddles, be careful not to drop the E-ring [1]
and the axis pin [3].
[3] [2] [1] [1] [2] [3]
F-244
3. Remove 3 paddles [2] each from the paddle assy [1].

Note
▪ When you reinstall the paddles, be sure to install the paddles in
the same direction as they were installed before.
[1] [2] [1] [2]

21.3.2 Lubrication of the stapler shaft and the rear stopper shaft

(1) Procedure
2. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on 2 stapler shafts [1].
3. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on the rear stopper shaft [2], and move the rear
stopper/Fr [3] and rear stopper/Rr [4].
[2] [3] [4] [1]
(1) Procedure
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wiring mounting cover [2].
[1]
F-245
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the connector cover [2].
[2]
[1]
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness.
[2] [4] 5. Remove the screw [2] to remove the ground [3], and then release the wiring
harness.
6. Release the wiring harness from the hole [4], remove the screw [5].
7. While you remove the screw [6], remove the stapler unit assy [7] in the
Note
▪ Be sure to remove the screw [5] before you remove the screw [6].
Otherwise, the stapler unit assy [7] could deform.
[3]
[5] [1] [7]
[6]
F-246
[1] 8. Note
▪ The staple position changes when you remove the stapler unit
assy.
Be sure to record the current adjustment position [1] before you
remove, and then adjust the position again when you install. (Refer
to I.28.1 Staple position adjustment)
9. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the staple unit [2].
[2]
[1]

21.5.1 Cleaning and lubrication of the paper exit alignment plate shaft
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.25.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2)
3. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the paper exit cover/Up [2].
[2] [1]
F-247
4. Clean the paper exit alignment plate shaft [1] with the isopropyl alcohol and
apply the MH surf or Molykote EM-30L.
[1]
F-248
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 22. SD-510
22. SD-510
CAUTION
22.2 Alignment section
22.2.1 Replacing the paddle/1, the paddle/2, and the paddle/3
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.26.3.4 SD unit)
2. Remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to G.26.3.3 Stapler unit cover)
3. Remove each screw [1], and then remove 2 paddle/1 [2].
4. Lift up the paper exit guide [1] and remove each screw [2], and then remove
2 paddle/3 [3]
5. Remove each screw [4], and then remove 2 paddle/2 [5].
[2] [3]
[1]
[4] [5]
F-249
1. Fully pull out the SD unit and install the SD support stay. (Refer to G.26.3.4
SD unit)
2. Remove the front cover. (Refer to " G.26.3.2 Front cover")
3. Remove the stapler unit cover. G.26.3.3 Stapler unit cover
4. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the SD unit cover/Lt [1] to the
[1] [2]
5. Remove the saddle, and release the wiring harness [1].
6. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the ground [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
7. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the guide plate [2].
Note
▪ When you install the guide plate [2], be sure to match the hole [3]
to the projection [4] of the guide plate.
[3][4] [1]
[2]
[1]
F-250
8. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the clincher cover [2].

[3] Note
▪ Remove the clincher cover [2] to the arrow-marked direction so
that the claws [3] are released from the projection [4]
▪ When you remove the clincher cover [2], be sure not to break the
[4] paddle [5].
[5]
[2]
[1]

10. Remove 2 screws [2] and 2 screws [3]. Then remove the stapler unit assy
[4].
Note
[1]
▪ When you remove the screws [3], insert the driver into the hole [5]
and remove them.
[4] [2]
[5] [3]
11. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the stapler unit [2].
[1]
[1] [2]

Note
▪ When the stapler unit is removed, be sure to adjust the position with the staple adjustment jig.
F-251
1. Install the stapler unit [2] with 4 screws [1].
[1]
[1] [2]
2. Install the connector [1].
3. Install the stapler unit assy [3] with 4 screws [2].
Note
▪ When you install the stapler unit assy [3], be sure to match the
[1]
projection [4] to the hole [5] of the stapler unit assy.
[3] [2]
[2] [4][5]
[4] [3] 4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the clincher [1].

Note
▪ Make sure that 2 injections [3] of the clincher do not come off from
2 slotted holes [4].
▪ Be careful that if the 2 screws [2] are too loose, the staple
adjustment jig [6] cannot be inserted.
5. Insert the staple adjustment jig [6] between the stapler unit [5] and the
clincher [1], and adjust the horizontal position of the clincher [1].
Note
▪ When you insert the staple adjustment jig [6], be sure to insert it
from obliquely upward as indicated by the allow mark [7].
6. Loosen 2 screws [2] to fasten the clincher [1].
7. Pull out the staple adjustment jig [6].
[5] [7] [2] [1] [6]
F-252
22.3.2 Cleaning and lubrication of the staple guide/Up and the staple guide/Lw
(1) Procedure
1. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.26.3.4 SD unit)
[2] [1] 2. Remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to G.26.3.3 Stapler unit cover)
3. Clean the staple guide/Up [1] and apply the MH Surf at 2 places [2] of the
guide shaft.
Note
▪ When you move the stapler unit to the right or the left, be sure to
hold the main body of the stapler.
▪ When the MH surf is not available, perform only cleaning.
4. Remove the SD unit cover/Lt. (Refer to F.22.3.1 Replacing the stapler unit)
5. Clean the staple guide/Lw [1] and apply the MH Surf at 2 places [2] of the
guide shaft.
Note
▪ When you move the stapler unit to the right or the left, be sure to
hold the main body of the stapler.
▪ When the MH surf is not available, perform only cleaning.
[2] [1]
22.4 Half-fold/folding&staple/tri-folding section
22.4.1 Cleaning the folding roller/1, the folding roller/2
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the folding knife assy /1. (Refer to G.26.3.5 Folding knife assy/1)
[4] 2. Clean the folding roller/1 [2] and the folding roller/2 [3] with the isopropyl
alcohol while you lift up the conveyance guide plate [1].
Note
▪ Be careful not to adhere the isopropyl alcohol to the PET parts [4].
[3] [2] [4] [1]
F-253
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 23. LS-506
23. LS-506
CAUTION
23.2.1 Replacing the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.28.2.2 Cover)
[1] [2] [5] 2. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness.
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [5].
[3] [4]
5. Check points when you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
[5]
Note
▪ When you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor (M1), be sure to
check that the belt [2] has been engaged with the gear [1], and then
engage it with the gear [3] before you fasten the stacker tray up
[4] down motor (M1) [4].
▪ When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the gear [1]
and the gear [3], rotate the encoder [5] counterclockwise to make
adjustments.
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3] from the
[2] stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2003c

23.2.2 Replacing the paper press solenoid/3 (SD8)

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ When you conduct this operation, be sure to bring the stacker tray down to the bottom in advance.
F-254
1. Remove the LC-501 from the main body while the stacker tray is placed.
[2] 2 3. Move the guide rail [2] on the front side to the arrow-marked direction and
release the fixing.
1
[1]
4. Slant the shift unit [1] to the front side so that you can see the upper surface
of it.
Note
▪ Be sure to slide the shift unit about 10cm to the right in advance.
[1] ▪ Be careful that the belt [2] does not get pushed down by the
bottom of the shift unit.
5. Release the cable stopper [3] and remove the ribbon cable [5] from the
connector [4].
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3] ls502fs2005c
6. How to handle the ribbon cable

Note
▪ Slide the lock [2] of the connector [1] for the ribbon cable in the
[1] arrow-marked direction and remove the ribbon cable [3].
When you reinstall the ribbon cable, insert the cable and then slide
[3]
the lock in the reverse direction.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
ls502fs2006c
F-255

8. Move the guide rail [2] on the rear side to the arrow-marked direction and
release the fixing.
9. Remove the belt [5] from the stopper section [4] of the shift unit [3].
[4] [5]
[3]
2
[2]
1
[1] ls502fs2007c
10. Check point when you reinstall the belt

Note
[2]
▪ When you attach the belt [2] to the stopper section [1], slide the
shift unit [3] in the arrow-marked direction and engage the stopper
[1] section with the belt.
[2]
[1]
[3]
ls502fs2008c
[1] [4] 11. Remove the shift unit [2] through the clearance between the belts [1].
Note
▪ When you remove the conveyance unit [2], be careful that the edge
stoppers [3] and the paper pressure arms/3 [4] do not contact the
belt [1].
[2]
[4] [3] ls502fs2009c
F-256
12. Remove the connector [1] and cut the wire binding band.
Note
▪ When you cut the wire binding band, be careful not to cut the lead
wire.
▪ When you attach the wire binding band, bundle it at the same
place.
14. Rotate the wire saddle [5] in the arrow-marked direction and remove it.
15. Remove 3 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid/3 assy [4].
[1] [3] [5] [4]
[3]
[3] [2] ls502fs2010c
16. Check point when you reinstall the paper press solenoid/3 assy
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper press solenoid/3 assy, be sure to
[1]
insert the pin [2] of the shaft into the slit section [1] at the tip of the
solenoid.
[2]
ls502fs2011c
[3] 17. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the solenoid mounting plate [3] from the
paper press solenoid/3 (SD8) [2].
[1]
[2] ls502fs2012c

(1) Procedure
F-257
[3] [4] 1. Remove the front cover/Up and front cover/Lw. (Refer to G.28.2.2 Cover)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness.
[2] 4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid/1 assy [4].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper press solenoid/1 assy, be sure to
insert the actuator [6] that is provided at the tip of the shaft into the
[6]
slit section [5] at the tip of the solenoid.
[5] [1] a0h1t3c001ca
paper press solenoid/1 (SD6) [2].
[3] [2]

(1) Procedure
[2] [6] 1. Remove the front cover/Up and front cover/Lw. (Refer to G.28.2.2 Cover)
[5]
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the paper press solenoid/2 (SD7) [4].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper press solenoid/2 (SD7), be sure to
[3]
[1] [4] ls502fs2033c

23.2.5 Replacing the rear stopper solenoid (SD3)

[3] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.28.2.2 Cover)
4. Remove 2 screws [3] and remove the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) [4].
[1] [4]
F-258
rear stopper solenoid (SD3) [2].
[2] [3]

[1] 1. Install the solenoid mounting plate [3] to the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) [2]
with 2 screws [1].
[2] [3]
[4] [5] 2. Install the rear stopper solenoid assy [3] aligning with the marking-off line [2]
while you press the plunger with 2 screws [1].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) [3], be sure to
▪ The actuator [5] can deform. Do not touch the actuator [5].
[2] [1] [3]
F-259
[1] [2] 5. Note

▪ Check that the rear stopper [1] does not project from the paper
feed surface of the guide plate [2].
▪ Check that the distance "a" is a standard value.
Standard value "a": 1.5 mm or more
▪ When the position of the rear stopper and the standard value "a"
are not proper, adjust the installation position of the rear stopper
solenoid assy again.
F-260
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 24. FD-503
24. FD-503
CAUTION
24.2.1 Replacing roller solenoids/1 (SD5) to /4 (SD8)
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the cord support board/A [2].
2. Remove the hook of the spring [3] from the shaft [4].
[2]
[4]
[3] fd501fs2001c

4. Remove each of 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller solenoid/1 (SD5) to
roller solenoid/4 (SD8) [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2002c
7. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.32.1 Roller solenoids/1 (SD5), /2 (SD6), /3 (SD7) and /4 (SD8) position
adjustment)
24.3 Punch section
24.3.1 Replacing the punch unit
(1) Procedure
[3] 3. Remove the punch unit [3].
[2]
fd501fs2003c
F-261
24.3.2 Cleaning the punch shaft and the punch support board

(1) Procedure
[2]
fd501fs2003c
[2]
4. Remove the plastic stopper [1], and remove the pin [2].
5. Remove the punch shaft [3], and clean the periphery. (Isopropyl alcohol,
Cleaning pad)
[1]
[3]
a0h0t3c001ca
[2]
6. Clean the inner periphery of the hole [2] of the punch support board [1].
(Isopropyl alcohol, Cleaning pad)
[1]
a0h0t3c002ca
24.3.3 Lubricating the punch drive section

(1) Procedure
[2]
fd501fs2003c
F-262
[1] 4. Lubricate 2 stopper cams [1] and 8 gears [2]. (Molykote EM-30L)
[2]
a0h0t3c003ca
24.4 Folding conveyance section

24.4.1 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)
(1) Procedure
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses from the
7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm/Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
[1] 3. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm/Fr [3] and the coupling
[3] arm/Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
F-263
[1] [2] 5. Open the front door [1] and then remove the screw [2].
6. Pull out the folding unit [3].
[3] a0h0t3c004ca
[1] 7. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left rail and the right rail,
and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1] fd501fs2049c
[2] 8. Open the guide plate [1].

[3] [1] a0h0t3c005ca
[2] [1] 10. Disconnect the connector [1].

11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18)
[3].
[3] a0h0t3c006ca
14. Make adjustments of the installation position. (Refer to I.32.2 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) position adjustment)
F-264

24.5.1 Replacing the tray up down motor (M11)
(1) Procedure
Note
▪ Be sure to remove the tray up down motor (M11) while you support the up down stay with your hands.
[2] 1. Remove the rear cover (refer to G.29.3.5 Rear cover) and the left cover/Rr
(refer to G.29.3.7 Left cover/Rr).
2. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit.
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the tray up down motor (M11) [3].
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2005c
24.6 PI section
24.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper stage)
(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
[2]
fd501fs2006c

[4] [1]
4. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit/Up [3].
Note
▪ The rear side of the shaft is inserted into the coupling [4]. Be sure
[3] to remove the pick-up unit/Up [3] from the front side.
▪ Be careful not to damage 2 actuators [5] of the pick-up unit/Up.
[5] [2]
fd501fs2007c
[1] [2] [4] 5. Remove the hook of the spring [1] from the mounting plate [2].
6. Remove 2 C-clips [3] and then remove the shaft [4].
[3] fd501fs2008c
F-265
[4] [3] [2] 7. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

8. Remove the shaft fixing piece [2], and then remove the shaft [3] from the
mounting plate [4].
[1] fd501fs2009c
[1] fd501fs2010c
[1] [2] 10. Remove the spacer [1] and the belt restriction plate [2].
fd501fs2011c
[1] [2] [3] 11. Remove the belt [3] from the gears [2] and [4], and then remove the gears [2]
and [4], the pins [1] and [5] from the pick-up roller shaft [4].
[4]
[5] fd501fs2012c
12. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [1] to the front side, and remove the pick-up
roller assy [2].
[1]
[2] fd501fs2013c
13. Remove the pick-up roller [1] and replace the pick-up rubber [2].
Note
▪ Be sure to install the pick-up roller so that the one-way clutch [3]
(blue) is on the front side.
[3]
[2] [1] fd501fs2014c
F-266
[4] [7] 14. Remove the C-clip [1].

16. Remove the belt restriction plate [3].
17. Remove the belt [4] from the gear [5], and then remove the gear [5] and the
pin [6] from the pick-up roller shaft [7].
18. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [7] to the rear side, and remove the pick-up
roller assy [8].
19. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[2] [3] [5] [6] [8] [9] [1]
fd501fs2015c
[3] [4] [7] 20. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

22. Remove the belt [3] from the gear [4], and then remove the gear [4] and the
[2] pin [5] from the pick-up roller shaft [6].
[6] 23. Pull out the pick-up roller shaft [6] from the rear side, and remove the pick-up
roller assy [7].
24. Remove the pick-up roller and replace the pick-up rubber.
Note
[1] [5] [8] [1]
fd501fs2016c
24.6.2 Replacing the paper feed rubber (Upper stage)

(1) Procedure
1. Perform steps 1 to 8 of " F.24.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper
[8] stage)" and remove the pick-up roller unit.
[7]
[3] 4. Remove the spacer [3].
5. Remove the belt [4].
6. Remove the gear [5] and the pin [6].
[4]
7. Remove the gear [7] and the pin [8].
[1]
[6] [5] [2]
fd501fs2017c
F-267
[2] [3] 8. Remove 2 C-clips [1] and then remove the entire paper feed arm [2] from the
paper feed shaft [3].
[1] fd501fs2018c
[4] [3] [2] [1] 9. Remove the spacer [1].

10. Remove the actuator [2].
fd501fs2019c
[3] [2] [1] 13. Remove the paper feed arm [1].
15. Remove the paper feed roller assy [3].
fd501fs2020c
[1] 16. Remove the paper feed roller [1] and replace the paper feed rubber [2].
[2] Note
[3] ▪ Be sure to install the pick-up roller so that the one-way clutch [3]
fd501fs2021c
24.6.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper stage)

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Perform steps 1 to 4 of " F.24.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper
stage)" and remove the pick-up unit/Up.
[1]
4. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the entire roller shaft from the
mounting plate while you press the separation roller assy [4] against the front
gear [5].
Note
▪ Pins are employed on the inside of the separation roller assy [4]
and the gear [5] respectively. When you remove them, be careful
that these pins do not get lost. Leave the C-clip [6] on the front
side of the gear as it is and press the roller onto the gear, so that it
[3] [4] [5] [6] fd501fs2022c prevents the pins from dropping off.
[1] [2] 5. Remove the separation roller rubber [1] from the separation roller [2] and
replace it.
fd501fs2023c
F-268
24.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ A shaft fixing screw is inserted when you remove the PI tray/Up. Be sure to remove this shaft fixing screw from the PI tray/Up
after completion of the replacement of the pick-up roller/Lw. Operating the machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted to the
PI tray/Up damage to the PI section.
[2] [3] 1. Make sure that the PI lift plate/Up [1] has come down fully. If it has not come
down completely, conduct the I/O check (output) (PI/Up: 70-11, PI/Lw:
70-13) in the service mode.
2. Perform steps 1 to 4 of " F.24.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper
stage)" and remove the pick-up unit/Up.
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the paper feed stopper plate/Up [3].
[2]
[1] fd501fs2024c
4. Remove the shaft fixing screw [1] and insert it in the shaft fixing hole [2].
[1] Note
▪ Be sure to turn the shaft fixing screw [1] until its stem section
disappears completely.
▪ After completion of the replacement of the pick-up rubber (lower
stage), be sure to remove the shaft fixing screw [1] from the
position [2] and get it back to the position [1]. Operating the
machine with the shaft fixing screw inserted to the position [2]
damage to the PI section.
[2] fd501fs2025c
[5] [3] [1] [2] 5. Remove the spring [2] hooked between the separation roller unit [1] and the
PI tray/Up [3].
7. Remove 4 screws [4] and then remove the PI tray/Up [3].
Note
▪ When you remove the PI tray/Up [2], be sure to pull it diagonally up
to the left.
[4] [4] fd501fs2026c

9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the pick-up unit/Lw [3].
10. For the subsequent operations, conduct the pick-up rubber (upper stage)
[1] (steps 4 to 25). (Refer to F.24.6.1 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Upper
stage))
11. Replace it with a new pick-up rubber.
[2]
Note
[2]
▪ When you install the PI tray/Up, be sure to remove the shaft fixing
screw and get it back to the original position.
fd501fs2027c
F-269
24.6.5 Replacing the paper feed rubber (lower stage)

(1) Procedure
1. Perform steps 1 to 9 of " F.24.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower stage)."
2. The subsequent operations are the same as the operations for the paper feed rubber (upper stage). (Refer to F.24.6.2 Replacing the
paper feed rubber (Upper stage))
3. Reinstall a new paper feed rubber following the removal steps in reverse.
24.6.6 Replacing the separation rubber (lower stage)

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Perform steps 1 to 9 of " F.24.6.4 Replacing the pick-up rubber (Lower
stage)."
2. Remove the 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed stopper plate/2 [2].
3. For the subsequent operations, conduct the separation rubber (upper stage)
(steps 2 to 6). (Refer to F.24.6.3 Replacing the separation rubber (upper
stage)
4. Replace it with a new separation rubber.
[2]
fd501fs2028c
F-270
25. SD-506
CAUTION
25.2 Right angle conveyance section

25.2.1 Replacing the roller release solenoid/1 (SD5)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove SD from the main body.
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
[2] [1]
15anf2c028na
[4] [5] [3] [6] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].

4. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the roller release solenoid/1 (SD5)
[3].
Note
▪ When you install the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5] is hitched
to the plunger [4].
▪ Install it with the wiring harness [6] that is located on the guide
plate side.
[2] [1]
15anf2c029na
5. While you pull the plunger [1], temporarily hold the new roller release
[2] solenoid/1 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a" between the
roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value. Then fully tighten the
screws.
a Standard value "a": 0 mm to 0.5 mm
[3]
[1]
15anf2c030nb

(1) Procedure
F-271
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door/Rt.

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
15anf2c031na

[3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to check that the pin [5] has been
inserted into the hole on the plunger [4].
plate side.
[1] [6] [2] [3] [4] [5]

15anf2c032na
5. While you pull the plunger [1], temporarily hold the new roller release
[2]
solenoid/2 and adjust the position so that the clearance "a" between the
roller [3] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value. Then fully tighten the
a screws.
Standard value "a": 0 mm to 0.5 mm
[3]
[1]
15anf2c033nb
25.2.3 Replacing the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the front door/Rt and then remove the screw [1].
3. Remove the hex wrench (short, #2.5) from the trimmer section. (Refer to
F.25.5.3 Replacing the trimmer blade kit)
15anf2c057na
F-272
[3] [2] [1] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2] and then remove the belt [3].
[4]
15anf2c058na
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
[2] [1]
15anf2c059nb
[4] [8] [3]
8. Pull the spring [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4] and release it, and then
open the right angle conveyance guide plate [5].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the spring [3], hook the long arm [6] on the
position between the frame and the E-ring [7] of the jam release
handle shaft and insert the tip of the short arm [3] into the hole [8].
[1] [2] [6] [7] [5]

15anf2c130ca
F-273
[1] [3] [3] [1] 9. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the entrance conveyance unit [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall, press it against 2 positioning pins [3] and then
tighten the screw [1].
[1]
[2] 15anf2c060na
10. Check point when you reinstall the entrance conveyance unit
[1] [2]
Note
▪ As the positioning pin [1] has anti-drop grooves, be sure to insert
it fully before you tighten the screw.
a0h2t3c043ca
[3] [2] [1]

12. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the entrance gate solenoid [3] and
the plunger [4].
[4] a0h2t3c044ca
F-274
13. Standard value when you reinstall the entrance gate solenoid
[4]
Note
[2] [1] ▪ When you reinstall, be sure to conduct in the following conditions
before you tighten the screw [4]; with the plunger of the entrance
gate solenoid not being pulled, the gap between the entrance gate
[1] and the guide plate [2] is at a standard value "a". With the
plunger of the entrance gate solenoid being pulled, the gap
a
between the entrance gate [1] and the guide plate [3] is at a
standard value "b".
Standard value
a: 2.0 mm ± 0.3 mm
b
b: 5.0 mm ± 0.5 mm
[3]
a0h2t3c051ca
16. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out the arm [4] from the shaft [5] in the arrow-
marked direction [6]. Then remove the right angle conveyance gate solenoid
assy [7].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the right angle conveyance gate solenoid assy,
press the arm [4] against the D-cut of the shaft [5] and then tighten
the screws [2].
[1] [7]
a0h2t3c045ca
17. Standard value when you reinstall the right angle conveyance gate solenoid
assy
[1] Note
▪ While you pull the plunger [1], adjust the position so that the
clearance "a" between the right angle conveyance gate [3] and the
guide plate [2] is at a standard value "a". Then fully tighten the
screws [4].
[4] Standard value a: 4.8 mm ± 0.5 mm
[3]
[2]
a0h2t3c052ca
F-275
18. Remove 2 screws [1], mounting plate [2], arm [3], plunger [4], and the right
[7] [2] [4] [3] angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [5].
Note
▪ When you install the right angle conveyance gate solenoid, make
sure that the wires [6] are located on the other side of the hole [7]
in the mounting plate [2].
[1] [5] [6]

a0h2t3c046ca

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door/Rt and front door/Lt.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the cover [2].
15anf2c157ca

[3].
Note
▪ When you install the solenoid, make sure that the pin [5] is hitched
to the plunger [4].
plate side.
[4] [5]
15anf2c158ca
5. While you pull the plunger [1] and slightly tighten the new roller release
solenoid/3, adjust the position so that the gap between the paper feed
surface [2] of the guide plate and the roller surface [3] falls within the
standard value. Then secure the roller release solenoid/3.
Standard value "a": 1.3 mm to 1.8 mm
[1]
[3]
[2] a
15anf2c159ca
F-276
25.3 Saddle stitching section

25.3.1 Replacing the stapler assy
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the front door/Lt. (Refer to G.30.3.8 Front door/Lt)
2. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.30.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] from the back side of the stapler, and release
the wires on the stapler side from the clamps.
15anf2c034na
[3] [2] 4. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.25.3.3 Pulling out the saddle
stitching unit)
5. Tilt the bundle arm [1] to the front.
6. Remove the staple cartridges [2] to the front.
Note
▪ When you move the stapler Assy, be sure to rotate the rotating
knob [3] first to prevent the belt tooth from skipping. Otherwise, it
causes the belt tooth skipping.
[1] 15anf2c035na
7. Remove 2 screws [1] on each stapler.

[4]
8. Move the stapler/Lt [2] and stapler/Rt [3] forward, and then remove the pins
[4], 2 for each, from each 2 holes [5] on each stapler. Then remove the
[5] stapler/Lt and stapler/Rt downward.
[1] [1]
[2] [3]
a0h2t3c047ca
9. Check point when you remove or reinstall the stapler/Lt

Note
▪ When you remove or reinstall the stapler/Lt, be sure not to bend
the guide sheet [6].
[6]
a0h2t3c048ca
F-277
[1] [2] 10. Remove the screw [1] and remove the sensor cover [2].
15anf2c038na

Note
▪ When you reinstall the saddle stitching unit, be careful not to let
the connector [1] make contact with the main body.
12. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the saddle stitching guide plate [3].
[1]
[2] 15anf2c039na
[3] [4] 13. Remove 2 screws [1] each and then remove the 2 connector covers [2].
Note
▪ When you remove the connector covers, while you lift up the
clincher/Lt [3] and clincher/Rt [4].
[1]
[1] [2] 15anf2c040na
[5] [4] [6] 14. Remove each 1 screws [1] and then remove the ground [2].
Note
▪ When you install the grounds, place the wiring harness on the
lower side and fasten the grounds with screws.
15. Remove each of 1 connectors [3].
16. Remove 2 screws [4] each, and then remove the clincher/Lt [5] and clincher/
Rt [6].
Note
▪ When you install the clinchers, slide them down completely, and
secure them with screws.
[3] [1]
[1] [3] [2] 15anf2c041na
17. Disconnect the connector [1] and then remove the wiring harness [3] from
the clincher [2].
[3] [1] [2] 15anf2c042na
F-278
[4] [5] 18. Reinstall the connector following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the wiring harness [4], be sure to wire the
wiring harness to the guide (white) side [5] of the clincher as you
can see in the figure [6].
Do not route the wiring harness to the rear side as you can see in
the figure [7]. Otherwise, the wiring harness possibly breaks at the
clincher operation.
19. Adjust the mounting position of the staplers and the clinchers. (Refer to
F.25.3.1 (2) Procedure for adjusting the mounting position)
[6]
[7] 15anf2c043na
(2) Procedure for adjusting the mounting position
F-279
[7] [7] 1. Rotate the screw [1] clockwise until clicked to make the clinchers [2] contact
with the staplers [3] and lock the clinchers [2], and then check the step edges
[4] of the staplers are aligned with the edges [5] of the clincher in the sub
scan direction [6].
Standard value: 0 ± 0.5 mm
2. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws [7] each
and move the staplers in the sub scan direction for the adjustment while you
rotate the screw [1] counterclockwise to make the clinchers [2] and the
stapler [3] closer, and then tighten the screws [7].
3. Tighten the screw [1] clockwise until it clicks to make the clinchers [2] contact
with the stapler [3] and lock it. Make sure that the standard surface of the
stapler [8] is located in the rear side in the main scan direction [10] as
compared to the inside plate inner surface [9] of the clincher.
[11] [11] Standard value "a": 0.2 mm to 0.3 mm
[4] [6] [10] 4. When the value is not within the standard value, loosen 2 screws [11] each
and move the staplers in the main scan direction for the adjustment while
rotating the screw [1] counterclockwise to make the clinchers [2] and the
A [8]
stapler [3] closer, and then tighten the screws [11].
Note
▪ After the reinstallation, perform the saddle stitching and check that
[9]
the stapling is performed without any problem.
a ▪ After the adjustment, be sure to perform the adjustment between
the fold line position and the staple position, and also the tilt
adjustment and the gap adjustment of the clincher.
(Refer to I.33.4 Staple position adjustment), (Refer to I.33.6 Tilt/
gap adjustment of the clincher)
A [5]
Section A
[3]
[2]
[1]
15anf2c063nc
25.3.2 Replacing the slope unit

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the motor cover [2].
[1] 15anf2c018na
F-280
[1] 2. Remove 2 connectors [1].
15anf2c019na
[2] 3. Hold the bundle arms [1] on both sides in the vicinity of the fulcrum shaft [2],
push them to the rear simultaneously and move the bundle arms [1]
approximately 30 mm.
Note
▪ When you rotate the bundle arm [1] manually, be sure to rotate it
gently with both hands because the belts on both sides
simultaneously activate the bundle. Otherwise, it causes the belt
tooth skipping.
▪ Never hold the tip of the bundle arm [1] and rotate it. Be sure to
hold the bundle arm [1] in the vicinity of the fulcrum shaft [2] and
rotate it. It causes the deformation.
[1] 15anf2c020na
[2] [4] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and 2 screws [3] of the slope unit [1] from the bottom
and top respectively, and then remove the slope unit [1].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the slope, be sure to align 2 positioning
projections [4].
[2] [1]
[3] 15anf2c022na
25.3.3 Pulling out the saddle stitching unit

(1) Procedure
F-281
1. Remove the front door /Lt. (Refer to G.30.3.8 Front door/Lt)

2. Remove the slope unit. (Refer to F.25.3.2 Replacing the slope unit)
3. Remove the wire [1] from the screw [2].
Note
▪ When you remove the 2nd wire [1], hold it with hands and prevent
the horizontal conveyance guide plate/Lt [3] from falling.
[2] [1]
[3] 15anf2c014na
[1] [2] [1] 4. Move 2 pins [1] to the direction of the arrow to the notch [2] and release the
fixing. Then, remove the horizontal conveyance guide plate/Lt [3].
Note
▪ Before you reinstall the horizontal conveyance guide plate/Lt [3],
adjust the position of the fix shaft [4] and move the pin [1] from the
notch.
[4] [3] [4] 15anf2c015na
5. Remove the screw [1] and move the wiring harness cover [4] to the rear side.
Remove the pin [2] from the hole [3], and then remove the wiring harness
cover [4].
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
15anf2c016na
F-282

[1]
15anf2c017na
[1]
15anf2c069na
[1] [6] [1] 8. Hold the position of the bundle arm [1] near the fulcrum shaft [2]. Move it to
the inside [3] slowly, and then remove the guide shaft [4] from the hole of the
shock absorbing guide [5].
Note
▪ When you narrow the distance of the bundle arms [1], be sure to
move them evenly and slowly.
▪ When you reinstall, check that the guide shaft [4] is in the hole of
the shock absorbing guide [5].
9. Rotate the bundle arm [1] to the guide plate [6] on the stapler side.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4] [5]
[3]
[5] [4] [2] [1] 15anf2c021na
F-283
[1] [2] [1] 10. Remove 6 screws (with a washer for each) [1]. Hold shafts [2] and pull out
the saddle stitch unit [3].
Note
▪ When you pull out, be careful not to let the removed connector
touch the SD main body and cut the wiring harness.
[1]
[1] [2] [3] 15anf2c024nb
25.3.4 Replacing the saddle stitching unit
CAUTION
Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the
saddle stitching unit is heavy.
(1) Procedure
[3] [4] [5] 1. Pull out the saddle stitching unit. (Refer to F.25.3.3 Pulling out the saddle
stitching unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and the screw [2], and remove the saddle stitching unit
[5] with 2 people by holding the shafts [3] and [4] while lift up the shaft [3]
slightly and shift the saddle stitching unit to the front side.
Note
▪ Be sure to hold the saddle stitching unit at the shafts [3] and [4].
▪ When reinstalling the saddle stitching unit, check that the unit is
surely placed on the rails [6] before releasing the unit.
[1] [2]
[6]
[1] 15anf2c025na
25.4 Bundle processing section

25.4.1 Replacing the bundle press stage gear
(1) Procedure
F-284

[2]
• Rear cover/Lt (Refer to G.30.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
• Left cover (Refer to G.30.3.4 Left cover)
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction until it stops.
Note
▪ When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check that the
bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper position [3] after
the bundle press stage goes down and the tension of the wire [4] is
released.
▪ Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
3. Move the bearing [6] and bearing [7], and then remove the E-ring [5] and
move the gear [8] to the back side.
[8] [7] [3]
[4] [1]
[6]
[5]
a0h2t3c028ca

[2] [3] [1]
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the bundle press stage up down
motor (M24).
Note
▪ Be careful not to lose the pin [3] as it drops off when you remove
the gear [2].
a0h2t3c029ca
6. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the bundle press stage gear [2] and
2 bearings [3] on both sides of the gear.
Note
▪ After you replace the bundle press stage gear [2], be sure to apply
plas guard Number 1 to the gear.
[1] [2] [3] a0h2t3c030ca
25.4.2 Replacing the bundle press stage unit

(1) Procedure
F-285

[2]
• Rear cover/Rt (Refer to G.30.3.3 Rear cover/Rt)
• Trimmer unit (Refer to F.25.5.6 Replacing the trimming unit)
2. Rotate the jam cleaning knob [1] in the arrow-marked direction until it stops.
Note
▪ When the jam cleaning knob [1] stops, be sure to check that the
bundle registration plate [2] comes to the upper position [3] after
the bundle press stage goes down and the tension of the wire [4] is
released.
▪ Be sure not to rotate the jam cleaning knob too much.
[3]
[4] [1] a0h2t3c031ca

4. Remove the wiring harness [2] from the clamp [3], and then pull it out from
[1] the hole [4] by following the arrow.
Note
[2] ▪ When you reinstall it, be careful not to nip the wiring harness [2]
[5] [4] [3] with the trimmer unit plate [5].
a0h2t3c032ca
[1] [2] [4] 5. Remove 1 each of the screws at 2 places and remove 1 each of the up-down
wire [2], and then take it out to the front side of the machine from the trimmer
unit plate [3] by following the arrow.
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to lubricate Molykote EM-30L to each
2 shafts [4].
6. Remove 8 screws [5] and then remove the trimmer unit plate [3].
Note
▪ Be careful not to damage the trimmer scraps guide [6].
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to align the projection [7].
[7] [3]
[5][6][5]
a0h2t3c033ca
F-286
[3] [1] 7. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the wiring harness [2] from the
clamp [3], and then take it out from the hole [4] of the metal plate to the
8. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the bracket [6].
9. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the guide plate [8].
[5] [6] [2] [4]
[7] [8]
a0h2t3c034ca

[1] [3] [2]
11. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the bundle registration motor (M12)
[3].
13. Remove 4 screws [5] and then remove the bundle press movement motor
(M17) [6].
[6] [5]
[4]
a0h2t3c035ca
F-287
14. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear [2] and the pin [3].
[1] [2] [3]
15. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the gear [5] and the pin [6].
[4] [5] [6] a0h2t3c036ca
[2] [6] [3] [4] 16. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

17. Cut the wire binding bands [2] and [3] and remove the wiring harness [4].
Note
▪ Be sure to let the wire binding bands [2] and [3] into the shaft hole
[5] and install the wire retaining band [6] on the [2] side between
the bands [2] and [3].
[5]
[1]
a0h2t3c037ca
[7] [5][10] [6] 18. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1].
[2] [3] [4] 19. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the wire mounting plate/Lt [3].
Note
▪ Since the wire/Lt [4] has the tension of the spring, be sure to
remove 2 screws [2] with keeping the wire mounting plate/Lt [3]
and lift it up until the tension is released, and then take it off
gently.
20. Loosen the screws [5] and pull the wire mounting plate/Rt [6] downward to
move it to the opposite side of the shaft [7], and then remove it to the space
[8] between the side plate [8] and the timing belt [9].
Note
▪ Since the wire/Rt [10] has the tension of the spring, be sure to lift
up the wire mounting plate/Rt [6] until the tension is released, and
then take it off gently.
[9] [1]
a0h2t3c038ca
F-288
21. Check point when you reinstall the wire

Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put the wire [1] on 2 pulleys [2].
[1] [2] a0h2t3c039ca
22. Push the bundle paper exit tray [1] fully to the back.
[6] 23. Remove 2 E-rings [2] and then remove 2 bearings [3] and the drive shaft [4].
24. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and then remove the bearings [6].
[5]
[3]
[2]
[4] [1]
a0h2t3c040ca
[3] [2] [1]

25. While keep holding the bundle paper exit assist roller [1] horizontally, push
the bundle press stage unit [3] to the back with holding the shaft [2] to
release the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper exit assist roller arm from the
regulation bracket [5]. After the release, put down the bundle paper exit
assist roller [1] gently.
Note
▪ Once the roller pin [4] of the bundle paper exit assist roller arm is
removed from the regulation bracket [5], the bundle paper exit
assist roller drops off. Therefore, be sure to hold it with hands.
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put the roller pin [4] under the
regulation bracket [5].
[5]
[4]
a0h2t3c041ca
F-289
[4] 26. Pull out the bundle paper exit tray [1] to about half.
Note
▪ If the bundle paper exit tray [1] is pulled out too much, the bundle
press stage unit [2] drops off from the tray.
27. Pull out the bundle press stage unit [2] to the position in the picture with
holding the bundle press section [3]. Then, pull it out more to the back with
paying the attention to the contacting places [5], [6], and [7] on the right side,
and remove the arm [8].
[2] [3] [8] [1]
[5]
[6]
[7]
a0h2t3c042ca
Note
▪ After the installation, rotate the jam cleaning knob and be sure to check that the bundle press stage unit goes up and down
horizontally.
25.5 Trimmer section
25.5.1 Removing/installing the trimmer paddle assy
(1) Procedure
[1]
• Rear cover /Lt (Refer to G.30.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
2. Push the scraps box all the way inside.
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the trimmer scraps guide [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, check that the scraps box is inserted all the
way and stretch the trimmer scraps guide [2] tight. When the
scraps box is not inserted all the way and you stretch the trimmer
scraps guide, the trimmer scraps guide is possibly damaged
during the operation.
[2] a0h2t3c009ca
4. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the trimmer paddle assy [2].
[1]
[2] a0h2t3c010ca
25.5.2 Replacing the trimmer board assy

(1) Procedure
F-290
[7] [1] 1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.

Note
▪ By the output check code "71-97" in the I/O check mode in the
service mode, move the trimmer press board to the position where
the trimmer board is released.
2. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) of
the main body and unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.25.5.1 Removing/installing the
trimmer paddle assy)
5. Pull the trimmer board assy [1] horizontally to the back side and remove it.
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, aligning the slit [2] of the trimmer board assy
[1] with the pin [3] and insert it between the trimmer press plate [4]
[4] and the hold plate [5].
[3] ▪ When you insert it, be careful not to bend the guide sheet [6].
[5] ▪ When you push it into the machine, be sure to push the movement
arm receiver [7] and insert it horizontally.
[6]
[2]
a0h2t3c017ca
6. Clean the bottom surface of the actuator [1] and the top surface [2] of the
[1]
trimmer blade retaining plate which contacts to the bottom surface.
Note
▪ When the trimmer scraps remain or the cleaning is not conducted
properly, the trimmer completion timing differs and a trimming
fault occurs.
[2] a0h2t3c067ca
8. Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter.
Note
▪ Reset the trimmer board solenoid operation counter by the output check code "71-95" of the I/O check mode of the service
mode.
▪ If the counter is not reset, the trimmer board solenoid operating timing after the trimmer board is replaced becomes faster
than specified timing (700/500/300 times of trimming). (In the first operation only)
▪ After you replace the trimmer board, perform the saddle stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is performed
without any problem.
25.5.3 Replacing the trimmer blade kit
WARNING
• Pay extra caution when you hold the trimmer blade [1].
Never touch the edge [2] of the blade. You get injured.
• Remove the blade cover only at the replacement.
Otherwise, never remove the cover. You get injured.
• Dispose the used trimmer blade as specified by the
local authority.
F-291
[2]
[1] a0h2t3c011ca
(1) Procedure
WARNING
• When you remove the trimmer blade, do not loosen
the screws too much since the trimmer blade can fall
down during the operation. Keep the loosening
amount of the screws to the minimum required to
remove the trimmer blade.
• Pay extra caution when you handle the trimmer blade.
Never touch the edge of the blade. You get injured.
• When you reinstall the trimmer blade, be sure to
insert the screws enough to hold the trimmer blade,
otherwise the trimmer blade can fall down during the
operation.
• When you tighten the screws of the trimmer blade,
tighten them temporarily with the torque that bends
the tip of the #3-hex wrench approximately 5 degrees.
Then fully tighten them with the strong torque that
bends it approximately 15 degrees.
F-292
[3] [2] [1] 1. Move the trimmer board to the release position.
Note
▪ Move the trimmer board to the trimmer press upper limit sensor
(PS52) by the output check code "71-56" in the I/O check mode in
the service mode.
4. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.25.5.1 Removing/installing the
6. Loosen the screws [2] and [3].
WARNING
▪ Do not loosen the screws [2] and [3] too much, or the trimmer
[6]
blade drops during the operation. Keep the loosening amount of
[7] the screws [2] and [3] to a minimum requirement for removing the
trimmer blade [4].
[4] 7. Hold the screws [2] and [3] and slightly lift the screw [3] side. Then move the
trimmer blade [4] in the arrow-marked direction [6] to pull out from the hole
[5], and remove it.
8. Put the trimmer blade [4] at a safe place with no fear of falling down.
[5] WARNING
a0h2t3c012ca
▪ Pay extra caution when you handle the trimmer blade [4]. Never
touch the edge [7] of the blade. You get injured.
9. Insert the #2.5 hex wrench [2] onto the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade,
[1] [2]
and then slide it from the right [3] to the left [4] (viewed from the operator) to
clean the trimmer scraps.
Note
▪ Conduct the cleaning with the #2.5 hex wrench which is one-step
thinner than the hex wrench #3 used for the installation screws of
the trimmer blade. Using #3 causes the deformation of the
mounting slit.
▪ To change the direction of the hex wrench, remove the wrench
once and reinsert it again.
[5] ▪ The bottom of the slit of the left side [4] (viewed from the operator)
is curved in the same manner as the blade [5]. Be sure to scrape
the trimmer scraps.
10. Clean the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade with the blower brush.
[4] [3]
a0h2t3c013ca
[4]
11. Put a new trimmer blade [1] on the floor and insert 2 new screws about a half
and a bit length of them [3] into the marked side [2].
WARNING
▪ Be sure to insert the screws [3] enough to hold the trimmer blade,
otherwise the trimmer blade falls down during the operation.
Note
▪ Install the brand-new screws [3] that are shipped with the trimmer
blade kit.
[3] [1] [2] 12. Remove the blade cover [4] of the new trimmer blade kit and put the cover
a0h2t3c014ca
on the old trimmer blade.
F-293
13. Hold 2 screws [2] of the new trimmer blade and insert it to the hole [3]. Then
insert 2 screws [2] to the screw grooves [4].
[3]
[2]
[1] [4]
[2]
[4]
a0h2t3c015ca
[1][2] [4] [6] 14. Tighten the new screw [1] temporarily. Then press 2 screws [1] and [2]
downward [3] until the trimmer blade [4] contacts the bottom, and then press
it to the right side [5] (viewed from the operator).
15. Tighten 2 screws [1] and [2] with the #3 hex wrench [6].
WARNING
▪ When you tighten 2 screws [1] and [2], tighten them temporarily
with the torque that bends the tip of the #3 hex wrench [6]
[7]
approximately 5 degrees [7]. Then fully tighten them with the
[8] strong torque that bends it approximately 15 degrees [8].
Note
▪ Be sure to check and clear the foreign object that obstacles the
operation of the trimmer blade.
[3] [5]
[2] [1]
a0h2t3c016ca
Note
▪ After you replace the trimmer blade, perform the saddle stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is performed
25.5.4 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32)

(1) Procedure
F-294
[2] [3] [6] [4] [2] 1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.25.5.6 Replacing the trimming unit)
3. Loosen 4 screws [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to tighten 4 screws [2] after you
make the tension of the spring [3] over the mounting plate [4].
4. Remove 4 screws [6] with keeping the trimmer press motor (M32) [5], and
then remove it from the belt [7].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put the trimmer press motor (M32)
[5] into the round hole [8].
[7] [8] [6]
[5] [1]
a0h2t3c022ca
5. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the gear [2] from the trimmer press
[1] [2]
motor (M32) [3].
[3] a0h2t3c023ca
25.5.5 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31)

(1) Procedure (previous trimmer unit)
DANGER
Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.
F-295

• Trimmer scraps guide (Refer to F.25.5.1 Removing/installing the
[1] 2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2 fixing
[1]
plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca
[2] [1] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] of the jig for supporting trimmer unit and then remove
the anti-drop bracket [2].
[4] [2] [3] [1]

4. Align the edge of the jig for supporting trimmer unit [1] with the corner [4] of
the trimmer unit that is based on the hole [2] of the jig for supporting trimmer
unit [1].
F-296
[2] [3] [1] 5. Disconnect the connector [1].

Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be careful not to nip the wiring harness with
the metal plate.
6. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the stopper [3].
7. Reinstall the anti-drop bracket [5] with 2 screws [4] which have been
removed in step 3.
DANGER:
▪ Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until the
stopper [3] is removed. If the stopper is removed while the trimmer
unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit drops.
[4]
[6]
[5] [6]
9. Disconnect 5 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harness from the
[1]
wiring harness clamp.
[1] a0h2t3c020ca
[3] [4] 10. Hold the lower edges [2] of the trimmer unit [1] and pull out the trimmer unit
to the back side until the stoppers [3] touch to the anti-drop brackets [4].
Note
▪ Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged like the
electrical parts.
[1]
[2]
F-297
11. Hold the lower right [2] of the trimmer unit [1], turn it around the engaging [3]
[1] [3]
of the stopper and the anti-drop bracket, and then put the trimmer unit [1] on
the jig for supporting trimmer unit [4].
[2] [4]
[1] a0h2t3c024ca
13. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
[1] [2] [1]
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure that the wiring harness [3] comes in
the position as you can see in the picture.
[3] a0h2t3c025ca
14. Check point when you reinstall the trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2] [1]
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the shaft on
the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole [2] of the
planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
15. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3] from the
[2] [4] [3] [5] [1]
trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure that the label [4] is in the same
direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting bracket [3].
[1] a0h2t3c027ca
F-298
(2) Procedure (new trimmer unit)

[1]
[1] 3. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure that the wiring harness [3] comes in
the position as you can see in the picture.
[3] [2]
4. Check point when you reinstall the trimmer blade motor (M31)
[2] [1]
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to insert the D-cut [1] of the shaft on
the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the D-cut hole [2] of the
planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the mounting bracket [3] from the
[2] [4] [3] [5] [1]
trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure that the label [4] is in the same
direction as the slotted hole [5] on the mounting bracket [3].
[1] a0h2t3c027ca
25.5.6 Replacing the trimming unit
CAUTION
trimmer unit is heavy.
(1) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer unit
F-299

• Trimmer paddle assy (Refer to F.25.5.1 Removing/installing the
[1] 2. Remove each 4 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove 2 fixing
[1]
plates [2].
a0h2t3c018ca

Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be careful not to nip the wiring harness with
the metal plate.
5. Hold the configuration parts [3] of the trimmer unit and pull out the trimmer
unit to the back side until the stoppers [4] and [5] touch to the anti-drop
brackets [6] and [7].
[5] [7] [6] [4]
[3]
a0h2t3c019ca
(2) Removing and reinstalling the trimmer unit
DANGER
Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until
the stopper is removed. If the stopper is removed while the
trimmer unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit
drops.
F-300
CAUTION
1. Conduct by the step 4 of the procedure for pulling out the trimmer unit (Refer
[1]
to F.25.5.6 (1) Procedure for pulling out the trimmer unit)
DANGER:
▪ Be sure not to pull out the trimmer unit to the back side until the
stopper is removed. If the stopper is removed while the trimmer
unit is pulled out to the back side, the trimmer unit drops.
2. Disconnect 5 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harness from the
wiring harness clamp.
[1] a0h2t3c020ca
3. Remove each 2 of the screws [1] at 2 places, and then remove the stopper/1
[1] [3] [2] [1]
[2] and stopper/2 [3].
4. Hold the configuration parts [5] and pull out the trimmer unit [4] to the back
side.
Note
▪ Lift the trimmer unit [4] slightly and remove or reinstall it. Be sure
to avoid the projection [6] that prevents the falling off on the
trimmer unit plate.
▪ Be sure not to hold the position that is easily damaged like the
electrical parts.
CAUTION
▪ Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the
[5] [4] [5]
[6]
a0h2t3c021ca
25.5.7 Lubrication to the trimmer unit

(1) Procedure (previous trimmer unit)
F-301
[3] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.30.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gear/3 [2] and drive gear/4 [3].
steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When you apply the grease, be careful not to spill the grease to
other parts.
[1]
[3] [2]
[1]
a0h2t3c060ca
(2) Procedure (new trimmer unit)

[3] 1. Pull out the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.25.5.6 (1) Procedure for pulling out the
trimmer unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the paper holding screw [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the drive gear/3 [2] and drive gear/4 [3].
steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When you apply the grease, be careful not to spill the grease to
other parts.
[2]
[3] [1] [2]
[1]
F-302
26. SD-513
CAUTION
26.2 Entrance conveyance section

26.2.1 Replacing the reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102)
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the rear cover /Rt. (Refer to G.31.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt)
2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove 2 screws [2] to remove the
reverse exit roller pressure release motor assy [3].
[2] [1] [3] [4] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate [3] from the
reverse exit roller pressure release motor (M102) [2].
Note
▪ When you install the reverse exit roller pressure release motor
(M102) [2], apply Molykote EM-30L to the gear [4] of the motor.

26.2.2 Cleaning of the paper re-feed roller/Lt

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the slitter unit. (Refer to G.33.3.2 Slitter unit)
2. Clean the paper re-feed roller/Lt [1] with the isopropyl alcohol.
26.2.3 Cleaning of the reverse exit roller/Rt

(1) Procedure
F-303
[1] 1. Remove the creaser unit. (Refer to G.32.3.2 Creaser unit)

2. Clean the reverse exit roller/Rt [1] with the isopropyl alcohol.
26.3 Folding conveyance section

26.3.1 Replacing the 1st folding knife motor (M13)
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.31.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt)
[3] [1] [2] 3. Remove the left cover/Rr. (Refer to G.31.3.6 Left cover/Rr)
4. Release the clamp [1].
5. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the 1st folding knife motor assy [3].
6. Note
[2] ▪ When you install the 1st folding knife motor assy, be sure to check
that the timing belt [2] is engaged to the gear [1] of the motor.
▪ When you install the 1st folding knife motor assy, move the 1st
folding knife away from the folding roller.
[1]
F-304
[2] [1] 7. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the motor mounting plate [3] from the
1st folding knife motor (M13) [2].
[1] [3]
26.3.2 Replacing the 2nd folding knife motor (M14)

(1) Procedure
[5] 1. Remove the rear cover /Lt. (Refer to G.31.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt)
2. Remove the sub tray cover. (Refer to G.31.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /
RrLt3, sub tray cover)
3. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness from the clamp
[2] [2].
Note
[1] ▪ When you remove the screw [3], be careful not to drop the 2nd
folding knife drive assy [4].
5. Release the claw [5], and remove the 2nd folding knife drive assy [4].
[3]
[4]
F-305
[4] 6. Note
▪ When you install the 2nd folding knife drive assy [1], pull out the
arm [2] in the arrowed direction. Hang the claw [5] on the hole of
the metal plate [6] while the 2nd folding knife [3] is released from
the nip of the folding roller [4]. If the 2nd folding knife drive assy is
installed with the 2nd folding knife [3] nipped, the 2nd folding knife
[3] could be distorted.
▪ When you tighten 5 screws [7], check that the drive section of the
2nd folding knife drive assy [1] keeps the arm [2] with the arm
pulled out in the arrowed direction.
If you adjust the position of the 2nd folding knife drive assy [1]
after you hang the claw [5] on the hole of the metal plate [6], the
[1] [2] [3] 2nd folding knife [3] could drop off by its own weight and nipped
by the folding roller [4].
[5][6]
[7]
[3] [1] [2] 7. Release the clamp [1].

8. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the 2nd folding knife motor assy [3].
F-306
9. Note
[2] ▪ When you reinstall the 2nd folding knife motor assy, be sure to
check the belt [2] is engaged to the gear [1] of the motor.
[1]
[3] 10. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the motor mounting plate [3] from the
2nd folding knife motor (M14) [2].
[1] [2]
26.3.3 Cleaning of the 1st folding roller, 2nd folding roller

(1) Procedure
1. Open the sub tray. (Refer to G.31.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3,
sub tray cover)
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and release the wiring harness [2] from the clamp.
Then, remove the folding roller guide home sensor assy [3].
Note
▪ The folding roller guide home sensor assy [3] is connected to
SD-513 with the wiring harness [2]. When you remove the folding
roller guide home sensor assy [3], be careful not to damage the
wiring harness [2].
[2] [1] [3]

3. Clean the 2nd folding roller [1] and 2 1st folding rollers [2] with the isopropyl
alcohol.
[1] [2]
F-307
26.3.4 Lubrication to the front stopper shaft

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the sub tray cover. (Refer to G.31.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /
RrLt3, sub tray cover)
2. Apply the MH Surf at 2 places of the front stopper shaft [1].
26.4 Sub tray, tri-folding tray section

26.4.1 Cleaning the tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3
(1) Procedure
1. Open the front console. (Refer to G.31.3.11 Opening and closing of the front
console)
2. Rotate the lever [1] and open the jam processing guide [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
4. Open the conveyance guide [1] to the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
5. While you lift the rear side of the conveyance guide [1], open the conveyance
guide [1] further to the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
F-308
6. Clean the tri-folding tray conveyance roller/3 [1] with isopropyl alcohol and a
cleaning pad.
[1]
26.5 Saddle stitching section

26.5.1 Replacing the staple unit
(1) Procedure
For the replacement procedure of the staple unit, be sure to refer to " I.34.5 Staple adjustment". Then, be sure to perform the replacement of
the staple unit and staple adjustment at the same time.
After you replace the parts, reset the special parts counter.
26.5.2 Replacing the clincher

(1) Procedure
For the replacement procedure of the clincher, refer to " I.34.5 Staple adjustment". Then perform the replacement of the clincher and the
stapler adjustment at the same time.
After you replace the parts, reset the special parts counter.
26.5.3 Replacing the booklet holding motor (M17)

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the left cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.31.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2,
left cover/Fr3)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness, and remove 2
screws [2]. Then remove the booklet holding motor assy [3].
booklet holding motor (M17) [2].
Note
▪ When you install the booklet holding motor (M17) [2], apply
Molykote EM-30L to the gear [4] of the motor.

26.5.4 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate/Rr

(1) Procedure
F-309
[2] [1] 1. Remove the left cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.31.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2,
left cover/Fr3)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal plate [2].
[1] 3. Apply the MH Surf at the 2 places of the saddle stitching alignment plate
shaft/Rr [1].
26.5.5 Lubrication to the saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Fr

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the front console. (Refer to G.31.3.11 Opening and closing of the front
console)
2. Apply the MH Surf at 2 places of the saddle stitching alignment plate shaft/Fr
[1].
26.5.6 Replacing the conveyance guide assy/Up

[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/frLt1. (Refer to G.31.3.9 Upper cover/FrLt1, /FrLt2)
console)
3. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the conveyance guide assy/Up [2].
[1]
[2]
F-310

[1] 1. Fasten the conveyance guide assy/Up [2] temporarily with 3 screws [1].
2. Tighten 3 screws [1] at the position where the apex [3] of conveyance guide/
Lw matches the apex [4] of the conveyance guide assy/Up.
[1]
[2] [3][4]
26.5.7 Replacing the alignment plate solenoid wiring

(1) Procedure
console)
2. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the wiring cover [2].
[2] [1]
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the solenoid cover [2].
[2] [1]
F-311
4. Remove the connector [1], and release the alignment plate solenoid wiring
from the clamp.
Note
▪ When you install the cover [3], be sure not to catch the alignment
plate solenoid wiring between the cover [3] and the metal plate.
[3] [2] [1]

6. Remove the wiring band [1] from the metal plate [2].
7. Release the alignment plate solenoid wiring from the hole [4] and the clamp.
[3] [2] [1] [4]

8. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the cover [2] in the arrow-marked
direction.
[1] [2]
10. Release the alignment plate solenoid wiring [2] from the clamp and remove
the alignment plate solenoid wiring.
[2] [1]
26.6 Booklet movement section

26.6.1 Lubrication to the booklet movement unit slide shaft
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Open the front console. (Refer to G.31.3.11 Opening and closing of the front
console)
2. Hold the metal plate [1], and pull out the booklet movement unit [2] to the
trimmer unit side.
F-312
[1] 3. Apply the MH Surf at 2 places of the booklet movement unit slide shaft [1].
26.6.2 Lubrication to the booklet holding unit slide shaft

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Open the front console. (Refer to G.31.3.11 Opening and closing of the front
console)
2. Hold the metal plate [1], and pull out the booklet movement unit [2] to the
trimmer unit side.
[1] 3. Pull out the booklet holding unit [1] to the trimmer unit side.
4. Apply MH surf at 2 places of the booklet holding unit slide shaft [2].
[2]
26.6.3 Lubrication to the booklet set unit slide shaft

(1) Procedure
console)
2. Apply the MH Surf at 4 places of the booklet set unit slide shaft [1].
F-313
26.7 Clamp section
26.7.1 Replacing the fore edge stopper motor (M24)
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [2] [1] 1. Remove the right cover/1. (Refer to G.31.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3)
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness.
3. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the fore edge stopper motor assy [3].
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the fore edge stopper motor (M24) [2].
Note
▪ When you install the fore edge stopper motor (M24) [2], apply
[1]
[2] [3]
26.7.2 Replacing the fore edge finger motor (M52), the fore-edge finger gear, and the finger torque limiter
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [4] [2] 1. Remove the right cover/1. (Refer to G.31.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3)
3. Remove 6 screws [2]. While you release the bearing [3], remove the fore
edge finger motor assy [4].
Note
▪ When you install the fore edge finger motor assy [4], be sure to
match the hole [5] and the bearing [3].
[5] [3]
F-314
[3] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the fore edge finger motor (M52) [2].
Note
▪ When you install the fore edge finger motor (M52) [2], apply
[1]
[1]
[3] [2] 6. Remove E-rings [1] 1 each, spacers [2] 1 each, and bearings [3] 1 each, and
remove the finger torque limiter assy [4] in the arrowed direction.
[4][1]
[3]
[1] [2]
F-315
7. Remove the E-ring [1], the gear [2], the pin [3] and the E-ring [4], and slide
the fore edge finger gear [5] and the finger torque limiter [6] in the arrowed
direction.
8. Remove the pin [7], and remove the fore edge finger gear [5] and the finger
torque limiter [6].
Note
▪ When you install the fore edge finger gear [5], apply Molykote
EM-30L to the fore edge finger gear [5].
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

26.7.3 Replacing the clamp motor (M23)

(1) Replacement procedure when FD-504 is not installed
[3] [2] [4] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.31.3.13 Gripper paper exit
unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the clamp motor assy [3].
Note
▪ When you remove the clamp motor assy [3], be careful that the
encoder [4] does not damage the clamp motor encoder sensor
(PS121) [5].
▪ When you reinstall the clamp motor assy [3], be careful that the
(PS121) [5].
[1] [5]
clamp motor (M23) [2].
Note
▪ When you install the clamp motor (M23) [2], apply Molykote
EM-30L to the gear [4] of the motor.

(2) Replacement procedure when FD-504 is installed

1. Move the FD clamp plate to the home position with the output check 71-94 of
the I/O Check Mode.
2. Move the up down position of the lifter plate to the home position with the
output check 71-68 of the I/O check mode.
3. Move the front back position of the lifter plate to the home position with the
4. Perform the pressure of the FD clamp plate on output check 71-95 in the IO
check mode.
5. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) of
6. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.31.3.13 Gripper paper exit
unit)
[1] [3] [2] [4] 7. Release the wiring harness from 3 clamps [1].
F-316
8. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the wiring mounting cover [3].
9. Move the FD roller assy [4] to the arrow-marked direction.
[4] [1] 11. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the clamp motor assy [3].
Note
▪ When you remove the clamp motor assy [3], be careful that the
(PS121) [5].
▪ When you reinstall the clamp motor assy [3], be careful that the
(PS121) [5].
[5] [3] [2]
clamp motor (M23) [2].
Note
▪ After you replace the FD roller cleaning assy/Fr and the FD roller cleaning assy/Rr, be sure to move the FD roller assy to
the original position (rear side). When the FD roller assy is not in the original position, it contacts with the gripper paper
exit unit and the machine is possibly damaged.
26.7.4 Replacing the booklet holding wire/1, booklet holding wire/2 and booklet holding wire/3
(1) Procedure
Note
▪ Be sure not to fold the conveyance guide [1] when you replace the booklet holding wire.
[1]
F-317
[3] 1. Open the front console at maximum. (Refer to G.31.3.11 Opening and
closing of the front console)
[1] 2. Remove the E-ring, 1 each.
3. Release the pulley [2], 1 each, in the arrow-marked direction [3], and remove
the pulley assy [4], 1 each, in the arrow-marked direction [5].
[4] [2]
[5] [2]
[1]
[3]
4. Remove the C-clip [1], 1 each, and remove the wire holding [2], 1 each.
[1]
[2]
5. Note
▪ When you install the wire holding [1], be sure to align the
projection [2] of the wire holding with the hole [3] of the metal
plate.
[1] [3] [2]
F-318
[3] 6. Remove 3 screws [1], and release the fixing of the wire retaining plate [2].
[2]
[1]
8. Release the edge [2] of the booklet holding wire from the wire retaining plate
[2] [1].
[1]
F-319
9. Remove C-clip [1], 1 each.

[1]
10. Pull out the shaft [1], 1 each, and release the fixing of the shaft.
[1]
F-320
11. Note
[4] [1] ▪ When you install the shaft [1], be sure to put each wire into the
groove [3] of each pulley [2].
▪ Be sure not to catch the wire in the gap [4] between pulleys.
[2][3]
12. Remove the booklet holding wire/1 [2], 1 each, the booklet holding wire/2 [3],
[1] 1 each, and the booklet holding wire/3 [4], 1 each, from 3 springs [1].
[4] [3] [2]
F-321
Note
▪ The lengths of the booklet holding wire/1 [1], the booklet holding
wire/2 [2], and the booklet holding wire/3 [3] are different. When
you install the booklet holding wire/1 [1], the booklet holding wire/2
[2], and the booklet holding wire/3 [3], follow the F Table 1:
Booklet holding wire distinction table to distinguish each wire.
[3] [2] [1]
[3] [2] [1] [2] [3]
Table 1: Booklet holding wire distinction table
Parts name Length Hook color Wire color
Booklet holding wire/1 [1] Long Silver Silver
Booklet holding wire/2 [2] Medium Black Silver
Booklet holding wire/3 [3] Short Silver Red
26.7.5 Replacing the clamp hanging wire

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
The strong spring has been installed in the pulley shaft. Be
sure to tighten the screw. If the fixing of the pulley shaft is
released during the replacement, the spring possibly
damages the parts or injury is possibly caused.
F-322
[6] [7] unit)
3. Lift up the bottom sections [2] of both edges of the clamp unit or push down
the [3] of the spine corner forming unit. This operation adjusts the height of
the spine corner forming unit [4]. Move the spine corner forming unit to the
position where the 2 screw holes of the pulley shaft [6] can be seen from the
2 holes [5].
4. Install the 2 screws [1] to the 2 screw holes on the pulley shaft [6].
CAUTION
▪ The strong spring [7] has been installed in the pulley shaft [6]. Be
sure to tighten the screw [1]. If the fixing of the pulley shaft [6] is
released during the replacement, the spring [7] possibly damages
the parts or injury is possibly caused.
[3] [5] [2] [1] [4] [3]
[1] 5. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the motor cover [2].
[1] [2]
[1] [2] [2] [1] 6. Remove 1 each of the screws [1], and remove 1 each of the rotation levers
[2].
F-323
[1] [2] 7. Attach the rotation lever [1] to the pulley shaft [2].
[1] [2][3] [3] 8. Rotate the rotation lever [1] 180 degrees or more to the arrow-marked
direction. Then, fix the rotation lever with the screw [2] which you removed in
step 6. Screw hole of the screw [2] is either of the 2 screw holes [3].
[1] [2] 9. Attach the rotation lever [1] to the pulley shaft [2].
[1] [3] [2][3] 10. Rotate the rotation lever [1] 180 degrees or more to the arrow-marked
direction. Then, fix the rotation lever with the screw [2] which you removed in
step 6. Screw hole of the screw [2] is either of the 2 screw holes [3].
F-324
11. Release 1 each of the clamp hanging wires [1] from 1 each of the hooks [2].
[1] Note
▪ When you install 1 each of the clamp hanging wires [1] to 1 each of
[2] the hooks [2], be sure to use the precision screwdriver and hook
the clamp hanging wires.
[2] [1] 12. Remove the C-clip [1], 1 each, and remove the wire holding [2], 1 each.
F-325
13. Remove the screw [1], 1 each, and release the fixing of the clamp hanging
[1] [2] wire [2].
14. Loosen the screws [3], 2 each, and release the fixing of the pulley retaining
[5] plate [4]. Then pull out the clamp hanging wire [2] from the hole [5].
[3]
[4]
[2] [1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2] [3] [1] 15. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each.
16. Remove the screw [2], 1 each, and remove the pulley cover [3], 1 each.
F-326
[3] [2] [1] 17. Slide the spacer [1], 1 each, and the pulley [2], 1 each in the arrow-marked
direction, and remove the clamp hanging wire [3], 1 each.
Note
▪ When you install the clamp hanging wire, check that the clamp hanging wire is caught in the groove of each pulley.
26.8 Trimmer section
26.8.1 Replacing the trimmer blade
WARNING
Pay extra caution when holding the trimmer blade [1]. Never
touch the edge [2] of the blade. If you touch the edge, you can
get injured.
Remove the blade cover only at the replacement. Otherwise,
never remove the cover. If you remove the cover, you can get
injured.
Dispose the used trimmer blade as specified by the local
authority.
[1] [2]
F-327
WARNING
When you release the lock mechanism to open the front
console, be careful not to put your hands in a gap of the
trimmer press unit. If you touch the trimmer blade, you can
get injured.
Do not loosen 2 hexagon socket screws too much, or the
trimmer blade drops during the operation. Keep the loosening
amount of 2 hexagon socket screws to a minimum
requirement for removing the trimmer blade.
Pay extra caution when you handle the trimmer blade. Never
touch the edge of the blade. If you touch the edge, you can
get injured.
CAUTION
In that case, use a tool as a driver to hold the lock
mechanism. If you hold the lock mechanism with your hands
when you open the front console, you can get injured.
1. Conduct the home position search of the trimmer press motor (M32) with the
output check 71-82 on the I/O check mode. Then, move the trimmer press
board to the home position.
2. Move the trimmer blade to the home position with the output check 71-79 on
the I/O check mode.
3. Move the trimmer booklet holding to the home position with the output check
71-73 on the I/O check mode.
4. Conduct the upper limit search of the trimmer press motor (M32) with the
output check71-81 on the I/O check mode. Then, move the trimmer press
board to the release position.
[2] [1] 6. Open the entrance door [1].
[3] 8. Remove the screw cover [1] and turn the screw [2] in the arrow marked
direction to release the lock mechanism [3].
WARNING
▪ When you release the lock mechanism [3] to open the front
console, be careful not to put your hands in a gap of the trimmer
press unit. If you touch the trimmer blade, you can get injured. If
you touch the trimmer blade, you can get injured.
[2] [1]
F-328
9. Note
▪ When you release the lock mechanism of the trimmer section and
open the front console half, the lock mechanism [1] rises. If the
lock mechanism [1] rises, open the front console while you hold it
with a driver [2].
CAUTION
▪ In that case, use a tool as a driver to hold the lock mechanism. If
you hold the lock mechanism with your hands when you open the
front console, you can get injured.
[1] [2]
10. Insert a driver into the hole [1] vertically, and then move the lock board [2] in
[1] the arrow marked direction and release the lock.
11. Hold the handle [3] with the lock released, and open the front console [4] a
[2] little in the arrow marked direction.
12. Pull out a driver from the hole [1].
[3]
[4]
F-329
13. Insert a driver into the hole [1] vertically, and then turn the sub lock [2] in the
[1] arrow marked direction and release the lock.
14. Hold the handle [3], and open the front console [4].
[2]
[3]
[4]
15. Remove the trimmer paddle assy. (Refer to F.26.8.2 Replacing the trimmer
board)
16. Remove the hexagon socket screw [1].
17. Loosen 2 hexagon socket screws [2].
WARNING
▪ Do not loosen 2 hexagon socket screws [2] too much, or the
trimmer blade [3] drops during the operation. Keep the loosening
amount of 2 hexagon socket screws [2] to a minimum requirement
for removing the trimmer blade [3].
[1] [2] [3]

[2] [1] 18. Hold the hexagon socket screws [1] and the hexagon socket screws [2], and
slightly pull out the hexagon socket screw [1] side. Then move the trimmer
blade [3] in the arrow marked direction to pull out from the hole [4], and
remove it.
[3]
[4]
F-330
19. Put the trimmer blade [1] at a safe place with no fear of falling down.
[1] [2]
20. Insert the hex wrench [2] onto the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade, and
then slide it from the left to the right (viewed from the operator) to clean the
trimmer scraps.
Note
▪ Conduct the cleaning with the #2.5 hex wrench which is one-step
thinner than the hex wrench #3 used for the installation screws of
the trimmer blade. Using #3 causes the deformation of the
mounting slit.
▪ To change the direction of the hex wrench, remove the wrench
once and reinsert it again.
▪ The bottom of the slit of the right side [3] (viewed from the
operator) is curved. Be sure to scrape the trimmer scraps.
[3] 21. Clean the mounting slit [1] of the trimmer blade with the blower brush.
[2] [1]
WARNING
Be sure to insert the screws enough to hold the trimmer
blade, otherwise the trimmer blade falls down during the
operation.
When you tighten 2 screws of the trimmer blade, tighten them
temporarily once. Then fully tighten the screws with the
strong torque. If you use the weak torque, the fixing of the
trimmer blade can be released.
[2] [4] [3] [1] 1. Put a new trimmer blade [1] on the floor and insert 2 new screws about a half
and a bit length of them [3] into the marked side [2].
Note
▪ Install the new screws [3] that are shipped with the trimmer blade.
2. Remove the blade cover [4] of the new trimmer blade and put the cover on
the old trimmer blade.
F-331
[2][4] 3. Hold 2 screws [2] of the new trimmer blade and insert the left end of the
trimmer blade to the hole [3]. Then insert 2 screws [2] to the screw grooves
[4].
[1]
[3]
4. Tighten the new screw [1] temporarily. Then press 2 hexagon socket screws
[1] and [2] to the back side [3] until the trimmer blade [4] contacts the bottom,
and then stick it on the left side [5] (viewed from the operator).
5. Tighten 2 hexagon socket screws [1] and [2] with the hex wrench.
WARNING
▪ When you tighten 2 screws [1] and [2], tighten them temporarily
once. Then fully tighten the screws with the strong torque. If you
use the weak torque, the fixing of the trimmer blade can be
released.
Note
▪ Be sure to check and clear the foreign object that obstacles the
operation of the trimmer blade.
[1] [5] [3] [2] [4]
Note
▪ After you replace the trimmer blade, perform the saddle stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is performed
26.8.2 Replacing the trimmer board

(1) Procedure
WARNING
trimmer press unit. If you touch the trimmer blade, you can
get injured.
CAUTION
In that case, use a tool as a driver to hold the lock
mechanism. If you hold the lock mechanism with your hands
when you open the front console, you can get injured.
F-332
1. Conduct the home position search of the trimmer press motor (M32) with the
output check 71-82 on the I/O check mode. Then, move the trimmer press
board to the home position.
2. Move the trimmer blade to the home position with the output check 71-79 on
the I/O check mode.
3. Move the trimmer booklet holding to the home position with the output check
71-73 on the I/O check mode.
4. Move the replacement position of the trimmer press motor (M32) with the
output check71-84 on the I/O check mode. Then, move the trimmer press
board to the replacement position.
[2] [1] 6. Open the entrance door [1].
[3] 8. Remove the screw cover [1] and turn the screw [2] in the arrow marked
WARNING
press unit. If you touch the trimmer blade, you can get injured. If
you touch the trimmer blade, you can get injured.
[2] [1]
9. Note
with a driver [2].
CAUTION
[1] [2]
F-333
[2] little in the arrow marked direction.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2] [1] 15. Pull out the trim scrap box [1].
16. Remove the inner box [2].
F-334
[1] [2] 17. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the trim scrap box [2].
[1] 18. Push 2 rails [1] to the inside of SD-513.
[2] [1] 19. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the trimmer unit cover [2].
F-335
[3] 20. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the fixing plate/Fr [2].
21. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the fixing plate/Rr [4].
[4]
[1] [1]
[2]
[1] [2] 22. Hold 2 handles [1] and then rotate the trimming unit [2] in the arrow marked
direction.
[3] [1] [2] 23. Note

▪ When you work with the trimmer unit [1] standing up, insert the
driver [3] to the hole [2] and fix it so as not to fall down.
F-336
24. Hold the handle [1] and then move the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow marked
direction [3].
25. Hold the handle [4] and then move the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow marked
[4] direction [5].
26. Hold 2 handles [6] and then lay down the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow
marked direction [7].
[3] [6] [5]
[1] [2] [7]
[4] 27. Remove the screw [1] 1 each, and then remove the washer [2] 1 each.
Note
▪ When you remove the screw [1] 1 each, be careful not to lose the
washer [2] 1 each.
28. Remove the screw [3] 1 each, and then remove the stopper assy [4] 1 each.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1][2] [3] [4]
F-337
[2] 29. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

30. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the trimmer paddle assy [3].
Note
▪ When trim scraps are wrapping around the trimmer paddle assy
[3], be sure to remove the trimmer scraps.
[3]
[1]
[2] [1] 31. Remove the screw [1] 1 each, and remove the fixing plate [2] each 1.
[2] [1]
F-338
[2] [3] [4] 32. Release 2 feed racks [2] in the arrow marked direction while you pull out the
trimmer board [1], then remove the trimmer board [1].
Note
▪ Be sure not to damage the trimmer board replacement sensor
(PS53) [4] with the actuator [3] of the trimmer board when you pull
out the trimmer board [1].
[1] [2]
[2] [1] 33. Note

▪ Be sure not to fold the guide sheet [2] when you install the trimmer
board [1].
F-339
[1] [2] 34. Note

▪ Install the trimmer board [1] vertically on the straight so that the
trimmer board [1] is inside 2 points of the hold plate [2].
▪ When you mount the trimmer board [1], insert the trimmer board to
the back side.
[1] [2]
[1] 35. Clean the actuator [1] and the area [2] of the trimmer blade retaining plate
which touches the actuator.
Note
▪ When the trimmer scraps remain or the cleaning is not conducted
properly, the trimmer completion timing differs and a trimming
fault occurs.
[2]
Note
▪ After you replace the trimmer board, perform the saddle stitch with trimming and check that the trimming is performed
37. Conduct the following procedure after you replace the trimmer board.
• Reset the trimmer counter with the output check 71-78 on the I/O check mode.
Note
· If the counter is not reset, the trimmer board solenoid moving timing after the trimmer board is replaced becomes faster
than specified timing. (In the first operation only)
F-340
26.8.3 Replacing the trimming unit

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
[2] [1] 1. Open the front console and release the wire. (Refer to G.31.3.11 Opening
and closing of the front console)
2. Pull out the trim scrap box [1].
3. Remove the inner box [2].
[1] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the retaining plate assy [2].
[1] 5. Push 2 rails [1] into the inside of SD-513.
[2] [1] 6. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the trimmer unit cover [2].
F-341
[3] 7. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the fixing plate/Fr [2].
8. Remove 3 screws [3], and remove the fixing plate/Rr [4].
[4]
[1] [1]
[2]
[1] [2] 9. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the locking material [2].
F-342
[2] 10. Turn the guide plate assy [1] in the arrow-marked direction and remove 2
screws [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 11. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the guide plate assy [2].
[1] [2] 12. Hold 2 handles [1], and rotate the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-marked
direction.
F-343
[3] [1] [2] 13. Note

▪ When you perform operations such as a replacement with the
trimmer unit [1] being risen, insert a driver [3] into the hole [2] to
fix the unit so that it does not fall down.
14. Hold the handle [1], and rotate the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-marked
direction [3].
15. Hold the handle [4], and rotate the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-marked
[4] direction [5].
16. Hold 2 handles [6], and turn the trimmer unit [2] in the arrow-marked
direction [7].
[3] [6] [5]
[1] [2] [7]
F-344
[4] 17. Remove screws [1] 1 each, and remove the washers [2] 1 each.
Note
▪ When you remove screws [1] 1 each, be careful not to lose
washers [2] 1 each.
18. Remove screws [3] 1 each, and remove the stopper assy [4] 1 each.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1][2] [3] [4]

[2] 19. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
20. Remove 4 screws [2], and then remove the trimmer paddle assy [3].
Note
▪ When trimmer scraps wrap around the trimmer paddle assy [3], be
sure to remove the trimmer scraps.
[3]
[1]
[1] [2] 21. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the slide board [2].
F-345

23. Hold 2 handles [2], and raise the trimmer unit [3].
[1]
[3] [1]
[2]
24. Hold the handle [1] and the lower position of the front side of the trimmer unit
[2], and hold the handle [3] and the lower position of the rear side of the unit
[4]. Then, remove the trimmer unit [5].
[3]
[2] [1] [5] [4]
26.8.4 Replacing the trimmer blade motor (M31)

(1) Procedure
F-346
1. Turn the trimmer unit back. (Refer to F.26.8.3 Replacing the trimming unit)
3. Loosen 3 screws [2], and remove the trimmer blade motor assy [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the trimmer blade motor assy [3], be sure to
reinstall it so that the wiring harness [4] comes in the position in
the picture.
[3] [2] [4] [1]

4. Note
[2] [1]
▪ When you reinstall the trimmer blade motor assy, be sure to insert
the D-cut [1] on the shaft of the trimmer blade motor (M31) into the
D-cut hole [2] of the planetary gear.
a0h2t3c026ca
[3] [2] 5. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the trimmer blade motor (M31) [2], be sure to
reinstall it so that the label [3] comes in the position in the picture.
[1]

26.8.5 Replacing the trimmer press motor (M32)

(1) Procedure
[1]
3. Rotate the trimmer unit [1].
[1]
F-347
[1] [4] [6] [5] [3] [1] 4. Loosen 4 screws [1].

Note
▪ When you install the trimmer press motor (M32) [2], tighten 4
screws [1] after you let the tension of the spring [3] over the
mounting plate [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] with keeping the trimmer press motor (M32) [2], and
then remove it from the belt [6].
Note
▪ When you install the trimmer press motor (M32) [2], be sure to
insert the trimmer press motor (M32) [2] into the round hole [7].
[5] [2] [7]
6. Loosen the screw [1] and then remove the gear [2] from the trimmer press
[1] [2]
motor (M32) [3].
[3] a0h2t3c023ca

26.8.6 Lubrication to the press drive screw, the gear

(1) Procedure
[3] [2] [1] 1. Rotate the trimmer unit. (Refer to F.26.8.3 Replacing the trimming unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the gear [2] from the hole [1].
3. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to 2 places of the gear [3].
F-348
5. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to 2 places of the press drive screw [1].
[1]
[1]
26.9 Booklet tray section

26.9.1 Replacing the gripper motor (M26)
(1) Procedure
[2] [4] [5] [2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.31.3.13 Gripper paper exit
unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the gripper motor assy [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the gripper motor assy [3], be sure to check the
belt [4] is engaged to the gear [5] of the motor.
[2] [1] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting plate [2].
5. Remove 2 hexagon socket screws [3], and remove the gear [5] from the
gripper motor (M26) [4].
[3] [5] [4]
F-349

[3] Note
▪ When you install the gear [2] to the gripper motor (M26) [1], install
it so that the distance between the leading edge of the shaft [3] of
the gripper motor and the gear is within the standard value.
Standard value: a = 3.9 ± 0.5 mm
a
[2] [1]
26.9.2 Lubrication to the gripper paper exit gear/Fr, the gripper paper exit gear/Rr
(1) Procedure
[1]
unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the gripper paper exit gear/Fr [1] and the
gripper paper exit gear/Rr [2].
[2]
26.9.3 Lubrication to the gripper lock plate

(1) Procedure
F-350
[1] unit)
2. Lubricate Molykote EM-30L to the 2 positions of the gripper lock plate [1].
[1]
26.9.4 Lubrication to the shutter slide shaft and the shutter slide plate
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit and put it upside down. (Refer to
G.31.3.13 Gripper paper exit unit)
[2] Note
▪ When you put the gripper paper exit unit upside down, put it on A3
or 11 x 17 paper. If you directly put the gripper paper exit unit on a
floor or a desk, the external section of the gripper paper exit unit is
possibly damaged.
[3] 2. Move down the shutter [1]. Apply MH Surf to 2 places to each of the shutter
slide shaft [2] and inside of the shutter slide plate [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
F-351
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 27. CR-101
27. CR-101
CAUTION
27.2 Creaser section
27.2.1 Cleaning the crease blade
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the creaser unit. (Refer to G.32.3.2 Creaser unit)
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the conveyance guide [2].
[1] [2]
3. Clean the crease blade [1] with Isopropyl alcohol and a cleaning pad.
[1]
F-352
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 28. TU-503
28. TU-503
CAUTION
28.2.1 Cleaning the registration roller
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the slitter unit. (Refer to G.33.3.2 Slitter unit)
2. Clean the registration roller [1] with Isopropyl alcohol and a cleaning pad.
3. Use the blower brush and clean the registration sensor (PS98) [2].
[1] [2]
28.2.2 Replacing the registration roller

(1) Procedure
2. Open the open close gate/Up [1].
[1]
3. Clean the registration driven roller [1] with Isopropyl alcohol and a cleaning
pad.
[1]
28.3 Slitter section
28.3.1 Lubrication to the slit cutter shaft
(1) Procedure
F-353

2. Displace the slit cutter assy [1] horizontally and clean the slit cutter shaft [2]
with a cleaning pad.
Note
[3] ▪ When you clean the slit cutter shaft [2], clean the slit cutter shaft
groove [3] as well.
▪ When you clean the slit cutter shaft, do not use alcohol. If you use
alcohol, the oil that is applied on the slit cutter shaft is removed.
3. Apply the Molykote EM-30L on the slit cutter shaft groove [3].
[2]
[1]
28.3.2 Lubrication to the slit cutter drive gear

(1) Procedure
2. Apply Molykote on the join section [2] of 2 slit cutter drive gears [1].
[1]
[2]
28.3.3 Replacing the slit cutter assy/Fr, /Rr

CAUTION
When you hold the slit cutter assy/Fr and the slit cutter assy/
Rr, be sure not to touch the cutter blade. You possibly get
injured.
F-354
[1] [2] 1. Remove rotary cutter assy. (Refer to F.28.4.1 Replacing the rotary cutter
assy)
2. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the sensor bracket [2].
[1] 3. Note
▪ When you install the sensor bracket [1], adjust the gap between
the bottom [2] of the sensor bracket and the bottom [3] of the
conveyance guide/Up within ± 0.5 mm.
[3] [2] [2] [3]

5. Remove 5 screws [2], and remove the slitter motor assy [3].
[2] [3] [1] [2]

[1] [2] 6. Remove 2 C-rings [1], and remove 2 bearings [2].
7. Remove the C-ring [1], and remove the gear [2], the pin [3], and the adjuster
ring [4].
[2] [1] [3] [4]
F-355
[2] [1] 8. Remove 2 hexagon socket screws [1], and then remove 2 slit cutter drive
gears [2].
[3] [4] [2] [1] 9. Remove the screw [1].

10. Remove 2 C-rings [1], and remove 2 bearings [3] and the spacer [4].
[3][4] 11. Move the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] and the slit cutter assy/Rr [2] to the direction
of the arrow.
12. Remove 4 screws [3] and 4 spacers [4]. Then, remove the slit cutter unit [5]
in the arrow-marked direction.
[2] [1] [5]
[2] [1] 13. Remove the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
14. Remove the slit cutter assy/Rr [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
F-356
[1] [3] [2] 15. CAUTION

▪ When you hold the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] and the slit cutter assy/Rr
[2], be sure not to touch the cutter blade [3]. You possibly get
injured.
16. Note
▪ When you install the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] and the slit cutter assy/
Rr [2], reinstall the [5] sections of the slit cutter shaft/Up [3] and
the slit cutter shaft/Lw [4] at the front side and the [6] sections and
the rear side.
▪ When you install the slit cutter assy/Fr [1] and the slit cutter assy/
Rr [2], install them so that the spring stopper [7] comes to the
position as it is shown in the figure.
[3] [7]
[2] [4] [1]
[6]
[5]
F-357
1. Reinstall a new slit cutter assy/Fr and a new slit cutter assy/Rr following the
removal steps in reverse.
2. Remove 1 each of the screws [1], and then remove 1 each of the slit cutter
positioning assy [2].
Note
▪ The slit cutter positioning assy [2] fixes the positions of the upper
slit cutter and lower slit cutter. Therefore, do not remove the slit
cutter positioning assy [2] until the slit cutter assy is installed. If
the positions of the upper slit cutter and the lower slit cutter move,
paper cannot be trimmed.
▪ The upper slit cutter has to be at outside. The lower slit cutter has
[2] [1] to be at inside.
▪ Be sure to store the slit cutter positioning assy that you removed.
When you remove the slit cutter assy, be sure to install the slit
cutter positioning assy that you store beforehand.
[1] [2]
28.4 Rotary cutter section

28.4.1 Replacing the rotary cutter assy
(1) Procedure
CAUTION
When you hold the rotary cutter assy, be careful not to touch
the cutter blade. You possibly get injured.
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the sensor cover [2].
[2] [1]
F-358
[1] [4] [2] [3] 3. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness [2] from the
clamp of the stay assy [3].
4. Release the wiring harness [2] from the hole [4].
5. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and remove 4 screws [2]. Then, release the
[2] [2]
fixing of the 2 rotary cutter assy [3].
[1] [3] [1] [3]
6. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the stay assy [2].
7. Remove 2 rotary cutter assy [3].
CAUTION
▪ When you hold the rotary cutter assy [3], be careful not to touch
the cutter blade [4]. You possibly get injured.
[2] [1]
[1] [4] [3] [3]
[4] [3]

28.4.2 Cleaning the slit scraps roller/Lt and slit scraps roller/Rt

(1) Procedure
F-359

2. Remove rotary cutter assy. (Refer to F.28.4.1 Replacing the rotary cutter
assy)
3. Clean the slit scraps roller/Lt [1] and the slit scraps roller/Rt [2] with Isopropyl
alcohol and a cleaning pad.
[1] [2]
F-360
29. FD-504
CAUTION
29.2 Clamp section
29.2.1 Lubrication to FD clamp
(1) Procedure
1. Move the FD clamp plate to the home position with the output check 71-94 of
[2] the I/O Check Mode.
[1] output check 71-66 of the I/O check mode.
check mode.
unit)
7. Apply MH surf on the FD roller scan line [1] and the FD roller scan line [2] of
the FD clamp plate.
Note
▪ When you apply the MH surf, be careful not to let the MH surf
adhere to the booklet press side of the FD clamp pressure plate.
▪ After the lubrication, put back the FD roller assy [3] to the home
position, rear side of the machine. When the FD roller assy is not
[2] [3] [1] in the original position, it contacts with the gripper paper exit unit
and the machine is possibly damaged.
[1] 8. Install the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.31.3.13 Gripper paper exit
unit)
9. Connect the power plug to the power outlet and activate the main power
switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
10. After the initial operation, open the booklet tray section door. (Refer to
G.31.3.14 Open and close of the booklet tray section door)
11. Check 2 booklet press sections [1] on the clamp plate, and wipe off any MH
surf.
29.2.2 Replacing the FD clamp motor/Rr (M202)

(1) Procedure
F-361
unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the FD clamp motor/Rr assy [3].
[3] [1] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the FD clamp motor/Rr (M202) [2].
Note
▪ When you install the FD clamp motor/Rr (M202) [2], apply Molykote
EM-30L to the gear of the motor [3].

29.2.3 Replacing the FD clamp motor/Fr (M203)

(1) Procedure
unit)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the FD clamp motor/Fr assy [3].
[3] [1] [2] 4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the FD clamp motor/Fr (M203) [2].
Note
▪ When you install the FD clamp motor/Fr (M203) [2], apply the

29.3 Spine corner forming sction

29.3.1 Replacing the FD roller motor (M201)
(1) Procedure
F-362
[1] [2] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.31.3.13 Gripper paper exit
unit)
2. Remove the right cover/1. (Refer to G.31.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3)
3. Push down the spine corner forming unit [1].
5. Remove 2 screws [3], and remove the FD roller motor (M201) [4].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the FD roller motor (M201) [4], be sure to check
the belt [6] is engaged to the gear [5] of the motor.
[6] [4] [3]
[5]
29.3.2 Replacing the FD roller cleaning assy/Fr, /Rr

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Move the FD clamp plate to the home position with the output check 71-94 of
the I/O Check Mode.
check mode.
unit)
7. Move the FD roller assy [1] to the arrow-marked direction.
8. Remove the screw [2], and remove the FD roller cleaning assy/Fr [3].
[2] [3] 9. Remove the screw [4], and remove the FD roller cleaning assy/Rr [5].
[5] [4]
Note
▪ After you replace the FD roller cleaning assy/Fr and the FD roller cleaning assy/Rr, be sure to move the FD roller assy to
the original position (rear side). When the FD roller assy is not in the original position, it contacts with the gripper paper
exit unit and the machine is possibly damaged.
F-363
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 30. PB-503
30. PB-503
30.1.1 Replacement of the entrance gate solenoid (SD1), the sub tray paper exit solenoid (SD4)
(1) Procedure
[7]
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
2. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.35.2.23 PB left unit)
[4] 3. Remove the upper cover/FrRt. (Refer to G.35.2.13 Upper cover/FrRt)
4. Remove the upper cover/RrRt. (Refer to G.35.2.15 Upper cover/RrRt)
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the metal frame [2].
7. Remove 6 screws [3] and disconnect the connectors [4] and [5].
[10] [11]
9. Remove the screws of 3 knobs [7] and remove the knobs.
[6]
10. Remove 2 screws [9] and remove the metal frame [10].
11. Remove 6 screws [8] and remove the conveyance unit [11].
[9] Note
▪ Put the conveyance unit on a table so that the paper entrance
guide does not contact the floor.
[8]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5] [3] a0v9t3c013ca
[1] [2] 12. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each, on the upper cover/Rt, and remove the upper
cover/Rt.
a0v9t3c014ca
F-364
13. Release the wiring harness [1], the wiring harness [2], and the wiring
harness [3] from the clamps.
[3]
[1] [2]
[3] [2] 14. Remove the spring [1].
15. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the entrance gate solenoid assy [3].
[1]
[2]
[1] [2] 16. Disconnect the connectors [1] and [2].

17. Release the wiring harness from the clamp [3].
[3]
F-365
18. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the entrance gate solenoid (SD1) [2].
[2] [1]

20. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy [3].
[2]
[1] a0v9t3c015ca
21. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the sub tray exit solenoid assy (SD4) [2].
[1] [2]
steps in reverse.
23. After the replacement, be sure to reset the parts counter of the sub tray exit
solenoid (SD4).
a0v9t3c016ca
[1] 24. Standard 1 value when you reinstall the sub tray exit solenoid (SD4)
• When you reinstall the sub tray exit solenoid, adjust the position so that
the distance "a" obtains a standard value with the plunger [2] being
[2] pulled.
a a0v9t3c017ca
25. Standard 2 value when you reinstall the sub tray exit solenoid assy (SD4)
• While you pull the plunger of the sub tray exit solenoid, adjust the
position so that the distance "a" (the distance between the paper exit
roller and the paper exit driven roller) obtains a standard value.
Standard value: a = 0 ± 1.5 mm
a a0v9t3c018ca
F-366
26. Check point when you reinstall the conveyance unit

a • After you reinstall the conveyance unit, check the points "a" that is
shown in the picture, to see that the conveyance unit does not contact
the upper door. When they are in contact, loosen 4 fixing screws on the
upper cover/Rt and adjust the position so that the upper door and the
upper cover/Rt does not come in contact.
a0v9t3c019ca
27. After you replace the parts, be sure to reset the parts counter.
30.2 Sub compile (SC) section

30.2.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the power plug of the PB from the power
outlet.
• Make sure to unplug the power code of the main body from
the power outlet when it is connected to the main body.
30.2.2 Replacing the switchback roller
(1) Procedure
[6] [7] [5] [4] [5] 1. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2]. Then close the upper door
[1].
Note
▪ To keep the SC door open, insert a screwdriver into the hole [3]. Be
sure to remove the screwdriver when you close the sub clamp
door, or the cover gets damaged.
2. Remove the 2 C-clips [4], and slide the 2 bearings [5] into the inside.
Note
▪ Before you remove the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet of paper
and so on under the switchback roller assy to prevent the C-clips
[3] [8] [2] [1]
from dropping into inside of the machine.
3. Release the pulley [7] from the belt [6] gently, and remove the switchback
roller assy [8].
a075f2c001ca
[2] [1] 4. Check point when you reinstall the switchback roller assy
Note
▪ After you reinstall the switchback roller assy, use a mirror to check
that the belt [1] is properly looped over the pulley [2] without any
slackness. If the belt has come off the pulley, remove the SC
cover/Up to correct that. (Refer to G.35.2.12 SC cover/Up)
a075f2c002ca
F-367
[9] [4] [3] 5. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the roller [2] and the pin [3].
[8] Note
▪ Be sure to install the bearing [4] so that its collar faces toward the
switchback roller.
[6] 7. Remove the E-ring [5], slide the switchback roller [8] in the direction of the
arrow [6] (toward the pulley) and remove the pin [7]. Then remove the
switchback roller [8] in the direction of the arrow [9].
[5]
[7] [2] [1]

a075f2c003ca
30.2.3 Replacing the SC switchback release motor (M13) and the one-way clutches/A and /B
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the SC cover/Up. (Refer to G.35.2.12 SC cover/Up)
2. Open the upper door [1] to open the SC door [2] and place the paper [3].
3. Close the SC door [2].
Note
▪ Before you remove the C-clips, be sure to spread a sheet of paper
under the switchback roller assy to prevent the C-clips from
dropping into the machine inside.
a0v9t3c020ca
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the switchback cam [2].
Note
▪ The switchback cam [2] is tensioned by the spring [4] via the
switchback arm [3]. When you remove the screw [1], the spring [4]
[2] pulls the switchback arm [3] and the switchback cam [2] moves. At
this time, be careful not to drop the screw [1].
[3]
[4]
[1]
a0v9t3c021ca
F-368
5. Check point when you reinstall the switchback cam

[2] [1] Note
▪ When you reinstall the switchback cam [2], be sure to install it
following the positional relation with the actuator [2] as you can
see in the picture.
a0v9t3c022ca
[1] [3] 6. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and remove 2 bearings [2].

[2] a0v9t3c023ca
[1] 8. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and remove the wiring harness from 2 wiring
harness clamps [2].
[2] a0v9t3c024ca
[1] 9. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release motor assy [2].
[2] a0v9t3c025ca
[1] 10. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the SC switchback release motor [2].
[2] a0v9t3c026ca
F-369
[2] 11. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the one-way clutch/B [2].
[1] a0v9t3c027ca
[1] 12. Check point when you reinstall the one-way clutch/B
Note
▪ When you reinstall the one-way clutch/B [1], be sure to install it in
the direction that is shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c028ca
[4] [3] [1] [2] 13. Remove the screw [1] and remove the pressure cam [2].
14. Remove the E-ring [3] and remove the one-way clutch/A [4].
a0v9t3c029ca
[2] [1] 17. Check point when you reinstall the pressure cam
Note
▪ When you reinstall the pressure cam [1], be sure to install it
following the positional relation with the actuator [2] as you can
see in the picture.
a0v9t3c030ca
[1] 18. Check point when you reinstall the one-way clutch/A
Note
▪ When you reinstall the one-way clutch/A [1], be sure to install it in
the direction that is shown in the picture.
a0v9t3c033ca
F-370
19. Standard value when you reinstall the SC switchback release motor assy
Note
▪ When you reinstall the SC switchback release motor assy, be sure
that the distances "a" and "b" become same value.
a b Standard value: The difference of distances "a" and "b" = 0.2 mm
or less
a0v9t3c004ca
30.2.4 Replacing the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.35.2.21 SC unit)
Note
▪ When you put down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the wiring
harness under it.
▪ Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of the sub
scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Pull out the sub scan alignment unit [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
a0v9t3c005ca

[1]
4. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13) [3].
[3]
[2] a0v9t3c006ca
[1] 7. Standard value when you reinstall the SC pressure arm solenoid (SD13)
Note
▪ When you reinstall the SC pressure arm solenoid, adjust the
position so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value with the
plunger [1] being pulled, and then fix with the screw [2].
Standard value: a = 16.4 ± 1 mm
[2]
a a0v9t3c007ca
30.2.5 Replacing the FD alignment solenoid (SD11)

(1) Procedure
F-371
1. Remove the SC unit. (Refer to G.35.2.21 SC unit)

[1]
Note
▪ When you put down the SC unit, be sure not to pin the wiring
harness under it.
▪ Put the SC unit on a table so that the bottom surface of the sub
scan alignment unit [1] does not contact the floor.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the SC door [2].
[3] [2]
a0v9t3c008ca
[2] [3] [4] 3. Put the SC unit with the FD alignment solenoid assy [4] that is faced up.
Note
▪ Put the SC unit on a table so that the SC switchback release motor
assy [3] does not contact the floor.
5. Remove 2 screws [3] and pull out 2 shafts, and then remove the sub scan
alignment plate [2].
[1] a0v9t3c009ca
[1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the sub scan alignment arm [2].
7. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the screw [4], and then remove the
[5]
FD alignment solenoid assy [5].
Note
▪ When you remove the FD alignment solenoid assy, be careful not
to drop the pin.
[4] [3] [2]

a0v9t3c010ca
[1] [2] 8. Remove 2 screws [1] to remove the mounting plate [2], and then remove the
FD alignment solenoid (SD11) [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the FD alignment solenoid, adjust the position
so that the distance "a" obtains a standard value with the plunger
[4] being pulled.
[4] [3] a0v9t3c011ca
a0v9t3c012ca
F-372
30.2.6 Lubrication to the sub scan alignment plate shaft

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/Md. (Refer to G.35.2.17 Upper cover/Md)
3. Pull out the clamp unit [1].
4. Apply plas guard Number 1 to the 4 sub scan alignment plate shafts [2].
[2]
[1]
a15xt3c001ca
30.3 Clamp section
30.3.1 Lubrication to the clamp pressing board shaft
(1) Procedure
F-373
1. Pull out the clamp unit [1].

2. Apply the plas guard No. 1 positions on the clamp pressing board shaft [2].
[2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c122ca
30.4 Glue tank section

30.4.1 Replacing the glue apply roller drive gear bearing
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.35.2.20 Glue tank unit)
2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the tank cover/Lt [2].
[2] [1] a15xt3c006ca
F-374
[2] [3] [1] 3. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the gear cover [3] from the notch [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall, be sure to put the gear cover edge [3] into the
notch [2].
a15xt3c007ca
[1] 4. Remove the 4 screws [1].

Note
projections [2].
[2]
a15xt3c008ca
[1] [5] [4] [2] 5. Remove 2 E-ring [1].

6. Hold the shaft [2] and pull up the glue tank Assy, and remove the glue apply
roller drive gear/1 [3] and glue apply roller drive gear/2 [4] and the bearings
[5], 2 for each.
[5] [3] a15xt3c009ca
30.4.2 Lubrication to the glue apply roller drive gear

(1) Procedure
F-375
[1] [2] 1. Open the front door and move the glue tank unit [1] to the front.
Note
▪ When you move the glue tank unit, hold the metal plate [2] on the
right side of the glue tank unit.
2. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the gear cover [4].
Note
▪ When you reinstall, be sure to put the gear cover edge [4] under
the notch [5] on the glue tank.
[5]
[4] [3]
a15xt3c010ca
[2] [1]
3. Apply multemp FF-RM to the glue apply roller drive gear/1 [1] and the glue
apply roller drive gear/2 [2].
a15xt3c011ca
30.4.3 Replacing the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4)

(1) Procedure
F-376
[1] [3] 1. Remove the rear cover/Rt. (Refer to G.35.2.5 Rear cover/Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the pellet supply cooling fan (FM4) [3], be sure
to reinstall it to the same direction as you can see in the picture.
▪ Be sure not to nip the wiring harness.
[2] 8050ma3141
30.4.4 Replacing the glue tank assy

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the glue tank unit. (Refer to G.35.2.20 Glue tank unit)
[2] a15xt3c012ca
F-377
[1]
3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the glue thread cut plate [2].
4. Remove 6 screws [3] and remove the tank cover/Lt [4].
5. Remove 4 screws [5] and remove the tank cover/Rt [6].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, reinstall it so that the curved part comes top.
[5] [2] [3]
[4] [6]
[3] [5] a15xt3c013ca
F-378
[1] [3] [2]

6. Disconnect 4 connectors [2] of the translucent wiring harnesses of the
temperature sensor.
Note
▪ When you reconnect the connector, check the color of the
connector and the number label [3] on the wiring harness, and
connect each connector to the corresponding wiring harness.
For correspondence between number label and connector color,
refer to " F Table 1: Correspondence table."
7. Remove the connector [4] from the metal frame [5].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to place the metal wiring harness [6]
toward the metal plate side [7].
8. Remove the square saddle [8] from the metal frame [7] and put the
connector [4] to the inside of the glue tank unit.
[8] [7] [2] [6] [4] [5] a15xt3c014ca
[1] [2] 9. Remove the wiring harness [1] from the 4 wire saddles [2].
[2] a15xt3c015ca
[1] [2] 10. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the glue tank assy [1].
Note
projections [3].
[3] [3]
a15xt3c016ca
F-379
[3] [1] [2] [3] 11. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to reinstall it with 2 springs [1] put on
the pin [3] on the bottom of the glue tank assy and on the
projection [4] of the glue tank unit.
▪ After you replace the parts, be sure to conduct the glue apply roller
gap adjustment. (Refer to I.37.4 Glue apply roller gap adjustment)
[4] a15xt3c017ca
Table 1: Correspondence table
Number Color
1 White
2 Blue
3 Yellow
4 Black
30.5 Cover paper supply section

30.5.1 Removing/reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy
(1) Procedure
2. Slightly push up the cover paper tray lock [2] with a screwdriver or a similar
[2] tool and unlock it. Then pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c002ca
[2] [3] 3. Turn the pick-up roller [1] in the direction of the arrow (counterclockwise as
seen from the front side) to make the coupling [2] upright.
Note
▪ Be sure not to rotate the pick-up roller [1] against the direction of
the arrow (clockwise) forcibly, as the roller is not designed to
rotate in that direction.
[1]
a075f2c009ca
F-380
[2] [1] 5. Remove the bearing/Fr [1].

6. Move the bearing/Rr [2] to the rear side.
Note
▪ When you reinstall them, slightly press down the metal frame [3] of
the pick-up roller assy. Then keep the flat face [4] of the bearing/Rr
[2] horizontally and insert the bearing into the notch [5] on the
metal frame. Then insert the bearing/Fr [1] in the same manner.
[2] [4]
[5] [3]
a075f2c010ca
[1] [5] [4] 7. Hold the pick-up roller assy [1] by hand and lift and tilt the paper feed roller
[3] so that it rotates on the shaft [2] of the pick-up roller. Then remove it from
the notch of the bearing [4] and the coupling [5].
Note
▪ When you remove the pick-up roller assy [1], be careful not to
damage the sensor [7] with the metal frame [6].
[3] [2] [6]
[7]
a075f2c011ca
F-381
[3] 8. Remove the pick-up roller shaft [2] from the arm [1] of the paper feed guide
plate and then remove the pick-up roller assembly [3].
Note
▪ After you install the pick-up roller assy, rotate the pick-up roller
counterclockwise as seen from the front side.
▪ Make sure the paper feed roller and the belt rotate smoothly.
▪ The pick-up roller rotates in counterclockwise direction only. Be
sure not to rotate it in the opposite direction.
[1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c081ca
[1] 10. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the entrance guide plate [2].
[2] a075f2c012ca
a075f2c013ca
F-382
[2] 12. Open the frame [1] of the separation roller assy in the direction of the arrow,
and remove the coupling pin [2] on the rear side from the joint [3]. Then
remove the separation roller assy [4].
Note
▪ When you reinstall, make sure to engage the coupling pin [2] with
the joint [3].
▪ When you reinstall the separation roller assy [4], fasten it with the
[3]
screws while you press it down.
[1]
[4]
a075f2c014ca
30.5.2 Replacing the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ The outward appearance of the collar is identical for the paper feed roller and the separation roller. However, the collar of the
paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism on the inside while the collar of the separation roller does not. Be careful not to
confuse one with the other.
[4] [2] [1] 1. Remove the pick-up roller assembly. (Refer to F.30.5.1 Removing/
reinstalling the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] of the pick-up roller assy.
3. Slide 2 bearings [2] and remove the pick-up roller [3] together with the shaft
[4].
[3]
a075f2c015ca
4. Remove the bearing [1] and pull out the pick-up roller [2] from the shaft [3].
[2] [1] 5. Remove the pick-up roller [2] from the collar [4].
6. Replace the pick-up roller.
[4] [3]
a075f2c082ca
F-383
[1] 7. Remove the C-clip [1] and pull out the bearing/Fr [2] from the shaft [3].
8. Move the bearing/Rr [4] and remove the paper feed roller [5] together with
the shaft [3].
[4] [5] [2] [3] a075f2c086ca

[2] [1] 10. Pull out the paper feed roller [3] from the collar [2].
11. Replace the pick-up roller [3].
[3]
a075f2c087ca
[2] [1] 12. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note
▪ There is no big difference in the appearance between the 2 collars
(one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is for the
separation roller). However, they are different in the inside. The
collar [1] for the paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism in it,
and the other one [2] does not. Make sure to attach them correctly.
a075f2c016ca

(1) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Remove the separation roller assy. (Refer to F.30.5.1 Removing/reinstalling
the pick-up roller assy and the separation roller assy)
2. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the separation roller [3] together with the
shaft [2].
[1] a075f2c017ca
F-384
[2] [3] [4] [1] 3. Pull out the gear [2], the collar [3] and the separation roller [4] from the shaft
[1] in the direction of the arrow.
4. Replace the separation roller [4].
steps in reverse.
Note
▪ There is no big difference in the appearance between the 2 collars
(one for the paper feed roller, and the other one is for the
separation roller). However, they are different in the inside. The
collar [5] for the paper feed roller has a one-way mechanism in it,
and the other one [6] does not. Make sure to attach them correctly.
[6] [5]
a075f2c018ca
30.5.4 Replacing the cover paper pick-up clutch (CL71) and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the stopper screws, 1 each, attached on the right rail and the left rail
of the cover paper tray and pull out the tray. (Refer to G.35.2.28 Cover
paper tray)
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] and remove the clutch cover [2].
[1] [2]
a075f2c019ca
[4] [2] [3] [5] [6] 3. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].

4. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and remove the cover paper feed clutch
(CL71) [3] and the cover paper separation clutch (CL72) [4].
Note
▪ When you reinstall, be sure to insert the stopper [5] of the clutch
over the tab [6] of the metal frame.
[5] [6] [1]

a075f2c020ca
F-385
30.6 Cover paper table section

30.6.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
• The glue tank unit is hot after you deactivate the main
power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the
main body. To prevent burn injuries, leave the unit until it
cools enough before you perform the maintenance work.
Note
▪ Before you perform the maintenance work, be sure to carry out the initial operation so that each part or the unit is at the home
position.
30.6.2 Replacing the roller cutter blade assy

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the PB from the main body.
2. Remove the conveyance unit/Lw. (Refer to G.35.2.26 Conveyance unit/Lw)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and the roller cutter blade Assy [2]. Then disconnect
the connector [3].
[1] Note
▪ Pull out the cover paper waste box before you remove the roller
cutter assy.
▪ When you reinstall the roller cutter assy, be sure to route the wire
binding [4] under the cutter motor (M50) [5].
▪ Push the roller cutter blade Assy [2] against the metal plate [6] to
reinstall the Assy.
[2]
[6]
[1]
[4] [5] [3] a075f2c007ca
F-386
30.6.3 Cleaning the cover paper folding plate and the book spine backing plate
(1) Simplified cleaning procedure
[1] 1. Carry out the I/O check in service mode in the order of following output
check code, and turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power
switch (SW1) with the cover paper folding plate opened.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
2. Clean the cover paper folding plate [1] and the book spine backing plate [2].
[2]
a075f2c004cb
30.6.4 Lubrication to the cover paper alignment plate shaft

(1) Procedure
1. Turn the knob [1] and move the cover paper alignment plate inside.
2. Apply plas guard Number 1 to the 4 cover paper alignment plate shafts [2].
Note
▪ Apply plas guard Number 1 to the outside of the cover paper
alignment plate bearing on both sides.
[3] [2]
[2] [1]
[3]
a075f2c094ca
F-387
30.7 Book stock section

30.7.1 Lubrication to the guide shafts/Rt and /Lt
(1) Procedure
1. Apply the plas guard No. 1 to 4 positions on 4 positions [1] on the guide
shaft/Rt and guide shaft/Lt.
[1]
a15xt3c067ca
30.8 Framework section
30.8.1 Replacing the exhaust filters/A and /B
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
a15xt3c003ca
[2] [1] 2. Pull the filter holding lever [1] in the arrow-marked direction, and then
remove the 2 exhaust filter/A [2].
a15xt3c004ca
F-388
[1] 3. Reverse the exhaust filter assy and slide the exhaust filter/B [1] in the arrow-
marked direction to remove it.
a15xt3c005ca
F-389
C73hc/Print C3070L F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 31. GP-501
31. GP-501
31.1 Caution for maintenance procedure
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR SAFTY
These symbols are used in this documentation alert you to danger or important information.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious Injury.
WARNING: Risk of electrical shock. This warning statement indicates situations where there is a risk of death by electric
shock.
CAUTION: This notice indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Certain components in this product are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge.
Observe all ESD procedures to avoid component damage.
This section contains cleaning and maintenance procedures.
CAUTION
• GP-501 uses screws of inch standard. Therefore, do not
mix them with other products (metric standard screws).
Otherwise, the screw hole is damaged.
31.2 Die set service
31.2.1 Die Set Service
The Die Set assembly is not serviceable other than inspection and periodic lubrication. The one exception is the felt pad on the Twin Loop Die
Set can be replaced. If a Die Set is at its end of life, it will tend to cause mis-feeds due to hanging chips. This is a result of die plate wear, and
not pin wear, which cannot be corrected. When this occurs, the Die Set should be replaced with a new one.
31.2.2 Die Set Life Expectancy

The GP-501 Punch Die Sets have a minimum life expectancy of 500K cycles (sheets of paper punched). With periodic lubrication and optimum
paper types, life can exceed this number. Variables that affect life expectancy:
• Failure to follow the lubrication schedule or using the incorrect lubricant.
• Variety and types of paper being punched
• Cover stocks being punched
• Length of the average job
• Other environmental conditions
31.2.3 Die Set Components

(1) Die Set Types
The GP-501 Punch uses two types of Die Sets.
Type Description Bindery Style
Felt Pad Retainer Assembly Felt oiler pad on one side (with magnet and retaining DS-501, 503, 504, 506, 508, 510, 511, 513, 515,
plate) 517, 518
Encircled Felt Oiler Pad Felt oiler pad surrounds the punch pins DS-502, 505, 507, 509, 512, 514, 516
(2) Serviceable Components
• Shoulder bolt and spring [1]
• Punch pins [2]
• Felt pad [3]
• Floating pressure bar spring (not shown).
F-390
(3) Felt Pad Retaining Assembly

The twin loop Die Set has a removable felt pad assembly. The felt pad [1] provides lubrication to the punch pins under normal usage and
helps keep them clean. The magnet [2] and retainer [3] keeps the felt pad in place during normal handling and operation.
Note
▪ The felt pad assembly on the Twin Loop Die Set is the only assembly that can be replaced.
(4) Reassembling the Felt Pad Assembly

The felt pad assembly consists of the felt pad [1], magnet [2], and retainer [3].
(a) To assemble the felt pad retaining assembly:

1. Lay the die assembly on a table so that the open side of the top bar is
facing up.
2. Lay the felt pad [1] along the punch pins so that it spans all pins.
3. If the pad needs oil, apply it along the full length of the pad.
4. Insert the magnet [2] into the retainer [3].
F-391
5. Place the magnet and retainer [1] over the pad [2] and lightly press them
against the pad and the Die Set base. Make sure the assembly is sitting
on the base [3] and that the felt pad is against the punch pins [4].
(5) Floating Pressure Bar Spring Replacement
Some Die Sets use springs to hold the top plate above the pressure bar [1]. Detentes in the top plate hold the springs in place [2]. Ensure all
springs are in place.
(a) To replace pressure bar springs:

1. Compress the spring and insert between the top bar and pressure bar.
2. Use a flat screwdriver to position the spring so that the detent holds it in place.
3. Compress the top bar to ensure it moves freely and that it returns.
31.2.4 Checking and Replacing the Die Set

(1) Procedure
Set the Die Set on a table and press the top plate straight down at both ends [1] at the same time and look for a smooth operation. The top
plate and pins should retract fully when you release.
Reinstall the Die Set into the punch and run several sheets of the customer’s paper through the punch. Inspect the holes.
• Holes should be clean and even with no tearing or frayed edges.
• Holes should be punched completely, leaving no chip attached.
• Holes should be straight (no skew) and evenly spaced from the edge of the paper and aligned.
31.2.5 Checking and lubricating the Die Set pins and Die Set shoulder bolts
(1) Procedure
Inspect the punch pins for signs of wear or mis-alignment. Periodic lubrication extends the life of the Die Sets.
The customer or operator can perform this maintenance between technician inspections.
F-392
(2) To lubricate Die Set pins:

• Lubricate with 3-IN-ONE oil (high quality machine oil).
• Apply oil lightly along the length of the pad [1], but do not over saturate.
• Do not use spray lubricants because they tend to dry up quickly and leave a sticky residue.
For the felt pad retaining assembly instructions, refer to F.31.2.3 Die Set Components.
(3) To lubricate shoulder bolts:

• Lubricate the shoulder bolts and springs [2] using a brush to apply Magnalube-G Teflon Grease.
• Make sure the grease coats the bolts.
31.2.6 Hole Alignment inspection

Inspect the hole alignment on the customer’s punched paper. Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the punched holes should be
aligned evenly along the edge and centered between the ends [2]. If the punched holes are not aligned, then the Die Set cradle must be
adjusted. For adjustment procedures.
31.3 Check, cleaning, and lubrication

31.3.1 Check, cleaning, and lubrication
If operating properly, the GP-501 will punch the same types of copy paper and cover materials handled by the copier and run at the same
speed. Hole quality will vary between different grades of paper.
The following maintenance should be performed according to the schedule.
(1) Table 3.2 Maintenance Schedule

Description Qty. Part Number Period Check Clean Lubricate Replace Materials, Tools
Used
Aligner belt 12,000K X a soft cloth and
(green belt) counts alcohol
Aligner idler 12,000K X a soft cloth and
roller assembly counts alcohol
Aligner idler 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
rollers counts alcohol
Aligner latching 3,000K X -
mechanisms counts
Back gauge 3,000K X X Blower brush/
solenoid counts vacuum cleaner
Back gauge 1 A0N9PP59## 4,000K X -
mechanism counts
Base 3,000K X Vacuum cleaner
counts
Die guide 3,000K X Vacuum cleaner
counts
Die set 500K Y -
counts
Punch die (pins) 50K X Oil 3-IN-ONE
counts (WD-40
Company)
F-393
Die set shoulder 200K X Grease Magnalube-G

bolts counts Teflon Grease
Door closing 3,000K X -
latch counts
Drive rollers 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
counts alcohol
Idler rollers 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
counts alcohol
Optical sensors 3,000K X Blower brush
counts
Paper path, 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
Aligner Panels counts alcohol
bypass counts alcohol
punch counts alcohol
Punch drive 3,000K Grease Magnalube-G
cams counts Teflon Grease
Roller energy 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
drive counts alcohol
Timing belts 3,000K X X a so ft cloth and
counts alcohol
31.3.2 External Cleaning
WARNING
Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power
source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could
result in death or serious Injury.
The cover may be cleaned with a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Do not use chemical cleaners or solvents as these may have a harmful effect. Use detergent sparingly to avoid contact with electrical
components.
31.3.3 Internal Cleaning
WARNING
Make sure you disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power
source before cleaning. Failure to observe this warning could
result in death or serious Injury.
Occasionally remove the covers and remove paper dust and chips. Paper dust can accumulate throughout the punch including around the
motors and other electrical components. Use a vacuum cleaner if possible. A small paintbrush can also be used but extreme care should be
used around electrical components.
Non-electrical components may be cleaned with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water.
Rollers can be cleaned with alcohol.
31.3.4 Operational Inspection
Make sure the punch operates smoothly and produces the desired holes in the customer’s paper.
31.3.5 Internal Inspection
Whenever the cover has been removed for corrective maintenance, visually inspect for defects and problems such as damaged components,
loose screws or nuts, abraded wire insulation, loose terminals, etc. Correct any problems before returning the machine to service.
F-394
31.3.6 Cleaning the base

(1) Procedure
Chips and paper dust falls to the bottom of the punch. Clean with a vacuum cleaner each time the machine is serviced. The customer can
also do this between the technician’s visits.
(2) Chip Bin
Remove the Chip bin tray and empty. Vacuum out paper chips and dust from the Chip bin [1], especially at the back around the chip tray
switch.
31.3.7 Cleaning the Die guide

(1) Procedure
Remove the Die Set and clean the guide [1] with a vacuum cleaner.
31.3.8 Checking the Door Latch

The door latch must hold the door closed and ensure that the switch activation tab is depressing the door switch [1]. The switch tab [2] should
press the switch button just so that it is close to bottoming.
(1) Procedure
• Ensure latch holds door closed.
• Ensure switch is activated when the door is closed.
• To adjust the door latch. (Refer to G.36.2.1 Door latch check)
31.3.9 Cleaning and Checking the aligner paper path and panels

(1) Procedure
Inspect for worn or damaged parts. Clean with alcohol, an approved cleaner, or a soft cloth moistened with mild detergent and warm water as
needed.
F-395
(2) To clean the Aligner Panels:

1. Lift the Aligner latches to open panels.
2. Clean surfaces [1].
3. Clean paper alignment channels [2].
31.3.10 Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller

(1) Cleaning and Checking the Aligner Idler Roller
Aligner idler rollers press the paper against the green drive belts and align the paper for punching and exiting. To replace the idler rollers.
(Refer to F.31.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement)
(a) Procedure
WARNING
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the
power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to
observe this warning could result in death or serious Injury.
• Make sure the aligner rollers are clean.
• Ensure that the idler rollers maintain pressure against the green drive belt.
• Inspect for bent or damaged parts.
(b) To inspect the aligner idler rollers:

1. Press the top of each roller’s bracket [1]. The roller should move away
from the green belt drive and then when released, they spring back into
place.
F-396
2. Ensure the torsion springs [1] are hooked over the bracket [2].
(c) To clean idler rollers:

1. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
2. Inspect the idler rollers for wear patterns or groves. Surface should be evenly textured and clean.
31.3.11 Cleaning the Aligner (Green) Drive Belt

(1) Procedure
• Ensure the Aligner Drive Belts are clean.
• Inspect for frayed edges and wear.
(2) To clean the Aligner Drive Belts:

1. Clean Green Drive Belt [1] with a plastic scouring pad.
2. Use the drive knob [2] to turn the belt.
Figure 3.16 Cleaning Green Drive Belt.
3. To adjust or replace the Aligner Drive Belt. (Refer to F.31.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement)
31.3.12 Cleaning and Checking the Back Gauge Solenoid

(1) Procedure
1. Inspect and ensure the Back Gauge solenoid linkage moves freely. Press linkage down and release [1]. Linkage should return.
2. Clean out the solenoid and surrounding area with a vacuum cleaner and canned air [2]. Make sure the solenoid is clean and dry.
Note
▪ Do not apply lubricants to the solenoid or linkage.
To remove and repair the back gauge. (Refer to F.31.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism, F.31.3.29 Back Gauge Removal)
F-397
31.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers

(1) Procedure
Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass [1] or the punch [2].
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface. Where practical, remove the roller
assembly to clean [3].
Please see the reference page about the mainteinence procedure of each roller.
Bypass Idler roller [3].
Punch Idler roller [4]. (Refer to F.31.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers)
(2) Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Idler Rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the bypass. Rollers can usually be serviced without removing the
bypass panel.
1. Separate the punch from the printer.
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Lift the retaining spring over the end of the idler roller shaft. The illustration shows moving the spring [1] on the bypass plate, which has
been removed from the machine for clarity.
4. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing the opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
5. Clean the idler rollers with a soft cloth and alcohol.
6. Ensure the rollers turn freely on the shaft.
7. To install idler roller assemblies reverse the steps.
F-398
Installation Note:
▪ Make sure the flat surface of the bushing aligns in the fork.
▪ Rollers are non-directional so it does not matter which end goes in each fork.
▪ After the assembly is in place, gently pull the assembly outward and release to ensure it moves freely in the fork.
(3) Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.36.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.31.3.22 Bypass panel Removal and F.31.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal
(a) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
▪ Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
▪ Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
F-399
To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing the
opposite end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
▪ Rollers are non-directional so it does not matter which end goes in
each fork.
▪ After the assembly is in place, gently pull the assembly outward and
release to ensure it moves freely in the fork.
31.3.14 Cleaning and Checking the punch idler rollers

Idler rollers press against the drive rollers and move the paper through the GP-501 Punch. Most can be serviced without disassembling punch
components. Unplug unit and separate from the printer. (Refer to G.36.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer).
Also remove two side panels as described in F.31.3.22 Bypass panel Removal and F.31.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal
(1) Procedure
Inspect rollers for wear patterns or groves [1],[2]. The roller surface should be even and have a textured surface.
Replace per the maintenance schedule.
Note
▪ Pull out the chip bin to access the idler roller [2]
F-400
▪ Use the drive knob [1] to turn the rollers to continue inspection and cleaning.
(2) To remove the Punch Idler rollers:

1. Lift the retaining spring [1] over the end of the idler roller shaft.
2. Pull the released shaft end out of the bushing fork [2], releasing the opposite
end of the shaft from the other retaining spring.
Installation Note:
▪ Rollers are non-directional so it does not matter which end goes in
each fork.
▪ After the assembly is in place, gently pull the assembly outward and
release to ensure it moves freely in the fork.
31.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive Rollers

Drive rollers are located opposite the idler rollers.
(1) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.
F-401
Some drive rollers are not easily accessible. Those that are [1], should be inspected and cleaned when the idler rollers are removed. Where
practical, make sure the rollers are clean. Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol. Refer to also F.31.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler
Rollers.
31.3.16 Checking the Aligner Latch

Latches [1] on both sides of the punch hold the Aligner Panels in place, which in turn keeps even pressure on the idler rollers.
(1) Procedure
• Inspect the latches for worn or damaged parts.
• Open and close the latches and ensure they lock into place when closed.
• Ensure the nylon wheel [2] turns freely on its bearing and that it aligns with its locking.
F-402
31.3.17 Cleaning the Optical Sensors

(1) Procedure
• Inspect and clean Optical Sensors [1] per the maintenance schedule or as needed.
(2) Supplies Needed
Canned air or vacuum cleaner
Use canned air to blow the debris off each sensor. The illustration shows examples of three sensors [1].
31.3.18 Cleaning and Checking the Bypass Paper Path

(1) Procedure
• Inspect the Bypass panel [1], rollers [2], and entrance guide [3] for wear, damage, and obstructions.
• Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves. The surface should be rough and even. Make sure the rollers are clean. Clean rollers with
a soft cloth and alcohol. (Refer to F.31.3.13 Cleaning and Checking the Idler Rollers, F.31.3.15 Cleaning and Checking the Drive
Rollers)
• Raise the panel and ensure the magnet holds it in open [4]. Inspect the path for obstructions. Clean as needed.
• Close the panel and check that it is flat and that paper will pass under it.
• Ensure the bypass diverter moves freely and returns to the bypass position.
F-403
31.3.19 Cleaning and Checking the Punch Paper Path

(1) Procedure
• Inspect the entire paper path through the punch. Look for wear, damage, and obstructions.
• Inspect the rollers for wear patterns or groves.
• Open the Aligner Panels [1] and U-channel [2] and make sure there are no obstructions.
• Confirm that the latch [3] holds the U-channel tightly in place. Re-shape it if necessary.
• Clean as needed.
31.3.20 Cleaning and Checking the Timing Belt

(1) Procedure
Inspect all timing belts [1], [2] for wear, missing teeth, frayed edges, and cracks. For replacement, refer to F.31.3.43 Belt replacement.
F-404
Check for proper deflection of belts. The belts should be slightly loose with approximately 1/4” (6.35mm) deflection [1]. Belts that are too loose
will not drive properly and belts that are too tight can wear out prematurely or damage their driven components. Five belts [2] have tensioners,
it is these five belts that should be checked.
31.3.21 Bypass panel
(1) Tools Needed
• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
• Flat bladed screwdriver
• Needle nose pliers
(2) Procedure
Separate the punch from the printer and remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.36.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer, G.36.3.3
Removing the Rear Cover)
31.3.22 Bypass panel Removal

(1) To remove the Bypass panel:
1. If removing the Bypass panel, remove the side panel cover by removing the
4 screws [1].
2. Disconnect the grounding strap by removing the screw [1] on the exit side of
the bypass.
3. Unplug the exit side connector [2] at the rear frame.
4. Disconnect the connectors [1] of Enter sensor (S1) and Bypass sensor (S8).
5. From the rear of the punch, remove one of the E-rings [1] from the Bypass
shaft.
F-405
6. From the side of the punch, slide the shaft towards the end of the shaft [1]
without the E-Ring [2] until the other end of the shaft clears the nylon
bushing and bracket.
7. Lift the opposite end of the shaft [3] and slide it out of the Bypass panel in
the opposite direction of the removed E-Ring [4].
Installation Note
▪ Make sure the nylon bushing is installed so that it protrudes
through the mounting bracket of the rear frame into the Bypass
panel [5].
8. Rotate the rear of Bypass panel [1] so that it extends past the entrance side
of the punch [2].
9. Remove the Bypass panel.

10. To install the Bypass panel, reverse the steps.
Installation Note
▪ Position the Bypass panel so that it is outside the shaft mounting
brackets. The nylon bushings go through the mounting brackets
[1], into the Bypass panel [2].
31.3.23 Aligner panels
The entrance side Aligner panel positions the paper in the Back Gauge for punching. The exit side Aligner panel positions the paper for the
finisher. Prior to servicing the Aligner Panels, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer. (Refer to G.36.3.2 Separating the Punch From the
Printer).
31.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal

Removing the Aligner panels provides access to the paper path and the Aligner Green Drive Belt. The procedure is the same for the entrance
and exit Aligner panels except that the exit side has a docking plate which must be removed first.
(1) To remove the Aligner panel:

1. If removing the exit side Aligner panel, remove the side panel cover by
removing the 6 screws [1].
Note
▪ The rest of the steps are the same for both Aligner panels.
F-406
2. Release the Aligner latch [1].

3. Remove the E-clips from both ends of the Aligner shaft [2].
4. Remove the shaft nylon bushings [3]
5. Slide the shaft out the front of the punch.

6. Remove aligner latch stop by removing screws [1].
7. Unhook the tension spring from the panel [1].

8. Remove the Aligner panel [2] out the front of the punch.
9. Reverse the steps to install the Aligner panel.
31.3.25 Aligner Idler Roller Replacement

(1) Tools Required
• Flat head screw driver
• Needle nose plyers
(2) Procedure
1. Pull off E-Clips [1]
2. Remove the pins [2]. During removal of pins hold on to spring with fingers.
3. Completely remove the springs [3] and then slide roller assembly [4] down
and then out.
Note
▪ Aligner rollers must be moved downwards. Hence all the rollers
need to be removed.
31.3.26 Aligner Drive Belt Replacement

(1) Procedure
Before replacing the green drive belts, remove the Aligner panels. (Refer to F.31.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal) Then follow the procedures
below for the entrance side or exit side green drive belt service.
F-407
(2) Tools Required
CAUTION
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from power and retain the
power cord in your possession for your safety. Failure to
observe this caution can result in injury.
• Phillips screw driver
• Nut drivers, 1/4 and 5/16"
• Hex wrenches, 5/64 and 9/64"
• Snap ring pliers
• E-Ring tool
• Twelve inch metal ruler or similar straight edge
Note
▪ Empty the paper chip bin and replace it. This makes it easier to find small parts that you may drop into the bin.
(3) Paper Entrance Side Green Drive Belt Replacement
CAUTION
• As you pull the assembly out, disconnect the sensor
harness behind the assembly as soon as you are able to
reach it. Failure to observe this notice may damage the
wiring.
• Leave the Flex Shaft attached.
1. Disconnect the enter sensor (S1) wire from the side frame [1].
2. Remove the 4 screws that secure the front paper chute [1] to remove the
entrance guide [2].
F-408
3. To remove the GP2 aligner latch [1], do the following:

1. Unhook the spring of the GP2 aligner latch on the right end.
2. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-rings of the GP2
aligner latch on the left end (front Door side).
3. Push the GP2 aligner latch in toward the front door until it clears the rear
frame.
4. Pull the entire GP2 aligner latch, door latch out and set it aside.
4. To remove Entrance Idler Aligner panel [2] assembly. (Refer to F.31.3.24
Aligner Panel Removal)
5. Remove the fan [7] that prevents access to the flexible cable. To remove it
simply pull it off the shaft.
6. Remove the flexible cable using a hex wrench.
7. Remove the 2 screws [3]
8. Loosen screw from the solenoid link.
9. Remove the solenoid assembly [5] and link from the Diverter Shaft[6], leave
it hanging.
10. Remove the 2 E-Rings of the Entrance Diverter assembly, slide the Diverter
out and set it aside.
11. To remove the Entrance Drive Aligner assembly [7], which is the large sheet
metal assembly that actually contains the green drive belt and Aligner.
1. Remove the 6 Screws that secure the face of this assembly.
2. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the side frame.
3. Disconnect the sensor connector [8]
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper Guide Aligner
assembly up and outward. You can grab the assembly at the roller cut out
with your fingers.
CAUTION
▪ As you pull the assembly out, disconnect the sensor harness
behind the assembly as soon as you are able to reach it. Failure to
observe this notice may damage the wiring.
12. Remove the green drive belt Aligner Roller assembly by removing the 4
screws [1].
CAUTION
▪ Leave the Flex Shaft [2] attached.
(4) Green Drive Belt Assembly

1. Stretch the new Belt [3] onto the Aligner Roller assembly, green side out. Rotate the Flex Shaft [2] to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 Pan Head Screws with the 4 Lock Washers.
1. Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is flush with the Sheet Metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal ruler
works well to check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the green drive belt and press it flat against the two surfaces.
2. Adjust the Aligner and snug the screws when perfectly flush.
Note
▪ The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure 3.35.
3. As a double check, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly up so that you can visually inspect the alignment between the sheet metal
surface and the metal surface of the Aligner. The green drive belt should appear to be even or parallel, and just floating above the
surface of the sheet metal.
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:
1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place,
• Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
• Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
• Be sure to clear the Sensor Bracket at the top left.
• Be sure that the Flex Coupling Shaft is sticking out of the rear of the
GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper Guide assembly
and that the Sensor Harness is properly connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started you have good
alignment. You may now go back and tighten the screws until they are snug.
F-409
4. Install the Flexible Shaft.

5. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide (item 7) with Idler Roller 4
Screws. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then tighten.
6. Connect the Sensor Wire Harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper Guide.
7. Install the GP2 Shaft back into place by inserting it first into the front, then
the back.
8. Close the GP2 Flipper Latch.

Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of the Idler Rollers.
9. Attach the GP2 Shaft Spring.
10. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP2.
(5) Entrance Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.31.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal. Then insert the punch into the printer and finisher and connect the
power cord.
1. Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:
1. Run10 copies in bypass mode.
2. Run 1 sheet in punch mode.
3. Run 10 sheets in punch mode.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1. Run 10 copies in bypass mode.
(6) Paper Entrance and Exit Side Green Drive Belt Replacement
CAUTION
• Walk the Belt off of the Aligner Pulley at the rear.
• Handle the helical coupling carefully. It is very delicate.
• As you do this, disconnect the sensor harness behind the
assembly as soon as you are able to reach it. Failure to
do this can damage the unit.
• Leave the Flex Shaft (FS) attached.
• Leave the Coupler attached.
1. To remove the GP6 Flipper (C), Door Latch:
1. Remove only one (the one closest to the frame) of the E-Rings of the GP6
Flipper on the right end (front door side).
2. Push the GP6 Flipper in toward the front door until it clears the rear frame.
3. Pull the entire GP6 Flipper, door latch out and set it aside.
F-410
2. To remove the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide assembly:

1. Remove 2 E-Rings from the Pivot Shaft.
2. Slide the Shaft all the way out through the front of the GP-501 Punch.
3. Remove the 2 nylon bearings.
4. Remove and set aside the Rear Aligner, Idler Paper Guide assembly.
3. To remove the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly:
1. Remove the 4 screws (2 rear and 2 front) of the curved sheet metal Exit
Paper Guide assembly.
2. Unplug the sensor.
3. Pull the entire sheet metal Exit Paper Guide assembly out, set aside.
4. To remove the Rear, Drive Side, and Paper Guide Aligner assembly. This is
the large sheet metal assembly within the GP-501 Punch that contains the
green drive belt Aligner.
5. CAUTION
▪ Walk the Belt off of the Aligner Pulley at the rear.
1. Remove the 2 screws that hold the block to the frame. The Coupler is
loose and the rear panel will come out.
2. Remove the 6 screws that secure the face of this assembly.
3. Remove the 2 screws that secure this assembly from the top.
4. Pull and walk the entire sheet metal assembly of the Paper Guide Aligner
up and outward. You can grab the assembly at the roller cut out with your
fingers.
CAUTION
▪ Handle the helical coupling carefully. It is very delicate.
Note
▪ In order to access these screws, you must first remove the Die Set
storage shelf and the cable shield attached to the Die storage shelf
at the paper entrance side. Moving the Die Storage shelf aside will
enable better access to the 2 screws with a short Phillips screw
driver.
CAUTION
▪ As you do this, disconnect the sensor harness behind the
assembly as soon as you are able to reach it. Failure to do this can
damage the unit.
screws (S).
CAUTION
▪ Leave the Flex Shaft (FS) attached.
screws.
CAUTION
▪ Leave the Coupler attached.
(7) Green Drive Belt Assembly
CAUTION
Do not over tighten the 2 screws on top.
1. Stretch the new green drive belt onto the Aligner Roller assembly, green side
out.
• Take care when handling the Aligner Roller assembly so as not to
damage the Flex Coupling.
• Rotate the shaft to confirm that the belt tracks properly.
F-411
2. Slide the Aligner into place, loosely attach the 4 pan head screws with the 4
lock washers.
Check that the metal surface of the Aligner Roller assembly is flush with the
sheet metal surface of the Paper Guide. A 12" metal ruler works well to
check this adjustment. Slip the ruler under the green drive belt and press it
flat against the two surfaces. Adjust the Aligner and snug the screws when
perfectly flush.
The green drive belt should look like the drawing shown in Figure 3.41.
To ensure proper assembly, hold the entire Paper Guide assembly up so
that you can visually inspect the alignment between the sheet metal surface
and the metal surface of the Aligner. The green drive belt should appear to
be even and just floating above the surface of the sheet metal.
3. To install the Paper Guide assembly into the GP-501 Punch:

1. As you slide the Paper Guide assembly into place:
• Hook up the Sensor Harness to the Sensor on the back.
• Lift it up slightly to clear the lower Transition Paper Guide.
• Be sure to clear the sensor bracket at the top left.
• Be sure that the Flex Coupling shaft is sticking out of the rear of the
GP-501 Punch properly.
2. Visually check all around the mounting area of the Paper Guide assembly
and that the sensor harness is properly connected.
3. Loosely secure it in place with 3 screws on the left and 3 on the right.
4. Loosely install the 2 top screws.
5. Once all 8 mounting screws have been properly started go back and
tighten the screws until they are snug.
CAUTION
▪ Do not over tighten the 2 screws on top.
4. Install the 2 screws to secure the bearing block for the pulley arrangement at the rear of the GP-501 Punch. Press the block to the top of
the punch before tightening.
5. Install the pulley and belt onto the pulley block. Once properly aligned, check belt and pulley movement. Tighten the set screw.
6. Install the Die Set storage rack with 3 screws front and 3 screws back. Remember to attach the ground strap at the middle screw on the
rear (belt side). Start each screw to achieve proper alignment, then go back over each screw and tighten it.
7. Install the Cable Guard on top of the Die Set storage rack (2 Screws).
8. Install the curved sheet metal Exit Paper Guide with Idler Roller 4 screws.
9. Start all 4 screws, (2 on front and 2 on back) then tighten.
10. Connect the sensor wire harness at the top rear of the Exit Paper Guide.
11. To install the Idler Aligner Paper Guide:
1. Hold it loosely in place.
2. Press the nylon flange bearings into place, through both pieces of sheet metal, with the flange to the inside.
3. Slide the shaft through the front of the machine, while holding the nylon flange bearing in place.
4. Secure with 2 E-rings on the inside of the bearing.
5. Inspect by pressing in on the bottom area of the sheet metal for:
• A slight deflection of each Idler Roller as you press.
• As you press, you can turn the pulleys at the rear of the GP-501 Punch and see the Idler Rollers rotate smoothly.
12. Bend the small metal tab back into place.
13. Install the GP6 shaft back into place by inserting it first into the front, then the back.
14. Close the GP6 Flipper Latch.
Repeat the test of rotating the pulleys to ensure smooth rotation of the Idler Rollers.
15. Attach the GP6 shaft spring.
16. Install the front E-Ring to secure GP6.
(8) Aligner Panel Installation

To install the Idler Aligner panel, refer to F.31.3.24 Aligner Panel Removal. Then insert the punch into the main body and finisher and
connect the power cord.
(a) Test the GP-501 Punch by doing the following:

1. Run 10 copies in bypass mode.
31.3.27 Cleaning and checking the energy drive roller

(1) Procedure
Reference Figure 3.44 Energy Roller as you perform this procedure.
F-412
1. Without disconnecting either retaining spring [1], roll one of them gently to
one side to release the Energy Drive Roller shaft from its mounting bracket.
2. Lift the shaft [2] from the mounting bracket.
3. Using a clean cloth and alcohol, clean the surfaces of the rollers [3] to
remove any paper dust or toner that may have accumulated over time.
4. Reverse steps 2 & 1 above to replace the shaft into the holder.
5. Ensure the flats of the bearings are seated properly in the mounting
brackets.
6. Ensure the springs are straight on the bearing to apply sufficient force for the
rollers to turn when you rotate the knob at the front of the machine.
31.3.28 Replacing the back gauge mechanism
WARNING
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before
removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or
death and damage the punch.
The Back Gauge assembly pauses the paper just as the edge has entered the die set. Working properly, the sheet will pause only long enough
for the holes to be punched correctly. The Back Gauge assembly also controls the paper chad falling into the chad bin, significantly reducing the
amount of chad that could flow through the paper path. Some chad falls outside the chad bin and should be cleaned up with a vacuum cleaner
during each servicing.
(1) Procedure
Remove Back Gauge assembly to clean and service the solenoid or to replace the Back Gauge. Also allows the removal of the Punch
Module.
To repair or replace the Back Gauge, separate the GP-501 Punch from the printer and finisher and then remove the rear cover. (Refer to
G.36.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service)
(2) Tools Required
Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
Note
31.3.29 Back Gauge Removal

(1) To remove the Back Gauge assembly:
CAUTION
Do not damage the wires in the wiring harness. Failure to
observe this precaution may damage the wiring.
F-413
1. Turn the Punch Cycle knob [1] so that the punch drive indicator [2] lines up
the position indicator [3].
2. Remove the Die Set and Chip Bin.

3. Remove the two Die Set Chip Brush bracket screws [1].
4. On the rear of the punch, unplug the drive punch flag sensor connector [1].
5. Remove the 2 Die Set Adjustment Bracket screws [2] and pull the bracket
aside [3].
6. Remove the 2 Back Gauge rear mounting screws [1].
7. Disconnect the Back Gauge connector from the Punch Controller PCB [1].
F-414
8. Cut wire harness ties as needed to free the solenoid wires.

9. Cut the 2 harness ties on the entrance side of the punch.
10. Remove the grommet from the frame [1].

Note
▪ If you are not replacing the Back Gauge or are removing it for
access to the Punch Module, it is not necessary to pull the wire
through the hole in the frame. The Back Gauge can be set aside.
11. Feed the connector through the hole in the frame and the grommet
separately [2].
12. Remove one top screw [1] of chip tray full sensor bracket [2] and pivot the
bracket down.
13. Gently slide the Back Gauge assembly to the rear of the punch [1] so that it
extends through the slot [2] and clears the wiring harness [3].
CAUTION
▪ Do not damage the wires in the wiring harness. Failure to observe
this precaution may damage the wiring.
14. Make sure the left end of the Back Gauge clears the opening on the front of
the punch [1] and pull it out [2] while sliding it to towards the front.
F-415
15. Remove the Back Gauge and rail as an assembly.
16. To install the Back Gauge, reverse these steps.

(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge:
1. Install a Die Set.
2. Rotate the punch drive knob to ensure the drive and cams turn easily.
3. Test for proper hole alignment to the paper edge by doing the following.
a. Run 1 page at a time.
b. Run 2 pages at a time.
c. Run 5 pages at a time.
d. Run 10 pages at a time.
e. Run 50 pages at a time.
31.3.30 Solenoid Spring Replacement

(1) Procedure
Removal of spring [1] and [2] -
Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the shaft.
Removal of spring [3] -
Grasp the loop of the spring with needle nose plyers and then pull them off the sheet metal part.
31.3.31 Back Gauge Paddle

(1) Procedure
First remove Back gauge assembly as described in " F.31.3.29 Back Gauge Removal".
Deep or angled deep punches may be caused by a broken weld on the Paddle shaft [1]. Inspect the Paddle and press down on it while
holding the linkage to keep the linkage from moving. If the paddle [2] moves, replace the Back Gauge assembly.
31.3.32 Back Gauge Assembly Adjustment

The Back Gauge can be adjusted up and down for optimum operation for specific Die Sets.
F-416
The Back Gauge should be at its highest position for VeloBind or PB Die Sets. If it is not, the Back Gauge Paddle may not completely close the
paper path gap. This can result in paper (especially with excessive curl) slipping through the gap created by the Paddle and the top plate of the
Die Set. This causes a deep punch.
Initially, move the assembly to its highest position and then adjust accordingly after testing each Die Set.
Ensure it is easy to insert and remove three hole Die Sets. If the Die Set is too tight, evenly lower the Back Gauge slightly to achieve the
tightness required, while still retaining the PB and VeloBind functionality mentioned above.
(1) To adjust the Back Gauge:

1. Loosen the 3 phillips head screws [1].
2. Move the entire assembly [2] upward or downward as needed while keeping
it even.
3. While holding the assembly up, tighten the 3 screws.
(2) Testing
(a) To test the Back Gauge adjustment:
1. Run a few sheets of paper and check for skew with each Die Set.
2. Adjust the Back Gauge as needed and re-test.

3. Run 200 to 500 sheets of paper and check for mis-feeding, deep punching, and skew.
31.3.33 Punch module
(1) Tools Required
• Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
• Hex wrench, 5/64"
NOTE
(2) Procedure
WARNING
Disconnect the GP-501 Punch from its power source before
removing the Back Gauge assembly.
Failure to observe this warning can result in severe injury or
death and damage the punch.
Remove the module to lubricate the cams, or to service or replace the following components.
• Punch motor
• Drive motor belt
• Punch module brake
• Cams
• Flexible drive coupling
• Punch Module drive rollers
The clutch can be replaced without removing the module. (Refer to F.31.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement).
31.3.34 Punch Module Removal

The Back Gauge assembly must be removed before removing the Punch Module. (Refer to F.31.3.29 Back Gauge Removal).
(1) To remove the Punch Module:
F-417
1. Remove the Back Gauge assembly.

2. Use a 5/64” hex wrench to remove the Punch Cycle knob [1].
3. Remove the 4 Punch Module retaining screws [1] from the front panel.
4. Release the cable ties on the left wiring harness [1] to free the Punch Module
wiring. Remove the connector from flag sensor [2]. Remove harness from
brake and clutch as per image below.
F-418
5. Remove the belts in the following order.

1. Remove the bottom left and right vertical belts [1] by walking the belts over
the pulleys.
2. Remove the 4 power supply screws [5].
3. Loosen the belt idler rollers [2] and remove the upper vertical belt [3].
4. Remove the bottom triangular belt [4] after loosening the respective
tensioner.
6. Remove the two rear Punch Module screws [1].
7. Cut wire harness ties as needed to release the punch wiring.

8. Unplug the punch connector [1] from the control board.
F-419
9. Carefully slide the Punch Module out the back of the punch.
Ensure that the wiring harness does not get caught or prevent removal of the
module.
31.3.35 Lubricating to the Punch Drive Cams

(1) Procedure
Back gauge and rail needs to be removed for accessing punch module cams. refer to F.31.3.29 Back Gauge Removal for removing back
gauge. Use brush for reach to cams for further cleaning operation.
Installation Note
▪ Make sure the wires on the rear of the punch are not obstructing the Die Set or Chip Bin.
31.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace if Punch clutch is malfunctioning.
Note
▪ The Punch clutch can be removed without removing the Punch Module.
(2) Tools Required
• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" nut driver
• Hex wrench, 5/64"
(3) To remove the clutch:
F-420
1. Unplug the punch flag sensor (S9) connector [1].
2. Slide the fan [1] off the shaft.
3. Remove the lower drive belt [1].
4. Loosen the 2 pulley socket head set screws [1].

5. Remove the pulley and its shaft key [2].
F-421
6. Remove the 2 clutch bracket screws [1].

Installation Note
▪ When installing the clutch bracket, ensure that the fork of the
clutch engages the tab on the bracket [2].
7. Loosen the 2 clutch socket head set screws [1], slide the Punch clutch [2] off
the shaft, and remove the shaft key [3].
Installation Note
▪ When installing the Punch clutch, be sure to install the shaft key.
Press the Punch clutch against the drive gear plate. While
pressing the clutch against the plate, tighten the 2 set screws. The
assembly does not require a gap between the Punch clutch and
clutch plate.
8. Cut wire ties as needed and unplug the clutch connector [1] from the Punch
Controller PCB.
9. Slide the back portion of the clutch [1] off the shaft.
The motor drive belt [2] can be removed at the same time.
10. To install the clutch, reverse these steps.
31.3.37 Punch Module Brake Replacement and Adjustment

(1) Procedure
To replace the Punch module brake, first remove the clutch and related drives. (Refer to F.31.3.36 Punch Clutch Replacement). The Punch
module brake must be adjusted while on drive shaft. To adjust the Punch module brake. (Refer to F.31.3.39 Punch Module Brake
Adjustment)
(2) Tools Needed
• Feeler gauge, 0.0001" (0.00254 mm)
• Hex wrenches, 0.05" and 3/32"
• Flat blade screwdriver
• Pliers
31.3.38 Punch Module Brake Replacement

(1) To replace the Punch module brake
F-422
1. Remove the 4 socket head set screws [1].

2. Loosen the 2 set screws [2] until the brake pad [3] slides freely on the shaft.
Installation Note
▪ When installing the Punch module brake, ensure that the 2 set
screws engage the flats on the shaft. To adjust the Punch module
brake. (Refer to F.31.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment)
3. Remove the E-Ring at the opposite end of the shaft [1].

4. Slide the shaft [2] out of the bearing bracket, away from the clutch end.
5. Slide the Punch module brake assembly off the shaft.
6. To install the Punch module brake assembly, reverse these steps.
31.3.39 Punch Module Brake Adjustment

(1) Procedure
The Punch module brake can be adjusted without removing the Punch module brake from the shaft. The gap between the brake and the pad
is 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) .
(2) To adjust the Punch module brake

1. Loosen the 2 set screws [1] until the brake pad slides freely on the shaft.
2. Use a 0.0001" (0.00254 mm) feeler gauge to set the gap between the brake and the brake pad.
3. Tighten the 2 set screws and check the gap.
31.3.40 Punch Module Motor Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace motor when it malfunctions.
(2) To replace the Punch Module motor:

1. Cut any wire ties as necessary to release the motor wires.
2. Unplug motor wire connections from the capacitor [1].
F-423
3. Remove the metal spring clip [1] from the fan and slide the fan [2] off the
shaft.
Installation Note
▪ When installing the fan, be sure to align the flat of the fan hub with
the flat on the shaft. Also, make sure the hub and spring clip are
facing away from the motor.
4. Loosen the 2 socket head set screws[1] on the pulley and slide the pulley
and belt off the shaft.
5. Remove the motor mounting 4 nuts [2].
6. To install the motor, reverse these steps.
31.3.41 Punch Module Motor Drive Belt Replacement

(1) Procedure
Replace the belt when it is frayed, missing teeth, or worn out.
(2) To replace the Punch Module drive belts:

1. With the fan removed from the shaft, work the belt [1] off the clutch gear [2].
2. Install a new belt by looping it over the motor pulley and then work it onto the
clutch gear.
The belt requires no adjustment. It should have slight deflection when
pressed.
31.3.42 Punch Module Drive Roller Replacement

(1) Procedure
Inspect for wear patterns or groves. The roller surface should be even and not glazed.Clean with a soft cloth and alcohol.
(2) Tools Required
• Phillips screw driver or 1/4" nut driver
• Flat bladed screwdriver
With the Punch Module out of the machine, the punch entrance side [1] and exit [2] drive rollers can be cleaned or replaced.
F-424
(3) To clean the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Remove the idler roller assembly [1].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
(4) To replace the punch entrance drive rollers:

1. Unplug the sensor [1].
2. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the idler roller assembly [2].
3. Remove the 2 screws at the ends of the drive roller assembly [3].
4. Remove the E-Ring at the end of the drive roller shaft [1].
5. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of the
Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at the end
where you removed the E- Ring [1].
6. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module.
(5) To clean the punch exit drive rollers:

1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler roller
assembly [2].
2. Rotate and clean the drive rollers [2].
(6) To replace the punch exit drive rollers:
F-425
1. Move one retaining spring [1] to the side and then remove the idler roller
assembly [2].
2. Remove the 2 screws at each end of the idler roller assembly [3].
3. Remove the E-Ring [4] at the end of the drive roller shaft.
4. Slide the drive roller shaft and bracket towards the opposite end of the
Punch Module so that the end of the shaft clears the bearing at the end
where you removed the E-Ring [4].
5. Lift the drive roller and bracket out of the Punch Module [5].
6. Remove the sensor [6].
7. To install the drive roller, reverse these steps.
31.3.43 Belt replacement
(1) To replace belts:
1. Loosen the screws of the 3 belt idlers [1].
Installation Note
▪ When setting the belt tension, adjust the belt idlers so that the belt
has approximately 1/4" (6.35mm) of deflection.
2. Remove the belts in order as follows
3. To install and adjust the tension of the belts, reverse these steps.
31.3.44 Tools
Tools (needs to be reviewed by Engineering for current design accuracy)
Tools recommended for service of the GP-501 Punch:
(1) Standard Measure Tools (English as opposed to metric)

• Open end ignition wrench - 1/4" (required only for chad kit installation)
• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4” and 5/16" nut drivers
• Hex wrenches, 3/32", 5/64", and 9/64"
(2) Other Recommended Tools and Supplies

• Wire cutters
• Screw driver, flat head, small
Supply of wire tie wraps
F-426
32. GP-502
The descriptions of the periodical maintenance procedure GP-502 are mentioned in the GP-502 service manual.
F-427
AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/ G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 1. ITEMS THAT YOU MUST NOT
C73hc/Print C3070L DISASSEMBLE
G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING
1. ITEMS THAT YOU MUST NOT DISASSEMBLE
1.1 List of Items that you must not disassemble
Note
▪ The list shows the parts which you must not disassemble in the field.
▪ For the details of the prohibited actions, refer to " G.1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw" to " G.1.2.8 Fusing section".
Numb Item
er
1 G.1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw
2 G.1.2.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards
3 G.1.2.3 CCD unit
4 G.1.2.4 Writing unit cover
5 G.1.2.5 Photo conductor section
6 G.1.2.6 Intermediate transfer section
7 G.1.2.7 Registration section
8 G.1.2.8 Fusing section
1.2 Items that you must not disassemble

1.2.1 Screw-lock applied screw
Note
▪ The screw-lock is applied to prevent the screw looseness.
▪ When the machine is used or conveyed, some screws have a possibility to loosen by the oscillation and the load. The screw-lock
is applied to the screws.
▪ When you loosen or remove the screw which has been applied the screw-lock, be sure to apply the screw-lock again after you
tighten the screw.
1.2.2 Prohibition of adjusting the volume of boards

Note
▪ Do not change the volume of the boards whose adjustment procedures are not indicated.
1.2.3 CCD unit
(1) Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
• 7 positioning screws of the CCD unit installation reference plate
[3] [1]
[2] [1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] CCD unit installation reference plate
[3] CCD unit -
(2) Reason of prohibition
The CCD unit installation reference plate acts as the basis for the installation position of the CCD unit. If you removing this plate, the
displacement of the optical axis of the CCD unit is caused. So, be sure not to remove the mounting screws of the lens reference plate
assembly.
G-1
1.2.4 Writing unit cover

(1) Prohibited positions from which you remove the screws
• 6 mounting screws of the writing unit cover
[1] [2]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Writing unit cover
The inside of the writing unit is the laser path. Once dust comes into the inside when the cover is opened, it prevents the laser path.
Therefore, do not remove the screw of the writing unit cover.
1.2.5 Photo conductor section

• 1 screw of the stopper plate/Fr on the drum unit
• 1 screw of the stopper plate/Rr on the drum unit
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Stopper plate/Fr
[3] Screws which you must not remove [4] Stopper plate/Rr
[5] Drum Unit
The distance between the drum and the developing roller depends on the installation positions of the stopper plate/Fr and the stopper plate/
Rr. The distance is adjusted at the factory. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the stopper plate/Fr and the stopper plate/Rr.
G-2
1.2.6 Intermediate transfer section

• 1 fixing screw of the tension adjusting plate
[1] [2] [3]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Tension adjusting plate
[3] Belt
The strength of the belt stretch depends on the tension adjusting plate, and is adjusted at the factory. Therefore, do not remove the screws of
the tension adjusting plate.
1.2.7 Registration section
• 2 positioning screws of the registration unit
[1] [2]
[1] Registration unit [2] Screws which you must not remove
The positioning screws adjust the skew of the registration unit. The skew is adjusted at the factory. Therefore, do not remove the positioning
screws of the registration unit.
G-3
1.2.8 Fusing section
(1) Fusing swing unit
(a) Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
• 3 positioning screws of the fusing swing unit
[1] [2]
[1] Fusing swing unit [2] Screws which you must not remove
(b) Reason of prohibition
The positioning screws adjust the position of the fusing swing unit. The position is adjusted at the factory. Therefore, do not remove the
positioning screws of the fusing swing unit.
(2) Fusing unit
(a) Positions from which removing the screws is prohibited
• 3 adjusting plate positioning screws of the fusing unit
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1] Screws that you must not remove [2] Fusing unit
[3] Adjusting plate [4] Fusing roller/2
G-4
(b) Reason of prohibition
The positioning screw defines the position of the fusing roller/2 of the fusing unit. The position is adjusted at the factory. If the fusing roller/2
is misaligned, the fusing belt is also misaligned, and the belt edge possibly deforms or rupture occurs. Do not remove the adjusting plate
positioning screws from the fusing unit.
G-5
AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/ G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 2. WARNING AND PRECAUTION ON
C73hc/Print C3070L DISASSEMBLING
2. WARNING AND PRECAUTION ON DISASSEMBLING

2.1 Precaution on removing the boards
WARNING
▪ To prevent the electric shock, do not touch the boards on the following table until a prescribed period of time passes after the
power switch is shut down.
There is a possibility of an electrical shock due to the charging voltage.
Board Standby time
Main body DC power supply/1 For 30 minutes
Main body DC power supply/2 For 10 minutes
DC power supply of RU For 50 minutes
DC power supply/1 of the SD-513 For 6 minutes
DC power supply/2 of the SD-513 For 6 minutes
CAUTION
▪ When you remove the boards, check the safety and important warning items and then remove the boards following the removal
procedure.
▪ The removal procedures from the connector and the board support are omitted.
▪ Be sure to use the body earth when you touch the element on the board by necessity.
G-6
AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/ G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 3. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/
C73hc/Print C3070L C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L

3.1 List of disassembling and assembling parts
Note
▪ This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and the reassembly of the parts which are considered necessary to replace
(other than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for the covers do not require to be disassembled while they
are in normal service operations.
▪ For the replacement method of the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.4.1.1 Replacement of the developing dust-proof filter/1,
the developing dust-proof filter/2, the PH dust-proof filter and the suction dust-proof filter to F.4.13.2 Replacing the paper exit
drive gear/1, paper exit gear and paper exit decurler roller.
No. Section Parts name
1 Cover Exhaust inlet cover
2 Rear cover
3 Left cover
4 Right cover/Up1
5 Right cover/Up2
6 Right cover/Up3
7 Right cover/Up4
8 Right cover/Lw1
9 Right cover/Lw2
10 Upper cover/Fr
11 Upper cover/Rt
12 Upper cover/Rr1
13 Upper cover/Rr2
14 Upper cover/Lt
15 Arm cover/Fr
16 Arm cover/Rr
17 Main board unit
18 Original glass assy
19 WT-511 (Option)
20 Scanner section CCD unit
21 LED exposure unit
22 Scanner drive board (SCDB)
23 Scanner motor (M201)
24 Write section Writing unit
25 Process section Process unit
26 Image correction unit
27 Toner supply section Toner bottle motor
28 Toner bottle clutch
29 Remaining toner sensor
30 Toner supply motor
31 Duplex section Duplex section
32 Paper feed section Paper feed tray
33 Tray up and down wire/1 (tray 1)
38 Fusing section Fusing paper exit plate assy
39 Temperature sensor/1 (TH1)
41 Thermostat/1 (TS1)
45 Fusing separation fan/1 (FM10), fusing separation fan/2 (FM11) and fusing
separation fan/3 (FM12)
46 Replacement of the fusing ball bearings/Up, /Lw1, the heat insulating sleeves/Up, /
Lw1, the belt regulating sleeve, the fusing belt, the fusing rollers/1, /2, and the
neutralizing ring
G-7

47 Charge control section HDD1, HDD2, HDD3
48 Hard disk/4 (HDD4)
49 Charge control framework unit
50 Tucking fan/4 (FN35)
51 Tucking fan/5 (FN36)
52 Boards Overall control board (OACB)
53 SSD (SSD)
54 IQ image processing board (IPB/I) (Option: VI-511)
55 VIF board (VIFB) (Option: VI-513)
3.2 Disassembling and assembling procedures

3.2.1 Duct cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the duct cover [2].
[1] [2] [1]

3.2.2 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the filter box cover. (Refer to F.4.1.2 Replacement of the filter box)
2. Remove the exhaust inlet cover. (Refer to G.3.2.1 Duct cover)
3. Remove 17 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover [2].
[1] [2] [1] [1]

3.2.3 Left cover
(1) Procedure
G-8
[2] 1. Remove the charging control framework unit. (Refer to G.3.2.34 Charge
control framework unit)
3. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the left cover [3].
[3] [1]
Note
▪ When the heat-proof sheet [1] for the charge control unit is
attached, be sure to install the left cover [2] so that it does not run
off the quadrilateral hole as the picture shows.
Otherwise, the sheet possibly hits the unit and a malfunction
possibly occurs.
3.2.4 Right cover/Up1, right cover/Up2, right cover/Up3, right cover/Up4, right cover/Lw1, right cover/Lw2
(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the right cover/Lw1 [2].
2. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the right cover/Up4 [4].
[1] [2]
G-9
[2] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/Up1 [2].
[3] [1] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/Up2 [2].
5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the right cover/Up3 [4].
[2] [4]
[1] 6. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the right cove/Lw2 [2].
[1] [2]
3.2.5 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr
(1) Procedure
G-10
1. Remove the electric component cooling filter. (Refer to F.4.1.3 Replacement

of the electric component cooling filter)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the arm cover/Rr [2].
4. Remove the screw cap, and remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the top
cover/Rr2 [4].
[1] [2] [3] [4]

5. Loosen 3 screws [1] and then remove the arm cover/Fr [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
cover/Rr [4].
[1]
[4] [3] [2] [1]

cover/Rr1 [2].
cover/Lt [4].
[1] [2] [3] [4]

[4] 9. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply door [2], and remove 4 screws
[3].
10. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the top cover/Fr [5].
[1] [2]
[3] [5]
G-11
3.2.6 Main board unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.3.2.2 Rear cover)
2. Remove the right cover/Up3. (Refer to G.3.2.4 Right cover/Up1, right cover/
Up2, right cover/Up3, right cover/Up4, right cover/Lw1, right cover/Lw2)
3. Remove 10 screws [1], and then open the board cover [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[1]
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]
[1]
[1] [2]
4. Remove 6 connectors [1] to release the wiring harness, and remove the
screw [2] to remove the board cover [3].
Note
▪ When you remove the board cover, be careful not to drop it. Hold
the top and bottom of the board cover.
[2]
[1] [3]
[1] [1] [1] [1]
G-12
5. To release the wiring harness from the clamps, remove 18 connectors [1].
[1] [1] [1]
[1]
[1] [1]
[1]
[1] [1] [1] [1]
6. Remove 3 screws [1] to remove the wiring mounting cover [3].
[2] [1]
G-13
[2] 7. Remove 11 screws [1], and remove the main board unit [2] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
3.2.7 Overall control board (OACB)

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ When the HDD lock password is enabled: Before you replace the overall control board (OACB), be sure to contact the service
manager of Konica Minolta.
▪ When you replace the OACB, the SSD (SSD), the Hard disk (HDD), and the NVRAM board (NRB) at the same time, conduct the
replace procedure for each part.
In addition, replace the NRB at first.
▪ Never touch the memory board [1] that is installed on the OACB.
[1]
[1] 1. Open the board cover. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Main board unit)
2. Disconnect 13 connectors [1], and remove 8 screws [2].
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1] [1] [2] [1] [2]
G-14

5. Remove 1 screw [3], and remove the cover [4].
[2] [4] [1] [3]

7. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove 1 screw [3], then remove the board unit
cover/Lt [4].
[1] [4] [2] [3]

[2] [1] [4] [5] [1] [3] 8. Remove 2 screws [1].
9. Push the edges [4] of the board to the arrow-marked direction while you hold
the fan [2] and support the over all control board (OACB) [3]. Disconnect the
connector [5], and then remove the over all control board (OACB) [3].
Note
▪ When the HDD lock password is disabled: When the overall control
board (OACB) [3] is replaced, be sure to replace the SSD (SSD) [6]
of the old overall control board (OACB) [3] to the new overall
control board [7]. (Refer to G.3.2.8 SSD (SSD))
▪ After you replace the overall control board (OACB) [3], conduct
IO99-98. (Refer to IO check mode list)
[6] [7]
[2] [3] [4] [1] [4] Note
▪ When you reconnect the connector [1], be sure to push the
connector edge [4] to the arrow-marked direction while you hold
the fan [2] and support the over all control board (OACB) [3]. If you
push the position other than the connector edge [4], the over all
control board (OACB) [3] possibly gets damaged.
▪ Be sure to replace the protection chip [5] and the memory board
other than the standard mounted one (option IC-605, UK-104,
VI-511) [6] when you replace the overall control board (OACB).
[5] [7] [6]
3.2.8 SSD (SSD)
Note
▪ For how to get or replace the SSD (SSD), contact the service manager of Konica Minolta.
G-15
▪ When the HDD lock password is enabled: Before the SSD (SSD) is replaced, be sure to contact the service manager of Konica
Minolta.
3.2.9 Original glass assy

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Rt. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt,
[1] top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr)
2. Remove each screw [1], remove the 2 original glass mounting brackets [2],
and remove the original glass assy [3].
[2]
[3]

4. After you reinstall the original glass unit, conduct the following items in the order.
• Read Position Auto Adj. (ADF Adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adj.)
• Restart timing adjustment (scanner adjustment) (Refer to I.4.3.22 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Adjustment))
• Centering adjustment (Scan adjustment) (Refer to I.4.3.23 Centering Adjustment (Scan Adjustment))
• Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan adjustment) (Refer to I.4.3.25 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment))
3.2.10 WT-511 (Option)
(1) Step
[2] 1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove WT-511 [2].
[1]
G-16
[1] [2] [5] [4] [3] [6] 2. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When MK-740, MK-740m is installed, tighten the screws in the
order of [1], [2], [3], and [4], and install WT-511 [5].
Both the screws [3] and [4] tighten the metal frame [6] of MK-740,
MK-740m. When the screws are not tightened in the correct order,
the screws [3] and [4] are not fixed enough, and WT-511 [5]
possibly falls.
3.2.11 CCD unit
(1) Removal method
1. Remove the original glass. (Refer to G.3.2.9 Original glass assy)
[1] [2] [1] 2. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the CCD board protective shield [2].
[1] [1] [1]

[2] [2] [3] 4. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the CCD unit [3].
[1] [1] [1]
1. Check the mark [1] on lens of the CCD unit.
[1] Note
▪ The mark is be “-”, “0”, or “+”.
G-17
2. Install the CCD unit [1].

3. Set the scale [2] of the CCD unit to the same position as the mark checked
[2] on step 1, and secure it with 2 screws.
Note
▪ When installing blade springs, be sure to install the blade spring
[3] at first.
[1] [3]
5. Carry out [Service Mode] -> [ADF Adjustment] -> [Read Position Auto Adj.].
6. Activate the main power switch.
7. Carry out [Service Mode] -> [Machine Adjustment] -> [Printer Adjustment] -> [FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)]. If the result is
out of specification, loosen the mounting screw of the CCD unit and adjust the CCD unit moving in the sub scan direction.
Note
▪ Be sure to move the CCD unit by hand. Do not stick and move the CCD board unit with a driver or other tools. It is because
the distance between the CCD sensor and the lens could change.
▪ Turn OFF the setting of the [Machine Adjustment] -> [Scan Adjustment] -> [Line Mag.Setting] in the Service Mode when the
CCD unit is replaced.
8. Carry out [Service Mode] -> [Machine Adjustment] -> [Scan Adjustment] -> [CD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)].
9. Carry out [Service Mode] -> [Machine Adjustment] -> [Scan Adjustment] -> [Scan Gradation/Color Adj.(Scan Adjustment)].
3.2.12 LED exposure unit

(1) Removal method
1. Remove the original glass.
[2] [1] (Refer to G.3.2.9 Original glass assy)
2. Release 4 screws [1] of the LED exposure unit [2].
[1]
3. Disconnect the flat cable [1], and remove the LED exposure unit [2].
[1]
[2]
4. Reinstall these parts following the removal steps in reverse.
5. After you reinstall the LED exposure unit, conduct the following items in the order.
• Read Position Auto Adj. (ADF Adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adj.)
• FD-Mag.Adjustment (Scan Adjustment) (Refer to I.4.3.24 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment))
• Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Refer to I.4.3.25 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment))
G-18
3.2.13 Scanner drive board (SCDB)

1. Remove the DF-706. (Refer to G.4.2.3 DF-706)
[1] [1] 2. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the scanner rear upper cover [2].
[1] [2] [1]
3. Disconnect all the connectors and the flat cables on the scanner drive board.
4. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the scanner drive board [2].
[1] [2] [1]

5. Reinstall these parts following the removal steps in reverse.
3.2.14 Scanner motor (M201)

(1) Removal method
1. Remove the DF-706. (Refer to G.4.2.3 DF-706)
[1] [1] 2. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the scanner rear upper cover [2].
[1] [2] [1]

[1] [2]
G-19
5. Remove 3 screws [1] and the belt [2], and remove the scanner motor assy
[1] [1] [3].
[2] [3] [1]
6. Note
[2] [2] [1] ▪ Be sure to remove the screws from 3 holes [2] on the side plate [1]
with a driver of an appropriate length.
[2]
7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the scanner motor [2].
[2]
[1]
1. Attach the spring [2] to the scanner motor assy [1].
[3] [3] [3] 2. Temporarily secure the scanner motor assy [1] with 3 screws [3].
Note
▪ Temporarily tighten the screw [2] so that the motor can move to a
proper position with a force of the spring.
[1] [2]
G-20
[1] [2] [3] 3. Install the drive belt [2] on the pulley [1], and then confirm that there is no
slack or tension.
Note
▪ Confirm that the drive belt [2] is stretched properly with the force
of the spring [3].
▪ If the drive belt [2] has a slack or a tension, the scanner unit does
not work properly and a trouble possibly occurs.
4. Rotate the pulley, and check that the belt does not run on the cogs of the
pulley.
5. Tighten 2 screws [1] of the scanner motor assy.

[2] [3] [1] [1]
6. Tighten the screw [2] of the scanner motor assy and fix the scanner motor
assy.
Note
▪ After you fix the scanner motor Assy, confirm the drive belt [3] has
no slack or tension again.
3.2.15 IQ image processing board (IPB/I) (Option : IQ-501)

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the board cover. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Main board unit)
2. Remove 2 connector fixing screws [1].
[3] [1] [2] 3. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the IQ image processing board (IPB/
I) [2].
Note
▪ When you install the IQ image processing board (IPB/I) [2], press
the dotted line area [3] to connect the connector.
3.2.16 VIF board (VIFB) (Option: VI-513)

(1) Procedure
G-21
[1] [2] 1. Remove the board cover. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Main board unit)
2. Remove 2 connector fixing screws [1].
3. Remove 4 screws [2], and remove the mounting plate [3].
[3]
[1] [2] 4. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the VIF board (VIFB).
Note
▪ When you install the VIF board (VIFB) [2], press the dotted line
area [3] to connect the connector.
[3]
3.2.17 Writing unit
(1) Procedure
1. Pull and remove the toner bottle.
2. Remove the right cover/Up1 and the right cover/Up4. (Refer to G.3.2.4 Right
cover/Up1, right cover/Up2, right cover/Up3, right cover/Up4, right cover/
Lw1, right cover/Lw2)
3. Remove 8 screws [1] and then remove the toner bottle unit [2].
Note
▪ Be sure to clean the toner bottle unit when the toner adheres.
[1] [2]
4. Remove 8 screws [1] and remove the coupling plate/Fr [2] and the coupling
plate/Rr [3].
[1] [2] [3] [1]

5. Remove the screw [1] and remove the toner pan [2].
[1] [2]
G-22
6. Disconnect each connector [1].

Note
▪ Be sure to fix the removed connectors [1] with the clamp [2].
7. Remove each 2 connectors [3] and remove each screw [4] and then remove
3 pressing metal plates [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
8. Remove the writing unit/Y [6], the writing unit/M [7], and the writing unit/C [8].
[2] [4] [5] [1]
[6][7][8] [3]
[4]

Note
▪ Be sure to fix the removed connectors [1] with the clamp [2].
10. Remove 2 connectors [3] and remove the screw [4] and then remove the
pressing metal plates [5] in the arrow-marked direction.
11. Remove the writing unit/K [6].
[2] [4] [1] [5]
[6] [3]
[4]
G-23
12. Note
▪ If you remove only the writing unit/K [1], be sure to remove the
pressing metal plate of the writing unit/C. Hold the writing unit/C
[2] to remove the writing unit/K [1].
[2] [1]
Note
▪ If you reinstall the pressing metal plate [1], be sure to place the
height adjustment screw [2] on the pressing metal plate [1].
[2] [1]
14. After you replace the writing unit/Y, the writing unit/M, the writing unit/C, conduct the following item.
• Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory) (Refer to I.4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment -
Writing Initial Pos. Memory))
• I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear, LD alarm measurement) (Refer to I.4.7.1 I/O Check Mode)
• Beam pitch adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.16 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
After you replace the writing unit/K, conduct the following item.
• Writing initial position memory (Refer to I.4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory))
• I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear, LD alarm measurement) (Refer to I.4.7.1 I/O Check Mode)
• CD-Mag. skew adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.15 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• Restart timing adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
• Beam pitch adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.16 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
3.2.18 Process unit
(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the process unit. (Refer to Pulling out the process unit)
2. Remove the intermediate transfer unit. (Refer to Removing and reinstalling
the intermediate transfer unit)
3. Remove the drum unit/Y, the drum unit/M, the drum unit/C, and the drum
unit/K. (Refer to Replacing the drum unit)
4. Remove the developing unit/Y, the developing unit/M, the developing unit/C,
and the developing unit/K. (Refer to Replacing the Developing unit/Y, /M, /
C, /K)
Note
▪ Be sure to remove the intermediate transfer unit, drum unit, and
developing unit before you remove the process unit.
5. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the process unit [2].
[3][4] [1] [2] Note
▪ Be careful when you remove the process unit since it is heavy.
▪ When you reinstall the process unit, be sure to align the projection
[3] of the process unit and the hole [4] of the guide rail.
G-24
Note
▪ When you reinstall the process unit, be sure to reinstall it with the
fan cover [1] being open. If the process unit is reinstalled with the
fan cover [1] closed, the process unit cannot be pushed back into
the main body.
7. After you reinstall the process unit, perform the adjustment in the following order.
• Belt line speed adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.10 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• Color registration gap measurement/Manual adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.13 Color Regist. Gap Masurement (Printer Adjustment))
Adj.))
3.2.19 Image correction unit

(1) Procedure
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the image correction unit [3].
Note
▪ Be sure to reinstall the image correction unit so that the hole [4] of
the image correction unit fits to the projection [5] of the main body.
▪ Be sure to reinstall the image correction unit so that the plate [6] of
the image correction unit fits to the hole [7] of the main body.
[1] [2] [6] [7]
[2] [6][7] [3]
[4]
[5]
5. After you reinstall the image correction unit, perform the adjustment in the following order.
• IDC sensor adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.31 IDC Sensor Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment))
• Highlight automatic adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.32 Highlight Automatic Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment))
• Color registration gap measurement/Manual adjustment (Refer to I.4.3.13 Color Regist. Gap Masurement (Printer Adjustment))
3.2.20 Toner bottle motor, toner bottle clutch, remaining toner sensor, toner supply motor
(1) Procedure
G-25
1. Remove the main board unit. (Refer to Main board unit)

[4] [10][11] 2. Remove the connector [1], and remove 4 screws [2], and then remove the
toner bottle motor (M15) [3].
3. Remove each connector [4], and remove each C-clip [5], and then remove
the toner bottle clutch/Y (CL10) [6], the toner bottle clutch/M (CL11) [7], the
[5] toner bottle clutch/C (CL12) [8], and the toner bottle clutch/K (CL13) [9].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the toner bottle clutches, align the stopper [10]
with the guide [11].
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[2] [3] [2]
4. Remove each connector [1], and remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the
[2] remaining toner sensor/Y (PZS1) [3], the remaining toner sensor/M (PZS2)
[5], the remaining toner sensor/C (PZS3) [5], and the remaining toner sensor/
K (PZS4) [6].
Note
▪ Be careful not to spill the toner when you remove the remaining
toner sensors.
When you remove the remaining toner sensors, be careful about
the static electricity.
[1] ▪ Do not touch the sensor surfaces of the remaining toner sensors.
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
G-26
[1] 5. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the wiring mounting cover [2].
[1] [2]
6. Remove each connector [1], and remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the
toner supply motor/Y (M19) [3], the toner supply motor/M (M18) [4], the toner
[2] supply motor/C (M17) [5], and the toner supply motor/K (M16) [6].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[2]
[1]
G-27
3.2.21 Duplex section
(1) Procedure
Note
▪ Since the duplex section is a heavy load, be sure to remove and install with 2 people.
[1] [2] 1. Pull out the duplex section. (Refer to F.4.12.1 Replacement of the
clutch/3 (CL7))
unit)
3. Remove the wiring harness guide [2] in the arrow-marked direction with
pushing the stopper [1].
[1] [3] [2] 5. Remove the C-clip [1] and remove the wiring harness arm [3] from the shaft
[2].
G-28

Note
▪ Be careful not to remove 2 black screws [2] since the screws fix
the stopper of the duplex section. If you remove 2 screws [2], the
duplex section could fall.
[1]
[2] [1]
7. Insert 2 drivers to 2 lift materials [1].
[1]
[1]
G-29
8. Hold the handle [1] and the drivers [2] with 2 people, and release the stopper
[5] moving the right side of the duplex section to direction of the arrow [4].
9. Hold the handle [1] and the drivers [2] with 2 people, and release the stopper
[8] moving the left side of the duplex section to direction of the arrow [7].
10. Remove the duplex section [9].
CAUTION
▪ Be careful to handle the duplex section [9] since it has a risk of
falling from the drivers [2] when the duplex section [9] is skewed.
[6] [1] [4] [5] [3]
[7] [2] [9] [8]
3.2.22 Paper feed tray

1. Pull the tray1 at the maximum. (Refer to Replacement of the paper feed
clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3) and
pre-registration clutch/2 (CL4))
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the tray1 [2].
[1] [2] [1]


1. Remove the paper feed unit of the tray2. (Refer to F.4.8.4 Replacement of
the paper feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-registration
clutch/1 (CL3) and pre-registration clutch/2 (CL4))
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the tray2 [2].
[1] [2] [1]

3.2.23 Tray up down wire/1, tray up down wire/2 (Tray1)

(1) Procedure
G-30
1. Pull the tray1 at the maximum. (Refer to Replacement of the paper feed
[4] [5] clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3) and
pre-registration clutch/2 (CL4))
2. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each. Hold up the paper lift plate, and slide each
pulley [3] in the arrow-marked direction. Release the fixation of the tray up
down wire/1 [4] and the tray up down wire/2 [5].
[2] [3] [1]
[2] [1] 3. Remove each E-ring [1] and remove each wire regulation cover [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the wire regulation covers [2], be careful not to
nip the tray up down wires.
4. Remove each tray up down wire/1 [3] from the rear side of the tray.
[3]
G-31
[1] [2] 5. Remove each E-ring [1], and remove each wire regulation cover [2].
[3]
[3][4] 7. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the tray up down wire/1 [1], be sure to check
that the tray up down wire/1 [1] comes inside of the tray [2].
that the tray up down wire/2 [3] comes outside of the tray [4].
[1][2] [3][4]
3.2.24 Tray up down wire/3, tray up down wire/4 (Tray2)

(1) Procedure
G-32
[1] 1. Pull the tray2 at the maximum. (Refer to F.4.8.4 Replacement of the paper
feed clutch/1 (CL1), paper feed clutch/2 (CL2), pre-registration clutch/1 (CL3)
and pre-registration clutch/2 (CL4))
2. Remove 12 screws [1], and then remove the tray cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
3. Release the tray up down wire/5 [2] from the spring [1].
Note
▪ When you hook the spring [1], be sure to check that the tray up
down wire/5 [2] is winded correctly. (Refer to G.3.2.25 Tray up
down wire/5 (Tray2) )
[1] [2]
4. Remove each E-ring [1]. Hold up the paper lift plate, and slide each pulley [3]
[4] [5] in the arrow-marked direction. Release the fix of the tray up down wire/3 [4]
and the tray up down wire/4 [5].
[2] [3] [1]
G-33
Note
▪ When you install the wire regulation covers [2], be careful not to
nip the tray up down wires.
[3]
[3]
G-34
[3][4] 9. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
that the tray up down wire/3 [1] comes inside of the tray [2].
that the tray up down wire/4 [3] comes outside of the tray [4].
[1][2] [3][4]
3.2.25 Tray up down wire/5 (Tray2)

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [3] 1. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.3.2.24 Tray up down wire/3, tray up
down wire/4 (Tray2))
2. Disconnect the connector [1].Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the gear
cover [3].
[2] [1] 3. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the up down actuator [2].
G-35
[3] [1] [2] 4. Note

▪ When you reinstall the up down actuator [1], be sure to check that
the larger projection side [2] comes to the back and the smaller
projection side [3] comes to the front.
5. Note
▪ When you reinstall the up down actuator [1], be sure to place the
hole [3] to the position in the picture while you push down the
paper lift plate [2].
▪ When you reinstall the gear cover [4], be sure to check the
following. You can see the hole [3] from the window [5] while you
push down the paper lift plate [2].
[4] [2] [5] [3]
[1] [3]
6. Release the tray up down wire/5 [2] from the spring [1].
[1] [2]
[1] [2] 7. Note
▪ When you hook the tray up down wire/5 [1] to the spring, wind the
tray up down wire/5 [1] 3 and a half turns around the pulley [2]. At
this time, be sure to check that there is no overlapping or peculiar
winding.
G-36
[2] [3] [1] 8. Remove the E-ring [1], and then remove the gear [2] and the pin [3].
[1] [2] 9. Remove the pulley [1], and remove the tray up down wire/5 [1].
3.2.26 Fusing paper exit plate assy

(1) Step
1. Remove the fusing roller/Lw assy. (Refer to Replacement of the fusing
[3] gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat insulating sleeve/Lw2, fusing roller/Lw)
3. Release the 2 springs [2].
[2] 4. Remove the E ring [3] and remove the fusing paper exit plate assy [1] in the
[1]
[2]
3.2.27 Temperature sensor/1 (TH1), temperature sensor/2 (TH2), thermostat/1 (TS1), thermostat/2 (TS2)
G-37
[1] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing duct. (Refer to F.4.11.2 Replacing the fusing heater lamp
3. Remove the fusing cover/Up2 and the fusing cover/Up3. (Refer to Replacing
the fusing temperature sensor/3 (TH3))
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and release the wiring harness from the clamp.
[3] [1] [2] 5. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the temperature sensor/1 (TH1) [2] and
the temperature sensor/2 (TH2) [3].
6. Push each 2 projections [1], and remove each 2 fastons [2].
[1][2]
[1] [2] [3] 7. Note
and pull it out.
G-38
[2] [3] 8. Remove the screw [1], 1 each, and remove the thermostat assy/1 [2] and the
thermostat assy/2 [3].
[1]
[1] [2] 9. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the thermostat/1 (TS1) and the
thermostat/2 (TS2) [2].

Note
▪ Be sure to adjust the positions of the thermostat assy/1 and the thermostat assy/2 with the thermostat positioning jig/Up before
you secure the thermostat assys.
After the fixation of the screws, be sure to apply the screw-lock to them.
▪ The adjustment method of the thermostat assy/1 and the thermostat assy/2 are same. The following shows the adjustment
steps of the thermostat assy/1.
▪ Be sure to adjust the position when the fusing roller is cold.
[1] [4] [3] [2] 1. Install TS1 [2] to the thermostat assy/1 [3] with 2 screws [1].
Note
▪ Be careful not to touch the surface [4] of the thermostat.
[3] [1] [2] [3] 2. Temporarily tighten the thermostat assy/1 [2] with the screw [1].
3. Install 2 fastons [3].
G-39
[1] [2] [3] 4. Note

▪ When you reinstall the faston, be sure to install it so that the
projection [1] faces forward. If the installed projection [1] faces
backward, it cannot be pushed so that the faston cannot be
removed.
▪ When you reinstall the faston, be sure to insert it in parallel to the
terminal. Never insert the faston at an angle.
▪ Make sure the faston is properly inserted as far as it goes and its
projection sticks out.
[2] [1] [3] [2] [4] 5. Insert the thermostat positioning jig/Up [3] between TS1 [1] and the fusing
belt [2].
6. Adjust the position of TS1 so that the gap amount between TS1 [1] and the
fusing belt [2] becomes equal to the thickness of the thermostat positioning
jig/Up [3]. Then tighten it with the screw [4].
Note
▪ Be sure to check that the distance "a" becomes equal to the
thickness of the thermostat positioning jig/Up. "a" is the distance
between the thermostat and the fusing belt.
7. Apply the screw-lock to the screw [4].
8. How to use the thermostat positioning jig/Up

C
[1]: Adjustment part

10
7
0-
T S-
[2]: The part must not be inserted between the thermostat and the fusing belt
U
[3]: The part must be inserted between the thermostat and the fusing belt
[3]
[1]
[2]
3.2.28 Thermostat/3 (TS3)
[1] [2] [3] [1] 1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to Removing and reinstalling the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing entrance guide/Lw. (Refer to Replacing the fusing
temperature sensor/4 (TH4))
3. Release 2 wiring harnesses [1] from the clamp.
4. Remove 2 screws [2], and release the fixation of the thermostat assy/3 [3].
[1][2] [1][2] 5. Remove each 2 fastons [2] with pushing each 2 projections [1].
G-40
[1] [2] [3] 6. Note

and pull it out.
[1] 7. Remove the thermostat assy/3 [1].
[2] [1] 8. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the thermostat/3 (TS3) [2].

Note
▪ When you fix the thermostat assy/3, be sure to adjust the position by using the thermostat positioning jig/Lw.
[4] [2] [3] [1] 1. Install TS3 [2] to the thermostat assy/3 [3] with 2 screws [1].
Note
▪ Be careful not to touch the surface [4] of the thermostat.
[1] [2] 2. Temporarily tighten the thermostat assy/3 [2] with 2 screws [1].
3. Install 2 fastons [3].
[3]
G-41
[1] [2] [3] 4. Note

▪ When you reinstall the faston, be sure to install it so that the
projection [1] faces forward. If the installed projection [1] faces
backward, it cannot be pushed so that the faston cannot be
removed.
▪ When you reinstall the faston, be sure to insert it in parallel to the
terminal. Never insert the faston at an angle.
▪ Make sure the faston is properly inserted as far as it goes and its
projection sticks out.
6. Insert the thermostat positioning jig/Lw [3] between TS3 [1] and the fusing
roller/Lw [2].
7. Adjust the position of TS3 so that the gap amount between TS3 [1] and the
fusing roller/Lw [2] becomes equal to the thickness of the thermostat
positioning jig/Lw [3]. Then tighten it with 2 screws [4].
Note
thickness of the thermostat positioning jig/Lw. "a" is the distance
between the TS3 and the fusing roller/Lw.
[4] [1] [4] [3] [2] 8. Apply the screw-lock to 2 screws [4].
9. How to use the thermostat positioning jig/Lw
C
[1]: Adjustment part

10
7
0-
TS
[2]: The part that must not be inserted between TS3 and the fusing roller/Lw.
L-
[3]: The part that must be inserted between TS3 and the fusing roller/Lw.
[3]
[1]
[2]
10. Reinstall the other parts following the removal steps in reverse.
3.2.29 Temperature sensor/5 (TH5)

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to Removing and reinstalling the fusing unit)
2. Remove the fusing roller/Lw assy. (Refer to Replacement of the fusing
gear/1, fusing bearing/Lw2, heat insulating sleeve/Lw2, fusing roller/Lw)
3. Remove the fusing entrance guide/Lw. (Refer to Replacing the fusing
temperature sensor/4 (TH4))
4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the binding cover [2].
[2] [1]
G-42
5. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness [2] from the
clamp.
[2] Note
▪ When the connector [1] is connected, place the wiring harness [2]
inside the wiring harness guide [3].
[3]
[1] [2]
6. Release the wiring harness [1] from the clamp.

7. Remove 2 screws [2], and remove the temperature sensor/5 (TH5) [3].
[2] [1] [2]
[3]

Note
▪ When you fix the TH5, be sure to adjust the position with the temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw.
1. Connect the connector of the TH5, and install the fusing roller/Lw following
the removal steps in reverse.
2. Temporarily tighten the TH5 [2] with 2 screws [1].
4. Insert the temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw [5] between the TH5 [3] and
the fusing roller/Lw [4].
5. Adjust the position of TH5 [3] so that the gap amount between TH5 and the
fusing roller/Lw [4] becomes equal to the thickness of the temperature
sensor positioning jig/Lw [5]. Then tighten it with 2 screws [1].
Note
[1] [2] [3] [5] [1] [4] thickness of the temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw. "a" is the
distance between the TH5 and the fusing roller/Lw.
6. Apply the screw-lock to 2 screws [1].
G-43
C107 7. How to use the temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw

0-TH-
L [1]: Adjustment part
[2]: The part that must not be inserted between the TH5 and the fusing roller/
Lw.
[1] [2]
3.2.30 Fusing separation fan/1 (FM10), fusing separation fan/2 (FM11) and fusing separation fan/3 (FM12)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the charging control framework unit. (Refer to Charging control framework unit)
2. Remove the left cover. (Refer to G.3.2.3 Left cover)
3. Remove the paper exit unit. (Refer to Replacing the paper exit drive gear/1, paper exit gear and paper exit decurler roller)
[1] 4. Remove 7 screws [2], and then remove the cooling stay assy [3].
5. Remove the connector [1].
[2] [2] [2]
[2] [3] [2] [2]

[2] [1] 6. To release the wiring harness from the clamps, remove 1 connector [1] each.
7. Remove 2 screws [2] each, and then remove the fusing separation fan/1
(FM10) [3], fusing separation fan/2 (FM11) [4], fusing separation fan/3
(FM12) [5].
[5] [4] [3]
G-44
3.2.31 Replacement of the fusing ball bearings/Up, /Lw1, the heat insulating sleeves/Up, /Lw1, the belt regulating
sleeve, the fusing belt, the fusing rollers/1, /2, and the neutralizing ring
(1) Note regarding the use of fusing roller/1
(a) Purpose
To prevent the splitting and chipping before they occur when you handle the fusing roller/1.
(b) Prohibited actions
1. When you handle the roller, wear the woven fabric gloves and never touch the roller with your bare hands. Your nails and fingers can
cause splitting or other damage.
2. Do not hold the roller tightly with your fingertips since that can cause the splitting. Be sure to use the palms of your hands and the
cushion of your fingers to gently hold the roller.
Note
▪ Be careful in the same manner even when the roller is wrapped in a highly foamed polyethylene sheet.
3. When you lift up the roller, be sure to hold the shaft and not the raised end.
4. Since the surface of the fusing roller/1 is soft and dust and foreign matter tend to adhere to it, be careful to handle the fusing roller/1 by
placing it on clean paper or doing things to keep it clean.
(2) Procedure
G-45

[6] unit)
2. Remove the fusing heater lamp assy/Up. (Refer to F.4.11.2 Replacing the
fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up and the fusing heater lamp 2 assy/Up)
3. Remove the fusing belt assy. (Refer to F.4.11.3 Replacing the fusing belt
assy)
[5] 4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the belt unit stay [2].
5. Remove 2 screws [3], and remove the belt unit fix shaft [4].
6. Remove the C-ring [5], and remove the fusing drive gear/Fr [6].
7. Remove the C-ring [7], and remove the fusing drive gear/Rr [8].
[3] [2] [1]
[8] [1] [4] [3]
[7]
8. Note
▪ The projection [3] is inside of the fusing drive gear/Fr [1] and the
fusing drive gear/Rr [2]. When you reinstall the fusing drive gear/Fr
[1] and the fusing drive gear/Rr [2], be sure to check that the side
[4] where the projection is cracked comes inside.
[4] [3] [2] [1]
G-46
9. Remove the fusing roller fix plate assy/Fr [2] and the fusing roller fix plate
assy/Rr [3] from the fusing belt unit [1].
Note
▪ After you reinstall the fusing roller fix plate assy/Fr and the fusing
roller fix plate assy/Rr, be sure to check that the multemp FF-RM is
not applied on the edge of the fusing roller/2. When the multemp
FF-RM is applied, wipe it off.
[1] [2]
[3]
10. Remove the screws [1] 1 each. Then remove the heat insulating sleeves/Up
[2] 1 each, the fusing ball bearings/Up [3] 1 each, the heat insulating sleeve
belts [4] 1 each, and the fusing bearing belts [5] 1 each.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the heat insulating sleeve/Up, the heat
insulating sleeve belt, the fusing ball bearing/Up, and the fusing
bearing belt, be sure to turn the flanges inside.
▪ When you reinstall the heat insulating sleeve/Up and the heat
insulating sleeve belt, be sure to apply the multemp FF-RM to the
inside and the outside.
▪ When you reinstall the fusing ball bearing/Up and the fusing
bearing belt, be sure to apply the multemp FF-RM on the outside.
[3] [2] [1] [4] [5]
G-47
11. Remove the C-rings [1] 1 each, and remove the belt regulating sleeves [2] 1
each.
Note
[1] ▪ When you reinstall the belt regulating sleeve, be sure to turn the
flange inside.
[2]
12. Remove the fusing roller/2 [2] and the fusing roller/1 [3] from the fusing belt
[1].
Note
▪ Never touch the surface of the fusing roller/1 and the fusing
roller/2 with bare hands.
▪ When you reinstall the fusing belt, be sure to check that the side
[4] where the lot number [4] is printed comes to the front.
▪ When you reinstall the fusing roller/1 [3], be sure to check that the
side where the shaft is shorter [5] comes to the front.
▪ Be careful when you handle the fusing roller/1 because it is easily
scratched. (Refer to G.3.2.31 (1) Note regarding the use of fusing
[2] [1] [3] [5] roller/1)
Note
▪ When you reinstall the fusing roller/1, hold it with the driver inserted on only one side and be careful not to touch the
surface of the roller.
3.2.32 HDD1, HDD2, HDD3

Note
▪ When the HDD lock password is enabled: Before the hard disk/1 (HDD1), the hard disk/2 (HDD2), and the hard disk/3 (HDD3) are
replaced, be sure to contact the service manager of Konica Minolta.
▪ When you remove the HDD after the format, be sure to install the removed HDD to the original position.
Therefore, record the alphabet that is marked on the board cover to the HDD before you remove the HDD.
(1) Procedure
G-48
1. Remove the duct cover. (Refer to G.3.2.1 Duct cover)

3. Remove the arm cover/Rr and the upper cover/Rr2. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Top
cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/
Fr, arm cover/Rr)
[2] 4. Remove the board cover. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Main board unit)
5. Remove 2 connectors [1], release each wiring harness, and remove 4
screws [2].
[1]
[2]
[2] 6. Remove 4 connectors [1], release each wiring harness, and remove 10
screws [2].
[1]
[2] [1]
[2]
[1] [2] 7. Remove the screws [1], 4 each, from the hard disk/1 assy, the hard disk/2
assy, and the hard disk/3 assy that are removed, and remove the hard disk
mounting plate [2].
[1]
G-49
[3] [4] [1] [2] 8. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
▪ Be sure to attach the wiring harness [1] on the clamp [2] so that
the label "UP" [3] comes to the referred position in the picture.
▪ Be sure to lock the clamp [2] so that the lock section [4] of the
clamp comes to the referred position in the picture.
9. After the hard disk/1 (HDD1), the hard disk/2 (HDD2), and the hard disk/3 (HDD3) are replaced, conduct the following items.
• Format HDD All Data (Refer to I.4.17.1 Format HDD All Data)
3.2.33 Hard disk/4 (HDD4)

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ When the HDD lock password is enabled: Before the hard disk/4 (HDD4) is replaced, be sure to contact the service manager of
Konica Minolta.
3. Remove the arm cover/Rr and the upper cover/Rr2. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Top
Fr, arm cover/Rr)
4. Remove the board cover. (Refer to G.3.2.6 Main board unit)
5. Remove 2 connectors [1], release each wiring harness, and remove 5
screws [2].
[1] [2] 6. Remove 4 screws [1] from the hard disk/4 assy that is removed, and remove
the hard disk mounting plate [2].
[1]
8. After the hard disk/4 (HDD4) is reinstalled, conduct the following items.
• Format HDD all data (Refer to I.4.17.1 Format HDD All Data)
• Format Additional HDD Data (Refer to I.4.17.3 Format Additional HDD Data)
3.2.34 Charge control framework unit

(1) Removal procedure for when OT-511 is not installed
G-50
1. Remove the charging roller assy. (Refer to Replacing the charging roller/Up)
[1]
[1]
[1] 3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each.
[1]
G-51
[1]
[1]
[1] 6. Remove the charging control framework unit [1] in the direction of the arrow.
G-52

Note
▪ When you install the charge control framework unit, be careful that
the PET sheet does not get caught by the parts.
[1]
(2) Removal procedure for when OT-511 is installed

1. Remove the left covers /Up and /Lw. (Refer to Left cover/Up, /Lw)
[1] Remove the charging roller assy. (Refer to F.4.14.1 Replacing the Charging
Roller/Up)
[1]
[1]
G-53
[1]
[1]
G-54
[1]
[1] 6. Remove the charging control framework unit [1] in the direction of the arrow.

Note
▪ When you install the charge control framework unit, be careful that
the PET sheet does not get caught by the parts.
[1]
3.2.35 Tucking fan/4 (FN35) and tucking fan/5 (FM36)

(1) Procedure
G-55
[2] [1] 1. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and remove 2 installation plates [2].
[1] [2]

[1] [2]
3. Remove 2 wiring harnesses from the clamp [1], and remove the connector
[2] [1] [2].
4. Remove 8 screws [1], and remove the fan motor assy [2].
[1] [2] [1]
G-56
5. Remove the wiring harnesses, 2 each, from the clamp [1], and remove the
[3] [4] [3] [5] connectors [2], 1 each. Then, remove the screws [3], 2 each, and remove the
tacking fan/4 [4] and the tacking fan/5 [5].
[1] [2] [1] [2]
G-57
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 4. DF-706
4. DF-706
1 Cover Front cover
2 Rear cover
3 Unit DF-706
4 Front side glass cleaning roller unit
5 Back side glass cleaning roller unit
6 CIS module (CIS)
7 Board DF control board (DFCB)
8 Restriction plate positional volume (VR1)
9 DF power supply (DFPU)
10 Sensor control board (SCB)
11 Multi feed detection board/1 (transmitter) (MFDB/1)
12 Multi feed detection board/2 (receiver) (MFDB/2)
13 Conveyance section paper feed motor (M1)
14 Registration motor (M2)
15 Reading motor (M3)
16 Exit motor (M4)
17 Reading roller pressure release motor (M6)
18 Back side cleaning motor (M7)
19 Front side cleaning motor (M8)
20 paper feed clutch (CL1)
21 Cooling fan (FM2)
22 separation roller torque limiter

4.2.1 Front cover
1. Open the DF-706.
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the front cover [2].
[1]
[2]
4.2.2 Rear cover
(1) Removal
1. Open the DF-706.
2. Remove four screws [1].
NOTE
▪ If the dual scan document feeder is set to be lifted up at angles up
to 60 degrees due to the set position of the stopper for the hinge,
change the set position to the lower side so that the dual scan
document feeder can be opened completely.
[1]
G-58
[1]
4. Slightly lift up the document feed tray [1].
[2] 5. Remove the rear cover [2].
[1]
4.2.3 DF-706
1. Remove the Duct cover.
[3] (Refer to G.3.2.1 Duct cover)
2. Remove the arm cover/Rr, . top cover/Rr1 and top cover/Rr2.
(Refer to G.3.2.5 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top
cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr)
3. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].
4. Remove the snap band [2] from the plate.
5. Disconnect three connectors [3].
[1] [2] [3]
G-59
6. Remove the harness from nine wire saddles [1].

7. Remove the snap band [2] from the plate.
[1] [2] [1]
[1] [3] [1]

9. NOTE
[1] [2] ▪ Match the number of the wiring harness and the number of the
exterior installation plate when you connect.
▪ If the connection is incorrect, SC will occur.
[1] [2]
10. Move the hinge stopper [1] position down.
[1]
[1]
G-60
11. Open the DF-706 90 degrees.

[1] [1]
13. Remove the DF-706 [1].

[1]
Note
▪ Hold the DF-706 at the proper position because it possibly becomes
OK
curved.
▪ When you remove the DF-706 from the main body, place it on such
as the floor as the figure shows.
NG
G-61
4.2.4 Front side glass cleaning roller unit

1. Open the DF-706.
2. Remove the C-clip [1] and the bushing [2].
[1] [2]
3. Remove two C-clips [1] shift the bushing [2], and remove the belt [3].
[3] [1]
[1] [2]
4. Remove the front side glass cleaning roller unit [2] while opening the pre-read
[2] sheet assy [1].
[1]
NOTE
▪ When installing the front side glass cleaning roller unit, the following adjustment is necessary.
1. Adjust the actuator [1] so that it is positioned where it blocks the light of
the front side cleaning home sensor [2], and install the belt.
[1] [2]
2. Align the D cut surface [1] of the shaft with the lines [2] marked on the
[1] bushing.
[2]
G-62
4.2.5 Back side glass cleaning roller unit

1. Open the DF-706.
[1] 2. Open the opening and closing guide [1].
3. While peeling off the mat, remove the screw [1], and while opening the opening
and closing guide, remove the cover [2].
[2] [1]
4. Remove the screw [1] and the C-clip [2], and remove the bushing [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
[4] [1] 6. Remove the gear [2], and remove the belt [3].
8. Remove the back side glass cleaning roller unit [5].
[5] [3] [2]

NOTE
▪ When installing the back side glass cleaning roller unit, the following adjustment is necessary.
1. Align the D cut surface [1] of the shaft with the lines [2] marked on the
[1] bushing.
[2]
G-63
2. When installing the belt, align the line [1] on the pulley and the line [2] on
the transport guide.
[2] [1]
4.2.6 CIS module (CIS)

[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
6. Disconnect the connector [1], remove the screw [2], and disconnect the ground
[3] wire [3].
[1] [2]
G-64
[1]
8. Remove the screw [1], and disconnect two connectors [1].
[1]
[2]
9. Remove two screws (front side) [1].
[1]
10. Remove the screw (rear side) [1].
[1]
11. Remove the CIS module [1] as shown in the illustration.
[1]
G-65
12. Remove the E-rings [1] on the right and left, and remove the plates [2].
[2]
[1]
NOTE
▪ Be sure to perform the following steps after the CIS module has been replaced with a new one.
▪ FD-Mag. Adjustment (ADF adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.9 FD-Mag. Adjustment)
▪ FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment (ADF adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment)
▪ FD-Mag. Adjustment(Back) (ADF adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.17 FD-Mag. Adjustment(Back))
▪ FD-Mag. Auto Adj.(Back) (Refer to I.4.8.18 FD-Mag. Auto Adj.(Back))
▪ Main Scan Dir. Zoom(Back) (ADF adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.19 Main Scan Dir. Zoom(Back))
▪ Main Scan Dir. Zoom Auto(Back) (ADF adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.20 Main Scan Dir. Zoom Auto(Back))
▪ Read Position Adj. (ADF adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.7 Read Position Adj.)
▪ Read Position Auto Adj. (ADF adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.8 Read Position Auto Adj.)
▪ ADF Orig. Stop Position (ADF adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.2 ADF Orig. Stop Position)
▪ ADF Orig Stop Pos. Auto (ADF adjustment) (Refer to I.4.8.3 ADF Orig Stop Pos. Auto)
4.2.7 DF control board (DFCB)

[2] (Refer to G.4.2.2 Rear cover)
2. Disconnect all connectors from the FS control board.
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the DF control board [2].
[1]

NOTE
▪ Install the firmware when the DF control board is replaced.
▪ Execute ADF Original Size Adj.(Refer to I.4.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj.) and Mixed Original Size Adj. (Refer to I.4.8.12 Mixed
Original Size Adj.) when the DF control board is replaced.
4.2.8 Restriction plate positional volume (VR1)

[1] [2]
G-66
4. Remove three tabs [1].

[1] 5. Turning the document feed tray [2] and remove it.
[2]
6. Remove two screws [1] and disconnect the connector [2], and remove the
[1] restriction plate positional volume [3].
[2] [3]
NOTE
▪ For mounting the restriction plate positional volume, mount it in the direction shown on the illustration.
NOTE
▪ Be sure to perform the following operation when the restriction plate positional volume is replaced.
▪ Execute ADF Original Size Adj. (Refer to I.4.8.1 ADF Original Size Adj.).
▪ Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again and check whether size detection operates normally.
4.2.9 DF power supply board (DFPU)

[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
G-67
[1]
[3] wire [3].
[1] [2]
[1]
8. Open the protective sheet [1].
[1]
9. Disconnect two connectors [1].
[3] [4] [2] 10. Remove the harness from the edge cover [2].
11. Remove two screws [3] and remove the DF power supply [4].
[1] [3]
G-68
4.2.10 Sensor control board (SCB)

2. Disconnect three connectors [1], remove four screws [2], and remove the
sensor control board [3].
[2] [1] [2]

NOTE
▪ Be sure to perform the following steps after the sensor control board has been replaced with a new one.
▪ Execute [Service Mode] -> [ADF] -> [Multi-Feed DetectionAdj].
4.2.11 Multi feed detection board/1 (transmitter) (MFDB/1)

(Refer to G.4.2.1 Front cover)
[2] [1]
[1] [2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[3] wire [3].
[1] [2]
G-69
[1]
8. Remove two screws [1], and disconnect the ground wire [2].
[2] [4] 9. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the multi feed detection board/1
(transmitter) [4].
[1] [3]
NOTE
▪ Install the board so that the sensor [1] fits into the depression [2].
[1] ▪ Be sure to perform the following steps after the multi feed detection
board/1 (transmitter) has been replaced with a new one.
[2] ▪ Execute [Service Mode] -> [ADF] -> [Multi-Feed DetectionAdj].
4.2.12 Multi feed detection board/2 (receiver) (MFDB/2)

1. Remove the cover from the DF-706 [1].
[1]
2. Remove the screw [1] and pull out the multi feed detection board/2(receiver)
[2] [1] [2].
G-70
3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the multi feed detection
[1] [2] board/2(receiver) [2].

NOTE
▪ Install the board so that the sensor [1] fits into the depression [2].
[1] ▪ Be sure to perform the following steps after the multi feed detection
board/2 (receiver) has been replaced with a new one.
[2] ▪ Execute [Service Mode] -> [ADF] -> [Multi-Feed DetectionAdj].
4.2.13 Paper feed motor (M1)

2. Remove the screw, and disconnect the ground wire [1].
3. Remove six wire saddles [2] and disconnect six connectors [3].
[3]
4. Remove two screws [1].
[1]
5. Unhook two hooks [1], remove the harness from the harness guide [2], and
[1] remove the harness guide [2].
[2]
G-71
6. Remove the screw [1], E-ring [2], and bushing [3].

[5] [2] [3] [1] 7. Remove three screws [4] and remove the paper feed motor assy [5].
[4]
8. Remove the two screws [1] and remove the paper feed motor [2].
[2]
[1]
4.2.14 Registration motor (M2)

2. Remove the roller pressure/retraction motor.
(Refer to G.4.2.17 Reading roller pressure release motor (M6))
3. Remove the reading motor.
(Refer to G.4.2.15 Reading motor (M3))
5. Remove two screws [2] and remove the registration motor assy [3].
[3] [1]
6. Remove two screws [1] and remove the registration motor [2].
[2] [1]
4.2.15 Reading motor (M3)

(1) Remove procedure
3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the reading motor assy [3].
[2]
G-72
4. Remove two screws [1] and remove the reading motor [2].
[2]
[1]
(2) Reinstall procedure
1. Loosen the screw [1] and move the tension plate [2] in the direction of the
[2] arrow to reduce the belt tension.
2. Tighten the screw [1].
[1]
3. Install the reading motor assy [2] with two screws [1].
[1] 4. Connect the connector [3].
5. Loosen the screw [4] and apply tension to the belt.
6. Tighten the screw [4].
[4] [3] [2]
4.2.16 Exit motor (M4)

2. Disconnect the connector [1], remove two screws [2], and remove the exit
motor assy [3].
[2]
3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the exit motor [2].
[2]
[1]
G-73
4.2.17 Reading roller pressure release motor (M6)

3. Remove the harness [3] from three wire saddles [2] and the harness guide.
[2]
4. Remove four screws [1] and remove the reading roller pressure release motor
[2] assy [2].
[1]
5. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the reading roller pressure release
[2] motor assy [2].
[1]
6. Remove two screws [1] and remove the reading roller pressure release motor
[2] [2].
[1]
4.2.18 Back side cleaning motor (M7)

3. Remove two crews [2] and remove the back side cleaning motor [3].
[3]
[2]
G-74
4.2.19 Front side cleaning motor (M8)

[3] (Refer to G.4.2.1 Front cover)
3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the front side cleaning motor [3].
[2] [1]
4.2.20 Paper feed clutch (CL1)

2. Remove the paper feed motor assy.
(Refer to G.4.2.13 Paper feed motor (M1))
3. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the paper feed clutch [2].
[1]
4.2.21 Cooling fan motor (FM)

2. Remove two wire saddles [1], disconnect the connector [2], and remove the
harness from the wire guide.
3. Remove two screws [3] and remove the cooling fan motor [4].
[3] [4]
4.2.22 Replacing the separation roller torque limiter

[1]
2. Grip both sides [1] of the holder and remove the separation roller assy [2].
[1]
[2]
G-75
3. While opening up the holder [1], remove the shaft.

NOTE
▪ Opening the holder too much can break the holder.
[1]
4. Remove the torque limiter [1] from the shaft.
NOTE
▪ Be careful not to lose the pin.
[1]
G-76
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 5. PF-602m
5. PF-602m
1 Cover Right cover
2 Rear cover/Lt2
3 Rear cover/Lt1, rear cover/Rt
4 Front door
5 Tray section Tray
6 Lift wire
7 Paper lift motor/1 (M2), paper lift motor/2 (M3)
8 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance unit
9 Horizontal conveyance unit
10 The multi feed detection board (MFDBR and S)

5.2.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling
CAUTION
5.2.2 Right cover
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the four screws [1] and remove the right cover fixing plate [2].
a03xf2c021ca
[1] [1] 2. Remove the 13 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[2] [1]
a03xf2c022ca
Note
▪ When you install the right cover, be sure to match the metal plate
[2] on the lower part of the PF main unit with the groove [1] on the
right cover.
a03xf2c023ca
G-77
5.2.3 Rear cover/Lt2
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the nine screws [1] and remove the rear cover/Lt2 [2].
[1]
Note
▪ When you install the rear cover/Lt2, be sure to match the metal
plate [2] of the lower part of the PF main unit with the groove [1] of
the rear cover.
a03xf2c025ca
5.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt

(1) Procedure
[3] [4] [3] [1] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lt2. (Refer to G.5.2.3 Rear cover/Lt2)
2. Remove the six screws [1] and remove the rear cover/Lt1 [2].
3. Remove the eleven screws [3] and remove the rear cover/Rt1 [4].
[3] [2]
Note
▪ When you install the rear cover/Rt, be sure to match the metal
plate [2] on the lower part of the PF main unit with the groove [1]
on the rear cover.
a03xf2c028ca
5.2.5 Front door
(1) Procedure
G-78

2. Remove the screws [2].
3. Remove the two screws [3] and the mounting plate [4], and remove the front
[2] door [1] releasing it from the pin [5].
[1]
[3]
[5]
[4]
5.2.6 Tray
CAUTION
▪ Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the try unit is heavy.
▪ Be sure to pull out the trays one at a time. Do not pull out the two trays at a time to prevent the PF from falling over.
Note
▪ The removal and installation procedures of tray 1 is the same as tray 2. The following explanation is for tray 1.
▪ When you raise up the tray, be sure to hold it at the specified positions. Holding it at positions other than those positions
specified damage the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
(1) Procedure
G-79

[2] [1] [5]
[1] 4. Remove the cushion/3 [1].

[3]
5. Remove the three screws [2] and remove the upper cover/1 [3].
Note
▪ When you replace the cushion/3, also replace the double-sided
tape that secure the cushion/ 3 with a new one.
[2] a03xf2c060ca
[3]
6. Remove the three screws [1] on the right side of the tray and remove the rail
stopper [2].
7. Pull the tray [3] out more.
[2]
[1]
a03xf2c032ca
G-80
[1] [2] 8. Remove the six screws [1], three each on the left rail and the right rail, hold
the tray [2] by the specified positions [5], and remove it straight up.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the tray, make sure that the four knobs [3] on
the rails are properly fitted in the notches [4] of the tray.
▪ When you raise up the tray, be sure to hold it at the specified
positions [5] and raise it up with 2 persons. Do not hold the part [6]
as the part can easily become deformed, which adversely affects
the paper feed resulting in a paper jam.
a03xf2c034ca
[1] [2] 9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When you install tray 1, make sure not to let the lower part [1] of
the tray cover contact the rail [2].
a03xf2c034ca
5.2.7 Lift wire
Note
▪ The removing and installing procedure of the lift wire is the same for tray 1 and tray 2.
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Press the down button [1] to let the lift plate [2] go down to the bottom of the
tray.
a03xf2c035ca
G-81
2. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.5.2.6 Tray)

3. Loosen the three screws [1], and remove the three screws [2].
[3] 4. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the front cover [4] of the tray.
[4]
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c036cb
[1] 5. Points to check when you reinstall the tray

Note
▪ The front cover of tray 1 has the ancillary cover [1], whereas that of
tray 2 does not. When you install the front covers of each tray,
make sure not to mix them up.
a03xf2c037ca
[1] [2] 6. Remove the nine screws [1] and remove the cover [2].
[1] [1]
a03xf2c061ca
G-82
7. Points to check when you reinstall the cover

Note
▪ When you install the cover [1], make sure to fasten the gear [3] and
the spring [4] with the plate [2] of the tray-down stopper.
[2] [3] [4]
[1] a03xf2c062ca

9. Slide the bearing [2] to the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c063ca
10. Slide the pulley/Fr1 [1] and the pulley/Fr2 [2], and pull out the wire ends of
[4] [2] [1] the lift wire/Fr1 [3] and the lift wire/Fr2 [4] from each hole of the shaft [5].
Note
▪ The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/Fr2 [3], must be inserted
into the shaft hole near the frame of the cover paper tray. The shaft
hole near the center of the tray is used for the shorter wire/Fr2 [3].
▪ When you install the pulley, raise the lift plate slightly to give slack
to the wire. Insert the wire ends one at a time into the shaft hole,
and secure them with the pulley/Fr1 [1] and the pulley/ Fr2 [2]. The
wires can be inserted easily in this way.
▪ When you install the pulley, be sure to fasten the pulley/Fr1 [1]
first, and then install the pulley/Fr2 [2].
[3] [5]
a03xf2c064ca
G-83
[1] [2] [3] [5] [4] 11. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the wire cover [2].
12. Remove the wire/Fr1 [4] and the wire/Fr2 [5] from the pulley [3].
Note
▪ When you install the wires, make sure that the wires are properly
routed inside the wire covers [2] and are not crossed each other.
[5] [4]
a03xf2c040ca
[3] [2]
13. Pull out the wire ends [4] of the wire/Fr1 [2] and the wire/Fr2 [3] through the
lift plate arm [1].
Note
▪ When you pull out the wire, pull it out carefully so as not to
damage it with sharp metal edges.
[1]
[4]
a03xf2c041ca
[1]
a03xf2c065ca
G-84
[1] [2] 15. Remove the lift wire/Rr1 [1] and the lift wire/Rr2 [2] in the same manner as
step 10 to 13.
Note
▪ After completion of the installation, check the lift plate to see if it is
horizontal.
a03xf2c042ca
5.2.8 Paper lift motor/1 (M2) and /2 (M3)

(1) Procedure
[5] [1] [2] • Rear cover/Rt (Refer to G.5.2.4 The rear cover/Lt1 and /Rt)
3. Remove each of 1 connectors [3].
4. Remove the six screws [4], and remove the paper lift motor assy/1 [5] and
the paper lift motor assy/2 [6] toward the rear of the main unit.
[1] [6]
[4]
[3]
[3] [1] [2] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].
a03xf2c044ca
G-85
[2] [1] 7. Remove the three screws [1] and remove the paper lift motor cover [2].
a03xf2c045ca
[2] [1] 8. Remove the two screws [1] and remove the paper lift motor/1 (M2) [2] and
the paper lift motor/2 (M3) [2].
a03xf2c046ca
5.2.9 Vertical conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove PF from the main body.
2. Remove the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), the vertical conveyance
clutch/2 (CL8), and the vertical conveyance clutch/3 (CL9) (Refer to F.6.3.1
[2] [1] Replacing the vertical conveyance clutch/1 (CL7), /2 (CL8), and /3 (CL9))
3. Remove the front door. (Refer to G.5.2.5 Front door)
G-86
[1] [8] 5. Loosen the screw [1], and release the filter replacement assy retaining
mechanism stopper [2].
6. Remove the E-ring [3], pull the shaft [4] toward you, and pull out the shaft [4]
through the hole [6] in the connector cover [5].
7. Release the lock [7] of the wire clamp and press it in toward the rear panel.
8. Remove the two screws [8] and remove the connector cover [5].
[7] [5]
[1] [2] [4] [5]
[3] [6]
a03xf3c048ca
G-87

[1] 10. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the vertical conveyance unit [2].
Note
▪ When you install the vertical conveyance unit [2], be sure that the
two tabs [3] on the vertical conveyance unit are fitted in the holes
[4] in the PF main unit.
[4] [1]
[2]
[3]
a03xf2c050ca
5.2.10 Horizontal conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the vertical conveyance unit. (Refer to G.5.2.9 Vertical conveyance
unit)
2. Remove the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), the horizontal
conveyance clutch/2 (CL11), and the pre-registration clutch (CL12). (Refer
to F.6.3.2 Replacing the horizontal conveyance clutch/1 (CL10), /2 (CL11),
and pre-registration clutch (CL12))
3. Disconnect the two connectors [1] and release the wires from the clamps.
a03xf2c051ca
G-88
[1]
a03xf2c052ca

6. Loosen the two screws [2] and remove the horizontal conveyance unit [3].
[1]
[2]
a03xf2c053ca

[2] [1]
Note
▪ When you install the horizontal conveyance unit, make sure that
the pin [2] is fitted in the notch [1] of the unit.
a03xf2c054ca
5.2.11 The multi feed detection board (MFDBR and MFDBS)

Note
▪ When you replace the multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS), be sure to replace the multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR) at the
same time.
▪ When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection
board (MFDBR, MFDBS). (Refer to I.4.3.14 Double Feed Detect Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
(1) Procedure
G-89
[1] [8] 1. Loosen the screw [1], and release the filter replacement assy retaining
mechanism stopper [2].
2. Remove the E-ring [3], pull the shaft [4] toward you, and pull out the shaft [4]
through the hole [6] in the connector cover [5].
3. Release the lock [7] of the wire clamp and press it in toward the rear panel.
4. Remove the two screws [8] and remove the connector cover [5].
[7] [5]
[1] [2] [4] [5]
[3] [6]
a03xf3c048ca

6. Open the jam processing lever PF5 [2], and remove the cover [3].
[2] [3]
a03xf2c056ca

8. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the multi feed detection board/R
(MFDBR) [3].
a03xf2c057ca
G-90
[2]
9. Remove the screw [1], slide the cover [2] in the arrow-marked direction, and
remove the cover down.
Note
▪ When you install the cover, be sure to insert the tab [3] on the
cover into the hole of the horizontal conveyance unit [4].
[1] [3] [4] [2]
a03xf3c058ca

11. Remove 2 screws [2], then remove the multi feed detection board/S
(MFDBS) [3].
a03xf2c059ca
G-91
6. PF-707m
6.1 Items you must not disassemble or reassemble
6.1.1 Framework panel/1, framework panel/2
(1) Positions from which removing is prohibited
• 8 mounting screws of the framework panel/1
• 20 mounting screws of the framework panel/2
[1] [1]
[2]
[2]
[2] [2]
[1] Screws that you must not remove [2] Screws that you must not remove
The framework panel/1 and the framework panel/2 are the parts of the PF framework parts. Therefore, removing the panels has a risk of a
scanning image trouble or a paper feed trouble. Therefore, do not remove the screws of the framework panel/1 and the framework panel/2.

1 Cover Right cover
2 Rear cover/Lt4
3 Rear cover/Lt2 and /Lt3
4 Rear cover/Lt1
5 Rear cover/Rt
6 Front door
7 Tray front cover
8 Tray section Tray
9 Lift wire
10 Paper leading edge separation fan/Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1
(FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), Rr3 (FM12)
11 Paper leading edge shutter solenoid/1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18)
12 Paper lift motor/1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9)
13 Paper feed suction unit
14 Paper feed belt
15 Paper suction fan/1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), /6 (FM6)
16 Paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2
(FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)
17 Shutter solenoid /Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /
Rr3 (SD16)
18 Paper feed check window
19 Conveyance section Vertical conveyance unit
20 Registration drive unit
21 Horizontal conveyance unit
22 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS)

CAUTION
▪ Be sure to remove each connection cable [1] before the operation to avoid damage when you install or remove the PF-707m.
G-92
[1] [1]
6.3.2 Right cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 12 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] [1]
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt4 [2].
[2]
[1]
6.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2 and /Lt3

(1) Procedure
G-93
1. Remove the rear cover/Lt4. (Refer to G.6.3.3 Rear cover/Lt4)

[1] 2. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt2 and rear cover/Lt3
[2].
[1]
[1] [2]
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Lt2. (Refer to G.6.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2 and /Lt3)
2. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt1 [2].
[1]
[2]
6.3.6 Rear cover/Rt
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover/Lt1. (Refer to G.6.3.5 Rear cover/Lt1)
[1] 2. Remove 10 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
[2]
[1]
G-94
6.3.7 Front door
(1) Procedure
CAUTION
The front door is heavy. Support it securely when you remove
it.
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the mounting plate [3] and the washer [4],
and then remove the front door [1].
CAUTION
▪ The front door [1] is heavy. Support it securely when you remove
it.
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
6.3.8 Tray front cover

(1) Procedure
G-95
1. Remove 6 screws [1], disconnect the connector [2], and then remove the tray
front cover [3].
Note
▪ Be noted that the shape of the front cover of the tray 1 differs from
the rest.
[1]
[3]
[2]
6.3.9 Tray
(1) Procedure for pulling out the tray
2. Insert a driver into the hole [2] and pull out the tray [4] while you lift up a little
[3] the tray lock lever [3].
[2]
[4]
[1]
a0gdt3c048ca
(2) Procedure for pulling out the tray at the maximum

CAUTION
▪ Be sure to pull out the trays one at a time. Avoid pulling out more than 2 trays at once. It causes the PF to turn over.
G-96
1. Open the front door. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (1) Procedure for pulling out the tray)
3. Pull out the tray. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (1) Procedure for pulling out the tray)
[1] [2]
(3) Procedure for removing the tray

CAUTION
▪ Be sure to perform this operation with 2 people because the try unit is heavy.
[3] 1. Pull out the tray completely. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2) Procedure for pulling out
the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove the tray front cover. (Refer to G.6.3.8 Tray front cover)
3. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, from the left rail and the right rail.
4. Hold the specified area [3] and bring it up. Remove the tray [2].
Note
▪ When you remove the tray, be sure to hold the specified area [3]
and never hold the parts easily deformed. It possibly causes
damage or the paper feed jam.
[1] [2]
[2] [3] [1] Note
▪ When you reinstall the tray, be sure to insert the 4 knobs [1] on the
rail to the shallow groove [2] for tray 1 and tray 2. For tray 3, be
sure to insert the knobs to the deep groove [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
G-97
6.3.10 Lift wire
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.6.3.9 Tray)
[4] [5] [3]
3. Remove the paper leading edge separation fan. (Refer to G.6.3.11 Paper
leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1
(FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12))
4. Remove the paper lift gear assy. (Refer to G.6.3.13 (1) Removing procedure
of the paper lift gear assy)
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, insert the screwdriver to the quadrilateral
hole [3]. Rotate the gear [4] to go through the hole [5] of the gear
[4]. Reinstall the gear [2] with the aligned position.
[2] [1] a0gdt3c096ca
[7] [2] [1] 6. Remove 4 E-rings [1] and then remove 1 each of the pulley covers [2].
7. Lift the paper lift plate [3] horizontally to loosen 1 each of the lift wires/Rt [4]
back and forth, and then remove it from the pulleys [5] and [6].
8. Lift the paper lift plate [3] horizontally to loosen 1 each of the lift wires/Lt [7]
back and forth, and then remove it from the pulleys [6].
[6] [5] [1] [2] Note
▪ When you hook the lift wire to the pulley, be sure to hook the
shorter lift wire/Lt [7] to the inside and the longer lift wire/Rt [4] to
the outside.
▪ When you install the wires, make sure that the lift wires are
properly routed inside the wire covers and are not crossed each
other.
9. Remove the pulleys [5] and [6].
Note
[4] ▪ When you reinstall the pulley, be sure that the metal bearing
comes to the outside.
[3]
a0gdt3c097ca
[7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] 10. Remove the E-ring [1] and move the bearing [2] into the inside.
11. Remove the E-ring [3] and move the gear [4] in to the inside and then
remove the pin [5].
12. Remove the E-ring [6] and move the bearing [7] into the inside.
a0gdt3c098ca
G-98
[2] [1] [4] [3] [5] [6] 13. Move the pulley [1] into the inside [2] and remove the lift wire/Lt [3] from the
shaft hole [4]. Move the pulley [5] and remove the lift wire/Rt [6].
Note
▪ Be sure to put the shorter lift wire/Lt [7] to the inside and the
longer lift wire/Rt [4] to the outside.
a0gdt3c099ca
[2] [1] [3] [4] 14. Pull out the lift wire/Rt and the lift wire/Lt [3] from the hole [2] of the lift plate
arm [1] to downward.
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put the circular cylindrical shape
wire end [4] from the downside of the hole [2].
▪ Be sure to install the shorter lift wire/Lt to the lift plate arm [5] and
the longer lift wire/Rt to the lift plate arm [6].
▪ When you pull or install it, be sure to pull out carefully and be
careful not to damage it with the corner of the metal plate.
[5] [6]
a0gdt3c100ca
6.3.11 Paper leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1 (FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12)
Note
▪ The height inside the trays differ for Tray1, Tray2, and Tray3.
Therefore, remove the tray before you remove the paper leading edge separation fan of Tray1 and Tray2.
For Tray3, you can remove the paper leading edge separation fan while it is installed to the PF.
(1) Procedure for Tray1 and Tray2

[1] 1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.6.3.9 Tray)
[2]
a0gdt3c006ca
G-99
[2] [3] [2] 3. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

4. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the 2 wiring harness clamp [3].
[1] a0gdt3c135ca
[5] [4] [7] [1] [2] 5. Remove the 3 screws [1] and move the paper leading edge separation fan/
Fr1 and the paper leading edge separation fan/Fr2 [2] in the arrow-marked
direction.
6. Remove the 3 screws [4] and move the paper leading edge separation fan/
Rr1 and the paper leading edge separation fan/Rr2 [5] in the arrow-marked
[6]
direction [6] to remove.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper leading edge separation fan/Fr1, the
paper leading edge separation fan/Fr2, the paper leading edge
[3] separation fan/Rr1, and the paper leading edge separation fan/Rr2
[5], be sure to press them against the air duct [7]. Secure the
screws so that there is no space between the contacting section
[8].
[8]
a0gdt3c007ca
(2) Procedure for Tray3

[1] 1. Remove the stopper and pull out the tray at the maximum. (Refer to G.6.3.9
Tray)
[2]
a0gdt3c008ca
G-100
[5] [4] [7] [6] [2] [3] 3. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
4. Remove the 3 screws [2] and remove the paper leading edge separation fan/
Fr3 [3].
5. Remove 3 screws [4] and remove the paper leading edge separation fan/Rr3
[5].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper leading edge separation fan/Fr3 [3]
and the paper leading edge separation fan/Rr3 [5], be sure to press
them against the air duct [6]. Secure the screws so that there is no
space between the contacting section [7].
[1]
a0gdt3c009ca
6.3.12 Paper leading edge shutter solenoid /1 (SD10), /2 (SD14), /3 (SD18)

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ The following pictures for the explanation are for the tray1 but the procedure is the same for the trays 2 and 3.
[7] [5] 1. Remove the paper leading edge separation fan. (Refer to G.6.3.11 Paper
leading edge separation fan /Fr1 (FM9), /Fr2 (FM13), /Fr3 (FM17), /Rr1
(FM4), /Rr2 (FM8), /Rr3 (FM12))
3. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the air duct [3] obliquely downward
[5] along the metal plate [4].
[4] Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to align the 2 fins [6] of the air duct
[3] with the notch [7] of the metal plate.
[3] [2]
[1]
a0gdt3c001ca
G-101
[1] [3] 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and the connector [2], and then remove the upper limit
sensor mounting plate [3].
[2] a0gdt3c002ca
[1] 5. Remove 4 screws [1], tilt the fan mounting plate [2], and then remove it in the
arrow-marked direction [3].
[3] [2] a0gdt3c003ca
[6] [5] 6. Disconnect the connector [1].

7. Remove the E-ring [2] and then pull out from the shaft [3].
8. Remove the 2 screws [4] and then remove the paper leading edge shutter
solenoid/1 (SD10), the paper leading edge shutter solenoid/2 (SD14), and
the paper leading edge shutter solenoid/3 (SD18) [5].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to install so that the wiring harness
[6] of the paper leading edge shutter solenoid is in the direction in
the picture.
[1] [4] [3] [2]

a0gdt3c004ca
G-102
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to install the air duct [1] temporary
and fix it with the screws [4] and pull the plunger [2]. Be sure that
the gap A of the plunger gets to the standard value at the position
where the shutter [3] contacts to the air duct [1].
▪ Standard value: A = 0.2 mm to 0.7 mm
[4] [1]
a0gdt3c005ca
6.3.13 Paper lift motor /1 (M7), /2 (M8), /3 (M9)

(1) Removing procedure of the paper lift gear assy
Note
▪ The removing and installing procedure of the paper lift gear assy is common between the trays 1, 2, and 3 but the installation
position is different at some part. This section shows the procedure for the tray 1 and the different parts are described in the
procedure.
1. Pull out the tray at the maximum. (Refer to G.4.3.20 (2) Procedure for pulling
[1]
out the tray at the maximum)
[2] a0gdt3c104ca
4. Remove 4 screws [2] (in the case of the trays 1 and 2 [1]) or 4 screws [4] (in
[1] the case of the tray 3 [3]), and then remove the reinforcing plate [5].
[2] [5]
[3]
[4]
a0gdt3c105ca
G-103
[1] a0gdt3c106ca
[1] [4] 6. Remove 5 screws [1], the E-ring [2], and the bearing [3] and then remove the
paper lift gear assy [4].
[3] [2]
[1]
a0gdt3c107ca
(2) Removing procedure of the paper lift motor

1. Remove the paper lift gear assy. (Refer to G.4.3.24 (1) Removing procedure
[2]
of the paper lift gear assy)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the support bracket [2].
[1] a0gdt3c108ca
G-104
3. Note
[2] [3] [1]
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put the pin [2] of the arm [1] into
the hole [3] and the pin [4] into the hole [6] of the support bracket
[5].
[4] [6] [5] a0gdt3c109ca
[5] [1] [2] [4] 4. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to align the bearing [3] on the
opposite side.
[5]
[3]
a0gdt3c110ca
7. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the top of the paper lift gear assy [2].
[1]
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to align 3 D-cut [3] positions of the
shaft and then tighten the screw [1].
[2] [3]
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c111ca
G-105
8. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the paper lift motor [2].
[2] [1]
a0gdt3c112ca
6.3.14 Paper feed suction unit

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.6.3.9 (3) Procedure for removing the tray)
4. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the paper feed suction unit [2] in the
[1] [2] arrow-marked direction.

Note
▪ When you reinstall the paper feed suction unit, be sure to align the
positioning pin [1] with the hole [2].
[1]
[2]
G-106
6.3.15 Paper feed belt

[2] 1. Remove the paper feed suction unit. (Refer to G.6.3.14 Paper feed suction
unit)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the neutralizing parts/Fr [2].
[1]
[1] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the neutralizing parts assy/Rr [2].
[2]
4. Remove the screw [1] two each and release the sensor assy [2]. Release the
[1] [2] wiring harnesses from the clamp.

[1]

[1]
7. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the suction duct assy [2] and the wiring
[3] [2] [1] harness [3] in the arrow-marked direction.
G-107
8. Note
[2] [1] ▪ The shaft [1] and the 2 bearings [2] are installed on the suction duct.
However, they are not fixed.
Be careful not to loose them.
[5] [3] 9. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the bearing [2].
10. Move the bearing [3] and then pull out the belt drive roller assy [4] from the
paper feed belt [5].
Note
▪ Be sure to check that the paper feed belt is not tilt against the roller
and rotates smoothly.
[1] [4] [2]
11. Remove the screw [1] one each and then remove the neutralizing parts/Fr [2],
and the neutralizing parts/Rr [3].
[3] [1]
[2] [1]
G-108
12. Remove 1 each of the E-rings [1] and the bearings [2]and then remove 2 belt
[1] [2] [3] driven roller assy /A [3].
13. Remove the E-ring [4] and the bearing [5] and then remove the belt driven
roller assy /B [6].
[6]
[4] [5]
[5] 14. Remove the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].
15. Remove the E-ring [3] and move the bearing [4] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
▪ When removing/installing the E-ring, be sure not to convert the
bearing support bracket [5].
[1] [2] [3] [4]

16. Slide the belt driven roller assy/C [1] to the arrow-marked direction and the
remove it. Remove 4 paper feed belts [2].
Note
▪ When reinstalling the paper feed belt [2], be sure to install it so that
the white line mark comes to the inside.
[1] [2]
6.3.16 Paper suction fan/1 (FM1), /2 (FM2), /3 (FM3), /4 (FM4), /5 (FM5), /6 (FM6)

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [2] [4] 1. Remove the tray. (Refer to G.6.3.9 (3) Procedure for removing the tray)
2. Remove the paper feed suction unit. (Refer to G.6.3.14 Paper feed suction
unit)
3. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness from the
clamps.
4. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the protecting sheet [3], the paper
suction fan/1 (FM1), the paper suction fan/3 (FM3), and the paper suction
fan/5 (FM5) [4].
G-109
[3] [1] [2] [4] 5. Disconnect the connector [1], and release the wiring harness from the
clamps.
suction fan/2 (FM2), the paper suction fan/4 (FM4), and the paper suction
fan/6 (FM6) [4].
6.3.17 Paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3 (FM20)
(1) Removing procedure of the side guide assy
1. Pull out the tray completely. (Refer to " G.6.3.9 Tray")
2. Loosen 1 each of the screws [1] of the side guide/Fr and the side guide/Rr.
3. Remove each of the screws [2], 2 each, and shorten the reinforcing plate [3].
[6] 4. Remove the screws [4] and remove the reinforcing hinge [5] from the pin [6].
Note
[5] [4]
▪ Be careful that the screw [4] is the stepped screw.
[2] [3] [1] [2]

5. Remove 1 each of the screws [1] at the 2 positions, and then remove 1 each
[5]
of the mounting metal fittings [2].
6. Lift up the cover/Fr [3] and the cover/Rr [4] and remove them.
Note
▪ When you remove or install the cover/Fr and the cover/Rr, be sure
to push the flap slightly into the side guide and not to damage it.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [1] [2] a0gdt3c072ca
G-110

[6] [4] 8. Remove 1 screw [1] and 2 screws [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, tighten the screws [2] and [3] temporary and
check the parallelism between the side guide/Fr and the side
guide/Rr with the paper, and then tighten the screws fully.
9. Remove the side guide/Rr [4].
10. While you press the side guide lock lever [5], remove the side guide/Fr [6].
[3] [3] [1]
[2]
[5]
[1]
(2) Removal procedures of the paper feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), the paper feed assist fan/Fr2 (FM15), the paper feed
assist fan/Fr3 (FM19).
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the cover [2], [3].
[5] [6] [7] [3] [2] Note
▪ The covers [2], [3] have the projection on the bottom, be sure to
put it into the positioning hole on the side guide.
▪ Be sure to check that the slide knob [4] moves smoothly after you
install the cover [3].
2. Remove the screw [5] and then remove the side guide fixed plate [6].
3. Remove 2 screws [7], and then press the side guide lock lever [9] slightly to
remove the lever cover [8].
[8] [9] [1] [4]
4. After removing 9 screws [1], rotate the small size guide [2], release the
[1] [4] magnet, and then remove the cover [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be careful that the cover does not press the
E-ring [4].
[1]
[1]
[3] [1] [2]
G-111
5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the supporting bracket [2] and the
[2] side guide lock lever [3].
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c076ca

[1]
a0gdt3c102ca
[3] [2] [1]
feed assist fan/Fr1 (FM11), the paper feed assist fan/Fr2 (FM15), and the
paper feed assist fan/Fr3 (FM19) [3].
Note
comes to the position in the picture.
▪ Be sure to install so that the protecting sheet does not slack.
a0gdt3c103ca
(3) Removal procedure of the paper feed assist fan/Rr1 (FM12), the paper feed assist fan/Rr2 (FM16), and the paper
feed assist fan/Rr3 (FM20)
G-112

[2] [1]
Note
2. Remove 2 screws [5] and then press the side guide lock lever [7] slightly and
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] a0gdt3c074ca
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c076ca
4. Remove the 2 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing hinge [2].
[1] [2]
a0gdt3c101ca
G-113

[1]
a0gdt3c102ca
[3] [2] [1]
feed assist fan/Rr1 (FM12), the paper feed assist fan/Rr2 (FM16), and the
paper feed assist fan/Rr3 (FM20) [3].
Note
comes to the position in the picture.
▪ Be sure to install so that the protecting sheet does not slack.
a0gdt3c103ca
6.3.18 Shutter solenoid/Fr1 (SD5), /Fr2 (SD10), /Fr3 (SD15), /Rr1 (SD6), /Rr2 (SD11), /Rr3 (SD16)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the side guide assy/Fr. (Refer to " G.6.3.17 Paper feed assist fan/
[2] [1]
Fr1 (FM11), /Fr2 (FM15), /Fr3 (FM19), /Rr1 (FM12), /Rr2 (FM16), /Rr3
(FM20)")
Note
3. Remove 2 screws [5] and then press the side guide lock lever [7] slightly and
[3] [4] [5] [6] [7] a0gdt3c074ca
G-114
4. After you remove 10 screws [1], rotate the small size guide [2]. Release the
[1] [4]
magnet and remove the cover [3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be careful that the cover does not press the
E-ring [4].
[1]
[1]
[3] [1] [2] a0gdt3c075ca
[1]
[3]
a0gdt3c076ca

7. Remove 2 screws [2] and then pull out the body [3] of the shutter solenoid/
Fr1 (SD4), the shutter solenoid/Fr2 (SD6), and the shutter solenoid/Fr3
(SD8) from the plunger [4].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the body [3] of the shutter solenoid/Rr, be sure
to install so that the wiring harness [5] is in the direction in the
picture.
[4]
[2]
a0gdt3c077ca
G-115
8. Remove 2 E-rings [1] and then pull out the pin [2] and remove the plunger
[3] [1] [2]
[3].
a0gdt3c078ca

[1] [2] [3]
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, pull the plunger [1]. Be sure to install so that
a. the gap A is the standard value at the position where the shutter
[2] contacts to the metal plate [3].
Standard value "a": = 0.2 mm to 0.7 mm
a0gdt3c079ca
6.3.19 Paper feed check window

(1) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray. (Refer to G.6.3.9 Tray)
[1]
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed check window [2].
[2] a0gdt3c126ca
6.3.20 Vertical conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
G-116

2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the protective cover [2].
3. Disconnect the connector [3] and then remove the wiring harness from the
clamp [4].
[3]
[4]
[1] [2]
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the vertical conveyance unit [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the vertical conveyance unit [2], be sure to
install it so that its projection [3] and the slit [4] are aligned to the
slit [5] and the projection [6] of PF.
[6] [4] [1] [3] [5]
[2]
[1]
6.3.21 Registration drive unit
(1) Procedure
G-117
1. Loosen 2 screws [1], and then remove the cover [2] in the arrow-marked
[1] direction.
[2]
[1]
3. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the registration drive unit [2].
[1] [1]
[1] [1] [2]

[2] Note
▪ Install so that the holes in the registration drive plate fit over 2
positioning pins [1]. Be careful not to damage the roller [2] with the
edge of the plate during the installation.
[1] [1]
6.3.22 Horizontal conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
G-118

2. Remove the rear cover/Lt2. (Refer to G.6.3.4 Rear cover/Lt2 and /Lt3)
3. Remove the registration drive unit. (Refer to G.6.3.21 Registration drive unit)
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the protection plate [2].
[3] 5. Disconnect the 3 connectors [3] and remove the clamp and release the
wiring harness.
[1] [2]
6. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and then remove the wiring harness from 4
wiring harness clamps [2].
[1]
[2]
7. Pull the wiring harness [1] through the hole [2] to remove the wiring harness.
[1] [2]
[1] [1] 8. Remove 4 screws [1].
G-119
[1] 9. Remove the horizontal conveyance unit [1].
6.3.23 Multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS)

Note
same time.
▪ When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection
board (PF). (Refer to I.4.3.14 Double Feed Detect Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Open the open close cover [1].
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the claw [2], and then remove the
protective cover/Up [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
G-120

4. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the multi feed detection board/R
(MFDBR) [3].
5. Remove the screw [1]. Pull the protective cover/Lw [2] frontward and remove
it.
[3] Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put 2 claws [3] of the protective
cover/Lw [2] into the holes [4] of the horizontal conveyance unit.
[4]
[4] [3]
[1] [2]
[1] [2] [3] (MFDBS) [3].
G-121
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 7. FA-502
7. FA-502
Numb Section Parts name
er
1 FA-502 FA-502

CAUTION
7.2.2 FA-502
(1) Procedure
CAUTION
▪ Be sure to perform FA-502 with 2 people because the unit is heavy.
1. Pull out the tray 2 at the maximum. (Refer to G.6.3.9 (2) Procedure for
pulling out the tray at the maximum)
2. Remove the connector [1] under the tray, and then remove the wiring
harness from the clamp [2].
4. Insert a half of the tray 2 back that has been pulled out.
5. Remove 4 screw [4].
NOTE
▪ Make sure that the tray 2 is inserted back into the PF in half, and
[3] [2] [3] [1] remove the screws [4]. If you remove the screws [4] while the tray
2 is pulled out, the FA-502 can deform.
[4]
[1] 6. Hold the FA-502 [1] and pull out the tray 2. Then, remove the FA-502 [1] in
the lower direction.
CAUTION
▪ When you pull out the tray 2, be sure to hold the FA-502 [1]. If you
pull out the tray 2 without holding the FA-502 [1], the FA-502 [1]
can fall and lead to an injury.
G-122
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 7. FA-502
steps in reverse.
Note
[3] [2] ▪ When you reinstall the FA-502 [1], be sure to insert 2 notches [2] to
each of the 2 screws [3] at the tray side.
▪ When you reinstall the FA-502 [1], be sure to insert the projections
[4] at 2 places to each of the 2 holes [5] on the tray side.
[1]
[5] [4]
[5] [4]
G-123
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 8. LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm
8. LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm

1 Cover section Upper door
Upper door/Rt (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)
Clutch cover
Paper feed cover
Right cover (LU-202m)
Right cover (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)
Front cover (LU-202m)
Front cover (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)
Rear cover (LU-202m)
Rear cover (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)
2 Up down section Lift wire (LU-202m)
Lift wire (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)
3 Paper feed section Paper size VR (VR1) (LU-202m)
Paper size VR (VR1) (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)
Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS), R (MFDBR) (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)

CAUTION
8.2.2 Upper door
(1) Procedure
[1] [7] [2] 1. Open the upper door [1].
2. Remove the hook [3] of spring [2] from the paper feed guide plate [4].
Note
▪ When you attach the spring, be sure to put its hook through the
hole on the plate from the outside.
3. Remove the 2 screws [5]. Slide the door [1] in the direction of the arrow [6].
Tilt it in the direction of the arrow [7] and remove it..
[5] [4] [3] [5] [6] a03wf2c011ca

Note
▪ Be sure to install the upper door aligning with the center of the marking-off line.
8.2.3 Upper door/Rt (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [2] 1. Open the upper door/Rt [1].
2. Remove 6 screws [2], and remove the upper cover/Rt [1].

Note
▪ When you install the upper door/Rt, be sure to align it to the projection.
8.2.4 Clutch cover
(1) Procedure
G-124
[1] [2] 1. Open the upper door [1].

2. Remove the 4 screws [2] and then remove the clutch cover [3].
[3] [2] a03wf2c012ca
8.2.5 Paper feed cover

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Remove the upper door. (Refer to G.8.2.2 Upper door)
2. Remove the 2 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2], and remove the paper feed
cover [3].
[2] a03wf2c013ca
8.2.6 Right cover (LU-202m)

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the 4 screws [2] and remove the right cover [3].
[2] a03wf2c014ca
8.2.7 Right cover (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [1] 1. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the right cover [2].
G-125
8.2.8 Front cover (LU-202m)

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.8.2.6 Right cover (LU-202m))
3. Open the front door [1] and remove the 6 screws [2].
[1]
4. Close the front door [1], and remove the front cover [3].
[2]
[3] [2]
a03wf2c015ca
8.2.9 Front cover (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)

(1) Procedure
1. Open the upper door and the upper cover/Rt.
[2] [1] 2. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.8.2.7 Right cover (LU-202XL,
LU-202XLm))
3. Open the front door [1], and remove 8 screws [2].
4. Close the front door [1], and remove the front cover [3].
[2] [3] [2]
G-126

Note
[3] [3] ▪ When you install the front cover, be sure to put 3 projections [2] on
the lower part of the front cover [1] to the edge of 3 screws [3].
[2] [1] [2]
8.2.10 Rear cover (LU-202m)

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] [1] [3] 1. Open the upper door.
3. Remove the 18 screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2] with the clutch
cover [3].
Note
▪ When the HT (option) is installed, remove the 4 screws [4].
[1]
[1] [1] [4]
a03wf2c016ca
8.2.11 Rear cover (LU-202XL)

(1) Procedure
G-127

[1] [1] 2. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.8.2.7 Right cover (LU-202XL,
LU-202XLm))
3. Remove the 21 screws [1] and remove the rear cover [2] with the clutch
cover [3].
Note
[2] [1] [1] [3]
[1] [1] [1]
[4] [4]
G-128
8.2.12 Rear cover (LU-202XLm)

(1) Procedure
[2] [1]
[3] [2] [2] [4]
[2] [2]
[5]
2. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.8.2.7 Right cover (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm))
3. Release the wiring harness [1] from the clamp.
Note
▪ The usage condition of the clamp changes depending on the option that the LU is connected to.
4. Remove the 21 screws [2] and remove the rear cover [3] with the clutch cover [4].
Note
8.2.13 Replacing the lift wire (LU-202m)

Note
▪ When HT-503 (option) is installed, remove it before operation.
▪ Be sure to press the tray down switch (SW100) while you charge to lower the paper lift plate to the bottom before operation.
▪ Remove the lift wires in the order of " G.8.2.13 (1) Removing and installing the paper feed motor assy", " G.8.2.13 (2) Removing
and installing the paper lift drive section", " G.8.2.13 (3) Removing and reinstalling the lift wire". Reinstall the preceding parts
following the removal steps in reverse.
▪ After you replace the lift wire, carry out the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment. (Refer to I.13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal
adjustment)
▪ There are 6 lift wires; the lift wire/Fr1 [2], the lift wire/Fr2 [3], the lift wire/Fr3 [4], the lift wire/Rr1 [5], the lift wire/Rr2 [6], and the lift
wire/Rr3 [7]. All of them are wound on the pulleys that are attached to the drive shaft [1]. The 4 lift wires; Fr2, Fr3, Rr2, Rr3 are the
same in the length, and are referred to as the drive wire/A which lifts the paper lift plate [8]. The other 2 lift wires; lift wire/Fr1 and
the lift wire/Rr1 are different in the length and attached to the spring/Fr [9] and the spring/Rr [10]. The lift wire/Fr1 and the lift wire/
Rr1, referred to as the assist wire/C and the assist wire/D respectively, pull down the paper lift plate stabilize the plate.
Drive wire/A (1450 mm) :lift wire/Fr2 [3], /Fr3 [4], Rr2 [6], /Rr3 [7]
Assist wire/C (1240 mm) :lift wire/Fr1 [2]
Assist wire/D (820 mm) :lift wire/Rr1 [5]
▪ Attach the cylindrical-shaped end [11] of the wire to the drive shaft, and attach the other ball shaped end [12] to the metal plate or
the spring.
G-129
[8] [10]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[11]
[4] [1]
[12]
FRONT [9] [3]
[2] a03wf2c017ca
[1] Drive shaft [2] Lift wire/Fr1

[3] Lift wire/Fr2 [4] Lift wire/Fr3
[5] Lift wire/Rr1 [6] Lift wire/Rr2
[7] Lift wire/Rr3 [8] Paper lift plate
[9] Spring/Fr [10] Spring/Rr
(1) Removing and installing the paper feed motor assy

[1] [2] 1. Remove the LU from the main body.
3. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.8.2.8 Front cover (LU-202m))
4. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.8.2.10 Rear cover (LU-202m))
5. Remove the paper feed clutch (CL101) [1] and pre-registration clutch
(CL102) [2]. (Refer to F.9.2.5 Replacing paper feed clutch (CL101) /pre-
registration clutch (CL102))
6. Remove the 2 screws [3] and remove the duct [4].
[4] [3]
a03wf2c018ca
G-130
[1] [2] [12] [11] [6] [3] [4] 7. Remove the wire binding [1] from the saddle [2].
8. Remove the 8 screws [3].
9. Loosen the screw [4] 1 or 2 turns.
Note
▪ Do not loosen the screw [4] too much. When you loosen the screw
too much, the clearance sponge [5] is possibly damaged.
10. Push the lower part of the bulkhead plate [6] a few millimeters in the direction
of the arrow [7]. Avoid the actuator [8] and push the tab [9] to remove the
lower limit sensor (PS101) [10].
Note
▪ When you remove and install PS101, be careful not to damage it.
▪ When you install, make sure that the tab [9] is securely inserted.
11. Slide the upper part of the bulkhead plate [5] to the direction of the arrow
[11], and tilt it until it comes off from the metal plate [12].
[3] [5] [7] [3]
[8] [10] [9]

a03wf2c019ca
[6] [3] [4] [6] [8] 12. Remove the 3 connectors [1] and remove the wire binding [2] from the
saddle.
15. Remove the 2 screws [6] and remove the paper feed motor assy [7] in the
direction of the arrow [8].
Note
▪ The screws [6] are shoulder screws. Make sure to attach the
screws properly so that the metal plate is fitted securely.
[5] [1] [2] [7] [5]

a03wf2c020ca
(2) Removing and installing the paper lift drive section

[2] [1] [4] 1. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.8.2.6 Right cover (LU-202m))
2. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.8.2.10 Rear cover (LU-202m))
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the sensor cover [2].
4. Remove the 5 connectors [3] and remove the wire binding [4].
[3] a03wf2c021ca
G-131
[3] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].

6. Remove the 3 screws [3] and the 2 screws [4].
Note
7. Remove the metal plate [5] and the bearing [6].
Note
▪ When you install the bearing [6], install it from the inner side of the
metal plate [5].
[2] [1] [6] [5] [4]
a03wf2c022ca
[1] [2] 8. Remove the positioning gear [1].

Note
▪ When you install it and the paper lift plate is at its lowest position,
align the edge surface of the actuator [3] of the remaining paper
detection gear [2] with the surface [5] of the remaining paper
sensor/4 (PS105) [4]. Install the gear [1].
▪ Make sure to attach the gear [1] in the correct direction.
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3] a03wf2c023ca
10. Remove the E-ring [4], then remove the gear [5] and the outer bearing and
the inner bearing [6].
[2] [3] [1] [6] [4] [5]

a03wf2c024ca
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

a03wf2c025ca
G-132
[3] [2] 13. Remove the 4 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2], and remove the paper lift
drive section [3].
Note
▪ Be careful not to damage the clearance sponge [4].
Reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1] [4]
a03wf2c026ca
(3) Removing and reinstalling the lift wire

[4] [3] [1] [2] 1. Remove the paper feed motor assy. (Refer to G.8.2.13 (1) Removing and
installing the paper feed motor assy)
2. Remove the paper lift drive section. (Refer to G.8.2.13 (2) Removing and
installing the paper lift drive section)
3. Release the hook [2] of the spring/Rr [1] provided at the back, and remove
the ball shaped wire end [3].
4. Remove the lift wire/Rr1 [7] from the pulley [4], [5] and [6].
5. Remove the E-ring [8] and the pulley [9], and then remove the lift wire/Rr1
[7].
[5]
[6] [7]
[8] [9] [6]
G-133
[2] [5] [4] [3] [9] [10] [1] 6. Check points when you reinstall the lift wire/Rr1
Note
▪ When you install the lift wire/Rr1 [1], insert the cylindrical-shaped
end of the wire [3] into the hole of the drive shaft [2]. Insert the
pulley [5] letting the wire through the cutout [4]. Wind the wire 7
turns clockwise [6] (from the panel [7] side to outward [8]) in a
single layer.
▪ When you install the lift wire/Rr1, be sure that the lift wire/Rr2 [9]
and the lift wire/Rr3 [10] are not on either side edge of the pulley.
Be sure that the lift wire/Rr1 [1] is wound 1 turn at the panel side
[7].
[8] [7]
[6] a03wf2c028ca
[4] [6] [7] [8] 7. Release the hook [2] of the spring/Fr [1] provided at the front, and remove
8. Remove the lift wire/Fr1 [6] from the pulley [4] and [5].
9. Remove the E-ring [7] and the pulley [8], and then remove the lift wire/Fr1
[6].
[1] [2] [3] [5]
a03wf2c029ca
[5] [4] [2] [3] [1] 10. Check points when you reinstall the lift wire/Fr1
Note
▪ When you install the lift wire/Fr1 [1], insert the cylindrical-shaped
turns counterclockwise [6] (from the panel [7] side to outward [8])
in a single layer.
▪ Before you install the lift wire/Fr1, rotate the shaft
counterclockwise to prevent the lift wire/Fr2 [9] and Fr3 [10] from
getting loose.
▪ Be sure to check that the wires are not loosened and are not on
[7] [10] [9] [8] [6]
either side edges of the pulleys.
a03wf2c030ca
G-134
[11] [10] [12] 11. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2], and then pull out the wire end [3].
12. Remove the lift wire/Fr2 [4] from the pulley [5], [6] and [7].
Note
▪ When you remove the wire from the pulley [5], [6] and [7], pull the
wire out from the convex portion [8] of the wire cover [9], then
move the wire cover.
13. Remove the screw [10], and remove the wire protective cover [11].
14. Pull the ball shaped wire end [12] and remove it straight up, and remove the
[9] lift wire/Fr2 [4].
[5] Note
▪ When you remove or install the lift wire, be careful not to damage it
[8] with the metal plate.
[4] [6]
[5] [7]
[1]
[2] [3]
a03wf2c031ca
[8] [7] 15. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and the pulley [2], and remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3].
16. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3] from the pulley
[4], the pulley [5] and the pulley [6].
17. In the same manner as step 13 and step 14, remove the screw [7] and the
wire cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3].
[5]
[6] [4] [3]
[2] [1] a03wf2c032ca
G-135
[7] [8] 18. Remove the E-ring [1] that is provided at the back and the pulley [2], and
remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3].
19. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3] from the pulley
wire protective cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3].
Note
▪ After you install the lift wire, make sure that the lift wire does not
[5]
contact with the metal plates or some other parts.
[4] [3] [6]
[1] [2] a03wf2c033ca
[7] [8] 21. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and the pulley [2], and remove the lift wire/Rr3 [3].
22. In the same manner as Step 12, remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3] from the pulley
wire protective cover [8], and remove the lift wire/Rr3 [3].
Note
[5]
[6] [3] [4]
[1] [2] a03wf2c034ca
Note
▪ After you install, carry out the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment. (Refer to I.13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal adjustment)
8.2.14 Replacing the lift wires (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)

Note
▪ When the HT-503 or HT-515 (option) is installed, remove it before operation.
▪ Be sure to press the tray down switch (SW100) while you charge to lower the paper lift plate to the bottom before operation.
▪ Remove the lift wires in the order of "Removing and installing the paper lift drive section", "Removing and reinstalling the lift
wire". Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
▪ After you replace the lift wire, carry out the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment. (Refer to Paper lift plate horizontal adjustment)
▪ There are 6 lift wires; /Fr1 [2], /Fr2 [3], /Fr3 [4], /Rr1 [5], /Rr2 [6], and /Rr3 [7]. All of them are wound on the pulleys attached to the
drive shaft [1] as shown. The 4 lift wires; Fr2, Fr3, Rr2, Rr3 are referred to as drive wire/A and drive wire/B which lift the paper lift
plate [8]. The other 2 lift wires; /Fr1 and /Rr1 are different in length and attached to the spring/Fr [9] and the spring/Rr [10] as
shown. The /Fr1 and /Rr1, referred to as assist wire/C and assist wire/D respectively, pull the paper lift plate downward to stabilize
the plate.
Up down wire/A (1409 mm): Lift wire/Fr3 [4], /Rr3 [7]
G-136
Up down wire/A (1753 mm): Lift wire/Fr2 [3], /Rr2 [6]

Assist wire/C (1240 mm): Lift wire/Fr1 [2]
Assist wire/D (820 mm): Lift wire/Rr1 [5]
▪ Attach the cylindrical-shaped end [11] of the wire to the drive shaft, and attach the other ball shaped end [12] to the metal plate or
the spring.
[10]
[8]
[5]
[7] [6]
[12] [11]
[4] [1]
[3]
[9] [2]
[1] Drive shaft [2] Lift wire/Fr1
[3] Lift wire/Fr2 [4] Lift wire/Fr3
[5] Lift wire/Rr1 [6] Lift wire/Rr2
[7] Lift wire/Rr3 [8] Paper lift plate
[9] Spring/Fr [10] Spring/Rr
(1) Removing and installing the paper lift drive section

[2] [1] [4] 1. Remove the right cover. (Refer to G.8.2.7 Right cover (LU-202XL,
LU-202XLm))
2. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to G.8.2.11 Rear cover (LU-202XL))
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the sensor cover [2].
4. Remove the 5 connectors [3] and remove the wire binding [4].
[3] a03wf2c021ca
G-137
[3] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2].

6. Remove the 3 screws [3] and the 2 screws [4].
Note
7. Remove the metal plate [5] and the bearing [6].
Note
▪ When you install the bearing [6], install it from the inner side of the
metal plate [5].
[2] [1] [6] [5] [4]
a03wf2c022ca
[1] [2] 8. Remove the positioning gear [1].

Note
▪ When you install it and the paper lift plate is at its lowest position,
align the edge surface of the actuator [3] of the remaining paper
detection gear [2] with the surface [5] of the remaining paper
sensor/4 (PS105) [4]. Install the gear [1].
▪ Make sure to attach the gear [1] in the correct direction.
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3] a03wf2c023ca
10. Remove the E-ring [4], then remove the gear [5] and the outer bearing and
the inner bearing [6].
[2] [3] [1] [6] [4] [5]

a03wf2c024ca
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

a03wf2c025ca
G-138
[3] [2] 13. Remove the 4 screws [1] and the 2 screws [2], and remove the paper lift
drive section [3].
Note
▪ Be careful not to damage the clearance sponge [4].
[1] [4]
a03wf2c026ca
(2) Removing and reinstalling the lift wire

1. Remove the paper lift drive section. (Refer to G.8.2.14 (1) Removing and
[4] [3] [1] [2] installing the paper lift drive section)
2. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.8.2.9 Front cover (LU-202XL,
LU-202XLm))
3. Release the hook [2] of the spring/Rr [1] provided at the back, and remove
4. Remove the lift wire/Rr1 [7] from the pulley [4], [5] and [6].
5. Remove the E-ring [8] and the pulley [9], and then remove the lift wire/Rr1
[7].
[5]
[6] [7]
[8] [9] [6]
G-139
[2] [5] [4] [3] [9] [10] [1] 6. Check points when you reinstall the lift wire/Rr1
Note
▪ When you install the lift wire/Rr1 [1], insert the cylindrical-shaped
turns clockwise [6] (from the panel [7] side to outward [8]) in a
single layer.
▪ When you install the lift wire/Rr1, be sure that the lift wire/Rr2 [9]
and the lift wire/Rr3 [10] are not on either side edge of the pulley.
Be sure that the lift wire/Rr1 [1] is wound 1 turn at the panel side
[7].
[8] [7]
[6] a03wf2c028ca
7. Release the hook [2] of the spring/Fr [1] provided at the front, and remove
[4] [6] [7] [8] the ball shaped wire end [3].
8. Remove the lift wire/Fr1 [6] from the pulley [4] and [5].
9. Remove the E-ring [7] and the pulley [8], and then remove the lift wire/Fr1
[6].
[1] [2] [3] [5]
G-140
[5] [4] [2] [3] [1] 10. Check points when you reinstall the lift wire/Fr1
Note
▪ When you install the lift wire/Fr1 [1], insert the cylindrical-shaped
turns counterclockwise [6] (from the panel [7] side to outward [8])
in a single layer.
▪ Before you install the lift wire/Fr1, rotate the shaft
counterclockwise to prevent the lift wire/Fr2 [9] and Fr3 [10] from
getting loose.
▪ Be sure to check that the wires are not loosened and are not on
[7] [10] [9] [8] [6]
either side edges of the pulleys.
a03wf2c030ca
11. Remove the E-ring [1] and the pulley [2], and then pull out the wire end [3].
[10] [11] [12] 12. Remove the lift wire/Fr2 [4] from the pulley [5], [6] and [7].
Note
▪ When you remove the wire from the pulley [5], [6] and [7], pull the
wire out from the convex portion [8] of the wire cover [9], then
move the wire cover.
13. Remove the screw [10], and remove the wire protective cover [11].
14. pull the ball shaped wire end [12] and remove it straight up, and remove the
lift wire/Fr2 [4].
[9] Note
[5] ▪ When you remove or install the lift wire, be careful not to damage it
with the metal plate.
[8]
[4] [6]
[5] [7]
[1]
[2] [3]
G-141
15. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and the pulley [2], and remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3].
[9] [8] 16. Remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3] from the pulley [4], [5], [6], and [7].
17. Remove the screw [8], remove the wire cover [9], and remove the lift wire/
Fr3 [3].
[6]
[7] [5] [4] [3]
[2] [1]
18. Remove the E-ring [1] that is provided at the back and the pulley [2], and
[8] [9] remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3].
19. Remove the lift wire/Rr2 [3] from the pulley [4], [5], [6], and [7].
20. Remove the screw [8], remove the wire protective cover [9], and remove the
lift wire/Rr2 [3].
Note
[6]
[4] [3] [5] [7]
[1] [2]
G-142
21. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and the pulley [2], and remove the lift wire/Rr3 [3].
[7] [8] 22. Remove the lift wire/Fr3 [3] from the pulley [4], [5], and [6].
23. Remove the screw [7], remove the wire protective cover [8], and remove the
lift wire/Rr3 [3].
Note
[5]
[6] [3] [4]
[1] [2]
Note
▪ After you install, carry out the paper lift plate horizontal adjustment. (Refer to I.13.2 Paper lift plate horizontal adjustment)
8.2.15 Paper size VR (VR1) (LU-202m)

G-143
1. Remove the paper from LU and close the upper door.

[2] [1] [3] [4] 2. Activate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of
the main body. After the paper lift plate stops at its uppermost position (listen
to the sound of the paper lift motor to figure out the stop status), deactivate
the both switches.
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the guide plate/Fr [1] and 2 screws [4] of the guide
plate/Rr [3], and widen the guide plate/Fr, the guide plate/Rr to the maximum
width.
5. Remove 3 screws [5] of the paper size VR (VR1) and remove the VR1.
[5]
a03wf2c035ca

[1] [2] 1. Widen the guide plate/Fr [1], the guide plate/Rr [2] to the maximum width.
2. Adjust the engagement of the gears of the paper size VR (VR1) and the
detection plate/Rr so that the holes [3] and [4] are aligned. Then tighten the
screw [5].
[5]
[3] [4]
a03wf2c036ca
3. After you install, place the paper in LU and check that the paper size is properly detected.
8.2.16 Paper size VR (VR1) (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)

G-144
1. Remove the paper from LU and close the upper door.

[2] [1] [3] [4] 2. Activate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of
the main body. After the paper lift plate stops at its uppermost position (listen
to the sound of the paper lift motor to figure out the stop status), deactivate
the both switches.
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the guide plate/Fr [1] and 2 screws [4] of the guide
plate/Rr [3], and widen the guide plate/Fr, the guide plate/Rr to the maximum
width.
5. Remove 3 screws [5] of the paper size VR (VR1) and remove the VR1.
[5]
a03wf2c035ca

[1] [2] 1. Widen the guide plate/Fr [1], the guide plate/Rr [2] to the maximum width.
2. Adjust the engagement of the gears of the paper size VR (VR1) and the
detection plate/Rr so that the holes [3] and [4] are aligned. Then tighten the
screw [5].
[5]
[3] [4]
a03wf2c036ca
3. After you install, place the paper in LU and check that the paper size is properly detected.
8.2.17 Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS), R (MFDBR) (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)

(1) Procedure
G-145
[1] [2] [1]

3. Release 5 clamps [1], remove the connector [2], remove 2 screws [3], and
[2] [3] then remove the multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS) [4].
[1] [4]
4. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and slide the shafts [2], 1 each, to the
inside, and remove the lower open close guide plate [3].
[2]
[1] [3]
[1] [2]
G-146
5. Note
▪ Be sure to install the lower open close guide plate so that the edge
of each spring [1] hangs the dent [2] on the guide plate.
[1] [2]
6. Remove 3 screws [1], and move the guide plate [2] down.
[2] [1]
[1]
7. Note
▪ Be careful not to tear the seal [1] on the guide plate when you
move the guide plate.
[1]
G-147
8. Remove 2 screws [1] from the upper of the guide plate that you moved.
[1]
9. Remove the connector [1], and remove the multi feed detection board/R
(MFDBR) [2].
[2] [1]
Note
▪ Be sure to install the guide plate so that the L-shaped metal [1] is
on the upper of the plate as the picture shows.
[1]
G-148
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 9. MB-506
9. MB-506
er
1 Paper feed section Paper size VR/BP (VR3)

CAUTION
9.2.2 Paper size VR/BP (VR3)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the MB-506. (Refer to F.10.2.1 Replacing the pick-up roller/BP, the
[1] paper feed roller rubber/BP, and the paper feed clutch/BP (CL14))
2. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the bypass cover/Lw [2].
[2]
[1]
4. Slide the side guide/Fr [1] and the side guide/Rr [2] inside.
[3] 5. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the side guide/Fr [1].
6. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the side guide/Rr [2].
[4]
[1] [2]
G-149
7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the bypass cover/Up [2].
[1] [2]
8. Note
▪ The gear [1] has 3 holes. The gear cover [2] has 1 hole. The side
guide rack/1 [3] has 1 hole. The side guide rack/2 [4] has 1 hole.
▪ When you install the bypass cover/Up, match each hole [5] to the
[5] positions in the picture.
[1] [2] [4]
[3]
[2] [1] 9. Remove the connector [1], and then remove the paper size VR/BP (VR3) [2].
G-150
10. MB-508
1 Cover sets Right cover/Fr and Right cover/Rr
2 Right cover/Lw
3 Rear cover
4 Bypass paper feed section Bypass tray
5 Paper size VR/BP (VR3)

CAUTION
10.2.2 Right cover/Fr and Right cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/Fr [2].
2. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the right cover/Rr [4].
[3] [4]
[2] [1]
10.2.3 Right cover/Lw
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the right cover/Lw [2].
[2]
G-151
10.2.4 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2] in the direction of
the arrow.
[1] [2] [1]

Note
▪ When you install the rear cover/Rt, be sure to match the metal
plate [2] on the lower part of the MB main unit with the groove [1]
on the rear cover.
[1]
[2]
10.2.5 Bypass tray
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the right cover/Fr and the right cover/Rr. (Refer to G.10.2.2 Right
cover/Fr and Right cover/Rr)
3. Release 2 connectors [1], and remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the
paper lift motor mounting plate assy [3].
[1] [3]
[2]
G-152
4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1], and then release the wiring harness.

[1] 5. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the bypass tray [3] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[2] [3]
[2]
10.2.6 Paper size VR/BP (VR3)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove bypass tray. (Refer to G.10.2.5 Bypass tray)
[1] 2. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the bypass cover/Lw [2].
[2]
[1]
G-153
4. Slide the side guide/Fr [1] and the side guide/Rr [2] inside.
[3] 5. Remove the screw [3], and then remove the side guide/Fr [1].
6. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the side guide/Rr [2].
[4]
[1] [2]
7. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the bypass cover/Up [2].
[1] [2]
8. Note
▪ The gear [1] has 3 holes. The gear cover [2] has 1 hole. The side
guide rack/1 [3] has 1 hole. The side guide rack/2 [4] has 1 hole.
▪ When you install the bypass cover/Up, match each hole [5] to the
[5] positions in the picture.
[1] [2] [4]
[3]
[2] [1] 9. Remove the connector [1], and then remove the paper size VR/BP (VR3) [2].
G-154
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 11. MK-744C
11. MK-744C
er
1 Status indicator light section Status indicator light

CAUTION
11.2.2 Status indicator light

(1) Connector position
[1]
[1] CN495 -
Connector specifications
Connector Pin Number Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
495 1 PAT1_DR Light ON signal L signal output when printing Open collector
is available
2 PAT2_DR L signal output while in the
scanning or printing
operation
3 PAT3_DR L signal output when an
abnormal stop occurs due to
jams, no paper, or no toner
4 PAT4_DR L signal output when the
toner supply message is
displayed
5 24V 24V DC source At all times 24V, 500mA
6 GND Ground - -
(2) Procedure (Short type)

[1] 1. Remove the arm cover/Rr and the upper cover/Rr2. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Top
Fr, arm cover/Rr)
2. Remove the cable pull out cover [2] and the status indicator light installation
cover [3] of the top cover/Rr [1].
[3] [2]
G-155
3. Remove the relay wiring harness [1] inside the status indicator light.
[1]
[1] [2] 4. Remove the nut [1] and the washer [2], and then remove the L-figured metal
plate [3] of the status indicator light.
[3]
[1] [2] [3] 5. Install the L-figured metal plate [3] to the main body with the 2 M4 x 8 TP
screws [1] and the 2 washers [2].
Note
▪ Install the L-figured metal plate in the direction that is shown in the
photograph.
▪ Fix the L-figured metal plate into place with the screws, making
sure that the metal plate is hitting the top of side of the main body.
[1] [2]
[1] 6. Pass the status indicator light [1] through the hole of the L-figured metal plate
[2].
[2]
[3] 7. Fix the status indicator light [3] in place with the nut [1] and the washer [2]
that you removed in step 4.
[1] [2]
G-156
[1] 8. Install the tube [2] with the cable tie [1].
Note
▪ Be sure to install the cable tie [1] within 10 mm of the edge of the
nut.
[2]
9. Install the cable tie [1] to the position marked "PAT" [2].
[1] [2]
10. Install the relay wiring harness [1] inside the status indicator light.
[1]
11. Install the status indicator light connector to the main body connector [1].
[1]
G-157
[1] 12. Install the 2 ferrite cores [1] to the position as shown in the picture.
[1]
13. Place the wiring harness to the cable tie [1] that was installed in step 9.
[1]
14. Install the upper cover/Rr2. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top
cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr)
Note
▪ Do not tuck the tube [1] under the cover.
[1]
15. Reinstall the arm cover/Rr. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm
cover/Rr)
(3) Procedure (Long type)

[1] 1. Remove the arm cover/Rr and the upper cover/Rr2. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Top
Fr, arm cover/Rr)
2. Remove the cable pull out cover [2] and the status indicator light installation
cover [3] of the top cover/Rr [1].
[3] [2]
G-158
3. Remove the relay wiring harness [1] inside the status indicator light.
[1]
[1] [2] 4. Remove the nut [1] and the washer [2], and then remove the L-figured metal
plate [3] of the status indicator light.
[3]
[3] 5. Install the locking saddle [2] and the status indicator light [3] to the fixing
plate [1].
Note
▪ Pass the status indicator light through the fixing plate, and then
[4] install the washer [4] and the nut [5].
▪ Since the wiring harness is placed in a later process, do not lock
[5] the locking saddle [1].
[2] [1]
6. Install the tube [1] to the status indicator light.
Note
▪ Be sure that the edge of the tube [2] is within about 5 mm from the
nut.
[1] [2]
[1] 7. Secure the tube [2] with the cable tie [1].
Note
▪ Be sure to install the cable tie [1] within 10 mm of the edge of the
nut.
[2]
G-159
8. Install the status indicator light using the 2 TP screws (M4 x 8) [1].
[1]
9. Install the cable tie [1] to the position marked "PAT" [2].
[1] [2]
10. Install the relay wiring harness [1] inside the status indicator light.
[1]
11. Install the status indicator light connector to the main body connector [1].
[1]
[1] 12. Install the 2 ferrite cores [1] to the position as shown in the picture.
[1]
G-160
13. Place the wiring harness to the cable tie [1] that was installed in step 9.
[1]
14. Install the upper cover/Rr2. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top
cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm cover/Rr)
Note
▪ Do not tuck the tube [1] under the cover.
[1]
15. Place the wiring harness to the wire saddle [1].
[1]
16. Reinstall the arm cover/Rr. (Refer to G.3.2.5 Top cover/Fr, top cover/Rt, top cover/Rr1, top cover/Rr2, top cover/Lt, arm cover/Fr, arm
cover/Rr)
G-161
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 12. OT-510
12. OT-510
12.1 Items not allowed to be disassembled/reassembled
12.1.1 Screws painted in red
Note
▪ Screws that are difficult to adjust in the field are painted in red to prevent them from being removed.
▪ Do not remove or loosen red painted screws in the field.

er
1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Upper cover /Rt1
4 Upper cover /Rt2
5 Upper cover /Fr
6 Upper cover /Rr
7 Upper cover /Md
8 Sub tray
9 Main tray section Main tray
10 Main tray up down motor (M11)
11 Main tray up down drive assy

CAUTION
12.3.2 Front door
(1) Procedure
G-162
[5] [4] [2] 1. Open the front door [1].

2. Remove the upper cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.12.3.6 Upper cover /Fr1)
3. Remove the screw [2] and release the wire [3].
4. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the door support bracket [5] and the
front door [1].
Note
it.
[3] ▪ When you install the front door [1], be sure to install so that the
shaft [6] is inserted into the hole [7] of the front door.
[1]
[6]
[7]
12.3.3 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
2. Loosen 2 screws [2] and then remove the rear cover [3] in the arrow-marked
direction.
[1]
[3]
[2]
12.3.4 Upper cover /Rt1

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/Rt1 [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
[2] [1]
G-163
12.3.5 Upper cover /Rt2

(1) Procedure
3. Open the front door [2], remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the upper
cover/Rt2 [4].
[1]
[2] [4]
[3]
12.3.6 Upper cover /Fr1

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the upper cover/Fr1 [2].
[2]
12.3.7 Upper cover /Fr2

(1) Procedure
G-164
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.12.3.6 Upper cover /Fr1)
2. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.12.3.4 Upper cover /Rt1)
[1] [2]
12.3.8 Upper cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.12.3.4 Upper cover /Rt1)
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/Rr [2].
12.3.9 Upper cover /Md

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.12.3.4 Upper cover /Rt1)
[1] 2. Remove the upper cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.12.3.7 Upper cover /Fr2)
3. Remove the upper cover/Rr. (Refer to G.12.3.8 Upper cover /Rr)
4. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/Md [2].
[2] [1]
12.3.10 Sub tray
(1) Procedure
G-165
1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1.

[1] 2. Remove the upper cover/Fr.
3. Remove the upper cover/Rr.
4. Remove the upper cover/Md.
5. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the sub tray [2].
[1] [2]
12.3.11 Main tray
CAUTION
After having lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
(1) Procedure
1. Activate the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body, and lower the main
[2] [3] tray [1] blocking the light of the main tray upper limit sensor (PS14) [2] during
up and down operation of the main tray. Then, deactivate the main power
switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
2. Unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove then main tray [1] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[1] [3]
12.3.12 Main tray up down motor (M11), main tray up-down drive assy
(1) Procedure
CAUTION
G-166
[3] [2] [1] 1. Activate the sub power switch (SW2), and block the light of the tray upper
limit sensor (PS16) [2] during up and down operation of the main tray [1].
Then, lower the main tray until it does not bother the removal of the paper
exit cover [3].
2. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and main power switch (SW1) of the
main body.

[2] [3] [2] 6. Remove 2 screws [4], and remove the main tray up down motor [3].
[2] [1] [2]
7. Remove the screw [1], and remove the main tray cover/Rr [2].
8. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the paper exit cover/Rr3 [4].
9. Remove 3 screws [5], and remove the paper exit cover/Rr2 [6].
[2]
[7]
[1]
[8] [5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[3]
11. Remove the 2 screws [1], and then remove the exterior mounting plate/1 [2].
[1] [2] [1]
G-167
12. Release the wiring harness [1] from the saddle and remove 2 screws [2], and
then remove the exterior mounting plate/2 [3].
[1] [2] [3]

[1]
14. Remove the screw [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[2] [1]
G-168
15. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the main tray up-down drive assy [2]
[1] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
▪ Be sure to remove the main tray up-down drive assy [2] while you
hold the main tray by hand.
If not to do so, the main tray drops off.
[1]
[2] [1] [1]
[1]
12.3.13 Note for replacing the board

CAUTION
▪ When the FNS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC70).
1. Install EEPROM (IC70) of the old control board [1] to the new control board [2].
[1]
[2]
G-169
A 2. Check points when you reinstall the EEPROM (IC70)

Note
▪ Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM (IC70) in the same
A direction.
▪ After you replace the FNS control board (FNSCB), conduct rewriting
of the firmware.
(Refer to J. Rewriting of firmware)
fd501fs2078c
G-170
13. OT-511
er
1 Paper exit section Paper exit unit
2 Cover Left cover/Up, /Lw
Rear cover
Conveyance door

13.2.1 Paper exit unit
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the tray [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
2. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the paper exit unit cover [2].
[2]
[1]
G-171

4. Remove 4 screws [2], and then remove the paper exit unit [3].
[2] [3]
[1] [2]
13.2.2 Left cover/Up, /Lw

(1) Step
[1] [2] 1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Up [2].
2. Remove 6 screws [3], and then remove the left cover/Lw[4].
[3] [4] [3]
13.2.3 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
G-172
[2] [1] 1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
13.2.4 Conveyance door
(1) Step
1. Remove the left cover/Up. (Refer to G.13.2.2 Left cover/Up, /Lw)
3. Turn the lever [1] in the direction of the arrow, and open the conveyance
door [2].
[2] [1]
[3] [1] [2] 4. Remove the screw [1] and release the wire [2].
Note
▪ Be careful not to open the conveyance door [3] too much while the
wire [2] is released. Otherwise, the exterior of OT-511 possibly gets
damaged.
[2] [1] 5. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and release the clamp [2].
G-173
6. Remove 1 screw [1] and 2 screws [2]. Remove the conveyance door [3] and
the hinge assy [4] in the direction of the arrow.
[1] [4] [2] [3]

Note
▪ Be sure to perform I.18.1 Conveyance door position adjustment after the conveyance door is installed.
G-174
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 14. EF-103
14. EF-103
The procedures are the same as the main body fusing unit.
er
1 Fusing section Temperature sensor/1 (TH1)
G-175
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 15. MK-740/MK-740m
15. MK-740/MK-740m
er
1 Paper feed section Paper feed tray
2 Paper exit section Paper exit tray

15.2.1 Paper feed tray
(1) Step
1. Release the wire [1] in the direction of the arrow.
2. Pull out the paper feed tray [2] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
[2]
[2] [1] 3. Reinstall the parts that were previously mentioned following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note
▪ Install the paper feed tray [1] by pressing the actuator [2] of the MB
in the direction of the arrow.
When you do not press the actuator [2], the paper feed tray [1] hits
the actuator [2] and the actuator [2] can be damaged or become
deformed.
15.2.2 Paper exit tray

(1) Procedure (for FS-532/OT-510)
1. Press the "FS Main Tray Replace" key on the Machine screen on the
operation panel of the main body, and lower the main tray.
2. Remove MK-740 or MK-740m.

3. When you install MK-740 or MK-740m, measure the gap between the FS panel and the edge of the banner tray. If it is not within the
standard, adjust it by "MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT MK-740 or MK-740m Installation position adjustment" (refer to I.16.1 Tray install
position adjustment).
NOTE
▪ MK-740m can be installed arbitrarily to the specifications FS-532 (W*5) and OT-510 (WY2).
G-176
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 16. RU-518/HM-103
16. RU-518/HM-103
16.1 Items that you must not disassemble or reassemble
16.1.1 Red-painted screws
Note
▪ Do not remove or loosen red-painted screws in the field.

1 Cover Upper cover/Rr
2 Paper exit cover/Lt
3 Duct/Rt
4 Duct/Lt
5 Rear cover/Up
6 Rear cover/Md
7 Water storage tank cover
8 Output density detection section Color sensor unit
9 Output tray section Output tray
10 Water supply section Water storage tank
11 Humidification section Humidification unit

16.3.1 Upper cover/Rr
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screw caps [1].
[1] [2] [3] 2. Remove 5 screws [2].
3. Open the paper exit cover [3], and remove the upper cover/Rr [4] in the
[4] [2]
16.3.2 Paper exit cover/Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the paper exit tray [1] with pushing in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
G-177
2. Remove 7 screws [1] and remove the paper exit cover [2].
[2]
[1]
16.3.3 Duct/Rt
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 8 screws [1] and remove the duct/Rt [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
16.3.4 Duct/Lt
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the duct/Lt [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
16.3.5 Rear cover/Up
(1) Procedure
G-178
1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.16.3.1 Upper cover/Rr)

3. Remove the rear cover/Up [2].
[1]
16.3.6 Rear cover/Md
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the duct/Lt. (Refer to G.16.3.4 Duct/Lt)
[2] 2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Md [2].
[1]
16.3.7 Water storage tank cover

(1) Procedure
[3] 2. Remove the water storage tank cover [2].
Note
▪ The water storage tank cover [2] is connected with the connector
[3].
▪ When you remove the water storage tank cover [2], disconnect the
connector [3]. Be sure not to damage the wiring harness.
[1] [2]
16.3.8 Color sensor unit

(1) Procedure
G-179
1. Open the paper exit cover [1], remove 2 screws [2], and open the paper exit
cover [1] to the maximum.
[2]
[1]
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the guide plate [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
G-180
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the color sensor unit[2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
5. Note
▪ When you put the color sensor unit on a workbench after you
remove it, place the unit in the direction as indicated in the figure
so that the rollers on the paper feeding side are not damaged.
[1] ▪ When you install the color sensor unit, hang its hook [2] on the
hole [1].
[1]
[2]
16.3.9 Water storage tank

(1) Procedure
G-181

tank cover)
[1]
3. Release 2 clamps [1] that are holding the wiring harness, and disconnect the
[4] [1] [2] connector [2].
[3]
[3]
[1]
G-182
6. Open the jam processing guide (RU8) [1].

8. Cut off 3 connections of each pipe [3].
Note
[1] [2]
9. Connect the water shut-off jig [2] to the pipe [1].

[1]
[2]
10. Pull out the water storage tank [1] in the direction of the arrow to the position
where you can disconnect the connection of the pipe [2].
[2] 11. Disconnect the connection of the pipe [2].
Note
12. Remove the water storage tank [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
16.3.10 Humidification unit
(1) Procedure
G-183

[2] 2. Remove the screw [2], and open the front door [1] to the maximum.
tank cover)
4. Remove the rear cover/Up. (Refer to G.16.3.5 Rear cover/Up)
5. Remove the rear cover/Md. (Refer to G.16.3.6 Rear cover/Md)
[1]
6. Remove the pipe [2] from the container [1], and remove the container [1] in
[2] the direction of the arrow.
[1]
7. Pull out the humidification unit. Insert a screwdriver through both the hole of
the main body [2] and the hole of the humidification unit [3] to hold the
humidification unit.
[1]
[2] [3]
G-184

9. Put the released wiring harness of the humidification unit away in 6 clamps
[2].
[2]
[2]
[1]
10. Release the jam release lever [1], and open the paper path assy [2] in the
11. Remove 3 screws [3], and remove the metal plate [4].
[2] [1]
[3] [4]
[2] [1] 12. Pull out the screwdriver [1], and draw the humidification unit in the direction
of the arrow.
G-185
13. Remove the pin [1].

14. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove 2 fixing parts [3].
[3] [1]
[2]
15. Attach 2 fixing parts [1] with the screws [2].
[3] [1] 16. Remove 2 screws [3].
[2] [3]
[1]
G-186
[1] 18. Cut off 2 connections of each pipe [1].
19. Attach the water shut-off jig [2] to the pipe [1].
[3] 20. Remove the humidification unit [3] in the direction of the arrow, and put it on
a workbench.
Note
▪ When you remove the humidification unit [3], keep it as horizontal
as you can not to spill the water in it.
▪ · If you tilt the humidification unit [3] a lot or tip it over, water spills
from the unit. Be careful to handle.
[2] [1]
CAUTION
When the RU control board (PCB1) is replaced, be sure to
replace the EEPROM (IC6).
G-187
1. Install the EEPROM (IC6) of the older RU control board [1] to the new RU
control board [2].
[1]
[2]

Note
A
direction.
▪ After you replace the RU control board (PCB1), conduct rewriting of
the firmware.
(Refer to REWRITING OF FIRMWARE)
G-188
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 17. RU-702
17. RU-702
Note

1 Cover Upper cover/Rr
2 Paper exit cover/Lt
3 Duct/Rt
4 Duct/Lt
5 Rear cover/Up
6 Rear cover/Md

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screw caps [1].
[1] [2] [3] 2. Remove 5 screws [2].
3. Open the paper exit cover [3], and remove the upper cover/Rr [4] in the
[4] [2]
17.3.2 Paper exit cover/Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the paper exit tray [1] with pushing in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
G-189
2. Remove 7 screws [1] and remove the paper exit cover [2].
[2]
[1]
17.3.3 Duct/Rt
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 8 screws [1] and remove the duct/Rt [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
17.3.4 Duct/Lt
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the duct/Lt [2].
[2] [1]
[1]
17.3.5 Rear cover/Up
(1) Procedure
G-190
1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.17.3.1 Upper cover/Rr)

3. Remove the rear cover/Up [2].
[1]
17.3.6 Rear cover/Md
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the duct/Lt. (Refer to G.17.3.4 Duct/Lt)
[2] 2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Md [2].
[1]
CAUTION
When the RU control board (PCB1) is replaced, be sure to
replace the EEPROM (IC6).
G-191
1. Install the EEPROM (IC6) of the older RU control board [1] to the new RU
control board [2].
[1]
[2]

Note
A
direction.
▪ After you replace the RU control board (PCB1), conduct rewriting of
the firmware.
(Refer to J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE)
G-192
18. RU-510
er
1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Left cover
4 Upper cover
5 Others RU control board (RUCB)

CAUTION
18.2.2 Front door
(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and remove the screw [2] and release the wire [3].
2. Remove the 3 screws [4] and then remove the door support bracket [5] and
[1] [2] [3] the front door [1].
Note
it.
[4]
[5] [4]
18.2.3 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
G-193
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
[1]
18.2.4 Left cover
(1) Procedure
[2]
[1] [1]
18.2.5 Upper cover
(1) Procedure
G-194

3. Remove the upper cover [3].
[2] [1]
[3]

1. When the RU control board (RUCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the
EEPROM (IC19). Install EEPROM (IC19) of the old control board [1] to the new
control board [2].
Note
direction.
▪ After you replace the RU control board (RUCB), conduct rewriting of
the firmware.
[1]
[2]
a04jf2c017ca
G-195
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 19. FS-531
19. FS-531
er
1 Cover Upper cover/1
2 Upper cover/2
3 Front door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover
7 Up down wire
8 Stacker section Stacker unit
9 Conveyance section Paper exit opening unit

CAUTION
19.2.2 Upper cover/1
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 2 caps [1].
[3]
cover/1 [4].
[4]
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c012na
Note
▪ When the PI (option) is installed, remove it.
(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover/1. (Refer to G.19.2.2 Upper cover/1)
[4] 2. Open the front door [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2], pull out the sub tray [3], and then remove the upper
cover/2 [4].
[1]
[2] 15jkf2c013na
19.2.4 Front door
(1) Procedure
G-196

[3]
2. Remove 2 screws [3] of the lower hinge plate [2] and then remove the front
[1] door [1].
[2]
15jkf2c034na
19.2.5 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to hook the notch [3] of the rear
[1] cover to the projection [4] of the frame.
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
15jkf2c035nb
19.2.6 Left cover
(1) Procedure
[2] 15jkf2c036na
19.2.7 Main tray
CAUTION
▪ After having lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
(1) Procedure
G-197
[1] fingers and down the main tray [2].
2. Deactivate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of
[2]
15jkf2c014na
[2] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] from the main tray.

4. Lift up the main tray [2] to unhook the up down stay [3], and remove the main
tray [2].
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c015na
19.2.8 Replacing the up down wire

CAUTION
▪ When the tray up down motor is removed, the main tray falls. Therefore, hold the tray with your hand and remove the motor.
Note
▪ The following procedure for replacing the wire shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of wires on
the front side are symmetrical to wires on the rear side.
▪ When you install the up and down wire, be sure to check the engraved marks "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side of the
wire bracket.
(1) Procedure
• Front door (Refer to G.19.2.4 Front door)
• Rear cover (Refer to G.19.2.5 Rear cover)
• Main tray (Refer to G.19.2.7 Main tray)
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing bracket [2]. Then, remove
the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3] and disconnect the connector [4].
[2] [1] 15jmf2c015na
G-198
[2] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the up down motor assy [2].
CAUTION
▪ When the up down motor assy [2] is removed, the main tray falls.
Therefore, hold the tray with your hand and remove the up down
motor assy.
15jkf2c017na
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire bracket [3] of the up down
wire [2] on the rear from the up down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
15jkf2c018na
5. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c019na
6. Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], and up down pulley/Lw [3]. Remove the up
down wire [4].
[5]
Note
[3]
▪ When you remove the up down pulley/Lw, be careful not to drop 2
pins [5].
[4]
[1] [2]
15jkf2c020na
G-199
7. Temporarily tighten the wire bracket [1] of a new up down wire [4] to the up
down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note
▪ When you install the up down wire [4], the shorter one [5] faces
down and the longer one [6] faces up.
[6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5] [3]
15jkf2c021na
8. Fasten the up down wire end with the wire end hole inside of the up down
pulley/Lw [1]. Through the notch [2] and wind 5 turns from inside to outside
with no slack. Then, align with the pin [3] and insert the up down pulley/L [1]
in the shaft.
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c022na
[2] [1] [4] [3] 9. Insert the wire winded up down pulley [1] in the shaft so that the pin [3] in
which the shaft [2] has been inserted fits in the groove [4] of the pulley.
15vlf2c009na
10. Hook the up down wire on the up down pulley/Up [1] and wind the wire 2
[1]
turns around the up down pulley/Lw [2] from inside to outside with no slack.
Then, through the notch of outside and fasten with the wire end hole [3].
Note
▪ Be sure not to overlap the short up down wire (first winded) and
the longer up down wire (latter winded) on the up down pulley/Up.
[3]
[2]
15jkf2c023na
G-200
11. Insert the pin [1] and the gear [2] into the shaft, and fasten them with the E-
ring [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c024na
12. Use a tension gauge or a spring balance and pull the belt tensioner [1] with a
specified force A [3] and tighten 2 screws [2].
Specified value [3]: A = 2.5kg ± 0.25kg
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c025na
[2] 13. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on the front and push down the
up down stay [3]. Then, tighten 4 screws [5] and [2] on the rear and front in a
horizontal position.
Note
▪ Be sure to check that the up down stay [3] is in a horizontal
position. When the stay is aslant, the main tray up down motor
(M3) or the gear is overloaded and has a risk of the damage.
[1]
[3]
[4] [5] 15jkf2c026na
19.2.9 Stacker unit
CAUTION
▪ Be sure to conduct this operation with more than 2 people.
▪ Be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
▪ When the FS is removed from the main body and you pull out the stacker unit, the FS possibly falls and there is a risk of the
injury.
(1) Procedure
[2]
• Booklet tray
2. Separate the FS from the main body.
4. Remove 2 connectors (CN22, CN23) [2] from the relay board (RB) [1] on the
rear of the stacker unit.
5. Remove the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3].
[3] [1] a0drf2c002ca
G-201
6. Remove the C-clip [1] and the shaft [2], and then separate the coupling arm
[2] [1]
[3].
[3] a0drf2c003ca
[1] 7. Remove 2 screws [1] that are provided on the rail stopper, and then pull out
Note
out stacker unit for balancing.
[2] [3] [1] 15vlf2c012na
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then lift the stacker unit [2] to remove it from the
[4]
guide rail [3].
[3]
Note
▪ Be careful of your posture when you remove it so that you do not
suffer backache.
[5]
[1] Note
▪ When you reinstall the stacker unit [2] to the guide rail [3], check
that the hook [4] is securely fit in the installation hole [5].
[2] [1]
[3] [5]
[4]
15vlf2c013na
19.2.10 Paper exit opening unit

(1) Procedure
G-202
[2] 1. Remove the following parts.

• Upper cover/1 or PI (option) (Refer to G.19.2.2 Upper cover/1)
• Upper cover/2 (Refer to G.19.2.3 Upper cover/2)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main paper exit opening cover
[2].
[1]
15vlf2c014na
3. Remove the screw [3] of the paper exit opening open close link [2] on the
[2] paper exit opening unit [1].
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c031na
[4] [1] [2] 4. Remove 1 camp [1], fixing screw [2] of the earth cord. 2 connectors [3], and
3 screws [4] of the clamp.
[3] 15jkf2c032na
[1] [2] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2], 1 each on back and front, and
then remove the paper exit opening unit [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
15jkf2c033na

CAUTION
▪ When the FS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC10).
G-203
[1]
[2]
a04df2e001ca
A 2. Check the point when you reinstall the EEPROM (IC10)

Note
A direction.
▪ After you replace the FS control board (FSCB), conduct rewriting of
the firmware. (Refer to J. Rewriting of firmware)
fd501fs2078c
G-204
20. FS-612
20.1.1 Screw not allowed to be removed on the folding stopper
1 screw that you must not remove on the folding stopper
[1]
15jmf2c017na
[1] Screw that you must not remove on the folding stopper -
Note
▪ For ease of understand, the position of the folding stopper is shown lower than the actual position in the illustration.
Adjust the tilt of the holding stopper on the slide shaft side of the holding stopper. (Refer to I.24.10 Half-fold stopper tilt adjustment) Do not
loosen the screws that you must not remove on the holding stopper. When you loosen those screws, the tilt of the holding stopper is changed
and the adjusting standard of the slide shaft is misaligned.

er
1 Cover Upper cover/1
2 Upper cover/2
3 Front door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover
7 Up down wire
8 Stacker section Stacker unit cover
9 Stacker unit
10 Conveyance section Paper exit opening unit

CAUTION
(1) Procedure
G-205
[1] 1. Remove 2 caps [1].

[3]
cover/1 [4].
[4]
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c012na
Note
▪ When the PI (option) is installed, remove it.
(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover/1. (Refer to G.20.3.2 Upper cover/1)
[4] 2. Open the front door [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2], pull out the sub tray [3], and then remove the upper
cover/2 [4].
[1]
[2] 15jkf2c013na
20.3.4 Front door
(1) Procedure
[3]
2. Remove 2 screws [3] of the lower hinge plate [2] and then remove the front
[1] door [1].
[2]
15jkf2c034na
20.3.5 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
G-206
1. Remove the 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to hook the notch [3] of the rear
[1] cover to the projection [4] of the frame.
[1]
[3] [4]
[2]
15jkf2c035nb
20.3.6 Left cover
(1) Procedure
[2] 15jkf2c036na
20.3.7 Main tray
CAUTION
▪ After having lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
(1) Procedure
[1] fingers and down the main tray [2].
2. Deactivate the main power switch (SW1) and the sub power switch (SW2) of
[2]
15jkf2c014na
[2] 3. Remove 2 screws [1] from the main tray.

4. Lift up the main tray [2] to unhook the up down stay [3], and remove the main
tray [2].
[1]
[3]
15jkf2c015na
G-207
20.3.8 Replacing the up down wire

CAUTION
▪ When the tray up down motor is removed, the main tray falls. Therefore, remove the motor while you hold the tray with your
hand.
Note
▪ The following procedure for replacing the wire shows the examples on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of wires on
the front side are symmetrical to wires on the rear side.
▪ When you install the up and down wire, be sure to check the engraved marks "F" on the front side and "R" on the rear side of the
wire bracket.
(1) Procedure
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the reinforcing bracket [2]. Then, remove
the wiring harness from 3 clamps [3] and disconnect the connector [4].
[2] [1] 15jmf2c015na
[2] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the up down motor assy [2].
CAUTION
▪ When the up down motor assy [2] is removed, the main tray falls.
Therefore, remove the up down motor assy while you hold the tray
with your hand.
15jkf2c017na
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire bracket [3] of the up down
wire [2] on the rear from the up down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
15jkf2c018na
G-208
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c019na
6. Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2] and the up down pulley/Lw [3], then remove
the up down wire [4].
[5]
Note
[3]
▪ When you remove the up down pulley/Lw, be careful not to drop 2
pins [5].
[4]
[1] [2]
15jkf2c020na
7. Temporarily tighten the wire bracket [1] of a new up down wire [4] to the up
down stay [2] with 2 screws [3].
Note
▪ When you install the up down wire [4], the shorter one [5] faces
down and the longer one [6] faces up.
[6]
[2]
[4]
[1]
[5] [3]
15jkf2c021na
8. Fasten the up down wire end with the wire end hole inside of the up down
pulley/Lw [1]. Through the notch [2] and wind 5 turns from inside to outside
with no slack. Then, insert the up down pulley/L [1] in the shaft to align with
the pin [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
15jkf2c022na
G-209
[2] [1] [4] [3] 9. Insert the wire winded up down pulley [1] in the shaft so that the pin [3] in
which the shaft [2] has been inserted fits in the groove [4] of the pulley.
15vlf2c009na
10. Hook the up down wire on the up down pulley/Up [1] and wind the wire 2
[1]
turns around the up down pulley/Lw [2] from inside to outside with no slack.
Then, through the notch of outside and fasten with the wire end hole [3].
Note
▪ Be sure not to overlap the short up down wire (first winded) and
the longer up down wire (latter winded) on the up down pulley/Up.
[3]
[2]
15jkf2c023na
11. Insert the pin [1] and the gear [2] into the shaft, and fasten them with the E-
ring [3].
[1]
[2]
[3] 15jkf2c024na
12. Use a tension gauge or a spring balance to pull the belt tensioner [1] with a
specified force A [3] and tighten 2 screws [2].
Specified value [3]: A = 2.5kg ± 0.25kg
[3]
[2]
[1]
15jkf2c025na
G-210
[2] 13. To push down the up down stay [3], loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket
[1] on the front. Then, tighten 4 screws [5] and [2] on the rear and front in a
horizontal position.
Note
▪ Be sure to check that the up down stay [3] is in a horizontal
position. When the stay is aslant, the main tray up down motor
(M3) or the gear is overloaded and has a risk of the damage.
[1]
[3]
[4] [5] 15jkf2c026na
20.3.9 Stacker unit cover

(1) Procedure
2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the stacker unit cover [2].
[1] 15jmf2c016na
20.3.10 Stacker unit
CAUTION
▪ Be sure to conduct this operation with more than 2 people.
▪ Be sure to unplug the power plug of the main body from the power outlet.
▪ If you pull out the stacker unit while you remove the FS from the main body, it causes falling of the FS and is at risk of injury.
(1) Procedure
• Booklet tray
2. Separate the FS from the main body.
4. Remove 3 connectors (CN22, CN23, CN24) [1] from the relay board (RB) [2]
on the rear of the stacker unit.
5. Remove the wiring harness from 4 clamps [3].
[3]
a04df2c001ca
[2] [1] 6. Remove the C-clip [1] and the shaft [2], and then separate the coupling arm
[3].
[3] 15jkf2c028na
G-211
7. Remove 2 screws [1] that are provided on the rail stopper, and then pull out
Note
[1] out stacker unit for balancing.
[2]
[1]
[3] 15jkf2c029na
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then lift the stacker unit [2] to remove it from the
[4] guide rail [3].
[3]
Note
▪ Be careful of your posture when you remove it so that you do not
suffer backache.
[5]
[1] Note
▪ When you reinstall the stacker unit [2] to the guide rail [3], check
that the hook [4] is securely fit in the installation hole [5].
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4] [1]
15jkf2c030na
20.3.11 Paper exit opening unit

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the following parts.
• Upper cover/1 or PI (option) (Refer to G.20.3.2 Upper cover/1)
• Upper cover/2 (Refer to G.20.3.3 Upper cover/2)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main paper exit opening cover
[2].
[1]
15vlf2c014na
3. Remove the screw [3] of the paper exit opening open close link [2] on the
[2] paper exit opening unit [1].
[3]
[1]
15jkf2c031na
G-212
[4] [1] [2] 4. Remove 1 camp [1], fixing screw [2] of the earth cord. 2 connectors [3], and
3 screws [4] of the clamp.
[3] 15jkf2c032na
[1] [2] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2], 1 each on back and front, and
then remove the paper exit opening unit [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
15jkf2c033na

CAUTION
▪ When the FS control board (FNSCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC10).
[1]
[2]
a04df2e001ca

Note
A direction.
▪ After you replace the FS control board (FSCB), conduct rewriting of
the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G-213
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 21. PK-512/513
21. PK-512/513
21.1 Items that you must not disassemble and adjust
21.1.1 Punch unit
(1) Parts that you must not remove
Do not loosen the following screws that you must not remove.
[1]
[2]
a04ef2c001ca
[1] Punch unit [2] Screws that you must not remove
When those screws are loosened, the prescribed functions are not kept.
21.2 Disassembly/reassembly parts list

er
1 Punch unit Punch unit
21.3 Disassembly/reassembly procedure
CAUTION
21.3.2 Punch unit
(1) Procedure (old conveyance section)
1. Remove the punch scraps box [1].
[1]
15kjf2c002na
G-214
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the punch drive board cover [1].
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c003na
[3] [4] 3. Remove 2 clamps [1].

4. Disconnect 2 connectors [3] and the relay connector [4] from the punch drive
board (PDB) [2].
[1]
[2]
15kjf2c004nb
[1] 5. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the punch unit cover [1].
[2]
15kjf2c005na
[3] [2] 6. Remove 2 connectors [2].

7. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the punch unit [3] from the FS.
[1]
[1] [2]
15kjf2c006na
(2) Procedure (new conveyance section)

[1]
G-215
[1] 2. Remove the 2 screws [1], and open the board cover [2].
[2]
[1]
[1] 4. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the punch unit cover [1].
[2]
15kjf2c005na
[3] [2] 5. Remove 2 connectors [2].

6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the punch unit [3] from the FS.
[1]
[1] [2]
15kjf2c006na
G-216
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 22. IQ-501
22. IQ-501
Note

Numbe Section Parts name
r
1 Cover Upper cover/Fr
2 Upper cover/Rr
3 Upper cover/Md
4 Rear cover
5 Scanner section/Scanner calibration section Scanner unit/1
6 Scanner calibration unit/1
7 Scanner cleaning brush/1
8 Scanner B&W standard part/1
9 Scanner white backing/1
10 Scanner black backing/1-1
12 Scanner unit/2
13 Scanner calibration unit/2
14 Scanner cleaning brush/2
15 Scanner B&W standard part/2
16 Scanner white backing/2
19 Colorimeter section/colorimeter calibration Colorimeter unit
20 section Colorimeter calibration unit
21 Colorimeter white calibration block

CAUTION
22.3.2 Note for assembling and disassembling the IQ-501

• Perform adjustments in the following situations.
• Situation
• When you remove the IQ-501 from the already running system which has the IQ-501, and operate the system.
• When you additionally install the IQ-501 to the already running system which does not have the IQ-501, and operate the system.
• Adjustments (Delete all the registered adjustment values and adjust again.)
1. Max Density Initial Adj. or Max. Dens. Initial Auto Adj.
• Perform the procedure for the setup.
• Prepare a standard paper.
2. Each Paper Type Color Adj.
3. Color Density Control (Manual adjustment)
4. Either one of the following adjustments
• Exact Color (when KM controller and Exact Color are used)
• G7 calibration (when KM controller and the G7 calibration are used)
• Outsourced controller calibration (when the outsourced controller is used)
22.3.3 Upper cover/Fr
(1) Procedure
G-217
[1] [2] 2. Remove 3 screw covers [1].

3. Remove 6 screws [2], and then remove the upper cover/Fr [3].
[3]
[2]
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screw covers [1].
[1] [2] [3] 2. Remove 6 screws [2] and then remove the upper cover/Rr [3].
[2]
22.3.5 Upper cover/Md
(1) Procedure
G-218
[1] [2] [3] [1] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr. (Refer to G.22.3.3 Upper cover/Fr)
4. Remove 9 screws [2], and then remove the upper cover/Md [3].
22.3.6 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 10 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
22.3.7 Scanner unit/1
(1) Procedure
G-219

[1]
[1]
3. Remove 9 clamps [1], and then release the wiring harness.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
G-220

5. Remove 2 screws [2] and open the front door/Lw [3].
[3] [2]
6. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the inside cover [2].
Note
▪ Do not remove the red painted screw.
[1] [2]
out procedure)
8. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the scanner mounting plate [2].
[1] [2] [1]

9. Remove the scanner unit/1 [1] while being careful with the rear wiring
harness.
[1]
11. Perform the following when you replace the scanner unit/1.
• Counter reset of the scanner unit/1 parts counter
• Scanner Read Position Adj. (Refer to I.4.9.89 IQ-501 Scanner Read Position Adj. (IQ Optimizer Adjustment))
• Scanner LUT Interpolation (Refer to I.4.9.90 IQ-501 Scanner LUT Interpolation (IQ Optimizer Adjustment))
22.3.8 Scanner calibration unit/1

(1) Procedure
G-221
[1] [2] 1. Pull out the conveyance mount fully. (Refer to F.20.2.1 (2) Maximum pulling
out procedure)
2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the cover [2].
3. While you push the lock release button [1] on the rear side, raise the
conveyance mount lever [2].
[1]
[2]
4. Note
▪ Turn the conveyance mount lever [1] when you insert the
[3] conveyance mount. When the conveyance mount is inserted while
the conveyance mount lever [1] is in the raised position, the
scanner unit/1 and scanner calibration unit/1 come into contact
with and damage each other.
▪ Perform the following steps when you turn the conveyance mount
lever.
1. Press the rear lock release button [3].
2. While you release the lock [2], turn the conveyance mount lever
[1].
[1]
[2]
G-222

[1] [1]
6. Remove the C clip [2] 1 each, and then remove the pin [3] 1 each.
[2]
[3]
7. Raise 2 holding arms [1], and then remove 2 driven rollers [2].
[1]
[2]
[2] 8. Remove 3 clamps [1], and then remove 2 connectors [2].
[1]
G-223
9. Remove the scanner calibration unit/1 [1].

[1] Note
▪ When you place the scanner calibration unit/1 [1] on a work bench,
place it upside down.
11. Perform the following when you replace the scanner calibration unit/1
• Scanner Correction Pos. Adj. (Refer to I.4.9.88 IQ-501 Scanner Correction Pos. Adj. (IQ Optimizer Adjustment))
22.3.9 Scanner cleaning brush/1, Scanner B&W standard part/1, Scanner white backing/1, Scanner black
backing/1-1, /1-2
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the scanner calibration unit/1. (Refer to G.22.3.8 Scanner
calibration unit/1)
stick/1 [3].
[2]
[3]
[1]
G-224
3. Keep rotating the calibration stick/1 until you can see the scanner cleaning
brush/1 [1].
4. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the scanner cleaning brush/1 [1].
[2]
[1]
[2]
5. Note
▪ Install the scanner cleaning brush/1 [1] so that the notch [2] comes
to the front.
[2] [1]
6. Keep rotating the calibration stick/1 until you can see the screw [2] of the
actuator [1].
7. Remove the screw [2], and then slide the actuator [1] in the direction of the
arrow.
[2]
[1]
G-225
9. Loosen the screw [2], and then remove the scanner B&W standard part/1 [1]
[2]
[1]
10. Keep rotating the calibration stick/1 until you can see the scanner white
backing/1 [1].
11. Loosen the screw [2], and then remove the scanner white backing/1 [1] in the
Note
[2] or make it dirty.
[1]
12. Note
▪ Install the scanner white backing/1 at the position where the white
label [1] is attached.
[1]
G-226
13. With the same procedure as the step 11 and the step 11, remove the
scanner black backing/1-1 [1] and scanner black backing/1-2 [2].
Note
▪ The white label is not attached at the installation position of the
scanner black backing/1-1 and scanner black backing/1-2.
▪ The scanner black backing/1-1 and scanner black backing/1-2 is
the same part.
[1]
[2]
15. Perform the following after you replace the scanner cleaning brush/1, scanner B&W standard part/1, scanner white backing/1, scanner
black backing/1-1, and scanner black backing/1-2.
• Counter reset of each part counter
22.3.10 Scanner unit/2
1. Remove the upper cover/Fr. (Refer to G.22.3.3 Upper cover/Fr)
[1]
[1]
G-227
4. Remove 6 clamps [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1] [2] [1] 5. Pull out the conveyance mount fully. (Refer to F.20.2.1 (2) Maximum pulling
out procedure)
6. Remove 7 screws [1], and then remove the scanner mounting plate [2].
Note
▪ Do not remove the red painted screw.
7. Slightly pull out the scanner unit/2 [1].
[1]
G-228
8. Press 3 rear wiring harness [1] toward the main unit.
[1]
9. Remove the scanner unit/2 [2] from the guide rail [1] in the direction of the
[2] arrow while being careful with the rear wiring harness.
[1] [1]
11. Perform the following when you replace the scanner unit/2.
• Counter reset of the scanner unit/2 parts counter
• Scanner Read Position Adj. (Refer to I.4.9.89 IQ-501 Scanner Read Position Adj. (IQ Optimizer Adjustment))
• Scanner LUT Interpolation (Refer to I.4.9.90 IQ-501 Scanner LUT Interpolation (IQ Optimizer Adjustment))
22.3.11 Scanner calibration unit/2

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Pull out the conveyance mount. (Refer to F.20.2.1 Pulling out/reinstalling the
conveyance mount)
2. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the conveyance mount front cover
[2].
[1]
[1] [2] [1] 3. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the cleaning guide [2].
G-229
[2] [3] 4. Disconnect 2 connectors [1] and remove the screw [2].
5. Slightly pull out the scanner calibration unit/2 [3] and lower the front side.
[1]
6. Pull out the scanner calibration unit/2 [1] along the rail to remove.
[1]
8. Perform the following when you replace the scanner calibration unit/2
• Scanner Correction Pos. Adj. (Refer to I.4.9.88 IQ-501 Scanner Correction Pos. Adj. (IQ Optimizer Adjustment))
22.3.12 Scanner cleaning brush/2, Scanner B&W standard part/2, Scanner white backing/2, Scanner black
backing/2-1, /2-2
(1) Procedure
out procedure)
stick/2 [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
G-230
3. Keep rotating the calibration stick/2 until you can see the scanner cleaning
brush/2 [1].
4. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the scanner cleaning brush/2 [1].
[2]
[1]
[2]
5. Note
[2] [1] ▪ Install the scanner cleaning brush/2 [1] so that the notch [2] comes
to the rear.
7. Loosen the screw [2], and then remove the scanner B&W standard part/2 [1]
[1]
[2]
G-231
8. Keep rotating the calibration stick/2 until you can see the scanner white
backing/2 [1].
9. Loosen the screw [2], and then remove the scanner white backing/2 [1] in the
Note
or make it dirty.
[1]
[2]
[1] 10. Note

▪ Install the scanner white backing/2 at the position where the white
label [1] is attached.
11. With the same procedure as the step 8 and the step 9, remove the scanner
black backing/2-1 [1] and scanner black backing/2-2 [2].
Note
▪ The white label is not attached at the installation position of the
scanner black backing/2-1 and scanner black backing/2-2.
▪ The scanner black backing/2-1 and scanner black backing/2-2 is
the same part.
[1]
[2]
13. Perform the following after you replace the scanner cleaning brush/2, scanner B&W standard part/2, scanner white backing/2, scanner
black backing/2-1, and scanner black backing/2-2.
• Counter reset of each part counter
22.3.13 Colorimeter unit
(1) Procedure
Note
▪ Be sure to replace the colorimeter unit and the colorimeter white calibration block at the same time.
G-232
[2] [3] [1] 1. Pull out the conveyance mount. (Refer to F.20.2.1 Pulling out/reinstalling the
conveyance mount)
3. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the protective cover [3].
4. Press the colorimeter unit [1] down.
[1]
6. Remove 3 screws [2], and then remove the colorimeter unit [3].

8. Perform the following when you replace the colorimeter unit.
• Measured Trigger Pos. Adj. (Refer to I.4.9.92 IQ-501 Measured Trigger Pos. Adj. (IQ Optimizer Adjustment))
• Rewriting of firmware (Q2) (Refer to J. REWRITING OF FIRMWARE)
22.3.14 Colorimeter calibration unit/1

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Pull out the conveyance mount. (Refer to F.20.2.1 Pulling out/reinstalling the
conveyance mount)
2. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the conveyance mount front cover
[2].
[1]
[1] [2] 3. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].

4. Remove the clamp [2] and release the wiring harness.
G-233
5. Attach the wiring harness which was released in step 4 to the clamp [1].
[3] [1] 6. Remove 4 screws [2].
7. Slightly pull out the colorimeter calibration unit [3] and lower the front side.
[2] [2]
8. Pull out the colorimeter calibration unit [1] along the rail and remove it.
[1]
22.3.15 Colorimeter white calibration block

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ Be sure to replace the colorimeter unit and the colorimeter white calibration block at the same time.
1. Remove the colorimeter calibration unit. (Refer to G.22.3.14 Colorimeter
calibration unit/1)
2. Keep rotating the colorimeter calibration unit [2] until you can see the
calibration block cover [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [3], and then remove the calibration block cover [1].
Note
▪ The spring is installed inside the calibration block cover. Be
careful not to lose this part.
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[2] [1] 4. Remove the colorimeter white calibration block [1].

Note
▪ Install the colorimeter white calibration block [1] so that the label
[2] faces inside.
G-234
Note
▪ When you install the colorimeter white calibration block [1], make
sure that there is no gap between the colorimeter white calibration
block [1] and the calibration block cover [2].
▪ Clean the colorimeter white calibration block with a hydro wipe
after installation. (Refer to F.20.4.2 Cleaning the paper temperature
sensor (TEMS4), colorimeter white backing, and colorimeter white
calibration block)

Note
▪ When the IQ control board (PCB1) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM.
1. Install the EEPROM of the old control board [1] to the new control board [2].
A 2. Check points when you reinstall the EEPROM

Note
▪ Be sure to install the "A" sections of the EEPROM in the same
A direction.
▪ After you replace the IQ control board (PCB1), conduct rewriting of
the firmware (Q1).
(Refer to J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE)
fd501fs2078c
G-235
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 23. UK-301
23. UK-301
1 Unit UK-301
2 Cover Cover
3 Board UK image processing board (IPB/U)
4 UK relay board (UKRYB)
5 SSD (SSD)
6 UK control board (UKCB)
7 HDD HDD/1 (HDD/1), HDD/2 (HDD/2), HDD/3 (HDD/3), HDD/4 (HDD/4)

CAUTION
23.2.2 UK-301
(1) Procedure
[1] [3] 2. Remove 2 screws [2].
3. Remove the UK-301 [3] in the direction of the arrow.
[2]
23.2.3 Cover
(1) Procedure
G-236
[1] 1. Remove the UK-301. (Refer to: G.23.2.2 UK-301)

2. Remove 12 screws [1], and then open the cover [2] in the direction of the
arrow.
[1] [2] [1]

23.2.4 UK image processing board (IPB/U), UK relay board (UKRYB)

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the UK-301. (Refer to: G.23.2.2 UK-301)
2. Open the cover. (Refer to G.23.2.3 Cover)
3. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the UK image processing board
(IPB/U) [2] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
4. Note
▪ When you install the IPB/U [1], connect the connector [2].
[3] ▪ When you install the IPB/U [1], check that the claw [3] is inserted
into the slit [4].
▪ When you tighten 3 screws [5], hit the IPB/U [1] in the direction of
the arrow.
[4]
[2] [1]
[5]
[1] 5. Remove the screw [1], and remove the UK relay board (UKRYB) [2] in the
[2]
G-237
[5] [2] 6. Note

▪ When you install the UKRYB [1], connect the connector [2].
▪ When you install the UKRYB [1], check that the claw [3] is inserted
into the slit [4].
▪ When you tighten the screw [5], hit the UKRYB [1] in the direction
of the arrow.
[1]
[3]
[4]
23.2.5 SSD (SSD)
Note
▪ When you replace the SSD (SSD), UK control board (UKCB), and HDD simultaneously, conduct the replacement procedure for
each part. Replace in the order of the SSD, UKCB, and HDD.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the UK-301. (Refer to G.23.2.2 UK-301)
3. Remove the UK image processing board (IPB/U). (Refer to G.23.2.4 UK
image processing board (IPB/U), UK relay board (UKRYB))
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the SSD (SSD) [2] in the direction of the
arrow.
[2] [1]

6. After the replacement of the SSD (SSD), conduct the following items.
• Serial number setting (Refer to I.4.5.9 Serial Number Setting)
• IO99-31 (Refer to I.4.7.4 (11) 060-00 to 099-99)
• Rewriting the firmware (Refer to J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE)
• Rebooting the main body
23.2.6 UK control board (UKCB)

Note
▪ When you replace the SSD (SSD), UK control board (UKCB), and HDD simultaneously, conduct the replacement procedure for
(1) Procedure
G-238

3. Remove the UK image processing board (IPB/U). (Refer to G.23.2.4 UK
image processing board (IPB/U), UK relay board (UKRYB))
[2] 4. Remove the UK relay board (UKRYB). (Refer to G.23.2.4 UK image
[1] processing board (IPB/U), UK relay board (UKRYB))
5. Remove the SSD (SSD). (Refer to G.23.2.5 SSD (SSD))
6. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the connector cover [2].

Note
▪ When you install 4 connectors [2], match the numbers on the
wiring harnesses and the ones on the board.
[1] [1]
[2]

[1] 10. While you hold the CPU cooling fan (FM33) [2], remove the UK control board
(UKCB) [3].
[2]
[3]
[1] [1]
12. After the replacement of the UK control board (UKCB), conduct the following items.
• IO99-32 (Refer to I 060-00 to 099-99)
23.2.7 HDD/1 (HDD/1), HDD/2 (HDD/2), HDD/3 (HDD/3), HDD/4 (HDD/4)

Note
▪ When you replace the HDD, replace the four HDDs (HDD/1, HDD/2, HDD/3, and HDD/4) at once.
▪ When you replace the SSD (SSD), UK control board (UKCB), and HDD at the same time, conduct the replacement procedures for
(1) Procedure
G-239

[2] 2. Open the cover. (Refer to G.23.2.3 Cover)
3. Remove the clamp [1], and release the wiring harness [2].
[1]

Note
▪ When you connect 4 connectors [2], match the numbers on the
4
wiring harnesses and the ones on the HDD.

3
3
2
2
1
[1]
[2]
6. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the HDD assy/12 [2].

[2]
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
[1]
[1] 7. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the plate spring [2].
[2]
G-240

Note
▪ When you remove the screw [1], release the HDD. Be careful not to
give a shock to the HDD.
9. Remove 2 screws [2], and then remove the support plate [3].
[2]
[3]
2 1
[2]
[1]
[3] 10. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the HDD/1 (HDD1) [2] and the HDD/2
(HDD/2) [3].
[2] [1]
[2] [1] 11. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the HDD assy/34 [2].
4
4
3
3
2
1
12. With the same procedure as step 7 to step 10, remove the HDD/3 (HDD/3)
[1] and the HDD/4 (HDD/4) [2].
4
[2]
3
[1]
14. After the replacement of the HDD/1 (HDD/1), HDD/2 (HDD/2), HDD/3 (HDD/3), and HDD/4 (HDD/4), conduct the following items.
• UK-301 Format HDD all data (UK) (Refer to I.4.17.4 Format HDD All Data (UK-301))
G-241
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 24. PI-502
24. PI-502
er
1 Cover Upper cover
2 Rear cover
3 Operation panel cover
4 PI unit PI unit

CAUTION
24.2.2 Upper cover
(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the cap [2] of the upper cover [1].
[2] 2. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the upper cover [1].
[1]
15jff2c009na
24.2.3 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
[3] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.24.2.2 Upper cover)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the connector cover [2].
[4]
3. Remove 3 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover [4].
[1]
[2]
[3]
15jff2c010na
24.2.4 Operation panel cover

(1) Procedure
G-242
[2] [1] 1. Remove the upper cover. (Refer to G.24.2.2 Upper cover)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and the relay connector [2], and then remove the
operation panel assy [3].
[3] 15jff2c011na
24.2.5 PI unit
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the connector cover [2].
[1] [2] 2. Remove the connector [1] and remove the spring [2].
[1] 3. Open the front door of FS and remove the 2 screws [1].
G-243
[2] 4. Move the PI unit [1] in the arrow-marked direction, release 2 locks [2] of the
positioning screw, and remove the PI unit [1].
[1]
G-244
25. FS-532
Note
(1) For the old type

Note
▪ The following screw is not painted in red for the old type FS-532.
The screw is not painted in red, but do not remove or loosen the screw in the field.
(a) 1 adjustment screw of the PI paper feed path
[1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove -

1 Cover Front door
2 Rear cover
3 Upper cover/Rt1
4 Upper cover/Rt2
5 Upper cover/Fr1
6 Upper cover/Fr2
7 Upper cover/Rr
8 Upper cover/Md
9 Front cover
10 Sub tray
11 Stacker section Stacker unit
13 Main tray up down motor (M11)
14 Main tray up down drive assy

CAUTION
25.3.2 Front door
(1) Procedure
G-245
[5] [4] [2] 1. Open the front door [1].

4. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the door support bracket [5] and the
front door [1].
Note
it.
▪ When you install the front door [1], be sure to install so that the
[3] shaft [4] is inserted into the hole [5] of the front door.
[1]
[4]
[5]
25.3.3 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
2. Loosen 2 screws [2] and then remove the rear cover [3] in the arrow-marked
direction.
[1]
[3]
[2]
25.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1
(1) Procedure
2. Remove the upper cover/Rt1 [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
[2] [1]
G-246
25.3.5 Upper cover/Rt2
(1) Procedure
cover/Rt2 [4].
[1]
[2] [4]
[3]
25.3.6 Upper cover/Fr1
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the upper cover/Fr1 [2].
[2]
25.3.7 Upper cover/Fr2
(1) Procedure
G-247
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.25.3.6 Upper cover/Fr1)

2. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.25.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1)
[1] [2]
5. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the upper cover/Fr2 [2].
[1] [2]
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.25.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1)
2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/Rr [2].
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1. (Refer to G.25.3.4 Upper cover/Rt1)
[2] [1]
G-248
25.3.10 Front cover
(1) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1] and remove the 5 screws [2].
[1] [2]
[2] [1] 2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the front cover [2].
25.3.11 Sub tray
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover/Rt1.
[1] 2. Remove the upper cover/Fr.
3. Remove the upper cover/Rr.
4. Remove the upper cover/Md.
5. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the sub tray [2].
[1] [2]
25.3.12 Stacker unit
(1) Procedure
G-249

4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stopper [2].
[2] [1]
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and then disconnect 9 connectors [2].

[3] 6. Remove 3 saddles [3] inside the metal frame, and release the wiring
harness.
7. Remove the stopper [4] and then pull out the shaft [5] in the arrow-marked
direction.
Note
▪ Fix the connector installation plate and the stacker arm to the back
of the stacker unit with tape.
[2] [1]
[5] [2]
[4]
G-250
8. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the stacker unit [2] from the rail [3].
[3] [1] [2]
[3] [1]
25.3.13 Main tray
CAUTION
(1) Procedure
1. Activate the sub power switch (SW2), lower the main tray [1] blocking the
[3] light of the main tray upper limit sensor (PS14) [2] during up and down
operation of the main tray. Deactivate the main power switch (SW1) and the
sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove then main tray [1] in the arrow-
marked direction.
[2]
[1] [3]
G-251
25.3.14 Main tray up down motor (M11), main tray up-down drive assy
(1) Procedure
CAUTION
[3] [2] [1] 1. Activate the sub power switch (SW2), and block the light of the tray upper
limit sensor (PS16) [2] during up and down operation of the main tray [1].
Then, lower the main tray until it does not bother the removal of the paper
exit cover [3].
2. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and main power switch (SW1) of the
main body.
5. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.26.3.4 (1) Procedure for fully pulling
out the SD unit)
6. Disconnect the 2 connectors [2] and remove the screw [1]. Then remove the
saddle arm.
[1] [2]
[3] [2] [4] [5] [4] 8. Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the connector mounting plate [3].
9. Remove the 4 screws [4], and remove the main tray up down motor [5].
[2] [4] [1] [4]
G-252
10. Remove the screw [1], and remove the main tray cover/Rr [2].
[2] 12. Remove 3 screws [5], and remove the paper exit cover/Rr2 [6].
[7]
[1]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[3]
14. Remove the 2 screws [1], and then remove the exterior mounting plate/1 [2].
[1] [2] [1]

15. Release the wiring harness [1] from the saddle and remove 2 screws [2], and
then remove the exterior mounting plate/2 [3].
[3] [1] [2]

[1]
17. Remove the screw [1], and remove the metal plate [2].
[2] [1]
G-253
18. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the main tray up-down drive assy [2]
[1] in the arrow-marked direction.
Note
▪ Be sure to remove the main tray up-down drive assy [2] while you
hold the main tray by hand.
If not to do so, the main tray drops off.
[1]
[2] [1] [1]
[1]

CAUTION
▪ When the FD control board (FDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC70).
1. Install EEPROM (IC70) of the old control board [[1] to the new control board
[2].
[1]
[2]
G-254

Note
A direction.
of the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G-255
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 26. SD-510
26. SD-510
Note

Note
▪ The following screw is not painted in red for the old type SD-510.
The screw is not painted in red, but do not remove or loosen the screw in the field.
(a) 6 attaching screws of the folding knife/1

[2] [3]
[1]
[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Folding knife assy/1
[3] Folding knife/1 -
(b) 2 attaching screws of the folding knife/2
[2] [3] [1]

[1] Screws which you must not remove [2] Folding knife assy/2
[3] Folding knife/2 -
G-256
(c) 2 fixing screws of the folding roller position fixation metal/Fr, 2 fixing screws of the folding roller position
fixation metal/Rr
[8] [1]
[7] [2]
[6] [5] [4] [3]
[1] Rear side [2] Folding roller mounting metal/Rr

[3] Folding roller position fixation metal/Rr [4] Screws that you must not remove
[5] Screws that you must not remove [6] Folding roller position fixation metal/Fr
[7] Folding roller mounting metal/Fr [8] Front side
(d) 2 fixing screws of the timing belt fixing part for stapler
[1]
[2]
[1] Timing belt fixing part for the stapler [2] Screws that you must not remove
G-257
(e) 3 fixing screws of the stopper motor (M105) assy
[1]
[2]
[1] Stopper motor (M105) assy [2] Screws that you must not remove
(f) 1 fixing screw of the adjustment plate assy/Fr, 1 fixing screw of the alignment plate assy/Rr
[3]
[2] [1]
[1] Adjustment plate assy/Fr [2] Adjustment plate assy/Rr

G-258
(g) 1 fixing screw of the timing belt fixing part for the adjustment plate assy
[2]
[1]
[1] Timing belt fixing part for the adjustment plate assy [2] Screws that you must not remove
(h) 1 fixing screw of the adjustment plate assy/Fr, 1 fixing screw of the alignment plate assy/Rr
[1]
[2]
[1] Entrance conveyance motor (M101) [2] Screws that you must not remove

1 Cover Front cover
2 Stapler unit cover
3 SD unit SD unit
G-259

4 Folding section Folding knife assy/1
5 Folding knife assy/2

CAUTION
26.3.2 Front cover
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the front cover [2].
26.3.3 Stapler unit cover

(1) Procedure
[2][3] 1. Pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.26.3.4 SD unit)
3. Release 2 claws [2] from the 2 holes [3], and remove the staple unit cover
[4].
[1] [4]
G-260
26.3.4 SD unit
(1) Procedure for fully pulling out the SD unit
[3] [1] [2]
3. Pull out the SD unit [1].

4. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the SD support stay/Lt1 [3].
5. Remove the screw [4], and then remove the SD support stay/Rt [5].
6. Remove the screw [6] to remove the 2 connectors [7], and then remove the
SD arm [8].
[7]
[6] [8]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
[4]
G-261
7. Insert the projection of the SD support stay/Rt [1] into the hole of the SD unit
[2].
8. Install the SD support stay/Rt [4] using the screw [3] that is removed in step
4.
[1][2] [4] [3] [1][2]

9. Insert the projection of the SD support stay/Lt1 [1] into the hole of the SD unit
[2].
10. Install the SD support stay/Lt1 [4] using the screw [3] that is removed in step
3.
Note
▪ When you install the SD support stay/Lt1, be sure to place the
projection [5] to the hole [6] of the SD support stay/Lt1.
▪ When you do not install the SD support stay and remove the SD
unit, the rail is deformed or the SD unit falls down.
When you pull out the SD unit, be sure to install the SD support
stay.
11. Remove the stopper screw [7], and then remove the SD unit.
[7] [6] [1] Note
▪ When you pull out the SD unit, lift the SD unit upward slightly.
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
12. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the SD support stay/Lt2 [2].
[1] [2]
13. Insert the projection of the SD support stay/Lt2 [1] into the hole of the SD unit
[2].
14. Install the SD support stay/Lt2 [4] using the screw [3] that is removed in step
11.
Note
▪ When you install the SD support stay/Lt2, be sure to place the
projection [5] to the hole [6] of the SD support stay/Lt2.
[6] [1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[5]
(2) Procedure for removing the SD unit
G-262
[4] [2] 1. Fully pull out the SD unit. (Refer to G.26.3.4 (1) Procedure for fully pulling
out the SD unit)
2. Remove the front cover of the FS. (Refer to G.25.3.10 Front cover)
4. Hold 2 handles [2] and then remove the SD unit [3] in the arrow-marked
direction.
Note
▪ When you remove or reinstall the SD unit, do not hold the
connecting bracket [4] of the stapler and clincher.
▪ When you reinstall the SD unit, be sure to place the mark [5] of the
SD unit to the metal frame [7] of the rail [6].
[2]
[1] [5] [3]
[7]
[6]
[2] [1] 5. Note

▪ When you reinstall the SD unit, be sure to place the rail [1] of the
SD unit on the rail [2] of the finisher.
26.3.5 Folding knife assy/1

(1) Procedure
G-263
1. Remove the SD unit. (Refer to G.26.3.4 (2) Procedure for removing the SD
unit)
2. Remove the front cover. (Refer to G.26.3.2 Front cover)
[4] 3. Remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to G.26.3.3 Stapler unit cover)
4. Rotate the folding knife drive shaft [1] to adjust the position of the clunk arm
[3] assy [2].
5. Remove the screw [3], 1 each, release the crank arm assy [2], and remove
[2] the bearing [4], 1 each.
6. Remove the folding knife drive shaft [1 ] in the arrow-marked direction.
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
[5] [2] 7. Note
[6] [7] [1] ▪ When you install the clunk arm assy [1], be sure to install it so that
the clunk arm [2] faces [3] the opposite direction [5] to the actuator
[4].
▪ When you install the clunk arm assy [1], be sure to install the
screw [7], 1 each, to prevent the clunk arm [2] from coming off
from the folding knife drive shaft [6].
▪ When you install the clunk arm assy [1], be careful that the leading
edge of the folding knife assy/1 does not bend by the contact with
the 1st folding roller.
[4] [1] [2] [7] [3]
G-264
8. Remove each E-rings [1], and remove each crank arm assy [2], the bearings
[4] [3], 2 each, and each collar [4].
[3] [1]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1] [2]
9. Remove the folding knife assy/1 [1] in the arrow-marked direction [2].
[6] [1] [2] 10. Remove 2 screws [3] and the assy stay/Fr [4] in the arrow-marked direction
[6].
11. Disconnect the collar [5].
Note
▪ When you remove the assy stay/Fr, be careful not to drop the
collar [5].
[5] [3] [4]
12. Lift the conveyance guide plate [1], and remove the folding knife assy/1 [2] in
the arrow-marked direction.
Note
▪ When you remove the folding knife assy/1 [2], be careful not to
drop the collar [3].
[2] [1] [3]
G-265
[2] [1] [3] 13. Disconnect the collar [1].

14. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the assy stay/Rr [3] in the arrow-
marked direction.
26.3.6 Folding knife assy/2

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the SD unit. (Refer to G.26.3.4 SD unit)
3. Remove the SD support stay/Rt and tilt the SD unit [1] in the arrow-marked
direction. (Refer to G.26.3.4 SD unit)
4. Remove the SD support stay/Lt. (Refer to G.26.3.4 SD unit)
5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit guide/1 [2].
7. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the cover [5].
8. Release the spring/1 [6] and the spring/2 [7].
9. Remove the C-clip [8] and pull out the shaft [9] in the arrow-marked direction,
and then remove the spring/1 [6], the spring/2 [7] and the paper exit guide/2
[10].
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [9] [10]
[6]
[7]
[8]
G-266
10. Remove each spring [1] and then remove each C-clip [2].
[1] 11. Slide the 2 each bearings [3] to the inside, and remove the paper exit driven
roller [4].
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2] [1] [4]
[3]
13. Remove the C-clip [3] and the belt holding material [4], and remove the belt
[2] [7] from the pulley [5] and the paper exit drive gear [6].
14. Remove the pulley [5] and the bearing [8], and remove the paper exit roller
[9].
[1]
[9]
[4] [6] [7] [5] [8]
[3]
G-267
[3] 15. Mark [2] the mounting position of the folding knife assy/2 mounting plate [1]
with a pencil or something.
16. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the folding guide [4].
17. Remove the screw [5], and remove the paper exit guide lock part [6].
[4] [5] [2] [1]
[6]
[3]
[1] [2] 18. Disconnect the connector [1] and release the wiring harness, remove 5
screws [2] and a screw [3], and remove the folding knife assy/2 mounting
plate [4].
Note
▪ When you install the folding knife assy/2 mounting plate [4], be
sure to install it according to the mark [5] that has been marked in
the step 15.
The 2nd folding misalignment occurs when the mounting plate is
not placed in the right place.
19. Remove the folding knife assy/2 [6] in the arrow-marked direction.
[6] [4] [2]

[3]
[5]
[2]
G-268
Note
▪ When you install the folding knife assy/2, be sure not to grab the
blade [1] or not to hit it against other parts.
It could lead to the skew or the damage of the blade.
[1]
G-269
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 27. PK-522
27. PK-522
Note

er
1 Punch unit Punch unit

CAUTION
27.3.2 Punch unit
(1) Procedure
[1]
15kjf2c002na
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the shooter [2] in the arrow-marked
direction.
[2] [1]
[2] [1] 3. Remove the rear cover of FS-532. (Refer to G.25.3.3 Rear cover)
4. Remove the connector from the punch drive board (PDB) [1] and release the
wiring harness, and then remove the relay connector [2].
G-270
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 27. PK-522
[1] [2] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the punch unit cover [2].
6. Disconnect the 2 connectors [1] and remove the clamp and release the
[2] [1] [2] [3] wiring harness.
7. Remove 6 screws [2], and remove the punch unit [3].
Note
▪ When you remove the punch unit, be careful not to damage the
conductive PET [4].
[4] [2]

9. After you reinstall the punch unit, conduct the following items in the order.
Punch unit mounting position adjustment
(Refer to I.30.2 Punch unit adjustment mounting position adjustment)
G-271
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 28. LS-506
28. LS-506
er
1 Cover Cover
2 Conveyance section Stacker tray up down wire

CAUTION
28.2.2 Cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Up [2].
[1] [1] 2. Remove 6 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover/Lw [4].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[3]
G-272
[1] [1] 3. Remove 5 screws [1] and move the front cover/Up [2] to the upper side.
5. Remove the front cover/Up [2].
[2]
[1] [1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
G-273
[3] 8. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove 3 knobs [2].
10. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the front cover/Lw [5].
[5]
[4]
[4]
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2036c
[2] 11. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover [2].
[1]
[1]
ls502fs2037c

13. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the front door [1].
[1]
[2]
ls502fs2038c
28.2.3 Replacing the stacker tray up/down wire

Note
▪ When you conduct this operation, be sure to place the stacker tray at the home position (the upper most position) before the
operation.
(1) Procedure
G-274
[3] [1] [4] 1. Remove the rear cover/Up and the rear cover/Lw. (Refer to G.28.2.2 Cover)
3. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the sensor mounting plate [3].
4. Remove 4 screws [4] and remove the stacker tray up down motor (M1) [5].
[2] [5] ls502fs2001c
5. Check points when you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor (M1)
[5]
Note
▪ When you reinstall the stacker tray up down motor (M1), be sure to
check that the belt [2] has been engaged with the gear [1]. Then
you can engage it with the gear [3] before you fasten the stacker
[4] tray up down motor (M1) [4].
▪ When the belt [2] is not horizontally attached between the gear [1]
and the gear [3], to make adjustments, you can rotate the encoder
[5] counterclockwise.
[1] [3]
[2] ls502fs2002c
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the motor mounting plate [3] from the
[2] stacker tray up down motor (M1) [2].
[3]
[1]
ls502fs2003c
[2] [1] [1] [2] 7. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2], 1 each.
ls501f2c001a
G-275
8. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and remove the pulley covers [2], 1 each.
[2] [1] [1] [2] ls501f2c002a
[4] [3] 9. Remove the screw [1] and remove the wire retaining bracket [2].
10. Remove 4 screws [3] and remove the pulley assy [4].
11. Remove the hexagon socket screw [6] and remove the tip [7] of the wire/1
[5].
[1] Note
▪ On the paper exit side, loosen 4 screws [3], bring down the pulley
assy [4] and release the tension of the wire/2 [5] before you start
the operation.
▪ When you reinstall it, the positions of the pulley assy on the paper
[2] feed side and the paper exit side become important. Be sure to
check the marked position of the pulley assy on the paper exit side
[5]
before you remove it.
[7]
[6]
ls501f2c003a
[1] [2] [4] 12. Release the winding of the wire/1 [2] from the pulley [1].
13. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the pulley [1] from the shaft [4].
[3] ls502fs2027c
14. Remove the wire retaining bracket [2] from the wire/1 [1].
[1] Note
▪ When you install the wire retaining bracket [2], install it to the
wire/1 [1] so that the bracket comes to the rear side.
[2]
ls501f2c004a
G-276
[1] [2] 15. Remove the wire/1 [2] from the pulley [1].
16. Reinstall a new wire/1 following the preceding steps 6 to 12 in reverse.
ls502fs2028c
[2] 17. Check point 1 when you reinstall the wire

Note
▪ When 2 wires at both sides are removed at the same time, the
stacker tray comes down. So, be sure to replace the wires one at a
time (The remaining wire holds the stacker tray in place.) )
▪ When you attach the pulley to the shaft, be sure to align the groove
[1] of the pulley with the pin [2] that has been inserted into the
shaft.
▪ Be sure to place it with the bead placement portion [3].
[1] [3] ls502fs2029c
[1] [2] 18. Check point 2 when you reinstall the wire
Note
▪ When you wind the wire around the pulley, be sure to wind it 8
turns [3] so that the direction of drawing-out [1] comes to the rear
panel side [2].
▪ The direction of drawing-out of the wire/1 is symmetrical to that of
the wire/2.
[3] ls502fs2030c
19. Check point 3 when you reinstall the wire

Note
▪ When you fix the pulley assy [1] on the paper exit side, be sure to
fix it at the same position as it was removed from.
[1] ls501f2c005a
20. Replace the wire/2 with a new one following the preceding steps 6 to 13.
21. Reinstall other parts following the steps 1 to 6 in reverse.
G-277
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 29. FD-503
29. FD-503
29.1.1 Folding/conveyance switching position adjustment section
Note
▪ Do not remove or loosen the screws [1], screws [2], screws [3] of the folding and the conveyance switching position adjustment
section on the front of the folding conveyance unit. The adjustment scale marked on the folding conveyance frame are used in
the factory.
[1] [3]
[2]
fd501fs2079c

Number Section Parts name
1 Cover section Upper cover/Fr + PI cover/Fr
2 Upper cover/Rr + PI cover/Rr
3 Upper door
4 Rear cover
5 Left cover/Fr
6 Left cover/Rr
7 Paper exit stopper cover
8 Right cover
9 Left cover/Up
10 Mount cover
11 Front door
12 Folding conveyance section 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)
13 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)
14 3rd folding roller
15 Folding conveyance section
16 Main tray section Main tray up down wire
17 PI section Multi feed detection board/1, /2

CAUTION
29.3.2 Upper cover/Fr + PI cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
G-278
[1] 1. Open the upper door [1] and the front door [2].
2. Remove 3 screws [3], pull out the PI cover/Fr [5] to the front side while you
raise it together with the upper cover/Fr [4].
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3] fd501fs2029c
[1] 3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the PI cover/Fr [3] together with
the upper cover/Fr [2].
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2030c
29.3.3 Upper cover/Rr + PI cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
[1]
2. Remove 3 screws [2] and pull out the PI cover/Rr [4] to the rear side while
you raise it together with the upper cover/Rr [3].
[4]
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2031c
29.3.4 Upper door
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr, the PI cover/Fr, the upper cover/Rr and the PI
cover/Rr.
[5] 2. Close the upper door [1].
3. Remove the E-ring [2] and then remove the bearing [4] of the upper door
open close shaft [3].
4. With the bearing [5] that is shifted to the front side, remove the upper door
[1].
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2032c
G-279
29.3.5 Rear cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Lw [2].
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2033c
29.3.6 Left cover/Fr
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Fr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2034c
29.3.7 Left cover/Rr
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Rr [2].
[1]
[2]
[1] fd501fs2035c
29.3.8 Paper exit stopper cover

(1) Procedure
G-280
[2]
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the paper exit stopper cover [2].
[1]
fd501fs2036c
29.3.9 Right cover
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the right cover [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2037c
29.3.10 Left cover/Up
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr, the PI cover/Fr, the upper cover/Rr and the PI
cover/Rr.
2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Up [2].
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2038c
29.3.11 Mount cover
(1) Procedure
G-281

2. Remove 3 screws [2] of the handle and then remove the handle.
3. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the mount cover [4].
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2039c
29.3.12 Front door
Note
▪ When you remove the front door, be sure to support it so that it does not fall down.
(1) Procedure
2. Remove the screws [2].
3. Remove the mount cover [3].
[2] 4. Remove 3 screws [4] while you push up the front door so that it does not fall
down, and then remove the support plate [5].
5. Remove the front door [1].
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
fd501fs2040c
29.3.13 Cleaning the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53)

(1) Procedure
G-282
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.29.3.12
Front door)
[1]
2. Open the guide plates [1] and [2].
3. Clean the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) [3].
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2041c
29.3.14 Cleaning the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54)

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.29.3.12
[1]
Front door)
2. Remove the screw [1] and turn over the sensor mounting plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2042c
3. Clean the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) [1].

[1]
fd501fs2043c
29.3.15 Cleaning the 3rd folding roller

(1) Procedure
G-283
[2] [1]
1. Open the front door and pull out the folding unit. (Refer to G.29.3.12 Front
door)
2. Remove the stand cover. (Refer to G.29.3.11 Mount cover)
3. The 2 springs [2] are hooked to the shaft [1]. Remove them from the shaft
[1].
4. Remove the screw [3] and then remove 2 springs [2], the support plate [4]
[5] and the guide plate [5].
[4]
[3]
fd501fs2044c
[1] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the guide plate [2].
[2]
fd501fs2045c
6. Clean the 3rd folding roller [1].
[1]
fd501fs2046c
G-284
29.3.16 Folding conveyance section
CAUTION
• The folding conveyance section is heavy. Be sure to
conduct this operation with 2 people.
• Be careful of your posture when you remove it. Be sure to
conduct this operation with 2 people so that you do not
suffer backache.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the front door and the rear cover.
2. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and then remove the wiring harnesses from the
7 wiring harness guides [3] of the coupling arm/Rr [2].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fd501fs2047c
[1] 3. Remove 2 C-clips [1].

4. Remove the shaft [2] and separate the coupling arm/Fr [3] and the coupling
[3] arm/Rr [4].
[4] [2]
fd501fs2048c
G-285
[1] 5. Remove the stopper screws [1], 1 each, from the left rail and the right rail
and pull further out the folding conveyance section.
[1] fd501fs2049c
[1] 6. Remove screws [1], 3 each, from the left rail and right rail.
[1]
fd501fs2050c
G-286
7. Hold the folding conveyance section [3] at the specified places [1] and [2]
and remove it while you lift it up.
[3]
CAUTION
▪ Be careful of your posture when you remove it. Be sure to conduct
this operation with 2 people so that you do not suffer backache.
Note
▪ When you lift up the folding conveyance section, be sure to hold
[1] the shaft at the places [1] and [2]. When you hold it at other places
such as the roller shaft or the guide plate, the deformation occurs.
[2]
fd501fs2051c
8. Keep the folding conveyance section [1] stand upright when it has been
[1] removed, or lay it down on the right-side [2].
Note
▪ Be careful not to lay it with the left side [3] down. The guide plate
[2]
gets deformed.
[3]
fd501fs2052c
[2] 9. Check points when you reinstall the folding conveyance section
Note
▪ When you install the folding conveyance section, make sure that
all 4 hooks [1] of the rails have engaged the attaching holes [2] of
the folding conveyance section.
▪ Push the top to the right and engage the upper rail and push the
[1] bottom to the left to engage the lower rail.
[1]
[2] fd501fs2053c
G-287
Note
▪ When you install the folding conveyance section, pull out the rail
[2] further than the length of the stopper [1]. Use the stopper screw [2]
to fasten it tentatively at its fully pulled-out position and fix the rail
on the opposite side with the tape [3]. It prevents the rail from
[1]
moving to inside for an easy and smooth operation.
[3] fd501fs2054c
29.3.17 Main tray up/down wire

(1) Procedure
CAUTION
When the gear box is removed, the up down stay is possibly
fall down. So, when you remove the gear box, be sure to
support the stay with your hands.
G-288
1. Check points when you remove or reinstall the main tray up and down wire
Note
[1] ▪ The following procedure for replacing the up down wire shows the
examples on the rear side. The figuration and the winding of wires
on the front side are symmetrical to wires on the rear side.
▪ There are 2 types of up down wires that are provided, one [1] on
the front side and the other [3] on the rear side. Be sure to use the
wire with the correct wire mounting plate direction when you
install it. The direction of the wire mounting plate distinguished
[2]
between these 2 wires when the shorter wire [2] is placed under
the longer wire.
Rear cover (Refer to G.29.3.5 Rear cover)
Left cover/Fr (Refer to G.29.3.6 Left cover/Fr)
Left cover/Rr (Refer to G.29.3.7 Left cover/Rr)
Front door (Refer to G.29.3.12 Front door)
[3]
[2]
fd501fs2056c
3. Remove 2 connectors [1] and 5 screws [2], and then remove the gear box [4]
together with the up down motor (M11) [3].
[3]
CAUTION
▪ When the gear box is removed, the up down stay is possibly fall
[1] down. So, when you remove the gear box, be sure to support the
stay with your hands.
[4]
[2]
fd501fs2057c
G-289
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the wire mounting plate [3] of the up
[2] down wire/Rr [2] from the up down stay [4].
[4]
[3]
[1]
fd501fs2058c
[5] 5. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the gear [3] together with the 2
[5] bearings [2].
6. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the gear [6] together with the 2
[4] bearings [5].
7. Remove the E-ring [7] and then remove the gear [8] and the pin [9].
Note
▪ When you remove the gear [8], be careful not to drop the pin [9].
[6]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[7] [9]
[8]
fd501fs2059c
G-290
[1]
[2]
fd501fs2060c
9. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the up down pulley/RrLw [2] and the
pin [3].
Note
▪ When you remove the up down pulley/RrLw [2], be careful not to
drop the pin [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2061c
10. Temporarily tighten the wire mounting plate [2] of a new up down wire/Rr [1]
to the up down stay [3] with 2 screws [4].
Note
▪ Place the shorter wire below the longer one with the wire
supporting part of the mounting plate outside to install the up
down wires.
[1] ▪ There are 2 types of up down wires, one for the front side and the
[4] other for the rear side. These 2 wires are different in the direction
[2] of the wire mounting plates. Be sure to use a wire that fits with the
direction of a wire mounting plate.
[3]
fd501fs2062c
G-291
11. Fasten the new up down wire/Rr [1] with the wire end [3] that is provided on
the inside of the up down pulley/RrLw [2] and insert it into the shaft [6].
Rotate the up down pulley/RrLw [2] and wind it 5.5 turns clockwise from
inside to outside around the up and down pulley with no slack. Then insert
the up down pulley/RrLw [2] fully onto the shaft so that it coincides with the
[2] [1] pin [4] and fasten it with the E-ring [5]. If the angle does not coincide with the
pin [4], move up and down the front side of the up down tray to change the
angle of the shaft [6].
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
fd501fs2063c
12. Hook up the up down wire/Rr [1] onto the up down pulley/RrUp [3] through
the relay pulley/Rr [2].
[3] [1]
[2]
fd501fs2064c
13. Wind the up down wire/Rr [1] 2 turns counterclockwise from inside to outside
around the up down pulley/RrLw [2] with no slack and fasten it with the wire
end [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
fd501fs2065c
G-292
14. The route along which the up down wire/Rr passes

The route along which the up down wire/Rr passes is, on the whole, as the
drawings are shown in the left.
fd501fs2066c
15. Pull up the wire tensioner [1] upward with a designated force "A," with a
tension gauge or a spring balance. Fasten it with the 3 screws [2].
Specified value: A = 2.5kg ± 0.25kg
[2]
[1]
fd501fs2067c
16. Reinstall the 3 gears [1] following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
fd501fs2068c
G-293
[4] 17. With the up down stay [1] that is held in a horizontal position, tighten the 2
screws [3] of the wire mounting plate [2].
[1] Note
▪ Move the up and down stay up and down and check to see if it
moves smoothly. If it does not move smoothly, adjust it again so
[5]
that it becomes horizontal.
▪ Check the up down wire [4] if it gets behind the actuator plate [5]. If
it gets behind the douser, an unnecessary load is applied to the up
[3] [2] down wire [4] when the up down stay [1] goes up.
fd501fs2069c
29.3.18 Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB/1) and /2 (MFDB/2)

Note
▪ When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing the multi feed detection board
(PI). (Refer to I.4.7.18 Adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (PI))
(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the multi feed detection board/1
(MFDB/1) cover [2].
[2] [1] fd501fs2070c

(MFDB/1) [3].
[3] [2] [1]

4. Open the front door and then open the conveyance guide plate/2 [1] in the
upper right direction.
[1] fd501fs2072c
G-294

6. Remove the wiring harness of the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1)
from the wiring harness guide [2].
[2]
[2] 7. Turn around the conveyance guide plate/2 assy [1] inside the machine and
pull it to the outside.
cover [3].
Note
▪ When you turn it around, or when disassembling or reassembling
it, be careful not to damage the wiring harness.
[1] [3] fd501fs2074c

(MFDB/2) [3].
[3] [2] [1]

(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) and the multi feed detection board/2 (MFDB/2)
• The shape of multi feed detection board/1 (MFDB/1) [1] and Multi feed
[2] detection board/2 (MFDB/2) [2] are different. When you reinstall them, be
sure to place them at the proper positions.
[1]

CAUTION
▪ When the FD control board (FDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G-295
Note
▪ Be sure to place the SW3 [3] same as the old FDCB. (Refer to
L.2.21.1 FD control board (FDCB))
[1]
[2] [3]
fd501fs2077c

Note
A direction.
▪ After you replace the FD control board (FDCB), conduct rewriting of
the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G-296
30. SD-506
30.1.1 Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50), Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
• 1 fixing screw of the mounting plate on each trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) and trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
a0h2t3c061ca
[1] Screw not allowed to be adjusted or removed [2] Mounting plate

[3] Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) [4] Screw not allowed to be adjusted or removed
[5] Mounting plate [6] Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)
• The trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) detects the home position of the trimmer blade. Once the home position is out of alignment, the
trimmer blade gets out from the trimmer press plate. It prevents the paper from entering to the trimmer section and causes the trimming
error or damages the trimmer blade retaining plate. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
• The trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) detects the upper limit of the trimmer blade after the completion of the trimming. Once the
upper limit detection is out of alignment, the paper fails to be trimmed because the trimmer blade stops before the completion. The
trimmer blade and the trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the trimmer board deeply. Therefore, be sure not to
change the installation position of PS51.
30.1.2 Trimmer completion sensor (PS62)

• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer completion sensor (PS62) mounting plate
[3] [2] [1]
a0h2t3c062ca
[1] Mounting plate [2] Screws which you must not adjust and remove
[3] Trimmer completion sensor (PS62) -
• The trimmer completion sensor (PS62) detects the completion of the trimming. Once the timing of the trimmer completion is out of
alignment, the paper fails to be trimmed or the trimmer blade. The trimmer board get damaged because the trimmer blade cuts in the
trimmer board deeply. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS50.
30.1.3 Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66)

• 1 fixing screw of the wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) mounting plate
G-297
(a) Previous trimmer unit
[3] [2] [1]

a0h2t3c063ca
[1] Mounting plate [2] Screws which you must not adjust and remove
[3] Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) -
(b) New trimmer unit
[3] [2] [1]
[1] Wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) [2] Mounting plate

[3] Screws which you must not adjust and remove -
• The wire slack prevention sensor (PS66) detects the slack of the winding wire on the trimmer blade. Once the detection position is out of
alignment, the wire is removed from the winding pulley and damages the trimmer unit. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation
position of PS66.
30.1.4 Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52), Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)
• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) mounting plate
• 1 fixing screw of the trimmer press home sensor (PS53) actuator
[4] [5] [6]
[3] [2] [1] a0h2t3c064ca
[1] Screws which you must not adjust and remove [2] Actuator
[3] Trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [4] Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)
[5] Screws which you must not adjust and remove [6] Mounting plate
G-298
• The trimmer press home sensor (PS53) detects the home position of the trimmer press plate. Once the home position is out of alignment,
the opening is not opened enough for the paper. The paper fails to enter to the trimming section and a error occurs. Therefore, be sure
not to change the position of the actuator of PS53.
• The trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) detects the upper limit of the trimmer press. Once the upper limit position is out of
alignment, the opening is not opened enough for the paper. As a result, the paper fails to enter to the trimming section and an error
occurs, or the opening is not enough for replacing the trimmer blade. Therefore, be sure not to change the installation position of PS52.
30.1.5 Trimmer press brake

• 1 gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake
[2] [1] a0h2t3c065ca
[1] Trimmer press brake [2] Screw not allowed to be adjusted or removed
• The trimmer press brake pushes the timing belt and prevents the trimmer press motor (M32) from rotating too much which caused by the
inertia of the trimmer press board. Once the gap between the trimmer press brake and the timing belt changes, it damages the timing belt
or disables the brake. Therefore, be sure not to adjust the gap adjusting screw of the trimmer press brake.
30.1.6 Fixing screw of the trimmer press timing belt

• All screws which fix the driving system of the trimmer press
[1] [2]
a0h2t3c066ca
[1] Screws which you must not adjust and remove (all [2] Screws that you can remove
screws that are shown in the picture)
• The right paper holding screw and the left paper holding screw drives the trimmer press plate through the timing belt. Once the part such
as a gear of the driving system is removed, the parallelism of the trimmer press plate is not guaranteed because of the belt tooth
skipping. Therefore, be sure not to remove the attaching screw of the cover which fixes the driving system and the bearing fixing screw.

er
1 Cover Rear cover/Lt
2 Rear cover/Rt
3 Left cover
4 Upper cover/Fr
5 Upper cover/Rr3
6 Sub tray cover
G-299
7 Front door/Lt
8 Front door/Rt
9 Folding section Folding unit

CAUTION
30.3.2 Rear cover/Lt
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt [2].
[1] [2] 15anf2c002na
30.3.3 Rear cover/Rt
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
[2] [1] 15anf2c003na
30.3.4 Left cover
(1) Procedure
G-300
[1] 1. Remove 7 screws [1], slide the bottom of the left cover [2] to the outside, and
remove it to the bottom.
[2] [1] 15anf2c004na
30.3.5 Upper cover/Fr
(1) Procedure
[3] [2] 1. Open the front door/Rt and the front door/Lt.
2. Remove the 5 screws [1] on the front, 2 screws [2], 1 screw [3] on the left,
and 3 screws [4] under the cover.
3. Loosen a screw [5].
4. Lift up and remove the upper cover/Fr [6].
Note
[1] ▪ When you remove the upper cover/Fr [6], pull the screw [5] to the
front to so that the tip of the screw does not catch the upper cover/
Fr [6].
[6]
[4] [5] 15anf2c005nb
30.3.6 Upper cover/Rr3
(1) Procedure
G-301
[1] [2] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.30.3.2 Rear cover/Lt)
2. Remove 2 screw caps [1] and then remove 2 screws [2].
4. Loosen the screw [4] and then remove the upper cover/Rr3 [5].
Note
▪ When you remove the upper cover/Rr3 [5], pull the screw [4] to the
front so that the tip of the screw does not catch the upper cover/
Rr3 [5].
[5]
[3] [3] [3]
[4] 15anf2c006na
30.3.7 Sub tray cover

(1) Procedure
[2] [3] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/Fr. (Refer to G.30.3.5 Upper cover/Fr)
2. Remove the upper cover/Rr3. (Refer to G.30.3.6 Upper cover/Rr3)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 4 screws [2], and then remove the sub tray cover
[3].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the sub tray cover [3], pull the screw [4] to the
outside.
[3] [1] [4] [1]
15anf2c007na
G-302
30.3.8 Front door/Lt
(1) Procedure
[6] [5] [4] 1. Open the front door/Lt [1].
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper/Lt [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and slide the hinge [5] upward to remove the fulcrum
[6], and then remove the front door/Lt [1].
Note
▪ Support the front door/Lt [1] with your hand so that it does not fall
down When you remove the screw [4].
[3] [2]
[1]
15anf2c008na
30.3.9 Front door/Rt
(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [6] 1. Open the front door/Rt [1].
2. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the front door stopper/Rt [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4]. Slide the hinge [5] upward to remove the fulcrum [6],
and remove the front door/Rt [1].
Note
▪ Support the front door/Rt [1] with your hand so that it does not fall
down when you remove the screw [4].
[2] [3]
[1] 15anf2c009na
G-303
30.3.10 Folding unit
CAUTION
folding unit is heavy.
(1) Procedure
[5] [4] [2] 1. Remove the front door/Rt. (Refer to G.30.3.9 Front door/Rt)
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and 2 clamps [2] from the rear of the folding unit.
Note
▪ Be sure not to drop the clamps [2].
4. Remove the screw [3] and the ground [4].
6. Remove the clamp and fall drop the wiring harness [7] from the hole [6] on
the wiring harness guide.
[3] [1] [6] [7] [1]
15anf2c010na
G-304
7. Pull out the folding unit.

8. Pull out the folding unit. Remove 2 screws [1], separate the notch [2] from
the hole [3] and remove the lower cover/2 [4].
9. Loosen the screw [5], remove the 2 screws [6] and remove the lower cover/1
[7].
10. Remove 2 screws [8], separate the notch [10] from the shaft [9] and remove
the lower cover/3 [11].
[8] [11] [1] [4] [6] [7]
[2] [9] [10] [3] [5]
15anf2c011na
11. Check points when you reinstall the lower cover/3

Note
▪ Install the lower cover/3 [11] between 2 pins [2] of the shaft [1]. If it
is installed at an improper position, other parts are damaged in
storing the folding unit.
[1] [2] 15anf2c071na
G-305
[1] 12. Remove 4 screws [1], and then lift up and remove the folding unit [2] with 2
people.
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to align the positioning pin [3] with
the hole.
[3] [2]
[3]
[1] 15anf2c012na
[5] [7] [6] 13. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When you hold the folding unit, be sure to hold the shafts [4] at the
front and rear or the upper top of the side plate [5]. Never hold the
jam release lever [6] or the handle [7]. They get damaged.
▪ When you place the folding unit, place it on the table not to contact
the guide plate [8] on the front with the floor. Because it is
projected from the bottom of the unit.
[8] [4]
15anf2c013na

CAUTION
▪ When the SD control board (SDCB) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC68).
G-306
1. Remove the EEPROM (IC68) from the old SD control board (SDCB) [1] and
install it into the new SD control board (SDCB) [2].
Note
direction.
▪ Be sure to place the SW3 [3] same as the old SDCB. (Refer to
L.2.22.1 SD control board (SDCB))
▪ After you replace the SD control board (SDCB), conduct rewriting of
the firmware.
[1]
[2]
A
[3]
a0g6f3c053ca
G-307
31. SD-513
Note

Note
▪ The following screw is not painted in red for the old type SD-513. The screw is not painted in red, but do not remove or loosen
the screw in the field.
(a) 1st folding stopper shaft fixing screw 2 pcs.
[1]

1 Cover Rear cover /Rt
2 Rear cover /Lt
3 Right cover/1
4 Right cover/2
5 Right cover/3
6 Front cover/1
7 Front cover/2
8 Front cover/3
9 Left cover/Fr1
10 Left cover/Fr2
11 Left cover/Fr3
12 Left cover /Rr
13 Upper cover/RrRt1
G-308
19 Upper cover/FrRt1
22 Upper cover/FrLt1
23 Upper cover/FrLt2
24 Upper cover/RrLt1
27 Sub tray cover
28 Paper exit load section Gripper paper exit unit
29 Front console Front console

CAUTION
31.3.2 Rear cover/Rt, /Lt

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
[1] 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the power cord cover [2].
3. Remove the power cord [3].
[3] [2]
G-309
[2] [1] 4. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover/Lt [2].

Note
▪ 2 PET sheets [2] are attached on the back side of the rear cover/Lt
[1].
Be sure to reinstall the rear cover/Lt and the rear cover/Rt to the
original position.
[2] [1]
31.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3

(1) Procedure
console)
2. Remove the upper cover/FrRt1, the upper cover/FrRt2, and the upper cover/
FrRt3. (Refer to G.31.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3)
[2] [1] [1] 4. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/1 [2].
[1]
G-310
[1] [2] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the right cover/2 [2].
[3] [2] [1] 7. Pull out the trim scrap box [1] in the arrow-marked direction.
8. Remove 5 screws [2] and then remove the right cover/3 [3].
31.3.4 Front cover/1, /2, /3

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/FrLt2. (Refer to G.31.3.9 Upper cover/FrLt1, /
FrLt2)
2. Remove the upper cover/FrRt3. (Refer to G.31.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /
FrRt2, /FrRt3)
3. Remove the right cover/3. (Refer to G.31.3.3 Right cover/1, /2, /3)
4. Remove the left cover/Fr1 and the left cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.31.3.5 Left
cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3)
5. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the front cover/1 [2].
[2] [1] 6. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the front cover/2 [2].
G-311
[1] [2] 7. Remove 7 screws [1], and then remove the front cover/3 [2].
[1]
31.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2, left cover/Fr3

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the upper cover/FrLt2. (Refer to G.31.3.9 Upper cover/FrLt1, /
FrLt2)
2. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the left cover/Fr3 [2].
[1] [2]
[1] [2] [3] 4. Open the saddle stitching section door [1].
31.3.6 Left cover/Rr
(1) Procedure
G-312
[2] [1] 1. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the left cover/Rr [2].
31.3.7 Upper cover/RrRt1, /RrRt2, /RrRt3, /RrRt4, /RrRt5, /RrRt6

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove 3 screw covers [1].
[1] [2] 2. Remove 5 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/RrRt1 [2].
G-313
31.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3

(1) Procedure
G-314
[2] [1] 2. Remove 4 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/FrRt1 [2].
31.3.9 Upper cover/FrLt1, /FrLt2

(1) Procedure
G-315
[1]
2. Remove 3 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/FrLt1 [2].
[1] [2]
[1]
4. Remove 2 screws [1], and remove the upper cover/FrLt2 [2].
[1] [2]
31.3.10 Upper cover/RrLt1, /RrLt2, /RrLt3, sub tray cover

(1) Procedure
G-316
[2] [1] 2. Remove 5 screws [1] and remove the upper cover/RrLt1 [2].
[2] [1] 3. Hold the handle [1], and open the sub tray [2] in the arrow-marked direction.
[1] 4. Remove 3 screws [1], and then remove the sub tray cover [2].
[2] [1]
5. Remove 4 screws [1] and remove the upper cover/RrLt2 [2].
[2] [1]
G-317
[1]
7. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the upper cover/RrLt3 [2].
[2] [1]
31.3.11 Opening and closing of the front console

(1) Procedure
WARNING
trimmer press unit.
If you touch the trimmer blade, you can get injured.
CAUTION
Use a tool as a driver to hold the lock mechanism.
If you hold the lock mechanism with your hands when you
open the front console, you can get injured.
G-318
1. Open the entrance door [1].

[3] 2. Remove the screw cover [2].
little in the arrow marked direction.
[5]
[2] [6] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1] 8. Note
▪ If the trimmer press unit is left open by execution of the I/O Check
or the error of SD-513, the front console cannot be opened
because the lock mechanism of the trimmer section [1] works.
When you open the front console in this condition, remove the
screw cover [2] and turn the screw [3] in the arrow marked
WARNING
press unit.
If you touch the trimmer blade, you can get injured.
[3] [2]
G-319
9. Note
with a driver [2].
CAUTION
[1] [2]
[1] [2] 10. When you open the front console further, remove 2 screws [1] and release 2
wires [2].
31.3.12 Front console
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the left cover/Fr2. (Refer to G.31.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2,
left cover/Fr3)
[1] [1]
G-320
[2] [1] 3. Remove 4 screws [1] each and remove the coupling plate/1 [2] and the
coupling plate/2 [3].
[2] [1]
console)
5. Remove 3 screws [1] each and remove the coupling plate/3 [2] and the
coupling plate/4 [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
G-321
6. Close the front console [1]. Then, separate the front console [1] and the rear
console [4] while you pull out the wiring harness [3] from the hole [2].
Note
▪ Be careful not to damage the wiring harness [3] with the edge of
the hole [2] or the caster.
▪ Before you move the removed front console, be sure to lift the
open close caster to the highest position. When the open close
caster is moved down and you move the front console, the open
close caster possibly contacts with steps on the floor and is
damaged. (Refer to I.34.4 Front console open close caster height
adjustment)
[4] [2] [1]
[3]
31.3.13 Gripper paper exit unit

(1) Procedure
console)
2. Remove the upper cover/FrRt1, the upper cover/FrRt2 and the upper cover/
FrRt3. (Refer to G.31.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /FrRt2, /FrRt3)
3. Move down the clamp unit [1] to the position where the bottom [2] of the
clamp unit [1] is lower than the metal plate [3].
Note
▪ If you do not move down the clamp unit [1], the clamp unit [1]
contacts the gripper paper exit unit and the gripper paper exit unit
cannot be removed.
[1] [2] [3]

[1] [2] [3] 4. Note
▪ When you have not installed the FD-504, hold the [2] section of the
clamp unit [1] from the downside and lift it down.
▪ To prevent the booklet from being damaged and got dirty, be
careful not to touch the tape [3] of the clamp unit [1].
G-322
5. Note
▪ When you have installed the FD-504, push down the [1] section of
the FD-504.
[1]
[1]

7. Remove 7 screws [2], and remove the gripper paper exit unit [4] while you
hold the handle [3].
[1]
[4] [3]
[2]
G-323
[1] 8. Note
▪ When you put the gripper paper exit unit [1] upside down, put it on
A3 or 11 x 17 paper [2].
If you directly put the gripper paper exit unit [1] on a floor or a
desk, the external section of the gripper paper exit unit [3] is
possibly damaged.
[2] [3]
Note
▪ When you install the gripper paper exit unit [1], be sure not to
damage the connector [3] of the paper exit motor (M28) [2].
[3] [1]
31.3.14 Open and close of the booklet tray section door

Note
▪ The booklet tray section door is equipped with the lock mechanism so that the door does not open during the machine operation.
When the machine completes the operation normally, the lock mechanism is released. However, when the machine does not
complete the operation normally, the lock mechanism becomes active and the booklet tray section door does not open. In order
to open the booklet tray section door when the machine does not complete the operation normally, release the lock mechanism
by following procedures.
(1) Procedure
G-324
[2] 1. Remove the upper cover/FrRt3. (Refer to G.31.3.8 Upper cover/FrRt1, /

FrRt2, /FrRt3)
2. Insert a driver into the screw [1] and rotate in the direction of the arrow.
3. Release the lock mechanism [2] and open the booklet tray section door [3].
[1] [3]
31.3.15 Moving up and down of the booklet holding

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] 1. Remove the left cover/Fr1. (Refer to G.31.3.5 Left cover/Fr1, left cover/Fr2,
left cover/Fr3)
2. When you turn the encoder [1], the booklet holding/Fr [2] and the booklet
holding/Rr [3] move down.
Note
▪ When you rotate the encoder [1], be sure to hold and rotate the
encoder [1] with your arms form the left side of the machine.
The encoder possibly rotates when the booklet holding moves
down and you could get injured.
3. When you turn the encoder [1] further, the booklet holding/Fr [2] moves up.
4. When you turn the encoder [1] further, the booklet holding/Rr [3] moves up.
Note
▪ When you move up the booklet holding, rotate the encoder [1] until
no load is applied on the encoder.
When you get your hands off of the encoder with the load, the
booklet holding falls down and the encoder rotates in the reverse
direction and you possibly get injured.

CAUTION
▪ When the SD control board (PCB1) is replaced, be sure to replace the EEPROM (IC70).
[1]
[2]
G-325

Note
A direction.
of the firmware.
fd501fs2078c
G-326
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 32. CR-101
32. CR-101
Note

1 Creaser unit Creaser unit

CAUTION
32.3.2 Creaser unit
(1) Procedure
[5] [3] [2] [1] 1. Open the entrance door [1].
2. Remove the screw [6], and remove the knob (number: SD6) [3].
Note
▪ A unique number is printed on the knob [3] for the reference when
you release the jam. When you install the knob [3], be sure not to
mistake other knobs for the knob [3].
3. Remove 4 screws [4], and remove the creaser cover [5].
[4]
[4] 4. Rotate the crank [1], and close the crease blade [2].
6. Remove 4 screws [4], and pull out the creaser unit [5].
[1] [2] [3] [5]
G-327
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 33. TU-503
33. TU-503
Note

1 Slitter unit Slitter unit

CAUTION
33.3.2 Slitter unit
(1) Procedure
[4] [5] [2] [3] 1. Open the entrance door [1].
console)
5. Remove 6 screws [6], and remove the slitter cover [7].
Note
▪ Depending on the installation place of the slitter cover [7], the slit
scraps box could not be removed. Therefore, when you reinstall
the slitter cover [7], move the slitter cover [7] to the right side.
[6] [1]
[7] [6]
6. Disconnect 4 connectors [1], and remove 6 screws [2].
[1] [1]
[2] [2]
G-328
7. Pull the handle [1].
[1] [2]
8. Hold the handle [1], and pull out approximately two thirds of the slitter unit
[2].
[1] [2]
9. Hold the positions [1], and remove the slitter unit [2].
[1]
10. Note
▪ When you remove the slitter unit [1], do not push the handle [2].
When the handle [2] is pushed, the slit scraps shutter [3] opens.
Then, you cannot push the slitter unit [1].
▪ When you put the slitter unit [1] with the slit scraps shutter [3]
opened, the slit scraps shutter [3] or the handle [2] is possibly
damaged.
[2] [3] [1]

11. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the TU support stay [2].
[2] [1]
G-329
12. Install the TU support stay [2] with the screw [1] that you removed on the
step 9.
[1] [2]
G-330
34. FD-504
Note

1 Spine corner forming unit Spine corner forming unit

CAUTION
34.3.2 Spine corner forming unit

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] [3] [4] 1. Remove the gripper paper exit unit. (Refer to G.31.3.13 Gripper paper exit
unit)
Note
▪ When you remove the spine corner forming unit [1], be sure not to
move the FD roller assy [2] to the inside beyond the specified
position [3]. The booklet pressure section of the FD roller assy [2]
and the FD clamp plate [4] possibly contact and the booklet
pressure section is possibly damaged.
[1] 2. Remove 2 connectors [1].
[2] [1] 3. Remove 7 screws [1], and remove the metal frame [2].
G-331
4. Remove 5 screws [1], and then release the fixing of the spine corner forming
unit [2].
[1] [2]
[2] 5. Install the 4 screws [1] and 2 handles [2] that were used at the installation.
Note
▪ After you install the spine corner forming unit [3], be sure to
remove the handle [2].
If the unit is operated with the handle is installed, the machine
could damaged.
[1] [3]
6. Hold the handle [1] and remove the spine corner forming unit [2].
[1] [2]
[3] [2] [1] 7. Reinstall the preceding parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
▪ When you install the spine corner forming unit, lift up the sub lock
[1] of the SD-513 to move away and insert the driver [3] into the
hole [2] to fix the sub lock [1]. If the sub lock [1] is not moved
away, you cannot install the spine corner forming unit.
34.3.3 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (1)

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ When you remove FD-504 from the system configuration, be sure to perform following procedure and install the coupling
screw. When the coupling screw is not installed, the clamp section of SD-513 is possibly damaged.
G-332
unit)
2. Remove the coupling screw [1].
[1]
[3] 3. Adjust the height of the spine corner forming unit [3] so that the D-cut side [2]
of the pulley [1] turns down and is horizontal.
[1]
[2]
4. Note
▪ When you adjust the height of the spine corner forming unit [1], be
sure not to touch the booklet pressure side [2] of the FD clamp
plate.
▪ Adjust the height of the spine corner forming unit [1] so that the
height of the front and rear becomes flat.
[2] [1]
G-333
[2] [1] 5. Check that the hole [2] of the pulley [1] turns up.
Note
▪ When the hole [2] does not turn up, adjust the height of the rear
side [3] of the spine corner forming unit and let the hole [2] turn
up. Be careful not to change the height of the front side [4] of the
spine corner forming unit so as not to change the position of the
D-cut that you adjusted on the step 3.
[3] [4]
6. Install the coupling screw that you removed on the step 1 to the screw hole
[1].
Note
▪ When the screw hole [1] does not turn down, repeat the step 3 and
the step 5.
[1]
34.3.4 Note for disassembling the FD-504 (2)

(1) Procedure
Note
▪ When you remove the FD-504 from the system configuration, be sure to use the following screws to install the guide plate. If
you use incorrect screws, the screws contact the drive section and the clamp section of the SD-513 could be damaged.
[4] [3] 1. Use 2 long silver screws [1] and install the booklet fixing plate [3] to the
clamp/Lt [2].
2. Use 2 short black screws [4] and install the booklet fixing plate [3] to the
clamp/Rt [5].
[5] [2] [1]
G-334
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 35. PB-503
35. PB-503
1 Cover Front door
2 Front cover
3 Booklet door
4 Rear cover/Rt
5 Rear cover/Lt
6 Left cover
7 Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr
8 Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr
9 Pellet supply cover
10 SC cover/Fr
11 SC cover/Up
12 Upper cover/FrRt
13 Upper cover/FrLt
14 Upper cover/RrRt
15 Upper cover/RrLt
16 Upper cover/Md
17 Others Deodorant unit
18 Pellet supply section Pellet supply unit
19 Glue tank section Glue tank unit
20 SC section SC unit
21 Clamp section Clamp unit
22 Others PB left unit
23 Book stock section Book lift wire
24 Cart wire
25 Conveyance section Conveyance unit/Lw
26 Relay conveyance section Relay conveyance unit
27 Cover paper supply section Cover paper tray
28 Cover paper lift wire
29 Others Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)

CAUTION
Make sure to unplug the power code of the main body from the
power outlet when it is connected to the main body.
35.2.2 Front door
(1) Procedure
G-335
[5] [4] [3] [2] 1. Open the front door [1].

2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the front door [1] from the lower pin
[6] with the mounting bracket [5] on the front door [1].
Note
▪ When you reinstall the wire [3], tighten the screw at the position in
the picture. (To prevent the wire from contacting with the tab.)
[1]
[6]
a15xt3c018ca
35.2.3 Front cover
(1) Procedure
G-336

2. Lift the lever [1] and pull out the cover paper tray.
4. Release the notches [3] at 2 positions from the screws [4] and pull out the
projection [5] from the hole [6], and then remove the front cover [7].
[5]
[2] [7]
[3] [4] [1] a15xt3c019ca
35.2.4 Booklet door
(1) Procedure
G-337
[1] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] 1. Open the booklet door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the wire [3].
3. Remove 2 screws [4], and then remove the booklet door [1] from the lower
pin [6]. Do not remove the mounting bracket [5] from the booklet door [1].
4. Remove the mounting bracket [5] from the booklet door [1].
[6] a15xt3c020ca
35.2.5 Rear cover/Rt
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.35.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove 9 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Rt [2].
Note
▪ When you install the rear cover, make sure to attach the metal
plates [3] to the bottom of the rear cover.
[3] a15xt3c021ca
G-338
35.2.6 Rear cover/Lt
(1) Procedure
[3] [4] 1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.35.2.18 Deodorant unit)
2. Remove 8 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover/Lt [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to place it with the projection [3] put
into the notch of the upper cover/RrLt [4], and with its bottom [5]
put on the metal frame [6].
[1] [2] [1]
[5] [6] a15xt3c022ca
35.2.7 Left cover
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Loosen 2 screws [1].
[1] a15xt3c023ca
G-339
35.2.8 Relay conveyance gear cover/Fr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the relay conveyance door.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Fr [2].
[1] a15xt3c024ca

Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put the claw of the plate in the hole of the relay conveyance gear cover/Fr.
35.2.9 Relay conveyance gear cover/Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Open the relay conveyance door.
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Rr [2].
[1] a15xt3c025ca

Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put it in the hole of the relay conveyance gear cover/Rr.
35.2.10 Pellet supply cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the deodorant unit. (Refer to G.35.2.18 Deodorant unit)
3. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Rr. (Refer to G.35.2.9 Relay
conveyance gear cover/Rr)
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch/Rr [2].
[1] [2] a15xt3c026ca
G-340
[4]
7. Open the pellet supply door [3]. Remove the pellet supply cover [5] in the
arrow-marked direction [6] carefully so as not to damage the wire harness
[4].
Note
▪ When you remove or installing the glue supply cover, be careful
not to cut or damage the wire binding [4].
[5] [6] [3]
[2]
[1] a15xt3c027ca
35.2.11 SC cover/Fr
(1) Procedure
[2]
1. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Fr. (Refer to G.35.2.8 Relay
conveyance gear cover/Fr)
2. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the magnet catch/Fr [2].
[1]
a15xt3c028ca
G-341
[4] [3]
3. Remove the screw [1] and remove the SC cover/Fr [2] to the arrow-marked
direction.
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put 2 claws on the upper side [3]
into the holes [4], and put the claw on the lower side [5] to the
inside of the metal frame.
[2]
[1]
[6] [5] a15xt3c029ca
35.2.12 SC cover/Up
(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.35.2.19 Pellet supply unit)
2. Remove the SC cover/Fr. (Refer to G.35.2.11 SC cover/Fr)
3. Slightly lift up the circled part [2] to remove 4 screws [1] and remove the SC
cover/Up [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4].
[3] [4]
[1] [2] a15xt3c030ca
35.2.13 Upper cover/FrRt
(1) Procedure
G-342
[4] [2] [1] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.35.2.23 PB left unit)
4. Pull the left part of the upper cover/FrRt [3] in the arrow-marked direction [4].
Then release the cover from the projection [5] and disconnect it from the
connector [6].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put the connector [6] under the
upper cover/FrRt [3] properly. Be careful not to let the cables get
caught between the cover and the frame.
[3]
[6] [5] a15xt3c031ca
35.2.14 Upper cover/FrLt
(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Fr. (Refer to G.35.2.8 Relay
conveyance gear cover/Fr)
4. Open the relay conveyance door.
6. Remove 7 screws [4] and then remove the upper cover/FrLt [5].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be careful not to nip the wiring harness [6].
[5] [4]
[3] [2] [1] [6] a15xt3c032ca

35.2.15 Upper cover/RrRt
(1) Procedure
2. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the upper cover/RrRt [3].
[2] a15xt3c033ca
G-343
35.2.16 Upper cover/RrLt
(1) Procedure
2. Remove the relay conveyance gear cover/Rr. (Refer to G.35.2.9 Relay
[1]
conveyance gear cover/Rr)
4. Remove 7 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover/RrLt [2].
[2]
[1] a15xt3c034ca
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.35.2.23 PB left unit)
a15xt3c035ca
35.2.18 Deodorant unit
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the exhaust filter assy [1].
a15xt3c003ca
G-344
[1] [2] 2. Remove 3 screws [1] and tilt the deodorant unit [2]. Disconnect the
connector [3] and then remove the deodorant unit [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put 2 claws [2] in the holes [5].
[4] [5]
[3] a15xt3c036ca

[3]
Note
▪ When you connect the loop connector [1] to the connector [2], the
[2] operational check with no error indication without connecting the
deodorant unit is enabled. After the operation, be sure to remove
the loop connector [1] and put it inside [4] of the rear cover/Lt [3].
▪ After you install it, be sure to check that the deodorant fans/1
(FM97) and the deodorant fans/2 (FM98) of the deodorant unit are
[4] rotating.
[1]
a15xt3c037ca
35.2.19 Pellet supply unit

(1) Procedure
G-345

2. Remove the pellet supply cover. (Refer to G.35.2.10 Pellet supply cover)
[2] a15xt3c045ca
[2] [3] [1] 5. Loosen 2 screws [1].

6. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the pellet supply unit [3] upward.
Note
▪ When you remove the unit, be careful not to spill the pellet.
[2] a15xt3c046ca
G-346
35.2.20 Glue tank unit
CAUTION
The glue tank unit is hot after the deactivation of the main
power switch (SW1) or the sub power switch (SW2) of the
main body. To prevent burn injuries, perform the maintenance
work after the temperature of the unit downs.
(1) Procedure
3. Remove the screw [1], disconnect 2 connectors [2], and then remove the
suction unit [3].
5. Remove the C-clip [5] and pull out the pin [6] straight up to release the
coupling arm [7].
[3]
[1]
[4] [5] [6] [7]

a15xt3c047ca
[2] [1] 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then uncouple the belt coupling bracket [2].
a075f2c119ca
G-347
[2] [2]
7. Pull out the glue tank unit [1] and remove 4 screws [2].
Note
▪ When you move the glue tank unit, be sure to hold it by the metal
frame [3] on the right side of the unit.
▪ When you remove the screw [2], be careful to avoid an injury from
sharp metal edges around the screw.
8. Pull out the glue tank unit [1].
9. Remove the roller [5] from the rail [4] and remove the glue tank unit.
[4] [5] [1] [3] a15xt3c048ca
Note
▪ After you install the glue tank unit, make a test print. Check that no glue is squeezed out of the top and bottom edges of
the created book and no pages come off the cover when you open the book.
[1] 11. Note
▪ Never loosen or tighten the 2 screws because they are keeping the
levelness and the vertical position of the glue tank unit.
a15xt3c049ca
35.2.21 SC unit
(1) Procedure
[2] [3] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.35.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove the upper cover/Md. (Refer to G.35.2.17 Upper cover/Md)
3. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.35.2.19 Pellet supply unit)
4. Remove the SC cover/Up. (Refer to G.35.2.12 SC cover/Up)
5. Remove the upper cover/FrRt. (Refer to G.35.2.13 Upper cover/FrRt)
6. Disconnect 5 relay connectors [1].
7. Remove the wires [3] that are connected to the SC unit [2] from saddles.
[1] a15xt3c050ca
G-348

9. Remove 2 screws [2] and remove the wire [3] and the knob [4]. Then remove
the belt [5].
Note
▪ After you install the belt [5], check that the lug belt is properly
installed with no slack and turns smoothly when the knob is
turned.
10. Hold the metal frames [6] on the rear and the front side of the unit, and
remove the SC unit [7] to the arrowed direction.
[6] [7] [6]
[1]
[4]
[5] [3] [2]

a15xt3c051ca
Note
▪ When the SC unit [1] is removed, the lock arm [2] is released from
the stopper [3]. Therefore, when you install the SC unit, be sure to
put the lock arm [2] under the stopper [3] while you lift and tilt the
unit in the direction of the arrow [4].
[2] [4] [3]
[1]
a075f2c042ca
35.2.22 Clamp unit
(1) Procedure
G-349
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.35.2.6 Rear cover/Lt)

2. Remove the pellet supply unit. (Refer to G.35.2.19 Pellet supply unit)
4. Remove the E-ring [2] and pull out the pin [3] down to release the coupling
arm [4].
5. Release the wiring harness [5] between the connector [1] and the coupling
arm [4] from the saddles.
[3] [2]
[4] [5] a15xt3c052ca
G-350
[2] [3] 6. Pull out the clamp unit [1] carefully watching the wire binding and the
coupling arm on the rear of the unit.
7. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the lock bracket [3].
9. Hold the left metal frame and the right metal frame [5] to lift the clamp unit
[1]. Release the 4 notches [6] from the hooks [7] and remove the clamp unit.
Note
▪ When you reinstall the clamp unit, make sure that the 4 hooks [7]
are properly fitted in the notches [6] of the unit.
[5] [4]
[1]
[6] [7]
a15xt3c053ca
Note
▪ After you install the clamp unit, make a test print and binding to check that the cover and inside papers are neatly aligned
without skewing.
35.2.23 PB left unit

(1) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove the rear cover/Lt. (Refer to G.35.2.6 Rear cover/Lt)
5. Remove 2 screws (with washer) [1].
[1]
a15xt3c054ca
G-351
a15xt3c055ca
a15xt3c056ca
[1] 8. Loosen 4 screws [1].
a15xt3c057ca
G-352
9. Remove the screws [1] at 2 positions, 2 each.

Note
▪ As the screw [1] is longer than other screws, be careful when you
reinstall.
[1]
a15xt3c058ca
[1] 10. Remove the clamps [1] at 4 positions.
[1] a15xt3c059ca
G-353
[2] [7] [1] [6] [3] 11. Rotate the PB left unit [2] around the wiring harness section [1] on the rear
side and remove it from the PB right unit [3].
Note
▪ The PB left unit [2] is rotated up to about 90 degrees.
▪ When you rotate the PB left unit [2], be sure to rotate it around the
wiring harness section [1] and be careful not to damage the wiring
harness.
▪ When you reinstall it, put the bottom of the PB left unit [5] on the
brackets [4] on the lower side and then put the pins [6] on the
upper side into the holes [7].
[5] [4] a15xt3c060ca
35.2.24 Book lift wire

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] 1. Perform the I/O check in the service mode in the following order of the output
check code. Deactivate the sub power switch (SW2) and the main power
switch (SW1) after you move the carriage section to its lowest position.
"77-55", "77-45", "77-58", "77-61"
4. Release the wiring harness [1] from the saddles and remove 2 screws [2]
and then remove the wiring harness bracket [3].
[2] a15xt3c066ca
G-354
[3] [2] [3] 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the 4 mounting brackets [2] on the front
and rear of the book stock unit.
Note
▪ When you reinstall, route the book lift wires/Fr [3] and/Rr [4]
[1] [1] between 2 screws and a screw [1], and secure them with the
mounting brackets [2].
6. Loosen the 2 screws [6] of the tension bracket/Fr [5].
Note
▪ When you install the tension bracket/Fr [5], be sure to tighten the
screws [6] while you pull down the bracket by the specified
[5] [6] tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
7. Loosen the 2 screws [8] of the tension bracket/Rr [7].
Note
▪ When you install the tension bracket/Rr [7], be sure to tighten the
screws [8] while you pull down the bracket by the specified
tension.
Standard value: 5kgf
[4]
[1]
[1]
[8] [7] [2]

a15xt3c038ca
G-355
[11] 8. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4]. Then remove
[4]
the book lift wire/Fr [5].
Note
[2] ▪ Install the book lift wire/Fr [5] as following. Route the wire so that it
comes out of the lower right [6] of the pulley [2]. Loop the wire
over the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8], [9], [10] pulleys in that
[1]
[5] order. Then wind the wire 6 times counterclockwise [11] over the
pulley [2], and put the wire end [4] into the pulley.
[3]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[2]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c039ca
[5] 9. Remove the E-ring [1], then remove the washers [2] and [3], spring [4], and
the gear [5].
[3]
10. Remove the coupling [6] and the pin [7].
[2]
[4]
[1]
[6]
[7]
a15xt3c040ca
G-356
11. Remove the E-ring [1], pulley [2], pin [3], and the wire end [4]. Then remove
[4] [2] [1] [3]
the book lift wire/Rr [5].
Note
▪ Install the book lift wire/Rr [5] as following. Route the wire so that it
comes out of the lower left [6] of the pulley [2]. Loop the wire over
[5] the pulley [7], then loop it over the [8], [9], [10] pulleys in that
order. Then wind the wire 6 times counterclockwise [11] over the
pulley [2], and put the wire end [4] into the pulley.
[11]
[7]
[5]
[6]
[9]
[8]
[10]
a15xt3c041ca
35.2.25 Cart wire
(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the mounting plate/Rr [2].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to open the registration plate/Fr [3]
and the registration plate/Rr [4] fully and then install the mounting
plate/Rr [2].
2. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove the mounting plate/Fr [6].
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, temporarily hold the mounting plate/Fr [6]
and hook the tension gauge on the hole [7]. Then pull it in the
arrow-marked direction [8] with the standard value and then fully
tighten it.
[3] [4] Standard value: 1kgf to 1.5kgf
▪ Check that the wires are not crossed or they do not contact the
metal frame.
[8] [7] [5] [6]

a15xt3c061ca
G-357
[1] [2] [4] [3] [6] [5] 3. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the mounting metal fitting/Rr [2].
4. Remove the wire [3] from the pulley [4] and release it from the saddles [5].
Note
▪ When you install the wire [3] on the pulley [4], be sure to hook it on
the pulley [6] with the mounting plate/Rr on the upper side.
5. Remove the screw [7] and remove the mounting metal fitting/Fr [8].
6. Remove the wire [9] from the pulley [10] and release it from the saddles [11].
Note
▪ When you install the wire [9] on the pulley [10], be sure to hook it
on the pulley [12] with the mounting plate/Rr on the upper side.
[10] [7]
[8]
[11] [9]
[12]
a15xt3c062ca
[2] [4] [3] [1] 7. Remove the screw [1] and release the wire.
Note
▪ When you reinstall it, be sure to put the edge part [3] between the
projections [4].
a15xt3c063ca
35.2.26 Conveyance unit/Lw
(1) Procedure
[7] [5] [7] 1. Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and release the wire binding from 6 saddles.
2. Remove the screw [2] and slide the coupling [3] into the arrow-marked
direction.
4. Release the conveyance unit/Lw [6] from the hooks [5] and remove the unit.
[4] [4] Note
▪ When you reinstall, be sure to align it to the projection [7].
[6] [1]
[2]
[3]
a075f2c063ca
G-358
35.2.27 Relay conveyance unit

(1) Procedure
[3] [1] [2] 1. Remove the PB left unit. (Refer to G.35.2.23 PB left unit)
2. Remove the upper cover/FrLt. (Refer to G.35.2.14 Upper cover/FrLt)
3. Remove the upper cover/RrLt. (Refer to G.35.2.16 Upper cover/RrLt)
5. Remove the E-rings [1] at 2 positions and remove the spacer [2], and then
release the arm [3].
Note
▪ When you release the arm [3], the conveyance guide plate [4] falls.
Hold it by your hand during the operation.
6. Put down the conveyance guide plate [4].
[5] a15xt3c064ca

9. Hold 2 shafts [2] and remove the relay conveyance unit [3].
Note
▪ When you remove the relay conveyance unit [3], insert a thin driver
into the hole [5] so that the relay conveyance door [4] does not
[6] close. When you move down the relay conveyance door [4] lower
than the horizontal position, the gear [6] comes off from the
dumper gear [7] and the dumper adjustment is misaligned.
[7]
[5] [4] [2] [1]
[1] [3]
[2] a15xt3c065ca
G-359
35.2.28 Cover paper tray
CAUTION
As the cover paper tray is heavy, be sure to perform the
following work with 2 people.
Note
▪ When you lift the cover paper tray, be sure to hold it by the specified positions. Holding it at positions other than those positions
specified damage the tray, thus resulting in a paper feed jam.
(1) Procedure
2. Slightly push up the cover paper tray lock lever [2] with a screwdriver or a
similar tool and pull out the cover paper tray [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
a15xt3c042ca
3. Remove the 2 stopper screws [2], 1 for each right rail and the left rail [1] and
pull out the cover paper tray.
[2] [1]
a075f2c065ca
G-360
4. Remove 4 screws [1], 2 for each left rail and the right rail, hold the cover
paper tray [2] by the specified positions [5], and remove it straight up.
Note
▪ When you install the cover paper tray, make sure that the 4 knobs
[3] on the rails are properly fitted in the notches [4] of the cover
paper tray.
▪ When you lift the cover paper tray, be sure to hold the specified
positions [5] by 2 people. Do not hold the part [6] as the part can
easily become deformed, which adversely affects the paper feed
resulting in a paper jam.
[5] [1] [6] [2]
[2] [1] [5]

[3] [4]
a075f2c066ca
35.2.29 Cover paper lift wire

(1) Procedure
G-361
1. Remove the cover paper tray. (Refer to G.35.2.28 Cover paper tray)
3. Disconnect the connector [2], and remove the cover paper tray front cover
[3].
[1] [1] [3]
a075f2c067ca
[5] [3] [2] [1] 4. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the knob [2] and the belt [3].
5. Remove 6 screws [4] and remove the gear cover [5].
[4]
a075f2c068ca
[1] 6. Remove the E-ring [1].
a075f2c069ca
G-362
[3] [2] 7. Change the position of the pulley [1], and pull out the wire ends of the lift
wire/Fr1 [2] and the lift wire/Fr2 [3] from each hole of the shaft [4].
Note
▪ The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/Fr2 [3], must be inserted
into the shaft hole that is near the frame of the cover paper tray.
The wire end of the shorter wire, lift wire/Fr2 [3], must be inserted
[1]
into the shaft hole that is near the frame of the cover paper tray.
▪ When you install the pulley, lift the cover paper lift plate slightly to
loosen the wires and insert the wire ends one by one into the shaft
holes. Then secure them with the pulley [1].
[4]
a075f2c070ca
8. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the wire cover [2].
[2] 9. Remove the cover paper lift wire/Fr1 [4] and the cover paper lift wire/Fr2 [5]
from each pulley [3].
Note
[4] ▪ When you install the wires, make sure that the wires are properly
routed inside the wire covers [2] and are not crossed each other.
[1]
[5]
[3]
[4] [5]
a075f2c071ca
10. Pull out each wire end [2] through each hole of the cover paper lift plate arm
[1].
Note
▪ When you pull out the wire, pull it out carefully so as not to
damage it with sharp metal edges.
[2]
[1]
a075f2c072ca
G-363
11. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the gear cover [2].
[1]
[1] [2]
[1]
[2]
a075f2c073ca
[3] [2] 12. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
▪ When you remove the gear [2], be careful not to drop and lose the
bearing [3].
[1] a075f2c074ca
[3] [4] 13. Remove the bearing [1] and the E-ring [2], and then remove the gear [3].
Note
▪ When you remove the gear [3], be careful not to drop the pin [4].
[1] [2] a075f2c075ca
[1] 14. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
▪ When you remove the gear [2], be careful not to drop the bearing
[3].
[3] [2] a075f2c076ca
G-364
[1] [3] 15. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear [2].
Note
▪ When you remove the gear [2], be careful not to drop and lose the
pin [3].
[2] a075f2c077ca
[1] [2] [3] 16. Remove the E-ring [1].

17. Pull out the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [2] and the cover paper lift wire/Rr2 [3]
from the shaft holes in the same manner as step 7.
a075f2c078ca
[2] [1] 18. Remove the cover paper lift wire/Rr1 [1] and the cover paper lift wire/Rr2 [2]
in the same manner as step 8 to step 10.
Note
▪ When you pull out the wire end [3] of the cover paper lift wire/Rr2
[2], lift the cover paper lift plate until the cover paper lift plate arm
[4] appears.
▪ The wire/Fr is gray in color and the wire/Rr is black.
▪ When the installation is completed, make sure that the lift plate is
horizontal.
[3] [4]
a075f2c079ca
35.2.30 Binding mode procedure with manual operating function

• When a problem occurs at the clamp section or the cover paper table section, the binding can be checked with the manual operation.
Note
▪ Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board (PBCB) after the check. (Manual operation forbidden state)
(1) Procedure
G-365

2. Connect the connector [2] to the connector (CN5) [1] on the PB control board
(PBCB).
[2] [1] a15xt3c043ca
3. Press the button/1 [1].

[1] [2] [3] 4. Open the front door and pull out the clamp unit.
5. Place the inside paper in the clamp unit.
6. Adjust the clamp alignment plate/Fr and the clamp alignment plate/Rr to the
inside paper edge on the shorter side by hand.
8. Place the clamp unit.
Note
▪ Place the clamp unit gently. When you place it roundly, the
misalignment of inside papers occurs because the clamp
alignment plate is widened.
9. Close the front door.
Note
▪ Disconnect the connector (CN5) on the PB control board (PBCB)
after the check.
a15xt3c044ca
35.2.31 Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS) and /R (MFDBR)

Note
same time.
▪ When the multi feed detection board is replaced, be sure to conduct the adjustment in replacing the multi feed detection board.
(Refer to I.4.7.19 Adjustment when you replace the cover paper multi feed detection board (PB))
(1) Procedure
G-366
[1] 1. Remove the conveyance unit/Lw [1]. (Refer to G.35.2.26 Conveyance unit/
Lw)
2. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi feed detection
board/S (MFDBS) [3].
[2]
[3] a075f2c095ca

[1] [2]
(MFDBS) [3].
[3]
a075f2c096ca
5. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the cover of the multi feed detection
board/R (MFDBR) [2].
[1]
[2] a075f2c097ca
G-367

[1] [2]
7. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the multi feed detection board/R
(MFDBR) [3].
[3]
a075f2c098ca
(2) Note for installing the multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS) and the multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR)
• The multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS) and the multi feed detection
[2]
board/R (MFDBR) are installed on the same type board. Be careful not to
confuse one with the other when you install them.
• Be sure to confirm the marking on the board when you install it.
Multi feed detection board/S (MFDBS) [1]: 56UA
Multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR) [2]: 15AG
• The connector shape is different for the multi feed detection board/S
(MFDBS) and the multi feed detection board/R (MFDBR). So, even if it is
installed, the connector cannot be connected.
[1] a075f2c099ca
G-368
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 36. GP-501
36. GP-501
36.1 Centering punched holes
Die Set Position Cradle Adjustment, The die set position cradle is set in the factory; however, because of the punched-hole spacing on the PB
die sets, there is a minimal amount of paper on each edge of the punched paper. The die set position cradle may have to be fine adjusted to
center the punched-hole pattern in the paper. Listed below are the step-by-step instructions to adjust the die set to the proper position.
1. The punched-hole alignment must be checked on a piece of punched paper.
Fold the punched sheet of paper in half [1] and the punched-holes should be
[1]
aligned evenly along the edge and centered between the ends [2]. If the
[2]
punched-holes are not aligned, then the die set cradle must be adjusted to
align the punched holes.
Note
▪ The paper path is always constant, if the holes are not centered, you
must adjust the die set cradle.
2. The two back covers on the GP-501 Punch must be removed to access the die
set position cradle [1]. (Refer to G.36.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover.)
3. Before adjusting the die set position cradle, you must first note what direction
the die set cradle [1] must move.
4. Loosen the lock-down screw [1].

5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, turn the adjustment screw [2] clockwise or
counter-clockwise to move the die set position cradle.
G-369
6. Observe the punched paper. If the punched-holes are too close to the rear of
the machine, then you must turn the adjustment screw counter-clockwise [1].
7. If the punched-holes are too close to the front of the machine, then you must
turn the adjustment screw clockwise [1].
Note
▪ Seven full turns of the adjustment screw result in a 1/4" (6.35 mm)
change in the punched hole position.
8. Before tightening the lock-down screw [1], tilt or bias the assembly towards the
bottom of the machine [2] and tighten the lock-down screw. This will ensure
positive engagement between the locking lever and the die set.
9. Run a test sample of punched paper and recheck paper alignment. Re-adjust if necessary.
36.2 Door latch
36.2.1 Door latch check
(1) Procedure
1. Ensure the door latch holds the door closed and that the activating bracket
tab [1] depresses the door switch [2]. The tab should press the switch button
just so that it is close to bottoming out.
36.2.2 Door Latch Adjustment

(1) To adjust the door latch:
G-370

2. Loosen the two adjustment screws [1] on the door latch.
3. Do one of the following.

• To move the door in, move the latch towards the front of the door.
• To move the door out, move the latch away from the front of the door.
4. Tighten the 2 screws [1] and close the door.
5. Test its operation.
36.2.3 Door Latch and Switch Replacement

(1) To replace the door latch:
(2) To replace the door switch:

3. Unplug connectors from switch [2].
G-371
36.3 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service

36.3.1 Preparing the GP-501 punch for service
WARNING
Disconnect the unit from power and maintain the cord in your
possession. Failure to observe this warning can result in injury
or electrical shock.
Most service requires that the GP-501 Punch be separated from the printer and finisher and the rear cover be removed.
(1) Procedure
• Unplug the unit from power.
• Disconnect the communication cable
• Empty Chip Bin
36.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer

Follow the instructions as described in Installation Manual.
36.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover

Separate the punch from the printer and finisher first. (Refer to G.36.3.2 Separating the Punch From the Printer.)
Note
▪ It is not necessary nor recommended that you remove the top cover.
(1) Procedure
(2) Tool Required
• Phillips screwdriver or 1/4" hex head nut driver
(3) To remove the rear cover:

1. Remove the 5 screws on the entrance side [1] and remove the 6 rear cover
screws [2].
2. Slide the cover out from under the top cover. Do not remove the top cover.
36.4 Leveling and aligning to the printer

The punch must be level and in line with the printer and finisher. If the printer and GP-501 Punch are moved or relocated, the system must be
re-leveled.
Note
▪ It is important that the punch is not twisted or skewed. It must be level front to back and side to side.
36.4.1 Procedure
Raise or lower the GP-501 Punch’s castors to level it.
36.4.2 Tool Required
• 2 3/8" open ended wrenches
• Level
G-372
36.4.3 To level the punch:

1. Remove the rear cover and put the punch back in line with the printer and
finisher.
2. Place the level on a flat surface of the top [1] and determine which castor
needs adjustment.
3. Loosen the locking nut [1] of the castor.

4. From below the frame and at the top of the castor [2], adjust the height of the
castor as needed.
5. Check the level and adjust as necessary.
6. Tighten the locking nut [1].
7. Ensure punch is level and in line with main body and finisher.
8. Install rear cover.
G-373
37. GP-502
The descriptions of the disassembling and reassembling procedure GP-502 are mentioned in the GP-502 service manual.
G-374
C73hc/Print C3070L G DISASSEMBLING/REASSEMBLING > 38. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS
38. COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE PARTS

38.1 Key counter (KCT)
38.1.1 Connector
[1]
[2]
[1] CN493 [2] Jumper connector (CN493R)
38.1.2 Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the key counter cover [2] of the upper cover/Rr2 [1], and connect to
the inside connector.
G-375
C73hc/Print C3070L H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES
The descriptions of the cleaning and the lubrication are mentioned in the maintenance section of each device.
H-1
C73hc/Print C3070L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 1. CHECKPOINTS
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
1. CHECKPOINTS
1.1 Checking before you start work
When you conduct the claims in the field, it is necessary to check the following points first:
1. Are the power supply and voltage secured in accordance with the specifications?
2. Did you properly install the ground line to the power supply?
3. Any equipment that repeatedly consumes a lot of electricity is connected to the same power supply? (for example: Electric noise sources
such as elevator and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the machine?
• High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, air ventilation, and so on.
• Levelness of the location on which the machine is installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original itself?
6. Is density selected properly?
7. Is the original glass stained?
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy consumables replaced with new ones at their life? (for example: Developer, drum, cleaning blade, and so on)
10. Is toner filled?
1.2 Checkpoints when you conduct the on-site service

When you repair the machine, be sure to pay due attention to the following items.
1. Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet. Also, when you operate the machine during the power distribution, be careful of the
scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to get caught by the gear.
2. The fusing section is hot. Be careful not to get burned for handling it.
3. The developing unit is magnetized strongly. Be careful not to bring a watch and an instrument near to the unit.
4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare hands.
I-1
C73hc/Print C3070L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 2. UTILITY
2. UTILITY
2.1 Start and exit
2.1.1 Start method
1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 appears.
2. "Utility screen"
Utility screen appears.
*1 Default is [Machine Screen].
2.1.2 Exit method
1. "Utility screen"
Press [Exit [UTILITY]] and return to the normal operation screen.
2. The new settings become effective.
I-2
C73hc/Print C3070L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

3.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts
Conduct the following adjustment on the items list in this order when you replace the parts on the list. Proper operation and image quality is not
guaranteed without conducting those adjustments after the parts replacement.
Note
▪ When you replace the board due to the damage on the printer image processing board (PRIPB), use the NVRAM board (NRB) that
was installed on the damaged PRIPB for the new PRIPB. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor if it is
considered that NRB is also damaged.
▪ The NVRAM board (NRB) stores various adjustment data, setting data and counter data. Therefore, when replacing the NRB,
perform all adjustments and settings, and be sure to replace the parts for control correction (Drum, developer, cleaning blade).
For details, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor.
▪ When you replace a board due to PB control board (PBCB), SD control board (SDCB), SD control board (PCB1), FD control board
(FDCB), RU control board (RUCB), IQ control board (PCB1), or FNS control board (FNSCB) being damaged, be sure to use the
non-volatile memory (EEPROM) that was installed on the damaged control board on the new control board. Install the new
EEPROM and perform all adjustments for the PB, SD, FD, RU, IQ, or OT if it is considered that the EEPROM is also damaged.
Classification Replacement parts and Others Description
After PM Implementation PM cycle setting counter reset
Drum Drum unit/Y, drum unit/M, drum unit/C, drum Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to F.4.3.3 Replacing unit/K Special Parts Counter (Reset)
the drum unit) (Refer to F.4.3.3 Replacing the drum unit) Gamma Automatic Adjustment
Color Registration Auto.Adj.
Color Registration Manual
Max Density Initial Adj. (execution is recommended)
Developing Developer/Y, /M, /C, /K Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to F.4.5.1 Developing Unit/Y, /M, /C, /K Developer charge (manual)
Developer charging Developer unit replacement adjustment (recommended)
procedures) Toner density sensor initial auto adjustment*1
Special parts counter (Reset)*1
Gamma Automatic Adjustment*1
Color registration auto adjustment*1
Density Balance Adjustment*1
*1 Not needed when the developer unit replace adjustment is
executed.
Intermediate Transfer Intermediate transfer belt Transfer unit installation direction (with UPSIDE mark in rear)
(Refer to F.4.6 (Refer to F.4.6.6 Replacing the intermediate Setting toner number 2 application
Intermediate transfer transfer belt, and cleaning of the rollers and Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
section) the cleaning sheet) Special Parts Counter (Reset)
Blade setting mode
Belt Line Speed Adj.
Gamma Automatic Adjustment
Transfer belt cleaning unit Setting toner number 2 application
(Refer to F.4.6.2 Replacing the transfer belt Special Parts Counter (Reset)
cleaning unit) Blade Setting Mode (intermediate transfer)
Transfer belt cleaning blade, side seal Setting toner number 2 application
(Refer to F.4.6.3 Replacing the belt cleaning Special Parts Counter (Reset)
blade and the side seal) Blade setting mode
1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
transfer roller/C, and 1st transfer roller/K Special Parts Counter (Reset)
(Refer to F.4.6.7 Replacing the 1st transfer Gamma Automatic Adjustment
roller/Y, /M, /C and /K and the transfer roller
bearing/Y, /M, /C and /K)
2nd transfer roller/Lw 2nd transfer roller/Lw installation direction (the longer shaft is on
(Refer to F.4.6.11 Replacing the 2nd transfer the front side)
roller/Lw and the C-clip, and cleaning around
Image correction unit Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
IDC Sensor Adjustment
Highlight Automatic Adjustment
Color registration sensor/Fr (PS60) and color Belt Line Speed Adj.
registration sensor/Rr (PS62) Gamma Automatic Adjustment
Total process mount Drum unit, intermediate transfer belt, transfer Setting toner number 2 application (Transfer belt cleaning unit,
belt cleaning unit, transfer belt cleaning blade transfer belt cleaning blade)
I-3

Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
Special Parts Counter (Reset)
Blade Setting Mode (intermediate transfer)
Belt Line Speed Adj.
Scanner CCD unit Read Position Auto Adj. (ADF Adjustment)
(Refer to G.3.2.11 CCD unit) FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
CD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
LED exposure unit Read Position Auto Adj. (ADF Adjustment)
(Refer to G.3.2.12 LED exposure unit) FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
Original glass Read Position Auto Adj. (ADF Adjustment)
(Refer to G.3.2.9 Original glass assy) Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
Centering Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)
Write Writing unit/K Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to Writing unit) (Refer to G.3.2.17 Writing unit) Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.
Restart Timing Adjustment
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Writing unit/Y, writing unit/M, writing unit/C Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to G.3.2.17 Writing unit) Writing initial position memory (Skew initial position memory)
I/O Check Mode (LD1 to LD4 alarm data clear, LD alarm
measurement)
Beam Pitch Adjustment
Dust-proof glass/Y, dust-proof glass/M, dust- Gamma Automatic Adjustment
proof glass/C, dust-proof glass/K Density balance adjustment
(Refer to G.3.2.17 Writing unit)
Charging Charging corona/Y, charging corona/M, Dust-proof glass cleaning (write unit)
(Refer to F.4.4.1 Replace charging corona/C, and charging corona/K Special Parts Counter (Reset)
the charging corona) (Refer to F.4.4.1 Replace the charging Gamma Automatic Adjustment
corona) Density balance adjustment
Fusing Fusing Belt Fusing belt installation direction (with rot number on the front side)
(Refer to F.4.11 Fusing (Refer to G.3.2.31 Replacement of the fusing
section) ball bearings/Up, /Lw1, the heat insulating
sleeves/Up, /Lw1, the belt regulating sleeve,
the fusing belt, the fusing rollers/1, /2, and the
neutralizing ring)
Temperature sensor/5 (TH5) Adjust the position with the temperature sensor positioning jig/Lw
(Refer to G.3.2.29 Temperature sensor/5 (the jig is required)
(TH5))
Thermostat/1 (TS1) Adjust the position with the thermostat positioning jig/Up (the jig is
(Refer to G.3.2.27 Temperature sensor/1 required)
(TH1), temperature sensor/2 (TH2),
thermostat/1 (TS1), thermostat/2 (TS2))
Thermostat/2 (TS2) Adjust the position with the thermostat positioning jig/Up (the jig is
(TH1), temperature sensor/2 (TH2),
thermostat/1 (TS1), thermostat/2 (TS2))
Thermostat/3 (TS3) Adjust the position with the thermostat positioning jig/Lw (the jig is
(TH5))
Boards Printer image processing board (PRIPB) NVRAM board (NRB) replacement
Laser Pulse Adjustment
Overall control board (OACB) Machine NIC setting
I-4

(Refer to G.3.2.7 Overall control board Performing IO99-98
(OACB)) When HDD Lock Password is disabled: SSD replacement
SSD replacement
When HDD Lock Password is enabled: SSD replacement
SSD replacement
Note
· Before the replacement, contact the service manager of
Konica Minolta.
SSD
Note
· For acquiring or replacing the SSD,
contact the support section of the Konica
Minolta.
Printer control board (PRCB) Rewriting of firmware
Hard disk/1, /2, /3 (HDD1, 2, 3) Format HDD All Data
(Refer to G.3.2.32 HDD1, HDD2, HDD3)
Hard disk/4 (HDD4) Format HDD All Data
(Refer to G.3.2.33 Hard disk/4 (HDD4))
PF-602m Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR) Multi feed detection board adjustment
(Refer to G.5.2.11 The multi feed detection
board (MFDBR and MFDBS))
PF-707m Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR) Multi feed detection board adjustment
(Refer to G.6.3.23 Multi feed detection board
(MFDBR, MFDBS))
LU-202XLm Multi feed detection boards/S (MFDBS) and /R Adjusting multi-feed detection
(MFDBR)
(Refer to G.8.2.17 Multi feed detection
boards/S (MFDBS), R (MFDBR) (LU-202XL,
LU-202XLm))
DF-706 DF control board (DFCB) Rewriting of firmware
ADF Original Size Adj.
Mixed Original Size Adj.
Multi feed detection board Multi-Feed Detection Adj.
CIS module FD-Mag. Adjustment
FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment
FD-Mag. Adjustment(Back)
FD-Mag. Auto Adj.(Back)
Main Scan Dir. Zoom(Back)
Main Scan Dir. Zoom Auto(Back)
Read Position Adj.
Read Position Auto Adj.
ADF Orig. Stop Position
ADF Orig. Stop Pos. Auto
Intermediate transfer/H Same as the intermediate transfer section of
the main body
EF-103 Same as the fusing section of the main body
RU-518 RU control board (PCB1) Rewriting of firmware
(Refer to G.16.3.11 Note for replacing the EEPROM replacement
board)
RU-702 RU control board (PCB1) Rewriting of firmware
(Refer to G.17.3.7 Note for replacing the EEPROM replacement
board)
RU-510 RU control board (RUCB) (Refer to G.18.2.6 Rewriting of firmware
Note for replacing the board) EEPROM replacement
IQ-501 Conveyance roller/1, /2, /3 Special Parts Counter (reset)
Read Trans.Roller Speed Adj.
Scanner calibration unit/1, /2 Scanner Correction Pos. Adj.
(Refer to Scanner calibration unit/1,
G.22.3.11 Scanner calibration unit/2)
Scanner unit/1, /2 Special Parts Counter (Reset)
(Refer to G.22.3.7 Scanner unit/1, G.22.3.10 Scanner Read Position Adj.
Scanner unit/2) Scanner LUT Interpolation
Colorimetry trigger sensor (PS013) Measured Trigger Sensitivity
Measured Trigger Pos. Adj.
Colorimeter unit, colorimeter white calibration Measured Trigger Pos. Adj.
block Rewriting of firmware
(Refer to G.22.3.13 Colorimeter unit,
Colorimeter white calibration bloc)
I-5

IQ control board (PCB1) EEPROM replacement
(Refer to G.22.3.16 Note for replacing the Rewriting of firmware
board)
UK-301 SSD (SSD) M/C Serial Number Setting
(Refer to G.23.2.5 SSD (SSD)) IO99-31
Rewriting of firmware
Rebooting the main body
UK control board (UKCB) IO99-32
(Refer to G.23.2.6 UK control board (UKCB)) Rebooting the main body
HDD/1 (HDD/1), HDD/2 (HDD/2), HDD/3 Format HDD All Data (UK-301)
(HDD/3), HDD/4 (HDD/4) Rebooting the main body
(Refer to G.23.2.7 HDD/1 (HDD/1), HDD/2
(HDD/2), HDD/3 (HDD/3), HDD/4 (HDD/4))
FS-531, FS-612, FS-532 FNS control board (FNSCB) Rewriting of firmware
EEPROM replacement
Stapler unit Clincher positioning (require the jig)
*FS-531, FS-532 do not require the adjustment.
OT-510 FNS control board (FNSCB) Rewriting of firmware
EEPROM replacement
SD-510 SD control board (SDCB) Rewriting of firmware
Stapler unit Clincher positioning (require the jig)
PK-511*1, PK-512*2, Punch drive board (PDB) Paper Edge Detect Sensor
PK-513*2, PK-522 Paper size sensor (PS305) Paper Edge Detect Sensor
*1: Only for Japan
*2: For the regions except
Japan
LS-506 LS control board (LSCB) Rewriting of firmware
Grip conveyance home sensor adjustment
Paper Width Adjustment
Paper Length Adjustment
FD-503 FD control board (FDCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Multi feed detection board (MFDB) Multi feed detection board adjustment
PI drive board (PIDB) Multi feed detection board adjustment
SD-506 SD control board (SDCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Trimmer board assy I/O Check Mode (trimmer board solenoid operation counter reset)
(Refer to F.25.5.2 Replacing the trimmer
board assy)
SD-513 SD control board (PCB1) EEPROM replacement
Trimmer board assy I/O check mode (Trimmer board movement operation counter
(Refer to F.26.8.2 Replacing the trimmer clear)
board)
Stapler unit (Refer to F.26.5.1 Replacing the Staple position adjustment
staple unit)
Clincher (Refer to F.26.5.2 Replacing the
clincher)
PB-503 PB control board (PBCB) DIPSW setting of the boards
EEPROM replacement
Multi feed detection board adjustment
Multi feed detection board (MFDBS, MFDBR) Multi feed detection board adjustment
I-6
C73hc/Print C3070L I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. SERVICE MODE
4. SERVICE MODE
4.1 Service Mode List
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board
(NRB).
NOTE
▪ Some items on the following list are not displayed at the default setting.
▪ In order to display items that are not displayed at the default settings, change the optional configurations or each setting.
4.1.1 Hierarchy
Adjustment/setting items
01 Machine Adjustment 01 Printer Adjustment 01 Restart Timing Adjustment
02 Centering Adjustment 01 Centering Auto Adjustment
02 Centering Sensor Gap Adj.
03 Centering Adjustment
03 FD-Mag. Adjustment
04 CD-Mag. Adjustment
05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
06 Registration Loop Adj.
07 Pre-registration Adj.
08 Belt Line Speed Adj.
09 Writing Initial Pos. 01 Skew Initial Position Memory
Memory
10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.
11 Color Regist. Gap Measurement
12 Double Feed Detect Adj.
13 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.
14 Beam Pitch Adjustment
15 Color Regist. Manual Adj.
16 Speed Adjustment
17 Registration Unit Skew Adj.
18 Fusing Unit Skew Adjustment
19 Recall Standard Data
02 Scan Adjustment 01 Restart Timing Adjustment
02 Centering Adjustment
04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.
05 CD-Mag. Adjustment
06 Sensor Check
07 CCD Check
08 Line Mag. Setting
09 Recall Standard data
03 Quality Adjustment 01 Gamma Curve 01 IDC Sensor Adjustment
Adjustment 02 Highlight Automatic Adj.
03 Highlight Adjustment
04 Half-Tone Adjustment
02 Sharpness Adjustment
03 Contrast Adjustment
04 Image Distinction Level 01 Dot Detect Adjustment
02 Color Text Adjustment
03 Dot/Text Area Adjustment
05 ACS Adjustment
06 Density Adjustment 01 AE(AES) Adjustment
02 Copy Density Adjustment
03 Background Removal
07 Tone Adjustment 01 Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC)
08 Line Width Adjustment
09 Package Color Auto Adj.
10 Package Color Manual Adj.
I-7
12 Prepare for auto selection
13 Image Diagnosis
04 Non-Image Area Erase Check
05 Laser Pulse Adjustment
06 Tray Adjustment 01 Tray Size Adjustment
02 Process Adjustment 01 High Voltage 01 1st Transfer Manual Adj.
Adjustment 02 2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
03 Sep. Current Manual Adj.
04 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm
02 Drum Peculiarity Adj. 01 Blade Setting Mode
02 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
03 Toner Density Sensor Init.
04 Toner Density Revert
05 Max Density Initial Adj.
06 Max. Dens. Initial Auto Adj.
07 All Dev. Unit Replace Adj.
03 Sensor Output Confirm 01 IDC Sensor Output
02 Toner Density Sensor Output
03 Humidity/Temperature Output
04 1st Trans. Resistance Meas.
05 2nd Trans. Resistance Meas.
04 Process Fine 01 Background Margin Fine Adj.
Adjustment 02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.
03 Develop AC Freq. Fine Adj.
04 Toner Density Fine Adj.
05 Fusing Temperature Fine Adj.
05 Interval/Quantity Adj. 01 Drum Small Rotation Interval
03 System Setting 01 Software DIPSW Setting
02 Service Center TEL/FAX
03 Serial Number Setting
04 Setup Data/Business Setting
04 Counter/Data 01 Maintenance Counter
02 Collecting Data 01 Paper Size Counter (Total) 01 Paper Size Counter (Total)
02 Paper Size (Total/Envelope)
02 Paper Size Counter (Copy) 01 Paper Size Counter(Copy)
02 Paper Size(Copy/Envelope)
03 Paper Size Counter (Printer) 01 Paper Size Counter(Printer)
02 Paper Size(Printer/Envelope)
04 ADF Counter
05 Coverage Data History
06 Paper JAM History
07 JAM Counter
08 Counter of Each Copy Mode
09 SC Counter
10 JAM Counter Individual Sec.
11 SC Counter Individual Sec.
12 SC Data of Time Series
13 Maintenance History 01 Maintenance Counter Reset
02 Parts History in Time Series
14 Each Paper Type Counter
15 ORU-M Maintenance History
03 Parts Counter 01 Special Parts Counter 01 All Items
02 Waste Toner / Filter
03 Charging Corona / Drum
04 Developing
05 Intermediate Transfer/C
I-8
06 Intermediate Transfer/H
07 Intermediate Transfer
08 2nd Transfer
09 Fusing
10 Paper Transportation
11 Main Body Tray
12 EF
13 PFU
14 RU
15 HM
16 GP
17 FD
18 LS
19 SD
20 PB
02 Special Parts Counter 2 01 FS
02 OT
03 ADF
04 IQ
05 LU
06 MB
07 Others
03 Voluntary Part Counter
04 Total Counter History
05 Life Counter
05 State Confirmation 01 I/OCheck Mode
06 ADF Adjustment 01 ADF Original Size Adj.
02 ADF Orig. Stop Position
03 ADF Orig Stop Pos. Auto
04 ADF Registration Loop Adj.
05 Feed paper Check
06 Sensor Check
07 Read Position Adj.
08 Read Position Auto Adj.
10 FD-Mag. Auto Adjustment
11 Scanning Light Adjustment
12 Mixed Original Size Adj.
13 Line Detection(Front Side)
14 Line Detection(Back Side)
15 ADF Scan Glass Auto Cleaning
16 Home Read Position Adj(Back)
17 FD-Mag. Adjustment(Back)
18 FD-Mag. Auto Adj.(Back)
19 Main Scan Dir. Zoom(Back)
20 Main ScanDir. Zoom Auto(Back)
21 Original Tray Pre-rise Set.
22 Multi-Feed Detection Adj.
23 Skew Measurement
25 ADF Data Backup
07 Finisher Adjustment 01 Staple Finisher 01 Staple Finisher(Main) 01 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
Adjustment(OT-510) Adj.
01 Staple Finisher 01 Staple Finisher(Main) 01 Exit Guide Paper Width Adj.
Adjustment(FS-532/ Adj. 02 Staple Paper Width Adj.
SD-510/PK-522/PI-502)
03 FD Alignment Plate Adj.
04 Staple Position Adjustment
I-9
05 Rewind Paddle Descent Adj.
02 Staple Finisher(Fold) 01 Fold&Staple Paper Width Adj.
Adj. 02 Fold&Staple Pitch Adj.
03 Fold&Staple Fold Position
04 Fold&Staple Staple Position
05 Half-Fold Fold Position Adj.
06 Tri-Fold Adjustment 01 Tri-Fold Position
Adjustment
02 Double Fold Plate
Adjustment
07 Half-Fold Strength Adj.
03 Staple Finisher (Punch) 01 Paper Edge Detect Sensor
Adj. 02 Registration Adjustment
03 Horizontal Position Adj. (FD)
04 Vertical Position Adj. (CD)
04 Staple Finisher(PI) Adj. 01 Tray Size Adjustment
02 PI Registration Adjustment
02 Multi Folder Adjustment 01 Multi Folder (Punch) 01 Paper Width Ajustment
Adj. 02 Punch Vertical Position 01 2-Hole Punch
Adj. 02 3-Hole punch
02 4-Hole punch
02 Multi Folder (Fold) Adj. 01 Fold Registration Loop Adj.
02 Half-Fold Position Adj.
03 Z-Fold Position Adj.
04 Tri-Fold-in Pos. Adj.
05 Tri-Fold-out Pos. Adj.
06 Double Parallel Pos. Adj.
07 Gate Position Adj.
03 Stacker Adjustment 01 Paper Width Ajustment
02 Paper Length Adjustment
04 Saddle Stitcher 01 Fold Paper Width Adj.
Adjustment(SD-506) 02 Half-Fold Position Adj.
03 Staple Paper Width Adj.
04 Staple Center Position
05 Staple Pitch Adjustment
06 Trimming Adjustment
07 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment
08 Trimmer Receiver Adj.
04 Saddle Stitcher 01 Trans. Entrance Paper Width
Adjustment(SD-513/ 02 Fold Paper Width Adj.
CR-101/TU-503/FD-504)
03 Fold Skew Adjustment
04 Half-Fold Position Adj.
05 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment
06 Crease Position 01 Half-Fold Crease Position
Adjustment 02 Tri-Fold Crease Position
03 PB Cover Crease Position
07 Staple Paper Width Adj.
08 Staple Center Position 01 2 Position Staple
02 4 Position Staple(Front 2)
03 4 Position Staple(Rear 2)
09 Staple Pitch Adjustment 01 2 Position Staple
02 4 Position Staple(Front 2)
03 4 Position Staple(Rear 2)
10 Saddle Position Adjustment
11 Staple Offset Adjustment
12 Staple Tip Adjustment
13 Spine Fold Line Adjustment
I-10
14 Flattening a Fold (Strength)
15 Flattening a Fold (Freq.)
16 Parallel Trimming Adjustment
17 Fore-edge Trimming Adj.
18 Registration Loop Adj.
19 2-Side Slitting Adjustment
20 Trimmer Recover Adj.
05 Perfect Binder 01 Sub Compile CD Width Adj.
Adjustment 02 Clamp CD Width Adjustment
03 Clamp FD Position Adj.
04 Glue Start Position
05 Glue Finish Position
06 Cover Lead Edge Adj.
07 Cover Trimming Adjustment
08 Cover Up/Down CD Width Adj.
09 Spine Corner Forming Pos.
10 Temperature Adjustment
06 Relay Stacker 01 Paper Width Ajustment
Adjustment 02 Paper Length Adjustment
07 External FNS Customize 01 External FNS Customize Set. 1
Set. 02 External FNS Customize Set. 2
08 Special Customize Setting
09 IQ Optimizer Adjustment 01 Read Trans. Roller Speed Adj.
02 Scanner Correction Pos. Adj.
03 Scanner Read Position Adj.
04 Scanner LUT Interpolation
05 Measured Trigger Sensitivity
06 Measured Trigger Pos. Adj.
07 Spot Detect. Base Adjustment
07 Finisher Adjustment 01 Confirm Paper Feed Position
(FS-612/PK-512/PK-513/ 02 Fold & Staple Stopper
PI-502)
03 Half-Fold Stopper Adj.
04 Punch Adjustment 01 Vertical Position Adj.
02 Horizontal Position Adj.
03 Registration Adjustment
04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor
05 Tri-Fold Adjustment
06 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.
07 Post Inserter Tray Size
08 Output Quantity Limit
07 Finisher Adjustment 01 Confirm Paper Feed Position
(FS-531/PK-512/PK-513/ 04 Punch Adjustment 01 Vertical Position Adj.
PI-502)
02 Horizontal Position Adj.
03 Registration Adjustment
04 Paper Edge Detect Sensor
06 2 Pos. Staple Pitch Adj.
07 Post Inserter Tray Size
08 Output Quantity Limit
08 Firmware Version 01 Firmware Version
09 CS Remote Care 01 CS Remote Care
02 Log FW Address Setting
03 Log Forwarding Time Setting
10 List Output
11 Test Mode 01 Running Test Mode
I-11
02 Test Pattern Output Mode
03 Print Suspend Mode
12 ISW 01 ISW
02 Package ISW
13 Setting Data 01 Load from External Memory
02 Store to External Memory
14 Log Store 01 Log Store Setting
02 Execute Log Storing
03 Log Store Setting (UK-301)
04 Execute Log Storing (UK-301)
15 ORU-M Setting 01 ORU-M Item/Life Setting
02 ORU-M Life Threshold Setting
03 ORU-M Password Setting
16 HDD Setting 01 Format HDD All Data
02 Format Controller HDD Data
03 Format Additional HDD Data
04 Format HDD All Data (UK-301)
17 Auth. Device Setting 01 Auth. Unit Selection
02 Loadable Driver Install
18 Startup Setting 01 Package Adjustment
02 Setup Setting 1 01 Date/Time Setting
02 Setup Date/Business Setting
03 Service Center TEL/FAX
04 Mono Energy-save Mode
03 Setup Setting 2 01 Firmware Version
02 Serial Number Setting
03 Non-Image Area Erase Check
04 To NIC Settings in Utility
05 Package Position 01 Centering Auto Adjustment
Adjustment 02 Package Position Auto Adj.
03 Package Position Manual Adj.
19 Install User's Guide
4.2 Start and exit

4.2.1 Start method
You can access the service mode while the power is both turned ON and OFF.
In either way, the started service mode is the same, but how to exit differs.
Note
▪ Do not let people who is not concerned in the service know how to enter the service mode.
▪ When you leave the site during the service mode operation, unauthorized changes could occur for any values. When you finish
the setting of the service mode, or when you have to leave the site during the operation, be sure to press [Exit [SERVICE]] to the
basic screen.
(1) Start-up from power ON

1. Be sure that the ordinary operation screen *1 appears.
2. "Utility screen"
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
When the CE password has been configured, entering the password is required to enter the service mode.
The service mode appears.
(2) Start-up from power OFF

1. While you press the [Utility/Counter] button, activate the sub power switch (SW2).
When the CE password has been configured, entering the password is required to enter the service mode.
The service mode appears.
4.2.2 Exit method
Exit methods differ according to the condition of the power switch, ON or OFF.
I-12
(1) When the power is ON

1. "Service Mode menu screen"
Press [Exit [SERVICE]] and return to the "Utility Menu screen".
2. The new settings become effective.
(2) When the power is OFF

Deactivate the SW2.
2. After the reboot, the new settings become effective.
4.3 Machine Adjustment
4.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
(1) Function
Change the restart timing of the registration roller and adjust the image position on the paper in the sub scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image leading edge timing of the printer.
Note
▪ Be sure the Scanner FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.5 FD-Mag.
Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Machine Adjustment].
2. "Machine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Printer Adjustment].
3. "Printer Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Restart Timing Adjustment]
4. "Restart Timing Adjustment screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item that you want to adjust and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment is available for each paper tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (large or small) and the paper type (plain paper or the
thick paper) respectively.
Note
▪ Large size: Paper size 300 mm or more in the sub scan direction
▪ Small size: Paper size less than 300 mm in the sub scan direction
▪ Thick: Paper weight 177 g/m2 or more
5. "PRINT MODE screen"
Configure the print setting according to the selected item and press the start button. Then output the test pattern (number 16 or number
33).
6. Check the image leading edge timing.
• Standard value: 20 ± 0.5 mm
20
57gaf3c007na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit PrintMode].
Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
• Setting range
: -60 (short) to +60 (long)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
I-13
4.3.2 Centering Auto Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)

(1) Function
Store the misalignment amount of each paper feed tray and configure the target value of the registration swing. Fix the image write position
aligning to the configured target value of the registration swing.
(2) Usage
Adjust when you install the main body or the paper feed option, or when the mis-centering amount is large on a particular feed tray.
Note
▪ Be sure the Printer CD-Mag. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.6 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer
Adjustment))
▪ To adjust the centering adjustment, usually perform this adjustment. When you want to perform the fine adjustment, perform "
I.4.3.4 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)".
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Adjustment].
4. "Centering adjustment mode menu screen"
Press [01 Centering Auto Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment] → [Centering Auto Adjustment]
5. "Centering Auto Adjustment screen"
This adjustment is available for each paper feed tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (common, large size, small size or 8 1/2× 5 1/2 (tray 1
to 2, bypass, ADU)) and the paper size (plain paper or thick paper) respectively.
Note
▪ Thick paper can only be selected for ADU
▪ The value on each item is the current value. This value is corrected by adding the value of the centering sensor gap
adjustment for the corresponding item to the current value on each item.
Configure the print setting according to the selected item, press the start button and output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
Note
▪ 5 sheets are printed for the test pattern. (The configured quantity can be changed, but print 5 sheets normally.)
▪ After the adjustment, the correction value is applied to the current value. (Configuration value: 1 step = 0.01 mm)
7. Press [Exit PrintMode].
8. "Centering Auto Adjustment screen"
Confirm that the current value is within - 200 to + 200.
Note
▪ If not, the paper feed tray or the paper feed option possibly is not installed to the proper position. You are recommended to
adjust the installation position of the paper feed tray or the paper feed option.
4.3.3 Centering Sensor Gap Adj. (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)

(1) Function
In order to correct the error of the installation position of the centering sensor, match the image writing position and the paper sensor position.
(2) Usage
Adjust when you install the main body or the paper feed option, or when you clean or replace the centering sensor.
Note
▪ Be sure that the centering adjustment (printer adjustment- centering adjustment) has been adjusted before this adjustment.
(Refer to I.4.3.2 Centering Auto Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment))
Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Centering Sensor Gap Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment] → [Centering Sensor Gap Adj.]
5. "Centering Sensor Gap Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select Tray1 and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16).
7. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left lines and right lines misalign
from each other.
• Standard value: within ± 1.5 mm
I-14
9. "Centering Sensor Gap Adj. screen"
• Setting range: -100 (image in front) to +100 (image in back)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.4 Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the laser writing timing and adjust the image writing position.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image centering in the printer main scan direction.
Note
Adjustment))
▪ To adjust the mis-centering, use the " I.4.3.2 Centering Auto Adjustment (Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment)"
normally. Perform this adjustment when you want to adjust the centering finely.
(3) Procedure
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment] → [Centering Adjustment]
5. "Centering Adjustment screen"
This adjustment is available for each paper feed tray (each tray or ADU), paper size (common, large size, small size or 8 1/2× 5 1/2 (tray 1
to 2, bypass, ADU)) and the paper size (plain paper or thick paper) respectively.
Note
Configure the print setting according to the selected item. To output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33), press the Start button.
7. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left lines and right lines misalign
from each other.
• Standard value: within ± 1.5 mm
• Setting range: -40 (image in front) to +40 (image in back)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
I-15
4.3.5 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the speed of the polygon motor and adjust the image magnification.
(2) Usage
This adjustment changes the speed of the polygon motor and adjusts the image magnification.
Note
▪ Be careful when you adjust because there are 2 following types of method for the printer magnification adjustment in the sub
scan direction.
1. FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in the sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration
roller or the paper shrinkage by heat.
2. Belt Line Speed Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment under the conditions that is not mentioned in Number 1.
▪ As the default, the magnification in the sub-scanning direction can be adjusted. When the difference between the
magnifications that are configured for the front and back of the paper is less than 1%, productivity does not decrease.
However, productivity decreases when the difference between the magnifications that are configured for the front and back of
the paper is greater than 1%.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [FD-Mag. Adjustment]
4. "FD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for the back side (each tray).
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the Start key to output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
6. Check the magnification in the sub scan direction.
• Standard value
: ± 0.5% or less (when in life-size)
: 205.7 ± 1 mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
Select the item that you want to adjust.
• Setting Range
Printer FD-Mag. (both sides at a time): -100 (short) to +100 (long)
Other than the above: -80 (short) to +20 (long)
• 1 step = 0.01%
9. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
4.3.6 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes the laser writing pitch and the magnification in the image process.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in main scanning direction.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 CD-Mag. Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [CD-Mag. Adjustment]
4. "CD-Mag. Adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust and press [Print Mode].
This adjustment can be performed for both sides at a time (all trays) or for the back side (each tray).
I-16

6. Check the magnification in the main scan direction.
• Standard value
: 190 ± 1 mm or less
190
57gaf3c004na
Select the item that you want to adjust.
• Setting range: -100 (short) to +100 (long)
• 1 step = 0.01%
9. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [Set].
4.3.7 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image erasure amount of the leading edge.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the image erasure (deleted) amount of the leading edge is not within the standard value.
Note
▪ This adjustment method is for C3080, C3070, C3070L (copier version). C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, C73hc (printer version) does
not have an adjustment means.
(3) Preparation
Be sure the printer FD-Mag. Adjustment has been adjusted.
(4) Procedure
Press [05 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Lead Edge Erase Adjustment]
4. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place the test chart to the original glass, choose a paper A3 or 11x17, and press the Start key.
6. Check the leading edge erasure amount.
• Standard value "a": 4 mm or less
a
57gaf3c029nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit Print Mode].
8. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
• Setting Range
: -20 (narrower) to +40 (wider)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.8 Registration Loop Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller section.
I-17
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove the paper skew and the crease, or the paper jamming in the registration section.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Registration Loop Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Registration Loop Adj.]
4. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
This adjustment can be performed for the feed tray (trays, ADU), paper size (large, small, 150 mm or less of the width), and the paper
type (plain paper, thick paper).
Note
▪ Paper thickness: Paper weight 177 g/m2 or more
Configure the print setting according to the selected item, press the start button and output the test pattern (number 16 or number 33).
6. If the problem is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
7. "Registration Loop Adj. screen"
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
8. Repeat the steps 4 to 7 until an appropriate value is obtained.
4.3.9 Pre-registration Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the paper loop amount in the pre-registration roller section.
(2) Usage
Adjust to remove the paper skew and the crease, or the paper jamming in the pre-registration section.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 Pre-registration Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Pre-registration Adj.]
4. "Pre-registration Adjustment screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item that you want to adjust. Then press [Print Mode].
This adjustment is available for each paper tray (each tray, the ADU, or each connecting part), paper size (large, small, or a width of 150
mm or less) respectively.
In case of PF-707m, this adjustment is available for each paper weight (105 g/m2 or less, 106 g/m2 to 256 g/m2, 257 g/m2 or more)
respectively.
Note
▪ 1st tandem connecting part: Adjusts the pre-registration amount of the 1st tandem PFU when a paper is fed from the 2nd
tandem PFU or the 3rd tandem PFU.
▪ 2nd tandem connecting part: Adjusts the pre-registration amount of the 2nd tandem PFU when a paper is fed from the 3rd
tandem PFU.
▪ Bypass tray connecting part: Adjusts the pre-registration amount of the 1st tandem PFU when a paper is fed from the
MB-508.
▪ Tray 6 connecting part: Adjusts the pre-registration amount of the 1st tandem PFU when a paper is fed from the
LU-202XLm.
6. If the problem is not solved, press [Exit PrintMode].
7. "Pre-registration Adjustment screen"
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.10 Belt Line Speed Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes line speed of the transfer belt.
I-18
(2) Usage
• Perform this adjustment to fix an offset on the peripheral speed of the belt that determines line speed from the part tolerance of the belt
driving system.
• To fix the offset, perform this adjustment when you replace the transfer belt unit.
• Adjust the magnification in sub-scan direction.
Note
▪ Bs careful that there are 2 following types of method for the printer magnification adjustment in the sub scan direction.
1. FD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment when the magnification in the sub-scanning direction has changed because of the worn registration
roller or the paper shrinkage by heat.
Adjust the rotation speed of the polygon motor. Used to perform the fine adjustment of the magnification.
2. Belt Line Speed Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)
Perform this adjustment under the conditions that is not mentioned in Number 1.
Adjust the speed of the intermediate transfer motor (M9). Used to perform the rough adjustment of the magnification.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Belt Line Speed Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Belt Line Speed Adj.]
4. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
• Standard value
: 205.7 ± 1 mm or less
205.7 1
57gaf3c003na
8. "Belt Line Speed Adj. screen"
• 1 step = 0.01%
Note
▪ Configuration range is available from -100 to +100, but the optimum value is from +3 to +29. An error code possibly occur
when you enter the value that is not within the optimum value.
4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)
(1) Function
Store the initial position of the skew adjustment mechanism of the write unit in the NVRAM board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Execute only when the write unit is replaced to the new one.
(3) Procedure
Press [09 Writing Initial Pos. Memory].
4. "Writing Initial Pos. Memory screen"
Press [01 Skew Initial Position Memory].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Writing Initial Pos. Memory] → [Skew Initial Position Memory]
5. "Skew Initial Position Memory screen"
Select the color of the replaced write unit and press [Start].
4.3.12 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Whole adjustment flow of color gap
• There are 5 types of the color gap adjustments.
I-19
• Color Registration Auto Adj. (described here)

• Color Regist. Gap Measurement - Measure (Refer to I.4.3.13 (4) Procedure (Measure))
• Color Regist. Gap Measurement - Horiz.(Part) Adj. (Refer to I.4.3.13 (5) Procedure (Horiz.(Part) Adj.))
• Writing unit tilt adjustment (Refer to I.9.4 Writing unit tilt adjustment)
• Color Regist. Manual Adj. (Refer to I.4.3.17 Color Regist. Manual Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• To adjust the color gap, follow the following flow.
• For details, refer to each adjustment.
Start
Color Registration Auto Adj.
Color Regist. Gap Measurement

->Measure
・NG
・OK, but you want to adjust the horizontal
State of the Horiz.(Part) partial magniﬁcation more accurately
OK Color Regist. Gap Measurement

->Horiz.(Part) Adj.
NG
State of the Horiz.(Part)
OK Writing unit tilt adjustment

->Horiz.(Part) Adj.
NG
OK

->Measure
NG
State of the Sub Scan
Color Regist. Manual Adj.
OK
->Measure
Finish
(2) Function
The main scan, sub scan, horizontal magnification (main scan direction magnification), and skew (tilt) of the color registration misalignment of
Y, M, C are automatically adjusted relative to K.
(3) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a color registration error.
Note
▪ Perform this adjustment when the malfunction code C-4520 or C-47A5 occurs.
(4) Procedure
I-20

Press [10 Color Registration Auto.Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Color Registration Auto. Adj.]
4. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Press [Start].
5. The color registration adjustment starts and a message "Completed" is shown in about 2 minutes. If the error message appears, perform
an error correction referring to the following solutions.
• Error 1: The pattern of the prescribed number has not been detected.
The patch density is possibly too light. Check around the drum unit and perform the Gamma Automatic Adjustment. Then conduct
this adjustment again.
• Error 2: The difference of the color registration is too much.
Check the installation position of the write unit.
Output the test pattern to check the image density. When the image density is abnormal, perform the gamma automatic adjustment.
• Error 3: Other
The other malfunction other than the auto color registration adjustment possibly occur. Restart the main body in the normal mode
and check the malfunction code.
6. "Color Registration Auto.Adj. screen"
Misalignment amounts of Y, M, and C of "Main Scan", "Sub Scan", "Horizontal", and "Skew" relative to K are displayed on the panel.
(unit: pixel)
4.3.13 Color Regist. Gap Masurement (Printer Adjustment)

• Color Registration Auto Adj. (Refer to " I.4.3.12 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)")
• Color Regist. Gap Measurement - Measure (Described here)
• Color Regist. Gap Measurement - Horiz.(Part) Adj. (Described here)
• Color Regist. Manual Adj. (Refer to I.4.3.17 Color Regist. Manual Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
I-21
Start

->Measure
・NG

->Horiz.(Part) Adj.
NG

->Horiz.(Part) Adj.
NG
OK

->Measure
NG
OK
->Measure
Finish
(2) Function
• Measure
• For the main scan, whole horizontal magnification (whole main scan direction magnification), partial horizontal magnification (partial
main scan direction magnification), sub scan, tilt, and scan bend (main scan direction), the gap of Y, M, and C are measured relative
to K. The measurement result is displayed on the touch panel.
• The measurement result of the partial horizontal magnification shows the correction result by the Horiz.(Part) Adj. and the writing
unit tilt adjustment.
• Horiz.(Part) Adj.
• Adjusts the partial horizontal magnification automatically.
• Displays the adjustment result of the partial horizontal magnification on the touch panel.
• The displayed adjustment result shows the correction result of the writing unit tilt adjustment only. The correction result of this
adjustment is not reflected.
Therefore, you can check the adjustment condition of the partial horizontal magnification by the writing unit tilt adjustment.
(3) Usage
• Measure
• Use this mode when you check the condition of the color gap.
• Horiz.(Part) Adj.
• Use this mode when you adjust the partial horizontal magnification.
I-22
Note
· You can adjust the partial horizontal magnification with the Horiz.(Part) Adj. and the writing unit tilt adjustment.
· Perform this adjustment first when you adjust the partial horizontal magnification.
If the state of the partial horizontal magnification is NG even though you perform this adjustment, perform the writing unit
tilt adjustment. (Refer to I.9.4 Writing unit tilt adjustment)
Note
▪ This adjustment is for the C3080, C3070, C3070L (copier version). It does not work for the C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, C73hc
(printer version). Perform ''Color Registration Auto.Adj. (printer adjustment)'' for the C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, C73hc (printer
version).
Adjustment))
▪ Be sure the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.12 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
(4) Procedure (Measure)
Press [11 Color Regist.Gap Measurement].
4. "Color Regist. Gap Meas./Manual Adj. screen"
Press [Measure].
Press [Print Mode].
Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Place the outputted test pattern [1] on the original glass securely against the original positioning plate/Lt [2] and the original positioning
plate/Rr [3], and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
▪ When you place the test pattern onto the original glass, be sure to take care of the setting direction (with printing face
down) and the position.
▪ Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C, K) in the [Test Pattern Output Mode] is configured to 255. If not, it causes an
error.
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1011

Press [Exit PrintMode].
Press [Start] to scan the test pattern using the scanner.
Note
▪ Scan the test pattern that is output when you select the [Measure] tab.
▪ If you scan the test pattern that is output when you select the [Horiz. (Part) Adj.] tab, the correct gap amount cannot be
measured. This situation occurs because the output test pattern varies according to the tab to select.
▪ Select [Measure] tab: Correction of the Horiz. (Part) Adj. is ON
▪ Select [Horiz. (Part) Adj.] tab: Correction of the Horiz. (Part) Adj. is OFF
9. Shows the misalignment amount of Y, M, and C relative to K of "Main Scan", "Horiz.(All)" (whole magnification in main scanning), "Horiz.
(Part)" (partial magnification in main scanning), Sub Scan, "Skew", and "Scan Bend" (main scanning) at "Rest" section on the touch
panel. (unit: pixel)
10. Make sure that the screen displays "OK" for all the items. If the value is out of standard, "NG" and an error code appears.
For details of setting values, refer to "Table 1: Error code."
11. When "NG" appears for "Horiz.(All)" or when you want to adjust the partial horizontal magnification more accurately, perform the Horiz.
(Part) Adj.. (Refer to I.4.3.13 (5) Procedure (Horiz.(Part) Adj.))
I-23
• When "NG" appears for "Main Scan", "Horiz.(All)", "Sub Scan", or "Skew", perform the Color Registration Auto Adj. again. (Refer to
I.4.3.12 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
• When "NG" appears for "Sub Scan" even after you conduct the Color Registration Auto Adj. again, perform the Color Regist. Manual
Adj.. (Refer to I.4.3.17 Color Regist. Manual Adj. (Printer Adjustment))
Table 1: Error code
Error code Description Cause
Error 1 Cannot detect the chart pattern Chart misplacement
Error 2 The chart is placed upside down Chart misplacement
Error 3 Cannot detect the chart pattern Different chart is placed
Error 4 Adjustment impossible Software bug
Error 5 Value is out of standard Readjust
Error 6 Non-volatile data abnormality Check the installation position of the NVRAM
board
Error 7 Accessing to the unassigned memory Software bug
Error 8 Memory-related error Software bug
Error 9 Program error Software bug
Error 10 Chart is skewed Chart misplacement
Error 11 Image header information read error Software bug
Error 12 Parameter setting error Software bug
Error 13 Measurement error Chart misplacement or chart failure
(5) Procedure (Horiz.(Part) Adj.)

Press [11 Color Regist.Gap Measurement].
Press [Horiz. (Part) Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
plate/Rr [3], and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
▪ When you place the test pattern onto the original glass, be sure to take care of the setting direction (with printing face
down) and the position.
▪ Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C, K) in the [Test Pattern Output Mode] is configured to 255. If not, it causes an
error.
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1011

Press [Start] to scan the test pattern using the scanner.
The correction value of the partial horizontal magnification is calculated at this time. The calculated correction value is saved in the
NVRAM board (NRB).
I-24
Note
▪ Scan the test pattern that is output when you select the [Horiz. (Part) Adj.] tab.
▪ If you scan the test pattern that is output when you select the [Measure] tab, the correct correction value cannot be
acquired. This is because the output test pattern varies according to the tab to select.
▪ Select [Measure] tab: Correction of the Horiz. (Part) Adj. is ON
▪ Select [Horiz. (Part) Adj.] tab: Correction of the Horiz. (Part) Adj. is OFF
9. The gap of the partial horizontal magnification of Y, M, and C relative to K is displayed at the "Rest" section on the touch panel. (unit:
pixel)
Note
▪ The displayed adjustment result shows the correction result of the writing unit tilt adjustment only. The correction result of
this adjustment is not reflected.
Therefore, you can check the adjustment condition of the partial horizontal magnification by the writing unit tilt
adjustment.
10. Check the state of the Horiz.(Part).
• For OK
Perform the Measure of the Color Regist. Gap Measurement. . (Refer to I.4.3.13 (4) Procedure (Measure))
• For NG
Perform the writing unit tilt adjustment. (Refer to I.9.4 Writing unit tilt adjustment)
4.3.14 Double Feed Detect Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
• This adjustment adjusts the ultrasonic sensor sensitivity of the multi feed detection boards (MFDBR, MFDBS).
• The multi feed detection boards (MFDBR, MFDBS) are installed to the PF-602m, PF-707m, LU-202XL and LU-202XLm.
(2) Usage
• Perform this adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS) or the PF drive board (PFDB) of PF-602m
and PF-707m.
• Perform this adjustment when you replace the multi feed detection board (MFDBR, MFDBS) of the LU-202XL or LU-202XLm.
• Adjust it when the multi feed is not detected properly due to specific types of paper (such as thin paper, coated paper with less stiffness,
and thick paper).
Note
▪ The sensor output varies according to the temperature of the sensor surface. Make the adjustment at a temperature close to
the environment in which the copier is actually used (20°C to 30°C). (In case you brought a new part from outdoors, make the
adjustment after the temperature of the sensor surface and the room temperature become the same)
(3) Procedure (PFU)
3. "Printer Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [12 Double Feed Detect Adj.].
4. Open the front door [1] of the PF, and open the jam processing guide PF2 [2] and the jam processing guide PF5 [3] in the horizontal
conveyance section (PF-602m).
[1]
[3] [2]
a03uf3c025ca
Open the PF front door [1], and then open the open close cover/1 [2] of the horizontal conveyance section (PF-707m).
[1]
[2]
I-25
5. Insert a sheet of paper [1] (part number 65AA995##, fusing adjustment paper, A3, 16 sheets) while you turn the knob PF4 [2], and close
the jam processing guides PF2 [3] and PF5 [4] (you can also use 200 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 paper) (PF-602m).
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
a03uf3c026ca
Insert a sheet of paper [1] whose part number is 65AA995## (fusing adjustment paper, A3, 16 sheets. You can also use the paper whose
weight is 200 g/m2 to 300 g/m2.) and close the open close cover/1 [2] (PF-707m).
[1]
[2]
6. "Double Feed Detect Adjustment screen"

Press [Start].
7. If the multi feed detection adjustment is normally completed, "Completed" is displayed. If the adjustment abnormality occurs, "Error" is
displayed. When the error message is displayed, repeat steps 4 to 6.
Note
▪ When an error occurs, the adjustment data is not written but the data before the adjustment remains.
8. Pull out the paper that is inserted in step 5.
9. Enter the I/O check mode, and select the following codes.
• PF-602m: IO Check (18-04)
• PF-707m: IO Check (18-24)
10. Insert a sheet of paper that the customer mainly uses (paper weight 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2) to the position of the paper that is inserted in
step 5. Then, press the Start key and confirm that "0" appears on the input check display.
11. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all) that customer mainly uses, and confirm that "1" appears on the input check display.
12. Pull out the inserted papers, and install the parts removed.
(4) Procedure (Main body + LU-202XL/LU202XLm)

1. "Service Mode Menu" screen
Press [12 Double Feed Detect Adj.].
4. Open the front door [1] of the LU-202XL or LU-202XLm, and remove 2 screws [2] from the LU fixing part. Take off the LU-202XL or
LU-202XLm from the LU fixing part with the connector [3] between the main body and LU-202XL or LU-202XLm connected. (LU-202XL,
LU-202XLm)
Note
▪ The main body is active. Do not disconnect the connector between the main body and the LU-202XL or LU-202XLm.
I-26
[2] [1]
[2]
[3]
5. Insert a sheet of paper [1] whose part number is 65AA995## (fusing adjustment paper, A3, 16 sheets. You can also use the paper whose
weight is 200 g/m2 to 300 g/m2.) from the exit of the LU-202XL or LU-202XLm while you turn the knob LC1 [2]. (LU-202XL, LU-202XLm)
[1]
[2]

Press [Start].
Note
• LU-202XL or LU-202XLm: IO Check (18-14)
11. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all) that customer mainly uses, and confirm that "1" appears on the input check display.
(5) Procedure (LU-202XLm + MB-508)

1. Press [Double Feed Detect Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Double Feed Detect Adj.]
2. Open the relay conveyance door [1] of the MB-508 and open the conveyance guide [2].
I-27
[2]
[1]
3. Open the front door of the LU-202XLm.
4. Insert a sheet of paper [2] from the side of the MB-508 rotating the knob LC1 [1].
Note
▪ Use the fusing adjustment paper. (Refer to Jig list)
▪ When there is no fusing adjustment paper, use the paper whose weight is 200 g/m2 to 300 g/m2.
[2] [1]

Press [Start].
Note
• IO Check (18-14)
10. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all) that the customer mainly uses, and confirm that "1" is displayed on the input check display.
(6) Procedure (LU-202XLm + PFU)

1. Press [Double Feed Detect Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Double Feed Detect Adj.]
2. Open the front door [1] of the LU-202XLm, and remove 2 screws [2] from the LU fixing part. Take off the LU-202XLm from the LU fixing
part with the connector [3] between the PFU and LU-202XLm connected.
Note
▪ The main body is active. Do not disconnect the connector between the PFU and LU-202XLm.
[2]
[2] [1]
I-28
[3]
3. Insert a sheet of paper [2] from the exit of the LU-202XLm rotating the knob LC1 [1].
Note
▪ Use the fusing adjustment paper. (Refer to Jig list)
▪ When there is no fusing adjustment paper, use the paper whose weight is 200 g/m2 to 300 g/m2.
[2]
[1]

Press [Start].
Note
• IO Check (18-14)
9. Insert another sheet of paper (2 sheets in all) that the customer mainly uses, and confirm that "1" is displayed on the input check display.
4.3.15 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the G5 lens in the writing unit/K and correct the image distortion of K in the main scanning direction.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when there is a skew in the main scan direction.
Note
▪ Color registration adjustment do not correct the image distortion of K in the main scanning direction. (Adjusts YMC only.)
(3) Procedure
Press [13 Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj.]
4. "Crosswise Direction Skew Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Note
▪ When you press the start key, G5 lenses of YMCK are adjusted and the color registration adjustment (for approximately 2
minutes) is automatically started. When the adjustment is completed, test pattern (number 16 or number 33) is printed.
6. Check the skew in main scanning direction.
• Standard value: ± 0.3% or less (difference between 280 mm diagonal lines "a, b" is 0.84 mm or less)
I-29
a03uf3c001ca
8. "Crosswise Dir. Skew Adj. screen"
• Setting range: -30 to +30
• 1 step = 0.01 mm
9. Repeat step 4 to step 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
4.3.16 Beam Pitch Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes the write clock to adjust the beam pitches of LD1 to LD4.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment after you replace the write unit.
Note
▪ Be sure to complete " I.4.3.11 Skew Initial Position Memory (Printer Adjustment - Writing Initial Pos. Memory)" and " I.4.3.12
Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)" before this adjustment.
(3) Procedure
Press [14 Beam Pitch Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Beam Pitch Adjustment]
4. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
Confirm that the current value of [Y] is "0".
When it is other than 0, enter "0" through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Change all the current values for each color to "0" in the same way and press [Print Mode].
Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper (105 g/m2 or less) and press the Start key.
6. Check the beam pitch misalignment on the 3rd column of the test chart.
The outputted charts shows from the top the conditions with the values +10 [1], +5 [2], ± 0 [3], -5 [4] and -10 [5] to or from the current
value of each colors.
I-30
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
7. When the moires on the top and bottom are even or there is no moire [1], or the white thin line and the black thin line on the left and right
are even or there is no thin line [4]: No need to adjust.
When the moire on the bottom is strong [2] or when the white thin line appears on the left side and the black one on the right side [5]:
Adjust in "+" direction.
When the moire on the top is strong [3] or when the black thin line appears on the left side and the white one on the right side [6]: Adjust
in "-" direction.
[2] [3]
[1]
[4] [5] [6]
8. If there are any abnormalities, press [Exit PrintMode].

9. "Beam Pitch Adjustment screen"
• Setting range: -100 to +100
4.3.17 Color Regist. Manual Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

• Color Registration Auto Adj. (Refer to " I.4.3.12 Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment)")
• Color Regist. Gap Measurement - Measure (Refer to I.4.3.13 (4) Procedure (Measure))
• Color Regist. Gap Measurement - Horiz.(Part) Adj. (Refer to I.4.3.13 (5) Procedure (Horiz.(Part) Adj.))
• Color Regist. Manual Adj. (described here)
I-31
Start

->Measure
・NG

->Horiz.(Part) Adj.
NG

->Horiz.(Part) Adj.
NG
OK

->Measure
NG
OK
->Measure
Finish
(2) Function
Manually adjust the offset value in the sub scan direction for the color registration misalignment amount.
(3) Usage
• Perform this adjustment when there is an offset on the misalignment amount of each color after the "Color Registration Auto Adj. (Printer
Adjustment)".
• Check the misalignment amount in the sub scan direction of "Color Regist. Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment)" and the actual
image. Perform this adjustment when there is an offset on the misalignment amount in the sub scan direction of each color relative to K.
I-32
[1]
[2]
[1] The test pattern for manual adjustment of color [2] Misalignment amount for color M
registration
Note
Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) )
Adjustment) )
▪ Be sure the Color Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.12 Color
Registration Auto.Adj. (Printer Adjustment) )
▪ Be sure that the Color Regist. Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.13 Color
Regist. Gap Masurement (Printer Adjustment) )
(4) Procedure
Press [15 Color Regist. Manual Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Color Regist. Manual Adj.]
4. "Color Registration Manual Adjustment screen"
Select the color that you want to adjust.
5. Enter a value through the numeric buttons when you need, and press [SET].
• Setting range: -80 (the image moves to the paper feed direction) to +80 (the image moves to the opposite of the paper feed
direction)
• 1 step = 1.3μm
• Default setting value: Y = -8, M = 0, C = 0
6. Check the measured misalignment amount in the sub scan direction of "Color Regist. Gap Measurement (Printer Adjustment)".
Otherwise, check the actual image. When the misalignment amount does not converge, repeat the step 4 to step 5.
4.3.18 Speed Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Allow the speed of each conveyance roller to be adjusted.
(2) Usage
Use this function for each corresponding part when a jam, paper damage (such as buckling (folds, lines, scratches from folding), scratches,
and creases) or image trouble (lines or unevenness) occurs in particular paper types.
(3) Procedure
Press [16 Speed Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Speed Adjustment]
4. Select the following speed adjustment button according to the use.
I-33
• Registration Speed ( I.8.1.19 Registration Speed)

• Fusing Speed(Front Side) ( I.8.1.15 Fusing Speed(Front Side))
• FusingSpeed(BackOffset) ( I.8.1.16 Fusing Speed(Back Side Offset))
• Reverse De-curler speed ( I.8.1.20 Reverse De-Curler Speed)
• Reverse speed(RevExit) ( I.8.1.21 Reverse Speed(RevExit))
• Reverse Speed(ADU) ( I.8.1.22 Reverse Speed(ADU))
• Banner Reverse Speed1 ( I.8.1.23 Banner Reverse Speed1)
• Output De-Curler Speed ( I.8.1.24 Output De-Curler Speed)
• LCT BannerRegist. Speed ( I.8.1.25 LCT BannerRegist. Speed)
• Regist. Speed(Banner) ( I.8.1.26 Regist. Speed(Banner))
• Banner paper reversing speed 2 ( I.8.1.27 Banner Reverse Speed2)
Note
▪ Each speed adjustment is associated with [Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] →
[Printer Adjustment] → [Speed Adjustment].
▪ Adjustments that are made in [MACHINE] screen → [Paper Setting] → [Expert Adj.] are handled as offset values for the
adjustment values that are entered in [Service Mode] or [Utility].
4.3.19 Registration Unit Skew Adj. (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
When you conduct the registration unit skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment, you need to change the position to insert the
adjustment jig according to the status of the image skew. (Refer to " I.9.6 Registration unit skew adjustment")
This adjustment displays the amount of the position to insert it into the adjustment hole.
(Feeds the test pattern and measures the image skew of IQ-501. Calculates the amount of the position to insert the adjustment jig from the
measurement result.)
Note
▪ When IQ-501 is not connected, this adjustment only prints the test pattern number 16 and cannot measure the image skew.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when IQ-501 is connected and you conduct the registration unit skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment.
(3) Procedure
1. Press [Registration Unit Skew Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Registration Unit Skew Adj.]
2. "Registration Unit Skew Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select the tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Note
▪ At this time, IQ-501 measures the image skew of the test pattern and calculates the amount of the position to insert the
adjustment jig.
5. "Registration Unit Skew Adjustment screen"
The amount of the position to insert the adjustment jig is displayed.
In addition, the condition of the image skew (image position in the main scan direction at 4 corners) is also displayed. (Unit: mm)
6. Perform the registration unit skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment. (Refer to I.9.6 Registration unit skew adjustment)
Insert the adjustment jig into the hole position as shown in step 5.
The displayed value is the amount of the hole position to change as based on the current adjustment hole position.
When the value of the side "+" is displayed, rotate the registration unit counterclockwise.
When the value of the side "-" is displayed, rotate the registration unit clockwise.
[Adjustment example]
• When the "+2" is displayed and the current hole position matches with [2]
Insert the adjustment jig into the hole [3].
• When the "+2" is displayed and the current hole position matches with [5]
• When the "-2" is displayed and the current hole position matches with [3]
• When the "+2" is displayed and the current hole position matches with [1] (default position)
• When the "-2" is displayed and the current hole position matches with [2]
I-34
[4] [5]
[3] [2]
[1]
4.3.20 Fusing Unit Skew Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
When you conduct the fusing unit skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment, you must change the position to insert the adjustment jig
according to the status of the image skew. (Refer to I.9.7 Fusing unit skew adjustment)
This adjustment displays the amount of the position to insert it into the adjustment hole. (Feeds the test pattern and measures the image skew
of IQ-501. Calculates the amount of the position to insert the adjustment jig from the measurement result.)
Note
▪ When IQ-501 is not connected, this adjustment only prints the test pattern number 16 and cannot measure the image skew.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the IQ-501 is connected and you conduct the fusing unit skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment.
(3) Procedure
1. Press [Fusing Unit Skew Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Fusing Unit Skew Adjustment]
2. "Fusing Unit Skew Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Note
▪ At this time, IQ-501 measures the image skew of the test pattern and calculates the amount of the position to insert the
adjustment jig.
▪ When you print the test pattern, use the recommended paper.
5. "Fusing Unit Skew Adjustment screen"
The amount of the position to insert the adjustment jig is displayed. The condition of the image skew (the distance from the paper edge in
the paper feed direction on the front side and back side to the intersection point) is also displayed. (Unit: mm)
6. Perform the fusing unit skew adjustment of the mechanical adjustment. (Refer to I.9.7 Fusing unit skew adjustment) Insert the
adjustment jig into the hole position as shown in step 5.
The displayed value is the amount of the hole position to change as based on the current adjustment hole position.
When the value of the side "+" is displayed, rotate the fusing unit counterclockwise. When the value of the side "-" is displayed, rotate the
fusing unit clockwise.
[Adjustment example]
· When the "+2" is displayed and the current hole position matches with "+2"
Insert the adjustment jig into the hole "+4".
· When the "-2" is displayed and the current hole position matches with "+2"
Insert the adjustment jig into the hole "0".
I-35
+5
+4
+3
+2
+1
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
4.3.21 Recall Standard Data (Printer Adjustment)

(1) Function
Reset the adjustment values of the printer adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
(2) Usage
The same adjustment table is changed since the user can change some parts of the printer adjustment. Therefore, conduct this adjustment
when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the erroneous operation by the user.
Note
▪ Adjustment data of "Color Registration Auto. Adj.", "Color Regist. Gap Measurement", and "Double Feed Detect Adj." are not
restored.
(3) Procedure
Press [Machine Adjustment].
Press [Printer Adjustment].
Press [Recall Standard Data].
4. "Recall Standard Data screen"
Press [Factory Initial Data] or [Installation Initial Data].
Note
▪ When you select [Factory Initial Data], each configuration value returns to the factory initial data.
▪ When you select [Installation initial data], each configuration value returns to the adjustment values stored when the code
"91-00" of the I/O check mode was conducted.
5. Press [Yes] to restore the standard data.
Press [No] to cancel the operation.
4.3.22 Restart Timing Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment changes read start timing when you scan original in the sub-scan direction.
(2) Usage
Adjust the image leading edge timing when you scan in platen mode.
Note
▪ Be sure the "Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment)" has been adjusted before you perform this adjustment. (Refer to
I.4.3.1 Restart Timing Adjustment (Printer Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Scan Adjustment].
3. "Scan Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Restart Timing Adjustment].
4. [Restart Timing Adjustment screen]
Press [Print Mode].
6. Check the scan image leading edge timing.
• Standard value: 0 ± 1.5 mm
I-36

• Setting range: -30 (image slow) to +30 (image fast)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.23 Centering Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the centering of images in the main scan direction when you scan from the original glass.
(2) Usage
Adjust an image mis-centering in the main scan direction when you scan from the original glass.
Note
▪ Be sure the Centering Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.4 Centering Adjustment
(Printer Adjustment - Centering Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Select "Original Glass Centering" and press [Print Mode].
5. "Copy screen"
Place the test chart to the original glass. Choose the paper A3 or 11x17, and press the start key.
6. Fold the printed paper into 2 along the center in the main scan direction, and measure how much the left line and the right line misalign
from each other.
• Standard value
: 0 +/- 1.5 mm or less
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [Exit Print Mode].
• Setting range: -57 (move the image back) to +57 (move the image front)
• 1 step = 0.1 mm
4.3.24 FD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the image magnification in the sub scan direction in the original grass mode. This adjustment changes scan speed.
(2) Usage
Adjust the magnification in the sub scan direction in original grass mode.
Note
I-37
(3) Procedure
Press [03 FD-Mag. Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
• Standard value
: 200 ± 1 mm or less
200
57gaf3c005na
• Setting range: +990 (short) to +1010 (long)
• 1 step = x 0.001
4.3.25 Scan Gradation/Color Adj. (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner and the ADF.
(2) Usage
When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usually conduct the "Gamma Automatic Adj." of the "Process Adjustment".
Conduct this adjustment if the color reproduction is in a poor condition (especially in a highlight area) after you replace the CCD unit, LED
exposure lamp (LU201), original glass, each scanner mirror, or the CIS module.
(3) Procedure A
1. After you replace the part, use the original glass and the DF-706 to copy the color chart.
2. Check if there is no image background or problem in color balance.
• When there is no abnormality: The following procedure is not necessary.
• When there is an abnormality: Perform procedure B.
(4) Procedure B
Press [04 Scan Gradation/Color Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Scan Adjustment] → [Scan Gradation/Color Adj.]
4. "Scan Gradation/Color Adj. screen"
Press [Reset Adj. Data].
CAUTION
▪ Scanner gradation (gamma) has been adjusted for each machine at the factory. Please note that the scanner gradation
data is overwritten to the average value if the [Reset Adj. Data] in the "Scan Gradation/Color Adj. screen" is pressed.
▪ When you return the data to the original one after you perform [Reset Adj. Data], perform " I.4.3.30 Recall Standard Data
(Scan Adjustment)".
5. Press the [YES] key to overwrite the scanner gradation data to the average value.
Press [No] to cancel the operation and return to the previous screen.
4.3.26 CD-Mag. Adjustment (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the magnification of the scanner section in the main scan direction.
(2) Usage
Use this adjustment when you replace the CCD unit.
I-38
Note
▪ Be sure the CD-Mag. Adjustment (Printer Adjustment) has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.3.6 CD-Mag. Adjustment
(Printer Adjustment))
(3) Procedure
Press [05 CD-Mag. Adjustment].
Press [Print Mode].
5. "Print Mode screen"
Place the color chart to the original glass, and select the paper A3 or 11x17. Press the start key.
6. Check the difference between "A" on the color chart and "A" on the output test print.
Enlarged view of the color chart
• Standard value
: ±1.0 mm
• When the value is too short: Change the setting value to the plus.
• When the value is too long: Change the setting value to the minus.
• Adjustment range: 990 to 1010
• 1 step = x 0.001
4.3.27 Sensor Check (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Check the sensor output of sensors which is related with the scanner.
(2) Usage
Check the detecting condition of each sensor for the troubleshooting.
Note
▪ This function is for C3080, C3070, C3070L (copier version). C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, C73hc (printer version) does not have this
function.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Sensor Check].
4. "Sensor Check screen"
ON or OFF indicates the condition of following detection sensors.
• Scanner home sensor 1: Scanner home sensor (PS201)
• Original size search original cover: Original cover sensor (RS201)
• Original size search 20 degrees: Angle sensor (PS202)
• Original size detection 1: Original size sensor/1 (PS203)
• Original size detection 2: Original size sensor/2 (PS204)*1
*1
For Japan: Not installed
For Asia, Pacific: Installed
For North America and Europe: Option (For service part)
4.3.28 CCD Check (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Displays the status of the CCD.
(2) Usage
Use this adjustment when you handle the trouble about the CCD sensor.
I-39
Note
function.
(3) Procedure
Press [07 CCD Check].
4. "CCD Check screen"
The highest value and the lowest value for each of the clamp and the gain are shown.
• The following table shows the range of the normal value.
<CCD>
• Clamp: The output values have to be within the value on the following table.
Clamp management value The lowest value The highest value
R 600 1500
G 600 1700
B 600 1600
• Gain: The output values have to be within the value on the following table.
Gain management value The lowest value The highest value
R 20 238
G 10 222
B 70 247
4.3.29 Line Mag. Setting (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Selects whether you use the unique adjustment value which is specified at the factory. Also, you can check the current magnification
adjustment value.
(2) Usage
• When you replace the CCD unit or the CIS module, configure to "OFF".
The line magnification calibration value that is adjusted for each unit changes to control the differences in the reading performance on
each scanner. So after you replace the CCD unit or CIS module, be sure to perform the setting of the default generic value.
• You can disable the original calibration adjustment value when the image failure and other problems whose cause are the individual
performance difference of the CCD unit or the CIS module occur.
Note
function.
(3) Procedure
Press [08 Line Mag. Setting].
4. "Line Magnification Setting screen"
Select [ON] or [OFF].
• CCD unit: Select [Front Side], and select [ON] or [OFF].
• CIS module: Select [Back Side], and select [ON] or [OFF].
Note
▪ When you change the setting, the function becomes available after you deactivate and activate the main power switch
again.
4.3.30 Recall Standard Data (Scan Adjustment)

(1) Function
Restore the scan adjustment configuration values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Therefore, conduct this adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of an erroneous operation by the user or CE.
Note
function.
▪ Data of the "Sensor Check" and "CCD Check" are not restored.
▪ Data of the "Scan gradation/Color Adj." is restored only when you select [Factory Initial Data].
(3) Procedure
I-40

Press [09 Recall Standard Data].
Note
▪ When you select [Installation initial data] each configuration value returns to the adjustment values stored when the code
4.3.31 IDC Sensor Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment)

(1) Function
In order to read the pattern on the transfer belt, the printer gamma correction that is performed automatically on regular basis uses the IDC
sensor. Therefore, the correction possibly is inaccurate depending on the characteristic changes of the IDC sensor. This adjustment corrects
the IDC sensor. For the correction, the machine uses the scanner unit/2 of IQ-501, the color sensor of RU,or the scanner.
Note
▪ The sensor that is used for the adjustment and the adjustment procedure are different depending on the configuration of the
optional device.
No Configuration for optional device Sensor for use
IQ-501 RU Scanner
1 Connected Connected Connected/None Scanner unit/2 of IQ-501
2 None Connected Connected/None Color sensor of RU
3 None None Connected Scanner
4 None None None Adjustment is unavailable ([IDC Sensor Adjustment] button is grayed
out.)
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a color reproduction is in a poor condition because of a replacement of the IDC sensor.
Do not conduct this adjustment unless the IDC sensor is replaced.
Note
▪ Be sure to confirm that each setting value of Y, M, C, and K from [11 Test Mode] - [02 Test Pattern Output Mode] is not "0"
before this adjustment. When any of the setting value Y, M, C, or K is "0", proper adjustment is not available.
▪ Be sure the Gamma Automatic Adjustment has been adjusted in advance. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
▪ When you conduct this adjustment, use the color copy paper. When you use the colored paper or the embossed paper, this
adjustment is not performed properly.
▪ To reset the data to the factory default, press [Reset Adj. Data]. Press [Yes] and reset the adjusted IDC sensor adjustment to
the factory default data, and [No] to keep the current data.
▪ Execute the calibration of the controller when IQ-501, RU, and a scanner are not connected.
(3) Procedure (When IQ-501 is connected)

1. Press [IDC Sensor Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] →[Gamma Curve Adjustment] → [IDC Sensor Adjustment]
2. "IDC Sensor Adjustment (IQ Optimizer) screen"
Select the screen that you want to adjust.
Note
▪ Configure the screen of the Screen1, Screen2, and Stochastic screen on the Custom Screen.
[Administrator Setting] → [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Custom Screen]
3. Press [Print Mode].
4. Select the A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
5. The test pattern is measured. If it is normal, the IDC sensor is adjusted and the printer gamma correction are executed. Then the
message "Completed" appears.
6. When an abnormality occurs, the screen shows an error code for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat
steps 3 to 6.
Error code Error Countermeasures
Error 1 A cross mark cannot be detected Chart misplacement
Error 2 Chart placement error Chart misplacement
Error 5 Value is out of standard Readjustment
Error 6 Non-volatile data abnormality Check the installation position of the memory
board
I-41

Error 12 RGB data abnormalities Chart is different, or software bug
(4) Procedure (When IQ-501 is not connected, and RU is connected)

[Service Mode] →[Machine Adjustment] →[Quality Adjustment] →[Gamma Curve Adjustment] →[IDC Sensor Adjustment]
2. "IDC Sensor Adjustment (RU) screen"
Note
4. Select the paper tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
5. The test pattern is measured. If it is normal, the IDC sensor is adjusted and the printer gamma correction are executed. Then the
message "Completed" appears.
6. When an abnormality occurs, the screen shows an error code for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat
steps 3 to 6.
board
(5) Procedure (When IQ-501 and RU are not connected, and a scanner is connected)
[Service Mode] →[Machine Adjustment] →[Quality Adjustment] →[Gamma Curve Adjustment] →[IDC Sensor Adjustment]
2. "IDC Sensor Adjustment screen"
Note
4. Select the paper tray. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
5. "Place output image on original glass...screen"
Returns to the adjustment screen automatically when test pattern is printed.
plate/Rr [4].
Note
▪ Place the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1017
6. Place 10 copy papers (white) on the test pattern and close the DF.
Note
▪ Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
I-42
7. Press [Start].
8. The test pattern is scanned. If it is normal, the IDC sensor is adjusted and the printer gamma correction are executed. Then the message
"Completed" appears.
9. When an abnormality occurs, an error code is displayed for every cause. Correct the error referring to the following and repeat steps 3 to
8.
board
4.3.32 Highlight Automatic Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the gradation in a highlight area and the background density automatically by changing the printer gamma curve. For the adjustment,
the machine uses the scanner unit/2 of IQ-501, the color sensor of RU,or a scanner to read the test pattern.
Note
▪ This adjustment can only be applied to IDC sensor gamma corrections. When Color Density Control is being used, this
adjustment is not necessary.
▪ The sensor that is used for the adjustment and the adjustment procedure are different depending on the configuration of the
optional device.
No Configuration for optional device Sensor for use
IQ-501 RU Scanner
1 Connected Connected Connected/None Scanner unit/2 of IQ-501
2 None Connected Connected/None Color sensor of RU
3 None None Connected Scanner
4 None None None Adjustment is unavailable ([Highlight Automatic Adj.] button is grayed
out.)
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the color reproduction of the highlighted gradation is not good.
Note
▪ Be sure to confirm that each setting value of Y, M, C, and K from [11 Test Mode] - [02 Test Pattern Output Mode] is not "0"
before this adjustment. When any of the setting value Y, M, C, or K is "0", proper adjustment is not available.
▪ Be sure that the gamma automatic adjustment has been adjusted before this adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic
Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
▪ When you conduct this adjustment, use the color copy paper. When you use the colored paper or the textured paper, this
adjustment is not performed properly.
▪ Use this adjustment normally for the highlight adjustment. Use I.4.3.33 Highlight Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Gamma
Curve Adjustment) when you want to adjust the highlight finely or when the IQ-501, the RU, and a scanner are not connected.
▪ You need not to conduct this adjustment when you conduct "Color Density Control".
(3) Procedure (When IQ-501 is connected)

1. Press [Highlight Automatic Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Gamma Curve Adjustment] → [Highlight Automatic Adj.]
2. "Highlight Automatic Adjustment screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the screen you want to adjust.
Note
▪ The displayed current value is linked to the value of the Highlight Adjustment.
3. Press [Readjust]. To readjust, press [Yes]. To cancel the operation, press [No].
Note
▪ When the adjustment value greatly differs from 0, press [Reset Adj. Data] to reset the current value to 0. Then press
[Readjust].
Select the A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Note
▪ Each set of test patterns to measure the color and to check result is outputted in twice.
I-43

The color of the test pattern is measured and the current YMCK values are updated.
Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
7. When the screen shows a message other than "Completed normally", it displays an error code every cause. Correct the error referring to
the following and repeat steps 4 to 6.
board
Error 14 Startup is out of the adjustment standard Readjustment
Error 15 Gray balance is out of the adjustment Nothing to do
standard
Error 16 Adjustment is completed Press the readjust button
Error 17 USB data acquisition error Provide 3D-LUT data to the USB and insert it
to the main body
Error 18 Output paper sensor value abnormality Readjust or replace the output paper density
sensor
(4) Procedure (When IQ-501 is not connected, and RU is connected)

2. "Highlight Automatic Adjustment(RU) screen"
Note
Note
[Readjust].
Select the A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Note
▪ Each set of test patterns to measure the color and to check result is outputted in twice.
6. "Highlight Automatic Adjustment(RU) screen"
The color of the test pattern is measured and the current YMCK values are updated.
Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
7. When the screen shows a message other than "Completed normally", it displays an error code every cause. Correct the error referring to
board
I-44

standard
to the main body
sensor
(5) Procedure (When IQ-501 and RU are not connected, and a scanner is connected)
Note
Note
[Readjust].
Place the A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
plate/Rr [4].
Note
▪ Place the test pattern so that the green triangular mark [2] comes to the left side. (printed side face down)
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
a03uf3c030ca
7. Place 10 sheets of copy paper (white) on top of the test pattern and close the DF or the platen cover.
Note
▪ Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gamma cannot be corrected properly.
8. Press [Start].
9. The test pattern is scanned and the current YMCK values are updated.
Note
▪ Because the scanned result at the first scan is not examined, a "Completed" message does not appear after the first scan.
▪ The quality examination of the value is made from the second scan. Make sure to repeat this adjustment several times until
the message "Completed normally" appears.
Press [Print Mode].
11. Perform the steps 5 to 8.
12. Confirm that the message "Completed normally" appears.
When the screen shows a message other than "Completed normally", it displays an error code every cause. Correct the error referring to
I-45
board
standard
to the main body
sensor
4.3.33 Highlight Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment adjusts the gradation in a highlight area and the background density by changing the printer gamma curve.
Note
▪ This adjustment can only be applied to IDC sensor gamma corrections. When Color Density Control is being used, this
adjustment is not necessary.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the color reproduction of the highlighted gradation is not good.
Note
▪ Be sure that the gamma automatic adjustment has been adjusted before this adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic
Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.))
▪ Use " I.4.3.32 Highlight Automatic Adj. (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment)" normally for the highlight adjustment.
Use this adjustment when you want to adjust the highlight finely or when the IQ-501, the RU-518, and a scanner are not
connected.
▪ You need not to conduct this adjustment when you conduct "Color Density Control".
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Quality Adjustment].
3. "Quality Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Gamma Curve Adjustment].
4. "Gamma Curve Adjustment screen"
Press [03 Highlight Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Gamma Curve Adjustment] → [Highlight Adjustment]
5. "Highlight Adjustment screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the screen that you want to adjust.
Note
▪ The displayed Current Data is linked to the value of the Highlight Automatic Adj..
▪ Configure the screen of the Screen 1, the Screen 2, and the Stochastic by the custom screen.
▪ Contone is a screen that is used in the character section of the screen. Contone does not require the adjustment.
7. Place the A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
8. Check the printed test pattern.
• Make sure that the highlight density starting section of Y, M, C, and K are uniform, and even between the gray reference lines [1].
[1]
Y
M
C
K
9. If they are not even, press [Exit PrintMode].

10. "Highlight Adjustment screen"
I-46
Press the button of a color (Y, M, C, or K) to adjust, enter a value through the numeric button and press [SET].
Setting range: -128 (light) to +127 (dark)
4.3.34 Half-Tone Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Gamma Curve Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjusts the half-tone characteristics of the engine to the gamma curve of the outsourced controller (other than IC-605).
(2) Usage
Use when a tone jump occurs on the sequential tone when you print on the outsourced controller.
Note
▪ Be sure that the Gamma Automatic Adjustment has been adjusted before this adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic
Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.) )
▪ After you perform this adjustment, re-create the target of the color density control.
(3) Procedure
Press [01 Gamma Curve Adjustment].
4. "Gamma Curve Adjustment screen"
Press [04 Half-Tone Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Gamma Curve Adjustment] → [Half-Tone Adjustment]
5. "Half-Tone Adjustment screen"
Select the item that you want to adjust. Enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
• Setting Range
: - 10 to + 10
Note
▪ Be sure to change only the IDC sensor side.
▪ When you change the RU side, be sure to delete all the table of the color density manual control.
4.3.35 Sharpness Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment adjusts the sharpness and reduces the moire.
(2) Usage
When you change the center value of the sharpness adjustment in user mode, conduct this adjustment.
Note
▪ This adjustment is reflected to only copying and scanning in the scanner.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Sharpness Adjustment].
4. "Sharpness Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place a "Color chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the Start key.
7. As necessary, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (soft, less moire) to +5 (sharp, more moire)
4.3.36 Contrast Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment adjusts the contrast.
(2) Usage
When you change the center value of the contrast adjustment in the user mode, conduct this adjustment.
Note
(3) Procedure
I-47

Press [03 Contrast Adjustment].
4. "Contrast Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Place a "Color chart" on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the Start key.
7. As necessary, enter a value through the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (contrast decrease) to +5 (contrast increase)
4.3.37 Dot Detect Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
This adjustment adjusts the dot detection threshold value of the original image.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the dot distinction result differs from the original.
Note
▪ The scanned original is judged to the text, photo, dot, or colored text by the image processing. The image processing to use is
decided according to the result.
▪ Use this adjustment for raising the judgment precision of the original on which the area is misjudged.
▪ To widen the judgment area of the photo, adjust it in the user mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Image Distinction Level].
4. "Image Distinction Level screen"
Press [01 Dot Detect Adjustment].
5. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 paper, place the original you want to adjust on the original glass, and press the start button.
7. Dot detection pattern is outputted.
This output pattern shows how the original image is judged.
• Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
• White part: Judged as picture
• Black section: Distinguished as black text
• Magenta section: Distinguished as colored text
9. "Dot Detect Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons when you need, and press [SET].
Setting range: -5 (dot area decrease) to +5 (dot area increase)
4.3.38 Color Text Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
This adjustment adjusts the color text distinction threshold value of the original image.
(2) Usage
When you change the center value of the color text distinction function in user mode, perform this adjustment.
Note
(3) Procedure
I-48

Press [02 Color Text Adjustment].
5. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, place the original to adjust on the original glass, and press the start button.
7. Color text detect pattern is printed.
9. "Color Text Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (color text area decrease) to +5 (color text area increase)
4.3.39 Dot/Text Area Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Image Distinction Level)

(1) Function
This adjustment adjusts the dot distinction and text distinction threshold values of the original image.
(2) Usage
When you change the center value of the text photo distinction function in the user mode, conduct this adjustment.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Dot/Text Area adjustment].
5. "Dot and Text Area Adj. screen"
Press [Print Mode].
6. Select A3 paper, place the original you want to adjust on the original glass, and press the start button.
7. Dot and a text detection pattern is outputted.
• Cyan section: Distinguished as dot
• White part: Judged as picture
9. "Dot/Text Area Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (dot area increase, text area decrease) to +5 (dot area decrease, text area increase)
4.3.40 ACS Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment adjusts the distinction threshold value of the color original and the black-and-white original.
(2) Usage
When the ACS (Automatic color selection) function does not work properly, conduct this adjustment.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [05 ACS Adjustment].
4. "Place original and touch [Scan] screen"
Place an original that the ACS does not work properly on the original glass and press the [Scan].
5. Next to the "Judge:", the result "Color" or "Black" appears.
I-49
6. Enter a value through the numeric buttons when you need, and press [SET].
Setting range: -2 (black) to +2 (color)
4.3.41 AE(AES) Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment adjusts the output density of the automatic background removal function.
(2) Usage
When you change the center value for the automatic background removal function in user mode, conduct this adjustment.
Note
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Density Adjustment].
4. "Density Adjustment screen"
Press [01 AE(AES) Adjustment].
5. "AE (AES) Adj. screen"
Enter a value through the numeric buttons when you need, and press [Set].
Setting range: -5 (light) to +5 (dark)
6. Select [Auto] on [Background Removal] of the copy mode. Output a copy and check the density.
7. Repeat the steps 1 to 6 until an appropriate density is obtained.
4.3.42 Copy Density Adjustment (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment adjusts the density reproduction of the center value of the copy density.
(2) Usage
When you adjust the density for copying, conduct this adjustment.
Note
▪ This adjustment is reflected only to copy mode.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Copy Density Adjustment].
5. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to adjust.
Select the mode that you adjust and select A3 or 11 X 17 paper. Then place a "Color chart" on the original glass and press the Start key.
9. "Copy Density Adjustment screen"
Setting range: -5 (light) to 5 + (dark)
4.3.43 Background Removal (Quality Adjustment - Density Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment adjusts the density reproduction of the center value of the background removal.
(2) Usage
When you adjust the background density (density of highlighted area) for copying, conduct this adjustment.
Note
I-50
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Background Removal].
5. "Background Removal screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to select the item to adjust.
Select the mode that you want to adjust and select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Then place a "Test chart" on the original glass and press the
Start key.
9. "Background Removal screen"
4.3.44 Tone Adjustment (RGB/YMC) (Quality Adjustment - Tone Adjustment)

(1) Function
To improve the gray balance, this adjustment finely adjusts the tone for the copy and scanner image.
(2) Usage
This adjustment is not required in the field because this adjustment is completed at the factory. However, the tone of the gray balance can be
adjusted.
Note
▪ This adjustment applies to only copying and scanning using the scanner.
(3) Procedure
3. "Quality Adjustment screen"
Press [07 Tone Adjustment].
4. "Tone Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Tone Adjustment(RGB/YMC)].
5. "Tone Adjustment(RGB/YMC) screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select [Full Color], and place the color chart on the original glass. Then, press the Start key.
8. "Tone Adjustment(RGB/YMC) screen"
When you improve the gray balance of the front side, press [Side1 Glass/ADF]. When you improve the gray balance of the back side,
press [Side2 ADF].
Select the color for adjusting the gray balance from R, G, B, Y, M, or C.
Input the adjustment value and press [Set].
4.3.45 Line Width Adj. (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Optimizes the line width of the image.
(Read the image with IQ-501. Optimize the setting value of [Text Thinning] so that the line width in the each setting of [Text Thinning] ([Weak
+], [Weak], [Normal], [Strong], [Strong+]), is the target value.)
[Utility] → [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Outline Process] → [Text Thinning]
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when you install the main body.
Note
▪ This adjustment is valid when IQ-501 is connected. There is no adjustment method when IQ-501 is not connected. (For the
parameter of text thinning, the factory default value is used.)
(3) Procedure
1. Press [Line Width Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Line Width Adjustment]
2. "Line Width Adjustment screen"
Press [Print Mode].
I-51
Note
▪ Available paper size: 178.9 mm x 210.0 mm or more.
▪ At this time, the scanner unit/2 reads the test pattern and the line width is optimized automatically.
4. The message "Completed" appears when the adjustment is completed.
When an error occurs, an error cord is displayed.
Note
▪ When you press [Reset Adj. Data], then [Yes], the setting value is reset to the factory default value.
Error code Description
409 Line width cannot be measured from the chart.
4.3.46 Package Color Auto Adj. (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
This adjustment automatically executes the multiple color adjustment in the appropriate order by using IQ-501.
Note
▪ This adjustment is available only when the IQ-501 is connected.
▪ The function is different from the Package Color Auto Adj. for users.
[Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Package Color Auto Adj.]
▪ This adjustment is not supported when you change the controller type (KM controller, outsourced controller) after the machine
is used in the field. An abnormality (the adjustment does not complete even it finishes) possibly occurs.
Deactivate the setting of the controller for this adjustment (Exact Color, G7 Calibration, outsourced controller calibration)
before switching the controller type.
(a) When IC-605 is connected

Adjustment Description Target
Gamma Automatic Gamma Automatic Adjustment Essential
Adjustment [Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Gamma Automatic
Adjustment]
Density Balance Auto. Adj. Density Balance Auto. Adj. Essential
[Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Density Balance Auto. Adj.]
Max Density Initial Adj. Max Density Initial Auto Adj. Selectable *1
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Max Density Initial
Auto Adj.]
Color Density Control Color Density Manual Control Essential*2
[Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Color Density Control] → [Color Density Manual
Control]
Exact Color or G7 · When DIPSW55-1=0 Selectable *1
Exact Color
[Controller]→[Color management]→[Exact Color]
· When DIPSW55-1=1
G7 Calibration
[Controller]→[Color management]→[G7 Calibration]
*1: This adjustment is not covered in the default setting. The adjustment can be added in [Initial Set.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Package Color Auto Adj.] → [Initial Set.]
*2 This adjustment is displayed only when [Use Color Density Control]=[ON].
[Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Color Density Control] → [Basic Setting] → [Use Color Density Control]
(b) When the outsourced controller is connected

Adjustment]
Density Balance Auto. Adj. Density Balance Auto. Adj. Essential
Max Density Initial Adj. Max Density Initial Auto Adj. Selectable *1
Auto Adj.]
Color Density Control Color Density Manual Control Essential*2
Control]
Controller calibration Calibration of the outsourced controller Essential
(2) Usage
Use this adjustment when the CE performs the color adjustment.
I-52
(3) Procedure
1. Press [Package Color Auto Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Package Color Auto Adj.]
2. "Package Color Auto Adj. screen"

Press [Initial Set.].
3. "Package Color Adjustment Initial Setting screen"
Configure the Table 1: Package Color Adjustment Initial Setting.
Note
▪ Do not add Exact Color/G7 when [Use Color Density Control] = [OFF]. (Reason: When [Use Color Density Control] is [OFF],
the IC-605 calibration needs to be executed before the Exact Color/G7 is performed. However, the IC-605 calibration is not
contained in the Package Color Auto Adj.)
4. Press [OK].
Press [Paper Setting].
Configure the paper setting of the tray that you use at the adjustment.
Note
▪ For the Max Density Initial Adj., be sure to use the specified maximum density management paper. If you use the
unspecified paper, the density becomes improper.
Press [Start].
Note
▪ At this time, each adjustment is performed automatically.
7. When you want to check the result of the adjustment, press [Adj. Result].
The adjustment result of the Density Balance Adjustment, the Max Density Initial Adj., and the Color Density Control are displayed.
Table 1: Package Color Adjustment Initial Setting
Item Description
Screen of Adjustment Target Select the screen that you want to adjust.
Additional Adjustment Select the additional adjustment.
Exact Color : Number of Output Job Specify the number of charts to output for each measurement that is performed by Exact Color
G7 Calibration : Number of Output Job or G7 calibration. The charts of several sheets are read and the average value is used.
(Maximum: 5 times x 5 sheets)
Maximum Density Adjustment Tray Select the tray that you use at the Max Density Initial Adj..
Adjustment Tray Select the tray that you use at any adjustments other than the Max Density Initial Adj.
Overwrite Tray Set. of Max.DensityAdj. Select whether to overwrite the tray settings when you perform the Max Density Initial Adj.
I-53
[ON]
• When you start the Package Color Auto Adj.: OFF
• When you perform the Max Density Initial Adj. (when the target value is [Designated]): The
paper type and paper weight of the tray are overwritten with the target value.
• When you perform the Max Density Initial Adj. (when the target value is [UserDesignated]):
The tray setting (excluding the color density control) is overwritten with the target value.
[OFF]
• When you start the Package Color Auto Adj. (when the target value is [UserDesignated]):
If the paper type and paper weight differ from the target value, adjustment will not start.
If the paper profile name differs from the target value, adjustment will not start.
• When you perform the Max Density Initial Adj.: OFF
Report for G7*1 Select whether you print the report of G7 calibration.
*1: This item is displayed only when DIPSW55-1=1.
4.3.47 Package Color Manual Adj. (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Displays the shortcut of multiple color adjustment so that you can execute the multiple color adjustment in the appropriate order.
Note
▪ It is recommended to use the Package Color Auto Adj. when IQ-501 is connected.
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Package Color Auto Adj.]
▪ The function is different from the Package Color Manual Adj. for users.
[Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Package Color Manual Adj.]
▪ The color adjustment of the controller (IC-605 calibration, Exact Color, G7 calibration, and the outsourced controller
calibration) is not contained.
Adjustment]
Density balance automatic · When IQ-501 is connected Necessary *1
adjustment Density Balance Auto. Adj. (IQ-501)
· When IQ-501 is not connected When a scanner is connected
Density Balance Auto. Adj. (Scanner)
· When IQ-501 and a scanner are not connected
[Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Quality
Adjustment] → [Density Balance Adjustment]
Maximum density initial · When IQ-501 is connected Selectable *2*3
adjustment Max. Dens. Initial Auto Adj.
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Max. Dens. Initial
Auto Adj.]
· When IQ-501 is not connected
Maximum density initial adjustment
Adj.]
Color Density Control · When IQ-501 is connected Necessary *4*5
Color Density Manual Control (IQ-501)
Control]
· When IQ-501 is not connected
Color Density Manual Control (RU)
Control]
*1: When RU (color sensor) is not connected, perform the manual adjustment.
*3 This adjustment is displayed only when the target density has been registered.
*5: When RU (color sensor) is not connected, it is not necessary.
(2) Usage
Use this adjustment when the CE performs the color adjustment.
(3) Procedure
1. Press [Package Color Manual Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Package Color Manual Adj.]
I-54
2. "Package Color Manual Adj. screen"

Press [Initial Set.]
Select the adjustment that you want to execute additionally.
4. Press [OK].
Press each adjustment button and execute adjustments from above.

When you want to check the result of the adjustment, press [Adj. Result].
The adjustment result of the Density Balance Adjustment, the Max Density Initial Adj., and the Color Density Control are displayed.
7. Perform the color adjustment of the controller as necessary.
4.3.48 Recall Standard Data (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Restore the quality adjustment configuration values to factory initial data or installation initial data.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change by CE.
(3) Procedure
Press [Machine Adjustment].
Press [Quality Adjustment].
Press [Recall Standard Data].
Note
▪ When you select [Installation initial data], each configuration value returns to the adjustment values that were stored by
the code "91-00" of the I/O check mode.
I-55
4.3.49 Prepare for auto selection (Quality Adjustment)

(1) Function
Registers the image data as a comparison reference that is used when you perform the automatic selection function of the adjustment items
in the Package Color Auto Adj. (user mode).
For details of the automatic selection function of the adjustment items in the Package Color Auto Adj. (user mode), refer to P.7.3.1 Automatic
selection in the adjustment items of the Package Color Auto Adj.
Note
▪ When Dot190 is not selected in [Screen1] or [Screen2] in [Utility] - [Administrator Setting] - [System Setting] - [Expert
Adjustment] - [Quality Adjustment] - [Custom Screen], this adjustment is unavailable.
▪ This adjustment activates the [Auto Selection] check box of [Additional Adjustment] in [MACHINE] - [Adjustment] - [Quality
Adjustment] - [Package Color Auto Adj.] - [Initial Set.].
(2) Usage
When you want to use the automatic selection function of the adjustment items in the Package Color Auto Adj. (user mode), you must perform
this adjustment at the following timings.
• At the IQ-501 installation
• When the target density of the maximum density initial adjustment is changed
• When the firmware version that does not include this function is updated to the new one that includes it
• C6100 series: This function is added at G00-30
• C3080 series: This function is added at G00-20
(3) Procedure
1. Press [Prepare for auto selection].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Prepare for auto selection]
2. "Prepare for auto selection screen"
Press [Initial Set.]
Configure the settings in Table 1: Initial Setting.
Note
▪ Do not add Exact Color/G7 when [Use Color Density Control] = [OFF]. (Reason: When [Use Color Density Control] is [OFF],
the KM controller calibration must be executed before the Exact Color/G7 is performed. However, the Package Color Auto
Adj. does not contain the KM controller calibration.)
4. Press [OK].
Press [Paper Setting].
Configure the paper setting of the tray that you use at the adjustment.
Note
▪ Place the specified maximum density management paper on the maximum density adjustment tray and the adjustment
tray. If you use the unspecified paper, the density becomes improper.
▪ Paper size: 279.4 mm or more in the main scan direction, 420.0 mm to 487.7 mm in the sub scan direction
Press [Start].
Note
▪ At this time, each adjustment is performed automatically.
7. The basic image diagnosis chart is output after the Package Color Auto Adj. is performed, and the image data that the IQ-501 scanner
unit reads is registered.
Table 1: Initial Setting
Item Description
Screen of Adjustment Target Select the screen that you want to adjust.
Additional Adjustment Select the adjustment that you want to add.
Exact Color : Number of Output Job Specify the number of charts for each measurement of Exact Color or G7 calibration. The
G7 Calibration : Number of Output Job several sheets of charts are read and the average value is used. (Maximum: 5 times x 5
sheets)
Maximum Density Adjustment Tray Select the tray to be used for the image diagnosis and the Max Density Initial Adj.
Adjustment Tray Select the tray that you use at any adjustments other than the Max Density Initial Adj.
Overwrite Tray Set. of Max.DensityAdj. Select whether to overwrite the tray setting when you perform the Max Density Initial Adj.
[ON]
• When you start the Package Color Auto Adj.: No operation
• When you perform the Max Density Initial Adj. (when the target value is [Designated]): The
paper type and paper weight of the tray are overwritten with the target value.
• When you perform the Max Density Initial Adj. (when the target value is [UserDesignated]):
The tray setting (excluding the color density control) is overwritten with the target value.
[OFF]
• When you start the Package Color Auto Adj. (when the target value is [Designated]): If the
paper type and paper weight differ from the target value, you cannot start the adjustment.
If the paper profile name differs from the target value, you cannot start the adjustment.
• When you perform the Max Density Initial Adj.: No operation
G7 Report*1 Select whether you print the report of G7 calibration.
*1: This item is displayed only when DIPSW55-1=1.
I-56
4.3.50 Basic Setting (Quality Adjustment - Image Diagnosis)

(1) Function
Configures the basic settings of the image diagnosis using the IQ-501.
Note
▪ This function is available only when the IQ-501 is connected.
Item Set value Description
Image Diagnosis ON or OFF (default) Select whether you use the image diagnosis.
When you select [ON], [Image Diagnosis] is
displayed in [MACHINE] - [Adjustment] -
[Quality Adjustment].
Select Screen Pattern Dot190 (default) or Dot270 Select the screen that you want to use for the
image diagnosis in the Service Mode.
Note
· Use Dot190 normally. When you want to
diagnose images in higher sensitivity, use
Dot270.
· In the image diagnosis of the user mode,
Dot190 is only available.
Vertical Streak Inspection Count 1 to 5 counts (default: 3) Enter the inspection count of the vertical
streak diagnosis of the detailed diagnosis.
Detailed Diagnosis Result Auto Reset ON (default) or OFF Select whether to automatically delete the
result of the detailed diagnosis.
When the setting is [ON], the result is deleted
at the following timings.
• When you press the [Print Mode] button
of Simple Diagnosis or Detailed
Diagnosis.
• When you perform the Package Color
Auto Adj. (User mode) (with [Auto
Selection] selected).
DetailedDiagnosis/Sync. SimpleDiagnosis ON or OFF (default) Select whether to execute the detailed
diagnosis automatically when the simple
diagnosis detects an error.
Diagnosis Level FD Streak Essential, Standard (default), Premium, Select the detection level of the FD streak
Setting Premium+ (vertical streak)
CD Streak Essential, Standard (default), Premium, Select the detection level of the CD streak
Premium+ (horizontal streak)
Diagonal Streak Moderate, Standard (default), Strict Select the detection level of the diagonal
streak
Back Surface Stain Moderate, Standard (default), Strict Select the detection level of the back surface
Quantity: 1 to 10 (default: 5) stain
Color/White Spot Quantity: 2 to 10 (default: 5) Select the detection level of the blurry color
Noise spots and blurry white spots.
Black/White Speckle Quantity: 2 to 10 (default: 5) Select the detection level of the black speckle
and white speckle.
(2) Usage
A CE changes the basic setting of the image diagnosis.
(3) Procedure
1. Press [Image Diagnosis].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Quality Adjustment] → [Image Diagnosis]
2. "Image Diagnosis screen"
Press [Basic Setting].
3. "Basic Setting screen"
Configure each setting.
4. Press [OK].
4.3.51 Simple Diagnosis (Quality Adjustment - Image Diagnosis)

(1) Function
Diagnoses whether any streaks or spots appear on images by reading the output chart through the scanner unit of the IQ-501. The simple
diagnosis does not repair the error image.
For details of the simple diagnosis, refer to P.7.1 Simple diagnosis.
Note
▪ When the setting value (Dot190 or Dot270) of [Select Screen Pattern] in [Image Diagnosis] - [Basic Setting] is not selected in
[Screen1] or [Screen2] in [Utility] - [Administrator Setting] - [System Setting] - [Expert Adjustment] - [Quality Adjustment] -
[Custom Screen], this function is unavailable.
(2) Usage
When you want to check whether an image trouble occurs, use this function.
I-57
(3) Procedure
Press [Simple Diagnosis].
3. "Simple Diagnosis screen"
Press [Print Mode].
Select the paper feed tray, and press the Start key.
Note
▪ Paper size: 279.4 mm or more in main scan direction, 420.0 mm to 487.7 mm in sub scan direction
5. A horizontal band chart and a vertical band chart are output, and the scanner unit of the IQ-501 reads their images.
6. The diagnosis result is displayed.
Note
▪ When this diagnosis recommends the detailed diagnosis, you can execute [Detailed Diagnosis] for the item necessary to
be diagnosed and the target color. The execution procedure is as follows.
· When [DetailedDiagnosis/Sync. SimpleDiagnosis] is [OFF]: Press [RunDetailedImageDiagnosis] in the diagnosis result
screen.
· When [DetailedDiagnosis/Sync. SimpleDiagnosis] is [ON]: The detailed diagnosis is automatically executed.
4.3.52 Detailed Diagnosis (Quality Adjustment - Image Diagnosis)

(1) Function
Diagnoses whether any streaks or spots appear on images by reading the output chart through the scanner unit of the IQ-501. If any errors
are detected, automatically perform a necessary process adjustment that repairs the error image.
For details of the detailed diagnosis, refer to P.7.2 Detailed diagnosis.
Note
▪ When the setting value (Dot190 or Dot270) of [Select Screen Pattern] in [Image Diagnosis] - [Basic Setting] is not selected in
[Screen1] or [Screen2] in [Utility] - [Administrator Setting] - [System Setting] - [Expert Adjustment] - [Quality Adjustment] -
[Custom Screen], this function is unavailable.
(2) Usage
When an error is detected in the simple diagnosis, use this function.
Note
▪ When you execute the detailed diagnosis that is synchronized with the simple diagnosis, the item necessary to be diagnosed
and the target color are automatically selected. You have two ways to synchronize the detailed diagnosis with the simple
diagnosis.
▪ When [DetailedDiagnosis/Sync. SimpleDiagnosis] is [OFF]: Press [RunDetailedImageDiagnosis] in the diagnosis result
screen of the simple diagnosis.
▪ When [DetailedDiagnosis/Sync. SimpleDiagnosis] is [ON]: The detailed diagnosis is automatically executed after the
simple diagnosis.
▪ When you can tell the cause of the image trouble (such as single color FD streak), specify the diagnosis item and the target
color to execute only the detailed diagnosis.
(3) Procedure
Press [Detailed Diagnosis].
3. "Detailed Diagnosis screen"
Select the diagnosis item and the target color, and press [Print Mode].
• Vertical Streak Diagnosis (not supported in the C3080 series)
• HorizontalStreakDiagnosis
• Spot Diagnosis
Select the paper feed tray, and press the Start key.
Note
▪ Paper size: 279.4 mm or more in main scan direction, 420.0 mm to 487.7 mm in sub scan direction
5. The chart of the diagnosis item is output, and the scanner unit of the IQ-501 reads its image.
6. If any errors are detected, a necessary process adjustment is automatically performed.
7. The diagnosis result is displayed.
Note
▪ When this diagnosis determines that the item has an error, the cause is displayed on the right side of the screen. Check
the description, and perform the necessary adjustment.
▪ In the spot diagnosis, the 1st transfer output adjustment or the 2nd transfer output adjustment is changed. After the spot
diagnosis, perform the density balance adjustment, maximum density adjustment, and color density control.
8. Manually print the standard chart and visually check the image quality.
Note
▪ Image trouble will excessively stand out in the half-tone chart that is printed in the detailed diagnosis. Therefore, the user
may point out the image trouble. In order to prevent users from pointing this out, use the standard chart when you visually
check the image quality.
▪ Be sure to acquire the standard chart from CSES.
CSES ID: TNBT1800130JP (Japanese), CSES ID: TNBT1800130EN (English)
I-58
4.3.53 Non-Image Area Erase Check

(1) Function
When you conduct the Non-Image Area Auto Erase function under a bright light source, the function could not operate normally. In that case,
check the level of the external light and check whether the Non-Image Area Auto Erase function operates normally.
The results are shown in the following patterns.
OK NORMAL adjustment selected.
The machine is set to appropriate parameters for Non-Image Area Erase.
NG1 Performed normally, however the data which has possibility that Non-Image Area Erase cannot
function correctly was found.
It tend to be failed with dark density originals.
Please refer the Service Manual.
NG2 The data which has possibility that Non-Image Area Erase cannot function correctly was found.
Please refer the Service Manual.
(2) Usage
Use this function when you install a new machine or move a installation location.
Use this function when the Non-Image Area Auto Erase function does not operate correctly because the environment of the installation
location changes.
Note
function.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Non-Image Area Erase Check ].
3. "Non-Image Area Erase Check screen"
Press [Start].
Note
▪ When you start this check, confirm that ADF or the original cover opens completely. Also, confirm that there are no
scratches or no dirt on the original glass.
4. The check is conducted, and the message "OK" appears for a normal condition. For "NG1" and "NG2", reinstall the machine so that the
external light does not come in, and then conduct the check again.
4.3.54 Laser Pulse Adjustment

(1) Function
To output the laser pulse width evenly in every pixel, this adjustment adjusts the unevenness of the laser pulse width.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment after you replace the printer image processing board (PRIPB).
Note
▪ If you do not perform this adjustment after you replace the PRIPB, it possibly causes the highlight density variability and the
moire.
▪ The adjustment is necessary to be performed only once.(There is no problem even you perform several times.)
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Laser Pulse Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Machine Adjustment] → [Laser Pulse Adjustment]
3. "Laser Pulse Adjustment screen"
Press [Start].
The adjustment is completed in approximately 1 minute.
4. "Pop-up screen"
Confirm that the message "Adjustment completed" appears, and then press [Reboot].
When you press [Reboot], the machine restarts automatically.
5. When an error occurs, the message "Error occurred. Please confirm image control board." appears.
Check the polygon motor or the condition of the board connection, and perform the adjustment again.
4.3.55 Tray Size Adjustment (Tray Adjustment)

(1) Function
Adjust the size detection accuracy of each tray.
• Main body tray
• MB-506
• MB-508
• LU-202m
• LU-202XL
• LU-202XLm
• PF-602m
I-59
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the paper size is detected wrongly.
(3) Procedure
Note
▪ When you adjust the tray size of the LU-202m, LU-202XL, or LU-202XLm, press the tray down switch (SW100) twice, and
lower the up down plate to the lowest position.
When you adjust the tray size while the up down plate is at its upper position, accurate adjustment is not guaranteed.
▪ The up down plate of the MB-506 or MB-508 does not move down on the adjustment mode.
When you move down the plate, exit from the adjustment mode.
(You can adjust the tray size of the MB-506 or MB-508 even when the up down plate is not at its lowest position.)
Press [06 Tray adjustment].
3. "Tray Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Tray Size adjustment ].
4. Select (Large) of the tray that you want to adjust.
5. Adjust the width of the side guide of the tray that you want to adjust to 297 mm with a scale.
6. Press [Start].
7. Select (Small) of the tray that you want to adjust.
Note
▪ For the PF-602m, LU-202m, LU-202XL, and LU-202XLm, the width of the side guide is more than 148 mm when it is reduced
at the maximum. Therefore, the tray (small) cannot be selected.
8. Adjust the width of the side guide of the tray that you want to adjust to 148 mm with a scale.
9. Press [Start].
4.4 Process Adjustment
4.4.1 1st Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)
Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
4.4.2 2nd Transfer Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.3 Sep. Current Manual Adj. (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.4 Pre-transfer Guide Confirm (High Voltage Adjustment)

4.4.5 Blade Setting Mode (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
To prevent the damage to the transfer belt and the cleaning blade, clean after the toner attached on the transfer belt.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when you replace the intermediate transfer belt and the cleaning blade.
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Process Adjustment].
2. "Process Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.].
3. "Drum Peculiarity Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Blade Setting Mode].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Blade Setting Mode]
4. "Blade Setting Mode screen"
Press [Intermediate Transfer Belt]. It completes in about 15 seconds then the message of the completion appears on the screen.
4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Executes the image stabilization control (long correction control) on arbitrary timing.(Refer to Long correction control)
(2) Usage
Executes the image stabilization control that is executed automatically and periodically on arbitrary timing.
Executes before color calibration of the controller.
(3) Procedure
I-60

Press [02 Gamma Automatic Adjustment].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Gamma Automatic Adjustment]
4. "Gamma Automatic Adjustment screen"
Press [Start]. The adjustment is complete in about 1 minute. The developing DC bias value for each process speed (line speed 1, line
speed 2, line speed 3, line speed 4, line speed 5) and each color (Y, M, C, K) appears. The message of the completion appears on the
screen.
Note
▪ An error code appears when there is any trouble. Correct the error referring to the following list.
Error 1: Unable to execute the gamma correction because of the gamma sensor output abnormality. When the error
occurs, use the previous correction value to control it.
4.4.7 Toner Density Sensor Init. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Use the TCR sensor to measure the developer permeability in the developing unit, and store the TCR sensor output voltage in the NVRAM
board (NRB).
(2) Usage
Carry out this adjustment after new developer is charged, and adjust the standard toner concentration of the developer.
Note
▪ After you replace the developer, do not execute printing without carrying out this adjustment. Otherwise, a proper image
density cannot be obtained, and you must replace the developers.
▪ The value that appears after the adjustment is the TCR sensor output voltage.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Toner Density Sensor Init.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Toner Density Sensor Init.]
4. "TonerDensitySensorInit.Auto screen"
Select the color of a developer that has been newly charged and then press the [Start].
5. A message "Completed" appears.
4.4.8 Toner Density Revert (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Supply toner automatically for the developing unit with lower output value of the TCR sensor than the standard (low toner concentration) until
the toner density reaches the standard.
Note
▪ When the toner density is high, change the test pattern density of the target color to 128 (change the density of other colors to
0), output 10 sheets of test pattern number 1, and check the toner density again.
(2) Usage
Recover to the normal toner density when the toner density of each color is low.
When SC that alerts low toner density occurs, recover the toner density with this recovery mode (start up the service mode).
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Toner Density Revert].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Toner Density Revert]
4. "Toner Density Revert screen"
Select the color(s) which you want to recover the density.
5. Press [Start] to supply the toner to the developing unit with lower than the standard density value. When the toner concentration reaches
to the standard value, the main body stops.
Note
▪ The output value on the touch panel indicates the toner density (%). The operation status (activation or deactivation)
indicates the status of the toner supplying operation.
4.4.9 Max Density Initial Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
The check and the optimization for the maximum density for each YMCK color is available.
(2) Usage
Perform this adjustment when the density which the spectrophotometer measured is not target density. Perform this adjustment mainly after
the change of the machine status such as the installation or the maintenance.
Note
▪ Maximum density initial adjustment is already adjusted at the factory setting.
I-61
▪ When IQ-501 is connected, [Max. Density Initial Adj.] is available. The use of [Max. Density Initial Adj.] is recommended.
(3) Adjustment target value (reference)

The following shows the target density according to the spectrophotometer and the standard paper.
Acceptable target density range of each color Y, M, C: -5% to +5%, K: -5% to +10%
Note
▪ The measurement result (measurement value) of the density varies according to the type of the spectrophotometer and the
paper.
▪ The value that a spectrophotometer measures and the one that the RU-518 color sensor automatically measures are different.
(a) FD-7, FD-5BT, FD-9

Standard paper Type of Y M C K
paper
POD GLOSS COAT 128 g/m2 (for Japan) Coated-GL 0.98 1.59 1.55 1.91
2
NewPage Sterling Premium Digital 100lb. Gloss Text 148 g/m (for North Coated- 0.95 1.53 1.52 1.85
America) GO
Mondi Color Copy Coated Silk 170 g/m2 (for Europe) Coated-ML 0.97 1.56 1.59 1.95
2
Mondi Color Copy 90 g/m Color 0.94 1.50 1.44 1.70
Specific
(b) ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 ("with UV filter" or "M2" is recommended)

Note
· Absolute value: This value (density) includes the density of the paper
· Relative value: This value (density) excludes the density of the paper
Absolute value
paper
NewPage Sterling Premium Digital 100lb. Gloss Text 148 g/m2 (for North Coated- 0.96 1.47 1.51 1.81
America) GO
Mondi Color Copy 90 g/m2 Color 0.93 1.45 1.39 1.66
Specific
Relative value (Relative)
paper
NewPage Sterling Premium Digital 100lb. Gloss Text 148 g/m2 (for North Coated- 0.89 1.42 1.45 1.76
America) GO
Specific
(c) i1iSis XL
paper
2
NewPage Sterling Premium Digital 100lb. Gloss Text 148 g/m (for North Coated- 0.96 1.50 1.54 1.85
America) GO
Specific
(4) Adjustment target value of C83hc, C73hc (reference)

The following shows the target density according to the spectrophotometer and the standard paper.
Acceptable target density range of each color Y, M, C: -5% to +5%, K: -5% to +10%
Note
▪ The measurement result (measurement value) of the density varies according to the type of the spectrophotometer and the
paper.
The value that a spectrophotometer measures and the one that the RU-518 color sensor automatically measures are different.
(a) FD-7, FD-5BT, FD-9

paper
I-62
NewPage Sterling Premium Digital 100lb. Gloss Text 148 g/m2 (For North Coated- 1.01 1.51 1.19 1.85
America) GO
Mondi Color Copy Coated Silk 170 g/m2 (For Europe) Coated-ML 1.04 1.56 1.24 1.95
Mondi Color Copy 90g/m2 Color 0.98 1.43 1.12 1.70
(b) ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 ("with UV filter" or "M2" is recommended)

Note
Absolute value: This value (density) includes the density of the paper
Relative value: This value (density) excludes the density of the paper
Absolute value
paper
America) GO
Mondi Color Copy 90g/m2 Color 0.98 1.39 1.09 1.66
Relative value (Relative)
paper
America) GO
2
Mondi Color Copy 90g/m Color 0.92 1.32 1.02 1.59
(c) i1iSis XL
paper
America) GO
2
Mondi Color Copy 90g/m Color 0.97 1.39 1.07 1.68
(5) Preparation
1. Prepare a standard paper.
Note
▪ When there is no standard paper, do not change the maximum density initial adjustment at the installation.
When there is the standard paper, perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the
standard paper in advance.
2. Prepare one of the following spectrophotometers.
• FD-7, FD-5BT
• FD-9
• ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (one of the spectrophotometers that EFI controller recommends)
• i1iSis XL
3. Specify one paper for the daily density management.
Note
▪ Standard papers are recommended. However, when the user assigns the paper, counsel with the user and decide the
paper.
▪ Perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the paper for the density
management in advance or before the record of target density.
(6) Procedure for the setup or the update of the target value for the density management
I-63
(a) Adjustment flow
Measure and adjust the maximum density
1.Reset the maximum density adjustment value.
2.Perform the gamma automatic adjustment.
When there is no standard paper; When there is the standard paper;
3.Output the image for measurement.
4.Measure the density.
When the density is within the target:
When the density is not within the target:
5.Change the maximum density

initial adjustment value.
When RU-518 is not installed: When RU-518 is installed:
Output the image for measurement.
Measure the density.
Record the measurement result. Register the target density.
Completed
Record the target density
(b) Measurement and adjustment procedures of the maximum density

1. Press [Utility/Counter] - [03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting] - [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [02
Maximum Density Adjustment].
2. "Maximum Density Adjustment screen"
Select "0" for all adjustment values of YMCK and press [OK].
I-64
3. Enter the service mode and perform the gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum
Peculiarity Adj.))
4. Select Screen1 (Dot190) in the "Test Pattern Output Mode" on the service mode, and output the test pattern number 69. (Refer to
I.4.13.17 Test pattern number 69 Maximum density adjustment pattern)
Note
▪ Use standard papers.
When there is no standard paper, proceed to (c) Recording the target density (when the RU-518 is installed) or (d)
Recording the target density (when the RU-518 is not installed). (Refer to I.4.4.9 (6) (c) Recording the target density
(when the RU-518 is installed), I.4.4.9 (6) (d) Recording the target density (when the RU-518 is not installed))
When there is the standard paper, perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and
the standard paper in advance.
5. Measure the density on the test pattern number 69 that you output.
The method differs depending on the spectrophotometer that you use.
• Measure the density with FD-7 and FD-5BT (Refer to I.4.4.9 (8) (a) Measure the density with FD-7, FD-5BT)
• Measure the density with FD-9 (Refer to I.4.4.9 (8) (b) Measure the density with FD-9)
• Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, and i1Pro2 (i1Profiler (X-Rite Corporation)) (Refer to I.4.4.9 (8) (c) Measure
the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (i1Profiler (X-Rite Corporation)))
• Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, and i1Pro2 (ColorPort (X-Rite Corporation)) (Refer to I.4.4.9 (8) (d) Measure
the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (ColorPort (X-Rite Corporation)))
• Measure the density with i1iSis XL (Refer to I.4.4.9 (8) (e) Measure the density with i1iSis XL)
6. Check the measurement result of each color.
Compare the result with the adjustment target value (reference). When the density is within the target, the operation is complete. When
the density is not within the target density, perform the following adjustments.
7. Go back to the top screen of the service mode.
Press [05 Max Density Initial Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Max Density Initial Adj.]
11. "Maximum Density Initial Adjustment screen"
Adjust the value according to the result of each color. Then, press [OK].
• The result is lower than the target density: increase the value of the target color.
• The measurement result is higher than the target density: decrease the value of the target color.
Setting range: -10 to +10
Note
▪ The change differs according to the paper.
(Reference) The change for POD GLOSS COAT 128 g/m2 (FD-7)
▪ Y: Changes for Δ0.012 by one step
▪ M: Changes for Δ0.021 by one step
▪ C: Changes for Δ0.026 by one step
▪ K: Changes for Δ0.021 by one step
12. Perform the step 3 to step 6, and check the measurement result.
When the density is not within the target density, perform the adjustments again.
(c) Recording the target density (when the RU-518 is installed)

1. Specify a paper type for the daily density management and place the papers on the tray.
Note
paper.
management before the record of target density.
Press [Print Mode].
Select the paper for the density management. Press the start key and output the chart.
I-65

Press [Confirm Target Density].
6. "Confirm Target Density screen"

Press [Register Target Density].
Note
▪ The information of the registered target density is displayed on the "Registered Data" column.
▪ The density data that you measured on the step 3 is displayed on the "Measured Data" column.
▪ The paper type that you used on the step 3 is displayed on the "Paper Type" column.
▪ The value that a spectrophotometer measures and the one that the RU-509 color sensor automatically measures are
different.
7. "Register Target Density screen"

Input the registered name of the target density data.
8. Press [OK] and register (update) the target density data.
Note
▪ When you press [Cancel], the target density data is not registered (updated).
Press [Confirm Target Density], and check that the information on "Registered Data" is updated.
(d) Recording the target density (when the RU-518 is not installed)

1. Specify a paper for the daily density management and place the papers on the tray.
Note
paper.
management before the record of target density.
2. Select Screen1 (Dot190) in the "Test Pattern Output Mode" on the service mode, and output the test pattern number 69. (Refer to
I.4.13.17 Test pattern number 69 Maximum density adjustment pattern)
Note
▪ Use paper for the daily density management.
I-66
• Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, and i1Pro2 (ColorPort (X-Rite Corporation)) (Refer to I.4.4.9 (8) (d) Measure
the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (ColorPort (X-Rite Corporation)))
Note
▪ When you measure the target density, use the spectrophotometer of the user.
▪ For the method to measure the density with other spectrophotometers, refer to the manual of each spectrophotometer.
4. Write down the measurement results of the YMCK maximum density.
Note
▪ Be sure to inform each color measurement result of YMCK to the user because it is the target value for daily maximum
density management.
(7) Procedure for maintenance

(a) Adjustment flow
When RU-518 is not installed: When RU-518 is installed:
1.Reset the maximum density adjustment value. 1.Measure the density with RU-518.
2.Perform the gamma automatic adjustment. 2.Compare with the registered target value.
3.Output the image for measurement. Completed. Or, adjust and measure again.
4.Measure the density.
When measuring with the standard paper: When measuring with other than a standard paper:
(When there is the standard paper) (When there is no standard paper)
5.Compare with the adjustment 5.Compare with the target density

target value (reference). which you record at the set up.
Completed. Or, adjust and measure again. Completed. Or, adjust and measure again.
(b) When the RU-518 is not installed

3. Enter the service mode and perform the gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum
Peculiarity Adj.))
I-67
4. Output the test pattern number 69 in the "Test Pattern Output Mode" on the service mode. (Refer to I.4.13.17 Test pattern number 69
Maximum density adjustment pattern)
Note
▪ Use standard papers.
When the user does not have the standard paper, use paper for the daily density management.
Perform the density balance adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the standard paper or Dot190
(screen) and the paper for the density management in advance.
• Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, and i1Pro (ColorPort (X-Rite Corporation)) (Refer to I.4.4.9 (8) (d) Measure the
density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (ColorPort (X-Rite Corporation)))
Note
▪ When you print the test pattern on the paper for the daily density management, use the spectrophotometer of the user.
▪ For the method to measure the density with other spectrophotometers, refer to the manual of each spectrophotometer.
6. Check the measurement result of each color.
When you measure the density with the standard paper, compare it with the adjustment target value (reference). When the density is
within the target, the operation is completed. When the density is not within the target density, perform the following procedures.
When you measure with the paper for the daily density management, compare the result with the target density that you recorded on
the setup. When the value is within the target density, the operation is complete. When the density is not within the target density,
perform the following procedures.
7. Go back to the top screen of the service mode.
Press [05 Max Density Initial Adj.].
Adjust the value according to the result of each color. Then, press [OK].
• The result is lower than the target density: increase the value of the target color.
• The measurement result is higher than the target density: decrease the value of the target color.
Note
▪ The change differs according to the paper.
(Reference) The change for POD GLOSS COAT 128 g/m2 (FD-7)
▪ Y: Changes for Δ0.012 by one step
▪ M: Changes for Δ0.021 by one step
▪ C: Changes for Δ0.026 by one step
▪ K: Changes for Δ0.021 by one step
12. Perform the step 3 to step 6, and check the measurement result.
When the density is not within the target density, perform the adjustments again.
(c) When the RU-518 is installed

3. Select [Service Mode] - [02 Process Adjustment] - [02 Drum Peculiarity Adj.] - [05 Max Density Initial Adj.].
Press [Print Mode].
I-68
Place a paper for the density management, that you specify on the step 1 of the target density registration, on the tray. Then, change
the paper setting of the tray to the setting that is the same as the paper setting on the target density registration.
Note
▪ If you conduct the tray select of the print mode on [Utility/Counter] - [03 Administrator Setting] - [01 System Setting] - [05
Expert Adjustment] - [06 Process Adjustment] - [03 Max. Density Auto Adj. (RU)], you can change the paper setting of the
tray to the setting that is the same as the paper setting on the target density registration. (Refer to R.2.2.7 Max. Density
Auto Adj. (RU))
6. Select the paper for the density management. Press the start key and output the chart.
Note
▪ At this time, the color sensor of the RU measures the color of the chart.

Compare the "Registered Data" and the "Measured Data".
Note
▪ The paper type that you used on the step 4 is displayed on the "Paper Type" column.
▪ The value that a spectrophotometer measures and the one that the RU-518 color sensor automatically measures are
different.
9. When the "Measured Data" is not within the standard range (Y, M, C:-5% to +5%, K: -5% to +10%) compared with the "Registered
Data", change the adjustment value according to the measurement result of each color. Then, repeat step 4 to step 7.
• When the measurement result is lower than the target density: Increase the value of the target color.
• When the measurement result is higher than the target density: Decrease the value of the target color.
10. When the Y, M, C, K values on the "Measured Data" are within the standard values, press [Close].
Note
▪ If you press [Register Target Density], the registered data of the target density value is updated. Therefore, do not press
[Register Target Density].
(8) Measure the density with the spectrophotometer

(a) Measure the density with FD-7, FD-5BT
1. Activate FD-5BT.
2. Use the up down move button [1] on the home screen, and move the cursor to the top.
I-69
[1] [2] [3]

[1] Up Down move button
[2] Return button
[3] OPTION button
3. Press the OPTION button and display the Functions screen.
4. Move the cursor to [Density] on the Functions screen, and press the OPTION button.
5. Move the cursor to [Paper] or [Sample] on the home screen, and press the OPTION button.
I-70
6. Move the cursor to [Menu] on the option screen, and press the OPTION button.
7. Move the cursor to [Density Options] on the menu screen, and press the OPTION button.
I-71
8. Change the items to the configurations mentioned in the table.

For details of setting items, refer to "Table 1: Setting item."
Note
▪ For detailed information on the configuration, refer to the manual attached to FD-7 or FD-5BT.
9. Press the return button and the menu screen is displayed.

10. Move the cursor to [Calibration] on the menu screen, and press the OPTION button.
11. Press the FD-5BT on the white calibration plate [1], and perform the white calibration.
I-72
[1]
[1] White calibration plate

12. When "Calibrating..." is no longer displayed, take the FD-5BT away from the plate.
13. Press the return button twice, and the menu screen is displayed.
14. After you move the cursor to [Sample], move the opening of the FD-5BT [6] on the patch that you measure. Press the FD-5BT and
measure the density of CMYK patches [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] on the test pattern number 69.
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5]
[6]
[1] Measurement patch 1

[6] Opening
I-73
15. Calculate the average of the maximum density for each of C, M, Y, and K by the 5 patch densities of CMYK which you measured. Use
Excel or another application for the calculation.
Table 1: Setting item
Setting item Configurations
Means. Cond. M2 (UV Cut)
Den. White Ref. Absolute value
Density Status T
Density Filter Auto
(b) Measure the density with FD-9

Note
▪ The following is the reference procedure using the chart file (Test Chart No.69.xml) and the average calculation file
(Meas_No.69_M2.xlsx).
▪ The chart file (Test Chart No.69.xml) and the average calculation file (Meas_No.69_M2.xlsx) are the reference. Konica Minolta
does not guarantee its accuracy.
▪ You can also create a chart file with the FD-S2w and use it for the measurement.
For details, refer to the manual of the FD-S2w.
1. Prepare the following files.
• Chart file (Test Chart No.69.xml)
• Average calculation file (Meas_No.69_M2.xlsx)
Note
▪ Be sure to acquire the files from CSES.
CSES ID: DLBT1613378JP (Japanese), CSES ID: DLBT1613378EN (English)
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the FD-9, and activate the FD-9.
3. Wait until the following screen appears on the FD-9 display.
4. Connect the FD-9 and the PC with the USB cable.
I-74
5. Activate the FD-S2w.

Note
▪ You can download the FD-S2w from the following URL.
▪ Japanese: http://www.konicaminolta.jp/instruments/support/download/fluorescence/index.html#fluorescence_02
▪ English: http://www.konicaminolta.com/instruments/download/software/color/index.html
▪ Besides, the FD-S2w is stored in the CD included with the FD-9.
6. Change the language setting of the FD-S2w as necessary. (Default: English)
1. Press [Settings]-[Environment].
2. Select the language, and press [OK].
3. Press [OK], and reboot the FD-S2w.

Note
▪ Unless the FD-S2w is rebooted, the language does not change.
I-75
7. Press [File]-[Open Chart File].
8. Select the chart file (Test Chart No.69.xml), and press [Open].
Note
▪ Be sure to use the chart file that you prepared in the step 1.
9. Press [Test Chart No69] on the Data List.
I-76
10. Insert the test pattern No.69 into the FD-9.

The FD-9 measures the color on the chart automatically.
Note
▪ Insertion direction of test pattern No.69: The black line [1] side is a leading edge.
[1]
Note
▪ When the measurement completes, the measurement data is created under the chart file.
I-77
11. Select the following setteings on the Measurement Settings.

• Density: Check
• Den. White Ref.: Absolute
• Density Status: T
• Measurement Condition - M2: Check
• The others: Uncheck
12. Right click the measurement data, and press [Save].
13. Select any folder and press [Save].

Note
▪ Be sure to save the data as a CSV file format.
I-78
14. Open the measurement data (CSV file) [1] that you saved in the step 13 and the average calculation file (Meas_No.69_M2.xlsx) [2] in
Excel.
Note
▪ Be sure to use the average calculation file that you prepared in the step 1.
▪ The formula [3] for the calculation of the average density is input in the average calculation file.
▪ The cell positions of the maximum density patch for each color (Y, M, C, K) are as follows. (Cell in yellow on the average
calculation file)
▪ K: L21, L45, L69, L93, L117
▪ C: I24, I48, I72, I96, I120
▪ M: J27, J51, J75, J99, J123
▪ Y: K30, K54, K78, K102, K126
I-79
[1]
[2] [3]
15. Copy the cells of the measurement data (A1 to L140) to the average calculation file.
The average density is displayed on the chart on the average calculation file.
I-80
(c) Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (i1Profiler (X-Rite Corporation))
1. The following procedure describes how to measure the density using i1Profiler (X-Rite Corporation) as an example.
2. Start i1Profiler.
Note
▪ i1Profiler is just one example of a color measurement application. Konica Minolta does not guarantee its measurement
accuracy.
▪ i1Profiler can be downloaded from the following URL.
http://www.xrite.com/i1publish/Support
▪ Close the applications other than i1Profiler.
3. Connect ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, or i1Pro2 to the PC.
4. Wait until "Licensing" turns green. (About 1 minute)
5. When the registration setting screen appears, select [Register Later].
I-81
6. Select [Advanced] in [User Mode].
7. Select [i1Pro | i1Pro 2] in [Default display device].
8. Select [Measure Chart] in "Printer" of Workflow selection.
I-82
9. Select [i1Pro] or [i1Pro2] in [Device setup].
10. Configure [Rows per page] to [5] and [Columns per page] to [4], and click [Next].
11. Select [Spot] in [Measurement Mode].
I-83
12. Place the spectrophotometers on the calibration dock horizontally, and click [Calibrate].
13. Stack 10 sheets of blank paper whose type is same as the one that you printed the test pattern No.69. Then, place the printed chart on
it.
14. Measure the maximum density patch of the measurement patch 1 [1] in order of K, C, M, and Y one by one. Measure the
measurement patch 2 [2] to measurement patch 5 [5] in the same way.
Note
▪ For the remeasurement, click the patch that you want to measure again.
I-84
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5]
15. Click [Save].
16. Input any file name and save it in any place. Select [i1Profiler CGATS Custom] in Save as type.
17. Configure "Custom CGATS Options" as follows, and click [OK]. After you press [OK], 3 text files ("***_M0", "***_M1", and "***_M2") are
saved.
18. Open the file with "_M2" at the end of file name among the saved text files in Excel.
I-85
19. Calculate the average of the 5 maximum density patch for each color: Y, M, C, and K.
• Maximum density of K: A21 to A25
• Maximum density of C: B26 to B30
• Maximum density of M: C31 to C35
• Maximum density of Y: D36 to D40
Note
▪ When you measure and calculate the maximum density average values with the procedure above, be sure to compare
the absolute value of the adjustment target value (reference) with the maximum density average values.
(d) Measure the density with ES-1000, ES-2000, i1Pro, i1Pro2 (ColorPort (X-Rite Corporation))
1. The following procedure describes how to measure the density using ColorPort (X-Rite Corporation) as an example.
2. Start "ColorPort".
Note
▪ ColorPort is just one example of a color measurement application. Konica Minolta does not guarantee its measurement
accuracy.
▪ Color Port can be downloaded from the following URL.
http://www.xrite.com/service-support/downloads/c/colorport-utility-software-v2_0_5
▪ Because ColorPort is not supported any more, i1Profiler is recommended to use.
3. Create a target.
1. Select [i1Pro] on [Device].
2. Select [CMYK] on the [Color Space].
3. Select [New] on [Patch Set].
4. The "Customize Screen" appears. Enter any name on [Name].

5. Click [+] until [Total Patches] reaches to [20].
6 Click [Save] and save the target to any directory. Select TIFF for [Files of Type].
I-86
4. Adjust the setting of the measurement condition

1. Click [Measure Target] tab.
2. Select the target that you created on [Target].
3. Select [i1Pro] on [Device].
5. Perform the calibration

1. Select [Spot] on [Measurement Mode] of the "Configuration Screen". Click [Calibrate].
2. Follow the instructions on the screen and perform the calibration.
6. Measure the target

1. Measure the 5 maximum density patches of K.
Continue the measurement by each color: The 5 maximum density patches of C, the 5 maximum density patches of M, and the 5
maximum density patches of Y.
I-87
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5]

7. Check the result
1. Select the patch that you want to check.
2. Click [1].
I-88
[1]
3. Click [Measurement Info] on the "Info Screen".
[1]
4. Select [Density] on the "Info Screen". Select [T] for [Status].

5. Check the result
8. Save the data

1. Click [Save Data] [1].
I-89
[1]
2. Select the format that you want to output on [Format].
3. Be sure that all the items on [Device] and [Colormetric] are not checked.
4. Check [VCMY] on [Density]. Select [T] on [Status].
5. Click [Save].
9. Open the saved CSV file in Excel.
I-90
10. Calculate the average maximum density [1] of each of the 5 colors (Y, M, C, K).
[1]
Note
▪ When you measure and calculate the maximum density average values with the procedure above, be sure to compare
the absolute value of the adjustment target value (reference) with the maximum density average values.
(e) Measure the density with i1iSis XL

1. Start ProfileMaker Measure tool.
Note
▪ ProfileMaker is just one example of a color measurement application. Konica Minolta does not guarantee its
measurement accuracy.
▪ ProfileMaker5 can be downloaded from the following URL.
https://xritephoto.com/ph_product_overview.aspx?ID=757
2. Prepare the script data for the test pattern number 69.
I-91
Note
▪ Be sure to acquire the script data from CSES.
3. Connect the USB dongle to the PC.
Note
▪ When there is no USB dongle, you cannot measure density.
4. Click [Instrument Configuration].
5. Select [Eye-One iSis] at the [Instrument] and select [Reflection].
When [OK] is displayed, close [Instrument Configuration].
6. Click [Chart] and display [Test Chart Measurement].

Select [Open...] from [Test Chart].
7. Select the script data (iSis_8c_100_50_10.txt) for i1iSis.

Note
▪ Be sure to acquire the script data from CSES.
I-92
8. Click [Start...].
9. Insert the test pattern number 69 to i1iSis XL.
I-93
10. When the measurement normally finishes and the following message is displayed, click [Close].
11. Click the [Optical density] tab.
I-94
12. Check [Offset Data], and then select [ANSI T] at [Filter Standard].
13. Select a desired color from C, M, Y, or K at the [Color Channel].
I-95
14. Click [Export Density...] and save the text file (.txt).
Note
▪ When you move the mouse on the patch, you can confirm the positioning information [1] and the density information [2]
of the patch.
[1] [2]
15. Open Excel. Select the saved text file (.txt) from [File] - [Open].
I-96
16. Calculate the average of the 5 maximum density patch for each color: Y, M, C, and K.
• Maximum density patch position of Y: B4, B18, H11, N4, N18
• Maximum density patch position of M: B3, B17, H10, N3, N17
• Maximum density patch position of C: B2, B16, H9, N2, N16
• Maximum density patch position of K:B1, B15, H8, N1, N15
4.4.10 Max Dens. Initial Auto Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
This adjustment automatically adjusts the maximum density of Y, M, C, and K each with using IQ-501.
Note
(2) Usage
• Perform this adjustment when you install the main body.
• Perform this adjustment when you replace the consumables (drum, developer, developing unit, charging corona).
(3) Adjustment target value

(a) Default value
• When you select the designated paper on [Initialize Target Data], the target density is configured to the default value (target density for
the designated paper that you selected).
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Max Dens. Initial Auto Adj.] → [Initialize Target Data]
• The target density differs depending on the designated paper.
1. C3080, C3080P, C3070, C3070P, C3070L
Paper Paper name Paper type Paper weight Y M C K
Designated paper 1 POD Gloss Coat 128 Coated GL 106 to 135 g/m2 0.98 1.59 1.55 1.91
Designated paper 2 NewPage Sterling Premium Digital Coated-GO 136 g/m2 to 176 g/m2 0.95 1.53 1.52 1.85
100lb.
Designated paper 3 Mondi Color Copy Coated Silk 170 Coated-ML 136 g/m2 to 176 g/m2 0.97 1.56 1.59 1.95
2. C83hc, C73hc
Paper Paper name Paper type Paper weight Y M C K
Designated paper 1 POD Gloss Coat 128 Coated GL 106 to 135 g/m2 1.02 1.54 1.21 1.91
Designated paper 2 NewPage Sterling Premium Digital Coated-GO 136 g/m2 to 176 g/m2 1.01 1.51 1.19 1.85
100lb.
Designated paper 3 Mondi Color Copy Coated Silk 170 Coated-ML 136 g/m2 to 176 g/m2 1.04 1.56 1.24 1.95
I-97
(b) Registration of target density

1. When the paper other than the designated paper is used as the maximum density management paper, the target density must be
updated.
With [Max Density Initial Adj.], you can feed the paper and measure the density. You can register the measured density as a target
density. (Update the default value)
2. When the paper other than the designated paper has the target density value, you can manually input the arbitrary target value on
[User Designated Paper] or import it from the USB memory.
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Max Dens. Initial Auto Adj.] → [Initialize Target Data] → [User
Designated Paper]
Note
▪ The coated paper that has stable quality is recommended for the paper other than the designated one.
▪ The target density value of the paper other than the designated one must be the same value of the toner adhesion
quantity at the time you match the density with using the designated paper.
(4) Preparation
• Prepare designated paper.
Note
▪ When you cannot prepare the designated paper, you cannot conduct "Adjustment of maximum density" (Procedure A or B)
at the installation. Proceed to "(d) Procedure C (Registration of target density)".
• Specify 1 type of the maximum density management paper that is used for the adjustment of the maximum density.
Note
▪ Designated paper is recommended. However, when the user assigns the paper other than the designated one, counsel
with the user and decide the paper.
▪ When the CE and the user adjust the maximum density, use the maximum density management paper that is specified in
this step.
If you use other paper, the density becomes improper.
(5) Procedure (Installation)
I-98
(a) Adjustment flow
Procedure A (b)
(Adjustment of maximum density)
Procedure B (c)
Start (Adjustment of maximum density)
NO Have you used NO

Can you prepare the your own paper setting
standard paper? or density values? *1
YES YES
Place the standard paper Load the special paper on the tray.
on the tray.
Import the paper setting and

Perform the the density value or
[Initialize Target Data] input them manually.
Perform the Perform the

[Max Density Initial Auto Adj.] [Max Density Initial Auto Adj.]
Have you used your NO

own paper as the maximum density
management paper?
YES
Finish
Did you use the standard NO
paper as the maximum density
management paper?
Place the maximum density
management paper on the tray.
YES
Measure the density by the
[Max Density Initial Adj.]
Register the measured density.
Finish Finish
Procedure C (d)
Registration of target density
*1 The target density value of your own paper must be the same as the toner adhesion quantity at the time of adjusting the density with the
designated paper.
(b) Procedure A (Adjustment of maximum density: For use of the designated paper)

Note
▪ When you cannot prepare the designated paper, you cannot conduct this procedure. Proceed to "(d) Procedure C
(Registration of target density)".
▪ Perform the Density Balance Adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the standard paper in advance.
1. Place the designated paper to use on the tray.
Note
▪ If you use the paper other than the designated paper or your own one, the density becomes improper.
▪ The target density value of your own paper must be the same as the toner adhesion quantity at the time of adjusting the
density with the designated paper.
2. Press [Max Dens. Initial Auto Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Drum Peculiarity Adj.] → [Max Density Initial Auto Adj.]
I-99
3. "Maximum Density Initial Auto Adj. screen"

Press [Initialize Target Data].
4. Pop-up screen
Select the paper that you will use from the designated paper 1 to 3, and then press [OK].

Press [Print Mode].
6. Pop-up screen
Select the tray that you placed the paper, then press [OK].
Note
▪ The paper profile of the tray is automatically switched to the specified paper profile.
Press Start on the control panel to output the color chart.
The auto adjustment result is displayed in [Current Data].
Note
▪ The [Current Data] is linked to the value of [Max Density Initial Adj.].
I-100
▪ When you conduct the [Max. Density Initial Auto Adj.], the paper profile of the tray that has been used for the auto
adjustment is switched to the specified paper profile, and it is not returned to the paper profile that has been used before
adjustment. After the adjustment, return the setting to the original.
When you configure DIPSW90-0 to "1", the paper profile is automatically returned to the paper profile that has been used
before adjustment.
(c) Procedure B (Adjustment of maximum density: When you conduct the operation configuring at the target
density value of your own paper)
The target density value has been provided with using the paper other than the designated one. In this case, you can configure the arbitrary
target density value manually or import it to configure. Including the case when you operate the multiple main bodies.
Note
▪ Perform the Density Balance Adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the standard paper in advance.
▪ The coated paper that has stable quality is recommended for the paper other than the designated one (your own paper).
▪ The target density value of the paper other than the designated paper (your own paper) must be the same as the toner
adhesion quantity at the time you match the density for the designated paper.
1. Place the standard paper on the tray.
Note
▪ If you use the paper other than the designated paper or your own one, the density becomes improper.

Press [Initialize Target Data].
4. Pop-up screen
Select the user designated paper, and press [OK].
5. "Initialize Target Data Setting screen"
I-101
Configure the arbitrary setting, then press [OK].

For details of setting items, refer to "Table 1: Table 1: Setting item."
Press [Print Mode].
7. Pop-up screen
Note
▪ The paper profile of the tray is automatically switched to the specified paper profile.
Note
before adjustment.
Table 1: Setting item
Input with numeric keys Enables to input the arbitrary target density value YMCK manually. (Adjustment range: 0 to 255 1 step = 0.01)
Export Export the current setting value to the USB memory that you connected.
Import Import the setting value that you exported to the USB memory.
Paper profile setting You can add or edit the paper profile setting.
(d) Procedure C (Registration of target density)

Note
▪ For the maximum density management paper, the designated papers are recommended. However, when the user assigns the
paper other than the designated one, counsel with the user and decide the paper.
▪ When the designated paper or your own paper is used as the maximum density management paper, this procedure is not
necessary. (Because the default target density can be used.)
▪ The target density value of your own paper must be the same as the toner adhesion quantity at the time of adjusting the
density with the designated paper.
▪ Perform the Density Balance Adjustment with the combination of Dot190 (screen) and the maximum density management
paper in advance.
1. Place the maximum density management paper on the tray.
2. Press [Max Density Initial Adj.].
I-102

Press [Print Mode].

Select the maximum density management paper. Press the start key and output the chart.

Press [Register Target Density].
Note
7. "Register Target Density screen"

Input the registeration name of the target density data.
8. Press [OK] and register (update) the target density data.
Note
▪ When you press [Cancel], the target density data is not registered (updated).
I-103

Check that the information on "Registered Data" is updated.
(6) Procedure (Replacement of consumables)

(a) Adjustment flow
Start
Place the maximum density management paper on the tray.
Perform the [Max Density Initial Auto Adj.]
Finish
(b) Procedure
1. Place the maximum density management paper on the tray.
Note
▪ If you use the paper other than the maximum density management paper, the density becomes improper.

Press [Print Mode].
4. Pop-up screen
Note
▪ The paper profile of the tray is automatically switched to the paper profile at the registration.
Note
before adjustment.
I-104
4.4.11 All Dev. Unit Replace Adj. (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)

(1) Function
Perform the batch adjustments that are required after you replace the developer or the developing unit.
On this mode, following items are selected and the automatic adjustment screen or the manual adjustment screen is displayed.
1. Toner density sensor initial automatic adjustment (automatic adjustment)
2. Gamma adjustment (automatic adjustment)
3. Color registration adjustment (automatic adjustment)
4. Density balance adjustment (manual adjustment)
(2) Usage
Use this function when you want to perform the adjustment operation efficiently after you replace the developer or the developing unit.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 All Dev. Unit Replace Adj.].
4. "Register ORU-M Replacement Unit screen"
Check the color of the developer unit that you replaced.
5. Press "Next".
6. The message "Selected unit counter reset Yes/No? " is displayed.
7. Press [Yes].
Note
▪ When you press [Yes], the counter of the selected developer is reset.
8. "Automatic Adjust screen"
Press [Start]. [TonerDenditySensorInit.Auto], [Gamma Adjustment], [Color Registration Adjustment] are adjusted automatically and the
screen moves to the [Density Balance Adjustment] screen.
9. Perform the [Density Balance Adjustment] (Refer to the User's Guide).
After all adjustments are completed, press [Next] and back to the "Drum Peculiarity Adjustment screen".
4.4.12 IDC Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

Measure the uncharged potential of the transfer belt by the IDC sensors (IDCS1), and check the sensor light volume for the maximum density
correction. (% display)
4.4.13 Toner Density Sensor Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Display the output value of the TCR sensor.
(2) Usage
Check the toner density level in the developer for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm].
3. "Sensor Output Confirm screen"
Press [02 Toner Density Sensor Output].
4. "Toner Density Sensor Output screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to select the process speed (line speed 1: 340mm/s, line speed 2: 315mm/s, line speed 3: 225 mm/s, line
speed 4: 157.5 mm/s) to check.
5. Select the color that you want to check.
6. Press [Start] to display the output value of the selected items.
7. Press [STOP] to end the check.
8. When you check another line speed, repeat steps 4 to 7.
4.4.14 Humidity/Temperature Output (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Check the output of the temperature and humidity sensor on the main body and option.
(2) Usage
Check the temperature and humidity inside the machine.
Check the detecting condition of each sensor for troubleshooting.
(3) Procedure
I-105
Press [03 Humidity/Temperature Output].

4. "Humidity/Temperature Output screen"
Press [Start] to display the humidity and the temperature value of the following items.
• Humidity and Temperature sensor 1: Temp/humidity sensor/1 (TEM/HUM1)
• Temperature-humidity sensor 2: Temp humidity sensor/2 (TEM/HUM2)
• Fusing top middle temperature sensor: TH1
• Fusing top edge temperature sensor: TH2
• Fusing top edge end temperature sensor: TH3
• Fusing bottom middle temperature sensor: TH5
• Fusing bottom edge temperature: TH4
5. Press [STOP] to end the check.
4.4.15 1st Trans. Resistance Meas. (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Displays the measured analog value (v) of the voltage that is applied to the 1st transfer roller.
(2) Usage
• Check the output value when the image trouble occurred because of the poor transfer to handle the trouble.
• When the value is 7,000 or more, the cause possibly be the error of the contact or the pressure.
(3) Procedure
Press [04 1st Trans. Resistance Meas.].
4. "1st Trans. Resistance Measurement screen"
Select the process speed (line speed 1: 340mm/s, line speed 2: 315mm/s, line speed 3: 225 mm/s, line speed 4: 157.5 mm/s) that you
want to check.
5. Press [Start] to display the output value of the selected items.
6. When you check another line speed, repeat step 4 and 5.
4.4.16 2nd Trans. Resistance Meas. (Sensor Output Confirm)

(1) Function
Displays the measured analog value (-v) of the voltage which is applied to the 2nd transfer roller/Up.
(2) Usage
• Check the output value when the image trouble occurred because of the poor transfer to handle the trouble.
• When the value is 7,500 or more, the cause possibly be the error of the contact or the pressure.
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Sensor Output Confirm]
Press [05 2nd Trans. Resistance Meas.].
4. "2nd Transfer Resistance Measurement screen"
Press [Start] to display the output value.
4.4.17 Background Margin Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change potential difference between the charging potential and the developing bias.
• Image background: Increase the covered margin.
• White spot image, carrier damages to the drum and blade: Decrease the covered margin.
Note
▪ Do not perform this adjustment when there is no problem. Unnecessary adjustment possibly cause an image failure (image
background, white spot image) or damages to the drum and the cleaning blade.
▪ There are several adjustment to reduce the image background. As a priority of the adjustment, adjust in the following order.
1) Develop AC Frequency
2) Covered Margin Fine Adjustment
3) Toner Density Fine Adjustment
▪ To change the covered margin, conduct the gamma automatic adjustment after you change the setting. (Refer to I.4.4.6
Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.) )
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the image background, white spots image, or the carrier scattering occurs.
(3) Procedure
I-106
Press [04 Process Fine Adjustment].

3. "Process Fine Adjustment Menu screen"
Press [01 Background Margin Fine Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Background Margin Fine Adj.]
4. "Background Margin Fine Adjustment screen"
Select the color(s) you want to adjust and enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons, and press [SET].
Adjustment range: -5 (carrier scattering, white spot image that is caused by carrier prevention) to +5 (image background prevention)
1 step = 10V
Note
▪ Take care that carrier scattering, white spot image that is caused by carrier prevention and the image background
prevention are trade-off. When either of them is improved, the other is worsened.
5. Press [Default] to restore the default settings.
4.4.18 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the developing AC bias.
• Up the developing AC bias: Improve the developing ability.
• Down the developing AC bias: Reduce the carrier scattering.
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the noisy image, the white spots image, or the low developing ability occurs.
Note
▪ After you change the configuration value, conduct the auto gamma adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(Drum Peculiarity Adj.) )
(3) Procedure
Press [02 Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.]
4. "Develop AC Bias Fine Adj. screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (noisy image prevention) to +5 (improve developing ability)
1 step = Negative side: 40V, Positive side: 80V
4.4.19 Develop AC Frequency (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change frequency of the developing AC bias to inhibit the image background, graininess, or the darker at the trailing edge of the paper.
(2) Usage
When the image background and graininess get worse, increase the frequency of the developing AC bias for the improvement.
When the darker at the trailing edge of the paper get worse, lower frequency of the developing AC bias for the improvement.
Note
▪ Take care that "image background, graininess" and "the darker at trailing edge of the paper" are trade-off. When either of them
is improved, the other is worsened.
▪ After you change the configuration value, conduct the auto gamma adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment
(Drum Peculiarity Adj.) )
(3) Procedure
Press [03 Develop AC Frequency].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Develop AC Frequency]
4. "Develop AC Frequency screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (improve reproducibility of outline characters on a colored background) to +5 (image background prevention)
1 step = 0.4kHz
4.4.20 Toner Density Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
Change the TCR sensor control voltage.
I-107
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the image background, toner scattering, carrier scattering, or the white spot from carrier occurs.
Note
▪ To reflect the change immediately, conduct the toner refresh mode (Machine Screen - Adjustment - Execute Adjust Operation)
and the gamma automatic adjustment. (Refer to I.4.4.6 Gamma Automatic Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.) )
(3) Procedure
Press [04 Toner Density Fine Adj.].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Process Fine Adjustment] → [Toner Density Fine Adj.]
4. "Toner Density Fine Adj. screen"
Adjustment range: -5 (image background, toner scattering prevention) to +5 (carrier scattering, white spot from carrier prevention)
1 step = 0.3%
4.4.21 Fusing Temperature Fine Adj. (Process Fine Adjustment)

(1) Function
You can perform the fine adjustment for the fusing temperature and the control temperature of the machine.
(2) Usage
Change the fusing temperature according to the paper type or the installation environment of the machine. As the result, the fusing quality is
improved or the paper curl is reduced.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Fusing Temperature Fine Adj.].
4. "Fusing Temperature Fine Adjustment screen"
Select the temperature that you want to perform the setting for the top fusing belt or the lower fusing roller.
Temperature of the top fusing belt: -15°C, -10°C, -5°C, 0°C, +5°C, +10°C
Temperature of the lower fusing roller: -15°C, -10°C, -5°C, 0°C, +5°C, +10°C, +15°C, +20°C
Note
▪ Basically, change the temperature of the fusing belt/up
▪ When you do not want to change the gloss much, mainly change the temperature of the fusing roller/Lw.
▪ When you want to reduce the paper curl, decrease the temperature of the top fusing belt.
▪ When the image side is convexed, increase the temperature of the lower fusing roller. When the image side is concaved,
decrease the temperature of the lower fusing roller.
5. Press [OK].
4.4.22 Drum Small Rotation Interval (Interval/Quantity Adj.)

(1) Function
Change interval of the low humidity environment correction control (rotates drums periodically).
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when image failures caused by a uneven drum charging potential (that occurs easily with the low humidity) occurs.
(3) Procedure
Press [05 Interval/Quantity Adj.].
3. "Interval/Quantity Adj. Menu screen"
Press [01 Drum Small Rotation Interval].
[Service Mode] → [Process Adjustment] → [Interval/Quantity Adj.] → [Drum Small Rotation Interval]
4. "Drum Small Rotation Interval screen"
Enter the adjustment value with the numeric buttons and press [SET].
Adjustment range: +1 to +5
1 step = 1 minute
I-108
4.4.23 Recall Standard Data

(1) Function
Reset the adjustment values of the process adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial data.
Note
▪ Items that can be recalled
▪ 1st Transfer Manual Adj.
▪ 2nd Transfer Manual Adj.
▪ Sep. Current Manual Adj.
▪ Max Density Initial Adj.
▪ Background Margin Fine Adj.
▪ Develop AC Bias Fine Adj.
▪ Develop AC Frequency
▪ Toner Density Fine Adj.
▪ Fusing Temperature Fine Adj.
▪ Drum Small Rotation Interval
(2) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the change by CE.
(3) Procedure
Press [06 Recall Standard Data].
Note
▪ When you select [Installation initial data], each configuration value returns to the adjustment values stored when the code
4.5 System setting
4.5.1 Software DIPSW setting procedures
(1) Outline
Configure the software DIPSW.
Note
▪ Do not change any switch that is not described in the service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 System Setting].
2. "System Setting Menu screen"
Press [01 Software DIPSW Setting].
[Service Mode] → [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting]
3. "Software switch setting mode screen"
Press [▲] / [▼] or numeric buttons after you press the "DIPSW number" and "Bit number" buttons.
4. Press [On (1)] or [Off (0)] to configure the selected bit number ON/OFF.
(3) Software DIPSW setting screen
[1]
[2] [3] [4] [5]
I-109
[1] DIPSW data (indicates the 8bit values of the selected [2] DIPSW number
DIPSW numbers in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.)
[3] Bit number (0 to 7) [4] Bit data: 1:ON, 0:OFF
[5] Numeric buttons -
4.5.2 Software DIPSW setting list (1 to 50)

(1) Software DIPSW setting list (1 to 10)
DIPSW Bit Function Set value Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
1 0 [Expert Adjustment] button in the User screen • 0: Not display 0 0 0
• 1: Display
1 1 Note display when the fusing JAM occurs • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Displays the handling for the fusing JAM on • 1: Enabled
"Paper Setting" screen - [Change IndividualSet].
To enable this setting, enable the DIPSW1-0
Expert adjustment user screen display.
1 2 Print stop method after the display of the toner • Stops after you eject the 1 1 1
3 supply or the waste toner full. (Decide the copier paper in the machine: 1-3=0, 0 0 0
operation when the machine detects no toner or 1-2=0
the waste toner full.) • Stops at a break between
the copy set: 1-3=0, 1-2=1
• Stops at the end of the
current job: 1-3=1, 1-2=0
• Does not stop: 1-3=1, 1-2=1
1 4 Print prohibition when the maintenance count is • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
reached • 1: Enabled
1 5 Number of the allowed print quantity after the • 1,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0, 0 0 0
6 machine reaches the maintenance count 1-5=0 0 0 0
• 2,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=0,
7 1-5=1 0 0 0
• 3,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1,
1-5=0
• 4,000Print: 1-7=0, 1-6=1,
1-5=1
• 5,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0,
1-5=0
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=0,
1-5=1
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1,
1-5=0
• 1,000Print: 1-7=1, 1-6=1,
1-5=1
2 0 Hard disk drive connection recognition (Default • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
settings for C3080, C3070, C3070L: 1, for • 1: Enabled (C3080P, (C3080P, (C3080P,
C3080P, C83hc, C3070P, C73hc: 0) C83hc, C83hc, C83hc,
C3070P, C3070P, C3070P,
C73hc) C73hc) C73hc)
1 (C3080, 1 (C3080, 1 (C3080,
C3070, C3070, C3070,
C3070L) C3070L) C3070L)
2 1 Toner amount save level setting (for the image • 0: Normal 0 0 0
area) • 1: Strong
· Function: Switches the control level for the
image tag area when you select [ON] for "Paper
Setting" - "Expert Adjustment" - "Toner Amount
Save". When you select "1" on this setting, the
limit becomes stronger.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when you
select [ON] for "Toner Amount Save" but the
paper wrap error is not improved well.
Note
· Change only DIPSW2-2 but not this setting
when you want to reduce the effect on the
color reproduction of the image area.
2 2 Toner amount save level setting (for the text or • 0: Normal 0 0 0
the graphic area) • 1: Strong
I-110
Function: Switches the control level for the text

or the graphic area when you select [ON] for
"Paper Setting" - "Expert Adjustment" - "Toner
Amount Save". When you select "1" on this
setting, the limit becomes stronger.
select [ON] for "Toner Amount Save" but the
paper wrap error is not improved well.
Note
· Change this setting in priority to DIPSW2-1.
2 3 Selection of the degree of the color text blur • 0: Normal 0 0 0
prevention (for image area) • 1: Strong
· Function: Switches the control level when
"Text, Graphics, Image" of "Color Text Blur
Prevention" becomes active for the driver setting
on the printer output. The setting switches the
control level for the image tag area. When you
select "1" on this setting, the limit becomes
stronger. However, select "Text, Graphics,
Image" to enable "Color Text Blur Prevention".
· Usage: Use this function when you activate
"Color Text Blur Prevention" with "Text, Graphics,
Image" is selected but the toner spillage of the
image range (high contrast pattern in a graphic)
is not improved well. To improve the smudge by
the toner spillage, select "1" on this setting.
2 4 Selection of the degree of the color text blur • 0: Normal 0 0 0
prevention (for text or graphic area) • 1: Strong
· Function: Switches the control level when "ON"
is selected on "Text, Graphics" of "Color Text Blur
Prevention" for the driver setting on the printer
output. When you select "1" on this setting, the
limit becomes stronger.
· Usage: Use this function when you activate
"Text, Graphics, Image" or "Text, Graphics" of
"Color Text Blur Prevention" but the toner spillage
is not improved well. The smudge by the toner
spillage on the thin lines is more improved
likewise the character area. Select "1" on this
setting to improve the smudge by the toner
spillage in the area.
2 5 Density balance 255 value correction • 0: ON 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW configures whether to • 1: OFF
correct the density balance of the maximum
density when the Density Balance Adjustment is
conducted.
<For DIPSW2-5=0>
-Screen of Dot190, Dot175, Dot150: Maximum
density is the correction target
-Other screens: Maximum density is out of the
correction target
<For DIPSW2-5=1>
-All screens: Maximum density is out of the
correction target
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when you do
not want to perform the Density Balance
Adjustment in the maximum density area.
2 6 Bar code adding function to the density balance • 0: Not print 0 0 0
correction chart (i1iSis XL, i1Pro, FD-9, FD-5BT) • 1: Print
· Function: Prints the bar codes depending on
values which are printed in the density valance
correction chart.
· Usage: You can enter the value on the i1iSis
XL, i1Pro, FD-9 or FD-5BT by bar cords.
2 7 Polygon motor rotation speed switchover • 0: Speed when the print 0 0 0
Polygon motor rotation speed switchover is completes
available to reduce the operation sound during • 1: 2/3 speed
idling.
The default setting keeps the speed of the
previous print.
3 0 PF Air-blow adjustment • 0: Not display the air-blow 0 0 0
Specify the setting to "1" so that it enables the air adjustment button
blow adjustment without feeding sheets when a • 1: Display the air-blow
jam occurs due to the paper feed from PF. adjustment button
I-111
(When confirming how much the paper is floated

and performing the air-blow adjustment in the halt
condition after a jam)
· Procedure
On the Machine Screen, select [Adjustment] -
[PFU Air Assist Adjustment] to select the tray that
needs the adjustment.
Select [Manual].
By pressing [Start] on the screen that is shown,
the air starts blowing. Then, change each setting
as needed.
Press [Stop] or [Close] when the air level is
proper.
· Adjustable items
Lead Edge Air Level Setting (Following the
setting changes, the air level changes)
Side Air Level Setting (Following the
configuration changes, the air level changes)
(When performing the air-blow adjustment
without canceling the job after cleaning the jam)
· Procedure
After you clean the JAM, press "Paper Setting"
on the screen where "Press [Start] to restart is
shown..
Select the tray that needs the adjustment and
select [Change Setting] - [Air-blow].
Change each setting as needed and press [OK].
Note
· Blow-out of the air cannot be checked.
· Adjustable items
Lead Edge Air Level Setting
Side Air Level Setting
3 1 Malfunction code latch (C1540 to 1562, C3501 to • 0: Latch released 0 0 0
3912, 3917) • 1: Latched
3 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 5 Release the capacity limit of FS-532 and OT-510 • 0: The specified sensor 0 0 0
main tray according to the mode,
· Function: Switches the maximum capacity of paper size, paper type,
FS-532/OT-510 main tray. paper weight and the
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you installation of SD-510
want to increase the maximum capacity of detects the tray full.
FS-532/OT-510 main tray. • 1: 4,000 sheets sensor
Note (PS19) detects the tray full.
· The tray breaks when the machine loads (When the SD-510 is
more papers than the specification. installed, 3,000 sheets
· For the relation with DIPSW15-3/4, refer to sensor (PS16) detects the
I.4.5.19 Release the capacity limit of FS-532 or tray full. )
OT-510 main tray and LS-506 stacker tray.
3 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
3 7 Carrying over the job for next day • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Switch the function of carrying over the job for • 1: Disabled
next day.
4 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4 1 Expansion of the maximum size for the FS-531 • 0: Maximum size for paper 0 0 0
main tray paper exit exit 320 mm × 458 mm
· Function: Expands the maximum size for the • 1: Maximum size for paper
FS-531 main tray paper exit from 320 mm × 458 exit 330 mm × 470 mm
mm to 330 mm × 470 mm.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting to expand the
maximum size for the FS-531 main tray paper
exit.
Note
· It is not guaranteed to exit to the main tray
paper exit (320 mm × 458 mm or larger).
I-112
· When you select "1" on this setting, select

"0"(Disabled) on DIPSW20-0.
· Be sure to use the paper (324 mm × 470 mm
or smaller) because the paper (324 mm or
longer in the main scan direction) causes a
paper jam.
· The thin paper (320 mm × 458 mm or larger)
drops off from the FS-531 main tray.
· The paper (320 mm × 458 mm or larger)
cannot be offset.
4 2 - • 0: - 0 1 0
• 1: -
4 3 - • 0: - 0 0 1
• 1: -
4 4 EQUIOS linkage • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Notifies to the controller whether the • 1: Enabled
job is a sample print job or a job that is specified
to delete after output.
· Usage: Configure to "1" to save the confirmed
print job temporarily that is sent from EQUIOS.
Notification to EQUIOS when a job is output is
performed as follows.
- [Sample Output]: Nothing is noted to EQUIOS.
- [Output]: Notes that the print is performed, and
notes the total record of printing and sample
output.
- [With Job Delete]: Notes that the job has
completed, and notes the printing record (not the
job deletion).
Note
· The memory switch number 113 of the
controller must be configured to
"1" (Enabled).
4 5 APS when change magnification • 0: Enabled 0 1 0
• 1: Disabled
4 6 Operation when stores the maximum hold job (for • 0: Not deleted automatically 0 0 0
the job list screen) • 1: Deleted automatically
· Function: This DIPSW configures the operation
of when the stored hold job has reached the
maximum number. When the stored hold job has
reached the maximum number, you cannot save
the new job. In this case, normally, you need to
delete the unnecessary jobs manually. When this
setting is "1", the oldest job is automatically
deleted.
· Usage: When you save the new job when the
stored hold job reaches the maximum number: If
you want to delete the oldest job automatically,
change this setting to "1".
Note
· This DIPSW changes the operation of when
you conduct the following operation in the job
list screen.
- [Job Ticket] - [New Store]
- [Page Edit] - [New Store]
- [Comb.]
- [Copy]
· When you save the new job from the PC,
configure the operation with DIPSW23-1.
4 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
5 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
5 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
5 2 Auto speed down mode • 0: Auto 0 0 0
· Function: When the power becomes active, • 1: Restrict
switches the control that reduces the process
speed by 1 step under the low temperature and
the humidity environment. The target is the speed
I-113
down that is executed to supply a gap of the

power source capacity. The power source
capacity is required in the 2nd transfer section.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you do
not execute the speed down in the condition.
Note
· When this setting is selected to "1", color
change can be occur because of the transfer
trouble as a side effect.
5 3 Fusing unit auto recognition • 0: Does not recognize 0 0 0
· Function: Automatically recognizes the three automatically
types of fusing unit (fusing unit A, fusing unit B, • 1: Recognize automatically
and envelope fusing unit) without entering ORU-
M.
· Usage: When you want to execute the
automatic detection for replacing the fusing unit
because of scratches on the fusing edge, select
"1" on this setting.
Note
For this function, disable to replace the fusing
unit by ORU-M. (Because it cannot be reset as
a replacement part at the end of replacing
operation)
5 4 Fusing jam blank paper cleaning • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
To clean the toner on the fusing belt, a screen to • 1: Disabled
select whether to feed the blank paper or not
appears on the touch panel at printing after the
fusing related jam process.
The blank paper is output to the tray other than
during printing.
5 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
5 6 Life message display timing of the filter box • 0: 23,200,000 counts: near 0 0 0
· Function: Decides the timing that the near life life, 24,000,000 counts: life
and the life reaching of the filter box are • 1: 24,000,000 counts: near
displayed on the touch panel. life, 24,800,000 counts: life
· Usage: Use this function when you delay the
display timing for the near life message and the
life message depending on the use condition of
the main body. Count up: Counts 7 to 460 for 1
side depending on the condition.
5 7 Printing at reaching life of the filter box • 0: Allow 0 0 0
• 1: Restrict
6 0 Faulty part isolation: FD-fold, punch function • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
6 1 Faulty part isolation: FD main tray paper exit • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
6 2 Faulty part isolation: FD post insert function • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
6 3 Faulty part isolation: FS staple function • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
6 4 Faulty part isolation: FS main tray paper exit • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
6 5 Faulty part isolation: FS • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
6 6 Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit (1st • 0: Normal 0 0 0
tandem) • 1: Unusable
6 7 Faulty part isolation: LS main tray paper exit (2nd • 0: Normal 0 0 0
tandem) • 1: Unusable
7 0 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 saddle • 0: Normal 0 0 0
stitch • 1: Unusable
7 1 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 multi center • 0: Normal 0 0 0
fold • 1: Unusable
7 2 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 multi tri-fold • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
7 3 Faulty part isolation: SD-506, SD-513 trimming • 0: Normal 0 0 0
I-114
• 1: Unusable
7 4 Faulty part isolation: SD-506 straight conveyance • 0: Normal 0 0 0
and sub tray paper exit, SD-513 straight • 1: Unusable
conveyance
7 5 Faulty part isolation: PB cover paper insertion • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
7 6 Faulty part isolation: PB binder function • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
7 7 Faulty part isolation: PB • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
8 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
8 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
8 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
8 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
8 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
8 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
8 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
8 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
9 0 Change the edge process of the printer image • Text and line: 9-1=0, 9-0=0 0 0 0
1 · Function: Polishes the edge of the printer • Text and line (Simple 0 0 0
image whose image resolution is configured to process): 9-1=0, 9-0=1
600 dpi. • Text, line, and image: 9-1=1,
· Usage: Change this setting when you want to 9-0=0
change the edge process of the 600 dpi printer • Text, line, and image: 9-1=1,
image. Select "DIPSW9-1=0, 9-0=1
DIPSW9-0=1(Simple process)" when you want to
avoid a side effect, which is cutting off the edge.
9 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
9 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
9 4 Copy quantity limit • 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0, 9-4=0: 0 0 0
5 No limit 0 0 0
• 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=0, 9-4=1:
6 1 sheet 0 0 0
7 • 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1, 9-4=0: 0 0 0
3 sheets
• 9-7=0, 9-6=0, 9-5=1, 9-4=1:
5 sheets
• 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0, 9-4=0:
9 sheets
• 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=0, 9-4=1:
10 sheets
• 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1, 9-4=0:
20 sheets
• 9-7=0, 9-6=1, 9-5=1, 9-4=1:
30 sheets
• 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0, 9-4=0:
50 sheets
• 9-7=1, 9-6=0, 9-5=0, 9-4=1:
99 sheets
• Others: No limit
10 0 Banner setting • 0: Prohibit the banner size 1 1 1
· Function: Decides whether to enable the banner setting of bypass tray
size setting when the bypass tray is used. • 1: Allow the banner size
setting of bypass tray
I-115
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when you use

a banner size with the bypass tray. The setting of
"1" enables you to input the custom banner size
to the tray setting.
Note
· For the conditions and the settings of
banner printings, refer to I.4.5.12 Restrictions
on banner print.
10 1 Hard disk image memory • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
• 1: Enabled
10 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
10 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
10 4 Display the finisher name on the "MACHINE" • 0: Not display 0 0 0
screen. • 1: Display
· Function: In the "MACHINE" screen in the user
mode, switches names of finisher options that are
displayed.
· Usage: To clear option types in the "MACHINE"
screen, use this function when you install many
finisher options.
10 5 Custom size tolerance setting • 0: ± 2 mm 0 0 0
• 1: ± 10mm
10 6 Image rotation for the custom size paper and • 0: Rotate 0 0 0
large size paper • 1: Not rotate
10 7 Ticket edition reset confirm screen • 0: Not display 0 0 0
· Function: This function switches to display the • 1: Display
confirmation pop-up screen or not, when you
push the "Cancel" button in the ticket edit and the
page edit.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you
display the confirmation pop-up screen for the
prevention of improper operations.

Japan Inch Metric
11 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
11 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
11 2 Release the limitation for SD-506, SD-513 multi • 0: Limited 0 0 0
half-fold • 1: Not Limited (Up to 50
Note sheets)
· If "1" is selected for this setting, a jam or
folding error could occur.
11 3 Automatic restart of the job under suspension • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
11 4 Switch of the message on the malfunction code • 0: Please turn on power 0 0 0
screen again
· Function: Switches the message when the • 1: Please call service
malfunction code occurs.
· Usage: You can recover some malfunction
codes by the reboot of the power, so the
message "Please turn on power again" is
displayed on the default setting. Select "1" to let
the user call service on any malfunction codes.
11 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
11 6 Automatic paper supply • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
11 7 Display Jam Code on the touch panel • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
• 1: Enabled
I-116
12 0 Counter of Each Copy Mode • 0: No.257 to No.265 Not 0 0 0

display the count per color
mode
• 1: No.257 to No.265 Display
the count per color mode
12 1 OFF setting of auto low power and auto shut off • 0: One is possible 0 0 0
• 1: Both are possible
12 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
12 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
12 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
12 5 Auto Shut OFF Europe mode • 0: OFF 0 0 0
· Function: Switch whether conduct auto shut-off • 1: Without low power, Auto
without the auto low power on [Utility] → [02 User Shut OFF 240min.
Setting] → [01 System Setting] → [07 Power
Save Setting] → [01 Power Save Function
Setting].
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when you want
to shut-off automatically in 240 minutes without
auto low power.
12 6 Erratic pagination detection notification • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Select 0 on this setting to detect the erratic • 1: Disabled
pagination during the job and the print operation
is stopped. The following patterns can be
detected; page missing, page switching, page
disorder, page overlapping, and the miss-inserted
number of the blank page.
12 7 Konica Minolta logo when the power switch • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
activates • 1: Disabled
13 0 Faulty part isolation: Multi punch function (GP) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
13 1 Faulty part isolation: PB-503 subsequent stage • 0: Normal 0 0 0
FNS • 1: Unusable
13 2 Faulty part isolation: RU-518 humidification • 0: Normal 0 0 0
function • 1: Unusable
13 3 Faulty part isolation: RU-518 color sensor unit • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
13 4 Faulty part isolation: GP-502 ring bind unit • 0: Usable 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
13 5 Switch of the destination of the unnecessary • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
paper exit • 1: Enabled
· Function: When this setting is changed to "1",
outputs any waste paper (sample print, AE (AES)
adjustment chart, waste tab) in a sub tray that is
the nearest to the main body and available.
· Usage: When the machine outputs the inside
paper in a sub tray, this function outputs and
classifies the waste paper into the other tray.
13 6 Black-and-white quality adjustment of Network • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
scanner • 1: Enabled
The purpose of this setting is to improve the
gradation of the black-and-white 2-value scan.
When you select "1" on this setting, the error
diffusion operation is performed in the black-and-
white mode of the Network scanner. Also,
"Quality Adjustment" in "Scan Settings" can be
adjusted.
Note
· This setting is enabled only when the IC-605
is connected.
13 7 Staple jam recovery operation setting • 0: Page recovery 0 0 0
When the staple jam in the finisher occurs, the • 1: Copy recovery
operator removes the paper remaining inside the
stacker. Then the missing pages or uneven
stapling occurs. To prevent the missing pages or
I-117
uneven stapling, select "1" on this setting to

display an additional message for the jam
cleaning.
14 0 Recall the previous job when you reserve the • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
next job • 1: Enabled
The setting condition for the copy can be kept for
the next job by "Pre-Job Recall."
14 1 Utility counter display switchover • 0: Normal display 0 0 0
Function: Counts paper size only in 2 sections. • 1: Displays at A4/8.5 x 11
· A4/8.5 x 11 Like: 1 count Like/ A3/11 x 17 Like
· A3/11 x 17 Like: 2 counts
· Custom size: Switches at the threshold value of
Inf.2 (default: 419.9 mm)
14 2 Printer 1200dpi compression mode • Standard (image area 0 0 0
3 Use this mode when the image deterioration resolution priority): 14-3=0, 1 1 1
occurs on the border of the image area or the 14-2=0 (Controller image
jaggy occurs on the outlines of the letters or lines compression setting: Same
of the image area. as "Resolution Priority")
Configure to the standard compression (image • Anti-aliasing compression
area resolution priority): 14-3=0, 14-2=0, so that (image area resolution
the image area is also processed in 1200dpi. priority): 14-3=0, 14-2=1
Note • Standard (image area
· This setting is associated with "Utility" - gradation priority): 14-3=1,
"Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" - 14-2=0 (Controller image
"Expert Adjustment"- "Image Quality Setting compression setting: Same
"- ""06 Controller Image Compression." as "Gradation Priority")
• Anti-aliasing compression
(image area gradation
priority): 14-3=1, 14-2=1
14 4 For Copitrak • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Configure to 1 when you connect the billing • 1: Enabled
management device from Copitrak. The interface
specification is as follows.
· RS232C
· Baud rate 9600
· Bits 8
· No parity
· No flow control
14 5 Standard of B type paper • 0: JIS 0 0 1
Note • 1: ISO
· Regardless of this DIPSW setting, the
original size is always JIS series.
14 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
14 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
15 0 ORU-M operator release setting • 0: ORU-M unavailable 0 0 0
• 1: ORU-M available
15 1 Switch of the parts counter display on the counter • 0: Display parts counter 0 0 0
list. • 1: Not display parts counter
Function: Disables the display of the parts
counter on the counter list.
Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you do
not want users to output the parts counter
information.
15 2 Display setting of the Details Counter and the • 0: Display (DIPSW50-0/1 1 0 0
icon (Refer to the DIPSW50-0, 1 as well) configures the display target)
· Function: This DIPSW switches the display of • 1: Not display
the following items.
-Details Counter (photo conductor life (YMCK),
developer life (YMCK))
-Material icon
-Periodical check icon
· Usage: Configure this setting to "1" when you
do not want to display all of the items.
Note
· When this setting is "0", DIPSW50-0, 1
configures the display of each item.
I-118
15 3 Switch the alarm stop timing of the finishing • Stops immediately after the 0 0 0
4 option alarm detection: 15-4=0, 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the alarm stop timing of the 15-3=0
finishing option. • Stops at a break between
<Example> the set after the alarm
- The paper exit tray is full. detection: 15-4=0, 15-3=1
- The punch scraps box is full or not installed. • The alarm stop is invalid:
- The trimmer scraps box is full or not installed. 15-4=1, 15-3=0
· Usage: Change this setting when you want the • The alarm stop is invalid:
machine not to stop immediately after the alarm 15-4=1, 15-3=1
detection.
Note
· The tray breaks when the machine loads
more papers than the specification.
· For the relation with DIPSW3-5, 29-1, refer to
I.4.5.19 Release the capacity limit of FS-532 or
OT-510 main tray and LS-506 stacker tray.
15 5 CS Remote Care recognition • 0: Disabled 0 1 0
• 1: Enabled
15 6 Address reset after the scan • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
15 7 IP scanner allow setting without a key counter • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
This setting allows to use the scanning function • 1: Allow
without key counter inserted.
16 0 Scanner magnification setting • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
• 1: Enabled
16 1 Color density control (periodical control) switching • 0: Not perform 0 0 0
when Fiery controller calibration is performed • 1: Perform
· Function: Switches whether to perform the
periodic adjustment of color density control
before output of the chart of the Fiery controller
calibration.
· Usage: When the color density control is used,
performing the control before Fiery calibration is
necessary. Select "1" on this setting to perform
the color density control before the Fiery
calibration automatically.
Note
When [ON] is selected to [Periodical Adj.
Execution] for the color density control, this
DIPSW is valid.
16 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
16 3 Count of the key counter in printer mode • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Decide whether to count the printer • 1: Enabled
output on the key counter or not when you use
the key counter.
· Usage: To count on the key counter, select "1"
in this setting.
16 4 Utility menu mode installation date display • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1: Disabled
16 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
16 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
16 7 ORU-M developing unit counter setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
User can enter the life counter (distance and the • 1: Enabled
quantity) of the developing unit.
17 0 Faulty part isolation: PI-502 function (FS-532) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
17 1 Faulty part isolation: SD-510 fold & staple, multi • 0: Normal 0 0 0
half fold, Multi tri-fold function • 1: Unusable
17 2 Image leading edge erase setting mode • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: 2 functions are included. • 1: Disabled
(1) Switch the default value of the leading edge
erase amount of the test pattern.
- "0": 10 mm
- "1": 0 mm
I-119
(2) Configure the reset amount of [Paper Setting]

- [Process Adjustment] - [Lead Edge Erase
Quantity].
- "0": 0 to 8 mm (Setting value of IO-87 in IO
check mode)
- "1": 0 mm
· Usage: When you configure the default value of
the leading edge erase amount of the test pattern
to 0 mm, configure this setting to "1".
Note
· When this setting is configured to "0",
configure the value of the [Lead Edge Erase
Quantity] by IO check mode: IO-87.
(Recommended value: 7 mm)
· The [Lead Edge Erase Quantity] is not
applied to the paper whose weight is 136 g/m2
or more.
· The lead edge erase quantity of the test
pattern is not applied to number 16, 33, 40, 49,
54, 75, 76, and 77.
17 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
17 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
17 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
17 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
17 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
18 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray/1 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
18 1 Faulty part isolation: Tray/2 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
18 2 Paper weight limit (136 g/m2 or more) switching • 0: Limited paper weight 0 0 0
when the lead edge erase quantity is configured (under 136 g/m2)
· Function: Makes to set the lead edge erase • 1: Unlimited paper weight
quantity for the thick paper whose weight is 136
g/m2 or more.
· Usage: Select "1" for DIPSW18-2 when a fusing
separation error occurs at the thick paper whose
weight is 136 g/m2 or more.
18 3 Faulty part isolation: LU tray • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
18 4 Print during dehumidification heater temperature • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
control (LU and PF) • 1: Allow
· Function: Select whether to print or not during
the dehumidification operation when the
dehumidification is attached to the LU or PF.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting so that the
printing becomes available when the machine
does not accept the printing during the
dehumidification.
Note
· When you select "1" on this setting under
the high-humidity condition, the no feed jam
easily occurs.
18 5 Faulty part isolation: FS center folding, saddle • 0: Normal 0 0 0
stitch • 1: Unusable
18 6 Faulty part isolation: PI • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
18 7 Faulty part isolation: HDD • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
19 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
19 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-120
19 2 Stamp print outside the original image for printer • 0: Disabled 0 0 0

job • 1: Enabled
· Function:This DIPSW changes the print
position and the print method of the printer job
stamp. (Stamp: Date/Time, Page Number, Set
Numbering)
<For DIPSW19-2=0>
· Date/Time, Page Number
- Print position: Based on paper (when the crop
mark is not in use), based on crop mark (when
the crop mark is in use)
- Print method: Overwrite method
· Set Numbering
- Print position: Based on original
- Print method: Overlay method
<For DIPSW19-2=1>
· Date/Time, Page Number, Set Numbering
- Print position: Based on paper
- Print method: Overwrite method
· Usage: To print the stamp outside the original
image, change this setting to "1".
19 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
19 4 Switch alignment speed of the SD-513 FD • 0: Normal Control 0 0 0
alignment claw • 1: Low speed control
Function: Switches the alignment speed of the
FD alignment claw (fold alignment claw).
∙ Usage: Select "1" when the FD alignment claw
mark is left at the trail edge (fore edge) side in the
paper exit direction of fold & staple, half-fold, or
tri-fold output.
Note
∙ When "1" is selected, the productivity of fold
& staple, half-fold, or tri-fold (simplex print)
are lowered.
19 5 Faulty part isolation: PK • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
19 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
19 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
20 0 Expansion of the maximum size for the FS-612 • 0: Maximum size for paper 0 0 0
main tray paper exit exit 320 mm × 458 mm
· Function: Expands the maximum size for the • 1: Maximum size for paper
FS-612 main tray paper exit from 320 mm × 458 exit 331 mm × 487 mm
mm to 331 mm × 487 mm.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting to expand the
maximum size for the FS-612 main tray paper
exit.
Note
· It is not guaranteed to exit to the main tray
paper exit (320 mm × 458 mm or larger).
· When you select "1" on this setting, select
"0"(Disabled) on DIPSW4-1.
· Be sure to use the paper (324 mm × 470 mm
or smaller) because the paper (324 mm or
longer in the main scan direction) causes a
paper jam.
· The thin paper (320 mm × 458 mm or larger)
drops off from the FS-531 main tray.
· The paper (320 mm × 458 mm or larger)
cannot be offset.
20 1 Image scanning area with image shift • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Original priority
20 2 Total page number standard in stamp mode • 0: Based on original 0 0 0
• 1: Based on transfer paper
20 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
20 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-121
20 5 Curl adjustment setting after auto reset • 0: Not reset 0 0 0

Reset the value of [Paper Setting] - [Curl • 1: Reset
Adjustment] to "0" at the auto reset and configure
whether to reset the humidifier setting to default
or not.
Note
· The default (ON or OFF) of the humidifier
setting differs depending on the paper type
and the paper weight.
20 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
20 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
21 0 PB perfect binding limit number switchover • 0: Fine, Color, Coated table 0 0 0
• 1: Plain table
21 1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
21 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
21 3 301 g/m2 to 350 g/m2 paper exit with its face up • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
• 1: Allow
21 4 SD-510 paper exit tray book feed amount • 0: Auto 0 0 0
· Function: When this setting is change to "1", • 1: 1 copy output
outputs the bundle of papers by 1 copy and do
not store them on the paper exit tray.
· Usage: Use this function for a user who has a
device that conveys the books by 1 copy to the
following procedure. Change this setting to "1"
when the paper exit tray belt is connected to the
paper exit opening and conveys a book.
21 5 Enable or disable the FS-532 overlap • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
conveyance of the 92 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 papers. • 1: Enabled
· Function: For the paper overlap conveyance of
FS-532, switches whether to apply the
conveyance for thick papers or not. In the status
of the factory default, the overlap conveyance of
the thick paper is not executed in order to reduce
the switch back sound.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to increase
the productivity of the paper between 92 g/m2 to
216 g/m2 in the staple mode or the punch staple
mode.
21 6 Number of PK-522 punch holes • 2 holes: 21-6=0, 21-7=0 0 1 0
7 Note • 2/3 holes: 21-6=1, 21-7=0 0 0 1
· The number of punch holes is configured • 2/4 holes (Europe): 21-6=0,
automatically before the shipment from the 21-7=1
factory so that there is no need to change it in • 4 holes (Sweden): 21-6=1,
the field. However, change the number in the 21-7=1
case of connecting the punch unit which is
different from the destination.
22 0 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
22 1 Number of punch holes of FD-503/PK-511/ • 2-Hole (PK): 23-7=0, 22-2=0, 1 1 0
2 PK-512/PK-513 (connected with DIPSW23-7) 22-1=0 0 0 1
Changes the prohibition control by paper size, • -: 23-7=0, 22-2=0, 22-1=1
which differs depending on the number of the • Sweden 4-Hole (PK):
punch holes. Also changes the number of the 23-7=0, 22-2=1, 22-1=0
holes on the punch hole select screen of the user • -: 23-7=0, 22-2=1, 22-1=1
mode. • -: 23-7=1, 22-2=0, 22-1=0
Note • 2/3-hole switchover (PK/FD):
· Deactivate and activate the main power after 23-7=1, 22-2=0, 22-1=1
you change the setting. • 2/4-hole switchover (PK/FD):
· PK-511, PK-512, and PK-513 are not 23-7=1, 22-2=1, 22-1=0
available for C6100 and C6085. • -: 23-7=1, 22-2=1, 22-1=1
I-122
22 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
22 4 Power save key function • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1: Disabled
22 5 Release of the [Trimmer Receiver Adj.] button of • 0: Not display 0 0 0
the SD-506 and the SD-513 for users • 1: Display
· Function: This DIPSW switches whether to
dislpay the [Trimmer Receiver Adj.] button in
"MACHINE" screen – [Adjustment] – [Finisher
Adjustment] – [Saddle Stitcher Pos. Adj.] in the
user mode.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to display the
[Trimmer Receiver Adj.] button.
22 6 Operation when staple empty of FS • 0: Staple supply request 0 0 0
• 1: Selecting between staple
supply or staple release
22 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
23 0 Switches to Russian font for WebLCD display • 0: Not use Russian font 0 0 0
· Function: Displays Russian font (new font) for (conventional font)
Web LCD. • 1: Use Russian font (new
· Usage: Select "1" for DIPSW23-0 when Fiery by font)
EFI is connected and Russian is not displayed
properly on the Fiery setting change screen (Web
LCD).
Note
· Select "1" for DIPSW23-0 when the machine
is installed in Russia.
23 1 Operation when stores the maximum hold job • 0: Not delete automatically 0 0 0
500 hold jobs can be stored at maximum. This (restrict to receive the copier
function configures the operation when 500 jobs hold job or the printer hold
are stored. job)
• 1: Delete the oldest hold job
and receive the new job
23 2 Precision of the color registration automatic • 0: Normal 0 0 0
correction (during printing) • 1: Fine
Change the accuracy of the color registration
correction that is performed periodically during
printing. If the fine is selected, the registration
accuracy improves by approximately 0.5 pixels,
but the correction time takes 2 minutes longer.
23 3 Control of the color registration automatic • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
correction (periodical correction) • 1: Disabled
Disable the color registration correction that is
performed periodically and reduce the down time
during the continuous printing. (Power ON
correction operates when the fusing temperature
is lower than the specified temperature.)
23 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
23 5 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
23 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
23 7 Number of punch holes of FD-503/PK-511/ • 2-Hole (PK): 23-7=0, 22-2=0, 1 1 1
PK-512/PK-513 (connected with DIPSW22-1/2) 22-1=0
Changes the prohibition control by paper size, • -: 23-7=0, 22-2=0, 22-1=1
which differs depending on the number of the • Sweden 4-Hole (PK): 23-7 =
punch holes. Also changes the number of the 0, 22-2 = 1, 22-1=0
holes on the punch hole select screen of the user • -: 23-7=0, 22-2=1, 22-1=1
mode. • -: 23-7=1, 22-2=0, 22-1=0
Note • 2/3-hole switchover (PK/FD):
· Deactivate and activate the main power after 23-7=1, 22-2=0, 22-1=1
you change the setting. • 2/4-hole switchover (PK/FD):
· PK-511, PK-512, and PK-513 are not 23-7=1, 22-2=1, 22-0=1
available for C6100 and C6085. • -: 23-7=1, 22-2=1, 22-1=1
24 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-123
24 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
24 2 Image stabilization control • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1: Disabled
24 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
24 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
24 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
24 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
24 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
25 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
25 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
25 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
25 3 Color registration automatic correction control • Enabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=0 0 0 0
4 Change the timing of the periodical color • Disabled: 25-4=0, 25-3=1 0 0 0
registration correction control or disable the • No performed during
correction. printing: 25-4=1, 25-3=0
Enabled: Suspend the print at every specified • -: 25-4=1, 25-3=1
print to perform the correction.
Disable: Correction is omitted temporarily to
reduce down time when the machine cannot be
used with the malfunction code related to the IDC
sensor.
No performed during printing: Correction that is
performed by the suspension of print at every
specified print is performed after the print job to
reduce down time.
25 5 Precision of the color registration automatic • 0: Normal 0 0 0
correction • 1: Speed priority
Change the accuracy of the color registration
correction that is performed automatically. If the
speed preference is selected, the correction time
can be shorten. Correction time of "speed
preference" is approximately 30 seconds.
25 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
25 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
26 0 Trigger judgment of the color registration • 0: Process mount 0 0 0
automatic correction temperature
Configure the standard and judge the timing • (Execute the color
when to execute the color registration correction. registration correction when
the process mount
temperature changes more
than the specified level from
the previous correction.)
• 1: Number of print pages
• (Execute the color
registration correction after
printing specified pages from
the previous correction.)
26 1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
26 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
26 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
26 4 Printer auto centering correction (PF) • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1: Disabled
I-124
26 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
26 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
26 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
27 0 FS-612 "Fold & Staple", "Multi Half Fold" for • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
SRA3 • 1: Enabled
· Function: Releases the prohibition of the fold &
staple and multi half fold of SRA3.
want to use the fold & staple function and multi
half fold function for SRA3 or custom size paper
(up to 320 mm x 450 mm) in case of print jobs
from the controller.
Note
The half fold and fold & staple of SRA3 are
available in case of print jobs from the main
body (such as HDD calling and copying) even
when you do not change this setting.
27 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
27 2 Charge control unit connection recognition • 0: Unconnected 1 1 1
· Function: Switches the connection of the • 1: Connected
charge control unit.
· Usage: Select "0" on this setting when the
paper is conveyed without any finisher option.
Note
·This function cannot be used on the field.
27 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
27 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
27 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
27 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
27 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
28 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
28 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
28 2 During the ring bind mode of GP-502, enable or • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
disable the control for the sheet number limitation • 1: Disabled
due to the paper weight.
· Function: In the ring bind mode of GP-502, it
has a limit for the number of sheets; 102 sheets
for 75 g/m2 to 91 g/m2 paper and 72 sheets for
92 g/m2 to 135 g/m2. When this setting is
changed to "1", the limitation becomes invalid.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to increase
the maximum number of sheets in the ring bind
mode of GP-502.
Note
· As a protection when the quantity limitation
is disabled, change DIPSW28-3 to enabled (1)
so that the hard limit works.
· When "1" is selected, an error possibly
occurs in the finish.
28 3 Enable or disable the alarm of the booklet • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
thickness over in the ring bind mode of GP-502 • 1: Enabled
· Function: Switches the method for detecting
the upper limit of loaded booklet in the ring bind
mode of GP-502. There are 2 methods for
detecting the upper limit of the loaded booklet;
number count by the weight and the thickness
I-125
detection sensor. As the default, only the number

count is enabled. Use the setting and enable or
disable the thickness detection sensor.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" to enable the
thickness detection sensor.
Note
· When the number limitation is disabled (1)
with DIPSW28-2, change this setting to "1" so
that the hard limit works.
28 4 Correspond to postcard • Regular operation (duplex is 0 0 0
5 · Function: Configures the restriction of the possible): 28-5=0, 28-4=0 0 0 0
postcard configuration. (Default)
Note • High speed postcard print
· When 28-4=1, 28-5=1, the productivity is (duplex is possible): 28-5=0,
lowered. 28-4=1
Also, the image quality is not guaranteed. • High speed postcard print
(duplex is possible): 28-5=1,
28-4=0
• Applicable to rimless print
(duplex is impossible):
28-5=1, 28-4=1
28 6 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
28 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
29 0 Default switch on the ticket edit screen • 0: Current Sheet 0 0 0
Configure where to reflect the default with "Paper • 1: All Sheet
Setting" - "Paper Type" on the job ticket edit
screen.
29 1 Release the capacity limit of LS-506 stacker tray • 0: 5,000 sheets stacked 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the maximum capacity of sensor (PS14) is activated,
the LS-506 stacker tray. or the specified number of
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you sheets according to the
want to increase the maximum capacity of the paper weight is loaded.
LS-506 stacker tray. (2,000 sheets stacked
Note sensor (PS13) or specified
· The tray breaks when the machine loads number of papers)
more papers than the specification. • 1: 5,000 sheets stacked
· For the relation with the DIPSW15-3 or sensor (PS14) is activated,
DIPSW15-4, refer to I.4.5.19 Release the or 5,000 sheets are loaded.
capacity limit of FS-532 or OT-510 main tray and (2,000 sheets stacked
LS-506 stacker tray. sensor (PS13) or 2,000
sheets)
29 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
29 3 Switches the shift direction for the 2nd page • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
during the reverse 2 repeat • 1: Enabled
· Function: Switches the shift direction for the
2nd page (right image and left image) during the
reverse 2 repeat.
· Usage: When this setting is changed to "0", this
function is executed based on the images (shifts
to the right and the left in reverse). When this
setting is changed to "1", this function is executed
based on the paper (shifts to the right and the
left).
29 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
29 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
29 6 PB perfect binding minimum number of the inside • 0: Follow the setting of the 0 0 0
paper Utility menu
• 1: 6 sheets (81 g/m2 to 91 g/
m2, 92 g/m2 to 105 g/m2,
106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2)
29 7 Switches the print operation to other sheets • 0: Prints on other sheets 0 0 0
during the tray setting difference on the front and (back side is blank)
back, or the size setting difference of the transfer • 1: Prints on the same sheets
paper
I-126
· Function: Switches the operation during the

duplex print when the paper size differs on the
front side and the back side.
· Usage: Change this setting and the operation is
switched.
30 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
30 1 Restriction of the display of "List output" in the • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Service Mode • 1: Enabled
30 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
30 3 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
30 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
30 5 PB perfect binding limit (includes Z-Fold) • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1: Disabled
30 6 Control the display of "Classified copy count by • 0: Display 0 0 0
paper size" on the counter list • 1: Hide
· Function: Switches whether to show "Classified
copy count by paper size" on the counter list of
the list print.
· Usage: "Classified copy count by paper size"
operates in the different specific from the
threshold of "TC double count size setting" by
DIPSW33-2 and DIPSW33-3. To avoid the
confusion when TC is used for billing, change this
setting to "1" so that "Classified copy count by
paper size" is not appeared.
30 7 FS sub tray full alarm detection • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: Disables only the job stop control and • 1: Disabled
output unavailable control when the FS sub tray
is full. This mode is for continuous output that
does not stop at a 10 sheets limit.
· Usage: Configure to "1" to output 10 sheets or
more continuously. However, DIPSW52-4 must
be configured to "0" at the same time.
Note
· In this mode, continuous output is
performed without detecting FS sub tray full,
and does not stop at a 10 sheets limit. Do not
select this mode for other use.
· When MK-740 is installed, remove the sheets
once in 10 sheets of output.
· It is not recommended for MK-740m to
change this DIPSW to "1".

Japan Inch Metric
31 0 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
31 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
31 2 Z-fold, center-fold maximum paper exit capacity: • 50 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=0 1 1 1
3 FS-532 main tray • 40 sheets: 31-3=0, 31-2=1 1 1 1
Z-fold, center-fold maximum paper exit capacity: • 30 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=0
FD-503 main tray • 20 sheets: 31-3=1, 31-2=1
· Function: You can configure the setting of Z-
fold and center folding maximum capacity of the
paper which exits to the FS-532 and the FD-503
main tray.
· Usage: Use this setting to respond to the
request of the user to increase the number of
loading sheets. However, when you increase the
number of loading sheets too much, a jam
possibly occurs by the bend of the folding, or
sheets possibly fall from the main tray. (effective
by power OFF or ON after the setting change)
I-127
31 4 FS-532 Z-fold + Staple number limit • 5 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=0 0 0 0

5 Enter the maximum number of FS-532 Staple Z- • 8 sheets: 31-5=0, 31-4=1 0 0 0
folded paper included in 50 sheets (A3 size). • 10 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=0
• 3 sheets: 31-5=1, 31-4=1
31 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
31 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
32 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
32 1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
32 2 Guide mark printing on the test pattern number • 0: Not print the guide mark. 1 1 1
16 and number 33 • 1: Print the guide mark.
Function: The machine prints the guide mark
which indicates the tray information, the printing
side information, and the printing direction on the
test pattern number 16 and number 33.
Usage: When you adjust with the test pattern
number 16 and number 33 for each tray, print the
tray information, the printing side information, and
the printing direction on the output test pattern.
· Output tray: Indicated by the number of the
guide marks.
· Printing side: The guide mark is printed only on
the front side. (No guide mark on the back side)
· Printing direction: The guide mark is printed
from the leading edge of the printing direction.
Here are the relations between the tray and the
number of guide marks.
Tray 1 of the main body: 1
Tray 2 of the main body: 2
PF-707m upper tray (1st tandem): 7
PF-707m middle tray (1st tandem): 8
PF-707m lower tray (1st tandem): 9
PF-707m upper tray (2nd tandem): 13
PF-707m middle tray (2nd tandem): 14
PF-707m lower tray (2nd tandem): 15
PF-707m upper tray (3rd tandem): 16
PF-707m middle tray (3rd tandem): 17
PF-707m lower tray (3rd tandem): 18
PF-602m upper tray: 7
PF-602m lower tray: 8
LU-202m, LU-202XL, LU-202XLm: 4
MB-506, MB-508: 5
32 3 Toner near empty sound alert • 0: Sound alert OFF 0 0 0
Function: When the toner is near empty, alerts • 1: Sound alert ON
by the sound.
Usage: Configure this setting to "1" when you
want to be alerted the toner near empty by the
sound.
32 4 Erratic pagination detection notification method • 0: Not display the error code. 0 0 0
Function: When the erratic pagination is (Exit papers when the erratic
detected, displays the error code and the pop-up pagination occurs)
message without exiting the paper. • 1: Displays the error code
Usage: Use this setting when the erratic (C-E018) and the notification
pagination occurs and you want to stop printing of the erratic pagination
with the error code (C-E018) without exiting the
paper.
When this setting is configured to "1" and the
erratic pagination occurs, a pop-up message is
displayed. When you press the OK button, the
notification to reboot the machine is displayed.
32 5 Display of the message to remove papers when • 0: Exits the paper in the 0 0 0
FS or SD job is canceled or capacity limit is over. stacker forcibly and releases
Function: Displays the pop-up message when a the mode.
job of staple or saddle stitch is canceled or the • 1: Displays the message that
capacity limit is over. directs to remove the
Usage: When a job is canceled or the limit is remained paper without
over, a user can select whether to exit papers exiting the remained paper in
forcibly or to remove papers. the stacker forcibly.
I-128
When this setting is configured to "1", the

message to select whether to exit papers forcibly
or remove papers is displayed.
32 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
32 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
33 0 Counting method of white black large size • 0: 1 count 0 1 0
Configure the count number to the double count • 1: 2 count
size paper which is configured with DIPSW33-2
and DIPSW33-3 in black and white printing.
Note
The setting is not reflected on the total
counter but only on,
· Counter control of such as the account track
authentication and the user authentication
· Black and white output in the counter of
each paper type
· Copitrak output
33 1 Color large size count method • 0: 1 count 0 1 0
Configure the count number to the double count • 1: 2 count
size paper which is configured with DIPSW33-2
and DIPSW33-3 in color printing.
Note
The setting is not reflected on the total
· Counter control of such as the account track
authentication and the user authentication
· Black and white output in the counter of
each paper type
· Copitrak output
33 2 Double count size setting • 330 mm or more in the sub 1 0 1
3 Configure the threshold of the double count size scan direction: 33-3=0, 0 1 0
in the sub scan direction. 33-2=0
Paper whose length in the sub scan direction is • 355 mm or more in the sub
more than the specified length is counted as the scan direction (except for the
double count size with the combination of U.S): 33-3=0, 33-2=1
DIPSW33-2 and DIPSW33-3. • 420 mm or more in the sub
Note scan direction (the U.S):
· In the case of the custom size paper, it is 33-3=1, 33-2=0
possibly counted as 2 even when the paper • All size is counted as a small
length is shorter than this configuration size: 33-3=1, 33-2=1
value.
This case occurs when this setting value is
included in the threshold setting range.
· It is reflected in PageScope Web Connection
and on the large size of the counter in "Copy
count of each paper size" which is during the
list print.
· The setting is not reflected on the total
a)· Counter control of such as the account
track authentication and the user
authentication
b)· Black and white output in the counter of
each paper type
c)· Copitrak output
33 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
33 5 Billing counter display • 0: Display the billing count 0 0 0
Change the "Billing Total Counter" display in the • 1: Do not display the billing
billing counter setting (when DIPSW33-7 is "1"). count
33 6 Counter display when the bill counter setting is • 0: Display items other than 0 0 0
adjusted the billing total counter
When you select "1" on this setting, the counter • 1: Display the billing total
items other than "Billing Total Counter" are not counter only
shown on the "Utility" screen.
Note
· This setting is valid when the DIPSW33-7 is
adjusted to "1".
33 7 Charge count setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
I-129
When you configure this setting to 1, "Total • 1: Enabled (displays "Billing

Counter" in the Setting Menu screen changes to Total Counter")
"Billing Total Counter", and "Envelope1 Counter"
to "Envelope3 Counter" are added on the screen.
Also, displays "04 Billing Coefficient Setting" of
Fee Collection Setting which appeares by
pressing Stop + 9 on service mode screen.
Note
· Default of the size coefficient is "1".
However, it can be changed by Stop9 in
Service Mode.
34 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
34 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
34 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
34 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
34 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
34 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
34 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
34 7 Count setting for 2-color printing when the • 0: Count the full color 0 0 0
envelope fusing (EF-103) is installed counter.
∙ Function: Switches the counter to count when • 1: Count the single color
the envelope fusing (EF-103) is installed, counter.
documents are printed in 2-color printing function
of the driver setting, and K and 1 color among C,
M, and Y are selected (2 colors in total).
∙ Usage: Select "1" on this setting to make the
method for count-up single color when the
envelope fusing is installed same as the method
for count-up single color when the normal fusing
is installed.
35 0 Faulty part isolation: Tray 3 (PF) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
• 1: Unusable
• 1: Unusable
• 1: Unusable
• 1: Unusable
• 1: Unusable
35 6 Faulty part isolation: Bypass tray (MB-508) • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
35 7 Faulty part isolation: Main body, Electric charge • 0: Normal 0 0 0
control unit, High voltage power supply • 1: Unusable
36 0 MB-506 connection recognition • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled
36 1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
36 2 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
36 3 Switch of the registration swing control • 0: Swing control is 1 1 1
· Function: Switches the use of the registration deactivated
swing control. • 1: Swing control is activated
I-130
· Usage: Use this function and deactivate the

registration swing control temporarily to check the
condition when such as the centering error
occurs.
36 4 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
36 5 Switch a timing when to enable FS-532 FS button • 0: Enable when the 0 0 0
start direction operation stops by the FS
button only
• 1: Enable at all times
36 6 Control to enable or disable the HDD extended • 0: Standard configuration 0 0 0
configuration • 1: Extended configuration
· Function: Select the configuration information
of the HDD.
· Usage: Change this setting to "0" when 3 HDDs
are in a configuration. Change this setting to "1"
when 4 HDDs are in a configuration.
36 7 Format HDD mode • 0: Standard format mode 0 0 0
· Function: Specify the format HDD mode. • 1: Forced format mode
- Standard format mode: Backup and format the
authentication information which is saved to the
HDD. An error occurs when the backup of the
information fails.
- Forced format mode: Delete and format the
authentication information which is saved to the
HDD.
· Usage: Select "0" in this setting when you want
to leave the authentication information during the
format HDD. When you select "0" and the error
occurs or when you want to delete the
authentication information, select "1" in this
setting.
37 0 ORU-M password authentication setting • 0: password authentication 1 1 1
Activate the password authentication in entering invalid
the ORU-M mode. • 1: password authentication
valid
37 1 ORU-M print mode display setting • 0: Display 0 0 0
Configure whether to display the sample output • 1: Not display
button on the ORU-M mode.
37 2 ORU-M replace reason input setting • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Configure whether to input the reason when you • 1: Disabled
replace the parts in the ORU-M mode.
37 3 ORU-M highlight adjustment priority setting • 0: Scanner automatic 0 0 0
Perform the highlight adjustment after completion adjustment priority
of the replacement of the developing unit or • 1: RU automatic adjustment
developer in the ORU-M mode. This setting priority
configure the highlight automatic adjustment
method with both RU and the scanner connected.
Note
· The priority of the adjustments varies
depending on whether the scanner and RU
are connected.
· When the RU is connected while the scanner
is not, RU automatic adjustment is performed.
· When RU is not connected but the scanner
is connected, the scanner automatic
adjustment is performed.
· When both of the RU and the scanner are
not connected, manual adjustment is
selected.
37 4 Guidance display for replacing the ORU-M • 0: Display the guidance to 0 0 0
developing unit charge the developer
On ORU-M mode, select whether to display the • 1: Not display the guidance
guidance for charging the developer. to charge the developer
37 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
37 6 Appeasement of the limit number of paper of • 0: No appeasement (the limit 0 0 0
SD-510 saddle stitching number of sheets is 5
sheets.)
I-131
· Function: When the machine is under the • 1: With appeasement (the

following condition, the machine increases the limit number of sheets is 16
limit number of paper of SD-510 saddle stitching sheets or 12 sheets.)
from 5 to 16.
- Weight: 92 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
· Usage: To increase the number of paper under
the condition, change to "1" in this setting.
Note
· The saddle stitching which is available when
you select "1" in this setting is out of
specification.
· When the paper weight of the cover is 217 g/m2
to 300 g/m2, the limit number is 12. (The cover
page whose paper weight is 217 g/m2 or more is
counted as 5 pages for 1 page.)
37 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
• 1: Unusable
• 1: Unusable
• 1: Unusable
38 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
38 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
38 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
38 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
38 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
39 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
39 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
39 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
39 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
39 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
39 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
39 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
39 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
40 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
40 1 Main body disposal mode • 0: Restrict 0 0 0
SW that allows you to delete all HDD data and • 1: Allow
the part of the data on the NVRAM board (NRB)
and SSD when you dispose the machine. Note
· Setting this mode to "1" and executing the

following step disable restoring the NVRAM
board (NRB) and reusing the machine.
Therefore, do not execute the steps except
when you throw away the machine.
"Utility" - "03 Administrator Setting" - "10
Security Setting" - "02 HDD Management
Setting" - "03 Delete All Data Setting" -
"Execute Deletion" on "Mode 1" to "Mode 8"
I-132
· Meet the following conditions to enable

"Delete All Data Setting".
· "1" is selected on DIPSW40-1.
· The security enhance mode is deactivated.
· The condition of the HDD is Ready.
· After you change the setting of DIPSW40-7,
reboot the power.
40 2 Forced ISW mode • 0: The normal ISW mode 0 0 0
· Function (when this setting is "1"): The • 1: The ISW mode which
operation starts in the scanner and the DF ISW enables the rewriting of the
mode when you activate the machine. scanner and the DF
· Usage: Use when an error occurs on the normal programs
scanner and DF ISW, and you cannot rewrite the
firmware.
40 3 Alert send setting without key counter • 0: Send 0 0 0
This setting does not allow alert to be sent to the • 1: Send the alert only when
client machine even when the vendor machine is the printer setting is adjusted
not Ready.
40 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
40 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
40 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
40 7 IC-605 controller connection (Default settings for • 0: Not connected 0 0 0
C3080, C3070, C3070L: 1, for C3080P, C83hc, • 1: Connected (C3080P, (C3080P, (C3080P,
C3070P, C73hc: 0) C83hc, C83hc, C83hc,
· Function: Switches the connections of the KM C3070P, C3070P, C3070P,
controllers and the outsourced controllers. C73hc) C73hc) C73hc)
· Usage: Select "0" on this setting when you 1 (C3080, 1 (C3080, 1 (C3080,
connect IC-313, IC-314, or IC-417. Select "1" C3070, C3070, C3070,
when you connect the IC-605. C3070L) C3070L) C3070L)
For OpenAPI/IWS functions that can be used
when an outsourced controller is connected, refer
to I.4.5.22 OpenAPI/IWS Function
Correspondence Table.

Japan Inch Metric
41 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
41 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
41 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
41 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
41 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
41 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
41 6 Standard of the temporal correction condition for • 0: Conduct under the 1 1 1
the color registration specified condition in
· Function: Select the standard of the timing for DIPSW26-0.
the color registration correction. • 1: Complex judgment
· Usage: Use this function when the color (judged by "OR" on both of
registration jitter changes even if the temperature the DIPSW26-0 settings)
change in the machine is controlled. If the color
registration is not corrected when you use the
machine, select "1" in this setting and correct the
color registration periodically changing the
number of prints.
0: Conduct the color registration control under the
condition of DIPSW26-0 settings.
I-133
1: Conduct the color registration control when

whichever condition is satisfied, the temperature
change in the machine or the specified number of
prints.
41 7 2nd transfer output adjustment range • 0: - 50 to + 50 0 0 0
enlargement setting • 1: - 120 to + 120
· Function: Changes the adjustment range of
[2nd Transfer Output Adj.] in [Paper Setting] -
[Expert Adj.], 2nd Transfer-Lead Edge, 2nd
Transfer-Rear Edge.
· Usage: When the electrostatic offset (a
phenomenon that the previous image applies
after the fusing belt goes round) occurs in
envelope, adjusts the 2nd transfer output setting
adjustment width within the range of -50 to +50
(default). When no improvement is made in this
range, change DIPSW41-7 to 1. Enlarge the
adjustment width to -120 to +120 and readjust the
adjustment width.
Note
· When 2nd transfer output is raised, the
transferability decreases. When output is
raised too much, the transfer is hardly
performed.
42 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
42 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
42 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
42 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
42 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
42 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
42 6 Draw method of the numbering text section • 0: Overlay method 0 0 0
· Function: Switch the draw method of the • 1: Overwrite method
overlay text section.
The overlay method of "0" is the existing model
type. The original information remains on the
background.
For the overwrite method of "1", the original
information does not remain on the background
(only the stamp color remains).
· Usage: To prevent the stamp peeling when you
add the overlay stamp (numbering) for the
original which has the dark-colored background,
use this function.
42 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
43 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
43 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
43 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
43 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
43 4 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
43 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
43 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
43 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-134
• 1: -
44 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
44 1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
44 2 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
44 3 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
44 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
44 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
44 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
44 7 Display the "Highest Speed" button • 0: Not display 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW switches whether to • 1: Display
display the "Highest Speed" button in the
"Utility"-"02 User Setting"-"03 Common
Setting"-"Fusing Stability" or not.
· Usage: For the user who gives more priority to
the speed than to the quality, select "1" in this
setting and release the "Highest Speed" button.
45 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
45 1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
45 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
45 3 Prohibit timer of the print job reception setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
after the gamma automatic adjustment • 1: Enabled
Function: This setting prohibits the reception of
the print job from IC to the engine during
"Gamma Automatic Adjustment".
Usage: On the daily color proof, when the print
job is received during "Gamma Automatic
Adjustment", the job is output after the gamma
automatic adjustment. When you perform the
paper density adjustment after the "Gamma
Automatic Adjustment" and you do not want to
output the print job, configure this setting to "1".
Note
· The time of the printer prohibit timer can be
configured on "UTILITY" - "Copy Setting" -
"Printer Prohibit Timer".
· This function is available only when the
configuration includes the scanner.
45 4 Output all to USB memory button on the system • 0: Not display 0 0 0
information screen • 1: Display
Function: Displays the "Output All to USB"
button on "System Information" screen.
Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you want
to output the list print information collectively
during the print output and check the setting
information of the engine.
45 5 Staple pitch adjustment value setting on SRA3 • 0: Adjustment range: -20 to 0 0 0
Function: Changes the staple pitch adjustment +20
range on SRA3 when the saddle stitching option • 1: Adjustment range: -49 to
(SD-506) is attached. +20
to narrow down the staple pitch on the saddle
stitching on SRA3.
Note
· When you change this setting to "1", the
staple pitch adjustment is out of the
specification.
I-135

display on the touch panel is not changed
from "Adj. Range: -20 to +20 1step = 1.0mm".
45 6 Setting of the face up paper exit for print jobs • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
when the envelope fusing is installed • 1: Enabled (Fixed on the
Function: When the envelope fusing is installed, face up paper exit)
performs the face up paper exit for print jobs from
the IC.
Usage: Select "1" on this setting when you output
the calibration chart of the envelope size or the
spot color chart from ColorCentro.
45 7 Business card scan setting • 0: Smallest size "Postcard" 0 0 0
Function: Change the smallest size that can be • 1: Smallest size "55 mm x 55
scanned. mm"
to scan the business card size.
Note
When you change this setting to "1", the item
that is displayed on "UTILITY" -
"Administrator Setting" - "System Setting" -
"Size Setting" - "Original Glass Small Size" is
not changed.
46 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
46 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
46 2 Display "Development Output Setting" in [Expert • 0: Not display 0 0 0
Adjustment] - [Process Adjustment] • 1: Display
· Function: Display [04 Development Output
Setting] in [Utility] - [03 Administrator Setting] -
[01 System Setting] - [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06
Process Adjustment].
· Usage: Use this function when the image is
darker in the area from the paper leading edge to
the line 44m or the image is darker (development
memory) in the area of 44 mm backward from the
image erasure. Select "Down" in "Development
Output Setting" to prevent the development
memory.
Note
· If you select "Down" in "Development
Output Setting", the unevenness of the
background can occur.
After you select "Down" and return to the
user mode, the gamma automatic adjustment
starts.
46 3 Sample print setting • 0: 1 sheet 0 0 0
· Function: Switch whether to print 1 sheet, or to • 1: 1 set
print 1 set for sample print.
· Usage: When the dirt occurs during mass
printing but not every time, switches to sample
print by sets, and confirms dirt on sample print.
46 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
46 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
46 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
46 7 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
47 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
47 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
47 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
47 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-136
47 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
47 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
47 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
47 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
48 0 Enabling the Paper Setting to be changed any • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
time • 1: Enabled
· Function: Normally, while the machine is
printing, you cannot change the Paper Setting of
the trays which are used for job. This DIPSW
abolishes the restriction. When this setting is "1",
you can change the Paper Setting any time.
Note
· If you change the settings other than the
Both Sides Adjustment, malfunctions such as
a paper mismatch and a jam possibly occur.
Be careful of the content and timing of the
setting change.
48 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
48 2 Release the combination restriction of "high • 0: Do not release the 0 0 0
accuracy, rimless copy" and "binding margin" restriction
The booklet layout (high accuracy, rimless copy) • 1: Release the restriction
mode is selected with the job from the controller.
In addition, "Binding margin" cannot be used with
the job ticket edit of the main body. To release
this restriction, change the setting to "1".
48 3 Printer monochrome color count setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Counts on the printer monochrome • 1: Enabled
color counter when the IC-605 specifies the
monochrome color.
Checking procedure:
1 [Service] → [Counter /Data] → [Collecting Data]
→ [Each Paper Type Counter]
2 List print
Print (mono color) for each paper size can be
checked in Copy count of each paper size on
Counter list and Management list.
Note
· This function does not work with outsourced
controllers.
48 4 Setting of the display of the toner amount and the • Hide toner amount, hide 0 0 0
5 replacement count of the toner bottle toner amount 25% message: 0 0 1
· Function: Displays the "Amount Info." button on 48-5=0, 48-4=0
the Machine screen so that you can check the • Display toner amount,
toner amount and the replacement count of the display toner amount 25%
toner bottle. Also switches whether to display a message: 48-5=0, 48-4=1
message when the toner amount is down to 25%. • Hide toner amount, hide
· Usage: Configure DIPSW48-4 and DIPSW48-5 toner amount 25% message:
to "1" in the following situation: The user wants to 48-5=1, 48-4=0
check the toner amount and the replacement • Display toner amount, hide
count of the toner bottle, and does not want the toner amount 25% message:
message to be displayed when the toner amount 48-5=1, 48-4=1
is down to 25%.
· For Japan and North America: Configure
DIPSW48-4 to "1" to display the "Amount Info."
button and also display the message when the
toner amount is down to 25%.
· For regions other than Japan and North
America: Configure DIPSW48-4 to "1" to only
display the "Amount Info." button.
48 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
48 7 Staple amount display • 0: OFF 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW changes the staple icon • 1: ON
on the MACHINE screen and enables you to
check the remaining amount. Displays "Amount
Info." button on the Machine Screen.
I-137
· Usage: Use this DIPSW when you check the

remaining staple amount of the FS-532, the
SD-506, and the SD-513.
Note
· For details, refer to I.4.5.15 Remaining staple
amount display setting.
49 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
49 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
49 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
49 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
49 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
49 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
49 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
49 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
50 0 Individual display switching of the Details Counter • Details Counter, material 0 0 0
1 and the icon (Refer to the DIPSW15-2 as well) icon, and periodical check 1 1 1
· Function: For DIPSW15-2=0, this DIPSW icon are displayed: 50-1=0,
switches the display of the following items 50-0=0
individually. • Details Counter and material
-Details Counter (photo conductor life (YMCK), icon are displayed: 50-1=0,
developer life (YMCK)) 50-0=1
-Material icon • Periodical check icon is
-Periodical check icon displayed: 50-1=1, 50-0=0
· Usage: When you want to switch the display of • Restricted: 50-1=1, 50-0=1,
each item individually, change this setting.
Note
· For DIPSW15-2=1, all items are not displayed
regardless of this setting.
50 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
50 3 Scanner character blur improvement filter setting • 0: Improve character blur. 0 0 0
Function: Switch to the filter which is appropriate • 1: Improve the dotted moire
to the image quality of the scanned document. image quality.
Usage: Configure this setting to "1" when
character blur does not occur but when dotted
moire occurs.
Note
When you change the setting to "1", the
dotted moire is reduced. However, the
resolution of the character becomes low.
(Trade-off)
50 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
50 5 Spine setting of Perfect Bind 2-in-1 • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Normally, when you select [Cover • 1: Enabled
Print 2 in 1] during perfect bind printing, the spine
becomes blank. When this setting is "1", the
machine outputs the image of the front cover and
the back cover without making a gap. Therefore,
the spine does not become blank.
· Usage: In order not to make the spine blank
when you print in [Cover Print 2 in 1], configure
this setting to "1".
Note
· When you configure this setting to "1", be
sure to change the software switch 98 of the
controller to [ON].
([Controller Administrator Setting Menu] -
[System Setting] - [Software Switch Setting])
50 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-138
• 1: -
50 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
51 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
51 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
51 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
51 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
51 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
51 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
51 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
51 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
52 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
52 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
52 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
52 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
52 4 Banner paper FS sub tray full detection mode • 0: FS sub tray full detection 0 0 0
· Function: If "0" is configured when a banner sensor control
paper is output, the full detection sensor stops • 1: FS sub tray 10-sheets soft
the paper exit. count control
If "1" is configured, printing stops when 10 sheets
are output, and "Please remove paper from sub
tray then touch [OK]" appears.
· Usage: Configure "1" if output stops even
though the output sheets are fewer than the stack
limit. This phenomenon happens when the FS
sub tray full detection sensor detects the paper
due to the stacked paper creep, when the
MK-740 is used. When the MK-740 is used,
configure this DIPSW to "1".
Note
· This mode does not depend on a paper size.
Paper types other than banner are also
counted.
· When 10 sheets are output, remove the
sheets. Press the "OK" button on the
operation screen to restart the printing.
· 10-sheets soft count control is performed
only when a paper is output in the FS sub
tray.
· It is not recommended for MK-740m to
change this DIPSW to "1".
52 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
52 6 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
52 7 Toner forcible output control switch setting • 0: Disabled (Forcible paper 1 1 1
exit process)
I-139
· Function: When near empty of the toner bottle • 1: Enabled (Forcible paper
is detected, stop printing, and the toner is exit process)
supplied from the toner bottle. When a toner is
not detected within a specified period of time,
confirm near empty.
· Usage: Used when the toner bottle does not
supply the toner, and near empty is detected
wrongly.
Note
productivity is lowered.
53 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
53 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
53 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
53 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
53 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
53 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
53 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
53 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
54 0 SD-513 non-staple detection function • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: When the non-staple is detected for • 1: Disabled
the SD-513 saddle stitching, displays a jam code
and stops the job.
· Usage: When you do not want to stop the job by
non-staple detection, change this setting to "1".
54 1 Switch of SD-513 fore-edge trim scrap box • 0: Default value (control 0 0 0
capacity according to the sheet
∙ Function: Switches the allowance number of number of booklet and the
trimming times that changes the machine status amount of trimming)
to the trimmer restriction from the fore-edge • 1: Extend (twice as the
trimmer scraps box full. default value)
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to extend the
period in which the "Fore-edge trimmer scraps
box full" display turns to the trimmer restriction
(time for the trimmer scraps disposal).
Note
∙ Booklets are possibly exited with fore-edge
trimmer scraps. Press marks of trimmer
scraps are possibly left on booklets. Trimmer
scraps are possibly caught in the trimmer
shutter and they possibly causes an error
code.
54 2 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
54 3 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 entrance section • 0: Normal 0 0 0
reversal stacker • 1: Unusable
54 4 Switch of the number of overlapped coated paper • 0: Always 1 sheet 0 0 0
at the SD-513 entrance conveyance section • 1: Control according to
· Function: Switches the number of overlapped weight (1 to 3 sheets)
coated paper at the entrance conveyance section
when the saddle stitching or multi half that uses
coated paper is conducted.
· Usage: Select "1" when you want to increase
the productivity of the saddle stitching or multi
half that uses coated paper.
Note
· Overlapped paper fails to fall to the reverse
exit section due to electrostatic suction, and a
jam possibly occurs.
54 5 Switch of TU-503 slit cutter rotation speed • 0: Normal Rotation 0 0 0
I-140
∙ Function: Switches the rotation speed of the • 1: High speed rotation

slitter motor (M108).
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to improve the
slit straightness.
Note
∙ The life of the slit cutter and the slit motor
(M108) is possibly shortened.
54 6 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 sub tray exit • 0: Normal 0 0 0
Note • 1: Unusable
"1".
54 7 Faulty part isolation: SD-513 non-staple detection • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
55 0 SD-513 input unit • 0: Fixed to mm 0 0 0
· Function: Configures the unit of each input • 1: Interlocked with the unit
value that is related to SD-513. setting
· Usage: To change the unit to inch, configure
this setting to "1". Then, select [Inch(Decimal
Point)] in [Utility] - [User Setting] - [System
Setting] - [Unit Setting].
Note
· When you select " Inch(Fraction)", operates
in " Inch(Decimal Point)".
55 1 G7 calibration switching • 0: Exact Color is used 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the calibration mode when • 1: G7 calibration is used
the IC-605 is used.
· Usage: To use the G7 calibration, change this
setting to "1".
Note
· The following data has no reciprocal usage
between G7 calibration and Exact Color.
- ICC profile (Printer profile and device link
profile)
- Spot color table
· After you switch the mode, deletion of the
old data is recommended.
55 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
55 3 Stamp outside print of printer job • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: When a printer job is output, prints a • 1: Enabled
stamp on the outside when the stamp is
configured under the following conditions.
- Stamp type: Page number
- Print position: Other than the center
- Output setting: Booklet, Adhesive binding,
perfect bind, ring bind
55 4 Paper size minimum input unit • 0: 0.1 mm/0.005 inch (when 0 0 0
· Function: Changes the minimum input unit for you use the IC-605)
the paper size. • 1: 1 mm/0.025 inch (when
· Usage: The minimum input unit of the paper you use the Fiery controller)
size differs between the Fiery controller (IC-313/
IC-417) and the main body. Therefore, the paper
size that you registered for the paper profile is
possibly changed when you deactivate and
activate the power switch.
In order to prevent that problem, change this
setting to "1" when you use the Fiery controller.
55 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
55 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
55 7 Proof copy function setting • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Configure the output operation on the • 1: Enabled
proof copy.
· Usage: When you press the Proof copy button
on the COPY screen, "Hold + Print" is applied
automatically. Then the screen moves to the hold
job list screen.
After one set is output and the job is hold, Job
Ticket Edit screen opens automatically.
I-141
After the operator checks the output, the operator

edits the ticket, outputs the sample again, or
saves and outputs as necessary.
56 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
56 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
56 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
56 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
56 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
56 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
56 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
56 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
57 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
57 1 Switching both sides adjustment default display • [Scan Meas.] ([Front] or 0 0 0
2 tab [Back] for the C3080P, 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW switches the tab that is C83hc, C3070P, C73hc):
displayed as default in the Both Sides Adjustment 57-2=0, 57-1=0
screen. ([Front] or [Back]: The default changes • [AutoMeasure] (only when
every time you press [Front] or [Back] on the Both the IQ-501 is connected):
Sides Adjust screen. When [Front] is pressed, the 57-2=0, 57-1=1
default becomes [Front]. When [Back] is pressed, • [Front] or [Back]: 57-2=1,
the default becomes [Back]. 57-1=0
· Usage: Use to change the tab that is displayed • [Gap]: 57-2=1, 57-1=1
as default.
57 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
57 4 Switch the original size sensor/2 (PS204) • 0: Without PS204 0 0 Metric: 0
between activated and deactivated (Default • 1: With PS204 ("1" for
setting for Asia and Pacific: 1) Asia and
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you Pacific)
install the original size sensor/2.
57 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
57 6 Maintenance counter counting condition • 0: Maximum 2 counts 1 1 1
· Function: Change the counting condition of the • - To 337.9 mm: 1 count
maintenance counter. • - 338 mm to 1300 mm: 2
Note counts
· Do not change this setting on the field. • 1: Maximum 5 counts
• - To 338 mm: 1 count
• - 338.1 mm to 488 mm: 2
counts
• - 488.1 mm to 686 mm: 3
counts
• - 686.1 mm to 915 mm: 4
counts
• - 915.1 mm to 1300 mm: 5
counts
57 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
58 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
58 1 Displays the shortcut button of color density • 0: Do not display the 0 0 0
control (periodical adjustment) ON and OFF shortcut button
setting • 1: Display the shortcut
· Function: Displays a shortcut button of button
[Adjustment] - [Color Density Control] - [Basic
Setting] - [Periodical Adj. Execution] in the
"MACHINE" screen.
I-142
· Usage: When you want to activate and

deactivate the periodic adjustment of the color
density control frequently, change this setting to
"1".
58 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
58 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
58 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
58 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
58 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
58 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
59 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
59 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
59 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
59 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
59 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
59 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
59 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
59 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
60 0 Switch of SD-513 fore-edge trimmer width • 0: Minimum 5 mm 0 0 0
∙ Function: Switches the minimum value of the • 1: Minimum 2 mm
fore-edge trimmer width.
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to configure 5
mm or less as the fore-edge trimmer width.
Note
∙ Trimmer scraps are possibly attached on
booklets due to electrostatic.
60 1 FS612 106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2 • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Prohibition moderation of 30 sheets for staple • 1: Enabled
and 20 sheets for fold & staple
· Function: For the paper of 106 g/m2 to 135 g/
m2, expands the staple limit of FS612 up to 30
sheets and the fold & staple limit up to 20 sheets.
You can configure the item "Staple/106-135g/m2
" of "Finisher Adjustment" - "Output Quantity
Limit" up to 30.
You can also assign the fold & staple 106 g/m2 to
135 g/m2 limit setting to the item
"Fold&Staple/81-105g/m2" and configure up to
20.
(You can also assign the fold & staple 62 g/m2 to
105 g/m2 limit setting to the item
"Fold&Staple/62-80g/m2" and configure up to
20.)
· Usage: For the paper of 106 g/m2 to 135 g/m2,
when you want to conduct the staple of 30 sheets
(Maximum) and the fold & staple of 20 sheets
(Maximum) with the FS612, change this setting to
"1".
Note
· For the panel display section (the item for
weight and the adjustment range +2 to +20)
which is related to this handling, there is no
change as with when the setting is "0".
I-143
· When you change this setting to "1", the jam

and the paper alignment fault possibly occur.
60 2 Switch the SD-513 loading limit detection of the • 0: Continuously output 8 sets 0 0 0
tri-fold tray (only 5 sheets set) • 1: Same with 1- to 4-sheet
∙ Function: Switches how to detect the loading set (Some sheets are exited
limit of the tri-fold tray (only 5 sheets set). after the paper full sensor is
∙ Usage: Select "1" when you want to output 9 or activated.)
more sets of the tri-fold tray in succession.
Note
∙ Loading 9 sets of the tri-fold tray (5 sheets
set) is not guaranteed. The tri-fold set
possibly falls from the exit tray.
60 3 Changing the maximum number of SD-513 • 0: 50 sheets, 49 sheets + 1 1 1 ("0" in
saddle stitching sheets (Default setting for cover paper (50 g/m2 to 256 Europe)
Europe: 0) g/m2), 44 sheets + cover
· Function: Switches the maximum number of paper (257 g/m2 to 300 g/
saddle stitching sheets (other than color paper, m2)
coated paper) that is 62 g/m2 to 91 g/m2 and 182 • 1: 35 sheets, 34 sheets +
mm or more in the FD direction. cover paper (50 g/m2 to 256
· Usage: When you want to increase the g/m2), 29 sheets + cover
maximum number of saddle stitching sheets paper (257 g/m2 to 300 g/
(other than color paper, coated paper) that is 62 m2)
g/m2 to 91 g/m2, and 182 mm or longer in the FD
direction, change this setting to "0".
Note
· The number of sheets that is available when
this setting is "0" is not possible.
· When you change this setting to "0", a
staple error could occur.
60 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
60 5 Envelope quick mode prohibition moderation • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Prints envelopes in the quick mode. • 1: Enabled
· Usage: To print envelopes at high speed,
change to "1".
Note
paper passage is not assured.
60 6 Envelope lower tray of main body prohibition • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
moderation for the size of 90 mm x 205 mm • 1: Enabled
· Function: Makes the lower tray of the main
body available to print envelopes. To output the
envelope of which the size is 90 mm x 205 mm,
attach the envelope kit for the size of 90 mm x
205 mm.
· Usage: To use the lower tray of the main body
to print envelopes, change to "1".
Note
· When you use the lower tray of the main
body to print envelopes, the paper passage is
not assured.
60 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
61 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
61 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
61 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
61 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
61 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-144
61 5 Apply the background removal (default setting) to • 0: Disabled 0 0 0

the scan application • 1: Enabled
· Function: When you use Y-Soft SafeQ (scan
application), aplly the background removal that
you configured to the main body to the scan
application.
The applied background removal setting is the
default. You can change the background removal
default by [Utility] - [User Setting] - [Default] -
[Scan Default Setting] - [Quality Adjustment].
· Usage: When you want to apply the background
removal of the main body to the scan application,
61 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
61 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
62 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
62 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
62 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
62 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
62 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
62 5 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
62 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
62 7 Stop button activation on the normal mode • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
screen • 1: Enabled
· Function: Enables you to stop the job by the
stop button on any normal mode screens.
· Usage: When you want to stop the job on any
screens, change this setting to "1".
63 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
63 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
63 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
63 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
63 4 Tone curves adjustment screen switching • 0: Depending on how you 0 0 0
· Function: There are 2 types of adjustment enter the adjustment screen
screen for the tone curves adjustment of the job • 1: Adjustment screen for
ticket edition, to use in a touch panel, and to use mouse at all times
a mouse. This DIPSW configures the display
method of the adjustment screen.
<When this setting is "0">
When you click [Tone curve adjustment] with the
mouse, the adjustment screen for mouse is
displayed. When you touch [Tone curve
adjustment], the adjustment screen for the touch
panel is displayed.
<When this setting is "1">
When the mouse is connected, the adjustment
screen for mouse is displayed at all times
regardless of how you entered the adjustment
screen.
· Usage: To display the adjustment screen for
mouse at all times, change to this setting to "1".
63 5 Postcard enable and disable switching setting • 0: Enabled 0 1 1
• 1: Disabled
I-145
· Function: Hide the [Postcard] button in the size

setting of the main body and PFU. Then
configure the postcard size not to be detected on
the bypass tray.
· Usage: When the postcard is not in use, change
this setting to "1".
63 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
63 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
64 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
64 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
64 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
64 3 1 to N and face up print at 2-sided printing • 0: 1 to N and Face down 0 0 0
· Function: When you use the IC-605, this • 1: 1 to N and Face up
DIPSW changes the paper exit setting when the
Plug-in driver setting is configured as follows.
- Select [2-Sided].
- Select [Face Up].
- Do not select [N to 1].
When this setting is configured to "0", the
machine prints as 1 to N and face down which
differs from the setting. When this setting is
configured to "1", the machine prints as 1 to N
and face up as configured in the setting.
· Usage: When you want to print as 1 to N and
face up during 2-sided printing, configure this
setting to "1".
64 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
64 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
64 6 Size automatic detection at paper profile setting • 0: Enable Size automatic 0 0 0
· Function: Size automatic detection is disabled detection
at paper profile setting. When the setting size of • 1: Disable Size automatic
the paper profile and the paper size in the tray detection
are different, the message appears on the
operation panel.
"0": After the paper profile (standard size setting)
is configured to the tray, you place the different
size paper in the tray. Then, the paper profile
name is changed to the paper type name.
"1": Because the size automatic detection is
inactive, the paper profile name is not changed.
∙ Usage: When you want to fix the paper size at
the paper profile setting, change this setting to
"1".
64 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
65 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
65 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
65 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
65 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
65 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
65 5 Releasing the restriction of GP-501 punch and • 0: Do not release the 0 0 0
staple restriction
· Function: Releases the restriction of the • 1: Release the restriction
GP-501 punch and staple.
I-146

to use both punch and staple function for the job
from the printer.
Note
· This function is only for the IC (printer), so it
does not work on the copy and job ticket edit
screen.
· When this setting is "1", it is out of
specification.
65 6 How to stop when DF double feed is detected • 0: Stop after the original is 0 0 0
· Function: Selects how to stop the operation output
when several sheets of paper are detected at the • 1: Stop immediately because
ADF original reading. of JAM
· Usage: The double feed detection message
appears when this setting is "0". With this setting
"1", the JAM screen appears and the JOB can
continue after the JAM is released.
65 7 Switching the selection button for output paper • 0: [ON(Coated paper)], 0 0 0
separation setting in electric charge control unit [ON(Uncoated paper)],
· Function: Integrates the ON (coated paper) [OFF], [Manual]
button on [MACHINE screen] - [Paper Setting] - • 1: [ON], [OFF], [Manual]
[Expert Adjustment] - [Output Paper Separation
Setting] and the ON (paper that is not coated)
button.
∙ Usage: Change this setting to "1" when you
want to simplify the user operation.
66 0 Faulty part isolation: IQ-501 scanner unit/1 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
66 1 Faulty part isolation: IQ-501 scanner unit/2 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
66 2 Faulty part isolation: IQ-501 colorimeter unit • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
66 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
66 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
66 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
66 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
66 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
67 0 Display of the control panel on receiving the PS • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
error page • 1: Enabled
· Function: When you receive the PS error page,
the alert (screen for selecting cancel or forcible
output) appears on the operation panel.
When you receive the error page after the job
print starts, the alert appears at the timing of
receiving the error page. When you receive the
error page before the job print starts, the alert
appears before the 1st page is printed.
· Usage: When you want to detect the job
including the PS error page, change this setting
to "1".
Note
· When [Controller Setting] - [Direct Print
Setting] - [PS Setting] - [PS Error Print] is
"ON", this setting becomes available.
67 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
67 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
67 3 1 page original at the duplex output setting • 0: Duplex paper path 0 0 0
· Function: Changes the paper path when you • 1: Simplex paper path
send 1 page job from the driver with the duplex
setting.
I-147
∙ Usage: When you want to improve the

productivity for sending 1 page job by the duplex
output setting, change this setting to "1".
Note
· The target of this DIPSW is only the job that
is sent from the printer driver. The hold job is
not the target of this DIPSW.
67 4 Switch of the fusing jam confirmation screen • 0: Display 0 0 0
· Function: After a jam of J-3102 or J-3106 is • 1: Not display
cleared, a confirmation screen appears on the
touch panel. This confirmation screen shows the
procedure to check the remained paper in the
fusing unit. This DIPSW switches whether to
show the confirmation screen or not.
· Usage: To hide the confirmation screen,
configure to "1".
Note
· The display of the confirmation screen is
recommended.
· When the confirmation screen is hid, explain
to the user that checking remained paper is
required each time jam is cleared.
· When this setting is "0", change DIPSW67-5
to "1". The confirmation screen appears only
when DIPSW67-5 is "1".
67 5 Switch of the fusing jam process screen • 0: For no inspection window 1 1 1
· Function: New model of the fusing unit has a • 1: For inspection window
inspection window to check the remained paper.
When the inspection window is attached to the
fusing unit, there is a procedure to check the
remained paper through the inspection window in
the jam process screen of J-3102 or J-3106. This
DIPSW switches the jam process screen.
· Usage: When you use the fusing unit that does
not have a inspection window, change this setting
to "0".
67 6 Reverse 2 repeat + Date + Page + Set • 0: Prohibition 0 0 0
Numbering restriction release • 1: Release the restriction
· Function: Performs the reverse 2 repeat when
3 stamps (Date/Time, Page, Set Numbering) are
specified.
to perform the reverse 2 repeat with 3 stamps
(Date/Time, Page, Set Numbering) specified.
67 7 Switching the SafeQ (ScanD) continuous reading • 0: Not display the continuous 0 0 0
· Function: Enables the continuous reading with reading button
the ScanD application. • 1: Display the continuous
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when the reading button
continuous reading is performed with the ScanD
application.
When this setting is "1", the continuous reading
button appears on the reading setting screen for
ScanD.
68 0 Display of the paper setting and the profile list • 0: Not display 0 0 0
button on the job ticket edit screen • 1: Display
· Function: Displays the paper setting and the
profile list button on the ticket edit screen
(including the wait screen).
to display the paper setting and the profile list
button on the ticket edit screen (including the
weight screen).
68 1 Switching the ID&Print operation • 0: ID&Print OFF 0 0 0
· Function: If a confidential folder matches with • 1: ID&Print ON
the login user name after you log in with the IC
card, moves it to the corresponding confidential
folder.
If no confidential folder matches with the user
name, you can log in without special steps.
· Usage: A confidential folder matches with the
login user name after you log in with the IC card
and you want to move it to the corresponding
confidential folder. In this case, select "1" on this
setting.
I-148
68 2 Default setting of size specify check box at profile • 0: Size specification check 0 0 0
registration box is not checked
· Function: Specifies the default setting whether • 1: Size specification check
to enable the size specification at the profile box is checked
registration.
perform the profile registration without the size
specification. Select "1" when you register the
size that is configured to the tray.
68 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
68 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
68 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
68 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
68 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
69 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
69 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
69 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
69 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
69 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
69 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
69 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
69 7 Activation or deactivation of the image centering • 0: Invalid (Deactivates 0 0 0
function when the size of the original is larger centering)
than that of the transfer paper. • 1: Valid (Activates centering)
· Function: Activates the centering function even
when you use the image centering on the job
ticket edit screen for the data size that is larger
than the paper size.
Note
For activating the centering function, change
this setting to "1" and select [Center] in
[Quality Adjustment] - [Image Position].
70 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
70 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
70 2 IQ-501 Near dust detection message • 0: No message 0 0 0
· Function: When a dust is detected on the • 1: Displays message
scanner glass of IQ-501, the message is
displayed. This DIPSW switches the display of
the near dust detection message. (Near dust
detection: Dust that does not interrupt scanning is
detected.)
want to display the near dust detection message.
70 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
70 4 Switch the count method of the blank page • 0: Black counting 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the count method of the • 1: Not counting
blank page.
· Usage: When you do not want to count the
blank page as the print page, change this setting
to "1".
Note
I-149
· The page that unites the blank page and the

printed page (2 in 1 and others) is not the
target of this setting.
70 5 Pitch adjustment of 4 repeat images at • 0: Pitch adjustment between 0 0 0
Printgroove 4 images is not available.
· Function: Changes the image position standard The image position standard
when the 4 repeat jobs are sent from Printgroove. is on the upper left.
You can also adjust the pitches between 4 • 1: Pitch adjustment between
images. 4 images is available. The
You can adjust the pitch between left and right by image position standard is
[Right Shift] of [Margin Layout] and the pitch on the center of each image.
between up and down by [Down Shift]. The pitch
becomes wider in + direction, narrower in -
direction.
∙ Usage: When the 4 times size of the original
and the paper size are different, change this
setting to "1" and align the image standard
position on the back and front.
Note
· The target of this DIPSW is the only 4 repeat
jobs that are sent from Printgroove.
70 6 Scanning function controller switching • 0: Scanning function of the 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW configures which outsourced controller is
scanning function to use; KM controller or used.
outsourced controller. • 1: Scanning function of the
· Usage: When the outsourced controller is KM controller is used.
connected and you use the scanning function of
the KM controller, change this setting to "1".
Note
· This DIPSW becomes available when
DIPSW40-7 is “0” and DIPSW70-7 is "1".
70 7 KM controller activation • 0: KM controller is not 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW configures whether to activated
activate the KM controller when the outsourced • 1: KM controller is activated
controller is connected.
· Usage: If you want to use the function (scan,
OpenAPI, IWS) of the KM controller when the
outsourced controller is connected, change this
setting to "1".
Note
· This DIPSW becomes available when
DIPSW40-7 is "0".
· Refer to DIPSW70-6 as well when you

Japan Inch Metric
71 0 Envelope feed (Target: 1st tandem PF-707m • 0: Unable 0 0 0
upper tray, PF-602m upper tray) • 1: Enable
· Function: This DIPSW enables the envelope
feed from the target tray.
want to feed envelopes from the target tray.
Note
· Envelope feed from the target tray is not
guaranteed.
PF-602m upper tray: Main scan 90.0 mm* to
330.2 mm, sub scan 182.0 mm to 487.0 mm
* When you feed the paper that is less than 100
mm, the envelop assist guide is necessary. When
you feed the paper that is less than 100 mm, the
mis-centering correction control is not performed.
I-150
71 1 Envelope feed (Target: 1st tandem PF-707m • 0: Unable 0 0 0

middle tray, PF-602m lower tray) • 1: Enable
Note
guaranteed.
PF-602m lower tray: Main scan 90.0 mm* to
330.2 mm, sub scan 148.0 mm to 487.0 mm
* When you feed the paper that is less than 100
mm, the envelop assist guide is necessary. When
you feed the paper that is less than 100 mm, the
mis-centering correction control is not performed.
71 2 Envelope feed (Target: 2nd tandem PF-707m • 0: Unable 0 0 0
upper tray) • 1: Enable
Note
guaranteed.
middle tray) • 1: Enable
Note
guaranteed.
lower tray) • 1: Enable
Note
guaranteed.
71 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
71 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
71 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
72 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
72 1 Bypass tray envelope feed (MB-508) • 0: Impossible 0 0 0
· Function: This DIPSW enables the envelope • 1: Enable
feed from the MB-508 bypass tray.
Note
Envelope feed from the target tray is not
guaranteed.
72 2 LCT envelope feed (Configuration in tandem of • 0: Impossible 0 0 0
LU-202XLm) • 1: Enable
feed from the LU-202XLm with configuration in
tandem (not directly connected to the main body).
Note
Envelope feed from the target tray with
configuration in tandem is not guaranteed.
72 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-151
72 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
72 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
72 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
72 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
73 0 FS612/531 (Entry) Envelope output to the main • 0: Unable 0 0 0
tray • 1: Enable
· Function: Enables to output the paper to the
main tray of FS612/531 when EF-103 is used.
to output the envelopes to the main tray of
FS612/531.
Note
· The feed from the paper exit tray that is
moderated when this setting is "1" is not
guaranteed.
73 1 IQ-501 Paper size of Auto Image Adjustment • 0: Particular standard size 0 0 0
· Function: The paper size that can be used for paper, custom size paper
IQ-501 Auto Image Adjustment is specified. whose size is specified size
Some standard size paper cannot be used even if or larger
its length in the sub scan direction is the specified • 1: Paper whose size is
size or larger. This DIPSW switches the available specified size or larger
paper size.
want to use standard size paper whose length in
the sub scan direction is a specified size or larger
(Example: A3, 11 x 17).
Note
· For details, refer to I.4.5.20 IQ-501 Paper size
of Auto Image Adjustment.
73 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
73 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
73 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
73 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
73 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
73 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
74 0 Switch the color mode display of the hold job • 0: Display the color mode of 0 0 0
· Function: When you select the job in [Job List] - the 1st page
[Hold Job], the color mode of the job appears in • 1: Display the higher priority
the "selecting job" area. This setting changes the color mode in the color
color mode that is displayed in the "selecting job" modes of all the pages
area.
Display priority (preferential order) when this
setting is "1": Full color, mono color (black + 1
color, 2 color print by the 1 color except K),
yellow, magenta, cyan, red, blue, green, black.
· Usage: When you want to distinguish the job
including the mono color page or the full color
page, change this setting to "1".
74 1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
74 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
74 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
74 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-152
74 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
74 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
74 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
75 0 Switch HM humidifying amount display • 0: [High] (high humidifying 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the display of [High] for the amount) is displayed. (For
humidifying amount in [RU Curl Adjustment]. coated paper 136 g/m2 or
· Usage: When an aqua conditioner (service tool more)
that is used exclusively with the color machine) is • 1: [High] (high humidifying
used, select “1” in this setting. amount) is always grayed
Note out.
· Humidifying amount [High] only functions in
the duplex mode.
· When an aqua conditioner is used, select
“1” in DIPSW201-5, too. When a humidifying
amount [High] is selected at the time of use of
an aqua conditioner, passing paper can cause
a jam.
75 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
75 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
75 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
75 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
75 5 Prohibition release on insertion from the PI when • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
the FS-612 or the FS-531 is installed • 1: Enabled
· Function: Releases the prohibition on use of the
following items when the paper is inserted from
the PI (lower tray).
· FS-612, FS-531: SRA3, 13 x 19, and custom
(maximum size: 331 mm x 487 mm) that are
output to the main tray.
· FS-612, FS-531: SRA3, 13 x 19, and custom
(maximum size: 331 mm x 487 mm) that are
inserted from the PI.
· FS-612: SRA3 and custom (maximum width in
main scan direction: 320 mm) that are "Fold &
Staple" or "Multi Half Fold".
Note
· When you insert 13 x 19 from the PI (lower
tray) with the FS-612 and the paper has run
out, no-feed jam occurs. Then place enough
paper.
· Change the setting of the DIPSW27-0 to "1"
when you want to use the fold & staple
function and multi half fold function for SRA3
or custom size paper (up to 320 mm x 450
mm) in print jobs from the controller.
· When this setting is "1", the performance is
not guaranteed.
75 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
75 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
76 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
76 1 IQ-501 Solution display for reading error • 0: Not display 0 0 0
· Function: When a reading error occurs while • 1: Display
the IQ-501 conducts each adjustment, the job
stops and an error message is displayed. This
DIPSW displays the solution in addition to the
error message.
want to display the solution.
I-153
76 2 IQ-501 Adjustment Interval lower limit of • 0: 100 sheet 0 0 0

Periodical Both Sides Adj • 1: 30 sheet
· Function: The Periodical Both Sides
Adjustment of the IQ-501 is performed by the
number of printed sheets that the Adjustment
Interval specified. This DIPSW switches the lower
limit of the Adjustment Interval.
want to perform the Periodical Both Sides
Adjustment at an interval of less than 100 sheets.
76 3 Switch to display or not display the Emboss • 0: Not display 0 0 0
Transfer Unit Replacement screen • 1: Display
· Function: Displays the [Transfer Unit
Replacement] button*1 on the [Expert
Adjustment] screen in [Utility] - [Administrator
Setting] - [System Setting].
*1: When the user uses the emboss transfer unit
(intermediate transfer/H), use the [Transfer Unit
Replacement] button.
· Usage: The [Transfer Unit Replacement] button
is only displayed in the following two situations.
Only then can it be replaced to an emboss
transfer unit (intermediate transfer/H).
· When the DIPSW76-3 is "1" and DIPSW15-0 is
"0" (ORU-M cannot be used).
· When the DIPSW76-3 is "1" and DIPSW15-0 is
"0", but the target intermediate transfer unit for
ORU-M replacement is "Disabled".
[Service Mode] - [ORU-M Setting] - [ORU-M Item/
Life Setting]
Note
· For the usage and the setting of the emboss
unit, refer to I.4.5.17 Restrictions on use of
parts for textured paper.
76 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
76 5 Remove the scan divided sending prohibition at • 0: With prohibition (cannot 0 0 0
the fee collection divide to send)
Function: Makes the scan divided sending • 1: Without prohibition (can
available at the fee collection with the application divide to send)
for authentication.
to make the scan divided sending available at the
fee collection with the application for
authentication.
Note: When you send the divided data, all of
the files are charged after sending them.
Thus, the divided data that had been sent
before you deactivate the main power are not
charged.
76 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
76 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
77 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
77 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
77 2 Scanner screen reset button • 0: Only reset mode 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the operation at the • 1: Reset mode + move to the
moment you press the reset button on the address selecting screen
scanner screen.
want to go back to the address selecting screen
after you reset "Setting Value" and "Address".
Note
When you change this setting "1" and press
the reset button, all of the addresses are
canceled.
77 3 Jammed booklet recovery in SD-506/SD-513 • 0: Disabled (Page recovery) 0 0 0
• 1: Enabled (Booklet
recovery)
I-154
· Function: This DIPSW configures the recovery

method when a jam occurs at the saddle stitch,
multi-fold, or multi tri-fold job in SD-506 and
SD-513.
want to recover the job as a booklet.
Note
• When this setting is "1", the jam is not
solved until every sheet inside the SD-506 and
SD-513 is removed.
· The following firmware must be installed.
(SD-506: G00-90 or more, SD-513: GUA-20 or
more)
77 4 Reset or do not reset to offset the output at the • 0: Not reset 0 0 0
sub tray output • 1: Reset
· Usage: During performing the offset output to
the main tray of the LS-506, FS-531, FS-612, or
FS-532, the offset cannot be performed due to
the interruption of the sub tray output job. When
you want to avoid this phenomenon, change this
setting to "1".
Note
Supported only when a KM controller is used.
77 5 Switch the timing to stop the printing when you • 0: Stop immediately 0 0 0
press the FS-532 removing button • 1: Stop at a break between
Function: Changes the stop timing when you the copy set
press the FS-532 pause button or restart button.
Usage: When you want to stop at a break
between the copy set, change this setting to "1".
Note
Supported only when a KM controller is used.
77 6 Perform or do not perform the color density • 0: OFF 0 0 0
control (periodical adjustment) when there is no • 1: ON
sub tray to output to
· Usage: The system configuration does not
include the sub tray to output to when you want to
perform the periodical adjustment of the color
density control. In this case, change this setting
to "1".
NOTE
· This DIPSW is available when [Periodical
Adj. Execution] of the color density control is
configured to [ON].
· The color density adjustment chart is mixed
into the user's job. Thus, tell customers to
remove the chart during operation.
77 7 Control method when an image is over the • 0: Cut the image that is over 0 0 0
adjoined surface by the page shift the self image area
Function: Conducts the same performance as • 1: Not cut the image that is
the shift on the both sides adjustment with using over the self image area
each shift function of the ticket edit.
Usage: Conduct the image shift of the 2 repeat +
the crop marked job on the Job Ticket screen and
perform the both sides adjustment.
Note: Shift in the same direction and by the
same amount. When you shift sheets in the
direction so that the two pages are
overlapped or when you shift them by the
different amount, the both sides adjustment
does not work correctly.
78 0 For printing large size label paper • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Enables to output the banner label • 1: Enabled
paper (including banner paper) to the main tray
when the RU-518, FS-532, and LU-202XL or
LU-202SLm are installed. Also, expands the
LU-202XL or 202XLm custom size to 177.5 mm x
182 mm at minimum.
· Usage: When you want to feed the banner label
paper, change this setting to "1".
Note
When the setting is "1", the performance is
not guaranteed.
78 1 Keep applied function selecting status • 0: Keep 0 0 0
• 1: Not Keep
I-155
· Function: Clears the applied function advanced

setting of the copier when you press the reset
button.
· Usage: When you want to clear the applied
function advanced setting of the copier with the
reset button, change this setting to "1".
78 2 Prohibit the job output for only blank inserted • 0: ON 0 0 0
paper • 1: OFF
· Function: Deletes the text of the job on the
ticket edit screen to prohibit the job output only
for blank inserted paper through the main body.
· Usage: When you do not want to feed the job
only for blank sheets, change this setting to "1".
78 3 Package ISW start-up • 0: OFF 0 0 0
· Function: Executes the package ISW by a USB • 1: ON
memory
· Usage: When you want to execute package
ISW, change this setting to "1".
Note
Configure the setting of DIPSW40-2 to "1"
when this setting is "1".
78 4 Envelope bypass tray 144.0 mm output • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
prohibition relaxation • 1: Enabled
· Function: Extend the minimum length in the
sub scan direction of the bypass tray until 144
mm.
· Usage: When you print envelopes C6 (162 mm
x 114 mm), change this setting to "1".
Note
Be sure to output the envelope while the flap
is open (162.0 mm x 144.0 mm).
78 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
78 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
78 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
79 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
79 1 Faulty part isolation: RU-518 de-curler function • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Unusable
79 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
79 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
79 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
79 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
79 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
79 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
80 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
80 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
80 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
80 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
80 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
80 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-156
80 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
80 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
81 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
81 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
81 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
81 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
81 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
81 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
81 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
81 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
82 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
82 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
82 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
82 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
82 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
82 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
82 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
82 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
83 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
83 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
83 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
83 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
83 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
83 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
83 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
83 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
84 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
84 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-157
• 1: -
84 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
84 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
84 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
84 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
84 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
84 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
85 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
85 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
85 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
85 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
85 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
85 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
85 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
85 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
86 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
86 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
86 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
86 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
86 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
86 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
86 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
86 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
87 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
87 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
87 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
87 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
87 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
87 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
87 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-158
87 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
88 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
88 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
88 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
88 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
88 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
88 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
88 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
88 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
89 0 Default valid object in the ticket edit tone curve • 0: Current Page 0 0 0
adjustment • 1: All Pages
· Function: Configures [All Pages] as the default
valid object for [Tone Curve Adj.] in [JOB LIST] -
[Hold Job] - [Job Ticket].
89 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
89 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
89 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
89 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
89 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
89 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
89 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
90 0 Switching the paper setting after the Max. Dens. • 0: Keep the paper setting 0 0 0
Initial Auto Adj. and the Max. Density Auto Adj. after the adjustment
· Function: When you enter the print mode of the • 1: Return to the paper
Max. Dens. Initial Auto Adj. and the Max. Density setting before the adjustment
Auto Adj., the paper setting of the tray
automatically switches to the setting at the
maximum density registration. Configures
whether to keep the paper setting that
automatically switched as the paper setting of the
tray, even after the adjustment completes.
· Usage: When you want to limit the keeping of
the paper setting that automatically switched to
only during the adjustment, configure this setting
to "1".
90 1 Synchronize the user authentication and account • 0: Not allows to interlock 0 0 0
track for the outsourced controller • 1: Allows to interlock
· Usage: You connect the outsourced controller
and configure the user authentication to "External
Server Authentication" and the account track to
"ON". In this case, when you want to synchronize
them, change this setting to "1".
Note
It is not available from the command work
station.
90 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
90 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-159
90 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
90 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
90 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
90 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
91 0 Screen after you press the new registration • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
button for the paper setting • 1: Enabled
· Usage: When you want to register the paper
setting specifying the arbitrary profile at the new
registration of the paper setting, change this
setting to "1".
Note
It is possible to rewrite the registration if you
specify the registered profile that is displayed
at the time you configure this setting to "1".
91 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
91 2 Prohibition release of saddle stitching (spine • 0: Prohibition 0 0 0
corner forming) + 2 creases • 1: Release prohibition
(advanced settings only for 2
creases with saddle stitching
+ spine corner forming)
91 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
91 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
91 5 Vertical and horizontal zooming for copying • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: In [COPY] - [Zoom], enlarges or • 1: Enabled
reduces the vertical and horizontal magnifications
of an original respectively. The setting range of
magnification is from 0.250 to 4.000.
want to use the vertical and horizontal zooming.
91 6 Embossed paper size prohibition for the PF-707m • No prohibition: 91-7=0, 0 1 0
7 tray 91-6=0 0 0 1
· Function: Releases the prohibition on the size • Paper with a main scanning
of the embossed paper that is fed to the PF-707m width that is less than
tray. 250.1mm, and a sub scan
· Usage: Change this DIPSW when you want to width that is less than 180.1
prohibit or release the prohibition of the size of mm is prohibited: 91-7=0,
the embossed paper that is fed to the tray. 91-6=1
Note • Paper with a main scanning
When the prohibition on the size of the paper width that is less than
fed is released, the feed is not guaranteed. 205.1mm, and a sub scan
width that is less than 180.1
mm is prohibited: 91-7=1,
91-6=0
• -: 91-7=1, 91-6=1
92 0 Embossed paper feed tray prohibition control for • 0: Prohibition 0 0 0
the main unit tray 1 • 1: No prohibition
· Function: Enables embossed paper to be fed
from the main unit tray (upper tray).
to use the main unit tray (upper tray).
Note
The feeding of the embossed paper that is fed
when this setting is "1" is not guaranteed.
the main unit tray 2 • 1: No prohibition
from the main unit tray (lower tray).
I-160

to use the main unit tray (lower tray).
Note
the PF-602 upper tray • 1: No prohibition
· Function: Enables embossed paper feed from
the PF-602m tray (upper tray).
to use the PF-602m tray (upper tray).
Note
the PF-602 lower tray • 1: No prohibition
· Function: Prohibits embossed paper to be fed
from the PF-602m tray (lower tray).
· Usage: When you want to prohibit embossed
paper from being fed to the tray, select "0" in this
setting.
all the PF-707m trays • 1: No prohibition
from all the PF-707m trays (1st to 3rd tandem, all
levels).
to use all the PF-707m trays (1st to 3rd tandem,
all levels).
(Normally, paper can be passed through the
lower tray of the 1st tandem.)
Note
(Excluding the lower tray of the 1st tandem)
the directly connected LU • 1: No prohibition
· Function: Prohibits the feeding of embossed
paper from the LU-202m, LU-202XL, or
LU-202XLm that is directly connected to the main
unit.
· Usage: When you want to prohibit embossed
paper from being fed to the tray, select "0" in this
setting.
the bypass tray • 1: No prohibition
from the MB-506 or MB-508 bypass tray.
to use the MB-506 or MB-508 bypass tray.
Note
the tandem of LU • 1: No prohibition
· Function: Prohibits the feeding of embossed
paper from the LU-202XLm that is not directly
connected to the main unit.
· Usage: When you want to allow the paper to be
passed through, select "1" in this setting.
Note
93 0 Display of the Emboss Transfer icon on the • 0: Display 1 1 1
Machine screen • 1: Not display
· Function: Displays the Emboss Transfer icon
on the Machine screen.
· Usage: When you change the intermediate
transfer belt to "the intermediate transfer belt/H"
or "the intermediate transfer belt/C" and want to
emphasize the connection to the emboss transfer
unit on the Machine screen, change this setting to
"0".
I-161
93 1 Enable or disable the Single Color Billing (printing • 0: OFF 0 0 0

ratio) Counter • 1: ON
· Function: Enables single color for color
classification of the printing ratio billing counter.
· Usage: When you want to manage the color
mode in the 3 classifications of full color, single
color, and black, change the setting to "1".
Note
This setting is valid when the DIPSW33-7
(billing counter setting) is "1".
93 2 Expert Adjustment - Open all trays for banner • 0: OFF (only the LU or MB 0 0 0
paper oscillation setting tray)
· Function: Enables the oscillation setting for • 1: ON (all trays open)
banner paper in "Paper Setting" - "Expert
Adjustment" for all levels and all sizes of the
paper feed tray.
· Usage: When you want to perform the
oscillation setting for banner paper using the
paper feed tray (all levels, all sizes), change the
setting to "1".
Note
· When this setting is "0: Default", the
oscillation setting for banner paper is
available for only the MB-506, MB-508,
LU-202XL, and LU-202XLm (in a direct
connection or tandem). (Banner paper 487.8
mm or more in the FD direction are the
target.)
· The feed from the tray and of the paper size
that are added as targets when this setting is
"1" are not guaranteed.
93 3 Embossed paper envelope setting • 0: Prohibition 0 0 0
· Function: When embossed paper can be used, • 1: No prohibition
enable "Texture Depth Setting" in the [Change
Individual Set] screen of [Paper Setting].
· Usage: When you want to enable the Texture
Depth Setting, select "1" in this setting.
93 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
93 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
93 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
93 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
94 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
94 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
94 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
94 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
94 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
94 5 Print start reservation during WUP of the color • 0: Normal 0 0 0
density manual control • 1: Enables the print start
· Function: Makes it possible for the user to reservation during the warm-
press the print start button during the warm-up of up.
the color density manual control.
want to reserve the print start during the warm-
up.
94 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
94 7 HM-103 Prohibition release of humidifier setting • 0: Prohibition 1 1 1
• 1: No prohibition
I-162
· Function: Specify whether to perform the

humidity treatment on coated paper under 135 g/
m2.
· Usage: When you want to use the humidifier
setting for coated paper under 135 g/m2, change
this setting to "1: No prohibition". When you want
to use the humidifier setting for coated paper
above 135 g/m2 only, change this setting to "0:
Prohibition".
Note
Paper feeding is not assured for coated paper
under 80 g/m2. When you specify the
humidifier setting for coated paper under 80
g/m2 to "1: No prohibition", moisture possibly
remains on the paper surface. In that case,
wrapping jam to the conveyance roller
possibly occurs.
95 0 Switch of the adjustment method for the "scan • 0: Only adjusts the back side 1 1 1
measurement" of the both sides adjustment position according to the
· Function: Switches the adjustment method to front side position. (Standard
either of these: The front and back positions are method)
automatically adjusted (this adjustment is the • 1: Adjusts both of the front
same as the both sides automatic adjustment of and back side positions to an
the IQ-501), or only the back side position is ideal position (this
adjusted according to the front side position in the adjustment is the same as
standard setting. the both sides automatic
· Usage: Change this setting to "0" when you adjustment of the IQ-501).
only want to adjust the back side position
according to the front side position as following
the standard workflow.
Note
The "scan measurement" is unavailable when
the IQ-501 is installed.
95 1 Switch of the displayed items on the finisher • 0: Not display 0 0 0
counter • 1: Display
· Function: Displays the count of [Counter of
Each Copy Mode] in the Service Mode on the
UTILITY screen. (Only the count of the currently
connected finisher)
want to display the count of the finisher on the
UTILITY screen.
95 2 Total counter display depending on the envelope • 0: Not display 0 0 0
size • 1: Display
· Function: Displays the total counters in the
Utility depending on the envelope size.
want to display each total counter of "Envelope1
Counter", "Envelope2 Counter", and "Envelope3
Counter" in the Utility.
Note
· This function is disabled when the
DIPSW33-7 is "1".
· Default of the size coefficient is "1".
However, it can be changed by STOP9 in
Service Mode.
95 3 Addition of the search conditions for registering, • 0: Screen, paper type 0 0 0
deleting, and obtaining the color density control • 1: Screen, paper type, paper
correction value weight
· Function: Displays "Weight" on the [MACHINE]
- [Adjustment] - [Quality Adjustment] - [Color
Density Control] - [Color Density Manual Control]
screen and adds "Weight" to the search
conditions of the correction value.
want to add "Weight" to the standard "Screen
Pattern" and “Paper Type” as correction
conditions for the color density control and the
auto image adjustment (gradation correction) of
the IQ-501.
95 4 Automatic separation of stapling after the staple • 0: OFF 0 0 0
limit is exceeded • 1: ON
I-163
· Function: Continues printing and stapling for

each staple limit even if the stapling is executed
over the staple limit.
want to continue printing and stapling even if the
stapling is executed over the staple limit.
Note
This DIPSW only works for flat stitching.
95 5 Loosening the prohibition on punched paper and • 0: Prohibition 0 0 0
PI insertion when the PI paper feeder is installed • 1: No prohibition
in the more downstream position than the punch
unit
· Function: Enables you to feed punched paper
from the PI paper feeder when the PI paper
feeder is installed in the more downstream
position than the punch unit.
want to feed punched paper from the PI paper
feeder in the following combinations.
· GP-501 + FS-532 (+ PI)
· GP-501 + FD-503
· GBC punch G2 + FS-532 (+ PI)
· GBC punch G2 + FD-503
Note
· When this setting is "1", the performance is
not guaranteed.
95 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
95 7 Switch of the method to detect an IQ-501 image • 0: Detects the error code 1 1 1
data abnormality (C-6B01)
· Function: Switches the method to detect an • 1: Detects the IQ-501
IQ-501 image data abnormality. reading error
When this setting is "1", the IQ-501 image data
abnormality is detected as an IQ-501 reading
error. The user can restart the job after removing
the paper.
When this setting is "0", the IQ-501 image data
abnormality is detected as the error code of
C-6B01.
· Usage: The IQ-501 image data abnormality is
detected as an IQ-501 reading error in the default
setting. This is because the abnormality is
occasionally caused by a sudden paper corner
folding. Change this setting to "0" when you want
to detect the IQ-501 image data abnormality as
the error code of C-6B01.
Note
If the IQ-501 reading error often occurs, press
[Help] - [Reading Error], and resolve the error
following the displayed instruction.
96 0 Prohibition moderation for HM humidifying • 0: Coated paper 136 g/m2 or 0 0 0
amount [High] more (However, when
· Function: Changes the range (paper type, DIPSW75-0 is "1", [High] is
paper weight) in which [RU Curl Adjustment] - always grayed out)
humidifying amount [High] can be selected. • 1: Coated paper of 106 g/m2
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" and select or more and uncoated paper
[High] when you want to increase the humidifying of 136 g/m2 or more
amount for coated paper (106 g/m2 or more) or
uncoated paper (136 g/m2 or more).
Note
"0".
· Humidifying amount [High] only functions in
the duplex mode.
96 1 Retention of an offset position until the next • 0: Not retained 0 0 0
switch timing • 1: Retained
· Function: Switches the paper exit position of
the offset [OFF] job when the offset [ON] job and
the offset [OFF] job are mixed. The target options
are the LS-506, OT-510, FS-531, FS-612, and
FS-532.
· Usage:
I-164
· When this setting is "1", the paper exit position

of the offset [OFF] job remains that of the last
offset [ON] job.
· When this setting is "0", the offset [OFF] job is
always output to the near side.
96 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
96 3 Gradation of scanned image • 0: Same as the "IP scan 0 0 0
· Function: Specifies the gradation of "IP scan black image gradation"
black image". function of the AccurioPress
· Usage: Select the image gradation that 6136 series
conforms to users requests. • 1: Same as the "IP scan
Note: black image gradation"
· The gradation is reflected after you function of the bizhub PRO
deactivate and activate the power. 1100
96 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
96 5 Enable or disable info sound for job completion • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Emits the info sound each time job • 1: Enabled
output (regardless of the job type) is completed.
Note
The conditions to emit the info sound is as
follows.
· Configure this setting to "1".
· [User Setting Menu] - [System Setting] -
[Operation/Info.Sound Setting] - [Volume
Setting] - [Speaker Sound] is [ON]
· [User Setting Menu] - [System Setting] -
[Operation/Info.Sound Setting] - [Info. Sound
Item Setting] - [For Sample Printing] is [Info.
Sound]
96 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
96 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
97 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
97 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
97 2 Switching whether the abnormality on the color • 0: Not determined as SC 0 0 0
density control is determined as SC. • 1: Determined as SC
· Function: Switches the setting to display the
SC (C-6B42, C-6B43) and stop the machine to be
enabled or disabled when an abnormality is
detected on the color density control.
want to acquire the log for analysis when an
abnormality is detected on the color density
control.
Note
· The C-6B43 is detected only when you use
the IQ-501.
97 3 Switching the value of the gamma curve • 0: Detects the C-6B43, and 0 0 0
abnormality detection Pb level and switching the C-6B42 detection level:
between activation and deactivation of the High
correction result error detection • 1: Not detects the C-6B43,
· Function: Switches whether to detect the and the C-6B42 detection
C-6B43 when an error occurs in the color density level: Low
control.
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" in the
following case: You want to prevent the machine
from detecting the C-6B43 and to loosen the
detection standard of the C-6B42 when an error
occurs in the color density control.
Note
· Change this setting and the DIPSW97-2 to
"1" when you want the system to detect an
error code of the only C-6B42.
· The C-6B43 is detected only when you use
the IQ-501.
I-165

small error of the C-6B42 cannot be detected.
97 4 Lower limit extension of the operating intervals of • 0: Disabled (Lower limit: 0 0 0
the color density control 100)
· Function: Extends the lower limit of the • 1: Enabled (Lower limit: 30)
operating intervals of the color density control.
want to change the lower limit of the setting page
number to "30 pages".
97 5 Color density control execution before jobs are • 0: OFF 0 0 0
output • 1: ON
· Function: Automatically executes color density
control before jobs are output.
Note
· When you configure this setting to "1", be
sure to configure [Adjustment Execution
Timing] to [Before Job Start] and
[Continuation Print] to [OFF].
· When you configure DIPSW97-5 and
DIPSW97-6 to "1", DIPSW97-5 has the higher
priority.
97 6 Periodical timing adjustment execution for the • 0: Disabled (Operates at 0 0 0
color density control regular page intervals)
· Function: Changes the method to determine • 1: Enabled (Operates every
the execution timing of the color density control. one hour)
want to change the execution timing of the color
density control from "the set page number" to
"every one hour".
Note
· When you configure DIPSW97-5 and
DIPSW97-6 to "1", DIPSW97-5 has the higher
priority.
· To operate at regular page intervals,
[Adjustment Interval] must be configured to
[ON].
97 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
98 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
98 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
98 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
98 3 IQ-501 White overwriting area of the crop mark • 0: Normal 0 0 0
background of Auto Image Adjustment • 1: Expand
· Function: To prevent a detection error of the
crop marks, the background of the crop marks is
overwritten in white. This DIPSW changes the
white overwriting area.
· Usage: To expand the white overwriting area,
Note
· For details, refer to I.4.5.21 IQ-501 White
overwriting area of the crop mark background of
Auto Image Adjustment.
98 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
98 5 PI manual sheet feeding for custom size paper • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: Enables the folding functions for • 1: Enabled
custom size paper by manual sheet feeding
(offline operation) from the PI that is mounted on
the FD-503.
Note
· The upper tray settings may change when
you deactivate and activate the power, or
when a job is output. Regardless of whether
the paper is a standard size or custom size,
be sure to perform PI manual sheet feeding
after you configure the Paper Setting.
I-166
98 6 Hide or display the close button in the screen • 0: Not display 0 0 0

displayed after log data is acquired with the • 1: Display
magic sequence
· Function: Displays the close button in the
screen that is displayed after you acquire log data
with the magic sequence.
98 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
99 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
99 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
99 2 UK-301 Combining of adjacent spots in the • 0: Combine spots 0 0 0
Automatic Inspection • 1: Do not combine spots
· Function: Adjacent spots are not detected as a
spot when the size of each spot is small. To
prevent this, adjacent spots are combined and
handled as one spot. When this setting is “1”,
spots are not combined.
· Purpose: When you want to detect adjacent
spots individually, change this setting to “1”.
Note
· If the spots are not combined, a large spot
that can be seen visually is possibly not
detected as a spot. (Example: A thin spot is
divided into multiple small spots and cannot
be detected as a spot.)
99 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
99 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
99 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
99 6 Life extension control for the parts counter limit • No life extension: 99-7=0, 0 0 0
7 value 99-6=0 0 0 0
· Function: Changes the replacement cycle of • Life extension 1: 99-7=0,
periodical maintenance parts. 99-6=1
For the conditions to change the counters for life • Life extension 2: 99-7=1,
extension 1 and life extension 2, refer to F.1.1.3 99-6=0
Life extension for the periodically replaced parts. • No life extension: 99-7=1,
· Usage: When you want to control the 99-6=1
replacement of parts that can still be used without
any quality or functional issues.
Note
· The specification value of the parts life does
not change.
100 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
100 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
100 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
100 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
100 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
100 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
100 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
100 7 Determine applicable models for corona life • 0: Applicable model 1 1 1
extension • 1: Not applicable model
· Function: Identifies when you replace a part
with one that extends the parts life of the
charging corona.
I-167

replace the following parts with a new one or add
one of the following parts.
· A50U1689: Replace the developing dust-proof
filter/1 with A50U1722
· A50U1695: Replace the developing dust-proof
filter/2 with A50U1723
· A50U1688: Replace the PH dust-proof filter with
A50U1721
· Add A50U9947 (after parts)
· Add A50U9948 (after parts)
Note
· This setting cannot be changed on mass-
produced machines whose factory default for
this setting is "1".

Japan Inch Metric
101 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
101 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
101 2 Toner band creation condition • For A4 width: 101-3=0, 0 0 0
3 · Function: Adjusts the creation intervals of the 101-2=0 0 0 0
toner band. • Productivity priority:
· Usage: When you give the priority to 101-3=0, 101-2=1
productivity in a high temperature environment • Restricted: 101-3=1,
and the small size print, widen the creation 101-2=0,
interval of the toner band to increase the • Restricted: 101-3=1,
productivity. However, the life of the transfer belt 101-2=1,
cleaning blade becomes shorter. (Refer to
I.4.5.11 Toner band creation condition
(productivity priority setting))
101 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
101 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
101 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
101 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
102 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
102 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
102 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
102 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
102 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
102 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
102 6 Toner band control target value when the emboss • 0%: 102-6=0, 102-7=0 0 0 0
7 unit is installed • 3%: 102-6=1, 102-7=0 0 0 0
· Function: Preferentially configures the toner • 5%: 102-6=0, 102-7=1
band control target value in either of the following • 5% (for embossed paper),
situations when the emboss setting is enabled 3% (for paper other than
regardless of the conventional settings embossed paper): 102-6=1,
DIPSW104-0 to DIPSW104-3. 102-7=1
1. When the emboss intermediate transfer
(intermediate transfer belt/H or intermediate
transfer belt/C) is installed and automatic
identification is performed.
2. When the DIPSW105-6 is "1".
I-168
· Usage: When you want to take it in priority to

configure the target value of the toner band
control, change this DIPSW setting.
Note
· When you change this setting, the life of the
transfer belt cleaning blade becomes shorter.
The productivity is slightly lowered.
103 0 Timing threshold of the intermediate transfer belt • 67.5 m: 103-1=0, 103-0=0 0 0 0
1 reverse control • 135m: 103-1=0, 103-0=1 0 0 0
· Function: Rotates the intermediate transfer belt • 108m: 103-1=1, 103-0=0
in the reverse direction according to the drive • 27m: 103-1=1, 103-0=1
distance timing of the intermediate transfer belt
which is configured with DIPSW.
· Usage: Increases the frequency of the
intermediate transfer belt reverse rotation when a
go-through occurs at the intermediate transfer
belt, and reduces the transfer belt cleaning blade
go-through.
Note
· For details, refer to I.4.5.14 Troubleshooting
for image errors.
103 2 Control change period setting when the drum unit • Until the lubricant applying 0 0 0
3 is replaced roller drives up to 5 km: 0 0 0
· Function: When you replace the drum unit to a 103-3=0, 103-2=0
new one, the amount of the lubricant application • Until the lubricant applying
is increased for a specified period. roller drives up to 2km:
In order to handle the image troubles that the 103-3=0, 103-2=1
increase of the lubricant cause, the following • Until the lubricant applying
controls are performed after the replacement of roller drives up to 8km:
the drum unit. 103-3=1, 103-2=0
· Toner band creation for discharge • At all times: 103-3=1,
· Increase of the reverse rotation amount of the 103-2=1
intermediate transfer belt
· Increase of the toner band supply frequency to
the transfer belt cleaning unit
Change the period of time that these controls are
performed.
· Usage: Use this setting when an image error
occurs after you replace the drum unit to a new
one.
Note
· When the DIPSW104-0, 1 is "0", the coverage
is 1.5%.
for image errors.
103 4 Weak rotate control of the intermediate transfer • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
belt • 1: Enabled
Function: Operates the intermediate transfer belt
once per an hour
Usage: Select "1" when you deactivate the
machine and leave it for a long time in the high
temperature and the high humidity environment
and a color registration error occurs soon after
the machine is activated. When the machine is
inactive for a long time in the high temperature
and the high humidity environment, winkle
appears on the intermediate transfer belt.
Therefore the belt cannot read the patch for the
image stabilization control normally. In this case,
the error codes of C-2840, C-2841, C-4521,
C-4522, C-4631, C-4632, C-4633, C-4634,
C-4641, C-4642, C-4643, C-4644, C-4661,
C-4662 and C-4663 occur.
Note
· When you change this setting to "1", select
"---min." on Auto Shut OFF from "Utility" -
"Power Save Function Setting".
machine operates except in the low
temperature and the low humidity
environment.
fusing temperature of the auto low power is
not executed. Therefore recovery time from
the auto low power is long.
I-169
103 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
103 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
103 7 2nd transfer unit pressure release setting on the • 0: Disabled 1 1 1
exit toner band creation • 1: Enabled
· Function: When the coverage setting of the exit
toner band (DIPSW104-0,1 or DIPSW104-2,3)
are on, releases the pressures of the 2nd transfer
unit and the intermediate transfer unit.
· Usage: The solid image on the intermediate
transfer belt that the coverage setting of the exit
toner band forms possibly causes the dirt on the
2nd transfer roller. Use this function when you
want to prevent the dirt on the back that the dirt of
the 2nd transfer roller causes.
Note
When you change this setting, the
productivity is slightly lowered.
for image errors.
104 0 Coverage setting for the exit toner band (Y, M, C, • 0%: 104-1=0, 104-0=0 0 0 0
1 Bk) • 3%: 104-1=0, 104-0=1 0 0 0
· Function: To avoid the deterioration of the • 1.5%: 104-1=1, 104-0=0
toner in low coverage, discharge the toner • 5%: 104-1=1, 104-0=1
according to the coverage of this DIPSW setting.
The default is 0% and no discharge.
· Usage: If the continuation print in the high
coverage (approximately 20% or more) is
conducted after the continuation print in the low
coverage (less than 3%), a lot of toner scatters
from the developing unit. In this case, dirt due to
the scattered toner, gray background, or an
image deterioration tends to occur. Therefore,
change this setting to prevent these troubles.
Note
· For the toner (Bk), the configured coverage
is applied only when DIPSW104-2,
DIPSW104-3 are configured to 0.
· For the toner (Bk), the toner amount that is
configured in DIPSW104-2,3 has the higher
priority in discharge.
belt cleaning blade becomes shorter. The
productivity is slightly lowered.
for image errors.
104 2 Coverage setting for the exit toner band • 0%: 104-3=0, 104-2=0 0 0 0
3 (exclusively for toners (Bk)) • 2%: 104-3=0, 104-2=1 0 0 0
· Function: To avoid the toner deterioration in • 3%: 104-3=1, 104-2=0
low coverage, discharge only the toner (Bk) • 5%: 104-3=1, 104-2=1
according to the coverage of this DIPSW setting.
The default is 0% and no discharge.
· Usage: If the continuation print in the high
coverage (approximately 50 % or more) is
conducted after the continuation print in the low
coverage, a lot of toner (Bk) scatters from the
developing unit. When the gray background
occurs due to the scattered toner (Bk), change
this setting.
Note
· Among the coverage that is configured in
DIPSW104-0,1, the coverage that is
configured in DIPSW104-2,3 discharges only
from the toner (Bk).
transfer belt cleaning blade becomes shorter.
The productivity is slightly lowered.
for image errors.
104 4 Slow conveyance speed of the developer • 0: Normal conveyance 0 0 0
· Function: Accelerate the slow conveyance speed
speed of the developer.
I-170
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when white • 1: Accelerate the

spots occurs by the developing screw pitch on conveyance speed of the
the rear trailing edge of the paper on the slow developer
printing.
Note
· Perform "Gamma Automatic Adjustment"
when you change the setting to "1".
104 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
104 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
104 7 Preventing the increase of the toner density • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: Prevents the toner density from • 1: Disabled
increasing excessively in the developing unit.
· Usage: Select "1" on this setting when the toner
density decreases.
Note
· When this setting is "1", an image error can
occur because of a screw mark.
105 0 Switches the cleaning amount at the paper • Normal: 105-1=0, 105-0=0 0 0 0
1 interval • Normal x 1.5 times: 105-1=0, 0 0 0
· Function: Switches number of times of the 105-0=1
cleaning operation for the 2nd transfer roller. • Normal x 2 times: 105-1=1,
· Usage: When the dirt occurs in a 75 mm cycle 105-0=0
on the back side of the paper, change this setting • Normal (same as 00):
to increase the number of times of the cleaning 105-1=1, 105-0=1
operation for the 2nd transfer roller.
Note
· When the number of times of the cleaning
operation for the 2nd transfer roller is
increased, the productivity is reduced.
105 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
105 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
105 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
105 5 Control of process stop during the option standby • 0: Process stop operation 0 0 0
· Function: Stops the main body operation when • 1: No process stop operation
the option operation takes time.
· Usage: To improve the productivity a little,
Note:
· If you select "1" in this setting, the durability
of the materials such as the drum or the
developer gets worse.
105 6 Display of Textured (Embossed) in the paper type • 0: Not display 0 0 0
when the machine uses the normal belt • 1: Display
· Function: Displays the "Textured button" in the
[Change Individual Set] screen of [Paper Setting]
when the machine uses the normal belt.
· Usage: When you use the normal intermediate
transfer belt and want to display the "Textured
button", select "1" in this setting.
Note
· In order to enhance the performance, it is
recommended that you replace the
intermediate transfer belt with the
intermediate transfer belt/H or the
intermediate transfer belt/C.
105 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
106 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
106 1 Envelope process speed decrease setting • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the envelope process • 1: Disabled
speed decrease setting.
· Usage: The process speed for envelopes
automatically decreases when this setting is "0"
under the following conditions.
I-171
· Under a low temperature and low humidity

environment
· When the C83hc is installed and the destination
is not Japan
· When the C73hc is installed
Select "1" when you want to increase the
productivity.
Note
· When this setting is "1", a fusing under can
occur.
106 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
106 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
106 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
106 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
106 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
106 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
107 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
107 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
107 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
107 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
107 4 Envelope 2nd transfer paper width correction • 0: Switched according to the 0 0 0
value 2nd transfer resistance
· Function: Prevents the transferability to the detection voltage
envelope from decreasing during a job. This • 1: 1.24 Fixed
phenomenon occurs when the 2nd transfer
output is insufficient, due to the change of the
2nd transfer resistance detection voltage value
when envelope is fed.
· Usage: Configure to "1" when the envelope
mode is used, and the image that is printed on
the envelope gets blurred. This malfunction
occurs when the range of [Paper Setting] -
[Process Adj.] - [2nd Transfer Output Adj. (Front)]
is configured in the + direction (approximately
+90 or more).
107 5 Thin paper separation priority mode (leading • 0: Normal Control 0 0 0
edge transfer output OFF control) • 1: Deactivates leading edge
· Function: Changes the timing of the 2nd transfer output
transfer current output.
want to perform the thin paper separation priority
mode.
Note
To perform the thin paper separation priority
mode, the following two conditions must be
satisfied in addition to this setting.
· The full bleed setting is "OFF".
· The paper weight is 91 gsm or less.
When this setting is "1", the image on the
leading edge can be erased.
107 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
107 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
108 0 Countermeasure for the photo conductor memory • 0: Not execute 0 0 0
while the speed priority is chosen
I-172
· Function: Change the transfer output timing • 1: Execute (wait for 1 cycle
when you select "Speed" in the stabilization of the photo conductor after
adjustment frequency setting. the 1st transfer resistance
· Usage: Use this function when the previous detection control is
image appears as the image lag (the photo executed)
conductor memory) after approximately 188 mm
(the drum cycle) because of too much 1st transfer
output.
Note
· Before you change this setting, be sure to
press [Utility] - [03 Administrator Setting] - [01
System Setting] - [05 Expert Adjustment] - [06
Process Adjustment], and decide whether to
decrease 5% on the 1st transfer output of
each YMCK or not. If the 1st transfer output is
reduced too much, white spots can occur. If
white spots occur, adjust the 1st transfer
output by 1 % with checking the image.
· If you select "1" in this setting, activate the
transfer output 1 cycle before the image is
written to the drum. Thus the time before the
first print gets slightly longer.
· Since the drum rotation number increases,
the drum life gets shorter.
108 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
108 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
108 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
108 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
108 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
108 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
108 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
109 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
109 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
109 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
109 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
109 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
109 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
109 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
109 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
110 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
110 1 Transfer belt cleaning blade default distance • 10 km or less: 110-2=0, 0 0 0
2 threshold value 110-1=0 0 0 0
· Function: Selects the default conditions when • 20 km or less: 110-2=0,
the transfer belt cleaning blade is replaced or 110-1=1
when you create the band at a high external • Not execute: 110-2=1,
temperature. 110-1=0
· Usage: If the external temperature is high when • Execute regardless of the
you replace the transfer belt cleaning blade to a distance: 110-2=1, 110-1=1
new one, the blade is pulled in and the edge can
I-173
get damaged. To prevent the damage, change

the condition of the toner band creation for
output.
Note
· If the band is created, the productivity
decreases. It is proportional to the band
creation distance.
110 3 Transfer belt cleaning blade default temperature • 0: 28 degrees or more 0 0 0
zone threshold for high temperature environment • 1: Conduct regardless of
· Function: Selects the first external high temperature
temperature judgment after the replacement of
the transfer belt cleaning blade.
conduct the first band creation after the
replacement regardless of the external
temperature.
110 4 The intermediate transfer cleaning band • 13.5m: 110-4=0, 110-5=0 1 1 1
5 threshold value for the first stage of the drum life • 27m: 110-4=1, 110-5=0 0: C3080, 0: C3080, 0: C3080,
(315 mm/s) (Default settings of DIPSW110-5 for • 50m: 110-4=0, 110-5=1 C3080P, C3080P, C3080P,
C3080, C3080P, C83hc: 0, for C3070, C3070P, • 75m: 110-4=1, 110-5=1 C83hc C83hc C83hc
C73hc, C3070L: 1) 1: C3070, 1: C3070, 1: C3070,
Function: Changes the frequency that the toner C3070P, C3070P, C3070P,
band is supplied to the intermediate transfer C73hc, C73hc, C73hc,
cleaning unit at a linear velocity of 315 mm/s. C3070L C3070L C3070L
Usage: When you replace the drum with a new
one, lumps of lubricant on the drum can cause
the toner to go through. Change the amount of
the toner band that is supplied to the intermediate
transfer cleaning unit to prevent this fault from
occurring.
Note
When the DIPSW is changed, the productivity
is possibly reduced.
110 6 The intermediate transfer cleaning band • 27 m: 110-6=0, 110-7=0 1 1 1
7 threshold value for the first stage of the drum life • 50 m: 110-6=1, 110-7=0 1 1 1
(other linear velocity) • 75 m: 110-6=0, 110-7=1
Function: Changes the frequency that the toner • 100 m: 110-6=1, 110-7=1
band is supplied to the intermediate transfer
cleaning unit at a linear velocity of 340 mm/s, 225
mm/s, or 157.5 mm/s.
Usage: When you replace the drum with a new
one, lumps of lubricant on the drum can cause
the toner to go through. Change the amount of
the toner band that is supplied to the intermediate
transfer cleaning unit to prevent this fault from
occurring.
Note
When the DIPSW is changed, the productivity
is possibly reduced.

Japan Inch Metric
111 0 Switch fine thin paper charge control output • 0: Output OFF 0 0 0
· Usage: For fine thin paper (weight: 62 gsm to • 1: Output ON
74 gsm), configure the setting to "1", when the
charge control output is needed.
Note
Depending on the paper type, output paper
misalignment may become worse slightly. In
addition, JAM possibly occurs due to the
sticking paper on the entrance of the FS. In
this case, be sure to configure [Machine
screen] - [Paper Setting] - [Expert Adjustment]
- [Output Paper Separation Setting] to "OFF".
111 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
111 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
111 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-174
111 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
111 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
111 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
111 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
112 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
112 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
112 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
112 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
112 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
112 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
112 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
112 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
113 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
113 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
113 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
113 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
113 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
113 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
113 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
113 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
114 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
114 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
114 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
114 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
114 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
114 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
114 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
114 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
115 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
115 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-175
• 1: -
115 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
115 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
115 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
115 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
115 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
115 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
116 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
116 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
116 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
116 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
116 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
116 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
116 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
116 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
117 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
117 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
117 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
117 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
117 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
117 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
117 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
117 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
118 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
118 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
118 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
118 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
118 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
118 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
118 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-176
118 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
119 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
119 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
119 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
119 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
119 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
119 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
119 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
119 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
120 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
120 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
120 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
120 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
120 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
120 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
120 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
120 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
121 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
121 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
121 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
121 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
121 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
121 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
121 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
121 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
122 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
122 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
122 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-177
• 1: -
122 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
122 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
122 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
122 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
122 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
123 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
123 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
123 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
123 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
123 4 Fusing separation fan abnormality detection • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
Enables the main body temporarily when a fan • 1: Disabled
abnormality of the fusing separation fan/1
(FM10), fusing separation fan/2 (FM11) and the
fusing separation fan/3 (FM12) occurs.
Note
· Disable this setting to perform the printing
operation without rotating the fan when an
error code related to FM10, FM11, FM12
occurs.
Therefore, a wrapping jam in the fusing
section possibly occur.
123 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
123 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
123 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
124 0 Envelope fusing warm up complete condition • 0: exclusively for envelope 0 0 0
setting fusing machine
· Function: Switches the warm up complete • 1: same as the normal fusing
condition setting when EF-103 is used. machine
· Usage: Select "1" when you want to shorten the
time to complete the warm up in case of the
fusing under does not occur on the image.
Note
· When you select "1" on this setting, the
fusing under is likely to occur.
124 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
124 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
124 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
124 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
124 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
124 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
124 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
125 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-178
125 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
125 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
125 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
125 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
125 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
125 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
125 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
126 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
126 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
126 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
126 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
126 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
126 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
126 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
126 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
127 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
127 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
127 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
127 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
127 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
127 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
127 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
127 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
128 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
128 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
128 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
128 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
128 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
128 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
128 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-179
• 1: -
128 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
129 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
129 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
129 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
129 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
129 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
129 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
129 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
129 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
130 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
130 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
130 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
130 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
130 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
130 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
130 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
130 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
131 0 Image stabilization control during idling • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Switches the image stabilization control during • 1: Enabled
idling.
When the environmental humidity during idling
reaches the specified level while this setting is
disabled, the image stabilization control is
executed before you start the next job.
Since the image stabilization control is executed
at the start of the job after the idling, there is a
waiting time at the start of printing.
While this setting is enabled, the image
stabilization control is executed when the
environmental humidity during idling reaches the
specified level.
Since the image stabilization control is executed
when the environmental humidity during idling
reaches the specified level, there is a fewer
waiting time at the start of printing. However,
since the number of executing the image
stabilization control increases under the
environment with the large humidity gap, the lives
of the developer and drum are shorten.
131 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-180
131 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
131 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
131 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
131 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
131 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
131 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
132 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
132 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
132 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
132 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
132 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
132 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
132 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
132 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
133 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
133 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
133 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
133 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
133 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
133 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
133 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
133 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
134 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
134 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
134 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
134 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
134 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
134 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
134 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
134 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-181
• 1: -
135 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
135 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
135 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
135 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
135 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
135 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
135 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
135 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
136 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
136 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
136 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
136 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
136 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
136 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
136 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
136 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
137 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
137 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
137 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
137 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
137 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
137 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
137 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
137 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
138 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
138 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
138 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
138 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
138 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-182
138 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
138 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
138 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
139 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
139 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
139 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
139 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
139 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
139 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
139 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
139 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
140 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
140 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
140 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
140 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
140 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
140 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
140 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
140 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
141 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
141 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
141 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
141 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
141 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
141 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
141 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
141 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
142 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-183
• 1: -
142 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
142 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
142 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
142 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
142 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
142 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
142 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
143 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
143 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
143 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
143 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
143 4 Drum speed gap setting (the drum speed for • 0%: 143-5=0, 143-4=0 0 0 0
5 transfer belt) • 0.30%: 143-5=0, 143-4=1 0 0 0
· Function: Specify the speed gap between the • 0.60%: 143-5=1, 143-4=0
drum speed and the belt speed. • 0.90%: 143-5=1, 143-4=1
· Usage: If the image missing occurs on the high
smoothness paper, adjust the speed gap using
this function and decrease the missing.
Note
· Since the accuracy of the color registration
correction reduces when this setting
becomes effective, be sure not to change the
default setting except when the missing
occurs.
143 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
143 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
144 0 Monochrome mode speed change control while • 0: Monochrome mode is 0 0 0
the thick paper feed enabled
· Function: Select the settings of the drum Bk • 1: Monochrome mode is
speed change control (the instant gain-up control) disabled
when the thick paper is inserted.
· Usage: When you select "1" in this setting, the
instant gain-up control becomes inactive during
the monochrome mode.
CAUTION
· If you change DIPSW144-0 to "0" and
DIPSW144-4 to "0", the instant gain-up control
of the drum Bk becomes active.
144 1 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
144 2 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
144 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
144 4 Monochrome mode speed change control while • 0: 157 mm/s line speed 0 0 0
the thick paper feed (low speed) enabled
· Function: Select the settings of the drum Bk • 1: 157 mm/s line speed
speed change control (the instant gain-up control) disabled
when the thick paper is inserted.
I-184
· Usage: When you select "0" in this setting, the

gain-up control becomes active while the
monochrome mode speed is low.
CAUTION
· If you change DIPSW144-0 to "0" and
DIPSW144-4 to "0", the instant gain-up control
of the drum Bk becomes active.
144 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
144 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
144 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
145 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
145 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
145 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
145 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
145 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
145 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
145 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
145 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
146 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
146 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
146 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
146 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
146 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
146 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
146 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
146 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
147 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
147 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
147 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
147 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
147 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
147 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
147 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
147 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-185
• 1: -
148 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
148 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
148 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
148 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
148 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
148 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
148 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
148 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
149 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
149 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
149 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
149 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
149 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
149 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
149 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
149 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
150 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
150 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
150 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
150 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
150 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
150 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
150 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
150 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
151 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
151 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-186
151 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
151 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
151 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
151 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
151 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
151 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
152 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
152 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
152 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
152 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
152 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
152 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
152 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
152 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
153 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
153 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
153 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
153 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
153 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
153 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
153 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
153 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
154 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
154 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
154 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
154 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
154 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
154 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
154 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
154 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-187
• 1: -
155 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
155 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
155 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
155 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
155 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
155 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
155 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
155 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
156 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
156 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
156 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
156 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
156 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
156 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
156 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
156 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
157 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
157 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
157 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
157 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
157 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
157 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
157 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
157 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
158 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
158 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
158 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
158 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
158 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-188
158 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
158 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
158 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
159 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
159 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
159 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
159 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
159 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
159 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
159 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
159 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
160 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
160 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
160 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
160 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
160 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
160 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
160 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
160 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
161 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
161 1 Enable or disable the fusing swing control • 0: No control 1 1 1
· Function: Enable or disable the swing • 1: Control
operation of the fusing unit.
When you feed the large size paper after the
small size paper, gloss lines which the small size
paper edge makes could occur in the paper
edges. "1" (Control) is selected in the default to
prevent this trouble.
· Usage: For users who feed only 1 size paper,
when sickly gloss lines are shown in the paper
edges, select "0" (No control) in this setting.
161 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
161 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
161 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-189
161 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
161 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
161 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
162 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
162 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
162 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
162 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
162 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
162 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
162 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
162 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
163 0 Productivity down during toner supplying • 0: The productivity is not 0 0 0
operation reduced during the toner
Toner empty possibly be indicated after you supplying operation
replace the toner bottle. It occurs when the toner • 1: The productivity is
is not supplied to the toner hopper due to the low reduced during the toner
fluidity of the toner in the toner bottle. supplying operation
When this problem occurs, change this setting to
1 to prevent the toner empty indication with the
toner bottle not empty.
Note
· When this setting is configured to 1, it
performs the toner bottle rotation operation
(toner supplying operation to the toner
hopper) longer time than usual control. At this
time, the paper interval is widened to reduce
the productivity.
163 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
163 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
163 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
163 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
163 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
163 6 Toner bottle empty detection timing • 0: From detection of near 0 0 0
· Function: Selects the toner bottle empty empty to after specified
detection timing. You can select whether to use amount of toner is supplied
the conventional near empty detection (enable to • 1: At detection of near empty
print) or to stop printing when the near empty is
detected.
to stop printing immediately when the color bottle
is empty.
Note
· When you select "1" on this setting, down
time occurs because the printing stops
immediately due to no toner. Thus the
productivity is possibly reduced.
163 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
164 0 - • 0: - 1 1 1
I-190
• 1: -
164 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
164 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
164 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
164 4 Registration motor gain-up control • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
Function: Enlarge the marginof the step out of • 1: Enabled
the registration motor (M45) on the specified • The gain up control of the
paper feed condition. registration motor is
Usage: When the paper is thick and hard that is performed only when the
out of specification, the registration motor (M45) following conditions are met.
possibly steps out. In this case, select "1". • Front side feed from
Note PF-707m
Use this control only when the user uses the • Paper weight setting 257 g/
thick paper (300 g/m2 or more) that is out of m2 to 300 g/m2
the product specification and jams (J-3101, • The paper length in the sub
J-3102) caused by the registration motor scan direction is 353 mm or
occur frequently. more
This function functions only when "1" is
selected on the DIPSW and the specified
paper feed condition is met.
164 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
164 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
164 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
165 0 Switch the roller release execution after the jam • 0: Release 0 0 0
occurs • 1: No release
· Function: Switch the pressure release roller
either to release or not after a jam occurs.
· Usage: In this setting, the pressure release
roller does not press the jam paper and you can
remove the jammed paper without using the jam
cleaning knob. Select "1" in this setting when you
use the paper on which the knob enables the jam
cleaning easier.
165 1 Fusing midstream wrap JAM detection setting • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: Disable the detection of the fusing • 1: Disabled
midstream wrap JAM (J-3106).
· Usage: Change this setting to "1" when J-3106
is detected falsely.
165 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
165 3 - • 0: - 1 1 1
• 1: -
165 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
165 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
165 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
165 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
166 0 Switch the fusing speed control at the middle • 0: Normal (the fusing loop is 0 0 0
speed controlled)
· Function: Stop the fusing entrance loop control • 1: The fusing speed is fixed
at the middle speed, and convey the paper at the at the middle speed (225
constant speed. mm/s)
· Usage: Use this function when the transfer jitter
occurs at the position 140 mm from the paper
trailing edge.
166 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-191
166 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
166 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
166 4 Tear up jam prevention control • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
· Function: (When OT-511 is mounted) When a • 1: Disabled
jam occurs in the paper exit section, pulling out
ADU tears up the paper.
To prevent the tear up jam, exit the paper forcibly
when a jam occurs and the paper remains in the
main body paper exit section.
· Usage: When you do not exit the jammed paper
in the main body exit section to the tray of
OT-511, change this setting to "1".
166 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
166 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
166 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
167 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
167 1 Fusing loop control of envelope fusing machine • 0: ON 0 0 0
Change this setting to "1" when you feed • 1: OFF
envelopes and a color registration error occurs.
167 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
167 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
167 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
167 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
167 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
167 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
168 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
168 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
168 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
168 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
168 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
168 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
168 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
168 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
169 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
169 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
169 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
169 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-192
• 1: -
169 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
169 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
169 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
169 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
170 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
170 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
170 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
170 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
170 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
170 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
170 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
170 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
171 0 LU-202XL, LU-202Xm Banner paper feed retry • 0: Not execute 0 0 0
control • 1: Execute
· Function: Conducts the paper feed retry in
order to improve the jam that occurs during the
banner paper feeding from LU-202XL and
LU-202XLm.
· Usage: When JAM "J-1502" occurs during the
banner paper feeding, select "1" on this setting
and the JAM is possibly improved.
Note
· Because the time to detect JAM becomes
long, the productivity is possibly reduced.
171 1 Change of the activate timing of the LU-202m, • 0: activate paper feed sensor 0 0 0
LU-202XL, and LU-202XLm pick-up solenoid • 1: activate pre-registration
(only when the air-blow operates.) sensor
· Function: Changes the activate timing of the
pick-up solenoid when the air-blow is conducted.
· Usage: When you feed the coated paper from
LU-202m, LU-202XL, or LU-202XLm, and the jam
"J-1502" occurs, select "1" on this setting.
171 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
171 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
171 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
171 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
171 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
171 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
172 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-193
172 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
172 2 Air assist shutter control (PF) • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
• 1: Disabled
172 3 Retry control disabling setting for a banner in the • 0: Enabled (The retry control 0 0 0
bypass tray is performed.)
· Function: Performs the retry control when a • 1: Disabled (The retry control
banner (488mm or more and 1300mm or less, is not performed.)
and 128g/m2 or more) fed from the bypass tray is
jammed because of the paper feed roller. Make
this control not to be performed.
· Usage: When you perform the retry control, the
productivity decreases. Select "1" for
DIPSW172-3 to secure productivity.
Note
· The banner print is out of specification
except when MK-740 or MK-740m is installed.
172 4 Dehumidification heater temperature control (LU, • Environment temperature 0 0 0
5 PF) +6°C: 172-5=0, 172-4=0 0 0 0
When you connect the option dehumidifier heater • Environment temperature
of LU or PF and when you configure the +8℃: 172-5=0, 172-4=1
dehumidifier fan heater control to [Compulsive • Environment temperature
ON] in the Utility mode, this switch is used to +10℃: 172-5=1, 172-4=0
configure the control temperature. • Environment temperature
+6°C: 172-5=1, 172-4=1
172 6 Retry control enabling setting for an envelope in • 0: Disabled (The retry control 0 0 0
the bypass tray is not performed.)
· Function: Conducts the paper feed retry when • 1: Enabled (The retry control
you feed an envelope from the bypass tray and is performed.)
the intermediate conveyance sensor/2 is not
active after a specified period of time.
· Usage: When JAM "J-1709" occurs and you
want to conduct the paper feed retry, select "1"
on this setting.
Note
productivity is lowered.
172 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
173 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
173 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
173 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
173 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
173 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
173 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
173 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
173 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
174 0 Multi feed detection (PI, FD) (effective by power • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
OFF or ON after the setting change) • 1: Disabled
174 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
174 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
174 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
174 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-194
174 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
174 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
174 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
175 0 PB warm-up control switchover (effective by • 0: Warm-up during power 1 1 1
power OFF or ON after the setting change) ON
• 1: No warm-up during power
ON
175 1 PB heater control switchover (effective by power • 0: Heater activates 0 0 0
OFF or ON after the setting change) automatically in 1 minute
after perfect binding finish.
• 1: Heater does not
deactivates automatically in
1 minute after perfect
binding finish.
175 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
175 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
175 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
175 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
175 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
175 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
176 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
176 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
176 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
176 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
176 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
176 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
176 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
176 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
177 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
177 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
177 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
177 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
177 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
177 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
177 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
177 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-195
178 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
178 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
178 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
178 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
178 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
178 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
178 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
178 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
179 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
179 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
179 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
179 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
179 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
179 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
179 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
179 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
180 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
180 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
180 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
180 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
180 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
180 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
180 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
180 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
181 0 Enable or disable the pre-purge function and the • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
auto-purge function • 1: Disabled
· Function: Switches whether to enable or
disable the pre-purge function and the auto-purge
function.
· Usage: Use this setting to disable the pre-purge
function and the auto-purge function.
181 1 FD-503 pre-purge enable or disable • 0: Enabled 0 0 0
I-196
· Function: This DIPSW switches enable and • 1: Disabled

disable of the pre-purge mode of the FD-503.
· Usage: To prevent the machine from outputting
the non-folded paper to the sub tray which is the
folded paper tray, use this DIPSW.
· Note
When the DIPSW181-1 is "0", this DIPSW is
enabled.
181 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
181 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
181 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
181 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
181 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
181 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
182 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
182 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
182 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
182 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
182 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
182 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
182 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
182 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
183 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
183 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
183 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
183 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
183 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
183 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
183 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
183 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
184 0 Paper feed cleaning assistance time setting • 24 ms: 184-0=0, 184-1=0 0 0 0
1 (PF-707m J-16xx countermeasures) • 44 ms: 184-0=1, 184-1=0 0 0 0
· Function: When a paper that is less than 179.9 • 54 ms: 184-0=0, 184-1=1
mm in the FD direction is fed, a jam can occur • 74 ms: 184-0=1, 184-1=1
because it does not reach the exit sensor/1
(PS26), the exit sensor/2 (PS27), or the loop
sensor/Lw (PS17). In such cases, for jams in
which there is no damage to the leading edge of
the paper, such as buckling, the number of
occurrences can be reduced if you increase this
value.
I-197
· Usage: If a jam occurs when a paper that is less

than 179.9 mm in the FD direction is fed, you can
extend the assistance time for when the exit roller
is restarted by changing this DIPSW.
Note
· There is a mitigation effect on jam
occurrences only when there is no damage to
the leading edge of the fed paper.
· Only valid when the DIPSW184-2 setting is
"0".
184 2 Switch between the new and old control boards • 0: New control board 0 0 0
(PF-707m J-16xx countermeasures) • 1: Old control board
· Function: Returns the assist control to the old
control board until the paper reaches the exit
sensor.
· Usage: When you want to return the control to
the old control board, select "1" in this setting.
184 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
184 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
184 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
184 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
184 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
185 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
185 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
185 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
185 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
185 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
185 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
185 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
185 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
186 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
186 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
186 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
186 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
186 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
186 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
186 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
186 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
187 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
187 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-198
• 1: -
187 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
187 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
187 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
187 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
187 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
187 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
188 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
188 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
188 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
188 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
188 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
188 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
188 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
188 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
189 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
189 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
189 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
189 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
189 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
189 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
189 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
189 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
190 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
190 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
190 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
190 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
190 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
190 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
190 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-199
190 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
191 0 Cycle down timing change • 0: Disabled 0 0 0
· Function: When there is print data in • 1: Enabled
preparation in the main body, switches all sheets
in the main body to the FS end process after they
are output.
· Usage: When there is print data in preparation
in the main body, select "1" in order not to cycle
down until FS outputs paper.
Note
· As the default setting, cycle down (Idling
state at end of a JOB) is performed when the
2nd transfer becomes inactive. In this case,
when the interval between printing is long,
productivity decreases since the main body
stops once between printing. When you want
to reduce this phenomenon, change this
setting to "1".
· When this setting is "1", the life of the main
body possibly becomes short.
191 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
191 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
191 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
191 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
191 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
191 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
191 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
192 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
192 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
192 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
192 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
192 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
192 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
192 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
192 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
193 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
193 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
193 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
193 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-200
193 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
193 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
193 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
193 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
194 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
194 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
194 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
194 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
194 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
194 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
194 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
194 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
195 0 - (Default setting for Asia and Pacific, India, • 0: - 0 0 0 ("1" for
China or Color Press: 1) • 1: - Asia
Pacific,
India,
China, or
Color
Press)
195 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
195 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
195 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
195 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
195 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
195 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
195 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
196 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
196 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
196 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
196 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
196 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
196 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
196 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
196 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-201
• 1: -
197 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
197 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
197 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
197 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
197 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
197 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
197 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
197 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
198 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
198 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
198 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
198 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
198 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
198 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
198 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
198 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
199 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
199 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
199 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
199 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
199 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
199 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
199 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
199 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
200 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
200 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
200 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
200 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
200 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-202
200 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
200 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
200 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
201 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
201 1 FS-532 banner kit • 0: No connection 0 0 0
Switch MK-740m connection • 1: With connection
· Function: Recognizes the connection of
MK-740m.
· Usage: When FS-532 is connected to
MK-740m, change the setting to "1".
Note
When you select "1" on this setting, be
careful about the following troubles.
· When 3000 sheets or more of the small size
paper (over A5 and A4 or less) are stacked,
the tooth skipping of the up down belt of the
main tray occurs.
· When the setting is configured to "1", the
loading limit prevents the tooth from being
skipped.
201 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
201 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
201 4 Switch the FS-532, OT-510 paper exit alignment • 0: Normal alignment speed 0 0 0
operation • 1: Alignment speed slower
· Function: Switch the operation speed of the than normal
paper exit alignment plate on the main tray
straight paper exit (with or without shifting, and
when the distance between paper and paper is
the specified value or longer).
· Usage: When you want to slow down the
operation speed of the paper exit alignment plate
and improve the paper exit alignment accuracy
(in the sub scan direction), change this setting to
"1".
201 5 Switch HM humidifying amount • 0: Low level for humidifying 0 0 0
· Function: Switches the humidifying amount of amount [Normal].
[RU Curl Adjustment] - [Standard] by changing • 1: Aqua conditioner level for
the rotation number of the pump motor (M401). humidifying amount
· Usage: When an aqua conditioner (service tool [Normal]. (Medium level)
that is used exclusively with the color machine) is
used, select "1" in this setting, and then select
[Normal].
Note
· When “1” is selected in this setting while an
aqua conditioner is not used, passing
uncoated or coated paper (below 136 g/m2)
can cause a jam.
· When an aqua conditioner is used, select
“1” in DIPSW75-0, too.
201 6 FS-532 Prevention of output paper misalignment • 0: Normal Control 0 0 0
in the job of staple and non-staple mixed • 1: Control for output paper
· Function: When the paper exit of the FS-532 is misalignment
changed from the straight paper exit to the staple
paper exit, a bundle of staples may push out the
paper on the main tray, which causes paper
misalignment. This function prevents such paper
misalignment by adding the control that presses
paper when the paper exit is changed.
Note
I-203
· The function may have no effect according

to paper conditions, machine types, and load
capacity.
201 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
202 0 FS-532 Reduction of the notification timing for • 0: Normal Control 0 0 0
discarding staples to every 100 times • 1: Every 100 times
· Function: Changes the notification timing for
discarding staple waste to every 100 times.
202 1 FS-532 Support for the 3-hole manual punch • 0: Normal Control 0 0 0
· Function: Enables the 3-hole manual punch • 1: 3-hole manual punch
when paper is fed to the FS-532 to which the
PK-522 is connected in the off-line operation of
the PI-502.
202 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
202 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
202 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
202 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
202 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
202 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
203 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
203 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
203 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
203 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
203 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
203 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
203 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
203 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
204 0 SD-513 Switch the booklet conveyance timing • 0: Normal Control 0 0 0
stabilization operation • 1: Individual control to
· Function: The output booklets are stacked maintain constant bundle
without change of exit intervals even if the exit intervals
booklet conditions (such as the number of sheets
per bundle) are switched.
Note
When you output different types of booklets,
the alignment may be disturbed.
204 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
204 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
204 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
204 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
204 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
204 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-204
• 1: -
204 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
205 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
205 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
205 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
205 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
205 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
205 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
205 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
205 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
206 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
206 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
206 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
206 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
206 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
206 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
206 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
206 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
207 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
207 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
207 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
207 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
207 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
207 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
207 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
207 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
208 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
208 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
208 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
208 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-205
208 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
208 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
208 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
208 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
209 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
209 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
209 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
209 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
209 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
209 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
209 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
209 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
210 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
210 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
210 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
210 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
210 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
210 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
210 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
210 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
211 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
211 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
211 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
211 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
211 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
211 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
211 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
211 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-206
• 1: -
212 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
212 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
212 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
212 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
212 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
212 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
212 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
212 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
213 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
213 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
213 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
213 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
213 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
213 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
213 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
213 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
214 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
214 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
214 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
214 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
214 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
214 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
214 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
214 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
215 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
215 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
215 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
215 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
215 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-207
215 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
215 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
215 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
216 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
216 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
216 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
216 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
216 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
216 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
216 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
216 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
217 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
217 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
217 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
217 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
217 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
217 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
217 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
217 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
218 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
218 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
218 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
218 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
218 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
218 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
218 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
218 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
219 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
219 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
219 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-208
• 1: -
219 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
219 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
219 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
219 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
219 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
220 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
220 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
220 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
220 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
220 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
220 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
220 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
220 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
221 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
221 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
221 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
221 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
221 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
221 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
221 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
221 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
222 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
222 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
222 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
222 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
222 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
222 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-209
222 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
222 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
223 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
223 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
223 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
223 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
223 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
223 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
223 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
223 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
224 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
224 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
224 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
224 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
224 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
224 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
224 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
224 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
225 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
225 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
225 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
225 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
225 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
225 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
225 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
225 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
226 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
226 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
226 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
226 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-210
• 1: -
226 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
226 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
226 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
226 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
227 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
227 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
227 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
227 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
227 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
227 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
227 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
227 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
228 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
228 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
228 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
228 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
228 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
228 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
228 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
228 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
229 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
229 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
229 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
229 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
229 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
229 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
229 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
229 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
230 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-211
230 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
230 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
230 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
230 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
230 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
230 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
230 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
231 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
231 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
231 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
231 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
231 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
231 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
231 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
231 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
232 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
232 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
232 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
232 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
232 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
232 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
232 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
232 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
233 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
233 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
233 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
233 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
233 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-212
• 1: -
233 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
233 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
233 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
234 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
234 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
234 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
234 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
234 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
234 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
234 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
234 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
235 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
235 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
235 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
235 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
235 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
235 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
235 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
235 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
236 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
236 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
236 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
236 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
236 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
236 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
236 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
236 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
237 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
237 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-213
237 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
237 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
237 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
237 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
237 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
237 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
238 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
238 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
238 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
238 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
238 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
238 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
238 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
238 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
239 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
239 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
239 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
239 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
239 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
239 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
239 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
239 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
240 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
240 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
240 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
240 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
240 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
240 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
240 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
240 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-214
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
241 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
241 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
241 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
241 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
241 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
241 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
241 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
241 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
242 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
242 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
242 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
242 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
242 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
242 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
242 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
242 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
243 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
243 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
243 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
243 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
243 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
243 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
243 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
243 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
244 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
244 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
244 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-215
244 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
244 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
244 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
244 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
244 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
245 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
245 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
245 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
245 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
245 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
245 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
245 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
245 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
246 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
246 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
246 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
246 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
246 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
246 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
246 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
246 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
247 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
247 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
247 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
247 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
247 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
247 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
247 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
247 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
248 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-216
• 1: -
248 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
248 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
248 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
248 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
248 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
248 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
248 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
249 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
249 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
249 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
249 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
249 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
249 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
249 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
249 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
250 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
250 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
250 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
250 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
250 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
250 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
250 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
250 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
251 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
251 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
251 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-217
251 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
251 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
251 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
251 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
251 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
252 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
252 1 Process delay time when the main body front • 500 ms: 252-2=0, 252-1=0 0 0 0
2 door is open. • 1 second: 252-2=0, 252-1=1 0 0 0
When you open the main body front door and • 5 seconds: 252-2=1,
execute such as jam cleaning, the HDD possibly 252-1=0
gets damaged due to the vibration. Therefore, • No delay: 252-2=1, 252-1=1
delays the band transmission from the Print data
to the engine and limits access to the HDD.
252 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
252 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
252 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
252 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
252 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
253 0 Change of the scanner compression method • 0: MMR 0 0 0
· Function: The compression format of TIFF and • 1: MH
PDF changes to G3 (MH).
· Usage: Use this function when you want to
change the compression format to G3 (MH)
format.
253 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
253 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
253 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
253 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
253 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
253 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
253 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
254 0 IGMP protocol • 0: Use IGMP protocol 0 0 0
· Function: Make IGMP protocol unusable. • 1: Not use IGMP protocol
· Usage: Configure when the IGMP protocol is
not used on the environment of the customer.
254 1 Keep DoneJobList • 0: Keep for approximately 5 0 0 0
· Function: The done job list for MIB is deleted seconds.
after 5 seconds. • 1: Keep up to 100 jobs.
When you change this setting, the latest job list
can be kept for maximum 100 jobs regardless of
the elapsed time.
When the number of jobs is more than 100, the
old jobs are deleted.
· Usage: Configure this setting when the done job
list for MIB is required for MIB tool that the
customer has.
I-218
Note
· When you change the setting or activate and
deactivate the sub power switch, the hold
jobs are deleted.
254 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
254 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
254 4 SMTP Authentication: DigestMD5 method • 0: Enable 0 0 0
inhibition • 1: Disable
· Function: Disable Digest-MD5 method
inhibition of SMTP Authentication.
· Usage: Configure when you cannot connect
with Digest-MD5 due to the environment of the
customer.
254 5 SMTP Authentication: CRAMMD5 method • 0: Enable 0 0 0
inhibition • 1: Disable
· Function: Disable CRAM-MD5 of SMTP
Authentication.
with CRAM-MD5 due to the environment of the
customer.
254 6 SMTP Authentication: LOGIN method inhibition • 0: Enable 0 0 0
· Function: Disable LOGIN of SMTP • 1: Disable
Authentication.
with LOGIN due to the environment of the
customer.
254 7 SMTP Authentication: PLAIN method inhibition • 0: Enable 0 0 0
· Function: Disable PLAIN of SMTP • 1: Disable
Authentication.
with PLAIN due to the environment of the
customer.
255 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
255 1 SMB client authentication protocol • 0: SMB2.0 0 0 0
· Function: Changes the SMB client • 1: SMB1.0
authentication protocol.
Although this machine is corresponding with
SMB2.0, it possibly does not work properly with
SMB2.0 according to the environment.
The operation with SMB1.0 is possible with other
setting.
· Usage: Change this setting when no
communication is available with SMB2.0.
(effective by power OFF or ON after the setting
change)
255 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
255 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
255 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
255 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
255 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
255 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
256 0 Updating interval of the count information • 10 minutes: 256-0=0, 0 0 0
1 · Function: Update the counter information at set 256-1=0 0 0 0
intervals. • 1 minute: 256-0=1, 256-1=0
· Usage: Use this function when you change the • 0 minutes: 256-0=0, 256-1=1
updating intervals for the counter information that • 60 minutes: 256-0=1,
an application (Visual Count Master) obtains. 256-1=1
Note
I-219
· When this setting is configured to 0 minutes,

the counter information is updated only once
when the main power activates.
256 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
256 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
256 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
256 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
256 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
256 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
257 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
257 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
257 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
257 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
257 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
257 5 Supporting "Import and export" of the Software • 0: Not support 0 0 0
Switch and the controller DipSW • 1: Support
You can backup and restore the Software Switch
and the controller DipSW setting (SW number
251 and after) as a csv file.
You can acquire and overwrite the csv file from
"CSV File Import/Export".
257 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
257 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
258 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
258 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
258 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
258 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
258 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
258 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
258 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
258 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
259 0 This function disables the Wake On Lan function • 0: Reboot the machine 0 0 0
(the machine is shut off). forcibly when a job is
Usually, the Wake On Lan (WOL) function is received
enabled. When the machine receives a job when • 1: Do not reboot the machine
it is shut off, this switch starts the machine again forcibly even though a job is
forcibly, and the machine is ready to print. When received
it is necessary to disable WOL (do not print)
according to the environment of the customer, it
is possible not to reboot the machine even
though a job is received.
I-220
Usage: This switch does not let the machine

reboot even though the machine receives a job
when it is shut off.
CAUTION
The corresponding job is only the job that is sent
from PS Plug-in driver or AccurioPro Hot Folder.
· Note
However, this function is not applied when
[All Jobs] is selected in [User Setting] -
[System Setting] - [Power Save Setting] -
[Power Save Function Setting] - [Auto Wake-
up Cond.].
259 1 This function disables the Wake On Lan function • 0: Reboot the machine 0 0 0
(the machine is ready for shut off). forcibly when a job is
Usually, the Wake On Lan (WOL) function is received
enabled. When the machine receives a job when • 1: Do not reboot the machine
it is ready for shut off (during the cooling in forcibly even though a job is
progress of machine), this switch starts the received
machine again forcibly. The machine is ready to
print. When it is necessary to disable WOL (do
not print) according to the environment of the
customer, it is possible not to reboot the machine
even though a job is received.
Usage: This switch does not let the machine
reboot even though the machine receives a job
when it is shut off.
CAUTION
The corresponding job is only the job that is sent
from PS Plug-in driver or AccurioPro Hot Folder.
· Note
However, this function is not applied when
[All Jobs] is selected in [User Setting] -
[System Setting] - [Power Save Setting] -
[Power Save Function Setting] - [Auto Wake-
up Cond.].
259 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
259 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
259 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
259 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
259 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
259 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
260 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
260 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
260 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
260 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
260 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
260 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
260 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
260 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
I-221
261 0 Operation for the maximum number of hold jobs • 0: Impossible to store jobs 0 0 0
stored (for application) without RIP from an
· Function: This DIPSW determines the application
operation when the number of hold jobs has • 1: Possible to store jobs
reached the maximum that the jobs can be without RIP from an
stored. application
You cannot store a new job with the hold jobs
stored at maximum.
In this case, you have to delete unnecessary jobs
manually.
When this setting is "1", however, the jobs
without RIP stored previously are automatically
deleted so that you can store a new job.
· Usage: Change this DIPSW to "1" in the
following case:
The maximum number of hold jobs has been
stored and you want to automatically delete the
previously stored jobs without RIP to store a new
hold job.
Note
Use this DIPSW when the maximum number
of hold jobs has been stored and you want to
store (or import) jobs without RIP as a hold
job from the application.
261 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
261 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
261 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
261 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
261 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
261 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
261 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
262 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
262 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
262 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
262 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
262 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
262 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
262 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
262 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
263 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
263 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
263 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
263 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
263 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-222
263 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
263 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
263 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
264 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
264 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
264 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
264 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
264 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
264 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
264 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
264 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
265 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
265 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
265 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
265 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
265 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
265 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
265 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
265 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
266 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
266 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
266 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
266 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
266 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
266 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
266 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
266 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
267 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
267 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
267 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-223
• 1: -
267 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
267 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
267 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
267 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
267 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
268 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
268 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
268 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
268 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
268 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
268 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
268 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
268 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
269 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
269 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
269 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
269 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
269 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
269 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
269 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
269 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
270 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
270 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
270 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
270 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
270 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
270 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
270 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
270 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-224

Japan Inch Metric
271 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
271 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
271 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
271 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
271 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
271 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
271 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
271 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
272 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
272 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
272 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
272 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
272 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
272 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
272 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
272 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
273 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
273 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
273 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
273 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
273 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
273 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
273 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
273 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
274 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
274 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
274 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
274 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-225
274 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
274 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
274 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
274 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
275 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
275 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
275 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
275 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
275 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
275 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
275 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
275 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
276 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
276 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
276 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
276 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
276 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
276 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
276 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
276 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
277 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
277 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
277 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
277 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
277 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
277 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
277 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
277 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
278 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
278 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-226
• 1: -
278 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
278 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
278 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
278 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
278 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
278 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
279 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
279 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
279 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
279 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
279 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
279 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
279 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
279 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
280 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
280 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
280 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
280 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
280 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
280 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
280 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
280 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
281 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
281 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
281 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
281 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
281 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-227
281 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
281 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
281 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
282 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
282 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
282 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
282 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
282 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
282 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
282 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
282 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
283 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
283 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
283 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
283 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
283 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
283 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
283 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
283 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
284 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
284 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
284 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
284 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
284 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
284 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
284 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
284 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
285 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
285 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
285 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-228
• 1: -
285 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
285 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
285 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
285 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
285 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
286 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
286 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
286 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
286 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
286 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
286 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
286 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
286 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
287 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
287 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
287 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
287 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
287 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
287 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
287 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
287 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
288 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
288 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
288 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
288 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
288 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
288 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
288 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
288 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-229
289 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
289 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
289 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
289 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
289 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
289 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
289 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
289 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
290 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
290 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
290 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
290 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
290 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
290 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
290 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
290 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -

Japan Inch Metric
291 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
291 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
291 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
291 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
291 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
291 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
291 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
291 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
292 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
292 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
292 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
292 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-230
• 1: -
292 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
292 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
292 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
292 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
293 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
293 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
293 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
293 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
293 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
293 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
293 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
293 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
294 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
294 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
294 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
294 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
294 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
294 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
294 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
294 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
295 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
295 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
295 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
295 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
295 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
295 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
295 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
295 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
296 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
I-231
296 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
296 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
296 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
296 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
296 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
296 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
296 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
297 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
297 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
297 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
297 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
297 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
297 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
297 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
297 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
298 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
298 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
298 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
298 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
298 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
298 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
298 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
298 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
299 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
299 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
299 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
299 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
299 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
299 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
299 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
I-232
• 1: -
299 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
300 0 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
300 1 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
300 2 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
300 3 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
300 4 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
300 5 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
300 6 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
300 7 - • 0: - 0 0 0
• 1: -
4.5.8 Service Center TEL/FAX

(1) Usage
Register the telephone number and the fax number of a service center that appears in the help information or when a malfunction occurs.
(2) Procedure
Press [02 Service Center TEL/FAX].
3. "Service Center TEL/FAX setting screen"
Press either [Service Center TEL (16)] or [Service Center FAX (16)] you want to configure.
4. Enter the telephone number or fax number you register through the numeric buttons.
Note
▪ When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure to use hyphen (-) to fill up the blanks.
5. Press [OK] to register the data.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the updating.
4.5.9 Serial Number Setting

(1) Usage
Configure and display the serial number of the main body and options.
Note
▪ The serial number of the main body cannot be changed.
(2) Procedure
Press [03 Serial Number Setting].
3. "Serial Number Setting screen"
Select the option, then a keyboard screen appears. Enter a serial number using the alphanumeric buttons.
4. Press [OK] to register the data.
4.5.10 Setup date/type of business setting

(1) Usage
Adjust the starting date of the total counter that is shown on the utility mode and the type of business of the client that CSRC notifies.
(2) Procedure
Press [04 Setup Date/Business Setting].
3. "Setup Date/Type of Business Setting screen "
Select the type of the business. Not to select the type of the business, select [Unknown].
4. "Setup Date/Type of Business Setting screen "
Enter an installation date with the numeric buttons. Press [Set] to highlight the Year, Month, and Date you want to enter.
5. Press [OK] to update the data.
I-233
4.5.11 Toner band creation condition (productivity priority setting)

(1) Function
• Adjust the creation intervals of the toner band.
• When the inside temperature is 35°C or more and the paper width is less than 260 mm, a 160-mm toner band (YMCK color 40 mm x full
width in the main scan direction) is created for about every 50 sides. Productivity is reduced to 97% since this control widens the paper
interval.
Note
▪ When the inside temperature is high (35°C or more) + print a small size, the intermediate transfer cleaning blade wears fast in
the range where the paper does not pass. Therefore, the creation interval of the toner band is shorten as the default to keep the
cleaning blade life.
(2) Usage
When you give the priority to productivity in a high temperature environment and the small-size print, widen the creation interval of the toner
band to increase the productivity. However, the life of the belt cleaning blade becomes shorter.
Mode DIPSW101-2 DIPSW101-3
For A4 width 0 0
Productivity priority 1 0
Restricted 0 1
Restricted 1 1
(a) Supply intervals of the toner band in "For A4 width" mode (default) (run distance of the belt (unit: mm))
Temperature inside the Paper width Remark
body 260 mm or more Less than 260 mm
35 °C or more 270,000 mm 13,500 mm Default.
Less than 35 °C 270,000 mm 270,000 mm
(b) Supply intervals of the toner band in "Productivity priority" setting (belt run distance (unit: mm))
Temperature inside the Paper width Remark
body 260 mm or more Less than 260 mm
35 °C or more 270,000 mm 270,000 mm Give the priority to productivity, and reduce the toner
Less than 35 °C 270,000 mm 270,000 mm consumption.
However, the intermediate transfer cleaning blade life
can become short.
4.5.12 Restrictions on banner print

(1) Restrictions
Restrictions on the banner print are listed as follows.
• Only the composition that includes the MK-740, MK-740m, LU-202XL or LU-202XLm ensure banner print. When the MK-740, MK-740m,
LU-202XL or LU-202XLm is not connected, the machine is not guaranteed.
• Only for the printer output (Copier is not supported).
• More differences appear in the print accuracy that is compared to the normal size.
• Available paper in the banner print: 487.8 mm or more and 1300 mm or less
• When you use IC-605, jobs of combine, booklet, image repeat, and adhesive bind cannot be output. (When you use the Fiery controller,
the jobs can be output.)
Note
▪ Errors could occur depending on the size of the image data.
▪ Usage the banner print too many times shortens the lives of materials and parts.
(2) How to use
Change the dipsw10-0 to [1] of the banner setting when you use the banner print.
(3) Maintenance counter
• To 338 mm: 1 count
• 915.1 mm to 1300 mm: 5 counts
4.5.13 Setting of the toner amount and the replacement count of the toner bottle
(1) Function
• Displays "Amount Info." button on the Machine Screen.
• When the toner amount is 25% or less, the toner display becomes yellow and blinks.
• The [Amount Info.] button is displayed on the Machine screen, but the toner display does not turn yellow or blink even when the toner
amount is 25% or less.
I-234
[2] [1]
[1] Amount Info. [2] Blinking yellow
(2) Usage
• When you select "0" on DipSW48-5 (default for Japan and North America models) and "1" on DipSW48-4, the replacement count of the
toner bottle and the toner amount are displayed on the toner info screen. You can check the information.
When the toner amount is 25% or less, the toner display becomes yellow and blinks.
• When you select "1" on DipSW48-5 (default for the regions except Japan and North America) and "1" on DipSW48-4, the replacement
count of the toner bottle and the toner amount are displayed on the toner info screen. You can check the information.
However, the toner display does not become yellow or blink even when the toner amount is 25% or less.
• Counter of Each Copy Mode manages the number of times of the toner bottle replacement. You can correct the count information on
CSRC and manage the stock of the toner bottle. (Refer to I.4.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode)
Note
▪ The replacement count of the toner bottle is counted when the main body detects the toner near empty or that the toner is
removed and placed. The counter does not count when you press [Complete Replacement] button.
▪ Counter of Each Copy Mode manages the replacement count of the toner bottle regardless of the setting of DipSW48-4.
• The toner amount displays 6 steps: 0%, 1%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%.
The toner amount is reset when the main body detects that the toner is placed after the toner is removed.
• The drive time of the toner supply motor calculates the toner amount display of 25% to 100 %.
1 % is displayed when the near empty is detected. 0 % is displayed when no toner is detected.
• When you replace the toner that is not empty, press the [Complete Replacement] button and reset the toner amount.
• When you use the IC-605 or the IC-313, the remaining toner amount is notified to the controller. For the details, refer to the user's guide.
[1] [2] [3]
[1] Replacement count of the toner [2] Toner amount

[3] Complete Replacement -
4.5.14 Troubleshooting for image errors

Trouble Main cause Countermeasure
I-235
The image background or scatter by the toner The developer is degenerated when the DIPSW104-1=1, DIPSW104-0=0
occurs. Then, the dirt or the image images with low coverage is created (recommended)
deterioration occurs. continuously. Because inside the machine DIPSW104-3=0, DIPSW104-2=0
(Y, M, C, Bk) gets dirty by the mass toner scatter after Configure the DIPSW as above.
images with high coverage are created. When the condition is not improved, change
DIPSW104-0, 1 and increase the coverage
more.
The image background or scatter only by the The developer is degenerated when the DIPSW104-3=1, DIPSW104-2=0
toner (Bk) occurs. Then, the dirt or the image images with low coverage is created (recommended)
deterioration occurs continuously. Because inside the machine DIPSW104-1=0, DIPSW104-0=0
gets dirty by the mass toner scatter after Configure the DIPSW as above.
images with high coverage are created. When the condition is not improved, change
Therefore, you can check easily. Especially, DIPSW104-2, 3 and increase the coverage of
the image background of the toner (Bk) easily the toner (Bk) more.
occur because it includes the carbon.
An image error occurs because the transfer The brand new drum unit applies much DIPSW104-1=0, DIPSW104-0=0
belt cleaning blade goes through, after you lubricant at the beginning. When you print DIPSW104-3=0, DIPSW104-2=0
replace the drum unit to a new one. images with low coverage continuously at this DIPSW103-3=0, DIPSW103-2=0
condition, the foreign materials are (recommended)
accumulated with the lubrication, and the Configure the DIPSW as above.
toner cannot removed perfectly. As a result, When the condition is not improved, configure
the toner is transferred. (Transfer belt cleaning DIPSW103-3=1 and DIPSW103-2=1. Always
blade goes through) create the exit toner band.
An image error occurs because of a transfer The foreign material is accumulated with the DIPSW103-3=0, DIPSW103-2=0 (Default)
belt cleaning blade go-through, even after you lubricant at the edge of the transfer belt DIPSW103-1=1, DIPSW103-0=1
configure the DIPSW104-0, 1 or the cleaning blade. Therefore, the toner is not Configure the DIPSW as above, and increase
DIPSW103-7. removed perfectly and the dirt is transferred. the frequency of the reverse control of the
intermediate transfer belt.
Dirt on the back side occurs. The dirt on the 2nd transfer roller by the solid DIPSW103-7=1
image on the coverage increase is not Configure the DIPSW as above. Separate the
cleaned perfectly and the dirt is transferred. 2nd transfer unit and the intermediate transfer
unit.
(1) Function
On printing, create the exit toner band between images that are transferred to the intermediate transfer belt. Suppress the error which occurs
when the toner supply amount is low.
Configure the coverage that is used for the exit toner band by each DIPSW.
Note
▪ The coverage that you configure on DIPSW is the sum of the coverage that is used for the exit toner band creation, and the
coverage that is used for printings. Example: When the exit toner band of coverage 3% is configured, and you print the image
of coverage approximately 2%, creates the exit toner band of coverage approximately 1% (the difference). The details of the
DIPSW setting are as follows.
• DIPSW104-0, 1
Configure these DIPSWs when the image background, the toner scatter dirt, or the image deterioration occurs as a result of printings
with high coverage after you perform the printings with the low coverage continuously.
Note
▪ When DIPSW104-3, 2 are configured, the toner amount of Bk follows DIPSW104-3, 2.
▪ When you activate this setting, the productivity is slightly lowered.
DIPSW104-1=0 0% (Not created)
DIPSW104-0=0
(default)
DIPSW104-1=0 3%
DIPSW104-0=1
DIPSW104-1=1 1.5%
DIPSW104-0=0
(Recommended)
DIPSW104-1=1 5%
DIPSW104-0=1
• DIPSW104-3, 2
After the continuous printings with low coverage, print with high coverage and create the exit toner band only for Bk. Image background
occurs easily for Bk.
Note
▪ When you activate this setting, the productivity is slightly lowered.
DIPSW104-3=0 0% (Not created)
DIPSW104-2=0
(default)
DIPSW104-3=0 2%
DIPSW104-2=1
DIPSW104-3=1 3%
DIPSW104-2=0
(Recommended)
I-236
DIPSW104-3=1 5%
DIPSW104-2=1
• DIPSW103-1, 0
Change the timing (drive distance of the intermediate transfer belt) of the reverse control of the intermediate transfer belt.
Note
▪ When you configure DIPSW103-1=1, DIPSW103-0=1, the productivity is slightly lowered.
DIPSW103-1=0 Every 67.5 m
DIPSW103-0=0
(default)
DIPSW103-1=0 Every 135 m
DIPSW103-0=1
DIPSW103-0=0
DIPSW103-0=1
• DIPSW103-3, 2
Configure the slide distance of the lubrication apply brush. The exit toner band is created for that period.
DIPSW103-3=0 5 km
DIPSW103-2=0
(default: recommended)
DIPSW103-3=0 2 km
DIPSW103-2=1
DIPSW103-3=1 8 km
DIPSW103-2=0
DIPSW103-3=1 At all times
DIPSW103-2=1
• DIPSW103-7
When you create the exit toner band, some toner is not transferred to the paper.
When the toner adheres on the 2nd transfer unit too much and the toner cleaning function of the 2nd transfer unit cannot clean all of the
dirt, the back side of the paper gets dirty.
When you select "1" on DIPSW103-7, the 2nd transfer unit separates from the intermediate transfer unit when the exit toner band is
created. Therefore, the toner does not adhere to the 2nd transfer unit, and you can prevent the dirt.
Note
▪ When you select 1 (ON) on DIPSW103-7, the productivity is slightly lowered.
4.5.15 Remaining staple amount display setting

(1) Outline
• Display the following information on the Machine screen when DIPSW48-7 "Display of the remaining staple amount" is "1".
• Remaining staple amount indicator
• [Amount Info.] button
(The Amount Information screen is displayed when you press the [Amount Info.] button. )
• Users can check the remaining staple amount by the remaining staple amount indicator and the Amount Information screen.
• Applicable finisher: FS-532, SD-506, SD-513
Note
▪ Reset the count when you place a new staple cartridge. (Refer to I.4.5.15 (3) Operation of staple cartridge replacement )
I-237
[2]
[1]
[3]
[1] Remaining amount indicator [2] [Amount Info.] button

[3] Amount Information screen -
(2) Remaining amount detection of staple

• Count the consumed staple amount and calculate the remaining staple amount. ("Remaining staple amount" = "Maximum number of
staple cartridge" - "Consumed staple")
• The remaining staple amount is displayed in 4 levels on the remaining amount indicator and the Amount Information screen.
• When several finishers are connected:
• Remaining amount indicator: Display the information of the finisher that has less remaining amount.
• Amount Information screen: Displays all connected finishers.
Remaining staple amount Staple display Amount Information
Lamp Remaining amount Text screen
indicator
2501 to 5000 None Level 3 (White) White 3
501 to 2500 None Level 2 (White) White 2
500 or less None Level 1 (Red) Red 1
0 Red None Red 0
I-238
[3] [4] [5]
[1]
[2]
[1] Staple display [2] Amount Information screen
[3] Lamp [4] Remaining amount indicator
[5] Text -
(3) Operation of staple cartridge replacement

Note
▪ When you attach the new staple cartridge, be sure to reset the remaining amount count. When you do not reset the remaining
amount count, the remaining amount is not correctly displayed.
▪ When you attach the partly used staple cartridge, the remaining amount is not correctly displayed.
1. Attach the new staple cartridge.
2. "MACHINE screen"
Touch [Amount Info.] and display the Amount Information screen.
Note
▪ If you replace the staple cartridge when the remaining staple amount is empty, the Amount Information screen appears
automatically.
▪ If you replace the staple cartridge when the power source is deactivated, the Amount Information screen does not
automatically appear.
3. "Amount Information screen"

Touch [Complete Replacement] and display the confirmation screen.
4. "Confirmation screen"
Press [OK]. The remaining amount count is reset.
I-239
4.5.16 Postcard full bleed print setting

(1) Outline
When DIPSW28-4=1 and 28-5=1, 3 side edge full bleed is available.
(2) Supported condition
• For Japan only.
• Configure the blank on the leading edge 1 mm or more.
• Select "1" on DIPSW10-5.
• Paper cannot be fed from the LU-202m, LU-202XL, or LU-202XLm.
• Paper weight: 177 g/m2 or more
• Only the PS Plug-in driver is supported.
• The paper size should be 100 mm x 148 mm at minimum and 107 mm x 154 mm at maximum.
Note
▪ If this setting is configured, the productivity is reduced to 2/3.
▪ Duplex printing is not supported.
▪ The image quality is not guaranteed.
(3) Print setting procedure

1. Click the [Layout] tab of the driver.
2. Click custom for the original size, and input the original size.
3. Configure the size 5 mm larger than the paper size.
4. Put a check on "Postcard Full Bleed".
4.5.17 Restrictions on use of parts for textured paper

(1) Preparation
When the textured paper is printed with the C3080, C3080P, C83hc, C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L, any of the following parts and settings
are required.
• The intermediate transfer belt type is Intermediate transfer belt/H or Intermediate transfer belt/C (service part).
• The intermediate transfer belt type is Normal and DIPSW105-6:1 (ON)
Note
▪ When you use the emboss intermediate transfer belt, lines like ripple on image possibly occur on feeding plain paper.
I-240
(2) Outline
When DIPSW76-3 "Display [Transfer Unit Replacement] button" is "1", displays the [Transfer Unit Replacement] button in [UTILITY] -
[Administrator Setting] - [System Setting] - [Expert Adjustment].
Note
▪ Change the DIPSW to "0" because this button is not displayed under DIPSW15-0=1.
(3) Replacement procedure for the intermediate transfer unit

Note
▪ It can be replaced in the ORU-M mode. When you replace it in the ORU-M mode, perform A-B replacement.
▪ When you replace the intermediate transfer unit in the Transfer Unit Replacement screen, you can replace it with either an
intermediate transfer unit with an intermediate transfer belt, an intermediate transfer belt/H, or an intermediate transfer belt/C.
When you replace in the ORU-M mode, you can replace it only with an intermediate transfer unit with the same type of belt.
▪ When you replace the part in the Transfer Unit Replacement screen, it is assumed that you are replacing it with an intermediate
transfer belt of a different type.
▪ When you replace the transfer unit without using the "Transfer Unit Replacement" screen or the ORU-M mode, the operation is
not guaranteed.
▪ When the ORU-M function is enabled or disabled before the transfer unit is replaced, the counter value is not guaranteed.
1. Press [Transfer Unit Replacement] in [Utility] - [Administrator Setting] - [System Setting] - [Expert Adjustment].
2. The "Transfer Unit Replacement screen" is displayed.
Press [Start Replacement].
3. "Start replacement work?" is displayed.

Press [Yes].
4. The main body is rebooted.
5. The Transfer Unit Replacement screen is displayed.
If you press [Procedure Guide View] while [Intermediate Transfer Unit] is selected, the replacement procedure of the emboss
intermediate transfer unit is displayed.
I-241
6. Follow the procedure guide and replace the unit.

7. After the replacement work is completed, press [Complete Replacement].
8. The main body is rebooted.
9. The Automatic Adjust screen is displayed.
Press [Start] and start the adjustment.
10. After the adjustment, press [Complete].

11. [Emboss Transfer] is displayed on the Machine screen.
Note
▪ When you want [Emboss Transfer] to be displayed on the Machine screen, select "1" for DIPSW93-0.
12. [Texture Depth Setting] is displayed in [Paper Setting] - [Change Set].
(4) Restrictions on the use of textured(embossed) paper

• When EF-103 is installed: When the textured paper is fed, the paper whose weight is 106 g/m2 or more cannot be used.
• When the textured paper is fed, IQ-501 cannot conduct the real-time adjustment, the periodical both sides adjustment, and the color
density control.
• For each tray, a prohibition is generated for the textured paper setting depending on the DIPSW setting.
Tray Corresponding DIPSW Setting value Remark
Main body tray Upper 92-0 0: Unable (default)
1: Enable
Lower 92-1 0: Unable (default)
1: Enable
PF-602 Upper 92-2 0: Unable (default)
1: Enable
Lower 92-3 0: Unable
1: Enable (default)
PF-707m 1st tandem Upper 92-4 0: Unable (default)
1: Enable
Middle 92-4 0: Unable (default)
1: Enable
Lower - - Enable at all times
PF-707m 2nd tandem Upper 92-4 0: Unable (default)
1: Enable
1: Enable
I-242

1: Enable
PF-707m 3rd tandem Upper 92-4 0: Unable (default)
1: Enable
1: Enable
1: Enable
LCT Connection to the main 92-5 0: Unable
body 1: Enable (default)
Connection to devices 92-7 0: Unable (default)
other than the main body 1: Enable
Bypass Connection to the main 92-6 0: Unable (default)
body 1: Enable
Connection to devices 92-6 0: Unable (default)
other than the main body 1: Enable
• Only for the PF-707m tray, a prohibition is generated for the transfer paper size depending on the DIPSW91-6 and DIPSW91-7 settings.
DipSW91-6 DipSW91-7 Prohibitions on the textured paper size for the Remark
PF-707m tray
0 0 No prohibition Default value for models
other than those for North
America and Europe
1 0 Paper with a main scanning width that is less Default value for North
than 250.1 mm, and a sub scan width that is America
less than 180.1 mm is prohibited
0 1 Paper with a main scanning width that is less Default value for Europe
than 205.1 mm, and a sub scan width that is
less than 180.1 mm is prohibited
1 1 No prohibition
4.5.18 Fusing Unit A and B Auto Recognition

(1) Function
When the "Fusing Unit Auto Recognition" (DipSW5-3) is "1", the automatic recognition control of the fusing unit A and the fusing unit B
becomes available.
When a short connector is inserted, it is judged to be the fusing machine A. When the short connector is removed, it is judged to be the fusing
machine B.
Fusing machine A (with a short connector)
Fusing machine B (without a short connector)
I-243
The detection timing of the fusing unit is as the following.

• At the timing the ADU is inserted to the main body (when the power supply is activated and ORU starts up.)
When the fusing unit is different from the current unit, conducts the replacement of the non-volatile value.
(Ex. The fusing unit A is replaced with the fusing unit B while the power supply is inactive under the condition that the fusing unit A is
connected. In this case, changes the special parts counter from A to B when the power supply starts up.)
DIPSW5-3=0 Fusing unit auto recognition OFF
(default)
DIPSW5-3=1 Fusing unit auto recognition ON
Note
▪ When the fusing unit auto recognition (DipSW5-3) is "1" (to recognize automatically) under the condition that the ORU-M
setting (DipSw15-0) is active, do not replace the fusing unit of ORU-M (because it cannot be reset as a replaced part at the
replacement operation).
▪ When you change the fusing unit auto recognition to being active while the ORU-M setting is active, replace the currently
connected fusing unit with the fusing unit [A]. Then, activate the auto recognition of the fusing unit. It is because that the
default fusing unit is [A]. If the connected fusing unit for ORU-M is the fusing unit [B] and the fusing unit auto recognition
becomes active, the data of the fusing unit [A] is overwritten.
4.5.19 Release the capacity limit of FS-532 or OT-510 main tray and LS-506 stacker tray
(1) Function
Release the capacity limit of FS-532 or OT-510 main tray and LS-506 stacker tray
Note
▪ The tray breaks when the machine loads more papers than the specification.
Switch the limit Switch the stop timing
Stop immediately: 15-4=0, Stop at a break between the set: The alarm stop is invalid: 15-4=1,
15-3=0 15-4=0, 15-3=1 15-3=0 or 1
FS-532, 3-5=0 The machine stops at the timing The machine stops at a break The machine does not stop until
OT-510 when the main tray activates the between the set after the main tray the job finishes.
specified sensors. activates the specified sensors.
The specified sensors are The specified sensors are different
different depending on the depending on the mode, paper
mode, paper size, paper type, size, paper type, paper weight, the
paper weight, the installation of installation of SD-510.
SD-510.
3-5=1 The machine stops at the timing The machine stops at a break The machine does not stop until
when the main tray activates the between the set after the main tray the job finishes.
4,000 sheets sensor (PS19). activates the 4,000 sheets sensor
(When the SD-510 is not (PS19). (When the SD-510 is not
installed.) installed.)
The machine stops at the timing The machine stops at a break
when the main tray activates the between the set after the main tray
3,000 sheets sensor (PS16). activates the 3,000 sheets sensor
(When the SD-510 is installed.) (PS16). (When the SD-510 is
installed.)
LS-506 29-1=0 <Large size> <Large size> The machine does not stop until
The machine stops at the The machine stops at a break the job finishes.
following timing (whichever is between the set, after the following
earlier). - When the stacker tray timing (whichever is earlier). -
activates the 5,000 sheets When the stacker tray activates
stacked sensor (PS14). the 5,000 sheets stacked sensor
(PS14).
I-244
- When the specified number of - When the specified number of

sheets according to the paper sheets according to the paper
weight is loaded. weight is loaded.
 

The machine stops at the The machine stops at a break
following timing (whichever is between the set, after the following
activates the 2,000 sheets When the stacker tray activates
stacked sensor (PS13). the 2,000 sheets stacked sensor
- When the specified number of (PS13).
sheets according to the paper - When the specified number of
weight is loaded. sheets according to the paper
weight is loaded.
29-1=1 <Large size> <Large size> <Large size>
The machine stops at the The machine stops at a break The machine stops at the timing
following timing (whichever is between the set, after the following when 5,000 sheets are loaded.
activates the 5,000 sheets When the stacker tray activates 
stacked sensor (PS14). - When the 5,000 sheets stacked sensor The machine stops at the timing
5,000 sheets are loaded. (PS14). - When 5,000 sheets are when 2,000 sheets are loaded.
loaded.

The machine stops at the 
following timing (whichever is The machine stops at a break
earlier). - When the stacker tray between the set, after the following
activates the 2,000 sheets timing (whichever is earlier). -
stacked sensor (PS13). - When When the stacker tray activates
2,000 sheets are loaded. the 2,000 sheets stacked sensor
(PS13). - When 2,000 sheets are
loaded.
4.5.20 IQ-501 Paper size of Auto Image Adjustment

• The paper size that can be used for IQ-501 Auto Image Adjustment is specified.
• The paper size that can be used varies depending on the following items.
• Machine type
• DIPSW73-1
• [Switch Patch Size of Auto Image Adj.]
• [Select Chart Type (Auto Image Adj.)]
Machine type DIPSW73-1 [Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [Common Available paper size
Setting] →
[Switch Patch Size of [Select Chart Type Standard size paper Custom size paper
Auto Image Adj.] (Auto Image Adj.)]
Color machines 0 [6mm x 8mm] [Type1] SRA3, 13 x 19, 12 x Paper size in the sub
18, SRA4 scan direction: 203.0
mm to 762.0 mm
[Type2] SRA3, 13 x 19, 12 x Paper size in the sub
mm to 762.0 mm
[5mm x 9.5mm] [Type1] SRA3, 13 x 19, 12 x Paper size in the sub
18 scan direction: 236.0
mm to 762.0 mm
18 scan direction: 250.0
mm to 762.0 mm
1 [6mm x 8mm] [Type1] Paper size in the sub scan direction: 203.0 mm
to 762.0 mm
[Type2] Paper size in the sub scan direction: 217.0 mm
to 762.0 mm
[5mm x 9.5mm] [Type1] Paper size in the sub scan direction: 236.0 mm
to 762.0 mm
to 762.0 mm
Monochrome 0 - [Type1] SRA3, 13 x 19, 12 x Paper size in the sub
machines 18, SRA4 scan direction: 217.0
mm to 762.0 mm
mm to 762.0 mm
1 - [Type1] Paper size in the sub scan direction: 217.0 mm
to 762.0 mm
I-245

to 762.0 mm
4.5.21 IQ-501 White overwriting area of the crop mark background of Auto Image Adjustment
• When the position adjustment of the Auto Image Adjustment is performed, the crop marks are printed on the paper.
• To prevent a detection error of the crop marks, the background of the crop marks is overwritten in white.
• The white overwriting area varies depending on the following items.
• Paper size
• [Select Chart Type (Auto Image Adj.)]
• DIPSW98-3
[1] [2] [3]
2.0mm 2.5mm
2.5mm 2.5mm
1.0mm
0.5mm
2.0mm 1.0mm
6.0mm 1.0mm 2.5mm 5.5mm
1.0mm 1.0mm
1.0mm 1.0mm 0.5mm 1.0mm
5.5mm
6.0mm
1.0mm 1.0mm
2.5mm 2.5mm
[4] [5]
2.5mm 2.5mm
8.5mm 8.5mm
0.5mm 0.5mm
0.5mm
1.0mm
2.5mm 5.5mm 1.0mm
2.0mm 1.0mm
6.0mm 1.0mm
1.0mm
0.5mm 1.0mm
1.0mm 1.0mm
5.5mm
6.0mm
1.0mm
1.0mm
2.5mm
2.5mm
[6] [7]
[1] White overwriting area [2] • When DIPSW98-3=0: Normal area (not overwritten in
white)
• When DIPSW98-3=1: White overwriting area
[3] Deleted area (the illustrations are for the KM controller.) [4] [Type1], Regular size paper (487.7 mm or less)
• For the KM controller: 2.5 mm
• For the outsourced controller: 1.0 mm
[5] [Type1], Banner size paper (487.8 mm or more) [6] [Type2], Regular size paper (487.7 mm or less)
[7] [Type2], Banner size paper (487.8 mm or more) -
4.5.22 OpenAPI/IWS Function Correspondence Table

(1) Function
Depending on the combination of DIPSW40-7, DIPSW70-7, and DIPSW70-6, the following OpenAPI/IWS functions can be used when an
outsourced controller is connected.
DIPSW Setting
DIPSW 40-7 1 0 0 0
DIPSW 70-7 0 0 1 1
I-246
DIPSW Setting
DIPSW 70-6 0 0 0 1
Scan(TypeD) ✓ ✓
Scan(TypeS) ✓ ✓
Pull Print ✓
Job Management
Authentication ✓ Restricted (*1) ✓ ✓
Setup
Browser (Auth) ✓ Restricted (*1) ✓ ✓
Browser (Scan) ✓ ✓
Browser (Pull) ✓
General application ✓ ✓
(Browser Scan)
General application ✓
(Browser Pull)
Browser (Screen saver) ✓ ✓ ✓
Browser Launcher ✓ ✓ ✓
Right Fax
Other - A
Browser - Tab ✓ ✓ ✓
Upload - Scan ✓ ✓
Upload - Box ✓
Download - Print ✓
Download - Save ✓
Web Page Printing ✓
IWS ScanToPrint (Copy) ✓ ✓ ✓
IWS Print ✓
IWS Scan ✓ ✓
IWS BoxToPrint ✓ ✓ ✓
IWS ScanToBox ✓ ✓ ✓
IWS BoxToXXX ✓
1*: When you configure these DipSW, you cannot install an application. When you configure the these DipSW after an application is installed,
the operation is not guaranteed. (The login screen is displayed and the authentication fails.)
4.6 Counter and data

4.6.1 Maintenance Counter
(1) Outline
Setting or resetting of the maintenance counter cycle.
Note
▪ You can select the maintenance cycle by the paper count or the drive distance (m) of the transfer belt cleaning unit of the
intermediate transfer unit. For default, the drive distance is selected.
▪ The count condition of the paper count differs depending on the paper size in the sub scan direction.
▪ To 338 mm: 1 count
▪ 338.1 mm to 488 mm: 2 counts
▪ 915.1 mm to 1300 mm: 5 counts
(2) Counter reset
After the maintenance is completed, reset the maintenance count using this mode.
Note
▪ Be sure to reset the maintenance counter after the periodic maintenance (every 144,000m).
Otherwise, the periodic check alert message and icon do not disappear.
▪ The value in [Total] cannot be reset.
▪ When you select "1" on the software DIPSW15-2, the periodic maintenance alert message and the icon are hidden. You can use
the parts unless there are any problems in the image quality even the parts reach their life in the counter display. Change the
setting and reduce down time and the cost.
(a) Procedure
Press [04 Counter /Data].
2. "Counter/Data Menu screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
3. "Maintenance Counter screen"
Press [Counter Clear] to reset the maintenance counter.
I-247
4. "Reset confirm screen"

Press [Yes] to reset the counter.
The counter is reset, and the start date is automatically inputted.
Press [No] to cancel.
(3) Maintenance cycle setting

Configure the maintenance counter.
Note
▪ The maintenance counter is predetermined. Be sure not to change the count value normally. The default is as follows.
▪ C3080, C3080P, C83hc: Distance 144,000, number of sheets 222,000
▪ C3070, C3070P, C73hc, C3070L: Distance 144,000, number of sheets 220,000
(a) Procedure
Press [01 Maintenance Counter].
Enter high digits of the cycle with the numeric buttons.
Press [OK] to register the data.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the operation.
4.6.2 Data collection procedures

Display the following counter and data of the main body on the touch panel.
The counter and the data also can be checked through the CS Remote Care, list output and the mail remote notification system.
• Paper Size Counter (Total)
• 01 Paper Size Counter (Total)
• 02 Paper Size (Total/Envelope)
• Paper Size Counter (Copy)
• 01 Paper Size Counter(Copy)
• 02 Paper Size(Copy/Envelope)
• Paper Size Counter(Printer)
• 01 Paper Size Counter(Printer)
• 02 Paper Size(Printer/Envelope)
• ADF Counter
• Coverage Data History
• Paper JAM History
• JAM Counter
• Counter of Each Copy Mode
• SC Counter
• JAM Counter Individual Sec.
• SC Count Individual Sec.
• SC Data of Time Series
• Maintenance History
• Maintenance Counter Reset History
• Parts History in Time Series
• Each Paper Type Counter
• ORU-M Maintenance History
(1) Procedure
Press [02 Collecting Data].
3. "Collecting Data Menu screen"
Press the counter or the data item that you want to check.
4. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the "Counter/Data screen" pages.
Note
▪ [Counter Clear] appears on each screen of [Jam Counter Individual Sec.] and [SC Counter Individual Sec.]
"Count Reset screen" appears when [Counter Clear] is pressed. Press [Yes] to reset the sectional count. Press [No] to
cancel the count reset.
Reset these data when you visit customers for the maintenance so that you can check the number of the jam and the
malfunction that is counted after the last visit.
▪ On the individual confirmation screen of [ORU-M Maintenance History], select the item that you want to check and press
[Information View] to check the information of the item that you selected.
4.6.3 Paper Size Counter (Total/copy/print)

Confirm the number of printings of each paper size.
Note
▪ Maximum count: 99,999,999
▪ 1 count is made for the paper of all types regardless of the paper size.
I-248
No. CSRC parameter Paper Size Remark

01 P1 00 Others
02 P1 01 A3
03 P1 02 A4 SEF
04 P1 03 A5
05 P1 04 A6
06 P1 05 B4
07 P1 06 B5 SEF
08 P1 07 B6
09 P1 08 12x18
10 P1 09 11x17
11 P1 0A 8.5x14
12 P1 0B 8.5x11 SEF
13 P1 0C 7.25x10.5
14 P1 0D 5.5x8.5
15 P1 0E F4
16 P1 0F Post card
17 P1 10 16K LEF
18 P1 11 8K
19 P1 12 16K SEF
20 P1 13 SRA4 LEF
21 P1 14 SRA3
22 P1 15 SRA4 SEF
23 P1 16 13x19
24 P1 17 Inf. 1 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 354.9 mm or less
27 P1 1A Inf. 4 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
28 P1 1B Inf. 5 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
29 P1 1C Inf. 6 (***mm) *** changes depending on the setting value.
Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction: 915.0 mm or more
30 P1 1D A4 LEF
31 P1 1E B5 LEF
32 P1 1F 8.5x11 LEF
Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction (envelopes): 297.9 mm or less
Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction (envelopes): 331.9 mm or less
Custom size, paper length in sub scan direction (envelopes): 332.0 mm or more
4.6.4 ADF Counter
Confirm the number of originals that are fed in each DF mode.
Note
▪ Number 01 and Number 02 counter do not double count with other counters.
▪ 1 count for single-sided, 2 counts for double-sided.
Number CSRC parameter Item Remark
01 F0 00 Number of originals that are fed in ADF mode (1 side)
02 F0 01 Number of originals that are fed in ADF mode (2 sides)
03 F0 02 -
04 F0 03 -
05 F0 04 -
06 F0 05 -
07 F0 06 -
08 F0 07 Number of mixed original fed in ADF (1 side)
I-249
Number CSRC parameter Item Remark

09 F0 08 Number of mixed original fed in ADF (2 sides)
10 F0 09 -
11 F0 0A Number of 1-sided Z-folded original fed
12 F0 0B Number of 2-sided Z-folded original fed
4.6.5 Coverage Data History

Confirm the average coverage of 5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y, M, C and K.
Note
▪ This coverage is a calculated value that is based on the colored area and the transfer paper area, and is different from the toner
consumption of the actual printing.
▪ Up to 30 most recent coverage data are stored and deleted in the chronological order.
Number CSRC parameter Printer counter Coverage (%)
01 V0 00 B/W accumulated coverage rate (00.0 to 99.9)
02 V0 01 B/W section 1 coverage rate
11 V0 0A B/W section 10 coverage rate
12 V0 0B B/W section 11 coverage rate
13 V0 0C B/W section 12 coverage rate
14 V0 0D B/W section 13 coverage rate
15 V0 0E B/W section 14 coverage rate
16 V0 0F B/W section 15 coverage rate
27 V0 1A B/W section 26 coverage rate
28 V0 1B B/W section 27 coverage rate
29 V0 1C B/W section 28 coverage rate
30 V0 1D B/W section 29 coverage rate
31 V0 1E B/W section 30 coverage rate
32 V0 1F
33 V0 20 Yellow accumulated coverage rate
34 V0 21 Yellow section 1 coverage rate
43 V0 2A Yellow section 10 coverage rate
44 V0 2B Yellow section 11 coverage rate
45 V0 2C Yellow section 12 coverage rate
46 V0 2D Yellow section 13 coverage rate
I-250

47 V0 2E Yellow section 14 coverage rate
48 V0 2F Yellow section 15 coverage rate
59 V0 3A Yellow section 26 coverage rate
60 V0 3B Yellow section 27 coverage rate
61 V0 3C Yellow section 28 coverage rate
62 V0 3D Yellow section 29 coverage rate
63 V0 3E Yellow section 30 coverage rate
64 V0 3F
65 V0 40 Magenta accumulated coverage rate
66 V0 41 Magenta section 1 coverage rate
75 V0 4A Magenta section 10 coverage rate
76 V0 4B Magenta section 11 coverage rate
77 V0 4C Magenta section 12 coverage rate
78 V0 4D Magenta section 13 coverage rate
79 V0 4E Magenta section 14 coverage rate
80 V0 4F Magenta section 15 coverage rate
91 V0 5A Magenta section 26 coverage rate
92 V0 5B Magenta section 27 coverage rate
93 V0 5C Magenta section 28 coverage rate
94 V0 5D Magenta section 29 coverage rate
95 V0 5E Magenta section 30 coverage rate
96 V0 5F
97 V0 60 Cyan accumulated coverage rate
98 V0 61 Cyan section 1 coverage rate
I-251

107 V0 6A Cyan section 10 coverage rate
108 V0 6B Cyan section 11 coverage rate
109 V0 6C Cyan section 12 coverage rate
110 V0 6D Cyan section 13 coverage rate
111 V0 6E Cyan section 14 coverage rate
112 V0 6F Cyan section 15 coverage rate
123 V0 7A Cyan section 26 coverage rate
124 V0 7B Cyan section 27 coverage rate
125 V0 7C Cyan section 28 coverage rate
126 V0 7D Cyan section 29 coverage rate
127 V0 7E Cyan section 30 coverage rate
128 V0 7F
4.6.6 Paper JAM History

With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm the jam code, the total count, the date of the occurrence, the time of the
occurrence, the tray, the paper size, the magnification, the paper type, and the paper weight.
4.6.7 JAM/JAM Counter Individual Sec.

Confirm the number of jam occurrences for each jam code. (Except idling JAM)
Note
▪ JAM Counter: Check the number of jam occurrences for each jam code. (Except idling JAM)
▪ JAM Counter Individual Section: Check the JAM occurrence situation (number) since the last "Counter Clear".
▪ Maximum count: 999,999
▪ (The stationary jam is not included in the count.)
▪ Jam code appears on the user mode screen when you change the DIPSW11-7 to 1.
Number CSRC Parameter Item (jam code)
001 J0 00 J-1001
002 J0 01 J-1002
003 J0 02 J-1003
004 J0 03 J-1101
005 J0 04 J-1201
006 J0 05 J-1501
007 J0 06 J-1502
008 J0 07 J-1510
009 J0 08 J-1601
010 J0 09 J-1602
011 J0 0A J-1603
012 J0 0B J-1604
013 J0 0C J-1605
014 J0 0D J-1606
015 J0 0E J-1607
016 J0 0F J-1608
017 J0 10 J-1609
018 J0 11 J-1610
019 J0 12 J-1611
020 J0 13 J-1613
I-252

021 J0 14 J-1614
022 J0 15 J-1615
023 J0 16 J-1616
024 J0 17 J-1617
025 J0 18 J-1618
026 J0 19 J-1619
027 J0 1A J-1620
028 J0 1B J-1621
029 J0 1C J-1622
030 J0 1D J-1623
031 J0 1E J-1624
032 J0 1F J-1625
033 J0 20 J-1626
034 J0 21 J-1627
035 J0 22 J-1628
036 J0 23 J-1631
037 J0 24 J-1632
038 J0 25 J-1633
039 J0 26 J-1701
040 J0 27 J-1702
041 J0 28 J-1704
042 J0 29 J-1705
043 J0 2A J-1706
044 J0 2B J-1707
045 J0 2C J-1708
046 J0 2D J-1709
047 J0 2E J-1710
048 J0 2F J-1901
049 J0 30 J-1902
050 J0 31 J-1903
051 J0 32 J-3101
052 J0 33 J-3102
053 J0 34 J-3106
054 J0 35 J-3112
055 J0 36 J-3120
056 J0 37 J-3140
057 J0 38 J-3201
058 J0 39 J-3202
059 J0 3A J-3203
060 J0 3B J-3204
061 J0 3C J-3205
062 J0 3D J-3206
063 J0 3E J-3207
064 J0 3F J-3208
065 J0 40 J-3209
066 J0 41 J-3210
067 J0 42 J-3211
068 J0 43 J-3212
069 J0 44 J-3213
070 J0 45 J-5101
071 J0 46 J-5201
072 J0 47 J-6603
073 J0 48 J-6604
074 J0 49 J-6605
075 J0 4A J-6606
076 J0 4B J-6607
077 J0 4C J-6608
I-253

078 J0 4D J-6613
079 J0 4E J-6614
080 J0 4F J-6623
081 J0 50 J-6633
082 J0 51 J-6654
083 J0 52 J-6698
084 J0 53 J-6699
085 J0 54 J-7101
086 J0 55 J-7102
087 J0 56 J-7103
088 J0 57 J-7104
089 J0 58 J-7105
090 J0 59 J-7107
091 J0 5A J-7108
092 J0 5B J-7109
093 J0 5C J-7110
094 J0 5D J-7111
095 J0 5E J-7216
096 J0 5F J-7217
097 J0 60 J-7218
098 J0 61 J-7219
099 J0 62 J-7220
100 J0 63 J-7221
101 J0 64 J-7222
102 J0 65 J-7223
103 J0 66 J-7224
104 J0 67 J-7225
105 J0 68 J-7226
106 J0 69 J-7227
107 J0 6A J-7228
108 J0 6B J-7229
109 J0 6C J-7230
110 J0 6D J-7231
111 J0 6E J-7235
112 J0 6F J-7236
113 J0 70 J-7237
114 J0 71 J-7243
115 J0 72 J-7248
116 J0 73 J-7249
117 J0 74 J-7250
118 J0 75 J-7251
119 J0 76 J-7265
120 J0 77 J-7266
121 J0 78 J-7272
122 J0 79 J-7281
123 J0 7A J-7282
124 J0 7B J-7283
125 J0 7C J-7290
126 J0 7D J-7401
127 J0 7E J-7402
128 J0 7F J-7403
129 J0 80 J-7404
130 J0 81 J-7405
131 J0 82 J-7406
132 J0 83 J-7407
133 J0 84 J-7408
134 J0 85 J-7409
I-254

135 J0 86 J-7410
136 J0 87 J-7411
137 J0 88 J-7412
138 J0 89 J-7431
139 J0 8A J-7432
140 J0 8B J-7433
141 J0 8C J-7434
142 J0 8D J-7435
143 J0 8E J-7436
144 J0 8F J-7437
145 J0 90 J-7438
146 J0 91 J-7439
147 J0 92 J-7440
148 J0 93 J-7441
149 J0 94 J-7442
150 J0 95 J-7501
151 J0 96 J-7502
152 J0 97 J-7503
153 J0 98 J-7504
154 J0 99 J-7505
155 J0 9A J-7506
156 J0 9B J-7507
157 J0 9C J-7508
158 J0 9D J-7509
159 J0 9E J-7510
160 J0 9F J-7511
161 J0 A0 J-7512
162 J0 A1 J-7513
163 J0 A2 J-7514
164 J0 A3 J-7515
165 J0 A4 J-7516
166 J0 A5 J-7517
167 J0 A6 J-7518
168 J0 A7 J-7519
169 J0 A8 J-7520
170 J0 A9 J-7521
171 J0 AA J-7522
172 J0 AB J-7523
173 J0 AC J-7524
174 J0 AD J-7530
175 J0 AE J-7531
176 J0 AF J-7532
177 J0 B0 J-7533
178 J0 B1 J-7535
179 J0 B2 J-7550
180 J0 B3 J-7551
181 J0 B4 J-7552
182 J0 B5 J-7553
183 J0 B6 J-7554
184 J0 B7 J-7555
185 J0 B8 J-7556
186 J0 B9 J-7557
187 J0 BA J-7558
188 J0 BB J-7560
189 J0 BC J-7561
190 J0 BD J-7562
191 J0 BE J-7563
I-255

192 J0 BF J-7564
193 J0 C0 J-7565
194 J0 C1 J-7566
195 J0 C2 J-7567
196 J0 C3 J-7568
197 J0 C4 J-7569
198 J0 C5 J-7570
199 J0 C6 J-7571
200 J0 C7 J-7572
201 J0 C8 J-7573
202 J0 C9 J-7574
203 J0 CA J-7575
204 J0 CB J-7576
205 J0 CC J-7577
206 J0 CD J-7578
207 J0 CE J-7579
208 J0 CF J-7580
209 J0 D0 J-7581
210 J0 D1 J-7582
211 J0 D2 J-7583
212 J0 D3 J-7584
213 J0 D4 J-7585
214 J0 D5 J-7586
215 J0 D6 J-7587
216 J0 D7 J-7589
217 J0 D8 J-7590
218 J0 D9 J-7591
219 J0 DA J-7592
220 J0 DB J-7593
221 J0 DC J-7594
222 J0 DD J-7595
223 J0 DE J-7596
224 J0 DF J-7597
225 J0 E0 J-7601
226 J0 E1 J-7602
227 J0 E2 J-7603
228 J0 E3 J-7604
229 J0 E4 J-7605
230 J0 E5 J-7606
231 J0 E6 J-7607
232 J0 E7 J-7608
233 J0 E8 J-7611
234 J0 E9 J-7612
235 J0 EA J-7621
236 J0 EB J-7622
237 J0 EC J-7623
238 J0 ED J-7624
239 J0 EE J-7625
240 J0 EF J-7626
241 J0 F0 J-7627
242 J0 F1 J-7628
243 J0 F2 J-7629
244 J0 F3 J-7630
245 J0 F4 J-7631
246 J0 F5 J-7632
247 J0 F6 J-7633
248 J0 F7 J-7634
I-256

249 J0 F8 J-7635
250 J0 F9 J-7660
251 J0 FA J-7661
252 J0 FB J-7662
253 J0 FC J-7663
254 J0 FD J-7664
255 J0 FE J-7665
256 J0 FF J-7666
257 J1 00 J-7667
258 J1 01 J-7668
259 J1 02 J-7669
260 J1 03 J-7670
261 J1 04 J-7671
262 J1 05 J-7672
263 J1 06 J-7673
264 J1 07 J-7674
265 J1 08 J-7675
266 J1 09 J-7676
267 J1 0A J-7677
268 J1 0B J-7678
269 J1 0C J-7679
270 J1 0D J-7680
271 J1 0E J-7681
272 J1 0F J-7682
273 J1 10 J-7683
274 J1 11 J-7684
275 J1 12 J-7685
276 J1 13 J-7686
277 J1 14 J-7687
278 J1 15 J-7688
279 J1 16 J-7689
280 J1 17 J-7690
281 J1 18 J-7691
282 J1 19 J-7692
283 J1 1A J-7693
284 J1 1B J-7694
285 J1 1C J-7695
286 J1 1D J-7696
287 J1 1E J-7697
288 J1 1F J-7698
289 J1 20 J-7701
290 J1 21 J-7702
291 J1 22 J-9201
292 J1 23 J-9202
293 J1 24 J-9301
294 J1 25 J-9401
295 J1 26 J-7113
296 J1 27 J-7703
297 J1 28 J-7704
298 J1 29 J-7705
299 J1 2A J-7706
300 J1 2B J-7802
301 J1 2C J-7804
302 J1 2D J-7805
303 J1 2E J-7806
304 J1 2F J-7807
305 J1 30 J-7808
I-257

306 J1 31 J-7809
307 J1 32 J-7810
308 J1 33 J-7811
309 J1 34 J-7812
310 J1 35 J-7813
311 J1 36 J-1011
312 J1 37 J-1012
313 J1 38 J-1013
314 J1 39 J-1014
315 J1 3A J-1021
316 J1 3B J-1515
317 J1 3C J-1516
318 J1 3D J-1517
319 J1 3E J-1520
320 J1 3F J-1634
321 J1 40 J-1635
322 J1 41 J-1636
323 J1 42 J-1637
324 J1 43 J-1638
325 J1 44 J-1639
326 J1 45 J-1640
327 J1 46 J-1801
328 J1 47 J-1802
329 J1 48 J-1803
330 J1 49 J-1804
331 J1 4A J-1805
332 J1 4B J-1806
333 J1 4C J-1807
334 J1 4D J-1808
335 J1 4E J-1809
336 J1 4F J-1810
337 J1 50 J-1811
338 J1 51 J-1812
339 J1 52 J-1813
340 J1 53 J-1814
341 J1 54 J-1815
342 J1 55 J-1816
343 J1 56 J-1817
344 J1 57 J-1821
345 J1 58 J-1822
346 J1 59 J-1823
347 J1 5A J-1834
348 J1 5B J-1835
349 J1 5C J-1836
350 J1 5D J-1837
351 J1 5E J-1838
352 J1 5F J-1839
353 J1 60 J-1840
354 J1 61 J-1849
355 J1 62 J-1904
356 J1 63 J-1905
357 J1 64 J-2001
358 J1 65 J-2002
359 J1 66 J-2003
360 J1 67 J-2004
361 J1 68 J-2005
362 J1 69 J-2006
I-258

363 J1 6A J-2007
364 J1 6B J-2008
365 J1 6C J-2009
366 J1 6D J-2010
367 J1 6E J-2011
368 J1 6F J-2012
369 J1 70 J-2013
370 J1 71 J-2014
371 J1 72 J-2015
372 J1 73 J-2016
373 J1 74 J-2017
374 J1 75 J-2021
375 J1 76 J-2022
376 J1 77 J-2023
377 J1 78 J-2049
378 J1 79 J-7114
379 J1 7A J-7115
380 J1 7B J-7840
381 J1 7C J-7841
382 J1 7D J-7842
383 J1 7E J-7843
384 J1 7F J-7844
385 J1 80 J-7845
386 J1 81 J-7846
387 J1 82 J-7847
388 J1 83 J-7848
389 J1 84 J-7849
390 J1 85 J-7850
391 J1 86 J-7851
392 J1 87 J-7852
393 J1 88 J-7853
394 J1 89 J-7854
395 J1 8A J-7855
396 J1 8B J-7856
397 J1 8C J-7857
398 J1 8D J-7858
399 J1 8E J-7859
400 J1 8F J-7872
401 J1 90 J-7873
402 J1 91 J-7874
403 J1 92 J-7875
404 J1 93 J-7880
405 J1 94 J-7881
406 J1 95 J-7882
407 J1 96 J-7883
408 J1 97 J-7884
409 J1 98 J-7885
410 J1 99 J-7886
411 J1 9A J-7887
412 J1 9B J-7888
413 J1 9C J-7889
414 J1 9D J-7890
415 J1 9E J-7891
416 J1 9F J-7892
417 J1 A0 J-7893
418 J1 A1 J-7894
419 J1 A2 J-7895
I-259

420 J1 A3 J-7896
421 J1 A4 J-7897
422 J1 A5 J-7898
423 J1 A6 J-7899
424 J1 A7 J-7912
425 J1 A8 J-7913
426 J1 A9 J-7914
427 J1 AA J-7915
428 J1 AB J-1015
429 J1 AC J-1518
430 J1 AD J-1646
431 J1 AE J-1647
432 J1 AF J-1648
433 J1 B0 J-1846
434 J1 B1 J-1847
435 J1 B2 J-1848
436 J1 B3 J-2046
437 J1 B4 J-2047
438 J1 B5 J-2048
439 J1 B6 J-5301
440 J1 B7 J-1120
441 J1 B8 J-1220
442 J1 B9 J-1906
443 J1 BA J-9501
444 J1 BB J-9502
445 J1 BC J-3141
446 J1 BD J-7117
447 J1 BE J-7930
448 J1 BF J-7931
449 J1 C0 J-7932
450 J1 C1 J-7933
451 J1 C2 J-7934
452 J1 C3 J-7935
453 J1 C4 J-7936
454 J1 C5 J-7937
455 J1 C6 J-7938
456 J1 C7 J-7939
457 J1 C8 J-7940
458 J1 C9 J-7941
459 J1 CA J-7942
460 J1 CB J-7943
461 J1 CC J-7944
462 J1 CD J-7945
463 J1 CE J-7946
464 J1 CF J-7947
465 J1 D0 J-7948
466 J1 D1 J-3131
467 J1 D2 J-3132
468 J1 D3 J-3133
469 J1 D4 J-3134
470 J1 D5 -
471 J1 D6 -
472 J1 D7 -
473 J1 D8 -
474 J1 D9 -
475 J1 DA -
476 J1 DB -
I-260

477 J1 DC -
478 J1 DD -
479 J1 DE -
480 J1 DF -
481 J1 E0 -
482 J1 E1 -
483 J1 E2 -
484 J1 E3 -
485 J1 E4 -
486 J1 E5 -
487 J1 E6 -
488 J1 E7 -
489 J1 E8 -
490 J1 E9 -
491 J1 EA -
492 J1 EB -
493 J1 EC -
494 J1 ED -
495 J1 EE -
496 J1 EF -
497 J1 F0 -
498 J1 F1 -
499 J1 F2 -
500 J1 F3 -
501 J1 F4 -
502 J1 F5 -
503 J1 F6 -
504 J1 F7 -
505 J1 F8 -
506 J1 F9 -
507 J1 FA -
508 J1 FB -
509 J1 FC -
510 J1 FD -
511 J1 FE -
512 J1 FF -
4.6.8 Counter of Each Copy Mode

Confirm the status of use of each copy mode.
Note
Numb CSRC Item Count conditions
er Parameter
001 F1 00 1-1 mode
002 F1 01 1-2 mode
003 F1 02 2-1 mode
004 F1 03 2-2 mode
005 F1 04 ADF 1-1 mode
006 F1 05 ADF 1-2 mode
007 F1 06 Same width mixed original
008 F1 07 Different width mixed original
009 F1 08 Z-Folded original mode
010 F1 09 LEF: Portrait, SEF: Landscape (Reg.)
011 F1 0A LEF: Landscape, SEF: Portrait (Reg.)
012 F1 0B LEF: Portrait, SEF: Landscape (Rev.)
013 F1 0C LEF: Landscape, SEF: Portrait (Rev.)
014 F1 0D -
I-261

er Parameter
015 F1 0E -
016 F1 0F -
017 F1 10 Tab original
018 F1 11 Custom Size Original
019 F1 12 1 point staple (upper left)
020 F1 13 1 point staple (upper right)
021 F1 14 2 points staple (left bind)
022 F1 15 2 points staple (top bind)
023 F1 16 Right & left bind (output)
024 F1 17 2 points staple (right bind)
025 F1 18 Top bind (output)
026 F1 19 Tri-folding
027 F1 1A Saddle stitch
028 F1 1B Stacker 5000 sheets full alarm
029 F1 1C Group
030 F1 1D Offset group
031 F1 1E Sort
032 F1 1F Offset sort
033 F1 20 FACE DOWN
034 F1 21 FACE UP
035 F1 22 1toN
036 F1 23 Nto1
037 F1 24 -
038 F1 25 Post Inserter
039 F1 26 Trim
040 F1 27 Real size copy
041 F1 28 Fixed Zoom Ratio E4
042 F1 29 Fixed Zoom Ratio E3
043 F1 2A Fixed Zoom Ratio E2
044 F1 2B Fixed Zoom Ratio E1
045 F1 2C Fixed Zoom Ratio R4
046 F1 2D Fixed Zoom Ratio R3
047 F1 2E Fixed Zoom Ratio R2
048 F1 2F Fixed Zoom Ratio R1
049 F1 30 Set Zoom Ratio 1
052 F1 33 ZOOM
053 F1 34 Vertical/Horizontal Zoom
054 F1 35 Maximum ZOOM
055 F1 36 Minimum ZOOM
056 F1 37 APS
057 F1 38 AMS
058 F1 39 AES
059 F1 3A Preset Density 1
060 F1 3B Preset Density 2
061 F1 3C Interrupted copy
062 F1 3D Cancel Automatic Image Rotation
063 F1 3E Insert sheet
064 F1 3F -
065 F1 40 Combine
066 F1 41 Booklet
067 F1 42 Adhesive Binding
068 F1 43 -
069 F1 44 -
070 F1 45 Book copy
I-262

er Parameter
071 F1 46 Program job
072 F1 47 Non-Image Area Erase
073 F1 48 Neg-/positive reverse
074 F1 49 Repeat
075 F1 4A Manual repeat
076 F1 4B 2 Repeat in Designated Order
077 F1 4C Frame Erasure
078 F1 4D Center erasure
079 F1 4E Centering
080 F1 4F All-image area
081 F1 50 Shift
082 F1 51 Auto repeat
083 F1 52 -
084 F1 53 -
085 F1 54 -
086 F1 55 Date and time
087 F1 56 Page
088 F1 57 Numbering
089 F1 58 Print quantity: 1
090 F1 59 Print quantity: 2 to 5
091 F1 5A Print quantity: 6 to 10
092 F1 5B Print quantity: 11 or more
093 F1 5C Time while the power remote 1 is on
094 F1 5D Time while the power remote 2 is on
095 F1 5E -
096 F1 5F -
097 F1 60 Time in the LOW-POWER mode
098 F1 61 Time in Warm-up
099 F1 62 Time during the front door is open
100 F1 63 Operation time in 1 side straight exit
101 F1 64 Operation time in 1 side reverse exit
102 F1 65 Operation time in 2 sides print
103 F1 66 Operation time in ADF mode
104 F1 67 Morning correction count
105 F1 68 Number of paper inserter
106 F1 69 -
107 F1 6A Mis-centering correct error
108 F1 6B Number of saddle stitching job
109 F1 6C Saddle stitcher tri-folding tray full alarm
110 F1 6D Number of ADF NF occurred
111 F1 6E -
112 F1 6F BlankPage Removal Copy JOB Count
113 F1 70 BlankPage Removal Scan JOB Count
114 F1 71 Number of the scanner scanned
115 F1 72 -
116 F1 73 Number of memory overflow
117 F1 74 Number of the fusing alarm occurred
118 F1 75 Number of no tray stop occurred
119 F1 76 -
120 F1 77 -
121 F1 78 -
122 F1 79 -
123 F1 7A -
124 F1 7B Compression memory overflow
125 F1 7C -
126 F1 7D -
I-263

er Parameter
127 F1 7E Staple finisher main tray alarm
128 F1 7F FNS Alarm(Staple)
129 F1 80 Saddle stitcher trash full alarm
130 F1 81 -
131 F1 82 Auto Y toner refresh mode count
132 F1 83 Auto M toner refresh mode count
133 F1 84 Auto C toner refresh mode count
134 F1 85 Auto K toner refresh mode count
135 F1 86 -
136 F1 87 -
137 F1 88 Saddle stitcher staple alarm
138 F1 89 Folding tray full alarm
139 F1 8A GP-502 Non punch-hole scrap box alarm
140 F1 8B GP-502 Punch-hole scrap box full
141 F1 8C ZU-608 Non punch-hole scrap box alarm
142 F1 8D ZU-608 Punch-hole scrap box full
143 F1 8E Punch
144 F1 8F Z-Folding
145 F1 90 Multi folder trash full alarm
146 F1 91 Hold Job Number(Copy)
147 F1 92 Hold + Output Job Number(Copy)
148 F1 93 Hold Job Number(Print)
149 F1 94 Hold + Output Job Number(Print)
150 F1 95 Number of the output hold job
151 F1 96 Number of the output hold job (the job is deleted after the
output)
152 F1 97 HDD Store Job Number
153 F1 98 Recall Print Number
154 F1 99 Recall Hold Job Number
155 F1 9A Recall PrintHold Job Number
156 F1 9B Store for HDD(Hold/HDD store)
157 F1 9C Recall from HDD(FTP/SMB/WebDAV)
158 F1 9D Max.Dens.Auto Adj.(RU)Frequency
159 F1 9E -
160 F1 9F -
161 F1 A0 -
162 F1 A1 -
163 F1 A2 -
164 F1 A3 -
165 F1 A4 -
166 F1 A5 -
167 F1 A6 -
168 F1 A7 -
169 F1 A8 -
170 F1 A9 -
171 F1 AA -
172 F1 AB -
173 F1 AC -
174 F1 AD -
175 F1 AE -
176 F1 AF -
177 F1 B0 -
178 F1 B1 -
179 F1 B2 -
180 F1 B3 -
181 F1 B4 -
I-264

er Parameter
182 F1 B5 -
183 F1 B6 -
184 F1 B7 -
185 F1 B8 -
186 F1 B9 -
187 F1 BA -
188 F1 BB -
189 F1 BC Perfect bind (cover blank)
190 F1 BD Perfect bind (cover print 1-in-1)
191 F1 BE Perfect bind (cover print 2-in-1)
192 F1 BF Perfect bind (cover print 3-in-1)
193 F1 C0 Perfect binder cover tray mode
194 F1 C1 Number of sets for perfect bind
195 F1 C2 Number of sets for the perfect bind (With the cover trim)
196 F1 C3 Number of sets for the perfect bind (Without the cover trim)
197 F1 C4 Number of perfect binder sub tray output paper
198 F1 C5 Number of perfect binder sub compile output paper
199 F1 C6 Times of pulling out PB cover tray
200 F1 C7 The number of perfect binder front door open and close
201 F1 C8 The number of stacker cover of perfect binder open and close
202 F1 C9 -
203 F1 CA -
204 F1 CB -
205 F1 CC -
206 F1 CD -
207 F1 CE -
208 F1 CF -
209 F1 D0 -
210 F1 D1 -
211 F1 D2 -
212 F1 D3 -
213 F1 D4 -
214 F1 D5 -
215 F1 D6 -
216 F1 D7 -
217 F1 D8 Sample print sheets
218 F1 D9 Printer Sample Print Sheets
219 F1 DA Printer Sample Print Sheets(L)
220 F1 DB Number of PI inserted sheets
221 F1 DC Number of blank inserted sheets
222 F1 DD Output offset mode by designated job
223 F1 DE Offset mode by specified numbers
224 F1 DF Output offset mode by specified pages
225 F1 E0 Number of offset job for 1 set + set pages
226 F1 E1 Continued job for next day
227 F1 E2 Corner crop mark setting
228 F1 E3 Center crop mark setting
229 F1 E4 Tab Paper Used Job Number
230 F1 E5 Number of needless tab paper exit job
231 F1 E6 Number of the job ticket edit
232 F1 E7 Sample output number
233 F1 E8 600dpi output quantity
234 F1 E9 Multi punch
235 F1 EA Ring binder
236 F1 EB Copy Protect
237 F1 EC Count of temporary storage job
I-265

er Parameter
238 F1 ED -
239 F1 EE -
240 F1 EF -
241 F1 F0 -
242 F1 F1 -
243 F1 F2 -
244 F1 F3 Colored Paper: White
245 F1 F4 Colored Paper:Blue
246 F1 F5 Colored Paper: Goldenrod
247 F1 F6 Colored Paper: Gray
248 F1 F7 Colored Paper: Green
249 F1 F8 Colored Paper: Ivory
250 F1 F9 Colored Paper: Orange
251 F1 FA Colored Paper: Pink
252 F1 FB Colored Paper: Red
253 F1 FC Colored Paper: Yellow
254 F1 FD Colored Paper: Cream
255 F1 FE Colored Paper: Others
256 F1 FF Colored Paper: User Color
257 F2 00 ACS
258 F2 01 Full color
259 F2 02 Black and white
260 F2 03 Single color (Y)
261 F2 04 Single color (M)
262 F2 05 Single color (C)
263 F2 06 Single color (R)
264 F2 07 Single color (G)
265 F2 08 Single color (B)
266 F2 09 Original Type: Text/Photo (Print)
267 F2 0A Original Type: Text/Photo (Photo)
268 F2 0B Original Type: Photo (Print)
269 F2 0C Original Type: Photo (Photo)
270 F2 0D -
271 F2 0E Original Type: Text
272 F2 0F Original Type: Map
273 F2 10 Screen: Auto
274 F2 11 Screen: Screen 1
275 F2 12 Screen: Screen 2
276 F2 13 Screen: Stochastic
277 F2 14 Original Type:Copied
278 F2 15 Original Type:Inkjet
279 F2 16 -
280 F2 17 Copy density
281 F2 18 Background removal
282 F2 19 Red adjustment
283 F2 1A Green adjustment
284 F2 1B Blue adjustment
285 F2 1C Hue adjustment
286 F2 1D Saturation adjustment
287 F2 1E Brightness adjustment
288 F2 1F Color balance adjustment
289 F2 20 Sharpness adjustment
290 F2 21 Contrast adjustment
291 F2 22 Image distinction level
292 F2 23 -
293 F2 24 -
I-266

er Parameter
294 F2 25 -
295 F2 26 -
296 F2 27 -
297 F2 28 -
298 F2 29 -
299 F2 2A -
300 F2 2B -
301 F2 2C -
302 F2 2D -
303 F2 2E -
304 F2 2F -
305 F2 30 -
306 F2 31 -
307 F2 32 -
308 F2 33 -
309 F2 34 -
310 F2 35 Main tray: face up output
311 F2 36 Number of no toner stop occurred (Y)
312 F2 37 Number of no toner stop occurred (M)
313 F2 38 Number of no toner stop occurred (C)
314 F2 39 Number of no toner stop occurred (K)
315 F2 3A N of Waste Toner Box Full
316 F2 3B Number of color registration auto adjustment
317 F2 3C Number of auto stability control
318 F2 3D -
319 F2 3E -
320 F2 3F -
321 F2 40 -
322 F2 41 -
323 F2 42 -
324 F2 43 Polygon motor operation time
325 F2 44 Develop motor operation time (color)
326 F2 45 Develop motor operation time (black)
327 F2 46 ON Time of PCL (Color)
328 F2 47 ON Time of PCL (Black)
329 F2 48 -
330 F2 49 -
331 F2 4A -
332 F2 4B -
333 F2 4C -
334 F2 4D -
335 F2 4E -
336 F2 4F -
337 F2 50 -
338 F2 51 Manual toner refresh mode count
339 F2 52 N of Belt Refresh Performed
340 F2 53 N of Toner Refresh Performed(Y)
341 F2 54 N of Toner Refresh Performed(M)
342 F2 55 N of Toner Refresh Performed(C)
343 F2 56 N of Toner Refresh Performed(K)
344 F2 57 Right & left bind (originals)
345 F2 58 Upper binding (original)
346 F2 59 Inside print multi tri-fold
347 F2 5A Outside print multi tri-fold
348 F2 5B Inside print tri-fold-in
349 F2 5C Outside print tri-fold-in
I-267

er Parameter
350 F2 5D Inside print tri-fold-out
351 F2 5E Outside print tri-fold-out
352 F2 5F Inside print double parallel
353 F2 60 Outside print double parallel
354 F2 61 Inside print gate
355 F2 62 Outside print gate
356 F2 63 Multi half fold
357 F2 64 Inside print half-fold
358 F2 65 Outside print half-fold
359 F2 66 Main tray output
360 F2 67 Stacker tray output
361 F2 68 Stacker pile setting permit
362 F2 69 Fold & staple tray output
363 F2 6A Tri-fold tray output
364 F2 6B Folding sub tray output
365 F2 6C Stacker sub tray output
366 F2 6D Fold & staple sub tray output
367 F2 6E Staple sub tray paper exit
368 F2 6F Number of main tray output job
369 F2 70 Stacker tray output job number
370 F2 71 Fold & staple tray output job number
371 F2 72 Tri-fold tray output job number
372 F2 73 Folding sub tray job number
373 F2 74 Stacker sub tray job number
374 F2 75 Fold & staple sub tray job number
375 F2 76 Staple sub tray job number
376 F2 77 Multi half fold job number
377 F2 78 Inside print half-fold job number
378 F2 79 Outside print half-fold job number
379 F2 7A Envelope(Large)
380 F2 7B Envelope(Small)
381 F2 7C Arbitrary stamp
382 F2 7D -
383 F2 7E -
384 F2 7F -
385 F2 80 -
386 F2 81 -
387 F2 82 -
388 F2 83 -
389 F2 84 -
390 F2 85 -
391 F2 86 Post Inserter Count
392 F2 87 Perfect Binder Copy Job
393 F2 88 Perfect Binder Printer Job
394 F2 89 Color density control
395 F2 8A Color density control (Large)
396 F2 8B -
397 F2 8C S.M.A.R.T (0) Start/Stop Count
398 F2 8D S.M.A.R.T (0) Load Cycle Count
399 F2 8E S.M.A.R.T (0) Reallocated Sector Count
400 F2 8F S.M.A.R.T (0) Power On Hours
401 F2 90 S.M.A.R.T (1) Start/Stop Count
402 F2 91 S.M.A.R.T (1) Load Cycle Count
403 F2 92 S.M.A.R.T (1) Reallocated Sector Count
404 F2 93 S.M.A.R.T (1) Power On Hours
I-268

er Parameter
407 F2 96 S.M.A.R.T (2) Reallocated Sector Count
408 F2 97 S.M.A.R.T (2) Power On Hours
411 F2 9A S.M.A.R.T (3) Reallocated Sector Count
412 F2 9B S.M.A.R.T (3) Power On Hours
413 F2 9C -
414 F2 9D -
415 F2 9E -
416 F2 9F -
417 F2 A0 -
418 F2 A1 -
419 F2 A2 -
420 F2 A3 -
421 F2 A4 Toner save inactive
422 F2 A5 Toner save minimum
423 F2 A6 Toner save middle
424 F2 A7 Toner save maximum
425 F2 A8 Number of ADF grain detection execution
426 F2 A9 Total number of ADF grain detection
427 F2 AA Number of the ADF glass cleaning
428 F2 AB Separation print job number
429 F2 AC Spine Corner Forming
430 F2 AD The Number of Crease (1 piece)
431 F2 AE The Number of Crease (2 pieces)
432 F2 AF The Number of Crease (3 pieces)
433 F2 B0 The Number of Crease (4 pieces)
434 F2 B1 Fold&Staple/Mul.Half Fold Crease
435 F2 B2 Multi Tri-Fold Crease
436 F2 B3 Crease position Spine
437 F2 B4 Crease Position (Gutter)
438 F2 B5 Crease Position (Spine + Gutter)
439 F2 B6 Staple Fold & Staple(4 Position)
440 F2 B7 2-Side Slitting Only(All Sheets)
441 F2 B8 2-Side Slitting Only(Cover Only)
442 F2 B9 Fold&Staple/Mul.Half-F Slit(All)
443 F2 BA Fold&Sta./Mul.Half-F Slit(Cover)
444 F2 BB Multi Tri-Fold 2-Side Slitting
445 F2 BC Perfect Bind 2-Side Slitting
446 F2 BD Spine Corner Forming Job Number
447 F2 BE Crease Job Number
448 F2 BF 2-Side Slitting Job Number
449 F2 C0 4Pos.Staple Job No.(Fold&Staple)
450 F2 C1 Number of ADF grain detection execution (back side)
451 F2 C2 Total number of ADF grain detection (back side)
452 F2 C3 Number of the ADF glass cleaning (back side)
453 F2 C4 Main SW OFF Count
454 F2 C5 External Finisher
455 F2 C6 ADF Double Feed Detect Number
456 F2 C7 Paper profile
457 F2 C8 Preset Profile(Recommended)
458 F2 C9 Preset Profile(Non-recommended)
459 F2 CA Both Sides Auto Adjust Count 1 count for single-sided exit, 2 counts for double-sided
exit
I-269

er Parameter
460 F2 CB Both Sides Auto Adjust Count(L) 1 count for single-sided exit, 2 counts for double-sided
exit
461 F2 CC IQ Scanner1 Spot Scan Count
462 F2 CD IQ Scanner1 SpotDetectTotalCount
463 F2 CE IQ Scanner2 Spot Scan Count
464 F2 CF IQ Scanner2 SpotDetectTotalCount
465 F2 D0 N of SATool Used Days(Utility)
466 F2 D1 N of SATool Used Days(Service)
467 F2 D2 Total Time of SATool(Utility)
468 F2 D3 Total Time of SATool(Service)
469 F2 D4 N of SATool Used: Parts Replace
470 F2 D5 N of SATool Used: Troubleshoot
471 F2 D6 N of SATool Used: Check Mac Info
472 F2 D7 N of SATool Used: Get Mac Info
473 F2 D8 N of SATool Used: Show Manual
474 F2 D9 N of SATool Used: I/O Check Mode
475 F2 DA N of SATool Used: Check Cont Info
476 F2 DB N of SATool used:Function8
477 F2 DC Time of SATool: Parts Replace
478 F2 DD Time of SATool: Troubleshoot
479 F2 DE Time of SATool: Check Mac Info
480 F2 DF Time of SATool: Get Mac Info
481 F2 E0 Time of SATool: Show Manual
482 F2 E1 Time of SATool: I/O Check Mode
483 F2 E2 Time of SATool: Check Cont Info
484 F2 E3 Time of SATool:Function8
485 F2 E4 Auto Image Adj. Sudden Gap Count
486 F2 E5 Texture Depth Setting(Light) It is the same as the count condition of each paper
type counter.
487 F2 E6 Texture Depth Setting(Deep) It is the same as the count condition of each paper
type counter.
488 F2 E7 Page+Numbering+Date/Time 1 count for single-sided exit, 2 counts for double-sided
exit
489 F2 E8 Combination+Numbering 1 count for single-sided exit, 2 counts for double-sided
exit
490 F2 E9 Completed Package Color Adj.
491 F2 EA Completed GammaAuto.(Pack.Color)
492 F2 EB Completed Dens.Balance(Pack.)
493 F2 EC Completed Max.Dens.(Pack.Color)
494 F2 ED Completed ColorDens.(Pack.Color)
495 F2 EE Completed ExactColor(Pack.Color)
496 F2 EF Completed G7(Pack.Color)
497 F2 F0 CompletedControllerCalib.(Pack.)
498 F2 F1 Executed IQ Both SidesAdj.(PFU1)
507 F2 FA Executed IQ Both SidesAdj.(Tray1)
508 F2 FB Executed IQ Both SidesAdj.(Tray2)
509 F2 FC Executed IQ Both SidesAdj.(LU)
510 F2 FD Executed IQ Both SidesAdj.(MB)
511 F2 FE -
I-270

er Parameter
512 F2 FF -
513 F7 00 -
514 F7 01 -
515 F7 02 -
516 F7 03 Error Image Diagnosis Count
517 F7 04 -
518 F7 05 GP-501 Feed Quantity
519 F7 06 GP-502 Feed Quantity
520 F7 07 GP-502 Output Sheet Count
521 F7 08 FS-532 Output Sheet Count
522 F7 09 FS-532Subtray Output Sheet Count
523 F7 0A FS-532Fold&StapleTrayOutputCount
524 F7 0B FS-531 Main Tray Output Count
525 F7 0C FS-531 Sub Tray Output Count
526 F7 0D FS-531Fold&StapleTrayOutputCount
527 F7 0E FS-612 Main Tray Output Count
528 F7 0F FS-612 Sub Tray Output Count
529 F7 10 FS-612 Saddle stitching tray paper output counter
530 F7 11 OT-510 Output Sheet Count
531 F7 12 IQ-501 Feed Quantity
532 F7 13 RU-510(Front) Feed Quantity
533 F7 14 -
534 F7 15 RU-509/RU-511/RU-518(Front)Feed
535 F7 16 RU-518(Front) Output Sheet Count
536 F7 17 RU-518(Rear) Feed Quantity
537 F7 18 RU-518(Rear) Output Sheet Count
538 F7 19 Rear ExternalFNS Output Count
539 F7 1A Middle ExternalFNS Feed Quantity
540 F7 1B Middle ExternalFNS Output Count
541 F7 1C -
542 F7 1D FD-503 Feed Quantity
543 F7 1E FD-503 Output Sheet Count
544 F7 1F LS-506(1st) Feed Quantity
545 F7 20 LS-506(1st)Main Tray OutputCount
546 F7 21 LS-506(1st)Sub Tray Output Count
547 F7 22 LS-506(2nd) Feed Quantity
548 F7 23 LS-506(2nd)Main Tray OutputCount
549 F7 24 LS-506(2nd)Sub Tray Output Count
550 F7 25 -
551 F7 26 -
552 F7 27 -
553 F7 28 SD-506 Feed Quantity
554 F7 29 SD-506 Main Tray Output Count
555 F7 2A SD-506 Sub Tray Output Count
556 F7 2B SD-506Tri-Fold Tray Output Count
557 F7 2C SD-513 Feed Quantity
558 F7 2D SD-513 Main Tray Output Count
559 F7 2E SD-513 Sub Tray Output Count
560 F7 2F SD-513 Tri-fold tray paper output counter
561 F7 30 PB-503 Feed Quantity
562 F7 31 PB-503 Main Tray Output Count
563 F7 32 PB-503 Sub Tray Output Count
564 F7 33 FS-531 Corner Staple(Main Tray)
567 F7 36 FS-531 2 Pos. Staple(Main Tray)
I-271

er Parameter
570 F7 39 FS-612Fold&Staple:Fold&StapleTray
571 F7 3A FS-532 Saddle stitching (fold & staple tray)
572 F7 3B SD-506 Fold&Staple(Main Tray)
573 F7 3C SD-513 Fold&Staple(Main Tray)
574 F7 3D SD-506 Trim(Main Tray)
575 F7 3E SD-513 Trim(Main Tray)
576 F7 3F PB-503 Perfect Bind
577 F7 40 FD-503 Multi Punch
578 F7 41 GP-501 Multi Punch
579 F7 42 GP-502 Ring Binder
580 F7 43 FS-612 Multi Half Fold
581 F7 44 FS-532 Multi Half Fold
582 F7 45 SD-506 Multi Half Fold
583 F7 46 SD-513 Multi Half Fold
584 F7 47 FS-612 Tri-Fold
585 F7 48 FS-532 Multi Tri-Fold
586 F7 49 SD-506 Multi Tri-Fold
587 F7 4A FS-513 Multi Tri-Fold
588 F7 4B FD-503 Half-Fold
589 F7 4C FD-503 Z-Fold
590 F7 4D FD-503 Tri-Fold-in
591 F7 4E FD-503 Tri-Fold-out
592 F7 4F FD-503 Gate
593 F7 50 FD-503 Double Parallel
594 F7 51 -
595 F7 52 FS-531 Punch
596 F7 53 FS-612 Punch
597 F7 54 FS-532 Punch
598 F7 55 Manual FS-531 Corner Staple
601 F7 58 Manual FS-531 2 Position Staple
602 F7 59 Manual FS-612 2 Position Staple
603 F7 5A Manual FS-532 2 Position Staple
604 F7 5B Manual FS-612 Fold & Staple
605 F7 5C Manual FS-532 Fold & Staple
606 F7 5D Manual SD-506 Fold & Staple
607 F7 5E Manual SD-513 Fold & Staple
608 F7 5F Manual FS-531 Punch
609 F7 60 Manual FS-612 Punch
610 F7 61 Manual FS-532 Punch
611 F7 62 Manual FD-503 Multi Punch
612 F7 63 Manual FD-503 Half-Fold
613 F7 64 Manual FD-503 Z-Fold
614 F7 65 Manual FD-503 Tri-Fold-in
615 F7 66 Manual FD-503 Tri-Fold-out
616 F7 67 Manual FD-503 Gate
617 F7 68 Manual FD-503 Double Parallel
618 F7 69 Manual FS-612 Tri-Fold
619 F7 6A Manual FS-532 Multi Tri-Fold
620 F7 6B -
621 F7 6C RU-702 Output Sheet Count
622 F7 6D RU-702 Feed Quantity
623 F7 6E -
I-272

er Parameter
624 F7 6F -
625 F7 70 -
626 F7 71 -
627 F7 72 -
628 F7 73 -
629 F7 74 -
630 F7 75 -
631 F7 76 -
632 F7 77 -
633 F7 78 -
634 F7 79 -
635 F7 7A -
636 F7 7B -
637 F7 7C N of PrintJobStopped byST button
638 F7 7D Number of Print Job Canceled
639 F7 7E -
640 F7 7F -
641 F7 80 AutoAdj.(Pos.)Number of Print
642 F7 81 AutoAdj.(Pos.+Gradation)NofPrint
643 F7 82 Detection Number of IQ ErrorNo.7
651 F7 8A Ref. Image Created Job Number
652 F7 8B Output Job Number (Inspect.:ON)
653 F7 8C Output Job Number (Inspect.:OFF)
654 F7 8D OutputSheetNumber (Inspect.:ON)
655 F7 8E OutputSheetNumber (Inspect.:OFF)
656 F7 8F Number of Reprint(1~7):Spot
657 F7 90 Number of Reprint(8~10):Spot
658 F7 91 Forced Stop Number
659 F7 92 HDD (ReferenceImage) Full Count
660 F7 93 HDD (PDF) Full Occurred Count
661 F7 94 Error PDF Download Number
662 F7 95 OK PDF Download Number
663 F7 96 Spot Detected Sheet Number
664 F7 97 ImageMissingDetectedSheetNumber
665 F7 98 Number of Reprint:ImageMissing
4.6.9 SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.

SC Counter/SC Counter Individual Sec.
Note
▪ SC counter: Check the SC occurrence situation (number).
▪ SC Counter Individual Section: Check the SC occurrence situation (number) since the last "Counter Clear".
▪ When the service mode DIPSW 3-1 is 1 (Latched), C35## to C39## are not counted.
Number CSRC Parameter Item (SC Code)
001 E0 00 C-0001
002 E0 01 C-0002
003 E0 02 C-0101
004 E0 03 C-0102
005 E0 04 C-0103
006 E0 05 C-0104
I-273

007 E0 06 C-0113
008 E0 07 C-0114
009 E0 08 C-0115
010 E0 09 C-0116
011 E0 0A C-0117
012 E0 0B C-0118
013 E0 0C C-0119
014 E0 0D C-0120
015 E0 0E C-0121
016 E0 0F C-0122
017 E0 10 C-0123
018 E0 11 C-0124
019 E0 12 C-0125
020 E0 13 C-0126
021 E0 14 C-0127
022 E0 15 C-0128
023 E0 16 C-0129
024 E0 17 C-0130
025 E0 18 -
026 E0 19 -
027 E0 1A -
028 E0 1B -
029 E0 1C C-0142
030 E0 1D C-0143
031 E0 1E C-0144
032 E0 1F C-0145
033 E0 20 C-0146
034 E0 21 C-0147
035 E0 22 C-0148
036 E0 23 -
037 E0 24 -
038 E0 25 -
039 E0 26 -
040 E0 27 C-0153
041 E0 28 C-0154
042 E0 29 C-0155
043 E0 2A C-0156
044 E0 2B C-0157
045 E0 2C C-0158
046 E0 2D C-0159
047 E0 2E -
048 E0 2F -
049 E0 30 -
050 E0 31 -
051 E0 32 C-0201
052 E0 33 C-0202
053 E0 34 C-0204
054 E0 35 C-0205
055 E0 36 C-0208
056 E0 37 C-0209
057 E0 38 C-0211
058 E0 39 C-0212
059 E0 3A C-0213
060 E0 3B C-0215
061 E0 3C C-0218
062 E0 3D C-0221
063 E0 3E C-0224
I-274

064 E0 3F C-0227
065 E0 40 C-0228
066 E0 41 C-0229
067 E0 42 C-0230
068 E0 43 C-0231
069 E0 44 C-0232
070 E0 45 C-0233
071 E0 46 C-0234
072 E0 47 C-0235
073 E0 48 C-0236
074 E0 49 C-0237
075 E0 4A C-0301
076 E0 4B C-0302
077 E0 4C C-0303
078 E0 4D C-0304
079 E0 4E C-0306
080 E0 4F C-0307
081 E0 50 C-0308
082 E0 51 C-0309
083 E0 52 C-0310
084 E0 53 C-0311
085 E0 54 C-0312
086 E0 55 C-0313
087 E0 56 C-0314
088 E0 57 C-0315
089 E0 58 C-0316
090 E0 59 C-0317
091 E0 5A C-0318
092 E0 5B C-0320
093 E0 5C C-0321
094 E0 5D C-0322
095 E0 5E C-0323
096 E0 5F C-0324
097 E0 60 C-0325
098 E0 61 C-0326
099 E0 62 C-0327
100 E0 63 C-0328
101 E0 64 C-0329
102 E0 65 C-0330
103 E0 66 C-0331
104 E0 67 C-0332
105 E0 68 C-0333
106 E0 69 C-0334
107 E0 6A C-0335
108 E0 6B C-0336
109 E0 6C C-0337
110 E0 6D C-0338
111 E0 6E C-0339
112 E0 6F C-0340
113 E0 70 C-0341
114 E0 71 C-0342
115 E0 72 C-0343
116 E0 73 C-0344
117 E0 74 C-0345
118 E0 75 C-0346
119 E0 76 C-0347
120 E0 77 C-0348
I-275

121 E0 78 C-0349
122 E0 79 C-0350
123 E0 7A C-0351
124 E0 7B C-0352
125 E0 7C C-0353
126 E0 7D C-0354
127 E0 7E C-0355
128 E0 7F C-0356
129 E0 80 C-0357
130 E0 81 C-0358
131 E0 82 C-0359
132 E0 83 C-0360
133 E0 84 C-0361
134 E0 85 C-0362
135 E0 86 C-0363
136 E0 87 C-0364
137 E0 88 C-0365
138 E0 89 C-0366
139 E0 8A C-0367
140 E0 8B C-0368
141 E0 8C C-0369
142 E0 8D C-0370
143 E0 8E C-0371
144 E0 8F C-0372
145 E0 90 C-0373
146 E0 91 C-0374
147 E0 92 C-0375
148 E0 93 C-0376
149 E0 94 C-0401
150 E0 95 C-0402
151 E0 96 C-0403
152 E0 97 C-0404
153 E0 98 C-0405
154 E0 99 C-0406
155 E0 9A C-0407
156 E0 9B C-0408
157 E0 9C C-0409
158 E0 9D C-0410
159 E0 9E C-0411
160 E0 9F C-0412
161 E0 A0 C-0413
162 E0 A1 C-0414
163 E0 A2 C-0415
164 E0 A3 C-0416
165 E0 A4 C-0417
166 E0 A5 C-0418
167 E0 A6 C-0419
168 E0 A7 C-0420
169 E0 A8 C-0421
170 E0 A9 C-0422
171 E0 AA C-0423
172 E0 AB C-0424
173 E0 AC C-0425
174 E0 AD C-0426
175 E0 AE C-0427
176 E0 AF C-0428
177 E0 B0 C-0429
I-276

178 E0 B1 C-0430
179 E0 B2 C-0431
180 E0 B3 C-0432
181 E0 B4 C-0433
182 E0 B5 C-0434
183 E0 B6 C-0435
184 E0 B7 C-0436
185 E0 B8 C-0437
186 E0 B9 C-0438
187 E0 BA C-0439
188 E0 BB C-0440
189 E0 BC C-0441
190 E0 BD C-1005
191 E0 BE C-1006
192 E0 BF C-1007
193 E0 C0 C-1009
194 E0 C1 C-1010
195 E0 C2 C-1011
196 E0 C3 C-1012
197 E0 C4 C-1013
198 E0 C5 C-1014
199 E0 C6 C-1017
200 E0 C7 C-1018
201 E0 C8 C-1101
202 E0 C9 C-1102
203 E0 CA C-1103
204 E0 CB C-1104
205 E0 CC C-1105
206 E0 CD C-1106
207 E0 CE C-1107
208 E0 CF C-1108
209 E0 D0 C-1109
210 E0 D1 C-1110
211 E0 D2 C-1111
212 E0 D3 C-1112
213 E0 D4 C-1113
214 E0 D5 C-1114
215 E0 D6 C-1115
216 E0 D7 C-1116
217 E0 D8 C-1124
218 E0 D9 C-1125
219 E0 DA C-1126
220 E0 DB C-1127
221 E0 DC C-1132
222 E0 DD C-1137
223 E0 DE C-1141
224 E0 DF C-1144
225 E0 E0 C-1147
226 E0 E1 C-1153
227 E0 E2 C-1154
228 E0 E3 C-1155
229 E0 E4 C-1156
230 E0 E5 C-1157
231 E0 E6 C-1158
232 E0 E7 C-1159
233 E0 E8 C-1170
234 E0 E9 C-1171
I-277

235 E0 EA C-1172
236 E0 EB C-1173
237 E0 EC C-1174
238 E0 ED C-1175
239 E0 EE C-1176
240 E0 EF C-1177
241 E0 F0 C-1179
242 E0 F1 C-1180
243 E0 F2 C-1181
244 E0 F3 C-1201
245 E0 F4 C-1202
246 E0 F5 C-1203
247 E0 F6 C-1204
248 E0 F7 C-1205
249 E0 F8 C-1206
250 E0 F9 C-1211
251 E0 FA C-1212
252 E0 FB C-1213
253 E0 FC C-1214
254 E0 FD C-1215
255 E0 FE C-1216
256 E0 FF C-1221
257 E1 00 C-1222
258 E1 01 C-1223
259 E1 02 C-1224
260 E1 03 C-1225
261 E1 04 C-1226
262 E1 05 C-1227
263 E1 06 C-1228
264 E1 07 C-1229
265 E1 08 C-1230
266 E1 09 C-1231
267 E1 0A C-1232
268 E1 0B C-1233
269 E1 0C C-1234
270 E1 0D C-1235
271 E1 0E C-1241
272 E1 0F C-1242
273 E1 10 C-1243
274 E1 11 C-1244
275 E1 12 C-1245
276 E1 13 C-1246
277 E1 14 C-1247
278 E1 15 C-1248
279 E1 16 C-1249
280 E1 17 C-1250
281 E1 18 C-1251
282 E1 19 C-1252
283 E1 1A C-1253
284 E1 1B C-1254
285 E1 1C C-1255
286 E1 1D C-1256
287 E1 1E C-1257
288 E1 1F C-1258
289 E1 20 C-1259
290 E1 21 C-1260
291 E1 22 C-1261
I-278

292 E1 23 C-1262
293 E1 24 C-1263
294 E1 25 C-1264
295 E1 26 C-1265
296 E1 27 C-1266
297 E1 28 C-1267
298 E1 29 C-1268
299 E1 2A C-1269
300 E1 2B C-1270
301 E1 2C C-1271
302 E1 2D C-1272
303 E1 2E C-1273
304 E1 2F C-1274
305 E1 30 C-1275
306 E1 31 C-1276
307 E1 32 C-1277
308 E1 33 C-1278
309 E1 34 C-1279
310 E1 35 C-1280
311 E1 36 C-1281
312 E1 37 C-1282
313 E1 38 C-1290
314 E1 39 C-1291
315 E1 3A C-1292
316 E1 3B C-1293
317 E1 3C C-1294
318 E1 3D C-1295
319 E1 3E C-1296
320 E1 3F C-1297
321 E1 40 C-1298
322 E1 41 C-1299
323 E1 42 C-1301
324 E1 43 C-1302
325 E1 44 C-1303
326 E1 45 C-1304
327 E1 46 C-1305
328 E1 47 C-1306
329 E1 48 C-1307
330 E1 49 C-1308
331 E1 4A C-1309
332 E1 4B C-1310
333 E1 4C C-1311
334 E1 4D C-1312
335 E1 4E C-1313
336 E1 4F C-1330
337 E1 50 C-1331
338 E1 51 C-1332
339 E1 52 C-1333
340 E1 53 C-1334
341 E1 54 C-1341
342 E1 55 C-1342
343 E1 56 C-1351
344 E1 57 C-1352
345 E1 58 C-1353
346 E1 59 C-1354
347 E1 5A C-1355
348 E1 5B C-1356
I-279

349 E1 5C C-1357
350 E1 5D C-1358
351 E1 5E C-1359
352 E1 5F C-1360
353 E1 60 C-1361
354 E1 61 C-1364
355 E1 62 C-1402
356 E1 63 C-1403
357 E1 64 C-1404
358 E1 65 C-1406
359 E1 66 C-1407
360 E1 67 C-1408
361 E1 68 C-1409
362 E1 69 C-1411
363 E1 6A C-1412
364 E1 6B C-1413
365 E1 6C C-1431
366 E1 6D C-1432
367 E1 6E C-1433
368 E1 6F C-1435
369 E1 70 C-1436
370 E1 71 C-1437
371 E1 72 C-1438
372 E1 73 C-1439
373 E1 74 C-1440
374 E1 75 C-1441
375 E1 76 C-1442
376 E1 77 C-1443
377 E1 78 C-1451
378 E1 79 C-1452
379 E1 7A C-1454
380 E1 7B C-1455
381 E1 7C C-1456
382 E1 7D C-1457
383 E1 7E C-1480
384 E1 7F C-1499
385 E1 80 C-1501
386 E1 81 C-1502
387 E1 82 C-1504
388 E1 83 C-1505
389 E1 84 C-1506
390 E1 85 C-1507
391 E1 86 C-1508
392 E1 87 C-1509
393 E1 88 C-1510
394 E1 89 C-1511
395 E1 8A C-1512
396 E1 8B C-1513
397 E1 8C C-1514
398 E1 8D C-1515
399 E1 8E C-1516
400 E1 8F C-1517
401 E1 90 C-1518
402 E1 91 C-1519
403 E1 92 C-1520
404 E1 93 C-1521
405 E1 94 C-1522
I-280

406 E1 95 C-1523
407 E1 96 C-1524
408 E1 97 C-1525
409 E1 98 C-1526
410 E1 99 C-1527
411 E1 9A C-1528
412 E1 9B C-1530
413 E1 9C C-1531
414 E1 9D C-1532
415 E1 9E C-1534
416 E1 9F C-1537
417 E1 A0 C-1538
418 E1 A1 C-1540
419 E1 A2 C-1541
420 E1 A3 C-1542
421 E1 A4 C-1543
422 E1 A5 C-1544
423 E1 A6 C-1545
424 E1 A7 C-1546
425 E1 A8 C-1547
426 E1 A9 C-1548
427 E1 AA C-1549
428 E1 AB C-1550
429 E1 AC C-1551
430 E1 AD C-1552
431 E1 AE C-1553
432 E1 AF C-1554
433 E1 B0 C-1555
434 E1 B1 C-1556
435 E1 B2 C-1557
436 E1 B3 C-1558
437 E1 B4 C-1559
438 E1 B5 C-1560
439 E1 B6 C-1561
440 E1 B7 C-1562
441 E1 B8 C-1565
442 E1 B9 C-1566
443 E1 BA C-1567
444 E1 BB C-1620
445 E1 BC C-1621
446 E1 BD C-1622
447 E1 BE C-1623
448 E1 BF C-1625
449 E1 C0 C-1626
450 E1 C1 C-1627
451 E1 C2 C-1628
452 E1 C3 C-1629
453 E1 C4 C-1630
454 E1 C5 C-1632
455 E1 C6 C-1633
456 E1 C7 C-2001
457 E1 C8 C-2004
458 E1 C9 C-2201
459 E1 CA C-2202
460 E1 CB C-2203
461 E1 CC C-2204
462 E1 CD C-2211
I-281

463 E1 CE C-2212
464 E1 CF C-2213
465 E1 D0 C-2214
466 E1 D1 C-2220
467 E1 D2 C-2221
468 E1 D3 C-2222
469 E1 D4 C-2223
470 E1 D5 C-2224
471 E1 D6 C-2225
472 E1 D7 C-2302
473 E1 D8 C-2303
474 E1 D9 C-2304
475 E1 DA C-2305
476 E1 DB C-2306
477 E1 DC C-2307
478 E1 DD C-2401
479 E1 DE C-2402
480 E1 DF C-2403
481 E1 E0 C-2404
482 E1 E1 C-2431
483 E1 E2 C-2432
484 E1 E3 C-2433
485 E1 E4 C-2434
486 E1 E5 C-2441
487 E1 E6 C-2442
488 E1 E7 C-2443
489 E1 E8 C-2444
490 E1 E9 C-2451
491 E1 EA C-2452
492 E1 EB C-2453
493 E1 EC C-2454
494 E1 ED C-2455
495 E1 EE C-2456
496 E1 EF C-2457
497 E1 F0 C-2458
498 E1 F1 C-2470
499 E1 F2 C-2701
500 E1 F3 C-2702
501 E1 F4 C-2703
502 E1 F5 C-2704
503 E1 F6 C-2711
504 E1 F7 C-2712
505 E1 F8 C-2713
506 E1 F9 C-2714
507 E1 FA C-2720
508 E1 FB C-2721
509 E1 FC C-2801
510 E1 FD C-2802
511 E1 FE C-2803
512 E1 FF C-2804
513 E2 00 C-2811
514 E2 01 C-2812
515 E2 02 C-2813
516 E2 03 C-2814
517 E2 04 C-2821
518 E2 05 C-2822
519 E2 06 C-2823
I-282

520 E2 07 C-2824
521 E2 08 C-2831
522 E2 09 C-2832
523 E2 0A C-2833
524 E2 0B C-2834
525 E2 0C C-2840
526 E2 0D C-2841
527 E2 0E C-3001
528 E2 0F C-3101
529 E2 10 C-3102
530 E2 11 C-3103
531 E2 12 C-3104
532 E2 13 C-3105
533 E2 14 C-3301
534 E2 15 C-3302
535 E2 16 C-3303
536 E2 17 C-3304
537 E2 18 C-3305
538 E2 19 C-3307
539 E2 1A C-3308
540 E2 1B C-3401
541 E2 1C C-3501
542 E2 1D C-3502
543 E2 1E C-3503
544 E2 1F C-3504
545 E2 20 C-3505
546 E2 21 C-3506
547 E2 22 C-3508
548 E2 23 C-3509
549 E2 24 C-3510
550 E2 25 C-3511
551 E2 26 C-3512
552 E2 27 C-3513
553 E2 28 C-3515
554 E2 29 C-3517
555 E2 2A C-3518
556 E2 2B C-3519
557 E2 2C C-37xx
558 E2 2D C-3801
559 E2 2E C-3802
560 E2 2F C-3803
561 E2 30 C-3807
562 E2 31 C-3901
563 E2 32 C-3902
564 E2 33 C-3903
565 E2 34 C-3904
566 E2 35 C-3905
567 E2 36 C-3906
568 E2 37 C-3907
569 E2 38 C-3908
570 E2 39 C-3909
571 E2 3A C-3910
572 E2 3B C-3911
573 E2 3C C-3912
574 E2 3D C-3913
575 E2 3E C-3917
576 E2 3F C-4101
I-283

577 E2 40 C-4102
578 E2 41 C-4103
579 E2 42 C-4104
580 E2 43 C-4501
581 E2 44 C-4502
582 E2 45 C-4503
583 E2 46 C-4504
584 E2 47 C-4505
585 E2 48 C-4506
586 E2 49 C-4507
587 E2 4A C-4508
588 E2 4B C-4511
589 E2 4C C-4512
590 E2 4D C-4513
591 E2 4E C-4514
592 E2 4F C-4515
593 E2 50 C-4516
594 E2 51 C-4517
595 E2 52 C-4518
596 E2 53 C-4520
597 E2 54 C-4521
598 E2 55 C-4522
599 E2 56 C-4525
600 E2 57 C-4526
601 E2 58 C-4527
602 E2 59 C-4528
603 E2 5A C-4601
604 E2 5B C-4602
605 E2 5C C-4603
606 E2 5D C-4604
607 E2 5E C-4611
608 E2 5F C-4612
609 E2 60 C-4613
610 E2 61 C-4614
611 E2 62 C-4631
612 E2 63 C-4632
613 E2 64 C-4633
614 E2 65 C-4634
615 E2 66 C-4641
616 E2 67 C-4642
617 E2 68 C-4643
618 E2 69 C-4644
619 E2 6A C-4661
620 E2 6B C-4662
621 E2 6C C-4663
622 E2 6D C-4705
623 E2 6E C-4709
624 E2 6F C-4713
625 E2 70 C-4714
626 E2 71 C-4715
627 E2 72 C-4716
628 E2 73 C-4717
629 E2 74 C-4718
630 E2 75 C-4719
631 E2 76 C-4720
632 E2 77 C-4721
633 E2 78 C-4722
I-284

634 E2 79 C-4723
635 E2 7A C-4724
636 E2 7B C-4725
637 E2 7C C-4726
638 E2 7D C-4728
639 E2 7E C-4729
640 E2 7F C-4730
641 E2 80 -
642 E2 81 -
643 E2 82 C-4840
644 E2 83 C-4850
645 E2 84 C-5001
646 E2 85 C-5002
647 E2 86 C-5003
648 E2 87 C-5006
649 E2 88 C-5007
650 E2 89 C-5010
651 E2 8A C-5014
652 E2 8B C-5025
653 E2 8C C-5100
654 E2 8D C-5101
655 E2 8E C-5121
656 E2 8F C-5301
657 E2 90 C-5305
658 E2 91 C-5307
659 E2 92 C-5309
660 E2 93 C-5310
661 E2 94 C-5311
662 E2 95 C-5401
663 E2 96 C-5403
664 E2 97 C-5404
665 E2 98 C-6102
666 E2 99 C-6103
667 E2 9A C-6104
668 E2 9B C-6105
669 E2 9C C-6114
670 E2 9D C-6115
671 E2 9E C-6121
672 E2 9F C-6702
673 E2 A0 C-6703
674 E2 A1 C-6704
675 E2 A2 C-6706
676 E2 A3 C-6720
677 E2 A4 C-6725
678 E2 A5 C-6751
679 E2 A6 C-6752
680 E2 A7 C-6753
681 E2 A8 C-6754
682 E2 A9 C-6755
683 E2 AA C-6756
684 E2 AB C-6781
685 E2 AC C-6782
686 E2 AD C-6801
687 E2 AE C-6F01
688 E2 AF C-7001
689 E2 B0 C-8001
690 E2 B1 -
I-285

691 E2 B2 C-8101
692 E2 B3 C-8103
693 E2 B4 C-8106
694 E2 B5 C-8107
695 E2 B6 C-8302
696 E2 B7 C-8401
697 E2 B8 C-8402
698 E2 B9 C-9401
699 E2 BA C-9402
700 E2 BB C-9403
701 E2 BC C-9404
702 E2 BD C-C101
703 E2 BE C-C102
704 E2 BF C-C104
705 E2 C0 C-C109
706 E2 C1 C-C111
707 E2 C2 C-C112
708 E2 C3 C-C113
709 E2 C4 C-C114
710 E2 C5 C-C116
711 E2 C6 C-C117
712 E2 C7 C-C118
713 E2 C8 C-C119
714 E2 C9 C-C120
715 E2 CA C-C121
716 E2 CB C-C123
717 E2 CC C-C124
718 E2 CD C-C126
719 E2 CE C-C150
720 E2 CF C-C151
721 E2 D0 C-C152
722 E2 D1 C-C156
723 E2 D2 C-D010
724 E2 D3 C-D060
725 E2 D4 C-D070
726 E2 D5 C-D080
727 E2 D6 C-D0C0
728 E2 D7 C-D0D1
729 E2 D8 C-D0E1
730 E2 D9 C-D0E3
731 E2 DA C-D0E4
732 E2 DB C-D0E5
733 E2 DC C-D0E8
734 E2 DD C-D0EF
735 E2 DE C-D0F0
736 E2 DF C-D0F1
737 E2 E0 C-D0F2
738 E2 E1 C-D0F5
739 E2 E2 C-D0F6
740 E2 E3 C-D0FE
741 E2 E4 C-E001
742 E2 E5 C-E002
743 E2 E6 C-E003
744 E2 E7 C-E004
745 E2 E8 C-E005
746 E2 E9 C-E006
747 E2 EA C-E007
I-286

748 E2 EB C-E008
749 E2 EC C-E009
750 E2 ED C-E010
751 E2 EE C-E018
752 E2 EF C-E020
753 E2 F0 -
754 E2 F1 C-1016
755 E2 F2 C-1019
756 E2 F3 C-1444
757 E2 F4 C-1458
758 E2 F5 C-1901
759 E2 F6 C-1902
760 E2 F7 C-1903
761 E2 F8 C-1904
762 E2 F9 C-1906
763 E2 FA C-1907
764 E2 FB C-1908
765 E2 FC C-1909
766 E2 FD C-1910
767 E2 FE C-1911
768 E2 FF C-1912
769 E3 00 C-1916
770 E3 01 C-1930
771 E3 02 C-1931
772 E3 03 C-4729
773 E3 04 C-6A01
774 E3 05 C-6A02
775 E3 06 C-6A03
776 E3 07 C-6A04
777 E3 08 C-6A06
778 E3 09 C-6A09
779 E3 0A C-6A11
780 E3 0B C-6A12
781 E3 0C C-6A13
782 E3 0D C-6A16
783 E3 0E C-6A17
784 E3 0F C-6A41
785 E3 10 C-6A42
786 E3 11 C-6A43
787 E3 12 C-6A44
788 E3 13 C-6A46
789 E3 14 C-6A49
790 E3 15 C-6A51
791 E3 16 C-6A52
792 E3 17 C-6A53
793 E3 18 C-6A56
794 E3 19 C-6A57
795 E3 1A C-6A81
796 E3 1B C-6A82
797 E3 1C C-6A83
798 E3 1D C-6A84
799 E3 1E C-6A85
800 E3 1F C-6A86
801 E3 20 C-6A87
802 E3 21 C-6A89
803 E3 22 C-6A90
804 E3 23 C-6A91
I-287

805 E3 24 C-6A92
806 E3 25 C-6A93
807 E3 26 C-6A94
808 E3 27 C-6A95
809 E3 28 C-6A96
810 E3 29 C-6A97
811 E3 2A C-6A99
812 E3 2B C-6B01
813 E3 2C C-6B31
814 E3 2D C-6BFF
815 E3 2E C-C106
816 E3 2F C-C122
817 E3 30 C-C129
818 E3 31 C-5015
819 E3 32 C-5016
820 E3 33 C-5017
821 E3 34 C-C133
822 E3 35 C-C134
823 E3 36 C-0164
824 E3 37 C-0165
825 E3 38 C-0180
826 E3 39 C-0181
827 E3 3A C-0182
828 E3 3B C-0183
829 E3 3C C-0184
830 E3 3D C-0377
831 E3 3E C-0378
832 E3 3F C-0452
833 E3 40 C-0453
834 E3 41 C-1015
835 E3 42 C-1021
836 E3 43 C-1701
837 E3 44 C-1702
838 E3 45 C-1703
839 E3 46 C-1704
840 E3 47 C-1705
841 E3 48 C-1706
842 E3 49 C-1707
843 E3 4A C-1708
844 E3 4B C-1709
845 E3 4C C-1710
846 E3 4D C-1711
847 E3 4E C-1712
848 E3 4F C-1713
849 E3 50 C-1714
850 E3 51 C-1715
851 E3 52 C-1716
852 E3 53 C-1717
853 E3 54 C-1718
854 E3 55 C-1719
855 E3 56 C-1720
856 E3 57 C-1721
857 E3 58 C-1722
858 E3 59 C-1723
859 E3 5A C-1724
860 E3 5B C-1725
861 E3 5C C-1726
I-288

862 E3 5D C-1727
863 E3 5E C-1728
864 E3 5F C-1729
865 E3 60 C-1730
866 E3 61 C-1731
867 E3 62 C-1732
868 E3 63 C-1733
869 E3 64 C-1734
870 E3 65 C-1735
871 E3 66 C-1736
872 E3 67 C-1737
873 E3 68 C-1738
874 E3 69 C-1739
875 E3 6A C-1740
876 E3 6B C-1741
877 E3 6C C-1742
878 E3 6D C-1743
879 E3 6E C-1744
880 E3 6F C-1745
881 E3 70 C-1746
882 E3 71 C-1747
883 E3 72 C-1748
884 E3 73 C-1749
885 E3 74 C-1750
886 E3 75 C-1751
887 E3 76 C-1752
888 E3 77 C-1753
889 E3 78 C-1754
890 E3 79 C-1755
891 E3 7A C-1756
892 E3 7B C-1757
893 E3 7C C-1771
894 E3 7D C-1772
895 E3 7E C-1773
896 E3 7F C-1774
897 E3 80 C-1775
898 E3 81 C-1776
899 E3 82 C-1777
900 E3 83 C-1778
901 E3 84 C-1779
902 E3 85 C-1780
903 E3 86 C-1781
904 E3 87 C-1782
905 E3 88 C-1783
906 E3 89 C-1784
907 E3 8A C-1785
908 E3 8B C-1786
909 E3 8C C-1787
910 E3 8D C-1788
911 E3 8E C-1789
912 E3 8F C-1790
913 E3 90 C-1791
914 E3 91 C-1792
915 E3 92 C-1793
916 E3 93 C-1794
917 E3 94 C-1795
918 E3 95 C-1796
I-289

919 E3 96 C-1797
920 E3 97 C-1798
921 E3 98 C-1799
922 E3 99 C-1800
923 E3 9A C-1801
924 E3 9B C-1802
925 E3 9C C-1803
926 E3 9D C-1804
927 E3 9E C-1805
928 E3 9F C-1806
929 E3 A0 C-1807
930 E3 A1 C-1808
931 E3 A2 C-1809
932 E3 A3 C-1810
933 E3 A4 C-1811
934 E3 A5 C-1812
935 E3 A6 C-1813
936 E3 A7 C-1814
937 E3 A8 C-1815
938 E3 A9 C-1816
939 E3 AA C-1817
940 E3 AB C-1818
941 E3 AC C-1819
942 E3 AD C-1820
943 E3 AE C-1821
944 E3 AF C-1822
945 E3 B0 C-1823
946 E3 B1 C-1824
947 E3 B2 C-1825
948 E3 B3 C-1826
949 E3 B4 C-1827
950 E3 B5 C-C141
951 E3 B6 C-C142
952 E3 B7 C-C143
953 E3 B8 C-C149
954 E3 B9 C-0136
955 E3 BA C-2251
956 E3 BB C-2252
957 E3 BC C-2253
958 E3 BD C-2254
959 E3 BE C-2471
960 E3 BF C-5008
961 E3 C0 C-5102
962 E3 C1 C-5103
963 E3 C2 C-5110
964 E3 C3 C-5111
965 E3 C4 C-5137
966 E3 C5 C-5138
967 E3 C6 C-47A5
968 E3 C7 C-6B41
969 E3 C8 C-6B42
970 E3 C9 C-6B43
971 E3 CA C-4680
972 E3 CB C-1022
973 E3 CC C-1831
974 E3 CD C-1832
975 E3 CE C-1833
I-290

976 E3 CF C-1834
977 E3 D0 C-1835
978 E3 D1 C-1836
979 E3 D2 C-1837
980 E3 D3 C-1838
981 E3 D4 C-1839
982 E3 D5 C-4851
983 E3 D6 C-6783
984 E3
985 E3 D8 C-A001
986 E3 D9 C-A002
987 E3 DA C-A003
988 E3 DB C-A004
989 E3 DC C-A005
990 E3 DD C-A006
991 E3 DE C-A007
992 E3 DF C-A008
993 E3 E0 C-A110
994 E3 E1 C-A180
995 E3 E2 C-A1C0
996 E3 E3 C-A1E1
997 E3 E4 C-A1E3
998 E3 E5 C-A1E4
999 E3 E6 C-A1E5
1000 E3 E7 C-A1E6
1001 E3 E8 C-A1E8
1002 E3 E9 C-A1F1
1003 E3 EA C-A1F2
1004 E3 EB C-A1F5
1005 E3 EC C-A1F6
1006 E3 ED C-A1FD
1007 E3 EE C-A1FE
1008 E3 EF C-A250
1009 E3 F0 C-A251
1010 E3 F1 C-A301
1011 E3 F2 C-A302
1012 E3 F3 C-A303
1013 E3 F4 C-A304
1014 E3 F5 C-A305
1015 E3 F6 C-A306
1016 E3 F7 C-A307
1017 E3 F8 C-A401
1018 E3 F9 C-A402
1019 E3 FA C-A403
1020 E3 FB C-A404
1021 E3 FC C-A406
1022 E3 FD C-A409
1023 E3 FE C-A412
1024 E3 FF C-A413
1025 E3 00 C-A416
1026 E3 01 C-A441
1027 E3 02 C-A442
1028 E3 03 C-A443
1029 E3 04 C-A444
1030 E3 05 C-A446
1031 E3 06 C-A449
1032 E3 07 C-A452
I-291

1033 E3 08 C-A453
1034 E3 09 C-A456
1035 E3 0A C-A500
1036 E3 0B C-A501
1037 E3 0C C-A502
1038 E3 0D C-A503
1039 E3 0E C-C130
1040 E3 0F C-C136
1041 E3 10 C-C180
1042 E3 11 C-C181
4.6.10 SC Data of Time Series

For the latest 100 items of error codes, check the SC Code, Total Counter, Date, Time, Machine (00: Idling, 01: Scan, 02: Print, 03: Scan/Print).
4.6.11 Maintenance Counter Reset (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency.
(2) Specifications
• The latest 10 items of the maintenance counter reset history appears.
• Item
• Reset Date
• Maintenance Counter
• Maintenance Limit Data
• Counter Average
• Counter Reset Count
(3) Confirmation steps of Maintenance Counter Reset

Press [13 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [01 Maintenance Counter Reset].
3. "Maintenance Counter Reset screen"
Check the maintenance counter reset history.
4.6.12 Parts History in Time Series (Maintenance History)

(1) Usage
Check the maintenance frequency for respective parts.
(2) Specifications
• The latest 50 items of the maintenance counter reset history appears
• Item
• No.
(Number of the special parts counter)
• Parts Name
• P/N
• Counter, Limit
• Replacement Count
• Date
• ORU
I-292
(The mark "*" means that the part is replaced in the ORU-M mode. )
(3) Confirmation steps of Parts History in Time Series

Press [13 Maintenance History].
2. "Maintenance History screen"
Press [02 Parts History in Time Series].
3. "Parts History in Time Series screen"
Check the special parts counter reset history.
4.6.13 Counter of each paper type

Check the number of originals that are fed for each paper type and the weight.
Note
▪ Maximum count: 99999999
▪ For each type of paper that is specified in the tray setting, small size paper is 1 count for each paper exit of the single side and 2
counts of the double side, large size paper is 2 counts for the single side and 4 counts for the double side.
Number Item
1 -
2 Plain (62-74 g/m2)
3 Plain (75-80 g/m2)
4 Plain (81-91 g/m2)
5 Plain (92-105 g/m2)
6 Plain (106-135 g/m2)
7 Plain (136-176 g/m2)
8 Plain (177-216 g/m2)
9 Plain (217-256 g/m2)
10 Plain (257-300 g/m2)
11 Plain (301-350 g/m2)
12 -
13 -
14 Fine (62-74 g/m2)
15 Fine (75-80 g/m2)
16 Fine (81-91 g/m2)
17 Fine (92-105 g/m2)
18 Fine (106-135 g/m2)
19 Fine (136-176 g/m2)
20 Fine (177-216 g/m2)
21 Fine (217-256 g/m2)
22 Fine (257-300 g/m2)
23 Fine (301-350 g/m2)
24 -
25 -
26 Color Specific (62-74 g/m2)
I-293
Number Item
36 -
37 -
38 Coated-GL (62-74 g/m2)
41 Coated-GL (92-105 g/m2)
42 Coated-GL (106-135 g/m2)
43 Coated-GL (136-176 g/m2)
44 Coated-GL (177-216 g/m2)
45 Coated-GL (217-256 g/m2)
46 Coated-GL (257-300 g/m2)
47 Coated-GL (301-350 g/m2)
48 -
49 -
50 Coated-ML (62-74 g/m2)
53 Coated-ML (92-105 g/m2)
54 Coated-ML (106-135 g/m2)
55 Coated-ML (136-176 g/m2)
56 Coated-ML (177-216 g/m2)
57 Coated-ML (217-256 g/m2)
58 Coated-ML (257-300 g/m2)
59 Coated-ML (301-350 g/m2)
60 -
61 -
62 Coated-GO (62-74 g/m2)
65 Coated-GO (92-105 g/m2)
66 Coated-GO (106-135 g/m2)
67 Coated-GO (136-176 g/m2)
68 Coated-GO (177-216 g/m2)
69 Coated-GO (217-256 g/m2)
70 Coated-GO (257-300 g/m2)
71 Coated-GO (301-350 g/m2)
72 -
73 -
74 Coated-MO (62-74 g/m2)
77 Coated-MO (92-105 g/m2)
78 Coated-MO (106-135 g/m2)
79 Coated-MO (136-176 g/m2)
80 Coated-MO (177-216 g/m2)
81 Coated-MO (217-256 g/m2)
82 Coated-MO (257-300 g/m2)
83 Coated-MO (301-350 g/m2)
84 -
85 -
86 Envelope (62-74 g/m2)
I-294
Number Item
90 Envelope (106-135 g/m2)
91 Envelope (136-176 g/m2)
92 Envelope (177-216 g/m2)
93 Envelope (217-256 g/m2)
94 Envelope (257-300 g/m2)
95 Envelope (301-350 g/m2)
96 -
97 -
98 Textured (62-74g/m2)
99 Textured (75-80g/m2)
100 Textured (81-91 g/m2)
101 Textured (92-105 g/m2)
102 Textured (106-135 g/m2)
103 Textured (136-176 g/m2)
104 Textured (177-216 g/m2)
105 Textured (217-256 g/m2)
106 Textured (257-300 g/m2)
107 Textured (301-350 g/m2)
108 -
4.6.14 ORU-M Maintenance History

(1) Usage
Check the frequency of the unit replacement, then predict the timing of replacing the ORU-M target part and collect each type of information.
(2) Specifications
Item
• Information of ORU-M maintenance history:
Unit replacing Start-End date and the Start-End time, Downtime (m), Total Counter, End Status (Normal, error)
• Information of each ORU-M maintenance unit:
No., Parts Name, P/N, Serial Number, Life Cycle, Replacement Count, Replace Reason (Periodical Replacement, Image Trouble,
Transport Trouble or JAM)
• Information of total ORU-M maintenance:
Maintenance Count, Replace Unit Number, Downtime Average
Maximum storable number

• The data of the latest 125 replacements of the ORU-M corresponding unit are stored.
When one of the ORU-M counters is reset, up to 125 data including the latest replacement date and the replaced unit information are
stored.
Example
When you replace 4 units at a maintenance, the data of the latest 25 maintenance can be stored.
(Maintenance date (1 record) + 4 units replaced (4 records) = 5 records
With this function, the following items can be checked.
Name of replaced unit
Part No. (P/N)
Serial Number
Life cycle
Replacement Count
Replace Reason (Periodical Replacement, Image Trouble, Trans. Trouble/JAM)
• The down time of the latest 50 units are stored.
Measures the length of time between the time of entering the ORU-M replacement screen and the time of exiting it.
Up to 50 data (replacement time and replacement date) of each ORU-M corresponding unit are stored. The data older than that are
stored as an averaged value.
(3) ORU-M maintenance history check procedures

1. "ORU-M Maintenance History screen"
Check the ORU maintenance history.
I-295
[1] [2]
[1] Information of ORU-M total maintenance history:
[2] ORU-M maintenance history information
2. To check the object unit of each maintenance, select the maintenance to display and then press [Information View].
3. "Information View screen"
Check the maintenance of each unit.
4.6.15 Check, setting and reset procedure of the Special Parts Counter

Displays the counter of the target part.
When the target part is replaced, reset the counter of that part to manage the service history.
(1) Checking, setting and resetting procedure

Press [03 Parts Counter].
[Service Mode] → [Counter/Data] → [Parts Counter]
3. "Parts Counter Menu screen"
Press [01 Special Parts Counter 1] or [02 Special Parts Counter 2].
4. "Special Parts Counter menu screen"
Press the button that includes the target parts from the menu.
5. "Special Parts Counter screen"
As necessary, press [Next] or [Previous] to scroll the "Special Parts Counter screen" pages and check the counter.
6. To reset the counter, press [▼] or [▲] to select the target item.
7. Press [Counter Clear].
8. "Reset confirm screen"
Press [Yes] to reset the counter.
Press [No] to cancel and return to "Special Parts Counter screen"
4.6.16 Data copying procedure of the Special Parts Counter (Intermediate transfer, intermediate transfer/C,
intermediate transfer/H)
(1) Function
Copies the special parts counters of each intermediate transfer unit to the specified intermediate transfer unit.
I-296
(2) Usage
When you change only the intermediate transfer belt so that textured paper can be passed through, you must install the dedicated connector.
Then the installed connector resets the counter. Thus, you copy the special parts counters of the units other than the intermediate transfer
belt.
(3) Count copying procedure

1. “Service Mode menu screen"
Press [04 Counter/Data].
Press [03 Parts Counter].
[Service Mode] → [Counter/Data] → [Parts Counter]
3. "Parts Counter Menu screen"
Press [01 Special Parts Counter 1].
4. "Special Parts Counter Menu screen"
Select the target that you want to copy from [05 Intermediate Transfer], [06 Intermediate Transfer/C], or [07 Intermediate Transfer/H] in
the menu.
5. Press [Data Copy]. (The following screen appears when you select [05 Intermediate Transfer].)
6. Select the intermediate transfer unit that you copied, and press [OK].
7. The confirmation screen is displayed, and press [Yes]. (The following screen appears when you select [06 Intermediate Transfer/C].)
I-297
8. Then you complete saving the data.
4.6.17 Special Parts Counter

Note
▪ Be sure to reset the parts counter after you replace any of the following parts. Otherwise, the image failure or the jam occurs.
1 Number 003 filter box
2 Number 013 to number 020 charging corona/Y, charging corona/M, charging corona/C, charging corona/K
3 Number 021 to number 028 drum unit/Y, drum unit/M, drum unit/C, drum unit/K
4 Number 029 to number 036 developer/Y, developer/M, developer/C, developer/K
5 Number 053, number 054 transfer belt cleaning blade
6 Number 055 to number 058 1st transfer roller/Y, 1st transfer roller/M, 1st transfer roller/C, 1st transfer roller/K
▪ When the counter exceeds the limit, the color of the character changes.
Nu CSRC Category Parts name Parts number Count conditions
mbe param
r eter
001 Z1 00 Waste Toner / Filter Waste toner box A50UR701 *1
The waste toner full sensor (PS33) detects the
limit automatically.
002 Z1 01 - - -
003 Z1 02 Waste Toner / Filter Filter Box (%) A50UR70A Counts for 7 to 460 for each print page
according to the humidity, the average
coverage or the paper size.
Shows the count in percentage with respect to
the end of its parts life.
004 Z1 03 Developing dust-proof filter/1 A50U1689 *1
(%) Shows the count in percentage with respect to
The counters number 004 to 008 are reset
simultaneously.
005 Z1 04 Developing dust-proof filter/2 A50U1695 *1
(%) Shows the count in percentage with respect to
simultaneously.
006 Z1 05 PH dust-proof filter (%) A50U1688 *1
simultaneously.
007 Z1 06 Electric component cooling A50U1099 *1
filter (%) Shows the count in percentage with respect to
simultaneously.
008 Z1 07 Suction dust-proof filter (%) A50U1649 *1
simultaneously.
009 Z1 08 - - -
010 Z1 09 - - -
011 Z1 0A - - -
I-298

mbe param
r eter
012 Z1 0B - - -
013 Z1 0C Charging Corona / Drum Charging corona/Y (Page) A50UR703 *2
Resetting this counter also resets No.014.
014 Z1 0D Charging Corona/Y(Time %) A50UR703 Counts the charging time of the charging
colona/Y and shows the count in percentage
with respect to the end of its parts life.
015 Z1 0E Charging corona/M (Page) A50UR703 *2
016 Z1 0F Charging Corona/M(Time %) A50UR703 Counts the charging time of the charging
colona/M and shows the count in percentage
017 Z1 10 Charging corona/C (Page) A50UR703 *2
018 Z1 11 Charging Corona/C(Time %) A50UR703 Counts the charging time of the charging
colona/C and shows the count in percentage
019 Z1 12 Charging corona/K (Page) A50UR703 *1
020 Z1 13 Charging Corona/K(Time %) A50UR703 Counts the charging time of the charging
colona/K and shows the count in percentage
021 Z1 14 Drum unit/Y (Page) A5WH0Y0 (C3080, *2
C3080P, C83hc, When this counter is reset, number 022 is also
C3070, C3070P, reset.
C73hc)
A5WJ0Y0 (C3070L)
022 Z1 15 Drum unit/Y (%) A5WH0Y0 (C3080, Counts the running distance of the drum/Y and
C3080P, C83hc, the lubricant applying roller/Y and the number
C3070, C3070P, of sheets. Shows the count that is closest to its
C73hc) end of the life in percentage with respect to the
A5WJ0Y0 (C3070L) end of the life.
When this counter is reset, number 021 is also
reset.
023 Z1 16 Drum unit/M (Page) A5WH0Y0 (C3080, *2
C3070, C3070P, reset.
C73hc)
A5WJ0Y0 (C3070L)
024 Z1 17 Drum unit/M (%) A5WH0Y0 (C3080, Counts the running distance of the drum/M
C3080P, C83hc, and the lubricant applying roller/M and the
C3070, C3070P, number of sheets. Shows the count that is
C73hc) closest to its end of the life in percentage with
A5WJ0Y0 (C3070L) respect to the end of the life.
reset.
025 Z1 18 Drum unit/C (Page) A5WH0Y0 (C3080, *2
C3070, C3070P, reset.
C73hc)
A5WJ0Y0 (C3070L)
026 Z1 19 Drum unit/C (%) A5WH0Y0 (C3080, Counts the running distance of the drum/C and
C3080P, C83hc, the lubricant applying roller/C and the number
reset.
027 Z1 1A Drum unit/K (Page) A5WH0Y0 (C3080, *1
C3070, C3070P, reset.
C73hc)
A5WJ0Y0 (C3070L)
I-299

mbe param
r eter
028 Z1 1B Drum unit/K (%) A5WH0Y0 (C3080, Counts the running distance of the drum/K and
C3080P, C83hc, the lubricant applying roller/K and the number
reset.
029 Z1 1C Developing Developer/Y (Page) A3VX700 (C3080, *2
C3080P, C83hc, Resetting this counter also resets No.030.
C3070, C3070P,
C73hc)
A3VX760
(ColorPress83, 83hc,
73, 73L)
030 Z1 1D Developer/Y (Distance %) A3VX700 (C3080, Counts the drive distance of the developing
C3080P, C83hc, roller/Y and shows the count in percentage
C3070, C3070P, with respect to the end of its parts life.
C73hc) Resetting this counter also resets No.029.
A3VX760
73, 73L)
031 Z1 1E Developer/M (Page) A3VX800 (C3080, *2
C3080P, C3070, Resetting this counter also resets No.032.
C3070P, C3070L)
A3VX860
(ColorPress83, 73,
73L)
A3VX801 (C83hc:
Other than Europe,
C73hc)
A3VX851 (C83hc:
Europe only)
A3VX861
(ColorPress83hc)
032 Z1 1F Developer/M (Distance %) A3VX800 (C3080, Counts the drive distance of the developing
C3080P, C3070, roller/M and shows the count in percentage
C3070P, C3070L) with respect to the end of its parts life.
A3VX860 Resetting this counter also resets No.031.
(ColorPress83, 73,
73L)
A3VX801 (C83hc:
Other than Europe,
C73hc)
A3VX851 (C83hc:
Europe only)
A3VX861
(ColorPress83hc)
033 Z1 20 Developer/C (Page) A3VX900 (C3080, *2
C3080P, C3070, Resetting this counter also resets No.034.
C3070P, C3070L)
A3VX960
(ColorPress83, 73,
73L)
A3VX901 (C83hc,
C73hc)
A3VX961
(ColorPress83hc)
034 Z1 21 Developer/C (Distance %) A3VX900 (C3080, Counts the drive distance of the developing
C3080P, C3070, roller/C and shows the count in percentage
C3070P, C3070L) with respect to the end of its parts life.
A3VX960 Resetting this counter also resets No.033.
(ColorPress83, 73,
73L)
A3VX901 (C83hc,
C73hc)
A3VX961
(ColorPress83hc)
035 Z1 22 Developer/K (Page) A3VX600 (C3080, *1
C3080P, C83hc, Resetting this counter also resets No.036.
C3070, C3070P,
C73hc, C3070L)
I-300

mbe param
r eter
A3VX660
73, 73L)
036 Z1 23 Developer/K (Distance %) A3VX600 (C3080, Counts the drive distance of the developing
C3080P, C83hc, roller/K and shows the count in percentage
C3070, C3070P, with respect to the end of its parts life.
C73hc, C3070L) Resetting this counter also resets No.035.
A3VX660
73, 73L)
037 Z1 24 Developing unit/Y (Page) A50UR702 *2
038 Z1 25 Developing unit/Y (Distance A50UR702 Counts the drive distance of the developing
%) roller/Y and shows the count in percentage
039 Z1 26 Developing unit/M (Page) A50UR702 *2
040 Z1 27 Developing unit/M (Distance A50UR702 Counts the drive distance of the developing
%) roller/M and shows the count in percentage
041 Z1 28 Developing unit/C (Page) A50UR702 *2
042 Z1 29 Developing unit/C (Distance A50UR702 Counts the drive distance of the developing
%) roller/C and shows the count in percentage
reset.
043 Z1 2A Developing unit/K (Page) A50UR702 *1
reset.
044 Z1 2B Developing unit/K (Distance A50UR702 Counts the drive distance of the developing
%) roller/K and shows the count in percentage
reset.
045 Z1 2C - - -
046 Z1 2D Intermediate Transfer Transfer roller bearing/K A50U5057 Counts the drive distance of the intermediate
(Distance %) transfer belt and shows the count in
percentage with respect to the end of its parts
life.
047 Z1 2E Transfer roller bearing/Y, the 65AA2638 Counts the drive distance of the intermediate
transfer roller bearing/M, and transfer belt and shows the count in
the transfer roller bearing/C percentage with respect to the end of its parts
(distance %) life.
048 Z1 2F Transfer belt cleaning unit A50UR706 Counts the drive distance of the intermediate
(distance %) transfer belt and shows the count in
life.
When you reset this counter, number 051 to
number 054, number 071 to number 072,
number 060 are also reset.
049 Z1 30 Intermediate transfer unit A50UR706, 1P, *1
A85CR70P, 0R When this counter is reset, number 046 to
050 Z1 31 Intermediate transfer belt A1DU5042 *1
051 Z1 32 Transfer belt cleaning unit A50UR706 *1
When this counter is reset, number 51 to
number 54, number 71, number 72, number
60, number 48 are also reset.
052 Z1 33 Toner collection sheet A1DUR71C *1
I-301

mbe param
r eter
053 Z1 34 Belt cleaning blade (Page) A50UR70K *1
reset.
054 Z1 35 Belt Cleaning Blade(Distance A50UR70K Counts the drive distance of the intermediate
%) transfer belt and shows the count in
life.
reset.
055 Z1 36 1st transfer roller/Y A50U5012 *2
056 Z1 37 1st transfer roller/M A50U5012 *2
057 Z1 38 1st transfer roller/C A50U5012 *2
058 Z1 39 1st transfer roller/K A50U5012 *1
059 Z1 3A 2nd transfer roller/Up A50U5004 *1
reset.
060 Z1 3B Side seal A50U5316 *1
reset.
061 Z1 3C Transfer Roller Bearing/YMC 65AA2638 *2
062 Z1 3D Intermediate Separation Claw 26NA8251 Counts the operation time and displays it.
Solenoid (operation time)
063 Z1 3E Transfer Roller Bearing/K A50U5057 *1
064 Z1 3F Intermediate transfer belt A1DU5042 Counts the drive distance of the intermediate
life.
reset.
065 Z1 40 1st transfer roller/Y (Time %) A50U5012 Counts the charging time of the 1st transfer
roller/Y and shows the count in percentage
066 Z1 41 1st Transfer Roller/M (Time A50U5012 Counts the charging time of the 1st transfer
%) roller/M and shows the count in percentage
reset.
067 Z1 42 1st Transfer Roller/C (Time %) A50U5012 Counts the charging time of the 1st transfer
roller/C and shows the count in percentage
068 Z1 43 1st Transfer Roller/K (Time %) A50U5012 Counts the charging time of the 1st transfer
roller/K and shows the count in percentage
069 Z1 44 2nd transfer roller/Up A50U5004 Counts the drive distance of the 2nd transfer
(Distance %) roller/Up and shows the count in percentage
reset.
070 Z1 45 Transfer belt separation claw A1DUR719 Counts the operation time and displays it.
(number of times)
071 Z1 46 Toner collection sheet A1DUR71C Counts the drive distance of the intermediate
life.
reset.
I-302

mbe param
r eter
072 Z1 47 Side seal (distance %) A50U5316 Counts the drive distance of the intermediate
transfer belt and shows the count in
life.
reset.
073 Z1 48 2nd transfer C-clip (Time%) V218060086 Counts the charging time of the 2nd transfer
roller/Lw and shows the count in percentage
074 Z1 49 2nd transfer unit A50UR705 *1
When this counter is reset, number 075,
number 076, number 078, number 079 are
also reset.
075 Z1 4A 2nd transfer roller/Lw A50U5200 *1
076 Z1 4B Separate Discharging Unit A50UR70B *1
077 Z1 4C 2nd transfer earth plate assy A50UR70G Counts the charging time of the 2nd transfer
(time %) roller/Lw and shows the count in percentage
078 Z1 4D Discharging time of the 2nd A50U5200 Counts the charging time of the 2nd transfer
transfer roller/Lw (%) roller/Lw and shows the count in percentage
reset.
079 Z1 4E Separation discharging plate A50UR70B Counts the charging time of the separation
unit discharging time (%) discharging unit and shows the count in
life.
reset.
080 Z1 4F - - -
081 Z1 50 - - -
082 Z1 51 Fusing Fusing unit A9VER701 (Japan) *1
A9VER702 (North When this counter is reset, number 083 to
America) number 103, number 105 to number 108 are
A9VER703 (Europe) also reset.
083 Z1 52 Fusing Roller/1 A50U7201 *1
084 Z1 53 Fusing Roller/Lw A50U7655 *1
085 Z1 54 Fusing Belt A50U7650 *1
086 Z1 55 Belt Regulating Sleeve A50U7241 *1
087 Z1 56 Fusing paper exit roller/Up A1DU7225 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex
mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode
088 Z1 57 Heat insulating sleeve/Up A5AW7449 *1
089 Z1 58 Fusing Bearing/Lw 26NA5371 *1
090 Z1 59 Heat insulating sleeve/Lw A50U7563 *1
091 Z1 5A Fusing Roller/2 A50U7205 *1
092 Z1 5B Fusing Gear/1 A50U7527 *1
093 Z1 5C Fusing ball bearing/Up A5AW7450 *1
094 Z1 5D Fusing gear/2 A03U8095 *1
095 Z1 5E Fusing temperature sensor/2 A50UM506 *1
096 Z1 5F Fusing gear/3 A50U7522 *1
097 Z1 60 Fusing separating claw assy A50UR72U *1
098 Z1 61 Fusing heater lamp 1 assy/Up A9VEM31A (Japan) *1
A9VEM31E (North
America)
A9VEM31F (Europe)
099 Z1 62 Fusing heater lamp/4 A50UM32A (Japan) *1
A50UM32E (North
America)
A50UM32F (Europe)
100 Z1 63 Fusing Temperature Sensor/3 A50UR70F *1
101 Z1 64 Fusing Temperature Sensor/4 A50UR70E *1
102 Z1 65 Fusing Temperature Sensor/1 65AA8801 *1
I-303

mbe param
r eter
103 Z1 66 Fusing Temperature Sensor/5 A50UR72Y *1
104 Z1 67 Paper conveyance Tacking Fan/4, /5 A5AWM151 Counts every fan motor activation
105 Z1 68 Fusing Fusing Separation A5AWM151 Counts every fan motor activation
Fan/1, /2, /3
106 Z1 69 Fusing Fusing belt assy A9VER704 *1
When this counter is reset, numbers 83, 85,
86, 88, 91, 93, 107, and 108 are also reset.
107 Z1 6A Fusing Fusing bearing/belt 26NA5371 *1
108 Z1 6B Fusing Heat insulating sleeve/belt A50U7563 *1
109 Z1 6C Fusing Fusing heater lamp 2 assy/Up A9VEM33A (Japan) *1
A9VEM33E (North
America)
A9VEM33F (Europe)
110 Z1 6D - - -
111 Z1 6E - - -
112 Z1 6F - - -
113 Z1 70 Main body tray, bypass Paper Feed/Separation Roller 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from the tray 1
tray Rubber/1
114 Z1 71 Paper Feed/Separation Roller 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from the tray 2
Rubber/2
115 Z1 72 - - -
116 Z1 73 Main body tray, bypass MB506 Paper Feed/ 25SA4096 1 count for each paper exit from bypass
tray Separation Roller Rubber/BP
117 Z1 74 Pick-up roller/1 A1DUR71J 1 count for each paper exit from the tray 1
118 Z1 75 Pick-up roller/2 A1DUR71J 1 count for each paper exit from the tray 2
119 Z1 76 - - -
120 Z1 77 Main body tray, bypass MB506 pick-up roller/BP A21ER703 1 count for each paper exit from bypass
121 Z1 78 tray Paper feed clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from the tray 1
122 Z1 79 Paper feed clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from the tray 2
123 Z1 7A - - -
124 Z1 7B Main body tray, bypass MB506 paper feed clutch/BP 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from bypass
125 Z1 7C tray Pre-registration clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from the tray 1
126 Z1 7D Pre-registration clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from the tray 2
127 Z1 7E - - -
128 Z1 7F Paper conveyance Intermediate Conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from the tray 2
Clutch/1
129 Z1 80 Intermediate Conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex
Clutch/2 mode, 1 count in the duplex mode
130 Z1 81 Intermediate Conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex
Clutch/3 mode, 1 count in the duplex mode
131 Z1 82 Registration cleaning sheet A50UR70D 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex
assy mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode
132 Z1 83 Registration roller A50U7101 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex
133 Z1 84 De-curler roller A50U8605 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex
134 Z1 85 Paper Exit Decurler Roller A50U8908 1 count for each paper exit
135 Z1 86 ADU Conveyance Clutch A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
(not counted in the simplex mode)
136 Z1 87 Registration Roller Bearing A03U8128 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex
137 Z1 88 Registration idler gear A50U7137 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex
138 Z1 89 ADU pre-registration clutch A03UM201 1 count for each paper exit in the duplex mode
(not counted in the simplex mode)
139 Z1 8A Paper conveyance Charging roller/Up A85C8990 1 count for each paper exit with charging in the
simplex mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode.
For a large size, 2 counts for each paper exit
with charging in the simplex mode, 4 counts in
the duplex mode.
reset.
I-304

mbe param
r eter
140 Z1 8B Charging Roller/Up (time %) A85C8990 Counts the charging time of the charging roller/
Up and displays it in percentage with respect
to the end of the life.
141 Z1 8C Paper exit drive gear/1 A03U9095 1 count for each paper exit
142 Z1 8D Paper exit drive gear/2 A0439099 1 count for each paper exit
143 Z1 8E Others Exposure lamp on time A61FM311 Accumulation of time when the lamp is on. 1
count per second. Outputted per minute.
144 Z1 8F Main Power Switch A4EUM600 1 count for each activation of the image control
(the times that the CPU is started except with
the sub power SW, CSRC, SHUTOFF, WT)
145 Z1 90 Sub Power Switch A50UM603 1 count for each deactivation with main
SW_OFF
146 Z1 91 Door switch 40AA8501 1 count for each time the front door opens
147 Z1 92 Toner access door switch 12QR8601 1 count for each time the replenish toner door
opens
148 Z1 93 Paper conveyance Paper exit gear A50U8997 1 count for each paper exit
149 Z1 94 Charging roller bearing/Fr A1RF5089 *1
150 Z1 95 Charging roller bearing/Rr A85C8972 *1
151 Z1 96 SD TU503 Slit Cutter Assy/Fr A65WF701 1 count for each entrance reversal output in
the slit mode
152 Z1 97 TU503 Slit Cutter Assy/Rr A65WF702 1 count for each entrance reversal output in
the slit mode
153 Z1 98 TU503 Rotary Cutter Assy/Rr A65WF700 1 count for each entrance reversal output in
the slit mode
154 Z1 99 - - -
155 Z1 9A - - -
156 Z1 9B EF EF103 Fusing unit A57VR701 (Japan) *1
A57VR702 (North When this counter is reset, number 157 to
America) number 177, number 183 to number 184 are
A57VR703 (Europe) also reset.
157 Z1 9C EF103 Fusing Roller/1 A57V7201 *1
158 Z1 9D EF103 Fusing Roller/Lw A57V7401 *1
159 Z1 9E EF103 Fusing belt A57V7202 *1
160 Z1 9F EF103 Belt Regulating Sleeve A50U7241 *1
161 Z1 A0 EF103 Fusing Paper Exit A50U7609 1 count for each paper exit in the simplex
Roller/Up mode, 2 counts in the duplex mode
162 Z1 A1 EF103 Fusing Temperature A50UM506 *1
Sensor/2
163 Z1 A2 EF103 Heat Insulating Sleeve/ A03U7295 *1
Up
164 Z1 A3 EF103 Fusing bearing/Lw 26NA5371 *1
165 Z1 A4 EF103 Heat insulating sleeve/ A50U7563 *1
Lw
166 Z1 A5 EF103 Fusing Roller/2 A50U7205 *1
167 Z1 A6 EF103 Fusing gear/1 A50U7527 *1
168 Z1 A7 EF103 Fusing Bearing/Up A1UD7235 *1
169 Z1 A8 EF103 Fusing gear/2 A03U8095 *1
170 Z1 A9 EF Fusing Heater Lamp Assy/ A50UM31A (Japan) *1
Up A50UM31E (North
America)
A50UM31F (Europe)
171 Z1 AA EF103 Fusing heater lamp/4 A50UM32A (Japan) *1
A50UM32E (North
America)
A50UM32F (Europe)
172 Z1 AB EF103 Fusing Temperature A50UR70F *1
Sensor/3
173 Z1 AC EF103 Fusing Temperature A50UR70E *1
Sensor/4
174 Z1 AD EF103 Fusing Temperature 65AA8801 *1
Sensor/1
I-305

mbe param
r eter
175 Z1 AE EF103 Fusing Temperature A50UR72Y *1
Sensor/5
176 Z1 AF EF103 Fusing gear/3 A50U7522 *1
177 Z1 B0 EF103 fusing separating claw A50UR72U *1
assy
178 Z1 B1 - - -
179 Z1 B2 - - -
180 Z1 B3 - - -
181 Z1 B4 - - -
182 Z1 B5 - - -
183 Z1 B6 EF EF103 Neutralizing Ring A50U7337 *1
184 Z1 B7 EF103 Neutralizing Flat Spring A50UR733 *1
Assy
185 Z1 B8 - - -
186 Z1 B9 - - -
187 Z1 BA OT OT511 Paper Exit Roller A0438907 1 count for each paper exit (when OT-511 is
mounted)
188 Z1 BB OT511 Paper Exit Roller/2 65AA4818 1 count for each paper exit (when OT-511 is
mounted)
189 Z1 BC OT511 Paper Hold Roller 65AA4849 1 count for each paper exit (when OT-511 is
mounted)
190 Z1 BD OT510 Idler roller/1 A0GY7121 1 count for each paper exit
191 Z1 BE - - -
192 Z1 BF PFU, LCT LU202m Pick-up Roller A03X5652 1 count for each paper exit from LCT
193 Z1 C0 LU202m Paper Feed/Sep. A03X5653/5654 1 count for each paper exit from LCT
Roller
194 Z1 C1 LU202m Paper Feed Clutch 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from LCT
195 Z1 C2 LU202m Pre-registraion 56AA8201 1 count for each paper exit from LCT
Clutch
196 Z1 C3 LU202m Pre-registration A03W6206 1 count for each paper exit from LCT
Roller
197 Z1 C4 LU202XL/LU202XLm Pre- A03W6206 For each paper exit from LCT*1
registration roller
198 Z1 C5 PF602m Pick-up Rubber (Tray A03X5652 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
3)
199 Z1 C6 PF602m Feed roller and A03X5653/5654 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
separation roller (tray 3)
200 Z1 C7 PF602m Paper feed clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
(tray 3)
201 Z1 C8 PF602m Separation clutch/1 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
(tray 3)
202 Z1 C9 PF602m Pick-up rubber (tray A03X5652 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4
4)
203 Z1 CA PF602m Feed roller and A03X5653/5654 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4
separation roller (tray 4)
204 Z1 CB PF602m Paper feed clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4
(tray 4)
205 Z1 C PF602m Separation clutch/2 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 4
C (tray 4)
206 Z1 C PF602m vertical conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
D clutch/1
207 Z1 CE PF602m vertical conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
clutch/2
208 Z1 CF PF602m vertical conveyance 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
clutch/3
209 Z1 D0 PF602m Pre-registration 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
clutch or PFU tray 4
210 Z1 D1 PF602m Horizontal 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
conveyance clutch/1 or PFU tray 4
211 Z1 D2 PF602m Horizontal 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
conveyance clutch/2 or PFU tray 4
I-306

mbe param
r eter
212 Z1 D3 - - -
213 Z1 D4 - - -
214 Z1 D5 - - -
215 Z1 D6 - - -
216 Z1 D7 - - -
217 Z1 D8 - - -
218 Z1 D9 - - -
219 Z1 DA - - -
220 Z1 DB - - -
221 Z1 D - - -
C
222 Z1 D - - -
D
223 Z1 DE - - -
224 Z1 DF - - -
225 Z1 E0 - - -
226 Z1 E1 - - -
227 Z1 E2 - - -
228 Z1 E3 - - -
229 Z1 E4 - - -
230 Z1 E5 PFU, LCT LU202XL/LU202XLm Pick-up A03X5652 For each paper exit from LCT*1
roller
231 Z1 E6 LU202XL/LU202XLm Paper A03X5653/5654 For each paper exit from LCT*1
feed roller, separation roller
232 Z1 E7 LU202XL/LU202XLm Paper 57GA8201 1 count for each paper exit from the LCT
feed clutch
233 Z1 E8 LU202XL/LU202XLm Pre- 57GA8201 1 count for each paper exit from the LCT
registration clutch
234 Z1 E9 FD FD503 Pick-up Rubber (Up) 50BAR701 Counts the paper feed from PI upper tray.
235 Z1 EA FD503 Sep. Rubber (Up) 13QNR704 Counts the paper feed from PI upper tray.
236 Z1 EB FD503 Paper Feed Rubber 50BAR702 Counts the paper feed from PI upper tray.
(Up)
237 Z1 EC FD503 Pick-up Rubber (Lw) 50BAR701 Counts the paper feed from PI lower tray.
238 Z1 ED FD503 Sep. Rubber (Lw) 13QNR704 Counts the paper feed from PI lower tray.
239 Z1 EE FD503 Paper Feed Rubber 50BAR702 Counts the paper feed from PI lower tray.
(Lw)
240 Z1 EF FD503 Punch Unit A0H0R700, 1 count for each paper exit in the punch mode.
A0H0R701, A0H0R702
241 Z1 F0 FD503 Roller Solenoid 15AGR723 1 count for each paper exit in the punch or
folding mode (all size).
242 Z1 F1 FD503 2nd folding roller 15AGR761 • 1 count for each paper exit in the folding
solenoid mode (all size)
• 1 count for each paper exit in the punch
mode (paper length 220 mm or larger).
243 Z1 F2 FD503 Tray Up-down Motor 129U-108 1 count for each paper exit to the main tray.
244 Z1 F3 - - -
245 Z1 F4 - - -
246 Z1 F5 LS LS1 (LS-506 1st tandem) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
paper press solenoid/1 sort mode (all size).
247 Z1 F6 LS1 (LS-506 1st tandem) rear 15AV8253 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
stopper solenoid sort mode (all size).
248 Z1 F7 LS1 (LS-506 1st tandem) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
paper press solenoid/2 sort mode (Length 295 mm or more and Width
226 mm or more).
249 Z1 F8 LS1 (LS-506 1st tandem) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
paper press solenoid/3 mode and the sort mode.
250 Z1 F9 LS1 (LS-506 1st tandem) 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the
stacker tray up down motor stacker tray up down motor.
251 Z1 FA - - -
252 Z1 FB - - -
I-307

mbe param
r eter
253 Z1 FC LS LS2 (LS-506 2nd tandem) 15AV8252 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
paper press solenoid/1 sort mode (all size).
254 Z1 FD LS2 (LS-506 2nd tandem) rear 15AV8253 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
stopper solenoid sort mode (all size).
255 Z1 FE LS2 (LS-506 2nd tandem) 15AV8251 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort and
paper press solenoid/2 sort mode (Length 295 mm or more and Width
226 mm or more).
256 Z1 FF LS2 (LS-506 2nd tandem) 15AV8255 1 count for each paper exit in the non-sort
paper press solenoid/3 mode and the sort mode.
257 Z7 00 LS2 (LS-506 2nd tandem) 15AV8003 Counts operation number of times of the
stacker tray up down motor stacker tray up down motor.
258 Z7 01 SD SD513 Conveyance Guide A729R70S On multi half-fold/fold & staple mode, 1 count
Assy/Up for each paper exit to the fold & staple section
259 Z7 02 SD513 Clamp Span Wire A65U6908 When FD-504 is mounted, 1 count for each
book exit in the fold & staple mode/half-folding
mode.
260 Z7 03 SD506 Trimmer Blade Kit A0H2R901 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
Counts when the new trimming unit is
mounted.
261 Z7 04 SD506 Trimmer Board Assy A0H2B622 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
mounted.
262 Z7 05 SD506 Trimmer Press Motor A0H2M101 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
mounted.
263 Z7 06 SD506 Trimmer Blade Motor A0H2M102 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
mounted.
264 Z7 07 SD506 Trimmer Unit A0H2A620 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
trimming mode.
mounted.
265 Z7 08 SD506 Stapler Assy/Rt 15AN-550 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch
mode.
Counts when either the new trimming unit or
the previous trimming unit is mounted.
266 Z7 09 SD506 Stapler Assy/Lt 15AN-550 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch
mode.
267 Z7 0A SD513 Alignment Plate Sol A65UN165 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
Wiring mode/half-folding mode.
268 Z7 0B SD513 Booklet Holding Wire/1 A65U6290
269 Z7 0C SD513 Booklet Holding Wire/2 A65U6300
270 Z7 0D SD506 Roller release 15AN8251 1 count for each paper exit to the folding
solenoid/1, /3 section.
271 Z7 0E SD506 Solenoid 15ANR710 1 count for each paper exit to the folding
section.
272 Z7 0F SD506 FNS Solenoid/2 15ANR771 1 count for each paper exit to the stacker.
273 Z7 10 SD506 Bundle Press Stage 15AN7719 1 count for each time the bundle up and down
Gear section moves up (PS45 is ON).
274 Z7 11 SD513 Booklet Holding Wire/3 A65U6302 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
275 Z7 12 SD513 Finger Torque Limiter A03X5656 mode/half-folding mode.
276 Z7 13 SD513 Fore Edge Finger Gear 55VA7903
I-308

mbe param
r eter
277 Z7 14 FS FS612 Stapler Unit/Fr 15JM-501 1 count for each exit in the 1-staple at front, 2-
staples, saddle stitching mode.
278 Z7 15 FS612 Stapler Unit/Rr 15JM-501 1 count for each exit in the 1-staple at front, 2-
staples, saddle stitching mode.
279 Z7 16 FS531/FS612 Shift Roller A10UA736 1 count each time an even number of the print
Motor is exited in the sort mode.
280 Z7 17 FNS Paper Exit Opening A10UA736 1 count for each starting job for the size A4R
Motor and 8.5 x 11R, and 1 count at exiting these
size in staple mode.
1 count for each start of saddle stitch, half-
folding.
281 Z7 18 FS612 Folding Knife Motor 120H8001 1 count for each paper exit in the saddle stitch
mode, half-folding mode, tri-folding mode.
282 Z7 19 FS531/612 Bypass Gate 15JKR703 1 count for each paper exit for the A4, B5, 8.5
Solenoid x 11 and 16K sizes in the staple mode.
283 Z7 1A FS612 Tri-folding Gate 15JKR703 Count for each paper exit in the tri-folding
Solenoid mode
284 Z7 1B FS531/612 Paper Exit Roller/A 122H4825 1 count for each paper exit to the FNS main
tray.
1 count for each paper exit in the staple mode.
285 Z7 1C FS531/612 Paper Exit Roller/B A04D8904 1 count for each paper exit to the FNS main
tray.
1 count for each paper exit in the staple mode.
286 Z7 1D FNS Intermediate Conv. Roller 13QE4531 1 count for each paper exit in the staple mode
or saddle stitching mode or half-folding mode
or tri-folding mode.
287 Z7 1E FS531/612 Paper Assist 20AK4210 1 count for each paper exit in the staple mode
Roller or saddle stitching mode or half-folding mode
or tri-folding mode.
288 Z7 1F FS531 Stapler Unit/Fr A07RA735 1 count for each exit in the 1-staple at front, 2-
staples.
289 Z7 20 FS531 Stapler Unit/Rr A07RA736 1 count for each exit in the 1-staple at front, 2-
staples.
290 Z7 21 FS531 Cleaning Plate Assy A07RA741 1 count for each paper in the staple mode.
291 Z7 22 - - -
292 Z7 23 - - -
293 Z7 24 - - -
294 Z7 25 - - -
295 Z7 26 FS FS532 Staple Unit A4F3R714 1 count for each booklet exit in the 1-staple at
front or 1-staple at rear mode
2 counts for each booklet exit completion in
the 2-staple mode
296 Z7 27 FS532 Paddle A4F37500 1 count for each paper exit to the staple
stacker
297 Z7 28 FS532 Idler Roller/1 A0GY7121 1 count for each paper exit
298 Z7 29 FS532 Idler Roller/2 A0GY7122 1 count for each paper exit
299 Z7 2A - - -
300 Z7 2B - - -
301 Z7 2C FS SD510 Staple Unit A4F47300 2 counts for each book exit in the saddle stitch
mode
302 Z7 2D SD510 2nd Folding Gate A4F4R702 Count for each paper exit in the tri-folding
Solenoid mode
303 Z7 2E SD510 Rear Gripper Solenoid 26NA8251 1 count for each paper "356 mm or more in
paper length" exit to the staple stacker (saddle
stitching, bundle center-folding, or tri-folding)
304 Z7 2F SD510 Paddle A4F4R70D/E/F 1 count for each paper exit completion to the
staple stacker (Saddle stitching or bundle half-
folding or tri-folding)
305 Z7 30 - - -
306 Z7 31 - - -
307 Z7 32 FS PI502 Paper Feed Clutch/Up 13QN8201 1 count for each paper feed on the PI
308 Z7 33 PI502 Pick-up Roller/Up 50BAR701 1 count for each paper feed on the PI
309 Z7 34 PI502 Paper Feed Roller/Up 13QNR705 1 count for each paper feed on the PI
I-309

mbe param
r eter
310 Z7 35 PI502 Separation Roller/Up 13QNR704 1 count for each paper feed on the PI
311 Z7 36 PI502 Torque Limiter/Up 13QN4073 1 count for each paper feed on the PI
312 Z7 37 PI502 Paper Feed Clutch/Lw 13QN8201 1 count for each PI lower paper feed
313 Z7 38 PI502 Pick-up Roller/Lw 50BAR701 1 count for each PI lower paper feed
314 Z7 39 PI502 Paper Feed Roller/Lw 50BAR702 1 count for each PI lower paper feed
315 Z7 3A PI502 Separation Roller/Lw 13QNR704 1 count for each PI lower paper feed
316 Z7 3B PI502 Torque Limiter/Lw 13QN4073 1 count for each PI lower paper feed
317 Z7 3C - - -
318 Z7 3D FS PK-522 Punch Unit - Number of paper exit when you select the
punch mode
319 Z7 3E PK511 Punch unit - Number of punching by PK
320 Z7 3F PK512 Punch unit - Number of punching by PK
321 Z7 40 PK513 punch unit - Number of punching by PK
322 Z7 41 - - -
323 Z7 42 - - -
324 Z7 43 PB PB503 Sub Tray Paper Exit 15ANR714 1 count for each paper exit in the PB sub tray
SD
325 Z7 44 PB503 SCswitchback Release A0V9M101 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
Motor section
326 Z7 45 PB503 FD Alignment Solenoid 15AA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
section
327 Z7 46 PB503 SC Pressure Arm 15AA8251 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
Solenoid section
328 Z7 47 PB503 Switchback Roller 13GQ4519 1 count for each paper exit from the PB
329 Z7 48 PB503 Pick-up Roller A4EUR715 1 count for each book exit in the PB tray cover
mode
330 Z7 49 PB503 Paper Feed/Sep. A4EUR714 1 count for each book exit in the PB tray cover
Roller mode
331 Z7 4A PB503 Cover Paper Pick-up 56AA8201 1 count for each book exit in the PB tray cover
Clutch mode
332 Z7 4B PB503 Cover Paper Sep. 56AA8201 1 count for each book exit in the PB tray cover
Clutch mode
333 Z7 4C PB503 Roller Cutter Blade A0756230 1 count for each book exit when the PB cover
Assy paper trimming is used.
334 Z7 4D PB503 Exhaust Filter/A A15X3017 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
section
335 Z7 4E PB503 Exhaust Filter/B A15X3018 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
section
336 Z7 4F PB503 Entrance gate solenoid 15ANR714 1 count for each book exit in other than PB
tray cover mode
337 Z7 50 PB503 Glue Tank Assy A15XA36A/E/F Time during which tank applying roller rotates.
1 count per 1 hour.
338 Z7 51 PB503 Pellet Supply Cooling 27LA8051 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
Fan section
339 Z7 52 PB503 One-way Clutch/A 13GQ7709 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
section
340 Z7 53 PB503 One-way Clutch/B 13GQ7709 1 count for each paper exit in the PB stack
section
341 Z7 54 PB503 Glue Roller Gear A0753799 Time during which tank applying roller rotates.
Bearing 1 count per 8 hours.
342 Z7 55 - - -
343 Z7 56 - - -
344 Z7 57 GP GP501 Aligner Idler Roller A0N9PP3X 1 count for each paper exit in the multi punch
Assy mode
345 Z7 58 GP501 Bypass Assembly A0N9PP54 1 count for each paper exit
346 Z7 59 GP501 Roller Energy Drive A0N9PP1J 1 count for each paper exit in the multi punch
mode
347 Z7 5A GP501 Belt Aligner (Green) A0N9PP2X 1 count for each paper exit in the multi punch
mode
348 Z7 5B GP501 Back Gauge A0N9PP59 1 count for each paper exit in the multi punch
Mechanism mode
I-310

mbe param
r eter
349 Z7 5C - - -
350 Z7 5D - - -
351 Z7 5E - - -
352 Z7 5F - - -
353 Z7 60 - - -
354 Z7 61 - - -
355 Z7 62 - - -
356 Z7 63 - - -
357 Z7 64 - - -
358 Z7 65 GP GP502 Pull Back Pad A4F6PP00 1 count for each paper that is stacked in the
GP stacker.
359 Z7 66 GP502 Suction Cup A4F6PP03 1 count for each paper that is stacked in the
GP stacker.
360 Z7 67 GP502 Die Set Felt A4F6PP01 1 count for each paper that is stacked in the
GP stacker.
361 Z7 68 GP502 Die Set A4F6PP02 1 count for each paper that is stacked in the
GP stacker.
362 Z7 69 GP502 Book Chute Mylar A4F6PPH1 1 count for each paper that is stacked in the
GP stacker.
363 Z7 6A - - -
364 Z7 6B RU RU510 Straight gate A4FC7030 1 count for each paper reversed in RU and
exited (2 counts for the overlapped paper in
RU and exited)
365 Z7 6C RU510 Entrance Roller/1,/2 A4FC7014 1 count for each paper exit
366 Z7 6D RU510 Stacker Ent./Merge A4FC7002 1 count for each paper exit
Roller
367 Z7 6E RU510 Paper Re-feed Roller A4FC7019 1 count for each paper exit
368 Z7 6F RU510 Paper Exit Roller A4FCR904 1 count for each paper exit
369 Z7 70 RU510 Driven Roller A0GY7121 1 count for each paper exit
370 Z7 71 RU510 Bearing/K A00V2406, A4FCR905 1 count for each paper exit
371 Z7 72 RU510 Ent,/Exit Conv. Belt A0GE2105, A4FC7015 1 count for each paper exit
372 Z7 73 RU510 Conv./Exit Pulley A4FC7077, A4FC7078 1 count for each paper exit
373 Z7 74 RU510 Entrance/Paper Exit A4FCR700 1 count for each paper exit
Motor
374 Z7 75 RU510 Stack Switch Motor A083M100 1 count for each paper reversed in RU and
exited (2 counts for the overlapped paper in
RU and exited)
375 Z7 76 RU510 Re-feed Roller Gear A4FC7022, A4FC7023 1 count for each paper exit
376 Z7 77 - - -
377 Z7 78 - - -
378 Z7 79 ADF DF706 Pick-up Roller 9J073301 1 count for each paper passage through the
ADF
379 Z7 7A DF706 Paper Feed Roller A00J5636 1 count for each paper passage through the
ADF
380 Z7 7B DF706 Separation Roller A1085639 1 count for each paper passes through the
ADF
381 Z7 7C SD SD513 Staple Unit A65U7779 2 counts for each booklet exit completion in
the fold & staple mode for 2 stapling.
382 Z7 7D SD513 Trimmer Blade A729R901 1 count for each booklet exit completion in the
383 Z7 7E SD513 Trimmer Board A729F624 trimming mode.
384 Z7 7F SD513 Trimmer Press Motor A0H2M101

385 Z7 80 SD513 Trimmer Blade Motor A0H2M102
386 Z7 81 SD513 Trimmer Unit A729F621
387 Z7 82 SD513 Reverse exit roller A65UR70M On the bundle half-folding/fold & staple mode,
pressure release motor 1 count for each paper exit to the fold & staple
section
In the bundle tri-folding mode without the
crease and the slit, 1 count for each bundle tri-
folding exit completion.
I-311

mbe param
r eter
In the bundle tri-folding mode with the crease
and the slit, 1 count for each bundle tri-folding
exit completion.
When the sub tray paper exit or the through
conveyance is performed with the crease, the
slit, or the reverse inside SD-513, 1 count for
each paper exit completion
388 Z7 83 SD513 1st Folding Knife Motor A65UR70N On the bundle half-folding/fold & staple mode,
1 count for each paper exit to the fold & staple
section
In the bundle tri-folding mode without the
crease and the slit, 1 count for each bundle tri-
folding exit completion.
In the bundle tri-folding mode with the crease
and the slit, 1 count for each bundle tri-folding
exit completion.
389 Z7 84 SD513 2nd Folding Knife A65UR70P 1 count for each paper exit in the tri-folding
Motor mode.
390 Z7 85 SD513 Booklet Holding Motor A729R704 2 counts for each booklet exit completion in
391 Z7 86 SD513 Clamp Motor A729R70G 1 count for each book exit in the fold & staple
392 Z7 87 SD513 Fore Edge Finger A729R706 mode/half-folding mode.
Motor
393 Z7 88 SD513 gripper motor A4JUM101
394 Z7 89 SD513 Fore Edge Stopper A729R706
Motor
395 Z7 8A SD513 Clincher A65U7781 2 counts for each booklet exit completion in
396 Z7 8B FD504 FD Roller Cleaning A65VR70B 2 counts for each booklet exit for a booklet that
Assy/Rr has 19 pages or less in the FD mode.
4 counts for each booklet exit for a booklet that
has 29 pages or less in the FD mode.
397 Z7 8C FD504 FD Roller Motor A65VR706 2 counts for each booklet exit for a booklet that
398 Z7 8D FD504 FD Clamp Motor/Rr A65VR705 1 count for each booklet exit in the FD mode.
399 Z7 8E FD504 FD Clamp Motor/Rr A65VR705 1 count for each booklet exit in the FD mode.
400 Z7 8F FD504 FD Roller Cleaning A65VR70A 2 counts for each booklet exit for a booklet that
Assy/Fr has 19 pages or less in the FD mode.
401 Z7 90 - - -
402 Z7 91 - - -
403 Z7 92 - - -
404 Z7 93 - - -
405 Z7 94 - - -
406 Z7 95 - - -
407 Z7 96 - - -
408 Z7 97 - - -
I-312

mbe param
r eter
409 Z7 98 IQ IQ501 Conveyance roller/1 A8FR7997 *3
410 Z7 99 IQ501 Conveyance roller/2 A8FR7997 *3
411 Z7 9A IQ501 Conveyance roller/3 A8FR7997 *3
412 Z7 9B IQ501 Entrance roller A8FR7995 *3
413 Z7 9C IQ501 Colorimeter upstream A8FR7995 *3
roller
414 Z7 9D IQ501 Colorimeter A8FR7937 *3
downstream roller
415 Z7 9E IQ501 Exit roller A8FR7994 *3
416 Z7 9F IQ501 Scanner B&W standard A8FRR906 1 count for each end of the shading operation
part/1 of the scanner 1.
(1 count for 1 retry: the maximum number of
retry is 3.)
417 Z7 A0 IQ501 Scanner B&W standard A8FRR906 1 count for each end of the shading operation
part/2 of the scanner 2.
retry is 3.)
418 Z7 A1 IQ501 Scanner white A8FRR904 1 count for each exit of paper on the scanner 1
backing/1 white back operation mode.
419 Z7 A2 IQ501 Scanner black A8FRR905 1 count for each exit of paper on the scanner 1
backing/1-1, /1-2 black back operation mode.
420 Z7 A3 IQ501 Scanner white A8FRR904 1 count for each exit of paper on the scanner 2
backing/2 white back operation mode.
421 Z7 A4 IQ501 Scanner black A8FRR905 1 count for each exit of paper on the scanner 2
backing/2-1, /2-2 black back operation mode.
422 Z7 A5 IQ501 Scanner cleaning A8FR3020 1 count for each end of the shading operation
brush/1 of the scanner 1.
retry is 3.)
423 Z7 A6 IQ501 Scanner cleaning A8FR3020 1 count for each end of the shading operation
brush/2 of the scanner 2.
retry is 3.)
424 Z7 A7 IQ501 Scanner unit/1 A8FRR901 1 count for each exit of paper on the scanner 1
operation mode.
425 Z7 A8 IQ501 Scanner unit/2 A8FRR902 1 count for each exit of paper on the scanner 2
operation mode.
426 Z7 A9 IQ-501 Colorimeter unit, A8FRM500 1 count for exit of paper on the colorimeter
colorimeter white calibration mode.
block
427 Z7 AA IQ501 Entrance motor A1TVM101 *3
428 Z7 AB IQ501 Conveyance motor/1 A1TVM101 *3
429 Z7 AC IQ501 Conveyance motor/2 A1TVM101 *3
430 Z7 AD IQ501 Conveyance motor/3 A1TVM101 *3
431 Z7 AE IQ501 Colorimeter upstream A1TVM101 *3
motor
432 Z7 AF IQ501 Colorimeter A1TVM101 *3
downstream motor
433 Z7 B0 IQ501 Exit motor A1TVM101 *3
434 Z7 B1 IQ501 Scanner calibration A0Y5J040 1 count for each end of the shading operation
motor/1 of the scanner 1.
retry is 3.)
435 Z7 B2 IQ501 Scanner calibration A0Y5J040 1 count for each end of the shading operation
motor/2 of the scanner 2.
retry is 3.)
436 Z7 B3 IQ501 Colorimeter calibration A0Y5J040 1 count for each exit of paper on the
motor/1 colorimeter mode.
437 Z7 B4 IQ501 Colorimeter calibration A0Y5J040 1 count for each exit of paper on the
motor/2 colorimeter mode.
438 Z7 B5 IQ501 Colorimeter white A8FR8958 1 count for each exit of paper on the
backing colorimeter white backing operation mode.
439 Z7 B6 - - -
I-313

mbe param
r eter
440 Z7 B7 - - -
441 Z7 B8 - - -
442 Z7 B9 - - -
443 Z7 BA - - -
444 Z7 BB - - -
445 Z7 BC PFU PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A55C7135 1 count for each exit of paper from the PFU
Horizontal conveyance roller/1 tray 3, the PFU tray 4, or the PFU tray 5
446 Z7 BD PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from the PFU
Horizontal conveyance roller tray 3, the PFU tray 4, or the PFU tray 5
bearing/1
447 Z7 BE PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A55C7135 1 count for each exit of paper from the PFU
Horizontal conveyance roller/2 tray 3, the PFU tray 4, or the PFU tray 5
448 Z7 BF PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from the PFU
Horizontal conveyance roller tray 3, the PFU tray 4, or the PFU tray 5
bearing/2
449 Z7 C0 PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3.
Suction belt clutch/1
Vertical conveyance
clutch/1, /2, exit clutch1
Exit clutch/2
454 Z7 C5 PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3,
Vertical conveyance PFU tray 4.
clutch/3, /4
455 Z7 C6 PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
Horizontal conveyance and PFU tray 4 and PFU tray 5.
clutch/1, /2
456 Z7 C7 PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A00V2406 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3
Pre-registration roller bearing and PFU tray 4 and PFU tray 5.
457 Z7 C8 PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A55C7101 1 count for each exit of paper from the PFU
Pre-registration roller tray 3, the PFU tray 4, or the PFU tray 5
458 Z7 C9 PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A1RG7161 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 3,
Loop roller/Up PFU tray 4.
459 Z7 CA PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 5.
Loop roller bearing/Lw
460 Z7 CB PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A1RG6075 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 5.
Loop roller/Lw
461 Z7 C PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A55CR702 2 counts for each exit of paper, whose size in
C Roller pressure release motor the sub scan direction is 350 mm or more,
from PFU tray 3, PFU tray 4, and PFU tray 5.
462 Z7 C PF1 (PF-707m 1st tandem) A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 6
D Tandem clutch/1, /2, /3, /4, /5 to 11, the MB-508 bypass tray, and the LU
connected to MB-508.
463 Z7 CE - - -
464 Z7 CF - - -
465 Z7 D0 - - -
466 Z7 D1 - - -
467 Z7 D2 - - -
468 Z7 D3 - - -
469 Z7 D4 PFU PF2 (PF2 (PF-707m 2nd A55C7135 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 6
tandem) tandem) Horizontal to 11
conveyance roller/1
470 Z7 D5 PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 6
Horizontal conveyance roller to 11
bearing/1
471 Z7 D6 PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) A55C7135 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 6
Horizontal conveyance roller/2 to 11
I-314

mbe param
r eter
472 Z7 D7 PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 6
bearing/2
473 Z7 D8 PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 6.
474 Z7 D9 PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7.
475 Z7 DA PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 8.
476 Z7 DB PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 6.
Vertical conveyance clutch
1/2, exit clutch 1
477 Z7 D PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 7.
C Exit clutch/2
478 Z7 D PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray
D Vertical conveyance 6,7.
clutch/3, /4
479 Z7 DE PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 6
Horizontal conveyance to 11
clutch/1, /2
480 Z7 DF PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) A00V2406 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 6
Pre-registration roller bearing to 11
481 Z7 E0 PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) A55C7101 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 6
Pre-registration roller to 11
482 Z7 E1 PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) A1RG7161 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 6
Loop roller/Up to 11
483 Z7 E2 PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 8.
Loop roller bearing/Lw
484 Z7 E3 PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) A1RG6075 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 8.
Loop roller/Lw
485 Z7 E4 PF2 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 9
Tandem clutch/1, /2, /3, /4, /5 to 11
486 Z7 E5 - - -
487 Z7 E6 - - -
488 Z7 E7 - - -
489 Z7 E8 - - -
490 Z7 E9 - - -
491 Z7 EA - - -
492 Z7 EB - - -
493 Z7 EC PFU PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) A55C7135 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 9
494 Z7 ED PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 9
bearing/1
495 Z7 EE PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) A55C7135 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 9
496 Z7 EF PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 9
bearing/2
497 Z7 F0 PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 9.
498 Z7 F1 PF3 (PF-707m 2nd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray
Suction belt clutch/3 10.
499 Z7 F2 PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray
Suction belt clutch/3 11.
500 Z7 F3 PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) 56AA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray 9.
Vertical conveyance clutch
1/2, exit clutch 1
Exit clutch/2 10.
Vertical conveyance 9,10.
clutch/3, /4
I-315

mbe param
r eter
503 Z7 F6 PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) A03UM201 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 9
Horizontal conveyance to 11
clutch/1, /2
504 Z7 F7 PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) A00V2406 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 9
Pre-registration roller bearing to 11
505 Z7 F8 PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) A55C7101 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU trays 9
Pre-registration roller to 11
506 Z7 F9 PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) A1RG7161 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray
Loop roller/Up 9,10.
507 Z7 FA PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) A03U8128 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray
Loop roller bearing/Lw 11.
508 Z7 FB PF3 (PF-707m 3rd tandem) A1RG6075 1 count for each exit of paper from PFU tray
Loop roller/Lw 11.
509 Z7 FC - - -
510 Z7 FD - - -
511 Z7 FE - - -
512 Z7 FF - - -
513 ZB 0 - - -
514 ZB 1 - - -
515 ZB 2 MB MB508 Paper feed counter - 1 count for each exit of paper from the MB-508
bypass tray
Numbers 516, 517, 518, and 525 (pick-up
roller, feed separation roller, paper feed clutch,
torque limiter) are also reset.
516 ZB 3 MB508 Pick-up Roller 55VAR746 1 count for each exit of paper from the MB-508
bypass tray
517 ZB 4 MB508 Paper feed roller/BP, 55VAR745 1 count for each exit of paper from the MB-508
separation roller/BP bypass tray
518 ZB 5 MB508 Paper Feed Clutch 57GA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from the MB-508
bypass tray
519 ZB 6 MB508 Pre-registration Roller A79A7031 1 count for each exit of paper from the MB-508
bypass tray
520 ZB 7 MB508 Exit roller A79A7032 1 count for each exit of paper from the MB-508
bypass or the LU which is connected to the
MB-508
521 ZB 8 MB508 Intermediate A79A7033 1 count for each exit of paper from the LU
conveyance roller which is connected to the MB-508
522 ZB 9 MB508 Pre-registration clutch 57GA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from the MB-508
bypass tray
523 ZB 0A MB508 Intermediate 57GA8201 1 count for each exit of paper from the LU
conveyance clutch/Up which is connected to the MB-508
524 ZB 0B MB508 Paper lift motor A2X0M121 1 count for each exit of paper from the MB-508
bypass tray
525 ZB 0C MB508 Torque limiter A03X5656 1 count for each exit of paper from the MB-508
bypass tray
526 ZB 0D MB508 Conveyance torque 57GA4430 1 count for each exit of paper from the LU
limiter which is connected to the MB-508
527 ZB 0E - - -
528 ZB 0F - - -
529 ZB 10 RU RU1 (RU-518 1st tandem) A9CER703 1 count for each sheet of paper whose length
paper exit gate solenoid is 270 mm or more when the reversal output
mode is selected
530 ZB 11 RU1 (RU-518 1st tandem) A1TTR704 1 count for each sheet of paper in RU paper
color sensor shutter solenoid density adjustment mode.
531 ZB 12 RU1 (RU-518 1st tandem) A1TTR704 1 count for each sheet of paper in RU paper
paper press solenoid density adjustment mode.
532 ZB 13 - - -
533 ZB 14 - - -
534 ZB 15 - - -
535 ZB 16 RU RU2 (RU-518 2nd tandem) A9CER703 1 count for each sheet of paper whose length
paper exit gate solenoid is 270 mm or more when the reversal output
mode is selected
I-316

mbe param
r eter
536 ZB 17 RU2 (RU-518 2nd tandem) A1TTR704 1 count for each sheet of paper in RU paper
color sensor shutter solenoid density adjustment mode.
537 ZB 18 RU2 (RU-518 2nd tandem) A1TTR704 1 count for each sheet of paper in RU paper
paper press solenoid density adjustment mode.
538 ZB 19 - - -
539 ZB 1A - - -
540 ZB 1B - - -
541 ZB 1C HM HM103 Humidification roller/ A9CF5001 1 count for each paper exit
Up
542 ZB 1D HM103 Humidification roller/ A9CF5000 1 count for each paper exit
Lw
543 ZB 1E HM103 Water feed roller/Lw A9CF5003 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
being active.
544 ZB 1F HM103 water feed filter A9CF5421 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
being active.
545 ZB 20 HM103 Pump motor A1TUR704 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
being active.
546 ZB 21 HM103 Water feed control SD A9CFR709 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
being active.
547 ZB 22 HM103 Control roller/Up A9CF5014 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
being active.
548 ZB 23 HM103 Control roller/Lw A9CF5004 1 count for each sheet with the humidification
being active.
549 ZB 24 - - -
550 ZB 25 - - -
551 ZB 26 - - -
552 ZB 27 - - -
553 ZB 28 Intermediate transfer/H Transfer roller bearing/K (Dis. A50U5057 Counts the drive distance and shows the count
(North America and %)/H in percentage with respect to the end of its
Europe (Default)) parts life.
reset.
554 ZB 29 Transfer roller bearing/Y, /M, / 65AA2638 Counts the drive distance and shows the count
C (Dis. %)/H in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
reset.
555 ZB 2A Transfer belt cleaning unit A50UR706 Counts the drive distance and shows the count
(Dis. %)/H in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
number 561, number 578, number 579,
556 ZB 2B Intermediate transfer/H A50UR706, 1P, *1
A85CR70R, When this counter is reset, numbers 553 to
A9VER705 555, 556 to 568, 570, and 571 to 579 are also
reset.
557 ZB 2C Intermediate transfer belt/H A9VE5001 *1
reset.
558 ZB 2D Transfer belt cleaning unit/H A50UR706 *1
number 567, number 555 are also reset.
559 ZB 2E Toner collection sheet/H A1DUR71C *1
reset.
560 ZB 2F Transfer belt cleaning blade A50UR70K *1 When the machine counts the number of
(Page)/H sheets
reset.
561 ZB 30 Transfer belt cleaning blade A50UR70K Counts the drive distance and shows the count
(Dis. %)/H in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
I-317

mbe param
r eter
reset.
562 ZB 31 1st transfer roller/Y(H) A50U5012 *2
reset.
563 ZB 32 1st transfer roller/M(H) A50U5012 *2
When you reset this counter, number 573 is
also reset.
*2
564 ZB 33 1st transfer roller/C(H) A50U5012
also reset.
*1
565 ZB 34 1st transfer roller/K(H) A50U5012
reset.
566 ZB 35 2nd transfer roller/Up(H) A50U5004 *1
reset.
567 ZB 36 Side seal/H A50U5316 *1
reset.
568 ZB 37 Transfer roller bearing/Y, /M, / 65AA2638 *2
C(H) When this counter is reset, number 554 is also
reset.
569 ZB 38 Intermediate separation claw 26NA8251 Counts the operation time and displays it.
solenoid (Count)/H
570 ZB 39 Transfer roller bearing/K(H) A50U5057 *1
reset.
571 ZB 3A Intermediate transfer belt/(Dis. A9VE5001 Counts the drive distance and shows the count
%)/H in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
reset.
572 ZB 3B 1st transfer roller/Y (Time %)/ A50U5012 Counts the charging time and shows the count
H in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
reset.
573 ZB 3C 1st transfer roller/M (Time %)/ A50U5012 Counts the charging time and shows the count
parts life.
also reset.
574 ZB 3D 1st transfer roller/C (Time %)/ A50U5012 Counts the charging time and shows the count
parts life.
also reset.
575 ZB 3E 1st transfer roller/K (Time %)/ A50U5012 Counts the charging time and shows the count
parts life.
also reset.
576 ZB 3F 2nd transfer roller/Up (Dis. %)/ A50U5004 Counts the drive distance and shows the count
parts life.
also reset.
577 ZB 40 Transfer belt separation claw A1DUR719 Counts the operation time and displays it.
(Count)/H
578 ZB 41 Toner collection sheet (Dis. A1DUR71C Counts the drive distance and shows the count
%)/H in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
reset.
579 ZB 42 Side seal (Dis. %)/H A50U5316 Counts the drive distance and shows the count
in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
I-318

mbe param
r eter
reset.
580 ZB 43 - - -
581 ZB 44 - - -
582 ZB 45 - - -
583 ZB 46 Intermediate transfer/C Transfer roller bearing/K (Dis. A50U5057 Counts the drive distance and shows the count
*Service part %)/C in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
reset.
584 ZB 47 Transfer roller bearing/Y/, M, / 65AA2638 Counts the drive distance and shows the count
C (Dis. %)/C in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
reset.
585 ZB 48 Transfer belt cleaning unit A50UR706 Counts the drive distance and shows the count
(Dis. %)/C in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
586 ZB 49 Intermediate transfer C A50UR706/1P/ *1
A85CR70P/R/ When this counter is reset, numbers 583 to
A9VER705 585, 587 to 598, 600, and 601 to 609 are also
reset.
587 ZB 4A Intermediate transfer belt/C A9VE5002 *1
reset.
588 ZB 4B Transfer belt cleaning unit/C A50UR706 *1
number 597, number 585 are also reset.
589 ZB 4C Toner collection sheet/C A1DUR71C *1
reset.
590 ZB 4D Transfer belt cleaning blade A50UR70K *1
(Page)/C When the machine counts the number of
sheets
reset.
591 ZB 4E Transfer belt cleaning blade A50UR70K Counts the drive distance and shows the count
(Dis. %)/C in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
reset.
592 ZB 4F 1st transfer roller/Y(C) A50U5012 *2
also reset.
593 ZB 50 1st transfer roller/M(C) A50U5012 *2
also reset.
594 ZB 51 1st transfer roller/C(C) A50U5012 *2
also reset.
595 ZB 52 1st transfer roller/K(C) A50U5012 *2
also reset.
596 ZB 53 2nd transfer roller/Up(C) A50U5004 *2
also reset.
597 ZB 54 Side seal/C A50U5316 *1
also reset.
598 ZB 55 Transfer roller bearing/Y, /M, / 65AA2638 *2
C(C) When this counter is reset, number 584 is also
reset.
I-319

mbe param
r eter
599 ZB 56 Intermediate separation claw 26NA8251 Counts the operation time and displays it.
solenoid (Count)/C
600 ZB 57 Transfer roller bearing/K(C) A50U5057 *1
reset.
601 ZB 58 Intermediate transfer belt/(Dis. A9VE5002 Counts the drive distance and shows the count
%)/C in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.
reset.
602 ZB 59 1st transfer roller/Y (Time %)/ A50U5012 Counts the charging time and shows the count
C in percentage with respect to the end of its
parts life.

AccurioPress C3080 C3080P C83hc C3070 C3070P C73hc Print C3070L E SM v3.00

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AccurioPress C3080 C3080P C83hc C3070 C3070P C73hc Print C3070L E SM v3.00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

Revision List .................................................................................................................................... -1

3. SAFETY WARNINGS ...............................................................................................................................................A-4

4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ...................................................................................................... A-21

5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ............................................................................................ A-53

B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS ..................................................................................................B-1

4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS ..................................................................................................................... B-4

C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................C-1

4. PF-602m (for WY3 or later) ....................................................................................................................................C-11

10. LU-202m .............................................................................................................................................................. C-17

11. LU-202XL............................................................................................................................................................. C-18

12. LU-202XLm.......................................................................................................................................................... C-19

14. MK-746 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-21

15. MB-506 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-23

16. MB-508 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-24

17. MK-744C.............................................................................................................................................................. C-25

18. OT-510................................................................................................................................................................. C-26

19. OT-511................................................................................................................................................................. C-29

20. EF-103 (Specification: W*2 or later) .................................................................................................................... C-30

21. MK-740/MK-740m................................................................................................................................................ C-32

22. RU-518................................................................................................................................................................. C-33

23. HM-103 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-35

24. RU-702................................................................................................................................................................. C-36

25. RU-510................................................................................................................................................................. C-38

26. FS-531 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-39

27. FS-612 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-41

28. PK-512/513 .......................................................................................................................................................... C-44

29. PI-502 .................................................................................................................................................................. C-45

30. IQ-501 .................................................................................................................................................................. C-46

31. UK-301................................................................................................................................................................. C-48

32. FS-532 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-49

33. SD-510................................................................................................................................................................. C-55

34. PK-522 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-59

35. MK-732 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-60

36. LS-506 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-61

37. FD-503 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-63

38. SD-506................................................................................................................................................................. C-65

39. SD-513................................................................................................................................................................. C-68

40. CR-101................................................................................................................................................................. C-75

41. TU-503 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-78

42. FD-504 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-80

43. PB-503 ................................................................................................................................................................. C-82

44. MK-737 ................................................................................................................................................................ C-85

45. IC-605 .................................................................................................................................................................. C-87

46. GP-501................................................................................................................................................................. C-88

47. GP-502................................................................................................................................................................. C-93

D OVERALL COMPOSITION ............................................................................................................D-1

2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................................................D-17

4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................................................D-21

6. IMAGE CREATION CONTROL ..............................................................................................................................D-28

E SERVICE TOOL .............................................................................................................................E-1

F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................... F-1

2. ORU-M PARTS ...................................................................................................................................................... F-48

3. LIFE VALUE ........................................................................................................................................................... F-53

4. AccurioPress C3080/C3080P/C83hc/C3070/C3070P/C73hc, AccurioPrint C3070L ............................................. F-56

6. PF-602m ............................................................................................................................................................... F-130

7. PF-707m ............................................................................................................................................................... F-138

8. FA-502 .................................................................................................................................................................. F-147

9. LU-202m/LU-202XL/LU-202XLm ......................................................................................................................... F-148

10. MB-506 ...............................................................................................................................................................F-153

11. MB-508 ...............................................................................................................................................................F-156

14. EF-103 ................................................................................................................................................................F-176

17. FS-531 ................................................................................................................................................................F-223